Red Lion Controls Catalog Ver 23

2014-11-11

: Pdf 102204-Attachment 102204-Attachment 011828 Batch12 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1040

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Volume 23

Insight Enabled

modular control & data acquisition
Modular Controller Series: Versatile multi-loop and data
acquisition platform with protocol conversion, web server
and Ethernet connectivity and more.
• PID modules
• Analog and digital I/O
• Communication modules
• Strain gage
• Temperature input

Known worldwide as the undisputed leader in digital and analog
panel meters, Red Lion has also gained acclaim for innovations in
operator interface panels, protocol conversion, device-level fieldbus and LAN/WAN
communications, data logging, PID controllers and signal conditioning devices.
Red Lion products enable insight into your process like no other.

digital and analog panel meters

and communications

• Counters, Rate Meters, Timers
• Current, Process, Voltage, Strain Gage
• Large Displays for all of the above
• Temperature; on/off, PID, limit alarm

Advanced HMIs with integrated Ethernet and web
connectivity control and monitor multiple devices, and
large LED displays communicate to the plant floor.
• G3 Series HMIs: Full-featured OI terminals
•G
3 Kadet ™ Series HMIs: value
and essential HMI features
• Plant Floor Marquee and
Big Flexible Display:
LED display boards with
advanced connectivity

digital and analog
panel meters

Signal Conditioners

Protocol Conversion and communications

Signal Conditioners

Sensors and Encoders
Red Lion’s extensive line of sensors and encoders let you complete
your application without going to additional providers.
• Encoders
• Magnetic pick-ups
• Proximity sensors
• Photoelectric sensors
• Rotary pulse generators
• Length sensors

Signal Conditioning

Panel Meters

Data Acquisition

Red Lion Controls ph: (717) 767-6511 fax: (717) 764-0839 www.redlion.net

Operator Interface • Panel Meters • Data Acquisition

• Data Station® Plus Series: Powerful and
versatile data management platform
with web-enabled communications,
data logging and protocol conversion

Innovative Control Solutions

Perform protocol conversion among any of over 170 protocols.

Protocol Conversion • Signal Conditioning • Sensors

Base- or DIN-rail mounted devices for conversion or isolation featuring
microprocessor-based configuration and minimal drift.
• IAMS Universal Signal Conditioners
– Frequency Inputs
– Process Inputs
– Temperature Inputs

Protocol Conversion

Operator Interfaces

Operator Interfaces & DISPLAYS

The trusted and preferred brand of digital and analog panel meters in the widest
range of models, sizes and capabilities, from our basic CUB indicators to versatile PAX
process meters that let you change capabilities
with plug-and-play, field installable cards.

Operator Interface

Innovative operator interface,
measurement, monitoring
and control solutions Protocol Conversion

Sensors and Encoders

modular control and
data acquisition

Red Lion product families

Protocol Conversion
& communications
modular control &
data acquisition

digital & analog
panel meters

Operator Interfaces

Signal Conditioners

Sensors & Encoders

Red Lion solutions worldwide.

Red Lion’s Data Station Plus provides a powerful set of data integration tools in a single DIN-rail mounted
box. With the ability to perform protocol conversion among any of over 170 protocols, the Data Station Plus
supports a minimum of seven protocols running and exchanging data simultaneously, over three serial and four
Ethernet™ ports. Additional serial ports or DeviceNet™, ProfibusDP, or CANopen/J1939 communications cards
can be added to further enhance protocol conversion capabilities. The Data Station Plus facilitates
communication to multiple PLCs, drives, motion controllers, HMIs, motor control products, breakers, SCADA
and PCs with a host of on-board drivers. A web-based HMI feature allows you to monitor and control processes
remotely via a web browser.
Red Lion’s Modular Controller series offers a cost-effective solution to integrating multi-zone PID control,
data acquisition and I/O into your PC, DCS or PLC control system. The Modular Controller product line has all
the communication, protocol conversion, data logging and web-based HMI capabilities of the Data Station Plus,
while adding the ability to manage up to 32 zones of PID control for analog and digital I/O. With capabilities to
handle high I/O counts between a minimum of 96 analog to a maximum of 224 digital I/O, the Modular
Controller supports up to 16 hot-swappable controller modules with automatic reprogramming, available with
configurations ranging from analog input and output, digital I/O, PID control, strain gage and temperature input.
Red Lion also offers a range of DIN rail mount Temperature and PID Loop Controllers and accessories.
The preferred brand for many years running, Red Lion has more high-quality Digital and Analog Panel Meter
solutions than any other supplier. Digitally display count, rate, time, voltage, current, process, strain gage and
temperature data in the widest range of models, sizes and capabilities—from Red Lion’s standard CUB family
to the versatile PAX family. Some models facilitate extended capabilities via plug-and-play, field-installable
cards, allowing users to easily add or change features including analog outputs, communication, setpoints and
more. To provide maximum visibility in plant floor and control room environments, Red Lion offers a number of
analog meters, counter, timer and rate panel meters featuring Large Displays that provide vastly improved
readability from distances, with display sizes from 1.5" to 4" and LED Graphical Displays up to 19" high.
Red Lion’s innovative G3 Series Human Machine Interface panels provide complete HMI functionality for
PLCs, motor drives and other communications-capable devices. G3 Series HMIs with integrated Ethernet ability
network-enable any serial device connected to the panel. G3 HMIs have the same data management features
as Red Lion’s Data Station series with the addition of an integrated LCD display or touchscreen in display sizes
ranging from 3" to 15". For applications that don’t require data logging or web-based HMI, Red Lion’s
G3 Kadet Series HMIs offers a similar set of capabilities including multiple serial ports, Ethernet connectivity,
visualization, protocol conversion and configuration using Red Lion’s free Crimson® software.

To modify existing signals into the desired format for an application, Red Lion manufactures a wide array of
Signal Conditioning Products that assure the proper interface and output. Input types range from RTD,
thermocouple, process, frequency, volt and current, and can convert to frequency and/or various analog outputs.
Communication conversions are also available. Features include 3-way isolation, sensor break detection,
programmable inputs, multiple input-to-output conversion combinations and loop power.

Red Lion Controls
Worldwide Headquarters
20 Willow Springs Circle
York, PA 17406
USA
Phone: +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax: +1 (717) 764-0839
sales@redlion.net

Red Lion Controls
Europe, ME Africa
Printerweg 10
3821 AD Amersfoort
The Netherlands
Phone: +31 (0) 33-4723-225
Fax: +31 (0) 33-4893-793
europe@redlion.net
Toll Free from UK and France:
00800 REDLIONS
(00800 733 54667)

Red Lion Controls

Complete technical data, customer support and free software.
Red Lion’s comprehensive web site offers complete product information and
technical specifications, as well as Crimson software, updated product
bulletins, technical and customer support, and contact information for your
local Red Lion distributor.

A proud global member of Spectris.
Headquartered in York, Pennsylvania USA, Red Lion
provides strong support for international customers through
offices located in the Netherlands, China, and India, plus
over 850 distributors in 65 countries. Red Lion Controls is
a member of Spectris, the productivity-enhancing
instrumentation and controls company. With sales of £668
million in 2007 and employing approximately 5,500 people
worldwide in its 13 business units, Spectris is listed on the
London Stock Exchange (symbol: SXS) and is a founder
member of techMARK, the London Stock Exchange’s
index for technology companies. For more information on
Spectris, visit www.spectris.com

n L iterature Downloads and Hardcopy Request: Access our comprehensive
library of product manuals, installation information, software manuals and application
notes online, and/or request hardcopies and catalogs delivered at no charge.
n Free Crimson® and Configuration Software: Download demos and the latest
revisions of the Red Lion Crimson® software, plus the device drivers, cable
specifications, DeviceNet EDS files and Profibus GSD files required for your application.
n Product Dimension Library: access free downloadable dimensioned drawings in
.dwg format, for easy import into your drawings.
n Product Cross Reference: Compare features and upgrade to Red Lion products from
other brands by entering part numbers into Red Lion’s Competitor Cross Reference.
n Virtual Help Desk: Use the Red Lion Virtual Help Desk to search our Knowledge
Base, browse through our Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s) for quick answers, read
Application Solutions to find out how Red Lion can solve your application or watch
Product Tutorials and Presentations.
n T raining Resources: Learn about Red Lion’s comprehensive in-house and field
training programs, or use the web to join live product tutorials and presentations.

n Lifetime Technical Support: Find the Red Lion Technical Support Team located
nearest you who will provide pre- or post-sales support on Red Lion products.
n Agency Approvals: Search our comprehensive database for information on UL,
CE, CSA and FM approvals for Red Lion’s products. View information on UL
recognized or rated products, RoHS-WEEE conformity and Hazardous Area approvals.
n Installation Tips: Learn valuable installation information including advice on
preventing noise interference in your industrial environment.

*Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. CompactFlash is a registered trademark of the CompactFlash Association.

Red Lion Controls
China
Unit 101, XinAn Plaza
Building 13
No.99 Tianzhou Road
ShangHai, P.R. China 200223
Phone: +86 21 6113-3688
Fax: +86 21 6113-3683
asia@redlion.net

www.redlion.net

nO
nline Customer Service: Contact our Customer Service Department online for
answers on your schedule. Red Lion Customer Service Representatives are ready to
take your orders, check product availability and order status, handle literature
requests, and answer any ordering questions you may have.

Red Lion offers a complete line of Sensors and Encoders to complement the multiple products that require
sensor inputs. Choose from photoelectric, proximity, pressure, thermocouple, RTD, magnetic pickup, shaft
encoders, thru-bore encoders, length sensors, temperature, and motor and gear sensors that provide seamless
integration with Red Lion products.

Red Lion Controls
India
54, Vishvas Tenement,
Near Railway Crossing
GST Road, New Ranip,
Ahmedabad-382480
Gujarat, India
Phone: +91 98795 40503
Fax: +91 79 27531350
india@redlion.net

Red Lion’s global distribution network ensures the availability
of the same high-quality Red Lion solutions virtually
anywhere in the world. For single-source solutions locally
or technology deployment to multiple facilities around the
globe, Red Lion has the answers and products you need.
Free live application and technical assistance
at 717-767-6511
Red Lion’s commitment to customer service is second to
none. So when you have questions, you can talk to a real
person instead of a machine. Our customer service and
tech support staff stands ready to help you choose the
Red Lion product that meets the needs of your application,
and put you in touch with the local distributor who can
serve your needs personally.

Red Lion insight enabled.
A global leader in process measurement, controls and automation,
Red Lion Controls continues to be recognized as industry’s preferred
brand of panel meters, offering the broadest selection of rate, count and
panel indication solutions in the world. The experience gained from over
35 years in the control and automation industry has allowed Red Lion to
develop a number of successful related products, including advanced lines
of Human Machine Interface (HMI) and protocol conversion technology,
as well as PID loop controller and process controller products.
From humble beginnings, a world-class innovator.
Founded in a garage in 1972, today Red Lion remains committed
to domestic manufacturing, designing and producing its products in
a state-of-the-art, 100,000 sq. ft. facility in York, Pennsylvania. The
proximity and close interaction of our design and manufacturing
arms in the United States provide Red Lion unique and unparalleled
customer focus and agility. A member of Spectris plc, the
productivity-enhancing instrumentation and control company, Red
Lion supports a vast network of specialized distributors from its
USA., European and Asian offices. Understanding manufacturing
problems and providing innovative, common sense solutions has
earned Red Lion the loyalty of its global customers, and the
recognition of top industry awards year after year.
See inside your process.
Red Lion’s core competency lies in providing simple solutions
that enable insight into complex, mixed-vendor product processes.
Through basic, essential indicators and large I/O count analog and
digital process controls that feature advanced communications
capabilities, Red Lion has tamed process complexity through the
conversion of more than 170 protocols—simultaneously enabling
open solutions for data management, visualization and remote
access. In short, Red Lion provides solutions that reveal untapped
or inaccessible data that can be used to make processes run
more efficiently.
Crimson®. A powerful universal software platform.
Central to the success and adoption of Red Lion as an industryleading technology innovator is Red Lion’s Crimson® software,
which seamlessly ties together products from multiple vendors,
creating insight into a process from a single entry point. Unlike
proprietary systems, this software platform is universal across all
Red Lion products with programming capabilities, facilitating
communication among dissimilar devices and protocols while
reconnecting orphaned and legacy technologies.

From this entry point, data from one vendor’s product can be sent
to another vendor’s dissimilar product. Data collection can be
centrally stored, emailed and pushed to an FTP site. Alarms can be
emailed or sent by text message to a mobile phone. Different
vendors’ products can be configured using Red Lion’s passthrough feature. This can all be achieved remotely via standard
network communications. Likewise, operational status can be
viewed in real-time, and process data can be visualized with a web
browser or uploaded in IT-ready CSV files. Making it simple to
monitor, analyze and trend data via common productivity platforms
such as Microsoft® Office.
OEM solutions. Powered by Red Lion.
As one of the world’s leading innovators in monitoring and control,
Red Lion technology plays an instrumental role in many OEM
products. Whether integrated or private branded, Red Lion offers
advanced technology that adds value to products and greatly
expands the capabilities of legacy devices. Many recognizable
global brands feature integrated technology “Powered By Red
Lion”, adding advanced capabilities and value to their product
portfolios. Our engineering teams work with OEM customers to
provide innovative and tailored solutions, and our responsive
service demonstrates a strong commitment to our third party
customers. For inquiries on customized products, call our Technical
Sales Department at (717) 767-6511.
The growth and success of Red Lion is fueled by an ongoing
commitment to delivering the greatest value in its products—not
only in terms of affordability and performance, but also in USAmade quality, seamless integration, superior functionality and
sophisticated simplicity. With an unparalleled combination of
innovation, features and capabilities, Red Lion represents best-inclass solutions for monitoring, control and automation across a
broad range of discrete and process manufacturing environments.

Red Lion what’s new
We’ve compiled a list with just a brief description to let you know about the new and
exciting products Red Lion has added to our already extensive list of product offerings.
Each of the products shown on this list can be found in the catalog you are holding.
 G3 Series Operator Interface – World renowned operator interface
 G3 Kadet Series Operator Interface – Functional interface and connectivity features for
applications where FTP access, data logging, and web server capabilities are not needed
 Data Station – Protocol converters
 Modular Controller – Multi-zone loop controller
 PFM – The tri-color display’s graphical design allows bargraphs, custom symbols and
graphics. There are four sizes for a wide range of applications.
 Compact Meters – Expanded the CUB5 line with analog inputs
 New Universal Signal Conditioners – Easily programmable IAMS signal conditioners
 New Line Of Large Digital Displays – Large display timers, counter/rate, serial slave
display and DC volt/current/process meters
 Encoders – Rotary pulse generator selection has grown to include many new thru-bore
encoders, shaft encoders and accessory items
 New PAX Lite Models – PAXLA accepts DC current, DC voltage, or process input signals;
PAXLCR features two independent counters and separate rate display capability; PAXLT
accepts thermocouple and RTD inputs
 New Current Transducers – New non-contact, current transducers to convert high level
current signals into simple 4 - 20 mA or 0 - 10 VDC process signals
 USB Interface – USB programming cards for the CUB5 and PAX meters
 CUB5 Dual Counter/Rate Meter Upgrade – Expanded the capabilities by adding a second
setpoint. Capabilities now include batch counting and control
 New Power Supply – New MLPS2 offers 24 VDC for use with the CUB5 Series.
 Communication Gateway – Serial to Ethernet connectivity
 Temperature Sensors – 50 new Thermocouple and RTD sensors

Red Lion catalog guide
This edition of the Red Lion products catalog offers several tools to help you find
the exact control solution you need, whether it’s instrumentation, indication, panel
meters, communications, data acquisition or interface devices.
Products are grouped by section. Preceding each section, you’ll find a summary of
general specifications for the product group. Product listings offer a detailed look at
specifications including description, applications and features, along with specific
technical data such as voltages, input and output, physical dimensions, wiring
diagrams, tutorials and ordering information.

More ways to find the right solutions.
There are also several alternative methods of determining the best product for your application:
n Product Selection Guide (Starting on page 7)
Helps you determine the appropriate product model based on your application parameters.
n Quick Spec Comparison Grid (Beginning of each section)
Offers a side-by-side comparison of models within a given product group.
n Product Replacement Guide (Following “Quick Specs” in each section)
A cross reference to the current Red Lion models to provide a functional replacement for
obsolete products. Always refer to replacement product literature as differences may exist.
n Product Lookup (Starting on page 1013)
An historical reference of current and past Red Lion products.

Industry and application experts at your disposal.
Because Red Lion’s selection of control solutions is so vast and growing every day, you might find the best
way to get what you need is by asking your local Red Lion distributor. We choose nothing but the best and
most experienced industry professionals to represent our products and give them the support and resources
to help our customers deploy the best solutions, quickly.
In some cases, you may want more advice. That’s where Red Lion’s dedicated customer support and technical
assistance teams can help. We respect your time by providing real answers from real people. Not automated
phone menus and stock answers. Red Lion also has an extensive Virtual Help Desk with Knowledge Base,
technical notes, tutorials and FAQs easily accessible 24/7 on our web site, plus convenient email technical
assistance. So you have several options to get the answers, and solutions you need:
n Personal service from your Local Red Lion Distributor
n Live customer service, application and technical assistance at 717-767-6511
n Online Virtual Help Desk available 24/7 at www.redlion.net
n Email tech support for a prompt, personal response at techsupport@redlion.net
n Tutorials and Training available pre- and post-sale

Table of Contents
Selection Guides
Counter
Rate
Timer
Digital Panel Meter
Temperature/Process
Signal Conditioning
Large Displays

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Operator Interface Section
G303
G306M/S
G306A
G308
G308A
G310
G315
G304K
G306K
G308K
G3RS
G3CN
G3DN
G3PB
G3GSM
DSP
CSMSTRV2
CSMSTRLE
CSMSTRSX/GT
CSPID
CSSG
CSTC
CSRTD
CSINI
CSINV
CSDIO
CSOUT
XCRS
XCCN
XCDN
XCPB
XCGSM
PFM
BFD
DLC
SWITCH08

3.2" Operator Interface Terminal - Monochrome
5.7" Operator Interface Terminal - Monochrome
5.7" Operator Interface Terminal - 256 Color
7.7" Operator Interface Terminal - 256 Color
8.4" Operator Interface Terminal - 256 Color
10.4" Operator Interface Terminal - 256 Color
15" Operator Interface Terminal - 32K Color
4.3" Kadet O/I Terminal - 256 Color
5.6" Kadet O/I Terminal - 256 Color
8" Kadet O/I Terminal - 256 Color
Serial Communication Option Card for G3
CanOpen Option Card for G3
DeviceNet Option Card for G3
Profibus Option Card for G3
GSM/GPRS Cellular Modem Option Card for G3
Data Station Plus
Modular Controller Master
Modular Controller with Multi Protocol Converter and Epansion Slot
Modular Cont. W/Protocol Converter, Data Logger and Web Server
PID Loop Control Module for Modular Controller
Strain Gage Module for Modular Controller
Thermocouple Module for Modular Controller
RTD Module for Modular Controller
Current Input Modules for Modular Controller
Voltage Input Modules for Modular Controller
Digital Input/Ouput Modules for Modular Controller
Analog Output Module for Modular Controller
Serial Communication Option Card for Modular Controller
CanOpen Option Card for Modular Controller
DeviceNet Option Card for Modular Controller
Profibus Option Card for Modular Controller
GSM/GPRS Cellular Modem Option Card for Modular Controller
Plant Floor Marquee Message Display
Large 38.5" x 19" LED Display
DIN Rail Dual Loop Controllers
Eight Port Ethernet Switch

17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
37
38
38
39
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
52
52
52
54
56
58
58
59
59
60
61
62
64
67

Section A - Totalizing Counters
QUICK SPECS
REPLACEMENT
Model
CUB7
CUB7W
CUB7W3
CUB7P
CUB7P1

GUIDE
Title
Miniature
Miniature
Miniature
Miniature
Miniature

8-Digit
8-Digit
8-Digit
8-Digit
8-Digit

Counter
Counter with Voltage Input
Counter with Voltage Input
Programmable Counter
Programmable Counter with 10 to 300 VAC/DC Input
1-717-767-6511

70
72
Page #
73
77
81
85
90
1

CUB7P3
CUB4L
CUB4L8
CUB4L8W
CUB5
PAXLC
PAXLCR
PAXC
PAXI

Miniature 8-Digit Programmable Counter with 10 to 30 VAC/DC Input
Miniature 6-Digit Counter
Miniature 8-Digit Counter
Miniature 8-Digit Counter with Voltage Input
Miniature Dual Counter & Rate Indicator
PAX Lite 6-Digit Counter
PAX Lite 6-Digit Counter and Rate Meter
PAX 6-Digit Counter
PAX 6-Digit Counter and Rate Meter

94
98
98
98
102
118
125
137
169

Section B - Preset Counters
QUICK SPECS
REPLACEMENT
Model
CUB5
C48C
PAXLCR
PAXC
PAXI
LG
LGP

GUIDE
Title
Miniature Dual Counter & Rate Indicator
Preset Counter with Batch Option
PAX Lite 6-Digit Counter and Rate Meter
PAX 6-Digit Counter
PAX 6-Digit Counter and Rate Indicator
Preset Batch Counter & Rate Indicator with Batch Option
Preset Batch Counter & Rate Indicator with Message Capability

172
175
Page #
177
178
184
185
186
187
193

Section C - Rate Meters
QUICK SPECS
REPLACEMENT
Model
DT8
CUB5
PAXLR
PAXLCR
PAXR
PAXI
PAXLPT
MDC
HHT/HHTP

GUIDE
Title
Adjustable Time Base Rate Indicator
Miniature Dual Counter & Rate Indicator
PAX Lite Rate Meter
PAX Lite 6-Digit Counter and Rate Meter
PAX Rate Meter - Reference Page
PAX 6-Digit Counter and Rate Indicator
PAX Lite Process Time Meter
Motor Drive Controller
Hand-held Tachometer

200
203
Page #
205
209
210
217
218
219
220
227
231

Section D - Timers
QUICK SPECS
REPLACEMENT
Model
CUB7T
CUB7T1
CUB7T3
CUB5T
C48T
PAXTM
PAXCK

GUIDE
Title
Programmable Timer
Programmable Timer
Programmable Timer
Miniature Preset Timer and Cycle Counter
Programmable Preset Timer
PAX Preset Timer
PAX Real-Time Clock - Reference Page

234
236
Page #
237
241
245
249
263
268
296

Section E - Digital Panel Meters
QUICK SPECS
REPLACEMENT
Model
CUB5V
CUB5I
PAXLI/V
PAXLIT
PAXLHV
PAXLA
DP5D
2

GUIDE
Title
Smart DC Voltage Meter
Smart DC Current Meter
PAX Lite Current or Voltage Meter
PAX Lite 5 A AC Current Meter
PAX Lite AC Power-Line Monitor
PAX Lite Universal DC Input Meter
Universal DC Input Display
www.redlion.net

298
303
Page #
305
317
329
336
342
347
358

PAXD
PAXH
CUB4CL/LP
CUB5P
PAXLCL
PAXLPV
DP5P
PAXP
PAXDP
PAXLSG
PAXS

PAX Smart Universal DC Input Meter
PAX Smart AC Voltage & Current Meter - Reference Page
Loop Powered Process Indicator/Current Loop Indicator
CUB5 Smart Process Meter
PAX Lite Current Loop Indicator
PAX Lite Process Voltmeter
Process Display - Reference Page
PAX Smart Process Meter - Reference Page
PAX Dual Input Process Meter
PAX Lite Strain Gage Indicator
PAX Smart Strain Gage Meter - Reference Page

378
405
406
410
422
430
438
439
440
473
481

Section F - Temperature Indicators and Controllers
QUICK SPECS
REPLACEMENT
Model
CUB5TC
CUB5RT
PAXLTC
PAXLRT
PAXLT
DP5T
PAXT
T16
T48
TCU
TSC
P16
P48
PCU
PSC
TLA

GUIDE
Title
Miniature Thermocouple Meter
Miniature RTD Meter
PAX Lite Thermocouple Indicator
PAX Lite RTD Input Indicator
PAX Lite Universal Temperature Meter
Universal Temperature Display - Reference Page
PAX Smart Temperature Meter - Reference Page
Temperature Controller
Temperature Controller
Temperature Control Unit
Temperature Setpoint Control Unit
Process Controller - Reference Page
Process Controller
Process Control Unit
Process Setpoint Control Unit
Temperature Limit Alarm

484
488
Page #
489
501
513
521
528
539
540
541
566
574
583
590
591
596
604
611

Section G - Large Displays
QUICK SPECS
REPLACEMENT
Model
LD
LDT
LDA
LDSS
LPAX5
LPAX6
LPAXDA
EPAX5
EPAX6

GUIDE
Title
4 or 6-Digit Large Displays for Count and Rate
6-Digit Large Displays for Timing
5-Digit Large Displays for DC Current, Voltage and Process Inputs
6-Digit Large Displays for Slave Display Inputs
5-Digit Large PAX Displays For Analog Inputs
6-Digit Large PAX Displays For Digital Inputs
5-Digit Large PAX Displays For Dual Analog Inputs
5-Digit Extra Large PAX Displays For Analog Inputs
6-Digit Extra Large PAX Displays For Digital Inputs

626
627
Page #
629
645
659
674
682
686
690
694
700

Section H - Signal Conditioners
QUICK SPECS
Model
IFMA
IFMR
AFCM
IAMS
IAMA
IAMA6
AAMA
AIMI
APMR

Title
DIN-Rail Frequency to Analog Converter
DIN-Rail Speed Switch
Analog to Frequency Converter Module
Intelligent Universal Signal Conditioner
Universal Signal Conditioning Module
Universal Signal Conditioning Module
Universal Signal Conditioning Module
0 (4) - 20 mA Passive Loop Powered Isolator
Three Phase Fault Detection
1-717-767-6511

708
Page #
713
721
729
731
742
750
753
758
759
3

IRMA
IRMA DC
ITMA
ITMA DC
ICM4
ICM5
ICM8
SWITCH08

Intelligent RTD Module with Analog Output
Intelligent RTD Module with Analog Output
Intelligent Thermocouple Module with Analog Output
Intelligent Thermocouple Module with Analog Output
Serial Converter Module
3-Way Isolated Serial Converter Module
Serial to Ethernet Converter Module
Eight Port Ethernet Switch

763
769
775
782
788
792
796
802

Section I - Sensors
QUICK SPECS
Model
HESS
PSAH
PSA
PSAC
PSAFP
MPS
MP
LMP
ARCJ
ZR Motor
GEARS
ZUJ/ZUL
ZR
ZSD
ZOD/ZOH
ZCG/ZFG/ZGG
ZCH/ZFH/ZGH
ZUK
ZPJ
ZBG/ZBH/ZHG
ZDH/ZNH
ZMD
ZLZ
RR/PRDC
PRM/RRM
PT
TMP
TMPC
TMPU
TMPB
TMP
TMP
TMPRT/CN
TMPT/TMPRN
CT5
CT4
CTD
CTL
CTR
CTS

Title
Hall Effect Speed Sensor
Hall Effect Speed Sensor
Inductive Proximity Sensors
Inductive Proximity Sensor with Current Sink Output
Flat Pack Proximity Sensors
Magnetic Proximity Switch
Magnetic Pickups
Logic Magnetic Pickups
NEMA“C” Face-Mounted Motor Adapter Kits
C-Face Encoder w/Line Driver Output
Machined Steel Sensing Gears
Large Thru-Bore Rotary Pulse Generator for Motor Feedback
C-Face Encoder w/NPN Open Collector Output
Standared Servo Mount Rotary Pulse Generator
Thru-Bore Rotary Pulse Generators
Single Channel Rotary Pulse Generator and Length Sensor
Quadrature Rotary Pulse Generator and Length Sensor
Large Thru Bore Rotary Pulse Generator
Large Thru-Bore Rotary Pulse Generator
Industrial and Heavy Duty Rotary Pulse Generator
Flange Mount Rotary Pulse Generator
Miniature Length Sensor
Linear Cable Encoder
Compact DC Powered Photo Electric Sensors
Miniature DC Powered Photo Sensors
Pressure Transmitter
Temperature Sensor Probes
High Temperature Thermocouple
Utility Thermocouples
Spring Loaded Compression Fitting Thermocouples
Quick Disconnect Temperature Probes and Accessories
Transition Joint Probes and Accessories
RTD Sensors and Connectors
Thermocouple and RTD Connectors with Signal Amplifier
Current Transformer
Current Transformer
DC Current Transducer
Average Responding AC Current Transducer
True RMS AC Current Transducer
AC Current Operated Switch

806
Page #
813
814
815
818
819
822
823
825
827
829
831
833
835
837
838
839
843
847
849
851
855
857
859
861
865
868
869
871
872
872
873
876
878
880
881
882
883
885
887
889

Section J - PC Board Mount Displays
QUICK SPECS
Model
SCUB1 & 2
SCUB28A
SCUBD
4

Title
6-Digit Component Counter
8-Digit Component Counter
Two Mode Component Counter w/ 6-Digit Display
www.redlion.net

892
Page #
895
896
897

SCUBT
MDMU
MDMV

5 1/2-Digit Component Timer/Counter
Component Counter/Timer/Tach
Component DC Voltmeter

898
899
900

Section K - Accessories
QUICK SPECS
Model
PSDR
APS
APSIS
MLPS
PSMA
V/T/LCM
RS
RLY5
RLY6/6A
RLY7
PAXLBK10
LX Label
CUB5USB
CUB5COM
PAXUSB
PAXCDC
PAXCDC3
PAXCDC4
PAXCDC5
PAXCDS
PAXCDL
FCOR
ILS
SNUB
LFIL

Title
Signal Conditioner 1 2, or 4 A Power Supply
Octal Plug-In Power Supply
Octal Plug-In Power Supply with 20 mA Source
MicroLine Power Supply 12 and 24 VDC
Power Supply and Interface Module
Signal Converter Modules
DIN Rail Relay System
Solid State Power Unit
Single-Phase DIN-Rail Mount Solid State Relay
Three-Phase DIN-Rail Mount Solid State Relay
PAX Annunciator Label Kit
LPAX Annunciator Label
CUB5 Universal Serial Bus Card
CUB5 Serial Communications Card
PAX Universal Serial Bus Card
PAX Serial Communications Card
PAX DeviceNet Output Card
PAX ModBus Output Card
PAX Profibus Communications Card
PAX Setpoint Outpoint Card
PAX Analog Output Card
EMI Installation Notes & Accessories
Ferrite Suppression Core
Inductive Load Suppressor
R-C Snubber Noise and Arc Suppressor
General Purpose Line Filter

902
Page #
907
909
911
913
915
917
920
922
924
926
928
929
930
932
936
938
944
948
954
958
962
964
965
966
967
968

Section L - Enclosures & Panels
Model
ENC4/5/6
ENC5A/B/C
ENC8/A/B
ENC9
ENC11
ENC12
BMK3/4
BMK6/7/7A
BMK8
BMK9
BMK11
PMK5/7/7A
PMK6
PMK6A
PMK8
PMKG1
PMKA1
PMKCC

Title
NEMA 4 Enclosures for Legend, Libra, and Gemini
NEMA 4 Enclosures for PAX
NEMA 4 Enclosures for CUB4, CUB5, and DT8
LPAX Enclosure/Shroud
1/16 DIN Enclosure
EPAX Enclosure/Shroud
Base Mount Kit for Legend, Lynx, Libra, C48, T48, T16 and P16
Base Mount Kit for CUB4, CUB5, and DT8
Base Mount Kit for CUB7
DIN Rail PAX Base Mount Kit
DIN Rail Base Mount Adapter Kit for CUB5 or MLPS
Panel Mount Adapter Kit - 1/4 DIN to 1/8 or 1/16 DIN
Panel Mount Adapter Kit - 1/8 DIN to 1/16 DIN
Panel Mount Adapter Kit - 1/8 DIN to CUB5
Panel Mount Adapter Kit - Gemini to PAX
Panel Adapter Kit for GEM
Panel Adapter Kit - 1/8 DIN units into cut-outs for older DT3 and SC units
Panel Mount Adapter Kit for C48 and T48

Page #
971
973
975
979
981
983
985
987
989
990
991
993
996
997
998
999
1000
1001

Section M - Sensor Wiring Guide

1003

Section N - Part Number Index

1013

1-717-767-6511

This page intentionally left blank.
6

www.redlion.net

SELECTION GUIDE: Counter
TOTALIZER (NO PRESETS)

PRESETS (OUTPUTS)
LED

LCD

WITHOUT SCALING

WITH SCALING

CUB7 [pg. 73 ]
DIN: 24mm (H) x 48mm (W)
8-digit, 0.35"
Battery powered
W
CUB7W [pg. 77 ]
DIN: 24mm (H) x 48mm (W)
8-digit, 0.35"
Voltage input
Battery powered
W
CUB4L [pg. 98 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
6-digit, 0.48"
Battery powered
W
CUB4L8 [pg. 98 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
8-digit, 0.46"
Battery powered
W
CUB4L8W [pg. 98 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
8-digit, 0.46"
Voltage input
Battery powered

CUB7P [pg. 85 ]
DIN: 24mm (H) x 48mm (W)
8-digit, 0.35"
Electronic and
voltage inputs
Battery powered
W
CUB5 [pg. 102 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
8-digit, 0.46"
Counter/Rate
Optional setpoint
and comms cards

PAXLC6/8 [pg. 118 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
8-digit, 0.4"
W
PAXLCR [pg. 125 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.4"
Counter/Rate
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXC [pg. 137 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Optional setpoint
output cards
W
PAXI [pg. 169 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LD [pg. 629 ]
2.25 or 4",
4-digit Counter
2.25 or 4",
6-digit Counter/Rate
W
LPAX/MPAXI [pg. 686 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, 1.5"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXI [pg. 700 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules

CUB5 [pg. 102 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
8-digit, 0.46"
Counter/Rate
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
C48C [pg. 178 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 48mm (W)
6-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.3"
Secondary 0.2"
1 or 2 Presets
W
LEGEND [pg. 187 ]
75mm (H) x 75mm (W)
8-digit, 0.3"
2 line
1 , 2 or 6 Presets
W
LEGEND PLUS [pg. 193 ]
75mm (H) x 75mm (W)
8-digit, 0.3"
2 line
6 Presets
Message capability
Foot/Inch counting
W
LIBRA [ * ]
68mm (H) x 68mm (W)
4-digit, 0.5"
1 or 2 Presets

LCD

BATCH

1-717-767-6511

LED

LCD

LED

PAXC [pg. 137 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Optional setpoint cards
W
PAXLCR [pg. 125 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.4"
Counter/Rate
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXI [pg. 169 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in cards
W
LIBRA [ * ]
68mm (H) x 68mm (W)
4-digit, 0.4"
1 or 2 Presets
W
GEMINI [ * ]
68mm (H) x 133mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
1 or 2 Presets
Dual counter or
Counter/Rate versions
W
LD [pg. 629 ]
2.25 or 4",
4-digit Counter
2.25 or 4",
6-digit Counter/Rate
W
EPAX/LPAX/MPAXI
[pg. 700, 686 ]

CUB5 [pg. 102 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
8-digit, 0.46"
Counter/Rate
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
C48CB [pg. 178 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 48mm (W)
6-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.3"
Secondary 0.2"
1 or 2 Presets
W
LEGEND [pg. 187 ]
75mm (H) x 75mm (W)
8-digit, 0.3"
2 line
4 Presets
W
LEGEND PLUS [pg. 193 ]
75mm (H) x 75mm (W)
8-digit, 0.3"
2 line
4 Presets
Message capability

PAXLCR [pg. 125 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.4"
Counter/Rate
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXI [pg. 169 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
GEM33 [ * ]
68mm (H) x 133mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
3 Presets; 2
process and
1 batch
W
LD (Batch) [pg. 629 ]
2.25 or 4",
6-digit Counter/Rate
W
LPAX/MPAXI [pg. 686 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, 1.5"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXI [pg. 700 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules

EPAX: 183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
LPAX: 120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, Large Display
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in modules

* See website for product information.

SELECTION GUIDE: Rate
INDICATION

PRESETS (OUTPUTS)

SPECIALTY

www.redlion.net

LCD

LED

LCD

LED

LCD

LED

NO DISPLAY

DT8 [pg. 205 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.6"
Rate Indicator
W
CUB5 [pg. 209 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
8-digit, 0.46"
Counter/Rate
Optional setpoint
and comms cards

PAXLR [pg. 210 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
W
PAXLCR [pg. 217 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.4"
Counter/Rate
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXR [pg. 218 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
8-digit, 0.4"
Optional setpoint
output cards
W
PAXI [pg. 219 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LD [pg. 629 ]
2.25 or 4",
6-digit Counter/Rate
W
LPAX/MPAXI [pg. 686 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, 1.5"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXI [pg. 700 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules

CUB5 [pg. 209 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
8-digit, 0.46"
Counter/Rate
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
LEGEND [pg. 187 ]
75mm (H) x 75mm (W)
8-digit, 0.3"
2 line
4 Presets
W
LEGEND PLUS [pg. 193 ]
75mm (H) x 75mm (W)
8-digit, 0.3"
2 line
4 Presets
Message capability

PAXR [pg. 218 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Optional setpoint
output cards
W
PAXI [pg. 219 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
GEMINI [ * ]
68mm (H) x 133mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
1 or 2 Presets
Dual counter or
Counter/Rate
versions
W
LD [pg. 629 ]
2.25 or 4",
6-digit Counter/Rate
W
LPAX/MPAXI [pg. 686 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, 1.5"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXI [pg. 700 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
Counter/Rate
Optional plug-in
output modules

MDC [pg. 227 ]
Motor Drive
Controller
DIN: 48mm (H) x 48mm (W)
6-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.3"
Secondary 0.2"
1 or 2 Presets

PAXLPT [pg. 220 ]
Process Time
Indication
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"

IFMA [pg. 713 ]
Frequency to Analog
Converter
DIN rail mount
0-10 V, 4-20 mA
outputs
W
IFMR [pg. 721 ]
Speed Switch
DIN rail mount
Over or underspeed
outputs

* See website for product information.

SELECTION GUIDE: Timer
INDICATION

REAL-TIME CLOCK

PRESETS (OUTPUTS)

1-717-767-6511

LCD

LED

LCD

LED

CUB7T [pg. 237 ]
DIN: 24mm (H) x 48mm (W)
8-digit, 0.35"
Contact and
voltage versions
W
CUB5T [pg. 249 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
7-digit, 0.46"
Optional setpoint and
comms cards

PAXTM [pg. 268 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LDT [pg. 645 ]
2.25 or 4",
6-digit
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAXCK/MPAXTM [pg. 686 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, 1.5"
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXTM [pg. 700 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
Optional plug-in
output modules

C48T [pg. 263]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.3"
Secondary 0.2"
1 or 2 Presets
W
LIBRA [ * ]
68mm (H) x 68mm (W)
4-digit, 0.5"
1 or 2 Presets

PAXTM [pg. 268 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LIBRA [ * ]
68mm (H) x 68mm (W)
4-digit, 0.4"
1 or 2 Presets
W
LDT [pg. 645 ]
2.25 or 4",
6-digit
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAXCK/MPAXTM [pg. 686 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, 1.5"
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXTM [pg. 700 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
Optional plug-in
output modules

PAXCK [pg. 296 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LPAXCK/MPAXCK [pg. 686 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
6-digit, 1.5"
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXCK [pg. 700 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
Optional plug-in
output modules

* See website for product information.

SELECTION GUIDE: Digital Panel Meter
DC

PROCESS

STRAIN GAGE
(microvoltmeter)

www.redlion.net

CURRENT

V O LTA G E

CURRENT

V O LTA G E

CURRENT

V O LTA G E

CUB 4I [ * ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.6"
Counter/Rate
199.9 mA DC max
W
CUB5I [pg. 317 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
PAXLID [pg. 329 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
1.999 Amp DC max
W
PAXLA [pg. 347 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXD [pg. 378 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Current/Volt
2 Amp DC max
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LDA [pg. 659 ]
5-digit, 2.25 or 4"
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAX/MPAXD [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
Current/Volt
2 Amp DC max
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXD [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
Current/Volt
2 Amp DC max
Optional plug-in
output modules

CUB 4V [ * ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.6"
Counter/Rate
199.9 VDC max
W
CUB5V [pg. 305 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
PAXLVD [pg. 329 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
300 VDC max
W
PAXLA [pg. 347 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXD [pg. 378 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Current/Volt
300 VDC max
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LDA [pg. 659 ]
5-digit, 2.25 or 4"
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAX/MPAXD [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
Current/Volt
300 VDC max
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXD [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
Current/Volt
300 VDC max
Optional plug-in
output modules

PAXLIA [pg. 329 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
1.999 Amp AC max
W
PAXLIT [pg. 336 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
5 Amp AC max
W
PAXH [pg. 405 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Current/Volt
5 Amp AC max
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LPAX/MPAXH [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
Current/Volt
5 Amp AC max
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXH [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
Current/Volt
5 Amp AC max
Optional plug-in
output modules

PAXLVA [pg. 329 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
300 VAC max
W
PAXLHV [pg. 342 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
600 VAC max
W
PAXH [pg. 405 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Current/Volt
300 VAC max
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LPAX/MPAXH [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
Current/Volt
300 VAC max
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXH [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
Current/Volt
300 VAC max
Optional plug-in
output modules

CUB4CL/LP [pg. 406 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.6"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Loop powered
W
CUB5P [pg. 410 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
PAXLCL [pg. 422 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
W
PAXLA [pg. 347 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXP (Single Loop) [pg. 439 ]
PAXDP (Dual Loop) [pg. 440 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Dual inputs (PAXDP)
Optional plug-in cards
W
LDA [pg. 659 ]
5-digit, 2.25 or 4"
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAX/MPAXP [pg. 682 ]
LPAXDA/MPAXDP [pg. 690 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Dual inputs (LPAXDA/MPAXDP)
Optional plug-in modules
W
EPAX/MPAXP [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Optional plug-in modules

CUB5P [pg. 410 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
PAXLPV [pg. 430 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
1-5 VDC
W
PAXLA [pg. 347 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
PAXP (Single Loop) [pg. 439 ]
PAXDP (Dual Loop) [pg. 440 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
0-10 VDC
Dual inputs (PAXDP)
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LDA [pg. 659 ]
5-digit, 2.25 or 4"
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAX/MPAXP [pg. 682 ]
LPAXDA/MPAXDP [pg. 690 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
0-10 VDC
Dual inputs (LPAXDA/MPAXDP)
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXP [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
0-10 VDC
Optional plug-in
output modules

PAXLSG [pg. 473 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
3 1/2-digit, 0.56"
Single-ended or
differential 2 V max
W
PAXS [pg. 481 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
24 or 240 mV DC
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LPAX/MPAXS [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
240 mV DC max
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXS [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
240 mV DC max
Optional plug-in
output modules

* See website for product information.

SELECTION GUIDE: Temperature/Process
TEMPERATURE
INDICATORS

1-717-767-6511

LCD

LED

CUB4RT [* ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.48"
Pt392, Pt385,
Ni672, and Cu427
W
CUB5TC [pg. 489 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
Optional setpoint and
comms cards
W
CUB5RT [pg. 501 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
Pt392, Pt385,
Ni672, and Cu427
Optional setpoint and
comms cards
W
PAXLT [pg. 528 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Dual Setpoint
Capability

PAXLTC [pg. 513 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
4-digit, 0.56"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
W
PAXLRT [pg. 521 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
4-digit, 0.56"
Pt392, Pt385
W
PAXLT [pg. 528 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
Dual Setpoint Capability
W
LPAX/MPAXT [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXT [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
Optional plug-in
output modules

PROCESS
ON/OFF
CONTROL

PID
CONTROL

ON/OFF
CONTROL

PID
CONTROL

CUB5TC [pg. 489 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
Optional setpoint and
comms cards
W
CUB5RT [pg. 501 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
Pt392, Pt385,
Ni672, and Cu427
Optional setpoint and
comms cards
W
PAXT [pg. 540 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
6-digit, 0.56"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
Optional plug-in
output cards
W
LPAX/MPAXT [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX/MPAXT [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
6-digit, 4"
T, E, J, K, R, S, B,
N, and mV
Optional plug-in
output modules

T16 [pg. 541 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 0.3"
2 line
W
T48 [pg. 566 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 0.3"
2 line
W
TCU [pg. 574 ]
DIN: 96mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.4"
Secondary 0.3"
W
TSC [pg. 583 ]
DIN: 96mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.4"
Secondary 0.3"
Ramp/Soak

CUB5P [pg. 410 ]
33mm (H) x 68mm (W)
5-digit, 0.46"
Optional setpoint
and comms cards
W
PAXP [pg. 439 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Optional plug-in cards
W
PAXDP [pg. 440 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 96mm (W)
5-digit, 0.56"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Dual inputs
Optional plug-in cards
W
LPAX/MPAXP [pg. 682 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Optional plug-in modules
W
LPAXDA/MPAXDP [pg. 690 ]
120mm (H) x 254mm (W)
5-digit, 1.5"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Dual inputs
Optional plug-in modules
W
EPAX/MPAXP [pg. 694 ]
183mm (H) x 629mm (W)
5-digit, 4"
4-20 mA or 10-50 mA
Optional plug-in modules

P16 [pg. 590 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 0.3"
2 line
W
P48 [pg. 591 ]
DIN: 48mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 0.3"
2 line
W
PCU [pg. 596 ]
DIN: 96mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.4"
Secondary 0.3"
W
PSC [pg. 604 ]
DIN: 96mm (H) x 48mm (W)
4-digit, 2 line
Main display 0.4"
Secondary 0.3"
Ramp/Soak

* See website for product information.

SELECTION GUIDE: Signal Conditioning
DIN RAIL

www.redlion.net

PROCESS

TEMPERATURE

FREQUENCY

COMMUNICATIONS

POWER SUPPLIES

OTHER MODULES

IAMA [pg. 742 ]
Universal Signal
Conditioning module
Inputs and Outputs are
Switch Selectable
9-32 VDC Powered
W
IAMS [pg. 731 ]
Universal Signal
Conditioning Module
Programmable Inputs
and Outputs
Dual Setpoint Control
21.6-253 VAC or
19.2-300 VDC Powered
Removable Programming
Module
W
IAMA6 [pg. 750 ]
Universal Signal
Conditioning module
Inputs and Outputs are
Switch Selectable
19.2-32 VDC Powered
6.2 mm Wide
W
AAMA [pg. 753 ]
Universal Signal
Conditioning module
Inputs and Outputs are
Switch Selectable
18-32 VDC Powered
Negative Signal Inputs
W
AIMI [pg. 758 ]
Loop Powered
0-20 or 4-20 mA
Input/Output Isolation

IAMS [pg. 731 ]
Universal Signal
Conditioning Module
Programmable Inputs
and Outputs
Dual Setpoint Control
21.6-253 VAC or
19.2-300 VDC Powered
Removable Programming
Module
W
ITMA [pg. 775 ]
Accepts Thermocouple
Types J, K, T, & E or
Millivolt Input
12-42 VDC
Loop Powered
Adjustable Range Setting
W
ITMA DC [pg. 782 ]
Accepts Thermocouple
Types J, K, T, & E or
Millivolt Input
9-32 VDC
Adjustable Range Setting
W
IRMA [pg. 760 ]
Accepts RTD Inputs
12-42 VDC
Loop Powered
Adjustable Range Setting
W
IRMA DC [pg. 769 ]
Accepts RTD Inputs
9-32 VDC
Adjustable Range Setting

AFCM [pg. 729 ]
Analog to Frequency Converter
Universal Input to Output
3-Way Isolation
19-30 VDC Powered
W
IFMA [pg. 713 ]
Frequency to Analog Converter
0-10 V, 4-20 mA Output
1 to 25 KHz Input
On-Line Range Setting
W
IFMR [pg. 721 ]
Speed Switch
Settable Trip Frequency
Over Speed, Under Speed,
and Zero-Speed Detection
Form C Relay Output

ICM4 [pg. 788 ]
RS-232 to RS-485
RS-232 to RS-422
4800-19200 Baud
9-32 VDC Powered
W
ICM5 [pg. 792 ]
RS-232 to RS-485
RS-232 to RS-422
4800-19200 Baud
9-32 VDC Powered
Three Way Isolation
W
ICM8 [pg. 796 ]
Serial to Ethernet Converter
RS-232 or RS-485 from
Red Lion products only
24 VDC Powered
W
SWITCH08 [pg. 802 ]
Unmanaged Switch
Requires No Configuration
Supports 10/100 MDPS
Network
Half/Full Duplex Negotiation
Auto-Crossing Detection

PSDR1 [pg. 907 ]
24 VDC @ 1 A
Input 85-264 VAC or
90-350 VDC
CE Approved
UL Listed
W
PSDR2 [pg. 907 ]
24 VDC @ 2 A
Input 85-264 VAC or
90-350 VDC
CE Approved
UL Listed
W
PSDR4 [pg. 907 ]
24 VDC @ 4 A
Input 85-264 VAC or
90-350 VDC
CE Approved
UL Listed

APMR [pg. 759 ]
3 Phase Fault Detector
230, 380, & 480 VAC
Modules
SPDT Relay Output

* See website for product information.

SELECTION GUIDE: Large Displays

1-717-767-6511
13

COUNT

RATE

TIME/CLOCK

AC CURRENT
AC VOLTAGE

DC CURRENT
DC VOLTAGE

PROCESS

TEMPERATURE

STRAIN GAGE

SERIAL SLAVE

LD2 [pg. 629 ]
2.25" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LD4 [pg. 629 ]
4" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAX06/MPAXC
[pg. 686 ]

LD2T [pg. 645 ]
2.25" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LD4T [pg. 645 ]
4" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAX06/MPAXTM
[pg. 686 ]

LPAX05/MPAXH
[pg. 682 ]

LD2A [pg. 659 ]
2.25" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LD4A [pg. 659 ]
4" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LPAX05/MPAXD
[pg. 682 ]

LPAX05/MPAXT
[pg. 682 ]

LPAX05/MPAXS
[pg. 682 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX05/MPAXT
[pg. 694 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX05/MPAXS
[pg. 694 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX06/MPAXC
[pg. 700 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX06/MPAXR
[pg. 700 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX06/MPAXTM
[pg. 700 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX05/MPAXD
[pg. 694 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX05/MPAXP
[pg. 694 ]

4" LED Display
AC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules

LD2SS [pg. 674 ]
2.25" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability
W
LD4SS [pg. 674 ]
4" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
NEMA 4X Case
Setpoint and comms
capability

4" LED Display
AC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
LPAX06 /MPAXI
[pg. 686 ]

4" LED Display
AC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
LPAX06/MPAXI
[pg. 686 ]

4" LED Display
AC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
LPAX06/MPAXCK
[pg. 686 ]

4" LED Display
AC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX06/MPAXI
[pg. 700 ]

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX06/MPAXCK
[pg. 700 ]

4" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules

4" LED Display
AC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules

1.5" LED Display
AC or DC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules
W
EPAX05/MPAXH
[pg. 694 ]
4" LED Display
AC Powered
Accepts various PAX
input modules
Optional plug-in
output modules

* See website for product information.

This page intentionally left blank.
14

www.redlion.net

OPERATOR
INTERFACE

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

This page intentionally left blank.
16

www.redlion.net

G3 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS
MODEL G303 - 3” DISPLAY
3.2-INCH 128X64 PIXEL BACKLIGHT LCD, ABLE TO SUPPORT
TEXT AND GRAPHICS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
UP TO 5 RS-232/422/485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(3 ON BOARD, 2 ON OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD)
ETHERNET PORT TO NETWORK UNITS
WEB-SERVE DATA & VISUALIZATION
PROTOCOL CONVERSION
EMAIL, SMS ALARMS/EVENTS
USB PORT TO DOWNLOAD THE UNIT’S CONFIGURATION FROM
A PC OR FOR DATA TRANSFERS TO A PC
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET TO INCREASE MEMORY CAPACITY
OUTDOOR UNIT WITH UV RATED OVERLAY AVAILABLE

63YN
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Division 2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G303 Operator Interface Terminal combines unique capabilities
normally expected from high-end units with a very affordable price. It is built
around a high performance core with integrated functionality. This core allows
the G303 to perform many of the normal features of the Paradigm range of
Operator Interfaces while improving and adding new features.
The G303 is able to communicate with many different types of hardware using
high-speed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and Ethernet 10 Base T/100
Base-TX communications. In addition, the G303 features USB for fast downloads
of configuration files and access to trending and data logging. A CompactFlash
socket is provided so that Flash cards can be used to collect your trending and data
logging information as well as to store larger configuration files.
In addition to accessing and controlling of external resources, the G303
allows a user to easily view and enter information. The unit uses a Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) module, which is easily readable in both indoor and
outdoor applications. Users can enter data through the front panel 32-button
keypad that has user identifiable keys.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
+24 VDC ±20% @ 9.5 W maximum.
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. DISPLAY: 3.2" 128 x 64 pixel FSTN LCD with yellow LED backlight for
text and graphics applications.
4. 32-KEY KEYPAD: 8 user legendable keys, 5 navigational keys, 10+2
numeric keys, 4 dedicated keys, and 3 soft keys for on-screen menus.
5. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
6. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB Port: USB 1.1. Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Three ports total. Two RS-232 and one RS-485/422. Each port
is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5
V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 8 Hz, 0.8" (p-p), 8 to
500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction, duration: 1 hour, 3 g.
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 40 g, 9 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed for use in Hazardous Locations, Class I, Division 2, Groups A,
B, C, and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class III, Division 2.
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
9. RATINGS: NEMA 4X/IP66
10. WEIGHT: 1.96 lbs (0.89 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

G303 PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G303

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Operator Interface for indoor applications only,
textured finish with embossed keys

G303M000

Operator Interface for indoor or outdoor
applications, glossy finish with UV rated overlay
(keys are not embossed)

G303S000

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards
will allow your G303 to communicate with many of
the popular fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications.
See the G3 Accessories section on page 37 for
information about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

Red Lion has a wide range of cables
and drivers for use with many different
communication types. A list of these
drivers and cables along with pin outs
is available from Red Lion’s website.
New cables and drivers are added on a
regular basis. If making your own
cable, refer to the “G303 Port Pin
Outs” for wiring information.

www.redlion.net

MODEL G306M/S - 5.7” DISPLAY
5.7-INCH FSTN MONOCHROME QVGA 320X240 PIXEL LCD WITH
WHITE LED BACKLIGHT
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
UP TO 5 RS-232/422/485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(3 ON BOARD, 2 ON OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD)
ETHERNET PORT TO NETWORK UNITS
WEB-SERVE DATA & VISUALIZATION
PROTOCOL CONVERSION
EMAIL, SMS ALARMS/EVENTS
USB PORT TO DOWNLOAD THE UNIT’S CONFIGURATION FROM
A PC OR FOR DATA TRANSFERS TO A PC
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET TO INCREASE MEMORY CAPACITY
OUTDOOR UNIT WITH UV RATED OVERLAY AVAILABLE
5 BUTTON KEYPAD FOR ON-SCREEN MENUS
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN

SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G306M Operator Interface Terminal combines unique capabilities
normally expected from high-end units with a very affordable price. It is built
around a high performance core with integrated functionality.
The G306 is able to communicate with many different types of hardware using
high-speed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and Ethernet 10 Base T/100
Base-TX communications. In addition, the G306 features USB for fast downloads
of configuration files and access to trending and data logging. A CompactFlash
socket is provided so that Flash cards can be used to collect your trending and data
logging information as well as to store larger configuration files.
In addition to accessing and controlling of external resources, the G306
allows a user to easily view and enter information. The unit uses a Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) module, which is easily readable in both indoor and
outdoor applications. Users can enter data through the touchscreen and/or front
panel 5-button keypad.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
+24 VDC ±20% @ 14 W maximum.
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. LCD DISPLAY: 5.7" 320 x 240 pixel FSTN LCD.
4. 5-KEY KEYPAD: for on-screen menus.
5. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
6. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB Port: USB 1.1. Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Three ports total. Two RS-232 and one RS-485/422. Each port
is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5
V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
9. RATINGS: NEMA 4X/IP66
10. WEIGHT: 3.0 lbs (1.36 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

G306M/S PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G306M

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Operator Interface for indoor applications, textured
finish with embossed keys

G306M000

Operator Interface for indoor or outdoor
applications, glossy finish with UV rated overlay
(keys are not embossed)

G306MS00

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards
will allow your G306M/S to communicate with many
of the popular fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications.
See the G3 Accessories section on page 37 for
information about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODEL G306A - 5.7” DISPLAY
5.7-INCH TFT ACTIVE MATRIX 256 COLOR QVGA 320X240 PIXEL
LCD
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
UP TO 5 RS-232/422/485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(3 ON BOARD, 2 ON OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD)
ETHERNET PORT TO NETWORK UNITS
WEB-SERVE DATA & VISUALIZATION
PROTOCOL CONVERSION
EMAIL, SMS ALARMS/EVENTS
USB PORT TO DOWNLOAD THE UNIT’S CONFIGURATION FROM
A PC OR FOR DATA TRANSFERS TO A PC
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET TO INCREASE MEMORY CAPACITY
5 BUTTON KEYPAD FOR ON-SCREEN MENUS
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN

63YN
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Division 2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G306A Operator Interface Terminal combines unique capabilities
normally expected from high-end units with a very affordable price. It is built
around a high performance core with integrated functionality. This core allows
the G306A to perform many of the normal features of the Paradigm range of
Operator Interfaces while improving and adding new features.
The G306A is able to communicate with many different types of hardware
using high-speed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and Ethernet 10 Base
T/100 Base-TX communications. In addition, the G306A features USB for fast
downloads of configuration files and access to trending and data logging. A
CompactFlash socket is provided so that Flash cards can be used to collect your
trending and data logging information as well as to store larger configuration
files.
In addition to accessing and controlling of external resources, the G306A
allows a user to easily view and enter information. Users can enter data through
the touchscreen and/or front panel 5-button keypad.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
+24 VDC ±20% @ 14 W maximum.
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. LCD DISPLAY: 5.7" 320 x 240 pixel TFT LCD.
4. 5-KEY KEYPAD: for on-screen menus.
5. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
6. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB Port: USB 1.1. Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Three ports total. Two RS-232 and one RS-485/422. Each port
is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5
V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 8 Hz, 0.8" (p-p), 8 to
500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction, duration: 1 hour, 3 g.
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 40 g, 9 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed for use in hazardous locations, Class I, Division 2, Groups A,
B, C, and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class III, Division 2.
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
9. RATINGS: NEMA 4X/IP66
10. WEIGHT: 3.0 lbs (1.36 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

G306A PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

G306A

Operator Interface for indoor applications, textured
finish with embossed keys

G306A000

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards
will allow your G306A to communicate with many of
the popular fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications.
See the G3 Accessories section on page 37 for
information about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODEL G308 - 7.7” DISPLAY
7.7-INCH DSTN PASSIVE MATRIX 256 COLOR VGA 640X480 PIXEL
LCD MODULE
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
UP TO 5 RS-232/422/485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(3 ON BOARD, 2 ON OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD)
ETHERNET PORT TO NETWORK UNITS
WEB-SERVE DATA & VISUALIZATION
PROTOCOL CONVERSION
EMAIL, SMS ALARMS/EVENTS
USB PORT TO DOWNLOAD THE UNIT’S CONFIGURATION FROM
A PC OR FOR DATA TRANSFERS TO A PC
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET TO INCREASE MEMORY CAPACITY
7 BUTTON KEYPAD FOR ON-SCREEN MENUS
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN

63YN
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Division 2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G308 Operator Interface Terminal combines unique capabilities
normally expected from high-end units with a very affordable price. It is built
around a high performance core with integrated functionality. This core allows
the G308 to perform many of the normal features of the Paradigm range of
Operator Interfaces while improving and adding new features.
The G308 is able to communicate with many different types of hardware using
high-speed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and Ethernet 10 Base T/100
Base-TX communications. In addition, the G308 features USB for fast downloads
of configuration files and access to trending and data logging. A CompactFlash
socket is provided so that Flash cards can be used to collect your trending and data
logging information as well as to store larger configuration files.
In addition to accessing and controlling of external resources, the G308
allows a user to easily view and enter information. Users can enter data through
the touchscreen or front panel 7-button keypad.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
+24 VDC ±20% @ 24 W maximum.
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. DISPLAY: 7.7" 640 x 480 pixel DSTN passive matrix.
4. 7-KEY KEYPAD: for on-screen menus.
5. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
6. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB Port: USB 1.1. Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Three ports total. Two RS-232 and one RS-485/422. Each port
is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5
V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s..
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 40 g, 9 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed for use in hazardous locations, Class I, Division 2, Groups A,
B, C, and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class III, Division 2.
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
9. RATINGS: NEMA 4X/IP66
10. WEIGHT: 3.84 lbs (1.74 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

G308 PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

G308

Operator Interface for indoor applications, textured
finish with embossed keys

G308C000

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards
will allow your G308 to communicate with many of the
popular fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications.
See the G3 Accessories section on page 37 for
information about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODEL G308A - 8.4” DISPLAY
8.4-INCH TFT ACTIVE MATRIX DISPLAY, 256 COLOR VGA 640X480
PIXELS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
UP TO 5 RS-232/422/485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(3 ON BOARD, 2 ON OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD)
ETHERNET PORT TO NETWORK UNITS
WEB-SERVE DATA & VISUALIZATION
PROTOCOL CONVERSION
EMAIL, SMS ALARMS/EVENTS
USB PORT TO DOWNLOAD THE UNIT’S CONFIGURATION FROM
A PC OR FOR DATA TRANSFERS TO A PC
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET TO INCREASE MEMORY CAPACITY
7 BUTTON KEYPAD FOR ON-SCREEN MENUS
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN

63YN
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Division 2

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
+24 VDC ±20% @ 24 W maximum.
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. DISPLAY: 8.4" 640 x 480 pixel TFT active matrix.
4. 7-KEY KEYPAD: for on-screen menus.
5. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
6. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB Port: USB 1.1. Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Three ports total. Two RS-232 and one RS-485/422. Each port
is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5
V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 10 to 55 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 1 g.
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g’s, 9 msec in 3
directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed for use in hazardous locations, Class I, Division 2, Groups A,
B, C, and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class III, Division 2.
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
9. RATINGS: NEMA 4X/IP66
10. WEIGHT: 4.20 lbs (1.91 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

G308A PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G308A

DESCRIPTION

Operator Interface with TFT display for indoor
applications, textured finish with embossed keys

PART NUMBER

G308A000

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards
will allow your G308A to communicate with many of
the popular fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications.
See the G3 Accessories section on page 37 for
information about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODEL G310C/S - 10.4” DISPLAY
10.4-INCH TFT ACTIVE MATRIX DISPLAY, 256 COLOR VGA
640X480 PIXELS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
UP TO 5 RS-232/422/485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(3 ON BOARD, 2 ON OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD)
ETHERNET PORT TO NETWORK UNITS
WEB-SERVE DATA & VISUALIZATION
PROTOCOL CONVERSION
EMAIL, SMS ALARMS/EVENTS
USB PORT TO DOWNLOAD THE UNIT’S CONFIGURATION FROM
A PC OR FOR DATA TRANSFERS TO A PC
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET TO INCREASE MEMORY CAPACITY
OUTDOOR UNIT WITH UV RATED OVERLAY AVAILABLE
8 BUTTON KEYPAD FOR ON-SCREEN MENUS

63YN
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Division 2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G310 Operator Interface Terminal combines unique capabilities
normally expected from high-end units with a very affordable price. It is built
around a high performance core with integrated functionality. This core allows
the G310 to perform many of the normal features of the Paradigm range of
Operator Interfaces while improving and adding new features.
The G310 is able to communicate with many different types of hardware using
high-speed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and Ethernet 10 Base T/100
Base-TX communications. In addition, the G310 features USB for fast downloads
of configuration files and access to trending and data logging. A CompactFlash
socket is provided so that Flash cards can be used to collect your trending and data
logging information as well as to store larger configuration files.
In addition to accessing and controlling of external resources, the G310
allows a user to easily view and enter information. An outdoor version is
available for direct sunlight applications. Users can enter data through the
touchscreen or front panel 8-button keypad.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
G310C: +24 VDC ±20% @ 33 W maximum.
G310S: +24 VDC ±20% @ 25 W maximum.
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. DISPLAY: 10.4" 640 x 480 pixel TFT active matrix.
4. 8-KEY KEYPAD: for on-screen menus.
5. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
6. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB Port: USB 1.1. Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Three ports total. Two RS-232 and one RS-485/422. Each port
is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5
V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 10 to 55 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 1 g.
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 9 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed for use in hazardous locations, Class I, Division 2, Groups A,
B, C, and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class III, Division 2.
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
9. RATINGS: NEMA 4X/IP66
10. WEIGHT: 5.53 lbs (2.51 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

G310C/S PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

G310C

Operator Interface for indoor applications, textured
finish with embossed keys

G310C000

G310S

Operator Interface for indoor or outdoor
applications, glossy finish with UV rated overlay
(keys are not embossed)

G310S000

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards
will allow your G310 to communicate with many of
the popular fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications.
See the G3 Accessories section on page 37 for
information about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODEL G315 - 15” DISPLAY
15-INCH TFT ACTIVE MATRIX DISPLAY, 32K COLOR VGA
1024X768 PIXELS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
UP TO 6 RS-232/422/485 COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(4 ON BOARD, 2 ON OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD)
ETHERNET PORT SUPPORTS MULITPLE PROTOCOLS
SIMULTANEOUSLY
PROTOCOL CONVERSION
EMAIL, SMS ALARMS/EVENTS
BUILT-IN WEB SERVER AND FTP SERVER/CLIENT
USB PORT TO DOWNLOAD THE UNIT’S CONFIGURATION FROM
A PC OR FOR DATA TRANSFERS TO A PC
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET TO INCREASE MEMORY CAPACITY
10 BUTTON KEYPAD FOR ON-SCREEN MENUS
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN

SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G315C Operator Interface combines powerful features normally found
only in PC-based HMIs, with the reliability of a dedicated operating system. It
is built around a high performance core with integrated features, allowing it to
provide SCADA-like functionality at a fraction of the cost.
The G315C is able to act as a multiple protocol converter using four highspeed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and an Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
port. The Ethernet port supports up to four protocols simultaneously, allowing
dissimilar Ethernet based products to communicate with one another.
The G315C's USB port allows fast downloads of configuration files and
access to trending and data logging. A CompactFlash socket is provided so that
standard ComplactFlash cards can be used to collect your trending and data
logging information as well as to store configuration files. The built-in web
server allows processes to be controlled remotely.
The G315C's large, high-resolution display allows users to easily view and
enter information. Data can be manipulated through the touchscreen and/or the
10-button keypad.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
+24 VDC ±20% @ 67 W maximum.
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. DISPLAY: 15" 1024 x 768 pixel TFT active matrix.
4. 10-KEY KEYPAD: for on-screen menus.
5. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
6. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB Port: USB 1.1. Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Four ports total. Two RS-232 and two RS-485/422. Each port
is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5
V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
9. RATINGS: NEMA 4X/IP66
10. WEIGHT: 11.41 lbs (5.17 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

G315C PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

G315C

Operator Interface for indoor applications, textured
finish with embossed keys

G315C000

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards
will allow your G315 to communicate with many of
the popular fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications.
See the G3 Accessories section on page 37 for
information about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

G3 KADET O/I TERMINALS
MODEL G304K - 4.3” DISPLAY
BRIGHT 4.3-INCH TFT ACTIVE MATRIX 256 COLOR 480 x 272
PIXEL DISPLAY
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
TWO SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(1 RS-232 AND 1 RS-232/422/485)
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN
PROTOCOL CONVERSION

UL
R

US LISTED

SPECIFICATIONS

IND. CONT. EQ.
22SV

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The 4.3-inch G3 Kadet was designed for applications in which available
mounting space is at a premium. Though diminutive in size, the Kadet boasts a
bright TFT display with full 256-color support. With a resolution of 480 x 272,
the Kadet’s 4.3-inch display has a higher resolution and better image clarity
than most 6-inch HMIs.
The G3 Kadet offers two high-speed serial ports in the form of one RS-232
and one RS-232/422/485 ports. This allows the Kadet to simultaneously
communicate with devices from different manufacturers, as well as to perform
protocol conversion.
The G3 Kadet range of HMIs is programmed with Red Lion’s free Crimson
2.0 software. Crimson 2.0 offers easy to use drag and drop communications
configuration, while the embedded image library allows the programmer to
create intuitive screens and prompts for the operator.

DIMENSIONS IN

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
Supply Voltage:
12-28 VDC, Class 2
Maximum Power:
3.6 W; Start up current may be as high as 700 mA
Fused:
Fast-blow 800mA, 5x20mm
2. DISPLAY: 4.3" 480 x 272 pixel TFT active matrix.
3. MEMORY: 2MB of non-volatile flash memory.
4. COMMUNICATIONS:
Serial Ports: Two Serial Ports total. One RS-232 port, one RS-232/422/485
Each port is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
5. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 45°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 10-90% relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 45°C.
Vibration: Operational 10 to 25 Hz in X, Y, Z direction for 30 minutes, 2 g’s.
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
7. RATINGS: NEMA 4/IP65
8. WEIGHT: 9.4 oz (270 g)

INCHES (MM)

1-717-767-6511

DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS

Several adapters are available which allow direct connection via Red Lion
communications cables. For a list of adapters and cables, please visit
http://www.redlion.net/support/downloads.html.
G3 Comms Cable
PT# CBLxxxxx

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G304K

DESCRIPTION

4.3" TFT Operator Interface

PART NUMBER

G304K000

ACCESSORIES
CABLES AND DRIVERS

Red Lion has a wide range of cables
and drivers for use with many different
communication types. A list of these
drivers and cables along with pin outs is
available from Red Lion’s website.
New cables and drivers are added on a
regular basis. If making your own cable,
refer to the “Device Communications”
for wiring information.

www.redlion.net

Kadet Adapter
PT# CBLADKxx

MODEL G306K - 5.6” DISPLAY
5.6-INCH TFT ACTIVE MATRIX 256 COLOR QVGA 320 X 234 PIXEL
DISPLAY
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
THREE SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(1 RS-232 AND 2 RS-232/422/485 PORTS)
ETHERNET PORT SUPPORTS MULITPLE PROTOCOLS
SIMULTANEOUSLY
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET FOR LOADING DATABASE IN FIELD
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN
PROTOCOL CONVERSION

UL
R

US LISTED

SPECIFICATIONS

IND. CONT. EQ.
22SV

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G306K is the perfect solution for applications that require the operator
to monitor and control more than just a single device. With three serial ports and
an Ethernet port, the 5.6" Kadet can connect to multiple serial and Ethernet
devices simultaneously, including PLCs, motor drives, bar code scanners, etc.
The G306K performs the functions of a multiple protocol converter, using
three high-speed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and a 10 Base-T
Ethernet port. The Ethernet port supports up to four protocols simultaneously,
allowing dissimilar Ethernet based products to communicate with one another.
The CompactFlash slot can be used to load the unit's configuration file,
allowing configuration changes to be made and saved to the card for later
transfer.
The G3 Kadet range of HMIs is programmed with Red Lion's free Crimson
2.0 software. Crimson 2.0 offers easy to use drag and drop communications
configuration, while the embedded image library allows the programmer to
create intuitive screens and prompts for the operator.

DIMENSIONS IN

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
Supply Voltage:
12 - 24 VDC, Class 2
Maximum Power:
200 mA @ 24 VDC
Fuse:
Fast-blow 800mA, 5x20mm
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. DISPLAY: 5.6" 320 x 234 pixel TFT active matrix.
4. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
5. COMMUNICATIONS:
Serial Ports: Three Serial Ports total. One RS-232 port, two RS-232/422/485
Each port is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
Ethernet Port: 10 Mbps
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 45°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 10-90% relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 45°C.
Vibration: Operational 10 to 25 Hz in X, Y, Z direction for 30 minutes, 2 g’s.
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
8. RATINGS: NEMA 4/IP65
9. WEIGHT: 30 oz (850 g)

INCHES (MM)

1-717-767-6511

DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G306K

DESCRIPTION

5.6" TFT Operator Interface

PART NUMBER

G306K000

ACCESSORIES
CABLES AND DRIVERS

Red Lion has a wide range of cables
and drivers for use with many different
communication types. A list of these
drivers and cables along with pin outs is
available from Red Lion’s website.
New cables and drivers are added on a
regular basis. If making your own cable,
refer to the “Device Communications”
for wiring information.

www.redlion.net

Kadet Adapter
PT# CBLADKxx

MODEL G308K - 8” DISPLAY
8-INCH TFT ACTIVE MATRIX 256 COLOR VGA 640 X 480 PIXEL
DISPLAY
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
THREE SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
(1 RS-232 AND 2 RS-232/422/485 PORTS)
ETHERNET PORT SUPPORTS MULITPLE PROTOCOLS
SIMULTANEOUSLY
COMPACTFLASH® SOCKET FOR LOADING DATABASE IN FIELD
RESISTIVE ANALOG TOUCHSCREEN
PROTOCOL CONVERSION

UL
R

US LISTED

SPECIFICATIONS

IND. CONT. EQ.
22SV

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G308K is the perfect solution for applications that require the operator
to monitor and control more than just a single device. With three serial ports and
an Ethernet port, the 8" Kadet can connect to multiple serial and Ethernet
devices simultaneously, including PLCs, motor drives, bar code scanners, etc.
The G308K performs the functions of a multiple protocol converter, using
three high-speed RS-232/422/485 communications ports and a 10 Base-T
Ethernet port. The Ethernet port supports up to four protocols simultaneously,
allowing dissimilar Ethernet based products to communicate with one another.
The CompactFlash slot can be used to load the unit's configuration file,
allowing configuration changes to be made and saved to the card for later
transfer.
The G3 Kadet range of HMIs is programmed with Red Lion's free Crimson
2.0 software. Crimson 2.0 offers easy to use drag and drop communications
configuration, while the embedded image library allows the programmer to
create intuitive screens and prompts for the operator.

DIMENSIONS IN

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
Supply Voltage:
24 VDC ± 5%, Class 2
Maximum Power:
440 mA @ 24 VDC
Fuse:
Fast-blow 800mA, 5x20mm
2. BATTERY: Lithium coin cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years.
3. DISPLAY: 8" 640 x 480 pixel TFT active matrix.
4. MEMORY:
On Board User Memory: Non-volatile Flash memory.
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II
CompactFlash cards.
5. COMMUNICATIONS:
Serial Ports: Three Serial Ports total. One RS-232 port, two RS-232/422/485
Each port is individually software programmable up to 115,200 baud.
Ethernet Port: 10 Mbps
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 45°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 10-90% relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 45°C.
Vibration: Operational 10 to 25 Hz in X, Y, Z direction for 30 minutes, 2 g’s.
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
See data sheet on web site for detailed information.
8. RATINGS: NEMA 4/IP65
9. WEIGHT: 42.4 oz (1.2 g)

INCHES (MM)

1-717-767-6511

DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G308K

DESCRIPTION

8" TFT Operator Interface

PART NUMBER

G308K000

ACCESSORIES
CABLES AND DRIVERS

Red Lion has a wide range of cables
and drivers for use with many different
communication types. A list of these
drivers and cables along with pin outs is
available from Red Lion’s website. New
cables and drivers are added on a
regular basis. If making your own cable,
refer to the “Device Communications”
for wiring information.

www.redlion.net

Kadet Adapter
PT# CBLADKxx

MODEL

G3 ACCESSORIES
G3RS - ISOLATED SERIAL EXPANSION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS

CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
ISOLATED RS-232 AND RS-485
MULTIPLEXED PORTS CAPABLE OF
COMMUNICATING WITH RS-232, RS-422, RS485 AND DH485 DEVICES AT UP TO 115,200
BAUD
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G3 proprietary expansion slot provides a high speed, parallel architecture
that extends the functionality and flexibility of the G3 series HMI. This
approach allows the G3 series to evolve concurrently with the latest advances in
communications and standards, without sacrificing performance. This high
bandwith channel has significantly greater throughput when compared to the
traditional (external) serial gateway approach.
The G3RS option card is easily installed by removing the rear cover of your
G3 operator interface, attaching the card using three screws and connecting a
single cable. Adding this card gives the operator interface another RS-232 port
and RS-422/485 port. It is built with isolation to protect equipment from
potentially harmful ground loops, and provides high speed RS-232, RS-422, RS485, and DH485 communications for many different types of hardware.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of your G3 operator interface.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
Serial Ports: Format and Baud Rates for each port are individually software
programmable up to 115,200 baud and are isolated to help prevent ground
loops. The RS-422/485 and DH485 port via RJ45 and the RS-232 port via
RJ12 share the same hardware.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5 VDC
Isolation from G3RS Communication ports to G3 operator interface:
1000 VDC for 1 minute.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G3RS

DESCRIPTION

RS-232/485 option card for G3 operator interfaces
with isolated high speed communications ports

PART NUMBER

G3RS0000

MODEL G3CN - CANOPEN/J1939 EXPANSION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
DIGITALLY ISOLATED CANopen PORT
CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH ANY
CANopen DEVICE
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G3 proprietary expansion slot provides a high speed, parallel architecture
that extends the functionality and flexibility of the G3 series HMI. This
approach allows the G3 series to evolve concurrently with the latest advances in
communications and standards, without sacrificing performance. This high
bandwidth channel has significantly greater throughput when compared to the
traditional (external) serial gateway approach.
The G3CN option card is easily installed by removing the rear cover of your
G3 operator interface, attaching the card using three screws and connecting a
single cable. Adding this card gives the operator interface a CANopen
communications port. It is built with digital isolation to protect the operator
interface from the CANopen/J1939 bus and vice versa. It provides the ability to
communicate to any high speed CANopen device. The G3CN option board has
a termination resistor built-in, and is selectable through a jumper setting. A
connector housing is provided to function as a strain relief for the wires that
terminate into the five position connector. The connector is pluggable for easy
removal of the G3 operator interface from the CANopen bus, without disturbing
communications with other devices on the bus.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of your G3 operator interface.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
CANopen Port: The CANopen port has format and baud rates that are
software programmable up to 1M baud and are digitally isolated. This port
may be configured for various CANopen protocols.
Isolation from G3CN Communication ports to G3 operator interface:
1000 VDC for 1 minute.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G3CN

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

CANopen option card for G3 operator interfaces
with isolated high speed communications ports

PART NUMBER

G3CN0000

MODEL G3DN - DEVICENET EXPANSION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
DIGITALLY ISOLATED DeviceNet PORT
CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH ANY
DeviceNet MASTER
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G3 proprietary expansion slot provides a high speed, parallel architecture
that extends the functionality and flexibility of the G3 series HMI. This
approach allows the G3 series to evolve concurrently with the latest advances in
communications and standards, without sacrificing performance. This high
bandwidth channel has significantly greater throughput when compared to the
traditional (external) serial gateway approach.
The G3DN option card is easily installed by removing the rear cover of your
G3 operator interface, attaching the card using three screws and connecting a
single cable. Adding this card gives the operator interface a DeviceNet slave
communications port. It is built with digital isolation to protect the operator
interface from the DeviceNet bus and vice versa. It provides the ability to
communicate to any DeviceNet master. A connector housing is provided to
function as a strain relief for the wires that terminate into the five position
connector. The connector is pluggable for easy removal of the G3 operator
interface from the DeviceNet bus, without disturbing communications with
other devices on the bus.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of your G3 operator interface.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
DeviceNet Port: The DeviceNet port has format and baud rates that are
software programmable up to 500K baud and are digitally isolated. This
port may be configured for various DeviceNet protocols. Check
www.redlion.net/g3 for currently supported protocols.
Isolation from G3DN Communication ports to G3 operator interface:
1000 VDC for 1 minute.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G3DN

DESCRIPTION

DeviceNet option card for G3 operator interfaces
with isolated high speed communications ports

PART NUMBER

G3DN0000

MODEL G3PB - PROFIBUS EXPANSION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS

ADDS PROFIBUS DP CONNECTIVITY TO
ANY G3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G3 proprietary expansion slot provides a high speed, parallel architecture
that extends the functionality and flexibility of the G3 series HMI. This
approach allows the G3 series to evolve concurrently with the latest advances in
communications and standards, without sacrificing performance. This high
bandwidth channel has significantly greater throughput when compared to the
traditional (external) serial gateway approach.
The G3PB option card adds PROFIBUS DP connectivity to any G3 series
HMI. This allows a high speed exchange of blocks of data, at data rates up to 12
MBaud, between the hosting G3 and a Master PLC on a PROFIBUS network.
The DP suffix refers to “Decentralized Periphery”, which is used to describe
distributed I/O devices connected via a fast serial data link with a central
controller.
The card is easily installed by removing the rear cover of your G3 operator
interface, attaching the card using three screws and connecting a single cable.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of your G3 operator interface.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
PROFIBUS Port: FIELDBUS TYPE : PROFIBUS-DP EN 50 170, I. The
PROFIBUS port has a format and baud rates that are software
programmable up to 12M baud and are digitally isolated.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G3PB

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PROFIBUS option card for G3 operator interfaces

PART NUMBER

G3PBDP00

MODEL G3GSM - CELLULAR MODEM EXPANSION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS
GSM/GPRS CAPABILITY
SMS TEXT MESSAGING
E-MAIL AND FTP
GLOBAL OPERATION
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON® SOFTWARE
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The G3GSM option card allows the user to add GSM/GPRS cellular modem
capability to their G3 operator interface terminal. GSM/GPRS is the most
prevalent cellular technology in today's markets. GPRS can be used for services
such as Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) access, Short Message Service
(SMS), and for Internet communication services such as email and World Wide
Web access. The G3GSM modem option card is quad-band, allowing it to work
in frequencies across Americas, Europe and Asia. US and Canada work in the
850/1900 MHz bands, while Europe, Middle East, Africa and most of Asia work
in the 900/1800 MHz GSM/GPRS frequencies.
The G3GSM requires the addition of a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
card, which is inserted into the holder prior to installation of the G3GSM card.
The SIM card securely stores the service-subscriber key (IMSI) used to identify
a subscriber, and is used to connect to the network to obtain an IP address from
the provider.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: 24 VDC ± 20%; 0.25A max; 0.25A typical
(independent from the host G3 power connection). Must use Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.
2. ANTENNA CONNECTOR:
SMA Female connector requires:
50 Ohm antenna with SMA male connector
Quad-band antenna (850/900/1800/1900 MHz) for global support.
Dual-band (850/1900 MHz) antenna for US and Canada only
Dual band (900/1800 MHz) for Europe only
The antenna cable should be 50Ω impedance, RG178/U or RG174/U type
and be able to connect to the RSMA (Male) jack bulkhead. The antenna
could be horizontal, vertical or right angled. Longer antenna cable would
equate to signal loss.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

G3GSM

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

GSM/GPRS Modem Option Card for G3 operator
interface

PART NUMBER

G3GSM000

This page intentionally left blank.
40

www.redlion.net

DATA STATION PLUS SERIES
MODEL DSP
C

UL
R

CONVERTS NUMEROUS PROTOCOLS SIMULTANEOUSLY
COMPACTFLASH® SLOT ALLOWS PROCESS DATA TO BE
LOGGED DIRECTLY TO CSV FILES
WEB-BASED HMI OFFERS BUILT-IN PC-BASED SCADA
FUNCTIONALITY

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.

WEBSERVER PROVIDES WORLDWIDE ACCESS TO DATA LOGS
AND WEB-BASED HMI

34AD

EXTENSIVE BUILT-IN DRIVER LIST ALLOWS EASY DATA
MAPPING TO PLCs, PCs, AND SCADA SYSTEMS
10 BASE-T/100BASE-TX ETHERNET PORT SUPPORTS FOUR
SIMULTANEOUS PROTOCOLS
INDEPENDENT SERIAL PORTS PROVIDE VIRTUALLY
UNLIMITED INTEGRATION METHODS
ALARM NOTIFICATIONS CAN BE SENT VIA EMAIL OR TEXT
MESSAGES
SUPPORTS UP TO NINE PROTOCOLS SIMULTANEOUSLY

3PWL
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLERS

FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Data Station Plus was designed to act as a nexus for industrial data
collection and management. The unit offers multiple protocol conversion, data
logging and remote machine access. With three built in serial ports and a 10
Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet port, the unit performs protocol conversion,
allowing disparate devices to communicate seamlessly with one another. The
Ethernet port supports up to four protocols simultaneously so even Ethernet to
Ethernet protocols can be converted.
The CompactFlash card allows data to be collected and stored for later
review. The files are stored in simple CSV file format allowing common
applications, such as Microsoft Excel and Access, to view and manage the data.
The free Websync utility provides a means to synchronize the files with a PC’s
hard drive for permanent storage. The CompactFlash card may also be used to
load new configuration files into the Data Station.
The built-in web server allows log files to be retrieved manually, and also
provides access to the unique web-based HMI”. The web-based HMI is
programmed just like Red Lion’s G3 series of HMI. Any standard web browser
such as Internet Explorer or Netscape may be used to monitor or control the
HMI from a PC anywhere in the world.
The USB port may be used for blazing fast file downloads, or to mount the
Data Station’s CompactFlash card as an external drive to your PC. The Data
Station’s DIN rail mounting saves time and panel space and snaps easily onto
standard top hat (T) profile DIN rail.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

1. POWER: 24 VDC ± 10%
200 mA min., without expansion card
1 Amp maximum with expansion card fitted
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB/PG Port: USB 1.1. Device only using Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Format and Baud Rates for each port are individually software
programmable up to 115,200 baud.
RS-232/PG Port: RS-232 port via RJ12
COMMS Ports: RS-422/485 port via RJ45, and RS-232 port via RJ12
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC,
VOL = 0.5 V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
RJ45 jack is wired as a NIC (Network Interface Card).
3. LEDs:
STS – Status LED indicates condition of Data Station.
TX/RX – Transmit/Receive LEDs show serial activity.
Ethernet – Link and activity LEDs.
CF – CompactFlash LED indicates card status and read/write activity
4. MEMORY:
On-board User Memory: 4 Mbytes of non-volatile Flash memory.
On-board SDRAM:
DSPLE and DSPSX: 2 Mbytes
DSPGT: 8 Mbytes
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II cards.
Used for optional database storage only
5. REAL-TIME CLOCK: Typical accuracy is less than one min./month drift.
Battery: Lithium Coin Cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years at 25 ºC.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to +70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% max relative humidity,
non-condensing, from 0 to 50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed For use in Hazardous Locations: Class I, Division 2, Groups
A, B, C, and D
8. WEIGHT: 15.1 oz (456.4 g)

1-717-767-6511

DATA STATION PLUS PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

Data Station Plus

MODEL NO.

DSP

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Data Station with multiple protocol converter, Comms, Ethernet and
expansion slot.

DSPLE000

Data Station with multiple protocol converter, data logger, web
server with Virtual HMI up to QVGA (320 x 240) and expansion slot.

DSPSX000

Data Station with multiple protocol converter, data logger, web
server with web-based HMI up to VGA (640 x 480) size and
expansion slot with increased SDRAM.

DSPGT000

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for
fieldbus communications. These communication cards will
allow your DSP to communicate with many of the popular
fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications. See the
DSP Accessories section on page 59 for information about
these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODULAR CONTROLLER SERIES
MODEL CSMSTRV2

CONTROL AND MONITOR UP TO 256 I/O POINTS ANALOG OR
DIGITAL
CONTROL OF OTHER MODULES IN THE MODULAR
CONTROLLER SERIES
STORES MODULE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION, AND
AUTOMATICALLY REPROGRAMS REPLACED MODULES
EXTENSIVE BUILT-IN DRIVER LIST ALLOWS EASY DATA
MAPPING TO PLCs, PCs, AND SCADA SYSTEMS
INDEPENDENT SERIAL PORTS PROVIDE VIRTUALLY
UNLIMITED INTEGRATION METHODS
10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX ETHERNET CONNECTION PROVIDES
NETWORKING CAPABILITY
SUPPORTS UP TO 16 MODULAR CONTROLLER SERIES
MODULES

UL
R

SUPPORTED BY CRIMSON SOFTWARE

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

HOT SWAPPABLE MODULES
MULTI-ZONE PID CONTROL
DATA ACQUISITION FOR PC, PLC OR SCADA SYSTEMS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Red Lion’s Modular Controller series offers a cost-effective solution to
integrating multi-zone PID control, data acquisition and I/O into your PC, DCS
or PLC control system. The Modular Controller product line has all the features
of the Data Station Plus, while adding the ability to manage up to 32 zones of
PID control for analog and digital I/O. With capabilities to handle high I/O
counts between a minimum of 96 analog to a maximum of 224 digital I/O, the
Modular Controller series is ideal for complex multi-zone applications, such as
cold storage warehouses or other areas where large amounts of analog and
digital I/O are needed. The Modular Controller supports up to 16 hot-swappable
controller modules with automatic reprogramming, available with
configurations ranging from analog input and output, digital I/O, PID control,
strain gage and temperature input. Combined with enhanced communication,
protocol conversion, and data logging capabilities with web-based HMI and
remote alarm/text, Red Lion’s Modular Controller offers 24/7 monitoring
capabilities for process peace-of-mind.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER: 24 VDC ± 10%
400 mA min. (1 module)
3 Amps max. (16 modules)
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB/PG Port: USB 1.1. Device only using Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Format and Baud Rates for each port are individually software
programmable up to 115,200 baud.
RS-232/PG Port: RS-232 port via RJ12
COMMS Ports: RS-422/485 port via RJ45, and RS-232 port via RJ12
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC,
VOL = 0.5 V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
RJ45 jack is wired as a NIC (Network Interface Card).
3. LEDs:
STS – Status LED indicates condition of master.
TX/RX – Transmit/Receive LEDs show serial activity.
Ethernet – Link and activity LEDs.
4. MEMORY:
On-board User Memory: 4 Mbytes of non-volatile Flash memory.
On-board SDRAM: 2 Mbytes
5. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to +70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% max relative humidity,
non-condensing, from 0 to 50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
7. WEIGHT: 12.9oz (365.7g)

1-717-767-6511

MASTER PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Master Module

CSMSTR

DESCRIPTION

Modular Controller Master, Comms, Ethernet

PART NUMBER

CSMSTRV2

ACCESSORIES
CABLES AND DRIVERS

Red Lion has a wide range of cables
and drivers for use with many different
communication types. A list of these
drivers and cables along with pin outs is
available from Red Lion’s website.
New cables and drivers are added on a
regular basis. If making your own
cable, refer to the “Master Port Pin
Outs” for wiring information.

www.redlion.net

MODEL CSMSTRLE

ADDS MULTIPLE PROTOCOL CONVERSION FUNCTIONALITY
TO DATA ACQUISITION AND MULTI-ZONE PID CONTROL
APPLICATIONS
PERFORMS HIERARCHICAL CONTROL OF OTHER MODULES
IN THE MODULAR CONTROLLER SERIES
STORES MODULE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION, AND
AUTOMATICALLY REPROGRAMS REPLACED MODULES
EXTENSIVE BUILT-IN DRIVER LIST ALLOWS EASY DATA
MAPPING TO PLCs, PCs, AND SCADA SYSTEMS
INDEPENDENT SERIAL PORTS PROVIDE VIRTUALLY
UNLIMITED INTEGRATION METHODS
10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX ETHERNET CONNECTION PROVIDES
NETWORKING CAPABILITY
SUPPORTS UP TO 16 MODULAR CONTROLLER SERIES
MODULES

UL
R

US LISTED

SUPPORTS UP TO NINE PROTOCOLS SIMULTANEOUSLY(with
expansion card)

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model CSMSTRLE is a communications and control platform designed
for use with Modular Controller Series slave modules. The CSMSTR uses a
proprietary high speed serial protocol to communicate, via backplane
connection, with up to 16 slave modules. Through the same connection, the
Master also provides power to the modules.
When powered up, the CSMSTR automatically identifies and addresses
connected slave modules. By storing the configuration information of all of the
modules, the CSMSTR is able to automatically configure modules if they are
replaced.
The Master provides high-speed RS-232/422/485 communication ports and
an Ethernet port for connection to PCs, PLCs, and SCADA systems. An
extensive list of master and slave protocol drivers are available to allow the
CSMSTR to share and exchange variable data with external devices. The 10
Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet port can also be used to connect and share data
with other devices at high speeds.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER: 24 VDC ± 10%
400 mA min. (1 module)
3.5 Amps max. (16 modules + Expansion Card)
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB/PG Port: USB 1.1. Device only using Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Format and Baud Rates for each port are individually software
programmable up to 115,200 baud.
RS-232/PG Port: RS-232 port via RJ12
COMMS Ports: RS-422/485 port via RJ45, and RS-232 port via RJ12
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC,
VOL = 0.5 V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
RJ45 jack is wired as a NIC (Network Interface Card).
3. LEDs:
STS – Status LED indicates condition of master.
TX/RX – Transmit/Receive LEDs show serial activity.
Ethernet – Link and activity LEDs.
CF – CompactFlash LED indicates card status and read/write activity
4. MEMORY:
On-board User Memory: 4 Mbytes of non-volatile Flash memory.
On-board SDRAM: 2 Mbytes
5. REAL-TIME CLOCK: Typical accuracy is less than one minute per month
drift.
Battery: Lithium Coin Cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years at 25 ºC.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to +70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% max relative humidity,
non-condensing, from 0 to 50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
8. WEIGHT: 12.9oz (365.7g)

1-717-767-6511

MASTER PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Master Module

CSMSTR

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Modular Controller Master with multiple protocol converter,
Ethernet, and expansion slot.

CSMSTRLE

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

Red Lion offers optional communication cards for fieldbus
communications. These communication cards will allow
your CSMSTR to communicate with many of the popular
fieldbus protocols.
Red Lion is also offering a communications card for
additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 communications. See the
CSMSTR Accessories section on page 59 for information
about these cards.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODEL CSMSTRSX & CSMSTRGT
PROVIDES ENHANCED FEATURES FOR DATA ACQUISITION OR
MULTI-ZONE PID CONTROL APPLICATIONS
WEBSERVER PROVIDES WORLDWIDE ACCESS TO DATA LOGS
AND VIRTUAL HMI
WEB-BASED HMI OFFERS BUILT-IN PC-BASED SCADA
FUNCTIONALITY
PERFORMS HIERARCHICAL CONTROL OF OTHER MODULES
IN THE MODULAR CONTROLLER SERIES
STORES MODULE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION, AND
AUTOMATICALLY REPROGRAMS REPLACED MODULES
EXTENSIVE BUILT-IN DRIVER LIST ALLOWS EASY DATA
MAPPING TO PLCs, PCs, AND SCADA SYSTEMS

UL
R

INDEPENDENT SERIAL PORTS PROVIDE VIRTUALLY
UNLIMITED INTEGRATION METHODS

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

The Model CSMSTR is a communications and control platform designed for
use with Modular Controller Series slave modules. The CSMSTR uses a
proprietary high speed serial protocol to communicate, via backplane
connection, with up to 16 slave modules. Through the same connection, the
Master also provides power to the modules.
When powered up, the CSMSTR automatically identifies and addresses
connected slave modules. By storing the configuration information of all of the
modules, the CSMSTR is able to automatically configure modules if they are
replaced.
The Master provides high-speed RS-232/422/485 communication ports and
an Ethernet port for connection to PCs, PLCs, and SCADA systems. An
extensive list of master and slave protocol drivers are available to allow the
CSMSTR to share and exchange variable data with external devices. The 10
Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet port can also be used to connect and share data
with other devices at high speeds. The web-based HMI feature allows you to
create and control an HMI from any networked PC. An onboard CompactFlash
slot provides storage for the Master’s built-in data logger.
The design of the Modular Controller Series high density packaging and DIN
rail mounting saves time and panel space. The controller snaps easily onto
standard top hat (T) profile DIN rail.

INCHES (MM)

SUPPORTS UP TO 16 MODULAR CONTROLLER
SERIES MODULES
COMPACTFLASH® SLOT ALLOWS PROCESS DATA
TO BE LOGGED DIRECTLY TO CSV FILES

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DIMENSIONS IN

10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX ETHERNET CONNECTION PROVIDES
NETWORKING CAPABILITY

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER: 24 VDC ± 10%
400 mA min. (1 module)
3.5 Amps max. (16 modules + Expansion Card)
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB/PG Port: USB 1.1. Device only using Type B connection.
Serial Ports: Format and Baud Rates for each port are individually software
programmable up to 115,200 baud.
RS-232/PG Port: RS-232 port via RJ12
COMMS Ports: RS-422/485 port via RJ45, and RS-232 port via RJ12
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC,
VOL = 0.5 V @ 25 mA max.
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
RJ45 jack is wired as a NIC (Network Interface Card).
3. LEDs:
STS – Status LED indicates condition of master.
TX/RX – Transmit/Receive LEDs show serial activity.
Ethernet – Link and activity LEDs.
CF – CompactFlash LED indicates card status and read/write activity
4. MEMORY:
On-board User Memory: 4 Mbytes of non-volatile Flash memory.
On-board SDRAM:
CSMSTRSX: 2 Mbytes
CSMSTRGT: 8 Mbytes
Memory Card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II cards.
5. REAL-TIME CLOCK: Typical accuracy is less than one minute per month
drift. Crimson 2.0’s SNTP facility allows synchronization with external servers.
Battery: Lithium Coin Cell. Typical lifetime of 10 years at 25 ºC.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to +70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% max relative humidity,
non-condensing, from 0 to 50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 10 to 150 Hz, 0.075 mm
amplitude in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
8. WEIGHT: 15.1 oz (456.4 g)

1-717-767-6511

MASTER PORT PIN OUTS

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

Master Module

MODEL NO.

CSMSTR

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Modular Controller Master with multiple protocol converter, data logger, web
server with web-based HMI up to QVGA (320 x 240) size and expansion slot.

CSMSTRSX

Modular Controller Master with multiple protocol converter, data logger, web
server with web-based HMI up to VGA (640 x 480) size and expansion slot
with increased SDRAM.

CSMSTRGT

ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD

CABLES AND DRIVERS

www.redlion.net

MODEL CSPID - SINGLE AND DUAL LOOP PID MODULES
DEDICATED SINGLE AND DUAL PID MODULES FOR THE
MODULAR CONTROLLER SERIES
HOT-SWAPPABLE REPLACEMENT REDUCES DOWNTIME
AUTO ADDRESSING MINIMIZES CONFIGURATION TIME
FULLY ISOLATED DESIGN PROVIDES RELIABLE OPERATION
PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
UNIVERSAL INPUTS ACCEPT TC, RTD, 0-10 V and 0/4-20 mA
SIGNALS
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID SETTINGS
DC ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTIONAL, CSPID1 ONLY)
HEATER CURRENT INPUT (OPTIONAL) ENSURES DETECTION
OF HEATER CIRCUIT FAILURE

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model CSPID series modules are full featured PID controllers designed
for use with the Modular Controller Series. The CSPID1 is a single loop
controller, while the CSPID2 is a dual loop controller. The design of the system
provides a true modular PID control platform for multi-zone control
applications. The modules can accept a wide range of thermocouple, RTD, 0-10
V, 0/4-20 mA signals. With multiple discrete outputs, plus an optional analog
output (CSPID1 only), the CSPID modules can perform virtually any
combination of time-proportioning or linear control for heat, cool, or heat/cool
applications. The discrete outputs may also be assigned to one of seven internal
soft alarms. The CSPID1’s optional linear output can be assigned to transmit
virtually any internal variable.
The CSPID modules connect and communicate via a backplane connection to
the CSMSTR Modular Controller Series Master. The CSMSTR, equipped with
serial ports as well as an Ethernet port, allows the system to share data with PCs,
PLCs, and SCADA systems. The Master supports any combination of up to 16
CS Series modules.
The modules can operate in On/Off, P, PI, or PID control mode, and use an
on-demand Auto-Tune that establishes the tuning constants. The PID constants
may be fine-tuned through the serial or Ethernet interface. The modules employ
a unique overshoot suppression feature, which allows the quickest response
without excessive overshoot. The modules can also be operated in manual mode,
providing the operator with direct control of the output.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER: Derived from system backplane. (CSPID1 draws 150 mA max. load
on power input of MASTER, CSPID2 draws 125 mA max). Modules may be
hot-swapped (Replaced while powered up).
2. LEDs*:
STS - Status LED shows module condition
OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4 - Indicate status of outputs 1, 2, 3, and 4
ALM, or AL1 and AL2 - Alarm LEDs are lit during any internal alarm condition
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programmable parameters.
4. INPUT:
GENERAL:
Sample Time: 67 msec (15 Hz)
Common Mode Rejection: >110 dB, 50/60 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection: >40 dB, 50/60 Hz
Temperature Coefficient: 0.01%/°C
Step Response Time: 200 msec typ., 250 msec max
THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C
Input Impedance: 20 M Ω
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
Cold Junction Compensation: Less than ±1°C typical (±1.5°C max) over 0
to 50 °C ambient temperature
Resolution: 0.1°
RTD INPUTS:
Type: 2 or 3 wire
Excitation: 150 μA
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω Max
Resolution: 1 or 0.1°
PROCESS INPUT:
INPUT RANGE

ACCURACY
MAX CONTINUOUS
IMPEDANCE
RESOLUTION
(18 TO 28 °C)
OVERLOAD

10 V

0.1% span

1 M Ohm

50 V

16 bit

20 mA

0.1% span

10 Ohm

100 mA

16 bit

5. COMMUNICATIONS: Provided by the CS Master
6. A/D CONVERTER: 16 bit resolution
7. DISCRETE OUTPUTS:
CSPID1: Outputs 1 and 2 available as Solid State NFET, Form A relay or
Triac. Output 3 is a Form C relay.
CSPID2: Outputs 1 through 4 available as Form A relay, Solid State NFET,
or Triac.
Solid State Output:
Type: Switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 1 A max
VDS ON: 0.3 V @ 1 A
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max

1-717-767-6511

Form A Relay Output:
Type: N.O.
Current Rating: 3 Amps @ 125 VAC
1/10 HP @ 125 VAC
Life Expectancy: 200,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
Form C Relay Output:
Type: SPDT
Current Rating: 5 Amps @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load)
1/8 HP @ 125 VAC
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
Triac: (CSPID1TA only)
Type: Optically isolated, zero-crossing detection
Rating: 120 VAC, Min: 20 VAC
Max Load Current: 1.0 A across Operating Temperature Range
Min Load Current: 5 mA
Offstate Leakage Current: 1 mA Max
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Suppression, Fused
Triac: (CSPID2T0 and CSPID2TM only)
Type: Optically isolated, zero-crossing detection
Rating: 120 VAC, Min: 20 VAC
Max Load Current: 0.5A @ 25°C, 0.4A @ 50°C
Min Load Current: 5 mA
Offstate Leakage Current: 1 mA Max
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Suppression, Fused
8. CONTROL MODES:
Control: On/Off, P, PI, or PID
Output: Time proportioning or linear (CSPID1 only)

Cycle Time: Programmable from 0.0 to 60.0 sec
Auto-Tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, derivative
time values, and output dampening time
Probe Break Action: Programmable response
Sensor Fail Response: Upscale
9. ALARMS:
Modes:
Manual
Absolute High Acting
Absolute Low Acting
Deviation High Acting
Deviation Low Acting
Inside Band Acting
Outside Band Acting
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Sensor Fail Response: Upscale
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to +50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to +85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max relative humidity, noncondensing, from 0 to +50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 10 to 150 Hz, 0.075 mm amplitude in
X, Y, Z direction 1 g.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g (10g relay), 11 msec in 3
directions.
11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
12. WEIGHT: 7 oz (198.4 g)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

Single Loop PID
Control Modules

Dual Loop PID
Control Modules

MODEL NO.

CSPID1

CSPID2

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Single Loop Module, Relay Outputs

CSPID1R0

Single Loop Module, Relay Outputs, Analog Output

CSPID1RA

Single Loop Module, Relay Outputs, Heater Current Input

CSPID1RM

Single Loop Module, Solid State Outputs

CSPID1S0

Single Loop Module, Solid State Outputs, Analog Output

CSPID1SA

Single Loop Module, Solid State Outputs, Heater Current Input

CSPID1SM

Single Loop Module, Triac Outputs, Analog Output

CSPID1TA

Dual Loop Module, Relay Outputs

CSPID2R0

Dual Loop Module, Relay Outputs, Heater Current Input

CSPID2RM

Dual Loop Module, Solid State Outputs

CSPID2S0

Dual Loop Module, Solid State Outputs, Heater Current Input

CSPID2SM

Dual Loop Module, Triac Outputs

CSPID2T0

Dual Loop Module, Triac Outputs, Heater Current Input

CSPID2TM

www.redlion.net

MODEL CSSG - STRAIN GAGE MODULE
HOT-SWAPPABLE REPLACEMENT REDUCES DOWNTIME
AUTO ADDRESSING MINIMIZES CONFIGURATION TIME
PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
LOAD CELL, PRESSURE AND TORQUE BRIDGE INPUTS
SOFTWARE SELECTABLE LOW LEVEL INPUTS
SOFTWARE SELECTABLE 5 VDC or 10 VDC BRIDGE EXCITATION
DIGITAL TARE (re-zero), BATCH TOTALIZER, AND PEAK/VALLEY
(max/min) RECORDING
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID SETTINGS
DC ANALOG OUTPUT

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model CSSG is a full featured single loop PID controller designed for
use with the Modular Controller Series. The module accepts low level signals
from a variety of bridge-type transducers, such as load cells, pressure
transducers, torque transducers, etc. An optional second signal input is available,
providing math capabilities between the two input channels (average,
differential, etc.). Each input channel provides a software selectable 5 V or 10 V
stable bridge excitation voltage, capable of driving up to four 350 Ω bridges
(combined total per module). The inputs are software selectable for ±20 mV, ±33
mV, or ±200 mV full scale. With solid state or relay outputs, plus an analog
output, the CSSG module can perform virtually any combination of timeproportioning or linear control. The discrete outputs may also be assigned to one
of seven internal soft alarms; and the linear output can be assigned to transmit
virtually any internal variable. In addition, digital tare (re-zero), batch totalizer,
and peak/valley (max/min) are provided.
The CSSG modules are available with relays, or open drain MOSFET
outputs. For applications requiring large loads to be controlled, several DIN rail
mount relays are available.
Internal power management circuits allow the modules to be replaced while
power is applied, which reduces downtime in the event of a relay failure. All
configuration information is stored locally within each module, as well as in the
Master, so replacement modules do not need to be configured.
The Modular Controller Series’ high density packaging and DIN rail
mounting saves time and panel space. The backplane connection provides power
and communication to the module and snaps easily onto standard top hat (T)
profile DIN rail.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

1. POWER: Derived from system backplane. 250 mA max. load on power input
of MASTER. Module may be hot-swapped (replaced while powered up).
Modules per Master: A single Master can support up to 11 CSSG1 modules
combined with any 5 other module types. For applications that require
more than 11 CSSG1 modules, please contact technical support.
2. LEDs*:
STS - Status LED shows module condition.
OP1, OP2, OP3 - Indicate status of outputs 1, 2, and 3
ALM - Alarm LED is lit during an internal alarm condition.
* Default configuration.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programmable parameters. The
MASTER also stores the parameters in order to reprogram any modules that
are replaced.
4. INPUTS:
SOFTWARE
SELECTABLE
INPUT RANGE

ACCURACY *
18 TO 28°C
10 TO 75% RH

ACCURACY *
0 TO 50°C
0 TO 85% RH

±20.000 mVDC 0.02% of reading +3 µV

0.07% of reading +4 µV

±33.000 mVDC 0.02% of reading +5 µV

0.07% of reading +7 µV

±200.00 mVDC 0.02% of reading +30 µV

0.07% of reading +40 µV

* After 20 minute warm-up. Accuracy over the 0 to 50°C range includes
the temperature coefficient.
Connection Type:
4-wire bridge (differential)
2-wire (single-ended)
Sample Time: 67 msec (15 readings per second)
Common Mode Range (with respect to input common): 0 to +5 VDC
Common Mode Rejection: > 100 dB, DC to 120 Hz
Temperature Coefficient (ratio metric): 20 ppm/°C max.
Step Response Time: 200 msec max. to within 99% of final process value
Input Impedance: 100 MΩ
Max Continuous Overload: 30 V
PV Range: -30,000 to 30,000
Effective Resolution: 16-bit
5. BRIDGE EXCITATIONS:
Software selectable:
5 VDC, ±2%, 65 mA max.
10 VDC, ±2%, 125 mA max. combined (excitation 1 plus excitation 2).
Temperature coefficient (ratio metric): 20 ppm/°C max.
Max. four 350Ω bridges per module.
6. COMMUNICATIONS: Provided by the CS Master.
7. DISCRETE OUTPUTS:
Outputs 1 and 2 are available as Solid State NFET, or Form A relay. Output 3
is a Form C relay.
Solid State Output:
Type: Switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET

1-717-767-6511

Current Rating: 1 A max
VDS ON: 0.3 V @ 1 A
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max
Form A Relay Output:
Type: N.O.
Current Rating: 3 Amps @ 125 VAC
1/10 HP @ 125 VAC
Life Expectancy: 200,000 cycles at maximum load rating. (Decreasing
load, increasing cycle time, and use of surge suppression such as RC
snubbers increases life expectancy.)
Form C Relay Output:
Type: SPDT
Current Rating: 5 Amps @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load)
1/8 HP @ 125 VAC
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating. (Decreasing
load, increasing cycle time, and use of surge suppression such as RC
snubbers increases life expectancy.)
8. CONTROL MODES:
Control: On/Off, P, PI, or PID
Output: Time proportioning or linear
Cycle Time: Programmable from 0.0 to 60.0 sec
Auto-Tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, derivative
time values, and output dampening time
Input Fault Response: Upscale

9. ALARMS:
Modes:
Manual
Absolute High Acting
Absolute Low Acting
Deviation High Acting
Deviation Low Acting
Inside Band Acting
Outside Band Acting
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Input Fault Response: Upscale
10. ANALOG DC OUTPUT:
Jumper Selectable/programmable for 0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA
Resolution:
Voltage: 500 μV
Current: 1 μA
Accuracy:
0.1% of full scale (18 to 28°C)
0.2% of full scale (0 to 50°C)
Update Time: 0.0 to 60.0 sec
Compliance (for current output only): 500 Ω max.
Minimum load (voltage output only): 10 KΩ min.
Output is independently jumper selectable for either 10 V or 20 mA. The
output range may be field calibrated to yield approximate 10% overrange
and a small underrange (negative) signal.
11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
12. WEIGHT: 7 oz (198.4 g)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

Strain Gage
Control Modules

MODEL NO.

CSSG1

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Single Loop, One SG Input, Relay Outputs, Analog Out

CSSG10RA

Single Loop, One SG Input, Solid State Outputs, Analog Out

CSSG10SA

Single Loop, Two SG Inputs, Relay Outputs, Analog Out

CSSG11RA

Single Loop, Two SG Inputs, Solid State Outputs, Analog Out

CSSG11SA

www.redlion.net

MODELS CSTC, CSRTD, CSINI
HIGH DENSITY TEMP

AND

CSINV -

ANALOG INPUT MODULES

MODELS AVAILABLE TO ACCEPT ±10 V, 0/4-20 mA,
THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS
±10 V AND 0/4-20 mA INPUT VERSIONS FULLY SCALABLE
±10 V AND 0/4-20 mA INPUT VERSIONS AVAILABLE WITH 100
POINT LINEARIZATION
UNUSED INPUTS CAN BE DISABLED TO INCREASE OVERALL
READING RATE
IDEAL FOR DATA-ACQUISITION APPLICATIONS
AUTO ADDRESSING MINIMIZES CONFIGURATION TIME
CAN BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH ANY CS SERIES
MODULES

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model CSTC, CSRTD, CSINI, and CSINV are 16-bit analog input
modules designed for use with the Modular Controller Series. These modules
provide a means of high-density signal measurement for data-acquisition
applications. The CSTC module accepts a wide range of thermocouple types,
while the CSRTD accepts various RTD inputs. The CSINI and CSINV accept
0/4-20 mA and ±10 V process signals, respectively.
The modules connect and communicate via a backplane connection to the
CSMSTR Modular Controller Series Master. The CSMSTR, equipped with serial
ports as well as an Ethernet port, allows the system to share data with PCs, PLCs,
and SCADA systems. The Master supports any combination of up to 16 CS series
modules, allowing a total of 128 signals to be monitored via a single Master.
Internal power management circuits allow the modules to be replaced while
power is applied, which reduces downtime. All configuration information is
stored locally within the module, as well as in the Master, so replacement
modules do not need to be configured.
The Modular Controller Series’ high density packaging and DIN rail
mounting saves time and panel space. The backplane connection provides power
and communication to the module and snaps easily onto standard top hat (T)
profile DIN rail.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

1. POWER: Derived from system backplane. (75 mA load on power input of
MASTER). Module may be hot-swapped (replaced while powered up).
2. LEDs:
STS - Status LED shows module condition.
ALM - Alarm LED is lit during any internal alarm condition.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programmable parameters.
MASTER also stores the parameters in order to reprogram modules that are
replaced.
4. ISOLATION LEVEL: 500 Vrms @ 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between the
Signal Inputs and the CS Master Power Supply Input.
5. COMMUNICATIONS: Provided by the CS Master
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
7. WEIGHT: 6 oz (170.1 g)

CSTC8 SPECIFICATIONS

1. INPUTS:
Channels: 8 single-ended
Effective Resolution: Full 16-bit
Sample Time: 50 msec - 400 msec, depending on number of enabled inputs.
Common Mode Rejection: >110 dB, 50/60 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection: >90 dB, 50/60 Hz
Temperature Coefficient: 0.01%/°C
Step Response Time: One scan time (to within 99% of final value)
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C
Slope & Offset: Provides sensor error correction
Input Impedance: 20 M Ω
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
Cold Junction Compensation: Less than ±1°C typical (±1.5°C max) over 0 to
50 °C ambient temperature
Resolution: 0.1°
2. TEMPERATURE INDICATION ACCURACY: ± (0.3% of span, +1°C).
3. PROBE BREAK RESPONSE: Upscale drive, Input Fault Alarm bit set high,
ALM LED illuminates.

CSRTD6 SPECIFICATIONS

1. RTD INPUTS:
Channels: 6 single-ended
Effective Resolution: Full 16-bit
Sample Time: 67 msec - 400 msec, depending on enabled inputs.
Common Mode Rejection: >110 dB, 50/60 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection: >90 dB, 50/60 Hz
Temperature Coefficient: 0.01%/°C

1-717-767-6511

Step Response Time: One scan time (to within 99% of final value)
Type: 2 or 3 wire; 100 Ω platinum, Alpha = .00385 and .003919, and 120 Ω
nickel, Alpha = .00672

Excitation: 150μA
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω Max
Resolution: 0.1°
Slope & Offset: Provides sensor error correction
2. TEMPERATURE INDICATION ACCURACY: ± (0.1% of span) over 18
to 28°C environment, ± (0.2% of span) over 0 to 50°C environment.
3. PROBE BREAK RESPONSE: If channel is enabled: upscale drive, Input
Fault Alarm bit set high, ALM LED illuminates.

CSINI8 SPECIFICATIONS

1. INPUTS:
Channels: 8 single-ended
Ranges: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
Effective Resolution: Full 16-bit
Programmable Scaling: ±30,000
Linearizer: 100 Points (CSINI8L0 only)
Sample Time: 50 msec - 400 msec, depending on number of enabled inputs.
Common Mode Rejection: >110 dB, 50/60 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection: >90 dB, 50/60 Hz
Step Response Time: One scan time (to within 99% of final value)

Input Impedance: 10 Ω
Max. Continuous Overload: 100 mA
2. ACCURACY: ±0.1% of span
3. INPUT FAULT RESPONSE: Upscale Drive, Input Fault Alarm bit set high,
ALM LED illuminates below -3 mA, and above 23 mA for 0-20 mA range;
below +3 mA and above 23 mA for 4-20 mA signals.

CSINV8 SPECIFICATIONS

1. INPUTS:
Channels: 8 single-ended
Ranges: 0-10 VDC or ±10 VDC
Effective Resolution: Full 16-bit
Programmable Scaling: ±30,000
Linearizer: 100 Points (CSINV8L0 only)
Sample Time: 50 msec - 400 msec, depending on number of enabled inputs.
Common Mode Rejection: >110 dB, 50/60 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection: >90 dB, 50/60 Hz
Step Response Time: One scan time (to within 99% of final value)
Input Impedance: 10 M Ω
Max. Continuous Overload: 50 V
2. ACCURACY: ±0.1% of span
3. INPUT FAULT RESPONSE: Upscale Drive, Input Fault Alarm bit set high,
ALM LED illuminates below -10.4 VDC and above +10.4 VDC.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Thermocouple Input Modules

CSTC

Current Input Modules

CSINI

Voltage Input Modules
RTD Input Modules

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

8 Channel Thermocouple Module

CSTC8000

8 Channel 0(4)-20 mA Input Module

CSINI800

8 Channel 0(4)-20 mA Input Module, 100-Point Linearizer

CSINI8L0

8 Channel ±10 V Input Module

CSINV800

8 Channel ±10 V Input Module, 100-Point Linearizer

CSINV8L0

6 Channel RTD Module

CSRTD600

CSINV
CSRTD

www.redlion.net

MODEL CSDIO - DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES
ADDS REMOTE I/O CAPABILITY TO THE MODULAR
CONTROLLER SERIES
EIGHT INPUT, SIX OUTPUT DIGITAL MODULE
INPUTS ISOLATED FROM OUTPUTS
INPUTS INDEPENDENTLY SWITCH SELECTABLE FOR SINK OR
SOURCE SIGNALS
INPUTS INDEPENDENTLY CONFIGURABLE FOR HIGH OR LOW
ACTIVE STATE
INPUTS INDEPENDENTLY SWITCH SELECTABLE FOR HIGH OR
LOW FREQUENCY SIGNALS
RELAY OR NFET OUTPUT MODELS AVAILABLE

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model CSDIO series modules are digital I/O modules designed for use
with the Modular Controller Series. The CSDIO14 offers eight inputs and six
outputs that can be used to monitor contact or sensor inputs and actuate relays,
solenoids, PLC inputs, etc.
The inputs accept standard DC inputs or contact closures, and are configured
for Sink/Source signals via external switches. Additionally, each input has a
switch selectable input filter that can be used to prevent contact bounce. Each
input may also be software configured as a high-active or low-active input.
The modules are available with relay or NFET outputs that are capable of
switching up to one amp each (NFET DC only). For applications requiring large
loads to be controlled, several DIN rail mount relays are available.
The CSDIO modules connect and communicate via a backplane connection
to the CSMSTR Modular Controller Series Master. The CSMSTR, equipped
with serial ports as well as an Ethernet port, allows the system to share data with
PCs, PLCs, and SCADA systems. The Master supports any combination of up
to 16 CS Series modules.
Internal power management circuits allow the modules to be replaced while
power is applied, which reduces downtime in the event of a relay failure. All
configuration information is stored locally within each module, as well as in the
Master, so replacement modules do not need to be configured. The Modular
Controller Series’ high density packaging and DIN rail mounting saves time and
panel space. The backplane connection provides power and communication to
the module and snaps easily onto standard top hat (T) profile DIN rail.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER: Derived from system backplane. (CSDIO draws 170 mA max. load
on power input of MASTER). Modules may be hot-swapped (replaced while
powered up).
2. LEDs:
STS - Status LED shows module condition.
IN1-IN8 - LEDs are lit when associated input is active.
OP1-OP6 - LEDs are lit when associated output is active.
ALM - Alarm LED is lit when an internal alarm condition exists.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programmable parameters.
MASTER also stores the parameters in order to reprogram modules that
are replaced.
4. INPUTS: DIP switch selectable for sink or source
Maximum voltage: +30 VDC, reverse polarity protected
Off Voltage: < 1.2 Volts
On Voltage: > 3.8 Volts
Input Impedance: Source Mode 10K ohms; Sink Mode 20K ohms
Input Frequency*:
Filter switch on: 50 Hz
Filter switch off: 300 Hz
* Actual useable frequency limited by communication to external device.
5. OUTPUTS: Outputs available as FORM-A relay or Solid State NFET.
Form A Relay Output:
Type: N.O.
The following pairs of relays share the common terminal: 1&2, 3&4, 5&6
Current Rating by pair: 3 Amps @ 30 VDC / 125 VAC resistive
1/10 HP @ 125 VAC
Life Expectancy: 200,000 cycles at maximum load rating. (Decreasing
load, increasing cycle time, and use of surge suppression such as RC
snubbers increases life expectancy.)
Solid State Output:
Type: Switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Contact Rating: 1 ADC max
VDS ON: < 0.2 V @ 1 A
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 μA max
6. LOGIC (BOOLEAN) MODE:
Count Frequency: 200 Hz/input when input is directly connected (soft-wired)
to the counter.
Logic Propagation Delay: 400 msecs. max.
Timer Accuracy: 0.2%
7. ISOLATION LEVEL: 500 Vrms @ 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between the
following: Inputs
Outputs
CS Master Power Supply Input
8. COMMUNICATIONS: Provided by the CS Master
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
10. WEIGHT: 6.6 oz (187.1 g)

1-717-767-6511

BLOCK DIAGRAM

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Digital I/O Modules

CSDI014

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Eight Inputs, Six Relay Outputs

CSDIO14R

Eight Inputs, Six Solid State Outputs

CSDIO14S

www.redlion.net

MODEL CSOUT -

4-C
CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE
HIGH DENSITY ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE FOR THE MODULAR
CONTROLLER SERIES
AVAILABLE OUTPUTS INCLUDE 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, ±10
VDC, AND 0/4-20 mA DC
OUTPUTS ARE ISOLATED FROM EACH OTHER AND FROM THE
BACKPLANE
OUTPUTS ARE SOFTWARE CONFIGURED AND FULLY
SCALABLE
AUTO ADDRESSING MINIMIZES CONFIGURATION TIME
CAN BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH ANY CS SERIES
MODULES

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
34AD

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The model CSOUT is an analog output module designed for use with the
Modular Controller Series. The module provides four isolated outputs that are
independently programmable for output ranges of 0-5V, 0-10V, +/-10V, 020mA, or 4-20mA. Internal scaling is provided to accommodate virtually any
application.
The modules connect and communicate via a backplane connection to the
CSMSTR Modular Controller Series Master. The CSMSTR, equipped with
serial ports as well as an Ethernet port, allows the system to share data with PCs,
PLCs, and SCADA systems. The Master supports up to 16 CS Series modules
(refer to the “Power” specifications).
Internal power management circuits allow the modules to be replaced while
power is applied, which reduces downtime. All configuration information is
stored locally within each module, as well as in the Master, so replacement
modules do not need to be configured.
The Modular Controller Series’ high density packaging and DIN rail
mounting saves time and panel space. The backplane connection provides power
and communication to the module and snaps easily onto standard top hat (T)
profile DIN rail.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER: Derived from system backplane. (CSOUT draws 180 mA max. load
on power input of MASTER). Modules may be hot-swapped (replaced while
powered up).
2. LEDs:
STS - Status LED shows module condition.
ALM - Alarm LED is lit when an internal alarm condition exists.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programmable parameters.
MASTER also stores the parameters in order to reprogram modules that
are replaced.
4. COMMUNICATIONS: Provided by the CS Master
5. OUTPUTS:
Channels: 4 independent outputs
Response Time: 25 msec max. to within 99% of final value
Output Range: software selectable
OUTPUT RANGE

ACCURACY *
18 to 28 °C
10 to 75% RH

ACCURACY *
0 to 50 °C
0 to 85% RH

COMPLIANCE

RESOLUTION

0 to 5 VDC

0.2% of span 0.4% of span

10K Ω min.

1/30,000

0 to 10 VDC

0.1% of span 0.2% of span

10K Ω min.

1/60,000

-10 to +10 VDC

0.1% of span 0.2% of span

10K Ω min.

1/60,000

0 to 20 mA

0.1% of span 0.2% of span

500 Ω max.

1/60,000

4 to 20 mA

0.1% of span 0.2% of span

500 Ω max.

1/48,000

* The accuracy is specified after 20 minutes warmup; in a non-condensing
environment; and includes linearity errors.
6. ISOLATION LEVEL: The outputs are isolated from each other, and are
isolated from the power supply. 500 V @ 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between any
of the outputs and the CS Master power supply input.
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to +50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to +85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max relative humidity, noncondensing, from 0 to +50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 10 to 150 Hz, 0.075 mm amplitude in
X, Y, Z direction 1 g.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
CE, UL Listed
9. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is burgundy high impact plastic. Installation
Category I, Pollution Degree 2.
10. CONNECTIONS: Removable wire clamp screw terminal blocks.
Wire Gage: 28-16 AWG terminal gage wire
Torque: 1.96-2.23 inch/lbs (0.22-0.25 N-m)
11. MOUNTING: Snaps on to standard DIN style top hat (T) profile mounting
rails according to EN50022 -35 x 7.5 and -35 x 15.
12. WEIGHT: 7 oz (198.4 g)

1-717-767-6511

BLOCK DIAGRAM

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Analog Output Module

CSOUT

DESCRIPTION

4-Channel Analog Output Module

PART NUMBER

CSOUT400

www.redlion.net

DSP & MODULAR CONTROLLER
ACCESSORIES
MODEL XCRS - ISOLATED SERIAL OPTION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON SOFTWARE
ISOLATED RS-232 AND RS-485 MULTIPLEXED
PORTS CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH
RS-232, RS-422, RS-485 AND DH485 DEVICES
AT UP TO 115,200 BAUD
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The XCRS option card adds an additional RS-232 and RS-422/485 port to the
series. This isolated card protects user equipment from potentially harmful
ground loops while providing high-speed RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, and DH485
communication options to the end user.
The XCRS communication card is easily installed by removing the blank
expansion port cover of your Modular Controller or Data Station Plus, and
plugging the XCRS card into the expansion port. Configuration is simple using
Red Lion's free Crimson 2.0 software.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of the Modular Controller Master or Data Station Plus.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
Serial Ports: Format and Baud Rates for each port are individually software
programmable up to 115,200 baud and are isolated to help prevent ground
loops. The RS-422/485 and DH485 port via RJ45 and the RS-232 port via
RJ12 share the same hardware.
DH485 TXEN: Transmit enable; open collector, VOH = 15 VDC, VOL = 0.5 VDC
Isolation from XCRS Communication ports to the Modular Controller
Master or Data Station Plus: 1000 VDC for 1 minute.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

XCRS

DESCRIPTION

RS-232/485 option card for Modular Controller or
Data Station Plus

PART NUMBER

XCRS0000

MODEL XCCN - CANOPEN/J1939 OPTION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON SOFTWARE
DIGITALLY ISOLATED CANopen PORT
CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH ANY
CANopen DEVICE
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The XCCN option card adds a CANopen communication port to the series.
This isolated card protects user equipment from potentially harmful ground
loops while providing the ability to communicate to any high speed CANopen
device. The XCCN option card has a termination resistor built-in, which is
selectable via a jumper setting. Additionally, the XCCN connector is pluggable
for easy removal of the Modular Controller Master or Data Station Plus from the
CANopen bus without disturbing communications with other devices on the bus.
The XCCN communication card is easily installed by removing the blank
expansion port cover of your Modular Controller or Data Station Plus, and
plugging the XCCN card into the expansion port. Configuration is simple using
Red Lion's free Crimson 2.0 software.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of the Modular Controller Master or Data Station Plus.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
CANopen Port: The CANopen port has format and baud rates that are
software programmable up to 1M baud and are digitally isolated. This port
may be configured for various CANopen protocols. Check www.redlion.net
for currently supported protocols.
Isolation from XCCN Communication ports to the Modular Controller
Master or Data Station Plus:1000 VDC for 1 minute.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

XCCN

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

CANopen option card for Modular Controller or
Data Station Plus

PART NUMBER

XCCN0000

MODEL XCDN - DEVICENET OPTION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS

CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON SOFTWARE
DIGITALLY ISOLATED DeviceNet PORT
CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH ANY
DeviceNet MASTER
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The XCDN option card adds a DeviceNet slave communication port to the
series. This isolated card protects user equipment from potentially harmful
ground loops while providing the ability to communicate to any high speed
DeviceNet master. Additionally, the XCDN connector is pluggable for easy
removal of the Modular Controller Master or Data Station Plus from the
DeviceNet bus without disturbing communications with other devices on the bus.
The XCDN communication card is easily installed by removing the blank
expansion port cover of your Modular Controller or Data Station Plus, and
plugging the XCDN card into the expansion port. Configuration is simple using
Red Lion's free Crimson 2.0 software.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of the Modular Controller Master or Data Station Plus.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
DeviceNet Port: The DeviceNet port has format and baud rates that are
software programmable up to 500K baud and are digitally isolated. This port
may be configured for various DeviceNet protocols. Check www.redlion.net
for currently supported protocols.
Isolation from XCDN Communication ports Modular Controller Master
or Data Station Plus: 1000 VDC for 1 minute.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

XCDN

DESCRIPTION

DeviceNet option card for Modular Controller or
Data Station Plus

PART NUMBER

XCDN0000

MODEL XCPB - PROFIBUS OPTION CARD
SPECIFICATIONS
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON SOFTWARE
ADDS PROFIBUS DP CONNECTIVITY TO
THE DATA STATION PLUS AND MODULAR
CONTROLLER SERIES
PROFIBUS DP SLAVE PROTOCOL
EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The XCPB option card adds PROFIBUS DP connectivity to the series. This
allows a high-speed exchange of blocks of data, at data rates up to 12MBaud,
between the hosting Modular Controller or Data Station and a Master PLC or PC
on a PROFIBUS network. The DP suffix refers to “Decentralized Periphery”,
which is used to describe distributed I/O devices connected via a fast serial data
link with a central controller.
The XCPB communication card is easily installed by removing the blank
expansion port cover of your Modular Controller or Data Station Plus, and
plugging the XCPB card into the expansion port. Configuration is simple using
Red Lion’s free Crimson 2.0 software.

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of the Modular Controller Master or Data Station Plus.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
PROFIBUS Port: FIELDBUS Type : PROFIBUS-DP EN 50 170, I. The
PROFIBUS port has autobaud detect up to 12M baud and is digitally
isolated.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

XCCN

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

CANopen option card for Modular Controller or
Data Station Plus

PART NUMBER

XCCN0000

MODEL XCGSM - CELLULAR MODEM OPTION CARD
CONFIGURED USING CRIMSON SOFTWARE
INSTALLS INSIDE A DATA STATION PLUS OR
MODULAR CONTROLLER
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
HARDWARE ARE INCLUDED WITH CARD

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The XCGSM option card allows the user to add GSM/GPRS cellular modem
capability to their Data Station Plus or Modular Controller. GSM/GPRS is the
most prevalent cellular technology in today's markets. GPRS can be used for
services such as Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) access, Short Message
Service (SMS), and for Internet communication services such as email and
World Wide Web access. The XCGSM modem option card is quad-band,
allowing to to work in frequencies across Americas, Europe and Asia. US and
Canada work in the 850/1900 MHz bands, while Europe, Middle East, Africa
and most of Asia work in the 900/1800 MHz GSM/GPRS frequencies.
The XCGSM requires the addition of a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
card, which is inserted into the holder prior to installation of the XCGSM card.
The SIM card securely stores the service-subscriber key (IMSI) used to identify
a subscriber, and is used to connect to the network to obtain an IP address from
the provider.
The XCGSM communication card is easily installed by removing the blank
expansion port cover of your Modular Controller or Data Station Plus, and
plugging the XCGSM card into the expansion port. Configuration is simple
using Red Lion's free Crimson 2.0 software.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: Power is supplied to the option card from the
main board of the Modular Controller Master or Data Station Plus.
2. ANTENNA CONNECTOR:
SMA Female connector requires:
50 Ohm antenna with SMA male connector
Quad-band antenna (850/900/1800/1900 MHz) for global support.
Dual-band (850/1900 MHz) antenna for US and Canada only
Dual band (900/1800 MHz) for Europe only
The antenna cable should be 50Ω impedance, RG178/U or RG174/U type
and be able to connect to the RSMA (Male) jack bulkhead. The antenna
could be horizontal, vertical or right angled. Longer antenna cable would
equate to signal loss.
3. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Refer to “Agency Approvals” section of Red Lion’s website for agency
certifications.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

XCGSM

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

GSM/GPRS Modem Option Card for Modular
Controller or Data Station Plus

PART NUMBER

XCGSM000

MESSAGE DISPLAYS
MODEL PFM - PLANT FLOOR MARQUEE
TRI-COLOR DISPLAY PROVIDES INSTANT NOTICE OF
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
DISPLAYS INFORMATION FROM ANY G3 HMI, AND SX/GT
MODELS OF THE DATA STATION AND MODULAR CONTROLLER
GRAPHICAL DESIGN ALLOWS BARGRAPHS, CUSTOM SYMBOLS
AND GRAPHICS
FOUR SIZES FOR A WIDE RANGE OF APPLICATIONS
RS-485 PORT SUPPORTS MULTIDROP
AC POWERED (110 or 220 VAC, 50 / 60 HZ)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The PFM - Plant Floor Marquee series are multi-color LED displays
designed to provide vital process and production information to personnel at a
glance. The PFM must be used in tandem with Red Lion's G3 series of HMIs,
Data Station Plus or Modular Controller series. This affords the PFM the unique
ability to display information gathered by its host. The host devices can collect
information from virtually any device equipped with a serial or Ethernet port.
Four different sizes are available - The smallest is suitable to provide data at
the machine level, while the largest can be used to communicate information
across an entire factory floor at distances up to 600 feet (182 meters) away.
The PFM displays are controlled via the RS-485 port of a G3 HMI, or Data
Station Plus SX/GT models or Modular Controller Master modules. Acting as a
slave to these products allows the PFM to display data from multiple industrial
devices including PLCs, motor drives, barcode scanners, etc. The RS-485
connection allows the displays to be multi-dropped for applications requiring
more than one display.
The PFMs are graphic-based (versus text-based), which allows the series to
display items such as bargraphs and custom symbols and graphics. The 7.62
mm (0.3 inch) pitch LED design allows the use of a wide range of font styles
and sizes to suit any application. The display is housed in an extruded
aluminum and plastic housing designed for indoor use. Brackets are provided
to allow the PFM to be mounted from an overhead support.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Tricolor display 16x80, 110V

PFM1608A

Tricolor display 16x80, 220V

PFM1608B

Tricolor display 24x120, 110V

PFM2412A

Tricolor display 24x120, 220V

PFM2412B

Tricolor display 32x120, 110V

PFM3212A

Tricolor display 32x120, 220V

PFM3212B

Tricolor display 64x120, 110V

PFM6412A

Tricolor display 64x120, 220V

PFM6412B

Cable G3/DSP/MC TO PFM

CBLPFM00

PFM

CBL

1. POWER:
PFM1608A: 105-115 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 75 W max.
PFM2412A: 105-115 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 155 W max.
PFM3212A: 105-115 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 185 W max.
PFM6412A: 105-115 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 267 W max.
PFM1608B: 210-230 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 75 W max.
PFM2412B: 210-230 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 155 W max.
PFM3212B: 210-230 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 185 W max.
PFM6412B: 210-230 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 267 W max.
2. DISPLAY: 7.62 mm (0.3 inch) pitch LED (red/amber/green)
Resolutions:
PFM1608x: 16H x 80W
PFM2412x: 24H x 120W
PFM3212x: 32H x 120W
PFM6412x: 64H x 120W
Maximum Viewing Distance:
PFM1608x: 150 ft (45.72 m)
PFM2412x: 200 ft (60.96 m)
PFM3212x: 450 ft (137.16 m)
PFM6412x: 600 ft (182.88 m)
3. COMMUNICATIONS: Connects to the host G3, Data Station or Modular
Controller (SX or GT models only) via RS-485.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C.
Storage Temperature: -10 to 60°C.
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (non
condensing from 0 to 50°C.
5. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Contact your Red Lion Controls distributor for more information.
6. CONNECTOR: IEC 320 C22 style; 5 ft. power cord included (US connector)
7. CONSTRUCTION: Extruded aluminum enclosure with ABS endcaps.
8. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS: Suspend from overhead truss or other
suitable structure. See “Mounting Instructions” for more info. Refer to local
safety codes for additional requirements.
9. DIMENSIONS:
PFM1608x: 26" x 6.6" x 2.4" (660 x 168 x 61 mm)
PFM2412x: 38.5" x 8.8" x 3.4" (978 x 224 x 86 mm)
PFM3212x: 38.8" x 10.9" x 3.4" (986 x 277 x 86 mm)
PFM6412x: 39.3" x 22.6" x 3.4" (998 x 572 x 86 mm)
10. WEIGHT:
PFM1608x: 6.8 lbs. (3.1 Kg)
PFM2412x: 14.1 lbs. (6.4 Kg)
PFM3212x: 17.0 lbs. (7.7 Kg)
PFM6412x: 28.7 lbs. (13.0 Kg)

www.redlion.net

MODEL BFD - BIG FLEXIBLE DISPLAY
NEMA 4 SEALED
LARGE 38.5" (977.9 mm) X 19" (482.6 mm) RED LED DISPLAY
WITH 0.2" DIAMETER PIXELS; 128 X 64 DOT RESOLUTION
DISPLAYS THE INFORMATION FROM ANY G3, DSP or
MODULAR CONTROLLER TO THE PLANT FLOOR
CONNECTS DIRECTLY TO THE RS-485 PORT OF A G3, DSP or
MODULAR CONTROLLERFS
FIELD REPLACEABLE DISPLAY BOARDS
REPLACEABLE FAN FILTER
FLEXIBLE 4 EYEBOLT MOUNTING
UNIVERSAL AC POWER (100 - 240 VAC, 50 / 60 HZ)
OPTIONAL NEMA 4 COOLING KIT AVAILABLE

SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The BFD is a large (38.5" x 19") LED display (128 x 64 pixel resolution)
which is driven from the RS-485 port of a G3. The BFD is built using 32 display
boards in an 8 column by 4 row configuration. When used with a G303, the
BFD will display the contents of the current G3 page. When used with larger
G3s, the desired information is selected by using a “display primitive” on the
current G3 page. Multiple BFDs can be driven from a single G3. The exact
number is dependent upon the lengths of the individual wiring runs. Contact
Red Lion Tech Support for more information.
The display is housed in a welded steel enclosure and the display window
(0.118" thick red acrylic) is sealed to the enclosure using a gasket and bezel
strips. The gasketed rear panel is bolted to the enclosure. The ventilation slots
and internal fan are designed to provide adequate cooling in a normal industrial
environment. The enclosure is designed to hang from an overhead support.
The BFD enclosure can be easily converted for indoor NEMA 4 operation
using the optional BFD NEMA 4 conversion kit. The kit includes a sealed cover
plate (to plug the vent hole), an external “cabinet cooler” (to replace the internal
fan) and a DIN-rail mounted power supply to operate the “cabinet cooler”.
Power to the BFD is provided by a universal AC input power supply. The AC
power and the G3 RS-485 cable enter the enclosure thru separate conduit
fittings. AC power connects to the power supply via a removable 3 position
terminal block. The RS-485 signal connects to the communication board via
either an RJ45 modular plug or a removable 2 position terminal block.

1. POWER: Universal AC input (100 - 240 VAC 50/60 Hz); 2.0 A @ 120 VAC;
1.0 A @ 240 VAC.
2. DISPLAY: 128 x 64 resolution using 0.2" (5.08 mm) diameter red LED
pixels. Overall display measures 38.5" (977.9 mm) x 19" (482.6 mm).
3. COMMUNICATIONS: Connects to the host G3 thru RS485 port via either
RJ45 or a removable 2 position terminal block; 115,200 baud, 8 bit, 1 stop bit,
no parity. The RS-232 ports (either the COMMs or PGM ports) may also be
used with the appropriate RS-232 to RS-485 converter. Note that the RS-232
and RS-485 ports provided by the Expansion card are not currently supported.
Isolation for communications: 2500 Vrms
Isolation for common: 1000 VDC for 60 seconds.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature : 0 - 50°C
Storage Temperature : -10 - 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% maximum relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0 to 50°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
5. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES: See data sheet on web site for
detailed information.
6. WEIGHT: 117 lbs. (53.07 Kg)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Big Flexible Display

G3BFDM00

Big Flexible Display NEMA 4 Kit

G3BFDNEM

10-foot RS485 cable for communications between
G3 and G3BFD

CBLRLC04

BFD

CBL

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)
BFD

BFD with NEMA 4 Option (G3BFDNEM)

1-717-767-6511

PROCESS CONTROLLERS
MODEL DLC - DUAL LOOP CONTROLLERS
MODULAR BUILDING BLOCK FOR MULTI-ZONE PROCESS
CONTROL
TWO INDEPENDENT PID CONTROL LOOPS
PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
UNIVERSAL INPUTS ACCEPT TC, RTD, 0-10 V and 0/4-20 mA
SIGNALS
TWO DC ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPTIONAL)
WINDOWS® CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE
RS485 MODBUS™ PROTOCOL
CHANNEL B CAN BE ASSIGNED AS A SECOND ANALOG INPUT
TO CHANNEL A FOR REMOTE SETPOINT OPERATION
SETPOINT CONTROLLER OPTION FOR TIME VS.
TEMP./PROCESS (RAMP/SOAK) AND SPECIAL BATCH/RECIPE
APPLICATIONS
UL Recognized Component,
File #E156876

SQUARE ROOT EXTRACTION FOR FLOW SENSOR
APPLICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model DLC, Dual Loop Controller, is a full featured, DIN rail mounted,
dual input PID controller. The DLC is designed as a modular building block for
multi-zone process control applications. The controller has two independent
“A” & “B” input channels. Each channel’s input can be configured to accept a
wide range of thermocouple, RTD, 0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA, or resistive signals. Each
channel can also be configured to extract the square root of the input in both
process voltage or process current modes for applications such as flow
measurement using a differential flow sensor.
Channel B can be assigned as a Remote Setpoint for Channel A. The two timeproportioning or DC Analog outputs can be programmed to control two
independent processes. The two alarms per channel can be configured for various
alarm modes, or provide a secondary control output for heat/cool applications.
The control and alarm outputs are N channel open drain MOSFETs capable
of switching up to 1 Amp DC. For applications requiring larger loads or A/C
loads, several DIN rail mount relays are available.
The controller operates in the PID Control Mode for both heating and
cooling, with on-demand auto-tune, that establishes the tuning constants. The
PID tuning constants may be fine-tuned through the serial interface. The
controller employs a unique overshoot suppression feature, which allows the
quickest response without excessive overshoot. The controller can be
transferred to operate in the Manual Mode, providing the operator with direct
control of the output, or the On/Off Control Mode with adjustable hysteresis.
The controller’s high density packaging and DIN rail mounting saves time
and panel space. The controller snaps easily onto standard top hat (T) profile
DIN rails.

COMMUNICATIONS
The RS-485 serial communications allows the DLC to be multi-dropped,
with Baud rates up to 38400. The CBPRO007 programming cable converts the
RS-232 port of a PC to RS-485 and is terminated with an RJ11 connector. The
bi-directional capability of the CBPRO007 allows it to be used as a permanent
interface cable as well as a programming cable.

ANALOG OUTPUT OPTION
The optional dual DC Analog Output (10 V or 20 mA) can be independently
configured and scaled for control or re-transmission purposes. These outputs can
be assigned to separate channels, or both outputs can be assigned to the same
channel. Programmable output update time reduces valve or actuator activity.

DIMENSIONS IN

ALARMS
The DLC’s two solid-state alarms can be configured independently for
absolute high or low acting with balanced or unbalanced hysteresis. They can
also be configured for deviation and band alarm. In these modes, the alarm
trigger values track the setpoint value. Adjustable alarm trip delays can be used
for delaying output response. The alarms can be programmed for Automatic or
Latching operation. Latched alarms must be reset with a serial command. A
standby feature suppresses the alarm during power-up until the temperature
stabilizes outside the alarm region. The outputs can also be manually controlled
with Modbus register or coil commands.

SETPOINT CONTROLLER OPTION
The Setpoint Controller option is suitable for time vs. temperature/process
control applications. The controller allows a profile of up to 20 ramp/soak
segments. Profile conformity is assured by using the Error Band Mode and
Error Band parameter. The Profile Cycle Count allows the profile to run
continuously or a fixed number of cycles. Power-on options automatically stop,
abort, start, resume, or pause a running profile.

www.redlion.net

INCHES (MM)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER:
18 to 36 VDC, 13 W
(4 W if +24 VDC Output excitation is unused)
24 VAC, ±10% 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
(7 VA if +24 VDC Output excitation is unused)
Must use a Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
2. +24 VDC OUTPUT POWER: 24 VDC, +15%, -5%, 200 mA max
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programmable parameters.
4. INPUT:
Sample Time: 100 msec (9.5 Hz)
Failed Sensor Response: Open or shorted (RTD only) sensor coils
indication, error code returned in Process Value
Common Mode Rejection: >110 dB, 50/60 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection: >40 dB, 50/60 Hz
Temperature Coefficient: 0.013%/°C
Overvoltage: 50 VDC max
Step Response Time: 300 msec typ., 400 msec max
5. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C, linear mV
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
Cold Junction Compensation: Less than ±1°C typical (±1.5°C max) over
0 to 50°C ambient temperature range or less than ±1.5°C typical (2°C max)
over -20 to 65°C maximum ambient temperature range.
Resolution: 1° or 0.1° for all types except linear mV (0.1 or 0.01 mV)
WIRE COLOR

MEASUREMENT
RANGE

ANSI

BS 1843

-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F

(+) Blue
(-) Red

(+) White
(-) Blue

-200 to +750°C
-328 to +1382°F

(+) Violet
(-) Red

(+) Brown
(-) Blue

-200 to +760°C
-328 to +1400°F

(+) White
(-) Red

(+) Yellow
(-) Blue

-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F

(+) Yellow
(-) Red

(+) Brown
(-) Blue

0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F

No Standard

(+) White
(-) Blue

0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F

No Standard

(+) White
(-) Blue

+149 to +1820°C
+300 to +3308°F

No Standard

-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F

(+) Orange
(-) Red

(+) Orange
(-) Blue

C
W5/W6

0 to +2315°C
+32 to +4199°F

No Standard

-5 mV to 56 mV

N/A

TYPE

6. RTD INPUTS:
Type: 2 or 3 wire
Excitation: 150 μA
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω max
Resolution: 1 or 0.1° for all types
TYPE

INPUT TYPE

RANGE

385

100 Ω platinum, Alpha = .00385

-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F

392

100 Ω platinum, Alpha = .003919

-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F

672

120 Ω nickel, Alpha = .00672

-80 to +215°C
-112 to +419°F

ohms

0 to 320 Ω

Linear Resistance

7. PROCESS INPUT:
INPUT RANGE

ACCURACY *
(18 to 28°C)
(10 to 75% RH)

MAX
IMPEDANCE CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

10 VDC
(-1 to 11)

0.10% of reading
+0.02 V

1 MΩ

50 V

1 mV

20 mA DC
(-2 to 22)

0.10% of reading
+0.03 mA

10 Ω

100 mA

1 µA

8. ISOLATION LEVEL: 500 V @ 50/60 Hz, for one minute (50 V working)
between the following groups:
Ch A Input
Ch B Input
Control and Alarm Outputs
RS485/Analog Output 1
Power Supply
Note: RS485 and Analog Outputs are not internally isolated. Their commons
must not be connected together externally for proper unit function (i.e.,
earth ground).
9. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Type: RS485; RTU and ASCII MODBUS modes
Baud: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400
Format: 7/8 bits, odd, even, and no parity
Transmit Delay: Programmable: See Transmit Delay explanation.
Transmit Enable (TXEN): (primarily for 20 mA loop converter) open
collector VOH = 10 VDC max, VOL = 0.5 VDC @ 5 mA max current limit
10. A/D CONVERTER: 16 bit resolution
11. CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS:
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 1 A max
VDS ON: 0.3 V @ 1 A
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max
12. MAIN CONTROL:
Control: PID or On/Off
Output: Time proportioning or DC Analog
Cycle Time: Programmable
Auto-Tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, derivative
time values, and output dampening time
Probe Break Action: Programmable
13. ALARM: 1 or 2 alarms
Modes:
Manual (through register/coil)
Absolute High Acting
Absolute Low Acting
Deviation High Acting
Deviation Low Acting
Inside Band Acting
Outside Band Acting
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Sensor Fail Response: Upscale
14. COOLING: Software selectable (overrides Alarm 2).
Control: PID or On/Off
Output: Time proportioning or DC Analog
Cycle Time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Heat/Cool Deadband Overlap: Programmable
15. ANALOG DC OUTPUTS: (optional)
Control or retransmission, programmable update rate from 0.1 sec or
1 to 250 sec
Step Response Time: 100 msec
OUTPUT
RANGE**

ACCURACY *
(18 to 28°C)
(10 to 75% RH)

COMPLIANCE

RESOLUTION
(TYPICAL)

0 to 10 V

0.10% of FS + 1/2 LSD

10 KΩ min

1/18000

0 to 20 mA

0.10% of FS + 1/2 LSD

500 Ω max

1/18000

4 to 20 mA

0.10% of FS + 1/2 LSD

500 Ω max

1/14400

16. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -20 to +65°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to +85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max relative humidity,
noncondensing, from -20 to +65°C
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction, duration: 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g’s, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
17. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES: See data sheet on web site
for detailed information.
18. WEIGHT: 10.5 oz. (298 g.)

* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages after 20 minute warm-up.

1-717-767-6511

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DLCD

DLCN

SF
CBPRO

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Dual Loop Controller

DLC00001

Dual Loop Controller w/ 2 Analog Outputs

DLC01001

Dual Setpoint Controller w/ 2 Analog Outputs

DLC11001

Dual Loop Controller w/ DH-485

DLCD0001

Dual Loop Cont. w/ 2 Analog Outputs w/ DH-485

DLCD1001

Dual Loop Cont., w/ 5 Pin Male M12 connector

DLCN0001

Dual Loop Cont., w/ COMBICON screw flange conn.

DLCN0011

Dual Loop Cont., w/ 2 analog outputs, 5 Pin Male M12 connector

DLCN1001

Dual Loop Cont., w/ 2 analog outputs, COMBICON screw flange connector

DLCN1011

Dual Loop Setpoint Cont., w/ 2 analog outputs, 5 Pin Male M12 connector

DLCN1101

Dual Loop Setpoint Cont., w/ 2 analog outputs, COMBICON screw flange connector

DLCN1111

PC Configuration Software for Windows

SFDLC

Programming Interface Cable

CBPRO007

CBJ

Cable RJ11 to RJ11 (6 inch jumper)

CBJ11BD5

DRR

RJ11 to Terminal Adapter

DRRJ11T6

P89

Paradigm to RJ11 Cable

P893805Z

See our RSRLYB, RLY6, and RLY7 literature for details on DIN rail mountable relays.

www.redlion.net

ETHERNET SWITCH
MODEL SWITCH08 - 8 PORT
O

UNMANAGED SWITCH REQUIRES NO CONFIGURATION

SUPPORTS 10/100 MDPS NETWORK

AUTO HALF/FULL DUPLEX NEGOTIATION

AUTO-CROSSING DETECTION SUPPORTS STANDARD AND
CROSSOVER ETHERNET CABLES

UL Recognized Component,
File # E244362

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The SWITCH08 is an eight-port Ethernet switch designed to simplify
network expansion, while improving the network’s efficiency. Eight 10/100
Base-T ports, with auto negotiation of half or full duplex connections requires
no setup, reducing installation time. The SWITCH08 also offers an
auto-crossing feature, which allows connections to be made with any
combination of standard or crossover Ethernet cables.
The SWITCH08 may be powered with two DC sources, allowing for
redundancy in critical applications. A relay output provides a warning signal if
the backup supply fails, ensuring continued operation when needed.

DIMENSIONS IN

INCHES (MM)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

SWITCH

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

8-Port Ethernet Switch

PART NUMBER

SWITCH08

This page intentionally left blank.
68

www.redlion.net

TOTALIZING
COUNTERS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

QUICK Specs
Totalizers

COUNTERS
CUB7

CUB7P

CUB4

PAXLC

1/32 DIN
Miniature Counter

Counter

1/8 DIN Counter

28 mm (H) x 51mm (W)

39 mm (H) x 75mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

8 Digit, .35" (9mm)
Reflective, Green and
Red Backlight LCD

6 Digit, .46" (12mm),
8 Digit, .46" (12mm)
Reflective, Green and
Red Backlight LCD

6 Digit, .56" (14mm)
8 Digit, .4" (10mm)
Red LED

Counting
Capability

Uni-Directional

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Store

Max. Input
Frequency

10,000 Counts/Sec.

5000 Counts/Sec.

25,000 Counts/Sec

Yes

Front Panel, Remote

Sensor Power

No
Yes, with Micro Line
Power Supply

9 to 17.5 VDC @ 100 mA

Setpoint
Capability

Communications

Power Source

3 Volt Lithium Battery,
Backlighting
9 - 28 VDC @ 35 mA

115/230 VAC
10 to 16 VDC

Page Number

Page 73

Page 85

Page 98

Page 118

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

Input Scaling &
Decimal Points
Reset
Capability

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Totalizing Counters
CUB5

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Counter/Rate Meter With
Output Option Card Capability

COUNTERS W/CONTROL
PAXLCR
PAXC

1/8 DIN Counter/Rate Meter
With Setpoint Capability

A
PAXI

1/8 DIN Counter
With Setpoint Card Capability

1/8 DIN Counter/Rate Meter
With Output Option Card
Capability

39 mm (H) x 75mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

8 Digit, .35" (9mm)
Reflective, Green and
Red Backlight LCD

6 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

6 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

Counting
Capability

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature
Batch

Max. Input
Frequency

20,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent.

20,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent

34,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent

Yes

Reset
Capability

Front Panel, Remote

Sensor Power

No
Yes, with Micro Line
Power Supply

24 VDC @ 100 mA, over 50 V
24 VDC @ 50 mA, under 50 V

12 VDC @ 100 mA

Setpoint
Capability

Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking

Dual Form C Relays

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

Display

Input Scaling &
Decimal Points

RS485

RS232 or RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Power Source

10 to 28 VDC

50 to 250 VAC
21.6 to 250 VDC

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

Page Number

Page 102

Page 125

Page 137

Page 169

Communications

1-717-767-6511

REPLACEMENT Guide
A

CURRENT PRODUCT

WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES

MODEL NUMBER

Q Display:

Q Power

.35" (9 mm) Reflective LCD
Source: Internal Battery
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.

.2" (5 mm) Reflective LCD
Source: 2 “N” Alkaline Batteries
Q Count Speed: 5 KHz Max.
CUB7

CUBID/CUBVD
CUBID/CUBVD
CUB1

Q Display:

Q Power

.48" (12 mm) Reflective LCD
Source: Internal Battery
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.

.35" (9 mm) Reflective LCD
Source: Battery Powered
Q Count Speed: 5 KHz Max.
LPPI
LPPI
CUB2

CUB4 / CUB4L8
Q Display:

Q Display:

.35" (9 mm) Reflective LCD
Source: Internal Battery
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences

.2" (5 mm) Reflective LCD

Q Power

Source: 2 “N” Alkaline
Batteries
Q Count Speed: 100 Hz Max.
CUB3

CUB7
Q Display:

Q Display:

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red
LED, 8 Digit, .4” (10 mm) Red LED

Q Power

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red
LED, 8 Digit, .36” (9 mm) Red LED

APLIT/APLHV
APLIT/APLHV
APLT

Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 14 VDC
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.

PAXLC

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED

6 Digit, .43" (11 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC, 12 VDC
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.
APLCL/APLPV
APLCL/APLPV
SCT

Source: 115/230 VAC,
10 to 16 VDC
Q Count Speed: 25 KHz Max.
Q Display:

Q Display:

Q Power

PAXLC

Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.

FEATURES

www.redlion.net

Source: 115/230 VAC,
10 to 16 VDC
Q Count Speed: 25 KHz Max.

A
MODEL CUB7 - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 8 DIGIT COUNTER
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR TRANSMISSIVE WITH YELLOW/GREEN
OR RED LED BACKLIGHTING (9-28 VDC power supply required for
versions with LED backlighting)
z 0.35" (8.90 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES UP TO
7 YEARS OF UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION (Battery included)
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z COUNT SPEEDS UP TO 10 KHz (CUB7)
z WIRE CONNECTION MADE VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE
TERMINALS
z FITS DIN STANDARD CUT-OUT 1.77" (45 mm) x 0.874"
(22.2 mm)

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The CUB7 series is an 8-digit miniature counter with large 0.35 inch (8.90
mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image Reflective,
Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green backlighting or red
backlighting. The backlight versions require an external 9 to 28 VDC power
supply.
The CUB7 series use a CMOS LSI counter circuit chip, mounted on a goldplated substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding.
Proven micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these
units with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7 series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a
clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber reset
button meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

CUB7 *

BNL

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Counter Positive Image Reflective

CUB70000

Counter W/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB70010

Counter W/Red Backlighting

CUB70020

3 V Lithium Battery

BNL10000

For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the
RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.
*Battery is included with unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 7 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Count and reset contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce
battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
Must use a Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. INPUTS: VIL (low) = 0.5 V max
Low speed input: 30 Hz from switch contact or open collector transistor
with 50% duty cycle
High speed input: VIH (high) = 2.0 V min. (3 V max). 10KHz max from
3.0 V bipolar output with a 50% duty cycle
5. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting
clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O 1
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference
EN 55022
Enclosure class B
Power mains class B
Notes:
1. Burst to DC backlight power had a power line filter installed RLC
#LFIL0000 or equivalent at the unit.

2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/rms
to backlight power lines.
LCD segments may flicker during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent at the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC. (Backlight versions)
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max
9. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
10. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

CUB7 LOW SPEED COUNT INPUT, 30 Hz MAX.

Pulling the “L.S. CNT.” Input to Common with a mechanical or solid-state
switch increments the counter. The low pass filter (2.2 MΩ resistor and 0.0068
μf capacitor) used with a Schmidt trigger circuit debounces mechanical switch
signals. The switch load is 6 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The

OFF-state leakage current must be less than 2 μA.
Motor starter contacts, tungsten contacts, and brush-type contacts should
not be used.

CUB7 HIGH SPEED COUNT INPUT, 10 KHz MAX.
TTL OR CMOS
OUTPUT

FIG 1

The “H.S. CNT.” Input allows the CUB7 to operate at speeds up to 10 KHz
when driven by bi-polar outputs or external circuits having an output
impedance of 3.3 KΩ or less. Input drive voltage must be limited to 3 V
maximum to avoid damage to the counter. CMOS and TTL Logic outputs can
be loaded with a resistor (RL) to limit drive voltage, or a voltage divider can
be used as shown for the PNP O.C. Transistor output.

www.redlion.net

PNP O.C. TRANSISTOR
OR BI-POLAR OUTPUT

FIG 2

NPN O.C.
TRANSISTOR

FIG 3
R values for
Fig 2 & 3
+V
R

+5 V 2.2 K
+12 V 10 K
+18 V 16 K
+24 V 24 K

and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit (AC or DC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring
the unit, use the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper
function. Strip the wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and
tighten down the screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can
accept up to two #14 AWG wires.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated. All leads
will be at the same line potential as the input leads.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel. Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to
operate the keypad of the unit.

Installation
The CUB7 series of products meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use, when properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into
an enclosed panel. The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for
a washdown environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are
provided for installing the unit in the panel cut-out.
The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean around
panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket. Slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. Insert the
mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw should
NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
3. Install CUB7 unit through the panel cut-out until front bezel flange contacts
the panel.
4. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage
into mating features on the CUB7 housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip
into position.

5. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed to
about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
6. If gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that mounting clip is
latched as close as possible to the panel.
7. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.

1-717-767-6511

BATTERY INSTALLATION

1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on rear
cover (See drawing at right), until the cover unlatches. Pull cover straight
out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing battery as shown in drawing.
4. Replace cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed upside
down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the top of the
CUB7 series when properly installed
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

RESET OPTIONS (CUB7 SERIES)

BACKLIGHT OPTION (CUB7 SERIES)

Connecting a wire from the RST. EN. (Reset Enable) Input terminal to
Common will enable the front panel Reset button.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the counter to reset. The “RST.” can
be pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch.
Switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when on. The off-state
leakage current must be less than 2 μA
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

Optional backlight versions of the CUB7 series require an external 9-28
VDC power supply. The external supply is connected between V+ and
Common terminals as shown by the solid line in the drawing.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

www.redlion.net

A
MODEL CUB7W - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 8 DIGIT COUNTER
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR TRANSMISSIVE WITH YELLOW/GREEN
OR RED LED BACKLIGHTING (9-28 VDC power supply required for
versions with LED backlighting)
z 0.35" (8.90 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES UP TO
7 YEARS OF UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z COUNT INPUT FROM 10 to 300 VAC/DC (CUB7W)
z WIRE CONNECTION MADE VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE
TERMINALS
z FITS DIN STANDARD CUT-OUT 1.77" (45 mm) x 0.874"
(22.2 mm)

DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

CUB7W *

BNL

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Counter Positive Image Reflective

CUB7W000

Counter w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB7W010

Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB7W020

3 V Lithium Battery

BNL10000

For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the
RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.
*Battery is included with unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

SPECIFICATIONS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 7 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Count and reset contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce
battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
4. INPUTS: VIL (low) = 0.5 V max
Low speed input: 10 to 300 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz, 30 cps max. 150 V max
for backlight versions. Unit counts on positive going edge.
5. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting
clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55022

Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O 1
Level 3; 2 Kv power
Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Level 4; 30 A/m
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Enclosure class B
Power mains class B

Notes:
1. Burst to DC backlight power had a power line filter installed RLC
#LFIL0000 or equivalent at the unit.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10
V/rms to backlight power lines.
LCD segments may flicker during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent at the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC. (Backlight versions)
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 5g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
9. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

WIRING CONNECTIONS

Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful installation or a troublesome
installation. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation
in an industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit (AC or DC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring
the unit, use the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper
function. Strip the wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and
tighten down the screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can
accept up to two #14 AWG wires.

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated. All leads
will be at the same line potential as the input leads.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

www.redlion.net

L. S. INPUT, 30 CPS MAX.
The CUB7W accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input accepts
AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 300 V at count speeds up to
30 cps. The unit counts on the positive going edge of the input signal.

WARNING: Any lead may be at hazardous live input potential.
External wiring and devices connected to the unit must be rated
the same as applied signal input voltage and be properly isolated
from Class 2 or SELV circuitry.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the keypad of the unit.

Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip
into position.
5. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed to
about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
6. If gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that mounting clip is
latched as close as possible to the panel.
7. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.

BATTERY INSTALLATION
1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on rear
cover (See drawing at right), until the cover unlatches. Pull cover straight
out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing battery as shown in drawing.
4. Replace cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed upside
down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the top of the
CUB7 series when properly installed
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

1-717-767-6511

RESET OPTIONS (CUB7 SERIES)
Connecting a wire from the RST. EN. (Reset Enable) Input terminal to
Common will enable the front panel Reset button.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the counter to reset. The “RST.” can
be pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch.
Switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when on. The off-state leakage
current must be less than 2 μA
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

BACKLIGHT OPTION (CUB7 SERIES)
Optional backlight versions of the CUB7 series require an external 9-28
VDC power supply. The external supply is connected between V+ and
Common terminals as shown by the solid line in the drawing.
WARNING: When connecting the signal wiring for a backlit
CUB7W measuring an AC input voltage, the neutral of the
single phase AC signal is connected to Terminal 1 (COM), and
line (hot) is connected to Terminal 4 (LS) as shown by the
dashed line in the drawing. The DC supply for the backlighting
is connected between V+ and Common as shown by the solid
line in the drawing. Three phase AC applications require an
isolation transformer.

www.redlion.net

A
MODEL CUB7W3 - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 8 DIGIT COUNTER
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR TRANSMISSIVE WITH YELLOW/GREEN
OR RED LED BACKLIGHTING (9-28 VDC power supply required for
versions with LED backlighting)
z 0.35" (8.90 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES UP TO
7 YEARS OF UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z COUNT INPUT FROM 10 to 30 VAC/DC
z WIRE CONNECTION MADE VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE
TERMINALS

z FITS DIN STANDARD CUT-OUT 1.77" (45 mm) x 0.874"
(22.2 mm)

BNL

PART NUMBERS

Counter Positive Image Reflective

CUB7W300

Counter w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB7W310

Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB7W320

3 V Lithium Battery

BNL10000

For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the
RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.
*Battery is included with unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

IND. CONT. EQ.

SPECIFICATIONS

ORDERING INFORMATION

CUB7W3 *

US LISTED

SAFETY SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION

51EB

DESCRIPTION

MODEL NO.

1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 7 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Count and reset contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce
battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
Must use a NEC Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. INPUTS: VIL (low) = 0.5 V max
Low speed input: 10 to 30 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz, 30 cps max. Unit counts
on positive going edge.
5. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting
clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O 1
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference
EN 55022
Enclosure class B
Power mains class B
Notes:
1. Burst to DC backlight power had a power line filter installed RLC
#LFIL0000 or equivalent at the unit.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10
V/rms to backlight power lines.
LCD segments may flicker during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent at the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.

7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC. (Backlight versions)
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm).
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-pounds (0.565 N-m) max.
10. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible

www.redlion.net

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated. All leads
will be at the same line potential as the input leads.

L. S. INPUT, 30 CPS MAX.
The CUB7W3 accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input
accepts AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 30 V at count
speeds up to 30 cps. The unit counts on the positive going edge of the input
signal.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the keypad of the unit.

1-717-767-6511

RESET OPTIONS (CUB7 SERIES)

Connecting a wire from the RST. EN. (Reset Enable) Input terminal to
Common will enable the front panel Reset button.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the counter to reset. The “RST.” can
be pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch.
Switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when on. The off-state leakage
current must be less than 2 μA
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

www.redlion.net

A
MODEL CUB7P PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRONIC 8-DIGIT COUNTER
O

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.

PRESCALER FROM 0.0001 TO 1.9999

SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINTS
REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES UP
TO 6 YEARS OF UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION (Battery Included)

WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS

FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

51EB

DESCRIPTION

AVAILABLE WITH LOW SPEED CONTACT (30 Hz MAX.), HIGH
SPEED LOGIC (10 KHz MAX.)

LCD, POSITIVE IMAGE REFLECTIVE OR NEGATIVE IMAGE
TRANSMISSIVE WITH YELLOW/GREEN OR RED LED
BACKLIGHTING (9-28 VDC power supply required for versions with
LED backlighting)

BOTH FRONT PANEL PROGRAM AND RESET BUTTONS ARE
INDIVIDUALLY ENABLED

SAFETY SUMMARY

The CUB7P is an 8-digit miniature programmable counter with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective, Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green backlighting, or red
backlighting. Backlight units require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply.
The CUB7P is available in either Low Speed Contact or High Speed Logic.
The Contact versions (CUB7P0xxx) operate from a switch contact or an NPN
open collector transistor. The Logic versions (CUB7P2xx) operate from 3 VDC
logic output or from an NPN open collector transistor.
The CUB7P has a programmable prescaler that can be set for any value
between 0.0001 and 1.9999. The decimal point position can be set anywhere
from 0 (no D.P.) to 0.000000 or no Leading Zero Blanking. Both the prescaler
and DP selection are accessed using the front panel PGM and RESET push
buttons. See Programming for details. Note that the count, prescaler and DP
values will be lost if the battery is removed. See BATTERY INSTALLATION
for additional information.
The CUB7P counters use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7P series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a
clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber buttons
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

*CUB7P

PART NUMBER

Counter; Positive Image Reflective
LOW SPEED
Counter, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
CONTACT INPUT
Counter; w/Red Backlighting

CUB7P000

Counter; Positive Image Reflective

CUB7P200

Counter, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB7P210

Counter; w/Red Backlighting
Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery

CUB7P220
BNL10000

HIGH SPEED
LOGIC INPUT
BNL

CUB7P010
CUB7P020

* Battery is included with unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation
is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
Must use NEC Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4) See Count Edge under Programming for
incrementing edge of input signal.
Contact Input (CUB7P0xx): 30 Hz max. from Switch Contact or solid state
Transistor Switch to Common with a50% duty cycle. Contact burden 7 μA max.
Logic Input (CUB7P2xx): 10 KHz max. from a 3.0V bipolar output or 200
Hz max.from a solid state Transistor Switch to Common with a 50% duty
cycle. Contact burden 7 μA max.
5. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 5g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC-61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529

PROGRAMMING
The CUB7P has programmable prescale values and decimal point positions.
These values are changed using the front panel push buttons. Connect wires
between RST EN (Reset Enable) and COM. (Common); and between HS
(Program Enable) and COM. (Common) to enable front panel push buttons.
Note: Upon entering the PGM mode for the first time, the Prescaler value is
set to 0.0000. Some value between 0.0001 and 1.9999 must be entered in
order for the CUB7P to operate properly. Previously stored values are
retained until changed by the user.

Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Simulation of cordless telephone

ENV 50204

Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power 1
Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle

Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55022

Enclosure class B

Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
9. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
10. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

After performing the prescale selection, the display will show 0.0000.
Decimal point positions can be set for:
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.0000 (Default)
0.00000
0.000000
00000000
Press the RST button until the desired decimal point position is displayed.
Press the PGM button to select that position and return to the counter mode.
Remove the wire from the HS (Program Enable) terminal to prevent accidental
changes to the programmed values.
Note: The incrementing edge of the count signal will change when the PGM
button is pressed for the first time. To avoid incorrect display information, it is
recommended that the CUB7P be reset after making programming changes.

COUNT EDGE
Accessing program mode for the first time will complement the
incrementing edge of the count signal. The table below shows the incrementing
edge of the count signal for the different versions of the CUB7P.
VERSION

AFTER INSTALLING OR
REPLACING BATTERY

AFTER ENTERING
PROGRAM MODE

CUB7P0 (Contact)

Rising Edge

Falling Edge

CUB7P2 (Logic)

Rising Edge

Falling Edge

www.redlion.net

WIRING CONNECTIONS
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on
the back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for
each terminal. Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be
tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and tighten down the
screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two
#14 AWG wires.

4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

BATTERY INSTALLATION
1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove the battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on
the rear cover (See drawing below), until the cover unlatches. Pull the
cover straight out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace it with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing the battery as shown in the
drawing.
4. Replace the cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed
upside down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the
top of the CUB7P when properly installed.
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

1-717-767-6511

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

INSTALLATION

The CUB7P meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel.
The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for a washdown
environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are provided for
installing the unit in the panel cut-out.
The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean around
panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the counter body to the back of the
bezel. Install CUB7P unit through the panel cut-out.
4. Insert the mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw
should NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage
into mating features on the CUB7P housing.
6. Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip into
position.
7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed to
about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that the mounting clip
is latched as close as possible to the panel.
9. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.

RESET AND PROGRAM OPTIONS
Connecting a wire from the RST EN (Reset Enable) or the HS (Program
Enable) Input terminals to Common will enable the front panel Reset or
Program buttons respectively.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the counter to reset. The “RST.” can be
pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch. The
Switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 μA.
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

L.S. INPUT; LOGIC VERSIONS (10 KHz MAX.)
TTL OR CMOS
OUTPUT

PNP O.C. TRANSISTOR
OR BI-POLAR OUTPUT

NPN O.C.
TRANSISTOR

FIG 1

FIG 2

FIG 3

The “LS.” Input allows the CUB7P to operate at speeds up to 10 KHz when
driven by bi-polar outputs or external circuits having an output impedance of
3.3 KΩ or less. Input drive voltage must be limited to 3 V maximum to avoid
damage to the counter. CMOS and TTL Logic outputs can be loaded with a
resistor (RL) to limit drive voltage, or a voltage divider can be used as shown
for the PNP O.C. Transistor output.

www.redlion.net

R values for
Fig 2 & 3
+V
R

+5 V 2.2 K
+12 V 10 K
+18 V 16 K
+24 V 24 K

L.S. INPUT; CONTACT VERSIONS (30 Hz MAX.)

Connecting the “L.S.” Input to Common with a mechanical or solid-state
switch increments the counter. The switch load is 7 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5
V) when ON. The OFF-state leakage current must be less than 2 μA.

Reed switches, mercury wetted contacts, snap action limit switches, and
silver alloy relay contacts with wiping action are usually satisfactory for input
activation. Motor starter contacts, tungsten contacts, and brush-type contacts
should not be used.

BACKLIGHT OPTION

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

Optional backlight versions of the CUB7P require an external 9 to 26 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and common
terminals as shown in the drawing.

SCALING A COUNTER
Example: An encoder generates 600 pulses per foot. The Desired Display is
tenths of inches. The Prescaler is determined using the formula below.
Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Value
Prescaler = ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯
Number of Pulses

Where:
Desired Display = The number of Desired
Display units (revolutions,
feet, 10ths of feet, meters,
etc.).
Number of Pulses = The number of pulses
required to achieve the
Desired Display
Decimal Point Value = The desired decimal point
placement on the display.

Decimal
Point Value

Multiply By

0.0

0.00

100

0.000

1000

0.0000

10000

0.00000

100000

Example: Display tenths of inches when using
1 (inch) x 10 (Decimal Point Value)
Prescaler = ⎯⎯⎯⎯
600 pulses/foot x 1 foot/ 12 inches
= 10/50 = 0.2

APPLICATION - TOTAL YARDS OF MATERIAL
A fabric manufacturer wants to know, as economically
as possible, how many whole yards of material his lines
are running. The CUB7P000 will meet his process
requirements. The encoder measuring the material,
generates a one pulse per foot output signal. To obtain the
desired display of yards measured, a prescale value of
0.3333 is programmed. To program the prescale value,
connect wires between RST EN (Reset Enable) and
COM. (Common); and between HS (Program Enable) and
COM. (Common) to enable the front panel push buttons
(See PROGRAMMING for more details.). Remove these
wires after programming to prevent accidental changes to
the prescale value. At the end of each shift, the machine
operator records the total shown on the display and resets
the counter to zero via key switch.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

1-717-767-6511

A
MODEL CUB7P - PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRONIC 8-DIGIT COUNTER
O

AVAILABLE VOLTAGE INPUTS (10 TO 300 VAC/DC)

PRESCALER FROM 0.0001 TO 1.9999

SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINTS

REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES UP
TO 6 YEARS OF UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION (Battery Included)

WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS

FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

DESCRIPTION

3 (8 Digit 0.35") LCD DISPLAY OPTIONS (Reflective, Red
Transmissive, Yellow/Green Transmissive. 9 to 28 VDC power
supply required for versions w/ LED backlighting)

BOTH FRONT PANEL PROGRAM AND RESET BUTTONS ARE
INDIVIDUALLY ENABLED

SAFETY SUMMARY

The CUB7P is an 8-digit miniature programmable counter with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective, Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green backlighting, or red
backlighting. Backlight units require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply.
The CUB7P versions operate from a signal voltage of 10 to 300 V (AC 50/60
Hz or DC).
The CUB7P1 has a programmable prescaler that can be set for any value
between 0.0001 and 1.9999. The decimal point position can be set anywhere
from 0 (no D.P.) to 0.000000 or no Leading Zero Blanking. Both the prescaler
and DP selection are accessed using the front panel PGM and RESET push
buttons. See Programming for details. Note that the count, prescaler and DP
values will be lost if the battery is removed. See BATTERY INSTALLATION
for additional information.
The CUB7P counters use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7P series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a
clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber buttons
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

All instructions that appear in the bulletin or on equipment, all safety related
regulations, and all local codes must be observed to ensure personal safety and
to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

*CUB7P
BNL

VOLTAGE
INPUT

PART NUMBER

Counter; Positive Image Reflective

CUB7P100

Counter, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB7P110

Counter; w/Red Backlighting
Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery

CUB7P120
BNL10000

* Battery is included with unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation
is 2.1" (53.4) H x 5.5" (140) W.

PANEL CUT-OUT

www.redlion.net

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
4. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4) See Count Edge under Programming for
incrementing edge of input signal.
Voltage Input (CUB7P1xx): 10 V min. to 300 V max. (AC 50/60 Hz. or DC) to
Common, 150 V max. for backlight versions. 30 cps max. Input current 0.5
mA max. ANY off-state leakage current may prevent counter from activating.
5. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC-1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference
Simulation of cordless telephone

EN 61000-4-6
ENV 50204

Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55022

Enclosure class B

Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
8. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
9. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

With the front panel push buttons enabled, press the PGM button to enter the
program mode. The CUB7P display will change to the current prescale value,
with the least significant digit flashing at a 2 Hz rate. The prescale value can be
set to any value between 0.0001 and 1.9999. Press the RST button to increment
the flashing digit to the desired value. Pressing the PGM button will lock in the
value of the flashing digit and advance to the next significant digit. The most
significant digit can only be set to 0 or 1. When the entire prescale value has
been programmed, press the PGM button once to enable decimal point selection.
Any new count pulses will be accumulated using the new prescale value.
After performing the prescale selection, the display will show 0.0000.
Decimal point positions can be set for:
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.0000 (Default)
0.00000
0.000000
00000000
Press the RST button until the desired decimal point position is displayed.
Press the PGM button to select that position and return to the counter mode.
Remove the wire from the HS (Program Enable) terminal to prevent accidental
changes to the programmed values.
Note: The incrementing edge of the count signal will change when the PGM
button is pressed for the first time. To avoid incorrect display information, it is
recommended that the CUB7P be reset after making programming changes.

COUNT EDGE
Accessing program mode for the first time will complement the incrementing
edge of the count signal. See below for the incrementing edge of the count signal
for the CUB7P1:
After installing or replacing battery: Falling Edge
After entering program mode: Rising Edge

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important and
can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are
long and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the
installation is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away
as possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on
Signal and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable
through the core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for
additional protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit
to suppress power line interference. Install them near the power entry point
of the enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:

1-717-767-6511

Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated. To
prevent damage to the unit, the voltage on all inputs must not
exceed 3.0 VDC with the following exceptions: V+ (all models 28 VDC max.) and LS (voltage versions - 300 V max.).

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel. Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens,
pencils, etc.) to operate the push buttons of the unit.

INSTALLATION
The CUB7P meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel.
The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for a washdown
environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are provided for
installing the unit in the panel cut-out.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on
the back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for
each terminal. Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be
tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and tighten down the
screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two
#14 AWG wires.

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.
CAUTION: All leads will be at the same line potential as the input
leads.

TROUBLESHOOTING

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

The
following
procedure assures
proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to
specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean around panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the counter body to the back of the
bezel. Install CUB7P unit through the panel cut-out.
4. Insert the mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw
should NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage into
mating features on the CUB7P housing.
6. Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip into
position.
7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed to
about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that the mounting clip
is latched as close as possible to the panel.
9. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.

For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

www.redlion.net

L.S. INPUT; VOLTAGE VERSIONS (30 Hz MAX.)
The CUB7P accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input
accepts single phase AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 300 V
at count speeds up to 30 Hz.. The counter increments when voltage is applied
between the LS input and Common. Any off-state leakage current may prevent
the counter from operating properly.
WARNING: If voltage input is connected to circuits above 30
Vrms, any lead may be at hazardous live input potential.
External wiring and devices connected to the unit must be rated
the same as applied signal input voltage and be properly
isolated from Class 2 or SELV circuitry.

BACKLIGHT OPTION

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

Optional backlight versions of the CUB7P require an external 9 to 26 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and common
terminals as shown in the drawing.

SCALING A COUNTER

WARNING: When connecting the wiring for a backlit CUB7P
measuring an AC input voltage, the neutral of the single phase
AC signal is connected to Terminal 1 (COM), and line (hot) is
connected to Terminal 4 (LS). The DC supply for the
backlighting is connected as shown in the drawing. Three phase
AC applications require an isolation transformer.

Example: An encoder generates 600 pulses per foot. The Desired Display is
tenths of inches. The Prescaler is determined using the formula below.
Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Value
Prescaler = ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯
Number of Pulses

Decimal
Point Value

Multiply
By

0.0

0.00

100

0.000

1000

0.0000

10000

0.00000

100000

Example: Display tenths of inches when using
1 (inch) x 10 (Decimal Point Value)
Prescaler = ⎯⎯⎯⎯
600 pulses/foot x 1 foot/ 12 inches
= 10/50 = 0.2

APPLICATION - TOTAL YARDS OF MATERIAL
The management at an amusement park wants to
know how many miles (in tenths) each of their parking
lot trams travel. They know that a 24 VDC input pulse is
given for each revolution of the 6 foot in circumference
wheel. The small CUB7P100 can meet this need. There
are 5280 feet in one mile and with 6 feet per revolution;
there would be 880 revolutions or pulses in a mile. To
obtain the desired display of miles in tenths, the
CUB7P100 decimal point would be programmed for 0.0
eith the prescale value of 0.0114 (1 x 10 decimal point
value /880 pulses per mile). TO program these values,
connect wires between RST EN (Reset Enable) and
COM (Common): and between HS (Program Enable)
and COM (Common) to enable the front panel push
buttons. (See PROGRAMMING for more details)
Remove these wires after programming to prevent the
mileage from being reset.

1-717-767-6511

A
MODEL CUB7P3 - PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRONIC 8-DIGIT COUNTER
O

AVAILABLE VOLTAGE INPUTS (10 TO 30 VAC/DC)

PRESCALER FROM 0.0001 TO 1.9999

SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINTS

UL
R

US LISTED
51EB

DESCRIPTION

REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES UP
TO 6 YEARS OF UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION (Battery Included)

WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS

FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

IND. CONT. EQ.

3 (8 Digit 0.35") LCD DISPLAY OPTIONS (Reflective, Red
Transmissive, Yellow/Green Transmissive. 9 to 28 VDC power
supply required for versions w/ LED backlighting)

BOTH FRONT PANEL PROGRAM AND RESET BUTTONS ARE
INDIVIDUALLY ENABLED

SAFETY SUMMARY

The CUB7P3 is an 8-digit miniature programmable counter with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective, Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green backlighting, or red
backlighting. Backlight units require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply.
The CUB7P3 versions operate from a signal voltage of 10 to 30 V (AC 50/60
Hz or DC).
The CUB7P3 has a programmable prescaler that can be set for any value
between 0.0001 and 1.9999. The decimal point position can be set anywhere
from 0 (no D.P.) to 0.000000 or no Leading Zero Blanking. Both the prescaler
and DP selection are accessed using the front panel PGM and RESET push
buttons. See Programming for details. Note that the count, prescaler and DP
values will be lost if the battery is removed. See BATTERY INSTALLATION
for additional information.
The CUB7P counters use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7P series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a
clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber buttons
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

*CUB7P3
BNL

VOLTAGE
INPUT

PART NUMBER

Counter; Positive Image Reflective

CUB7P300

Counter, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB7P310

Counter; w/Red Backlighting
Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery

CUB7P320
BNL10000

* Battery is included with unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation
is 2.1" (53.4) H x 5.5" (140) W.

PANEL CUT-OUT

www.redlion.net

SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
Must use a NEC Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4) See Count Edge under Programming for
incrementing edge of input signal.
Voltage Input (CUB7P3xx): 10 V min. to 30 V max. (AC 50/60 Hz. or DC)
to Common. 30 cps max. ANY off-state leakage current may prevent
counter from activating.
5. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC-61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Simulation of cordless telephone

ENV 50204

Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55022

Enclosure class B

Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
8. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm).
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-pounds (0.565 N-m) max.
10. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

PROGRAMMING

The CUB7P has programmable prescale values and decimal point positions.
These values are changed using the front panel push buttons. Connect wires
between RST EN (Reset Enable) and COM. (Common); and between HS
(Program Enable) and COM. (Common) to enable front panel push buttons.
Note: Upon entering the PGM mode for the first time, the Prescaler value is
set to 0.0000. Some value
between 0.0001 and 1.9999
must be entered in order for
the CUB7P to operate
properly. Previously stored
values are retained until
changed by the user.

COUNT EDGE
Accessing program mode for the first time will complement the incrementing
edge of the count signal. See below for the incrementing edge of the count signal
for the CUB7P3:
After installing or replacing battery: Falling Edge
After entering program mode: Rising Edge

1-717-767-6511

Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated. To
prevent damage to the unit, the voltage on all inputs must not
exceed 3.0 VDC with the following exceptions: V+ (all models:
28 VDC max.) and LS (voltage versions: 30 V max.).

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel. Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens,
pencils, etc.) to operate the push buttons of the unit.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on
the back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for
each terminal. Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be
tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and tighten down the
screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two
#14 AWG wires.

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

www.redlion.net

L.S. INPUT; VOLTAGE VERSIONS (30 Hz MAX.)
The CUB7P3 accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input
accepts single phase AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 30 V
at count speeds up to 30 Hz. The counter increments when voltage is applied
between the LS input and Common. Any off-state leakage current may prevent
the counter from operating properly.

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

BACKLIGHT OPTION

SCALING A COUNTER

Optional backlight versions of the CUB7P require an external 9 to 26 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and common
terminals as shown in the drawing.

Decimal
Point Value

Multiply
By

0.0

0.00

100

0.000

1000

0.0000

10000

0.00000

100000

Example: Display tenths of inches when using
1 (inch) x 10 (Decimal Point Value)
Prescaler = ⎯⎯⎯⎯
600 pulses/foot x 1 foot/ 12 inches
= 10/50 = 0.2

APPLICATION - TOTAL YARDS OF MATERIAL
The management at an amusement park wants to
know how many miles (in tenths) each of their parking
lot trams travel. They know that a 24 VDC input pulse
is given for each revolution of the 6 foot in
circumference wheel. The small CUB7P300 can meet
this need. There are 5280 feet in one mile and with 6
feet per revolution; there would be 880 revolutions or
pulses in a mile. To obtain the desired display of miles
in tenths, the CUB7P300 decimal point would be
programmed for 0.0 eith the prescale value of 0.0114 (1
x 10 decimal point value /880 pulses per mile). TO
program these values, connect wires between RST EN
(Reset Enable) and COM (Common): and between HS
(Program Enable) and COM (Common) to enable the
front panel push buttons. (See PROGRAMMING for
more details) Remove these wires after programming
to prevent the mileage from being reset.

1-717-767-6511

A
MODEL CUB4L, CUB4L8 & CUB4L8W - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC COUNTERS
z LCD, POSITIVE REFLECTIVE OR NEGATIVE TRANSMISSIVE
WITH YELLOW/GREEN OR RED LED BACKLIGHTING
z INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES UP TO 6 YEARS OF
UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z FRONT PANEL RESET, REMOTE RESET, OR BOTH
z COUNT SPEEDS UP TO 5 KHz (Model Dependent)
z COUNT INPUT FROM 10 to 300 VAC/DC (CUB4L8W)
z WIRE CONNECTION MADE VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE
TERMINALS

UL Recognized Component,
File # E179259

DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The CUB4 offers a large display in a miniature package. There are three
CUB4 counters to choose from; the CUB4L (6-digit counter), CUB4L8 (8-digit
counter), and the CUB4L8W (8-digit counter with voltage input). You also have
a choice of three displays; reflective, red backlight or green backlight.
The backlight versions require power from an external 9–28 VDC supply. The
optional power supply (MLPS1000) is designed to be attached directly to the rear
of the CUB4 and is powered from an 85–250 VAC source. The power supply
provides 12 VDC @ 400 mA to power the backlight and sensor, if required.
The CUB4 series has a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a clear
viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber reset button
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

CUB4L
(6-digit)

CUB4L8
(8-digit)

PART NUMBERS

Counter Positive Image Reflective

CUB4L000

Counter w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB4L010

Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB4L020

Counter Positive Image Reflective w/V+ Terminal

CUB4LM00

Counter Positive Image Reflective

CUB4L800

Counter w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB4L810

Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB4L820

Counter Positive Image Reflective w/V+ Terminal

CUB4L80M

Counter Positive Image Reflective
CUB4L8W Counter w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
(8-digit
w/VCM) Counter w/Red Backlighting
Counter Positive Image Reflective w/V+ Terminal

CUB4L8W0

MLPS

Micro Line/Sensor Power Supply

CUB4L8W1
CUB4L8W2
CUB4L8WM
MLPS1000

For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the RLC
Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY:
CUB4L: 6-Digit, LCD, 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits.
CUB4L8 & CUB4L8W: 8-Digit, LCD, 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up to 6 years
of continuous operation. Battery life is dependent upon usage. Count and reset
contacts that remain closed for long periods of time will reduce battery life.
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC, 35 mA typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate operating temperature to 50°C.
Must use the MLPS or a Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. INPUTS:
All Inputs: VIL (low) = 0.5 V max.
Low Speed Input (CUB4L & CUB4L8): 30 Hz from switch contact or open
collector transistor with a 50% duty cycle.
Low Speed Input (CUB4L8W): 10 to 300 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz, 30 cps max.
VIL = 0.5 VDC max. Unit counts on positive going edge. Will not operate
with Triac outputs.
High Speed Input (CUB4L): 5 KHz from 4.0 V to 28.0 V bipolar output
with a 50% duty cycle.
High Speed Input (CUB4L8): 5 KHz at 2.0 V (3 V max) bipolar output with
a 50% duty cycle.
Remote Reset:
CUB4L: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 4.0 V to 28.0 V bipolar
output or an open collector transistor or a switch contact to common.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip
installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

www.redlion.net

CUB4L8 & CUB4L8W: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output or open collector transistor or a switch contact to common.
5. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°C (above 50°C, derate backlight operating
voltage to 26 VDC max.).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 5g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL 61010-1, CSA C22.2 No.
61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/9257C/UL,
CB Scheme Test Report # E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Power frequency magnetic fields
Simulation of cordless telephone

EN 61000-4-8
ENV 50204

Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Level 4; 30 A/m
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle

Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference

EN 55011

Class B

Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
7. CONSTRUCTION:
This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor use. Installation Category I,
Pollution Degree 2
8. WEIGHT: 3 oz. (85 grams)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Although Red Lion Controls Products are designed with a high degree of
immunity to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring
methods must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type
of the electrical noise, source or coupling method into a unit may be different for
various installations. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very
important and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome
installation. Listed are some EMI guidelines for a successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

Installation

The CUB4 series of products meet NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor
use, when properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an
enclosed panel. The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for a
washdown environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are
provided for sealing the unit in the panel cut-out.
The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean around
panel opening.
2. Carefully remove the center section of the panel gasket and discard.
Slide gasket over rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
3. Assemble nut fastener first and then mounting screw onto both sides of
mounting clip. Tip of screw should not project from hole in mounting clip.
4. Install CUB4 unit through the panel cut-out until front bezel flange contacts
the panel-mounted gasket.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the mounting clip is
against the back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which
engage into mating features on the CUB4 housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip into
position.

6. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure. Visually
inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed about 75 to
80% of its original thickness. (Recommended torque is 28 to 36 in-oz.) If
not, gradually turn mounting screws to further compress gasket.
7. If gasket is not adequately compressed, and mounting screws can no longer
be turned, loosen mounting screws and check that mounting clip is latched
as close as possible to panel.
Repeat procedure for tightening mounting screws.

1-717-767-6511

WIRING CONNECTIONS

The electrical connections are made via rear screw-clamp terminals located
on the back of the unit. When wiring the unit, use the label to identify the wire
position with the proper function. All conductors should meet voltage and
current ratings for each terminal. Also cabling should conform to appropriate
standards of good installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended
that power supplied to the unit (AC or DC) be protected by a fuse or circuit
breaker. Strip the wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the wire into the screw-clamp
terminal and tighten down the screw until the wire is clamped tightly. Each
terminal can accept up to two #14 AWG wires.
Note: The Reflective CUB4 will NOT have a screw terminal installed at the V+
terminal, since it is NOT required for operation and is not internally
connected. Refer to the Ordering Information for the part number of a
reflective model that will accommodate the MLPS.

Note: This drawing is for CUB4L and CUB4L8 reference only.
For reference of CUB4L8W, refer to Backlight Option on page 4.

Backlight Wiring
Optional backlight versions of the CUB4 require an external 9-28 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and Common
terminals.

Warning: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.
Caution: All leads will be at the same line potential as the input leads.

CUB4L AND CUB4L8 LOW SPEED COUNT INPUT, 30 Hz MAX.
Pulling the “L.S. CNT.” Input to Common
with a mechanical or solid-state switch
increments the counter. The low pass filter used
with a Schmidt trigger circuit debounces
mechanical switch signals. The switch load is
14 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The
OFF-state leakage current must be less than 2
μA. Motor starter contacts, tungsten contacts,
and brush-type contacts should NOT be used.

CUB4L8W L.S. INPUT, 30 CPS MAX.
The CUB4L8W accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input
accepts AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 300 V at count speeds
up to 30 cps. The unit counts on the positive going edge of the input signal.
WARNING: Any lead may be at hazardous live input potential.
External wiring and devices connected to the unit must be rated
the same as applied signal input voltage and be properly
isolated from Class 2 or SELV circuitry.

CUB4L HIGH SPEED COUNT INPUT, 5 KHz MAX.
The “H.S. CNT.” Input allows the CUB
Counter to operate at speeds up to 5 KHz
when driven by bi-polar outputs. Input drive
voltage must be limited to 28.0 V maximum
to avoid damage to the counter.
INPUT PULSE EXCURSION LIMITS
VIH (High) = +4.0 V min., +28.0 V max.
VIL (Low) = +0.5 V max.

100

www.redlion.net

CUB4L8 HIGH SPEED COUNT INPUT, 5 Hz MAX.
TTL OR CMOS
OUTPUT

PNP O.C. TRANSISTOR
OR BI-POLAR OUTPUT

FIG 1

The “H.S. CNT.” Input allows the CUB Counter to operate at speeds up to
5 KHz when driven by bi-polar outputs or external circuits having an output
impedance of 3.3 KΩ or less. Input drive voltage must be limited to 3 V
maximum to avoid damage to the counter. CMOS and TTL logic outputs can
be loaded with a resistor (Rl) to limit drive voltage, or a voltage divider can
be used as shown for the PNP O.C. transistor output.

RESET OPTIONS

FIG 2

INPUT PULSE EXCURSION LIMITS
VIN (High) = 2.0 V min., 3.0 V max.
VIL (Low) = ±0.5 V max.

NPN O.C.
TRANSISTOR

FIG 3
R values for
Fig 2 & 3
+V
R

+5 V 2.2 K
+12 V 10 K
+18 V 16 K
+24 V 24 K

BACKLIGHT OPTION

Connecting a wire from the “RST. EN.” (Reset Enable) Input terminal to
Common will enable the front panel Reset button. When Remote Reset is
required, a wire is connected from the “REM. RST.” input terminal to
Common. Pulling this input low causes the counter to reset. The “REM. RST.”
can be pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor
switch. Switch load and leakage are the same as for “L.S. CNT.” Input above.
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “REM. RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

Optional backlight versions of the CUB4 require an external 9-28 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and Common
terminals as shown in the drawing.
Red Lion Controls optional power supply (MLPS1000) is designed to be
attached directly to the rear of a CUB4 and is powered from a 85 to 250 VAC
source. The MLPS provides power for unit backlighting and a sensor.
WARNING: When connecting the wiring for a backlit CUB4L8W
measuring an AC input voltage, the neutral of the single phase AC
signal is connected to Terminal 1 (COM), and line (hot) is
connected to Terminal 5 (LS). The DC supply for the backlighting
is connected as shown in the drawing. Three phase AC applications
require an isolation transformer.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

1-717-767-6511

101

MODEL CUB5 - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 8-DIGIT DUAL
COUNTER AND RATE INDICATOR
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.46" (11.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z OPTIONAL SETPOINT OUTPUT MODULES
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS MODULE (RS232 or RS485)
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING FOR COUNT AND RATE
z BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL
z QUADRATURE SENSING (UP TO 4 TIMES RESOLUTION)

UL
R

z BUILT-IN BATCH COUNTING CAPABILITY

US LISTED

z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

COUNTER

The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The meter can be programmed as a single or dual counter with rate indication
capability. The display can be toggled either manually or automatically between
the selected displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective (CUB5R000) and backlight (CUB5B000). The
backlight version is user selectable for green or red backlighting with variable
display intensity.
The counter is programmable for one of eight different count modes,
including bi-directional and quadrature. When programmed as a dual counter,
each counter has a separate scale factor and decimal points. In the counter/rate
indicator mode, each have their own scaling and decimal point read-outs in
different engineering units. The internal batch counter can be used to count
setpoint output activations.
The meter has two separate inputs which provide different functions
depending on which operating mode is selected. Input A accepts the signal for
the Count and/or Rate displays, while Input B accepts the signal for the Count
display or direction control. In the anti-coincidence mode, both inputs are
monitored simultaneously so that no counts are lost. The resulting display can
be chosen as the sum or difference of the two inputs. The Rate Indicator has
programmable low (minimum) and high (maximum) update times to provide
optimal display response at any input frequency. There is a programmable user
input that can be programmed to perform a variety of functions.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
single setpoint relay output module or the dual setpoint solid state output
module. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485 is added with a
serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

102

The CUB5 receives incoming pulses and multiplies them by the Count Scale
Factor to obtain the desired reading for the count display. Input A accepts the
signal for the count and Input B is used for quadrature, dual counter, anticoincidence counting, or up/down control counting.

RATE
The rate indicator utilizes the signal at Input A to calculate the rate value
using a time interval method (1/tau). The unit counts on the negative edge of the
input pulses. After the programmed minimum update time elapses and the next
negative edge occurs, the unit calculates the input rate based on the number of
edges that occurred during the elapsed time. The input rate is then multiplied by
the rate scaling value to calculate the rate display.
At slower rates, averaging can be accomplished by programming the rate
minimum update time for the desired response. Extensive scaling capabilities
allow practically any desired reading at very slow count rates.

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

www.redlion.net

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

CUB5

Optional Plug-in Cards

Accessories

MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

CUB5R
CUB5B
CUB5RLY
CUB5SNK

Dual Counter & Rate Indicator with Reflective Display
Dual Counter & Rate Indicator with Backlight Display
Single Relay Option Card
Dual Sinking Open Collector Output card
RS485 Serial Communications Card
RS232 Serial Communications Card
USB Serial Communication Card
Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC
Programming Cable RS232 (RJ11-DB9)
Programming Cable RS485 (RJ11-DB9)
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 1
USB Programming Cable

CUB5COM
CUB5USB
MLPS1
CBLPRO
CBPRO
SFCRD
CBLUSB

PART NUMBER

CUB5R000
CUB5B000
CUB5RLY0
CUB5SNK0
CUB5COM1
CUB5COM2
CUB5USB0
MLPS1000
CBLPROG0
CBPRO007
SFCRD200
CBLUSB0

Crimson 2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 8 digit LCD 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits
CUB5R000: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5B000: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.
MODEL
NO.

DISPLAY COLOR

CUB5R000
CUB5B000
CUB5B000

--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)

Operating Temperature Range for CUB5B000 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL

Red Display

Green Display

INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0

10 mA
85 mA
95 mA

30 mA
115 mA
125 mA

3. COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Counter A: 8-digits, enabled in all count modes
Display Range: -9999999 to 99999999
Overflow Indication: Display flashes “Cnt OVEr”
Counter B: 7-digits, enabled in Dual Counter Mode or batch counting
Display Designator: “b” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 9999999 (positive count only)
Overflow Indication: Display flashes “bCntOVEr”
Maximum Count Rates: 50% duty cycle
Without setpoint option card: 20 KHz (all count modes)
With setpoint option card: 20 KHz for any count mode except Dual Counter
(16 KHz), Quadrature x2 (14 KHz) and Quadrature x4 (13 KHz).
4. RATE DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be enabled or disabled in any count mode
Display Designator: “R” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Over Range Display: “R OLOLOL”
Maximum Frequency: 20 KHz
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%
5. COUNT/RATE SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A and INP B):
Input A: DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources.
See Section 2.0 Setting the DIP Switches for Input A specifications.
Input B: Logic signals only
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Current sinking: Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Filter (LO Freq.): Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce.
Limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.
6. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect to input common (INP
COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and count values when power is removed.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
9. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5R000: -35 to 75°C

1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5

TEMPERATURE

-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C

Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 40 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257C/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
12. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)

1-717-767-6511

103

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
A ADDING OPTION CARDS

The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
SINGLE RELAY OUTPUT CARD (One setpoint only)
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch
from the unit. Slide the panel gasket over the rear
of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit
should be installed fully assembled. Insert
the unit into the panel cutout.

THE

RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable, 2 msec min. or 50 msec min.
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity

METER

INSTALLATION

2.0 SETTING

DUAL SINKING OUTPUT CARD (One or two setpoints)
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 100 mA max.
VDS ON: 0.7 V @ 100 mA
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approx. 28 to 36 in-oz [0.202 to 0.26 N-m]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.

DIP SWITCHES

SWITCH 2

1 2

3 4
HI Freq.

HI Freq.

SWITCHES 3 and 4

SNK.

SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC, IMAX = 3.8 mA.
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor,
7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

Input B LO Freq.

LOGIC: Input A trigger levels VIL = 1.25 V max.;
VIH = 2.75 V min.; VMAX = 28 VDC
MAG: 200 mV peak input sensitivity; 100 mV
hysteresis; maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak
(28 Vrms); Must also have SRC switch ON.
(Not recommended with counting applications.)

Logic

To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.

SWITCH 1

Input A LO Freq.

REMOVING THE REAR COVER

The meter has four DIP switches for Input A and Input B that must be set
before applying power.
Input A SRC.

Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards. Remove
all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing inside of
the meter.

SETTING THE INPUT DIP SWITCHES

Input A MAG.

To access the switches, remove the rear cover of the meter as described
below. A bank of 4 switches is located in the upper right hand corner. After
setting the switches, install any optional plug-in cards before replacing the rear
cover (see next section).

Factory Setting

HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.

104

www.redlion.net

3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.

The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter. After
installing the cards, replace the rear cover before wiring the meter.

Setpoint Card

Comms Card

REPLACING THE REAR COVER
To replace the rear cover, align the cover with the input terminals and press
down until the cover snaps into place.

Locking Tab

4.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed
(stranded wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct
screw-clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

4.1 POWER WIRING
DC Power
+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC

the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

4.2 USER INPUT WIRING
Sinking Logic
INP COMM
USR

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and Input Common.

}

The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<1 .0 V).

1-717-767-6511

105

4.3 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Power common (PWR COMMON) is NOT isolated from input common (INP COMM). In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the power common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth
ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may be present at the Signal or User Inputs and input common terminals. Appropriate considerations must
then be given to the potential of the input common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.

Magnetic Pickup

Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.
Input A

Current Sinking Output

Input A

Interfacing With TTL

Current Sourcing Output
Input A

Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink

Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source

Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction

Input A

Switch position is application dependent.

Shaded areas not recommended for counting applications.

4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Note: Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load must
be wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.

4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD

106

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

www.redlion.net

5.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

ENTERING PROGRAM MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

RST

Resets count display(s) and/or outputs

Advances through the program menu/
Increments selected parameter value or selection

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“R” - To the left of the display is the rate value.

“ ” - To the left of the display is the Counter B value (dual count or batch).
“1” and “2” - Indicates setpoint 1 and 2 output status.

- Counter A has no designator.

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the rate and count values.

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL KEY)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL KEY)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL key. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL key with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST KEYS)

It is recommended to start with Module 1 for counting or Module 2 for rate.
When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the parameter
programming and lock out parameter programming with the user input or
programming security code.

The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST key is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL key.

MODULE MENU (SEL KEY)
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The SEL key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO. Programming may
continue by accessing additional modules.

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful when
encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s factory setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST key is used to move through the
selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL key, stores and activates the
displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST key to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST key again increments the digit
by one or the user can hold the RST key and the digit will automatically scroll.
The SEL key will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the SEL key
will enter the value and move to the next parameter.

1-717-767-6511

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

INP A-b «
ª Cnt ud

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

107

6.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS (1-INPUt)
A

PARAMETER MENU

Shaded area selections only apply when Counter B is enabled (Dual Counter
mode or batch counter).

COUNTER A COUNT DIRECTION

COUNT MODE

INP A-b «
ª Cnt ud

Cnt ud
RAtE Cnt
dUAL Cnt

qUAd 1
qUAd 2
qUAd 4

Add Add
Add Sub

Cnt ud
RAtE Cnt
dUAL Cnt
qUAd 1
qUAd 2
qUAd 4
Add Add
Add Sub

MODE

CmtA Ld «
ª 00000500

Count with Direction

Counter A

Counter A Direction

Rate/Counter

Rate only

Counter A Add

Dual Counter

Counter A Add

Counter B Add

Quadrature x1

Count A

Quad A

Cmtb bAt

Quadrature x2

Count A

Quad A

Quadrature x4

Count A

Quad A

2 Input Add/Add

Counter A Add

2 Input Add/Subtract

Counter A Add

Counter A Subtract

0.00
0.000

0.0000
0.00000

This selects the decimal point position for Counter A. The selection will also
affect Counter A scale factor calculations.

-9999999 to 99999999

Counter A resets to this value if Reset to Count Load action is selected.

COUNTER B BATCH COUNT ENABLE

NO
SP1

SP2
SP1-2

The Counter B batch count function internally counts the number of output
activations of the selected setpoint(s). The count source for the batch counter
can be SP1, SP2 or both. Batch counting is available in all count modes except
Dual Counter, which uses an external input signal for Counter B. This
parameter only appears if a Setpoint Output option card is installed.

COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION

COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION

0
0.0

rEV

COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE

INPUT B ACTION

NOr

INPUT A ACTION

Note: The Rate indicator signal is derived from Input A in all count modes.

CntA dP

Reverse (rEV) switches the normal Counter A count direction shown in the
Count Mode parameter chart.

Select the count mode that corresponds with your application. The input
actions are shown in the boxes below. For simple counting applications, it is
recommended to use Count with Direction for the count mode. Simply leave the
direction input unconnected.
DISPLAY

CmtA dir

Cntb dP
ª

0
0.0

0.00
0.000

0.0000
0.00000

This selects the decimal point position for Counter B. The selection will also
affect Counter B scale factor calculations.

COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR
COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR

CmtA ScF «
ª
01.0000

00.0001 to 99.9999

The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale factor to obtain the
desired process value. A scale factor of 1.0000 will result in the display of the
actual number of input counts. (Details on scaling calculations are explained at
the end of this section.)*

Cntb ScF «
ª
01.0000

00.0001 to 99.9999

The number of input or batch counts is multiplied by the scale factor to
obtain the desired process value. A scale factor of 1.0000 will result in the
display of the actual number of input or batch counts. (Details on scaling
calculations are explained at the end of this section.)*

COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP
COUNTER A RESET ACTION

CmtA rSt «
ª to 2Ero

to 2Ero

to CtLd

When Counter A is reset, it returns to Zero or Counter A Count Load value.
This reset action applies to all Counter A resets, except a setpoint generated
Counter Auto Reset programmed in Module 4.

RSt P-UP

NO
yES

NO Count b
Count A both A-b

The selected counter(s) will reset at each meter power-up.

* For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.

108

www.redlion.net

108

SCALING FOR COUNT INDICATION

USER INPUT FUNCTION

The CUB5’s scale factor is factory set to 1, to provide one count on the
display for each pulse that is input to the unit. In many applications, there will
not be a one-to-one correspondence between input pulses and display units.
Therefore, it is necessary for the CUB5 to scale or multiply the input pulses by
a scale factor to achieve the desired display units (feet, meters, gallons, etc.)
The Count Scale Factor Value can range from 00.0001 to 99.9999. It is
important to note that the precision of a counter application cannot be improved
by using a scale factor greater than one. To accomplish greater precision, more
pulse information must be generated per measuring unit. The following formula
is used to calculate the scale factor.
Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses
WHERE:
Desired Display Units: Count display units acquired after pulses that occurred.
Number of Pulses: Number of pulses required to achieve the desired
display units.
Decimal Point Position:
0
=
1
0.0
=
10
0.00
=
100
0.000
=
1000
0.0000
=
10000
0.00000 =
100000
EXAMPLE: The counter display is used to indicate the total number of feet
used in a process. It is necessary to know the number of pulses for the desired
units to be displayed. The decimal point is selected to show the resolution in
hundredths.
Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses
Given that 128 pulses are equal to 1 foot, display total feet with a onehundredth resolution.
Scale Factor = 1.00 x 100
128
Scale Factor = 0.007812 x 100
Scale Factor = 0.7812

USEr INP

DISPLAY

NO
Pro Loc
Inhibit
rESEt
StorE
Stor-rSt
d-SELECt
d-LEVEL
d-COLOr
Print
Prnt-r5t
rESEt-1
rESEt-2
rESEt-12

MODE

DESCRIPTION

No Function

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out

See Programming Mode Access chart.
(Module 3)

Inhibit

Inhibit counting for the selected counter(s).

Maintained Reset

Level active reset of the selected counter(s).
Freeze display of selected counter(s) while
allowing counts to accumulate internally.
Edge triggered reset of the selected
counter(s) after storing the count.

Store
Store and Reset
Display Select *

Advance once for each activation

Display Intensity Level *
Backlight Color *
Print Request
Print and Reset *

Increase intensity one level for each
activation. (backlight version only)
Change backlight color with each activation
(backlight version only)
Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options (Module 5)
Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the selected counter(s).

Setpoint 1 Reset *

Reset Setpoint 1 output

Setpoint 2 Reset *

Reset Setpoint 2 output

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset * Reset Setpoint 1 and 2 outputs

Note: * indicates Edge Triggered function. Other functions are Level Active
(maintained)

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

USEr ASN «
ª Count A

Count A

Count b

both A-b

The User Input Assignment is only active when Counter B is enabled and the
User Input performs a Reset, Inhibit or Store function on one or both counters.

6.2 MODULE 2 - RATE SETUP PARAMETERS (2-rAtE)
PARAMETER MENU

Module 2 is the programming for the rate parameters. For maximum input
frequency, Rate Enable should be set to NO when not in use. When set to NO, the
remaining rate parameters are not accessible. The rate value is shown with an
annunciator of “R” in the Display Mode.

RATE ENABLE

RAtE Enb
ª

YES

RAtE dSP «
ª
001000

999999

Enter the desired Rate Display Value for the Scaling Point.*

YES
RATE SCALING INPUT VALUE

RAtE INP «
ª
01000.0

RATE DECIMAL POINT

RAtE dP

RATE SCALING DISPLAY VALUE

0
0.0

0.00
0.000

0.0000
0.00000

0.1

99999.9

Enter the corresponding Rate Input Value for the Scaling Point.*

This selects the decimal point position for the rate display and any setpoint
value assigned to rate. This parameter does not affect rate scaling calculations.

*For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.

1-717-767-6511

109

INPUT FREQUENCY CALCULATION

SCALING FOR RATE INDICATION

To scale the rate, enter a Scaling Display value with a corresponding Scaling
Input value. These values are internally plotted to a display value of 0 and input
value of 0.0 Hz. A linear relationship is formed between these points to yield a
rate display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. The meter
is capable of showing a rate display value for any linear process.

SCALING CALCULATION
If a display value versus input signal (in pulses per second) is known, then
those values can be entered into Scaling Display (RAtE dSP) and Scaling Input
(RAtE INP). No further calculations are needed.
If only the number of pulses per ‘single’ unit (i.e. # of pulses per foot) is
known, then it can be entered as the Scaling Input value and the Scaling Display
value will be entered as the following:
RATE PER

DISPLAY (RAtE

Second

dSP)

INPUT (RAtE

INP)

# of pulses per unit

Minute

# of pulses per unit

Hour

3600

# of pulses per unit

The meter determines the input frequency by summing the number of falling
edges received during a sample period of time. The sample period begins on the
first falling edge. At this falling edge, the meter starts accumulating time
towards Low Update and High Update values. Also, the meter starts
accumulating the number of falling edges. When the time reaches the Low
Update Time value, the meter looks for one more falling edge to end the sample
period. If a falling edge occurs (before the High Update Time value is reached),
the Rate display will update to the new value and the next sample period will
start on the same edge. If the High Update Time value is reached (without
receiving a falling edge after reaching Low Update Time), then the sample
period will end but the Rate display will be forced to zero. The High Update
Time value must be greater than the Low Update Time value. Both values must
be greater than 0.0. The input frequency calculated during the sample period, is
then shown as a Rate value determined by the scaling calculation.

NOTES:
1. If # of pulse per unit is less than 10, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 10.
2. If # of pulse per unit is less than 1, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 100.
3. If the Display value is raised or lowered, then Input value must be raised
or lowered by the same proportion (i.e. Display value for per hour is
entered by a third less (1200) then Input value is a third less of # of pulses
per unit). The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered, then
Display value must be raised or lowered by the same proportion.
4. Both values must be greater than 0.0.
EXAMPLE:
1. With 15.1 pulses per foot, show feet per minute in tenths. Scaling Display
= 60.0 Scaling Input = 15.1.
2. With 0.25 pulses per gallon, show whole gallons per hour. (To have greater
accuracy, multiply both Input and Display values by 10.) Scaling Display
= 36000 Scaling Input = 2.5.

RATE LOW UPDATE TIME

LO-Udt
ª

0.1

01.0

99.9

seconds

The Low Update Time is the minimum amount of time between display
updates for the rate display. Values of 0.1 and 0.2 seconds will update the
display correctly but may cause the display to appear unsteady.

RATE HIGH UPDATE TIME

HI-Udt
ª

02.0

0.2

99.9

seconds

The High Update Time is the maximum amount of time before the rate
display is forced to zero. (For more explanation, refer to Rate Value
Calculation.) The High Update Time must be higher than the Low Update Time
and higher than the desired slowest readable speed (one divided by pulses per
second). The factory setting of 2.0, will force the display to zero for speeds
below 0.5 Hz or a pulse every 2 seconds.

110

www.redlion.net

6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (3-dSPLAY)

PARAMETER MENU

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL Enb
ª

yES

Pro CodE

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

FRONT PANEL COUNTER RESET ENABLE (RST)

RSt Enb
ª

yES
NO

YES

NO
Count A
Count b

both A-b
dSPLAy

The yES selection allows the RST button to reset the selected counter(s). The
shaded selections are only active when Counter B is enabled (Dual Count mode
or batch counter).

yES

000

The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (Pro Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the setpoint output time-out and counter load values (when applicable) to be
modified, but allows direct access to these values without having to enter Full
Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the Pro CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending
on the code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the Pro CodE
prompt appears (see chart).

not

Pro Loc

______

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. Each display is shown for 4 seconds.

DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

rEd

Active

Immediate Access

1-99

Quick
Programming

After Quick Programming
with correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *

100-999

Pro CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *

1-99

Pro Loc

rEd

6rn
Not Active

Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

Full Programming

d-COLOr

999

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
KEY IS PRESSED

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

d-ScroLL

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming

No Access
No Access

100-999

Pro CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

SOFTWARE VERSION DISPLAY
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

d-LEVEL
ª

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.

CodE UEr «
ª
NO

yES

Select YES to momentarily display the meter software version before advancing
to the next parameter. The software version is also displayed at power-up.

LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

FACt SEt

yES

The yES selection will return the meter to the factory default settings. The
meter will display rESEt and then return to Pro, at which time all settings have
been changed.

1-717-767-6511

111

6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SEtPt)
A

PARAMETER MENU

The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional Setpoint
Output Module is installed in the meter. Some parameters in the menu will not
appear depending on the Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint Output Action. The
Setpoint Parameter Availability chart below illustrates this.

SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION

SETPOINT SELECT

SPt SEL

SP1

SPn ACt «
ª
LAtCH

SP2

Select the Setpoint Output to be programmed, starting with Setpoint 1. The
"n" in the following parameters reflects the chosen Setpoint number. After
Setpoint 1 is completely programmed, the display returns to SPt SEL. Repeat
steps for Setpoint 2 if both Setpoints are used in the application.
Select NO to exit the Setpoint programming module. The number of Setpoints
available is dependent on the Setpoint option module installed.

SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION

LAtCH
t-OUt

bOUNd
NO

YES

Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If
selected, the unit returns to SPt SEL and Setpoint 2 is disabled.

t-OUt

bOUNd

The parameter selects the action of the Setpoint Output as described in the
chart. Boundary output action is not applicable for Counter B assignment.

SETPOINT 2 ENABLE (SP2 Only)

SP2 Enb

LAtCH

OUTPUT ACTIVATES

OUTPUT DEACTIVATES

When Count =
Setpoint
When Count =
Setpoint
When Count ≥
Setpoint
When Count ≤
Setpoint

At Manual Reset
(if SPn rSt=YES)
After Setpoint
Output Time-Out
When Count
< Setpoint
When Count
> Setpoint

Latched Output Mode
Timed Output Mode
Boundary Mode
(High Acting Type)
Boundary Mode
(Low Acting Type)

NO is

SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

SPn ASN «
ª Count A

Count A

Count b

rAtE

Select the display to which the Setpoint is assigned.

SETPOINT PARAMETER AVAILABILITY
COUNTER ASSIGNMENT (A or B) *
PARAMETER

SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SPn
SP1
SP2
SPn
SPn

tOUt
VAL
OUt
LIt
P-UP
tYPE
StbY
AUtO
OFF2
OFF1
rSt
ChC

DESCRIPTION

TIMED OUT BOUNDARY

BOUNDARY

LATCH

t-OUt

bOUNd

LAtCH

t-OUt

bOUNd

LAtCH

Setpoint Output Time-out Value

Yes

Setpoint Value

Yes

Setpoint Output Logic

Yes

Setpoint Annunciator

Yes

Setpoint Output Power-up State

Yes

Setpoint Boundary Type

Yes

Standby Operation (Low acting only)

Yes

Counter Auto Reset

Yes

SP1 Output Off at SP2 (SP1 only)

Yes

SP2 Output Off at SP1 (SP2 only)

Yes

Output Reset with Manual Reset

Yes

Change Display Color w/ Output State

Yes

* BOUNDARY Setpoint Action not applicable for Counter B Assignment

112

RATE ASSIGNMENT

www.redlion.net

LATCH

TIMED OUT

SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT

SPn tOUt «
ª
001.00

0.01

599.99

COUNTER AUTO RESET

seconds

This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to time out (t-OUt).
Enter the value in seconds that the Setpoint output will be active, once the
Setpoint Value is reached.

SETPOINT VALUE

SPn VAL «
ª 00000100

Count A:
Count B:
Rate:

SPn AUtO

NO
2Ero-Str
CtLd-Str
2Ero-End

Enter the desired Setpoint value. To enter a negative setpoint value,
increment digit 8 to display a “-” sign (Counter A only).

CtLd-End

SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC

SPn OUt
ª

NOr

SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR

NOr

Normal (NOr) displays the setpoint annunciator when the corresponding
output is “on”. Reverse (rEV) displays the setpoint annunciator when the output
is “off”.

SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE

OFF

output at power up.

LO-ACt

High Acting Boundary Type activates the output when the assigned display
value (SPn ASN) equals or exceeds the Setpoint value. Low Acting activates the
output when the assigned display value is less than or equal to the Setpoint.

SETPOINT STANDBY OPERATION

Reset to Count Load value at the start of output activation.
Reset to Zero at the end of output activation (timed out only).
Reset to Count Load value at the end of output activation
(timed out only).

Out2-Str

Out2-End

This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 1 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 2 output (O1 off at O2). The “-End” setting only applies if Setpoint 2
Output Action is programmed for timed output.

SP2 OFF1 «
ª
NO

Out1-Str

Out1-End

This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 2 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 1 output (O2 off at O1). The “-End” setting only applies if Setpoint 1
Output Action is programmed for timed output.

SPn rSt
ª

YES

Selecting YES causes the Setpoint output to deactivate (reset) when the
Setpoint Assigned Counter is reset. The counter reset can occur by the RST
button, User Input, Counter Reset at Power-up or a serial Reset Counter
command.
This output reset will not occur when the Assigned Counter is reset by a
Setpoint generated Counter Auto Reset.

SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE

SPn StbY «
ª
NO

Reset to Zero at the start of output activation.

SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH MANUAL RESET

SAVE will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down. ON will activate the output at power up. OFF will deactivate the

HI-ACt

No Auto Reset.

SP1 OFF2 «
ª
NO

SAVE

OFF

SPn tYPE «
ª
HI-ACt

ACTION

SETPOINT 2 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 1 (SP2 Only)

rEV

NOr

SPn P-UP

CtLd-Str
CtLd-End

SETPOINT 1 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 2 (SP1 Only)

rEV

Normal (NOr) turns the output “on” when activated and “off” when
deactivated. Reverse (rEV) turns the output “off” when activated and “on” when
deactivated.

SPn LIt

@2Ero-Str
2Ero-End

This parameter automatically resets the counter to which the setpoint is
assigned (SPn ASN) each time the setpoint value is reached. The automatic reset
can occur at output start, or at output end if the Setpoint Output Action is
programmed for timed output mode. The Reset-to-Count Load selections
(“CtLd-”) only apply to Counter A assignment. This reset may be different from
the Counter A Reset Action selected in Module 1.
SELECTION

-9999999 to 99999999
0 to 9999999
0 to 999999

CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR WITH OUTPUT STATE

SPn ChC

YES

This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.

YES

This parameter only applies to Low Acting Boundary Type setpoints. Select

YES to disable a Low Acting Setpoint at power-up, until the assigned display
value crosses into the output “off” area. Once in the output “off” area, the
Setpoint will then function per the description for Low Acting Boundary Type.

1-717-767-6511

113

6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (5-SEriAL)
A

PARAMETER MENU

The Serial Communications Parameters are only accessible when an
optional RS232 or RS485 serial communications module is installed in the
meter.

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the CUB5B and CUB5R.

Abbr
ª

BAUD RATE

bAUd
ª

300
600

9600

1200
2400

4800
9600

19200
38400

Set the baud rate to match that of other serial communications equipment.
Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value that all of the serial
communications equipment is capable of transmitting and receiving.

YES

This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value command or a Block Print Request. Select NO
for a full print transmission, consisting of the meter address, mnemonics, and
parameter data. Select YES for abbreviated print transmissions, consisting of the
parameter data only. This setting is applied to all the parameters selected in the
PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 0, the address will not be sent
during a full transmission.)

PRINT OPTIONS

Prnt OPt «
ª
NO

DATA BIT

dAtA
ª

7-bit

8-bit

7-bit

Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

PARITY BIT

PAritY
ª

Odd

EVEN

Odd

This parameter only appears when the Data Bit parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to NO, an additional stop bit is used
to force the frame size to 10 bits.

Enter the serial node address. With a single unit, an address is not needed
and a value of zero can be used (RS232 applications). Otherwise, with multiple
bussed units, a unique address number must be assigned to each meter. The
node address applies specifically to RS485 applications.

114

YES

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (Prnt ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting
(YES), without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, Counter B or Scale Factor B will only be sent if Counter
B is enabled (Dual Counter mode or batch count). Likewise, the Setpoint
value(s) will not be sent unless an optional setpoint card is installed in the
meter.

METER ADDRESS

Addr

www.redlion.net

DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

Count A
Count b
rAtE
CntA ScF
Cntb ScF
sSP1
SP2
CntA Ld

Counter A
Counter B
Rate Value
Scale Factor A
Scale Factor B
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Counter A Count Load

FACTORY
SETTING

YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

MNEMONIC

CTA
CTB
RTE
SFA
SFB
SP1
SP2
CLD

Sending Serial Commands and Data

When sending commands to the meter, a string containing at least one
command character must be constructed. A command string consists of a
command character, a value identifier, numerical data (if writing data to the
meter) followed by a command terminator character, * or $.

Command Chart
Command Description

N
T
V
R
P

Notes

Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value Change (write) followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.
Reset a count value or setpoint output. Must
Reset
be followed by a register ID character
Block Print Request Initiates a block print output. Registers in the
(read)
print block are selected in Print Options.
Node (meter)
Address Specifier

Command String Construction
The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints all the active selections chosen in the Print Options menu parameter.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination characters
* or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string until this
character is received. See Command Response Time section for differences in
meter response time when using the * and $ terminating characters.

Receiving Data From The Meter

Data is transmitted from the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a block print request command (P) or a User Input print request. The
response from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated
transmission, depending on the selection chosen in Module 5.

Full Field Transmission
Byte

Description

1, 2

2 byte Node Address field [00-99]

Value Description MNEMONIC

Counter A

CTA

T, V, R

8 digit positive/7 digit negative
(with minus sign)

Counter B

CTB

T, V, R

7 digit, positive only

Rate

RTE

6 digit, positive only

Scale Factor A

SFA

T, V

6 digit, positive only

Scale Factor B

SFB

T, V,

6 digit, positive only

Setpoint 1
(Reset Output 1)

SP1

T, V, R

per setpoint Assignment, same
as Counter or Rate

Setpoint 2
(Reset Output 2)

SP2

T, V, R

per setpoint Assignment, same
as Counter or Rate

Counter A Count
Load Value

CLD

T, V

8 digit positive/7 digit negative
(with minus sign)

Command String Examples:
1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the Setpoint 1 value
String: N17VF350*
2. Node address = 5, Read Counter A, response time of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
3. Node address = 0, Reset Setpoint 1 output
String: RF*
4. Node address = 31, Request a Block Print Output, response time of 2 msec min
String: N31P$

Transmitting Data to the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to transmit details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. Negative numbers
must have a minus sign. The meter ignores any decimal point and conforms the
number to the scaled resolution. (For example: The meter’s scaled decimal point
position is set for 0.0 and 25 is written to a register. The value of the register is
now 2.5. In this case, write a value of 250 to equal 25.0).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.

requested value. The data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned with leading
spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with a and . After the
last line of a block print, an extra , and are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.

Abbreviated Transmission
Byte

Description

4-6

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

12 byte data field, 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign,
one byte for decimal point
(carriage return)

7-18

12 byte data field; 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte for
decimal point

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

1-12

(Space)

(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12
characters long. When a requested counter or rate value exceeds the meter’s
display limits, an * (used as an overflow character) replaces a space in byte 7.
Byte 8 is always a space.
The remaining ten positions of this field consist of a minus sign (for negative
values), a floating decimal point (if applicable), and eight positions for the

The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register ID,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.

Meter Response Examples:
1. Node address = 17, full field response, Counter A = 875
17 CTA
875
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 1 = -250.5
SP1
-250.5
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 1 = 250, last line of block
print
250

1-717-767-6511

115

Command Response Time
A

At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter is
ready to receive the next command.
t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
The maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the
times t1, t2 and t3.

Communication Format

Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character. The voltage level conventions depend on the interface
standard. The table lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters (0 to ∞). Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit,
an optional parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data format and
baud rate must match that of other equipment in order for communication to
take place. The figures list the data formats employed by the meter.

Timing Diagram Figure

Start Bit and Data Bits
Data transmission always begins with the start bit. The start bit signals the
receiving device to prepare for reception of data. One bit period later, the least
significant bit of the ASCII encoded character is transmitted, followed by the
remaining data bits. The receiving device then reads each bit position as they are
transmitted.

Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The CUB5 meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Stop Bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the meter.

Character Frame Figure

116

www.redlion.net

CUB5 PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press and hold SEL key to
enter Programming Mode.

1-717-767-6511

117

MODEL PAXLC - PAX® LITE COUNTER
z AVAILABLE IN 6 OR 8-DIGIT VERSIONS
z 6-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) / 8-DIGIT, 0.4" (10.1 mm) HIGH LED
DISPLAYS
z ACCEPTS INPUT COUNT RATES UP TO 25 KHZ
z BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING
z REMOTE RESET CAPABILTY
z DISPLAY STORE
z COUNT INHIBIT
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALE FACTOR

UL
R

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The PAX® Lite Counter, Model PAXLC, is a versatile totalizing counter that
can be adapted to a wide variety of counting, measuring, and positioning
readout applications.
The unit features a programmable scale factor, front panel and remote reset,
store, inhibit, and a count rate of 25 KHz, while offering an economical solution
to any totalizing need.
The PAXLC accepts digital inputs from a variety of sources including switch
contacts, NPN-OC and TTL outputs, as well as most standard Red Lion sensors.
The input can be scaled to display any desired unit of measure by simply using
the programmable scale factor. The meter can accept bi-directional and unidirectional signals.
The meter is programmed through the front panel buttons and the use of DIP
switches. The Down Arrow Key will also function as a front panel display reset.
Once the front panel programming is complete, the buttons can be disabled by
a DIP switch setting.
The meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

118

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE

CONTENTS

Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Setting the Switches . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4

Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Scaling the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

4
6
6
7

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

C6 - 6 Digit Counter
C8 - 8 Digit Counter

1-717-767-6511

119

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
A

1. DISPLAY: 6-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) or 8-digit, 0.4" (10.1 mm)
7-segment LED
Display Range: 6-digit, -99999 to 999999 or 8-digit, -9999999 to 99999999
Display Overflow indicated by flashing dot to the right of digit 1
Decimal points are programmed by front panel keys
2. POWER:
AC Power: 115/230 VAC, switch selectable. Allowable power line variation
±10%, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA.
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to input and DC Out/In.
DC Power: 10 to 16 VDC @ 0.1 A max.
3. SENSOR POWER: 9 to 17.5 VDC @ 100 mA max.
4. KEYPAD: 3 programming keys, the T (Down Arrow) key can also function
as the front panel reset button
5. COUNT INPUT: (DIP switch selectable)
Accepts pulses from a variety of sources including switch contacts, NPNOC and TTL Outputs, as well as most standard Red Lion® sensors
Logic State: Active Low
Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current Sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, I max = 1.9 mA
Current Sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits input
frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
6. MAXIMUM COUNT RATE: 25 KHz max.
7. CONTROL INPUTS:
Count Up/Down Control, Remote Reset, Inhibit, and Store
Max. Continuous Input: 30 VDC
Isolation To Sensor Input Commons: Not isolated
Logic State: Active Low, 22 KΩ pull-up to +12 V
Active: VIN < 0.9 VDC
Inactive: VIN > 3.6 VDC
Response Time:
Up/Down and Inhibit: 25 μsec max.
Reset and Store: 10 msec. max.
8. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
count values.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 60°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity
non-condensing
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.0 INSTALLING
Installation

THE

UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A 2
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A 2
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Criterion A
30 A/m
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. EMI filter placed on the DC power supply, when DC powered: Corcom
#1VB3 or Schaffner #FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000).
11. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
12. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
13. WEIGHT: 12 oz. (340 g)

METER

latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch should be engaged in the
farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal, tighten the latch screws
evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79Ncm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment

120

www.redlion.net

2.0 SETTING

THE

SWITCHES

The meter has switches that must be checked and/or changed prior to applying
power. To access the power switch, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the latch
below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

Power Selection Switch
Caution: Insure the AC power selection switch is set for the proper
voltage before powering-up the meter. The meter is shipped from
the factory in the 230 VAC position.

DIS RST

DIS PGM

MAG

LO Freq.

SRC.

A DIP switch is at the rear of the meter. It is used
to set up the input, enable/disable programming and
front panel reset functions. For the correct input
setup, refer to 3.3 Wiring the Meter.

SNK.

Setup DIP Switches

Switch 4
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max; VIH = 3.75 V max.
MAG: Not used for count applications.
Switch 5
Enable Programming: Enables programming through the front panel
buttons.
Disables Programming: Disables the front panel buttons from any
programming changes.
Switch 6
Enable Reset: Enables the front panel reset (down arrow key).
Disable Reset: Disables the front panel reset key. Note: The remote reset
terminal is not disabled by this switch.
FRONT DISPLAY

1 2 3 4 5 6
EN RST

EN PGM

HI Freq.

LOGIC

Not Active

POWER
SELECTION
SWITCH

230

Factory Setting

115

Switch 1
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA
Switch 2
SRC: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.
Switch 3
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to
10 msec.

3.0 WIRING

THE

REAR TERMINALS

INPUT SET-UP
DIP SWITCHES

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

1-717-767-6511

121

3.1 POWER WIRING
A

AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 4: COMM

3.2 CONTROL INPUT WIRING
The PAXLC provides a number of control inputs, including Store, Reset,
Inhibit and Up/Down control. These inputs are active low (connected to
common), so the external switching device should be connected between the
control input and common terminals.
Up/Down - This input determines the direction of the count. Unconnected,
the meter will count up. When input is pulled low, the meter will count down.
Reset - When this input is pulled low, the meter will reset to zero. If the input
remains low or connected to common, the meter will be held in the reset mode,
and not able to count.
Inhibit - When low, this input will prevent the meter from counting. If the
input remains low or connected to the common, the meter will not be able to
count.
Store - A low will stop the display from updating. It will freeze the display
as long as the input is held low. Once released the display will update to the
current count display.

3.3 INPUT WIRING
Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

Current Sinking Output

Current Sourcing Output

Interfacing With TTL

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source

Emitter Follower; Current Source

*Switch position is application dependent.

122

www.redlion.net

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY
A

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

No Function

Increment selected digit of parameter value

Front Panel Reset

Select digit position in parameter value

5.0 SCALING

THE

METER

In many industrial applications, a meter is required to totalize the output of an
operation or event. The pulses from a sensor are received by the PAXLC, and
then totalized on the display. In many cases the incoming pulses do not represent
the desired display readout. For those applications, a scale factor can be entered
into the meter, scaling the pulses to obtain the desired readout. The following
formula will help provide the scaling values to achieve the desired readout.

Example 1:
This application involves counting cases from a production line. The sensor
provides a pulse for every can produced. The desired readout is in cases,
therefore the incoming pulses need to be converted to obtain the proper readout.
The following is used to calculate scale factor.
SF = DR
EPU

SF = DR
EPU

WHERE:
SF = Scale Factor
DR = Desired Readout* (Single unit of measure, i.e. foot, gallon, etc.)
EPU = Existing Pulses per Unit (Number of pulses per single unit of measure,
i.e. foot, gallons, etc.)

DR = 1 case
EPU = 12 cans/case
SF = 1
12
SF = 0.83333

Since the Calculated Scale Factor Value is less than 9.99999, it can be
entered directly into the meter. The Scale Multiplier can be left at 1.

For calculated SF values less than 9.99999
If the Scale Factor is a value less than 9.99999, it can be entered directly
into the meter as the Scale Factor and the Scale Multiplier can be left at 1.
For calculated SF values greater than 9.99999
If the Scale Factor is a value over 9.99999 (maximum value), the Scale
Multiplier must be used to reduce the calculated SF value until it is less then
9.99999. The Scale Multiplier multiplies the calculated Scale Factor value by
1, 0.1, and 0.01, thus reducing the calculated value accordingly. Select the
appropriate Scale Multiplier value that allows the Scale Factor to be a value
under 9.99999. Both the Scale Factor and Scale Multiplier can then be
entered into the meter.

1-717-767-6511

123

6.0 PROGRAMMING
A

THE

METER

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

The Totalizer has four programmable parameters which are entered in the
sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
Before programming, refer to the section on Scaling the Meter to determine
the Decimal Position, Scale Factor and Scale Multiplier to use for the specific
application.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out with the Program Disable DIP
switch. With the switch in the Disabled (up) position the meter will not enter
programming mode. Refer to the section on DIP switch setup.

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY
Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.

SCALE MULTIPLIER

«
ª
The number of input counts is multiplied by the Scale Multiplier and the
Scale Factor to obtain the desired process value. A Scale Multiplier of 1 will
result in only the Scale Factor affecting the display. (See details on scaling
calculations.)
Press the arrow keys (S or T) to sequence through the selection list until the
desired selection is displayed. Press the PAR key to save the selection and exit
programming mode.

COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP

PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS
In programming mode, the display alternates between the parameter and the
current selection or value for that parameter. The dual display with arrows is
used below to illustrate the alternating display. The selection choices or value
range for each parameter is shown to the right of the alternating display.

DECIMAL POSITION

«
ª
The totalizer may be programmed to reset at each meter power-up.

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT

«
ª
This parameter selects the decimal point position on the display.
Press the arrow keys (S or T) to sequence through the selection list until the
desired selection is shown. Press the PAR key to save the displayed selection
and advance to the next parameter.

The meter exits Programming Mode when the PAR key is pressed to save the
Scale Multiplier selection. The meter briefly displays
upon exiting
Programming Mode. All programmed selections are now transferred to the nonvolatile memory and the meter returns to the Counter display.
(If power loss occurs during programming mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)

PROGRAMMING MODE TIME OUT
The Programming Mode has an automatic time out feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the Counter
display. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to the
parameter currently being programmed, will not be saved.

SCALE FACTOR

ª
The number of input counts is multiplied by the Scale Factor and the Scale
Multiplier to obtain the desired process value. A Scale Factor of 1.00000 and a
Scale Multiplier of 1 will result in the display of the actual number of input
counts. (See details on scaling calculations.)
The Scale Factor is displayed as a six-digit value with one selected digit
flashing (initially digit 6). Press the S (up arrow) key to increment the value of
the selected (flashing) digit. Holding the S key automatically scrolls the value
of the selected digit.
Press the T (down arrow) key to select the next digit position to the right.
Use the S key to increment the value of this digit to the desired number. Press
the T key again to select the next digit to be changed. Holding the T key
automatically scrolls through each digit position. Repeat the “select and set”
sequence until all digits are displaying the desired Scale Factor value. Press the
PAR key to save the displayed value and advance to the next parameter.

124

FACTORY SETTINGS
The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown above in the
alternating display illustrations. The factory settings can be easily restored by
removing power from the meter, and then pressing and holding the PAR key
while power is reapplied. The meter displays
until the PAR key is
released. The normal power-up sequence then resumes, with the factory settings
loaded and saved in non-volatile memory. The Count is reset to 0.
Note: The Program Disable DIP switch must be in the Enabled (down)
position to allow loading factory settings. See section on DIP switch setup.

www.redlion.net

A
MODEL PAXLCR - PAX LITE DUAL COUNTER AND RATE METER
z 6 DIGIT, 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING FOR COUNT AND RATE
z BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL
z QUADRATURE SENSING (UP TO 4 TIMES RESOLUTION)
z BUILT-IN BATCH COUNTING CAPABILITY
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z DUAL 5 AMP FORM C RELAYS
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The PAXLCR is a versatile meter that provides a single or dual counter with
rate indication, scaling and dual relay outputs. The 6-digit display has 0.56" high
digits with adjustable display intensity. The display can be toggled manually or
automatically between the selected counter and rate values.
The meter has two signal inputs and a choice of eight different count modes.
These include bi-directional, quadrature and anti-coincidence counting, as well
as a dual counter mode. When programmed as a Dual Counter, each counter has
separate scaling and decimal point selection.
Rate indication is available in all count modes. The Rate Indicator has
separate scaling and decimal point selection, along with programmable display
update times. In addition to the signal inputs, the User Input can be programmed
to perform a variety of meter control functions.
Two setpoint outputs are provided, each with a Form C relay. The outputs can
activate based on either counter or rate setpoint values. An internal batch counter
can be used to count setpoint output activations.
The PAXLCR can be powered from a wide range of AC or DC voltages. The
meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments. With a
NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet CE requirements, the
meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to
it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Do not use this meter
to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators not equipped with
safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or equipment in the
event of a fault to the meter

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PAXLCR

DESCRIPTION

Dual Counter & Rate Meter with dual Relay Output

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

PART NUMBER

PAXLCR00

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) intensity adjustable Red LED
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC POWER: 50 to 250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 12 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs
DC POWER: 21.6 to 250 VDC, 6 W
DC Out: +24 VDC @ 100 mA if input voltage is greater than 50 VAC/VDC
+24 VDC @ 50 mA if input voltage is less than 50 VDC
3. COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Counter A: 6-digits, enabled in all count modes
Display Designator: “A” to the left side of the display
Display Range: -99999 to 999999
Counter B: 6-digits, enabled in Dual Count mode or Batch Counter
Display Designator: “B” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999 (positive count only)
Overflow Indication: Display “
” alternates with overflowed count value
Maximum Count Rates: 50% duty cycle, count mode dependent.
With setpoints disabled: 25 KHz, all modes except Quadrature x4 (23 KHz).
With setpoint(s) enabled: 20 KHz, all modes except Dual Counter (14 KHz),
Quadrature x2 (13 KHz) and Quadrature x4 (12 KHz).

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

1-717-767-6511

125

4. RATE DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be enabled or disabled in any count mode
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Over Range Display: “
”
Maximum Frequency: 25 KHz
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%
5. COUNT/RATE SIGNAL INPUTS (INPUT A and INPUT B):
See Section 2.0 Setting the DIP Switches for complete Input specifications.
DIP switch selectable inputs accept pulses from a variety of sources. Both
inputs allow selectable active low or active high logic, and selectable input
filtering for low frequency signals or switch contact debounce.
Input A: Logic level or magnetic pickup signals.
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.25 V max; VIH = 2.75 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Mag. pickup sensitivity: 200 mV peak, 100 mV hysteresis, 40 V peak max.
Input B: Logic level signals only
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
6. USER INPUT: Programmable
Software selectable for active logic state: active low, pull-up (24.7 KΩ to +5
VDC) or active high, pull-down resistor (20 KΩ).
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 10 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
count values when power is removed.
8. OUTPUTS:
Type: Dual Form C contacts
Isolation to Input & User/Exc Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8
H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads.
Response Time: Turn On or Off: 4 msec max.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g (10g relay), 11 msec in 3
directions.
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters

1.0 INSTALLING
Installation

THE

Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Surge

EN 61000-4-5

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Voltage dip/interruptions

EN 61000-4-11

Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Criterion A
10 V/m
Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Criterion C
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Criterion A
0.5 cycle

Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion C: Temporary loss of function which requires operator
intervention.
13. WEIGHT: 10.4 oz. (295 g)

METER

The PAX Lite meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed.
The unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel
cutout to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]).
Do not over-tighten the screws.

126

10. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use. IP20
Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.

Installation Environment

www.redlion.net

PANEL CUT-OUT

2.0 SETTING

THE

DIP SWITCHES

To access the switches, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start on the other side latch.

FRONT DISPLAY
Main
Circuit
Board

Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing
inside of the meter.

SWITCH 1 (Input A)
LOGIC: Input A trigger levels VIL = 1.25 V max.; VIH = 2.75 V min.;
VMAX = 28 VDC
MAG: 200 mV peak input sensitivity; 100 mV hysteresis; maximum voltage:
40 V peak (28 Vrms); Must also have Input A SRC switch ON. (Not
recommended with counting applications.)

1
2
3
4
5

INPUT SET-UP
DIP SWITCHES

SWITCH 2 (Input A) {See Note 1}
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +5 VDC, IMAX = 0.7 mA.
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

SWITCH 3 (Input A)

REAR TERMINALS

HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.

Note 1: When the DIP switch is in the SNK position (OFF), the signal input is
configured as active low. When the switch is in the SRC position (ON), the
signal input is configured as active high.

SWITCH 4 (Input B) {See Note 1}
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +5 VDC, IMAX = 0.7 mA.
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

LOGIC
Input A

HI FREQ.

SWITCH 5 (Input B)
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.

3.0 WIRING

SNK.

THE

Input B

SNK.
HI FREQ.

1
2
3
4
5

MAG.
SRC.
LO FREQ.
SRC.
LO FREQ.

Factory Setting

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

1-717-767-6511

127

3.1 POWER WIRING
A

DC Out Power

Power

Terminal 3: + 24 VDC OUT
Terminal 4: Common

Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC -

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
The meter provides a choice of eight different count modes using two signal inputs,
A and B. The Count Mode selected determines the action of Inputs A and B. Section
5.1, Input Setup Parameters, provides details on count mode selection and input action.
CAUTION: DC common (Terminal 4) is NOT isolated from Input common (Terminal 7) or User common (Terminal 9). In order
to preserve the safety of the meter application, DC common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced
voltage; or Input common and User common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may be
present at the Signal or User Inputs, and Input or User common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given
to the potential of the Input or User common with respect to earth ground.

Input A

Current Sinking Output

Input A

Current Sourcing Output

Interfacing With TTL
Input A

Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink

Terminal 8: User Input
Terminal 9: User Common

Current Sinking (Active Low Logic)

Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction

Input A

Shaded areas not recommended for counting applications.

* Switch position is application dependent.

3.3 USER INPUT WIRING

Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source

Input A

3.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
Terminal 10: NC 1
Terminal 11: NO 1
Terminal 12: Relay 1 Common
Terminal 13: NC 2
Terminal 14: NO 2
Terminal 15: Relay 2 Common

Current Sourcing (Active High Logic)

128

Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.

Magnetic Pickup

www.redlion.net

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY
A

BUTTON DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value

RST

Resets count display(s) and/or outputs

Increment selected digit of parameter value

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“SP1” - Indicates setpoint 1 output status.
“SP2” - Indicates setpoint 2 output status.

“A” - Counter A value
“B” - Counter B value (dual count or batch)
- Rate value is displayed with no designator

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR BUTTON)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR button. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a
security code or a hardware lock.

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the PAR button with
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & PAR BUTTONS)

It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module in
sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user input
or programming security code.

The Programming Menu is organized into four modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
Pro and the present module. The SEL button is used to select the desired module.
The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR button.

MODULE MENU (PAR BUTTON)
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The PAR button is pressed to advance to a particular
parameter to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding
parameters. After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO.
Programming may continue by accessing additional modules.

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The SEL and RST buttons are used to
move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR button,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to
the next parameter.
For numeric values, the value is displayed with one digit flashing (initially
the right most digit). Pressing the RST button increments the digit by one or the
user can hold the RST button and the digit will automatically scroll. The SEL
button will select the next digit to the left. Pressing the PAR button will enter the
value and move to the next parameter.

1-717-767-6511

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

129

5.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS (
A

)

PARAMETER MENU

Shaded area selections only apply when Counter B is enabled (Dual Count
mode or batch counter).

COUNTER A RESET ACTION

«
ª

COUNT MODE

When Counter A is reset, it returns to Zero or Counter A Count Load value.
This reset action applies to all Counter A resets, except a Setpoint generated
Counter Auto Reset programmed in Module 4.

«
ª
Select the count mode that corresponds with your application. The input
actions are shown in the boxes below. For simple counting applications, it is
recommended to use Count with Direction for the count mode. Simply leave the
direction input unconnected.
DISPLAY

MODE

INPUT A ACTION

INPUT B ACTION

Count with Direction

Counter A

Counter A Direction

Rate/Counter

Rate only

Counter A Add

Dual Counter

Counter A Add

Counter B Add

Quadrature x1

Count A

Quad A

Quadrature x2

Count A

Quad A

Quadrature x4

Count A

Quad A

2 Input Add/Add

Counter A Add

2 Input Add/Subtract

Counter A Add

Counter A Subtract

Note: The Rate indicator signal is derived from Input A in all count modes.

COUNTER A COUNT DIRECTION

«
ª
Reverse (
) switches the normal Counter A count direction shown in the
Count Mode parameter chart.

COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE

«
ª

Counter A resets to this value if Reset to Count Load action is selected. To
enter a negative Count Load value, increment digit 6 to display a “-” sign.*

COUNTER B BATCH COUNT ENABLE

COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION

«
ª

This selects the decimal point position for Counter A. The selection will also
affect Counter A scale factor calculations.

The Counter B Batch Count function internally counts the number of output
activations of the selected setpoint(s). The count source for the batch counter
can be SP1, SP2 or both. Batch counting is available in all count modes except
Dual Counter, which uses an external input signal for Counter B.

COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR

«
ª

COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION

«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter B. The selection will also
affect Counter B scale factor calculations.

*For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.

130

www.redlion.net

COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR

USER INPUT FUNCTION

DISPLAY

MODE

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out

See Programming Mode
Access chart (Module 3).

Inhibit

COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP

Maintained Reset

«
ª
The selected counter(s) will reset at each meter power-up.

SCALING FOR COUNT INDICATION
The counter’s scale factor is factory set to 1, to provide one count on the
display for each pulse that is input to the unit. In many applications, there will
not be a one-to-one correspondence between input pulses and display units.
Therefore, it is necessary for the meter to scale or multiply the input pulses by
a scale factor to achieve the desired display units (feet, meters, gallons, etc.)
The Count Scale Factor Value can range from 00.0001 to 99.9999. It is
important to note that the precision of a counter application cannot be improved
by using a scale factor greater than one. To accomplish greater precision, more
pulse information must be generated per measuring unit. The following formula
is used to calculate the scale factor.

Decimal Point Position:
0
=
1
0.0
=
10
0.00
=
100
0.000
=
1000
0.0000
=
10000
0.00000 =
100000

Inhibit counting for the
selected counter(s).
Level active reset of the
selected counter(s).

Store

Freeze display for the selected
counter(s) while allowing
counts to accumulate internally.

Store and Reset

Edge triggered reset of the
selected counter(s) after
storing the count.

Display Select *

Advance once for each
activation.

Display Intensity Level *

Increase intensity one level
for each activation.

Setpoint 1 Reset *

Reset setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset *

Reset setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset *

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2
outputs.

* Indicates Edge Triggered function. All others are Level Active functions.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses
WHERE:
Desired Display Units: Count display units acquired after pulses that occurred.
Number of Pulses: Number of pulses required to achieve the desired
display units.

DESCRIPTION

No Function

«
ª
The User Input Assignment is only active when Counter B is enabled and the
user input selection performs a Reset, Inhibit or Store function on one or both
of the counters.

EXAMPLE 1: The counter display is used to indicate the total number of feet
used in a process. It is necessary to know the number of pulses for the
desired units to be displayed. The decimal point is selected to show the
resolution in hundredths.
Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses
Given that 128 pulses are equal to 1 foot, display total feet with a onehundredth resolution.
Scale Factor = 1.00 x 100
128
Scale Factor = 0.007812 x 100
Scale Factor = 0.7812

USER INPUT ACTIVE LEVEL

«
ª
Select whether the user input is configured as active low or active high.

EXAMPLE 2: A manufacturer wants to count the total number of bricks
molded in a process yielding 12 bricks per mold. The counter receives 1
pulse per mold and should increase by 12 for each pulse received. Since
single brick accuracy is not required, a Scale Factor greater than 1 can be
used in this case.
Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses

*For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.

Scale Factor = 12 x 1
1
Scale Factor = 12.0000

1-717-767-6511

131

5.2 MODULE 2 - RATE SETUP PARAMETERS (
A

)

PARAMETER MENU

RATE ENABLE

RATE LOW UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY UPDATE)

seconds

This parameter enables the Rate display. For maximum input frequency, Rate
Enable should be set to
when not in use. When set to , the remaining rate
parameters are not accessible.

The Low Update Time is the minimum amount of time between display
updates for the Rate display. Values of 0.1 and 0.2 seconds will update the
display correctly but may cause the display to appear unsteady.

RATE DECIMAL POINT

RATE HIGH UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY ZERO)

seconds

This selects the decimal point position for the rate display. This parameter does
not affect rate scaling calculations.

The High Update Time is the maximum amount of time before the Rate
display is forced to zero. (For more explanation, refer to Input Frequency
Calculation.) The High Update Time must be higher than the Low Update Time
and higher than the desired slowest readable speed (one divided by pulses per
second). The factory setting of 2.0, will force the display to zero for speeds
below 0.5 Hz or a pulse every 2 seconds.

RATE INPUT SCALING STYLE

«
ª
If a Rate Input value (in Hz) and the corresponding Rate Display value are
known, the Key-in (
) Scaling Style can be used. This allows rate scaling
without the presence of a rate input signal.
If the Rate Input value has to be derived from the actual rate input signal, the
Apply (
) Scaling Style should be used.

To scale the Rate, enter a Scaling Display value with a corresponding Scaling
Input value. These values are internally plotted to a Display value of 0 and Input
value of 0.0 Hz. A linear relationship is formed between these points to yield a
rate display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. The meter
is capable of showing a rate display value for any positive slope linear process.

SCALING CALCULATION FOR KEY-IN STYLE

RATE SCALING DISPLAY VALUE

SCALING FOR RATE INDICATION

ª
Enter the desired Rate Display value. This value is entered using the front
panel buttons for either Scaling Style.*

If a display value versus input signal (in pulses per second) is known, then
those values can be entered into Scaling Display (
) and Scaling Input
(
). No further calculations are needed.
If only the number of pulses per ‘single’ unit (i.e. # of pulses per foot) is
known, then it can be entered as the Scaling Input value and the Scaling Display
value will be entered as the following:
RATE PER
Second

RATE SCALING INPUT VALUE

«
ª

Enter the corresponding Rate Input value using the Scaling Style selected.

Key-in Style:
Enter the Rate Input value using the front panel buttons. This value is always
in pulses per second (Hz).*

Apply Style:
The meter initially shows the stored Rate Input value. To retain this value,
press PAR to advance to the next parameter. To enter a new value, apply the rate
input signal to Input A. Press RST and the applied input frequency (in Hz) will
appear on the display. To insure the correct reading, wait several rate sample
periods (see Rate Low Update Time) or until a consistent reading is displayed.
Press PAR to store the displayed value as the new Rate Input value.

)

INPUT (

)

# of pulses per unit

Minute

# of pulses per unit

Hour

3600

# of pulses per unit

NOTES:
1. If # of pulses per unit is less than 1, multiply both Input and Display values
by 10 or 100 as needed to obtain greater accuracy.
2. If the Display value is raised or lowered, then Input value must be raised
or lowered by the same proportion (i.e. Display value for per hour is
entered by a third less (1200) then Input value is a third less of # of pulses
per unit). The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered, then
Display value must be raised or lowered by the same proportion.
3. Both values must be greater than 0.
EXAMPLE:
1. With 15.1 pulses per foot, show feet per minute in tenths. Scaling Display
= 60.0 Scaling Input = 15.1.
2. With 0.25 pulses per gallon, show whole gallons per hour. (To have greater
accuracy, multiply both Input and Display values by 10.) Scaling Display
= 36000 Scaling Input = 2.5.

*For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.

132

DISPLAY (

www.redlion.net

INPUT FREQUENCY CALCULATION
The meter determines the input frequency by summing the number of falling
edges received during a sample period of time. The sample period begins on the
first falling edge. At this falling edge, the meter starts accumulating time
towards Low Update and High Update values. Also, the meter starts
accumulating the number of falling edges. When the time reaches the Low
Update Time value, the meter looks for one more falling edge to end the sample
period. If a falling edge occurs (before the High Update Time value is reached),
the Rate display will update to the new value and the next sample period will
start on the same edge. If the High Update Time value is reached (without
receiving a falling edge after reaching Low Update Time), then the sample
period will end but the Rate display will be forced to zero. The High Update
Time value must be greater than the Low Update Time value. Both values must
be greater than 0.0. The input frequency calculated during the sample period, is
then shown as a Rate value determined by the scaling calculation.

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

ª
The

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

selection allows the SEL key to toggle through the enabled displays.

FRONT PANEL COUNTER RESET ENABLE (RST)

«
ª
The
selection allows the RST key to reset the selected counter(s). The
shaded selections are only active when Counter B is enabled (Dual Count Mode
or batch counter).

The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (
) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
unit parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits
only user selected values to be modified, but allows direct access to these values
without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Entering a Security Code from 1-99 enables Quick Programming mode, and
displays a sublist to select which values appear in the Quick Programming
menu. All of the values set to
in the sublist are accessible in Quick
Programming. The values include Setpoints (
,
), Output Time-outs
(
,
), Count Load value (
) and Display Intensity (
).
Programming any Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the
prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Quick
Programming mode, if enabled, is accessed before the
prompt appears.

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “PAR”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
KEY IS PRESSED

The
selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. Each display is shown for 4 seconds.

not

______

1-99
100-999

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

«
ª

Active

1-99
100-999

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed.

Not Active

0-999

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

Full Programming

Immediate Access

Quick
Programming

After Quick Programming
with correct code entry
prompt *
at

prompt
Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming
prompt
Full Programming

With correct code entry
prompt *
at
No Access
No Access
With correct code entry
prompt *
at
Immediate Access

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

1-717-767-6511

133

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

A ª
Select

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

«
ª

to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with the factory default
settings. The meter will display
and then return to
. Press the
PAR button to exit the module.

VIEW MODEL AND VERSION DISPLAY

«
ª
Entering Code 50 will display the model and version (x.x) of the meter. The
display then returns to
. Press the PAR button to exit the module.

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Some Setpoint parameters will not appear depending on the Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint
Output Action selected. The Setpoint Parameter Availability chart below illustrates this.
COUNTER ASSIGNMENT (A or B)*
PARAMETER

tOUt-n
SPt-n
Out-n
Lit-n
P-UP-n
tYPE-n
StbY-n
AUtO-n
OFF2-1
OFF1-2
rSt-n

DESCRIPTION

TIMED OUT

BOUNDARY

RATE ASSIGNMENT

LATCH

TIMED OUT

BOUNDARY

LATCH

Setpoint Output Time-out Value

Yes

Setpoint Value

Yes

Setpoint Output Logic

Yes

Setpoint Annunciator

Yes

Setpoint Output Power-up State

Yes

Setpoint Boundary Type

Yes

Standby Operation (Low ActingOnly)

Yes

Counter Auto Reset

Yes

SP1 Output Off at SP2 (SP1 only)

Yes

SP2 Output Off at SP1 (SP2 only)

Yes

Output Reset with Manual Reset

Yes

* BOUNDARY Setpoint Action not applicable for Counter B assignment.

SETPOINT SELECT

SETPOINT ENABLE

Select the Setpoint Output to be programmed, starting with Setpoint 1. The
“ ” in the following parameters reflects the chosen Setpoint number. After the
selected setpoint is completely programmed, the display returns to
.
Repeat steps for Setpoint 2 if both Setpoints are being used. Select
to exit the
Setpoint programming module.

Select
to enable the chosen setpoint and access the setup parameters. If
is selected, the unit returns to
and the setpoint is disabled.

SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

«
ª
Select the display to which the Setpoint is assigned.

134

www.redlion.net

SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION

SETPOINT STANDBY OPERATION

This parameter selects the action of the Setpoint output as described in the
chart below. Boundary mode is not applicable for Counter B assignment.

This parameter only applies to Low Acting Boundary Type setpoints. Select
to disable a Low Acting Setpoint at power-up, until the assigned display
value crosses into the output “off” area. Once in the output “off” area, the
Setpoint will then function per the description for Low Acting Boundary Type.

SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION

OUTPUT ACTIVATES

OUTPUT DEACTIVATES

When Count =
Setpoint
When Count =
Setpoint
When Count ≥
Setpoint
When Count ≤
Setpoint

At Manual Reset
=
)
(if
After Setpoint
Output Time-Out
When Count
< Setpoint
When Count
> Setpoint

Latched Output Mode
Timed Output Mode
Boundary Mode
(High Acting)
Boundary Mode
(Low Acting)

SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT

seconds

This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to timed output
mode (
). Enter the value in seconds that the output will be active, once
the Setpoint Value is reached.

Count A:
Count B:
Rate:

COUNTER AUTO RESET

«
ª
This parameter automatically resets the Setpoint Assigned Counter (A or B)
each time the Setpoint value is reached. The automatic reset can occur at output
start, or output end if the Setpoint Output Action is programmed for timed
output mode. The Reset-to-Count Load selections (“
”) only apply to
Counter A assignment. This reset may be different from the Counter A Reset
Action selected in Module 1.
SELECTION

NO
ZEr-St
CLd-St
ZEr-En
CLd-En

SETPOINT VALUE

to
to
to

Enter the desired Setpoint value. To enter a negative setpoint value,
increment digit 6 to display a “-” sign (Counter A only).

ACTION

No Auto Reset
Reset to Zero at the Start of output activation
Reset to Count Load value at the Start of output activation
Reset to Zero at the End of output activation (timed out only)
Reset to Count Load at the End of output activation (timed out only)

SETPOINT 1 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 2 (SP1 Only)

SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC

«
ª
Normal (
) turns the output “on” when activated and “off” when
deactivated. Reverse (
) turns the output “off” when activated and “on”
when deactivated.

This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 1 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 2 output (O1 off at O2). The “
” setting only applies if Setpoint 2
Output Action is programmed for timed output.

SETPOINT 2 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 1 (SP2 Only)

SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR

ª
Normal (
) displays the setpoint annunciator when the corresponding output
is “on”. Reverse (
) displays the setpoint annunciator when the output is “off”.

This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 2 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 1 output (O2 off at O1). The “
” setting only applies if Setpoint 1
Output Action is programmed for timed output.

SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE

SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH MANUAL RESET

will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down.
will activate the output at power up.
will deactivate the
output at power up.

SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE

ª
Selecting
causes the Setpoint output to deactivate (reset) when the
Setpoint Assigned Counter is reset. The counter reset can occur by the RST
button, User Input or Counter Reset at Power-up.
This output reset will not occur when the Assigned Counter is reset by a
Setpoint generated Counter Auto Reset.

ª
High Acting Boundary Type activates the output when the assigned display
value (
) equals or exceeds the Setpoint value. Low Acting activates the
output when the assigned display value is less than or equal to the Setpoint.

1-717-767-6511

135

PAXLCR PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press PAR key to enter
Programming Mode.

136

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAX - 1/8 DIN DIGITAL INPUT PANEL METERS
MODELS: COUNTER/RATE (PAXI) COUNTER (PAXC)

RATE (PAXR)

z COUNT, DUAL COUNTER, RATE AND SLAVE DISPLAY
z 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
z VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY
z 10 POINT SCALING FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES (PAXI)
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Option Card)
z RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/Option Card) (PAXI)
z COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/Option Card) (PAXI)
z BUS CAPABILITIES; DEVICENET, MODBUS, AND PROFIBUS-DP
z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE (PAXI)

UL
R

z ETHERNET(W/ External Gateway) (PAXI)
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The PAX Digital Input Panel Meters offer many features and performance
capabilities to suit a wide range of industrial applications. Available in three
different models, PAXC Counter/Dual Counter, PAXR Rate Meter and the PAXI
which offers both counting and rate in the same package. Refer to pages 4 - 5 for
the details on the specific models. The PAXC and PAXR offer only the Setpoint
Option, while the PAXI is the fully featured version offering all the capabilities
as outlined in this bulletin as well as a slave display feature. The optional plugin output cards allow the opportunity to configure the meter for present
applications, while providing easy upgrades for future needs.
The meters employ a bright 0.56" LED display. The meters are available with
a red sunlight readable or standard green LED display. The intensity of the
display can be adjusted from dark room applications up to sunlight readable,
making it ideal for viewing in bright light applications.
The meters accept digital inputs from a variety of sources including switch
contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits, magnetic pickups and all
standard RLC sensors. The meter can accept directional, uni-directional or
Quadrature signals simultaneously. The maximum input signal varies up to 34
KHz depending on the count mode and function configurations programmed.
Each input signal can be independently scaled to various process values.
The Rate Meters provide a MAX and MIN reading memory with
programmable capture time. The capture time is used to prevent detection of false
max or min readings which may occur during start-up or unusual process events.
The meters have four setpoint outputs, implemented on Plug-in option cards.
The Plug-in cards provide dual FORM-C relays (5A), quad FORM-A (3A), or
either quad sinking or quad sourcing open collector logic outputs. The setpoint
alarms can be configured to suit a variety of control and alarm requirements.
Communication and Bus Capabilities are also available as option cards for
the PAXI only. These include RS232, RS485, Modbus, DeviceNet, and
Profibus-DP. Readout values and setpoint alarm values can be controlled

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

through the bus. Additionally, the meters have a feature that allows a remote
computer to directly control the outputs of the meter. With an RS232 or RS485
card installed, it is possible to configure the meter using Red Lion’s Crimson
software. The configuration data can be saved to a file for later recall.
A linear DC output signal is available as an optional Plug-in card for the PAXI
only. The card provides either 20 mA or 10 V signals. The output can be scaled
independent of the input range and can track any of the counter or rate displays.
Once the meters have been initially configured, the parameter list may be
locked out from further modification in its entirety or only the setpoint values
can be made accessible.
The meters have been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise effects to CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.

1-717-767-6511

137

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications. . . . . . . .
PAXC Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAXR Rate Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAXI Counter/Rate Meter . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Plug-In Output Cards . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Jumper and DIP Switches .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2
3
4
4
5
6
7
7

Installing Plug-In Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display. . . 11
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Factory Service Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Parameter Value Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Programming Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAX

C - Counter/Dual Counter
R - Rate Meter
I - Counter/Dual Counter/
Rate Meter/Slave Display
0 - Red, Sunlight Readable Display
1 - Green Display
0 - 85 to 250 VAC
1 - 11 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC

Option Card and Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards
PAXCDC

Accessories
Accessories

SFCRD*
ICM8

DESCRIPTION

PAXCDS10

Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

RS485 Serial Communications Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

DeviceNet Communications Card

PAXCDC30

Modbus Communications Card

PAXCDC40

Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC4C

Profibus-DP Communications Card

PAXCDC50

Analog Output Card

PAXCDL10

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP

SFCRD200

Communication Gateway

ICM80000

*Crimson software is available for free download from http://www.redlion.net/
Shaded areas are only available for the PAXI

138

PART NUMBERS

Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card

www.redlion.net

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) red sunlight readable or standard green
LED
2. POWER:
AC Versions:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 18 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs. (300 V working)
DC Versions:
DC Power: 11 to 36 VDC, 14 W
(derate operating temperature to 40° C if operating <15 VDC and three
plug-in option cards are installed)
AC Power: 24 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs (50 V working).
3. SENSOR POWER: 12 VDC, ±10%, 100 mA max. Short circuit protected
4. KEYPAD: 3 programmable function keys, 5 keys total
5. USER INPUTS: Three programmable user inputs
Max. Continuous Input: 30 VDC
Isolation To Sensor Input Commons: Not isolated
Logic State: Jumper selectable for sink/source logic
INPUT STATE

SINKING INPUTS
Ω pull-up to +12 V
5.1 KΩ

SOURCING INPUTS
Ω pull-down
5.1 KΩ

Active

VIN < 0.9 VDC

VIN > 3.6 VDC

Inactive

VIN > 3.6 VDC

VIN < 0.9 VDC

Response Time: 6 msec. typical; function dependent. Certain resets, stores
and inhibits respond within 25 μsec if an edge occurs with the associated
counter or within 6 msec if no count edge occurs with the associated
counter. These functions include
,
,
,
,
,
, and
. Once activated, all functions are latched for
50 msec min. to 100 msec max. After that period, another edge/level may
be recognized.
6. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
display values.
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ±5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Note:
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the bulletin for additional
information.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C (0 to 45°C with all three plug-in
cards installed)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity noncondensing
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
10. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 10.1 oz. (286 g)

1-717-767-6511

139

MODEL PAXC - 1/8 DIN COUNTER
z 6-DIGIT LED DISPLAY (Alternating 8 digits for counting)
z DUAL COUNT QUAD INPUTS
z UP TO 3 COUNT DISPLAYS
z SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)

PAXC SPECIFICATIONS
MAXIMUM SIGNAL FREQUENCIES:
To determine the maximum frequency for the input(s), first answer the
questions with a yes (Y) or no (N). Next determine the Count Mode to be
used for the counter(s). If dual counters are used with different Count Modes,
then the lowest frequency applies to both counters.
FUNCTION QUESTIONS Single: Counter A or B Dual: Counter A & B
Are any setpoints used?

Is Counter C used?

COUNT MODE

(Values are in KHz)

Count x1

Count x2

Quadrature x1

3.5

Quadrature x2
Quadrature x4

17
8

13
6

9
4

7
3

3.5

N
Y

Y
N
18

N
Y

Y
N

Notes:
1. Counter Modes are explained in the Module 1 programming section.
2. Listed values are with frequency DIP switch set on HI frequency.

Y
Y
7.5

ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Counter A
B - Counter B
C - Counter C
- Upper significant digit display of counter
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Maximum display: 8 digits: ± 99999999 (greater than 6 digits display
Alternates between high order and low order.)
INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources including
switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all standard RLC
sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not have
the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup switches. The
user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low frequency filtering.
Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a dual count mode
must be debounced externally. The user input may only be selected for
sink/source by the User Jumper placement.

MODEL PAXR - 1/8 DIN RATE METER
z 5-DIGIT LED DISPLAY
z RATE INDICATION
z MINIMUM/MAXIMUM RATE DISPLAYS
z SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)

PAXR SPECIFICATIONS
ANNUNCIATORS:
- Rate
- Maximum (High) Rate
- Minimum (Low) Rate
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
RATE DISPLAY:
Accuracy: ±0.01%
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Maximum Frequency: 34 KHz
Maximum Display: 5 Digits: 99999
Adjustable Display (low) Update: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds
Over Range Display: “
”

140

INPUT A:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources including
TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXI - 1/8 DIN COUNTER/RATE METER

z COUNT, RATE AND SLAVE DISPLAY
z 6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
z VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY
z 10 POINT SCALING (FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES)
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)
z RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)
z COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)
z BUS CAPABILITIES; DEVICENET, MODBUS, AND PROFIBUS-DP
z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

FUNCTION QUESTIONS Single: Counter A or B (with/without rate) or Rate only Dual: Counter A & B or Rate not assigned to active single counter
Are any setpoints used?

Is Prescaler Output used?

Is Counter C used?

COUNT MODE

(Values are in KHz)

Count x1

Count x2

Quadrature x1

Quadrature x2

Quadrature x4

Rate Only

N/A

(Values are in KHz)

7.5

3.5 *

N/A

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Counter Modes are explained in the Module 1 programming section.
If using Rate with single counter with direction or quadrature, assign it to Input A for the listed frequency.
* Double the listed value for Rate frequency.
Listed values are with frequency DIP switch set on HI frequency.
Derate listed frequencies by 20% during serial communications. (Placing a 5 msec. delay between serial characters will eliminate the derating.)

ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Counter A
B - Counter B
C - Counter C
- Rate
- Maximum (High) Rate
- Minimum (Low) Rate
- Upper significant digit display of counter
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
RATE DISPLAY:
Accuracy: ±0.01%
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Maximum Frequency: see Max Signal Frequencies Table.
Maximum Display: 5 Digits: 99999
Adjustable Display (low) Update: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds
Over Range Display: “
”
COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Maximum display: 8 digits: ± 99999999 (greater than 6 digits display
Alternates between high order and low order.)

INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources
including switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all
standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not have
the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup switches. The
user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low frequency filtering.
Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a dual count mode
must be debounced externally. The user input may only be selected for
sink/source by the User Jumper placement.
PRESCALER OUTPUT:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1 VDC max. VOH = 30
VDC max. With duty cycle of 25% min. and 50 % max.

1-717-767-6511

141

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN OUTPUT CARDS
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards

The PAX and MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional plugin cards. The details for each plug-in card can be reviewed in the specification
section below. Only one card from each function type can be installed at one time.
The function types include Setpoint Alarms (PAXCDS), Communications
(PAXCDC), and Analog Output (PAXCDL). The plug-in cards can be installed
initially or at a later date.

PAXI COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming
the unit via Crimson, a Windows® based program, the RS232 or RS485 Cards
must be used.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (Connector)

PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC40 - Modbus (Terminal)
PAXCDC4C - Modbus (Connector)
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 or RS232
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Data: 7/8 bits
Baud: 300 to 19,200
Parity: no, odd or even
Bus Address: Selectable 0 to 99, Max. 32 meters per line (RS485)
Transmit Delay: Selectable for 2 to 50 msec or 50 to 100 msec (RS485)
DEVICENET™ CARD
Compatibility: Group 2 Server Only, not UCMM capable
Baud Rates: 12 5Kbaud, 250 Kbaud, and 500 Kbaud
Bus Interface: Phillips 82C250 or equivalent with MIS wiring protection per
DeviceNet™ Volume I Section 10.2.2.
Node Isolation: Bus powered, isolated node
Host Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between DeviceNet™
and meter input common.
MODBUS CARD
Type: RS485; RTU and ASCII MODBUS modes
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 minute.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
Baud Rates: 300 to 38400.
Data: 7/8 bits
Parity: No, Odd, or Even
Addresses: 1 to 247.
Transmit Delay: Programmable; See Transmit Delay explanation.
PROFIBUS-DP CARD
Fieldbus Type: Profibus-DP as per EN 50170, implemented with Siemens
SPC3 ASIC
Conformance: PNO Certified Profibus-DP Slave Device
Baud Rates: Automatic baud rate detection in the range 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Station Address: 0 to 126, set by the master over the network. Address stored
in non-volatile memory.
Connection: 9-pin Female D-Sub connector
Network Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between Profibus
network and sensor and user input commons. Not isolated from all other
commons.

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the PAX
meter from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands, that
make it easy to program the PAX meter. The PAX program can then be saved in
a PC file for future use. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to program the
meter using the software.

142

SETPOINT CARDS (PAXCDS)
The PAX and MPAX series has 4 available setpoint alarm output plug-in
cards. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the
outputs can be reversed in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector
DUAL RELAY CARD
Type: Two FORM-C relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2000 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 240 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load),
1/8 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with both relays energized not to exceed 5 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.
QUAD RELAY CARD
Type: Four FORM-A relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 3 amps @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load), 1/10
HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with all four relays energized not to exceed 4 amps
Life Expectancy: 100K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.
QUAD SINKING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sinking NPN transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: 100 mA max @ VSAT = 0.7 V max. VMAX = 30 V
Response Time: Counter = 25 μsec; Rate = Low Update time
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.
QUAD SOURCING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sourcing PNP transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: Internal supply: 24 VDC ± 10% , 30 mA max. total
External supply: 30 VDC max., 100 mA max. each output
Response Time: Counter = 25 μsec; Rate = Low Update time
Time Accuracy: Counter = ± 0.01% + 10 msec.
Rate = ± 0.01% + 20 msec.

PAXI LINEAR DC OUTPUT (PAXCDL)
Either a 0(4)-20 mA or 0-10 V retransmitted linear DC output is available
from the analog output plug-in card. The programmable output low and high
scaling can be based on various display values. Reverse slope output is possible
by reversing the scaling point positions.
PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card
ANALOG OUTPUT CARD
Types: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Accuracy: 0.17% of FS (18 to 28°C); 0.4% of FS (0 to 50°C)
Resolution: 1/3500
Compliance: 10 VDC: 10 KΩ load min., 20 mA: 500 Ω load max.
Response Time: 50 msec. max., 10 msec. typ.

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING

METER

THE

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert
the unit into the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel
latch should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a
proper seal, tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel
(Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices
that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPER

To access the jumper and switches, remove the meter base from the meter
case by firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This
should lower the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the
finger tabs). It is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the
other side latch.

AND

DIP SWITCHES

Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards. Remove
all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing inside of
the meter.

2.1 SETTING THE JUMPER

2.2 SETTING THE INPUT DIP SWITCHES

The meter has one jumper for user input logic. When using the user inputs
this jumper must be set before applying power. The Main Circuit Board figure
shows the location of the jumper and DIP switch.
The user input jumper determines signal logic for the user inputs, when they
are used with user functions or for input signal direction. All user inputs are set
by this jumper.

The meter has six DIP switches for Input A and Input B terminal set-up that
must be set before applying power. NOTE: The PAXR only uses switches 1-3.

6
5

Input B LO Freq.
Input B SRC.
Input B MAG.
Input A LO Freq.

Main
Circuit
Board

Input A SRC.
Input A MAG.

HI Freq.
SNK.

4
3

Logic

2
1

SNK.

HI Freq.
Logic

Factory Setting

SWITCHES 3 and 6

INPUT SET-UP
DIP SWITCHES

1 2 3 4 5 6

HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Also
limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.
USER
INPUT
JUMPER
SRC
SNK

SWITCHES 2 and 5
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.

SWITCHES 1 and 4
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
MAG: 200 mV peak input (must also have SRC on). Not recommended with
counting applications.

1-717-767-6511

143

3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
A

The Plug-in cards are separately purchased optional cards that perform
specific functions. These cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter. The
Plug-in cards have many unique functions when used with the PAX. The
literature that comes with these cards should be discarded, unless it specifically
states in the Plug-in Card literature that the information applies to the PAX.
Note: The PAXC and PAXR only use the setpoint option card.
CAUTION: The Plug-in card and main circuit board contain
static sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.

TOP VIEW

To Install:
1. With the case open, locate the Plug-in card connector for the card type to be
installed. The types are keyed by position with different main circuit board
connector locations. When installing the card, hold the meter by the rear
terminals and not by the front display board.*
2. Install the Plug-in card by aligning the card terminals with the slot bay in the
rear cover. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the tab on the Plug-in
card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
3. Slide the meter base back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
4. Apply the Plug-in card label to the bottom side of the meter in the designated
area. Do Not Cover the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of
the case must be clean for the label to adhere properly.

Quad Sourcing Open Collector Output Card Supply Select
* If installing the Quad sourcing Plug-in Card (PAXCDS40), set the
jumper for internal or external supply operation before continuing.

144

www.redlion.net

4.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).

b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

4.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC

4.2 USER INPUT WIRING

Before connecting the wires, the User Input Logic Jumper should be verified for proper position. If User Input 1
and/or 2 are wired for quadrature or directional counting, an additional switching device should not be connected to that
User Input terminal. Only the appropriate User Input terminal has to be wired.

Sinking Logic
Terminals 7-9
Terminal 10

}

Connect external switching device between the
appropriate User Input terminal and User Comm.

The user inputs of the meter are
internally pulled up to +12 V with 5.1 K
resistance. The input is active when it is
pulled low (<0 .9 V).

Sourcing Logic
Terminals 7-9:
+ VDC through external switching device
Terminal 10:
-VDC through external switching device
The user inputs of the meter are internally
pulled down to 0 V with 5.1 K resistance.
The input is active when a voltage greater
than 3.6 VDC is applied.

1-717-767-6511

145

4.3 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential
of the user input common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.

If you are wiring Input B, connect signal to Terminal 6 instead of 5, and set DIP switches 4, 5, and 6 to the positions shown for 1, 2, and 3.
Magnetic Pickup

Input A

AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.

Two Wire Proximity, Current Source
Input A

Input A

Current Sinking Output

Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink

Interfacing With TTL

Current Sourcing Output
Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source

Input A

Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction

Single Counter A

If using single Counter B, then wire signal to 6,
and Quad/Direction to 8. Set switch positions
4, 5, and 6 as shown for 1, 2, and 3.

Emitter Follower; Current Source

Input A

Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction

Input A

Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction
Counter A
& Rate B

User Input Jumper
in Sink Position

Switch position is application dependent.

Counter A &
Counter B

User Input Jumper
in Sink Position

Shaded areas not recommended for counting applications.

4.4 SETPOINT (ALARMS) WIRING

SOURCING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD

SETPOINT PLUG-IN CARD TERMINALS

SINKING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD

146

www.redlion.net

4.5 PAXI SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
RS232 Communications

RS485 Communications

The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the PAX is limited to 19.2k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that is,
data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.
RECEIVING DEVICE

PAX METER
+5V

Transmit
Enable

Terminal Block Connection Figure

33K
12
13

B(-)

A(+)
(+)

33K

COMM. *

15 NC

* OPTIONAL

Extended Comms Connection Figure

Terminal Block Connection Figure

RS232 is intended to allow two devices to communicate over distances up to
50 feet. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) transmits data on the Transmitted Data
(TXD) line and receives data on the Received Data (RXD) line. Data Computer
Equipment (DCE) receives data on the TXD line and transmits data on the RXD
line. The PAX emulates a DTE. If the other device connected to the meter also
emulates a DTE, the TXD and RXD lines must be interchanged for
communications to take place. This is known as a null modem connection. Most
printers emulate a DCE device while most computers emulate a DTE device.
Some devices cannot accept more than two or three characters in succession
without a pause in between. In these cases, the meter employs a busy function.
As the meter begins to transmit data, the RXD line (RS232) is monitored to
determine if the receiving device is “busy”. The receiving device asserts that it
is busy by setting the RXD line to a space condition (logic 0). The meter then
suspends transmission until the RXD line is released by the receiving device.

4.6 PAXI ANALOG OUTPUT WIRING

Extended Comms Connection Figure

4.7 PAXI PRESCALER OUTPUT WIRING

ANALOG OPTION CARD FIELD TERMINALS

5.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

DSP

Index display through the selected displays.

Quit programming and return to Display Mode

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

F1V

Function key 1; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 1 **

Increment selected parameter value or selections

F2W

Function key 2; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 2 **

Decrement selected parameter value or selections

RST

Reset (Function key) ***

Advances digit location in parameter values

* Counters B, and C are locked out in Factory Settings (PAXC and PAXI only).
** Factory setting for the F1, and F2 keys is NO mode.
(Reset Display).
*** Factory setting for the RST key is

1-717-767-6511

147

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

Shaded areas represent program access that is model dependent.

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (DSP KEY or at

The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters can be
programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by pressing the
PAR key. If it is not accessible then it is locked by either a security code, or a
hardware lock.
Two types of programming modes are available. Quick Programming Mode
permits only certain parameters to be viewed and/or modified. All meter
functions continue to operate except the front panel keys change to
Programming Mode Operations. Quick Programming Mode is configured in
Module 3. Full Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. In this mode, incoming counts may not be recognized correctly, the
front panel keys change to Programming Mode Operations and certain user
input functions are disabled. Throughout this document, Programming Mode
(without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming.

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the DSP key (from anywhere
in the Programming Mode) or the PAR key (with
displayed). This will
commit any stored parameter changes to memory and return the meter to the
Display Mode. If a parameter was just changed, the PAR key should be pressed
to store the change before pressing the DSP key. (If power loss occurs before
returning to the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

PAR KEY)

MODULE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)

FACTORY SETTINGS

PROGRAMMING TIPS
It is recommended to start with Module 1 for counting and Module 4 for rate.
If lost or confused while programming, press the DSP key and start over. When
programming is complete, it is recommended to record the parameter
programming on the Parameter User Chart and lock out parameter
programming with a user input or lock-out code.

The Programming Menu is organized into nine modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
and the present module. The arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used to select
the desired module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR key.

Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 9. This is a good
starting point for programming problems. Most parameters can be left at their
Factory Settings without affecting basic start-up. These parameters are
identified throughout the module explanations.

MODULE MENU (PAR KEY)

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY

Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The PAR key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to
. Programming may
continue by accessing additional modules.

In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used
to move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR key,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter
to the next parameter.
For numeric values, the RST key may be used to select a specific digit to be
changed. Once a digit is selected, the arrow keys are used to increment or
decrement that digit to the desired number.

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

6.1 MODULE 1 - COUNT A & B INPUT PARAMETERS (
PAXC & I

)

PARAMETER MENU

x = Counter A or Counter B

Module 1 is the programming for Counter A, Counter B and the Prescaler Output. Counter B parameters follow the Prescaler parameters. For
maximum input frequency, the counters should be set to mode NONE and the Prescaler to NO when they are not in use. When set to NONE
or NO, the remaining related parameters are not accessible. A corresponding annunciator indicates the counter being shown in the Display
Mode. An Exchange Parameter Lists feature for scale factors and count load values is explained in Module 2.

148

www.redlion.net

COUNTER A OPERATING MODE

NONE

cnt

COUNTER A SCALE MULTIPLIER *

quAd4 dquAd1 dquAd2 cnt2 cntud2 dctud2

MODE

DESCRIPTION

Does not count.

NONE
cnt
cntud

Count X1

Adds Input A falling edge.

Count X1
w/direction

Adds Input A falling edge if Input B is high.
Subtracts Input A falling edge if Input B is low.

dcntud

Count X1
w/direction

Adds Input A falling edge if User 1 is high. Subtracts
Input A falling edge if User 1 is low.

quAd1

Quad X1

Adds Input A rising edge when Input B is high.
Subtracts Input A falling edge when Input B is high.

quAd2

Quad X2

Adds Input A rising edge when Input B is high and
Input A falling edge when Input B is low. Subtracts
Input A falling edge when Input B is high and Input A
rising edge when Input B is low.

quAd4

ª
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale multiplier and the scale
factor to obtain the desired process value. A scale multiplier of 1 will result in
only the scale factor affecting the display. (Details on scaling calculations are
explained at the end of this section.)

Select the operating mode for Counter A.
SELECTION

cntud dcntud quAd1 quAd2

Quad X4

Adds Input A rising edge when Input B is high, Input
A falling edge when Input B is low, Input B rising
edge when Input A is low, and Input B falling edge
when Input A is high. Subtracts Input A falling edge
when Input B is high, Input A rising edge when Input
B is low, Input B rising edge when Input A is high,
and Input B falling edge when Input A is low.

dquAd1

Quad X1

Adds Input A rising edge when User 1 is high.
Subtracts Input A falling edge when User 1 is high.

dquAd2

Quad X2

Adds Input A rising edge when User 1 is high and
Input A falling edge when User 1 is low. Subtracts
Input A falling edge when User 1 is high and Input A
rising edge when User 1 is low.

cnt2
cntud2

Count X2

Adds Input A rising and falling edges.

Count X2
w/direction

Adds Input A rising and falling edges if Input B is
high. Subtracts Input A rising and falling edge if
Input B is low.

dctud2

Count X2
w/direction

Adds Input A rising and falling edges if User 1 is
high. Subtracts Input A rising and falling edge if
User 1 is low.

COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE *

«
ª

When reset to count load action is selected, Counter A will reset to this value.

COUNTER A RESET POWER-UP *

«
ª
Counter A may be programmed to reset at each meter power-up.

PAXI: PRESCALER OUTPUT ENABLE *

«
ª
This enables the prescaler output. The prescaler output is useful for providing
a lower frequency scaled pulse train to a PLC or another external counter. On
each falling edge of Input A, the prescaler output register increments by the
prescaler scale value (
). When the register equals or exceeds 1.0000, a
pulse is output and the register is lowered by 1.0000. The prescaler register is
reset to zero whenever Counter A is reset (except for Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset). (See Prescaler Output Figure.)

PAXI: PRESCALER SCALE VALUE *

COUNTER A RESET ACTION

When Counter A is reset, it returns to zero or Counter A count load value.
This reset action affects all Counter A resets, except the Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset in Module 6.

The prescaler output frequency is the Input A frequency times the prescaler
scale value.

COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION

«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter A and any setpoint value
assigned to Counter A. The selection will also affect Counter A scale factor
calculations.

COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

1-717-767-6511

149

COUNTER B OPERATING MODE

A ª

NONE

cnt

COUNTER B RESET POWER-UP *

dcntud dquAd1

dquAd2 cnt2 dctud2

Counter B may be programmed to reset at each meter power-up.

Select the operating mode for Counter B.
SELECTION

MODE

DESCRIPTION

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

Does not count.

NONE
cnt
dcntud

Count X1

Adds Input B falling edge.

Count X1
w/direction

Adds Input B falling edge if User 2 is high. Subtracts
Input B falling edge if User 2 is low.

dquAd1

Quad X1

Adds Input B rising edge when User 2 is high.
Subtracts Input B falling edge when User 2 is high.

dquAd2

Quad X2

Adds Input B rising edge when User 2 is high and
Input B falling edge when User 2 is low. Subtracts
Input B falling edge when User 2 is high and Input B
rising edge when User 2 is low.

cnt2
dctud2

Count X2

Adds Input B rising and falling edges.

Count X2
w/direction

Adds Input B rising and falling edges if User 2 is
high. Subtracts Input B rising and falling edge if
User 2 is low.

COUNTER B RESET ACTION

8 DIGIT COUNT VALUES
Any counter display value below -99999 or above 999999 (less decimal
point) will consist of a two part display. This display alternates between the
least 6 significant digits and the remaining most significant digits beginning
with “ ” in the display. If the display exceeds ± 99999999 the display will roll
to zero and continue counting. Outputs cannot be set to counter values above 6
digits. The annunciator, indicating the counter being displayed, will flash when
the value is above 6 digits.

SCALING CALCULATIONS
Each counter has the ability to scale an input signal to a desired display
value. This is accomplished by the counter mode (x- ), scale factor (x
),
scale multiplier (x
) and decimal point (x
). The scale factor is
calculated using:
SF (x

«
ª

Where:

When Counter B is reset, it returns to zero or Counter B count load value.
This reset action affects all Counter B resets, except the Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset Action in Module 6.

Desired
Display
Decimal DDD

COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION

«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter B and any setpoint value
assigned to Counter B. The selection will also affect Counter B scale factor
calculations.

COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR

«
ª
The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale multiplier and the scale
factor to obtain the desired process value. A scale multiplier of 1 will result in
only the scale factor affecting the display. (Details on scaling calculations are
explained at the end of this section.)

COUNTER B COUNT LOAD VALUE *
to

When reset to count load action is selected, Counter B will reset to this value.

150

Counter Decimal Selection

None

0.0

Tenths

100

0.00

Hundredths

1000

0.000

Thousandths

10000

0.0000

Ten Thousandths

100000

0.00000

Hundred Thousandths

Number of pulses per ‘single’ unit: pulses per unit generated by the
process (i.e. # of pulses per foot)
CM: Counter Mode(x- ) times factor of the mode 1,2 or 4.
SM: Scale Multiplier (x
) selection of 1, 0.1 or 0.01.

1. Show feet to the hundredths (0.00) with 100 pulses per foot:
Scale Factor would be 100 / (100 x 1 x 1) = 1
(In this case, the scale multiplier and counter mode factor are 1)
2. Show feet with 120 pulses per foot: Scale Factor would be 1 / (120 x 1 x 1)
= 0.0083333. (In this case, the scale multiplier of 0.01 could be used: 1 / (120
x 1 x 0.01) = 0.83333 or show to hundredths (0.00): 100 / (120 x 1 x 1) =
0.8333.)

General Rules on Scaling

COUNTER B SCALE MULTIPLIER *

Desired Display Decimal DDD
(Number of pulses per ‘single’ unit x CM x SM)

Example:

1. It is recommended that, the scale factor be as close as possible to, but not
exceeding 1.00000. This can be accomplished by increasing or decreasing
the counter decimal point position, using the scale multiplier, or selecting a
different count mode.
2. To double the number of pulses per unit, use counter modes direction X2 or
quad X2. To increase it by four times, use counter mode quad X4. Using
these modes will decrease the maximum input frequency.
3. A scale factor greater than 1.00000 will cause Counter display rounding. In
this case, digit jumps could be caused by the internal count register rounding
the display. The precision of a counter application cannot be improved by
using a scale factor greater than 1. 00000.
4. The number of pulses per single unit must be greater than or equal to the
DDD value for the scale factor to be less than or equal to one.
5. Lowering the scale factor can be accomplished by lowering the counter
decimal position. (Example: 100 (Hundredths)/10 pulses = 10.000 lowering
to 10 (Tenths)/10 = 1.000.)

www.redlion.net

6.2 MODULE 2 - USER INPUT AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETERS (
)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 2 is the programming for rear terminal user inputs and front panel
function keys.
Three rear terminal user inputs are individually programmable to perform
specific meter control functions. While in the Display Mode, the function is
executed when the user input transitions to the active state. (Refer to the user
input specifications for active state response times.) Certain user input functions
are disabled in “full” Programming Mode.
Three front panel function F1, F2 and RST keys are also individually
programmable to perform specific meter control functions. While in the Display
Mode, the primary function is executed when the key is pressed. Holding the
F1 and F2 function keys for three seconds executes a secondary function. It is
possible to program a secondary function without a primary function. The front
panel key functions are disabled in both Programming Modes.
In most cases, if more than one user input and/or function key is programmed
for the same function, the maintained (level trigger) actions will be performed
while at least one of those user inputs or function keys are activated. The
momentary (edge trigger) actions are performed every time any of those user
inputs or function keys transition to the active state. All functions are available
to both user inputs and function keys.
Some of the user functions have a sublist of parameters. The sublist is
accessed when PAR is pressed at the listed function. The function will only be
performed for the parameters entered as
. If a user input or function key is
configured for a function with a sublist, then that sublist will need to be scrolled
through each time to access the following user inputs or function keys
parameters.

«
ª

With this selection, NO function is performed. This is the factory setting for
all user inputs and function keys except the Reset (RST) Key.
NOTE: When a user input is used to accept a quad or directional input
signal, then that user input should be programmed for NO function.

PROGRAMMING MODE LOCK-OUT
Programming Mode is locked-out, as long as activated
(maintained action). In Module 3, certain parameters can
be setup where they are still accessible during
Programming Mode Lockout. A security code can be configured to allow
complete programming access during user input lockout. Function keys should
not be programmed for
.

ADVANCE DISPLAY

Shaded parameters do not apply to the PAXR.

PAXI: PRINT REQUEST

RESET DISPLAY

The meter issues a block print through the serial port when activated. The
data transmitted during the print request is configured in Module 7. If the user
input is still active after the transmission is complete (about 100 msec.), an
additional transmission will occur. Only one transmission will take place with
each function key depression. This selection will only function when a serial
communications Plug-in card is installed in the meter.

The meter issues a block print through the serial port when activated just like
the Print Request function. In addition, when activated (momentary action), the
meter performs a reset of the displays configured as
. The print aspect of this
action only functions when a serial communication plug-in card is installed.
The reset action functions regardless.
DISPLAY

When activated (momentary action), the display advances to the next display
that is not locked out from the Display Mode.

Two lists of values are available for
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
. The two lists are named
and
.
If a user input is used to select the list then
is selected when the user
input is not active and and
is selected when the user input is active,
(maintained action). If a front panel key is used to select the list then the list will
toggle for each key press, (momentary action). The meter will suspend ALL
operations for approximately 1 msec. while the new values are loaded. The
display will only indicate which list is active when the list is changed or when
entering any Programming Mode.
To program the values for
and
, first complete the
programming of all the parameters. Exit programming and switch to the other
list. Re-enter programming and enter the values for
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
. If any other parameters are
changed then the other list values must be reprogrammed.

PAXI: PRINT REQUEST AND RESET DISPLAYS

NO FUNCTION

EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO

DESCRIPTION

Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum

FACTORY

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

When activated (momentary action), the shown display is reset. This is the
factory setting for the Reset (RST) Key.

1-717-767-6511

151

MAINTAINED (LEVEL) RESET AND INHIBIT

DEACTIVATE SETPOINT MAINTAINED (LEVEL)

A ª

The meter performs a reset and inhibits the displays configured as
long as activated (maintained action).
DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

, as

DISPLAY

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

The meter performs a reset and inhibits the displays configured as
long as activated (maintained action).
DESCRIPTION

HI
LO

, as

When activated (momentary action), the meter deactivates the setpoints
configured as
. This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.
DISPLAY

MOMENTARY (EDGE) RESET

When activated (momentary action), the meter resets the displays configured as
. (Momentary resets improve max. input frequencies over maintained resets.)
DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

When activated (momentary action), the meter resets the displays configured as
. (Momentary resets improve max. input frequencies over maintained resets.)

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

1
2
3
4

FACTORY

NO
NO
NO
NO

ACTIVATE SETPOINT MOMENTARY (EDGE)

ª
DISPLAY

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

STORE DISPLAY

«
ª

The meter holds (freeze) the displays configured as
, as long as activated
(maintained action). Internally the counters and max. and min. values continue to
update.
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
FACTORY

152

When activated (momentary action), the meter activates the setpoints
configured as
. This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

, as long as activated

FACTORY

Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum

NO
NO
NO
NO

The meter activates the setpoints configured as
, as long as activated
(maintained action). This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO

1
2
3
4

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

DISPLAY

INHIBIT

DESCRIPTION

NO
NO

The meter inhibits the displays configured as
(maintained action).

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO

The meter holds the state of the setpoints configured as
, as long as
activated (maintained action). This action only functions with a Setpoint plug-in
card installed.
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
FACTORY

FACTORY

Maximum
Minimum

ª
DISPLAY

NO
NO
NO
NO

ACTIVATE SETPOINT MAINTAINED (LEVEL)

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

ª
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

DISPLAY

1
2
3
4

PAXR: MOMENTARY (EDGE) RESET

HI
LO

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

HOLD SETPOINT STATE

DISPLAY

NO
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO

FACTORY

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

1
2
3
4

FACTORY

Maximum
Minimum

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

DEACTIVATE SETPOINT MOMENTARY (EDGE)

PAXR: MAINTAINED (LEVEL) RESET AND INHIBIT

DISPLAY

The meter deactivates the setpoints configured as
, as long as activated
(maintained action). This action only functions with a Setpoint card installed.

FACTORY

Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Maximum
Minimum

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
HI
LO

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

1
2
3
4

FACTORY

NO
NO
NO
NO

CHANGE DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

«
ª

When activated (momentary action), the display intensity changes to the next
intensity level (of 4). The four levels correspond to Display Intensity Level
(
) settings of 0, 3, 8 & 15. The intensity level, when changed via the User
Input/ Function Key, is not retained at power-down, unless Quick Programming
or Full Programming mode is entered and exited. The meter will power-up at the
last saved intensity level.

www.redlion.net

6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND PROGRAM
PARAMETERS

LOCK-OUT
(
)

PARAMETER MENU

x = Counter A , Counter B, and then Counter C
n = Setpoints 1 to 4

Shaded areas represent program access that is model dependent.

Module 3 is the programming for Display lock-out and “Full” and “Quick”
Program lock-out.
When in the Display Mode, the available displays can be read consecutively
by repeatedly pressing the DSP key. An annunciator indicates the display being
shown. These displays can be locked from being visible. It is recommended that
the display be set to
when the corresponding function is not used.
SELECTION

DESCRIPTION

SETPOINT 1 to 4 ACCESS LOCK-OUT *

«
ª

The setpoint displays can be programmed for
,
, or
(See the
following table). Accessible only with the Setpoint Plug-in card installed.

Visible in Display Mode

COUNT LOAD A B C ACCESS LOCK-OUT *

Not visible in Display Mode

“Full” Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. This Programming Mode can be locked with a security code and/or
user input. When locked and the PAR key is pressed, the meter enters a Quick
Programming Mode. In this mode, setpoint, count load and scale factor values
can still be read and/or changed per the selections below. The Display Intensity
Level (
) parameter also appears whenever Quick Programming Mode is
enabled, and the security code is greater than zero.
SELECTION

«
ª

These displays can be programmed for

«
ª

Not visible in Quick Programming Mode

, or

ª
,

, or

SECURITY CODE *

«
ª

The Scale Factor values can be programmed for

COUNTER A B C DISPLAY LOCK-OUT *
RATE DISPLAY LOCK-OUT *
MAX. MIN. DISPLAY LOCK-OUT *

SCALE FACTOR A B C ACCESS LOCK-OUT *

Visible but not changeable in Quick Programming Mode
Visible and changeable in Quick Programming Mode

DESCRIPTION

Entry of a non-zero value will cause the prompt
to appear when trying to
access the “Full” Programming Mode. Access will only be allowed after entering
a matching security code or universal code of
. With this lock-out, a user input
would not have to be configured for Program Lock-out. However, this lock-out is
overridden by an inactive user input configured for Program Lock-out.

These displays can be programmed for

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

Shaded areas are model dependent.

PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS
SECURITY
CODE

USER INPUT
CONFIGURED

USER INPUT
STATE

WHEN PAR KEY IS
PRESSED

“FULL” PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS

not

————

“Full” Programming

not

————

Quick Programming w/Display Intensity

Immediate access.
After Quick Programming with correct code # at

prompt.

Active

Quick Programming w/Display Intensity

After Quick Programming with correct code # at

prompt.

Not Active

“Full” Programming

Immediate access.

Active

Quick Programming

No access

Not Active

“Full” Programming

Immediate access.

Throughout this document, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming (all meter parameters are accessible).

1-717-767-6511

153

6.4 MODULE 4 - RATE INPUT PARAMETERS (
A

) - PAXR & I

PARAMETER MENU

Module 4 is the programming for the Rate parameters. For maximum input
frequency, Rate assignment should be set to
when not in use. When set to
, the remaining related parameters are not accessible. The Rate value is
shown with an annunciator of ‘ ’ in the Display Mode.
Note: For PAXR,
is actually
on the unit’s display and
is
actually
on the unit’s display.

PAXI: RATE ASSIGNMENT

ª
For measuring the rate (speed) of pulses on Input A, select
. For Input
B select
. This assignment is independent of the counting modes.

LOW UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY UPDATE) *

Non-linear processes may utilize up to nine segments (ten scaling points) to
provide a piece-wise linear approximation representing the non-linear function.
The Rate display will be linear throughout each individual segment (i.e.
between sequential scaling points). Thus, the greater the number of segments,
the greater the conformity accuracy. Several linearization equations are
available in the SFPAX software.

About Scaling Points

Non-linear Application – Up to 10 Scaling Points

seconds

Each Scaling Point is specified by two programmable parameters: A desired
Rate Display Value (
) and a corresponding Rate Input Value (
).
Scaling points are entered sequentially in ascending order of Rate Input Value.
Two scaling points must be programmed to define the upper and lower
endpoints of the first linear segment. Setting
, automatically factory sets
the first scaling point to 0.0 for typical single segment, zero based applications.
When multiple segments are used, the upper scaling point for a given segment
becomes the lower scaling point for the next sequential segment. Thus, for each
additional segment used, only one additional scaling point must be programmed.
The following chart shows the Scaling Points, the corresponding Parameter
mnemonics, and the Factory Default Settings for each point.
SEGMENT

HIGH UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY ZERO) *

«
ª

seconds

ª
This selects the decimal point position for Rate, Minimum and Maximum
rate displays and any setpoint value assigned to these displays. This parameter
does not affect rate scaling calculations.

INPUT
PARAMETER

INPUT
DEFAULT

000000

00000.0

001000

01000.0

002000

02000.0

003000

03000.0

004000

04000.0

005000

05000.0

006000

06000.0

007000

07000.0

008000

08000.0

009000

09000.0

PAXI: RATE DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

PAXI: RATE INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

«
ª

PAXI: LINEARIZER SEGMENTS

Confirm the Rate Input Value for the first Scaling Point is 0.0. (See Note)

This parameter specifies the number of linear segments used for the Rate
Scaling function. Each linear segment has two scaling points which define the
upper and lower endpoints of the segment. The number of segments used
depends on the linearity of the process and the display accuracy required as
described below.

Linear Application – 2 Scaling Points
Linear processes use a single segment (two scaling points) to provide a linear
Rate display from 0 up to the maximum input frequency. For typical zero based
frequency measurements (0 Hz = 0 on display), leave
(factory setting).
For non-zero based 2 scaling point applications, set
, to enter both the
zero segment (
&
) and segment 1 (
&
).

154

DISPLAY
DEFAULT

Confirm the Rate Display Value for the first Scaling Point is 0. This parameter
is automatically set to 0 and does not appear when
. (See Note)

DISPLAY
PARAMETER

RATE DECIMAL POSITION

SCALING
POINT

Note: For all linear and most non-linear applications, the Scaling Point 1
parameters (
and
) should be set to 0 and 0.0 respectively.
Consult the factory before using any non-zero values for Scaling Point 1. These
parameters are automatically set to 0 and do not appear when
.

RATE DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

«
ª

Enter the desired Rate Display Value for the second Scaling Point by using
the arrow keys.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

www.redlion.net

RATE INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

RATE SCALING

ª
Enter the corresponding Rate Input Value for the second Scaling Point by
using the arrow keys. Rate Input values for scaling points can be entered by
using the Key-in or the Applied method described below.

Key-in Method:
Enter the Rate Input value (
) that corresponds to the entered Rate
Display value (
) by pressing the F1 or F2 keys. This value is always in
pulses per second (Hz).

Applied Method:
Apply an external rate signal to the appropriate input terminals. At the Rate
Input Value (
) press and hold the F1 and F2 keys at the same time. The
applied input frequency (in Hz) will appear on the display. (To verify correct
reading wait for at least the length of the Low Update Time. Then press and
hold the F1 and F2 keys at the same time again. The new value should be ±
0.1% of the previous entered value.) Press PAR to enter the displayed
frequency as the Rate Input value. To prevent the displayed value from being
entered, press DSP. This will take the meter out of Programming Mode and the
previous Rate Input value will remain.

RATE DISPLAY ROUND *

«
ª
Rounding values other than one round the Rate display to the nearest
increment selected (e.g. rounding of ‘5’ causes 122 to round to 120 and 123 to
round to 125). Rounding starts at the least significant digit of the Rate display.

LOW CUT OUT *

«
ª

The Low Cut Out value forces the Rate display to zero when the Rate display
falls below the value entered.

MAXIMUM CAPTURE DELAY TIME *

«
ª

seconds

When the Rate value is above the present Maximum rate value for the
entered amount of time, the meter will capture that Rate value as the new
Maximum value. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short
spikes. Maximum detection will only function if Rate is assigned to Input A or
B. The Maximum rate value is shown with an annunciator of ‘ ’ in the display
and will continue to function independent of being displayed.

To scale the Rate, enter a Scaling Display value with a corresponding Scaling
Input value. (The Display and Input values can be entered by Key-in or Applied
Methods.) These values are internally plotted to a Display value of 0 and Input
value of 0 Hz. A linear relationship is formed between these points to yield a
rate display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. The PAXI
and PAXR are capable of showing a rate display value for any linear process.

KEY-IN SCALING METHOD CALCULATION
If a display value versus input signal (in pulses per second) is known, then
those values can be entered into Scaling Display (
x) and Scaling Input
(
x). No further calculations are needed.
If only the number of pulses per ‘single’ unit (i.e. # of pulses per foot) is
known, then it can be entered as the Scaling Input value and the Scaling Display
value will be entered as the following:
RATE PER
Second

DISPLAY (

INPUT (

# of pulses per unit

Minute

# of pulses per unit

Hour

3600

# of pulses per unit

MINIMUM CAPTURE DELAY TIME *

«
ª

seconds

When the Rate value is below the present Minimum rate value for the entered
amount of time, the meter will capture that Rate value as the new Minimum
value. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.
Minimum detection will only function if Rate is assigned to Input A or B. The
Minimum rate value is shown with an annunciator of ‘ ’ in the display and will
continue to function independent of being displayed.

RATE DISPLAY EXCEEDED
If the rate of the input signal causes a display that exceeds the capacity of the
Rate display (5 digits, 99999), then the display will indicate an overflow
condition by showing “
”. During this overflow condition, the Minimum
and Maximum rate values will stay at their values even during resets.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

1-717-767-6511

155

6.5 MODULE 5 - COUNTER C INPUT PARAMETERS (
A

PAXC & I

PARAMETER MENU

Module 5 is the programming for Counter C. For maximum input frequency,
the counter operating mode should be set to
when not in use. When set to
the remaining related parameters are not accessible. The C annunciator
indicates that Counter C is being shown in the Display Mode. An Exchange
Parameter List feature for scale factor and count load values is explained in
Module 2.

«
ª
Select the operating mode for Counter C.

Add Ab

Sub Ab

Does not count.

COUNTER C SCALE MULTIPLIER

Counter C counts the incoming pulses from Counter A input
as per Counter A mode of operation. The signal is scaled only
according to Counter C parameters.
Counter C counts the incoming pulses from Counter A and B
inputs as per Counter A and B modes of operation. The result
is scaled only according to Counter C parameters. (Example:
If Counter A is set for Count X1 mode and Counter B is set
for Count X2 mode, then Counter C will increment by 1 for
each pulse received on Input A and increment by 2 for each
pulse received on Input B less any effects of scaling.)
Counter C counts the incoming pulses from Counter A and B
inputs as per Counter A and B modes of operation and
subtracts the B counts from the A counts. The result is scaled
only according to Counter C parameters. (Example: If
Counter A is set for Count X1 mode and Counter B is set for
Count X2 mode, then Counter C will increment by 1 for each
pulse received on Input A and decrement by 2 for each pulse
received on Input B less any effects of scaling.)

Note: When using Add Ab or Sub Ab, Counter A, B and C must all be reset
at the same time for the math to be performed on the display values.

SLAVE

COUNTER C SCALE FACTOR

The number of input counts is multiplied by the scale factor and the scale
multiplier to obtain the desired process value. A scale factor of 1.00000 will
result in the display of the actual number of input counts. For (Numeric
transmissions) modes of operation, the input signal is scaled directly. For
and
modes of operation, the math is performed on the input signals
and then the result is scaled. To achieve correct results, both Input A and Input
B must provide the same amount of pulses per unit of measurement. (Details on
scaling calculations are explained at the end of Module 1 section.)

COUNTER C OPERATING MODE *

NONE
A

)

COUNTER C COUNT LOAD VALUE

«
ª

When reset to count load action is selected, Counter C will reset to this value.

See Serial Communications for details.

(PAXI only)

COUNTER C RESET POWER-UP *

COUNTER C RESET ACTION

Counter C may be programmed to reset at each meter power-up.

ª
When Counter C is reset, it returns to zero or Counter C count load value.
This reset action affects all Counter C resets, except the Setpoint Counter Auto
Reset Action in Module 6.

COUNTER C DECIMAL POSITION

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

«
ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter C and any setpoint value
assigned to Counter C. The selection will also affect Counter C scale factor
calculations.

156

www.redlion.net

6.6 MODULE 6 - SETPOINT (ALARM) PARAMETERS (

)
A

PARAMETER MENU

Module 6 is the programming for the setpoint (alarms) output parameters. To have setpoint outputs, a setpoint Plug-in card needs to
be installed into the PAX (see Ordering Information). Depending on the card installed, there will be two or four setpoint outputs
available. This section replaces the bulletin that comes with the setpoint plug-in card. Please discard the separate literature when using
the Plug-in card with the Digital PAX. For maximum input frequency, unused Setpoints should be configured for
action.
The setpoint assignment and the setpoint action determine certain setpoint feature availability. The chart below illustrates this.

SETPOINT PARAMETER AVAILABILITY
RATE
PARAMETER

LIt-n
OUt-n
SUP-n
SP-n
trC-n
tyP-n
Stb-n
HyS-n
tOFF-n
tON-n
tOUt-n
AUtO-n
rSd-n
rSAS-n
rSAE-n

DESCRIPTION

COUNTER

TIMED OUT

BOUNDARY

LATCH

TIMED OUT

BOUNDARY

LATCH

Annunciators

Yes

Output Logic

Yes

Power Up State

Yes

Setpoint Value

Yes

Setpoint Tracking

Yes

Boundary Type

Yes

Standby Operation

Yes

Setpoint Hysteresis

Yes

Setpoint Off Delay

Yes

Setpoint On Delay

Yes

Setpoint Time Out

Yes

Counter Auto Reset

Yes

Reset With Display Reset

Yes

Reset When SPn+1 Activates

Yes

Reset When SPn+1 Deactivates

Yes

SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC *

SETPOINT SELECT

«
ª

Select a setpoint (alarm output) to open the remaining module menu. (The
“ ” in the following parameters will reflect the chosen setpoint number.) After
the chosen setpoint is programmed, the display will default to
. Select
the next setpoint to be programmed and continue the sequence for each setpoint.
Pressing PAR at
will exit Module 6.

Normal ( ) turns the output “on” when activated and “off” when
deactivated. Reverse ( ) turns the output “off” when activated and “on” when
deactivated.

SETPOINT POWER UP STATE *

SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS*

ª
disables the display of the setpoint annunciator. Normal ( ) displays
the corresponding setpoint annunciator of an “on” alarm output. Reverse ( )
displays the corresponding setpoint annunciator of an “off” alarm output.
flashes the display and the corresponding setpoint annunciator of an
“on” alarm output.

will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down.
will activate the output at power up.
will deactivate the
output at power up.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

1-717-767-6511

157

SETPOINT ACTION

SETPOINT STANDBY OPERATION *

A ª

«
ª

: When not using a setpoint, it should be set to

(no action).

For Counter Assignments:

LAtCH
bOUNd

tOUt

With Latch action, the setpoint output activates when the count
value equals the setpoint value. The output remains active until
reset. This action is not associated with Boundary types.
With boundary action, the setpoint output activates when the
= ) or less than
count value is greater than or equal to (for
= ) the setpoint value. The setpoint output
or equal to (for
= )
will deactivate when the count value is less than (for
= ) the setpoint value.
or greater than (for
With Timed Out action, the setpoint output activates when the
count value equals the setpoint value and deactivates after the
Time Out value. This action is not associated with Boundary
types.

For Rate Assignments:

LAtCH

bOUNd

tOUt

With Latch action, the setpoint output activates when the rate
value is equal to the setpoint value. The setpoint output remains
active until reset. If after reset, the rate value is greater than or
= ) or less than or equal to (for
= ) the
equal to (for
setpoint value, the output will reactivate.
With Boundary action, the setpoint output activates when the
= ) or less than
rate value is greater than or equal to (for
= ) the setpoint value. The setpoint output
or equal to (for
will deactivate (Auto reset) as determined by the hysteresis
value.
With Timed Out action, the setpoint output cycles when the rate
= ) or less than or
value is greater than or equal to (for
= ) the setpoint value. The Setpoint Time Out
equal to (for
) and Setpoint On Delay (
) values determine the
(
cycling times.

Selecting
will disable low acting setpoints at a power up until the display
value crosses into the alarm “off” area. Once in the alarm “off” area, the
setpoint will function according to the configured setpoint parameters.

PAXI & R: SETPOINT HYSTERESIS *

The hysteresis value is added to (for
= ), or subtracted from (for
=
), the setpoint value to determine at what value to deactivate the associated
setpoint output. Hysteresis is only available for setpoints assigned to the Rate
with boundary action.

PAXI & R: SETPOINT OFF DELAY *

This is the amount of time the Rate display must meet the setpoint
deactivation requirements (below hysteresis for high acting and above
hysteresis for low acting) before the setpoint’s output deactivates.

PAXI & R: SETPOINT ON DELAY *

«
«
Select the display that the setpoint is to be assigned.

SETPOINT TIME OUT *

SETPOINT VALUE

seconds

This is the amount of time the Rate display must meet the setpoint activation
requirements (below setpoint for
= and above setpoint for
= ) before
the setpoint’s output activates. If the Rate Setpoint Action is Timed Out, this is
the amount of time the output is off during the on / off output cycling.

PAXC & I: SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

seconds

Enter the desired setpoint value. Setpoint values can also be entered in the
Quick Programming Mode when the setpoint is configured as
in Module 3.
(See Module 2 for Exchange Parameter Lists explanation.)

seconds

If the setpoint action is Timed Out and the setpoint is assigned to Rate, then
this is the amount of time the output is on during the on / off output cycling. If
the setpoint action is Timed Out and the setpoint is assigned to Count, then this
is the amount of time the output will activate once the count value equals the
setpoint value.

SETPOINT TRACKING *

PAXC & I: COUNTER AUTO RESET *

If a selection other than NO is chosen, then the value of the setpoint being
programmed (“n”) will track the entered selection’s value. Tracking means that
when the selection’s value is changed (in the Quick Programming Mode), the
“n” setpoint value will also change (or follow) by the same amount.

This automatically resets the display value of the Setpoint Assignment (
) counter each time the setpoint value is reached. This reset may be different
than the Counter’s Reset Action (x
) in Module 1 or 5.
SELECTION

SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE

«
ª
activates the output when the assigned display value (
) equals or
exceeds the setpoint value.
activates the setpoint when the assigned display
value is less than or equal to the setpoint.

ZErOAS CLdAS
ZErOAE CLdAE

NO
ZErOAS
CLdAS
ZErOAE
CLdAE

ACTION

No auto reset.
Reset to zero at the start of output activation.
Reset to count load value at the start of output activation.
Reset to zero at the end of output activation. (

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

158

www.redlion.net

action only).

Reset to count load value at the end of output activation. (
action only).

PAXC & I: SETPOINT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET *

PAXC & I: SETPOINT RESET WHEN SPn+1 DEACTIVATES *

Select
, so the setpoint output will deactivate (reset) when the Setpoint
Assignment (
) counter display resets. The only exception is if the
assigned counter is reset by a Counter Auto reset generated by another setpoint.

Select
, so the setpoint output will deactivate (reset) when SPn +1
activates and then times out (deactivates). This function may only be used if the
SPn+1 is programmed for Setpoint Action of
. (Example SP1 deactivates
when SP2 is activated and then times out.) The last setpoint will wrap around
to the first.

PAXC & I: SETPOINT RESET WHEN SPn+1 ACTIVATES *

«
ª

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

Select
, so the setpoint output will deactivate (reset) when SPn +1
activates. (Example: SP1 deactivates when SP2 activates and SP4 when SP1
activates.) The last setpoint will wrap around to the first.

PAXR & I: SETPOINT (ALARM) FIGURES FOR RATE
(For Reverse Action, The Alarm state is opposite.)
LOW ACTING WITH NO DELAY

LOW ACTING WITH DELAY

HIGH ACTING WITH NO DELAY

HIGH ACTING WITH DELAY

HIGH ACTING WITH TIMEOUT

LOW ACTING WITH TIMEOUT

1-717-767-6511

159

6.7 MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (
A

PAXI ONLY

PARAMETER MENU

Module 7 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the PAXI
with those of the host computer or other serial device, such as a terminal or
printer. This programming module can only be accessed if an RS232 or RS485
Serial Communications card is installed.
This section also includes an explanation of the commands and formatting
required for communicating with the PAXI. In order to establish serial
communications, the user must have host software that can send and receive
ASCII characters. Red Lion's SFPAX software can be used for configuring the
PAXI (See Ordering Information). For serial hardware and wiring details, refer
to section 4.5 Serial Communication Wiring.
This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the PAXI. Also, this section does NOT apply to the
DeviceNet, Modbus, or Profibus-DP communication cards. For details on the
operation of the Fieldbus cards, refer to the bulletin shipped with each card.

BAUD RATE

METER UNIT ADDRESS

Enter the serial meter (node) address. With a single unit, an address is not
needed and a value of zero can be used. With multiple units (RS485
applications), a unique 2 digit address number must be assigned to each meter.

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

«
ª
Select
for full print or Command T transmissions (meter address,
parameter data and mnemonics) or
for abbreviated print transmissions
(parameter data only). This will affect all the parameters selected in the print
options. (If the meter address is 00, it will not be sent during a full
transmission.)

ª
Set the baud rate to match the other serial communications equipment on the
serial link. Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value that all the serial
equipment are capable of transmitting and receiving.

PRINT OPTIONS

«
ª
- Enters the sub-menu to select the meter parameters to appear during a
print request. For each parameter in the sub-menu, select
for that parameter
information to be sent during a print request or
for that parameter
information not to be sent. A print request is sometimes referred to as a block
print because more than one parameter information (meter address, parameter
data and mnemonics) can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.

DATA BIT

«
ª
Select either 7 or 8 bit data word lengths. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

PARAMETER

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
rAtE
HILO
SCFAC
CNtLd
SPNt

PARITY BIT

«
ª
Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial communications equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores the parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If no parity is selected with 7 bit word length, an
additional stop bit is used to force the frame size to 10 bits.

DESCRIPTION

Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
Rate
Max. & Min.
A B C Scale Factors
A B C Count Load
1 2 3 4 Setpoints *

FACTORY

yES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

*Setpoints are plug-in card dependent.

160

)

www.redlion.net

MNEMONIC

CTA
CTB
CTC
RTE
MIN MAX
SFA SFB SFC
LDA LDB LDC
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4

SENDING SERIAL COMMANDS AND DATA

Command String Examples:

Command Chart
Command Description

Notes

Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
Node (Meter) Address
two digit node address. Not required when
Specifier
address = 00.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value change (write) followed by register ID character and numeric
data.
Reset a register or output. Must be followed
Reset
by register ID character
Block Print Request
Initiates a block print output. Registers are
(read)
defined in programming.

N
T
V
R
P

1. Address = 17, Write 350 to Setpoint 1
String: N17VM350$
2. Address = 5, Read Count A value, response time of 50 - 100 msec. min.
String: N05TA*
3. Address = 0, Reset Setpoint 4 output
String: RS*

Transmitting Data To the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to Transmit Details listed in
the Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. Negative numbers
must have a minus sign. The meter ignores any decimal point and conforms the
number to the scaled resolution. (ie. The meter’s scaled decimal point position
is set for 0.0 and 25 is written to a register. The value of the register is now 2.5.
In this case, write a value of 250 to equal 25.0).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.

Transmitting Data From the Meter
Data is transmitted from the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a print block command (P) or User Function print request. The response
from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated transmission.
The meter response is established in Module 7.

Full Transmission
Byte

Description

1, 2

2 byte Node (Meter) Address field [00-99]

(Space)

4-6

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

7-18

12 byte numeric data field: 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one
byte for decimal point

(Carriage return)

(Line feed)

(Space)3

(Carriage return)3

(Line feed)3

These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.

Count B

CTB

T, V, R

6 digit (V), 8 digit (T)

Count C

CTC

T, V, R

6 digit (V), 8 digit (T)

Rate

RTE

T, V

5 digit, positive only

Min

MIN

T, V, R

5 digit, positive only

Max

MAX

T, V, R

5 digit, positive only

Scale Factor A

SFA

T, V

6 digit, positive only

The first two characters transmitted (bytes 1 and 2) are the unit address. If the
address assigned is 00, two spaces are substituted. A space (byte 3) follows the
unit address field. The next three characters (bytes 4 to 6) are the register
mnemonic. The numeric data is transmitted next.
The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12 characters long. When the requested
value exceeds eight digits for count values or five digits for rate values, an *
(used as an overflow character) replaces the space in byte 7. Byte 8 is always a
space. The remaining ten positions of this field (bytes 9 to 18) consist of a minus
sign (for negative values), a floating decimal point (if applicable), and eight
positions for the requested value. The data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned
with leading spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with (byte 19), and
(byte 20). When a block print is finished, an extra (byte 21), (byte
22), and (byte 23) are used to provide separation between the
transmissions.

Scale Factor B

SFB

T, V

6 digit, positive only

Abbreviated Transmission

Scale Factor C

SFC

T, V

6 digit, positive only

Byte

Count Load A

LDA

T, V

5 negative / 6 positive

1-12

Count Load B

LDB

T, V

5 negative / 6 positive

Count Load C

LDC

T, V

5 negative / 6 positive

Setpoint 1

SP1

T, V, R

5 negative / 6 positive

Setpoint 2

SP2

T, V, R

5 negative / 6 positive

13
14
15
16
17

Setpoint 3

SP3

T, V, R

5 negative / 6 positive

Setpoint 4

SP4

T, V, R

5 negative / 6 positive

VALUE DESCRIPTION

Count A

TRANSMIT DETAILS

CTA

T, V, R

6 digit (V), 8 digit (T)

Auto/Manual Register

MMR

T, V

0 - auto, 1 - manual

Analog Output Register

AOR

T, V

0 - 4095 normalized

Setpoint Register

SOR

T, V

0 - not active, 1 - active

1. Register Names are also used as Register Mnemonics during full transmission.
2. The registers associated with the P command are set up in Print Options (Module 7).
3. Unless otherwise specified, the Transmit Details apply to both T and V
Commands.

Description

12 byte data field, 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte
for decimal point
(Carriage return)
(Line feed)
(Space)3
(Carriage return)3
(Line feed)3

These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the address and register mnemonics,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.
3

Meter Response Examples:
1. Address = 17, full field response, Count A = 875
17 CTA
875
2. Address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 2 = -250.5
SP2
-250.5
3. Address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block print
250

1-717-767-6511

161

Auto/Manual Mode Register (MMR) ID: U

This register sets the controlling mode for the outputs. In Auto Mode (0) the
meter controls the setpoint and analog output. In Manual Mode (1) the outputs
are defined by the registers SOR and AOR. When transferring from auto mode
to manual mode, the meter holds the last output value (until the register is
changed by a write). Each output may be independently changed to auto or
manual. In a write command string (VU), any character besides 0 or 1 in a field
will not change the corresponding output mode.
U abcde

Writing to this register (VW) while the analog output is in the Manual Mode
causes the output signal level to update immediately to the value sent. While in
the Automatic Mode, this register may be written to, but it has no effect until the
analog output is placed in the manual mode. When in the Automatic Mode, the
meter controls the analog output signal level. Reading from this register (TW)
will show the present value of the analog output signal.
Example: VW2047 will result in an output of 10.000 mA, 12.000 mA or
5.000V depending on the range selected.

Setpoint Output Register (SOR) ID: X

e = Analog Output
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1

This register stores the states of the setpoint outputs. Reading from this
register (TX) will show the present state of all the setpoint outputs. A “0” in the
setpoint location means the output is off and a “1” means the output is on.
X abcd
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1

Example: VU00011 places SP4 and Analog in manual.

Analog Output Register (AOR) ID: W
This register stores the present signal value of the analog output. The range
of values of this register is 0 to 4095, which corresponds to the analog output
range per the following chart:
*Due to the absolute
Output Signal*
accuracy rating and
Register Value
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
0-10V
resolution of the output
0
0.000
4.000
0.000
card, the actual output
1
0.005
4.004
0.0025
signal may differ 0.15% FS
from the table values. The
2047
10.000
12.000
5.000
output signal corresponds
4094
19.995
19.996
9.9975
to the range selected (0-20
4095
20.000
20.000
10.000
mA, 4-20 mA or 0-10 V).

In Automatic Mode, the meter controls the setpoint output state. In Manual
Mode, writing to this register (VX) will change the output state. Sending any
character besides 0 or 1 in a field or if the corresponding output was not first in
manual mode, the corresponding output value will not change. (It is not
necessary to send least significant 0s.)
Example: VX10 will result in output 1 on and output 2 off.

COUNTER C SLAVE COMMUNICATIONS
Counter C may be programmed for
, to act as a serial slave display. By doing this, the carriage return
is added as a valid command terminator character for all serial command strings. The as a terminator may be
very useful for standard serial commands, even if Counter C is never displayed or sent a slave message. The $
terminator should not be used in the slave mode. If numeric values are not to be saved to EPROM then send the value
as a literal transmission with terminator.
The Counter C slave display is right aligned. It has a capacity of displaying six characters. When less than six
characters are received, blank spaces will be placed in front of the characters. If more than six characters are sent,
then only the last six are displayed. The meter has a 192 character buffer for the slave display. If more than 192
characters are sent, the additional characters are discarded until a terminator is received. Counter C processes
numeric and literal transmissions differently.

Numeric Transmissions

Literal Transmissions

When a string that does not begin with #, T, V, P or R is received, the meter
processes it as a Numeric transmission. In this case, only the recognized numbers
and punctuation are displayed. All other characters in the string are discarded. If
a negative sign appears anywhere in the string the resulting number will be
negative. Only the most significant decimal point is retained. If no numerical
characters are received, then the numeric value will be zero. The numeric display
can be used for setpoint (boundary action only) and analog output functions.
When using this display for setpoint and analog output values, the decimal point
position must match the programming entered through the front panel. The
numeric value is retained in Counter C memory until another Numeric
transmission is received.

When a string that begins with # is received, the meter processes it as a Literal
transmission. In this case, any unrecognized characters will be replaced with a
space. A Literal display will replace a Numeric value in the Counter C display.
However, it will not remove a previous Numeric value from Counter C memory
or prevent the Counter C outputs from functioning with the Numeric value.
Literal transmissions are only possible when using RS232 or RS485 cards.
Recognized Characters = a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, l, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u,
y, z (in upper or lower case)
Recognized Numbers = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Recognized Punctuation = period, comma, minus, blank

Recognized Numbers = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Recognized Punctuation = period, comma, minus

162

www.redlion.net

COMMAND RESPONSE TIME

SERIAL TIMING

COMMENT

PROCESS TIME (t2)

Numeric Slave

2-50 msec.

Reset

2-50 msec.

COMMAND

Literal

2-50 msec.

Write

100-200 msec.

Transmit

2-50 msec. for $

50-100 msec. for * and
2-50 msec. for $
50-100 msec. for * and

Timing Diagrams

t1 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies (See Timing Diagrams). If no response from the meter is
expected, the meter is ready to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The ‘*’ or ‘’ terminating character
results in a response time window of 50 msec. minimum and 100 msec.
maximum. This allows sufficient time for the release of the sending driver on
the RS485 bus. Terminating the command line with ‘$’ results in a response
time window (t2) of 2 msec. minimum and 50 msec. maximum. The faster
response time of this terminating character requires that sending drivers release
within 2 msec. after the terminating character is received.
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter is
ready to receive the next command.

NO REPLY FROM METER

RESPONSE FROM METER

t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
The maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the
times t1, t2 and t3.

COMMUNICATION FORMAT
Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character.
The voltage level conventions depend on the interface standard. The table
lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Start bit and Data bits
Data transmission always begins with the start bit. The start bit signals the
receiving device to prepare for reception of data. One bit period later, the least
significant bit of the ASCII encoded character is transmitted, followed by the
remaining data bits. The receiving device then reads each bit position as they are
transmitted.

Character Frame Figure

Parity bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The PAX meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Stop bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the PAXI.

1-717-767-6511

163

6.8 MODULE 8 - ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS (
A

PAXI ONLY

PARAMETER MENU

Module 8 is the programming for the analog output parameters. To have an
analog output signal, an analog output plug-in card needs to be installed (See
Ordering Information). This section replaces the bulletin that comes with the
analog plug-in card. Please discard the separate literature when using the plugin card with the PAXI.

«
ª

0-20
4-20
0-10

ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE

«
ª

RANGE

0 to 20 mA

ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE

= Counter B Value
= Counter C Value

rAtE
LO
HI

-99999

999999

Enter the display value within the selected Analog Assignment that
corresponds to the high limit of the type selected.
The decimal point is determined by the decimal point setting of the assigned
counter or rate. The scale value can not be set to read values with more than 6
digits. Reverse acting output is possible by reversing the scaling values.

A CNt b CNt C CNt
rAtE
LO
HI
= Counter A Value

«
ª

Select the display that the analog output is to follow:

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt

999999

0 to 10 V

ANALOG ASSIGNMENT

4 to 20 mA

Enter the analog output type. For voltage output use terminals 16 and 17. For
current output use terminals 18 and 19. Only one range can be used at a time.

-99999

Enter the display value within the selected Analog Assignment that
corresponds to the low limit of the type selected.
The decimal point is determined by the decimal point setting of the assigned
counter or rate. The scale value can not be set to read values with more than 6
digits. Reverse acting output is possible by reversing the scaling values.

ANALOG TYPE
SELECTION

)

= Rate Value
= Minimum Value
= Maximum Value

6.9 MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

«
ª

164

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (0-15) by
using the arrow keys. The display will actively dim or
brighten as the levels are changed. This parameter also
appears in Quick Programming Mode when enabled.

Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
The meter will display
and then returns to
.
Press DSP key to return to the Display Mode. This will
overwrite all user settings with the factory settings.
Pressing the PAR and DSP keys at the same time on power-up will load the
factory settings and display
. This allows operation in the event of a
memory failure or corrupted data. Immediately press RST key and reprogram
the meter. If the meter is powered down again before pressing the RST key, the
existing dynamic data will not be overwritten.

www.redlion.net

Analog Output Card Calibration

PAXI: CALIBRATION

The only item in the PAXI meter that can be calibrated
is the Analog Output. The Count A and B values are scaled
using the parameters in Module 1, Counter C value is scaled
using Module 5 and the Rate value is scaled using Module 4. If the meter appears
to be indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to the Troubleshooting section.
When Analog Out recalibration is required (generally every 2 years), it
should be performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment.
Calibration does not change any user programmed parameters.
Calibration may be aborted by disconnecting power to the meter before
exiting Module 9. In this case, the existing calibration settings remain in effect.

Before starting, verify that a precision meter with an accuracy of 0.05% or
better (voltmeter for voltage output and/or current meter for current output) is
connected and ready. Then perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2.
is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select
and press PAR.
3. Using the chart below, step through the five selections to be calibrated. At
each prompt, use the PAXI arrow keys to adjust the output so that the
external meter display matches the selection being calibrated. When the
external reading matches, or if the range is not being calibrated, press PAR.
SELECTION

EXTERNAL METER

0.0-A
4.0-A
20.0-A
0.0u
10.0u

Note: Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before staring calibration.

4. When

ACTION

0.00

Adjust if necessary, press PAR

4.00

Adjust if necessary, press PAR

20.00

Adjust if necessary, press PAR

0.00

Adjust if necessary, press PAR

10.00

Adjust if necessary, press PAR

appears, press PAR twice and remove the external meters .

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
PROBLEM

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

CHECK: Power level, power connections

PROGRAM LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Active (lock-out) user input
ENTER: Security code requested

CERTAIN DISPLAYS ARE LOCKED OUT

CHECK: Module 3 programming

INCORRECT DISPLAY VALUE or NOT
COUNTING

CHECK: Input wiring, DIP switch setting, input programming, scale factor calculation,
input signal level, user input jumper, lower input signal frequency

USER INPUT NOT WORKING CORRECTLY

CHECK: User input wiring, user input jumper, user input being used for signal, Module 2

OUTPUT DOES NOT WORK

CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation, output configuration, output wiring

JITTERY DISPLAY

CHECK: Wiring is per EMC installation guidelines, input signal frequency, signal quality,
scaling, update time, DIP switch setting

“

CHECK: Lower input signal frequency, reduce rate scaling

” RATE

MODULES or PARAMETERS NOT ACCESSIBLE

CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation, related controlling parameter selected

ERROR CODE (

PRESS: Reset key (if unable to clear contact factory.)

)

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

CHECK: Wiring, connections, meter and host settings

Shaded areas are model dependent.

1-717-767-6511

165

PARAMETER VALUE CHART
PAX Model Number _________

Programmer ________________ Date ________
Meter# _____________ Security Code __________

1-INP Counter A & B Input Parameters - PAXC & I only
FACTORY
SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

A CNt
ArESEt
AdECPt
ASCFAC

COUNTER A OPERATING MODE
COUNTER A RESET ACTION
COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION
COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR (A)
COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR (B) *
COUNTER A SCALE MULTIPLIER
COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE (A)
COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE (B)*
COUNTER A RESET POWER-UP
PRESCALER OUTPUT ENABLE
PRESCALER SCALE VALUE
COUNTER B OPERATING MODE
COUNTER B RESET ACTION
COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION
COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR (A)
COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR (B)*
COUNTER B SCALE MULTIPLIER
COUNTER B COUNT LOAD VALUE (A)
COUNTER B COUNT LOAD VALUE (B)*
COUNTER B RESET POWER-UP

ASCALr
ACNtLd
A P-UP
PrSEN
PrVAL
b CNt
brESEt
bdECPt
bSCFAC
bSCALr
bCNtLd
b P-UP

USER SETTING

cnt
ZErO

500

* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.

2-FNC User Input and Function Key Parameters
DISPLAY

USr-1
USr-2
USr-3
F1
F2
rSt
Sc-F1
Sc-F2

PARAMETER

USER INPUT 1
USER INPUT 2
USER INPUT 3
FUNCTION KEY 1
FUNCTION KEY 2
RESET KEY
2nd FUNCTION KEY 1
2nd FUNCTION KEY 2

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
dSPrSt
NO
NO

A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
rAtE
HI
LO
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
ACNtLd
bCNtLd
CCNtLd
ASCFAC
bSCFAC
CSCFAC
COdE

PARAMETER

COUNTER A DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
COUNTER B DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
COUNTER C DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
RATE DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
MAX DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
MIN DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 1 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 2 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 3 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
SETPOINT 4 ACCESS LOCK-OUT
COUNT LOAD A ACCESS
COUNT LOAD B ACCESS
COUNT LOAD C ACCESS
SCALE FACTOR A ACCESS
SCALE FACTOR B ACCESS
SCALE FACTOR C ACCESS
SECURITY CODE

FACTORY
SETTING

rEd
LOC
LOC
rEd
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
ENt
LOC
LOC
0

DISPLAY

rAtEEN
LO-Udt
HI-Udt
rtE dP
SE6S
rdSP 0
rINP 0
rdSP 1
rINP 1
rdSP 2
rINP 2
rdSP 3
rINP 3
rdSP 4
rINP 4
rdSP 5
rINP 5
rdSP 6
rINP 6
rdSP 7
rINP 7
rdSP 8
rINP 8
rdSP 9
rINP 9
rOUNd
LOCUt
HI-t
LO-t

FACTORY
SETTING

RATE ASSIGNMENT
LOW UPDATE TIME
HIGH UPDATE TIME
RATE DECIMAL POINT
LINEARIZER SEGMENTS
SCALING PT. 1 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 1 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 2 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 2 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 3 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 3 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 4 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 4 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 5 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 5 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 6 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 6 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 7 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 7 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 8 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 8 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 9 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 9 - INPUT VALUE
SCALING PT. 10 - DISPLAY VALUE
SCALING PT. 10 - INPUT VALUE
RATE DISPLAY ROUNDING
MINIMUM LOW CUT OUT
MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME
MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

rAtE-a
1.0
2.0
0
0
0
0.0
1000
1000.0
2000
2000.0
3000
3000.0
4000
4000.0
5000
5000.0
6000
6000.0
7000
7000.0
8000
8000.0
9000
9000.0
1
0
2.0
2.0

USER SETTING

5-CtrC Counter C Input Parameters - PAXC & I only

USER SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

C CNt
CrESEt
CdECPt
CSCFAC

COUNTER C OPERATING MODE
COUNTER C RESET ACTION
COUNTER C DECIMAL POSITION
COUNTER C SCALE FACTOR (A)
COUNTER C SCALE FACTOR (B)*
COUNTER C SCALE MULTIPLIER
COUNTER C COUNT LOAD VALUE (A)
COUNTER C COUNT LOAD VALUE (B)*
COUNTER C RESET POWER-UP

CSCALr
CCNtLd
C P-UP

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

NONE
ZErO

500

* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.

Shaded areas are model dependent.

166

PARAMETER

Shaded areas are model dependent.

3-LOC Display and Program Lockout Parameters
DISPLAY

4-rtE Rate Input Parameters - PAXI & R only

www.redlion.net

6-SPt
DISPLAY

LIt-n
OUt-n
SUP-n
ACt-n
ASN-n
SP-n
trC-n
tYP-n
Stb-n
HYS-n
tOFF-n
tON-n
tOUt-n
AUtO-n
rSd-n
rSAS-n
rSAE-n

Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters

SP-1

PARAMETER

FACTORY
SETTING

SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS
SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC
SETPOINT POWER UP STATE
SETPOINT ACTION
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
SETPOINT VALUE (A)
SETPOINT VALUE (B)*
SETPOINT TRACKING
SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE
STANDBY OPERATION
SETPOINT HYSTERESIS (rate)
SETPOINT OFF DELAY
SETPOINT ON DELAY
SETPOINT TIME OUT
COUNTER AUTO RESET ACTION
SETPOINT RESET WITH DISPLAY
RESET WHEN SPn+1 ACTIVATES
RESET WHEN SPn+1 DEACTIVATES

NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO

SP-2

USER SETTING

FACTORY
SETTING

SP-3

USER SETTING

NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO

FACTORY
SETTING

SP-4

USER SETTING

NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

NOr
NOr
OFF
OFF
A CNt
100
100
NO
HI
NO
0
0.00
0.00
1.00
NO
NO
NO
NO

* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.

7-SrL Serial Communication Parameters - PAXI only
DISPLAY

bAUd
dAtA
PAr
Addr
AbrV
A CNt
b CNt
C CNt
rAtE
HILO
SCFAC
CNtLd
SPNt

PARAMETER

BAUD RATE
DATA BIT
PARITY BIT
METER ADDRESS
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
PRINT COUNTER A
PRINT COUNTER B
PRINT COUNTER C
PRINT RATE
PRINT MAX & MIN
PRINT SCALE FACTORS
PRINT COUNT LOAD VALUES
PRINT SETPOINT VALUES

FACTORY
SETTING

9600
7
Odd
00
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

USER SETTING

8-AnA Analog Output Parameters - PAXI only
DISPLAY

tYPE
ASIN
AN-LO
AN-HI

PARAMETER

FACTORY
SETTING

ANALOG TYPE
ANALOG ASSIGNMENT
ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE
ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE

4-20
rAtE
0
1000

USER SETTING

9-fCS Factory Service Parameters
DISPLAY

d-LEV

1-717-767-6511

PARAMETER

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

167

168

www.redlion.net

Factory
Service Code

Display
Intensity Level

Off Time
Delay

Meter
Address

Analog Low
Scale Value

Print Scale
Factors

Print Setpoint
Values

Print
Counter A

Print Count
Load Values

Print
Options

Boundary
Type

Min. Capture
Delay Time

x = Counter A, B, or C
= Setpoint number
# = Scaling Points (0-9)

Reset
w/SPn+1
Deactivates

Max. Capture
Delay Time

Prescaler
Scale
Value

Reset when
SPn+1
Activates

Setpoint
Tracking

Reset with
Display Reset

Setpoint
Value

Min. Low
Cut-out

Security
Code

Prescaler
Output
Enable

Rate Display
Rounding

Counter C
Reset at
Power-up

Counter
Auto Reset

Setpoint
Assignment

Counter C
Count Load
Value

Time-out
Value

Abbreviated
Printing

Setpoint
Action

#
Rate Scaling
Input

Scale
Factor x
Access

x
Counter x
Count Load
Access

FUNCTION KEYS

x
Counter x
Reset at
Power-up

x
Counter x
Count Load
Value

Rate Scaling
Display

Counter C
Scale
Multiplier

Linearizer
Segments

Print
Max/Min

Analog High
Scale Value

x
Counter x
Scale
Multiplier

Setpoint 1-4
Access

On Time
Delay

Power-up
State

Counter C
Scale
Factor

Rate Decimal
Position

Min
Display
Lock-out

Counter x
Scale
Factor

Print Rate

Parity Bit

Print
Counter C

Analog
Assignment

Print
Counter B

Data Bit

Analog
Type

Baud
Rate

Output
Logic

Counter C
Decimal
Position

High Update
Time

Max
Display
Lock-out

Setpoint
Hysteresis

Setpoint
Annunciators

Setpoint
Select

Standby
Operation

Counter C
Reset
Action

Low Update
Time

Rate
Assignment

x
Counter x
Decimal
Position

Counter C
Operating
Mode

Rate
Display
Lock-out

Counter x
Display
Lock-out

USER INPUTS

Counter x
Reset
Action

Counter x
Operating
Mode

F1/F2 Keys

Counter parameters apply to the PAXC and PAXI, while the rate
parameters apply to the PAXR and PAXI.

PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

MODEL PAXI - 1/8 DIN DUAL COUNTER/RATE METER
This is a brief overview of the PAXI. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Digital Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 137.

UL
R

US LISTED

COUNTER, DUAL COUNTER, RATE AND SLAVE DISPLAY

6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY

VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY

10 POINT SCALING (FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES)

FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)

RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)

COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)

BUS CAPABILITIES; DEVICENET, MODBUS, AND PROFIBUS-DP

CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

PAXI SPECIFICATIONS
MAXIMUM SIGNAL FREQUENCIES TABLE
To determine the maximum frequency for the input(s), first answer the questions with a yes (Y) or no (N). Next determine the Count Mode
to be used for the counter(s). If dual counters are used with different Count Modes, then the lowest frequency applies to both counters.
FUNCTION QUESTIONS Single: Counter A or B (with/without rate) or Rate only Dual: Counter A & B or Rate not assigned to active single counter
Are any setpoints used?

Is Prescaler Output used?

Is Counter C used?

COUNT MODE

(Values are in KHz)

Count x1

7.5

Count x2

Quadrature x1

3.5 *

Quadrature x2

3.5 *

Quadrature x4

Rate Only

N/A

INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources
including switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all
standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not
have the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup
switches. The user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low
frequency filtering. Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a
dual count mode must be debounced externally. The user input may
only be selected for sink/source by the User Jumper placement.
PRESCALER OUTPUT:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1 VDC max. VOH = 30
VDC max. With duty cycle of 25% min. and 50 % max.

1-717-767-6511

169

This page intentionally left blank.
170

www.redlion.net

PRESET
COUNTERS
B

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

171

QUICK Specs
Preset Counters
CUB5

DUAL OUTPUTS
C48C

PAXLCR

M U LT I O U T P U T S
PAXC

Counter/Rate Meter

1/16 DIN Counter/Rate Meter

1/8 DIN Counter/Rate Meter
With Setpoint Capability

1/8 DIN Counter
With Setpoint Capability

39 mm (H) x 75 mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 50 mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97 mm (W)

8 Digit, .46" (12mm) Reflective,
Green and Red Backlight LCD

2 x 6 Digit, Main Display .3"
(7mm) Sec. Display .2" (5mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD

6 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) Standard
Green or Sunlight Readable Red
LED, Adjustable Intensity

Counting
Capability

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature
Batch

Max. Input
Frequency

20,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent

12,000 Counts/Sec.
Model and Program Dependent

20,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent

34,000 Counts/Sec.
34,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent

Yes

Reset
Capability

Front Panel, Remote

Sensor Power

No
Yes, with Micro Line
Power Supply

12 VDC @ 100 mA

24 VDC @ 100 mA, over 50 V
24 VDC @ 50 mA, under 50 V

12 VDC @ 100 mA

Setpoint
Capability

Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking

Single Form A
Dual Form A
Current Sinking

Dual Form C Relays

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

RS485

Power Source

9 to 28 VDC

85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

50 to 250 VAC
21.6 to 250 VDC

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

Page Number

Page 177

Page 178

Page 184

Page 185

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

Input Scaling &
Decimal Points

Communications

172

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Preset Counters
PAXI

M U LT I O U T P U T S
LEGEND

LEGEND PLUS

DUAL OUTPUTS
GEM1 / 2

B
1/8 DIN Counter/Rate Meter
With Output Optio Card
Capability

Counter/Rate Meter

Counter/Rate Meter with
Messaging Capability

Counter or Rate Meter

50 mm (H) x 97 mm (W)

75 mm (H) x 75 mm (W)

69 mm (H) x 133 mm (W)

2 x 8 Digit, .3" (7mm)
Backlight LCD

2 x 8 Digit, .3" (7mm)
Backlight LCD,
Dual Color Version

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) LED

Counting
Capability

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature
Batch

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature
Batch
Foot/Inch

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature

Max. Input
Frequency

34,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent

23,000 Counts/Sec.
Model and Program Dependent

15,000 Counts/Sec.
Model and Program Dependent

10,000 Counts/Sec.
Model and Program Dependent

Yes

Front Panel, Remote

12 VDC @ 100 mA

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

1,2,4 or 6 Preset Capability,
Dual Relay
Current Sinking

Single Form C
Dual Form C
Current Sinking

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

RS485

RS232
RS485

20 mA Current Loop

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

115/230 VAC
12 VDC

115/230 VAC
11 to 14 VDC

Page Number

Page 186

Page 187

Page 193

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) Standard
Display Green or Sunlight Readable Red
LED, Adjustable Intensity

Input Scaling &
Decimal Points
Reset
Capability

Sensor Power

Setpoint
Capability

Communications

*See website for product information.

1-717-767-6511

173

QUICK Specs
Preset Counters
DUAL OUTPUTS
GEM33

LIBC

Counter/Rate Meter or
Dual Count Capability

Batch Counter

Counter

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

69 mm (H) x 133 mm (W)

72 mm (H) x 72 mm (W)

Display

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) LED

4 Digit, .4" (10mm) LED
4 Digit, .5" (13mm) LCD

Counting
Capability

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature
Dual Count

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature
Batch

Uni-Directional
Up/Down

Max. Input
Frequency

10,000 Counts/Sec.
Model and Program Dependent

2500 Counts/Sec.

Yes

Front Panel, Remote

12 VDC @ 100 mA

Single or Dual Form C
Current Sinking

Single or Dual Form C,
Solid State

20 mA Current Loop

Power Source

115/230 VAC
11 to 14 VDC

Page Number

GEM41 / 42

Description

Input Scaling &
Decimal Points
Reset
Capability

Sensor Power

Setpoint
Capability

Communications

*See website for product information.

174

www.redlion.net

REPLACEMENT Guide
CURRENT PRODUCT

WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES

MODEL NUMBER

Q Display:

.2" (5 mm) Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC, 10 to
28 VDC, 10 to 28 VAC
Q Count Speed: 12 KHz Max.
CUBC

FEATURES

C48C

2 x 6, Main Display .3"
(7 mm), Secondary Display .2"
(5 mm) Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Q Count Speed: 12 KHz Max.
Q Display:

Q Display:

.3" (8 mm) Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC, 11 to
14 VDC, 21.5 to 30 VDC
Q Count Speed: 2500 Hz Max.
LYNX

C48C

2 x 6, Main Display .3"
(7 mm), Secondary Display .2"
(5 mm) Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Q Count Speed: 12 KHz Max.
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display:

Q Display:

None
Source: 115/230 VAC, 12 VDC
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.
Q Power

SCP

PAXLCR

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 50 to 250 VAC,
21.6 to 250 VDC
Q Count Speed: 20 KHz Max.
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display:

Q Display:

6 Digit, .43" (11 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC, 12 VDC
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.
SCD

PAXLCR

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 50 to 250 VAC,
21.6 to 250 VDC
Q Count Speed: 20 KHz Max.
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display:

Q Display:

6 Digit, .43" (11 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC, 12 VDC
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.
SC2

PAXLCR

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 50 to 250 VAC,
21.6 to 250 VDC
Q Count Speed: 20 KHz Max.
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display:

Q Display:

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC or 11 to
14 VDC
Q Count Speed: 10 KHz Max.
PAXI
GEM1, 2, 33, 41 and 42

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Q Count Speed: 34 KHz Max.
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display:

Q Display:

4 Digit, .4" (10 mm) LED or
.5" (13 mm) LCD
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC, 11 to
14 VDC
Q Count Speed: 2500 Hz
C48C
LIBRA

2 x 6, Main Display .3"
(7 mm), Secondary Display .2"
(5 mm) Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Q Count Speed: 12 KHz Max.
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences

Q Display:
Q Display:

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Count Speed: 50 KHz Max.
PAXI

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Q Count Speed: 34 KHz Max.
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card

IMI
Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.

1-717-767-6511

175

This page intentionally left blank.
176

www.redlion.net

MODEL CUB5 - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 8-DIGIT DUAL COUNTER AND
RATE INDICATOR
This is a brief overview of the CUB5. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
CUB5 Bulletin starting on page 102.

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING

0.46" (11.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS

OPTIONAL RELAY OUTPUT MODULE

OPTIONAL COMMS OUTPUT MODULES

COUNT SPEEDS UP TO 20 KHZ

OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE

PROGRAMMABLE SCALING FOR COUNT AND RATE

BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL

QUADRATURE SENSING (UP TO 4 TIMES RESOLUTION)

ANTI-COINCIDENCE COUNTING (ADD/ADD & ADD/SUB)

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

SPECIFICATIONS
COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Counter A: 8-digits, enabled in all count modes
Display Range: -9999999 to 99999999
Overflow Indication: Display flashes “Cnt OVEr”
Counter B: 7-digits, enabled in Dual Counter mode only
Display Designator: “b” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 9999999 (positive count only)
Overflow Indication: Display flashes “bCntOVEr”
Maximum Count Rates: 50% duty cycle
Without setpoint option card: 20 KHz (all count modes)
With setpoint option card: 20 KHz for any count mode except Quadrature
x4 (18 KHz) and Dual Counter (17 KHz)
RATE DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be enabled or disabled in any mode
Display Designator: “R” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Over Range Display: “R OLOLOL”
Maximum Frequency: 20 KHz
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%
COUNT/RATE SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A and INP B):
Input A: DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources.
See Section 2.0 Setting the DIP Switches for Input A specifications.
Input B: Logic signals only
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Current sinking: Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Filter (LO Freq.): Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce.
Limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.

1-717-767-6511

177

C48C SERIES - 1/16 DIN COUNTERS
MODEL C48CS - SINGLE PRESET
MODEL C48CD - DUAL PRESET
MODEL C48CB - THREE PRESET BATCH

LCD, 7 SEGMENT, 2 LINE, 6 DIGIT DISPLAY, POSITIVE
REFLECTIVE OR NEGATIVE TRANSMISSIVE MODELS WITH
RED TOP LINE AND GREEN BOTTOM LINE BACKLIGHTING

QUADRATURE SENSING ( Up to 4 times resolution)

BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL

FIELD REPLACEABLE RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS

HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL STACKING OF MULTIPLE UNITS

STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS

85 to 250 VAC OR 18 to 36 VDC/24 VAC POWERED UNITS

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED BEZEL

RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION

PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE OPERATOR
ACCESS PRIVILEGES AND PROTECTED VALUE MENU

CHOICE OF NUMERIC DATA ENTRY MODES

PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS AND FRONT PANEL
FUNCTION KEY

DESCRIPTION

UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808

The Model C48 Counter is available as a Standard Counter or a Batch
Counter. The Standard Counter is available with single or dual presets. The
Batch Counter has a main process counter with dual presets and a secondary
counter with a single preset. The secondary counter can be selected to function
as a batch or a total counter.
The C48C features a 7 segment, 2 line by 6 digit reflective or backlit LCD
display. For the backlit versions, the main display line is red and shows the
count value or the Batch/Total value when preset 3 or output 3 is viewed in the
secondary display. The smaller secondary display line is green and can be used
to view the prescaler value, preset values, output time values or Batch/Total
count values (Batch model).
The C48C offers a choice of nine programmable counting modes for use in
applications requiring bi-directional, anti-coincidence, and quadrature counting.
The unit may be programmed to register counts on both edges of the input signal
providing frequency doubling capability. DIP switches are used for input
configuration set-up and to provide a Program Disable function.
Four front panel push-buttons are used for programming the operating modes
and data values, changing the viewed display, and performing user
programmable functions, e.g. reset, etc. The C48C can be configured for one of
two numeric data entry methods, digit entry or automatic scrolling. The digit
entry method allows for the selection and incrementing of digits individually.
The automatic scrolling method allows for the progressive change of one
through all digit positions by pressing and holding the “up” or “down” button.
The Program Disable DIP switch, a user-programmable code value, and an
external user input selected for Program Disable can be utilized to provide
multi-level protection against unauthorized changes to data values and unit
configuration.
The C48 Counter has programmable User Inputs and a programmable front
panel function key. The user inputs can be configured as sinking (active low) or
sourcing (active high) inputs via a single plug jumper. The user inputs and the
front panel function key can be configured to provide a variety of functions.

The Standard Counter with Dual Presets is available with solid-state or Relay
outputs. The Single Preset model has a solid-state and relay output. The Batch
Counter has relay outputs for Output 2 and the Batch/Total Output 3, with
Output 1 available as solid-state. The Batch Counter is also available with three
solid-state outputs. For all C48 Counters, the solid-state outputs are available in
a choice of NPN current sinking or PNP current sourcing, open-collector
transistor outputs. All relay output boards are field replaceable.
A Prescaler Output model is available as a Dual Preset, with solid-state
outputs. The Prescaler Output is useful for providing a lower frequency scaled
pulse train to a PLC or another external totalizing counter. The Prescaler Output
provides a programmable width output pulse for every count or every 10 counts
registered on the display.
The optional RS-485 serial communication interface provides two-way
communication between a C48 and other compatible equipment such as a
printer, PLC, HMI, or a host computer. In multipoint applications (up to thirtytwo), the address number of each C48 on the line can be programmed from 0 to
99. Data from the C48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm output(s) may
be reset by sending the proper command code via serial communications. PC
software, SFC48, allows for easy configuration of controller parameters. These
settings can be saved to disk for later use or used for multi-controller down
loading. On-line help is provided within the software.
Optional programming software (SFC48) is available to program all unit
configuration parameters. The software allows unit configurations to be created,
uploaded, downloaded, and saved to a file for later use or multi-unit
programming.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a
textured front panel and a clear display window. The front panel meets NEMA
4X/IP65 specifications when properly installed. Multiple units can be stacked
horizontally or vertically. Modern surface-mount technology, extensive testing,
plus high immunity to noise interference makes the C48 Counters extremely
reliable in industrial environments.

DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)”

178

PANEL CUT-OUT

www.redlion.net

SPECIFICATIONS

Dual Preset Model C48CD

1. DISPLAY: 2 Line by 6 digit LCD display. Positive image reflective or
negative image transmissive with red (top line) and green (bottom line)
backlighting
Main Display: 0.3" (7.62 mm) high digits
Secondary Display: 0.2" (5.08 mm) high digits
Annunciators:
Value: PRS, 1, 2, and 3
Output: 01, 02, and 03.
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Versions:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 9 VA max.
DC Power: 11 to 14 VDC @ 150 mA max. (Non PNP output models)
Note: Models with PNP current sourcing outputs must be powered from AC.
DC Versions (C48XXX1X):
CONTINUOUS:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC; 5.5 W max.
AC Power: 24 VAC ±10%; 50/60 Hz; 7 VA max.
Note: The +10% tolerance range on AC input voltage must be strictly
adhered to. DO NOT EXCEED 26.4 VAC.
PEAK (START-UP CURRENT):
AC or DC Power: 500 mA peak start-up current for 10 msec max.
DC OUT (VSRC IN) - Terminal 10
For units which do not have PNP current sourcing outputs, this terminal
provides a DC output for sensor power (+12 VDC +/-15%). The
maximum sensor current is 100 mA.
For units with PNP current sourcing outputs, this terminal serves a dual
purpose depending on the application’s PNP output voltage level and
current requirements.
1. The terminal may be used as a +12 VDC output for sensor power.
In this case, the PNP output voltage level will be +12 VDC
(±15%). A maximum of 100 mA is available for the combination
of sensor current and PNP output sourcing current.
2. If a higher PNP output voltage level or additional output sourcing
current is desired, an external DC supply may be connected
between the “DC OUT (VSRC IN)” and “COMM.” terminals. This
supply will determine the PNP output voltage level, and must be
in the range of +13 to +30 VDC.
An external DC supply can also provide the additional output
sourcing current required in applications where two or more PNP
outputs are “ON” simultaneously. However, the maximum current
rating of 100 mA per individual output must not be exceeded,
regardless of external supply capacity.
3. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
count values.
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC (± 15%) @ 100 mA max.
5. COUNT INPUTS A & B: Accepts count pulses from a variety of sources,
DIP switch selectable.
Current Sourcing: 3.9KΩ pull-down, VIN max = 30 VDC
Current Sinking: 7.8KΩ pull-up to 12 VDC; ISNK = 1.8 mA max.
Debounce: 50 Hz max.
Lo Bias: VIL = 1.5 VDC max., VIH = 3.75 VDC min.
Hi Bias: VIL = 5.5 VDC max., VIH = 7.5 VDC min.
6. MAX. COUNT RATE: Model dependent. All listed values are in KHz.
Note: Max. count rates for X2 & X4 modes are given for 50 % duty cycle
signals and quad signals with 90° phase shift.
Single Preset Model C48CS
QUAD

C1-Usr
C1-Ud

C2-Usr
C2-Ud

*Ad-Sub
Ad-Ad

8.4

4.1

9.4

5.4

4.5

2.1

1.00000

5.9

12.4

6.5

1.00001-2

6.6

3.2

6.8

4.3

3.3

1.6

2.00001-3

5.3

2.6

5.6

3.7

2.6

1.3

3.00001-4

4.3

2.1

4.6

2.2

1.1

4.00001-5

3.6

1.8

3.8

2.7

1.8

0.9

5.00001-6

3.1

1.5

3.4

2.4

1.6

0.8

6.00001-7

2.8

1.4

3.2

2.1

1.4

0.7

7.00001-8

2.6

1.3

2.8

1.9

1.3

0.6

8.00001-9

2.3

1.1

2.4

1.8

1.1

0.5

9.00001-9.99999

2.1

2.3

1.7

1.1

0.5

PRESCALER
VALUE

0.00001-0.99999

QUAD

C1-Usr
C1-Ud

C2-Usr
C2-Ud

*Ad-Sub
Ad-Ad

0.00001-0.99999

8.3

4.1

8.6

4.5

4.1

2.1

1.00000

11.5

5.7

11.5

5.8

1.00001-2

6.5

3.2

6.6

3.2

1.6

2.00001-3

2.4

5.2

3.4

2.5

1.3

3.00001-4

4.1

4.4

2.8

4.00001-5

3.4

1.7

3.8

2.5

1.7

0.8

5.00001-6

2.9

1.4

3.2

2.2

1.4

0.7

6.00001-7

2.7

1.3

2.8

1.3

0.6

7.00001-8

2.2

1.1

2.4

1.8

1.2

0.6

8.00001-9

2.2

0.9

2.3

1.6

1.1

0.5

9.00001-9.99999

1.9

0.9

1.5

0.9

0.4

PRESCALER
VALUE

Batch Model C48CB

With Counter 2 configured as a Batch Counter (C2 ASn = bAtch)
QUAD

C1-Usr
C1-Ud

C2-Usr
C2-Ud

*Ad-Sub
Ad-Ad

0.00001-0.99999

8.3

4.1

8.4

3.7

3.6

2.2

1.00000

11.4

5.5

11.8

4.3

4.2

1.00001-2

6.5

3.2

6.6

3.2

1.6

2.00001-3

2.5

5.4

2.8

2.5

1.3

3.00001-4

4.1

4.2

2.4

4.00001-5

3.4

1.7

3.8

2.1

1.7

0.8

5.00001-6

2.9

1.4

3.2

1.9

1.5

0.7

6.00001-7

2.7

1.3

2.8

1.7

1.3

0.6

7.00001-8

2.4

1.1

2.6

1.6

1.2

0.6

8.00001-9

2.2

1.1

2.4

1.5

1.1

0.5

9.00001-9.99999

1.9

0.9

2.2

1.4

0.4

PRESCALER
VALUE

Batch Model C48CB

With Counter 2 configured as a Total Counter (C2 ASn = totAL)
PRESCALER
VALUE

C1-Usr
C1-Ud

C2-Usr
C2-Ud

0.00001-0.99999

6.5

1.00000

8.5

QUAD

Ad-Sub
Ad-Ad

3.3

6.6

3.5

3.3

1.6

3.6

8.6

2.1

Prescaler Output Model C48CP
PRESCALER
VALUE

0.00001-0.99999
1.00000

C1-Usr
C1-Ud

C2-Usr
C2-Ud

6.2
8

QUAD

Ad-Sub
Ad-Ad

N/A

* - Inputs A & B rates summed.
7. USER INPUTS: Configurable as current sinking (active low) or current
sourcing (active high) inputs via a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking: VIL = 1.5 VDC max, 22 KΩ pull-up to 5 VDC.
Current Sourcing: VIH = 3.5 VDC min., VIN max = 30 VDC; 22 KΩ pulldown.
Response Time = 10 msec max.
Inhibit Response Time = 250 μsec max.
8. OUTPUTS: (Output type and quantity, model dependent)
Solid-State:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1.1 VDC max.; VOH
= 30 VDC max.
PNP Open Collector: ISRC = 100 mA max.(See note); VOH = 12 VDC
±15% (using internal supply); VOH = 13 to 30 VDC (using external
supply).
Note: The internal supply of the C48C can provide a total of 100 mA for
the combination of sensor current and PNP output sourcing current.
The supply voltage is +12 VDC (±15%), which will be the PNP output
voltage level when using only the internal supply.
If additional PNP output sourcing current or a higher output voltage
level is desired, an external DC supply may be connected between the
“DC Out/In” and “Comm.” terminals. This supply will determine the
PNP output voltage level, and must be in the range of +13 to +30 VDC.
An external supply can provide the additional output sourcing
current required in applications where two or more outputs are “ON”
simultaneously. However, the maximum rating of 100 mA per individual
output must not be exceeded, regardless of external supply capacity.

1-717-767-6511

179

8. OUTPUTS: (Output type and quantity, model dependent) Cont’d
Relay: Form A contact, Rating = 5 A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load),
1/10 HP @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Relay Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles min. at max. load rating
Programmable Timed Output: User selectable output time resolution.
0.01 Second Resolution: 0.01 to 99.99 sec, ± 0.01% +20 msec max.
(Prescalers less than 2)
0.1 Second Resolution: 0.1 to 999.9 sec, ± 0.01% + 100 msec (Prescalers
less than 2)
Note: For Prescaler values above 2, the timed delay output is affected by
the count speed (rate).
9. RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional): Up to 32 units can be
connected.
Baud Rate: Programmable from 1200 to 9600 baud
Address: Programmable from 0 to 99
Data Format: 10 Bit Frame, 1 start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, 1 or No Parity bit,
and 1 stop bit
Parity: Programmable for Odd (7 data bits), Even (7 data bits), or None (8
data bits)
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Notes:
AC VERSIONS
1. A power line filter, RLC#LFIL0000 or equivalent, was installed when the
unit was DC powered.
DC VERSIONS
To insure compliance with the EMC standards listed above, do not connect
any wires from the terminal(s) labeled “COMM.” to the “DC-” supply
terminal (12), when powering the unit from a DC supply.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
11. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0°C to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40°C to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity
(non-condensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
12. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals.
13. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic case with collar style panel latch. The
panel latch can be installed for horizontal or vertical stacking. Black plastic
textured bezel with clear display viewing window. Unit assembly with circuit
boards can be removed from the case without removing the case from the
panel or disconnecting the wiring. Front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65
requirements for indoor use, when properly installed. Installation Category
II, Pollution Degree 2.
14. WEIGHT: 6.0 oz (170 g)

180

SINGLE PRESET MODELS

The C48CS has a solid-state output that operates in parallel with a relay
output. The solid-state output is available as an NPN or PNP open collector
transistor.

DUAL PRESET MODELS

The C48CD has two outputs that are activated from presets 1 and 2
respectively. These outputs can be relay outputs, or solid-state outputs. The
solid-state outputs are available as NPN or PNP open-collector transistors. Units
with solid-state outputs can be ordered with an optional prescaler output
(C48CP).

3 PRESET BATCH MODELS

The C48CB has a secondary counter that can be used for batch counting, or
to keep a total count. This second counter can be programmed to operate in one
of eight operating modes. Outputs 1 and 2 are assigned to the primary process
counter (C1). Output 3 is assigned to the secondary Batch/Total counter (C2).
The three preset batch unit can be ordered with solid-state or relay outputs.
Units with solid-state outputs have a User Input 2 terminal available. The relay
model has a relay output for Output 2 and Output 3 (Batch/Total). Output 1 is
available only as solid-state.

PRESCALER OUTPUT MODELS

The C48CP is a dual preset counter with solid-state outputs. These models
have an additional output configured as a prescaler output. Each time the least
significant digit of the display increments, the Prescaler output provides a pulse.
The width of this pulse is variable in that the output will turn off after a
programmed number of count input pulses has occurred (1-9). The Prescaler
output can also be programmed to activate when the 10’s digit of the display
increments, rather than the least significant digit.
Note: Prescaler Output models are limited to two programmable count modes
and prescaler values of 1.00000 or less. See Count Input Modes for available
modes.

FRONT PANEL FEATURES

The C48 Counters feature a dual line display. In the normal operating mode
(main display), the count or batch/total value is shown on the top line and
presets, prescaler, or output time values are shown on the bottom line. The
bottom line values can be programmed to be viewable only, viewable and
changeable, or locked (not viewable) from the main display.
In the operating mode, the presets, prescaler, and output time values are
accessible providing that these values are not programmed for ‘L’ocked. Values
that are accessible (changeable) can be changed immediately when viewed in
the secondary display.

FRONT PANEL KEYPAD

%
"

- Performs user Programmed Function

- Selects next available mode in programming mode.
- Increments digit in Digit Entry mode.
- Increments value in Auto Scrolling entry mode.

- Selects Digit to right when in Digit Entry mode.
- Decrements value in Auto Scrolling entry mode.

www.redlion.net

- Cycles through secondary displays.
- Enters Protected Value Menu or Programming Mode
when pushed and held for 2 seconds.
- Scrolls through programming parameters.
- Enters Data Values.

USER INTERFACE/PROGRAMMING MODES
The operating modes of the C48C are programmed using the front panel
keypad. To enter the programming menu, the " key is pushed and held for 2
seconds. Within the programming menu, the " key is used to sequence through
the list of programming parameters.

Count Input Modes - Cnt In
This parameter controls the count/control function of Inputs A and B. It also
allows Input B to be used as a User Input with the same programmable
functions as the dedicated User Inputs.
MODE

C1-USr
C2-USr
C1-Ud
C2-Ud
Ad-Sub
Ad-Ad
qUAd 1
qUAd 2
qUAd 4

PROGRAMMING MENU

EntrY
Ac PSc
PScALr
dEc Pt
Cnt In
OPEr 1
C2 ASn
OPEr 2
Ac PrS
PrESEt
PltrAC
Ac Out
OutrES
OutPut
rEVOut
rEVAnu
OutP.uP
USrIn1
USrIn2
USrInb
USr F1
CodE
ScroLL
SErSEt
SErAdr
SErAbr
PrnOPt
PrnrSt
PScOAt
PScLEn
FAcSEt

INPUT A

Digit or Auto Scrolling Data Entry Mode
Accessibility of Prescaler Value
Prescaler Value
Decimal Point Position
Count Input Modes
Counter 1 Operating Mode
Counter 2 Assignment (C48CB only)

INPUT B

Count
User Input *
Count (X2)
User Input
Count
Up/Dn Control *
Count (X2)
Up/Dn Control
Add Count
Subtract Count
Add Count
Add Count
Quad X1 Inputs
Quad X2 Inputs
Quad X4 Inputs

* These are the only count input modes available on the Prescaler Output
Model.

Counter 2 Operating Mode (C48CB only)
Accessibility of Preset Values
Preset 1, 2, and 3 Values

Programmable Operating Modes - OPEr

P1 Track P2 (not available on C48CS)

These modes determine the operational characteristics of the counter. In the
tables, 01, 02, and 03, refer to Outputs 1,2, and 3 respectively.

Accessibility of Output Time Values
Output Resolution

SINGLE PRESET OPERATING MODES

Output 1, 2, and 3 Time Values
Reverse Output/Relay Logic

- Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Output

Reverse Output Annunciator Logic

- Manual Reset to Zero, Timed Output

Power Up Output State

- Manual Reset to Preset, Latched Output

User Input 1

- Manual Reset to Preset, Timed Output

User Input 2 (Not available on Batch Relay Models)

- Auto Reset to Zero, Timed Output

User Input b

- Auto Reset to Preset, Timed Output

User F1 Key

- Auto Reset to Zero at Timed Output End

Programming/Protected Parameter menu Code

- Auto Reset to Preset at Timed Output End

- Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Outputs

Print Options

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

Print & Reset Count Value

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed

Prescaler Output Pulse (C48CP only)

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

Prescaler Output Pulse Length {width} (C48CP only)

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

Load Factory Default Settings

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, Latched Outputs

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed

Scroll Display
Serial Baud Rate & Parity Settings
DUAL PRESET AND BATCH COUNTER 1 OPERATING MODES

Serial Unit Address
Abbreviate Serial Mnemonics

(RS485 option only)

Program Security/Operator Accessible Values
The Program Disable DIP switch, programmable code value, User Input
(programmed for Program Disable), and the Accessible Value parameters
provide various levels of security against unauthorized programming changes.
The accessible values parameters provide individual access or locking of each
value.

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

Protected Value Menu

- Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed

The Protected Value Menu allows access to selected presets, prescaler and
timed output values without having them viewable or changeable from the main
display. To enter the protected menu, the " key is pressed and held, and a
programmed code value is entered.

- Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Manual Reset to Zero, 03 Latched

- Manual Reset to Zero, 03 Timed

- Manual Reset to Preset 3, 03 Latched

- Manual Reset to Preset 3, 03 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero, 03 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero at 03 Timed Output End

- Auto Reset to Preset 3, 03 Timed

- Auto Reset to Preset 3 at 03 Timed Output End

Programming Numeric Data Values
The Presets may be accessible when the unit is in its operating mode.
Pressing the " key will sequence the secondary display through the available
preset, prescaler and Batch/Total count values.
To change a data value it must be visible on the secondary display. Pressing
the $ or # key will allow changing of the value. If the data entry method has
been set to “digit entry”, pressing the $ key multiple times will select other
digits. Pressing the # key will increment the selected digit. If the data entry
method is set to “Auto scrolling”, the data value can be changed by pressing and
holding the # or $ keys to change one or all digits of the display.The data
value will be entered when the " key is pushed, or the old value will be
retained if no key activity is detected for 10 seconds.

COUNTER 2 OPERATING MODES (C48CB Only)

1-717-767-6511

181

MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING
The C48C is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel
latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum spacing

from center line to center line of the units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This spacing is
the same for vertical or horizontal stacking.
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that
the maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.
PANEL CUT-OUT SPACING FOR MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING.
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT SHOWN.

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR VERTICAL
UNIT STACKING

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
HORIZONTAL UNIT STACKING

SLOW DOWN & CUT TO LENGTH WITH TOTAL FOOTAGE
To improve production efficiency, a wallpaper manufacturing plant is
installing cut to length counters on the roll form machines. Currently, electromechanical counters are used for length measurements. The operator slows
the machine down upon arriving at the desired length, stops and then cuts. The
addition of the C48CB batch counters eliminates the operator’s manual
observation and control.
The operator programs the required cut length as Preset 2. Preset 1 is
preprogrammed for tracking and will automatically follow Preset 2. Preset 1
is used as the slow down, and is set for a value 0.25 yards less than Preset 2.
The process count is programmed to automatically reset at the Preset 2 cut
length of 11.00 yards, and begin counting for the next roll. Counter 2 is
programmed as a totalizer and is recorded and reset (via key switch) at the end
of the operator’s shift. The C48CB was ordered with the RS-485 serial
communication option. Future plans include a data acquisition program to
interrogate the C48CB’s. A 100 ppr rotary pulse generator is shaft coupled to
a 4" pinch roller for length measurement. Display units desired is 0.01 yards.
Program Security features are set to allow access to Preset 2 only. This allows
the operator to change the required cut length, but prevents acidental changes
to other programming parameters that may adversely affect process operation.
After all programming is complete, the Program Disable DIP switch is moved
to the up position to enable the Program Security function.
Circumference Of Pinch Roller:
circumference = π × diameter
12.56636 = 3.14159 × 4.00
Pulses Per Yard:
1 rev
36 i nches
⎯⎯ × ⎯⎯ = 2.8647913 rev/yard
12.56636”
1 yard
2.8647913 rev/yard × 100 ppr/rev = 286.47913 pulses/yard
Prescaler:
Display units
Prescaler = ⎯⎯
number of pulses
100
= ⎯⎯
286.47913

PROGRAMMING

EntrY
Ac PSc
PScALr
dEc Pt
Cnt In
OPEr 1
C2 ASn
OPEr 2
Ac PrS
PrESEt
PrESEt
PrESEt
P1trAc
Ac Out
OutrES
OutPut
OutPut
OutPut
rEVOut
rEVAnu
OutP.uP
USrIn1
USr F1
CodE
ScroLL
SErSEt
SErAdr
SErAbr
PrnOPt
PrnrSt
FAcSEt

Prescaler = 0.34907
Products:
C48CB108
RPGQ0100

182

www.redlion.net

AutoSc
-L (locked)
0.34907
----.-qUAd 1
12
totAL
02
-L-y-L
PRS1 10.75 (value 0.25 less than PRS2 for slowdown)
PRS2 11.00 (cut length)
PRS3 9000.00 (Set high so output does not activate)
yES
-L-L-L
0.01SEC
1t 0.10
2t 1.00
3t 0.10
-n-n-n
-n-n-n
-F-F-F
rSt.2-E
rSt.-E
003
no
96o
00
no
08
no
no

ORDERING INFORMATION

C48CS

C48CD

C48CP

C48CB

PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE
SUPPLY VOLTAGES

*NPN O.C.
OUTPUT(S)

RELAY OUTPUT(S)
(Note)

RS485

18-36 VDC/24 VAC

85 to 250 VAC

1 Preset Counter, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48CS013

C48CS003

1 Preset Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CS113

C48CS103

2 Preset Counter, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48CD015

C48CD005

2 Preset Counter, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48CD012

C48CD002

2 Preset Counter, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48CD017

C48CD007

2 Preset Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CD110

C48CD100

2 Preset Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CD115

C48CD105

2 Preset Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CD112

C48CD102

2 Preset Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CD117

C48CD107

2 Preset Counter w/Prescaler Output, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48CP015

C48CP005

2 Preset Counter w/Prescaler Output, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CP110

C48CP100

2 Preset Counter w/Prescaler Output, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CP115

C48CP105

3 Preset Batch Counter, Reflective LCD

Yes (O1)

Yes

N/A

C48CB003

3 Preset Batch Counter, Reflective LCD

Yes (O1)

Yes

N/A

C48CB008

3 Preset Batch Counter, Reflective LCD

Yes

N/A

C48CB005

3 Preset Batch Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes (O1)

Yes

N/A

C48CB103

3 Preset Batch Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes (O1)

Yes

N/A

C48CB108

3 Preset Batch Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48CB110

C48CB100

3 Preset Batch Counter, Backlit LCD

Yes

N/A

C48CB105

MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

Note: On Batch Relay Models, Outputs 2 and 3 are Relays, and Output 1 (O1) is a solid-state output.
* PNP O.C. output(s) versions available, contact the factory.

RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

Single Preset
RBC48

Dual Preset
Batch

NPN O.C.
OUTPUT(S)

PNP O.C.
OUTPUT(S)

RELAY
OUTPUT(S)

PART NUMBER

Yes

RBC48001

Yes

RBC48002

Yes

RBC48003

Yes

RBC48004

Yes

RBC48005

ACCESSORIES
MODEL

DESCRIPTION

SFC48

PC Configuration Software for Windows 3.x and 95 (3.5" disk) (for RS-485 Models)

PART NUMBER

1-717-767-6511

SFC48

183

MODEL PAXLCR - 1/8 DIN PAX LITE DUAL COUNTER AND RATE METER
This is a brief overview of the PAXLCR. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Lite Dual Counter and Rate Meter Bulletin starting on page 125.
z 6 DIGIT, 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING FOR COUNT AND RATE
z BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL
z QUADRATURE SENSING (UP TO 4 TIMES RESOLUTION)

z BUILT-IN BATCH COUNTING CAPABILITY
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z DUAL 5 AMP FORM C RELAYS
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Counter A value
B - Counter B value (dual count or batch)
- Rate value is displayed with no designator
SP1 - Indicates setpoint 1 output status
SP2 - Indicates setpoint 2 output status

RATE DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be enabled or disabled in any count mode
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Over Range Display: “0-0-”
Maximum Frequency: 25 KHz
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%

COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Counter A: 6-digits, enabled in all count modes
Display Designator: “A” to the left side of the display
Display Range: -99999 to 999999
Counter B: 6-digits, enabled in Dual Count mode or Batch Counter
Display Designator: “B” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999 (positive count only)
Overflow Indication: Display “0-0-” alternates with overflowed count value
Maximum Count Rates: 50% duty cycle, count mode dependent.
With setpoints disabled: 25 KHz, all modes except Quadrature x4 (23 KHz).
With setpoint(s) enabled: 20 KHz, all modes except Dual Counter (14 KHz),
Quadrature x2 (13 KHz) and Quadrature x4 (12 KHz).

COUNT/RATE SIGNAL INPUTS (INPUT A and INPUT B):
See Section 2.0 Setting the DIP Switches for complete Input specifications.
DIP switch selectable inputs accept pulses from a variety of sources. Both
inputs allow selectable active low or active high logic, and selectable input
filtering for low frequency signals or switch contact debounce.
Input A: Logic level or magnetic pickup signals.
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.25 V max; VIH = 2.75 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Mag. pickup sensitivity: 200 mV peak, 100 mV hysteresis, 40 V peak max.
Input B: Logic level signals only
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC

184

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXC - 1/8 DIN COUNTER
This is a brief overview of the PAXC. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Digital Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 137.

UL
R

6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY (Alternating 8 digits for counting)

DUAL COUNT QUAD INPUTS

UP TO 3 COUNT DISPLAYS

FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

Is Counter C used?

COUNT MODE

(Values are in KHz)

Count x1

Count x2

Quadrature x1

3.5

Quadrature x2
Quadrature x4

17
8

13
6

9
4

7
3

3.5

N
Y

Y
N
18

N
Y

Y
N

Notes:
1. Counter Modes are explained in the Module 1 programming section.
2. Listed values are with frequency DIP switch set on HI frequency.

Y
Y
7.5

ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Counter A
B - Counter B
C - Counter C
- Upper significant digit display of counter
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Maximum display: 8 digits: ± 99999999 (greater than 6 digits display
Alternates between high order and low order.)
INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources including
switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all standard RLC
sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not
have the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup
switches. The user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low
frequency filtering. Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a
dual count mode must be debounced externally. The user input may
only be selected for sink/source by the User Jumper placement.

1-717-767-6511

185

UL
R

US LISTED

COUNTER, DUAL COUNTER, RATE AND SLAVE DISPLAY

6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY

VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY

10 POINT SCALING (FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES)

FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)

RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)

COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)

BUS CAPABILITIES; DEVICENET, MODBUS, AND PROFIBUS-DP

CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

Is Prescaler Output used?

Is Counter C used?

COUNT MODE

(Values are in KHz)

Count x1

7.5

Count x2

Quadrature x1

3.5 *

Quadrature x2

3.5 *

Quadrature x4

Rate Only

N/A

ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Counter A
B - Counter B
C - Counter C
S - Rate
) - Maximum (High) Rate
- - Minimum (Low) Rate
- Upper significant digit display of counter
SP1 - setpoint 1 output state
SP2 - setpoint 2 output state
SP3 - setpoint 3 output state
SP4 - setpoint 4 output state
RATE DISPLAY:
Accuracy: ±0.01%
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Maximum Frequency: see Max Signal Frequencies Table.
Maximum Display: 5 Digits: 99999
Adjustable Display (low) Update: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds
Over Range Display: “
”
COUNTER DISPLAYS:
Maximum display: 8 digits: ± 99999999 (greater than 6 digits display
Alternates between high order and low order.)

186

INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources
including switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all
standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits input
frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not have
the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup switches. The
user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low frequency filtering.
Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a dual count mode
must be debounced externally. The user input may only be selected for
sink/source by the User Jumper placement.
PRESCALER OUTPUT:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1 VDC max. VOH = 30
VDC max. With duty cycle of 25% min. and 50 % max.

www.redlion.net

LEGEND SERIES
MODEL LGS -Single Preset Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGD - Dual Preset Counter/Rate Indicator

MODEL LGB - Four Preset Batch/Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGM - Six Preset Counter/Rate Indicator

DESCRIPTION

The Legend Series consist of four different models that are multi-function
count and rate indicators. There can be up to six presets and six programmable
outputs depending upon the unit. The count and rate displays have separate
programmable decimal point settings. The unit also has rate peak and valley
displays that show the highest and lowest rate readings since they were reset
(peak and valley readings are not retained when power is removed). There are
five Programmable User Inputs, three external remote inputs and two front
panel function keys, which allow the user to select from a variety of functions.
The two line by eight character alphanumeric display with English menus,
allows for easy viewing and simple programming of the units. The four scroll
through indication displays can be programmed to show other parameters and if
desired, automatically scroll at one of the two programmable rates. A program
disable DIP switch used with an external User Input can be utilized to protect
the settings and guarantee that no unwanted changes occur during operation.
The standard RS485 serial communication feature provides the capability of
two-way communication between the Legend unit and other compatible
equipment such as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer.
The Baud Rate is programmable and ranges from 1200 to 9600. The unit
address number can be programmed from 00-99. Up to thirty-two units can be
installed on a single pair of wires, each with an individual address. The Count
value(s), Preset(s), Rate, Peak, Valley, etc can all be interrogated or changed.
The output(s), counters(s), rate and peak readings can be reset, by sending the
proper command codes via serial communications or by activating a
programmable user input. When a user input, selected for the print request
function, is activated, the values specified in the Program Print Options module
can be transmitted to a printer.
Optional Programming Software (SFLGP) for IBM® compatible PCs is
available to program all of the Legend configuration parameters such as User
Inputs, count modes, etc. The software allows unit configurations to be created,
uploaded, downloaded, and saved to a file for rapid programming of the Legend.
The Legend offers a choice of seven programmable counting modes for use
in applications requiring Bi-directional, Anti-coincidence, and Quadrature
counting. A separate external inhibit terminal can be used in conjunction with
any of the count modes. The input circuitry is switch selectable to accept signals
from a variety of input sources. A unit may be programmed to register counts on
both edges of the input signal providing frequency doubling capability.
A Legend unit will indicate an overflow condition when the capacity of a
Count display (Process, Batch, or Total) is exceeded, by flashing the word
“OVERFLOW” in the appropriate display.
All count values and program setting are retained when unit power is
removed in nonvolatile memory.

2X8 TRANSMISSIVE LCD, NEGATIVE IMAGE, WITH LED
BACKLIGHTING

FOUR USER PROGRAMMABLE INDICATION DISPLAYS

OPTIONAL PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

ENGLISH PROGRAMMING MENUS

RATE, PEAK & VALLEY INDICATION

ABILITY TO LOCKOUT OPERATOR ACCESS TO PROGRAMMING
PARAMETERS

ACCEPTS COUNT RATES UP TO 23 KHz (for Model LGS)

BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL

QUADRATURE SENSING (Up to 4 times resolution)

COUNT INHIBIT PIN AVAILABLE FOR ALL COUNT MODES

SEPARATE INPUT SCALING FOR RATE & COUNT

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUTS

INPUTS ARE SWITCH SELECTABLE FOR MAGNETIC PICKUPS

RELAY OUTPUT(S) (Field Replaceable)

OUTPUT(S) ASSIGNABLE TO COUNT OR RATE

SOLID STATE CURRENT SINKING OUTPUT(S)

115/230 VAC SWITCH SELECTABLE

RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

NONVOLATILE MEMORY

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT PANEL BEZEL
UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm) Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 3.0" (76.2) H x 4.0" (101.6) W.

1-717-767-6511

PANEL CUT-OUT

187

DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)

A Legend unit will indicate an overflow condition when the capacity of a
Count display (Process, Batch, or Total) is exceeded, by flashing the word
“OVERFLOW” in the appropriate display.
All count values and program setting are retained when unit power is
removed in nonvolatile memory.
The choice of several reset cycle modes along with the compatibility of count
and control inputs to other RLC products, provides added versatility for standalone and system counter needs.
The rate input uses the time interval method (1/tau) to calculate the rate value.
This method insures high resolution at all input rates. The unit counts input
pulses and after the programmable minimum update time elapses and the next
count edge occurs, the unit will take the number of edges that occurred during
the elapsed time to calculate the rate value. The minimum update time can be as
low as 0.1 second per update, enabling quick response to rate changes. At slower
rates, averaging can be accomplished by programming the Minimum and
Maximum Update Time for the desired response. Extensive scaling capabilities
allow practically any reading at very slow input rates.
The construction of the Legend series is a light weight high impact plastic
case with a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone
rubber keypad meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or
dusty environments, when properly installed. Plug-in style terminal blocks
simplify installation and wiring change-outs.

SAFETY SUMMARY

MODELS - LGS & LGD

The single preset unit has one NPN open collector output and the dual preset
unit has two outputs which are activated from presets 1 and 2 respectively. Each
output can be assigned to either Rate or Count display. An optional relay board
can be installed that operates in parallel with the solid state output(s).

MODEL - LGB

The process counter is used to monitor the progress of the count within the
batch. Presets 1 and 2 are assigned to the Process Counter and activate relay
outputs 1 and 2 respectively.
Presets 3 and 4 can be assigned to either the Batch Counter, Totalizer, or Rate
indicator. Presets 3 and 4 activate the NPN open collector outputs O3-SNK and
O4-SNK respectively.

MODEL - LGM

The Multi Preset unit has six Presets (1-6) which control NPN open collector
outputs 01-SNK to 06-SNK respectively. Preset one through four are assigned
to the count display. Presets 5 and 6 can be assigned to either the Rate or Count
display.
AVAILABLE INDICATION DISPLAYS AND PRESETS FOR EACH MODEL

LGS
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(1 Preset)

LGD
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(2 Presets)

SPECIFICATIONS

LGB
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
PROCESS
BATCH
TOTAL
(4 Presets)

LGM
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(6 Presets)

1. DISPLAY: 2x8, 0.3" (7 mm) high characters, negative image transmissive
LCD, with yellow/green or red LED backlighting.
2. POWER:
AC Operation: 115/230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
DC Operation: +12 VDC ±20% @ 250 mA.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programming information.
Count and Preset values are written to non-volatile memory when power is
interrupted. All other programming parameters are written to memory when
programming mode is exited. If power is removed while in the programming
menus, the parameters are restored to previously saved settings.
Data Retention: 10 years minimum
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC ±25% @ 100 mA.
5. INPUTS A and B: DIP Switch selectable to accept count pulses from a
variety of sources including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL
circuits, and all standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 VMAX; VIH = 3.75 VMIN.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pulled up internally to +12 VDC,
IMAX = 1.6 mA.

188

Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA @ 28 VDCMAX.
Debounce: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce.
Limits count speed to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak.
Hysteresis: 100 mV.
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz.
Maximum input voltage: ±50 Vp
Note: For magnetic pickup input, the sink/source DIP switch must be in the
SRC position.
6. RATE ACCURACY: ±0.01%
7. RATE MINIMUM INPUT FREQUENCY: 0.01 Hz.
8. MAXIMUM COUNT RATE IN KHz:
MODEL

CNT + DIR

LGS (Single Preset)
LGD (Dual Preset)
LGB (Batch)
LGM (Six Preset)

X1
23
20
17
15

X2
11
10
8
7

QUAD

X1
9
8.5
7
7

X2
7
7
7
7

ADD/ADD ADD/SUB

X4
5.5
5
4
3

X1*
23
20
17
15

X1*
12
10
9
8

Notes:
1. Maximum count rates given are for Process counter set for Auto reset with
the auto cycle preset set to an equivalent of 100 count pulses or greater.
With auto cycle presets less than 100 count pulses, with Count SF = 0.5000
and Count Scale Multiplier = X1, would be 50.
2. Maximum count rate given for X2 & X4 count modes are given for 50%
duty cycle signals and Quad signals with 90o phase shift.
*Inputs A & B count rates summed.
9. CONTROL INPUTS:
Programmable user inputs (3): Internal 10 KΩ pull-up to +5 VDC,
VIL = 1.0 VMAX; VIH = 4.0 VMIN, response time = 10 msec.
Inhibit: Internal 10 KΩ pull-up to +5 VDC, VIL = 1.0MAX; VIH = 4.0 VMIN.
10. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Type: RS-485 Multi-point Balanced Interface (2 Wire).
(Can connect up to 32 units on a single pair of wires)
Baud Rate: Programmable from 1200 to 9600.
Maximum Addresses: Programmable from 00 to 99.
(Actual number on a single pair of wires is limited by serial hardware
specifications)
Transmit Delay: Programmable for 0.002 or 0.100 second.
Data Format: 10 Bit Frame; 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 stop
bit. Parity is programmable for either ODD, EVEN, or No Parity.
11. OUTPUT(S):
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN open collector transistor.
VCE = 1VSAT @ 100 mA max. VOH = 30 VDC max.
(Internal Zener Diode Protection).
Relay(s): Mounted on field-replaceable P.C. board. Form C contacts rated at
5 amps @ 120 VAC/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120
VAC (inductive load). The operate time is 5 msec nominal and the release
time is 3 msec nominal.
Programmable Timed Output(s): Programmable time ranges from 0.01 to
99.99 seconds, ±0.05% - 11 msec max.
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808, UL508, CSA 22.2 No. 14
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1581-176645/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 97ME50052-081391
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc,
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
Fast transients (burst)
RF conducted interference
Power frequency magnetic fields
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference

www.redlion.net

EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O1
Level 3; 2 Kv power
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 1
150 KHz - 80 MHz
EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
EN 55011

Enclosure class A
Power mains class A

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

Note:
1. When the unit is DC powered from terminal TBA pin 5 (common) and
terminal TBA pin 3 (DC OUT/IN) a power line filter was installed, RLC
#LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C
to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for
1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g’s (10g relay), 11 msec
in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
14. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
installed properly. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clips included.
15. WEIGHT: 1.5 lbs. (0.68 Kg)

PROGRAMMING

The Legend Series provides an easy to use, menu driven programming
interface. The English prompts, the front panel keypad, and the flashing display
aids the operator during programming. In the normal run mode, the main
display loop allows the user to scroll through the four programmable indication
displays, using the direction keys. From the main loop, presets and scale factors
can be accessed directly for changing parameters. All other parameters are
accessed through the programming loop. In the programming loop, parameters
can be viewed or changed and the operator can exit anywhere in the loop.
Shown to the side is part of the main display loop and part of the programming
loop of a Dual Preset Legend (LGD) unit. Also shown are four different views
of the indication displays.

RATE SCALE MULTIPLIERS
Multiplies the contents of the actual internal rate, pulses per second (PPS),
by a factor of 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, or 1000 to view the desired number of
significant digits on the 6-digit Rate display. The desired time units that the rate
is to be displayed, can also be programmed as per Second (x1), per Minute
(x60), or per Hour (x3600).
UPDATE TIME
The Rate Minimum/Maximum Update Times range from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds
which provides averaging capability for non-consistent pulse spacing.
COUNTING MODES
Count with Direction
Count with Direction (X2)
Quadrature
Quadrature (X2)
Quadrature (X4)
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Add
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Subtract
A separate Inhibit input, is available for all count modes.

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
PRESET(S)
Ranges from -99999 to 999999
Counter Load ranges from -99999 to 999999
SCALE FACTORS (RATE & COUNT)
Range from 0.0001 to 5.9999
COUNT SCALE MULTIPLIER
Multiplies the contents of the 9-digit internal counter or the 11-digit internal
totalizer by a factor of 1, 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 to view the desired number of
significant digits on the 6-digit Counter display or the 8-digit Totalizer display.
DECIMAL POINT
Separate decimal point location for Count and Rate displays.
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.0000
0.00000

RESET MODES
Manual Reset
Automatic Reset at Preset
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1
Reset at Beginning Of Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 2
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1 or Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1 or Output 2
MODEL LGB ONLY
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3
Reset at Beginning Of Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 4
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3 or Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3 or Output 4

1-717-767-6511

189

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS (Cont’d)
RESET ACTION
Reset to Zero: Output activates when the count equals the preset value. Count
display value returns to zero when reset.
Reset to Preset: Output activates when the count equals zero. Count display
value returns to preset value when reset.
Reset to Counter Load: Output activates when count equals the preset value.
Count display value returns to counter load value when reset.

USER INPUTS
There are three external user inputs and two front panel Function keys that
are programmable. When activated each User Input can be programmed to
perform one of the following functions:
Maintained Reset or Momentary Reset:
Can reset Rate, Peak, Valley, Process*, Batch*, Total*, or Count* display values
and/or any output associated with that display.
*Models with the available display.
Reset Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their inactive state. (Momentary action)
Set Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their active state. (Momentary action)
View Display 1-4:
Will cause the selected indication display (1, 2, 3, or 4) to be displayed and
held from anywhere in the main display loop.
Change Display:
Will cause the indication display to toggle to the next indication display.
Counter Load:
Loads the counter load value into the count display.
Print Request:
Transmits the values specified in the Program Print Options module over the
serial port.
Skip Preset 1, Skip Preset 3 (LGB Only):
Keeps the output from activating and automatic reset from occurring, if
programmed, when the count value equals the preset value.
Program Disable:
Operates in conjunction with the program disable DIP switch, to provide a
variety of program disable modes.
OUTPUT(S)
Output Assignment:
The LGS can have its Output assigned to the Count or the Rate.
The LGD can have Outputs 1 & 2 assigned to the Count or the Rate.
The LGB has Outputs 1 & 2 assigned to the Process. Outputs 3 and 4 can be
assigned to the Batch, Total, or Rate.
The LGM can have Outputs 5 and 6 assigned to either Count or Rate and
Outputs 1-4 are assigned to the Counter.
Output Activation Mode:
Latched
Boundary
Timed - 0.01 to 99.99 seconds

190

Output Reset Mode:
Outputs 1 & 2 Only:
End Output 1 @ Output 2 Start
End Output 1 @ Timed Output 2 End
End Output 2 @ Output 1 Start
End Output 2 @ Timed Output 1 End
Output(s) Power Up or Power Down State:
The Output’s state can be set to be Off (Inactive) @ power up.
OR
The Output’s state can be saved @ power down and restored at power-up.
Note: Power down state for Latched Mode Only.
Reset Output when Count is Reset:
This feature can be enabled or disabled.
Phase:
Each Output can have its logic state set for Positive (ON) Phase or
Negative (OFF) Phase.
INDICATION DISPLAYS
There are four configurable indication displays are programmed individually.
Each line of each indication display can be programmed to show one of the
following Mnemonics; COUNT*, PROCESS*, BATCH*, TOTAL*, PEAK,
VALLEY, OR RATE, and a Numeric value, Output status, Preset value, or the
Counter Load value. A single or dual character Mnemonic is displayed to the left
of the appropriate Numeric value if the other line is not programmed to display
the full mnemonic. Also the indication displays can be set to scroll automatically
at a 2.5 or 5 second rate, if desired.
* Models with the available display.
COMMUNICATION PORT
Baud Rate - 1200 to 9600
Parity - Odd, Even, or No parity
Unit Address - 00 to 99
Transmit Delay - 0.002 or 0.100 seconds
PRINT OPTIONS
The programmable print options specify which values will be transmitted
when a print request is issued. The available options are; Rate, Peak, Valley,
Count*, Totalizer*, Process*, Batch*, Scale Factors, Preset(s), and Counter
Load values.
* Models with the available display.
The unit can be programmed to transmit or NOT transmit mnemonics (unit
address & value identifiers).
OPERATOR ACCESS TO FRONT PANEL
There are several program disable modes that can be used to limit the
operator from programming the parameter values via the front panel keypad.
The Program Disable DIP switch can be used alone or in conjunction with a
User Input, programmed for the program disable function, to provide the desired
level of security.

www.redlion.net

LGB APPLICATION

An order requires that sheets of material be cut in two different lengths. The operator would like to change the settings for the second
length to be cut with no down time. A Legend series LGB (Four Preset Batch Counter/Rate Indicator) is used to satisfy the requirement.
A Lenght Sensor (LSQ) with a 100 pulse per revolution (PPR) quadrature output is coupled with an LSAHC hinge clamp assemby and
a one foot circumference wheel. The LEGEND series LGB is set to the Quadrature X1 mode. With a one foot wheel, the information
becomes 100pulses/foot and allows the material to be cut to the nearest 1/100 of a foot. The counter display is programmed for two
decimal places to provide a readout in 1/100 of a foot increments.
Preset value P1 (Process
count) is programmed for the
first length to be cut for the order
and Preset value P2 (Process
count) for the second length.

The outputs are used to
control power to the cutting
knife and the counter is
programmed to reset when
Preset 1 or Preset 2 is reached.
Preset value P3 (Batch count)
is programmed to activate User
Input 1 (skip P1) when the total
number of pieces is reached for
the first order. Preset value P4
(Batch count) is programmed to
stop the process after the second
order is complete. The totalizer
will keep track of the total
amount of feet used.

1-717-767-6511

191

LGM APPLICATION

A process performs five different procedures to a piece of raw stock at five different locations. The Legend series LGM with six presets
and six solid state outputs is used for this application.
The raw stock comes in ten foot sections and requires five various operations to be performed at 9.00", 23.00", 72.00", 83.00", & 111.00".
A rotary pulse generator (RPGB) with a 600 pulse per revolution (PPR) quadrature output is coupled to a 1 foot circumference wheel. A
quadrature sensor is specified because the stock must be reversed after stations #1 and #4. This allows the Legend to keep track of true position.
The Legend is set to the quadrature X2 mode
which increases the pulses to 1200 PPR. This gives a
measurement resolution of 1/100 of an inch. The five
Presets are programmed with the proper values and
the solid state outputs control pilot relays that control
the actuators. As the material passes each station, a
signal is sent to the proper equipment and the process
is performed. Also, the outputs are programmed so
that if a power outage occurs they will save the state
that they were in at power down.

The sixth output is assigned to rate so that if the
rate drops below a predetermined value the output
will activate a warning indicator.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

LGS

LGD

LGB
LGM
_
_
_

192

DESCRIPTION

Single Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Single Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Single Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Single Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Dual Preset Legend w/Red Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend w/Red Backlighting
Multi Preset (6) Legend w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
Multi Preset (6) Legend w/Red Backlighting
Legend Programming Software, 3.5", 1.44 M disk
Single Relay Board
Dual Relay Board

www.redlion.net

OPTION
w/RELAY BOARD

PART NUMBERS
115/230 VAC
& +12 VDC

No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

LGS00001
LGS00000
LGS00101
LGS00100
LGD00001
LGD00000
LGD00101
LGD00100
LGB00000
LGB00100
LGM00001
LGM00101
SFLGP
RLYLG001
RLYLG002

LEGEND PLUS SERIES MODEL LGPB - Four Preset Batch/Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGPM - Six Preset Counter/Rate Indicator
MODEL LGPBF - Four Preset Foot-Inch Length Counter
O

PROGRAMMABLE DISPLAY INTENSITY

OPTIONAL DUAL COLOR DISPLAY (Red and Green)

DESCRIPTION

The Legend Plus Series consists of two models that are multi-input count and
rate indicators. The LGPB features process, batch, and total counting, as well as
a time interval rate indicator. The four available presets can be assigned to the
process counter or the rate indicator. Outputs three and four can also be
assigned to the batch or total indicator. The Legend Plus foot-inch counter
provides Process and Total count read-outs in feet and inches. A decimal point
is used to separate the foot and inch units. All Process and Total presets are also
displayed in feet and inches. The LGPM features six presets, which can be
assigned to either the rate or count display.
The Legend Plus has advanced features which allow the units to be more
closely coupled to the application. The units feature a 2 line by 8 character
alpha-numeric display, allowing the value mnemonics and programming menus
to be easily read. The units are available in single or dual color display models.
The four scroll-through indication displays can be programmed to show various
parameters and automatically scroll, if desired. On dual color models, each
indication display can be programmed for either color. The mnemonics
corresponding to the main display values (RATE, PROCESS, BATCH,
TOTAL) can be individually programmed and modified as desired. For
example, the RATE mnemonic can be reprogrammed to display the word
SPEED, so that when the rate mnemonic is to be displayed, the mnemonic
SPEED is displayed instead.
Two custom display lines are available which enable the user to specify the
number of digits of a value to be displayed on the line, along with any alphanumeric prefix or suffix. This capability allows displays such as: ‘1000 RPM’,
‘99999 Ft’, ‘PRC 9999’, etc.
The Legend Plus also features messaging capabilities that can inform the
user of output actions or other events that occur in a system. Up to ten messages
can be programmed. Messages can be requested by an output status change,
user input(s), or through serial communications. The messages can be
programmed to blink, scroll, time out, and to alternately flash between message
and indication display.
On dual color models, the message can be programmed to be displayed in
either color. This capability is very useful in drawing the operator’s attention to
particular messages.

FOUR USER PROGRAMMABLE INDICATION DISPLAYS WITH
CUSTOMIZABLE MNEMONICS AND DISPLAY LINES

PROGRAMMABLE MESSAGE CAPABILITIES

ENGLISH PROGRAMMING MENUS

RS485 OR RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

O
O

2X8 TRANSMISSIVE LCD, NEGATIVE IMAGE, WITH L.E.D.
BACKLIGHTING

OPTIONAL PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE FOR PROGRAMMING
MULTIPLE UNITS
ABILITY TO LOCKOUT OPERATOR ACCESS TO PROGRAMMING
PARAMETERS
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUTS
COUNT INPUTS ARE SWITCH SELECTABLE FOR VARIOUS
SENSOR OUTPUTS

BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL

QUADRATURE SENSING (Up to 4 times resolution)

COUNT INHIBIT TERMINAL AVAILABLE FOR ALL COUNT MODES

ACCEPTS COUNT RATES UP TO 15 KHz

ALL OUTPUT(S) ASSIGNABLE TO COUNT OR RATE

ON & OFF DELAY FOR RATE OUTPUTS

SOLID STATE CURRENT SINKING OUTPUT(S)

RELAY OUTPUTS (LGPB only; Field Replaceable)

SEPARATE INPUT SCALING FOR RATE, COUNT, & TOTAL

115/230 VAC SWITCH SELECTABLE

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT PANEL BEZEL

UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 3.0" (76.2)H x 4.0" (101.6)W.

1-717-767-6511

PANEL CUT-OUT

193

DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)

The program disable DIP switch, the code value, and an external user input
selected for Program Disable can be utilized to provide multi-level protection
against unwanted changes to data values and unit configuration.
The Legend Plus features enhanced serial communications. The serial port
can be configured for connection to RS485 or RS232 devices. It can be used for
data retrieval and for programming various data values.
Optional Legend Plus Programming Software for IBM® compatible PCs is
available to program all the Legend configuration parameters, such as
messages, count modes, etc. The software allows unit configurations to be
created, uploaded, downloaded and saved to a file for rapid programming of the
Legend unit.
The six programmable User Inputs can be configured to provide a variety of
functions. Four user inputs are located on the upper rear terminal block and the
other two inputs are front panel function keys. The User Inputs can be
configured to provide functions such as:
Count Inhibit
Message Request
Output Activation
Program Disable
Print Request

Reset
Message Cancellation
Output Deactivation
View/Freeze Display
Skip Presets(outputs)

The units offer a choice of seven programmable counting modes for use in
applications requiring Bi-directional, Anti-coincidence, and Quadrature
counting. The count inhibit function can be utilized with all of these input
response modes by programming User Input 4 for the Inhibit Count function.
The input circuitry is switch selectable to accept signals from a variety of
sources. In the Anti-coincidence mode both inputs are monitored
simultaneously, so that no counts are missed, and the final count can be chosen
as the sum or difference of the two inputs.
Rate, Process and Total displays have separate scaling and decimal point
placement, for readouts in different units. The Counter Load feature enables the
operator to modify the count value. This is useful when flawed material has
been counted and it is necessary to adjust the count value accordingly.
The rate operates in the time interval method (1/tau) to calculate the rate
value. This method insures high resolution at all input rates. Averaging can be
accomplished by programming the Minimum and Maximum Update Time for
the desired response. Extensive scaling capabilities allow practically any
reading at very slow input rates.
The construction of the Legend Plus unit is a lightweight, high impact plastic
case with a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with silicone rubber
keypad meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed. Plug-in style terminal blocks simplify
installation and wiring change-outs.

SAFETY SUMMARY

MODEL - LGPB

The process counter is used to monitor the count within the batch. Presets 1
through 4 can be assigned to the process counter or the rate indicator. Presets 3
and 4 can also be assigned to either the batch counter or totalizer.
Presets 1 and 2 can activate relay outputs 1 and 2 respectively. Presets 3 and
4 can activate the NPN open collector outputs O3-SNK and O4-SNK
respectively.

MODEL - LGPM

The Multi Preset unit has 6 presets which can control NPN open collector
outputs 01-SNK to 06-SNK respectively. Presets 1 through 6 can be assigned to
either the rate or count display.
STANDARD INDICATION DISPLAYS
& PRESETS FOR EACH MODEL

LGPB & LGPBF
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
PROCESS
BATCH
TOTAL
(4 Presets)

194

LGPM
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
COUNT
(6 Presets)

SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 2x8, 0.3" (7 mm) high characters, negative image transmissive
LCD, with Single (green or red) or Dual Color (green and red) LED
backlighting.
2. POWER:
AC Operation: 115/230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
DC Operation: +12 VDC ±20% @ 250 mA max.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile memory retains all programming information.
Count and Preset values are written to non-volatile memory when power is
interrupted. All other programming parameters are written to memory when
programming mode is exited. If power is removed while in the programming
menu’s the parameters are stored to previously saved settings.
Data Retention: 10 yr. min.
Message/Mnemonics Memory:
792 (LGPB) / 804 (LGPM) bytes available (with factory settings loaded).
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC ±25% @ 100 mA.
5. INPUTS A and B: DIP Switch selectable to accept count pulses from a
variety of sources including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL
circuits, magnetic pickups and all standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 VMAX; VIH = 3.75 VMIN.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mAMAX @ 28 VDC.
Debounce: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce.
Limits count speed to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak.
Hysteresis: 100 mV.
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz.
Maximum input voltage: ±50 Vp
Note: For magnetic pickup input, the sink/source DIP switch must be in the
SRC position.
6. RATE ACCURACY: ±0.01%
7. RATE MINIMUM INPUT FREQUENCY: 0.01Hz.
8. MAXIMUM COUNT RATE IN KHz:
MODEL

CNT + DIR

LGPB (Batch)
LGPM (Six Preset)
LGPBF (Foot-Inch)

X1
15
13
15

X2
7
6
7

QUAD

X1
7
6
7

X2
5.5
5
5.5

X4
3
2.5
3

ADD/ADD

ADD/SUB

X1*
14
12
15

X1*
7
6
7

Notes:
1. Maximum count rates given are for Process counter set for Auto reset with
the auto cycle preset set to an equivalent of 100 count pulses or greater.
With auto cycle presets less than 100 counts the maximum count rates may
be lower. The actual Preset value for 100 count pulses, with Count
SF=0.5000 and Count Scale Multiplier=X1, would be 50.
2. Maximum count rate given for X2 & X4 count modes are given for 50%
duty cycle signals and Quad signals with 90° phase shift.
*Inputs A & B count rates summed.
9. MAXIMUM COUNT CAPACITY:
Process or Count: 9 digits internal (non-scaled), 6 digits displayable (scaled)
Batch Count: 6 digits
Total Count: 11 digits internal (non-scaled), 8 digits displayable (scaled)
10. CONTROL INPUTS:
Programmable user inputs (4):
USR INP 1 to 3: Internal 10 KΩ pull-up to +5 VDC, VIL = 1.5 VMAX; VIH
= 3.5 VMIN, response time = 30 msec typical, 100 msec max. (count rate
dependent).
USR INP 4/INH: Internal 10 KΩ pull-up to +5 VDC, VIL = 1.5 VMAX,
VIH = 3.0 VMIN, response time = 30 msec typical, 100 msec max. (count
rate dependent).
INHIBIT Response time = 50 μsec max.
User Inputs Programmed for Binary Message Request: Debounce =
100 msec. (Binary message request inputs must be stable for 100 msec
before a message is requested).
11. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS:
Type: Jumper selectable RS485 or RS232.
Can connect up to 32 units when using RS485 interface.
Baud Rate: Programmable from 1200 to 9600.
Maximum Addresses: Programmable from 00 to 99. (Actual number on a
line is limited by hardware specifications)
Transmit Delay: Programmable for 0.002 or 0.100 second.
Data Format: 10 Bit Frame; 1 start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, 1 or no parity bit,
and 1 stop bit. Parity is programmable for ODD (7 data bits), EVEN (7
data bits), or NO Parity (8 data bits).
12. OUTPUT(S):
Solid-State: Current sinking NPN open collector transistor.
VCE = 1.1 VSAT @ 100 mA max. VOH = 30 VDC max.
(Internal Zener Diode Protection).

www.redlion.net

12. OUTPUT(S): (Cont’d)
Relay(s): Mounted on field-replaceable P.C. board. Form C contacts rated at
5 amps @ 120 VAC/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120
VAC (inductive load). The operate time is 5 msec nominal and the release
time is 3 msec nominal.
Programmable Timed Output(s): Programmable time ranges from 0.01 to
99.99 seconds, ±0.05% - 11 msec max.
Output Time Required To Request Message: 50 msec.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g’s (10g relay), 11 msec
in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File # E137808, UL508, CSA22.2 No. 14
Recognized to U. S and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL1581-176645/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report #97ME50052-081391
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

IEC 61010- 1, EN 61010- 1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O1
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 1
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Note:
1. When the unit is DC powered from terminal TBA pin 5 (common) and
terminal TBA pin 3 (DC OUT/ IN) a power line filter was installed, RLC
#LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
15. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. (Panel gasket,
mounting clips, nut fasteners and screws included with unit.)
16. WEIGHT: 1.5 lbs. (0.68 Kg)

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
PRESET(S)
Ranges from -99999 to 999999
Counter Load ranges from -99999 to 999999
SCALE FACTORS (RATE, COUNT & TOTAL)
Ranges from 0.0001 to 5.9999. The internal count value is multiplied by the
count scale factor and the count scale multiplier to provide the process count
display value. The total count is scaled by the count scale factor and the count
scale multiplier, and is additionally scaled by the total scale factor. The number
of negative edges is multiplied by the rate scale factor, the rate scale multiplier,
and the rate conversion factor to calculate the rate value.
COUNT SCALE MULTIPLIER
Multiplies the contents of the 9-digit internal counter or the 11-digit internal
totalizer by a factor of 1, 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 to view the desired number of
significant digits on the 6-digit Counter display or the 8-digit Totalizer display.

PROGRAMMING

The Legend Plus Series provides an easy to use, menu driven programming
interface. The English prompts, the front panel keypad, and the flashing display
aid the operator during programming. In the normal operating mode, the main
display loop allows the user to scroll through the four programmable indication
displays using the direction keys. From the main loop, presets and scale factors
can be accessed directly. All other parameters are accessed through the
programming loop, which can be set to require an access code number to enter
the loop. In the programming loop, parameters can be viewed or changed and
the operator can exit anywhere in the loop. The drawing above shows the main
display loop and part of the programming loop of a Legend Plus unit. Also
shown above right are four different views of the indication displays.

DECIMAL POINT
Separate decimal point location for Count, Rate, and Total displays.
0
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.0000
0.00000
RATE SCALE MULTIPLIERS
Multiplies the contents of the actual internal rate, pulses per second (PPS),
by a factor of 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, or 1000 to view the desired number of
significant digits on the 6-digit Rate display. The desired time units for the rate
can be programmed as per Second (x1), per Minute (x60), or per Hour (x3600).

1-717-767-6511

195

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS (Cont’d)
UPDATE TIME
The Rate Minimum and Maximum Update Times range from 0.1 to 99.9
seconds. This provides averaging capability for non-consistent pulse spacing.
Note: The maximum update time must be larger than the minimum update time.

COUNTING MODES
Count with Direction
Count with Direction (X2)
Quadrature
Quadrature (X2)
Quadrature (X4)
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Subtract
2-Input Anti-coincidence Add/Add
A separate Inhibit input is available for all count modes.
RESET MODES
Manual Reset
Automatic Reset at Preset
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1
Reset at Beginning Of Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 2
Reset at Beginning Of Output 1 or Output 2
Reset at End Of Timed Output 1 or Output 2
MODEL LGPB ONLY
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3
Reset at Beginning Of Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 4
Reset at Beginning Of Output 3 or Output 4
Reset at End Of Timed Output 3 or Output 4
RESET ACTION
Reset to Zero: Count display value returns to zero when reset. Output activates,
if programmed, when the count equals the preset value.
Reset to Preset: Count display value returns to preset value when reset. Output
assigned to the specified preset activates, if programmed, when the count
equals zero.
Reset to Counter Load: Count display value returns to counter load value when
reset. Output activates, if programmed, when count equals the preset value.
USER INPUTS
There are four external user inputs and two front panel Function keys that are
programmable. When activated, each user input can be programmed to perform
one of the following functions:
Maintained Reset or Momentary Reset:
Can reset Rate, Peak, Valley, Process*, Batch*, Total*, or Count* display
values and/or any output associated with that display.
* On Models with these available display options.
Reset Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their inactive state. (Momentary action)
Set Output(s):
Places the output(s) in their active state. (Momentary action)
View Display 1-4:
Causes the selected indication display (1, 2, 3, or 4) to be displayed and held
from anywhere in the main display loop. The current display value is frozen
(not updated) while the display is held.
Change Display:
Causes the indication display to toggle to the next indication display.
Request Message:
Requests a specific programmed message to activate.
Clear Message:
Causes the displayed message to be canceled. (Maintained action)
Skip Preset:
Keeps the output from activating and automatic reset from occurring, if
programmed, when the count value equals the preset value.
Counter Load:
Places the counter load value into the count display and operates from that
value. (Maintained action)
Print Request:
Transmits the values specified in the Program Print Options module over the
serial port. (Maintained action)

196

Program Disable:
Can be used alone, or in conjunction with the program disable DIP switch, to
provide a variety of program security modes. (External User Input only)
Inhibit Count:
Prevents pulses from being counted on Inputs A and B. (User Input 4 only).
The rate input is not affected by the inhibit setting and continues to display the
rate of the signal at Input A.
OUTPUT(S)
Output Assignment:
The LGPB can have outputs 1 through 4 assigned to the process or the rate.
Outputs 3 and 4 can also be assigned to the batch or total.
The LGPM can have outputs 1 through 6 assigned to either count or rate.
Phase:
Each output can have its active logic state set for positive phase (normally
off) or negative phase (normally on).
Output Activation Mode:
Latched
Boundary
Timed - 0.01 to 99.99 seconds
Hi/Lo Acting:
This mode is used in conjunction with all Rate modes and the Boundary
count modes. A Lo acting output would perform the Output action when the
count/rate is lower than the preset. A Hi acting output would perform the
Output action when the count/rate is higher than or equal to the preset.
Rate Output On/Off Delay:
Used to prevent output chatter. Output condition must be satisfied for a
period of time longer than delay period for output state to change.
On Delay: Prevents activation of output(s) for the amount of time
programmed.
Off Delay: Prevents deactivation of output(s) for the amount of time
programmed.
On & Off Delay: This mode prevents output state change for specified delay
period when turning on or off.
Output Reset Mode:
Outputs 1 & 2 Only:
End Output 1 @ Output 2 Start
End Output 1 @ Timed Output 2 End
End Output 2 @ Output 1 Start
End Output 2 @ Timed Output 1 End
Output(s) Power Up or Power Down State:
The Output’s state can be set to be Off (Inactive) @ power up.
OR
The Output’s state can be saved @ power down and restored at power-up.
OR
The Output’s state can be set to be ON (Active) @ power up.
Note: Power down state for Latched Mode Only.
Reset Output when Count is Reset:
This feature can be enabled or disabled.
Request Message:
Each output can be programmed to request a specific message when the
output conditions are satisfied.
INDICATION DISPLAYS
Each of the four indication displays is programmed individually. Each line of
each indication display can be programmed to show a value mnemonic, a
numeric value, the output status, a preset value, the counter load value, or a
custom display line. The mnemonics are factory set to; RATE, PEAK, VALLEY,
COUNT*, PROCESS*, BATCH*, TOTAL*, and OVERFLOW. Each
mnemonic can be individually changed to a mnemonic tailored to a specific
application. The first character of the full mnemonic is displayed to the left of
the appropriate numeric value if the other line is not programmed to display the
full mnemonic. Each of the 4 indication displays can be programmed to be
green or red on dual color models.
* On Models with these available display options.
Scroll Speed:
None
2.5 Seconds
5.0 Seconds
Display Intensity:
The brightness of the display can be adjusted from 1 to 5, with 5 as the
brightest. There is a separate adjustment for each color.

www.redlion.net

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS (Cont’d)
INDICATION DISPLAYS (Cont’d)
Custom Display Line:
The Legend Plus has two Custom Display Lines which allow the user to
specify the number of digits to be displayed on the line, along with any alphanumeric prefix or suffix.
Program Mnemonic:
Allows the user to modify the mnemonics (RATE, PROCESS, BATCH, etc.)
to a mnemonic of your choice. For example, RATE can be changed to read
SPEED.
MESSAGES
There are ten messages that can be programmed in the Legend. The following
attributes can be set for each message.
Message Text:
Standard Characters - Lower/Upper case letters, numbers, punctuation
symbols
Extended Characters (Including most European characters)
Message Priority:
1 to 8 (1 = highest priority)
Message Type:
1 line block - message scrolls in block fashion on the top line of the display,
bottom line contains programmed indication display.
2 line block - message scrolls in block fashion on both lines of the display
1 line scroll - message scrolls right to left on the top line of the display,
bottom line contains programmed indication display
2 line scroll - Top line scrolls right to left, bottom line is blanked
Maintained/Momentary Request:
A Maintained Request setting enables messages to be restored or
redisplayed, when the display is available if the input/output action
requesting the message is still active.
A Momentary Message setting will allow only one request per message
requesting input/output action. Lower priority messages will be canceled by
higher priority messages.
Blinking Message:
Enables the message to blink when displayed. Only available with 1 or 2 line
block messages.
Multiplex:
Setting this parameter to yes will cause the unit to display the message for 2
seconds, then display the programmed display for 2 seconds. Only available
with 1 or 2 line block messages.

Message Cancellation:
The displayed message is canceled when:
A message of equal or higher priority is requested.
Message times out (Timed) and input/output is deactivated.
User input or output is deactivated (Til End).
User input programmed for clear message is activated.
Message Time:
Ranges from 1 to 599 Seconds.
Message Color: (Dual Color Option only)
Green or Red
COMMUNICATION PORT
Jumper selectable for RS-485 or RS-232
Baud Rate - 1200 to 9600
Parity - Odd (7 data bits), Even (7 data bits), or No parity (8 data bits)
Unit Address - 00 to 99
Transmit Delay - 0.002 or 0.100 seconds
PRINT OPTIONS
The programmable print options specify which values are transmitted when
a print request is issued. The available options are; Rate, Peak, Valley, Count*,
Process*, Batch*, Total*, Scale Factors, Preset(s), Counter Load values, and
Message 0.
* On Models with these available display options.
The unit can be programmed to transmit or NOT to transmit mnemonics (unit
address & value identifiers). The mnemonic transmitted is the first three
characters of the programmed display mnemonic. For total, only the first
character is transmitted. A transmit and reset count capability allows the
selected count values to automatically reset after the value is printed
(transmitted).
OPERATOR ACCESS TO FRONT PANEL
There are several program disable modes that can be used to limit the
operator from programming the parameter values via the front panel keypad.
The Program Disable DIP switch can be used alone or in conjunction with a
User Input, programmed for the program disable function and a programmable
code value, to provide the desired level of security.

MODEL LGPB APPLICATION

A local canning plant wishes to improve the display and control capabilities
of its nine process lines. There is a requirement to add message interaction for
the operators during process operation. The following application facts and
requirements have been specified by the plant engineer.
1. The cans are sensed by a photo-electric device specially suited for can
manufacturing. The device produces one pulse per can.
2. The can count for the process of boxing the cans is the first requirement. The
can count is never changed, there are always 24 cans to each box. An output
is required at 20 cans to slow the line temporarily until the second output is
turned on. The second output changes the gate direction to begin the next
grouping of 24. The second output has a time delay output of 2 seconds. After
the time delay, both outputs are reset and ready for the next process cycle.
3. A count of the number of batches is required for each 8-hour shift. This count
is recorded and reset by the manufacturing computer.
4. A total count of cans produced per 24-hour period is required. This count is
also transmitted to the manufacturing computer, and reset as required via the
communication link.
5. A display of cans per minute is required with minimum and maximum speed
limits. Output 3 activates below 100 counts per minute and Output 4
activates above 500 counts per minute.
6. The four desired displays are process, batch, total, and rate. These are to be
scrolled via the front panel.
7. The customer also wants the following messages displayed when the listed
events occur:
Output 3 - Line #4 Slow
Output 4 - Overspd STOP! (Wants this display to stand out and have top
priority)
Proximity 1 - Check Label Glue
Proximity 2 - Check Top Supply
Proximity 3 - System Fault! Stop Line #4! (Wants this display to stand out
and have top priority)

8. Once the unit is set up, the only front panel access should be for a reset of
the process count and viewing of the displays.
The following page is a chart of the necessary programming for the Legend
Plus unit.

1-717-767-6511

197

LEGEND PLUS PROGRAM SHEET
RATE

SCALING

COUNT SF
RATE SF
TOT SF
CNT. SCM
CNT. D.P.
RATE SCM
RATE PER
RATE D.P.
TOT D.P.
CHG. CNT

MIN. TIME
MAX. TIME

1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
X1.0
0
X1.0
MINUTE
0
0
YES

MESSAGE

1.0
5.0

COUNTER
CNT. INPUT
PRC. RST.
P AUTO. RS
BAT. RST.
B AUTO. RS
TOT. RST.

CT+DIRX1
TO ZERO
OUT2
TO ZERO
DISABLED
TO ZERO

USER INPUTS
BIN. MSG.REQ. NONE
USER INP. 1
REQMSG#5
USER INP. 3
REQMSG#4
USER F1
NO MODE

USER INP. 2
USER INP. 4
USER F2

REQMSG#6
CLRMSG
MNT.RST
PRC-YES

OUTPUTS
OUTPUT 1
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OUTPUT END
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #
OUTPUT 3
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #

TO PRC
+
LATCHED
@OUT2END
OFF@P.UP
EN

TO RATE
+
BOUNDARY
LO ACT
OFF@P.UP
EN
2

OUTPUT 2
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OUTPUT END
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #
OUTPUT 4
ASSIGNED
PHASE
TYPE
ACT/TIME
OFF @ P.
RST/C
REQ MSG #

TO PRC
+
TIMED
2.00
DISABLED
OFF@P.UP
EN

TO RATE
+
BOUNDARY
HI ACT
OFF@P.UP
EN
3

OPTIONS
ACCESS
P1
P2
P3
P4
CTLD.
SF’S

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

PRESETS
P1
P2
P3
P4
CL

20
24
100
500
0

MSG. #1
TEXT

1
GATE CHANGE

PRIORITY
TYPE
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIME SEC.
COLOR

8
2L BLOCK
NO
NO
TIL END

MSG. #2
TEXT

2
LINE #4
SLOW
7
2L BLOCK
YES
YES
TIL END

PRIORITY
TYPE
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIME SEC.
COLOR
MSG. #3
TEXT
PRIORITY
TYPE
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIME SEC.
COLOR

GREEN

GREEN
3
OVERSPD
STOP
5
2L BLOCK
YES
YES
TIL END
RED

MSG. #5
TEXT

5
CHECK LABEL
GLUE
PRIORITY
6
TYPE
1L SCROL
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIMED
TIME SEC.
1
COLOR
GREEN
MSG. #6
TEXT

6
CHECK TOP
SUPPLY
PRIORITY
6
TYPE
1L SCROL
BLINKING
MULTIPLEX
CANCEL
TIMED
TIME SEC.
1
COLOR
GREEN

DISPLAY
DISPLY 1
D1 LINE 1
D1 LINE 2
D1 COLOR

CUSTOM 2
OUTPUTS
GREEN

DISPLY 2
D2 LINE 1
D2 LINE 2
D2 COLOR

BAT-MNE
BAT-VAL
GREEN

DISPLY 3
D3 LINE 1
D3 LINE 2
D3 COLOR

CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
GREEN

DISPLY 4
D4 LINE 1
D4 LINE 2
D4 COLOR

TOT-MNE
TOT-VAL
GREEN

MNEMONIC
RATE
PEAK
VALLEY
PROC/CNT
BATCH
TOTAL
OVERFLOW

SPEED
P
V
CANS
CASES
TOT.CANS
OVERFLOW

SCRO. SPD
NONE
DSP. LEVEL G 10
R 10
CUST. DSP.
CUST.DSP.1

PRESET TRACKING
P1 TRACK
NONE
P2 TRACK
NONE
P3 TRACK
NONE
P4 TRACK
NONE
PRO. CODE
33

MSG. #4
4
TEXT
SYSTEM
STOP LINE #4
FAULT
PRIORITY
5
TYPE
2L BLOCK
BLINKING
YES
MULTIPLEX
NO
CANCEL
TIMED
TIME SEC.
1
COLOR
RED

CUST. DPS.2

VAL-RATE
-CPM
VAL-PRC
-CANS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

LGPB

LGPM
LGPBF
SFLGP

198

PART NUMBER
115/230 VAC
& +12VDC

DESCRIPTION

Four Preset Batch Legend Plus w/Grn Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend Plus w/Red Backlighting
Four Preset Batch Legend Plus w/Dual Color Backlighting
Multi-Preset (6) Legend Plus w/Grn Backlighting
Multi-Preset (6) Legend Plus w/Red Backlighting
Multi-Preset (6) Legend Plus w/Dual Color Backlighting
Four Preset Foot-Inch Counter w/Red Backlighting
Legend Plus Programming Software, 3 1/2", 1.44 M Disk
Dual Relay Board (Model LGPBs only)

www.redlion.net

LGPB0000
LGPB0100
LGPB0200
LGPM0001
LGPM0101
LGPM0201
LGPBF100
SFLGP
RLYLG002

RATE
METERS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

199

QUICK Specs
Rate Meters
DT8

I N D I C AT I O N
PAXLR

PAXLPT

Rate Indicator

1/8 DIN Rate Indicator

1/8 DIN Process Time Indicator

Counter/Rate Meter with
Output Option Card Capability

39 mm (H) x 75mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

39 mm (H) x 75mm (W)

5 Digit, .6" (15mm) Reflective,
Green and
Red Backlight LCD

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) LED

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) LED
Decimal and Chronometer Modes

6 Digit, .46" (12mm)
Reflective, Green and
Red Backlight LCD

Selectable Time Base
Range 4 msec to 32 sec.

Adjustable Time Interval

10,000 Counts/Sec.

25,000 Counts/Sec.

20,000 Counts/Sec.

Yes

No
Yes, with Micro Line Power
Supply

9 to 17.5 VDC @ 100 mA

No
Yes, with Micro Line Power
Supply

Setpoint
Capability

Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking

Communications

RS485

Power Source

3 Volt Lithium Battery,
Backlighting
9 - 28 VDC @ 35 mA

115/230 VAC
10 to 16 VDC

9 to 28 VDC

Page Number

Page 205

Page 210

Page 220

Page 209

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

Measurement
Format

Max. Input
Frequency

Decimal Points

Sensor Power

200

www.redlion.net

CONTROL
CUB5

QUICK Specs
Rate Meters
PAXLCR

CONTROL
PAXR

PAXI

I N D I C AT I O N
GEM52

1/8 DIN Counter/Rate Meter
with Setpoint Capability

1/8 DIN Rate Meter
with Setpoint Card Capability

1/8 DIN Counter/Rate Meter with
Output Option Card Capability

Dual Rate Meter with
Math Functions

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

69 mm (H) x 133 mm (W)

6 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

5 Digit, .56" (14mm) Standard
Green or Sunlight Readable
Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) Standard
Green or Sunlight Readable
Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

6 Digit, .56" (14mm) LED

Uni-Directional
Up/Down
Inhibit
Add/Subtract
Add/Add
Quadrature
Batch

Adjustable Time Interval

Adjustable Time Interval
Ratio (A/B),
Difference (A-B),
Draw [(A-B)/B] or Dual Rate

20,000 Counts/Sec.
Program Dependent

34,000 Counts/Sec.

10,000 Counts/Sec.

Yes

24 VDC @ 100 mA, over 50 V
24 VDC @ 50 mA, under 50 V

12 VDC @ 100 mA

Dual Form C Relays

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

Single or Dual Form C
Current Sinking

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

20 mA Current Loop

Power Source

50 to 250 VAC
21.6 to 250 VDC

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

115/230 VAC
11 to 14 VDC

Page Number

Page 217

Page 218

Page 219

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

Measurement
Format

Max. Input
Frequency

Decimal Points

Sensor Power

Setpoint
Capability

Communications

*See website for product information.

1-717-767-6511

201

QUICK Specs
Rate Meters
CONTROL
MDC

INDICATION
HHT

Motor Drive Controller

Hand Held Rate Indicator

75 mm (H) x 75 mm (W)

170 mm (H) x 72 mm (W)

2 x 8 Digit, .3" (7mm)
Red Backlight LCD

5 Digit, .4" (10mm) LCD

Master & Follower Modes
Loop Response:
10 msec (Master)
20 msec (Follower)

Touch Type [HHT]
Revs./Min
Feet/Min
Meters/Min
Photo Type [HHTP]
Revs/Min

20,000 Counts/Sec.

1999 RPM, 1999.9 M/Min
6560 Ft/Min [HHT]
100,000 RPM [HHTP]

Yes

Sensor Power

12 VDC @ 100 mA

Setpoint
Capability

3 Current Sinking
0 to 15 VDC

Power Source

115/230 VAC

4 x 1.5 V AA size

Page Number

Page 227

Page 231

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

Measurement
Format

Max. Input
Frequency

Decimal Points

Communications

202

www.redlion.net

REPLACEMENT Guide
CURRENT PRODUCT

WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES

MODEL NUMBER

Q Display:

CUBID/CUBVD
DT5

4 Digit, .35" (9 mm)
Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 2 “N” Alkaline
Batteries
Q Measurement Format: Fixed One
Second

FEATURES

Q Display:

5 Digit, .6" (15 mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: Internal Battery
Q Measurement Format: Time Base
DT8

Q Display:

LPPI
DT6

4 Digit, .35" (9 mm)
Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 2 “N” Alkaline Batteries
or 5 to 24 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Time Base

Q Display:

5 Digit, .6" (15 mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: Internal Battery
Q Measurement Format: Time Base
DT8
Q Display:

5 Digit, .6" (15 mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: Internal Battery
Q Measurement Format: Time Base

Q Display:

5 Digit, .6" (15 mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: Internal Battery
Q Measurement Format: Time Base
DT7

DT8
Q Display:

5 Digit, .6" (15 mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: Internal Battery
Q Measurement Format: Time Base

Q Display:

5 Digit, .46" (12 mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: Internal Battery
Q Measurement Format: Time Base
APLIT/APLHV
DT9

DT8
Q Display:

APLCL/APLPV
DT3A

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED
Source: 115/230 VAC,
10 to 16 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Programmable
Scaling and Update
Q Use PMKA1 Panel
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Power

Q Display:

4 Digit, .43" (11 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement Format: Fixed One
Second
PAXLR

Q Display:
Q Display:

APLSG

4 Digit, .43" (11 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC, 12 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Time Base

DT3D

PAXLR

Q Display:

IMP
APLR & APLRI

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Construction: Metal Front Bezel
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 14 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Time Base

PAXLR

Q Display:

4 or 5 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 14 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Process Time

APLPT

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED
Source: 115/230 VAC,
10 to 16 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Programmable
Scaling and Update
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Power

Q Display:

IMD

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED
Source: 115/230 VAC,
10 to 16 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Programmable
Scaling and Update
Q Use PMKA1 Panel
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Power

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED
Source: 115/230 VAC,
10 to 16 VDC
Q Measurement Format: Programmable
Scaling and Update
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Power

PAXLPT

Q Display:

IMH

Q Display:

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Count Speed: 50 KHz Max.

IMI

PAXI

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Q Count Speed: 34 KHz Max.
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card

Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.

1-717-767-6511

203

This page intentionally left blank.
204

www.redlion.net

DITAK 8 - ADJUSTABLE TIMEBASE 5-DIGIT RATE INDICATOR
z LCD, POSITIVE REFLECTIVE OR NEGATIVE TRANSMISSIVE
WITH YELLOW/GREEN OR RED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.6 INCH (15.2 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z ADJUSTABLE TIMEBASE FROM 4 MSEC TO 32 SEC
z INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY PROVIDES OVER 7 YEARS OF
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT PANEL BEZEL
z ACCEPTS MAGNETIC OR LOGIC TYPE SIGNAL INPUTS
z WIRE CONNECTIONS MADE VIA SCREW CLAMP
TYPE TERMINALS

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The Ditak 8 is a self-powered rate indicator which features selectable
Timebase Increments by setting the appropriate DIP switches on the rear of the
unit. The internal 3.0 VDC lithium battery will operate continuously for at least
7 years. It has a 5-digit LCD display with 0.6 inch (15.2 mm) high digits. The
displays are available in positive image reflective (black digits, reflective
background) or negative image transmissive (illuminated digits, dark
background) with red or yellow/green backlighting. Backlight version units
require power from an external 9 to 28 VDC supply.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a clear
viewing window. The sealed front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications
for wash-down and/or dusty environments, when properly installed.
The optional Micro Line/Sensor Power Supply (MLPS1000) is designed to
attach to the rear of an installed Ditak 8. The optional supply can be powered
from 85 to 250 VAC, and can provide power for the backlighting of a unit and
most sensors.

1. DISPLAY: 5-Digit LCD, 0.6" (15.2 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Internal 3.0 V lithium battery provides over 7 years of
continuous service (battery life is dependent upon usage).
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC @ 35 mA.
Above 26 VDC, derate operating temperature to 50°C. Must use the MLPS1
or a Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. SIGNAL INPUT: 0 to 10 KHz from a magnetic or bi-polar output (with a
50% duty cycle). Min. input sensitivity is 0.9 V. Max. input = 28 VDC.
5. TIMEBASE: Adjustable in 1/256 sec (3.906 msec) increments via DIP
switches located at the rear of the unit. Timebase ranges from 3.906 msec to
31.998 sec; 0.01% ±1 digit accuracy.
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°C (Above 50°C derate backlight operating
voltage to 26 VDC max.)
Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
60°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window
(Panel gasket and mounting clip included). Installation Category I, Pollution
Degree 2.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Adjustable Timebase Tachometer
DT800000
Adjustable Timebase Tachometer with
DT800010
DT8
Yellow/Green Backlighting
Adjustable Timebase Tachometer with
DT800020
Red Backlighting
MLPS
Micro Line Sensor/Power Supply
MLPS1000
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the RLC
Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

1-717-767-6511

205

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion B
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion B
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L, 2 kV
L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
9. WEIGHT: 3.4 oz (96.4 g)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:

206

BLOCK DIAGRAM

WIRING CONNECTIONS
The electrical connections are made via rear screw-clamp terminals
located on the back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and
current ratings for each terminal. Also cabling should conform to
appropriate standards of good installation, local codes and regulations. It is
recommended that power supplied to the unit (AC or DC) be protected by a
fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use the label to identify the
wire position with the proper function. Strip the wire, leaving
approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be tinned with
solder). Insert the wire into the screw-clamp terminal and tighten the screw
until the wire is clamped tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two #14
AWG wires.
The backlighting for a backlight version unit is powered between
Terminal 2 (V+) and Terminal 1 (GND).

Variable Frequency AC Inputs, Signal Source Powered

Variable Frequency AC Inputs, Signal Source Powered
Minimum VAC for operation is 0.9 V peak.

Logic Pulse Inputs From Other Circuits & Sensors

www.redlion.net

REAR PANEL DIP SWITCHES
When viewing the Ditak 8 from the rear, there are two banks of DIP switches
located along the top edge of the PC board. The bank of eight switches to the left
is labeled SWA and the bank of six switches to the right is labeled SWB. All of
the SWA switches and five of the SWB switches are used to select the desired
Timebase. The remaining switch of SWB is used to select Frequency Doubling.

The Timebase increment total is computed according to the following formula:
TIMEBASE INCREMENT TOTAL (TBIT) =
WHERE:
DR
RPM
PPR
FQ.DBL.

=
=
=
=

DR x 15,361
RPM x PPR x FQ.DBL.

Desired Reading
Revolutions Per Minute
Pulses Per Revolution
Frequency Doubling disable (times 1 switch on,
times 2 switch off)

Example: Find the appropriate Timebase DIP switch setting for desired
parameters.
Desired Readout (DR)
= 2500
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) = 1250
Pulses Per Revolution (PPR)
= 50
FQ.DBL. = ON (times 1 switch on)
TIMEBASE INCREMENT TOTAL (TBIT) =
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

TBIT = 614.44

FREQUENCY DOUBLING
DIP switch SWB 6 is the “Frequency Doubling” switch. When it is in the
“ON” position, frequency doubling is disabled. When set to the “OFF” position,
it is enabled and twice the number of input pulses are registered in the unit. This
doubling of the input rate allows the Timebase Increment Total to be halved,
thus allowing a faster update time for a given display value.

TBIT = 614

The Ditak 8 has a Timebase selection range from 3.906 msec to 31.998 sec.
SWA 1 is set to the “ON” position for the minimum Timebase setting. SWA 1
through SWB 5 are set to the “ON” position for the maximum Timebase setting.
A specific Timebase setting is achieved by adding the appropriate individual
Timebase increments.
TIMEBASE
INCREMENTS

SWA 1
SWA 2
SWA 3
SWA 4
SWA 5
SWA 6
SWA 7
SWA 8

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

TBIT = 614 {round to the nearest whole number}

TIMEBASE SELECTION

SWITCH

2500 x 15,361
1250 x 50 x 1

DIP SWB 2

DIP SWA 7

DIP SWA 6

DIP SWA 3

DIP SWA 2

512
102
64
38
32
6
4
2
2
0

Needed

SWITCH

TIMEBASE
INCREMENTS

Note: If no timebase switches are turned on, the Ditak 8 will default to 3.906
msec timebase.

SWB
SWB
SWB
SWB
SWB
SWB

256
512
1024
2048
4096
FREQ. DBL.

DIP switches SWA 2, 3, 6, 7, and SWB 2 are all set to the “ON” position for
a Timebase Increment Total of 614. If it is desired to know what the
approximate Timebase is in seconds, use the following formula:

1
2
3
4
5
6

TBIT x 0.003906
614 x 0.003906

=
=

Time in seconds
2.398 sec.

TYPICAL APPLICATION
CONVEYOR BELT SPEED INDICATOR
It is desired to display the rate of a conveyor belt used to carry PC Boards through an infrared soldering chamber that is variable from 0 to 10 feet per minute.
The rate must be adjusted depending on the size of the boards being soldered. The display of the rate indicator must read in feet per minute. The shaft of the variable
speed motor contains a keyway. A speed of 100 RPM will produce a belt speed of 10 ft/min. A proximity sensor is used to monitor the speed of the shaft. The Ditak
8 can be used to display the belt speed in this application. The output signal of the sensor is connected to the Ditak 8 Terminal 3 (INP). The sensor common and
shield are connected to the Ditak 8 Terminal 1 (GND). The Timebase setting is to be determined by using the formula.
TIMEBASE INCREMENT TOTAL (TBIT) =
DR x 15,361
=
RPM x PPR x FQ.DBL.
Desired Reading
MAX RPM Of Shaft
Pulses Per Revolution
FQ.DBL.

10 x 15,361
100 x 1 x 1
= 10
= 100
= 1
= ON (times 1 switch on)

With these DIP switch settings, the Timebase would be approximately 5.99 sec
(1536 x 0.003906 = 5.995). To reduce the display update time, the “Frequency
Doubling” switch can be enabled (set to the “OFF” position). Therefore, only half
the Timebase will be necessary (768 x 0.003906 = 2.99 sec.).
TBIT = 768

TBIT = 1536.1
TBIT = 1536 {round to the nearest whole number}
TBIT = 1536
DIP SWB 3
DIP SWB 2

- 1024
512
512
0

Needed

1-717-767-6511

DIP SWB 2

DIP SWB 1

DIP SWB 6

512
256
256
0
OFF

Needed

Needed
Frequency Doubling Enabled

207

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
The unit should be installed in a location that does
not exceed the maximum operating temperature
and provides good air circulation. Placing the
unit near devices that generate excessive
heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only
with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct
sunlight may accelerate the aging
process of the bezel.

INSTALLATION

The Ditak 8 meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use, when properly installed. The units are
intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. A sponge
rubber gasket, mounting clip, two screws, and nut
fasteners are provided to install and seal the unit in the
panel cut-out.
The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs
and clean panel opening.
2. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of
the bezel.
3. Slide nut fastener into slot on mounting clip and then insert mounting
screw through nut on both sides of mounting clip. Tip of mounting screw
should NOT project through hole on clip.
4. Install Ditak unit through panel cut-out.
5. Slide mounting clip over rear of unit until clip is against back of panel. The
mounting clip and Ditak housing have a latching feature to hold the unit in
place until tightened.
Note: Hold the Ditak front bezel in place when sliding the mounting clip
into position.

6. Alternately tighten each mounting screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the gasket for proper seal. The gasket should be
compressed approximately 75 to 80% of its original thickness.
7. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws cannot
be tightened any further, loosen mounting screws and insure that the clip is
latched as close as possible to the panel.
8. Repeat step #6 for tightening the mounting screws.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

208

www.redlion.net

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING

0.46" (11.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS

OPTIONAL RELAY OUTPUT MODULE

OPTIONAL COMMS OUTPUT MODULES

COUNT SPEEDS UP TO 20 KHZ

OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE

PROGRAMMABLE SCALING FOR COUNT AND RATE

BI-DIRECTIONAL COUNTING, UP/DOWN CONTROL

QUADRATURE SENSING (UP TO 4 TIMES RESOLUTION)

ANTI-COINCIDENCE COUNTING (ADD/ADD & ADD/SUB)

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

1-717-767-6511

209

MODEL PAXLR - PAX® LITE RATE METER
z RATE INDICATION
z 6-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAYS
z INPUT RATES UP TO 25 KHZ
z ACCEPTS A WIDE VARIETY OF SENSORS
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING
z PROGRAMMABLE UPDATE TIME
z PROGRAMMABLE DECIMAL POINTS
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

C
C

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The PAX® Lite Rate Meter, Model PAXLR, provides the versatility and
flexibility needed to accommodate virtually any rate measuring application. The
meter has the ability to scale for direct readout in terms of the units being
measured. Whether a machine produces bottles, cloth, wire, or beverage mix,
operation is enhanced when the rate readout is expressed directly in bottles/min.,
feet/min., gallons/min., or whatever units are needed in plant applications.
The PAXLR can accommodate magnetic pickups, logic sensors, and NPN
open collector sensors. The pulses are received and scaled, so the desired
display can be achieved. The meter is programmed through both the front panel
buttons and DIP switches. Once the programming is complete, the front panel
buttons can be disabled by a DIP switch setting.
The meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough, yet reliable application solution.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

210

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Setting the Switches . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4

Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Scaling the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

4
6
6
7

ORDERING INFORMATION
C

Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

R0 - 6 Digit Rate Meter

1-717-767-6511

211

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 6-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm), 7-segment LED.
Decimal points are programmed by front panel keys.
2. POWER:
AC Power: 115/230 VAC, switch selectable. Allowable power line variation
±10%, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA. @ 100 mA max.
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to input and DC Out/In.
DC Power: 10 to 16 VDC @ 0.1 A max.
3. SENSOR POWER: 9 to 17.5 VDC @ 100 mA max.
4. KEYPAD: 3 programming keys, the T (Down Arrow) key can also function
as the front panel reset button.
5. INPUT: (DIP switch selectable)
Accepts pulses from a variety of sources including NPN-OC, PNP-OC, TTL
Outputs, Magnetic Pickups and all standard Red Lion® sensors.
Logic: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current Sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA
Current Sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.
MAGNETIC PICK-UP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
6. INPUT FREQUENCY RANGE:
Max Frequency: 25 KHz
Min Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
display values.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g (10g relay), 11 msec in
3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Criterion A
30 A/m
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. EMI filter placed on the DC power supply, when DC powered: Corcom
#1VB3 or Schaffner #FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000).
10. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage Capacity: 30-14 AWG copper wire.
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 12 oz (340 g)

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the
back of the bezel. The unit should
be installed fully assembled.
Insert the unit into the panel
cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT

212

www.redlion.net

2.0 SETTING

THE

SWITCHES

The meter has switches that must be checked and/or changed prior to
applying power. To access the power switch, remove the meter base from the
case by firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This
should lower the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the
finger tabs). It is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the
other side latch.

Power Selection Switch
Caution: Insure the AC power selection switch is set for the
proper voltage before powering-up the meter. The meter is shipped
from the factory in the 230 VAC position.

Set-Up DIP Switches

FRONT DISPLAY

Not Active

DIS PGM

MAG

LO Freq.

SRC.

SNK.

A DIP switch is located at the rear of the meter,
and is fully accessible when the unit is in the case.
It is used for the selection of the input parameters
and program disable.

SWITCH 3
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths
to 10 msec.
SWITCH 4
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V max.
MAG: 200 mV peak input (must have SRC on).
SWITCH 5
Enable Programming: Enables programming through the front panel buttons.
Disables Programming: Disables the front panel buttons from any
programming changes.
SWITCH 6
Not Active for the Rate Meter

1 2 3 4 5 6

POWER
SELECTION
SWITCH

Not Active

EN PGM

HI Freq.

LOGIC

Not Active

230
115

Factory Setting

SWITCH 1
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to + 12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
SWITCH 2
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.

3.0 WIRING

THE

REAR TERMINALS

INPUT SET-UP
DIP SWITCHES

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

1-717-767-6511

213

3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 4: COMM

3.2 INPUT WIRING
Magnetic Pickup

AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.

Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

Current Sourcing Output

Interfacing With TTL

Current Sinking Output

Emitter Follower; Current Source

*Switch position is application dependent.

214

www.redlion.net

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

No Function

Increment selected digit of parameter value

No Function

Select digit position in parameter value

5.0 SCALING

THE

To scale the Rate, enter a Scaling Display value with a corresponding Scaling
Input value. These values are internally plotted to a Display value of 0 and Input
value of 0 Hz. A linear relationship is formed between these points to yield a
rate display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. The
location of the scaling point should be near the process end limit for the best
possible accuracy. The PAXLR is capable of showing a rate display value for
any linear process.

SCALING CALCULATION
If a display value versus input signal (in pulses per second) is known, then
those values can be entered into Scaling Display (
) and Scaling Input
(
). No further calculations are needed.
If only the number of pulses per ‘single’ unit (i.e. # of pulses per foot) is
known, then it can be entered as the Scaling Input value and the Scaling Display
value will be entered as the following:
DISPLAY (

)

DISPLAY

METER

RATE SCALING

RATE PER

AND

INPUT (

)

C
NOTES:
1. If # of pulses per unit is less than 10, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 10.
2. If # of pulses per unit is less than 1, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 100.
3. If the Display value is raised or lowered, then Input value must be raised
or lowered by the same proportion (i.e. Display value for per hour is
entered by a third less (1200) then Input value is a third less of # of pulses
per unit). The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered, then
Display value must be raised or lowered by the same proportion.
4. Both values must be greater than 0.0.
EXAMPLE:
1. With 15.1 pulses per foot, show feet per minute in tenths.
Scaling Display = 60.0 Scaling Input = 15.1
2. With 0.25 pulses per gallon, show whole gallons per hour. (To have greater
accuracy, multiply both Input and Display values by 10.)
Scaling Display = 36000 Scaling Input = 2.5

Second

# of pulses per unit

Minute

# of pulses per unit

RATE DISPLAY OVERFLOW

Hour

3600

# of pulses per unit

The rate of the input signal along with the programmed scaling values can
cause the calculated rate display to exceed the meter’s 6-digit capacity. If this
occurs, the display will show “
” to indicate an overflow condition.

1-717-767-6511

215

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

The Rate Indicator has five programmable parameters which are entered in
the sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
Before programming, refer to the section on Scaling the Meter to determine
the Rate Scaling Display Value and Rate Scaling Input Value to use for the
specific application.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out with the Program Disable DIP
switch. With the switch in the Disabled (up) position the meter will not enter
programming mode. Refer to the section on DIP switch setup.

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY
Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.

HIGH UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY ZERO)

«
ª

RATE SCALING DISPLAY VALUE

«
ª

RATE SCALING INPUT VALUE

This parameter selects the decimal point position on the display. The
selection does not affect scaling calculations.
Press the arrow keys (S or T) to sequence through the selection list until the
desired selection is shown. Press the PAR key to save the displayed selection
and advance to the next parameter.

ENTERING NUMERICAL VALUES
The parameters which follow are displayed as a multi-digit numerical values
with one selected digit flashing (initially the far left digit). Press the S (up
arrow) key to increment the value of the selected (flashing) digit. Holding the
S key automatically scrolls the value of the selected digit.
Press the T (down arrow) key to select the next digit position to the right.
Use the S key to increment the value of this digit to the desired number. Press
the T key again to select the next digit to be changed. Holding the T key
automatically scrolls through each digit position.
Repeat the “select and set” sequence until all digits are displaying the desired
numerical value. Press the PAR key to save the displayed value and advance to
the next parameter.

LOW UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY UPDATE)

seconds

«
ª

Enter the Rate Input value that corresponds to the Rate Display value entered
above. This value is always in pulses per second (Hz). For more explanation,
refer to Rate Scaling.

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT
The meter exits Programming Mode when the PAR key is pressed to save the
Rate Scaling Input Value. The meter briefly displays
upon exiting
Programming Mode. All programmed selections are now transferred to the nonvolatile memory and the meter returns to the Rate display.
(If power loss occurs during programming mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)

PROGRAMMING MODE TIME OUT
The Programming Mode has an automatic time out feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the Rate
display. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to the
parameter currently being programmed, will not be saved.

FACTORY SETTINGS

The Low Update Time is the minimum amount of time between display
updates. The factory setting of 1.0 allows a minimum of one second between
updates. Low values below 0.3 seconds will update the display correctly, but
may cause the display to appear unsteady.
For more details on display updating, refer to Input Frequency Calculation.

216

Enter the desired Rate Display value to be shown for the corresponding Rate
Input value entered below. For more explanation, refer to Rate Scaling.
If a decimal point was selected in the Decimal Position (
) parameter,
it will be displayed at the same position for this parameter value.

DECIMAL POSITION

seconds

The High Update Time is the maximum amount of time before the display is
forced to zero. The High Update Time must be higher than the Low Update
Time and also higher than the desired slowest readable speed (one divided by
pulses per second). The factory setting of 2.0 will force the display to zero for
speeds below 0.5 Hz or one pulse every 2 seconds.
For more details on display updating, refer to Input Frequency Calculation.

The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown above in the
alternating display illustrations. The factory settings can be easily restored by
removing power from the meter, and then pressing and holding the PAR key
while power is reapplied. The meter displays
until the PAR key is
released. The normal power-up sequence then resumes, with the factory settings
loaded and saved in non-volatile memory.
Note: The Program Disable DIP switch must be in the Enabled (down)
position to allow loading factory settings. See section on DIP switch setup.

www.redlion.net

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

RATE DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be enabled or disabled in any count mode
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Over Range Display: “0-0-”
Maximum Frequency: 25 KHz
Minimum Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.01%

1-717-767-6511

217

MODEL PAXR - 1/8 DIN RATE METER
This is a brief overview of the PAXR. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Digital Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 137.

UL
R

5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR
STANDARD GREEN DISPLAY

RATE INDICATION

MINIMUM/MAXIMUM RATE DISPLAYS

FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)

VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

218

www.redlion.net

UL
R

US LISTED

COUNTER, DUAL COUNTER, RATE AND SLAVE DISPLAY

6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY

VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY

10 POINT SCALING (FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES)

FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)

RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)

COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)

BUS CAPABILITIES; DEVICENET, MODBUS, AND PROFIBUS-DP

CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

Is Prescaler Output used?

Is Counter C used?

COUNT MODE

(Values are in KHz)

Count x1

7.5

Count x2

Quadrature x1

3.5 *

Quadrature x2

3.5 *

Quadrature x4

Rate Only

N/A

INPUTS A and B:
DIP switch selectable to accept pulses from a variety of sources
including switch contacts, TTL outputs, magnetic pickups and all
standard RLC sensors.
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA.
Current sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA max. @ 28 VDC,
VMAX = 30 VDC.
Filter: Damping capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec. minimum.
MAGNETIC PICKUP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
DUAL COUNT MODES:
When any dual count mode is used, then User Inputs 1 and/or 2 will
accept the second signal of each signal pair. The user inputs do not
have the Logic/Mag, HI/LO Freq, and Sink/Source input setup
switches. The user inputs are inherently a logic input with no low
frequency filtering. Any mechanical contacts used for these inputs in a
dual count mode must be debounced externally. The user input may
only be selected for sink/source by the User Jumper placement.
PRESCALER OUTPUT:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1 VDC max. VOH = 30
VDC max. With duty cycle of 25% min. and 50 % max.

1-717-767-6511

219

MODEL PAXLPT - PAX® LITE PROCESS TIME METER
z PROCESS TIME INDICATION
z 6-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAYS
z DISPLAY MODES 999999 OR 999-59
z INPUT RATES UP TO 25 KHZ
z ACCEPTS A WIDE VARIETY OF SENSORS
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING
z PROGRAMMABLE DECIMAL POINTS
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The PAX® Lite Process Time Meter, Model PAXLPT, displays a value
representing the time between a beginning and end point of a process, such as a
conveyor oven.
The PAXLPT’s display will update inversely in relation to the input signal
frequency. As input frequency increases (representing speed), the PAXLPT
time display will decrease indicating a reduction in the duration of process
time. For example, the bake time through an oven will decrease the faster the
conveyor runs.
The display can be programmed for two operating modes. Operating in the 6
digit mode, the PAXLPT can readout in any whole value, such as seconds,
minutes, or hours. This mode also provides capability for decimal points. The 5
digit mode functions as a chronometer, which has a maximum display value of
999-59. This formats the display to allow the meter to readout in hours and
minutes, minutes and seconds, etc.
The PAX® Lite Process Time Indicator also has a feature called “moving
window average”. This allows one time disturbances, or irregularly spaced
items to be averaged over eight inputs, thus keeping display fluctuations to a
minimum while still updating the display on every pulse. This feature can be
enabled or disabled by a rear DIP switch.
The PAXLPT can accept many different types of sensors including magnetic
pickups, logic sensors, and NPN open collector sensors, as well as switch
contact closure sensors.
The meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

220

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications. . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Jumper and Switches

.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4

Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Scaling the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

4
6
6
7

ORDERING INFORMATION
C

Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

PT - 6 Digit Process Time Meter

1-717-767-6511

221

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 6-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm), 7-segment LED.
Decimal points are programmed by front panel keys (6 digit mode only)
2. POWER:
AC Power: 115/230 VAC, switch selectable. Allowable power line variation
±10%, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA.
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to input and DC Out/In.
DC Power: 10 to 16 VDC @ 0.1 A max.
3. SENSOR POWER: 9 to 17.5 VDC @ 100 mA max.
4. KEYPAD: 3 programming keys
5. INPUT: (DIP switch selectable)
Accepts pulses from a variety of sources including NPN-OC, PNP-OC, TTL
Outputs, Magnetic Pickups and all standard Red Lion® sensors.
Logic State: Active Low
Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V min.
Current Sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA
Current Sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.
MAGNETIC PICK-UP:
Sensitivity: 200 mV peak
Hysteresis: 100 mV
Input impedance: 3.9KΩ @ 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage: ±40 V peak, 30 Vrms
6. INPUT FREQUENCY RANGE:
Max Frequency: 25 KHz
Min Frequency: 0.05 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.02%
Note: When the input pulse rate is 3 Hz or lower, the unit will utilize, if
enabled, a technique known as a “moving window average.” (This
continually averages the last eight input pulses.)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g (10g relay), 11 msec in
3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards

1.0 INSTALLING
Installation

THE

Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Surge

EN 61000-4-5

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Voltage dip/interruptions

EN 61000-4-11

2 kV power
2 kV signal
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Criterion A
30 A/m
Criterion A
0.5 cycle

Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. EMI filter placed on the DC power supply, when DC powered: Corcom
#1VB3 or Schaffner #FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000).
10. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage Capacity: 30-14 AWG copper wire.
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 12 oz (340 g)

METER

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment

222

Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Criterion A
10 V/m

www.redlion.net

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPER

The meter has a jumper and switches, which must be checked and/or changed
prior to applying power. To access the power switch and the jumper, remove the
meter base from the case by firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear
finger tabs. This should lower the latch below the case slot (which is located just
in front of the finger tabs). It is recommended to release the latch on one side,
then start the other side latch.

Power Selection Switch
Caution: Insure the AC power selection switch is set for the
proper voltage before powering-up the meter. The meter is shipped
from the factory in the 230 VAC position.

Mode Selection Jumper
Inside the meter is also the Mode Selection Jumper, located near the display
board. This jumper will select operation in the 6 digit mode or 5 digit
(chronometer) mode. When the jumper is positioned toward the display board,
the unit will be in the 6 digit mode of operation. With the jumper positioned
away from the display board, the meter is in the 5 digit (chronometer) mode.
This unit ships from the factory in the 6 digit mode.

SWITCHES

SWITCH 1
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to + 12 VDC, IMAX = 1.9 mA
SWITCH 2
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 8 mA max. @ 30 VDC max.
SWITCH 3
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Limits input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths
to 10 msec.
SWITCH 4
LOGIC: Input trigger levels VIL = 1.5 V max.; VIH = 3.75 V max.
MAG: 200 mV peak input (must have SRC on)
SWITCH 5
Enable Programming: Enables programming through the front panel buttons
Disables Programming: Disables the front panel buttons from any
programming changes
SWITCH 6
Enable Averaging: Enables moving windows averaging feature.
Disable Averaging: Disables moving windows averaging feature.
FRONT DISPLAY

DIS AVE

DIS PGM

MAG

LO Freq.

SRC.

A DIP switch is located at the rear of the meter,
and is fully accessible when the unit is in the case.
It is used for the selection of the input parameters
and program disable. For the correct input setup,
refer to 3.2 Input Wiring.

SNK.

Set-Up DIP Switches

AND

MODE SELECTION JUMPER

POWER
SELECTION
SWITCH

230

1 2 3 4 5 6
115

EN AVE

EN PGM

HI Freq.

LOGIC

Not Active

REAR TERMINALS

3.0 WIRING

THE

INPUT SET-UP
DIP SWITCHES

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

1-717-767-6511

223

3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 4: COMM

3.2 INPUT WIRING
Magnetic Pickup

AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.

Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

Current Sourcing Output

Interfacing With TTL

Current Sinking Output

Emitter Follower; Current Source

*Switch position is application dependent.

224

www.redlion.net

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

No Function

Increment selected digit of parameter value

No Function

Select digit position in parameter value

5.0 SCALING

THE

METER

In many industrial applications, a meter is required to display the process
time of an operation or event. The pulses from a sensor are received by the
PAXLPT, and then scaled to produce just such a readout. The following formula
will help provide the scaling values to achieve the desired readout.
SF = DR x PPS

Example 1 (6 Digit):
DR = 150 minutes
PPS = 450 RPM x 60 PPR
60
PPS = 450

WHERE:

SF = DR x PPS

SF = Scale Factor
DR = Desired Readout*
PPS = Pulses per Second

SF = 150 x 450

To calculate the PPS multiply the RPM (Revolutions per Minute) by the PPR
(Pulses per Revolution) and divide by 60.
RPM x PPR
60

*For applications requiring a decimal point, select and program the
appropriate decimal point. When calculating the Scale Factor, use the whole
value of the number to be displayed, for example, 50.0 minutes, the Desired
Readout in this case is 500. Do not use decimal points in the Desired Readout
when calculating the scale factor.
For calculated SF values less than 59,999
If the Scale Factor is a value less than 59,999, it can be entered directly
into the meter as the Scale Factor and the Scale Multiplier can be left at 1.
For calculated SF values greater than 59,999
If the Scale Factor is a value over 59,999 (maximum value), the Scale
Multiplier must be used to reduce the calculated Scale Factor value until it is
less than 59,999. The Scale Multiplier divides the calculated Scale Factor
value by 1, 10, 100 and 1000, thus reducing the calculated value accordingly.
Select the appropriate Scale Multiplier value that allows the Scale Factor to
be a value under 59,999. Both the Scale Factor and Scale Multiplier can then
be entered into the meter.

SF = 67,500

Since the SF value is greater than 59,999, the SM will be needed to reduce
the calculated value to value less than 59,999. Using the SM of 10, the 67,500
value is divide by 10, reducing the SF to a value of 6750. The meter can be
programmed for a SF of 6750 and a SM of 10.

Example 2 (5 Digit):
DR = 2 hours and 23 minutes (2-23)
PPS = 138 RPM x 100 PPR
60
PPS = 230

To calculate the Scale Factor for a 5 Digit application, first convert the DR
to its base units.
DR = 2 (hours) x 60 + 23
DR = 120 + 23
DR = 143 minutes
SF = DR x PPS
SF = 143 x 230
SF = 32,890

Since the SF value is less than 59,999, it can be entered directly as the SF
and the SM will be 1. Note: When programmed for the 5 Digit mode, the
meter will convert the D.R. back to the hours and minutes format.

1-717-767-6511

225

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

The Process Time Indicator has three programmable parameters which are
entered in the sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
Before programming, please refer to the section on Scaling the Meter to
determine the Decimal Position, Scale Factor and Scale Multiplier to use for the
specific application.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out with the Program Disable DIP
switch. With the switch in the Disabled (up) position the meter will not enter
programming mode. Refer to the section on DIP switch setup.

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY
Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.

In programming mode, the display alternates between the parameter and the
current selection or value for that parameter. The dual display with arrows is
used below to illustrate the alternating display. The selection choices or value
range for each parameter is shown to the right of the alternating display.

DECIMAL POSITION (6-digit version only)

ª
The Scale Multiplier is used in combination with the Scale Factor to obtain
the desired process time readout. (See details on Scaling the Meter.)
Press the arrow keys (S or T) to sequence through the selection list until the
desired selection is displayed. Press the PAR key to save the selection and exit
programming mode.

The meter exits Programming Mode when the PAR key is pressed to save the
Scale Multiplier selection. The meter briefly displays
upon exiting
Programming Mode. All programmed selections are now transferred to the nonvolatile memory and the meter returns to the Process Time display.
(If power loss occurs during programming mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)

PROGRAMMING MODE TIME OUT

«
ª
This parameter selects the decimal point position on the display. The
selection is used when calculating the Scale Factor. This parameter only appears
when the meter is configured for the conventional (6-digit) display.
Press the arrow keys (S or T) to sequence through the selection list until the
desired selection is shown. Press the PAR key to save the displayed selection
and advance to the next parameter.

SCALE FACTOR

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT

PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

SCALE MULTIPLIER

The Programming Mode has an automatic time out feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the Process
Time display. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to
the parameter currently being programmed, will not be saved.

FACTORY SETTINGS
The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown above in the
alternating display illustrations. The factory settings can be easily restored by
removing power from the meter, and then pressing and holding the PAR key
while power is reapplied. The meter displays
until the PAR key is
released. The normal power-up sequence then resumes, with the factory settings
loaded and saved in non-volatile memory.
Note: The Program Disable DIP switch must be in the Enabled (down)
position to allow loading factory settings. See section on DIP switch setup.

The Scale Factor is used in combination with the Scale Multiplier to obtain
the desired process time readout. (See details on Scaling the Meter.)
The Scale Factor is displayed as a five-digit value with one selected digit
flashing (initially digit 5). Press the S (up arrow) key to increment the value of
the selected (flashing) digit. Holding the S key automatically scrolls the value
of the selected digit.
Press the T (down arrow) key to select the next digit position to the right.
Use the S key to increment the value of this digit to the desired number. Press
the T key again to select the next digit to be changed. Repeat the “select and
set” sequence until all digits are displaying the desired Scale Factor value. Press
the PAR key to save the displayed value and advance to the next parameter.
Holding the T key automatically scrolls through each digit position.

226

www.redlion.net

MOTOR DRIVE CONTROLLER
O

ON LINE SETPOINT INCREMENT/DECREMENT

SELECTABLE DISPLAY SCROLLING

O
O

ABILITY TO LIMIT OPERATOR ACCESS TO PROGRAMMING
PARAMETERS
ENGLISH PROGRAMMING MENUS
FREQUENCY INPUTS ARE SWITCH SELECTABLE FOR A
VARIETY OF SOURCES

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUTS

THREE SOLID STATE OUTPUTS

VARIABLE SPAN (5 TO 15 VDC) ISOLATED DRIVE OUTPUT

MASTER AND FOLLOWER MODES OF OPERATION

FEEDBACK LOSS DETECTION

PROGRAMMABLE SETPOINTS:

PROGRAMMABLE ALARM TYPES

INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL DRIVE OUTPUT REFERENCE

DIAGNOSTICS MODE

115/230VAC SWITCH SELECTABLE

NON-VOLATILE MEMORY

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT PANEL BEZEL

TWO SPEED (Master)
TWO RAMP RATE (Master)
TWO RATIO (Follower)
TWO RATIO RAMP RATE (Follower)
ONE JOG SPEED
ONE JOG RAMP RATE
O

8 CHARACTER BY 2 LINE ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY

FOUR PROGRAMMABLE INDICATION DISPLAYS

DESCRIPTION

There are five dedicated control inputs on the MDC:

The Motor Drive Controller (MDC) regulates motor speed by varying an
isolated DC control signal to a motor drive system. There are two modes of
operation, Master and Follower.
Master Mode provides control of a motor directly via programmed speed
setpoints in the MDC. Regulation is maintained by a feedback frequency to the
MDC taken from the motor shaft or a downstream shaft pulse encoder. Follower
Mode controls a motor’s speed as a ratio to a second motor’s speed or outside
frequency source. Ratio setpoints are programmed into the MDC causing the
motor to “follow” the lead motor or frequency at a fixed speed ratio.
Master Mode has two speed setpoints and two ramp setpoints. Follower
Mode has two ratio setpoints and two ramp setpoints. Both modes share a jog
speed setpoint and a jog ramp setpoint. All setpoints are retained in non-volatile
memory when the unit is powered down.
The Motor Drive Controller has the added feature of allowing real time
adjustment of the Speed (Master Mode) or Ratio (Follower Mode) setpoint
while the unit is operating a motor drive system. The setpoint may be adjusted
via the front panel keypad using the “Up” or “Down” arrow keys, or via 2 User
Inputs programmed for increment setpoint and decrement setpoint.
User flexibility is provided through the two-line by eight-character
alphanumeric display. The display features English language menus for easy
viewing and simplified programming. The four scroll-through indication
displays can be programmed to show various parameters and to automatically
scroll, if desired. A program disable DIP switch used with an external User
Input can be utilized to protect the settings and guarantee that no unwanted
changes occur during operation.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

RUN
RAMP STOP
FAST STOP
JOG
OPEN LOOP

There are six programmable control inputs: two front panel function keys
and four remote user inputs. The F1 and F2 keys are factory programmed for
RUN and R-STOP respectively. This eliminates the need for external switches
in some applications.
There are three solid state outputs, two are programmable alarms and one is
a dedicated Drive Enable output. Programmable alarm functions include:
High Alarm
Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm
Zero Speed
Disabled

These may be programmed for boundary or latching operation, high or low
acting.
Changing speed setpoints and programming information is easily
accomplished by scrolling through menus and selecting the correct parameter.
There are three main modules or menu loops:
Display Module
User Setpoint Module
Programming Module

Scaling is accomplished by entering the desired values for feedback pulses
per revolution (PPR), the maximum RPM, and the maximum display value.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 3.0” (76.2) H x 4.0” (101.6) W.

1-717-767-6511

PANEL CUT-OUT

227

DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
The unit is factory configured for an isolated 0 to 10 VDC drive output
signal. The output drive signal can be adjusted to span from 0 to 15 VDC via an
accessible potentiometer. The drive output is jumper selectable for an external
reference. To use the external reference, the MDC is connected to the drive in
place of an external potentiometer.
The Motor Drive Controller has a light weight, high impact plastic case with a
clear viewing window. The sealed front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65
specifications for wash-down and/or dusty environments, when properly installed.
Plug-in style terminal blocks simplify installation and wiring change-outs.

SAFETY SUMMARY

SPECIFICATIONS:

1. DISPLAY: 2x8, 0.3" (7 mm) high characters, negative image transmissive
LCD, with red LED backlighting.
2. POWER: 115/230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
3. MEMORY: Non-volatile E2PROM retains all programming information and
values when power is removed or interrupted.
Power Cycles(ON/OFF): 100,000 min.
Data Retention: 10 years min.
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC ±25% @ 100 mA.
5. INPUTS (LEAD AND FEEDBACK): DIP Switch selectable to accept input
pulses from a variety of sources including outputs from CMOS or TTL
circuits and all standard RLC sensors.
Input Freq:
1 Hz to 20 KHz (Master Mode), 1 Hz to 12 KHz (Follower Mode).
Logic: Input trigger levels VIL= 1.5 VMAX; VIH= 3.75 VMIN.
Current Sinking: Internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC, IMAX= 1.6 mA.
Current Sourcing: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down, 7.3 mA @ 28 VDCMAX.
Magnetic Pickup:
Sensitivity: 200 mV PEAK.
Hysteresis: 100 mV.
Input impedance: 3.9 KΩ @ 60 Hz.
Maximum input voltage: ±50 V PEAK.
Note: For magnetic pickup input, the Sink/Source DIP switch must be in the
SRC position.
6. CONTROL LOOP RESPONSE: 10 msec (Master Mode), 20 msec
(Follower Mode).
7. CONTROL ACCURACY:
0.01% of Speed Setpoint (Master Mode)
0.02% of Ratio Setpoint (Follower Mode)
Minimum Frequency Resolution: 0.00125 Hz
8. ERROR TRIM: ±4095 BITS.
9. ERROR GAIN: 0 to 99%.
10. RAMP RATE: (Ramp 1, Ramp 2, and Jog Ramp)
1 Hz to 20 KHz/sec, set in user units/sec.
0.0001 to 1.9999 ratio units/sec (Ramp 1 & 2 in Follower Mode).
11. CONTROL INPUTS:
Internal 10 KΩ pull-up to +5 VDC. VIL = 1.0 VMAX, VIH = 4.0 VMIN.
Response time = 10 msec nominal, 30 msec max.
INPUTS

SWITCH CONNECTIONS

RUN
FAST STOP
RAMP STOP
JOG
OPEN LOOP
USER INPUTS(4)

Momentary N.O.
Momentary N.C.
Momentary N.C.
Sustained N.O.
Maintained
Function Specific

External Reference: 15 VDC max. (positive polarity only).
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 minute
250 V working
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
90 MHz ±5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Note: Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. RH (non-condensing) from
0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
15. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA4 X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clips included.
16. WEIGHT: 1.5 lbs. (0.68 Kg).

PROGRAMMING

Programming the MDC unit is accomplished through the front panel keypad,
which allows the user to enter into Main Menus, Sub-Menus, and Edit Menus.
The English language prompts, the flashing parameter values, and the front panel
keypad aid the operator during programming. In the normal run mode, the main
display loop allows the user to scroll
through the four programmable
indication displays, using the
direction keys. From the main loop,
setpoints, alarm values and a gain
value may be accessed directly for
changes, without entering the
programming loop. All other
parameters are accessed through the
pro-gramming loop, which can be
set to require an access code number
for loop entry. In the programming
loop, parameters can be viewed or
changed and the operator can exit
anywhere in the loop.

12. OUTPUTS:
Drive Enable, Alarm 1, and Alarm 2:
Solid state, current sinking NPN Open collector transistor.
VCE = 1.1 VSAT @ 100 mA max., VOH= 30 VDC max.
(Internal zener diode protection.)
Response Time:
Drive Enable: 10 msec nominal; 30 msec max.
Alarm 1&2: Programmable
Normal: 1 sec nominal, 2 sec max.
Fast: 20 msec nominal, 40 msec max.
Isolated Drive Output: Jumper selectable internal/external reference 5 mA max.
Internal Reference: Pot adjustable from 0 to 5 VDC min. through 0 to 15
VDC max. span.

228

www.redlion.net

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS

R-Stop(F1 or F2 only):
Pressing the function key programmed for R-Stop causes the unit to
decelerate the motor from its active speed to Stop mode using the active ramp
rate.

MODES
Master
Follower

F-Stop(F1 or F2 only):

SCALING
Pulses per Revolution Feedback (PPR FB) ranges from 1 to 59999
Maximum RPM Feedback (MAX RPM FB) ranges from 1 to 59999
Display Decimal Point (DSP DP) ranges from 0 to 0.00000
Maximum Display Units (DSP UNIT) ranges from 1 to 99999
*Pulses per Revolution Lead (PPR LD) ranges from 1 to 59999
*Maximum RPM Lead (MAX RPM LD) ranges from 1 to 59999
*These parameters are available in Follower Mode only.
Note: Values may be programmed in the range listed, provided that the
maximum equivalent frequency does not exceed 20971 Hz. If this occurs,
“OVFLW” will flash and a new entry will be required.

SETPOINTS
2 SPEED (Master Mode) - ranges from 0 to 99999 (or Display Unit Max.).
2 RAMP RATE (Master Mode) - ranges from 1 to 99999.
2 RATIO (Follower Mode) - ranges from 0.0000 to 1.9999.
2 RAMP RATE (Follower Mode) - ranges from 0.0001 to 1.9999 ratio units.
1 JOG SPEED - ranges from 0 to 99999 (or Display Unit Maximum).
1 JOG RAMP RATE - ranges from 1 to 99999.
2 ALARM - ranges from 0 to 99999.
1 GAIN - ranges from 0 to 99.
Note: Values may be programmed in the ranges listed, provided that the
maximum equivalent frequency does not exceed 20,971 Hz ( 20 KHz/sec for
Ramp Rate). If this occurs, a message will flash and the maximum is
automatically entered by the unit.

Pressing the function key programmed for F-Stop causes the unit to execute
a fast stop, taking the motor from its current speed immediately to the stop
mode. The deceleration is limited only by the motor and drive.

Jog(F1 or F2 only):
This function is only available from the Stop mode. Pressing and holding the
function key programmed for Jog causes the unit to accelerate the motor to
the jog speed setpoint using the jog ramp rate.

ALARMS
Type Of Alarm:
High Alarm: Alarm output activates when the feedback input is greater than
or equal to the alarm value.
Low Alarm: Alarm output activates when the feedback input is less than or
equal to the alarm value.
Deviation Alarm: The alarm output activates when the feedback input is
outside a ± band.
Zero Speed Alarm: Alarm output activates when the feedback input receives
no input pulse for at least one second.
Disabled: The alarm output is inactive when disabled.

Phase:
Each output can have its active logic state set for Positive phase (ON) or
Negative phase (OFF).

Latched Or Boundary:
An alarm programmed for a latched output stays active until it is manually
reset by a User Input. An alarm programmed for boundary output stays active
as long as the alarm condition exists, after which the output returns to its
inactive state.

Fast Or Normal Update:

USER INPUTS
There are four programmable external user inputs and two programmable
front panel function keys. The options for each user input are the same, except
for the two function keys (F1/RUN & F2/STP), which have additional options.

No Mode:
If a user input terminal or a function key is activated, it will be ignored.

View Display 1-4:
Causes the selected indication display (1, 2, 3, or 4) to be displayed and held
from anywhere in the main display loop.

Change Display:
Causes the indication display to toggle to the next indication display.

Reset Alarm(s) Output:
Places the alarm(s) output(s) in its inactive state.

Setpoint Select/Toggle:
Selects Setpoint 1 or Setpoint 2 for the active speed (or ratio) setpoint. This
is a maintained select action for User Inputs 1 to 4, and a momentary toggle
action for F1 or F2.

Ramp Select/Toggle:
Selects Ramp 1 or Ramp 2 for the active acceleration and deceleration ramp
rate. This is a maintained select action for User Inputs 1 to 4, and a
momentary toggle action for F1 or F2.

Ramp Override:
Overrides the acceleration/deceleration ramp routine causing the unit to jump
to the ramp endpoint.

Setpoint Increment:
Only an external User Input can be used for this option. The currently active
speed or ratio setpoint is incremented when the User Input is made active. If
the input remains active for more than 5 display unit increments, the scroll
rate will progressively increase.

Setpoint Decrement:
Only an external User Input can be used for this option. The currently active
speed or ratio setpoint is decremented when the User Input is made active. If
the input remains active for more than 5 display unit increments, the scroll
rate will progressively increase.

Program Disable:
Only an external user input can be used for this option. When used with the
program disable DIP switch, this option can limit operator access to
programmable parameters.

Run (F1 only):

The normal update rate for the alarm outputs is once each second. The fast
update rate occurs at an interval less than or equal to 40 msec.

INDICATION DISPLAYS
If an indication display is to show two different numeric values, one for each
line, there will be a single or dual character mnemonic to the left of the numeric
value. Each line of each indication display can be programmed to show
mnemonics or a numeric value. The following list shows the single or dual
character mnemonics that will be displayed when value is selected and the
mnemonics for each programmable option.
VAL

S1 99999
S2 99999
Sp 99999
R 1.999
%D 100.0
%O 100.0
FB 20971
LD 12000
A1 99999
A2 99999
Tr 4095

MNE

DESCRIPTION

SETPT. 1
SETPT. 2
SPEED
RATIO
% DEV.
% OUTPUT
FB. FREQ
LD. FREQ
ALARM 1
ALARM 2
TRIM

Speed or ratio setpoint 1
Speed or ratio setpoint 2
Actual speed in user display units (feedback)
Actual ratio (follower mode)
% deviation of actual speed from target speed
Analog drive output- % of full scale voltage
Feedback frequency in pulses/sec (Hz.)
Lead frequency in pulses/sec (Hz.)
Alarm 1 setpoint
Alarm 2 setpoint
Error correction in bits (-4095 to +4095)

STATUS DISPLAYS
Operating Status:
Setpoint 1, ramp rate 1, Stop mode

Alarm Output Status:
Alarm 1 active, alarm 2 inactive

Operating Status:
The operating status display indicates the currently active speed or ratio
setpoint (S1 or S2), the currently active ramp rate (R1 or R2), and the mode
of operation (RUN, STP, or JOG). An arrow will replace the “R” for the
currently active ramp rate indication when an actual ramp up or down is in
progress.

Alarm Status:
The alarm status display indicates that an alarm output is active when the
corresponding output number (1 or 2) is displayed. When an alarm output is
inactive, a dash is displayed.

Pressing the F1 button causes the MDC to accelerate the motor from Stop
mode to the active speed setpoint using the active ramp rate.

1-717-767-6511

229

OPERATOR ACCESS
This is used with the program disable DIP switch or an external user input
that is selected for the program disable function. When a setpoint is selected as
NO, it can be viewed, but NOT changed from the front panel keypad. The
following setpoint values can be disabled from front panel access
programming:
Speed/Ratio Setpoint 1 and 2
Ramp Rate 1 and 2
Alarm Setpoint 1 and 2
Setpoint Scroll Menu

Jog Speed
Jog Ramp
Gain

USER SETTINGS
The operator can reset ALL parameters to the factory settings if desired.

PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS

This allows testing of the various MDC inputs and outputs. It is especially
useful after unit installation to independently test the operation of external
switches, relays, the feedback transducer, and the motor drive system.
Inputs - The MDC displays an alphanumeric character to indicate a Dedicated
Function Input or a User Input is active. This allows the user to check switch
operation and wiring connections to the Inputs.
Alarm Outputs - The up and down arrow keys are used to select an alarm
output and set it to the active or inactive state. This allows the user to check
the operation of devices wired to the alarm outputs and the wiring
connections.
Drive Output - This function allows the user to test the Drive System. A %
Output value is entered through the front panel keypad causing the motor to
run at the corresponding open loop speed. The display indicates the motor’s
feedback frequency.

PROGRAM SECURITY
The programmable code number is used in conjunction with the program
disable DIP switch and/or a user input programmed for the program disable
function to limit operator access to programming.

FOLLOWER MODE APPLICATION
A fertilizer production facility is mixing pellets containing Nitrogen with
pellets that contain Phosphorus. A chemical ratio of 1:1 is determined by the
speed of two different conveyors. Because of differences in the gearing of
the conveyor and concentration of the pellets, the Nitrogen conveyor motor
must run at 3 times the speed of the Phosphorus conveyor motor in order to
produce a 1:1 mixture. The maximum speed of both motors is 2000 RPM.
Set the follower MDC scaling to produce a 1:1 mixture of Nitrogen and
Phosphorus when a setpoint of 1.0000 is entered. Display speed units are in
RPM’s. Both the lead and feedback frequency are taken from 60 tooth gears
on each motor shaft.
1) Choose the Phosphorus conveyor motor for the follower MDC. It runs
slower than the Nitrogen conveyor motor.
2) Set the Pulses per revolution feedback to 60.
3) Set the MAX RPM feedback to 2000. This is the conveyor motor’s
maximum operating speed.
4) Set display decimal point to 0.
5) Set display unit to 2000. The display speed unit maximum is 2000 at a
MAX RPM FB of 2000. If the display units wanted were conveyor
feet/minute or Phosphorus pellets in lbs/sec, the equivalent display value
for 2000 RPM would be entered.
6) Set the pulses per revolution lead to 60.
7) Setting the MAX RPM Lead:
This is the Lead RPM that would be necessary to have a 1:1 mixture if
the Follower Speed was MAX RPM FB (2000 RPM). Since the Nitrogen
conveyor motor must run 3 times as fast as the Phosphorus motor, MAX
RPM LD = 3 * 2000 = 6000 RPM. Set MAX RPM LD = 6000 RPM. This
is the correct value, even though the Nitrogen conveyor motor would never
actually run at 6000 RPM. A ratio setpoint of 1.0000 on the MDC is now
equal to a 1:1 mixture of Phosphorus and Nitrogen.

MASTER MODE APPLICATION
A pump delivers a maximum of 30.0 gallons per minute with a shaft speed of
1750 RPM. A shaft pulse encoder generates 60 pulses/revolution. Set the MDC
scaling to control and display pumping speed in tenths of a gallon/minute. In the
Program Scaling Module:
1) Set the pulses per revolution feedback to 60.
2) Set the maximum RPM feedback to 1750. This is the pump shaft’s maximum
operating speed.
3) Set display decimal point to 0.0. Display units are in 0.1 gpm.
4) Set max display units to 30.0. The display speed unit maximum is 30.0 at a MAX
RPM FB of 1750.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

MDC

230

DESCRIPTION

Motor Drive Controller with Red Backlighting

www.redlion.net

PART NUMBERS
115/230VAC

MDC00100

MODELS HHT & HHTP -

ACCURATE 5-DIGIT PRECISION MEASURING HAND HELD TACHOMETERS

MICRO-COMPUTER CIRCUITRY
The exclusive one chip Micro-computer LSI-circuit and crystal time base is
used to accurately provide a wide measurement range.

Model HHT
Contact Type

Model HHTP
Photo Type

MEMORY
The last maximum/minimum reading will be automatically stored in memory
and can be displayed by pressing the “MEMORY” switch.

ERROR-FREE READING
Highly visible LCD display, with Leading Zero Blanking gives exact RPM
with no guessing or errors and saves battery energy.

RUGGED AND LIGHTWEIGHT CONSTRUCTION
The use of durable, long-lasting components, including a strong, lightweight
ABS-plastic housing assures maintenance-free performance for many years.
The housing has been carefully shaped to fit comfortably in either hand.

BATTERIES INCLUDED

DESCRIPTION

CONTACT TACHOMETER SPECIFICATIONS

The CONTACT TACHOMETER (Model HHT) incorporates precision
bearings instead of gears to ensure long life while providing minimal loading to
the rotating shaft. A built-in photo-sensor and slotted disc detect the number of
revolutions for a high degree of accuracy. By simply pressing the “MEASURE”
button and lightly contacting the conical tip against the center hole of a rotating
shaft, the RPM will be displayed and updated every second. By attaching the
circumferential speed wheel (included), the Model HHT can measure surface
speed in “Switch Selectable” units of either feet per minute (FT/MIN) or meters
per minute (M/MIN).
The PHOTO TACHOMETER (Model HHTP) provides for non-contact RPM
measurements which enhances operator safety when measuring high speed
shafts. By pressing the “MEASURE” button and aiming the Visible Light Beam
at a piece of reflective tape (included) on the rotating shaft, RPM will be
displayed and updated every second. A display indicator blinks once each
revolution to ensure that the reflecting mark is within the 2” to 12” sensing
distance of the Model HHTP.
Both units can display Memory values which are obtained immediately
before turning off the “MEASURE” button. The last value, Maximum value
and Minimum value can be displayed by pushing the “MEMORY” button as
follows:

1. MEASUREMENT RANGE:
0.5 to 8,000 RPM
0.05 to 1999.9 m/min.
0.2 to 6560 ft/min.
2. RESOLUTION:
0.1 RPM (0.5 to 999.9 RPM)
1 RPM (over 1000 RPM)
0.01 m/min. (0.05 to 99.99 m/min.)
0.1 m/min. (over 1000 m/min.)
0.1 ft/min. (0.1 to 999.9 ft/min.)
1 ft/min. (over 1000 ft/min.)
3. ACCURACY: ±(0.05% full scale + 1 digit)
4. SAMPLE TIME: 1 sec. (over 6 RPM)
5. POWER CONSUMPTION: Approximately 10 mA.
6. ACCESSORIES INCLUDED: RPM adapters (1 cone, 1 funnel), Surface
speed test wheel, Carrying Case, Instruction Manual.
7. WEIGHT: 0.58 lb. (260 g) including battery

1. First Push and Hold = Last value displayed:
“LA” and last value alternately displayed.
2. Second Push and Hold = Maximum value displayed:
“UP” and maximum value alternately displayed.
3. Third Push and Hold = Minimum value displayed:
“DN” and minimum value alternately displayed.
These memory features are useful when the measurement to be made is in a
“hard-to-access” area where the display is not visible to the operator.
A “LO” (low battery) display is incorporated in both units and is a visible
reminder when batteries are to be replaced.

PHOTO TACHOMETER SPECIFICATIONS
1. MEASUREMENT RANGE: 5 to 99,999 RPM (one reflecting mark)
2. RESOLUTION: 0.1 RPM (0.5 to 999.9 RPM)
1 RPM (over 1000 RPM)
3. ACCURACY: ±(0.05% full scale + 1 digit)
4. SAMPLING TIME: 1 sec. (over 60 RPM)
5. DETECTING DISTANCE: (2-6 inches) (50 to 150 mm) Typical max. 12
inches (300 mm) depending upon ambient light.
6. POWER CONSUMPTION: Approximately 150 mA (Operation).
Approximately 20 mA (Memory Recall)
7. ACCESSORIES INCLUDED: Carrying Case, 23.6 inches (600 mm)
Reflective tape, Instruction Manual.
8. WEIGHT: 0.55 lb. (250 g) including battery

COMMON SPECIFICATIONS

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
A) When it is necessary to replace the batteries (battery voltage less than
approx. 4.5 V), “LO” will appear in the display.
B) Slide the battery cover away from the instrument and remove the batteries.
C) Install new batteries correctly into the case. Permanent damage to the
tachometer circuit may result from incorrect installation.

1. DISPLAY: 5-digit, 0.4” high LCD.
2. MEMORY TIME: 10 sec. nominal.
3. TIME BASE: Quartz crystal.
4. BATTERY: 4 x 1.5 V AA size.
5. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 50°C).
6. SIZE: 6.7″ x 2.8″ x 1.5″ (170 mm x 72 mm x 37 mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

HHT
HHTP
-

PART NUMBER

LCD Hand Held Contact Tachometer
LCD Hand Held Photo Tachometer
Replacement 1/2″ x 2′ Reflective Tape For HHTP
HHT Rubber Wheel
HHT Cone Point Disc With Shaft
HHT Concave Disc

1-717-767-6511

HHT00000
HHTP0000
HHTRT000
HHTWHL00
HHTCONE0
HHTCONC0

231

This page intentionally left blank.
232

www.redlion.net

TIMERS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

233

QUICK Specs
Timers
TIMER
CUB7T

CUB5T

TIMER W/CONTROL
C48T

PAXTM

Description

1/32 DIN Miniature Timer

Timer with Output Option Card
Capability

1/16 DIN Timer with Control

1/8 DIN Timer with Output
Option Card Capability

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

28 mm (H) x 51 mm (W)

39 mm (H) x 75mm (W)

49 mm (H) x 49 mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

8 Digit, .35" (9mm) Reflective,
Green and Red Backlight LCD

8 Digit, .46" (12mm)
Reflective, Green and
Red Backlight LCD

2 x 6 Digit,
Main Display .3" (7mm)
Sec. Display .2" (5mm)
Reflective and Backlight LCD

6 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

Switch Contact,
NPN O. C. or Voltage
10 V to 300 VAC or DC

Switch Contact,
NPN O. C. or Voltage
9 V to 28 VDC

Switch Contact,
NPN O. C., PNP O. C.,
or VCME through VCMH

.001, .01, .1 and 1 Second
.1 and 1 Minute
.01, .1 and 1 Hour
Hour: Minutes: Seconds

.001, .01, .1 and 1 Second
.01, .1 and 1 Minute
.01, .1 and 1 Hour
.01, .1 and 1 Min/Sec
.01, .1 and 1Hr/Min
Hours/Minutes/Seconds
Days/Hours/Minutes

.001, .01, .1 and 1 Second
.001, .01, .1 and 1 Minute
Min/Sec
Min/Sec/Tenth
Hr/Min/Sec
Hr/Min/Tenth
Hr/Min/Hun

.001, .01, .1 and 1 Second
.001, .01, .1 and 1 Minute
.001, .01, .1 and 1 Hour
Minutes/.001, .01, .1, 1 Sec
Hours/.001, .01, .1, 1 Min
Hours/Minutes/Seconds

Front Panel, Remote

Front Panel, Remote, Automatic

Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking

Single or Dual Form A
Current Sinking

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

Display

Input

Time Ranges

Reset

Setpoint
Capability

Communications

RS232
RS485

RS485

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Other Features/
Options

Programmable User Inputs

Programmable User Inputs
and Front Buttons

Programmable User Inputs
and Front Buttons,
Cycle Counting Capability

Power Source

3 Volt Lithium Battery,
Backlighting 9 - 28 VDC
@ 35 mA

9 to 28 VDC

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 14 VDC
24 VAC

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

Page Number

Page 237

Page 249

Page 263

Page 268

*See website for product information.

234

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Timers
TIMER W/CONTROL
PAXCK
LIBT

1/8 DIN Real Time Clock with
Output Option Card Capability

Timer with Control

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

72 mm (H) x 72 mm (W)

6 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

4 Digit, .4" (10mm) LED
4 Digit, .5" (13mm) LCD

Switch Contact,
NPN O. C., PNP O. C.,
or VCME through VCMH

Switch Contact,
NPN O. C., PNP O. C., or
VCME through VCMH

.001, .01, .1 and 1 Second
.001, .01, .1 and 1 Minute
.001, .01, .1 and 1 Hour
Minutes/.001, .01, .1, 1 Sec
Hours/.001, .01, .1, 1 Min
Hours/Minutes/Seconds
Days/Hours/Minutes

.01, .1 and 1 Second
.01, .1 and 1 Minute
.01, .1 and 1 Hour
Minutes/Seconds Hours/Minutes

Front Panel, Remote, Automatic

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

Single or Dual Form C,
Solid State

Communications

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Other Features/
Options

Programmable User Inputs
and Front Buttons,
Cycle Counting Capability

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

115/230 VAC
11 to 14 VDC

Page Number

Page 296

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

Input

Time Ranges

Reset

Setpoint
Capability

*See website for product information.

1-717-767-6511

235

REPLACEMENT Guide
CURRENT PRODUCT

WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES

MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES
Q Display: 2 x 6, Main Display .3" (7 mm)

Q Display:

Secondary Display .2" (5 mm)
Reflective LCD

.2" (5 mm) Reflective LCD

Q Power

Source: 115/230 VAC,
10 to 28 VDC, 10 to 28 VAC

CUBT

Q Power

Source: 85 to 250 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC

C48T
Q Display: 2 x 6, Main Display .3" (7 mm)
Q Display:

Secondary Display .2" (5 mm)
Reflective LCD

.3" (8 mm) Reflective LCD

Q Power

Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 14 VDC, 21.5 to 30 VAC

LNXT

Q Power

C48T

Source: 85 to 250 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences

Q Display: 2 x 6, Main Display .3" (7 mm)

Secondary Display .2" (5 mm)
Reflective LCD

Q Display:

4 Digit, .4" (10 mm)
LED OR .5" (13 mm) LCD

Q Power

Source: 115/230 VAC,
11 to 14 VDC

LIBT

C48T

Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.

236

www.redlion.net

Source: 85 to 250 VAC,
11 to 36 VDC
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences

MODEL CUB7T0 PROGRAMMABLE GENERAL PURPOSE ELECTRONIC TIMER
O
O

O
O

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

9 PROGRAMMABLE TIMER RANGES
3 (8 Digit 0.35") LCD DISPLAY OPTIONS (Reflective, Red
Transmissive, Yellow/Green Transmissive) with “Timer Active”
annunciator
CONTACT INPUT
REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY (provides up to 6
years of uninterrupted operation)
BOTH FRONT PANEL PROGRAM AND RESET BUTTONS ARE
INDIVIDUALLY ENABLED

WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS

FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The CUB7T0 is an 8-digit miniature programmable timer with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective (CUB7T000), Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green
backlighting (CUB7T010) or red backlighting (CUB7T020). The backlight
versions require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply. The display will wrap
around from a full display of “99999999” to “00000000” when an overflow
occurs. An annunciator, located in the upper left hand corner of the display,
blinks at 2 Hz when the signal input is activated. The CUB7T0 operates from
a switch contact or an open collector NPN transistor.
The CUB7T timers use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7T series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with
a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber buttons
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
Must use a NEC Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. ANNUNCIATOR: Annunciator in the upper left corner of the display flashes
at a 2 Hz rate when the signal input is activated.
5. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4)
Contact Input (CUB7T0xx): Switch Contact or solid state Transistor Switch
to Common. Contact burden 15 μA max. A maintained closed switch to
COM will actuate the timer.
6. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
7. ACCURACY: 0.025%
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals.
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50

SAFETY SUMMARY

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.15" (53.4) H x 3.00" (140) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

237

IEC-61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Level 4; 2 Kv I/O

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Level 3; 2 Kv power 1
Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz

Simulation of cordless telephone

ENV 50204

Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle

Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55022

INSTALLATION
The CUB7T meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed
panel. The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for a
washdown environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are
provided for installing the unit in the panel cut-out.

Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing
the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the push buttons of the unit.

Enclosure class B

Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
11. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

TIMER RANGE SELECTION
The CUB7T’s timer range can be modified in the Program mode. The
Program mode uses the PGM button (refer to photo) to switch between
Program and Operate modes. The RESET button (refer to photo) is used to
select the desired timer range.
Note: Timer range and accumulated time on the display will be lost if the
battery is removed from the unit

Connect wires between RST EN (Reset Enable) and COM. (Common); and
between HS (Program Enable) and COM. (Common) to enable front push
buttons. Press the PGM button to enter Program Mode, allowing selection of
the desired timer range. The display will show 00000.000 (Timer Range 0.001
sec). Repeatedly pressing the RST button will cycle through the available timer
ranges as shown in the table. When the desired timer range is displayed, press
PGM to load the range and return
to operating mode. (The CUB7T
will remain in Program Mode
DISPLAY DURING
Timer Range
PROGRAMMING
until the PGM button is pressed.)
Remove the wire from the HS
00000.000
0.001 Sec
(Program Enable) terminal to
111111.11
0.01 Sec
prevent accidental changes to the
2222222.2
0.1 Sec
timer range. Any new time
33333333
1 Sec
accumulated will be at the new
rate selected.
4444444.4
0.1 Min
Note: To avoid incorrect display
55555555
1 Min
information,
it
is
666666.66
0.01 Hr
recommended that the CUB7T
7777777.7
0.1 Hr
be reset after making
88888888
1 Hr
programming changes.
9999.99.99

238

The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean
around panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the counter body to the back of the
bezel. Install CUB7T unit through the panel cut-out.
4. Insert the mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw
should NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage
into mating features on the CUB7T housing.
6. Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip
into position.
7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed
to about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that the mounting
clip is latched as close as possible to the panel.
9. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

Factory Use Only

www.redlion.net

BATTERY INSTALLATION
1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove the battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on
the rear cover (See drawing at right), until the cover unlatches. Pull the
cover straight out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace it with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing the battery as shown in the drawing.
4. Replace the cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed
upside down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the top
of the CUB7T when properly installed.
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important and
can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress

power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be
tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and tighten down the
screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two
#14 AWG wires.

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

L.S. INPUT; CONTACT VERSIONS

Connecting the “L.S.” Input to Common with a mechanical or solid-state
switch activates the timer. Releasing the connection, deactivates the timer. The
switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 μA.

1-717-767-6511

239

RESET AND PROGRAM OPTIONS

BACKLIGHT OPTION

Connecting a wire from the RST EN (Reset Enable) or the HS (Program
Enable) Input terminals to Common will enable the front panel Reset or
Program buttons respectively.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the timer to reset. The “RST.” can be
pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch. The
Switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 μA.
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

Optional backlight versions of the CUB7T require an external 9 to 26
VDC power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and
common terminals as shown in the drawing.

APPLICATION
A bottling company has a preventive maintenance program based
on the accumulative running hours. For each bottling line, they added
a CUB7T000. When the line is running a contact closure is given to the
CUB7T timer allowing the new time to accumulate with the hours of
previous operations. At a designated value, the line maintenance is
performed and the CUB7T is reset with a key switch to 0.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

*CUB7T
BNL

DESCRIPTION

CONTACT
INPUT

PART NUMBER

Timer; Positive Image Reflective

CUB7T000

Timer, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

CUB7T010

Timer; w/Red Backlighting

CUB7T020

Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery

BNL10000

*Battery is included with unit.

240

www.redlion.net

MODEL CUB7T1 PROGRAMMABLE GENERAL PURPOSE ELECTRONIC TIMER
O
O

9 PROGRAMMABLE TIMER RANGES
3 (8 Digit 0.35") LCD DISPLAY OPTIONS (Reflective, Red
Transmissive, Yellow/Green Transmissive) with “Timer Active”
annunciator
REPLACEABLE INTERNAL LITHIUM BATTERY (provides up to 6
years of uninterrupted operation)
BOTH FRONT PANEL PROGRAM AND RESET BUTTONS ARE
INDIVIDUALLY ENABLED

WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS

FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The CUB7T1 is an 8-digit miniature programmable timer with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective (CUB7T100), Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green
backlighting (CUB7T110) or red backlighting (CUB7T120). The backlight
versions require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply. The display will wrap
around from a full display of “99999999” to “00000000” when an overflow
occurs. An annunciator, located in the upper left hand corner of the display,
blinks at 2 Hz when the signal input is activated. The CUB7T1 operates from
a signal voltage of 10 to 300 V (AC 50/60 Hz or DC).
The CUB7T timers use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7T series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with
a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber
buttons meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
4. ANNUNCIATOR: Annunciator in the upper left corner of the display flashes
at a 2 Hz rate when the signal input is activated.
5. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4)
Voltage Input (CUB7T1xx): 10 V min. to 300 V max. (AC 50/60 Hz. or DC)
to Common. 150 V max. for backlight versions. Input current 0.5 mA max.
ANY off-state leakage current may activate the timer. Constant voltage
applied to the input will actuate the timer. Due to the internal digital
filtering to this input, up to 30 msec of error may be added per activation
of the signal input.
6. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
7. ACCURACY: 0.025% (+ up to 30 msec per activation of signal input—
CUB7T1xx only)
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only).

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
bulletin or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.5" (140) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

241

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2

INSTALLATION

Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2

Level 2; 4 Kv contact

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Level 4; 2 Kv I/O

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Level 3; 2 Kv power 1
Level 3; 10 V/rms

Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz

150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone

ENV 50204

Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle

Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55022

Enclosure class B

Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals.
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max
10. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

The CUB7T meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. The units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed
panel. The viewing window and reset button are factory sealed for a
washdown environment. A sponge rubber gasket and mounting clip are
provided for installing the unit in the panel cut-out.

Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing
the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the push buttons of the unit.

TIMER RANGE SELECTION
The CUB7T’s timer range can be modified in the Program mode. The
Program mode uses the PGM button (refer to photo) to switch between Program
and Operate modes. The RESET button (refer to photo) is used to select the
desired timer range.
Note: Timer range and accumulated time on the display will be lost if the
battery is removed from the unit

Connect wires between RST EN (Reset Enable) and COM. (Common); and
between HS (Program Enable) and COM. (Common) to enable front push
buttons. Press the PGM button to enter Program Mode, allowing selection of
the desired timer range. The display will show 00000.000 (Timer Range 0.001
sec). Repeatedly pressing the RST button will cycle through the available timer
ranges as shown in the table. When the desired timer range is displayed, press
PGM to load the range and return to
DISPLAY DURING
Timer Range
operating mode. (The CUB7T will
PROGRAMMING
remain in Program Mode until the
00000.000
0.001 Sec
PGM button is pressed.) Remove the
111111.11
0.01 Sec
wire from the HS (Program Enable)
2222222.2
0.1 Sec
terminal to prevent accidental
changes to the timer range. Any new
33333333
1 Sec
time accumulated will be at the new
4444444.4
0.1 Min
rate selected.
55555555
1 Min
Note: To avoid incorrect display
666666.66
0.01 Hr
information, it is recommended
7777777.7
0.1 Hr
that the CUB7T be reset after
88888888
1 Hr
making programming changes.
9999.99.99

242

The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean
around panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the counter body to the back of the
bezel. Install CUB7T unit through the panel cut-out.
4. Insert the mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw
should NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage
into mating features on the CUB7T housing.
6. Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip
into position.
7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed
to about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that the mounting
clip is latched as close as possible to the panel.
9. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.

Factory Use Only

www.redlion.net

BATTERY INSTALLATION
1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove the battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on
the rear cover (See drawing at right), until the cover unlatches. Pull the
cover straight out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace it with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing the battery as shown in the drawing.
4. Replace the cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed
upside down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the top
of the CUB7T when properly installed.
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

WIRING CONNECTIONS

The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the unit. All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the battery cover to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be
tinned with solder). Insert the wire under the screw-clamp and tighten down the
screw until the wire is clamped in tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two
#14 AWG wires.

1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.
CAUTION: All leads will be at the same line potential as the input
leads.

1-717-767-6511

243

L.S. INPUT; VOLTAGE VERSIONS
The CUB7T accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input accepts
AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 300 V. The unit times when
voltage is applied between the LS input and Common. Any off-state leakage
current may activate the timer.
WARNING: Any lead may be at hazardous live input potential.
External wiring and devices connected to the unit must be rated
the same as applied signal input voltage and be properly
isolated from Class 2 or SELV circuitry.

RESET AND PROGRAM OPTIONS
Connecting a wire from the RST EN (Reset Enable) or the HS (Program
Enable) Input terminals to Common will enable the front panel Reset or
Program buttons respectively.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the timer to reset. The “RST.” can be
pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch. The
Switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 μA.
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

BACKLIGHT OPTION
Optional backlight versions of the CUB7T require an external 9 to 26 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and common
terminals as shown in the drawing.
WARNING: When connecting the wiring for a backlit CUB7T
measuring an AC input voltage, the neutral of the single phase
AC signal is connected to Terminal 1 (COM), and line (hot) is
connected to Terminal 4 (LS). The DC supply for the
backlighting is connected as shown in the drawing. Three phase
AC applications require an isolation transformer.

APPLICATION

A laundromat owner wants to monitor the cost of operating his dryers.
He needs to know how many hours each dryer has operated. A CUB7T100
(Voltage Input; Positive Image Reflective) is mounted on the back panel of
each dryer. The signal input is connected across the motor of the dryer. The
CUB7T will accumulate time while the dryer is running. On a regular basis
the owner records the cumulative
operating hours for each
dryer and calculates if
he needs to make any
necessary adjustments. The
timer can be reset via key
switch.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the
appropriate company numbers listed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

*CUB7T

Timer; Positive Image Reflective
VOLTAGE
Timer, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
INPUT
Timer; w/Red Backlighting

BNL

Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery

*Battery is included with unit.

244

www.redlion.net

PART
NUMBER

CUB7T100
CUB7T110
CUB7T120
BNL10000

MODEL CUB7T3 PROGRAMMABLE GENERAL PURPOSE ELECTRONIC TIMER
O
O

UL
R

US LISTED

WIRE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREW CLAMP TYPE TERMINALS

FRONT PANEL AND REMOTE RESET INPUT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The CUB7T3 is an 8-digit miniature programmable timer with large 0.35
inch (8.90 mm) high digits. It has an LCD read-out available in Positive Image
Reflective (CUB7T300), Negative Image Transmissive with yellow/green
backlighting (CUB7T310) or red backlighting (CUB7T320). The backlight
versions require an external 9 to 28 VDC power supply. The display will wrap
around from a full display of “99999999” to “00000000” when an overflow
occurs. An annunciator, located in the upper left hand corner of the display,
blinks at 2 Hz when the signal input is activated. The CUB7T3 operates from
a signal voltage of 10 to 30 V (AC 50/60 Hz or DC).
The CUB7T timers use a CMOS LSI chip, mounted on a gold-plated
substrate, that is electrically connected by ultrasonic wire-bonding. Proven
micro-electronic assembly and manufacturing techniques provide these units
with the reliability and dependability required for industrial service.
The CUB7T series is housed in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with
a clear viewing window. The sealed front panel with the silicone rubber
buttons meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and/or dusty
environments, when properly installed.

1. DISPLAY: 8-digit LCD, 0.35" (8.90 mm) high digits.
2. POWER SOURCE: Replaceable Internal 3.0 V lithium battery to provide up
to 6 years of continuous operation. (Battery life is dependent upon usage.
Contacts that remain closed for long periods of time reduce battery life.)
3. BACKLIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS: 9 to 28 VDC; 35 mA. typical,
50 mA max. Above 26 VDC, derate max. operating temperature to 40°C.
Must use a NEC Class 2 or SELV rated power supply.
4. ANNUNCIATOR: Annunciator in the upper left corner of the display flashes
at a 2 Hz rate when the signal input is activated.
5. SIGNAL INPUT: (LS terminal #4)
Voltage Input: 10 V min. to 30 V max. (AC 50/60 Hz. or DC) to Common.
ANY off-state leakage current may activate the timer. Constant voltage
applied to the input will actuate the timer. Due to the internal digital
filtering to this input, up to 30 msec of error may be added per activation
of the signal input. Must use a NEC or a Class 2 or SELV rated power
supply.
6. REMOTE RESET: 15 msec min. pulse width (active low) from 3.0 V
bipolar output, an open collector transistor, or a switch contact to common.
7. ACCURACY: 0.025%
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC (Backlight versions).
Storage Temperature: -30 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.5" (140) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

245

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Level 2; 4 Kv contact

Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Level 4; 2 Kv I/O

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Level 3; 2 Kv power 1
Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz

Simulation of cordless telephone

ENV 50204

Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle

Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55022

Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing
the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the push buttons of the unit.

Enclosure class B

Notes
1. Backlit powered units require a power line filter to be installed, RLC
LFIL0000 or equivalent, so as not to impair the function of the
backlighting.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals.
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max
10. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when
properly installed. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. Panel gasket
and mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (57 grams) [with battery]

TIMER RANGE SELECTION

The CUB7T’s timer range can be modified in the Program mode. The
Program mode uses the PGM button (refer to photo) to switch between Program
and Operate modes. The RESET button (refer to photo) is used to select the
desired timer range.
Note: Timer range and accumulated time on the display will be lost if the
battery is removed from the unit

Connect wires between RST EN (Reset Enable) and COM. (Common); and
between HS (Program Enable) and COM. (Common) to enable front push
buttons. Press the PGM button to enter Program Mode, allowing selection of
the desired timer range. The display will show 00000.000 (Timer Range 0.001
sec). Repeatedly pressing the RST button will cycle through the available timer
ranges as shown in the table. When
the desired timer range is
DISPLAY DURING
Timer Range
displayed, press PGM to load the
PROGRAMMING
range and return to operating
00000.000
0.001 Sec
mode. (The CUB7T will remain in
111111.11
0.01 Sec
Program Mode until the PGM
button is pressed.) Remove the
2222222.2
0.1 Sec
wire from the HS (Program
33333333
1 Sec
Enable) terminal to prevent
4444444.4
0.1 Min
accidental changes to the timer
55555555
1 Min
range. Any new time accumulated
666666.66
0.01 Hr
will be at the new rate selected.
Note: To avoid incorrect display
7777777.7
0.1 Hr
information, it is recommended
88888888
1 Hr
that the CUB7T be reset after
9999.99.99
Factory Use Only
making programming changes

246

The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut panel opening to specified dimensions. Remove burrs and clean
around panel opening.
2. Carefully remove and discard the center section of the gasket.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the counter body to the back of the
bezel. Install CUB7T unit through the panel cut-out.
4. Insert the mounting screws onto both sides of mounting clip. Tip of screw
should NOT project from hole in mounting clip.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the clip is against the
back of the panel. The mounting clip has latching features which engage
into mating features on the CUB7T housing.
6. Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding mounting clip
into position.
7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed
to about 75 to 80% of its original thickness. If not, gradually turn mounting
screws to further compress gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen mounting screws, and check that the mounting
clip is latched as close as possible to the panel.
9. Repeat from step #5 for tightening mounting screws.

www.redlion.net

BATTERY INSTALLATION
1. Remove all power to the unit before removing battery cover.
2. To remove the battery cover, push upward in the direction of the arrow on
the rear cover (See drawing at right), until the cover unlatches. Pull the
cover straight out from unit to fully remove.
3. Remove old battery* and replace it with an RLC battery (BNL10000).
Observe proper polarity when replacing the battery as shown in the drawing.
4. Replace the cover. The battery cover is keyed so that it cannot be placed
upside down. The arrow on the rear of the cover should point toward the top
of the CUB7T when properly installed.
* - Dispose of properly.
WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

WIRING CONNECTIONS

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

WARNING: Lithium battery may explode if incinerated.

1-717-767-6511

247

L.S. INPUT; VOLTAGE VERSIONS
The CUB7T3 accepts most machine control voltage signals. The input
accepts AC (50/60 Hz) or DC control voltages from 10 to 30 V. The unit times
when voltage is applied between the LS input and Common. Any off-state
leakage current may activate the timer.

RESET AND PROGRAM OPTIONS
Connecting a wire from the RST EN (Reset Enable) or the HS (Program
Enable) Input terminals to Common will enable the front panel Reset or
Program buttons respectively.
Pulling the “RST.” input low causes the timer to reset. The “RST.” can be
pulled low by either a mechanical switch or solid-state transistor switch. The
Switch load is 15 μA (max. voltage drop 0.5 V) when ON. The OFF-state
leakage current must be less than 2 μA.
Note: The RC protection circuit on the “RST.” Input causes a delay of
approximately 15 msec in Reset response.

BACKLIGHT OPTION
Optional backlight versions of the CUB7T require an external 9 to 26 VDC
power supply. The external supply is connected between the V+ and common
terminals as shown in the drawing.

TROUBLESHOOTING

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

*CUB7T3

Timer; Positive Image Reflective
VOLTAGE
Timer, w/Yel-Grn Backlighting
INPUT
Timer; w/Red Backlighting

BNL

Replacement 3 V Lithium Battery

PART
NUMBER

For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the
appropriate company numbers listed.

CUB7T300
CUB7T310
CUB7T320
BNL10000

*Battery is included with unit.

248

www.redlion.net

MODEL CUB5T - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC PRESET TIMER
AND CYCLE COUNTER
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR RED/GREEN LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.46" (11.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z 7-DIGIT BI-DIRECTIONAL TIMING CAPABILITY
z 6-DIGIT CYCLE COUNTING CAPABILITY
z OPTIONAL RELAY OUTPUT MODULE
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS MODULE (RS232 or RS485)
z SELECTABLE TIMER RANGES AND OPERATING MODES
z ELAPSED TIMER AND PRESET TIMER FUNCTIONALITY

UL
R

z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT PRESET OUTPUT

US LISTED

z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The CUB5T provides the ultimate in timer flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional relay output and serial communications capability.
The meter functions as an Elapsed Timer or Preset Timer. It also has a built-in
Cycle Counter. The display can be toggled either manually or automatically
between the Timer and Cycle Counter values. With eight different input
operating modes and 18 selectable timer ranges, the meter can be programmed
for a wide variety of timing applications.
The CUB5T has an LCD display with 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits. The LCD
is available in two versions, reflective (CUB5TR00) and backlight
(CUB5TB00). The backlight version is user selectable for red or green
backlighting with variable display intensity.
The Timer has two signal inputs and eight input operating modes. These
modes provide level active or edge triggered start/stop operation. A Display
Hold mode will display the elapsed time for one cycle, while the next cycle
continues timing internally. The Timer Reset modes will automatically reset the
timer value when a time start edge is applied to the input. This allows sequential
timing cycles without having to manually reset the Timer.
In addition to the Timer inputs, a programmable User Input is available to
perform a variety of meter functions. All inputs are current sinking (active low)
and accept a variety of logic and open-collector output signal sources. Relay and
switch contacts can also be used as signal sources, when the software input
debounce filter is enabled.
The capability of the CUB5T can be easily expanded with the addition of a
field installable option module. When the CUB5RLY0 relay output module is
added, the meter becomes a Preset Timer. The Setpoint Output can be assigned
to the Timer or Cycle Counter values, and configured to suit a variety of control
and alarm requirements. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module (CUB5COM).

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

The CUB5T can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5T.
The MLPS1 is powered from an 85 to 250 VAC source and provides up to 400
mA to drive the meter and sensors.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

1-717-767-6511

249

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

CUB5T

Optional Plug-in Cards

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

CUB5TR

Preset Timer and Cycle Counter with Reflective Display

CUB5TB

Preset Timer and Cycle Counter with Backlight Display

CUB5TB00

CUB5RLY

Single Relay Option Card

CUB5RLY0

RS485 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM1

RS232 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM2

CUB5COM

CUB5TR00

MLPS1

Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC

MLPS1000

CBLPRO

Programming Cable RS232 (RJ11-DB9)

CBLPROG0

CBPRO

Programming Cable RS485 (RJ11-DB9)

CBPRO007

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 8 digit LCD 0.46" (11.7 mm) high digits
CUB5TR00: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5TB00: Selectable transmissive red or green backlight LED with
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability at preset when
using a relay module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.

MODEL
NUMBER

DISPLAY COLOR

INPUT CURRENT
WITHOUT
CUB5RLY0

INPUT CURRENT
WITH
CUB5RLY0

CUB5TR00
CUB5TB00
CUB5TB00

--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)

10 mA
85 mA
95 mA

30 mA
115 mA
125 mA

3. TIMER DISPLAY: 7-digits
Display Designator: “t” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 9999999
Overflow/Underflow Indication: Display flashes “t OVEr”
Minimum Digit Resolution: 0.001 Sec.
Maximum Single Digit Resolution: 1 Hr.
Timing Accuracy: ±0.01%
4. CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY: 6-digits, may be disabled if not used
Display Designator: “C” to the left side of the display
Display Range: 0 to 999999
Overflow/Underflow Indication: Display flashes “C
OVEr”
Maximum Count Rate:
All Count Sources except Input B: 10 Hz
Input B Count Source:
With Timer Input Filter ON: 10 Hz
With Timer Input Filter OFF: 500 Hz
5. TIMER SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A and INP B)
Logic Inputs, Current Sinking (active low)
Input A:
Internal 7.8KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.25 V max; VIH = 2.75 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Input B:
Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Inputs A and B:
Timer Input Pulse Width: 1 msec min.
Timer Start/Stop Response Time: 1 msec max.
Filter: Software filtering provided for relay or switch contact debounce.
Filter enabled or disabled through programming. If enabled, results in
50 msec start/stop response time for successive pulses applied to the
same input terminal.
6. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable function input
Logic Input, Current Sinking (active low)
Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and timer/counter values when power is removed.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TR00: -35 to 75°C

250

Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TB00 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL

Red Display

Green Display

1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5

TEMPERATURE

-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C

Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 40 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
12. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)

www.redlion.net

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS

The CUB5T meters can be fitted with optional relay card and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
Time Accuracy: ± 0.01%

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

WARNING: Disconnect all power to the meter before
installing Plug-in card.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable. 2 msec min. or 50 msec min.
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity

METER

INSTALLATION

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
The unit should be installed fully assembled. Insert
the unit into the panel cutout.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

2.0 DIP SWITCHES
The DIP switches on the main circuit board are not used with the CUB5T and
must be left in the factory set position (all down). Setting any switch to the up
position may cause improper operation of the meter.

1-717-767-6511

251

3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter after the rear
cover is removed
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the meter before
installing Plug-in Card.

Comms Card

Relay Card

REMOVING THE REAR COVER
To remove the rear cover, locate the cover locking tab below the 2nd and 3rd
input terminals. To release the tab, insert a small, flat blade screwdriver between
the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Inserting the screwdriver will
provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.

4.0 WIRING

THE

CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal object.
Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean workstation. Also,
only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or other contaminants
that may contact the cards can adversely affect circuit operation.

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.

252

5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

www.redlion.net

4.1 POWER WIRING

4.2 USER INPUT WIRING

DC Power

Sinking Logic

+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC

INP COMM
USR

}

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and Input Common.

The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low.

4.3 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Power input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the power input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential
of the user input common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.
Current Sinking Output

Interfacing With TTL
Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink
Input A

Input A

4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

1-717-767-6511

253

5.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

ENTERING PROGRAM MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

SEL

Select display (timer or cycle counter)

Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

RST

Reset value(s) per Front Panel Reset setting

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“t” - To the left of the display is the timer value.
“C” - To the left of the display is the cycle counter value.

Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection

“1” - To the upper left of the display indicates the setpoint status.

If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between the timer and cycle counter values.

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL KEY)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL KEY)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL key. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock (See Module 3).

PROGRAMMING TIPS

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST KEYS)
The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST key is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL key.

FACTORY SETTINGS

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST key is used to move through the
selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL key, stores and activates the
displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST key to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST key again increments the digit
by one or the user can hold the RST key and the digit will automatically scroll.
The SEL key will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the SEL key
will enter the value and move to the next parameter.

254

It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module
in sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user
input or programming security code.

Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.
Pressing the RST key on power-up will load the factory settings and display
rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a memory failure or corrupted data.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

www.redlion.net

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

INPUtsOP «
ª
LEVEL

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

6.1 MODULE 1 - TIMER INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INPUt)
PARAMETER MENU

TIMER INPUT FILTER

TIMER RANGE

«
RANGE
ª 5555555

18 TIMER RANGE SELECTIONS

= SEC;

= MIN;

= HR;

= DAY))

FILtEr

OFF

Provides a 50 msec software debounce for the Timer Inputs (A and B). Select
RANGE
MAXIMUM
SELECTION DISPLAY

DISPLAY
RESOLUTION

RANGE
SELECTION

MAXIMUM
DISPLAY
DISPLAY RESOLUTION

ON when using relays or switch contacts as a signal source.

MINUTES/SECONDS

SECONDS

5555555
555555.5
55555.55
5555.555

1 SEC

9999999
999999.9
99999.99
9999.999

0.1 SEC
0.01 SEC
0.001 SEC

MINUTES

NNNNNNN
NNNNNN.N
NNNNN.NN

1 MIN

9999999
999999.9
99999.99

0.1 MIN
0.01 MIN

NNNNN.SS
NNNN.SS.S
NNN.SS.SS
HHHHH.NN
HHHH.NN.N
HHH.NN.NN

HHHHHHH
HHHHHH.H
HHHHH.HH

1 HR

9999999
999999.9
99999.99

0.1 HR

0.01 SEC
1 MIN

99999.59
9999.59.9
999.59.99

0.1 MIN
0.01 MIN

HOURS/MINUTES/SECONDS

ddd.HH.NN

TIMER START VALUE

1 MIN

999.23.59

Ed9E-2
Ed-2srSt

HOLd-2
HOLdsrSt

This parameter determines how the Timer Input Signals affect the Run/Stop
status of the Timer. Timing diagrams are shown below for level active and edge
triggered (1-input or 2-input) operation. For single input modes (Input A only),
Input B provides a level active Timer Inhibit function. In the Display Hold
mode, the timer display value remains held and only updates when a Timer
Start (Input A) or Timer Stop (Input B) edge occurs.
The timer reset (rSt) operating modes are identical to the other modes in the
diagrams, except the timer display value is reset at the Time Start edges.
The Timer can also be stopped at a Timer Stop Value or at Setpoint output
activation or deactivation. This type of Stop condition is cleared when a Timer
Reset occurs, or another start edge is applied on the timer input.

Time Time
Stop Start

TIMER STOP VALUE

t-StOP

Time
Start

Time
Stop

INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)

Ed9E-2, Ed-2srSt

StOP VAL «
ª 0000000

t-FLASH
ª

0000000 to 9999999

Time
Start

INPUT A

Time Start,
Display Update

INPUT A
Time
Stop

Time Stop,
Display Update

INPUT B

YES

TIMER RUN STATE AT POWER-UP

Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input,
with Display Hold
Time Start,
Display Update

Select YES to have the timer annunciator (t) flash when the timer is running.

HOLd-2, HOLdsrSt

Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input

INPUT B

YES

FLASH TIMER ANNUNCIATOR
Time
Stop

Time
Start

INPUT A

Time
Stop

The Timer stops when this value is reached regardless of the signal levels on
the timer inputs. Selecting YES displays a sub-menu where the Stop Value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. This stop
condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs or another start edge is applied
on the timer input. Select NO if a Stop Value is not desired.

Edge Triggered Operation -1 Input
Time
Stop

INPUT A

Time
Start

Ed9E-1, Ed-1srSt

Level Active (Gated) Operation
Time
Start

0000000 to 9999999

The Timer returns to this value whenever a Timer Reset occurs. The value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. Non-zero
values are normally used for “timing down” applications, but they can also
provide an offset value when timing up.

For Reset Modes (rSt), the timer is reset at Time Start edge.

LEVEL, LEVsrSt

Bi-directional timing capability. Select the timing direction desired for the
application.

t-Strt «
ª 0000000
Ed9E-1
Ed-1srSt

1 SEC

999.59.59

TIMER INPUT OPERATION

LEVEL
LEVsrSt

t-dir

DAYS/HOURS/MINUTES

0.01 HR

INPUtsOP «
ª LEVEL

TIMING DIRECTION

0.1 SEC

HOURS/MINUTES

HHH.NN.SS

HOURS

1 SEC

99999.59
9999.59.9
999.59.99

Display
Update

RunsP-UP «
ª
StOP

StOP

SAVE

Determines the Run/Stop state of the Timer at Power-up. This parameter
does not apply to LEVEL Input Operation.
StOP - Timer Stopped at power-up, regardless of prior Run/Stop state
SAVE - Timer assumes the Run/Stop state it was in prior to power-down

1-717-767-6511

255

USER INPUT FUNCTION (Cont’d)

TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP

RStsP-UP «
ª
YES

YES

The Timer can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.

DISPLAY

MODE

DESCRIPTION

Inhibit

Inhibit timing or counting for the
selected value(s).

d-LEVEL

Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)

Increase intensity one level
for each activation. (backlight
version only)

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active
parameters selected in the Print
Options menu (Module 5).

Prnt-r5t

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed
by a momentary reset of the
selected value(s).

r5t OUt

Reset Output

Edge triggered deactivation of
the Setpoint Output.

USER INPUT FUNCTION

USErsINP

NO
DISPLAY

MODE

DESCRIPTION

NO
Pro Loc
d-SELECt
rESEt

No Function

User Input disabled.

d-HOLd

Display Hold

Freeze display for the selected
value(s) while allowing time or
counts to accumulate internally.

Hold and Reset

Edge triggered reset of the
selected value(s) after
storing the time or count.

HOLd-rSt

See Programming Mode
Access chart (Module 3).
Toggle display with each
activation.
Level active reset of the
selected value(s).

Program Mode Lock-out
Display Select
(Edge triggered)
Maintained Reset

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

t-VALUE
C-VALUE
both t-C

USErsASN «
ª t-VALVE

The User Input Assignment only applies if the cycle counter is enabled and
a selection of reset, display hold, hold and reset, inhibit, or print and reset is
selected in the User Input Function menu.

6.2 MODULE 2 - CYCLE COUNTER PARAMETERS (2-Count)
PARAMETER MENU

CYCLE COUNTER ENABLE

CntsEnb
ª

YES

CYCLE COUNTER COUNTING DIRECTION

YES

When set to NO, the remaining Cycle Counter parameters are not accessible.

Cntsdir

CntsSrc «
ª t-rESEt

CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE

CntsStrt «
ª
000000

OUt-ON
OUt-OFF

This parameter selects the source from which the Cycle Counter derives
counts. The Timer Reset (t-rESEt) selection generates a count when either a
manual or automatic timer reset occurs (See Module 4 for programming
Automatic Reset). The Input B (INPUt b) selection generates a count each time
Input B is activated. This selection overrides the timer inhibit function of Input
B, when the timer is programmed for Level or Edge-1 operating mode (See
Module 1 for Timer Input Operating Modes).
The User Input (USr1NP) selection generates a count each time the User Input
is activated. When selected as the count source, the User Input can still be set
to perform a User Function described in Module 1. In this case, the Cycle
Counter will count the number of times the selected User Function occurred.
The Output ON/OFF selections generate a count when the Setpoint output
either activates or deactivates. These selections will only generate counts when
an optional Setpoint module is installed.

256

Bi-directional counting capability. Select the counting direction desired for
the application.

CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE

INPUtsb
USrsINP
t-rESEt

000000

999999

The Cycle Counter returns to this value whenever a Counter Reset occurs.
Non-zero values are normally used for “down counting” applications, but can
also provide an offset value when counting up.

CYCLE COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP

RStsP-UP

YES

The Cycle Counter can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.

www.redlion.net

6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (3-dSPLAY)

PARAMETER MENU

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SELsEnb
ª

yES

ProsCodE

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle between the timer and cycle
counter displays.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

RStsEnb
ª

YES

yES
NO

NO
t-VALUE
C-VALUE

both t-C
dSPLAy

The yES selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s). The
shaded selections only appear if the cycle counter is enabled.

000

999

The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (Pro Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the Setpoint values and Timer Stop value to be modified, but allows direct
access to these values without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the Pro CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending
on the code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the Pro CodE
prompt appears (see chart).
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
KEY IS PRESSED

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

d-ScroLL

not

yES

______

Pro Loc

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll between the timer
and cycle counter values. The scroll rate is about every 4 seconds.

Full Programming

Immediate Access

1-99

Quick
Programming

After Quick Programming
with correct code entry at
Pro CodE prompt *

100-999

Pro CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *

0
Active

1-99

Pro Loc
DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

d-COLOr
ª

rEd

Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming

No Access
No Access

100-999

Pro CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at Pro CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

6rn

Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.

LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

d-LEVEL
ª

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.

FACtsSEt

yES

The yES selection will return the meter to the factory default settings. The
meter will display rESEt and then return to Pro, at which time all settings have
been changed.
Pressing the RST key on power-up will load the factory settings and display
rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a memory failure or corrupted data.

1-717-767-6511

257

6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SEtPt)
PARAMETER MENU

The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when the optional relay
module is installed in the meter. Some parameters will not appear depending on
the Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint Output Action selected.

t-VALUE

SPtstOUt «
ª
00.01.00

00.00.01

C-VALUE

Select the display for Setpoint assignment.

LAtCH
t-OUt
ON-OFF

This parameter selects the action of the Setpoint output as shown below.

SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION

LAtCH
t-OUt
ON-OFF

OUTPUT ACTIVATES

99.59.99

STOP TIMER

SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION

SPtsACt «
ª
LAtCH

This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to Timed Output
mode (t-OUt). Enter the time duration the Setpoint Output will remain ON once
it is activated. This value is always entered in minutes, seconds, and hundredths
of seconds format. The maximum value is 99 minutes 59.99 seconds.

SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

SPtsASN «
ª t-VALUE

SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT

StOP-t

NO
Out-ON
Out-OFF

Stops the Timer when the Setpoint output activates (OUt-ON) or deactivates
(OUt-OFF). Select NO if the output should not affect the Timer Run/Stop status.
The Timer Stop condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs, or a Time
Start edge is applied on the Timer input.

OUTPUT DEACTIVATES

At Manual Reset
When Time or Count
Latched Output Mode
(if SPt rSt = YES)
= Setpoint On value
When Time or Count
After Setpoint
Timed Output Mode
= Setpoint On value
Output Time-Out
When Time or Count When Time or Count
On-Off Output Mode
= Setpoint On value = Setpoint Off value

TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET

AUtOsrSt

NO
Out-ON
Out-OFF

Automatically resets the Setpoint Assigned display value when the Setpoint
Output activates (OUt-ON) or deactivates (OUt-OFF). Select NO if the output should
not cause a display reset.

SETPOINT ON

SPtsON
ª

VALUE

VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP

SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

SPtsrSt

This parameter determines when the Setpoint output will activate. The output
can activate at a programmed Setpoint Value or can be set to activate when the
Timer starts (t-Strt) or stops (t-StOP).
Selecting VALUE displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Value is entered. If
the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same display
format as the selected Timer Range.

SPt VAL «
ª 0000100

SPtsOFF «
ª
VALUE

0000000 to 9999999

258

YES

Select YES to have the Setpoint Output deactivate (reset) when the Setpoint
Assigned display resets. Reset can occur by the RST button or the User Input,
if programmed for that function. Select /0 if the Setpoint output should not
reset when the display resets.

CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/SETPOINT OUTPUT STATE

Ch-COLOr

SETPOINT OFF

VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP

This parameter enables the backlight CUB5T to switch the display color when
the Setpoint output activates. When the output deactivates, the display color will
revert to the normal operating mode color. This parameter is only active for the
backlight version.

The Setpoint Off parameter only appears if the Setpoint Action is set to OnOff Output mode (ON-OFF). In this mode, the Setpoint OFF parameter determines
when the Setpoint Output will deactivate. The output can be programmed to
deactivate at a Setpoint Off Value or can be set to deactivate when the Timer
starts (t-Strt) or stops (t-StOP).
Selecting VALUE displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Off Value is entered.
If the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same display
format as the selected Timer Range.

SPOF VAL «
ª 0000200

0000000 to 9999999

YES

SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE

SPtsP-UP
ª

OFF

OFF
ON
SAVE

SAVE will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down. ON will activate the output at power up. OFF will deactivate the
output at power up. This parameter is not active when the Setpoint Action is
selected for timed output mode.

www.redlion.net

6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (5-SEriAL)
PARAMETER MENU

Module 5 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the
CUB5T with those of the host computer or other serial device. The Serial Setup
Parameters are only accessible when an optional RS232 or RS485 serial
communications module is installed in the meter.
This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the CUB5T.

BAUD RATE

bAUd
ª

9600

300
600

1200
2400

4800
9600

DATA BIT

7-bit

8-bit

7-bit

Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

PARITY BIT

PAritY
ª

Odd

EVEN

Odd

METER ADDRESS

Addr
ª

Abbr
ª

YES

19200
38400

dAtA

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

PRINT OPTIONS

Prnt OPt «
ª
NO

YES

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (Prnt ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting
(YES), without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, the Cycle Counter and Cycle Counter Start values will
only be sent when the Cycle Counter is enabled. If disabled, these parameters
are inactive and will not be transmitted. Likewise, the Setpoint parameters will
not be sent unless an optional setpoint card is installed in the meter.
DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

t-VALUE
C-VALUE
t-Strt
t-StOP
Cnt Strt
SPt ON
SPt OFF
SPt tOUt

Timer
Cycle Counter
Timer Start
Timer Stop
Counter Start
Setpoint ON
Setpoint OFF
Setpoint Time-out

FACTORY
SETTING

YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

MNEMONIC

TMR
CNT
TST
TSP
CST
SPT
SOF
STO

1-717-767-6511

259

Sending Serial Commands and Data

Command Chart
Command Description

N
T
V
R
P

Notes

Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value Change (write) followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.
Reset a value or the output. Must be followed
Reset
by a register ID character
Block Print Request Initiates a block print output. Registers in the
(read)
print block are selected in Print Options.
Node (meter)
Address Specifier

Value Description MNEMONIC

Transmit Details (T and V)

Timer

TMR

T, V, R

7 digit, per Timer Range

Cycle Counter

CNT

T, V, R

6 digit

Timer Start

TST

T, V

7 digit, per Timer Range

Timer Stop

TSP

T, V

7 digit, per Timer Range

Counter Start

CST

T, V

6 digit

Setpoint ON
(Reset Output)

SPT

T, V, R

per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter

Setpoint OFF

SOF

T, V

per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter

Setpoint
Time-out

STO

T, V

6 digit, mm.ss.ss format

Command String Construction

Command String Examples:

The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:

1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the Setpoint On value
String: N17VF350$

1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints all the active selections chosen in the Print Options menu parameter.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See timing diagram figure for differences in
meter response time when using the * and $ terminating characters.

2. Node address = 5, Read Timer value, response time of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
3. Node address = 0, Reset Setpoint output
String: RF*
4. Node address = 31, Request a Block Print Output, response time of 2 msec min
String: N31P$

Transmitting Data to the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to Transmit Details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. The meter ignores any
decimal point and conforms the number to the appropriate display format. (For
example: The Timer range is set for tenths of a second and 25 is written to the
Timer Start register. The value of the register is now 2.5 seconds. In this case,
write a value of 250 to equal 25.0 seconds).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.

Receiving Data From The Meter

data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned with leading spaces for any unfilled
positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with a and . After the
last line of a block print, an extra , and are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.

Full Field Transmission

Abbreviated Transmission

Byte

Description

Byte

1, 2

2 byte Node Address field [00-99]

1-12

(Space)

4-6

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

7-18

12 byte data field; 9 bytes for number and three bytes for decimal
points

Description

12 byte data field, 9 bytes for number and three bytes for
decimal points
(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register
mnemonic, leaving only the numeric part of the response.

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12
characters long. When a display overflow exists for a requested timer or cycle
counter value, an * (used as an overflow character) replaces a space in byte 7.
Byte 8 is always a space.
The remaining ten positions of this field consist of seven positions for the
requested value with decimal points positioned for the selected timer range. The

260

Meter Response Examples:
1. Node address = 17, full field response, Cycle Counter = 875
17 CNT
875
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint On value = 250.5
SPT
250.5
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint On value= 250, last line of
block print
250

www.redlion.net

Command Response Time
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). During RS232 transmissions, the meter ignores commands while
transmitting data, but instead uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending
commands and data to the meter, a delay must be imposed before sending
another command. This allows enough time for the meter to process the
command and prepare for the next command.
At the start of the time interval t1, the computer program prints or writes the
string to the com port, thus initiating a transmission. During t1, the command
characters are under transmission and at the end of this period, the command
terminating character (* or $) is received by the meter. The time duration of t1
is dependent on the number of characters and baud rate of the channel.

Communication Format

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Timing Diagram Figure

Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The CUB5T meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Character Frame Figure

1-717-767-6511

261

CUB5T PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press and hold SEL key to
enter Programming Mode.

262

www.redlion.net

C48T SERIES - 1/16 DIN TIMERS
MODEL C48TS - SINGLE PRESET
MODEL C48TD - DUAL PRESET
O

LCD, 7 SEGMENT, 2 LINE, 6 DIGIT DISPLAY, POSITIVE
REFLECTIVE OR NEGATIVE TRANSMISSIVE MODELS WITH
RED TOP LINE AND GREEN BOTTOM LINE BACKLIGHTING

SOLID STATE AND RELAY OUTPUT MODELS

FIELD REPLACEABLE RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS

STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS

O
O

HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL STACKING OF MULTIPLE UNITS

85 to 250 VAC or 18 to 36 VDC/24 VAC POWERED UNITS

RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION

CHOICE OF NUMERIC DATA ENTRY MODES

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION
KEY
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE OPERATOR
ACCESS PRIVILEGES AND PROTECTED VALUE MENU

DESCRIPTION
The Model C48 Timer is available in Single or Dual Preset models. The
C48T features a 7 segment, 2 line by 6 digit reflective or backlit LCD display.
For the backlit versions, the main display line is red and shows the timer value.
The smaller secondary display line is green, and can be used to view the preset
values or output time values.
The C48 timer can be configured for a variety of different operating modes
to meet most timing application requirements. Twelve timing ranges are
available from thousandths of a second to hours and minutes. Decimal Points
are used to separate the time units (hours, minutes, seconds). Timing can be
cumulative or can reset and start upon each power cycle. “On Delay” or “Off
Delay”, “Single Shot”, “Repetitive auto cycling” modes are all supported.
The Timer can also be configured to Continue or Stop timing upon reaching
Preset. The display can be programmed to stop at the preset value (Reset to Zero
mode) or zero (Reset to Preset mode), or automatically reset to zero or preset
and hold. Once stopped, the timer can be restarted by manually resetting it, or
it can be programmed to restart when power is reapplied.
The C48 Timer has a Run/Stop Input, 3 programmable User Inputs, and a
programmable front panel function key. The Run/Stop and User Inputs can be
configured as sinking (active low) or sourcing (active high) inputs via a single
plug jumper. The user inputs and the front panel function key can be configured
to provide a variety of functions.
Four front panel push-buttons are used for programming the operating modes
and data values, changing the viewed display, and performing user
programmable functions, e.g. reset, etc. The C48T can be configured for one of
two numeric data entry methods, digit entry or automatic scrolling. The digit
entry method allows for the selection and incrementing of digits individually.
The automatic scrolling method allows for the progressive change of one
through all digit positions by pressing and holding the “up” or “down” button.

UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808

The Dual Preset models are available with solid-state or Relay outputs. The
Single Preset model has a solid-state and relay output in parallel. All solid-state
outputs are available in a choice of NPN current sinking or PNP current
sourcing, open-collector transistor outputs. All relay output boards are field
replaceable.
The optional RS-485 serial communication interface provides two-way
communication between a C48 and other compatible equipment such as a
printer, PLC, HMI, or a host computer. In multipoint applications (up to thirtytwo), the address number of each C48 on the line can be programmed from 0 to
99. Data from the C48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm output(s) may
be reset by sending the proper command code via serial communications. PC
software, SFC48, allows for easy configuration of controller parameters. These
settings can be saved to disk for later use or used for multi-controller down
loading. On-line help is provided within the software.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a
textured front panel and a clear display window. The front panel meets NEMA
4X/IP65 specifications when properly installed. Multiple units can be stacked
horizontally or vertically. Modern surface-mount technology, extensive testing,
plus high immunity to noise interference makes the C48 Timers extremely
reliable in industrial environments.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

263

SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 2 Line by 6 digit LCD display; Positive image reflective or
negative image transmissive with red (top line) and green (bottom line)
backlighting.
Main Display: 0.3" (7.62 mm) high digits
Secondary Display: 0.2" (5.08 mm) high digits
Annunciators:
Value: PRS, 1, and 2
Output: 01 and 02
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Versions (C48CXXX0X):
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 9 VA max.
DC Power: 11 to 14 VDC @ 150 mA max. (Non PNP output models)
Note: Models with PNP current sourcing outputs must be powered from AC.

DC Versions (C48CXXX1X):
CONTINUOUS:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC; 5.5 W max.
AC Power: 24 VAC ±10%; 50/60 Hz; 7 VA max.
Note: The +10% tolerance range on AC input voltage must be strictly
adhered to. DO NOT EXCEED 26.4 VAC.
PEAK (START-UP CURRENT):
AC or DC Power: 500 mA peak start-up current for 10 msec max.

DC OUT (VSRC IN) - Terminal 10
For units which do not have PNP current sourcing outputs, this terminal
provides a DC output for sensor power (+12 VDC ±15%). The
maximum sensor current is 100 mA.
For units with PNP current sourcing outputs, this terminal serves a dual
purpose depending on the application’s PNP output voltage level and
current requirements.
1. The terminal may be used as a +12 VDC output for sensor power.
In this case, the PNP output voltage level will be +12 VDC
(±15%). A maximum of 100 mA is available for the combination
of sensor current and PNP output sourcing current.
2. If a higher PNP output voltage level or additional output sourcing
current is desired, an external DC supply may be connected
between the “DC OUT (VSRC IN)” and “COMM.” terminals. This
supply will determine the PNP output voltage level, and must be
in the range of +13 to +30 VDC.
An external DC supply can also provide the additional output
sourcing current required in applications where two or more PNP
outputs are “ON” simultaneously. However, the maximum current
rating of 100 mA per individual output must not be exceeded,
regardless of external supply capacity.
3. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
timer values.
4. SENSOR POWER: +12 VDC (± 15%) @ 100 mA max.
5. INPUTS: Run/Stop, Usr. In1, Usr In2, and Usr. In3.
Configurable as current sinking (active low) or current sourcing (active high)
inputs via a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking (active low): VIL = 1.5 VDC max, 22 KΩ pull-up to 5
VDC.
Current Sourcing (active high): VIH = 3.5 VDC min., VIN max = 30 VDC;
22 KΩ pull-down.
Run/Stop Response Time: 250 μsec max.
User Input Response Time: 5 msec max.
6. TIME ACCURACY: ± 0.01%
7. OUTPUTS: (Output type and quantity are model dependent)
Solid-State:
NPN Open Collector: ISNK = 100 mA max. @ VOL = 1.1 VDC max; VOH
= 30 VDC max.
PNP Open Collector: ISRC = 100 mA max.(See note); VOH = 12 VDC
±15% (using internal supply); VOH = 13 to 30 VDC (using external
supply).
Note: The internal supply of the C48T can provide a total of 100 mA for
the combination of sensor current and PNP output sourcing current.
The supply voltage is +12 VDC (±15%), which will be the PNP output
voltage level when using only the internal supply.
If additional PNP output sourcing current or a higher output voltage
level is desired, an external DC supply may be connected between the
“DC Out/In” and “Comm.” terminals. This supply will determine the
PNP output voltage level, and must be in the range of +13 to +30 VDC.
An external supply can provide the additional output sourcing current
required in applications where two or more outputs are “ON”
simultaneously. However, the maximum rating of 100 mA per individual
output must not be exceeded, regardless of external supply capacity.

264

Relay: Form A contact, Rating = 5 A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load),
1/10 HP @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Relay Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles min. at max. load rating
Programmable Timed Output(s): User selectable output time resolution
0.01 Second Resolution: 0.01 to 99.99 seconds, ± 0.01% + 10 msec max.
0.1 Second Resolution: 0.1 to 999.9 Seconds, ± 0.01% + 100 msec max.
8. RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional): Up to 32 units can be
connected.
Baud Rate: Programmable from 1200 to 9600 baud
Address: Programmable from 0 to 99
Data Format: 10 Bit Frame, 1 start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, 1 or No Parity bit,
and 1 stop bit
Parity: Programmable for Odd (7 data bits), Even (7 data bits), or None (8
data bits)
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Notes:
AC VERSIONS
1. A power line filter, RLC#LFIL0000 or equivalent, was installed when the
unit was DC powered.
DC VERSIONS
To insure compliance with the EMC standards listed above, do not connect
any wires from the terminal(s) labeled “COMM.” to the “DC-” supply
terminal (12), when powering the unit from a DC supply.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
10.ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0°C to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40°C to 70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals.
12. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic case with collar style panel latch. The
panel latch can be installed for horizontal or vertical stacking. Black plastic
textured bezel with clear display viewing window. Unit assembly with circuit
boards can be removed from the case without removing the case from the
panel or disconnecting the wiring. This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
13. WEIGHT: 6.0 oz. (170 g)

SINGLE PRESET MODELS
The C48TS offers a choice of twelve timing ranges with eighteen different
operating modes. The unit has a solid-state output that operates in parallel with
a relay output. The solid-state output is available as an NPN or PNP open
collector transistor.

DUAL PRESET MODELS
The C48TD offers a choice of twelve timing ranges with 42 operating modes.
The unit is available with solid-state or relay outputs. The solid-state outputs are
available as NPN or PNP open collector transistors.

www.redlion.net

FRONT PANEL FEATURES
The C48 Timer features a dual line display. In
the normal operating mode (main display), the
timer value is shown on the top line and preset or
output time values are shown on the bottom line.
The Presets or Output time values can be
programmed to be viewable only, viewable and
changeable, or locked (not viewable) from the
main display.
In the normal operating mode, the presets and
output time values are accessible providing that
these values are not programmed for ‘L’ocked.
Values that are accessible (changeable) can be
changed immediately when viewed in the
secondary display.

FRONT PANEL KEYPAD

USER INTERFACE/PROGRAMMING MODES
The operating modes of the C48T are programmed using the front panel
keypad. To enter the programming menu, the " key is pushed and held for 2
seconds. Within the programming menu, the " key is used to sequence through
the list of programming parameters.

%
"

- Performs user Programmed Function

- Selects next available mode in programming mode.
- Increments digit in Digit Entry mode.
- Increments value in Auto Scrolling entry mode.

- Selects Data Entry mode for displayed data values.
- Selects Digit to right when in Digit Entry mode.
- Decrements value in Auto Scrolling entry mode.

PROGRAMMING MENU
DISPLAY

EntrY
trAn9E
OPEr
rSt.P.uP
Ac PrS
PrESEt
P1trAc
Ac Out
OutrES
OutPut
rEVOut
rEVAnu
OutP.uP
USrIn1
USrIn2
USrIn3
USr F1
CodE
ScroLL
SErSEt
SErAdr
SErAbr
PrnOPt
PrnrSt
FAcSEt

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

- Cycles through secondary displays.
- Enters Programming Mode or Protected Value Menu
when pushed and held for 2 seconds.
- Scrolls through programming displays.
- Enters Data Values.

Digit or Auto Scrolling Data Entry Mode

Timer Range Modes (See Table on following page)

Timer Operating Modes (See Table on following page)

Reset at Power up

Accessibility of Preset Values

Preset 1 and 2 Values

P1 Track P2 (C48TD only)

Accessibility of Output Time Values

Output Resolution

Program Security/Operator Accessible Values

Output 1 and 2 Time Values

Reverse Output/Relay Logic

Reverse Output Annunciator Logic

Power up Output State

The Program Disable Plug Jumper, Programmable Code Value, User
Input (programmed for Program Disable), and the Accessible value
parameter settings provide various levels of security against unauthorized
programming changes. The accessible value parameters provide individual
access or locking of each value.

User Input 1

User Input 2

User Input 3

User F1 Key

Programming/Protected Parameter Menu Code

Scroll Display

Serial Baud Rate and Parity Settings

Serial Unit Address

Abbreviate Serial Mnemonics

Print Options

Print and Reset Time Value

Load Factory Default Settings

Protected Value Menu
The Protected Value Menu allows access to selected presets and timed
output values without having them viewable or changeable from the main
display. To enter the protected menu, the " key is pressed and held, and a
programmed code value is entered.

Timer Range Modes (RS485 option only)

trAnGE

The timer can be configured to operate in one of 12 time ranges. The table
below shows the various ranges available with the time resolution of each
range.
MODE

SEC.000
SEC.00
SEC.0
SEC
n.000
n.00
n.0
n.SEC
n.SEC.0
h.n.SEC
h.n.00
h.n.0
1-717-767-6511

RANGE

RESOLUTION

999.999 Seconds

0.001 sec

9999.99 Seconds

0.01 sec

99999.9 Seconds

0.1 sec

999999 Seconds

1 sec

999.999 Minutes

0.001 min

9999.99 Minutes

0.01 min

99999.9 Minutes

0.1 min

9999.59 Minutes.Seconds

1 sec

999.59.0 Minutes.Seconds.0

0.1 sec

99.59.59 Hours.Minutes.Seconds

1 sec

99.59.99 Hours.Minutes.00

0.01 min

999.59.9 Hours.Minutes.0

0.1 min

265

Programmable Operating Modes -

OPEr

These modes determine the operational characteristics of the timer. In the
tables, 01 and 02 refer to Output 1 and Output 2 respectively.
SINGLE PRESET OPERATING MODES

- Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Output

- Manual Reset to Zero, Timed Output

10 - Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Zero, Timed Output
11 - Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Preset, Latched Output

- Manual Reset to Preset, Latched Output

12 - Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Preset, Timed Output

- Manual Reset to Preset, Timed Output

13 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Zero, Latched Output

- Auto Reset to Zero, Timed Output

14 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Zero, Timed Output

- Auto Reset to Preset, Timed Output

15 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Preset, Latched Output

- Auto Reset to Zero at 01 End, Timed Output

16 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Preset, Timed Output

- Auto Reset to Preset at 01 End, Timed Output

17 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Zero at 01 End, Timed Output

- Stop Timer at 01, Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Output

18 - Stop Timer at 01, Auto Reset to Preset at 01 End, Timed Output

- Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Outputs

22 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

23 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed

24 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, Latched Outputs

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

25 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

- Manual Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

26 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, Latched Outputs

27 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

28 - Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed

29 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, Latched Outputs

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

30 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

- Manual Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

31 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed

32 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

- Auto Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

33 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed

34 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, Latched Outputs

- Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

35 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

- Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed

36 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 and 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

37 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Latched

- Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed

38 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

39 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed

- Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, Latched Outputs

40 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Zero at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

- Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 Timed, 02 Latched

41 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 and 02 Timed

- Stop Timer at 02, Manual Reset to Zero, 01 and 02 Timed

42 - Stop Timer at 02, Auto Reset to Preset 2 at 02 End, 01 off at 02, 02 Timed

DUAL PRESET OPERATING MODES

MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING
The C48T is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel
latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum spacing

from center line to center line of the units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This spacing is
the same for vertical or horizontal stacking.
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that the
maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.

PANEL CUT-OUT SPACING FOR MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING.
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT SHOWN.

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR VERTICAL
UNIT STACKING

266

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
HORIZONTAL UNIT STACKING

www.redlion.net

APPLICATION
ONE SHOT TIMING CYCLE
run terminal is connected to common. The normally open relay contacts close
at the timer reset signal activating the disinfectant solution pump. When the
programmed preset is reached, timing stops and the relay deactivates, turning
off the pump controlling the disinfectant solution. The C48 Timer’s preset
cycle time may be changed according to the manufacturer’s concentration
level of the disinfectant.

Proper wash down mixture for a food processing plant is an important
factor in maintaining the clean environment required. A disinfectant solution
is added to the mixing/holding tank used for the wash down cycle. When the
holding tank is near empty, a level transducer activates the filler pump. A
C48TS is used to turn on the disinfectant solution pump for a preprogrammed
amount of time during the filling process of the holding tank.
When the filler pump starts, a momentary contact closure activates User
Input 1, resetting the C48 Timer. The timer begins the timing cycle since the

PROGRAMMING

EntrY
trAnGE
OPEr
rStP.uP
Ac PrS
PrESEt
rEVOut
rEVAnu
OutP.uP
USrIn1
USrIn2
USrIn3
UsrF1
CodE
ScroLL

Auto Sc
nSEC (min & sec)
09
no
-Y (yes)
xxxx.xx

-Y (yes)
-n (no)
-F (off)
rSt-E
Pro.diS
ChgdSP
rSt-E
xxxx

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

C48T

PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE
SUPPLY VOLTAGES

* NPN O.C.
OUTPUT(S)

RELAY
OUTPUT(S)

RS485

18-36 VDC/24VAC

85 to 250 VAC

1 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48TS013

C48TS003

1 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48TS113

C48TS103

2 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48TD012

C48TD002

2 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD

Yes

C48TD017

C48TD007

2 Preset Timer, Reflective LCD

Yes

N/A

C48TD005

2 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48TD112

C48TD102

2 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD

Yes

C48TD117

C48TD107

2 Preset Timer, Backlit LCD

Yes

N/A

C48TD105

DESCRIPTION

* PNP O.C. output(s) versions are available, contact the factory.

RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS
MODEL NO.

RBC48

DESCRIPTION

NPN O.C.
OUTPUT

PNP O.C.
OUTPUT

RELAY
OUTPUT(S)

PART NUMBER

Single Preset

Yes

RBC48001

Dual Preset

Yes

RBC48003

ACCESSORIES
MODEL

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

SFC48

PC Configuration Software for Windows 3.x and 95 (3.5"disk) (for RS-485 Models)

1-717-767-6511

SFC48

267

MODEL PAX-1/8 DIN PRESET TIMER (PAXTM) &
REAL-TIME CLOCK (PAXCK)
z 6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
z 4 SEPARATE DISPLAYS (Timer, Counter, Real-Time Clock, and Date)
z CYCLE COUNTING CAPABILITY
z PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUTS
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)
z COMMUNICATIONS AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/Plug-in card)

UL
R

z BUS CAPABILITIES: DEVICENET, MODBUS and PROFIBUS-DP
z CRIMSON® PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
®

The PAXTM (PAX Timer) and PAXCK (PAX® Clock/Timer) offer many
features and performance capabilities to suit a wide range of industrial
applications. Both can function as an Elapsed Timer or Preset Timer, while the
PAXCK also offers Real-Time Clock with Date capability. The Plug-in option
cards allow the opportunity to configure the meter for the present application,
while providing easy upgrades for future needs.
Both units can function as an Elapsed Time Indicator. By using two separate
signal inputs and 23 selectable timer ranges, the meters can be programmed to
meet most any timing application. With the addition of a Plug-in Setpoint card,
they can easily become a dual or quad output preset timer.
The PAXCK can also operate as a Real-Time Clock (RTC), with the RealTime Clock Card already installed. The meter is capable of displaying time in
12 or 24-hour time formats. The 12-hour format can be displayed in hours and
minutes, with or without an AM/PM indication or in hours, minutes, and
seconds. The 24-hour format can be displayed in hours and minutes or in hours,
minutes, and seconds. The PAXCK is also capable of a calendar display in
which the day, month and/or year can be displayed. The meter will recognize
leap years, and can automatically adjust for Daylight Savings Time. The RealTime Clock has the ability to externally synchronize with other PAXCK meters
to provide a uniform display network throughout the plant.
If the application calls for both a Preset Timer and a Real-Time Clock at the
same time, the PAXCK can handle this requirement as well. The meter provides
up to four different displays, accessed via front panel push buttons or external
inputs. The displays are Timer (TMR), which displays the current timer value;
Count (CNT), which displays the current cycle counter value; Date (DAT),
which displays the current programmed date; and Real-Time Clock, which
displays the current time. A battery-backed Real-Time Clock plug-in card is
provided with the PAXCK. This card, which includes a lithium coin-cell battery,
will maintain the time and date when main power is removed.
The meters accept inputs from a variety of sources including switch contacts
and outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits. The input can be configured to trigger
on the edge or level of the incoming pulse. Internal jumpers are available to allow
the selection for sinking inputs (active low) or sourcing inputs (active high).
The front panel keys and three user inputs are programmable to perform
various meter functions. One of the functions includes exchanging parameter
lists, allowing for two separate listings of setpoint values, timer start/stop
values, counter start/stop values and RTC daily on and off values.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

268

The meters can have up to four setpoint outputs, determined by the optional
plug-in cards. The setpoint plug-in cards provide dual FORM-C relays (5A),
quad FORM-A relays (3A) or either quad sinking or quad sourcing open
collector logic outputs. The outputs can be assigned to the timer, counter, RTC
date, and RTC time. The outputs can also be independently configured to suit a
variety of control and alarm requirements.
Plug-in cards can also provide serial communications. These include RS232,
RS485, Modbus, DeviceNet, and Profibus-DP. Display values, setpoint alarm
values and setpoint states can be controlled through serial communications.
With the RS232 or RS485 communication card installed, it is possible to
configure the meter using a Windows® based program. The meter configuration
data can be saved to a file for later recall.
Once the meters have been initially configured, the parameter list may be
locked out from further modification entirely, or the setpoint, timer start/stop
values, counter start/stop values, RTC time SET, and Display Intensity can be
made accessible. This lockout is possible through a security code or user input.
The meters have been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting
clip installation is 2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications. . . . . . . . .
Optional Plug-In Cards and Accessories
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Plug-In Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

2
3
4
5
5
6

Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display . . . 9
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Factory Service Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Programming Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAX

D
CK - Timer/Real Time Clock
TM - Timer

0 - Red, Sunlight Readable Display
1 - Green Display
0 - 85 to 250 VAC
1 - 11 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC

Option Card and Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards
PAXCDC

PAXRTC
Accessories

SFCRD*

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS10

Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

DeviceNet Communications Card (Terminal Block)

PAXCDC30

Modbus Communications Card

PAXCDC40

Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC4C

Profibus-DP Communications Card

PAXCDC50

Real-Time Clock Card (Replacement Only)
®

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP

PAXRTC00
SFCRD200

*Crimson® software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/

1-717-767-6511

269

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) red sunlight readable or standard green
LED
2. POWER:
AC Versions (PAXCK000, PAXTM000):
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 18 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs. (300 V working)
DC Versions (PAXCK010, PAXTM010):
DC Power: 11 to 36 VDC, 14 W
(Derate operating temperature to 40°C if operating <15 VDC and three
Plug-in cards are installed)
AC Power: 24 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs (50 V working)
3. SENSOR POWER: 12 VDC, ±10%, 100 mA max. Short circuit protected.
4. ANNUNCIATORS:
TMR - Timer Display
SP1 - Setpoint 1 Output
CNT - Cycle Counter Display
SP2 - Setpoint 2 Output
DAT - Real-Time Clock Date Display
SP3 - Setpoint 3 Output
- Real-Time Clock Time Display
SP4 - Setpoint 4 Output

5. KEYPAD: 3 programmable function keys, 5 keys total.
6. TIMER DISPLAY:
Timer Range: 23 Selectable Ranges
Timing Accuracy: ± 0.01%
Minimum Digit Resolution: 0.001 Sec.
Maximum Least Significant Digit Resolution: 1 Hr.
Maximum Display: 999999
7. CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY:
Counter Range: 0 to 999999
Digit Resolution: 1 cycle
Maximum Count Rate: 50 Hz
8. REAL-TIME/DATE DISPLAY (PAXCK):
Real-Time Display: 5 display formats
Hr/Min/Sec (12 or 24 Hr. format); Hr/Min (24 Hr.); Hr/Min (12 Hr. with
or without AM/PM indication)
Date Display: 7 display formats
Month/Day or Day/Month (numeric or 3-letter Month format);
Month/Day/Year or Day/Month/Year (all numeric);
Day of Week/Day (3-letter Day of Week format)
9. REAL-TIME CLOCK CARD: Field replaceable plug-in card
Time Accuracy: ± 5 secs./Month (1 min./year) with end-user calibration
Battery: Lithium 2025 coin cell
Battery Life Expectancy: 10 yrs. typical
Synchronization Interface: Two-wire multi-drop network (RS485 hardware),
32 units max., operates up to 4000 ft.
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
10. TIMER INPUTS A and B:
Logic inputs configurable as Current Sinking (active low) or Current
Sourcing (active high) via a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking (active low): VIL = 0.9 V max., 22KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC.
Current Sourcing (active high): VIH = 3.6 V min., 22KΩ pull-down, Max.
Continuous Input: 30 VDC.
Timer Input Pulse Width: 1 msec min.
Timer Start/Stop Response Time: 1 msec max.
Filter: Software filtering provided for switch contact debounce. Filter
enabled or disabled through programming.
If enabled, filter results in 50 msec start/stop response time for successive
pulses on the same input terminal.
11. USER INPUTS: Three programmable user inputs
Logic inputs configurable as Current Sinking (active low) or Current
Sourcing (active high) through a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking (active low): VIL = 0.9 V max., 22KΩ pull-up to +12 VDC.
Current Sourcing (active high): VIH = 3.6 V min., 22KΩ pull-down, Max.
Continuous Input: 30 VDC.
Isolation To Timer Input Common: Not isolated
Response Time: 10 msec

270

12. MEMORY: Non-volatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
display values.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C (0 to 45°C with all three plug-in
cards installed)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH non-condensing
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g (10g relay), 11 msec in 3
directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCE:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
Fast transients (burst)
RF conducted interference
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 61000-4-2 Level 3; 8 Kv air
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
EN 55022

Enclosure class B
Power mains class B

Note:
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section for more information.
15. CONNECTIONS: High compression, cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
16. CONSTRUCTION: This meter is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
17. WEIGHT: 10.1 oz. (286 g)

www.redlion.net

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

ACCESSORIES

Adding Option Cards

The PAX and MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional plugin cards. The details for each plug-in card can be reviewed in the specification
section below. Only one card from each function type can be installed at one time.
The function types include Setpoint Alarms (PAXCDS), Communications
(PAXCDC), and Real-Time Clock Card (PAXRTC). The plug-in cards can be
installed initially or at a later date.

COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming
the unit via RLCPro, a Windows® based program, the RS232 or RS485 Cards
must be used.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (Connector)

AND

PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC40 - Modbus (Terminal)
PAXCDC4C - Modbus (Connector)
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 or RS232
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Data: 7/8 bits
Baud: 300 to 19,200
Parity: No, Odd or Even
Bus Address: Selectable 0 to 99, Max. 32 meters per line (RS485)
Transmit Delay: Selectable for 2 to 50 msec or 50 to 100 msec (RS485)
DEVICENET™ CARD
Compatibility: Group 2 Server Only, not UCMM capable
Baud Rates: 125 Kbaud, 250 Kbaud, and 500 Kbaud
Bus Interface: Phillips 82C250 or equivalent with MIS wiring protection per
DeviceNet™ Volume I Section 10.2.2.
Node Isolation: Bus powered, isolated node
Host Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between DeviceNet™
and meter input common.
MODBUS CARD
Type: RS485; RTU and ASCII MODBUS modes
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 minute.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
Baud Rates: 300 to 38,400.
Data: 7/8 bits
Parity: No, Odd, or Even
Addresses: 1 to 247.
Transmit Delay: Programmable; See Transmit Delay explanation.
PROFIBUS-DP CARD
Fieldbus Type: Profibus-DP as per EN 50170, implemented with Siemens
SPC3 ASIC
Conformance: PNO Certified Profibus-DP Slave Device
Baud Rates: Automatic baud rate detection in the range 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Station Address: 0 to 126, set by the master over the network. Address stored
in non-volatile memory.
Connection: 9-pin Female D-Sub connector
Network Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between Profibus
network and sensor and user input commons. Not isolated from all other
commons.

PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector
DUAL RELAY CARD
Type: Two FORM-C relays
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 240 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load),
1/8 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with both relays energized not to exceed 5 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.
QUAD RELAY CARD
Type: Four FORM-A relays
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 3 amps @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load), 1/10
HP @ 120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with all four relays energized not to exceed 4 amps
Life Expectancy: 100K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Response Time: 5 msec. nominal with 3 msec. nominal release
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.
QUAD SINKING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sinking NPN transistors.
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: 100 mA max @ VSAT = 0.7 V max. VMAX = 30 V
Response Time: 400 μsec. nominal with 2 msec. nominal turnoff
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.
QUAD SOURCING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sourcing PNP transistors.
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: Internal supply: 24 VDC ± 10% , 30 mA max. total
External supply: 30 VDC max., 100 mA max. each output
Response Time: 400 μsec. nominal with 2 msec. nominal turnoff
Timed Output Accuracy: ±0.01% -10 msec.

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

The Crimson® software is a Windows® based program that allows
configuration of the PAX® meter from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down
menu commands, that make it easy to program the meter. The meter’s program
can then be saved in a PC file for future use. A PAX® serial plug-in card is
required to program the meter using the software.

1-717-767-6511

271

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when properly
installed. The meter is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare
the panel cutout to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the
meter. Slide the panel gasket over the
rear of the meter to the back of the
bezel. The meter should be
installed fully assembled.
Insert the meter into the
panel cutout.

While holding the meter in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the
meter so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The
panel latch should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve
a proper seal, tighten the latch screws evenly until the meter is snug in the panel
(Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment
The meter should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the meter near devices
that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the meter.
PANEL CUT-OUT

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

To access the jumpers, remove the meter base from the meter case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards. Remove
all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing inside of
the meter.

Timer Input Logic Jumper
One jumper is used for the logic state of both timer inputs. Select the proper
position to match the input being used.

User Input Logic Jumper

One jumper is used for the logic state of all user inputs. If the user inputs are
not used, it is not necessary to check or move this jumper.

Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

SRC

USER
INPUT
JUMPER

SNK

TIMER
INPUT
JUMPER

272

SRC
SNK

www.redlion.net

indicates factory setting.

3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased optional cards that perform
specific functions. These cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter. The
Plug-in cards have many unique functions when used with the meters.
CAUTION: The Plug-in card and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.

TOP VIEW

To Install:
1. With the case open, locate the Plug-in card connector for the card type to be
installed. The types are keyed by position with different main circuit board
connector locations. When installing the card, hold the meter by the rear
terminals and not by the front display board.*
2. Install the Plug-in card by aligning the card terminals with the slot bay in the
rear cover. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the tab on the Plug-in
card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
3. Slide the meter base back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
4. Apply the Plug-in card label to the bottom side of the meter. Do Not Cover
the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of the case must be
clean for the label to adhere properly. Apply the label to the area designated
by the large case label.

Quad Sourcing Open Collector Output Card Supply Select
* If installing the Quad sourcing Plug-in Card (PAXCDS40), set the jumper for
internal or external supply operation before continuing.

4.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).

b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

1-717-767-6511

273

4.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC

4.2 TIMER INPUT WIRING
Before connecting the wires, the Timer Input logic jumper should be verified for proper position.
Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

Current Sinking Output

Current Sourcing Output

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source

Interfacing With TTL

Emitter Follower; Current Source

CAUTION: Timer Input common is NOT isolated from User Input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the timer input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential
of the User Input Common with respect to earth ground; and the common of the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.

4.3 USER INPUT WIRING

Before connecting the wires, the Timer Input logic jumper should be verified for proper position. When the user input is configured for cycle
count, in module 4, the count input should be wired between terminals 7 & 10.
Sinking Logic
Terminals 7-9
Terminal 10

}

Connect external switching device between the
appropriate User Input terminal and User Comm.

The user inputs of the meter are internally
pulled up to +12 V with 22 KΩ resistance.
The input is active when it is pulled low
(<0 .9 V).

274

Sourcing Logic
Terminals 7-9:
+ VDC through external switching device
Terminal 10:
-VDC through external switching device
The user inputs of the meter are internally
pulled down to 0 V with 22 KΩ resistance.
The input is active when a voltage greater
than 3.6 VDC is applied.

www.redlion.net

4.4 SETPOINT (ALARMS) WIRING

SOURCING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD

SETPOINT PLUG-IN CARD TERMINALS

SINKING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD

4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
RS232 Communications

RS485 Communications

PAX METER
+5V

Transmit
Enable

Terminal Block Connection Figure

33K
12
13

B(-)

A(+)
(+)

33K

COMM. *

15 NC

* OPTIONAL

Extended Comms Connection Figure

Terminal Block Connection Figure

1-717-767-6511

Extended Comms Connection Figure

275

4.6 REAL-TIME CLOCK WIRING (PAXCK)
Time synchronization between multiple
PAXCK meters can be accomplished through a
hardware interface on the Real-Time Clock option
card. This RS485 type interface allows connection
of up to 32 PAXCK meters in a two-wire
multidrop network, at distances up to 4000 ft.
In a synchronization network, one PAXCK
meter is programmed as the Host, while all other
meters are programmed as Slaves. Once every
hour, the Host meter outputs a time
synchronization pulse onto the network. Upon
receiving the synchronization pulse, each Slave
meter automatically adjusts the minutes and
seconds of its RTC Time setting to synchronize
with the Host.

5.0 REVIEWING

Real-Time Clock Synchronization Figure

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

DSP

Index display through Timer, Cycle Counter, Date, and Time

Exit programming and return to Display Mode

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

F1V

Function key 1; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 1 **

Increment selected parameter value or selections

F2W

Function key 2; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 2 **

Decrement selected parameter value or selections

RST

Reset (Function key) ***

Selects digit location in parameter values

* Cycle counter and Real-Time Clock displays are locked out in Factory Settings.
** Factory setting for the F1 and F2 keys is NO mode.
(Reset Display)
*** Factory setting for the RST key is

276

www.redlion.net

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

DISPLAY MODE
The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. In this mode, the meter
displays can be viewed consecutively by pressing the DSP key. The
annunciators to the left of the display indicate which display is currently shown;
Timer (TMR), Cycle Counter (CNT), or Date (DAT). The Time Display for the
Real-Time Clock is shown with no annunciator. Any of these displays can be
locked from view through programming. (See Module 3.)

module in sequence. Note that Modules 5 through 8 are only accessible when
the appropriate plug-in option card is installed. If lost or confused while
programming, press the DSP key to exit programming mode and start over.
When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the meter settings
on the Parameter Value Chart and lock-out parameter programming with a User
Input or lock-out code. (See Modules 2 and 3 for lock-out details.)

PROGRAMMING MODE

FACTORY SETTINGS

Two programming modes are available.
Full Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Upon entering this mode, the front panel keys change to Programming Mode
operations. This mode should not be entered while a process is running, since
the meter timing functions and User Input response may not operate properly
while in Full Programming Mode.
Quick Programming Mode permits only certain parameters to be viewed and/or
modified. When entering this mode, the front panel keys change to
Programming Mode operations, and all meter functions continue to operate
properly. Quick Programming Mode is configured in Module 3. The Display
Intensity Level “
” parameter is only available in the Quick Programming
Mode when the security code is non-zero. For a description, see Module 9—
Factory Service Operations. Throughout this document, Programming Mode
(without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming Mode.

Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 9. This is a good
starting point if encountering programming problems. Throughout the module
description sections which follow, the factory setting for each parameter is
shown below the parameter display. In addition, all factory settings are listed on
the Parameter Value Chart following the programming section.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the module description sections which follow, the dual display with arrows
appears for each programming parameter. This is used to illustrate the display
alternating between the parameter (top display) and the parameter’s Factory
Setting (bottom display). In most cases, selections or value ranges for the
parameter will be listed on the right.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

PROGRAMMING TIPS

The Programming Menu is organized into nine modules. (See above.) These
modules group together parameters that are related in function. It is
recommended to begin programming with Module 1 and proceed through each

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

STEP BY STEP PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS:
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)

NUMERICAL VALUE ENTRY (ARROW, RST & PAR KEYS)

The Programming Mode is entered by pressing the PAR key. If this mode is
not accessible, then meter programming is locked by either a security code or a
hardware lock. (See Modules 2 and 3 for programming lock-out details.)

For parameters which require a numerical value entry, the arrow keys can be
used to increment or decrement the display to the desired value. When an arrow
key is pressed and held, the display automatically scrolls up or scrolls down.
The longer the key is held, the faster the display scrolls.
In addition, the RST key can be used in combination with the arrow keys to
enter numerical values. The RST key is pressed to select a specific digit to be
changed, which blinks when selected. Once a digit is selected, the arrow keys
are used to increment or decrement that digit to the desired number. The RST
key is then pressed again to select the next digit to be changed. This “select and
set” sequence is repeated until each digit is displaying the proper number.
Pressing the PAR key stores and activates the displayed value, and also
advances the meter to the next parameter.

MODULE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
Upon entering the Programming Mode, the display alternates between
and the present module (initially ). The arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used
to select the desired module, which is then entered by pressing the PAR key.

PARAMETER (MODULE) MENU (PAR KEY)
Each module has a separate parameter menu. These menus are shown at the
start of each module description section which follows. The PAR key is pressed
to advance to a particular parameter to be changed, without changing the
programming of preceding parameters. After completing a module, the display
will return to
. From this point, programming may continue by selecting
and entering additional modules. (See MODULE ENTRY above.)

PARAMETER SELECTION ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
For each parameter, the display alternates between the parameter and the
present selection or value for that parameter. For parameters which have a list of
selections, the arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used to sequence through the list
until the desired selection is displayed. Pressing the PAR key stores and activates
the displayed selection, and also advances the meter to the next parameter.

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (DSP KEY or PAR KEY at

)

1-717-767-6511

277

6.1 MODULE 1 - TIMER INPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 1 is the programming module for the Timer Input Parameters. In the
Display Mode, the TMR annunciator indicates the Timer display is currently
being shown. An EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS feature, which includes
the Timer Start and Timer Stop Values, is explained in Module 2.

TIMER RANGE

Time
Start

ª
RANGE
MAXIMUM
SELECTION DISPLAY

= SEC;

DISPLAY
RESOLUTION

= MIN;

Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input,
with Display Hold

Time
Start

Time Start,
Display Update

INPUT A

Time Start,
Display Update

Display
Update

INPUT A

= DAY)

= HR;

RANGE
SELECTION

Time
Stop

Time Stop,
Display Update

INPUT B

MAXIMUM
DISPLAY
DISPLAY RESOLUTION

INPUT B

* - Timer is reset at Time Start edge.

MINUTES/SECONDS

SECONDS
1 SEC

1 SEC

0.1 SEC

0.01 SEC

0.001 SEC

TIMER INPUT FILTERING

HOURS/MINUTES

MINUTES

1 MIN

0.1 MIN

0.01 MIN

0.001 MIN

ª
Provides a 50 msec debounce for the Timer Inputs (A and B). Select
using relays or switch contacts as a signal source.

when

HOURS/MINUTES/SECONDS

HOURS
1 HR

1 SEC

0.1 HR

0.1 SEC

0.01 HR

TIMING DIRECTION

DAYS/HOURS/MINUTES

0.001 HR

1 MIN

TIMER INPUT OPERATION

Timing direction can be reversed through a User Input. (See Module 2.)

«
ª

TIMER START VALUE

This parameter determines how the Timer Input Signals affect the
“Run/Stop” status of the Timer. The timing diagrams below reflect a Sinking
input setup (active low). A Sourcing input setup (active high) is available
through plug jumper selection (see Section 2.0). In this case, the logic levels of
the timing diagrams would be inverted.
The Timer can also be stopped using a Timer Stop Value or a Setpoint. This
type of Stop condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs, or another start
edge is applied.
For
and
operation, Input B provides a level active Timer
Inhibit function. This function is also available through a User Input (see
Module 2). Timing diagrams are shown below for “
” through “
”
modes. The “
” through “
” modes are identical except the
timer display value is also reset at “Time Start” edges. In the “
” and
“
” modes, the timer display value remains held and only updates when
a Timer Start (Input A) or Timer Stop (Input B) edge occurs.

,
Time
Start

Time Time
Stop Start

Edge Triggered Operation -1 Input
Time
Stop

Time
Start

Time
Stop

Time
Start

TIMER STOP VALUE

«
ª
The Timer stops when this value is reached, regardless of the signal levels on
the Timer Inputs. Selecting
will display the
sub-menu where the Stop
Value can be set or changed. The Stop Value is entered in the same display
format as the Timer Range selected. This Stop condition is cleared when a
Timer Reset occurs. Select
if a Stop Value is not being used.

Level Active (Gated) Operation

Time
Stop

INPUT A

INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)

«
ª

* - Timer is reset at Time Start edge.

278

Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input

23 TIMER RANGE SELECTIONS

(

www.redlion.net

FLASH TIMER ANNUNCIATOR

TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP

«
ª

ª
This parameter allows the Timer annunciator (TMR) to flash when the Timer
is running or stopped/inhibited. Select if a flashing indicator is not desired.

The Timer can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.

TIMER INPUT STATE AT POWER-UP

«
ª
Determines the “Run/Stop” State of the Timer at Power-up. This parameter
does not apply to
timer input operation.
- Timer Stopped at power-up, regardless of prior run/stop state
- Timer assumes the same run/stop state it was in prior to power-down

6.2 MODULE 2 - USER INPUT AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU

D
Module 2 is the programming module for the rear terminal User Inputs and
front panel Function Keys.
Three rear terminal User Inputs are individually programmable to perform
specific meter control functions. While in the Display Mode, the function is
executed when the User Input transitions to the active state. Refer to the User
Input specifications for active state response times. Certain User Input functions
are disabled in “Full” Programming Mode. User Inputs should be programmed
while in the inactive state.
Three front panel Function Keys, F1, F2 and RST, are also individually
programmable to perform specific meter control functions. While in the Display
Mode, the primary function is executed when the key is pressed. Holding the
F1 or F2 Function Keys for three seconds executes a secondary function. It is
possible to program a secondary function without a primary function. The front
panel key functions are disabled in both Programming Modes.
In most cases, if more than one User Input and/or Function Key is
programmed for the same function, the maintained (level active) functions will
be performed while at least one of those User Inputs or Function Keys are
activated. The momentary (edge triggered) functions are performed every time
any of those User Inputs or Function Keys transition to the active state.
Some functions have a sublist of parameters, which appears when PAR is
pressed at the listed function. A sublist provides yes/no selection for Display
Values or Setpoints which pertain to the programmed function. The function
will only be performed on the parameters entered as Z&4 in the sublist. If a User
Input or Function Key is configured for a function with a sublist, then that
sublist will need to be scrolled through each time, in order to access any
parameters for the User Inputs or Function Keys which follow.

NO FUNCTION

«
ª

With this selection, NO function is performed. This is the factory setting for
all user inputs and function keys except the Reset (RST) Key.

PROGRAMMING MODE LOCK-OUT

«
ª
Programming Mode is locked-out, as long as activated (maintained action).
In Module 3, certain parameters can be setup where they are still accessible
during Programming Mode Lock-out. A security code can be configured to
allow complete programming access during User Input lock-out. This parameter
does not apply to the function keys. Program only one user input for this function.

EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS

«
ª

Two lists of parameter entries are available for the Timer/Counter Start and
Stop Values; Setpoint On/Off and Time-Out Values; and Setpoint Daily On/Off
Occurrence (for Real-Time Clock option). The two lists are named
and
. If a User Input is used to select the list, then
is selected when
the User Input is in the inactive state and
is selected when the User
Input is in the active state (maintained action). If a front panel Function Key is
used to select the list, then the list will toggle for each key press (momentary
action). The display will only indicate which list is active when the list is
changed or when entering any Programming Mode.
To program the values for
and
, first complete the
programming of all the parameters. Exit programming and switch to the other
list. Re-enter programming and enter the Timer/Counter Start and Stop Values
(
,
,
,
), and if applicable, the Setpoint On/Off and
Time-Out Values (
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
), and the Setpoint Daily On/Off Occurrence
(
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
). If any
other parameters are changed, the other list values must be reprogrammed.
Program only one user input for this function.
Note: When downloading the Crimson® program containing List A/B, make
sure that both the software and meter have the same list active. The active
list in the Crimson® program is the one being displayed in Input Setup
and/or Setpoint Alarms category.

1-717-767-6511

279

DISPLAY SELECT (Level Active)

DISPLAY HOLD (Level Active)

When active (maintained action), the meter continuously scrolls through all
displays that are not “locked-out” in the Display mode. (See Module 3 for
Display Lock-out details.) A sub-menu provides Scrolling Speed selection.

When active (maintained action), the meter “freezes” the display values
entered as
in the sublist, while normal meter operation continues internally.
Program only one user input for this function.

ª
DISPLAY

t-dsp
C-dsp
rtC-d
rtC-t

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter
RTC Date
RTC Time

NO
NO
NO
NO

DISPLAY SELECT (Edge Triggered)

DISPLAY HOLD and RESET (Level Active Reset)

ª
When activated (momentary action), the meter advances to the next display
that is not “locked-out” in the Display mode. (See Module 3 for Display Lockout details.)

«
ª

When activated, the meter “freezes” the display values entered as
in the
sublist, before performing an internal Maintained Reset on the selected
displays. This function does not apply to the RTC Time or Date displays.

DISPLAY RESET (Level Active)

DISPLAY

t-dSp
C-dSP

When active (maintained action), the meter continually resets only the
currently shown display. If the RTC Time or Date is displayed, this function
applies to the Outputs assigned to the RTC, and does not Reset the actual RTC
Time or Date display. (See Module 6 for details on Output Assignment and
Output Reset with Display Reset.)

DISPLAY RESET (Edge Triggered)

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter

NO
NO

DISPLAY HOLD and RESET (Edge Triggered Reset)

When activated, the meter “freezes” the display values entered as
in the
sublist, before performing an internal Momentary Reset on the selected
displays. This function does not apply to the RTC Time or Date displays.
Program only one user input for this function.
DISPLAY

t-dSp
C-dSP

When activated (momentary action), the meter resets only the currently
shown display. This is the factory setting for the Reset (RST) key. If the RTC
Time or Date is displayed, this function applies to the Outputs assigned to the
RTC, and does not Reset the actual RTC Time or Date display. (See Module 6
for details on Output Assignment and Output Reset with Display Reset.)

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter

NO
NO

INHIBIT (Level Active)

«
MAINTAINED RESET (Level Active)

«
ª

When active (maintained action), the meter continually resets the displays
entered as
in the sublist. The sublist appears when the PAR key is pressed.
This function does not apply to the RTC Time or Date displays.
DISPLAY

t-dSp
C-dSP

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter

NO
NO

When active (maintained action), timing and counting ceases for the displays
entered as
in the sublist. The inhibit function is not a
or
event in Setpoint programming. This function does not apply to RTC Time or
Date displays. Program only one user input for this function.
DISPLAY

t-dSp
C-dSP

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter

NO
NO

CHANGE DIRECTION (Level Active)

When activated (momentary action), the meter resets the displays entered as
in the sublist. Function does not apply to RTC Time or Date displays.
DISPLAY

t-dSp
C-dSP
280

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter

NO
NO

MOMENTARY RESET (Edge Triggered)

When active (maintained action), the timing or counting direction for the
display entered as
in the sublist, will be reversed from the direction set by
the Timing Direction (
) and/or Counting Direction (
) parameters in
Modules 1 and 4. (Program only one User Input per display for this function.)
This function does not apply to RTC Time or Date displays.
DISPLAY

t-dSp
C-dSP
www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter

NO
NO

CHANGE DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

OUTPUT SET (Level Active)

«
ª

When activated (momentary action), the display intensity changes to the next
intensity level (of 4). The four levels correspond to Display Intensity Level
(
) settings of 0, 3, 8 & 15. The intensity level, when changed via the User
Input/Function Key, is not retained at power-down, unless Quick Programming
or Full Programming mode is entered and exited. The unit will power-up at the
last saved intensity level.

When activated (maintained action), the meter continually activates the
output for all Setpoints entered as
in the sublist.
DISPLAY

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

1
2
3
4

FACTORY

NO
NO
NO
NO

Note: The next two parameters only appear when an RS232 or RS485 Serial
Communications Card is installed in the meter.

OUTPUT SET (Edge Triggered)

PRINT REQUEST

ª
DISPLAY

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

PRINT REQUEST and RESET (Edge Triggered)

When activated (momentary action), the meter first issues a block print
through the serial port, and then performs a Momentary Reset on the displays
entered as
in the sublist. The specific values transmitted in the print block
are selected with the Print Options parameter in Module 7. Only one transmit
and reset occurs per User Input activation or Function Key press.
DISPLAY

t-dSp
C-dSP

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY

Timer
Cycle Counter

NO
NO

«
ª

DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

1
2
3
4

FACTORY

NO
NO
NO
NO

When activated (maintained action), the meter continually deactivates the
output for all Setpoints entered as
in the sublist.
DISPLAY

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

1
2
3
4

FACTORY

NO
NO
NO
NO

OUTPUT RESET (Edge Triggered)

When activated (momentary action), the meter deactivates the output for all
Setpoints entered as
in the sublist.

When active (maintained action), the meter “holds” (maintains) the present
output state for all Setpoints entered as
in the sublist. Does not apply to
Output Set and Reset User Inputs. Program only one user input for this function.

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

1
2
3
4

Note: The remaining parameters only appear when a Setpoint Card is
installed in the meter.

OUTPUT HOLD (Level Active)

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

OUTPUT RESET (Level Active)

When activated (momentary action), the meter activates the output for all
Setpoints entered as
in the sublist.

When activated, the meter issues a block print through the serial port. The
specific values transmitted during a print request are selected with the Print
Options parameter in Module 7. For User Inputs (level active), the meter
transmits blocks repeatedly as long as the input is active. For Function Keys,
(edge triggered) only one block is transmitted per key press.

FACTORY

DISPLAY

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4

DESCRIPTION

Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint

1
2
3
4

FACTORY

NO
NO
NO
NO

1-717-767-6511

281

6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND PROGRAM
PARAMETERS

LOCK-OUT
(
)

PARAMETER MENU

** These parameters only appear if a Setpoint option card is installed.

= Setpoint Number 1 thru 4

Module 3 is the programming module for setting the Display Lock-out
Parameters and the “Quick Programming Mode” Value Access Parameters. In the
Quick Programming mode, after the PROGRAM LOCKOUT PARAMETERS
and before the Security Code (
), a Display Intensity Level (
)
parameter is available when the security code is non-zero. It allows the display
intensity to be set to 1 of 16 levels (0-15).

TIMER & CYCLE COUNTER START/STOP VALUE ACCESS

«
ª

Timer & Counter Start/Stop Values can be programmed for

, or

DISPLAY LOCK-OUT PARAMETERS

When operating in the Display Mode, the meter displays can be viewed
consecutively by repeatedly pressing the DSP key. The annunciators to the left
of the display indicate which display is currently shown. Timer (TMR), Cycle
Counter (CNT), or Date (DAT). The Time Display for the Real-Time Clock is
shown with no annunciator. Any of these displays can be locked from view with
the DISPLAY LOCK-OUT parameters. Using these parameters, each display
can be programmed for “Read” or “Lock” defined as follows:
SELECTION

DISPLAY

PAXCK: REAL-TIME CLOCK TIME SETTING ACCESS

«
ª
This parameter can be programmed for
or
. Selecting
setting or changing the RTC Time in Quick Programming mode.

DESCRIPTION

Read

Visible in Display Mode

Lock

Not visible in Display Mode

TIMER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
PAXCK: REAL-TIME CLOCK DATE/TIME DISPLAY LOCK-OUT

«
ª

These displays can be programmed for
or
. When a particular meter
function is not used, the Display Lock-out should be set to
for that display.

PROGRAM LOCK-OUT PARAMETERS (VALUE ACCESS)
“Full” Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. This programming mode can be locked with a Security Code and/or
a User Input. When locked, and the PAR key is pressed, the meter enters a
Quick Programming Mode. In this mode, access to Setpoint Values, Timer &
Cycle Counter Start/Stop Values, and Time Setting for the Real-Time Clock can
be programmed for “Read”, “Enter”, or “Lock” defined as follows:
SELECTION

DISPLAY

Visible, not changeable, in Quick Programming Mode

Enter

Visible and changeable in Quick Programming Mode

Lock

Not visible in Quick Programming Mode

SETPOINT 1 to 4 VALUE ACCESS ** ( = 1 thru 4)

«
ª

,
, or
.
Setpoint Values for SP1 thru SP4 can be programmed for
and
are only displayed when they apply to the Setpoint Action
(
) programmed for that particular Setpoint. (See Module 6 for details.)

282

SECURITY CODE

Entry of a non-zero value will cause the
prompt to appear when trying
to access the “Full” Programming Mode. Access will only be allowed after
entering a matching security code or the universal unlock code of
. With this
lock-out, a User Input would not have to be used for the Program Lock-out
function. Note however, the Security Code lock-out is overridden when an User
Input, configured for Program Lock-out (
), is not active (See Chart.)

PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS
SECURITY USER INPUT USER INPUT MODE WHEN “PAR”
CODE
SELECTION
STATE
KEY IS PRESSED

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

not

————

not 0

not

After Quick Programming
———— Quick Programming with correct Security
code entry

DESCRIPTION

Read

allows

not 0

Active

not 0

Not Active

Active

Not Active

Full Programming Immediate access

After Quick Programming
Quick Programming with correct Security
code entry
Full Programming Immediate access
Quick Programming No access
Full Programming Immediate access

Throughout this bulletin, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always
refers to “Full” Programming.

www.redlion.net

6.4 MODULE 4 - CYCLE COUNTER PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 4 is the programming module for the Cycle Counter Parameters. In the
Display Mode, the CNT annunciator indicates the Cycle Counter display is
currently being shown. An EXCHANGE PARAMETER LISTS feature, which
includes the Cycle Counter Start and Stop Values, is explained in Module 2.

CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE

CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE

«
ª

999

The Cycle Counter returns to this value whenever a Cycle Counter Reset
occurs. Non-zero values are normally used for “down counting” applications,
but they can also provide an “offset” value when counting up.

«
ª
This parameter selects the source from which a count is added to or
subtracted from the Cycle Counter. Select
if the Cycle Counter is not
being used, which will exit the module and bypass the remaining parameters.
When
is selected, a count is generated each time the User 1 Input is
activated. When selected as the count source, User Input 1 can still be
programmed to perform a User Function described in Module 2, if desired. In
this case, the Cycle Counter would be counting the number of times the
particular User Function occurred.
The Timer Reset (
) selection generates a count when either a manual
or automatic reset occurs. (See Module 6 for programming Automatic Resets.)
The Output ON/OFF selections generate a count when the chosen output
either activates or deactivates. These selections only appear when a Setpoint
Card is installed. O3 and O4 selections only appear for Quad Setpoint cards.

CYCLE COUNTER STOP VALUE

«
ª
The Cycle Counter stops counting when this value is reached, regardless of
the operation of the Timer. Selecting
will display the
sub-menu where
the Stop Value can be set or changed. The Stop condition is cleared when a
Cycle Counter Reset occurs. Select if a Stop Value is not used.

CYCLE COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP

CYCLE COUNTER COUNTING DIRECTION

«
ª

ª
Counting direction can be reversed through a User Input. (See Module 2.)

The Cycle Counter can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.

6.5 MODULE 5 - TIMER OPERATING MODES (

)

This module can only be accessed if a Setpoint Card is installed.

PARAMETER MENU

* Only the value parameters which apply to the selected mode will appear.

PREDEFINED TIMER OPERATING MODE

« ON-dLY
OF-dLY
rEPEAt
dLYINt
INt-L
INt-E

- On-Delay Timing
- Off-Delay Timing
- Repeat Cycle Timing
- On-Delay/Interval Timing
- Interval Timing (Level Triggered)
- Interval Timing (Edge Triggered)

This parameter is used to select Predefined Operating Modes for the Timer.
These modes cover a variety of timing applications frequently encountered in
industrial control processes. When using a Predefined mode, the operator needs
only to set the actual Setpoint On/Off or Time-out values for the particular
application. However, each programming parameter will still be accessible, in
order to make modifications to the predefined settings if desired.

The Predefined modes control the activation and deactivation of Output 1, in
relation to Start and Reset signals applied to the Timer inputs. (See timing
diagrams which follow.) When a selection other than
is chosen, the
parameters for Setpoint 1 (
) in Module 6 are automatically configured to
implement the selected operating mode. For some modes, parameters in
Modules 1 and 2 are also automatically configured to properly implement the
predefined mode. Refer to the chart shown with the timing diagrams for the
specific parameters loaded for each predefined mode. Also, note the specific
external wiring or plug jumper settings required for some modes.
The Setpoint On/Off or Time-out values for the specific application should
be entered directly in Module 5 after selecting the operating mode. Only the
value parameters which apply to the selected mode are displayed. These values
can also be entered through Module 6, Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters, if desired.
Select
if not using a Predefined Operating Mode, in which case Setpoint
parameters must all be individually programmed for the particular application.

1-717-767-6511

283

Timing Diagrams for Predefined Timer Operating Modes
NOTE: Input A is shown as a Sourcing input (active high). If a Sinking input (active low) is used, the logic levels for Input A would be inverted.
On-Delay / Interval Timing

On-Delay Timing

Input A

Output 1

Off-Delay Timing

Interval Timing (Level triggered)

Input A

Input A
T

Output 1

The input signal must be wired to both the Input A and
User Input 1 terminals. The Timer Input plug jumper and
the User Input plug jumper must both be set to the
same position (either both SNK or both SRC).

The input signal must be wired to both the Input A and
User Input 1 terminals. The Timer Input plug jumper and
the User Input plug jumper must be set to opposite
positions (one SNK, one SRC) and the Input signal must
be a current sinking type (i.e. pulls input to common).

Repeat Cycle Timing

Interval Timing (Edge triggered)

Input A

Output 1

Input A
T1

Output 1

Parameter Settings for Predefined Timer Operating Modes
MODULE 1 - Timer Input Parameters (
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

INP OP

Timer Input Operation

)

ON-dLY

OF-dLY

rEPEAt

dLYINt

INt-L

INt-E

EdrS-2

LEVrSt

EdrS-2

MODULE 2 - User Input Parameters (

)

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

ON-dLY

OF-dLY

rEPEAt

dLYINt

INt-L

INt-E

USEr-1
rSt

User Input 1

N/A

OrSt-E
(SP1-YES)
NO

N/A

Reset Key

rSt-L
NO

)

MODULE 6 - Setpoint Parameters (
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

ON-dLY

OF-dLY

rEPEAt

dLYINt

INt-L

INt-E

SPSEL
ASN-1
ACt-1
OUt-1
ON-1
SP-1
OFf-1
SPOf-1
tOUt-1
tstP-1
AUtO-1
OrSd-1
Lit-1
P-UP-1

Setpoint Select

SP-1
t-dSP
LAtCH
NOr
VALUE

SP-1
t-dSP
ON-OFF
NOr
t-Strt

SP-1
t-dSP
ON-OFF
NOr
VALUE

SP-1
t-dSP
t-OUt
NOr
VALUE

SP-1
t-dSP
ON-OFF
NOr
t-Strt

SP-1
t-dSP
t-OUt
NOr
t-Strt

Setpoint Assignment
Setpoint Action
Output Logic
Setpoint On
Setpoint On Value

N/A

T1*

N/A

Setpoint Off

N/A

VALUE

N/A

VALUE

N/A

Setpoint Off Value

N/A

T2*

N/A

Time-out Value

N/A

T2*

N/A

Timer Stop

NO
NO
NO
NOr
OFF

0-OFF
NO
NO
NOr
OFF

NO
0-OFF
NO
NOr
OFF

0-OFF
NO
NO
NOr
OFF

Timer/Counter Auto Reset
Output Reset w/display Reset
Setpoint Annunciator
Power-up State

* Refer to timing diagrams. These parameters are the actual Setpoint On/Off or Time-Out values set by the user for the specific application.

284

www.redlion.net

6.6 MODULE 6 - SETPOINT (ALARM) PARAMETERS (

)

This module can only be accessed if a Setpoint Card is installed.

PARAMETER MENU

= Setpoint Number 1 thru 4

Module 6 is the programming module for the Setpoint (Alarm) Output
Parameters. This programming module can only be accessed if a Setpoint card
is installed. Depending on the card installed, there will be two or four Setpoint
outputs available. The Setpoint Assignment and Setpoint Action parameters
determine the applicable Setpoint features, and dictate which subsequent
parameters will appear for the Setpoint being programmed.
This section of the bulletin replaces the bulletin shipped with the Dual and
Quad Setpoint plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using Setpoint
plug-in cards with the PAXCK and PAXTM.

OUTPUT LOGIC

«
ª

Normal Output Logic ( ) turns the output “on” when activated and “off”
when deactivated. Reverse Output Logic ( ) turns the output “off” when
activated and “on” when deactivated.

SETPOINT ON

«
ª

SETPOINT SELECT

«
ª
Select the Setpoint (alarm) output to be programmed. This provides access to
the parameters for that particular Setpoint. The “ ” in the following parameter
displays, reflects the chosen Setpoint number (1 thru 4). After the chosen
Setpoint is programmed, the display returns to
. Select the next
Setpoint to be programmed and continue this sequence for each Setpoint. Select
to exit the module.
and
apply to Quad Setpoint cards only.

SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

«
ª
Select the meter display to which the Setpoint is assigned: Timer (
),
Cycle Counter (
), Real-Time Clock Date display (
) or Real-Time
Clock Time display (
). (The
and
selections only appear if a
Real-Time Clock option card is installed.)
By selecting
, the Setpoint is not assigned to a specific display.
However, the output can still be activated (set) and deactivated (reset) by
various “events”. Such events include the Timer starting or stopping, or another
Setpoint output turning On or Off. The output can also be set and reset through
a User Input function or through serial communications.

SETPOINT ACTION

«
ª
This parameter determines the mode for output deactivation as shown below.
Output activation is controlled by the SETPOINT ON parameter setting.
DISPLAY

LAtCH
t-OUt
ON-OFF
The
to

and

DESCRIPTION

Latched Output Mode
Timed Output Mode
On-Off Output Mode

OUTPUT DEACTIVATES

At Reset (Manual or Automatic)
After “Time-Out Value” Elapses
Based on “Setpoint Off” Setting

This parameter determines when the Setpoint output will activate. Output
activation can occur at a specific Setpoint Value (
) or can be triggered by
various “events”, as shown in the parameter list. Such events include the Timer
starting (
) or stopping (
), or by the action (event) that causes
another Setpoint output to turn On or Off. When programmed for an event, the
Setpoint must not be used as the Setpoint On event for another Setpoint.
Selecting
displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint value is entered. The
Setpoint value is based on the meter display to which the Setpoint is assigned
(
). When assigned to the Timer or Cycle Counter, the Setpoint value is
entered in the same format as the assigned display. When assigned to the RealTime Clock Date Display (
), the date value is entered in month.day.year
format (
). When assigned to the Real-Time Clock Time Display (
),
the Setpoint value is always entered in
format (Hours-Minutes with
AM/PM selection). In Setpoint One-shot mode (See Daily On Occurrence), the
One-shot Setpoint is enabled (armed) by scrolling the AM/PM digit until the 2nd
digit decimal point is lit.

«
ª

to
SETPOINT OFF

«
ª
The Setpoint Off parameter only appears when the Setpoint Action (
)
is programmed for On-Off Output mode (
). In this mode, this parameter
determines when the Setpoint output will deactivate. Output deactivation can
occur at a specific Setpoint Off Value (
) or can be triggered by various
“events”, as shown in the parameter list. Such events include the Timer starting
) or stopping (
), or by the action (event) that causes another
(
Setpoint output to turn On or Off. When programmed for an event, the Setpoint
must not be used as the Setpoint Off event for another Setpoint.
Selecting
will display a sub-menu where the Setpoint Off value is
entered. The Setpoint Off value is based on the meter display to which the
Setpoint is assigned (
). When assigned to the Timer or Cycle Counter, the
value is entered in the same format as the assigned display. When assigned to
the Real-Time Clock Date Display (
), the date value is entered in
month.day.year format (
). When assigned to the Real-Time Clock Time
Display (
), the value is always entered in
format (Hours-Minutes
with AM/PM selection).

selections are not available when Setpoint is assigned

ª
1-717-767-6511

to
285

TIME-OUT VALUE

TIMER STOP

The Time-Out Value only appears when the Setpoint Action (
) is
programmed for Timed Output mode (
). In this mode, the Time-Out Value
is the Setpoint Output time duration, from activation to deactivation. This value
is always entered in minutes, seconds, and hundredths of seconds format. The
maximum Time-Out Value is 99 minutes 59.99 seconds.

Timer stops when the Setpoint output activates (
) or deactivates (
Select
if the output should not affect the Timer Run/Stop status.
Stopping the Timer as a result of this parameter does not constitute a
condition (event) for the Setpoint On or Setpoint Off parameters.

TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET

PAXCK: DAILY ON OCCURRENCE

ª
) to the
This parameter only appears when the Setpoint is assigned (
Real-Time Clock Time display (
). This parameter determines the days of
the week when the Setpoint output will activate.
Selecting
displays a sublist for choosing the days of the week. On all
days entered as
in the sublist, the output will activate. On all days entered
as , the output will not activate. The output activation is repetitive, and will
occur every week on the chosen day(s).
DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

When the Setpoint output activates (
) or deactivates (
), the meter
automatically resets the Setpoint Assignment display (
). Select
if the
Setpoint output should not cause the assigned display to reset. Does not apply
to manual activations or deactivations by user input, function key, or serial
communications.

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

FACTORY

Sunday
Monday

Tuesday

When
is selected, the Setpoint output will reset when the Setpoint
Assignment display (
) resets. Select
if the Setpoint output should not
reset when the assigned display resets.

Wednesday
Thursday
Friday

Saturday

Setpoint One-Shot Mode
If all days are set to , the Setpoint will operate in “One-shot” mode. When
a One-shot setpoint is enabled (armed), the setpoint output will activate at the
set time and disable itself from activating again. To enable or re-enable a oneshot alarm, go to the Setpoint value entry display and press the Up or Dn key
repeatedly while the AM/PM digit is selected (flashing). When the 2nd digit
decimal point is lit, the Setpoint is enabled. The Setpoint enable status is saved
at power-down. The enable state of the Setpoint is not affected or changed when
the Parameter List is exchanged.
The setpoint will turn off (de-activate) as programmed per the Setpoint
Action selected. If
mode is selected, program all the Daily Off days to
to have the Setpoint turn off at the next Daily Off Occurrence. The Oneshot status can also be viewed or set from the Setpoint Off value entry display.

SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR

«
ª
This parameter controls the illumination of the LED annunciator for the
corresponding Setpoint output ( ) as follows:

Normal (
Reverse (
Flash (
Off (
)

)

– Annunciator displayed when output is “on” (activated)
) – Annunciator displayed when output is “off” (deactivated)
) – Annunciator and display flashes when output is “on” (activated)
– Annunciator disabled

PAXCK: DAILY OFF OCCURRENCE

SETPOINT POWER-UP STATE

ª
This parameter only appears when the Setpoint is assigned (
) to the
Real-Time Clock Time display (
) and when the Setpoint Action (
)
is programmed for On-Off Output mode (
). In this mode, this parameter
determines the days of the week when the Setpoint output will deactivate.
Selecting
displays a sublist for choosing the days of the week. On all
days entered as
in the sublist, the output will deactivate. On all days entered
as , the output will not deactivate. The output deactivation is repetitive, and
will occur every week on the chosen day(s).
DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

ª
Determines the on/off state of the Setpoint output at power-up. Regardless of
output logic setting (normal or reverse).

FACTORY

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday

286

www.redlion.net

– Deactivates the Setpoint output at power-up
– Activates the Setpoint output at power-up
– Restores the output to the state it was in prior to power-down

6.7 MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (

)

This module can only be accessed if a Serial Communications Card is installed.

PARAMETER MENU

* Only appears if the Real-Time Clock Card is installed.

Module 7 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the PAX
with those of the host computer or other serial device, such as a terminal or
printer. This programming module can only be accessed if an RS232 or RS485
Serial Communications card is installed.
This section also includes an explanation of the commands and formatting
required for communicating with the PAX. In order to establish serial
communications, the user must have host software that can send and receive
ASCII characters. Red Lion’s Crimson® software can be used for configuring
the PAX. (See ordering information.) For serial hardware and wiring details,
refer to section 4.5 Serial Communication Wiring.
This section of the PAXTM/CK bulletin replaces the bulletin shipped with the
RS232 and RS485 serial communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate
bulletin when using those serial plug-in cards with the PAXTM/CK. Also, this
section does NOT apply to the DeviceNet, Modbus, or Profibus-DP
communication cards. For details on the operation of the Fieldbus cards, refer
to the bulletin shipped with each card.

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

«
ª
This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value (T) command or a Block Print Request (P)
command. Select
for a Full print transmission, which consists of the meter
address, mnemonics, and parameter data. Select
for abbreviated print
transmissions, consisting of the parameter data only. This setting affects all the
parameters selected in the PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 00,
the address will not be sent during a Full transmission.)

PAXCK: REAL-TIME CLOCK PRINT FORMATTING

«
ª

BAUD RATE

«
ª
Set the baud rate to match the other serial communications equipment on the
serial link. Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value at which all the
serial equipment are capable of transmitting and receiving data.

DATA BITS

This parameter determines the formatting of the Real-Time Clock (RTC)
values transmitted from the meter in response to a Transmit Value (T) command
or a Block Print Request (P) command. This parameter appears only when a
Real-Time Clock plug-in option card is installed.
When
is selected, RTC values are formatted as per the RTC Time and
Date Display Formats programmed in Module 8. The Day of Week value is sent
as a character string.
When
is selected, the meter sends the RTC values as numeric data only.
This selection allows the RTC values to be recognized by the Red Lion HMI
products. RTC Time/Date units are separated by a “.”. The Day is sent as a
single number as shown below.
TIME - Hours (24-Hr. format), Minutes, Seconds (HHMMSS)
DATE - Month, Day, Year (mmddyy)
DAY - 1 = Sunday thru 7 = Saturday

ª
Select either 7- or 8-bit data word lengths. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

PRINT OPTIONS

PARITY BIT

«
ª
This parameter only appears when the Data Bits parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial
communications equipment on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when
receiving data and sets the parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to , an
additional stop bit is used to force the frame size to 10 bits.

METER ADDRESS

«
ª

Enter the serial meter (node) address. With a single meter, an address is not
needed and a value of zero can be used. With multiple meters (RS485
applications), a unique 2 digit address number must be assigned to each meter.
Addresses 98 and 99 are reserved to configure a unit as a serial real-time
clock master. See Serial Real-time Clock Master Adressing.

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A Print Request is sometimes referred to as a block print because more
than one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting
displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the block print. All parameters entered as
in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as
will not be sent.
DISPLAY

t-dsp
C-dSP
rtC-d
rtC-t
SPNt
SpNtOF
StrStp

PARAMETER

Timer
Cycle Counter
RTC Date*
RTC Time*
Setpoint Values*
Setpoint Off/Time-Out Values*
Timer/Cnt Start & Stop Values

FACTORY

yES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

MNEMONIC

TMR
CNT
DAT
TIM
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4
TST TSP CST CSP

* These values are plug-in card dependent.

1-717-767-6511

287

SERIAL RTC MASTER ADDRESSING

A meter, having software code version 2.3 or greater, with a Real Time Clock
Card and an RS485 Serial Communication Card installed, can act as a Serial
RTC Master, when programmed with meter address 98 or 99. With this feature,
whenever the Master meter's time, date or day is changed, through quick or
main programming, it will transmit and make the same change to the other
PAXCK's on the RS485 bus. Only one meter should be configured as Master.
This Master, with address 98 or 99, should also be programmed as the “Host”
in module SUD under Clock Synchronization. With it programmed as Host,
the other PAXCK Slaves will update hours, minutes and seconds to the Host
once an hour and the Real-Time Clock Wiring (terminals 16-18) will not be
necessary.
Meter addresses 98 and 99 are distinguished as follows:With address 98, the
meter will transmit the change to all meters on the RS485 bus addressed as “0”.
This is useful when using both newer or older software code version meters, or
when another master (computer, operator interface) is not being used.
With address 99, the meter will transmit the change to all, software code
version 2.3 or greater, meters on the RS485 bus using a global broadcast address
suffix. This is useful when it is necessary to have unique or other than 0 serial
meter addresses or when having a computer or operator interface connected.

SENDING SERIAL COMMANDS AND DATA

Command Chart
COMMAND DESCRIPTION

NOTES

Node (Meter) Address Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
Specifier
node address. Not required when address = 00.

Transmit Value (read)

Read a register from the meter. Must be
followed by register ID character.

Value change (write)

Write to register of the meter. Must be followed
by register ID character and numeric data.

Reset

Block Print Request
(read)

Reset a register or output. Must be followed
by register ID character
Initiates a block print output. Registers are
defined in programming.

Command String Construction
The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to invalid commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
1. The first characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed by a
1 or 2 character address number. The address number of the meter is
programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node address
itself may be omitted. The address suffix , “?” is the global broadcast address
specifier. A command string that is sent with N? prefix will be accepted by
all PAXCKs on the RS485 network (software code version 2.3 or greater).
This is useful for setting all meters to the current time, date or day that may
have unique meter addresses on a bus. It is important not to send (P)rint or
(T)ransmit commands using N? prefix, as it will result in multiple meters
responding at the same time. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the Register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a Register ID character.
It prints according to the selections made in print the options. If constructing
a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is sent next.
4. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See Timing Diagram figure for differences
between terminating characters.
Note: On a change value command (V), if the command string is terminated
with the * character, all values are stored in E2PROM memory. Values are
not stored if the $ terminator is used.

288

VALUE DESCRIPTION

Timer Value

TMR

T, V, R

6 digit

Cycle Counter Value

CNT

T, V, R

6 digit

RTC Time Value

TIM

T, V

6 digit

RTC Date Value

DAT

T, V

6 digit

Setpoint 1

SP1

T, V, R

6 digit

Setpoint 2

SP2

T, V, R

6 digit

Setpoint 3

SP3

T, V, R

6 digit

Setpoint 4

SP4

T, V, R

6 digit

Setpoint 1 Off Value

SO1

T, V

6 digit

Setpoint 2 Off Value

SO2

T, V

5 digit

Setpoint 3 Off Value

SO3

T, V

6 digit

Setpoint 4 Off Value

SO4

T, V

6 digit

Timer Start Value

TST

T, V

6 digit

Cycle Counter Start Value

CST

T, V

6 digit

Timer Stop Value

TSP

T, V

6 digit

Cycle Counter Stop Value

CSP

T, V

6 digit

Auto/Man Register

MMR

T, V

0 - auto, 1 - manual

Day of Week Value

DAY

T, V

1 = Sun....7 = Sat

Setpoint Register

SOR

T, V

0 - not active, 1 - active

Command String Examples:
1. Address = 17, Write 350 to Setpoint 1
String: N17VE350$
2. Address = 5, Cycle Counter value, response time of 50 to 100 msec. min.
String: N05TB*
3. Address = 0, Reset Timer value
String: RA*

Transmitting Data To the Meter
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to Transmit Details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. The meter ignores any
decimal point and conforms the number to the scaled resolution. (ie. The meter’s
scaled decimal point position is set for 0.0 and 25 is written to a register. The value
of the register is now 2.5. In this case, write a value of 250 to equal 25.0).
For RTC Time [C] and Date [D] Value:
Time - 24 Hours, Minutes, Seconds (HHMMSS)
Ex: 083000 = 8:30 AM, 144500 = 2:45 PM
Date - Month, Day, Year (mmddyy)
Ex: 123101 = December 31, 2001
Day - 1 = Sunday through 7 = Saturday
EX: 3 = Tuesday
Notes:
1. Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.
2. The date and day must be set separately.

www.redlion.net

Full Transmission (

)

Meter Response Examples:

BYTE

DESCRIPTION

1, 2
3
4-6
7-18
19
20
21
22
23

2 byte Node (Meter) Address field [00-99]
(Space)
3 byte Register Mnemonic field
12 byte numeric data field: 6 bytes for number, up to 3 for decimal points.
(Carriage return)
(Line feed)

(Space)3
(Carriage return)3
(Line feed)3

These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.

The first two characters transmitted are the unit address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the unit address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field is 12 characters long
(decimal points are loaded depending on timer range selected). The data is rightaligned with leading spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with and . When a
block print is finished, an extra , , and are used to provide
separation between the transmissions.

Abbreviated Transmission (

1. Address = 17, full field response, Cycle Counter = 875
17 CNT
875
2. Address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 2 = 250.5
SP2
250.5
3. Address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block print
250

Auto/Manual Mode Register (MMR) ID: U
This register sets the controlling mode for the outputs. In Auto Mode (0) the
meter controls the setpoint output. In Manual Mode (1) the outputs are defined
by the registers SOR. When transferring from auto mode to manual mode, the
meter holds the last output value (until the register is changed by a write). Each
output may be independently changed to auto or manual. In a write command
string (VU), any character besides 0 or 1 in a field will not change the
corresponding output mode.
U abcd
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1
Example: VU0011 places SP3 and SP4 in manual.

)

Setpoint Output Register (SOR) ID: X

BYTE

DESCRIPTION

1-12
13
14
15
16
17

12 byte data field, 6 bytes for number, up to 3 bytes for decimal points.
(Carriage return)
(Line feed)
(Space)3
(Carriage return)3
(Line feed)3

This register is used to view or change the states of the setpoint outputs.
Reading from this register (TX) will show the present state of all the setpoint
outputs. A “0” in the setpoint location means the output is inactive and a “1”
means the output is active. The output logic parameter in Module 6 will affect
the active logic state.
X abcd

These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the address and register mnemonics,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.
Note: Transmissions are formatted to match the way the parameter is displayed.
This includes setpoints.
Example: SP1 assigned to RTC. RTC format = 12:00 P.
SP1 printout = 12:00 P.
Note: When communicating with a Red Lion Controls HMI unit, set
in
programming module 7 (serial) to . This formats the RTC parameters to:
Time - 24 Hours, Minutes, Seconds
Date - Month, Day, Year
Day - 1 = Sunday through 7 = Saturday
Decimal points are substituted for all punctuation.

COMMAND RESPONSE TIME

SERIAL TIMING

The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). During RS232 transmissions, the meter ignores commands while
transmitting data, but instead uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending
commands and data to the meter, a delay must be imposed before sending
another command. This allows enough time for the meter to process the
command and prepare for the next command.
Refer to the Timing Diagrams below. At the start of the time interval t1, the
computer program prints or writes the string to the com port, thus initiating a
transmission. During t1, the command characters are under transmission and at
the end of this period, the command terminating character (*, $) is received by
the meter. The time duration of t1 is dependent on the number of characters and
baud rate of the channel.
t1 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies. If no response from the meter is expected, the meter is ready
to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The '*' terminating character results in a
response time window of 50 msec. minimum and 100 msec. maximum. This
allows sufficient time for the release of the sending driver on the RS485 bus.
Terminating the command line with '$' results in a response time window (t2) of
2 msec. minimum and 50 msec. maximum. The faster response time of this
terminating character requires that sending drivers release within 2 msec. after
the terminating character is received.
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. At the end of t3, the meter is
ready to receive the next command.
t3 = (10 times the # of characters) / baud rate

d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1

Example: VX10* will result in output 1 active and output 2 inactive.

COMMENT

PROCESS TIME (t2)

R
V
T

Reset
Write
Transmit

2-50 msec.
100-200 msec.
2-50 msec. for $
50-100 msec. for *
2-50 msec. for $
50-100 msec. for *

COMMAND

1-717-767-6511

Timing Diagrams
NO REPLY FROM METER

RESPONSE FROM METER

289

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -25 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +25 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters. Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit, an
optional parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data format and baud
rate must match that of other equipment in order for communication to take
place. The figures list the data formats employed by the meter.

Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The PAX meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Character Frame Figure

6.8 MODULE 8 - REAL-TIME CLOCK PARAMETERS (

) - PAXCK

PARAMETER MENU

Module 8 is the programming module for the Real-Time Clock (RTC) Date
and Time Parameters. In the Display Mode, the DAT annunciator indicates the
RTC Date is currently being shown. The RTC Time display is shown with no
annunciator. This programming module can only be accessed if a Real-Time
Clock card is installed.

SET DATE

«
ª
This parameter sets the Date for the Real-Time Clock. Selecting
will
display the sub-menu where the Date can be set or changed. The RTC Date is
entered in “Month.Day.Year” format (two-digit values). When the PAR key is
pressed, the new Date is entered. Select
to advance to the next parameter
without changing the Date.

SET TIME

«
ª

This parameter sets the Time for the Real-Time Clock. Selecting
will
display the sub-menu where the Time can be set or changed. The RTC Time is
entered in “Hours-Minutes”, 12-hour format, with AM/PM indication. When
the PAR key is pressed, the new Time is entered and begins running. The
“Seconds” always start from 00 when the Time is entered. Select to advance
to the next parameter without changing the Time.

«
ª
290

MONTH.DAY.YEAR

SET DAY

«
HOURS-MINUTES Am/Pm

ª
Set the Day of the week for the Real-Time Clock.

www.redlion.net

TIME DISPLAY FORMAT

«
ª

12-59p

12-59

23-59

Select the format in which the Real-Time Clock Time will be displayed. The
format selections depict the range for the RTC Time display, and DO NOT
represent the current RTC Time. When the meter is operating in the Display
Mode, the RTC Time display is shown with no annunciator.

DATE DISPLAY FORMAT

«
ª

+B/

To calibrate the RTC, install the meter in its normal operating
environment, and set the time based on a known accurate reference (such as
the WWV broadcast or the Atomic Clock reference which is available via the
internet). After 30 days of normal operation, compare the RTC time to the
reference, and note the amount of time gained or lost. Refer to the tables on
the next page for the proper Offset value to enter, given the amount of time
drift observed.

Selecting
for the
parameter displays the
sub-menu where the
present Offset value can be viewed or changed. The tables below show the
value to enter, given the amount of time gained or lost in a 30-day period.

sun-31

Select the format in which the Real-Time Clock Date will be displayed. The
format selections depict the range for the RTC Date display, and DO NOT
represent the current RTC Date. When the meter is operating in the Display
Mode, the RTC Date display is indicated by the DAT annunciator.

Values 00 and 32 provide no Offset, and are not shown in the tables.
IF RTC CLOCK GAINED TIME:
USE VALUE FROM THIS TABLE
SECONDS ENTER THIS SECONDS ENTER THIS
GAINED IN
OFFSET
GAINED IN
OFFSET
30 DAYS
VALUE
30 DAYS
VALUE

AUTO CHANGE FOR DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

«
ª
Selecting
allows the meter to automatically adjust the RTC Time for
Daylight Savings Time. (Adjustment dates are U.S.A. standard only.) Avoid
setpoints that occur during adjustment (Sundays 1 to 3 AM).

METER TYPE FOR CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION

«
ª
Time synchronization between multiple PAXCK meters can be accomplished
through a hardware interface on the Real-Time Clock option card. This RS485
type interface allows connection of up to 32 PAXCK meters in a two-wire
multidrop network, at distances up to 4000 ft. (See Section 4.6, Real-Time
Clock Wiring).
In a Synchronization network, one PAXCK meter is programmed as the Host
(
), while all other meters are programmed as Slaves (
). Once every
hour (at 30 min. past the hour), the Host meter outputs a time synchronization
pulse onto the network. Upon receiving the synchronization pulse, each Slave
meter automatically adjusts the Minutes and Seconds of its RTC Time setting to
synchronize with the Host. Synchronization, using the Real-Time Clock Wiring,
adjusts the Minutes and Seconds only, and does not change the Hours, AM/PM,
Day or Date settings in the Slave meter's RTC.
Full-time synchronization (hours, minutes and seconds) is possible for
PAXCKs that are connected in an RS485 network (RS485 Serial Option cards
required). In this configuration, one meter is designated as the Serial RTC
Master by setting the meter's address as 98 or 99 (see Serial Real-time Clock
Addressing in Master Module 7). Every hour (at 30 min past the hour), the
Serial RTC Master / Host will transmit the full time (Hours, minutes, seconds)
to all meters through the RS485 serial card wiring network. The time, date, or
day will also be transmitted and updated in the Slaves when changed in the
programming of the Serial RTC Master. Only one meter should be configured
as Master and that meter should also be configured as the Host.

CALIBRATE REAL-TIME CLOCK

«
ª

* NOTE: DO NOT ADJUST TRIM CAP ON RTC CARD!

The Real-Time Clock circuit uses a crystal controlled oscillator for high
accuracy timekeeping. The oscillator is factory calibrated* and optimized for
25°C ambient temperature operation. Since the PAXCK is designed to operate
over a wide temperature range, and since the accuracy of a crystal oscillator
varies with ambient temperature, some drift in the RTC time may be observed
over an extended period. This is primarily seen in high or low temperature
installations. To compensate for the wide operating temperature range, a
calibration or “Offset” value can be entered, which effectively slows down or
speeds up the clock to maintain accurate timekeeping.

1-717-767-6511

100

105

111

116

121

127

132

137

142

148

153

158

163

IF RTC CLOCK LOST TIME:
USE VALUE FROM THIS TABLE
SECONDS ENTER THIS SECONDS ENTER THIS
LOST IN 30
OFFSET
LOST IN 30
OFFSET
DAYS
VALUE
DAYS
VALUE

179

190

200

211

221

232

243

253

264

105

274

116

285

127

295

137

306

148

316

158

327

169

291

6.9 MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

E-&7 «
ª

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS

Use the RST and/or arrow keys to display
and
press PAR. The meter will display
and then returns
to
. Press DSP key to return to the Display Mode.
This will overwrite all programmed user settings with the
Factory Default Settings shown in the Parameter Value Chart. For the PAXCK,
the Time and Date stored in the Real-Time Clock, as well as the RTC
Claibration Offset value, are NOT overwritten by this parameter. However, the
Time and Date Display Formats will revert back to the Factory Default Settings.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

PROBLEM

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

CHECK: Power level, power connections

PROGRAMMING LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: User input set for program lock-out function is in Active state
ENTER: Security code requested

CERTAIN DISPLAYS ARE LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Display Lock-out programming in Module 3

MODULES or PARAMETERS NOT ACCESSIBLE

CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation, Program Lock-out/ Value Access
parameter programming in Module 3

TIMER NOT RUNNING

CHECK: Input wiring, Timer plug jumper setting, Timer input programming in Module 1,
input signal level, Timer Inhibited by Input B or a user input

USER INPUT NOT WORKING PROPERLY

CHECK: User input wiring, user input plug jumper setting, user input signal level,
user input programming in Module 2

OUTPUTS NOT WORKING PROPERLY

CHECK: Setpoint plug-in card installation, wiring, Setpoint programming in Module 6

REAL-TIME CLOCK NOT WORKING PROPERLY

CHECK: RTC plug-in card installation, RTC programming in Module 8, check for
proper battery installation, replace battery. DO NOT ADJUST TRIM CAP ON RTC CARD!

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS NOT WORKING

CHECK: Serial plug-in card installation, Serial wiring, Serial settings in Module 7,
host settings

ERROR CODE (

PRESS: Reset key (If unable to clear, contact factory.)

)

Shaded areas are model dependent.

292

www.redlion.net

PARAMETER VALUE CHART
PAXCK Clock Timer

Programmer ________________ Date ________
Meter# _____________ Security Code __________

3-LOC Display and Program Lock-out Parameters

1-INP Timer Input Parameters
DISPLAY

rANGE
INP OP
FILtEr
t dir
t Strt

PARAMETER

TIMER RANGE
TIMER INPUT OPERATION

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

SSSSSS
LEVEL

TIMER INPUT FILTERING
TIMING DIRECTION
TIMER START VALUE (A)
TIMER START VALUE (B)*

t StOP
VaLUE

TIMER STOP (A & B*)

TIMER STOP VALUE (A)
TIMER STOP VALUE (B)*

FLASH
InP-UP
t p-UP

FLASH TIMER ANNUNCIATOR
TIMER INPUT STATE AT POWER-UP
TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP

2-FNC User Input and Function Key Parameters
DISPLAY

USEr-1
USEr-2
USEr-3
F1
F2
rSt
SEC-F1
SEC-F2

PARAMETER

USER INPUT 1
USER INPUT 2
USER INPUT 3
FUNCTION KEY 1
FUNCTION KEY 2
RESET KEY
SECONDARY FUNCTION KEY F1
SECONDARY FUNCTION KEY F2

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
drSt-E
NO
NO

DISPLAY

t-dSP
C-dSP
rtC-d
rtC-t
Sp-1
SP0F-1
tOUt-1
Sp-2
Sp0f-2
tOUt-2
sp-3
sp0f-3
tOUt-3
sp-4
sp0f-4
tOUt-4
t Strt
t StOP
C Strt
C StOP
SEt-t
COdE

PARAMETER

TIMER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
CYCLE COUNT DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
RTC DATE DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
RTC TIME DISPLAY LOCK-OUT
SP1 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP1 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP1 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
SP2 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP2 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP2 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
SP3 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP3 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP3 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
SP4 ON VALUE ACCESS
SP4 OFF VALUE ACCESS
SP4 TIME-OUT VALUE ACCESS
TIMER START VALUE ACCESS
TIMER STOP ACCESS
COUNTER START VALUE ACCESS
COUNTER STOP VALUE ACCESS
RTC TIME SETTING ACCESS
SECURITY CODE

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

rEd
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
000

4-CNt Cycle Counter Parameters
DISPLAY

C Src
C dir
C Strt

PARAMETER

CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE
CYC. CNTR. COUNTING DIRECTION
CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE (A)
CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE (B)*

C StOP
VALUE

CYCLE COUNTER STOP (A & B*)
CYCLE COUNTER STOP VALUE (A)
CYCLE COUNTER STOP VALUE (B)*

C p-UP

CYC. CNTR. RESET AT POWER-UP

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

NONE
UP
000000
000000
NO
000000
OOOOOO
NO

5-OPEr Timer Operating Modes
DISPLAY

t OPEr
SP-1
SPOF-1
tOUt-1

PARAMETER

PREDEFINED TIMER OPER. MODE
SETPOINT 1 ON VALUE
SETPOINT 1 OFF VALUE
SETPOINT 1 TIME-OUT VALUE

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

NO
000100

* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.

1-717-767-6511

293

6-SPt

Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters

DISPLAY

ASM-n
ACt-n
OUt-n
ON-n

PARAMETER

USER SETTING

NONE
LAtCH
NOr
VALUE
VALUE
000000
000000
VALUE
VALUE
000100
000100

DAILY ON OCCURRENCE (A)

Mon-Fri

DAILY ON OCCURRENCE (B)*

Mon-Fri

DAILY OFF OCCURRENCE (A)

Mon-Fri

DAILY OFF OCCURRENCE (B)*

Mon-Fri

NO
NO
NO
NOr

OUTPUT LOGIC
SETPOINT ON (A)
SETPOINT ON VALUE (A)
SETPOINT OFF (A)
SETPOINT OFF VALUE (A)
SETPOINT OFF VALUE (B)*

tOUt-n

USER SETTING

SP-4
FACTORY
SETTING

NONE
LAtCH
NOr
VALUE
VALUE
000000
000000
VALUE
VALUE
000100
000100

SETPOINT OFF (B)*

SPOF-n

SP-3
FACTORY
SETTING

NONE
LAtCH
NOr
VALUE
VALUE
000000
000000
VALUE
VALUE
000100
000100

SETPOINT ACTION

SETPOINT ON VALUE (B)*

OFF-n

USER SETTING

SP-2
FACTORY
SETTING

NONE
LAtCH
NOr
VALUE
VALUE
000000
000000
VALUE
VALUE
000100
000100

SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

SETPOINT ON (B)*

SP-n

SP-1
FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

TIME-OUT VALUE (A)
TIME-OUT VALUE (B)*

TIMER STOP
TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET
OUTPUT RESET W/DISPLAY RESET
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR
POWER-UP STATE

7-SrL Serial Communication Parameters
DISPLAY

bAUd
dAtA
PAr
Addr
Abbr

PARAMETER

BAUD RATE
DATA BITS
PARITY BIT
METER UNIT ADDRESS
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
REAL-TIME CLOCK PRINT FORMAT

OPt
t-dSP
C-dSP
rtC-d
rtC-t
spNt
SPNtOF

FACTORY
SETTING

8-rtC Real-Time Clock Parameters
USER SETTING

DISPLAY

dSP-t
dSP-d
Ch-dSt
SyNC
CAL
OFFSEt

9600
7
Odd
00
NO
YES

PARAMETER

TIME DISPLAY FORMAT
DATE DISPLAY FORMAT
AUTO TIME CHANGE FOR D.S.T.
SYNCHRONIZATION UNIT TYPE
CALIBRATE REAL-TIME CLOCK
RTC CALIBRATION OFFSET VALUE

USER SETTING

12-59p
12-31
N0
sLAVE
00

PRINT OPTIONS
TIMER DISPLAY
CYCLE COUNTER DISPLAY
RTC DATE DISPLAY
RTC TIME DISPLAY
SETPOINT VALUES
SETPOINT OFF/ TIME-OUT VALUES

YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

9-fCS Factory Service Parameters
DISPLAY

d-LEV

PARAMETER

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

* See Module 2, Exchanging Parameter Lists, for details on programming this value.
Shaded areas are model dependent.

PAXCK Application
A big application request has always been for
Real-Time Clocks to display time throughout the
plant. The challenge has been to keep all the
various clock locations synchronized with the
right time. With the new PAXCK Timer/RealTime Clock this problem is history. The clocks can
be provided in three different sizes, the PAXCK
(0.56 inch LEDs), the LPAXCK (1.5 inch LEDs),
or the EPAX (4 inch LEDs). You can mix and
match any number of the two versions, up to a
maximum of 32 units. Simply select one of the
units in the system as the host and the balance are
programmed as slaves. The host will send out a
synchronization pulse every hour to correct the
time on any clock unit wired in the system.

294

FACTORY
SETTING

Real-Time Clock Synchronization Network

www.redlion.net

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

1-717-767-6511

PAR

F1/F2 Keys

Display
Intensity
Level

Set Time

Baud Rate

Setpoint
Select

Predefined Timer
Operating Mode

Cycle Counter
Count Source

Timer Display
Lock-out

Timer Range

Factory Service
Code

Set Date

Data Bit

Set Day

Parity Bit

Setpoint
Action

Time Display
Format

Date Display
Format

Time-out
Value

Auto Change
for Daylight
Savings Time

Real-Time Clock
Print Formatting

Calibrate
Real-Time
Clock

Daily On
Occurrence

Timer Start
Value Access

Timer Input
State at
Power-up

Power-up
State

Meter Type
for Clock
Synchronization

Print
Options

Setpoint
Annunciator

Setpoint Off

Output Reset
w/Display
Reset

Abbreviated
Printing

Timer/Counter
Auto Reset

Meter
Address

Output
Logic

Setpoint
On

Cycle Counter
Reset at Power-up

Setpoint 1 Timeout Value

Cycle Counter
Stop Value

Timer Stop

Setpoint 1
Off Value

Cycle Counter
Start Value

Daily Off
Occurrence

Setpoint
Assignment

Setpoint 1
On Value

Cycle Counter
Count DIrection

Flash Timer
Annunciator

Setpoint
Time-Out
Value Access

Security
Code

Setpoint Off
Value Access

FUNCTION KEYS

Timer Stop
Value

RTC Time
Set Access

Setpoint On
Value Access

Timer Start
Value

Cycle Counter
Stop Value
Access

Real-Time Clock
Time Display
Lock-out

Timing
Direction

Cycle Counter
Start Value
Access

Real-Time Clock
Date Display
Lock-out

Timer Input
Filtering

Timer Stop
Value Access

Cycle Counter
Display
Lock-out

USER INPUTS

Timer Input
Operation

Real-Time Clock parameters apply to the PAXCK only.

= Setpoint number

Timer Reset
at Power-up

PAXTM/PAXCK PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

295

MODEL PAXCK - 1/8 DIN REAL-TIME CLOCK
This is a brief overview of the PAXCK. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX 1/8 DIN Preset Timer (PAXTM) & Real-time Clock (PAXCK) Bulletin starting on page 268.
z 6-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY
z 4 SEPARATE DISPLAYS (Timer, Counter, Real-Time Clock, and
Date)
z CYCLE COUNTING CAPABILITY
z PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUTS
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/Plug-in card)
z COMMUNICATIONS AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/Plug-in card)
z BUS CAPABILITIES: DEVICENET, MODBUS and PROFIBUS-DP
z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

UL
R

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

PAXCK SPECIFICATIONS
4. ANNUNCIATORS:

TMR - Timer Display
CNT - Cycle Counter Display
DAT - Real-Time Clock Date Display
- Real-Time Clock Time Display

SP1 - Setpoint 1 Output
SP2 - Setpoint 2 Output
SP3 - Setpoint 3 Output
SP4 - Setpoint 4 Output

REAL-TIME/DATE DISPLAY (PAXCK):
Real-Time Display: 5 display formats
Hr/Min/Sec (12 or 24 Hr. format); Hr/Min (24 Hr.); Hr/Min (12 Hr. with
or without AM/PM indication)
Date Display: 7 display formats
Month/Day or Day/Month (numeric or 3-letter Month format);
Month/Day/Year or Day/Month/Year (all numeric);
Day of Week/Day (3-letter Day of Week format)
REAL-TIME CLOCK CARD: Field replaceable plug-in card
Time Accuracy: ± 5 secs./Month (1 min./year) with end-user calibration
Battery: Lithium 2025 coin cell
Battery Life Expectancy: 10 yrs. typical
Synchronization Interface: Two-wire multi-drop network (RS485
hardware), 32 units max., operates up to 4000 ft.
Isolation To Timer & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
TIMER INPUTS A and B:
Logic inputs configurable as Current Sinking (active low) or Current
Sourcing (active high) via a single plug jumper.
Current Sinking (active low): VIL = 0.9 V max., 22KΩ pull-up to +12
VDC.
Current Sourcing (active high): VIH = 3.6 V min., 22KΩ pull-down, Max.
Continuous Input: 30 VDC.
Timer Input Pulse Width: 1 msec min.
Timer Start/Stop Response Time: 1 msec max.
Filter: Software filtering provided for switch contact debounce. Filter
enabled or disabled through programming.
If enabled, filter results in 50 msec start/stop response time for
successive pulses on the same input terminal.

296

www.redlion.net

DIGITAL PANEL
METERS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

297

QUICK Specs
Digital Panel Meters
CUB4V / I

V O LT / C U R R E N T
CUB5V / I

PAXLV / I

Miniature DC
Volt/Current Meter

DC Volt/Current Meter with
Output Option Card Capability

1/8 DIN, AC or DC
Volt/Current Meter

1/8 DIN, DC
Volt/Current/Process Meter with
Setpoint Card Capability

39mm (H) x 75mm (W)

50mm (H) x 97mm (W)

Display

3 1/2 Digit, .6" (15mm)
Reflective, Green and Red
Backlight LCD

5 Digit, .48" (12mm) Reflective,
Green and Red Backlight LCD

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

5 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

Input Ranges

Current (CUB4I)
0 to 199.9 µA DC through
199.9 mA DC
Voltage (CUB4V)
0 to 199.9 mV DC through
199.9 VDC

Current (CUB5I)
0 to 200 µA DC through
200 mA DC
Voltage (CUB5V)
0 to 200 mV DC through
200 VDC

Current (PAXLI)
(AC or DC)
0 to 199.9 µA through
1.999 A Voltage(PAXLV)
(AC or DC)
0 to 1.999 mV DC
through 300 VDC

Current: 0 to 200 µA through
200 mA DC
Voltage: 0 to 200 mV through
200 VDC
Process: 4 to 20 mA and
0 to 10 VDC

Zero/Offset

Zero Based

Non Zero Based

Setpoint
Capability

Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking

Dual Form C Relays

Communication
Capability

RS232
RS485

Other Features/
Options

User Input
Min/Max Memory
Custom Units Indicator

Custom Units Overlay

User Input
Excitation
Custom Units Overlay
Min/Max Memory

Power Source

9 to 28 VDC

115/230 VAC

50 to 250 VAC
21.6 to 250 VDC

Page Number

Page 305/317

Page 329

Page 347

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

298

www.redlion.net

UNIVERSAL
PAXLA

QUICK Specs
Digital Panel Meters
PAXLIT

V O LT / C U R R E N T
PAXLHV
DP5D

PAXD

1/8 DIN, 5 amp AC
Current Meter

1/8 DIN, AC
Voltage Monitor

1/8 DIN, Universal DC Meter

1/8 DIN, Universal DC Meter with
Output Option Card Capability

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

50mm (H) x 97mm (W)

Display

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

Current
+/-200 µA DC to +/-2 A DC
Voltage
+/-200 mV DC to +/-300 VDC
Resistance
100 Ohm to 10K Ohm

Description

Input Ranges

0 to 5 A AC

0 to 600 VAC

Current
+/-200 µA DC to +/-2 A DC
Voltage
+/-200 mV DC to +/-300 VDC
Resistance
100 Ohm to 10K Ohm

Zero/Offset

Zero Based

Non Zero Based

Setpoint
Capability

Yes

Form C Relay (Dual)
Form A Relay (Quad)
Solid State Outputs (Quad)

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8
Analog Output , Tare,
Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Linearizer, Excitation,
Custom Units Overlay

Communication
Capability

Other Features/
Options

Custom Units Overlay

Tare, Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Linearizer, Excitation,
Custom Units Overlay

Power Source

115/230 VAC

85 to 250 VAC or
11 to 36 VDC

Page Number

Page 336

Page 342

Page 358

Page 378

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

1-717-767-6511

299

QUICK Specs
Digital Panel Meters
V O LT / C U R R E N T
PAXH

PROCESS
CUB5P

PAXLCL

DC Process meter with Output
Option Card Capability

1/8 DIN, Current Loop Meter

CUB4CL / LP

1/8 DIN, AC True RMS Voltage
and Current Meter with Output
Option Card Capability

Miniature Current Loop and
Loop Powered Meters

50mm (H) x 97mm (W)

39mm (H) x 75mm (W)

50mm (H) x 97mm (W)

Display

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

3 1/2 Digit, .6" (15mm)
Reflective, Green and
Red Backlight LCD

5 Digit, .48" (12mm)
Reflective, Green and
Red Backlight LCD

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

Input Ranges

Current
+200 µA AC to +5 A AC
Voltage
+200 mV AC to +300 VAC

Current Loop
Dual Range
4 to 20 mA DC or
10 to 50 mA DC

0 to 10 VDC
4 to 20 mA DC or
10 to 50 mA DC

Current Loop
Dual Range
4 to 20 mA DC or
10 to 50 mA DC

Zero/Offset

Non Zero Based

Setpoint
Capability

Yes

Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking

Communication
Capability

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

RS232
RS485

Other Features/
Options

Analog Output , Tare,
Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Linearizer, Excitation,
Custom Units Overlay

User Input
Min/Max Memory
Custom Units Indicator

Custom Units Overlay,
Excitation

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC or
11 to 36 VDC

9 to 28 VDC
(CUB4CL)
Derives Operating Power from
Current Loop
3 Volts Max. (CUB4LP)

9 to 28 VDC

85 to 250 VAC

Page Number

Page 405

Page 406

Page 410

Page 422

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

300

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Digital Panel Meters
PROCESS
PAXLPV

DP5P

PAXP

PAXDP

1/8 DIN, Process Volt Meter

1/8 DIN, Process Meter

1/8 DIN, Process Meter
with Output Option
Card Capability

1/8 DIN, Dual Input
Process Meter with Output
Option Card Capability

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

50mm (H) x 97mm (W)

Display

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Sunlight Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

Process
Current/Voltage
0 to 20 mA DC or
0 to 10 VDC

Dual Inputs
Process
Current/Voltage
0 to 20 mA DC/0 to 10 VDC

Description

Input Ranges

Process Volt
1 to 5 VDC

Zero/Offset

Non Zero Based

Setpoint
Capability

Form C Relay (Dual)
Form A Relay (Quad)
Solid State Outputs (Quad)

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Other Features/
Options

Custom Units Overlay,
Excitation

Tare, Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Linearizer, Excitation, Custom
Units Overlay

Analog Output , Tare,
Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Linearizer, Excitation,
Custom Units Overlay

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC

85 to 250 VAC or
11 to 36 VDC

85 to 250 VAC or
18 to 36 VDC

Page Number

Page 430

Page 438

Page 439

Page 440

Communication
Capability

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

1-717-767-6511

301

QUICK Specs
Digital Panel Meters
STRAIN GAGE
PAXLSG
PAXS

1/8 DIN, Strain
Gage Meter

1/8 DIN, Strain Gage Meter
with Output Option Card
Capability

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

50mm (H) x 97mm (W)

Display

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Red LED

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or
Sunlight Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

Input Ranges

Single-ended or
Differential Input
0 to 10 mV
through 1.999 A

+/- 24 mV DC or +/- 240 mV DC

Zero/Offset

Non Zero Based

Setpoint
Capability

Form C Relay (Dual)
Form A Relay (Quad)
Solid State Outputs (Quad)

Communication
Capability

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Other Features/
Options

Custom Units Overlay
Excitation,

Analog Output , Tare,
Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Linearizer, Excitation,
Custom Units Overlay

Power Source

115/230 VAC

85 to 250 VAC or
11 to 36 VDC

Page Number

Page 473

Page 481

Description

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

302

www.redlion.net

REPLACEMENT Guide
CURRENT PRODUCT

WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES

MODEL NUMBER

Q Display:

5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 9 to 28 VDC
Q Measurement: DC Current or Voltage

Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .35" (9 mm)
Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 5 VDC or 7 to 28 VDC
Q Measurement: DC Current or Voltage
CUBID
/ CUBVD
CUBID/CUBVD

FEATURES

CUB5I / CUB5V
Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .6" (15 mm)
Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: Loop Powered
Q Measurement: Current Loop

Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .35" (9 mm)
Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: Loop Powered
Q Measurement: Current Loop
LPPI
LPPI

CUB4LP
Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Reflective LCD
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: AC or DC Current
and Voltage

Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: AC or DC Current
and Voltage
APLI / APLV

PAXLI / PAXLV
Q Display:

Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: 5 Amp AC Current/
600 VAC
APLIT
/ APLHV
APLIT/APLHV

PAXLIT / PAXLHV

Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: Current Loop/
Process Volt
APLCL
/ APLPV
APLCL/APLPV

PAXLCL / PAXLPV

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC
Q Measurement: Current Loop/Process
Volt
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display:

Q Display:

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: Strain Gage
APLSG
APLSG

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: 5 Amp AC/600 VAC
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences

PAXLSG

3 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: Strain Gage
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display: 6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED
Q Power

Q Display:

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: Process Signals
IMP
IMP

PAXP

Q Display: 6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED

Q Display:

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: DC Current and
Voltage
IMD
IMD

Source: 85 to 250 VAC, 11 to
36 VDC, 24 VAC
Q Measurement: Process Signals
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Power

PAXD

Source: 85 to 250 VAC, 11 to
36 VDC, 24 VAC
Q Measurement: DC Current and
Voltage
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Q Display: 6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED
Q Power

Q Display:

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: 5 Amp AC
IMH
IMH

PAXH

Source: 85 to 250 VAC, 11 to
36 VDC, 24 VAC
Q Measurement: AC Current and Voltage
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences
Q Display: 6 Digit, .56" (14 mm) Red LED
Q Power

Q Display:

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: Strain Gage
IMS
Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.

PAXS

1-717-767-6511

Source: 85 to 250 VAC, 11 to
36 VDC, 24 VAC
Q Measurement: Strain Gage
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences

303

This page intentionally left blank.
304

www.redlion.net

MODEL CUB5V - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 5-DIGIT DC VOLTMETER
z FOUR SELECTABLE D.C. RANGES
0 to 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V

z MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DISPLAY CAPTURE
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR RED/GREEN LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.48" (12.2 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z OPTIONAL SETPOINT OUTPUT MODULES
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS MODULES (RS232 or RS485)
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z FRONT PANEL OR CRIMSON PROGRAMMABLE

UL
R

z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT

US LISTED

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The CUB5V accepts a DC Voltage input signal and provides a display in the
desired unit of measure. The meter also features minimum and maximum
display capture, display offset, units indicator, and programmable user input.
The display can be toggled either manually or automatically between the
selected displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective and red/green backlight. The backlight version is user
selectable for the desired color and also has variable display intensity.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
setpoint output modules. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.

SAFETY SUMMARY

E
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

VOLTAGE
The CUB5V is the DC Volt meter. It features 4 voltage input ranges, that are
selected by the user via a programming jumper and software input range
selection. The ranges consist of following: 0 to 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V. Users
should select the appropriate voltage range that covers their maximum input.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

1-717-767-6511

305

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

CUB5

DESCRIPTION

CUB5V
CUB5RLY
CUB5SNK

Optional Plug-in Cards

CUB5COM
CUB5USB
MLPS1
CBLPROG
CBPRO
SFCRD
CBLUSB

Accessories

1 Crimson

PART NUMBER

DC Volt Meter with reflective display
DC Volt Meter with backlight display
Single Relay Output Card
Dual Sinking Open Collector Output Card
RS485 Serial Communications Card
RS232 Serial Communications Card
USB Programming Card for CUB5 Products
Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC
RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)
RS485 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 1
USB Programming Cable

CUB5VR00
CUB5VB00
CUB5RLY0
CUB5SNK0
CUB5COM1
CUB5COM2
CUB5USB0
MLPS1000
CBLPROG0
CBPRO007
SFCRD200
CBLUSB00

2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit LCD 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits
CUB5VR00: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5VB00: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection.
MODEL
NO.

DISPLAY COLOR

CUB5VR00
CUB5VB00
CUB5VB00

--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)

INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0

10 mA
85 mA
95 mA

40 mA
115 mA
125 mA

3. INPUT RANGES: Jumper Selectable
D.C. Voltages: 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V
4. SIGNAL INPUTS:
INPUT
RANGE

200 mVDC
2 VDC
20 VDC
200 VDC

ACCURACY
@23 °C, less
than 85% RH

0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%

of
of
of
of

span
span
span
span

INPUT
IMPEDANCE

1.027
1.027
1.027
1.027

MΩ
MΩ
MΩ
MΩ

MAX
INPUT
SIGNAL

RESOLUTION

75 VDC
75 VDC
250 VDC
250 VDC

10 µV
.1 mV
1 mV
10 mV

TEMP.
COEFFICIENT

70
70
70
70

ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm

/
/
/
/

°C
°C
°C
°C

5. OVERRANGE RATINGS, PROTECTION & INDICATION:
9 to 28 VDC power circuit is not isolated from the signal circuit.
Input Overrange Indication: “OLOL”.
Input Underrange Indication: “ULUL”.
Display Overrange/Underrange Indication: “.....”/“-.....”
6. A/D CONVERTER: 16 bit resolution
7. DISPLAY RESPONSE TIME: 500 msec min.
8. NORMAL MODE REJECTION: 60 dB 50/60 Hz
9. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect terminal to common
(USR COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
10. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
11. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and max/min values when power is removed.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5VR00: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5VB00 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL

Red Display

Green Display

306

1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5

Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
13. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
15. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)

TEMPERATURE

-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C

www.redlion.net

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS

The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
Note: Measurement errors may occur if signal input common is shared with
another circuit common (ie, serial common, Dual Sinking Output option card,
or Power Supply common) on multiple units.
SINGLE RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

DUAL SINKING OUTPUT CARD
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 100 mA max.
VDS ON: 0.7 V @ 100 mA
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable (refer to CUB5COM bulletin)
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity

METER

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

1-717-767-6511

307

3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter

CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.

Range Jumpers

Setpoint Card

Comms Card

Locking Tab

4.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

4.1 POWER WIRING

4.2 USER INPUT WIRING

DC Power

Sinking Logic

+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC

USR COMM
USR

CAUTION: 9 to 28 VDC
power circuit is not isolated
from the signal circuit.

308

}

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Input Common.

The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .7 V).

www.redlion.net

4.3 INPUT WIRING
Voltage Signal
(self powered)

CAUTION: Power input common is NOT isolated from user and input
commons. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the
power input common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth
referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground
potential. If not, hazardous voltage may be present at the signal or user inputs and
input common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the
potential of the user and input commons with respect to earth ground; and the
common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.
Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper should be verified for proper
position.

JUMPER
POSITION

MAX INPUT
VOLTAGE

200 mV ⁄ 2 VDC

75 VDC

20V ⁄ 200 VDC

250 VDC

4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load must be
wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.

4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

1-717-767-6511

309

5.0 REVIEWING

BUTTON

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

ENTERING PROGRAM MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

RST

Resets values (MIN/MAX) or outputs

Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“1” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL BUTTON)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL button. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL button with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST BUTTONS)

The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST button is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL button.

MODULE MENU (SEL BUTTON)
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The SEL button is pressed to advance to a particular
parameter to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding
parameters. After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO.
Programming may continue by accessing additional modules.

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST button is used to move through
the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL button, stores and
activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next
parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST button to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST button again increments the
digit by one or the user can hold the RST button and the digit will automatically
scroll. The SEL button will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the
SEL button will enter the value and move to the next parameter.

310

www.redlion.net

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

USrIN

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

6.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU

SCALING STYLE

CUB5V INPUT RANGE

rAN6E
ª

200u

SELECTION

RANGE
RESOLUTION

SELECTION

200.00 mV

0.2u
2u

RANGE
RESOLUTION

20.000 V

20u
200u

2.0000 V

200.00 V

Select the input range that corresponds to the external signal. This selection
should be high enough to avoid input signal overload but low enough for the
desired input resolution. This selection and the position of the Input Range
Jumper must match.

StYLE
ª

KEy

APLY

KEy

If Input Values and corresponding Display Values are known, the Key-in
(KEY) scaling style can be used. This allows scaling without the presence or
changing of the input signal. If Input Values have to be derived from the actual
input signal source or simulator, the Apply (APLY) scaling style must be used.

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1
DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

dECPt
ª

0.0

0.00

INP 1
0.000

0.0000

Select the decimal point location for the Input, MIN and MAX displays. This
selection also affects the dSP1 and dSP2 parameters and setpoint values.

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

OFSEt
ª

0.00

0 to 29999

0.00

For Key-in (KEY) style, enter the first Input Value using the front panel buttons.
(The Input Range selection sets the decimal location for the Input Value).
For Apply (APLY) style, the meter shows the previously stored Input Value. To
retain this value, press the SEL button to advance to the next parameter. To
change the Input Value, press the RST button and apply the input signal to the
meter. Adjust the signal source externally until the desired Input Value appears.
Press the SEL button to enter the value being displayed.

-19999 to 19999

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

The display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be used to
compensate for signal variations or sensor errors. This value is automatically
updated after a Zero Display to show how far the display is offset. A value of
zero will remove the effects of offset.

dSP 1
ª

-19999 to 99999

0.00

Enter the first Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the same
for KEY and APLY scaling styles. The decimal point follows the dECPt selection.

FILTER SETTING

FILtr
ª

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

0,1 2 3

INP 2 «
ª 100.00

0 to 29999

If the displayed value is difficult to read due to small process variations or
noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display. Software
filtering effectively combines a fraction of the current input reading with a
fraction of the previous displayed reading to generate the new display.
Filter values represent no filtering (0), up to heavy filtering (3). A value of 1
for the filter uses 1/4 of the new input and 3/4 of the previous display to generate
the new display. A filter value of 2 uses 1/8 new and 7/8 previous. A filter value
of 3 uses 1/16 new and 15/16 previous.

For Key-in (KEY) style, enter the known second Input Value using the front
panel buttons.
For Apply (APLY) style, the meter shows the previously stored Input Value for
Scaling Point 2. To retain this value, press the SEL button to advance to the next
parameter. To change the Input Value, press the RST button and apply the input
signal to the meter. Adjust the signal source externally until the desired Input
Value appears. Press the SEL button to enter the value being displayed.

FILTER BAND

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

bANd

dSP 2 «
ª 100.00

0 to 199 display units

The filter will adapt to variations in the input signal. When the variation
exceeds the input filter band value, the filter disengages. When the variation
becomes less than the band value, the filter engages again. This allows for a
stable readout, but permits the display to settle rapidly after a large process
change. The value of the band is in display units, independent of the Display
Decimal Point position. A band setting of ‘0’ keeps the filter permanently
engaged at the filter level selected above.

-19999 to 99999

Enter the second Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the
same for KEY and APLY scaling styles.

General Notes on Scaling

1. When using the Apply (APLY) scaling style, input values for scaling points
must be confined to the signal input imits of the selected range.
2. The same Input Value should not correspond to more than one Display Value.
(Example: 10 V can not equal 0 and 10.)
3. For input levels beyond the programmed Input Values, the meter extends the
Display Value by calculating the slope from the two coordinate pairs (INP1 /
dSP1 & INP2 / dSP2).

1-717-767-6511

311

USER INPUT FUNCTION

USrIN

DISPLAY MODE

NO
P-Loc
ZErO
rESEt

DISPLAY MODE

DESCRIPTION

No Function

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out
Zero Input
(Edge triggered)
Reset (Edge triggered)

See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Zero the Input Display value causing
Display Reading to be Offset.
Resets the assigned value(s) to the
current input value.
Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).

d-HLd

Display Hold

d-SEL
d-LEV
COLOr

Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Backlight Color
(Edge Triggered)

Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation (backlight version only).
Change backlight color with each
activation (backlight version only).

DESCRIPTION

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).

P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).

Setpoint 1 Reset

Resets setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset

Resets setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

U-ASN
ª

HI
LO

dSP

HI-LO
dSP

Select the value(s) to which the User Input Function is assigned. The User
Input Assignment only applies if a selection of reset, display hold, or print and
reset is selected in the User Input Function menu.

6.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU

HI-En

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

YES

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

CodE

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press the SEL button to exit the module.

VIEW VERSION DISPLAY

HI-t

2.0

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

When the Input Display is above the present MAX value for the entered
delay time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MAX reading.
A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.

LO-En

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

YES

Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

LO-t

2.0

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

yES

Select yES to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

312

Entering Code 55 will display the version (x.x) of the
meter. The display then returns to CodE 00. Press the SEL
button to exit the module.

CALIBRATION

CodE

The CUB5V uses stored voltage calibration values to
provide accurate voltage measurements. Over time, the
electrical characteristics of the components inside the
meter will slowly change, with the result that the stored
calibration values no longer accurately define the input circuit. For most
applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration of the CUB5V involves an input voltage calibration, which
should only be performed by individuals experienced in calibrating electronic
equipment. Allow a 30 minute warm up before performing any calibration
related procedures. The following procedures should be performed at an
ambient temperature of 15 to 35°C (59 to 95°F).
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the CUB5V.

Voltage Calibration

When the Input Display is below the present MIN value for the entered delay
time, the meter will capture that display value as the new MIN reading. A delay
time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short spikes.

FCS

CodE

1. Connect a precision DC voltage source with an accuracy of 0.01% or better
to the INP+ (positive) and COMM (negative) terminals of the CUB5V. Set
the output of the voltage source to zero.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button to select the range to be calibrated.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 0.0v.
5. With the voltage source set to zero (or a dead short applied to the input),
press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
6. When the display reads the selected range, apply full-scale input signal for
the range. (Note: For 200V range, apply 100V as indicated on the display.)
Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each input range to be calibrated. When display
reads CAL NO, press the SEL button to exit calibration.

www.redlion.net

6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

dSP-t
ª

0.5

DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

COLOr

seconds

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

rEd

6rn

Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL

yES

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

yES

d-LEV

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

rSt
ª

dSP

NO
HI

LO
HI-LO

dSP

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

CodE
ª

This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

ZERO DISPLAY WITH DISPLAY RESET

ZErO

yES

This parameter enables the RST button or user input to zero the input display
value, causing the display reading to be offset.
Note: For this parameter to operate, the RST button or User Input being used
must be set to dSP and the Input value must be displayed. If these conditions are
not met, the display will not zero.

000

yES

NO
not

P-Loc

UNITS INDICATOR SELECTION

999

______

Active

1-99

Full Programming

OFF

LISt

SEGS

This parameter activates the Units Indicator on the display. There are two
methods of selecting the Indicator. List will present a group of Units
preprogrammed into the meter. Segments allows the user to choose which of the
segments should light.

Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

Immediate Access

After Quick Programming
Quick Programming with correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

Programming Lock

No Access

1-99

Quick Programming

No Access

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

P-Loc

OFF

The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (P-Loc) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
the Setpoint values to be modified, but allows direct access to these values
without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the CodE prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending on the
code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the CodE prompt
appears (see chart).

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds. This parameter only appears
when the MAX or MIN displays are enabled.

UNItS

000

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

ScroL

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

1-717-767-6511

313

6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU

The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional output
module is installed in the meter.

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSEL

SP-1

SETPOINT 2 ENABLE

YES

Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and setpoint 2 is disabled.

Act-n «
ª HI-Ub

LO-bL

HI-bL

HI-Ub

LO-Ub

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub

-19999

99999

HYSTERESIS VALUE

HYS-n
ª

59999

Enter desired hysteresis value. See Setpoint Output Figures for visual
explanation of how setpoint output actions (balanced and unbalanced) are
affected by the hysteresis. When the setpoint is a control output, usually
balanced hysteresis is used. For alarm applications, usually unbalanced
hysteresis is used. For unbalanced hysteresis modes, the hysteresis functions on
the low side for high acting setpoints and functions on the high side for low
acting setpoints.
Note: Hysteresis eliminates output chatter at the switch point, while time delay
can be used to prevent false triggering during process transient events.

ON TIME DELAY

SETPOINT ACTION

SPt-n «
ª 10000

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

SP-2

Enter the setpoint (output) to be programmed. The n in the following
parameters will reflect the chosen setpoint number. After the chosen setpoint
is completely programmed, the display will return to SPSEL. Repeat steps for
each setpoint to be programmed. Select NO to exit the module. The number of
setpoints available is setpoint output card dependent.

Enb-2

SETPOINT VALUE

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

tON-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning on
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.

OFF TIME DELAY

tOF-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

Enter the time value in seconds that the output is delayed from turning off
after the trigger point is reached. A value of 0.0 allows the meter to update the
output status per the response time listed in the Specifications.

OUTPUT RESET ACTION
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

HI-bL

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

LO-bL

rSt-n
ª

Auto

LAtCH

L-dLY

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

Auto = Automatic action; This action allows the output to automatically reset off
at the trigger points per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output
Figures. The “on” output may be manually reset (off) immediately by the
front panel RST button or user input.The output remains off until the trigger
point is crossed again.

LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

314

HI-Ub

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

LO-Ub

the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST

www.redlion.net

button or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power
cycle. When the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action),
the corresponding “on” output is reset immediately and remains off until the
trigger point is crossed again. (Previously latched alarms will be off if power
up Display Value is lower than setpoint value.)

L-dLY = Latch with delay reset action; This action latches the output on at the
trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures. Latch
means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST button
or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power cycle. When
the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action), the meter
delays the event until the corresponding “on” output crosses the trigger off
point. (Previously latched outputs are off if power up Display Value is lower
than setpoint value. During a power cycle, the meter erases a previous L-dLY
reset if it is not activated at power up.)

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

rEn-n
ª

YES

This parameter enables the RST button or user input to reset the output when
the display is reset.
Note: For this parameter to operate, the RST button or User Input being used
must be set to dSP and the Input value must be displayed. If these conditions are
not met, the output will not reset.

STANDBY OPERATION

Stb-n

YES

When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and Output Reset Action.

CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/OUTPUT STATE

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

ChC-n

YES

This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.

6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
E

PARAMETER MENU

The Serial Setup Parameters are only active when the optional RS232 or RS485 serial communications module is installed in the meter. Refer to the CUB5COM
bulletin for complete details on CUB5 serial communications.

1-717-767-6511

315

CUB5V PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press and hold SEL button
to enter Programming Mode.

316

www.redlion.net

MODEL CUB5I - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 5-DIGIT DC CURRENT METER
z FOUR SELECTABLE D.C. RANGES
200 μA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA

UL
R

z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT

US LISTED

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The CUB5I accepts a DC Current input signal and provides a display in the
desired unit of measure. The meter also features minimum and maximum
display capture, display offset, units indicator, and programmable user input.
The display can be toggled either manually or automatically between the
selected displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective and red/green backlight. The backlight version is user
selectable for the desired color and also has variable display intensity.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
setpoint output modules. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.

SAFETY SUMMARY

E
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

CURRENT
The CUB5I is the DC Current meter. It features 4 current input ranges, that
are selected by the user via a programming jumper and software input range
selection. The ranges consist of following: 200 μA, 2 mA, 20 mA, or 200 mA.
Users should select the appropriate current range that covers their maximum
signal input.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

1-717-767-6511

317

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

CUB5

DESCRIPTION

CUB5I

Optional Plug-in Cards

PART NUMBER

DC Current Meter with reflective display

CUB5IR00

DC Current with backlight display

CUB5IB00

CUB5RLY

Single Relay Output Card

CUB5RLY0

CUB5SNK

Dual Sinking Open Collector Output Card

CUB5SNK0

RS485 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM1

CUB5COM

RS232 Serial Communications Card

CUB5USB

USB Programming Card for CUB5 Products

CUB5COM2
1

CUB5USB0

MLPS1

Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC

MLPS1000

CBLPROG

RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBLPROG0

CBPRO

RS485 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBPRO007

SFCRD

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows ME, 2000, XP 2

SFCRD200

CBLUSB

USB Programming Cable

CBLUSB00

Accessories

1 The
2

USB Programming Card is not UL Approved.
Crimson 2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit LCD 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits
CUB5IR00: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5IB00: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.
MODEL
NO.

DISPLAY COLOR

CUB5IR00
CUB5IB00
CUB5IB00

--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)

INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0

10 mA
85 mA
95 mA

40 mA
115 mA
125 mA

3. INPUT RANGES: Jumper Selectable
D.C. Currents: 200 μA, 2 mA, 20 mA, or 200 mA
4. SIGNAL INPUTS:

INPUT
RANGE

200 μA
2 mA
20 mA
200 mA

ACCURACY
@23 °C, less
than 85% RH

0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%

of
of
of
of

span
span
span
span

INPUT
IMPEDANCE

MAX
INPUT
SIGNAL

RESOLUTION

1.111 KΩ
111 Ω
11 Ω
1Ω

15 mA
50 mA
150 mA
500 mA

10 nA
.1 µA
1 µA
10 µA

TEMP.
COEFFICIENT

70
70
70
70

ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm

/
/
/
/

°C
°C
°C
°C

5. OVERRANGE RATINGS, PROTECTION & INDICATION:
9 to 28 VDC power circuit is not isolated from the signal circuit.
Input Overrange Indication: “OLOL”.
Input Underrange Indication: “ULUL”.
Display Overrange/Underrange Indication: “.....”/“-.....”
6. DISPLAY RESPONSE TIME: 500 msec min.
7. NORMAL MODE REJECTION: 60 dB 50/60 Hz
8. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect terminal to common
(USR COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
9. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and max/min values when power is removed.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5IR00: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5IB00 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL

Red Display

Green Display

318

1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5

TEMPERATURE

-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C

Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
12. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257C/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
14. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)

www.redlion.net

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS

The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
Note: Measurement errors may occur if signal input common is shared with
another circuit common (ie, serial common, Dual Sinking Output option card,
or Power Supply common) on multiple units.
SINGLE RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

1-717-767-6511

319

3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter

CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.

Range Jumpers

Setpoint Card

Comms Card

Locking Tab

4.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

4.1 POWER WIRING

4.2 USER INPUT WIRING

DC Power

Sinking Logic

+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC

USR COMM
USR

CAUTION: 9 to 28 VDC
power circuit is not isolated
from the signal circuit.

320

}

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Input Common.

The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .7 V).

www.redlion.net

4.3 INPUT WIRING

2 Wire With External Power

CAUTION: Power input common is NOT isolated from user and input
commons. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the
power input common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live
earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth
ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may be present at the signal or user
inputs and input common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given
to the potential of the user and input commons with respect to earth ground; and the
common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.
Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper should be verified for
proper position.

2 Wire With MLPS1 Power

Input Signal (self powered)
JUMPER
POSITION

MAX INPUT
CURRENT

200 µA

15 mA

2 mA

50 mA

20 mA

150 mA

200 mA

500 mA

Series Loop (must use separate supply for sensor power
and each CUB5)

2 Wire With Separate Sensor And CUB5 Power

4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load
must be wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.

4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

1-717-767-6511

321

5.0 REVIEWING

BUTTON

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

ENTERING PROGRAM MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

RST

Resets values (MIN/MAX) or outputs

Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“1” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL BUTTON)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL button. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST BUTTONS)

The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST button is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL button.

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

322

www.redlion.net

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

USrIN

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

6.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU

SCALING STYLE

CUB5I INPUT RANGE

rAN6E
ª

0.02A

SELECTION

200uA
0.002A

RANGE
RESOLUTION

SELECTION

200.00 μA

0.02A
0.2A

2.0000 mA

RANGE
RESOLUTION

20.000 mA
200.00 mA

StYLE
ª

KEy

APLY

KEy

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1
DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

dECPt
ª

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

0.000

Select the decimal point location for the Input, MIN and MAX displays. This
selection also affects the dSP1 and dSP2 parameters and setpoint values.

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

OFSEt
ª

0.000

INP 1 «
ª 0.000

0 to 29999

-19999 to 19999

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

dSP 1 «
ª 0.000

-19999 to 99999

Enter the first Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the same
for KEY and APLY scaling styles. The decimal point follows the dECPt selection.

FILTER SETTING

FILtr
ª

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

0,1 2 3

INP 2 «
ª 10.000

0 to 29999

FILTER BAND

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

bANd

dSP 2 «
ª 10.000

0 to 199 display units

-19999 to 99999

Enter the second Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the
same for KEY and APLY scaling styles.

General Notes on Scaling

1. When using the Apply (APLY) scaling style, input values for scaling points
must be confined to the range limits shown.
2. The same Input Value should not correspond to more than one Display Value.
(Example: 20 mA can not equal 0 and 20.)
3. For input levels beyond the programmed Input Values, the meter extends the
Display Value by calculating the slope from the two coordinate pairs (INP1 /
dSP1 & INP2 / dSP2).

1-717-767-6511

323

USER INPUT FUNCTION

USrIN

DISPLAY MODE

NO
P-Loc
ZErO
rESEt

DISPLAY MODE

DESCRIPTION

No Function

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out
Zero Input
(Edge triggered)
Reset (Edge triggered)

d-HLd

Display Hold

d-SEL
d-LEV
COLOr

Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Backlight Color
(Edge Triggered)

Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation (backlight version only).
Change backlight color with each
activation (backlight version only).

DESCRIPTION

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).

P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).

Setpoint 1 Reset

Resets setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset

Resets setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

U-ASN
ª

HI
LO

dSP

HI-LO
dSP

6.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU

HI-En

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

YES

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

CodE

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press the SEL button to exit the module.

VIEW VERSION DISPLAY

HI-t

2.0

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

LO-En

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

YES

Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

LO-t

2.0

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

yES

Select yES to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

324

Entering Code 50 will display the version (x.x) of the
meter. The display then returns to CodE 00. Press the SEL
button to exit the module.

CALIBRATION
The CUB5I uses stored current calibration values to
provide accurate current measurements. Over time, the
electrical characteristics of the components inside the
CUB5I will slowly change with the result that the stored
calibration values no longer accurately define the input circuit. For most
applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration of the CUB5I involves a current calibration which should only be
performed by individuals experienced in calibrating electronic equipment.
Allow 30 minute warm up before performing any calibration related procedure.
The following procedures should be performed at an ambient temperature of 15
to 35 °C (59 to 95 °F).
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the CUB5I.

CodE

Current Calibration

FCS

CodE

1. Connect the negative lead of a precision DC current source with an accuracy
of 0.01% or better to the COMM terminal. Leave the positive lead of the DC
current source unconnected.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO
3. Press the RST button to select the range to be calibrated.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 0.0A
5. With the positive lead of the DC current source unconnected, press SEL.
Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
6. When the display reads the selected range, connect the positive lead of the DC
current source to INP+ and apply full-scale input signal for the range. (Note:
For 200 mA range, apply 100 mA as indicated on the display.)
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each input range to be calibrated. When display
reads CAL NO, press the SEL button to exit calibration.

www.redlion.net

6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

dSP-t
ª

DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

0.5

seconds

COLOr
ª

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

rEd

6rn

Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL

yES

NO
DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

d-LEV
ª

dSP

NO
HI

LO
HI-LO

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

CodE
ª

ZERO DISPLAY WITH DISPLAY RESET

yES

dSP

This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

ZErO

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

rSt

000

999

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

ScroL

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

yES

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds. This parameter only appears
when the MAX or MIN displays are enabled.

not

P-Loc

______

UNITS INDICATOR SELECTION

UNItS
ª

OFF

LISt

Active

SEGS

1-99

Full Programming

Not Active

Immediate Access

After Quick Programming
Quick Programming with correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

Programming Lock

No Access

1-99

Quick Programming

No Access

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

P-Loc

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

1-717-767-6511

325

6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU

The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional output
module is installed in the meter.

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSEL

SP-1

SETPOINT 2 ENABLE

YES

SPt-n «
ª 10000

-19999

99999

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

SP-2

Enb-2

SETPOINT VALUE

Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and setpoint 2 is disabled.

HYSTERESIS VALUE

HYS-n
ª

59999

ON TIME DELAY
SETPOINT ACTION

Act-n «
ª HI-Ub

LO-bL

HI-bL

HI-Ub

LO-Ub

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

tON-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

OFF TIME DELAY

tOF-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

OUTPUT RESET ACTION
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

HI-bL

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

LO-bL

rSt-n
ª

Auto

LAtCH

L-dLY

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

326

HI-Ub

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

LO-Ub

the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST

www.redlion.net

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

rEn-n
ª

YES

STANDBY OPERATION

Stb-n

YES

When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and Output Reset Action.

CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/OUTPUT STATE

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

ChC-n

YES

This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.

6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
E

PARAMETER MENU

1-717-767-6511

327

CUB5I PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press and hold SEL button
to enter Programming Mode.

328

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXLI - PAX LITE CURRENT METERS &
MODEL PAXLV - PAX LITE VOLTMETERS
O

FOUR MULTI-RANGE UNITS COVER:
199.9 μA to 1.999 A *, 199.9 mV (AC or DC)
1.999 V to 300 V (AC or DC)

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.

3 1/2-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAY W/POLARITY

BUILT-IN SCALING PROVISIONS

SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINT LOCATION

AUTO ZEROING CIRCUITS

OVER-RANGE INDICATION

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT

Accessory Shunts Available For Higher Current Ranges.

51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

PAX Lite Current and Volt Meters are premium quality instruments designed
for tough industrial applications. With multi-range capability, built-in provision
for scaling, and DIP switch selectable decimal points, these meters offer the
ultimate in application flexibility. Four models cover your voltage and current
indicator needs. The meter can provide direct readout from pressure, speed or
flow transducers, or any other variable that can be translated to voltage or
current. The built-in scaling allows the display to be scaled to the desired
engineering unit.
The 3 ½ -digit bi-polar display (minus sign displayed when current or voltage
is negative) features a 0.56" high, 7-segment LEDs for easy reading. The meter
is also available with custom units label capability. Using the PAX label kit
(PAXLBK30), the selected label is installed behind the panel, keeping it safe
from washdown or other environmental conditions. A DIP switch is used to
control the backlight for the units label.
The meters have a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of
noise effects to CE requirements, allowing the meter to provide a tough yet
reliable application solution.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

SAFETY SUMMARY

DEFINITION OF TERMS
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) I, (CAT I):
Signal level, special equipment or parts of equipment, telecommunication,
electronic, etc. with smaller transient overvoltages than Installation
Category (overvoltage category) II. (See IEC 664 & IEC 61010)
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) II, (CAT II):
Local level, appliances, portable equipment, etc. with smaller transient
overvoltages than Installation Category (overvoltage category) III. (See
IEC 664 & IEC 61010)

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

1-717-767-6511

329

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications. . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Jumpers and Switches

.
.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4
4

Wiring the Meter .
Scaling the Meter
Troubleshooting .
Calibration . . . . .

.
.
.
.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

I - Current Input
V - Voltage Input

E
A - AC Input
D - DC Input

Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

PAXLBK
Accessories

330

APSCM

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK30

10 Amp DC Current Shunt

APSCM010

100 Amp DC Current Shunt

APSCM100

www.redlion.net

.
.
.
.

5
6
7
7

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 3 1/2-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high, 7-segment LED, (-) minus sign
displayed when current or voltage is negative. Decimal points inserted before
1st, 2nd, or 3rd least significant digits by DIP switch selection.
2. POWER: 115/230 VAC, switch selectable. Allowable power line variation
±10%, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA.
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. between input and supply
Working Voltage: 300 V max. , CAT II
3. INPUT RANGES/RESOLUTION: (Selectable by jumper connections.):
AC Voltmeters

AC Current Meters

DC Voltmeters

DC Current Meters

0-1.999 V/1 mV
0-19.99 V/10 mV
0-199.9 V/100 mV
0-300 V/1 V

0-199.9 μA/0.1 μA
0-1.999 mA/1 μA
0-19.99 mA/10 μA
0-199.9 mA/100 μA
0-1.999 A/1 mA
0-199.9 mV/100 μV

±1.999 V/1 mV
±19.99 V/10 mV
±199.9 V/100 mV
±300 V/1 V

±199.9 μA/0.1 μA
±1.999 mA/1 μA
±19.99 mA/10 μA
±199.9 mA/100 μA
±1.999 A/1 mA
±199.9 mV/100 μV

Working Voltage: 300 V max. , CAT II
4. ACCURACY:
AC Voltmeters: ±(0.1% of Reading + 3 digits) (45-500 Hz)
AC Current Meters (45-500 Hz):
199.9 μA/199.9 mV, 1.999 mA, 19.99 mA: ±(0.1% of Reading + 3 digits)
199.9 mA: ±(0.15% of Reading + 3 digits)
1 A: ±(0.5% of Reading + 3 digits)
DC Voltmeters: ±(0.1% of Reading + 1 digit)
DC Current Meters:
199.9 μA/199.9 mV, 1.999 mA, 19.99 mA: ±(0.1% of Reading + 1 digit)
199.9 mA: ±(0.15% of Reading + 1 digit)
1.999 A: ±(0.5% of Reading + 1 digit)
Note: Any individual range may be recalibrated (scaled) to 0.1% accuracy
with appropriate calibration equipment.
5. OVER-RANGE INDICATION: on all modes is indicated by blanking 3
least significant digits.
6. MAX. VOLTAGE ON LOWEST INPUT RANGE: 75 VAC or DC (Both
voltmeters and current meters).
7. MAX. VOLTAGE ON TERMINAL BLOCK: 300 VAC or DC (Both
voltmeters and current meters).
8. MAX. CURRENTS (FOR CURRENT METERS):
199.9 μA through 19.99 mA: 10 times max. range current
199.9 mA: 1 A
1.999 A: 3 A
Caution: In circuits where fault currents can exceed the maximum shunt
current, a fast-blow fuse should be installed in series with the input
signal. Otherwise, a slow blow 10 amp fuse is recommended that will
allow for start-up over current situations, while still protecting the
instrument.
9. TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENTS:
Current meters
DC: ±100 PPM/°C
AC: ±200 PPM/°C

Voltmeters
DC: ±75 PPM/°C
AC: ±150 PPM/°C

10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. RESPONSE TIME TO STEP CHANGE INPUT: 1 sec. nominal
12. READING RATE: 2.5 readings/sec., nominal

13. NORMAL MODE REJECTION: 50 dB 50/60 Hz (DC units only)
14. COMMON MODE REJECTION: 110 dB DC or 50/60 Hz (DC units only)
15. COMMON MODE VOLTAGE (COMM. TO EARTH): 350 volt peak
16. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3
Criterion B
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion B
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle; 40 % variation
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
17. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
18. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 use. Installation
Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel
gasket and mounting clip included.
19. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs. (0.24 Kg)

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)

EXTERNAL CURRENT SHUNTS (APSCM)

Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized
using the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled by a DIP switch.

To measure DC current signals greater than 2 ADC, a shunt must be used. The
APSCM010 current shunt converts a maximum 10 ADC signal into 100.0 mV.
The APSCM100 current shunt converts a maximum 100 ADC signal into 100.0
mV. The continuous current through the shunt is limited to 115% of the rating.

1-717-767-6511

331

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of
the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

The meter has an input jumper and switches, which must be checked and/or
changed prior to applying power. To access the input jumper and switches,
remove the meter base from the case by firmly squeezing and pulling back on
the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the latch below the case slot (which
is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is recommended to release the latch
on one side, then start the other side latch.

SWITCHES

Set-Up DIP Switches
A DIP switch is located inside the meter. It is used for the selection of decimal
points, backlight annunciator, and scaling. Selecting the “ON” position enables
the function.

Power Selection Switch
Caution: Insure the AC power selection switch is set for the
proper voltage before powering the meter. The meter is shipped
from the factory in the 230 VAC position.

SWITCH

FUNCTION

Decimal Point 1 (000.0)

Decimal Point 2 (00.00)

Decimal Point 3 (0.000)

Backlight Annunciator for Units Label

Enables the Scaling Pot

Input Range Jumper
A jumper is used for selection of the voltage or current input range. Select the
proper input range that will be high enough to avoid input signal overload. It is
important that only one jumper position is used at a time. Avoid placing a jumper
across two different input ranges.

PAXLI Jumper Selection
FRONT DISPLAY

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

Main
Circuit
Board

SET-UP
DIP
SWITCHES

POWER SELECTION SWITCH

115

230

AND

INPUT
RANGE
JUMPER

SCALING
POT

REAR TERMINALS

332

www.redlion.net

PAXLV Jumper Selection
FRONT DISPLAY

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

Main
Circuit
Board

indicates factory setting.

115

230

SET-UP
DIP
SWITCHES

POWER
SELECTION
SWITCH

SCALING
POT

INPUT RANGE
JUMPER

REAR TERMINALS

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the meter (AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

1-717-767-6511

333

3.1 POWER WIRING

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING

Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper should be verified for proper position.

AC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

4.0 SCALING

THE

PAXLV
Voltage Signal (self powered)

PAXLI
Current Signal (self powered)

Terminal 4: + Volts DC/AC
Terminal 3: - Volts DC/AC

Terminal 4: + Amps DC/AC
Terminal 3: - Amps DC/AC

METER

PAXLV
DIRECT VOLTMETER READOUT
When the application requires direct voltmeter readout, the Scale Switch
should remain in the “OFF” position. The Input Range Jumper is set to the
voltage range being applied. It is possible to select a range higher than being
applied to get lower resolution. The Decimal Point switches are set to resolution
of the selected Input Range Jumper.

SCALING VOLTMETER READOUT

DIVISION FACTOR RANGE SELECTION CHART
D.F.
Use Input Position
0.1 to 1.2
Pos 1: 0-1.999 VDC
1.2 to 10.5
Pos 2: 0-19.99
10.5 to 100.5
Pos 3: 0-199.9
100.5 to 1300
Pos 4: 0-300

Note: Only one voltage jumper should be selected. Install the jumper before
the voltage signal is applied.

In many industrial applications, a voltmeter is required to display a reading
in terms of PSI, RPM, or some other unit of measure. The signal voltage being
measured can be generated by a transducer that senses the variations and
delivers a linear output voltage. To provide the desired readout at the specified
voltage, the voltmeter must be scaled.
Place the Scale Switch in the “ON” position. This enables the Scale
Potentiometer which is accessible from the back of the meter. (Enabling the
Scale Potentiometer does NOT affect the calibration of the meter.) Place the
Decimal Point Switches to the proper location. To properly set the Input Range
Jumper, the Division Factor must be determined by first using the below formula.
After the Division Factor is calculated, use the Division Factor Range Selection
Chart to choose the proper Input Range Jumper setting. Apply the meter power
and the voltage signal. Adjust the Scale Potentiometer to the desired value.
This scaling only effects the span. There is no offset scaling. This means that
only zero voltage can display a value of zero.

BLOCK DIAGRAM PAXLV

DIVISION FACTOR FORMULA:
VT x D.D.P.
= D.F.
D.R.

WHERE:
VT
D.D.P
D.F.
D.R.

=
=
=
=

D.D.P.
0.000 =
00.00 =
000.0 =
0000 =

Maximum Transducer Output
Display Decimal Point
Division Factor
Desired Reading

1
10
100
1000

EXAMPLE: A relative humidity transducer delivers a 7.0 VDC voltage at a
relative humidity of 75%.
D.F. = VT x D.D.P. = 7.0 x 1000 = 93.3
D.R.
75

The Display Decimal Point
(D.D.P.) is determined by
the desired decimal point
placement in the readout.

After the Division Factor for the application has been calculated, the proper
voltage range jumper can be selected. Use the “Division Factor Range Selection
Chart” to choose the proper jumper setting.

334

This Division Factor is between 10.5 and 100.5, therefore jumper position 3
(199.9 V) is selected. The Scaling Potentiometer is then adjusted for the desired
readout at a known relative humidity.

www.redlion.net

PAXLI
DIRECT CURRENT METER READOUT

BLOCK DIAGRAM PAXLI

When the application requires direct current meter readout, the Scale Switch
should remain in the “OFF” position. The Input Range Jumper is set to the
current range being applied. It is possible to select a range higher than being
applied to get lower resolution. The Decimal Point switches are set to resolution
of the selected Input Range Jumper.

SCALING CURRENT METER READOUT
In many industrial applications, a current meter is required to display a
reading in terms of PSI, RPM, or some other unit of measure. The signal voltage
being measured can be generated by a transducer that senses the variations and
delivers a linear output voltage. To provide the desired readout at the specified
current, the current meter must be scaled.
Place the Scale Switch in the “ON” position. This enables the Scale
Potentiometer which is accessible from the back of the meter. (Enabling the
Scale Potentiometer does NOT affect the calibration of the meter.) Place the
Decimal Point Switches to the proper location. The Input Range Jumper is set
to the current range being applied. Apply the meter power and the current signal.
Adjust the Scale Potentiometer to the desired value. Scaling to obtain a
numerical readout higher than the normal value of the current can also be
accomplished, in most cases, by selecting a lower current range. However, the
maximum current for the range must not be exceeded. (See Specifications for
maximum input currents.)
This scaling only effects the span. There is no offset scaling. This means that
only zero amps can display a value of zero.

EXAMPLE: The Pax Current Meter has been connected to measure a circuit
current to 120.0 mA maximum. However, in this application, the display is to
indicate percent of load current with 120.0 mA equivalent to 100.0 percent.
The scale potentiometer is adjusted to reduce the normal 120.0 mA signal
input display reading of 120.0 to indicate the desired reading of 100.0 on the
display. Scaling to obtain a numerical readout higher than the normal value
of the current can also be accomplished in most cases by selecting a lower
current range. However, the maximum current for the range must not be
exceeded. (See Specifications for maximum input currents.)

5.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

CHECK: Power switch and line voltage

INCORRECT DISPLAY

CHECK: Input jumper position
CHECK: Scaling adjustment pot DIP switch position
ADJUST: Scaling pot
VERIFY: Input Signal

OVER-RANGE INDICATION

CHECK: Input jumper position
VERIFY: Input signal

For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

6.0 CALIBRATION
The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory. Scaling to convert the input
signal to a desired display value is performed by enabling the scale pot DIP
switch. If the meter appears to be indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to
Troubleshooting before attempting to calibrate the meter.
When recalibration is required (generally every 2 years), it should only be
performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment.

Input Calibration
WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source
with an accuracy of 0.01% or better and an external meter with an
accuracy of 0.005% or better.
Before starting, verify that the Input Range Jumper is set for the range to be
calibrated. Also verify that the precision signal source is connected and ready.
Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating the meter.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Place jumper in 2 V range (PAXLV) or 2 mA range (PAXLI).
2. Set the DIP switch off to disable the scaling pot.
3. Apply half scale input signal.
4. Adjust calibration potentiometer as necessary for the display to read 1000
(ignore decimal point).
5. Apply zero signal and ensure display reads zero.
6. Apply full scale signal and ensure display reads 1999.
Note: Any individual range may be recalibrated (scaled) to 0.1% accuracy with
appropriate calibration equipment.

1-717-767-6511

335

MODEL PAXLIT - PAX LITE 5 AMP AC CURRENT METER
z 5 AMP AC CURRENT INPUT*
z 3 1/2-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAY
z SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINT LOCATION
z BUILT-IN SCALING PROVISIONS
z OVER-RANGE INDICATION
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT

Accessory Shunts Available For Higher Current Ranges.

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

PAXLIT 5 Amp AC Current Meter provides the capability of measuring large
AC currents. The internal current shunt in the PAXLIT can measure up to 5
Amps AC current directly. Using an external current transformer, AC currents
of up to 1,999 Amps can be measured and displayed.
The PAXLIT can be scaled, using the scaling potentiometer, to display
between 200 and 1999 when measuring full scale current. Using the DIP switch
selectable decimal points, the display can be customized for direct readout for
practically any application.
The 3½-digit bi-polar display (minus sign displayed when current is
negative) features a 0.56" high, 7-segment LEDs for easy reading. The meter is
also available with custom units label capability. Using the PAX label kit
(PAXLBK30), the selected label is installed behind the panel, keeping it safe
from washdown or other environmental conditions. A DIP switch is used to
control the backlight for the units label.
The meters have a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of
noise effects to CE requirements, allowing the meter to provide a tough yet
reliable application solution.

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

336

SAFETY SUMMARY

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Setting the Switches . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4
4

Wiring the Meter .
Scaling the Meter
Application . . . . .
Troubleshooting .
Calibration . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

5
5
6
6
6

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

IT - 5 Amp Current Meter

Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

PAXLBK
Accessories
Accessories

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK30

50:5 Amp Current Transformer

CT005050

200:5 Amp Current Transformer

CT020050

1-717-767-6511

337

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 3 1/2-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high, 7-segment LED. Decimal points
inserted before 1st, 2nd, or 3rd least significant digits by DIP switch selection.
2. POWER: 115/230 VAC, switch selectable. Allowable power line variation
±10%, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA.
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. between input and supply
Working Voltage: 300 V max., CAT II
3. SIGNAL INPUT:
Range: 0 to 5 Amps AC @ 45 to 400 Hz
Resolution: 2.5 mA
Working Voltage: 300 V max., CAT II
4. ACCURACY: ±(0.5% of reading + 5 digits).
5. OVER-RANGE INDICATION: is indicated by blanking 3 least significant
digits.
6. MAX SHUNT CURRENT: 50 Amps for 1 sec.; 8 Amps continuous.
Caution: In circuits where fault currents can exceed the maximum shunt
current, a fast-blow fuse should be installed in series with the input signal.
Otherwise, a slow blow 8 Amp fuse is recommended that will allow for
start-up over current situations, while still protecting the instrument.
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. RESPONSE TIME TO STEP CHANGE INPUT: 1 sec. nominal
9. READING RATE: 2.5 readings/sec., nominal
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion B
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion B
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle; 40 % variation
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
11. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
12. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 use. Installation
Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel
gasket and mounting clip included.
13. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs. (0.24 Kg)

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized
using the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled by a DIP switch.

338

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of
the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 SETTING

THE

SWITCHES

The meter has switches, which must be checked and/or changed prior to
applying power. To access the switch, remove the meter base from the case by
firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower
the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It
is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

Power Selection Switch
Caution: Insure the AC power selection switch is set for the
proper voltage before powering the meter. The meter is shipped
from the factory in the 230 VAC position.

FRONT DISPLAY

Main
Circuit
Board

SET-UP
DIP
SWITCHES

Set-Up DIP Switches

FUNCTION

Decimal Point 1 (000.0)

Decimal Point 2 (00.00)

Decimal Point 3 (0.000)

Backlight Annunciator for Units Label

Enables the Scaling Pot

115

SWITCH

230

A DIP switch is located inside the meter. It is used for the selection of decimal
points, backlight annunciator, and scaling. Selecting the “ON” position enables
the function.

POWER SELECTION
SWITCH
SCALING
POT

REAR TERMINALS

1-717-767-6511

339

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the meter (AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

3.1 POWER WIRING
E

4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING

AC Power

Current Signal (self powered)

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 4: + Amps AC
Terminal 3: - Amps AC

4.0 SCALING

THE

METER

FACTORY SCALING

SCALING READOUT

The meter is calibrated from the factory for 5 Amps AC current input to show
1999. This scaling will be used when the Scale Switch is in the “OFF” position.

Place the Scale Switch in the “ON” position. This enables the Scale
Potentiometer which is accessible from the back of the meter. (Enabling the
Scale Potentiometer does NOT affect the calibration of the meter.) Place the
Decimal Point Switches to the proper location. Apply the meter power and the
current signal. Adjust the Scale Potentiometer to the desired value.
This scaling only effects the span. There is no offset scaling. This means that
only zero current can display a value of zero.
At 5 Amps AC current input, the display can be scaled from 1999 down to
200 by using the scaling potentiometer. For display values below 200, turn on
the appropriate Decimal Point Switch and then adjust the potentiometer to
achieve the desired display value. Example: A customer wants to display 50
Amps because he is using a 50:5 CT. In this case, he must turn DIP switch 1 on
for a decimal point and DIP switch 5 on for scaling. Then apply the 5 Amp
signal and turn the scaling pot until 50.0 is shown on the display.

340

www.redlion.net

5.0 APPLICATION
MOTOR CURRENT MEASUREMENT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER

USING

The PAXLIT 5 Amp AC Current Meter is configured by simply connecting
the “COMM.” (Terminal 3) and the “5AMP” (Terminal 4) to the external
current transformer. The current carrying wire to be sensed is passed through the
center of the current transformer. The resolution of the display, in this case, is
0.1 Amp, therefore, “Switch #1” is selected.
The meter is now ready to be scaled. The installer has access to a calibrated
portable digital current meter capable of measuring the motor current. Scaling
will be accomplished by adjusting the scaling pot on the PAXLIT meter to agree
with the portable digital current meter. The operator turns on the AC motor and
lifts a large weight to load the motor. The installer then simply adjusts the
scaling adjustment, located at the rear of the unit, until the display is equal to
the value indicated on the portable current meter. The meter will now indicate
the load current of the motor precisely.

CAUTION: It is recommended that the current transformer be
internally protected or that a voltage clamping circuit be provided,
preventing dangerous high voltage across the CT secondary
windings in case of accidental opening of the secondary output
leads when the primary is energized.
In order to prevent risk of electric shock ensure CT is installed
according to local NEC regulations for installation of current
instrument transformers.

6.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

CHECK: Power switch and line voltage

INCORRECT DISPLAY

CHECK: Scaling adjustment pot DIP switch position
ADJUST: Scaling pot
VERIFY: Input Signal

OVER-RANGE INDICATION

VERIFY: Input signal

For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

7.0 CALIBRATION
The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory. Scaling to convert the input
signal to a desired display value is performed by enabling the scale pot DIP
switch. If the meter appears to be indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to
Troubleshooting before attempting to calibrate the meter.
When recalibration is required (generally every two years), it should only be
performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment.

Input Calibration
WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source
with an accuracy of 0.05% or better and an external meter with
an accuracy of 0.005% or better.
Before starting, verfiy that the precision signal source is connected and ready.
Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating the meter.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Set the DIP switch off to disable the scaling pot.
2. Apply half scale input signal.
3. Adjust calibration potentiometer as necessary for the display to read 1000
(ignore decimal point)
4. Apply zero signal and ensure display reads zero.
5. Apply full scale signal and ensure display reads 1999.

1-717-767-6511

341

MODEL PAXLHV - PAX LITE AC VOLTAGE MONITOR

3-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED DISPLAY

AUTO ZEROING CIRCUIT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT

UP TO 600 VAC MAX

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Model PAXLHV is designed for AC voltage monitoring. The half-wave
rectified input signal is calibrated to indicate the RMS value of a pure
sinusoidal wave-form. The front bezel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements
when properly installed.

SAFETY SUMMARY

DEFINITION OF TERMS
CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) I:
Signal level, special equipment or parts of equipment, telecommunication,
electronic, etc. with smaller transient overvoltages than Installation
Category (overvoltage category) II.
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) II:
Local level, appliances, portable equipment, etc. with smaller transient
overvoltages than Installation Category (overvoltage category) III.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

342

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Meter Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Setting the Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

HV - AC Voltage Input

Accessories Part Number
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Accessories

PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK30

1-717-767-6511

343

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 3-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high character, 7-segment Red LED
2. POWER: 115 or 230 VAC, switch selectable. Allowable power line variation
±10%, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to input
Working Voltage: 300 V max., CAT II
3. ACCURACY: At 23°C, 85% R.H.; ±(0.1% of Reading + 2 digits)
4. INPUT IMPEDANCE: 1 MΩ
5. INPUT RANGE: 0 to 600 VAC max. @ 45 to 500 Hz. Installation Category I
6. RESOLUTION: 1 VAC
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40° to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Temperature Coefficient: ±150 PPM/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. READING RATE: 400 msec., nominal
9. RESPONSE TIME: 1 sec. nominal for a step change input.
10. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL3101-1, CSA C22.2 No.
1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL/7470/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #03ME09282-08292003
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3
Criterion B
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle; 40 % variation
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
11. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
12. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 use. Installation
Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel
Gasket and mounting clip included.
13. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs. (0.24 Kg)

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized
using the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled by a DIP switch.

344

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the
back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the
unit into the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 SETTING

THE

SWITCHES

The meter has a switch, which must be checked and/or changed prior to
applying power. To access the switch, remove the meter base from the case by
firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower
the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It
is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

FRONT DISPLAY
Main
Circuit
Board

Power Selection Switch

Caution: Insure the AC power selection switch is set for the
proper voltage before powering-up the meter. The meter is shipped
from the factory in the 230 VAC position.

SET-UP
DIP
SWITCHES

SWITCH

FUNCTION

Decimal Point 1 (000.0)

Decimal Point 2 (00.00)

Decimal Point 3 (0.000)

Backlight Annunciator for Units Label

230

A DIP switch is located inside the meter. It is used for the selection of decimal
points and backlight annunciator. Selecting the “ON” position enables the
function.

115

Set-Up DIP Switches
POWER SELECTION
SWITCH

REAR TERMINALS

1-717-767-6511

345

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

BLOCK DIAGRAM

The PAX Lite AC Voltage Monitor incorporates a built-in precision
voltage divider that provides direct measurement from 0 to 600 VAC.

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for
various installations. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very
important and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome
installation. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation
in an industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, that is properly connected
to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the meter is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.

4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VB3
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

3.1 POWER WIRING

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING

Primary AC power is connected to terminal 1 and 2 (Marked AC Power,
located on the left-hand side of the terminal block). For best results, the AC
power should be relatively “Clean” and within the specified ±10% variation
limit. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits or from circuits that also
power loads that cycle on and off, should be avoided.

Input connections are made on terminal 5 and 8. When powering the
PAXLHV with the same voltage that is being measured, terminal 5 (COMM.)
should be connected to neutral for the most stable reading on the display. If an
unstable display results from measuring a voltage that is isolated from the supply
voltage, reversing the supply voltage connections may correct this condition.

AC Power

Voltage Input

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 5: Common
Terminal 8: 600 VAC

346

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXLA - PAX LITE DC VOLT/CURRENT/PROCESS METER
z 5 DIGIT, 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING AND DECIMAL POINTS
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z DUAL 5 AMP FORM C RELAY
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNIT OVERLAY W/ BACKLIGHT
z MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DISPLAY CAPTURE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The PAXLA is a versatile meter available as a DC volt, current, or process
meter with scaling and dual Form C relay outputs. The meter is programmed
through the front panel buttons and the use of jumpers. The RST Key will also
function as a front panel display reset.
Once the front panel programming is complete, the buttons can be disabled
by a user input setting. The meter has been specifically designed for harsh
industrial environments. With a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive
testing to meet CE requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable
application solution.

1. DISPLAY: 5 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) intensity adjustable Red LED (-19999 to
99999)
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC POWER: 50 to 250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 12 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs
DC POWER: 21.6 to 250 VDC, 6 W
DC Out: +24 VDC @ 100 mA if input voltage is greater than 50 VAC/VDC
+24 VDC @ 50 mA if input voltage is less than 50 VDC
3. INPUT RANGES: Jumper Selectable
D.C. Voltages: 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 10 V

INPUT
RANGE

ACCURACY @
INPUT
23 °C LESS
IMPEDANCE
THAN 85% RH

200 mV

0.1% of span

1.033 MΩ

0.1% of span

1.033 MΩ

20 V

0.1% of span

200 V
10 V

MAX
INPUT
SIGNAL

RESOLUTION

TEMP.
COEFFICIENT

75 VDC

10 μV

70 ppm /°C

75 VDC

0.1 mV

70 ppm /°C

1.033 MΩ

250 VDC

1 mV

70 ppm /°C

0.1% of span

1.033 MΩ

250 VDC

10 mV

70 ppm /°C

0.1% of span

538 KΩ

75 V

1 mV

70 ppm /°C

RESOLUTION

TEMP.
COEFFICIENT

D.C. Currents: 200 μA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

PAXLA
PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

ACCURACY @
23 °C LESS
THAN 85% RH

INPUT
IMPEDANCE

MAX
INPUT
SIGNAL

10 nA
200 μΑ 0.1% of span 1.111 KΩ 15 mA
0.1 μA
0.1% of span
50 mA
2 mA
111 Ω
1 μA
150 mA
20 mA 0.1% of span 11 Ω
10 μA
500 mA
200 mA 0.1% of span 1 Ω
D.C. Process: 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 VDC, 0/1 to 10 VDC

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

INPUT
RANGE

PART NUMBER

Volt/Current/Process Meter with dual Relay Output

PAXLA000

Unit Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK10

INPUT RANGE

70 ppm /°C
70 ppm /°C
70 ppm /°C
70 ppm /°C

SELECT RANGE

4 - 20 mA

Use the 20 mA range

1 - 5 VDC

Use the 10V range

1 - 10 VDC

Use the 10V range

4. OVERRANGE/UNDERRANGE INDICATION:
Input Overrange Indication: “OLOL”.
Input Underrange Indication: “ULUL”.
Display Overrange/Underrange Indication: “.....”/“-.....”
5. A/D CONVERTER: 16 bit resolution
6. UPDATE RATES:
A/D conversion rate: 20 readings/sec.
Display update: 500 msec min.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1-717-767-6511

347

7. USER INPUT:
User Input: Software selectable pull-up (24.7 KΩ) or pull-down resistor
(20 KΩ) that determines active high or active low input logic.
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 100 msec debounce (activation and release)
8. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters when
power is removed.
9. OUTPUT:
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8
H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters
11. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
12. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use. IP20
Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50

1.0 INSTALLING
Installation

THE

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Surge

EN 61000-4-5

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Voltage dip/interruptions

EN 61000-4-11

Emissions:
Emissions

EN 55011

Class A

Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
14. WEIGHT: 10.4 oz. (295 g)

METER

The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment

PANEL CUT-OUT

348

Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Criterion A
10 V/m
Criterion B
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Criterion A
0.5 cycle

www.redlion.net

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

INPUT RANGE JUMPER
This jumper is used to select the proper input range. The input range selected
in programming must match the jumper setting. Select a range that is high
enough to accommodate the maximum signal input to avoid overloads.
To access the jumpers, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start on the other side latch.
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing
inside of the meter.

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be properly connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.

4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

1-717-767-6511

349

3.1 POWER WIRING
DC Out Power

Power

Terminal 3: + 24 VDC OUT
Terminal 4: Common

Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC -

3.2 USER INPUT WIRING
Sinking Logic

Terminal 8: User Input
Terminal 9: User Comm

Sourcing Logic

3.3 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
Terminal 10: NC 1
Terminal 11: NO 1
Terminal 12: Relay 1 Common
Terminal 13: NC 2
Terminal 14: NO 2
Terminal 15: Relay 2 Common

E
3.4 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
CAUTION: Analog common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the Analog and DC power common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or
input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may be present at the User Input and
Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of the input common with respect
to earth ground. Always connect the analog signal common to terminal 7.

Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Current Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 5: +VDC
Terminal 7: -VDC

Terminal 6: +ADC
Terminal 7: -ADC

Terminal 3: +EXC
Terminal 6: +ADC

Terminal 6: +ADC (signal)
Terminal 7: -ADC (common)
Terminal 3: +EXC

Voltage Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)
Terminal 5: +VDC (signal)
Terminal 7: -VDC (common)
Terminal 3: +EXC

350

www.redlion.net

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

BUTTON DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

AND

DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

SEL

Index display through selected displays

Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value

RST

Resets display

Increment selected digit of parameter value

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“SP1” - Below the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“SP2” - Below the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

E
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR BUTTON)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR button. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a
security code or a hardware lock.

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the PAR button with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and return
the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to the
Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & PAR BUTTONS)
The Programming Menu is organized into four modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
Pro and the present module. The SEL button is used to select the desired module.
The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR button.

PROGRAMMING TIPS
It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module in
sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user input
or programming security code.

FACTORY SETTINGS

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The SEL and RST buttons are used to move
through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR button, stores
and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the
next parameter.
For numeric values, the value is displayed with one digit flashing (initially the
right most digit). Pressing the RST button increments the digit by one or the user
can hold the RST button and the digit will automatically scroll. The SEL button
will select the next digit to the left. Pressing the PAR button will enter the value
and move to the next parameter.

Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful when
encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

1-717-767-6511

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

USrIN

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

351

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU

SCALING STYLE

INPUT RANGE

rAN6E
ª

200v

RANGE
SELECTION
RESOLUTION

200uA
0.002A
0.2u
2u
10u

RANGE
SELECTION
RESOLUTION

200.00 μA

0.02A
0.2A
20u
200u

2.0000 mA
200.00 mV
2.0000 V

20.000 mA
200.00 mA
20.000 V
200.00 V

10.000 V

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

0.00

Select the decimal point location for the Input, MIN and MAX displays. This
selection also affects the dSP1 and dSP2 parameters and setpoint values and offset
value..

ª
E

0.00

INP 1

0,1 2 3

FILTER BAND

bANd

0 to 29999

0.00

-19999 to 99999

0.00

Enter the first Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the same
for KEY and APLY scaling styles. The decimal point follows the dECPt selection.

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

INP 2 «
ª 100.00

0 to 29999

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

dSP 2 «
ª 100.00

-19999 to 99999

Enter the second Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the
same for KEY and APLY scaling styles. The decimal point follows the dECPt
selection.

0 to 199 display units

352

KEy

dSP 1

-19999 to 19999

FILTER SETTING

APLY

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

FILtr

KEy

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

OFSEt

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

dECPt

StYLE

General Notes on Scaling

www.redlion.net

USER INPUT FUNCTION

USrIN

U-ASN
ª

DISPLAY MODE

HI
LO

dSP

HI-LO
dSP

DESCRIPTION

NO
P-Loc
ZErO

No Function

rESEt

Reset (Edge triggered)

d-HLd

Display Hold

d-SEL
d-LEV
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out
Zero Input
(Edge triggered)

See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Zero the Input Display value causing
Display Reading to be Offset.
Resets the assigned value(s) to the current
input value.
Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).

Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)

Select the value(s) to which the User Input Function is assigned. The User
Input Assignment only applies if a selection of reset, or display hold is selected
in the User Input Function menu.

USER INPUT ACTIVE LEVEL

U-Act

Select whether the user input is configured as active low or active high.

Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation.

Setpoint 1 Reset

Resets setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset

Resets setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU

HI-En

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

YES

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

HI-t

2.0

yES

Select yES to perform any of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

LO-En

FCS

CodE

VIEW MODEL AND VERSION DISPLAY

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press the PAR button to exit the module.

YES

CodE

Entering Code 50 will display the version (x.x) of the
meter. The display then returns to CodE 00. Press the PAR
button to exit the module.

Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

CALIBRATION

LO-t

2.0

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

The PAXLA uses stored calibration values to provide
accurate measurements. Over time, the electrical
characteristics of the components inside the PAXLA will
slowly change with the result that the stored calibration
values no longer accurately define the input circuit. For most applications,
recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration of the PAXLA involves a calibration which should only be
performed by individuals experienced in calibrating electronic equipment. Allow
30 minute warm up before performing any calibration related procedure. The
following procedures should be performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to 35
°C (59 to 95 °F).
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the PAXLA.

CodE

1-717-767-6511

353

Current Calibration

Voltage Calibration

1. Connect the negative lead of a precision DC current source with an accuracy
of 0.01% or better to the COMM terminal. Leave the positive lead of the DC
current source unconnected.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press the PAR button. Unit will display CAL NO
3. Press the RST button to select the range to be calibrated.
4. Press the PAR button. Display reads 0.0A
5. With the positive lead of the DC current source unconnected, press PAR.
Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
6. When the display reads the selected range, connect the positive lead of the
DC
current source to the current input and apply full-scale input signal for the
range. (Note: For 200 mA range, apply 100 mA as indicated on the display.)
Press PAR. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each input range to be calibrated. When display
reads CAL NO, press the PAR button to exit calibration.

1. Connect a precision DC voltage source with an accuracy of 0.01% or better
to the volt input and COMM terminals of the PAXLA. Set the output of the
voltage source to zero.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press the PAR button. Unit will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button to select the range to be calibrated.
4. Press the PAR button. Display reads 0.0v.
5. With the voltage source set to zero (or a dead short applied to the input), press
PAR. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
6. When the display reads the selected range, apply full-scale input signal for the
range. (Note: For 200V range, apply 100V as indicated on the display.) Press
PAR. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each input range to be calibrated. When display
reads CAL NO, press the PAR button to exit calibration

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

dSP-t
ª

0.5

seconds

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

ScroL

yES

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds. This parameter only appears
when the MAX or MIN displays are enabled.

E
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL

yES

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT*

yES

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

b-LIt «
ª
OFF

OFF

The Units Label Kit Accessory contains a sheet of custom unit overlays
which can be installed in to the meter’s bezel display assembly. The backlight
for these custom units is activated by this parameter.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

rSt
ª

dSP

NO
HI

LO
HI-LO

dSP

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

yES

354

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-3). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed.

ZERO DISPLAY WITH DISPLAY RESET

ZErO

d-LEV

www.redlion.net

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

CodE
ª

000

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “PAR”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

999

not

______

P-Loc

Active

Full Programming

Immediate Access

After Quick Programming
Quick Programming with correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

1-99
100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

Programming Lock

No Access

1-99

Quick Programming

No Access

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

P-Loc
Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSEL

SP-1

SP-2

High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

SETPOINT ENABLE

Enb-n

YES

SPt-n «
ª 001.00

LO-bL

HI-Ub

99999

HYSTERESIS VALUE

HYS-n

LO-Ub

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub

-19999

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

SETPOINT ACTION

HI-bL

LO-Ub

SETPOINT VALUE

Select YES to enable Setpoint n and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and Setpoint n is disabled.

Act-n «
ª HI-Ub

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

HI-Ub

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

59999

High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

HI-bL

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

LO-bL

1-717-767-6511

355

ON TIME DELAY

tON-n
ª

0.0

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

rEn-n

599.9 Sec

0.0

OFF TIME DELAY

tOF-n

0.0

Auto

LAtCH

YES

When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and Output Reset Action.

L-dLY

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

at the trigger points per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output
Figures. The “on” output may be manually reset (off) immediately by the
front panel RST button or user input.The output remains off until the trigger
point is crossed again.

LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, or meter power cycle. When the user input
or RST button is activated (momentary action), the corresponding “on” output
is reset immediately and remains off until the trigger point is crossed again.
(Previously latched alarms will be off if power up Display Value is lower than
setpoint value.)
L-dLY = Latch with delay reset action; This action latches the output on at the
trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures. Latch
means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST button or
user input manual reset, or meter power cycle. When the user input or RST
button is activated (momentary action), the meter delays the event until the
corresponding “on” output crosses the trigger off point. (Previously latched
outputs are off if power up Display Value is lower than setpoint value. During
a power cycle, the meter erases a previous L-dLY reset if it is not activated at
power up.)

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

356

YES

Stb-n

Auto = Automatic action; This action allows the output to automatically reset off

YES

STANDBY OPERATION

OUTPUT RESET ACTION

599.9 Sec

rSt-n

www.redlion.net

PAXLA PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press PAR key to enter
Programming Mode.

1-717-767-6511

357

MODEL DP5 – 1/8 DIN ANALOG INPUT PANEL METERS

UL
R

PROCESS, VOLTAGE, CURRENT, AND TEMPERATURE INPUTS

5-DIGIT 0.56" HIGH LED DISPLAY

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUT

9 DIGIT TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) WITH BATCHING

OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT

NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The DP5 Panel Meters offer many features and performance capabilities to
suit a wide range of industrial applications. These meters are available in three
different models to handle various analog inputs, including DC Voltage/Current,
Process, and Temperature Inputs. Refer to pages 4 and 5 for the details on the
specific models.
The meters provide a MAX and MIN reading memory with programmable
capture time. The capture time is used to prevent detection of false max or min
readings which may occur during start-up or unusual process events.
The signal totalizer (integrator) can be used to compute a time-input product.
This can be used to provide a readout of totalized flow, calculate service
intervals of motors or pumps, etc. The totalizer can also accumulate batch
weighing operations.
Once the meters have been initially configured, the parameter list may be
locked out from further modification.
The meters have been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise effects to CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

358

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications. . . . . . .
Universal DC Input Panel Meter . . . .
Process Input Panel Meter . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple and RTD Input Meter .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2
3
4
4
5
5
6

Setting the Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display . . . 9
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Factory Service Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Parameter Value Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Programming Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

DP5

D - DC Volt/Current Input
P - Process Input
T - Thermocouple and RTD Input

E
0 - Red LED Display
0 - 85 to 250 VAC
1 - 11 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC

Accessories Part Number
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Accessories

PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory (Not required for DP5T)

1-717-767-6511

PAXLBK10

359

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 5 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) red LED, (-19999 to 99999)
2. POWER:
AC Versions:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs.
DC Versions:
DC Power: 11 to 36 VDC, 11 W
AC Power: 24 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs (50 V working).
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
MAX - maximum readout selected
MIN - minimum readout selected
TOT - totalizer readout selected, flashes when total overflows
Units Label - optional units label backlight
4. KEYPAD: 3 programmable function keys, 5 keys total
5. A/D CONVERTER: 16 bit resolution
6. UPDATE RATES:
A/D conversion rate: 10 readings/sec.
Step response: 200 msec. max. to within 99% of final readout value
(digital filter and internal zero correction disabled)
700 msec. max. (digital filter disabled, internal zero correction enabled)
Display update rate: 1 to 10 updates/sec.
Max./Min. capture delay time: 0 to 3275 sec.
7. DISPLAY MESSAGES:
“OLOL” - Appears when measurement exceeds + signal range.
“ULUL” - Appears when measurement exceeds - signal range
DP5T: “OPEN” - Appears when open sensor is detected.
DP5T: “SHrt” - Appears when shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
“. . . .” - Appears when display values exceed + display range.
“- . . .” - Appears when display values exceed - display range.
8. INPUT CAPABILITIES: See specific product specifications, pages 4-5
9. EXCITATION POWER: See specific product specifications, pages 4-5
10. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode: > 60 dB @ 50 or 60 Hz ±1%, digital filter off
Common Mode: >100 dB, DC to 120 Hz
11. USER INPUT: One software defined user input
Max. Continuous Input: 30 VDC
Isolation To Sensor Input Common: Not isolated. Do not tie commons together.
Response Time : 50 msec. max.
Logic State: Jumper selectable for sink/source logic
INPUT STATE

SINKING INPUTS
Ω pull-up to +5 V
22 KΩ

SOURCING INPUTS
Ω pull-down
22 KΩ

Active

VIN < 0.9 VDC

VIN > 3.6 VDC

Inactive

VIN > 3.6 VDC

VIN < 0.9 VDC

12. TOTALIZER:
Time Base: second, minute, hour, or day
Time Accuracy: 0.01% typical
Decimal Point: 0 to 0.0000
Scale Factor: 0.001 to 65.000
Low Signal Cut-out: -19,999 to 99,999
Total: 9 digits, display alternates between high order and low order readouts
13. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters
and display values.

360

14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH non-condensing
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
15. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
DP5T Only: File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part I
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ±5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Measurement input signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or equivalent)
I/O and power cables are routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the bulletin for additional
information.
16. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
17. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
18. WEIGHT: 7 oz. (200 g)

www.redlion.net

MODEL DP5D - UNIVERSAL DC INPUT
O

FOUR VOLTAGE RANGES (300 VDC Max)

FIVE CURRENT RANGES (2A DC Max)

24 VDC TRANSMITTER POWER

DP5D SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT RANGES:
INPUT
RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

0.03% of reading
+0.03 μA
0.03% of reading
±2 mADC
+0.3 μA
0.03% of reading
±20 mADC
+3μA
0.05% of reading
±200 mADC
+30 μA
0.5% of reading
±2 ADC
+0.3 mA
0.03% of reading
±200 mVDC
+30 μV
0.03% of reading
±2 VDC
+0.3 mV
0.03% of reading
±20 VDC
+3 mV
0.05% of reading
±300 VDC
+30 mV
±200 μADC

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

IMPEDANCE/
COMPLIANCE

0.12% of reading
+0.04μA
0.12% of reading
+0.4 μA
0.12% of reading
+4 μA
0.15% of reading
+40 μA
0.7% of reading
+0.4 mA
0.12% of reading
+40 μV
0.12% of reading
+0.4 mV
0.12% of reading
+4 mV
0.15% of reading
+40 mV

MAX
CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

1.11 Kohm

15 mA

10 nA

111 ohm

50 mA

0.1 μA

11.1 ohm

150 mA

1 μA

1.1 ohm

500 mA

10 μA

0.1 ohm

0.1 mA

1.066 Mohm

100 V

10 μV

1.066 Mohm

300 V

0.1 mV

1.066 Mohm

300 V

1 mV

1.066 Mohm

300 V

10 mV

MODEL DP5P - PROCESS INPUT
O

DUAL RANGE INPUT (20 mA or 10 VDC)

24 VDC TRANSMITTER POWER

DP5P SPECIFICATIONS
SENSOR INPUTS:
INPUT
(RANGE)

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

MAX
IMPEDANCE/
DISPLAY
CONTINUOUS
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

0.03% of
0.12% of
20 mA
(-2 to 26 mA) reading +2 μA reading +3 μA

20 ohm

150 mA

1 μA

10 VDC
0.03% of
0.12% of
(-1 to 13 VDC) reading +2 mV reading +3 mV

500 Kohm

300 V

1 mV

1-717-767-6511

361

MODEL DP5T - THERMOCOUPLE

AND

RTD INPUT

THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS

CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS

TIME-TEMPERATURE INTEGRATOR

DP5T SPECIFICATIONS
READOUT:
Resolution: Variable: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1, 2, or 5 degree
Scale: F or C
Offset Range: -19,999 to 99,999 display units
THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.03μV/ohm
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 V

INPUT
TYPE

RANGE

ACCURACY* ACCURACY*
STANDARD
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)

-200 to 400°C
-270 to -200°C

1.2°C
**

2.1°C

-200 to 871°C
-270 to -200°C

1.0°C
**

2.4°C

-200 to 760°C

1.1°C

2.3°C

-200 to 1372°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.4°C

-50 to 1768°C

1.9°C

-50 to 1768°C

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

BS 1843

ITS-90

(+) blue
(-) red

(+) white
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) purple (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) white
(-) red

ITS-90

(+) yellow (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

1.9°C

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

100 to 300°C
300 to 1820°C

3.9°C
2.8°C

5.7°C
4.4°C

ITS-90

no
standard

-200 to 1300°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.1°C

ITS-90

(+) orange (+) orange
(-) red
(-) blue

C
(W5/W26)

0 to 2315°C

1.9°C

6.1°C

ASTM no
E988-90*** standard

(+) yellow
(-) blue

no
standard

*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an
18 to 28°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0
to 85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco and ice point tracking effects. The
specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization conformity, and
thermocouple ice point compensation. Total system accuracy is the sum of meter
and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the meter readout
at the temperature of interest.
** The accuracy over the interval -270 to -200°C is a function of temperature,
ranging from 1°C at -200°C and degrading to 7°C at -270°C. Accuracy may be
improved by field calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.
*** These curves have been corrected to ITS-90.

RTD INPUTS:
Type: 3 or 4 wire, 2 wire can be compensated for lead wire resistance
Excitation current: 100 ohm range: 165 μA
10 ohm range: 2.6 mA
Lead resistance: 100 ohm range: 10 ohm/lead max.
10 ohm range: 3 ohms/lead max.
Max. continuous overload: 30 V
INPUT TYPE

100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .003919
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-80 to 260°C

0.2°C

0.5°C

-100 to 260°C

0.4°C

0.9°C

STANDARD
***

IEC 751
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard

DIRECT READOUT:
Input range: -10 to 65 mV
0 to 400 ohms, high range
0 to 25 ohms, low range
Display range: -19999 to 99999
INPUT TYPE

RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

Direct
mV range
Direct
100 ohm range
Direct
10 ohm range

-10 to 65mV
(1 μV res.)
0 to 400 Ω
(10 MΩ res.)
0 to 25 Ω
(1 MΩ res.)

0.02% of reading
+ 4μV
0.02% of reading
+ 0.04 Ω
0.04% of reading
+ 0.005 Ω

0.12% of reading
+ 5μV
0.12% of reading
+ 0.05 Ω
0.20% of reading
+ 0.007 Ω

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK) - Not required for DP5T
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized
using the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled in the programming.
Each DP5T meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels which can be
installed into the meter’s bezel display assembly.

362

RANGE

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING THE METER
Installation
The DP5 meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when properly
installed. The unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare
the panel cutout to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the
unit. Slide the panel gasket over the rear
of the unit to the back of the bezel. The
unit should be installed fully
assembled.
Insert
the
unit into the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel
latch should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a
proper seal, tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel
(Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate
the keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

The meter can have up to two jumpers that must be checked and / or changed
prior to applying power. The two jumpers are: Input Range and User Input
Logic. The following Jumper Selection Figures show an enlargement of the
jumper area.
To access the jumpers, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

User Input Logic Jumper
This jumper selects the logic state of the user input. If the user input is not
used, it is not necessary to check or move this jumper.

DP5D Jumper Selection
Input Range Jumper

One jumper is used for voltage or current input ranges. Select the proper
input range high enough to avoid input signal overload. Only one jumper is
allowed in this area. Do not have a jumper in both the voltage and current
ranges at the same time. Avoid placing the jumper across two ranges.

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.
Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER LOCATIONS
CURRENT
VOLT/
OHM

1-717-767-6511

USER INPUT

363

DP5P Jumper Selection
Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

USER INPUT
JUMPER
LOCATION

DP5T Jumper Selection
RTD Input Jumper

One jumper is used for RTD input ranges. Select the proper range to match the RTD
probe being used. It is not necessary to remove this jumper when not using RTD probes.

Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

JUMPER
LOCATION

RTD
INPUT

3.0 WIRING
E

USER INPUT

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).

364

indicates factory setting.

c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

www.redlion.net

3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
DP5D INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper should be verified for proper position.

Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Current Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 5: -VDC

Terminal 4: +ADC
Terminal 5: -ADC

Terminal 4: -ADC
Terminal 6: +ADC

Terminal 4: +ADC (signal)
Terminal 5: -ADC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply

Voltage Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)
Terminal 3: +VDC (signal)
Terminal 5: -VDC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply

CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated from user
input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the sensor input common must be suitably isolated
from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or input
common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous live voltage may be present at the User Input and
User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations
must then be given to the potential of the user input common
with respect to earth common.

Potentiometer Signal
(3 wire requiring excitation)
Terminal 3: Wiper
Terminal 5: Low end of pot.
Terminal 6: High end of pot.
Input Range Jumper: 300 Volt
Module 1 Input Range: 300 Volt
Note: The Apply signal scaling style
should be used because the signal will
be in volts.

DP5P INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Current Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 5: -VDC

Terminal 4: +ADC
Terminal 5: -ADC

Terminal 4: -ADC
Terminal 6: +ADC

Terminal 4: +ADC (signal)
Terminal 5: -ADC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply

Voltage Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)
Terminal 3: +VDC (signal)
Terminal 5: -VDC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply

CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous live voltage may be present at the User Input and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the
potential of the user input common with respect to earth common.

1-717-767-6511

365

DP5T INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Thermocouple

3-Wire RTD

2-Wire RTD

CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated
from user input common. In order to preserve the
safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous
live earth referenced voltages; or input common
must be at protective earth ground potential. If
not, hazardous live voltage may be present at the
User Input and User Input Common terminals.
Appropriate considerations must then be given to
the potential of the user input common with
respect to earth common.

3.3 USER INPUT WIRING

Before connecting the wires, the User Input Logic Jumper should be verified for proper position. If not using the User Input then skip this section.

Sinking Logic

Sourcing Logic

Terminal 8:
Terminal 7:

Terminal 8: + VDC thru external switching device
Terminal 7: -VDC thru external switching device

}

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Comm.

In this logic, the user input of the meter is
internally pulled down to 0 V with 22 K
resistance. The input is active when a voltage
greater than 3.6 VDC is applied.

In this logic, the user input of the meter
is internally pulled up to +5 V with 22 K
resistance. The input is active when it is
pulled low (<0 .9 V).

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

DSP

Index display through max/min/total/input readouts

Quit programming and return to display mode

PAR

Access parameter list

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

F1V

Function key 1; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 1**

Increment selected parameter value

F2W

Function key 2; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 2**

Decrement selected parameter value

RST

Reset (Function key)**

Hold with F1V, F2W to scroll value by x1000

* Display Readout Legends may be locked out in Factory Settings.
** Factory setting for the F1, F2, and RST keys is NO mode.

366

AND

www.redlion.net

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

DISPLAY MODE
The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. In this mode, the meter
displays can be viewed consecutively by pressing the DSP key. The
annunciators to the left of the display indicate which display is currently shown;
Max Value (MAX), Min Value (MIN), or Totalizer Value (TOT). Each of these
displays can be locked from view through programming. (See Module 3) The
Input Display Value is shown with no annunciator.

STEP BY STEP PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS:
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)
The Programming Mode is entered by pressing the PAR key. If this mode is
not accessible, then meter programming is locked by either a security code or a
hardware lock. (See Modules 2 and 3 for programming lock-out details.)

MODULE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)

PROGRAMMING MODE
Two programming modes are available.
Full Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Upon entering this mode, the front panel keys change to Programming Mode
operations. This mode should not be entered while a process is running, since
the meter functions and User Input response may not operate properly while
in Full Programming Mode.
Quick Programming Mode permits only certain parameters to be viewed
and/or modified. When entering this mode, the front panel keys change to
Programming Mode operations, and all meter functions continue to operate
properly. Quick Programming Mode is configured in Module 3. Throughout
this document, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always refers to
“Full” Programming Mode.

Upon entering the Programming Mode, the display alternates between
and the present module (initially ). The arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used
to select the desired module, which is then entered by pressing the PAR key.

PROGRAMMING TIPS

For each parameter, the display alternates between the parameter and the
present selection or value for that parameter. For parameters which have a list
of selections, the arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used to sequence through the
list until the desired selection is displayed. Pressing the PAR key stores and
activates the displayed selection, and also advances the meter to the next
parameter.

The Programming Menu is organized into nine modules (See above). These
modules group together parameters that are related in function. It is
recommended to begin programming with Module 1 and proceed through each
module in sequence. If lost or confused while programming, press the DSP key
to exit programming mode and start over. When programming is complete, it is
recommended to record the meter settings on the Parameter Value Chart and
lock-out parameter programming with a User Input or lock-out code. (See
Modules 2 and 3 for lock-out details.)

PARAMETER SELECTION ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)

NUMERICAL VALUE ENTRY (ARROW, RST & PAR KEYS)

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (DSP KEY or PAR KEY at

FACTORY SETTINGS

In the module description sections which follow, the dual display with
arrows appears for each programming parameter. This is used to illustrate the
display alternating between the parameter (top display) and the parameter's
Factory Setting (bottom display). In most cases, selections or value ranges for
the parameter will be listed on the right.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

)

Parameter

Selection/Value

1-717-767-6511

367

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

DP5T PARAMETER MENU

Refer to the appropriate Input Range for the selected
meter. Use only one Input Range, then proceed to Display
Decimal Point.

DP5D INPUT RANGE

«
ª

SELECTION

RANGE
RESOLUTION

SELECTION

±200.00 µA

200uA

RANGE
RESOLUTION

TEMPERATURE SCALE

°C

Select the temperature scale. This selection applies for Input, MAX, MIN,
and TOT displays. This does not change the user installed Custom Units
Overlay display. If changed, those parameters that relate to the temperature
scale should be checked.

±200.00 mV

±2.0000 mA
±20.000 mA
±200.00 mA

2u
20u
300u

±2.0000 V
±20.000 V

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

±300.00 V

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

⎫
⎬
⎭

±2.0000 A

°F

These selections are not
available for DP5T.

Select the decimal point location for the Input, MAX and MIN displays. (The
TOT display decimal point is a separate parameter.) This selection also affects
,
and
parameters.

E
DP5P INPUT RANGE

DISPLAY ROUNDING*

RANGE
RESOLUTION

SELECTION

±20.000 mA

±10.000 V

Select the input range that corresponds to the external signal.

SELECTION

T TC
E TC
J TC
K TC
R TC

100

B TC
N TC

TYPE

C TC

Pt385
Pt392
Ni672
Cu427

S TC

RTD platinum 385
RTD platinum 392
RTD copper 10 Ω
Direct mV range

rES-H

DP5T: TEMPERATURE DISPLAY OFFSET*

RTD nickel 672

Direct ohms range high
Direct ohms range low

Select the input type that corresponds to the input sensor. For RTD types,
check the RTD Input Jumper for matching selection. For sensor verification and
testing, use the direct readout modes.

368

5
50

Rounding selections other than one, cause the Input Display to ‘round’ to the
nearest rounding increment selected (ie. rounding of ‘5’ causes 122 to round to
120 and 123 to round to 125). Rounding starts at the least significant digit of
the Input Display. Remaining parameter entries (scaling point values, etc.) are
not automatically adjusted to this display rounding selection.

SELECTION TYPE

tc-t

2
20

These bottom selections are not
available for DP5T.

DP5T INPUT TYPE

1
10

⎫
⎬
⎭

«
ª

The temperature display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be
used to compensate for probe errors, errors due to variances in probe placement
or adjusting the readout to a reference thermometer. This value is automatically
updated after a Zero Display to show how far the display is offset. A value of
zero will remove the affects of offset.

www.redlion.net

FILTER SETTING*

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

seconds

The input filter setting is a time constant expressed in tenths of a second. The
filter settles to 99% of the final display value within approximately 3 time
constants. This is an Adaptive Digital Filter which is designed to steady the
Input Display reading. A value of ‘0’ disables filtering.

For Key-in (
), enter the known second Input Value by using the arrow
keys. For Apply (
), adjust the signal source externally until the next
desired Input Value appears.

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

FILTER BAND*

display units

ª
The digital filter will adapt to variations in the input signal. When the
variation exceeds the input filter band value, the digital filter disengages. When
the variation becomes less than the band value, the filter engages again. This
allows for a stable readout, but permits the display to settle rapidly after a large
process change. The value of the band is in display units, independent of the
Display Decimal Point position. A band setting of ‘0’ keeps the digital filter
permanently engaged.

The remaining parameters in Module 1 do not apply to the
DP5T.

SCALING STYLE

«
ª

KEY
APLY

key-in data
apply signal

If Input Values and corresponding Display Values are known, the Key-in
(
) scaling style can be used. This allows scaling without the presence or
changing of the input signal. If Input Values have to be derived from the actual
input signal source or simulator, the Apply (
) scaling style must be used.
After using the Apply (
) scaling style, this parameter will default back to
but the scaling values will be shown from the previous applied method.

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

ª
Enter the second coordinating Display Value by using the arrow keys. This is
the same for
and
scaling styles.

General Notes on Scaling
1. Input Values for scaling points should be confined to the limits of the Input
Range.
2. The same Input Value should not correspond to more than one Display Value.
(Example: 20 mA can not equal 0 and 10.)
This is referred to as read out jumps (vertical scaled segments).
3. The same Display Value can correspond to more than one Input Value.
(Example: 0 mA and 20 mA can equal 10.)
This is referred to as readout dead zones (horizontal scaled segments).
4. The maximum scaled Display Value spread between range maximum and
minimum is limited to 65,535. For example using +20 mA range the
maximum +20 mA can be scaled to is 32,767 with 0 mA being 0 and Display
Rounding of 1. (Decimal points are ignored.) The other half of 65,535 is for
the lower half of the range 0 to -20 mA even if it is not used. With Display
Rounding of 2, +20 mA can be scaled for (32,767 x 2 =) 65,535 but with even
Input Display values shown.
5. For input levels beyond the first programmed Input Value, the meter extends
the Display Value by calculating the slope from the first two coordinate pairs
(
/
&
/
). If
= 4 mA and
= 0, then 0 mA
would be some negative Display Value. The calculations stop at the limits of
the Input Range.
6. For input levels beyond the last programmed Input Value, the meter extends
the Display Value by calculating the slope from the two sequential coordinate
pairs. The calculations stop at the limits of the Input Range.

ª
For Key-in (
), enter the known first Input Value by using the arrow keys.
(The Input Range selection sets up the decimal location for the Input Value).
For Apply (
), apply the input signal to the meter, adjust the signal source
externally until the desired Input Value appears. In either method, press the
PAR key to enter the value being displayed. The DSP key can be pressed
without changing the previously stored
value in the
style.
style - Pressing the RST key will advance the display to the next
Note:
scaling display point without storing the input value.

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

ª
Enter the first coordinating Display Value by using the arrow keys. This is
the same for
and
scaling styles. The decimal point follows the
selection.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

1-717-767-6511

369

5.2 MODULE 2 - USER INPUT AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU

The user input is programmable to perform specific meter control functions.
While in the Display Mode or Program Mode, the function is executed the
instant the user input transitions to the active state.
The front panel function keys are also individually programmable to perform
specific meter control functions. While in the Display Mode, the primary
function is executed the instant the key is pressed. Holding the function key for
three seconds executes a secondary function. It is possible to program a
secondary function without a primary function.
In most cases, if the user input and/or one of the function keys is
programmed for the same function, the maintained (level trigger) actions will
be performed while the user input or at least one of the function keys are
activated. The momentary (edge trigger) actions will be performed every time
the user input or function keys transition to the active state.

Note: In the following explanations, not all selections are available for both
the user input and front panel function keys. Alternating displays are shown
with each selection. Those selections showing both displays are available for
both. If a display is not shown, it is not available for that selection.
will represent the user input.
will represent all five function keys.

RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE DISPLAY

This function will switch the Input Display between Relative and Absolute.
The Relative is a net value that includes the Display Offset Value. The Input
Display will normally show the Relative unless switched by this function.
Regardless of the display selected, all meter functions continue to operate based
on relative values. The Absolute is a gross value (based on Module 1 DSP and
INP entries) without the Display Offset Value. The Absolute display is selected
as long as the user input is activated (maintained action) or at the transition of
the function key (momentary action). When the user input is released, or the
function key is pressed again, the input display switches back to Relative
display.
(absolute) or
(relative) is momentarily displayed at transition
to indicate which display is active.

HOLD DISPLAY

NO FUNCTION

ª
E

No function is performed if activated. This is the factory setting for the user
input and all function keys. No function can be selected without affecting basic
start-up.

HOLD ALL FUNCTIONS

«
ª

The meter disables processing the input and holds all
display contents as long as activated (maintained action).

SYNCHRONIZE METER READING

PROGRAMMING MODE LOCK-OUT

The shown display is held but all other meter functions
continue as long as activated (maintained action).

Programming Mode is locked-out, as long as activated
(maintained action). A security code can be configured to
allow programming access during lock-out.

«
ª

The meter suspends all functions as long as activated
(maintained action). When the user input is released, the
meter synchronizes the restart of the A/D with other
processes or timing events.

STORE BATCH READING IN TOTALIZER
ZERO (TARE) DISPLAY

«
ª

The Zero (Tare) Display provides a way to zero the Input Display value at
various input levels, causing future Display readings to be offset. This function
is useful in weighing applications where the container or material on the scale
should not be included in the next measurement value. When activated
(momentary action),
flashes and the Display is set to zero. At the same
time, the Display value (that was on the display before the Zero Display) is
subtracted from the Display Offset Value and is automatically stored as the new
Display Offset Value (
). If another Zero (tare) Display is performed, the
display will again change to zero and the Display reading will shift accordingly.

370

«
ª

The Input Display value is one time added (batched) to the Totalizer at
transition to activate (momentary action). The Totalizer retains a running sum of
each batch operation until the Totalizer is reset. When this function is selected,
the normal operation of the Totalizer is overridden.

SELECT TOTALIZER DISPLAY

«
ª

www.redlion.net

The Totalizer display is selected as long as activated
(maintained action). When the user input is released, the
Input Display is returned. The DSP key overrides the active
user input. The Totalizer continues to function independent
of being displayed.

RESET TOTALIZER

RESET, SELECT, ENABLE MAXIMUM DISPLAY

«
ª

When activated (momentary action), the Maximum value
is set to the present Input Display value. Maximum continues
from that value while active (maintained action). When the
user input is released, Maximum detection stops and holds its
value. This selection functions independent of the selected display. The DSP key
overrides the active user input display but not the Maximum function.

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and the Totalizer resets to
zero. The Totalizer then continues to operate as it is configured. This selection
functions independent of the selected display.

SELECT MINIMUM DISPLAY

RESET AND ENABLE TOTALIZER

«
ª

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and
the Totalizer resets to zero. The Totalizer continues to
operate while active (maintained action). When the user
input is released, the Totalizer stops and holds its value. This
selection functions independent of the selected display.

RESET MINIMUM

ENABLE TOTALIZER

The Minimum display is selected as long as activated
(maintained action). When the user input is released, the
Input Display is returned. The DSP key overrides the active
user input. The Minimum continues to function
independent of being displayed.

The Totalizer continues to operate as long as activated
(maintained action). When the user input is released, the
Totalizer stops and holds its value. This selection functions
independent of the selected display.

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and
the Minimum reading is set to the present Input Display
value. The Minimum function then continues from that value.
This selection functions independent of the selected display.

«
ª

RESET, SELECT, ENABLE MINIMUM DISPLAY
SELECT MAXIMUM DISPLAY

«
ª

The Maximum display is selected as long as activated
(maintained action). When the user input is released, the
Input Display returns. The DSP key overrides the active
user input. The Maximum continues to function
independent of being displayed.

When activated (momentary action), the Minimum value
is set to the present Input Display value. Minimum continues
from that value while active (maintained action). When the
user input is released, Minimum detection stops and holds
its value. This selection functions independent of the selected display. The DSP
key overrides the active user input display but not the Minimum function.

RESET MAXIMUM
When activated (momentary action),
flashes and
the Maximum resets to the present Input Display value. The
Maximum function then continues from that value. This
selection functions independent of the selected display.

RESET MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and the Maximum and
Minimum readings are set to the present Input Display value. The Maximum and
Minimum function then continues from that value. This selection functions
independent of the selected display.

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND PROGRAM
PARAMETERS

LOCK-OUT
(
)

PARAMETER MENU

MAXIMUM DISPLAY LOCK-OUT*
MINIMUM DISPLAY LOCK-OUT*
TOTALIZER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT*

«
ª

PROGRAM MODE SECURITY CODE*

«
«

These displays can be programmed for
or
. When programmed for
, the display will not be shown when the DSP key is pressed regardless of
Program Lock-out status. It is suggested to lock-out the display if it is not needed.
The associated function will continue to operate even if its display is locked-out.

ª
By entering any non-zero value, the prompt
will appear when trying
to access the Program Mode. Access will only be allowed after entering a
matching security code or universal code of
. With this lock-out, a user input
would not have to be configured for Program Lock-out. However, this lock-out
is overridden by an inactive user input configured for Program Lock-out.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

1-717-767-6511

371

5.4 MODULE 4 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

«
ª

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME*

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE*

sec.

This parameter does not apply for the DP5T.

«
ª

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME*

sec.

«
ª

Unless a Zero Display was performed or an offset from Module 1 scaling is
desired, this parameter can be skipped. The Display Offset Value is the
difference from the Absolute (gross) Display value to the Relative (net) Display
value for the same input level. The meter will automatically update this Display
Offset Value after each Zero Display. The Display Offset Value can be directly
keyed-in to intentionally add or remove display offset. See Relative / Absolute
Display and Zero Display explanations in Module 2.

DP5T: ICE POINT COMPENSATION*

«
«
ª
E

DISPLAY UPDATE RATE*
updates/sec.

This parameter determines the rate of display update. When set to 10
updates/second, the internal re-zero compensation is disabled, allowing for the
fastest possible output response.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT*

ª
The Units Label Kit Accessory contains a sheet of custom unit overlays
which can be installed in to the meter’s bezel display assembly. The backlight
for these custom units is activated by this parameter.

372

www.redlion.net

5.5 MODULE 5 - TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

The totalizer accumulates (integrates) the Input Display value using one of
two modes. The first is using a time base. This can be used to compute a timetemperature product. The second is through a user input or function key
programmed for Batch (one time add on demand). This can be used to provide
a readout of temperature integration, useful in curing and sterilization
applications. If the Totalizer is not needed, its display can be locked-out and this
module can be skipped during programming.

TOTALIZER DECIMAL POINT*

«
ª

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

For most applications, this matches the Input Display Decimal Point
(
). If a different location is desired, refer to Totalizer Scale Factor.

TOTALIZER TIME BASE

«
ª

- seconds

(÷ 1)
- minutes (÷ 60)

- hours
- days

(÷ 3600)
(÷ 86400)

This is the time base used in Totalizer accumulations. If the Totalizer is being
accumulated through a user input programmed for Batch, then this parameter
does not apply.

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR*

For most applications, the Totalizer reflects the same decimal point location
and engineering units as the Input Display. In these cases, the Totalizer Scale
Factor is 1.000. The Totalizer Scale Factor can be used to scale the Totalizer to
a different value than the Input Display. Common possibilities are:
1. Changing decimal point location (example tenths to whole)
2. Changing engineering units (example inches to meters)
3. Changing both decimal point location and engineering units.
4. Average over a controlled time frame.
Details on calculating the scale factor are shown later.
If the Totalizer is being accumulated through a user input programmed for
Batch, then this parameter does not apply.

TOTALIZER HIGH ORDER DISPLAY

When the total exceeds 5 digits, the front panel annunciator TOT flashes. In
this case, the meter continues to totalize up to a 9 digit value. The high order 4
digits and the low order 5 digits of the total are displayed alternately. The letter
“ ” denotes the high order display.

TOTALIZER BATCHING

The Totalizer Time Base and scale factor are overridden when a user input or
function key is programmed for store batch (
). In this mode, when the user
input or function key is activated, the Input Display reading is one time added
to the Totalizer (batch). The Totalizer retains a running sum of each batch
operation until the Totalizer is reset. This is useful in weighing operations, when
the value to be added is not based on time but after a filling event.

TOTALIZER USING TIME BASE
Totalizer accumulates as defined by:
Input Display x Totalizer Scale Factor
Totalizer Time Base
Where:
Input Display - the present input reading
Totalizer Scale Factor - 0.001 to 65.000
Totalizer Time Base - (the division factor of
)
Example: The input reading is at an average of 10.0°C per hour. The Totalizer
is used to verify this average reading in a controlled time frame of 4 hours.
Because the Input Display and Totalizer are both in tenths of °C, the Totalizer
Scale Factor is 1. However, the Totalizer Time Base is hours (3600) divided
by the 4 hours in the controlled time frame to yield a Totalizer Scale Factor
of 0.250. By placing these values in the equation, the Totalizer will
accumulate every second as follows:
10.0 x 0.250 = 0.00069 accumulates each second
3600
This results in:
0.04167 accumulates each minute
2.5 accumulates each hour
10.0 reached at the end of 4 hours

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR CALCULATION EXAMPLES

1. When changing the Totalizer Decimal Point (
) location from the Input
Display Decimal Point (
), the required Totalizer Scale Factor is
multiplied by a power of ten.
Example: Input (
) = 0.0
Input (
) = 0.00

TOTALIZER LOW CUT VALUE*

A low cut value disables Totalizer when the Input Display value falls below
the value programmed.

TOTALIZER POWER UP RESET*

«
ª

NO
rSt

Do not reset buffer
Reset buffer

The Totalizer can be reset to zero on each meter power-up by setting this
parameter to reset.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

Totalizer

Scale
Factor

Totalizer

Scale
Factor

0.00
0.0
0
x10
x100

10
1
.1
.01
.001

0.000
0.00
0.0
0
x10

10
1
.1
.01
.001

(x = Totalizer display is round by tens or hundreds)
2. When changing the Totalizer engineering units, the Totalizer Scale Factor is
the known conversion multiplier from Input Display units to Totalizer units.
Example: If Input Display is feet and the Totalizer needs to be in yards, the
conversion multiplier from feet to yards is 0.333. Enter 0.333 as the
Totalizer scale factor.
3. When changing both the Totalizer engineering units and Totalizer Decimal
Point the two calculations are multiplied together. Example: Input Display =
feet in tenths (0.0) with Totalizer = whole yards (0), the scale factor would
be 0.033.
4. To obtain an average reading within a controlled time frame, the selected
Totalizer Time Base is divided by the given time period expressed in the
same timing units.
Example: Average temperature per hour in a 4 hour period, the scale factor
would be 0.250. To achieve a controlled time frame, connect an external
timer to a user input programmed for
. The timer will control the
start (reset) and the stopping (hold) of the totalizer.

1-717-767-6511

373

5.9 MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS

«
ª

DP5P - Input Calibration

Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
The meter will display
and then return to
.
Press DSP key to return to Display Mode. This will
overwrite all user settings with the factory settings.

CALIBRATION
The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory.
Scaling to convert the input signal to a desired display
value is performed in Module 1. If the meter appears to be
indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to
Troubleshooting before attempting to calibrate the meter.
When recalibration is required (generally every 2 years), it should only be
performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment. Calibration
does not change any user programmed parameters. However, it may affect the
accuracy of the input signal values previously stored using the Apply (
)
Scaling Style.
Calibration may be aborted by disconnecting power to the meter before
exiting Module 9. In this case, the existing calibration settings remain in effect.

WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source with an
accuracy of 0.01% or better.
Before starting, verify that the precision signal source is connected to the
correct terminals and ready. Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before
calibrating the meter.
and PAR can be chosen to exit the calibration mode
without any changes taking place.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. Choose the range to be calibrated by using the arrow keys and press PAR.
3. When the zero range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage range: dead short applied
- Current range: open circuit
4. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
5. When the top range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage range: 10 VDC
- Current range: 20 mADC
6. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
7. When
appears, press PAR twice.
8. If the meter is not field scaled, then the input display should match the value
of the input signal.
9. Repeat the above procedure for each input range to be calibrated.

DP5T - Input Calibration

DP5D - Input Calibration
WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source with
an accuracy of 0.01% or better.

Warning: Calibration of this meter requires precision instrumentation
operated by qualified technicians. It is recommended that a
calibration service calibrates the meter.

Before starting, verify that the Input Ranger Jumper is set for the range to be
calibrated. Also verify that the precision signal source is connected and ready.
Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating the meter.
and PAR
can be chosen to exit the calibration mode without any changes taking place.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. Choose the range to be calibrated by using the arrow keys and press PAR.
3. When the zero range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage ranges: dead short applied
- Current ranges: open circuit
4. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
5. When the top range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage ranges: top range value applied (The 300 V range is the exception.
It is calibrated with a 100 V signal.)
- Current ranges: top range value
6. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
7. When
appears, press PAR twice.
8. If the meter is not field scaled, then the input display should match the value
of the input signal.
9. Repeat the above procedure for each input range to be calibrated.

Before selecting any of the calibration procedures, the input to the meter
must be at 0 mV or 0 ohms. Set the digital filer in Module 1 to 1 second. Allow
a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating the meter. The
and PAR can
be chosen to exit calibration mode without any changes taking place.

374

10 OHM RTD Range Calibration

1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 10 ohm.
2. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR. Then choose
and press PAR.
3. At
, apply a direct short to input terminals 3, 4 and 5 using a three wire
link. Wait 10 seconds, then press PAR.
4. At
, apply a precision resistance of 15 ohms (with an accuracy of 0.01%
or better) using a three wire link, to input terminals 3, 4 and 5. Wait 10
seconds, then press PAR.
5. Connect the RTD, return to the Display Mode and verify the input reading
(with 0 Display Offset) is correct. If not correct repeat calibration.

100 OHM RTD Range Calibration
1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 100 ohm.
2. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR. Then choose
and press PAR.
3. At
, apply a direct short to input terminals 3, 4 and 5 using a three wire
link. Wait 10 seconds, then press PAR.
4. At
, apply a precision resistance of 300 ohms (with an accuracy of
0.01% or better) using a three wire link, to terminals 3, 4 and 5. Wait 10
seconds, press PAR.
5. Connect the RTD, return to the Display Mode and verify the input reading
(with 0 Display Offset) is correct. If not correct repeat calibration.

www.redlion.net

THERMOCOUPLE Range Calibration

ICE POINT Calibration

1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR. Then choose
and
press PAR.
2. At
, apply a dead short or set calibrator to zero to input terminals 4 and
5. Wait 10 seconds, then press PAR.
3. At
, apply 50.000 mV input signal (with an accuracy of 0.01% or
better) to input terminals 4 and 5. Wait 10 seconds, then press PAR.
4. Return to the Display Mode.
5. Continue with Ice Point Calibration.

1. The ambient temperature must be within 20°C to 30°C.
2. Connect a thermocouple (types T, E, J, K, or N only) with an accuracy of 1°C
or better to the meter.
3. Verify the readout Display Offset is 0, Temperature Scale is °C, Display
Resolution is 0.0, and the Input Range is set for the connected thermocouple.
4. Place the thermocouple in close thermal contact to a reference thermometer
probe. (Use a reference thermometer with an accuracy of 0.25°C or better.)
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (A calibration bath could be used in place of
the thermometer.)
5. In the Normal Display mode, compare the readouts.
6. If a difference exists then continue with the calibration.
7. Enter Module 9, use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR. Then
choose
and press PAR.
8. Calculate a new Ice Point value using: existing Ice Point value + (reference
temperature - Display Mode reading). All values are based on °C.
9. Enter the new Ice Point value.
10. Return to the Display Mode and verify the input reading (with 0 Display
Offset) is correct. If not correct repeat steps 8 through 10.

TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

CHECK: Power level, power connections

PROGRAM LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Active (lock-out) user input
ENTER: Security code requested

MAX, MIN, TOT LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Module 3 programming

INCORRECT INPUT DISPLAY VALUE

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Range Jumper position, input connections, input signal level,
Module 4 Display Offset is zero, press DSP for Input Display
PERFORM: Module 9 Calibration (If the above does not correct the problem.)

“OLOL” in DISPLAY (SIGNAL HIGH)

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Range Jumper position, input connections, input signal level

“ULUL” in DISPLAY (SIGNAL LOW)

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Range Jumper position, input connections, input signal level

JITTERY DISPLAY

INCREASE: Module 1 filtering, rounding, input range
CHECK: Wiring is per EMC installation guidelines

ERROR CODE (Err 1-4)

PRESS: Reset KEY (If cannot clear contact factory.)

For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

1-717-767-6511

375

PARAMETER VALUE CHART
Programmer ________________ Date ________
DP5 Model Number _______ Meter# _____________ Security Code __________
1-INP

Signal Input Parameters

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

rANGE
tyPE
SCALE
dECPt
round
OFFSt
FILtr
bANd
StYLE
INP 1
dSP 1
INP 2
dSP 2

INPUT RANGE
DP5T: INPUT TYPE
DP5T: TEMPERATURE SCALE
* DISPLAY RESOLUTION
DISPLAY ROUNDING INCREMENT
DP5T: DISPLAY OFFSET
FILTER SETTING
FILTER ENABLE BAND
SCALING STYLE - NOT DP5T
* INPUT VALUE 1
* DISPLAY VALUE 1
* INPUT VALUE 2
* DISPLAY VALUE 2

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

tc°F
0
1
0
1.0
10
KEY
0.000
0
1.000
1000

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

USr-1
F1
F2
rSt
Sc-F1
Sc-F2

USER INPUT 1
FUNCTION KEY 2
RESET KEY
2nd FUNCTION KEY 1
2nd FUNCTION KEY 2

PARAMETER

HI-t
LO-t
dSP-t
b-LIt
OFFSt
ICE

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

DISPLAY

User Input and Function Key Parameters

FUNCTION KEY 1

Secondary Function Parameters

5-tOt

2-FNC

FACTORY
SETTING

4-SEC
DISPLAY

dECPt
tbASE
SCFAC
Locut
P-UP

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME
DISPLAY UPDATE TIME
UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT - DP5T
DISPLAY OFFSET - NOT DP5T
DP5T: ICE POINT COMPENSATION

PARAMETER

* TOTALIZER DECIMAL POINT
TOTALIZER TIME BASE
TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR
* TOTALIZER LOW CUT VALUE
TOTALIZER POWER-UP RESET

USER SETTING

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

3-LOC

Display and Program Lockout Parameters

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

HI
LO
tOt
CodE

MAX DISPLAY LOCKOUT

376

MIN DISPLAY LOCKOUT
TOTAL DISPLAY LOCKOUT
SECURITY CODE

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

LOC
LOC
LOC
0

www.redlion.net

USER SETTING

0.1
0.1
2
OFF
0.00
ON

Totalizer (Integrator) Parameters

* Decimal point location is model dependent.

FACTORY
SETTING

0
_ IN
1.000
-19999
NO

USER SETTING

DP5 PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

DP5T
ONLY

1-717-767-6511

377

MODEL PAX – 1/8 DIN ANALOG INPUT PANEL METERS
MODELS: VOLT/CURRENT (PAXD) PROCESS (PAXP) AC TRUE RMS
VOLT AND CURRENT (PAXH) STRAIN GAGE (PAXS)
THERMOCOUPLE/RTD (PAXT)
z PROCESS, VOLTAGE, CURRENT, TEMPERATURE, AND STRAIN
GAGE INPUTS
z 5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
z VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY
z 16 POINT SCALING FOR NON-LINEAR PROCESSES
z PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUTS
z 9 DIGIT TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) WITH BATCHING
z OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)

UL
R

z COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)
z RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)

US LISTED

z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

IND. CONT. EQ.

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The PAX® Analog Panel Meters offer many features and performance
capabilities to suit a wide range of industrial applications. Available in five
different models to handle various analog inputs, including DC Voltage/Current,
AC Voltage/Current, Process, Temperature, and Strain Gage Inputs. Refer to
pages 4 through 6 for the details on the specific models. The optional plug-in
output cards allow the opportunity to configure the meter for present
applications, while providing easy upgrades for future needs.
The meters employ a bright 0.56" LED display. The unit is available with a
red sunlight readable or a standard green LED. The intensity of display can be
adjusted from dark room applications up to sunlight readable, making it ideal
for viewing in bright light applications.
The meters provide a MAX and MIN reading memory with programmable
capture time. The capture time is used to prevent detection of false max or min
readings which may occur during start-up or unusual process events.
The signal totalizer (integrator) can be used to compute a time-input product.
This can be used to provide a readout of totalized flow, calculate service
intervals of motors or pumps, etc. The totalizer can also accumulate batch
weighing operations.
The meters have four setpoint outputs, implemented on Plug-in option cards.
The Plug-in cards provide dual FORM-C relays (5A), quad FORM-A (3A), or
either quad sinking or quad sourcing open collector logic outputs. The setpoint
alarms can be configured to suit a variety of control and alarm requirements.
Communication and Bus Capabilities are also available as option cards.
These include RS232, RS485, Modbus, DeviceNet, and Profibus-DP. Readout
values and setpoint alarm values can be controlled through the bus.
Additionally, the meters have a feature that allows a remote computer to directly
control the outputs of the meter. With an RS232 or RS485 card installed, it is
possible to configure the meter using a Windows® based program. The
configuration data can be saved to a file for later recall.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

378

A linear DC output signal is available as an optional Plug-in card. The card
provides either 20 mA or 10 V signals. The output can be scaled independent of
the input range and can track either the input, totalizer, max or min readings.
Once the meters have been initially configured, the parameter list may be
locked out from further modification in its entirety or only the setpoint values
can be made accessible.
The meters have been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise effects to CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications . . . . . . . . .
Universal DC Input Panel Meter . . . . . . .
Process Input Panel Meter . . . . . . . . . . .
AC True RMS Voltage and Current Meter
Strain Gage Input Panel Meter . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple and RTD Input Meter . . .
Optional Plug-In Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7

Installing the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setting the Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display . . 13
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Factory Service Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parameter Value Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Programming Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAX

D - DC Volt/ Current Input
P - Process Input
H - AC True RMS Volt/Current Input *
S - Strain Gage/Bridge Input
T - Thermocouple and RTD Input
0 - Red, Sunlight Readable Display
1 - Green Display

0 - 85 to 250 VAC
1 - 11 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC
* PAXH is only available with 85-250 VAC power supply.

Option Card and Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards
PAXCDC

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS10

Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

DeviceNet Communications Card

PAXCDC30

Modbus Communications Card

PAXCDC40

Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC4C

Profibus-DP Communications Card

PAXCDC50

PAXCDL

Analog Output Card

PAXCDL10

PAXLBK

Units Label Kit Accessory (Not required for PAXT)

PAXLBK10

SFCRD*

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP

SFCRD200

*Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/

1-717-767-6511

379

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 5 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) red sunlight readable or standard green
LEDs, (-19999 to 99999)
2. POWER:
AC Versions:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs.
DC Versions (Not available on PAXH):
DC Power: 11 to 36 VDC, 11 W
(derate operating temperature to 40° C if operating <15 VDC and three
plug-in option cards are installed)
AC Power: 24 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs (50 V working).
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
MAX - maximum readout selected
MIN - minimum readout selected
TOT - totalizer readout selected, flashes when total overflows
SP1 - setpoint alarm 1 is active
SP2 - setpoint alarm 2 is active
SP3 - setpoint alarm 3 is active
SP4 - setpoint alarm 4 is active
Units Label - optional units label backlight
4. KEYPAD: 3 programmable function keys, 5 keys total
5. A/D CONVERTER: 16 bit resolution
6. UPDATE RATES:
A/D conversion rate: 20 readings/sec.
Step response: 200 msec. max. to within 99% of final readout value
(digital filter and internal zero correction disabled)
700 msec. max. (digital filter disabled, internal zero correction enabled)
PAXH Only: 1 sec max. to within 99% of final readout value (digital filter
disabled)
Display update rate: 1 to 20 updates/sec.
Setpoint output on/off delay time: 0 to 3275 sec.
Analog output update rate: 0 to 10 sec
Max./Min. capture delay time: 0 to 3275 sec.
7. DISPLAY MESSAGES:
“OLOL” - Appears when measurement exceeds + signal range.
“ULUL” - Appears when measurement exceeds - signal range
PAXT: “SHrt” - Appears when shorted sensor is detected. (RTD only)
PAXT: “OPEN” - Appears when open sensor is detected.
“. . . .” - Appears when display values exceed + display range.
“- . . .” - Appears when display values exceed - display range.
“E . . .” - Appears when Totalizer exceeds 9 digits.
“h . . .” - Denotes the high order display of the Totalizer.
8. INPUT CAPABILITIES: See specific product specifications, pages 4-6
9. EXCITATION POWER: See specific product specifications, pages 4-6
10. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION: (Does not apply to PAXH)
Normal Mode: > 60 dB @ 50 or 60 Hz ±1%, digital filter off
Common Mode: >100 dB, DC to 120 Hz
11. USER INPUTS: Three programmable user inputs
Max. Continuous Input: 30 VDC
Isolation To Sensor Input Common: Not isolated. (Not PAXH)
PAXH: Isolation to Sensor Input Common: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 125 V
Response Time: 50 msec. max.
Logic State: Jumper selectable for sink/source logic
INPUT STATE

SINKING INPUTS
Ω pull-up to +5 V
22 KΩ

SOURCING INPUTS
Ω pull-down
22 KΩ

Active

VIN < 0.9 VDC

VIN > 3.6 VDC

Inactive

VIN > 3.6 VDC

VIN < 0.9 VDC

12. TOTALIZER:
Function:
Time Base: second, minute, hour, or day
Batch: Can accumulate (gate) input display from a user input
Time Accuracy: 0.01% typical
Decimal Point: 0 to 0.0000
Scale Factor: 0.001 to 65.000
Low Signal Cut-out: -19,999 to 99,999
Total: 9 digits, display alternates between high order and low order readouts

380

13. CUSTOM LINEARIZATION:
Data Point Pairs: Selectable from 2 to 16
Display Range: -19,999 to 99,999
Decimal Point: 0 to 0.0000
PAXT: Ice Point Compensation: user value (0.00 to 650.00 μV/°C)
14. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters
and display values.
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C (0 to 45°C with all three plug-in
cards installed)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 25 g (10g relay), 11 msec in 3
directions.
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH non-condensing
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
PAXT Only: File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part I
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204 Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ±5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Measurement input and/or analog output signal may deviate during
EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or equivalent)
I/O and power cables are routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the bulletin for additional
information.
17. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
18. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
19. WEIGHT: 10.4 oz. (295 g)

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXD - UNIVERSAL DC INPUT
z FOUR VOLTAGE RANGES (300 VDC Max)
z FIVE CURRENT RANGES (2A DC Max)
z THREE RESISTANCE RANGES (10K Ohm Max)
z SELECTABLE 24 V, 2 V, 1.75 mA EXCITATION

PAXD SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT RANGES:
INPUT
RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

IMPEDANCE/
COMPLIANCE

MAX
CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

1.11 Kohm

15 mA

10 nA

111 ohm

50 mA

0.1 μA

11.1 ohm

150 mA

1 μA

1.1 ohm

500 mA

10 μA

0.1 ohm

0.1 mA

1.066 Mohm

100 V

10 μV

1.066 Mohm

300 V

0.1 mV

1.066 Mohm

300 V

1 mV

1.066 Mohm

300 V

10 mV

0.175 V

30 V

0.01 ohm

1.75 V

30 V

0.1 ohm

17.5 V

30 V

1 ohm

* After 20 minute warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways:
Accuracy over an 18 to 28°C and 10 to 75% RH environment; and
accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0 to 85% RH (non-condensing
environment). Accuracy over the 0 to 50°C range includes the
temperature coefficient effect of the meter.
EXCITATION POWER:
Transmitter Power: 24 VDC, ±5%, regulated, 50 mA max.
Reference Voltage: 2 VDC, ± 2%
Compliance: 1 kohm load min. (2 mA max.)
Temperature coefficient: 40 ppm/°C max.
Reference Current: 1.75 mADC, ± 2%
Compliance: 10 kohm load max.
Temperature coefficient: 40 ppm/°C max.

MODEL PAXP - PROCESS INPUT
z DUAL RANGE INPUT (20 mA or 10 VDC)
z 24 VDC TRANSMITTER POWER

PAXP SPECIFICATIONS
SENSOR INPUTS:
INPUT
(RANGE)

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

MAX
IMPEDANCE/
DISPLAY
CONTINUOUS
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

0.03% of
0.12% of
20 mA
(-2 to 26 mA) reading +2 μA reading +3 μA

20 ohm

150 mA

1 μA

10 VDC
0.03% of
0.12% of
(-1 to 13 VDC) reading +2 mV reading +3 mV

500 Kohm

300 V

1 mV

1-717-767-6511

381

MODEL PAXH - AC TRUE RMS VOLT

AND

CURRENT

z FOUR VOLTAGE RANGES (300 VAC Max)
z FIVE CURRENT RANGES (5 A Max)
z ACCEPTS AC OR DC COUPLED INPUTS
z THREE WAY ISOLATION: POWER, INPUT AND OUTPUTS

PAXH SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT RANGES:
Isolation To Option Card Commons and User Input Commons: 125 Vrms
Isolation To AC Power Terminals: 250 Vrms
INPUT
RANGE

200 mV
2V
20 V
300 V
200 μA
2 mA
20 mA
200 mA
5A

ACCURACY*

0.1% of reading
+0.4 mV
0.1% of reading
+2 mV
0.1% of reading
+20 mV
0.2% of reading
+0.3 V
0.1% of reading
+0.4 μA
0.1% of reading
+2 μA
0.1% of reading
+20 μA
0.1% of reading
+0.2 mA
0.5% of reading
+5 mA

IMPEDANCE
(60 Hz)

MAX
CONTINUOUS
OVERLOAD

686 Kohm

30 V

±10 V

0.01 mV

686 Kohm

30 V

±50 V

0.1 mV

686 Kohm

300 V

±300 V

1 mV

686 Kohm

300 V

±300 V***

0.1 V

1.11 Kohm

15 mA

±15 mA

0.01 μA

111 ohm

50 mA

±50 mA

0.1 μA

11.1 ohm

150 mA

±150 mA

1 μA

1.1 ohm

500 mA

±500 mA

10 μA

0.02 ohm

7 A**

±7 A***

1 mA

MAX DC
RESOLUTION
BLOCKING

*Conditions for accuracy specification:
- 20 minutes warmup
- 18-28°C temperature range, 10-75% RH non-condensing
- 50 Hz - 400 Hz sine wave input
- 1% to 100% of range
- Add 0.1% reading + 20 counts error over 0-50°C range
- Add 0.2% reading + 10 counts error for crest factors up to 3, add 1% reading up to 5
- Add 0.5% reading + 10 counts of DC component
- Add 1% reading + 20 counts error over 20 Hz to 10 KHz range
** Non-repetitive surge rating: 15 A for 5 seconds
*** Inputs are direct coupled to the input divider and shunts. Input signals with
high DC component levels may reduce the usable range.
MAX CREST FACTOR (Vp/VRMS): 5 @ Full Scale Input
INPUT COUPLING: AC or AC and DC
INPUT CAPACITANCE: 10 pF
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 125 VAC working
COMMON MODE REJECTION: (DC to 60 Hz) 100 dB

MODEL PAXS - STRAIN GAGE INPUT
z LOAD CELL, PRESSURE AND TORQUE BRIDGE INPUTS
z DUAL RANGE INPUT: ±24 mV OR ±240 mV
z SELECTABLE 5 VDC OR 10 VDC BRIDGE EXCITATION
z PROGRAMMABLE AUTO-ZERO TRACKING

PAXS SPECIFICATIONS
SENSOR INPUTS:
MAX
CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

INPUT RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

IMPEDANCE

±24 mVDC

0.02% of
reading +3 μV

0.07% of
reading +4 μV

100 Mohm

30 V

1 μV

±240 mVDC

0.02% of
reading +30 μV

0.07% of
reading +40 μV

100 Mohm

30 V

10 μV

382

CONNECTION TYPE: 4-wire bridge (differential)
2-wire (single-ended)
COMMON MODE RANGE (w.r.t. input common): 0 to +5 VDC
Rejection: 80 dB (DC to 120 Hz)
BRIDGE EXCITATION :
Jumper Selectable: 5 VDC @ 65 mA max., ±2%
10 VDC @ 125 mA max., ±2%
Temperature coefficient (ratio metric): 20 ppm/°C max.

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXT - THERMOCOUPLE

AND

RTD INPUT

z THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS
z CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
z CUSTOM SCALING FOR NON-STANDARD PROBES
z TIME-TEMPERATURE INTEGRATOR

PAXT SPECIFICATIONS
READOUT:
Resolution: Variable: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1, 2, or 5 degrees
Scale: F or C
Offset Range: -19,999 to 99,999 display units
THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.03μV/ohm
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 V
INPUT
TYPE

RANGE

-200 to 400°C
-270 to -200°C

1.2°C
**

2.1°C

-200 to 871°C
-270 to -200°C

1.0°C
**

2.4°C

-200 to 760°C

1.1°C

2.3°C

-200 to 1372°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.4°C

-50 to 1768°C

1.9°C

-50 to 1768°C

B
N
C
(W5/W26)

ACCURACY* ACCURACY*
STANDARD
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

BS 1843

ITS-90

(+) blue
(-) red

(+) white
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) purple (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) white
(-) red

ITS-90

(+) yellow (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

1.9°C

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

100 to 300°C
300 to 1820°C

3.9°C
2.8°C

5.7°C
4.4°C

ITS-90

no
standard

-200 to 1300°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.1°C

ITS-90

(+) orange (+) orange
(-) red
(-) blue

0 to 2315°C

1.9°C

6.1°C

ASTM no
E988-90*** standard

(+) yellow
(-) blue

no
standard

*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an 18
to 28°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0 to
85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco and ice point tracking effects. The
specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization conformity, and
thermocouple ice point compensation. Total system accuracy is the sum of meter
and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the meter readout
at the temperature of interest.
** The accuracy over the interval -270 to -200°C is a function of temperature,
ranging from 1°C at -200°C and degrading to 7°C at -270°C. Accuracy may be
improved by field calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.
*** These curves have been corrected to ITS-90.

100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .003919
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427

RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

STANDARD
***

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

IEC 751

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-80 to 260°C

0.2°C

0.5°C

-100 to 260°C

0.4°C

0.9°C

no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard

CUSTOM RANGE: Up to 16 data point pairs
Input range: -10 to 65 mV
0 to 400 ohms, high range
0 to 25 ohms, low range
Display range: -19999 to 99999
INPUT TYPE

RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°°C)

Custom
mV range
Custom
100 ohm range
Custom
10 ohm range

-10 to 65mV
(1 μV res.)
0 to 400 Ω
(10 MΩ res.)
0 to 25 Ω
(1 MΩ res.)

0.02% of reading
+ 4μV
0.02% of reading
+ 0.04 Ω
0.04% of reading
+ 0.005 Ω

0.12% of reading
+ 5μV
0.12% of reading
+ 0.05 Ω
0.20% of reading
+ 0.007 Ω

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK) - Not required for PAXT

EXTERNAL CURRENT SHUNTS (APSCM)

Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized
using the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled in the programming.
Each PAXT meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels which can be
installed into the meter’s bezel display assembly.

1-717-767-6511

383

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN OUTPUT CARDS
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards

PAXH Isolation Specifications For All Option Cards
Isolation To Sensor Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 125 V
Isolation to User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage 50 V

PAXCDC40 - Modbus
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

DEVICENET™ CARD
Compatibility: Group 2 Server Only, not UCMM capable
Baud Rates: 125 Kbaud, 250 Kbaud, and 500 Kbaud
Bus Interface: Phillips 82C250 or equivalent with MIS wiring protection per
DeviceNet™ Volume I Section 10.2.2.
Node Isolation: Bus powered, isolated node
Host Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between DeviceNet™
and meter input common.
MODBUS CARD
Type: RS485; RTU and ASCII MODBUS modes
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 minute.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
Baud Rates: 300 to 38400.
Data: 7/8 bits
Parity: No, Odd, or Even
Addresses: 1 to 247.
Transmit Delay: Programmable; See Transmit Delay explanation.
PROFIBUS-DP CARD
Fieldbus Type: Profibus-DP as per EN 50170, implemented with Siemens
SPC3 ASIC
Conformance: PNO Certified Profibus-DP Slave Device
Baud Rates: Automatic baud rate detection in the range 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Station Address: 0 to 126, set by the master over the network. Address stored
in non-volatile memory.
Connection: 9-pin Female D-Sub connector
Network Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between Profibus
network and sensor and user input commons. Not isolated from all other
commons.

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

384

SETPOINT CARDS (PAXCDS)
The PAX and MPAX series has 4 available setpoint alarm output plug-in
cards. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the
outputs can be reversed in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector
DUAL RELAY CARD
Type: Two FORM-C relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2000 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 240 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load),
1/8 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with both relays energized not to exceed 5 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
QUAD RELAY CARD
Type: Four FORM-A relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 3 amps @ 240 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load), 1/10
HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with all four relays energized not to exceed 4 amps
Life Expectancy: 100K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
QUAD SINKING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sinking NPN transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: 100 mA max @ VSAT = 0.7 V max. VMAX = 30 V
QUAD SOURCING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sourcing PNP transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: Internal supply: 24 VDC ± 10% , 30 mA max. total
External supply: 30 VDC max., 100 mA max. each output
ALL FOUR SETPOINT CARDS
Response Time: 200 msec. max. to within 99% of final readout value (digital
filter and internal zero correction disabled)
700 msec. max. (digital filter disabled, internal zero correction enabled)

LINEAR DC OUTPUT (PAXCDL)
Either a 0(4)-20 mA or 0-10 V retransmitted linear DC output is available
from the analog output plug-in card. The programmable output low and high
scaling can be based on various display values. Reverse slope output is possible
by reversing the scaling point positions.
PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card
ANALOG OUTPUT CARD
Types: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Accuracy: 0.17% of FS (18 to 28°C); 0.4% of FS (0 to 50°C)
Resolution: 1/3500
Compliance: 10 VDC: 10 KΩ load min., 20 mA: 500 Ω load max.
Powered: Self-powered
Update time: 200 msec. max. to within 99% of final output value (digital
filter and internal zero correction disabled)
700 msec. max. (digital filter disabled, internal zero correction enabled)

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the
back of the bezel. The unit should
be installed fully assembled.
Insert the unit into the panel
cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel
latch should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a
proper seal, tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel
(Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment
The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum
operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.
PANEL CUT-OUT

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

The meter can have up to four jumpers that must be checked and / or changed
prior to applying power. The following Jumper Selection Figures show an
enlargement of the jumper area.
To access the jumpers, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

Input Range Jumper
This jumper is used to select the proper input range. The input range selected
in programming must match the jumper setting. Select a range that is high enough
to accommodate the maximum input to avoid overloads. The selection is different
for each meter. See the Jumper Selection Figure for appropriate meter.

Excitation Output Jumper
If your meter has excitation, this jumper is used to select the excitation range
for the application. If excitation is not being used, it is not necessary to check or
move this jumper.

User Input Logic Jumper
This jumper selects the logic state of all the user inputs. If the user inputs are
not used, it is not necessary to check or move this jumper.

PAXH:
Signal Jumper
This jumper is used to select the signal type. For current signals, the jumper
is installed. For voltage signals, remove the jumper from the board. (For 2 V
inputs, this removed jumper can be used in the “2 V only” location.)

Couple Jumper
This jumper is used for AC / DC couple. If AC couple, then the jumper is
removed from the board. If DC couple is used, then the jumper is installed.

PAXD Jumper Selection
Input Range Jumper

One jumper is used for voltage/ohms or current input ranges. Select the proper input range high
enough to avoid input signal overload. Only one jumper is allowed in this area. Do not have a jumper
in both the voltage and current ranges at the same time. Avoid placing the jumper across two ranges.

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER
LOCATION
CURRENT
VOLT/
OHM

1-717-767-6511

JUMPER
LOCATION
EXCITATION
USER INPUT

385

PAXP Jumper Selection
Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

USER INPUT
JUMPER
LOCATION

PAXH Jumper Selection
CAUTION: To maintain the electrical safety of the meter, remove
unneeded jumpers completely from the meter. Do not move the
jumpers to positions other than those specified.

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

Main
Circuit
Board

Jumper
Locations
RANGES
CURRENT
VOLTAGE

2 V ONLY
CURR/VOLT
SIGNAL
AC/DC COUPLE
USER INPUT

Input Range Jumper
Signal Jumper
One jumper is used for the input signal type. For current signals, the jumper
is installed. For voltage signals, remove the jumper from the board. (For 2 V
inputs, this removed jumper can be used in the “2 V only” location.)

Couple Jumper

For most inputs, one jumper is used to select the input range. However, for
the following ranges, set the jumpers as stated:
5 A: Remove all jumpers from the input range.
2 V: Install one jumper in “.2/2V” position and one jumper in “2 V only”.
All Other Ranges: One jumper in the selected range only.
Do not have a jumper in both the voltage and current ranges at the same time.
Avoid placing a jumper across two ranges.

One jumper is used for AC / DC couple. If AC couple is used, then the jumper
is removed from the board. If DC couple is used, then the jumper is installed.

PAXS Jumper Selection
Bridge Excitation
One jumper is used to select bridge excitation to allow use of the higher sensitivity 24 mV input
range. Use the 5 V excitation with high output (3 mV/V) bridges. The 5 V excitation also reduces
bridge power compared to 10 V excitation.
A maximum of four 350 ohm load cells can be driven by the internal bridge excitation voltage.

Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

JUMPER
LOCATION
BRIDGE

JUMPER
LOCATION
USER INPUT
INPUT RANGE

386

www.redlion.net

PAXT Jumper Selection
RTD Input Jumper

One jumper is used for RTD input ranges. Select the proper range to match
the RTD probe being used. It is not necessary to remove this jumper when
not using RTD probes.

Main
Circuit
Board

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

JUMPER
LOCATION

indicates factory setting.

JUMPER
LOCATION

RTD
INPUT

USER INPUT

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

4. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
5. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
6. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
7. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
8. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC

1-717-767-6511

387

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
PAXD INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper and Excitation Jumper should be verified for proper position.

Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Current Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 5: -VDC

Terminal 4: +ADC
Terminal 5: -ADC

Terminal 4: -ADC
Terminal 6: +ADC
Excitation Jumper: 24 V

Terminal 4: +ADC (signal)
Terminal 5: -ADC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply
Excitation Jumper: 24 V

Voltage Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)
Terminal 3: +VDC (signal)
Terminal 5: -VDC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply
Excitation Jumper: 24 V

Resistance Signal
(3 wire requiring
excitation)

Potentiometer Signal
(3 wire requiring excitation)
Terminal 3: Wiper
Terminal 5: Low end of pot.
Terminal 6: High end of pot.
Excitation Jumper: 2 V REF.
Input Range Jumper: 2 Volt
Module 1 Input Range: 2 Volt
Note: The Apply signal scaling style
should be used because the signal will
be in volts.

Terminal 3: Resistance
Terminal 5: Resistance
Terminal 6: Jumper to
terminal 3
Excitation Jumper:
1.75 mA REF.

CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous live voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the
potential of the user input common with respect to earth common; and the common of the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.

PAXP INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Current Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 3: +VDC
Terminal 5: -VDC

Terminal 4: +ADC
Terminal 5: -ADC

Terminal 4: -ADC
Terminal 6: +ADC

Terminal 4: +ADC (signal)
Terminal 5: -ADC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply

Voltage Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)
Terminal 3: +VDC (signal)
Terminal 5: -VDC (common)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply

CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous live voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the
potential of the user input common with respect to earth common; and the common of the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.

388

www.redlion.net

PAXH INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Before connecting signal wires, the Signal, Input Range and Couple Jumpers
should be verified for proper position.

Voltage Signal

Current Signal (Amps)

Current Signal (Milliamps)
CAUTION: Connect only one input signal range to the
meter. Hazardous signal levels may be present on
unused inputs.
CAUTION: The isolation rating of the input common of the
meter with respect to the option card commons and the
user input common Terminal 8 (If used) is 125 Vrms; and
250 Vrms with respect to AC Power (meter Terminals 1 &
2). To be certain that the ratings are not exceeded, these
voltages should be verified by a high-voltage meter before
wiring the meter.

CAUTION:
1. Where possible, connect the neutral side of the signal (including current shunts) to the input common of the meter. If the input signal is sourced from
an active circuit, connect the lower impedance (usually circuit common) to the input signal common of the meter.
2. For phase-to-phase line monitoring where a neutral does not exist, or for any other signal input in which the isolation voltage rating is exceeded, an isolating potential
transformer must be used to isolate the input voltage from earth. With the transformer, the input common of the meter can then be earth referenced for safety.
3. When measuring line currents, the use of a current transformer is recommended. If using external current shunts, insert the shunt in the neutral return line. If the
isolation voltage rating is exceeded, the use of an isolating current transformer is necessary.

PAXS INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper should be verified for proper position.

4-Wire Bridge Input

2-Wire Single
Ended Input

6-Wire Bridge Input

DEADLOAD COMPENSATION

BRIDGE COMPLETION RESISTORS

In some cases, the combined deadload and liveload output may exceed the
range of the 24 mV input. To use this range, the output of the bridge can be offset
a small amount by applying a fixed resistor across one arm of the bridge. This
shifts the electrical output of the bridge downward to within the operating range
of the meter. A 100 K ohm fixed resistor shifts the bridge output approximately
-10 mV (350 ohm bridge, 10 V excitation).
Connect the resistor between +SIG and -SIG. Use a metal film resistor with a
low temperature coefficient of resistance.

For single strain gage applications, bridge completion resistors must be
employed externally to the meter. Only use metal film resistors with a low
temperature coefficient of resistance.
Load cells and pressure transducers are normally implemented as full
resistance bridges and do not require bridge completion resistors.

PAXT INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Thermocouple

3-Wire RTD

2-Wire RTD

1-717-767-6511

CAUTION: Sensor input common is NOT isolated
from user input common. In order to preserve the
safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous
live earth referenced voltages; or input common
must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous live voltage may be present at the User
Inputs and User Input Common terminals.
Appropriate considerations must then be given to the
potential of the user input common with respect to
earth common; and the common of the isolated plugin cards with respect to input common.

389

3.3 USER INPUT WIRING

Before connecting the wires, the User Input Logic Jumper should be verified for proper position. If not using User
Inputs, then skip this section. Only the appropriate User Input terminal has to be wired.

Sinking Logic

Sourcing Logic

Terminal 8-10:
Terminal 7:

Terminal 8-10: + VDC thru external switching device
Terminal 7: -VDC thru external switching device

}

Connect external switching device between
appropriate User Input terminal and User Comm.
In this logic, the user inputs of the
meter are internally pulled up to +5 V
with 22 K resistance. The input is active
when it is pulled low (<0 .9 V).

In this logic, the user inputs of the meter are
internally pulled down to 0 V with 22 K
resistance. The input is active when a voltage
greater than 3.6 VDC is applied.

PAXH ONLY
Sinking Logic

Sourcing Logic

Terminals 9-11 Connect external
switching device between
Terminal 8
appropriate User Input
terminal and User Comm.

Terminals 9-11:
+ VDC through external switching device
Terminal 8:
-VDC through external switching device

}

In this logic, the user inputs of the
meter are internally pulled up to +5 V
with 22 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .9 V).

In this logic, the user inputs of the meter are
internally pulled down with 22 K resistance.
The input is active when a voltage greater
than 3.6 VDC is applied.

3.4 SETPOINT (ALARMS) WIRING
3.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
3.6 ANALOG OUTPUT WIRING

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

⎫
⎬
⎭

See appropriate plug-in card bulletin for details.

FRONT BUTTONS

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

DSP

Index display through max/min/total/input readouts

Quit programming and return to display mode

PAR

Access parameter list

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

F1V

Function key 1; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 1**

Increment selected parameter value

F2W

Function key 2; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 2**

Decrement selected parameter value

RST

Reset (Function key)**

Hold with F1V, F2W to scroll value by x1000

* Display Readout Legends may be locked out in Factory Settings.
** Factory setting for the F1, F2, and RST keys is NO mode.

390

AND

www.redlion.net

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

DISPLAY MODE
The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. In this mode, the meter
displays can be viewed consecutively by pressing the DSP key. The
annunciators to the left of the display indicate which display is currently shown;
Max Value (MAX), Min Value (MIN), or Totalizer Value (TOT). Each of these
displays can be locked from view through programming. (See Module 3) The
Input Display Value is shown with no annunciator.

MODULE ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)

PROGRAMMING MODE
Two programming modes are available.
Full Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Upon entering this mode, the front panel keys change to Programming Mode
operations. This mode should not be entered while a process is running, since
the meter functions and User Input response may not operate properly while
in Full Programming Mode.
Quick Programming Mode permits only certain parameters to be viewed
and/or modified. When entering this mode, the front panel keys change to
Programming Mode operations, and all meter functions continue to operate
properly. Quick Programming Mode is configured in Module 3. The Display
Intensity Level “
” parameter is available in the Quick Programming
Mode only when the security code is non-zero. For a description, see Module
9—Factory Service Operations. Throughout this document, Programming
Mode (without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming Mode.

PROGRAMMING TIPS
The Programming Menu is organized into nine modules (See above). These
modules group together parameters that are related in function. It is
recommended to begin programming with Module 1 and proceed through each
module in sequence. Note that Modules 6 through 8 are only accessible when
the appropriate plug-in option card is installed. If lost or confused while
programming, press the DSP key to exit programming mode and start over.
When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the meter settings
on the Parameter Value Chart and lock-out parameter programming with a User
Input or lock-out code. (See Modules 2 and 3 for lock-out details.)

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 9. This is a good
starting point if encountering programming problems. Throughout the module
description sections which follow, the factory setting for each parameter is
shown below the parameter display. In addition, all factory settings are listed on
the Parameter Value Chart following the programming section.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the module description sections which follow, the dual display with
arrows appears for each programming parameter. This is used to illustrate the
display alternating between the parameter (top display) and the parameter's
Factory Setting (bottom display). In most cases, selections or value ranges for
the parameter will be listed on the right.

PARAMETER SELECTION ENTRY (ARROW & PAR KEYS)
For each parameter, the display alternates between the parameter and the
present selection or value for that parameter. For parameters which have a list
of selections, the arrow keys (F1S and F2T) are used to sequence through the
list until the desired selection is displayed. Pressing the PAR key stores and
activates the displayed selection, and also advances the meter to the next
parameter.

NUMERICAL VALUE ENTRY (ARROW, RST & PAR KEYS)
For parameters which require a numerical value entry, the arrow keys can be
used to increment or decrement the display to the desired value. When an arrow
key is pressed and held, the display automatically scrolls up or scrolls down.
The longer the key is held, the faster the display scrolls.
The RST key can be used in combination with the arrow keys to enter large
numerical values. When the RST key is pressed along with an arrow key, the
display scrolls by 1000’s. Pressing the PAR key stores and activates the
displayed value, and also advances the meter to the next parameter.

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (DSP KEY or PAR KEY at

)

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

Selection/Value

1-717-767-6511

391

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PAX PARAMETER MENU

PAXT PARAMETER MENU

Refer to the appropriate Input Range for the selected
meter. Use only one Input Range, then proceed to Display
Decimal Point.

PAXD INPUT RANGE

«
ª

SELECTION

RANGE
RESOLUTION

SELECTION

±200.00 µA

200uA

2u
20u
300u
100o
1000o

±2.0000 mA
±20.000 mA
±200.00 mA
±2.0000 A

RANGE
RESOLUTION

PAXS INPUT RANGE

SELECTION

±24 mV
±240 mV

0.02u

±2.0000 V
±20.000 V
±300.00 V

PAXT INPUT TYPE

100.00 ohm
1000.0 ohm

±200.00 mV

10000 ohm

SELECTION

TYPE

tc-t

T TC
E TC
J TC

RANGE
RESOLUTION

K TC
R TC

SELECTION

20.000 mA
10.000 V

Select the input range that corresponds to the external signal.

0.2u

200uA

«
RANGE
RESOLUTION

SELECTION

200.00 mV
2.0000 V
20.000 V
300.0 V
200.00 µA

RANGE
RESOLUTION

2.0000 mA
20.000 mA
200.00 mA
5.000 A

Custom TC

Custom RTD Low

°C

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

«
ª

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

For the PAXT, these are only
available with Custom Scaling.

The input signal can be either AC coupled (rejecting the DC components of
the signal) or DC coupled (measures both the AC and DC components of the
signal). The coupling jumper and the setting of this parameter must match.

392

Custom RTD High

RTD nickel 672
RTD copper 10 Ω

⎫
⎬
⎭

PAXH INPUT COUPLE

°F

CS-rH

RTD platinum 392

PAXT TEMPERATURE SCALE

PAXH INPUT RANGE

RTD platinum 385

Select the input type that corresponds to the input sensor. For RTD types,
check the RTD Input Jumper for matching selection. For custom types, the
Temperature Scale parameter is not available, the Display Decimal Point is
expanded, and Custom Sensor Scaling must be completed.

RANGE
RESOLUTION

SELECTION

Pt385
Pt392
Ni672
Cu427

N TC

PAXP INPUT RANGE

TYPE

C TC

S TC
B TC

SELECTION

Select the decimal point location for the Input, MAX and MIN displays. (The
TOT display decimal point is a separate parameter.) This selection also affects
,
and
parameters and setpoint values.

www.redlion.net

DISPLAY ROUNDING*

2
20

5
50

100

⎫
⎬
⎭

1
10

SCALING POINTS*

These bottom selections are not
available for the PAXT.

Linear - Scaling Points (2)

Rounding selections other than one, cause the Input Display to ‘round’ to the
nearest rounding increment selected (ie. rounding of ‘5’ causes 122 to round to
120 and 123 to round to 125). Rounding starts at the least significant digit of
the Input Display. Remaining parameter entries (scaling point values, setpoint
values, etc.) are not automatically adjusted to this display rounding selection.

For linear processes, only 2 scaling points are necessary. It is recommended
that the 2 scaling points be at opposite ends of the input signal being applied.
The points do not have to be the signal limits. Display scaling will be linear
between and continue past the entered points up to the limits of the Input Signal
Jumper position. Each scaling point has a coordinate-pair of Input Value (
)
and an associated desired Display Value (
).

Nonlinear - Scaling Points (Greater than 2)
PAXT: TEMPERATURE DISPLAY OFFSET*

For non-linear processes, up to 16 scaling points may be used to provide a
piece-wise linear approximation. (The greater the number of scaling points
used, the greater the conformity accuracy.) The Input Display will be linear
between scaling points that are sequential in program order. Each scaling point
has a coordinate-pair of Input Value (
) and an associated desired Display
Value (
). Data from tables or equations, or empirical data could be used to
derive the required number of segments and data values for the coordinate pairs.
In the SFPAX software, several linearization equations are available.

SCALING STYLE
This parameter does not apply for the PAXT. Scaling values for the PAXT
must be keyed-in.

FILTER SETTING*

seconds

ª
The input filter setting is a time constant expressed in tenths of a second. The
filter settles to 99% of the final display value within approximately 3 time
constants. This is an Adaptive Digital Filter which is designed to steady the
Input Display reading. A value of ‘0’ disables filtering.

KEY
APLY

key-in data
apply signal

FILTER BAND*

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

display units

ª
The digital filter will adapt to variations in the input signal. When the
variation exceeds the input filter band value, the digital filter disengages. When
the variation becomes less than the band value, the filter engages again. This
allows for a stable readout, but permits the display to settle rapidly after a large
process change. The value of the band is in display units. A band setting of ‘0’
keeps the digital filter permanently engaged.

For the PAXT, the following parameters only apply to Custom
Sensor Scaling.

ª
For Key-in (
), enter the known first Input Value by using the arrow keys.
The Input Range selection sets up the decimal location for the Input Value. With
0.02A Input Range, 4mA would be entered as 4.000. For Apply (
), apply
the input signal to the meter, adjust the signal source externally until the desired
Input Value appears. In either method, press the PAR key to enter the value
being displayed.
Note:
style - Pressing the RST key will advance the display to the next
scaling display point without storing the input value.

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1
PAXT: ICE POINT SLOPE

«
ª

μV/°C

This parameter sets the slope value for ice point compensation for the
Custom TC range (
) only. The fixed thermocouple ranges are
automatically compensated by the meter and do not require this setting. To
calculate this slope, use μV data obtained from thermocouple manufacturers’
tables for two points between 0°C and 50°C. Place this corresponding μV and
°C information into the equation:
slope = (μV2 - μV1)/(°C2 - °C1).
Due to the nonlinear output of thermocouples, the compensation may show
a small offset error at room temperatures. This can be compensated by the offset
parameter. A value of 0 disables internal compensation when the thermocouple
is externally compensated.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

Enter the first coordinating Display Value by using the arrow keys. This is
the same for
and
scaling styles. The decimal point follows the
selection.

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

ª
For Key-in (
), enter the known second Input Value by using the arrow
keys. For Apply (
), adjust the signal source externally until the next
desired Input Value appears. (Follow the same procedure if using more than 2
scaling points.)

1-717-767-6511

393

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

ª
Enter the second coordinating Display Value by using the arrow keys. This is
the same for
and
scaling styles. (Follow the same procedure if using
more than 2 scaling points.)

General Notes on Scaling
1. Input Values for scaling points should be confined to the limits of the Input
Range Jumper position.
2. The same Input Value should not correspond to more than one Display Value.
(Example: 20 mA can not equal 0 and 10.)
This is referred to as read out jumps (vertical scaled segments).
3. The same Display Value can correspond to more than one Input Value.
(Example: 0 mA and 20 mA can equal 10.)
This is referred to as readout dead zones (horizontal scaled segments).

4. The maximum scaled Display Value spread between range maximum and
minimum is limited to 65,535. For example using +20 mA range the
maximum +20 mA can be scaled to is 32,767 with 0 mA being 0 and Display
Rounding of 1. (Decimal points are ignored.) The other half of 65,535 is for
the lower half of the range 0 to -20 mA even if it is not used. With Display
Rounding of 2, +20 mA can be scaled for 65,535 (32,767 x 2) but with even
Input Display values shown.
5. For input levels beyond the first programmed Input Value, the meter extends
the Display Value by calculating the slope from the first two coordinate pairs
(
/
&
/
). If
= 4 mA and
= 0, then 0 mA
would be some negative Display Value. This could be prevented by making
= 0 mA /
= 0,
= 4 mA /
= 0, with
= 20 mA /
= the desired high Display Value. The calculations stop at the limits of
the Input Range Jumper position.
6. For input levels beyond the last programmed Input Value, the meter extends
the Display Value by calculating the slope from the last two sequential
coordinate pairs. If three coordinate pair scaling points were entered, then the
Display Value calculation would be between
/
&
/
.
The calculations stop at the limits of the Input Range Jumper position.

5.2 MODULE 2 - USER INPUT AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETERS (
)
PARAMETER MENU

The three user inputs are individually programmable to perform specific
meter control functions. While in the Display Mode or Program Mode, the
function is executed the instant the user input transitions to the active state.
The front panel function keys are also individually programmable to perform
specific meter control functions. While in the Display Mode, the primary
function is executed the instant the key is pressed. Holding the function key for
three seconds executes a secondary function. It is possible to program a
secondary function without a primary function.
In most cases, if more than one user input and/or function key is programmed
for the same function, the maintained (level trigger) actions will be performed
while at least one of those user inputs or function keys are activated. The
momentary (edge trigger) actions will be performed every time any of those
user inputs or function keys transition to the active state.

Note: In the following explanations, not all selections are available for both
user inputs and front panel function keys. Alternating displays are shown
with each selection. Those selections showing both displays are available for
both. If a display is not shown, it is not available for that selection.
will represent all three user inputs.
will represent all five function keys.

ZERO (TARE) DISPLAY

RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE DISPLAY

NO FUNCTION

«
ª

No function is performed if activated. This is the factory setting for all user
inputs and function keys. No function can be selected without affecting basic
start-up.

PROGRAMMING MODE LOCK-OUT

«
ª
394

Programming Mode is locked-out, as long as activated
(maintained action). A security code can be configured to
allow programming access during lock-out.

«
ª

www.redlion.net

HOLD DISPLAY

«
ª

RESET MAXIMUM

The shown display is held but all other meter functions
continue as long as activated (maintained action).

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and
the Maximum resets to the present Input Display value. The
Maximum function then continues from that value. This
selection functions independent of the selected display.

«
ª

HOLD ALL FUNCTIONS

«
ª

The meter disables processing the input, holds all display
contents, and locks the state of all outputs as long as activated
(maintained action). The serial port continues data transfer.

RESET, SELECT, ENABLE MAXIMUM DISPLAY
When activated (momentary action), the Maximum value
is set to the present Input Display value. Maximum continues
from that value while active (maintained action). When the
user input is released, Maximum detection stops and holds its
value. This selection functions independent of the selected display. The DSP key
overrides the active user input display but not the Maximum function.

SYNCHRONIZE METER READING

«
ª

The meter suspends all functions as long as activated
(maintained action). When the user input is released, the
meter synchronizes the restart of the A/D with other
processes or timing events.

STORE BATCH READING IN TOTALIZER

SELECT MINIMUM DISPLAY

SELECT TOTALIZER DISPLAY

«
ª

RESET MINIMUM
When activated (momentary action),
flashes and
the Minimum reading is set to the present Input Display
value. The Minimum function then continues from that value.
This selection functions independent of the selected display.

«
ª

RESET, SELECT, ENABLE MINIMUM DISPLAY
When activated (momentary action), the Minimum value
is set to the present Input Display value. Minimum continues
from that value while active (maintained action). When the
user input is released, Minimum detection stops and holds
its value. This selection functions independent of the selected display. The DSP
key overrides the active user input display but not the Minimum function.

RESET TOTALIZER

«
ª

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and the Totalizer resets to
zero. The Totalizer then continues to operate as it is configured. This selection
functions independent of the selected display.

«
ª

RESET AND ENABLE TOTALIZER

RESET MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM

CHANGE DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL
ENABLE TOTALIZER

«
ª

SELECT MAXIMUM DISPLAY

«
ª

When activated (momentary action), the display intensity changes to the next
intensity level (of 4). The four levels correspond to Display Intensity Level (
) settings of 0, 3, 8, and 15. The intensity level, when changed via the User
Input/ Function Key, is not retained at power-down, unless Quick Programming
or Full Programming mode is entered and exited. The meter will power-up at the
last saved intensity level.

1-717-767-6511

395

SETPOINT SELECTIONS

PRINT REQUEST

The following selections are accessible only with the Setpoint plug-in card
installed. Refer to the Setpoint Card Bulletin shipped with the Setpoint plug-in
card for an explanation of their operation.

Setpoint
Card
Only

⎧
⎨
⎩

- Select main or alternate setpoints

Reset Setpoint 1 (Alarm 1)
Reset Setpoint 2 (Alarm 2)
Reset Setpoint 3 (Alarm 3)
Reset Setpoint 4 (Alarm 4)
- Reset Setpoint 3 & 4 (Alarm 3 & 4)
- Reset Setpoint 2, 3 & 4 (Alarm 2, 3 & 4)
- Reset Setpoint All (Alarm All)

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

The meter issues a block print through the serial port when activated. The
data transmitted during a print request is programmed in Module 7. If the user
input is still active after the transmission is complete (about 100 msec), an
additional transmission occurs. As long as the user input is held active,
continuous transmissions occur.

AND PROGRAM
PARAMETERS

LOCK-OUT
)
(

PARAMETER MENU

DESCRIPTION

Visible in Display Mode
Not visible in Display Mode

“Full” Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. This Programming Mode can be locked with a security code and/or
user input. When locked and the PAR key is pressed, the meter enters a Quick
Programming Mode. In this mode, the setpoint values can still be read and/or
changed per the selections below. The Display Intensity Level (
)
parameter also appears whenever Quick Programming Mode is enabled and the
security code is greater than zero.
SELECTION

DESCRIPTION

Visible but not changeable in Quick Programming Mode
Visible and changeable in Quick Programming Mode

MAXIMUM DISPLAY LOCK-OUT*
MINIMUM DISPLAY LOCK-OUT*
TOTALIZER DISPLAY LOCK-OUT*

SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 SP-4 SETPOINT ACCESS*

«
ª

The setpoint displays can be programmed for
,
or
(See the
following table). Accessible only with the Setpoint plug-in card installed.

Not visible in Quick Programming Mode

PROGRAM MODE SECURITY CODE*

«
* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS
SECURITY
CODE

USER INPUT
CONFIGURED

USER INPUT
STATE

WHEN PAR KEY IS
PRESSED

“FULL” PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS

not

————

“Full” Programming

not

————

Quick Programming w/Display Intensity

Immediate access.
After Quick Programming with correct code # at

prompt.

Active

Quick Programming w/Display Intensity

After Quick Programming with correct code # at

prompt.

Not Active

“Full” Programming

Immediate access.

Active

Quick Programming

No access

Not Active

“Full” Programming

Immediate access.

Throughout this document, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming (all meter parameters are accessible).

396

www.redlion.net

5.4 MODULE 4 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT*

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME*

sec.

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME*
DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE*

sec.

This parameter does not apply for the PAXT.

DISPLAY UPDATE RATE*

updates/sec.

This parameter determines the rate of display update. When set to 20
updates/second, the internal re-zero compensation is disabled, allowing for the
fastest possible output response.

ª
Unless a Zero Display was performed or an offset from Module 1 scaling is
desired, this parameter can be skipped. The Display Offset Value is the
difference from the Absolute (gross) Display value to the Relative (net) Display
value for the same input level. The meter will automatically update this Display
Offset Value after each Zero Display. The Display Offset Value can be directly
keyed-in to intentionally add or remove display offset. See Relative / Absolute
Display and Zero Display explanations in Module 2.

E
«

sec.

This parameter turns the internal ice point compensation on or off. Normally,
the ice point compensation is on. If using external compensation, set this
parameter to off. In this case, use copper leads from the external compensation
point to the meter. If using Custom TC range, the ice point compensation can
be adjusted by a value in Module 1 when this is yes.

PAXS: AUTO-ZERO BAND

PAXT: ICE POINT COMPENSATION*

PAXS: AUTO-ZERO TRACKING

ª
The meter can be programmed to automatically compensate for zero drift.
Drift may be caused by changes in the transducers or electronics, or
accumulation of material on weight systems.
Auto-zero tracking operates when the readout remains within the tracking
band for a period of time equal to the tracking delay time. When these
conditions are met, the meter re-zeroes the readout. After the re-zero operation,
the meter resets and continues to auto-zero track.
The auto-zero tracking band should be set large enough to track normal zero
drift, but small enough to not interfere with small process inputs.
For filling operations, the fill rate must exceed the auto-zero tracking rate.
This avoids false tracking at the start of the filling operation.
Fill Rate ≥ tracking band
tracking time
Auto-zero tracking is disabled by setting the auto-zero tracking parameter = 0.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

1-717-767-6511

397

5.5 MODULE 5 - TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

TOTALIZER HIGH ORDER DISPLAY
When the total exceeds 5 digits, the front panel annunciator TOT flashes. In
this case, the meter continues to totalize up to a 9 digit value. The high order 4
digits and the low order 5 digits of the total are displayed alternately. The letter
“ ” denotes the high order display. When the total exceeds a 9 digit value, the
Totalizer will show “E . . .” and will stop.

TOTALIZER BATCHING
TOTALIZER DECIMAL POINT*

«
ª
(

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

For most applications, this matches the Input Display Decimal Point
). If a different location is desired, refer to Totalizer Scale Factor.

TOTALIZER USING TIME BASE
Totalizer accumulates as defined by:

TOTALIZER TIME BASE

«
ª

seconds (÷ 1)
- minutes (÷ 60)
-

(÷ 3600)
- days (÷ 86400)

- hours

This is the time base used in Totalizer accumulations. If the Totalizer is being
accumulated through a user input programmed for Batch, then this parameter
does not apply.

For most applications, the Totalizer reflects the same decimal point location
and engineering units as the Input Display. In these cases, the Totalizer Scale
Factor is 1.000. The Totalizer Scale Factor can be used to scale the Totalizer to
a different value than the Input Display. Common possibilities are:
1. Changing decimal point location (example tenths to whole)
2. Average over a controlled time frame.
Details on calculating the scale factor are shown later.
If the Totalizer is being accumulated through a user input programmed for
Batch, then this parameter does not apply.

TOTALIZER LOW CUT VALUE*

A low cut value disables Totalizer when the Input Display value falls below
the value programmed.

TOTALIZER POWER UP RESET*

«
ª

NO
rSt

Where:
Input Display - the present input reading
Totalizer Scale Factor - 0.001 to 65.000
Totalizer Time Base - (the division factor of

Do not reset buffer
Reset buffer

The Totalizer can be reset to zero on each meter power-up by setting this
parameter to reset.

10.0 x 1.000 = 0.1667 gallon accumulates each second
60
This results in:
10.0 gallons accumulates each minute
600.0 gallons accumulates each hour

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR CALCULATION EXAMPLES
1. When changing the Totalizer Decimal Point (
) location from the
Input Display Decimal Point (
), the required Totalizer Scale Factor is
multiplied by a power of ten.
Example:
Input (
)=0
Input (
) = 0.0 Input (
) = 0.00
Totalizer

Scale
Factor

Totalizer

Scale
Factor

Totalizer

Scale
Factor

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0

0.00

x10

0.1

0.0

0.1

x100

0.01

x10

0.01

x1000

0.001

x100

0.001

x10

0.001

(x = Totalizer display is round by tens or hundreds)
2. To obtain an average reading within a controlled time frame, the selected
Totalizer Time Base is divided by the given time period expressed in the same
timing units.
Example: Average temperature per hour in a 4 hour period, the scale factor
would be 0.250. To achieve a controlled time frame, connect an external timer
to a user input programmed for
. The timer will control the start (reset)
and the stopping (hold) of the totalizer.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

398

)

Example: The input reading is at a constant rate of 10.0 gallons per minute. The
Totalizer is used to determine how many gallons in tenths has flowed.
Because the Input Display and Totalizer are both in tenths of gallons, the
Totalizer Scale Factor is 1. With gallons per minute, the Totalizer Time Base
is minutes (60). By placing these values in the equation, the Totalizer will
accumulate every second as follows:

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR*

Input Display x Totalizer Scale Factor
Totalizer Time Base

www.redlion.net

Modules 6, 7, and 8 are accessible only with the appropriate plug-in cards installed. A quick overview of each Module is
listed below. Refer to the corresponding plug-in card bulletin for a more detailed explanation of each parameter selection.

5.6 MODULE 6 - SETPOINT (ALARM) PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Repeat programming for each setpoint.
- SELECT SETPOINT
- SETPOINT ACTION

- SETPOINT VALUE
- SETPOINT HYSTERESIS

0.0 to 3275.0 sec
0.0 to 3275.0 sec
nor
rEv
AUto
LAtC2
LAtC1
NO
YES
OFF
rEv
nor
FLASH
ON
OFF

- ON TIME DELAY

NO SP-1
SP-3
SP-2
SP-4
OFF
dE-HI
Ab-HI
dE-LO
Ab-LO
bANd
AU-HI
totLo
AU-LO
totHI
-19999 to 99999
1 to 65000

- OFF TIME DELAY
- OUTPUT LOGIC
- RESET ACTION
- STANDBY OPERATION
- SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS
- PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION
PAXT ONLY

5.7 MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

This module is for RS232 and RS485.
- BAUD RATE

- DATA BITS
- PARITY BIT

300
600
1200
2400
7
Odd
EVEN

4800
9600
19200

E
0 to 99
NO
YES

- METER ADDRESS
- ABBREVIATED PRINTING
- PRINT OPTIONS

6roSS
INP
tot

8
NO

tArE
HILO
SPNt

These two options are for the PAXS ONLY.

5.8 MODULE 8 - ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

- ANALOG TYPE
- ANALOG ASSIGNMENT

0-20
4-20
INP
HI

- ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE

0-10

- ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE

LO
tot

- ANALOG UPDATE TIME
- PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION
PAXT ONLY

1-717-767-6511

-19999 to 99999
-19999 to 99999
0.0 to 10.0 sec.
HI

LO
399

5.9 MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

«
ª

PAXP - Input Calibration

The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory.
Scaling to convert the input signal to a desired display
value is performed in Module 1. If the meter appears to be
indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to
Troubleshooting before attempting to calibrate the meter.
When recalibration is required (generally every 2 years), it should only be
performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment. Calibration
does not change any user programmed parameters. However, it may affect the
accuracy of the input signal values previously stored using the Apply (
)
Scaling Style.
Calibration may be aborted by disconnecting power to the meter before
exiting Module 9. In this case, the existing calibration settings remain in effect.

Before starting, verify that the precision signal source is connected to the
correct terminals and ready. Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before
calibrating the meter.
and PAR can be chosen to exit the calibration mode
without any changes taking place.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. Choose the range to be calibrated by using the arrow keys and press PAR.
( and PAR can be chosen to exit the calibration mode without any changes
taking place.)
3. When the zero range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage range: dead short applied
- Current range: open circuit
4. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
5. When the top range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage range: 10 VDC
- Current range: 20 mADC
6. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
7. When
appears, press PAR twice.
8. If the meter is not field scaled, then the input display should match the value
of the input signal.
9. Repeat the above procedure for each input range to be calibrated.

PAXD - Input Calibration

PAXH - Input Calibration

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS

«
ª

Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
The meter will display
and then return to
.
Press DSP key to return to Display Mode. This will
overwrite all user settings with the factory settings.

CALIBRATION

WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source with an
accuracy of 0.01% or better and an external meter with an accuracy
of 0.005% or better.

WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source with an
accuracy of 0.01% or better and an external meter with an accuracy
of 0.005% or better. Resistance inputs require a resistance
substitution device with an accuracy of 0.01% or better.
Before starting, verify that the Input Ranger Jumper is set for the range to be
calibrated. Also verify that the precision signal source is connected and ready.
Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating the meter.
and PAR
can be chosen to exit the calibration mode without any changes taking place.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. Choose the range to be calibrated by using the arrow keys and press PAR.
3. When the zero range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage ranges: dead short applied
- Current ranges: open circuit
- Resistance ranges: dead short with current source connected
4. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
5. When the top range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage ranges: top range value applied (The 300 V range is the exception.
It is calibrated with a 100 V signal.)
- Current ranges: top range value
- Resistance ranges: top range value (The ohms calibration requires
connection of the internal current source through a resistance substitution
device and the proper voltage range selection.)
6. Press PAR and
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds.
7. When
appears, press PAR twice.
8. If the meter is not field scaled, then the input display should match the value
of the input signal.
9. Repeat the above procedure for each input range to be calibrated.

400

WARNING: In the PAXH, DC signals are used to calibrate the AC
ranges. Calibration of the PAXH requires a DC voltmeter with an
accuracy of 0.025% and a precision DC signal source capable of:
1. +1% of full scale, DC
2. -1% of full scale, DC
3. +100% of full scale, DC; (300 V range = +100 V calibration)
4. -100% of full scale, DC; (300 V range = -100 V calibration)
Before starting, verify the Input Range and Signal Jumpers are set for the
range to be calibrated and the Couple jumper is installed for DC. Also verify the
DC signal source is connected and ready. Allow a 30 minute warm-up period
before calibrating the meter.
and PAR can be chosen to exit the calibration
mode without any changes taking place.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Press the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. The meter displays
. Use the arrow keys to select the range that matches
the Signal Jumper setting. Press PAR.
3. Apply the signal matching the meter prompt.
4. Press PAR and
will appear on the display, wait for next prompt.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining three prompts.
6. When
appears, press PAR twice.
7. If the meter is scaled to show input signal, the Input Display should match
the value of the input signal in the Display Mode.
8. Repeat the above procedure for each range to be calibrated or to recalibrate
the same range. It is only necessary to calibrate the input ranges being used.
9. When all desired calibrations are completed, remove the external signal
source and restore original configuration and jumper settings. If AC is being
measured, continue with AC Couple Offset Calibration.

www.redlion.net

100 OHM RTD Range Calibration

AC Couple Offset Calibration - PAXH
It is recommended that Input Calibration be performed first.
1. With meter power removed, set the Input Range Jumper for 20 V, the Couple
Jumper for DC, and set the Signal Jumper for voltage by removing the jumper.
2. Connect a wire (short) between Volt (terminal 6) and COMM (terminal 4).
3. Apply meter power.
4. In Module 1, program as follows: Range:
; Couple: ; Decimal Point:
; Round: ; Filter: ; Band: ; Points: ; Style:
; INP1:
; DSP1:
; INP2:
; DSP2:
5. In Module 4, program as follows: Hi-t: ; Lo-t:
6. Press PAR then DSP to exit programming and view the Input Display.
7. The readout displays the DC coupled zero input, record the value.
8. Remove the meter power and set the Couple Jumper to AC by removing the
jumper.
9. Maintaining the short between terminals 4 and 6, reapply the meter power.
10. Keeping all programming the same, view the Input Display.
11. The readout now displays the AC coupled zero input, record the value.
12. In Module 9, Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
13. Press the down arrow key twice to
and press PAR.
14. Calculate the offset
using the following formula:
= AC coupled reading (step 11) - DC coupled reading (step 7)
15. Use the arrow keys to enter the calculated
.
16. Press PAR three times, to exit programming.
17. Remove the meter power and remove the short from terminals 4 and 6.
18. Restore the original jumper and configuration settings.

PAXS - Input Calibration
WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source with an
accuracy of 0.01% or better and an external meter with an accuracy of
0.005% or better.
Before starting, connect -SIG (terminal 4) to COMM (terminal 5). This
allows a single ended signal to be used for calibration. Connect the calibration
signal to +SIG (terminal 3) and -SIG (terminal 4). Verify the Input Range
jumper is in the desired position. Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before
calibrating the meter.
and PAR can be chosen to exit the calibration mode
without any changes taking place. Perform the following procedure:
1. Press the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. Choose the range to be calibrated by using the arrow keys and press PAR.
3. When the zero range limit appears on the display, apply 0 mV between +SIG
and -SIG.
4. Press PAR and ---- will appear, wait for next prompt.
5. When the top range limit appears on the display, apply the corresponding
+SIG and -SIG voltage (20 mV or 200 mV).
6. Press PAR and ---- will appear, on the display for about 10 seconds.
7. When
appears, press PAR twice to exit programming.
8. Repeat the above procedure for each range to be calibrated or to recalibrate
the same range. It is only necessary to calibrate the input ranges being used.
9. When all desired calibrations are completed, remove -SIG to COMM
connection and external signal source.
10. Restore original configuration and jumper settings.

PAXT - Input Calibration
Warning: Calibration of this meter requires precision instrumentation
operated by qualified technicians. It is recommended that a
calibration service calibrates the meter.
Before selecting any of the calibration procedures, the input to the meter
must be at 0 mV or 0 ohms. Set the digital filer in Module 1 to 1 second. Allow
a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating the meter. The
and PAR can
be chosen to exit calibration mode without any changes taking place.

1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 100 ohm.
2. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR. Then choose
and press PAR.
3. At
, apply a direct short to input terminals 3, 4 and 5 using a three wire
link. Wait 10 seconds, then press PAR.
4. At
, apply a precision resistance of 300 ohms (with an accuracy of
0.01% or better) using a three wire link, to terminals 3, 4 and 5. Wait 10
seconds, press PAR.
5. Connect the RTD, return to the Display Mode and verify the input reading
(with 0 Display Offset) is correct. If not correct repeat calibration.

THERMOCOUPLE Range Calibration
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR. Then choose
and
press PAR.
2. At
, apply a dead short or set calibrator to zero to input terminals 4 and
5. Wait 10 seconds, then press PAR.
3. At
, apply 50.000 mV input signal (with an accuracy of 0.01% or
better) to input terminals 4 and 5. Wait 10 seconds, then press PAR.
4. Return to the Display Mode.
5. Continue with Ice Point Calibration.

ICE POINT Calibration
1. Remove all option cards or invalid results will occur.
2. The ambient temperature must be within 20°C to 30°C.
3. Connect a thermocouple (types T, E, J, K, or N only) with an accuracy of 1°C
or better to the meter.
4. Verify the readout Display Offset is 0, Temperature Scale is °C, Display
Resolution is 0.0, and the Input Range is set for the connected thermocouple.
5. Place the thermocouple in close thermal contact to a reference thermometer
probe. (Use a reference thermometer with an accuracy of 0.25°C or better.)
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (A calibration bath could be used in place of
the thermometer.)
6. In the Normal Display mode, compare the readouts.
7. If a difference exists then continue with the calibration.
8. Enter Module 9, use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR. Then
choose
and press PAR.
9. Calculate a new Ice Point value using: existing Ice Point value + (reference
temperature - Display Mode reading). All values are based on °C.
10. Enter the new Ice Point value.
11. Return to the Display Mode and verify the input reading (with 0 Display
Offset) is correct. If not correct repeat steps 8 through 10.

ANALOG OUTPUT CARD CALIBRATION
Before starting, verify that the precision voltmeter (voltage output) or current
meter (current output) is connected and ready. Perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. Use the arrow keys to choose
and press PAR.
3. Using the chart below, step through the five selections to be calibrated. At
each prompt, use the PAX arrow keys to adjust the external meter display to
match the selection being calibrated. When the external reading matches, or
if this range is not being calibrated, press PAR.
SELECTION

EXTERNAL METER

0.00
4.00
20.00
0.00
10.00

4. When

ACTION

Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust

if
if
if
if
if

necessary,
necessary,
necessary,
necessary,
necessary,

press
press
press
press
press

PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR

appears remove the external meters and press PAR twice.

10 OHM RTD Range Calibration

1-717-767-6511

401

TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

CHECK: Power level, power connections

PROGRAM LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Active (lock-out) user input
ENTER: Security code requested

MAX, MIN, TOT LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Module 3 programming

INCORRECT INPUT DISPLAY VALUE

“OLOL” in DISPLAY (SIGNAL HIGH)

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Range Jumper position, input connections, input signal level

“ULUL” in DISPLAY (SIGNAL LOW)

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Range Jumper position, input connections, input signal level

JITTERY DISPLAY

INCREASE: Module 1 filtering, rounding, input range
CHECK: Wiring is per EMC installation guidelines

MODULES or PARAMETERS NOT ACCESSIBLE

CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation

ERROR CODE (Err 1-4)

PRESS: Reset KEY (If cannot clear contact factory.)

DISPLAY ZERO’S AT LEVELS BELOW 1% OF RANGE

PROGRAM: Module 4 as Hi-t: 0.0 LO-t: 3271.1 (to disable zero chop feature)

For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

PARAMETER VALUE CHART
Programmer ________________ Date ________
PAX MODEL NUMBER ________ Meter# _____________ Security Code __________
1-INP

Signal Input Parameters

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

E rAN6E
tyPE
SCALE
COUPL
dECPt
round
OFFSt
FILtr
bANd
ICE
PtS
StYLE
INP 1
dSP 1
INP 2
dSP 2
INP 3
dSP 3
INP 4
dSP 4
INP 5
dSP 5

FACTORY
SETTING

MODEL DEPENDENT

tcPAXT: TEMPERATURE SCALE
°F
PAXH: INPUT COUPLE
AC
* DISPLAY RESOLUTION
0
DISPLAY ROUNDING INCREMENT
1
PAXT: DISPLAY OFFSET
0
FILTER SETTING
PAXH 0.5
1.0
FILTER ENABLE BAND - PAXH 0.020
10
PAXT: ICE POINT SLOPE
0.00
SCALING POINTS
2
SCALING STYLE - NOT PAXT
KEY
* INPUT VALUE 1
0.000
* DISPLAY VALUE 1
0
* INPUT VALUE 2
1.000
* DISPLAY VALUE 2
1000
* INPUT VALUE 3
0.000
* DISPLAY VALUE 3
0
* INPUT VALUE 4
0.000
* DISPLAY VALUE 4
0
* INPUT VALUE 5
0.000
* DISPLAY VALUE 5
0
PAXT: INPUT TYPE

USER SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP

* INPUT VALUE 6

6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16

* Decimal point location is model and programming dependent.

402

www.redlion.net

* DISPLAY VALUE 6
* INPUT VALUE 7
* DISPLAY VALUE 7
* INPUT VALUE 8
* DISPLAY VALUE 8
* INPUT VALUE 9
* DISPLAY VALUE 9
* INPUT VALUE 10
* DISPLAY VALUE 10
* INPUT VALUE 11
* DISPLAY VALUE 11
* INPUT VALUE 12
* DISPLAY VALUE 12
* INPUT VALUE 13
* DISPLAY VALUE 13
* INPUT VALUE 14
* DISPLAY VALUE 14
* INPUT VALUE 15
* DISPLAY VALUE 15
* INPUT VALUE 16
* DISPLAY VALUE 16

FACTORY
SETTING

0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0
0.000
0

USER SETTING

2-FNC
DISPLAY

USr-1
USr-2
USr-3
F1
F2
rSt
Sc-F1
Sc-F2

User Input and Function Key Parameters
FACTORY
SETTING

PARAMETER

USER SETTING

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

USER INPUT 1
USER INPUT 2
USER INPUT 3
FUNCTION KEY 1
FUNCTION KEY 2
RESET KEY
2nd FUNCTION KEY 1
2nd FUNCTION KEY 2

3-LOC

Display and Program Lockout Parameters

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

HI
LO
tOt
SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
CodE

MAX DISPLAY LOCKOUT

4-SEC

Secondary Function Parameters

FACTORY
SETTING

LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
0

MIN DISPLAY LOCKOUT
TOTAL DISPLAY LOCKOUT
SETPOINT 1 ACCESS
SETPOINT 2 ACCESS
SETPOINT 3 ACCESS
SETPOINT 4 ACCESS
SECURITY CODE

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

HI-t
LO-t
dSP-t
At-t
At-b
b-LIt
OFFSt
ICE

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

FACTORY
SETTING

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME
DISPLAY UPDATE TIME
PAXS: AUTO-ZERO DELAY
PAXS: AUTO-ZERO BAND
UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT - PAXT
DISPLAY OFFSET - NOT PAXT
PAXT: ICE POINT COMPENSATION

USER SETTING

0.0
0.0
2
0
0.02
OFF
0.00
ON

5-tOt
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

ACt-n
SP-n

Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters
PARAMETER

SETPOINT ACTION
* SETPOINT VALUE (main)
* SETPOINT VALUE (alternate)

HYS-n
tON-n
tOF-n
out-n
rSt-n
Stb-n
LIt-n
brn-n

* SETPOINT HYSTERESIS
ON TIME DELAY
OFF TIME DELAY
OUTPUT LOGIC
RESET ACTION
STANDBY OPERATION
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS
PAXT: PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION

OFF
100
100
2
0.0
0.0
nor
AUto
NO
nor
OFF

USER SETTING

* TOTALIZER DECIMAL POINT

7-SrL

Serial Communication Parameters

TOTALIZER TIME BASE

1.000
-19999
NO

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR
* TOTALIZER LOW CUT VALUE
TOTALIZER POWER-UP RESET

FACTORY
USER SETTING
SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

bAUd
dAtA
PAr
Addr
Abrv
Opt
6ross
tArE
INP
tot
HILO
SPNt

BAUD RATE

8-Out

Analog Output Parameters

9600
7
Odd
0
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO

DATA BIT
PARITY BIT
METER ADDRESS
ABBREVIATED PRINTING
ENTER PRINT OPTIONS
PAXS: PRINT GROSS OFFSET
PAXS: PRINT TARE OFFSET
PRINT INPUT VALUE
PRINT TOTAL VALUE
PRINT MAX & MIN VALUES
PRINT SETPOINT VALUES

FACTORY
USER SETTING
SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

tYPE
ASIN
AN-LO
AN-HI
udt
burn

ANALOG TYPE

4-20
INP
0
1000
0.0
LO

ANALOG ASSIGNMENT
* ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE
* ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE
ANALOG UPDATE TIME
PAXT: PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION

E
Factory Setting Parameters
FACTORY
USER SETTING
SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

d-LEv

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

SP-1
FACTORY
SETTING

FACTORY
SETTING

PARAMETER

dECPt
tbASE
SCFAC
Locut
P-UP

9-FCS

6-SPt

Totalizer (Integrator) Parameters

SP-2

USER SETTING

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

OFF
200
200
2
0.0
0.0
nor
AUto
NO
nor
OFF

SP-3
FACTORY
SETTING

OFF
300
300
2
0.0
0.0
nor
AUto
NO
nor
OFF

USER SETTING

SP-4
FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

OFF
400
400
2
0.0
0.0
nor
AUto
NO
nor
OFF

Select alternate list to program these values.

* Decimal point location is model and programming dependent.

1-717-767-6511

403

PAX PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

PAXT
ONLY

404

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXH - AC TRUE RMS VOLT AND CURRENT
This is a brief overview of the PAXH. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 378.
5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY
FOUR VOLTAGE RANGES (300 VAC Max)
FIVE CURRENT RANGES (5 A Max)
ACCEPTS AC OR DC COUPLED INPUTS
THREE WAY ISOLATION: POWER, INPUT AND OUTPUTS
FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (w/OPTION CARD)
COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (w/OPTION CARD

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

PAXH SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT RANGES:
Isolation To Option Card Commons and User Input Commons: 125 Vrms
Isolation To AC Power Terminals: 250 Vrms
INPUT
RANGE

200 mV
2V
20 V
300 V
200 μA
2 mA
20 mA
200 mA
5A

ACCURACY*

IMPEDANCE
(60 Hz)

MAX
CONTINUOUS
OVERLOAD

686 Kohm

30 V

±10 V

0.01 mV

686 Kohm

30 V

±50 V

0.1 mV

686 Kohm

300 V

±300 V

1 mV

686 Kohm

300 V

±300 V***

0.1 V

1.11 Kohm

15 mA

±15 mA

0.01 μA

111 ohm

50 mA

±50 mA

0.1 μA

11.1 ohm

150 mA

±150 mA

1 μA

1.1 ohm

500 mA

±500 mA

10 μA

0.02 ohm

7 A**

±7 A***

1 mA

MAX DC
RESOLUTION
BLOCKING

*Conditions for accuracy specification:
- 20 minutes warmup
- 18-28°C temperature range, 10-75% RH non-condensing
- 50 Hz - 400 Hz sine wave input
- 1% to 100% of range
- Add 0.1% reading + 20 counts error over 0-50°C range
- Add 0.2% reading + 10 counts error for crest factors up to 3, add 1%
reading up to 5
- Add 0.5% reading + 10 counts of DC component
- Add 1% reading + 20 counts error over 20 Hz to 10 KHz range
** Non-repetitive surge rating: 15 A for 5 seconds
*** Inputs are direct coupled to the input divider and shunts. Input signals
with high DC component levels may reduce the usable range.
MAX CREST FACTOR (VP/VRMS): 5 @ Full Scale Input
INPUT COUPLING: AC or AC and DC
INPUT CAPACITANCE: 10 pF
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 125 VAC working
COMMON MODE REJECTION: (DC to 60 Hz) 100 dB

1-717-767-6511

405

MODEL CUB4LP - LOOP POWERED PROCESS INDICATOR
MODEL CUB4CL - CURRENT LOOP INDICATOR
z DUAL RANGE, 4 to 20 mA OR 10 to 50 mA
z 3½-DIGIT, 0.6" (15.2 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z POSITIVE IMAGE TRANSFLECTIVE LCD WITH RED BACKLIGHT
OR POSITIVE IMAGE REFLECTIVE LCD (CUB4LP)
z POSITIVE IMAGE TRANSFLECTIVE LCD WITH RED BACKLIGHT
OR NEGATIVE IMAGE TRANSMISSIVE WITH RED OR
YELLOW/GREEN BACKLIGHT (CUB4CL)
z SPAN AND OFFSET CAPABILITY
z NEGATIVE AND OVERRANGE INDICATION
z SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINT POSITION
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT PANEL BEZEL
z FITS DIN STANDARD CUT-OUT 2.68" (68 mm) X 1.30" (33 mm)
FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Division 2

DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The CUB4LP and CUB4CL are additions to the CUB4 product line. The
CUB4LP uses a 4 to 20 mA or a 10 to 50 mA input signal as operating power.
The input signal is also used to power the backlighting on the CUB4LP40 unit.
The CUB4CL uses a 4 to 20 mA or a 10 to 50 mA input signal to power the unit.
An external power supply is used to power the CUB4CL backlighting to provide
a brighter, more consistent display and a lower compliance voltage.
The units have a 3½-digit LCD display with 0.6" (15.2 mm) high digits and
a DIP switch selectable decimal point. The CUB4LP display is available in
positive image reflective (dark digits, reflective background) or positive image
transflective (dark digits, illuminated background) with red backlighting. The
CUB4CL display is available in positive image transflective (dark digits,
illuminated background) with red or yellow/green backlighting or negative
image transmissive (illuminated digits, dark background) with red or
yellow/green backlighting.
The ability to scale the display allows indication in any desired unit of
measurement such as temperature, pressure, humidity, fluid flow, etc. The unit
is calibrated at the factory with 0.0 displayed @ 4 mA input and 100.0 displayed
@ 20 mA input.
The units are contained in a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a clear
viewing window. When properly installed, the sealed front panel meets NEMA
4X/IP65 specifications for wash-down and dusty environments.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

406

WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION
OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR
CLASS I, DIVISION 2 / CLASS II, DIVISION 2 / CLASS III, DIVISION 2

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 3½-digit (-1999 to 1999), 0.6" (15.2 mm) high digits.
The CUB4LP is available with a positive image reflective LCD or a red
backlit positive image transflective LCD. The intensity of the backlighting
will vary with the input signal.
The CUB4CL is available with a positive image transflective LCD with red
or yellow/green backlighting or a negative image transmissive with red or
yellow/green backlight.
A minus sign is displayed when the indicator is adjusted for a negative offset.
Overrange: Overrange is indicated by a “1” in the most significant digit and
the blanking of the three least significant digits.
2. EXTERNAL BACKLIGHT POWER: (CUB4CL only)
9 - 28 VDC, @ 35 mA typ., 50 mA max. Power Supplies must be Class 2
(NEC) or SELV rated. Above 26 VDC, derate the operating temperature to
50°C.
3. DECIMAL POINTS: Three DIP switch selectable, decimal point positions
allow the display to be read in tenths, hundredths or thousandths.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for
mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

www.redlion.net

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
4. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DROP:
3.2 VDC for CUB4LP00
4.0 VDC for CUB4LP40
3.2 VDC for CUB4CL all models
5. EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE:
CUB4LP00: 800 Ω max. @ 4 mA; 160 Ω max. @ 20 mA
320 Ω max. @ 10 mA; 65 Ω max. @ 50 mA
CUB4LP40: 1000 Ω max. @ 4 mA; 200 Ω max. @ 20 mA
400 Ω max. @ 10 mA; 80 Ω max. @ 50 mA
CUB4CL (all models): 800 Ω max. @ 4 mA; 160 Ω max. @ 20 mA
320 Ω max. @ 10 mA; 65 Ω max. @ 50 mA
6. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE INPUT CURRENT: 100 mA
7. SCALING RANGE:
Span: Two potentiometers provide a coarse and fine span adjustment. Span
range = 0 to 2000.
Offset: Two potentiometers provide a coarse and fine zero offset adjustment.
Offset range = -1999 to 1999.
8. LINEARITY: (@ 23°C, Less than 85% RH) ±(0.1% + 1 digit).
9. READING RATE: 2.5 per second, nominal.
10. RESPONSE TIME: 1.5 seconds to settle for a step change.
11. NORMAL MODE REJECTION: 60 dB 50/60 Hz
12. TEMPERATURE EFFECTS:
Span Temperature Coefficient: 100 PPM/°C
Offset Temperature Coefficient: 0.2 digits/°C
13. CONSTRUCTION: High impact plastic case with clear viewing window.
(Panel gasket and mounting clips included.) This unit is rated for NEMA
4X/IP65 indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File #E184589, UL1604, CSA 22.2 No. 213-M1987
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

EN 55011

Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
Level 3; 10 V/rms2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Level 4; 30 A/m
Enclosure class B
Power mains class B

Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Process Signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or equivalent)
connected to earth ground.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms.
Process signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install 1 ferrite core, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to signal cable at
the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines of this bulletin for additional
information.
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
(Derate backlight voltage to 26 VDC above 50°C.)
Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
60°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. WEIGHT: 3.3 oz. (93.5 g)

INSTALLATION
When properly installed, the CUB4LP/CL meets
NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use. The
units are intended to be mounted into an enclosed
panel. A sponge rubber gasket, mounting clip, two
screws, and nut fasteners are provided to install and
seal the unit in the panel cutout.

Installation Environment

The unit should be installed in a location that does
not exceed the maximum operating temperature and
provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near
devices that generate excessive heat should be
avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft
cloth and neutral soap product. Do NOT use
solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may
accelerate the aging process of the bezel.
The following procedure assures proper installation:
1. Cut the panel opening to the specified dimensions. Remove
burrs and clean the panel opening.
2. Slide nut fastener into slot on mounting clip and then insert
mounting screw through nut on both sides of mounting clip. The tip
of mounting screw should not project through hole on clip.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
Install CUB4LP/CL unit through panel cutout.
4. Slide mounting clip over rear of unit until the clip is against back of panel.
The mounting clip and CUB4LP/CL housing have a latching feature to hold
the unit in place until tightened.
Note: Hold the CUB4LP/CL front bezel in place when sliding the mounting
clip into position.
5. Alternately tighten each mounting screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the gasket for proper seal. The gasket should be compressed

to approximately 75 to 80% of its original thickness.
(Recommended torque is 28 to 36 in-oz.)
6. If the gasket is not adequately compressed and the mounting screws cannot be
tightened any further, loosen the mounting screws and insure that the clip is
latched as closely as possible to the panel.
7. Repeat Step #6 for tightening the mounting screws.

1-717-767-6511

407

3. Signal or control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

WIRING CONNECTIONS

All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for
each terminal. Also cabling should conform to appropriate
standards of good installation, local codes and regulations. It is
recommended that power supplied to the unit (AC or DC) be
protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
The electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals
located on the back of the unit. When wiring the unit, use the
label to identify the wire position with the proper function. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately ¼" of bare wire (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the wire into the screwclamp terminal and tighten the screw until the wire is clamped
tightly. Each terminal can accept up to two #14 AWG wires.

CUB4LP/CL SIGNAL INPUT

SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

The current range is selected by setting DIP switch S1 to the OFF position for
a 4 to 20 mA input or ON for a 10 to 50 mA input. Attach the signal wires to
terminals 3 (SIG-) and 4 (SIG+) observing the correct polarity. The (SIG-)
signal input circuit is not reverse polarity protected.

Span is defined as the numerical range that the display traverses, disregarding
the decimal point, when the input signal is varied from minimum to maximum
(4 to 20 mA or 10 to 50 mA). For example; if a unit is to display 250 @ 4 mA
and 1000 @ 20 mA, the span is 750 (the difference between 250 and 1000). Had
the minimum display been -250, the span would be 1250 (1000 - (-250) = 1250).
The CUB4LP/CL can be set to operate over a wide span range by adjusting the
Coarse and Fine Span adjustment pots. The Coarse Span pot is used to get the
display to within a couple of counts of the desired reading, and the Fine Span
pot is used to adjust for the exact reading.

Backlight Power (CUB4CL only)
Attach a 9 to 28 VDC supply to terminals 1 (COM) and 2 (V+) to power the
backlight. Terminals 3 (SIG-) and 1 (COM) are AC coupled with a capacitor.
This limits the isolation between these terminals to 50 VDC maximum.

OFFSET ADJUSTMENTS
The minimum currents are not zero based with 4 to 20 mA and 10 to 50 mA
signals. To obtain a zero minimum display reading, the display must be offset.
The display on the CUB4LP/CL can be offset by adjusting the Coarse and Fine
Offset pots.

WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT
EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF
OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.

THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Division 2 or Non Hazardous locations.

408

www.redlion.net

DECIMAL POINT POSITION SELECTION

APPLICATION EXAMPLE

The decimal point position is DIP switch selectable for one of three locations.
The CUB4LP/CL can be set up to read in 10ths, 100ths, or 1000ths. If all the
DIP switches are set to the “OFF” position, no decimal point will appear on the
display. The DIP switches are located at the rear of the unit.

Operation of a refinery process required a local display of the position of a
remote pipeline valve. The display would indicate 0 (zero) when the valve was
fully closed with an input signal of 4 mA. When the valve was fully open the
display would indicate 100 with an input signal of 20 mA.
Both the CUB4LP and the CUB4CL meet the necessary requirements.

CALIBRATING THE DISPLAY
Calibrating the CUB4LP/CL requires either an accurate adjustable constant
current supply or the CUB4LP/CL can be installed and scaled with the process
sensor connected to the CUB4LP/CL. To calibrate the unit, proceed as follows.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

1. Set DIP switching for the desired current range.
2. Select the desired decimal point position.
3. Apply the minimum input signal to the CUB4LP/CL and adjust the COARSE
OFFSET to display the approximate desired minimum value.
4. Apply the maximum input signal to the CUB4LP/CL and adjust the COARSE
SPAN to display the approximate desired maximum value.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the minimum and maximum values are within the
desired values.
6. Apply the minimum input signal to the CUB4LP/CL and adjust the FINE
OFFSET to display the exact desired minimum value.
7. Apply the maximum input signal to the CUB4LP/CL and adjust the FINE
SPAN to display the exact desired maximum value.
8. Apply the minimum input signal and verify that the display indicates
correctly.
9. Apply the maximum input signal and verify that the display indicates
correctly.
10. Repeat Steps 6 through 9 until display reads exact.

Note: The CUB4LP/CL display is factory calibrated to indicate 0.0 to 100.0
with an input of 4 to 20 mA at approximately 25°C.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

Reflective LCD Loop Powered Process Indicator
CUB4LP

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical
support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
CUB4CL

MLPS

Red Backlit LCD Loop Powered Process Indicator
Positive Image Transflective LCD
Yel/Grn Backlit LCD External Powered Process
Indicator Negative Image Transmissive LCD
Red Backlit LCD External Powered Process Indicator
Negative Image Transmissive LCD
Yel/Grn Backlit LCD External Powered Process
Indicator Positive Image Transflective LCD
Red Backlit LCD External Powered Process Indicator
Positive Image Transflective LCD
Micro Line/Sensor Power Supply
(Non-hazardous use only)

PART NUMBERS

CUB4LP00
*CUB4LP40
CUB4CL10
CUB4CL20
CUB4CL30
CUB4CL40
MLPS1000

*Backlight intensity will vary depending on signal level.

1-717-767-6511

409

MODEL CUB5P - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 5-DIGIT PROCESS METER
z THREE SELECTABLE D.C. RANGES
0 to 10 V, 0(4) to 20 mA, 0 to 50 mA

UL
R

z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT

US LISTED

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The CUB5 Series provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its
complete user programming to the optional setpoint control and communication
capability. The CUB5 accepts a DC voltage or current input signal and provides
a display in the desired unit of measure. The meter also features minimum and
maximum display capture, display offset, units indicator, and programmable
user input. The display can be toggled either manually or automatically between
the selected displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective or red/green backlight. The backlight version is user
selectable for the desired color and also has variable display intensity.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. The setpoint output cards are field installable with
programmable setpoints. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
can be added with a serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

INPUT
The CUB5P is a DC Process meter. It features voltage and current input
ranges, that are selected by the user via a programming jumper and software
input range selection. The ranges consist of the following: 0 to 10 V, 0(4) to 20
mA, or 0 to 50 mA. Users should select the appropriate voltage range that
covers their maximum input.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

410

www.redlion.net

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

CUB5

DESCRIPTION

CUB5P

Optional Plug-in Cards

CUB5PR00

Process Meter with backlight display

CUB5PB00

CUB5RLY

Single Relay Output Card

CUB5RLY0

CUB5SNK

Dual Sinking Open Collector Output card

CUB5SNK0

RS485 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM1

RS232 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM2

USB Programming Card for CUB5 Products

CUB5USB0

CUB5COM
CUB5USB
MLPS1

Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC

MLPS1000

CBLPROG

RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBLPROG0

CBPRO

RS485 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBPRO007

SFCRD

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 1
USB Programming Cable

SFCRD200

Accessories

CBLUSB
1 Crimson

PART NUMBER

Process Meter with reflective display

CBLUSB0

2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit LCD 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits
CUB5PR00: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5PB00: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a Class 2 or SELV
rated power supply.
MODEL
NO.

DISPLAY COLOR

CUB5PR00
CUB5PB00
CUB5PB00

--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)

INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0

10 mA
85 mA
95 mA

40 mA
115 mA
125 mA

3. INPUT RANGES: Jumper Selectable
0 to 10 V, 0(4) to 20 mA, 0 to 50 mA
4. SENSOR INPUTS:
INPUT
RANGE

ACCURACY
INPUT
MAX INPUT
TEMP.
@23 °C, less
RESOLUTION
IMPEDANCE SIGNAL
COEFFICIENT
than 85% RH

20 / 50 mA 0.1% of span
10 VDC 0.1% of span

10 Ω
538 KΩ

150 mA
30 V

1 µA
1 mV

70 ppm / °C
70 ppm / °C

5. OVERRANGE RATINGS, PROTECTION & INDICATION:
9 to 28 VDC power circuit is not isolated from the signal circuit.
Input Overrange Indication: “OLOL”.
Input Underrange Indication: “ULUL”.
Display Overrange/Underrange Indication: “.....”/“-.....”
6. DISPLAY RESPONSE TIME: 500 msec min.
7. NORMAL MODE REJECTION: 60 dB 50/60 Hz
8. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect USR terminal to USR
COMM to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to 28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
9. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
10. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and max/min values when power is removed.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
12. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5PR00: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5PB00 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL

Red Display

Green Display

1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5

Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 500 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 5 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257C/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
14. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)

TEMPERATURE

-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C

1-717-767-6511

411

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS

The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
Note: Measurement errors may occur if signal input common is shared with
another circuit common (ie, serial common, Dual Sinking Output option card,
or Power Supply common) on multiple units.
SINGLE RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

INSTALLATION

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from
the unit. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the
unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the
panel cutout.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

412

www.redlion.net

3.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter

CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.

Range Jumpers

Setpoint Card
Comms Card

Locking Tab

4.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

4.1 POWER WIRING

4.2 USER INPUT WIRING

DC Power

Sinking Logic

+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC

USR COMM
USR

CAUTION: 9 to 28 VDC
power circuit is not isolated
from the signal circuit.

}

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Input Common.

The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .7 V).

1-717-767-6511

413

4.3 INPUT WIRING

2 Wire With External Power

CAUTION: Power input common is NOT isolated from user and input
commons. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the
power input common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live
earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth
ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may be present at the signal or user
inputs and input common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given
to the potential of the user and input commons with respect to earth ground; and the
common of the plug-in cards with respect to input common.
Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper should be verified for
proper position.

2 Wire With MLPS Power

Input Signal (self powered)
JUMPER
POSITION

MAX SIGNAL
INPUT

10 VDC

30 VDC

20/50 mA DC

150 mA

Series Loop (must use separate supply for sensor power
and each CUB5)

2 Wire With Separate Sensor And CUB5 Power

4.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load
must be wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.

4.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD

414

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

www.redlion.net

5.0 REVIEWING

BUTTON

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

ENTERING PROGRAM MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

RST

Resets values (MIN/MAX) or outputs

Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“1” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

6.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL BUTTON)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL button. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST BUTTONS)

The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST button is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL button.

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY
For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
the selections/value for that parameter. The RST button is used to move through
the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the SEL button, stores and
activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to the next
parameter.
For numeric values, press the RST button to access the value. The right hand
most digit will begin to flash. Pressing the RST button again increments the
digit by one or the user can hold the RST button and the digit will automatically
scroll. The SEL button will advance to the next digit. Pressing and holding the
SEL button will enter the value and move to the next parameter.

Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

1-717-767-6511

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

USrIN

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

415

6.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU

SCALING STYLE

CUB5P INPUT RANGE

rAN6E
ª

10u

RANGE
SELECTION
RESOLUTION

0.02A
0.05A

10.000 V

10u

20.000 mA
50.000 mA

StYLE
ª

KEy

APLY

KEy

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1
DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

dECPt
ª

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

0.000

Select the decimal point location for the Input, MIN and MAX displays. This
selection also affects the dSP1 and dSP2 parameters and setpoint values.

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

OFSEt
ª

0.000

0 to 59999

For Key-in (KEY) style, enter the known first Input Value using the front panel
buttons. (The Input Range selection sets the decimal location for the Input
Value).
For Apply (APLY) style, the meter shows the previously stored Input Value. To
retain this value, press the SEL button to advance to the next parameter. To
change the Input Value, press the RST button and apply the input signal to the
meter. Adjust the signal source externally until the desired Input Value appears.
Press the SEL button to enter the value being displayed.

-19999 to 19999

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

INP 1 «
ª 0.000

dSP 1 «
ª 0.000

-19999 to 99999

Enter the first Display Value using the front panel buttons. This is the same
for KEY and APLY scaling styles. The decimal point follows the dECPt selection.

FILTER SETTING

FILtr
ª

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

0,1 2 3

INP 2 «
ª 10.000

0 to 59999

FILTER BAND

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

bANd

dSP 2 «
ª 10.000

0 to 199 display units

416

-19999 to 99999

Enter the second Display Value using the front panel buttons. This is the same
for KEY and APLY scaling styles.

General Notes on Scaling

1. When using the Apply (APLY) scaling style, input values for scaling points
must be confined to signal limits of the selected range.
2. The same Input Value should not correspond to more than one Display Value.
(Example: 10 V can not equal 0 and 10.)
3. For input levels beyond the programmed Input Values, the meter extends the
Display Value by calculating the slope from the two coordinate pairs (INP1 /
dSP1 & INP2 / dSP2).

www.redlion.net

USER INPUT FUNCTION

USrIN

DISPLAY MODE

NO
P-Loc
ZErO
rESEt

DISPLAY MODE

DESCRIPTION

No Function

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out
Zero Input
(Edge triggered)
Reset (Edge triggered)

d-HLd

Display Hold

d-SEL
d-LEV
COLOr

Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Backlight Color
(Edge Triggered)

Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation (backlight version only).
Change backlight color with each
activation (backlight version only).

DESCRIPTION

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).

P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).

Setpoint 1 Reset

Resets setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset

Resets setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

U-ASN
ª

dSP

HI
LO

HI-LO
dSP

6.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU

HI-En

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

YES

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

CodE

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press the SEL button to exit the module.

VIEW VERSION DISPLAY

HI-t

2.0

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

LO-En

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

YES

Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

LO-t

2.0

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

Entering Code 50 will display the version (x.x) of the
meter. The display then returns to CodE 00. Press the SEL
button to exit the module.

CALIBRATION
The CUB5P uses stored calibration values to provide
accurate voltage and current measurements. Over time,
the electrical characteristics of the components inside the
meter could slowly change, therefore the stored
calibration values may no longer accurately define the input circuit. For most
applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration of the CUB5P involves a voltage or current calibration, which
should only be performed by individuals experienced in calibrating electronic
equipment. Allow a 30 minute warm up for eqiupment and unit before
performing any calibration related procedures. The following procedures should
be performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to 35°C (59 to 95°F).
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the CUB5P.

CodE

Calibration

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

FCS

CodE

yES

Select yES to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

1. Connect the negative lead of a precision DC source with an accuracy of 0.01%
or better to the COMM. Leave the positive lead of the DC source unconnected.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button to select the range to be calibrated.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 0.0A (0.0 V for voltage).
5. Apply 0 signal:
Current: leave the positive lead of the DC source unconnected.
Voltage: apply a short to the input or connect the positive lead of the DC
source to INP+ and set the source to 0.
Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
6. When the display reads the selected range (10 V, 20 mA, or 50 mA), connect
the positive lead of the DC source to INP+ and apply the full scale input signal
for the range. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each input range to be calibrated. When display
reads CAL NO, press the SEL button to exit calibration.

1-717-767-6511

417

6.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

dSP-t
ª

0.5

DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

COLOr

seconds

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

rEd

6rn

Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL

yES

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

yES

d-LEV

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

rSt
ª

dSP

NO
HI

LO
HI-LO

dSP

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

CodE

This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

ZERO DISPLAY WITH DISPLAY RESET

ZErO

yES

000

yES

not

P-Loc

______

Active

UNITS INDICATOR SELECTION

OFF

LISt

SEGS

Not Active

418

999

1-99

Full Programming

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

Immediate Access

After Quick Programming
Quick Programming with correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

Programming Lock

No Access

1-99

Quick Programming

No Access

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

P-Loc

OFF

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds. This parameter only appears
when the MAX or MIN displays are enabled.

UNItS

000

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

ScroL

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

www.redlion.net

6.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU

The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional output
module is installed in the meter.

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSEL

SP-1

SETPOINT 2 ENABLE

YES

SPt-n «
ª 10000

-19999

99999

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

SP-2

Enb-2

SETPOINT VALUE

Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and setpoint 2 is disabled.

HYSTERESIS VALUE

HYS-n
ª

59999

ON TIME DELAY
SETPOINT ACTION

Act-n
ª HI-Ub

LO-bL

HI-bL

HI-Ub

LO-Ub

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

tON-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

OFF TIME DELAY

tOF-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

OUTPUT RESET ACTION
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

HI-bL

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

LO-bL

rSt-n
ª

Auto

LAtCH

L-dLY

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

HI-Ub

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

LO-Ub

the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST

1-717-767-6511

419

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

rEn-n
ª

YES

STANDBY OPERATION

Stb-n

YES

When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and Output Reset action.

CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/OUTPUT STATE

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

ChC-n

YES

This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.

6.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
E

PARAMETER MENU

420

www.redlion.net

Press and hold SEL button
to enter Programming Mode.

CUB5P PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

1-717-767-6511

421

MODEL PAXLCL - PAX LITE CURRENT LOOP METER
DUAL RANGE, 4 to 20 mA or 10 to 50 mA *
3 1/2-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED READOUT
24 VDC EXCITATION SUPPLY
WIDE SPAN & OFFSET SCALING RANGE
OVER-RANGE INDICATION
SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINTS
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT

UL
R

Also adapts to 0 to 50, 0 to 20, 0 to 10, 1 to 5 mA ranges as well as
bi-polar inputs.

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The premium features of the PAX Lite Series can now be applied to
measurement of process variables. With its high sensitivity and programmability,
the PAX Lite Current Loop Meter can be set up for a wide variety of applications.
In most plants the PAXLCL can be used for 90 to 95% of current loop meter needs
for readout of pressure, flow, temperature, level and other variables. The meter has
been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments. With NEMA
4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise effects to CE requirements,
the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution. This allows the
PAXLCL to be used in dirty, hostile environments and in wash-down areas. The
3 1/2-digit bi-polar display (minus sign displayed when current or voltage is
negative) features 0.56" (14.2 mm) high, 7-segment LEDs for easy reading.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

422

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Setting the Switches . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4
4

Wiring the Meter . . . .
Scaling the Meter . . .
Calibrating the Meter.
Applications . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

4
6
7
8

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

CL - Current Loop Meter

Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Accessories

PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK30

1-717-767-6511

423

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 3 1/2-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high, 7-segment LED, (-) minus sign
displayed when current or voltage is negative. Decimal points inserted before
1st, 2nd, or 3rd least significant digits by DIP switch selection.
2. OVER-RANGE INDICATION: Indicated by blanking 3 least significant
digits.
3. POWER:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 6 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. between input and supply (300 V working
voltage).
4. INPUT SENSITIVITY: (Numerical Readout Change/mA)
260 units/mA @ 4 to 20 mA input
105 units/mA @ 10 to 50 mA input
(max. allowable input current, 170 mA)
5. COMPLIANCE: Voltage drop across input at max. signal current, less than
600 mV for both 4 to 20 and 10 to 50 mA ranges.
6. INPUT RESISTANCE:
4 to 20 mA - 29.2 Ω
10 to 50 mA - 11.8 Ω
7. SCALING RANGE:
SPAN: 32 coarse steps (binary progression with 5 DIP switches) Each step
providing approx. 8.125 numerical units/mA/step sensitivity for 4 to 20
mA input and 3.25 units/mA/step for 10 to 50 mA input.
OFFSET: 16 coarse steps (binary progression with 4 DIP switches) with ±
switch to add or subtract offset. Each step adds or subtracts approximately
175 from the numerical display for a total offset range of ±2700.
8. LINEARITY: ±(0.05% ±1 digit)
9. READING RATE: 2.5 updated readings/second, nominal.
10. RESPONSE TIME: 1 second to settle for step change.
11. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode Rejection: 63 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB, DC to 50/60 Hz
12. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Span Temperature Coeff.: 100 PPM/°C
Offset Temperature Coeff.: 100 PPM/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL3101-1, CSA C22.2 No.
1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL/7470A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 03ME09282-08292003
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion B
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Criterion A
30 A/m
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
14. EXCITATION SUPPLY: 24 VDC @ 50 mA max. Regulated and isolated.
15. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
16. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 use. IP20 Touch
safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece bezel/case.
Flame resistant. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
17. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs (0.24 kg)

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized using
the Units Label Kit (PAXLBK30). The backlight is controlled by a DIP switch.

424

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of
the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 SETTING

THE

SWITCHES

The meter has switches, which must be checked and/or changed prior to
applying power. To access the switches, remove the meter base from the case by
firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower
the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It
is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

FRONT DISPLAY

Main
Circuit
Board

Set-Up DIP Switches
Two banks of DIP switches are located inside the meter. The 10 position bank
of switches are used for calibrating the meter. The values of these switches are
discussed in section 5.0 Calibrating the Meter.
The bank of 4 switches located near the front display are used for the
selection of decimal points and backlight annunciator. Selecting “ON” position
enables the function.
SWITCH

FUNCTION

Decimal Point 1 (000.0)

Decimal Point 2 (00.00)

Decimal Point 3 (0.000)

Backlight Annunciator for Units Label

4
3
2
1

D.P./ BACKLIGHT

E
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

OFFSET

SPAN

SPAN
OFFSET

REAR TERMINALS

3.0 WIRING
WIRING OVERVIEW

THE

METER

When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

1-717-767-6511

425

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, its source or the method of coupling into the unit may be different for
various installations. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful
installation in an industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.

Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
2-WIRE, EXTERNAL EXCITATION

2-WIRE, WITH EXCITATION (Series Conn.) 2-WIRE, WITH EXCITATION (Parallel Conn.)

NOTES
1. When shielded wire leads are used, connect the shield to earth ground at the meter and insulate the other end to avoid contact with machine ground.
2. Never run signal leads in conduit, bundles, or race ways with power conductors. Avoid runs close to contactors, relays, solenoids, transformers, and other potential
sources of electrical noise.

426

www.redlion.net

4.0 SCALING

THE

METER
PAXLCL SCHEMATIC

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

The PAX Lite Current Loop Meter consists of a digital volt meter combined
with an analog scaling circuit (shown above). The unit was designed primarily for
use with 4-20 mA and 10-50 mA current loop signal circuits. However, it can also
be adapted to other current ranges, such as 0-50 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA, and in
a great many applications it can be used even with 0-5 mA and 1-5 mA current
loops. In addition, input current can be reversed in polarity resulting in negative
numerical readout with a minus (-) sign displayed. Input terminals 3 and 4 are
connected in series with 10-50 mA current loops, and Terminal 3 and 5 are series
connected with 4-20 mA loops. In either case, the voltage drop generated across
the shunt resistor(s) ranges from approximately 0.12 V min. (@ 4 or 10 mA) to
0.59 V max. (@ 20 or 50 mA). The buffer amplifier (K1) conditions and filters
the input signal voltage and applies it to the input of the scaling circuit. The
procedure for scaling PAX Lite Current Loop Meters is simplified by dividing the
scaling process into two separate components, span adjustments and offset
adjustments which are defined in the following discussion.

SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

Span is defined as the numerical range that the display traverses, disregarding
decimal points, when the input signal current is varied from minimum (4 or 10
mA) to maximum (20 or 50 mA). For example, if a unit is to display 25.0 @ 4
mA and 100.0 @ 20 mA, the span is 750 (the difference between 250 and 1000).
Had the minimum display been -25.0 @ 4 mA and +100.0 @ 20 mA, the span
would be 1250 (1000 - (-250) = 1250). (Note: the terms “GAIN”, “SCALE”, and
“SENSITIVITY” are also frequently used interchangeably with the term
“SPAN.”) The PAX Lite Current Loop Meter
can be set up over a very wide span range by
means of the coarse DIP switches S6-S10, and
the fine screwdriver adjustment pot, located at
the back cover. The coarse span switches add
parallel input resistors to the summing
amplifier (K2), thereby increasing its gain, or
sensitivity, as more summing resistors are
added. Effectively, adding more parallel input
resistors, increases the slope of the transfer
curve (at right) and increases the numerical
readout for a given input signal current change. The input summing resistor values
are weighted in a binary progression, so they can be switched in combinations to
give 32 discrete steps of span. The fine adjust control brackets these coarse steps
and can be adjusted to the exact span needed.

The approximate span contributed by each switch is shown on the rear label.
These values are based on the standard current-loop spans of 4 to 20 mA (16 mA
current variation) and 10-50 mA (40 mA current variation). In other words, if S7
only is turned “ON”, the numerical readout will display a change approximately
1050 for a current swing of 16 mA (4-20 mA input) or 40 mA (10-50 mA input).
If S8 were also turned “ON”, the numerical readout would swing approximately
1575 (1050 for S7 + 525 for S8) for the same signal current variation. The fine
control has a continuous span range of approximately 0-150.

OFFSET ADJUSTMENTS

In the foregoing discussion of span, the transfer curves were shown as
“ZERO-BASED”, i.e., the numerical readout displays “0” when the signal
current goes to zero. With current loop ranges such as 0-5 or 0-10, or 0-20 mA,
and with Bi-Polar (+/-) signals, this is often the desired condition. However,
with 4-20 and 10-50 mA current loops, the minimum current level of 4 or 10
mA usually represents the zero level of the parameter being displayed. There are
also many applications where the minimum
(or zero level) represents some value that
does not fall on a zero based transfer curve.
To
accommodate
non-zero
based
applications, the PAX Lite Current Loop
Meter has provisions for offsetting the
transfer curve over a wide range.
Essentially, offset moves the transfer curve
up or down to change its intercept with the
numerical readout axis, but it does not
change the slope (SPAN) of the transfer
curve. In the PAX Lite Current Loop Meter,
offset is accomplished by adding (or
subtracting) a constant at the input of the summing amplifier (K2). This offset
constant is summed in with a switched binary resistor network and a fine adjust
offset control in a similar manner to that used for span adjustment. Switches S2S5 can be turned on in combinations to give 16 different coarse offset levels.
Each switch is labeled to show the approximate amount of offset contributed
when it is turned “ON”. Switch 1 selects the polarity of the switched-in offset
value and allows offsetting the transfer curve “UP” (adding the offset constant)
or “DOWN” (subtracting). The fine offset control has a numerical readout range
of ±100 and brackets all the coarse switched ranges.

1-717-767-6511

427

5.0 CALIBRATING

THE

METER

Direct calibration in the signal loop is usually not practical due to the
difficulty in varying the measured parameter and the confusing interaction that
occurs between span and offset adjustments. However, the PAXLCL can be
quickly and easily bench calibrated using a commercially available current
calibrator or the calibration set-up shown below.

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

The procedure outlined below minimizes span/offset interaction and
simplifies calibration. In Steps 1 to 4 the unit is “nulled” to zero readout with
zero input signal current. In Steps 5 and 6, the span adjustments are made to
establish the required slope of the transfer curve. Then in Step 7, the transfer
curve is shifted up or down as required by setting the offset adjustments. In Step
8, the final “tweaking” adjustments are made at minimum and maximum signal
current. Setting the decimal points in Step 9 completes the calibration.
Before calibrating, the READOUT SPAN (Rs) and SWING CURRENT (Is)
must be determined.

4. Place unit in its case and apply power. Apply zero current. Adjust the
indicator to read zero using the offset adjustment pot.
5. Apply the SWING CURRENT (Is) (16 mA in the example) to the input.
Set the exact READOUT SPAN value (1000) with span adj.pot.
6. Apply zero current to see if the zero value has shifted. If it has, re-zero with
the offset pot, then repeat Step 5.
7. After the span has been adjusted, set the signal current to the minimum
level (4 mA in the example). Record the meter reading (in this example the
reading will be 250). Subtract the desired reading at minimum current
value (0 in the example) from the recorded reading (0-250 = - 250). Power
down the meter and remove it from its case. Set the offset add/subtract
switch S1 (subtract = on), and the offset switches (S2-S5) to obtain a total
value closest to (but no more than) the difference between the desired
reading at minimum current value and the observed reading The following
chart gives an approximate offset adjustment value for each switch:

WHERE:
Rs = (Max. Numerical Display) - (Min. Numerical Display) (Disregard Decimal Points)
Is = (Current @ Max. Display) - (Current @ Min. Display)

Example:
Readout is to be 0.00 @ 4 mA and 10.00 @ 20 mA.
READOUT SPAN (Rs) = 1000 - 0 = 1000
SWING CURRENT (Is) = 20 mA - 4 mA = 16

CALIBRATION STEPS

1. Power down the meter and remove it from its case. Turn off all offset and
span adjustment switches (S2-S10 down). S1 has no effect when zeroing
and can be in either position.
2. Turn the span control pot fully counter-clockwise (20 turns max.).
3. Turn on a combination of span adjust switches (6-10) to obtain a total value
closest to (but not greater than) the READOUT SPAN (Rs) desired (1000
in this example). The following chart gives an approximate span
adjustment value for each switch:

428

SWITCH NUMBER

SPAN VALUE

2100

1050

525

260

130

SWITCH NUMBER

OFFSET VALUE

1400

700

350

175

Place the meter in its case and apply power. Using the offset adjust pot,
adjust the readout to equal the desired reading at the minimum current
value (0 in the example).
8. Adjust the input signal current to its maximum value to see if the proper
readout is obtained (1000 @ 20 mA in the example). If the readout is
slightly off, adjust the span pot to obtain the true reading. Then, recheck
the reading at the minimum input current (4 mA) and readjust the offset
pot if necessary. Repeat the maximum and minimum readout adjustments
until the unit displays the proper readout at both extremes.
9. Set decimal points as desired using the three decimal point switches. The
unit can now be installed.

TROUBLESHOOTING

For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company
numbers listed.

www.redlion.net

6.0 APPLICATIONS
Example 1:

Example 3 (± Display):

A PAXLCL is to be calibrated to match a flow transducer whose output is 10
mA @ 0 GPM and 50 mA @ 1375 GPM.

A differential pressure transducer has a range of ±1500 PSI with a 4 to 20 mA
output (-1500 @ 4 mA, +1500 @ 20 mA).

READOUT SPAN (Rs) = 1375 − 0 = 1375
SWING CURRENT (Is) = 50 mA − 10 mA = 40 mA

READOUT SPAN (Rs) = +1500 −(−1500) = 3000
SWING CURRENT (Is) = 20 mA(max) - 4 mA(min) = 16 mA

ADJUSTMENTS (Refer to the transfer curve below)
Null the unit to zero readout @ 0
current per Steps 1 to 4 of the
calibration steps.
Set the coarse and fine span adjustments
to get a readout of 1375 @ 40 mA per
Steps 5 and 6. Note: With the full
standard swing of 40 mA, the coarse
span switch reference markings can be
used to determine settings as follows:

ADJUSTMENTS
Null the unit per Steps 1 to 4.

S7 ON (1050) + S9 ON (260) = 1310
Span set with switches.
375 (needed) - 1310 (with SW’s) = 65
w. fine span adj.

Set offset to readout 0 @ 10 mA per Step 7. Note: The read out observed

when the 10 mA min. current is first applied can be used to determine the
offset switch settings.) In this example the readout will be (+) 344 when the
10 mA min. current is first applied. Applying -344 offset then reduces the
readout to zero @ 10 mA.
Check readout at max. (50 mA) and min. (10 mA) and fine tune (tweak) as
required per Step 8.

Set transfer curve slope with span
adjustments per Steps 5 and 6, to get a
readout of +1500 @ 8 mA.
Apply (-) offset per Step 7 to get a
reading of -1500 @ 4 mA.
Check min. and max. extremes and
tweak if required to get desired readout
@ 4 and 20 mA per Step 8.

Example 2 (Negative Slope):
A level measuring device puts out 6 mA when a storage tank is full and 15
mA when the tank is empty. The PAXLCL is to readout 90.0 tons at full tank
and zero when empty.
READOUT SPAN (Rs) = 900 − 0 = 900 (Disregard Decimal Points)
SWING CURRENT (Is) = 6 mA (@ max rdg) - 15 mA (@ min rdg) = -9 mA

In this case, the signal current is reverse [Term 3 (-) with respect to Term 5
(+)] causing the readout to go “down” (increasingly negative) as the negative
current increases.
ADJUSTMENTS
Null the unit per Steps 1 to 4.

Set slope of transfer curve with span
adjustments to get readout of -900 @ 9 mA per Steps 5 and 6.
Move transfer curve up by applying
(+) offset per Step 7 until readout is
+900 @ -6 mA.
Check extreme readings per Step 8, 0
readout @ -15 mA and +900 readout
@ -6 mA. Set D.P. Switch S1 and
replace unit in case.

1-717-767-6511

429

MODEL PAXLPV - PAX LITE PROCESS VOLT METER
z WIDE SPAN & OFFSET SCALING RANGE
z 3 1/2-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED READOUT
z 24 VDC EXCITATION SUPPLY
z OVER-RANGE INDICATION
z SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINTS
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT
z ±25 VOLT DC MAXIMUM INPUT

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The premium features of the PAX Lite Series can now be applied to
measurement of process variables. With its high sensitivity and programmability,
the PAX Lite Process Volt Meter can be set up for a wide variety of applications.
In most plants the PAXLPV can be used for 90 to 95% of Process Volt meter
needs for readout of pressure, flow, temperature, level and other variables. The
meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments. With
NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise effects to CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution. This
allows the PAXLPV to be used in dirty, hostile environments and in wash-down
areas. The 3½-digit bi-polar display (minus sign displayed when voltage is
negative) features 0.56" (14.2 mm) high, 7-segment LEDs for easy reading.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

430

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Setting the Switches . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4
4

Wiring the Meter . . . .
Scaling the Meter . . .
Calibrating the Meter.
Applications . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

5
6
7
8

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

PV - Process Volt Meter

Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Accessories

PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK30

1-717-767-6511

431

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 3 1/2-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high, 7-segment LED, (-) minus sign
displayed when current or voltage is negative. Decimal points inserted before
1st, 2nd, or 3rd least significant digits by DIP switch selection.
2. OVER-RANGE INDICATION: Indicated by blanking 3 least significant
digits.
3. POWER:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 6 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs.
4. INPUT SENSITIVITY: (Numerical Readout Change/Volt) Adjustable from
40 units/volt to 1000 units/volt. Max. allowable input voltage, ±25 volts DC.
5. INPUT RESISTANCE: 1 M Ω
6. SCALING RANGE:
SPAN: 32 coarse steps (binary progression with 5 DIP switches) Each step
providing approx. 40 numerical units/volt/step sensitivity. Fine adjust
brackets the coarse step increments.
OFFSET: 16 coarse steps (binary progression with 4 DIP switches) with ±
switch to add or subtract offset. Each step adds or subtracts approximately
175 from the numerical display for a total offset range of ±2700. Fine control
brackets the steps.
7. LINEARITY: ±(0.05% ±1 digit)
8. READING RATE: 2.5 updated readings / second, nominal.
9. RESPONSE TIME: 1 second to settle for step change.
10. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode Rejection: 63 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB, DC to 50/60 Hz
11. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Span Temperature Coeff.: 100 PPM/°C
Offset Temperature Coeff.: 100 PPM/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2 No.
1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion B
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Criterion A
30 A/m
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
13. EXCITATION SUPPLY: 24 VDC @ 50 mA max. Regulated and isolated.
14. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
15. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor use. IP20
Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel Gasket and mounting clip included.
16. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs (0.24 kg)

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized using
the Units Label Kit (PAXLBK30). The backlight is controlled by a DIP switch.

432

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of
the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 SETTING

THE

SWITCHES

The meter has switches that must be checked and/or changed prior to
applying power. To access the switches, remove the meter base from the case by
firmly squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower
the latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It
is recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

FUNCTION

Decimal Point 1 (000.0)

Decimal Point 2 (00.00)

Decimal Point 3 (0.000)

Backlight Annunciator for Units Label

FRONT DISPLAY

Main
Circuit
Board

4
3
2
1

D.P./ BACKLIGHT

ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

OFFSET

SPAN

SPAN
OFFSET

REAR TERMINALS

1-717-767-6511

433

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the meter (AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

3.1 INPUT WIRING
Voltage Signal (2 wire)

Voltage Signal (4 wire)

Terminal 3: COMM
Terminal 4: INPUT

Terminal 3: COMM
Terminal 4: INPUT
Terminal 5: EXCITATION Terminal 6: EXCITATION +

434

www.redlion.net

4.0 SCALING

THE

METER
PAXLPV SCHEMATIC

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
The PAX Lite Process Volt Meter consists of a digital volt meter combined with an analog scaling circuit
(shown above). Input voltage can be reversed in polarity resulting in negative numerical readout with a minus
(-) sign displayed. Input terminals 3 and 4 are connected to the signal voltage. The buffer amplifier (K1)
conditions and filters the input signal voltage and applies it to the input of the scaling circuit. The procedure
for scaling PAX Lite Process Volt Meters is simplified by dividing the scaling process into two separate
components, span adjustments and offset adjustments which are defined in the following discussion.

SPAN ADJUSTMENTS

OFFSET ADJUSTMENTS

Span is defined as the numerical range that the display traverses, disregarding
decimal points, when the input signal is varied from minimum to maximum. For
example, if a unit is to display 25.0 @ 1 V and 100.0 @ 5 V, the span is 750 (the
difference between 250 and 1000). Had the minimum display been -25.0 @ 1 V
and +100.0 @ 5 V, the span would be 1250 (1000 - (-250) = 1250). (Note: the
terms “GAIN,” “SCALE,” and “SENSITIVITY” are also frequently used
interchangeably with the term “SPAN.”) The PAX Lite Process Volt Meter can
be set up over a very wide span range by means of the coarse DIP switches S6S10, and the fine screwdriver adjustment pot, located at the back cover. The
coarse span switches add parallel input resistors to the summing amplifier (K2),
thereby increasing its gain, or sensitivity, as
more summing resistors are added.
Effectively, adding more parallel input
resistors increases the slope of the transfer
curve (at right) and increases the numerical
readout for a given input signal change. The
input summing resistor values are weighted in
a binary progression, so they can be switched
in combinations to give 32 discrete steps of
span. The fine adjust control brackets these
coarse steps and can be adjusted to the exact
span needed.
The approximate span contributed by each switch is shown on the rear label.
The values shown are “units per volt.” For example, if S6 only is turned “ON,”
the numerical readout will change approximately 550 units for a signal voltage
change of 1 volt. If S7 were also turned “ON,” the numerical readout would
change approximately 825 units for a signal voltage change of 1 volt. The span
adjust pot has a continuous span range of approximately 0- 45.

Effectively, adding more parallel input
resistors increases the slope of the
transfer curve (at right) and increases the
numerical readout for a given input
signal change. In the foregoing
discussion of span, the transfer curves
were shown as “ZERO-BASED,” i.e.,
the numerical readout displays “0” when
the signal goes to zero. With voltage
ranges such as 0-5 V or 0-10 V, and with
Bi-Polar (+/-) signals this is often the
desired condition. However, with voltage
ranges such as 1-5 V or 1-10 V, the minimum voltage level usually represents
the zero level of the parameter being displayed. There are also many
applications where the minimum (or zero level) represents some value that does
not fall on a zero based transfer curve. To accommodate non-zero based
applications, the PAX Lite Process Volt Meter has provisions for offsetting the
transfer curve over a wide range. Essentially, offset moves the transfer curve up
or down to change its intercept with the numerical readout axis, but it does not
change the slope (SPAN) of the transfer curve. In the PAX Lite Process Volt
Meter, offset is accomplished by adding (or subtracting) a constant at the input
of the summing amplifier (K2). This offset constant is summed in with a
switched binary resistor network and a fine adjust offset control in a similar
manner to that used for span adjust. Switches S2-S5 can be turned on in
combinations to give 16 different coarse offset levels. Each switch is labeled to
show the approximate amount of offset contributed when it is turned “ON.”
Switch 1 selects the polarity of the switched-in offset value and allows
offsetting the transfer curve “UP” (adding the offset constant) or “DOWN”
(subtracting). The offset adjust pot has a numerical readout range of +/-100 and
brackets all the coarse switched ranges.

1-717-767-6511

435

5.0 CALIBRATING

THE

METER

Direct calibration in the signal loop is usually not practical due to the
difficulty in varying the measured parameter and the confusing interaction that
occurs between span and offset adjustments. However, the PAXLPV can be
quickly and easily bench calibrated using a commercially available calibrator.

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
The procedure outlined in the calibration steps below, minimizes span/offset
interaction and simplifies calibration. In Steps 1 to 4 the unit is “nulled” to zero
readout with zero input signal voltage. In Steps 5 and 6, the span adjustments
are made to establish the required slope of the transfer curve. Then in Step 7, the
transfer curve is shifted up or down as required by setting the offset adjustments.
In Step 8, the final “tweaking” adjustments are made at minimum and maximum
signal voltage. Setting the decimal points in Step 9 completes the calibration.
Before calibrating, the READOUT SPAN (Rs), SWING VOLTAGE (Vs), and
SPAN PER VOLT (Rs/Vs) must be determined.

CALIBRATION STEPS

1. Power down the meter and remove it from its case. Turn off all offset and
span adjustment switches (S2-S10 down). S1 has no effect when zeroing
and can be in either position.
2. Turn the span control pot. fully counter-clockwise (20 turns max.).
3. Turn on a combination of span adjust switches (6-10) to obtain a total value
closest to (but not greater than) the SPAN PER VOLT desired (250 in this
example). The following chart gives an approximate span adjustment
value for each switch:

SWITCH NUMBER

SPAN VALUE

550

275

140

4. Place unit in its case and apply power. Apply zero volts. Adjust the
indicator to read zero using the offset adjustment pot.
5. Apply the SWING VOLTAGE (Vs) (4 V in this example) to the input. Set
the exact READOUT SPAN value (1000) with span adj. pot.
6. Apply zero volts to see if the zero value has shifted. If it has, re-zero with the
offset pot, then repeat Step 5.
7. After the span has been adjusted, set the signal voltage to the minimum level
(1 V in the example). Record the meter reading (in this example the reading
will be 250). Subtract the desired reading at minimum voltage value (0 in
the example) from the recorded reading (0-250 = - 250). Power down the
meter and remove it from its case. Set the offset add/subtract switch S1

436

WHERE:
Rs = (Max. Numerical Display) - (Min. Numerical Display) (Disregard Decimal Points)
Vs = (Voltage @ Max. Display) - (Voltage @ Min. Display)
Rs/Vs = READOUT SPAN (Rs)
SWING VOLTAGE (Vs)

Example:
Readout is to be 0.00 @ 1 V and 10.00 @ 5 V.
READOUT SPAN (Rs) = 1000 - 0 = 1000
SWING VOLTAGE (Vs) = 5 V - 1 V = 4 V
SPAN PER VOLT (Rs/Vs) = 1000 / 4 V = 250

(subtract = on), and the offset switches (S2-S5) to obtain a total value
closest to (but no more than) the difference between the desired reading at
minimum voltage value and the observed reading. The following chart
gives an approximate offset adjustment value for each switch:
SWITCH NUMBER

OFFSET VALUE

1400

700

350

175

Place the meter in its case and apply power. Using the offset adjust pot,
adjust the readout to equal the minimum voltage value (0 in the example).
8. Adjust the input signal voltage to its maximum value to see if the proper
readout is obtained (1000 @ 5 V in the example). If the readout is slightly
off, adjust the span pot to obtain the true reading. Then, recheck the reading
at the minimum input voltage (1 V) and readjust the offset pot if necessary.
Repeat the maximum and minimum readout adjustments until the unit
displays the proper readout at both extremes.
9. Set decimal points as desired using the three decimal point switches. The
unit can now be installed.

TROUBLESHOOTING

For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company
numbers listed.

www.redlion.net

6.0 APPLICATIONS
Example 1 (± Display):

Example 3 (Negative Slope):

A differential pressure transducer has a range of ±15 PSI with a 1-6 V
output (-15 @ 1 V, +15 @ 6 V)
READOUT SPAN (Rs) = +1500 - (-1500) = 3000
SWING VOLTAGE (Vs) = 6 V (max) - 1 V (min) = 5 V
SPAN PER VOLT (Rs/Vs) = 3000 / 5 V = 600

Note: Since the display readout is limited to 1999 numerical indication, the
full READOUT SPAN of 3000 cannot be obtained during zero based span
adjustment. However, dividing both the READOUT SPAN and SWING
VOLTAGE by two, i.e. 1500 readout @ 2.5 V, allows the span adjustment
to be made for the proper transfer curve slope.
ADJUSTMENTS
Null the unit to zero readout @ 0 V per
Steps 1 to 4 of the calibration steps.
Set transfer curve slope with span
adjustments per Steps 5 and 6 to get a
readout of +1500 @ 2.5 V (SPAN PER
VOLT = 600).
Apply (-) offset per Step 7 to get a
reading of -1500 @ 1 V.
Check min. and max. extremes and tweak
if required to get desired readout @ 1 V
and 6 V per step 8. Set D.P. switch S2
and replace unit in case.

A liquid level sensor puts out 1 V when a storage tank is full and 11 V
when the tank is empty. The PAXLPV is to read out 100.0 when the tank is
full and zero when the tank is empty.
READOUT SPAN (Rs) = 1000 - 0 = 1000
SWING VOLTAGE (Vs) = 1 V (max) - 11 V (min) = -10 V
SPAN PER VOLT (Rs/Vs) = 1000 / -10 V = -100

In this case, the signal voltage is reversed [Term. 3 (+) with respect to Term.
4 (-)] causing the readout to go “down” (increasingly negative) as the
negative voltage increases (hence, the negative (-) SPAN PER VOLT).
ADJUSTMENTS
Null the unit per Steps 1 to 4 of the
calibration steps.
Set the slope of the transfer curve with the
span adjustments to get a readout of -1000
@ -10V (SPAN PER VOLT =
-100) per Steps 5 and 6.
Move the transfer curve up by applying (+)
offset per Step 7 until readout is +1000 @
-1 V.
Check extreme readings per Step 8 0
readout @ -11 V and +1000 @ -1 V. Set
D.P. switch S1 ON and replace unit in case.

Example 2 (Positive Offset):
PAXLPV is to be calibrated to match a flow transducer whose output is 0
V @ 40 GPM and 5 V @ 650 GPM.
READOUT SPAN (Rs) = 650 - 40 = 610
SWING VOLTAGE (Vs) = 5 V (max) - 0 V (min) = 5 V
SPAN PER VOLT (Rs/Vs) = 610 / 5 V = 122

ADJUSTMENTS
Null the unit per Steps 1 to 4 of the
calibration steps.
Set the coarse and fine span adjustments
to get a readout of 610 @ 5 V (SPAN PER
VOLT = 122) per Steps 5 and 6.
Set offset to readout 40 @ 0 V per Step 7.

Check the readout @ max. (5 V) and min.
(0 V) and fine tune (tweak) as required
per Step 8.

1-717-767-6511

437

MODEL DP5P - PROCESS INPUT
This is a brief overview of the DP5P. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
DP5 Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 358.

DUAL RANGE INPUT (20 mA or 10 VDC)
5-DIGIT 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUT
24 VDC TRANSMITTER POWER
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

DP5P SPECIFICATIONS
SENSOR INPUTS:
INPUT
(RANGE)

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

MAX
IMPEDANCE/
DISPLAY
CONTINUOUS
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

0.03% of
0.12% of
20 mA
(-2 to 26 mA) reading +2 μA reading +3 μA

20 ohm

150 mA

1 μA

10 VDC
0.03% of
0.12% of
(-1 to 13 VDC) reading +2 mV reading +3 mV

500 Kohm

300 V

1 mV

438

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXP - PROCESS INPUT
This is a brief overview of the DP5P. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 378.
5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY
DUAL RANGE INPUT (20 mA or 10 VDC)
24 VDC TRANSMITTER POWER
FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)
RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)
COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)
CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

PAXP SPECIFICATIONS
SENSOR INPUTS:
INPUT
(RANGE)

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

MAX
IMPEDANCE/
DISPLAY
CONTINUOUS
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

0.03% of
0.12% of
20 mA
(-2 to 26 mA) reading +2 μA reading +3 μA

20 ohm

150 mA

1 μA

10 VDC
0.03% of
0.12% of
(-1 to 13 VDC) reading +2 mV reading +3 mV

500 Kohm

300 V

1 mV

1-717-767-6511

439

MODEL PAXDP – 1/8 DIN DUAL PROCESS INPUT METER
z ACCEPTS TWO 4 - 20 mA OR 0 - 10 VDC INPUT SIGNALS
z PROGRAMMABLE A/D CONVERSION RATE, 5 TO 105
READINGS PER SECOND
z 5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE DISPLAY
z VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY
z LINEARIZATION/SQUARE ROOT EXTRACTION INPUT RANGE
z PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUTS
z 9 DIGIT TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) WITH BATCHING
z OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT
z FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)

UL
R

z COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)

US LISTED

z RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)

IND. CONT. EQ.

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

z PC SOFTWARE AVAILABLE FOR METER CONFIGURATION

The PAXDP Dual Process Input Meter offers many features and performance
capabilities to suit a wide range of industrial applications. Available in two
models, AC or DC power, the meter has the capability to accept two, 4 to 20 mA
or 0 to 10 VDC input signals. Each input signal can be independently scaled and
displayed. In addition, a math function can be performed on the two signals, C +
A + B, C - A - B, C + A - B, AB / C, CA / B, or C (A / B - 1). Any of the three
meter values can have Alarms, Comms, and/or a Retransmitted Analog Output
capability by simply adding optional cards. The optional plug-in output cards
allow the opportunity to configure the meter for current applications, while
providing easy upgrades for future needs.
The update rate of the meter is user selectable. This will help in those
applications where a quick response from the meter is of the utmost importance.
The rate can be adjusted from eight selections with a minimum of 5
updates/second to a maximum of 105 updates/second.
The meters employ a bright 0.56" (14.2 mm) red sunlight readable LED
display. The intensity of display can be adjusted from dark room applications up
to sunlight readable, making it ideal for viewing in bright light applications.
The meters provide a MAX and MIN reading memory with programmable
capture time. The capture time is used to prevent detection of false max or min
readings which may occur during start-up or unusual process events.
The signal totalizer (integrator) can be used to compute a time-input product.
This can be used to provide a readout of totalized flow, calculate service intervals
of motors or pumps, etc. The totalizer can also accumulate batch operations.
The meter has four setpoint outputs, implemented on Plug-in option cards.
The Plug-in cards provide dual FORM-C relays (5A), quad FORM-A (3A), or
either quad sinking or quad sourcing open collector logic outputs. The setpoint
alarms can be configured to suit a variety of control and alarm requirements.
Communication and Bus Capabilities are also available as option cards. The
standard output is in Modbus Protocol. Any of the following option cards,
RS232, RS485, DeviceNet, or Profibus can be used with the meter. Readout

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

440

values and setpoint alarm values can be controlled through the bus.
Additionally, the meters have a feature that allows a remote computer to directly
control the outputs of the meter.
A linear DC output signal is available as an optional Plug-in card. The card
provides either 20 mA or 10 V signals. The output can be scaled independent of
the input range and can track either the input, totalizer, max/min readings, or
math calculation value.
Once the meters have been initially configured, the parameter list may be
locked out from further modification in its entirety or only the setpoint values
can be made accessible.
The meters have been specifically designed for harsh industrial environments.
With NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise effects to CE
requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Plug-In Cards . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Setting the Jumpers . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

2
3
4
5
6
6

Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display . . . 9
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Factory Service Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Parameter Value Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Programming Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAX

DP - Dual Process Input

0 - Red, Sunlight Readable Display

E
0 - 85 to 250 VAC
1 - 18 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC

Option Card and Accessories Part Numbers
TYPE

MODEL NO.

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards

PART NUMBERS

Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS10

Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

DeviceNet Communications Card

PAXCDC30

Profibus-DP Communications Card

PAXCDC50

PAXCDL

Analog Output Card

PAXCDL10

PAXLBK

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK10

SFCRD

Crimson® 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 2

SFCRD200

PAXCDC

Accessories
Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Notes:
1. For Modbus communications use RS485 Communications Output Card and configure communication (U:1&) parameter for Modbus.
2. Crimson® 2 software is available as a free download at http://www.redlion.net/

1-717-767-6511

441

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) variable intensity red sunlight readable
(-19999 to 99999)
2. POWER:
AC Versions:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 21 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs.
DC Versions: (Derate operating temperature to 40° C if three plug-in option
cards or PAXCDC50 are installed.)
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC, 13 W
AC Power: 24 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 16 VA
Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs (50 V working).
Must use a Class 2 or SELV rated power supply
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
A - Programmable Display
B - Programmable Display
C - Programmable Display
SP1 - Setpoint alarm 1 is active
SP2 - Setpoint alarm 2 is active
SP3 - Setpoint alarm 3 is active
SP4 - Setpoint alarm 4 is active
Units Label - Optional units label backlight
4. KEYPAD: 3 programmable function keys, 5 keys total
5. A/D CONVERTER: 16 bit resolution
6. UPDATE RATES:
A/D conversion rate: Adjustable 5.3 to 105 readings/sec.
Step response: (to within 99% of final readout value with digital filter disabled)

INPUT UPDATE RATE

MAX. TIME (msec)

5.3

770

7.5

560

16.7

260

19.8

220

150

105

Display update rate: adjustable 1 to 20 readings/sec.
Setpoint output on/off delay time: 0 to 3275 sec.
Analog output update rate: 0 to 10 sec
Max./Min. capture delay time: 0 to 3275 sec.
7. DISPLAY MESSAGES:
“OLOL” - Appears when measurement exceeds + signal range.
“ULUL” - Appears when measurement exceeds - signal range
“. . . .” - Appears when display values exceed + display range.
“- . . .” - Appears when display values exceed - display range.
8. SENSOR INPUTS:
INPUT
(RANGE)

±20 mA
(-26 to
26 mA)
±10 VDC
(-13 to
13 VDC)

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

MAX
IMPEDANCE/
DISPLAY
CONTINUOUS
COMPLIANCE
RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

0.03% of
0.12% of
24.6 ohm
reading +2 μA reading +3 μA

90 mA

1 μA

0.03% of
0.12% of
500 Kohm
reading +2 mV reading +3 mV

50 V

1 mV

442

10. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode: (digital filter off)
INPUT UPDATE RATE

50 Hz ±1 Hz

60 Hz ±1 Hz

5.3

>90 dB

>65 dB

7.5

>60 dB

>55 dB

16.7

>100 dB

>50 dB

19.8*

>60 dB

>95 dB

>55 dB

>100 dB

>20 dB

105

>20 dB

>13 dB

*Note: 19.8 Hz Input Rate provides best rate performance and
simultaneous 50/60 Hz rejection.
Common Mode: >100 dB @ 50/60 ±1 Hz (19.8 or 20 Input Rate)
11. USER INPUTS: Three programmable user inputs
Max. Continuous Input: 30 VDC
Isolation To Sensor Input A Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min;
Working Voltage: 50 V
Isolation To Sensor Input B Common: Not isolated.
INPUT STATE

SINKING INPUTS
Ω pull-up to +5 V
22 KΩ

SOURCING INPUTS
Ω pull-down
22 KΩ

Active

VIN < 0.9 VDC

VIN > 3.6 VDC

Inactive

VIN > 3.6 VDC

VIN < 0.9 VDC

Response Time: 20 msec. max.
Logic State: Jumper selectable for sink/source logic
12. TOTALIZER:
Function:
Time Base: second, minute, hour, or day
Batch: Can accumulate (gate) input display from a user input
Time Accuracy: 0.01% typical
Decimal Point: 0 to 0.0000
Scale Factor: 0.001 to 65.000
Low Signal Cut-out: -19,999 to 99,999
Total: 9 digits, display alternates between high order and low order readouts
13. CUSTOM LINEARIZATION:
Data Point Pairs: Selectable from 2 to 16
Display Range: -19,999 to 99,999
Decimal Point: 0 to 0.0000
14. MEMORY: Nonvolatile memory retains all programmable parameters and
display values.
15. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529

www.redlion.net

15. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES (Cont’d):
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Emissions:
AC powered
EN 55011
Class B
DC powered
EN 55011
Class A

16. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C (0 to 45°C with all three plug-in
option cards installed)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH non-condensing
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
17. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
18. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
19. WEIGHT: 10.4 oz. (295 g)

Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of the bulletin for additional
information.

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized
using the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled in the programming.

The Crimson® 2 (SFCRM2) software is a Windows® based program for
configuring and updating the firmware of the PAXDP meter from a PC. Using
the software makes programming the PAXDP meter easier and allows the user
to save the PAXDP database in a PC file for future use. The software is available
as a free download from Red Lion’s website, or it can be purchased on CD.
The first time Crimson® 2 software is run from the File menu, select “New”
to display a dialog and select the PAXDP. The screen will display icons that
represent the various programming sections of the PAXDP. Double-click on an
icon to configure the programming parameters pertaining to the selection. Tool
Tip help is available for each of the program parameters. A PAX® serial plugin card is required to program the meter using the software.
When communicating with Crimson® 2 software, the PAXDP must be set in
default configuration type of:
Communications Type: MODBUS RTU
Baud Rate: 38400
Data Bit: 8
ParityBit: no
Meter Unit Address: 247

1-717-767-6511

443

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN OUTPUT CARDS
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards

COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. Note: For Modbus
communications use RS485 Communications Output Card and configure
communication (
) parameter for Modbus.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal Block)
PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Dual RJ11 Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal Block)
PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (9 Pin D Connector)
PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 or RS232
Communication Type: RLC Protocol (ASCII), Modbus RTU, and Modbus
ASCII
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Baud: 300 to 38,400
Data: 7/8 bits
Parity: no, odd or even
Bus Address: Selectable 0 to 99 (RLC Protocol), or 1 to 247 (Modbus
Protocol), Max. 32 meters per line (RS485)
Transmit Delay: Selectable for 0 to 0.250 sec (+2 msec min)

DEVICENET™ CARD
Compatibility: Group 2 Server Only, not UCMM capable
Baud Rates: 125 Kbaud, 250 Kbaud, and 500 Kbaud
Bus Interface: Phillips 82C250 or equivalent with MIS wiring protection per
DeviceNet™ Volume I Section 10.2.2.
Node Isolation: Bus powered, isolated node
Host Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between DeviceNet™
and meter input common.
PROFIBUS-DP CARD
Fieldbus Type: Profibus-DP as per EN 50170, implemented with Siemens
SPC3 ASIC
Conformance: PNO Certified Profibus-DP Slave Device
Baud Rates: Automatic baud rate detection in the range 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
Station Address: 0 to 126, set by the master over the network. Address stored
in non-volatile memory.
Connection: 9-pin Female D-Sub connector
Network Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between Profibus
network and sensor and user input commons. Not isolated from all other
commons.

SETPOINT CARDS (PAXCDS)
The PAX and MPAX series has 4 available setpoint alarm output plug-in
cards. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the
outputs can be reversed in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector
DUAL RELAY CARD
Type: Two FORM-C relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2000 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 240 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load),
1/8 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with both relays energized not to exceed 5 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
QUAD RELAY CARD
Type: Four FORM-A relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 Vrms
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 3 amps @ 240 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load), 1/10
HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total current with all four relays energized not to exceed 4 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
QUAD SINKING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sinking NPN transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: 100 mA max @ VSAT = 0.7 V max. VMAX = 30 V
QUAD SOURCING OPEN COLLECTOR CARD
Type: Four isolated sourcing PNP transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: Internal supply: 24 VDC ± 10%, 30 mA max. total
External supply: 30 VDC max., 100 mA max. each output
ALL FOUR SETPOINT CARDS
Response Time: See update rates step response specification; add 6 msec
(typical) for relay card

LINEAR DC OUTPUT (PAXCDL)
Either a 0(4)-20 mA or 0-10 V retransmitted linear DC output is available
from the analog output plug-in card. The programmable output low and high
scaling can be based on various display values. Reverse slope output is possible
by reversing the scaling point positions.
PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card
ANALOG OUTPUT CARD
Types: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Accuracy: 0.17% of FS (18 to 28°C); 0.4% of FS (0 to 50°C)
Resolution: 1/3500
Compliance: 10 VDC: 10 KΩ load min., 20 mA: 500 Ω load max.
Powered: Self-powered
Step Response: See update rates step response specification
Update time: See ADC Conversion Rate and Update Time parameter

444

www.redlion.net

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout to
the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the
back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert
the unit into the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

The meter has three jumpers that must be checked and/or changed prior to
applying power. The following Jumper Selection Figures show an enlargement
of the jumper area.
To access the jumpers, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start the other side latch.

Input Jumpers
These jumpers are used to select the proper input types, Voltage (V) or Current
(I). The input type selected in programming must match the jumper setting. See
the Jumper Selection Figures for more details.

User Input Logic Jumper
This jumper selects the logic state of all the user inputs. If the user inputs are
not used, it is not necessary to check or move this jumper.

PAXDP Jumper Selection
FRONT DISPLAY

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

INPUT JUMPER LOCATIONS
INPUT B

Note: In the figures above, the text shown in parenthesis is printed on the
circuit board to help with proper jumper positioning.

(CURRENT) I
(VOLTAGE) V
INPUT A

I
V

USER INPUT
JUMPER
LOCATION

REAR TERMINALS

1-717-767-6511

445

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screwclamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
5. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
6. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
7. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
8. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

3.1 POWER WIRING

AC Power

DC Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper must be verified for proper position.

INPUT A SIGNAL WIRING
Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 4: -VDC
Terminal 5: +VDC

Terminal 4: -ADC
Terminal 5: +ADC

Terminal 3: +ADC
Terminal 5: -ADC

446

www.redlion.net

Voltage/Current Signal (3 wire requiring excitation)
Terminal 3: +Volt supply
Terminal 4: -ADC (common)
Terminal 5: +ADC (signal)

INPUT B SIGNAL WIRING
Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 7: -VDC
Terminal 8: +VDC

Terminal 7: -ADC
Terminal 8: +ADC

Terminal 6: +ADC
Terminal 8: -ADC

Voltage/Current Signal (3 wire requiring excitation)
Terminal 6: +Volt supply
Terminal 7: -ADC (common)
Terminal 8: +ADC (signal)

CAUTION: Sensor Input B common is NOT isolated from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the sensor input
common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not,
hazardous live voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the
potential of the user input common with respect to earth common; and the common of the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.

3.3 USER INPUT WIRING

Sinking Logic

Sourcing Logic

Terminal 9:
Terminal 10-11:

Terminal 9: -VDC thru external switching device
Terminal 10-11: + VDC thru external switching device

}

Connect external switching device between
appropriate User Input terminal and User Comm.
In this logic, the user inputs of the meter
are internally pulled up to +5 V with 22
K resistance. The input is active when it
is pulled low (<0 .9 V).

In this logic, the user inputs of the meter are internally
pulled down to 0 V with 22 K resistance. The input is
active when a voltage greater than 3.6 VDC is applied.

3.4 SETPOINT (ALARMS) WIRING
SOURCING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD

SETPOINT PLUG-IN CARD TERMINALS

SINKING OUTPUT LOGIC CARD

1-717-767-6511

447

3.5 ANALOG OUTPUT WIRING
ANALOG OPTION CARD FIELD TERMINALS

3.6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
RS232 Communications

RS485 Communications
The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the PAX is limited to 19.2k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that is,
data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.
RECEIVING DEVICE

PAX METER
+5V

Transmit
Enable

Terminal Block Connection Figure

33K
12
13

B(-)

A(+)
(+)

33K

COMM. *

15 NC

* OPTIONAL

Extended Comms Connection Figure

Terminal Block Connection Figure

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

Extended Comms Connection Figure

FRONT BUTTONS

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

DSP

Index display through main displays as programmed in

Quit programming and return to display mode

PAR

Access parameter list

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

Function key 1; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 1**

Increment selected parameter value

Function key 2; hold for 3 seconds for Second Function 2**

Decrement selected parameter value

RST

Reset (Function key)**

Hold with F1 , F2

* Display Readout Legends may be locked out in Factory Settings.
** Factory setting for the F1, F2, and RST keys is NO mode.

448

AND

www.redlion.net

to scroll value by x1000

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

DISPLAY MODE
The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. In this mode, the meter
displays can be viewed consecutively by pressing the DSP key. The
annunciators to the left of the display indicate which display is currently shown;
A, B, or C. Each of these displays are programmable and can be locked from
view through programming. (See Module 3.)

PROGRAMMING MODE
Two programming modes are available.
Full Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Upon entering this mode, the front panel keys change to Programming Mode
operations. This mode should not be entered while a process is running, since
the meter functions and User Input response may not operate properly while
in Full Programming Mode.
Quick Programming Mode permits only certain parameters to be viewed
and/or modified. When viewing parameters (SP1, etc), the front panel keys
change to Programming Mode operations, and all meter functions continue
to operate properly. Quick Programming Mode is configured in Module 3.
The Display Intensity Level “
” parameter is available in the Quick
Programming Mode only when the security code is non-zero. For a
description, see Module 9—Factory Service Operations. Throughout this
document, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always refers to
“Full” Programming Mode.

PROGRAMMING TIPS
The Programming Menu is organized into ten modules (see above). These
modules group together parameters that are related in function. It is
recommended to begin programming with Module 1 and proceed through each
module in sequence. Note that Modules 6 through 8 are only accessible when
the appropriate plug-in option card is installed. If lost or confused while
programming, press the DSP key to exit programming mode and start over.
When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the meter settings
on the Parameter Value Chart and lock-out parameter programming with a User
Input or lock-out code. (See Modules 2 and 3 for lock-out details.)

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the module description sections which follow, the dual display with
arrows appears for each programming parameter. This is used to illustrate the
display alternating between the parameter (top display) and the parameter’s
Factory Setting (bottom display). In most cases, selections or value ranges for
the parameter will be listed on the right.

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (DSP KEY or PAR KEY at

)

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

Selection/Value

1-717-767-6511

449

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS
INPUT A PARAMETER MENU

INPUT B PARAMETER MENU

FILTER BAND*

INPUT RANGE

SELECTION

RANGE RESOLUTION

10.000 V
20.000 mA
±10.000 V - Square Root Extraction
±20.000 mA - Square Root Extraction

Select the input range that corresponds to the external signal. Before
applying signal configure input jumper to match setting desired.

ADC CONVERSION RATE

display units

SCALING POINTS

Select the ADC conversion rate (conversions per second). The selection does
not affect the display update rate, however it does affect setpoint and analog
output response time. The default factory setting of 19.8 is recommended for
most applications. Selecting a fast update rate may cause the display to appear
very unstable.

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

ª
Linear - Scaling Points (2)
For linear processes, only 2 scaling points are necessary. It is recommended
that the 2 scaling points be at opposite ends of the input signal being applied.
The points do not have to be the signal limits. Display scaling will be linear
between and continue past the entered points up to the limits of the Input Signal
Jumper position. Each scaling point has a coordinate-pair of Input Value (
)
and an associated desired Display Value (
).

Square Root Extraction Input Range - Scaling Points (2)

ª
Select the decimal point location for the Input display. (The TOT display
decimal point is a separate parameter.) This selection also affects
,
and
parameters and setpoint values.

The PAXDP can apply the square root function directly to the sensor signal
by selecting the Square Root Extraction Input Range (
or
). When
configured for Square Root Extraction, piecewise multipoint linearization is not
required and only the first 2 scaling points are used. For proper operation the
Display 1 (
) value must be zero.

Nonlinear - Scaling Points (Greater than 2)
DISPLAY ROUNDING*

«
ª
Rounding selections other than one, cause the Input Display to ‘round’ to the
nearest rounding increment selected (ie. rounding of ‘5’ causes 121 to round to
120 and 124 to round to 125). Rounding starts at the least significant digit of
the Input Display. Remaining parameter entries (scaling point values, setpoint
values, etc.) are not automatically adjusted to this display rounding selection.

seconds

450

SCALING STYLE

FILTER SETTING

For non-linear processes, up to 16 scaling points may be used to provide a
piece-wise linear approximation. (The greater the number of scaling points
used, the greater the conformity accuracy.) The Input Display will be linear
between scaling points that are sequential in program order. Each scaling point
has a coordinate-pair of Input Value (
) and an associated desired Display
Value (
). Data from tables or equations, or empirical data could be used to
derive the required number of segments and data values for the coordinate pairs.
In the Crimson 2 (SFCRM2) software, several linearization equations are
available. See the Accessories section for more information.

KEY
APLY

key-in data
apply signal

* The decimal point position is dependent on the selection made in the
“Display Decimal Point” parameter.

www.redlion.net

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2*

For Key-in (
), enter the known first Input Value by using the arrow keys.
(The Input Range selection sets up the decimal location for the Input Value.)
For Apply (
), apply the input signal to the meter, adjust the signal source
externally until the desired Input Value appears. In either method, press the
PAR key to enter the value being displayed. In the
style, the RST key can
be pressed to advance the display past the
value or other input value
without storing it. This is useful for application scaling of the second scaling
point (i.e. when the tank is full), or some other point in multipoint applications.

Enter the second coordinating Display Value by using the arrow keys. This is
the same for
and
scaling styles. (Follow the same procedure if using
more than 2 scaling points.)

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1*

ª
Enter the first coordinating Display Value by using the arrow keys. This is
the same for
and
scaling styles. The decimal point follows the
selection. For Square Root Extraction Input Range, the Display 1 value must
be zero.

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

* The decimal point position is dependent on the selection made in the
“Display Decimal Point” parameter.

General Notes on Scaling
1. Input Values for scaling points should be confined to the limits of the Input
Signal, ie. 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC.
2. The same Input Value should not correspond to more than one Display Value.
(Example: 20 mA can not equal 0 and 10.)
This is referred to as readout jumps (vertical scaled segments).
3. The same Display Value can correspond to more than one Input Value.
(Example: 0 mA and 20 mA can equal 10.)
This is referred to as readout dead zones (horizontal scaled segments).
4. The maximum scaled Display Value spread between range maximum and
minimum is limited to 65,535. For example using +20 mA range the
maximum +20 mA can be scaled to is 32,767 with 0 mA being 0 and Display
Rounding of 1. (Decimal points are ignored.) The other half of 65,535 is for
the lower half of the range 0 to -20 mA even if it is not used. With Display
Rounding of 2, +20 mA can be scaled for 65,535 (32,767 x 2) but with even
Input Display values shown.
5. For input levels beyond the first programmed Input Value, the meter extends
the Display Value by calculating the slope from the first two coordinate pairs
(
/
&
/
). If
= 4 mA and
= 0, then 0 mA
would be some negative Display Value. This could be prevented by making
= 0 mA /
= 0,
= 4 mA /
= 0, with
= 20 mA /
= the desired high Display Value. The calculations stop at the limits of
the Input Range Jumper position.
6. For input levels beyond the last programmed Input Value, the meter extends
the Display Value by calculating the slope from the last two sequential
coordinate pairs. If three coordinate pair scaling points were entered, then the
Display Value calculation would be between
/
&
/
.
The calculations stop at the limits of the Signal Input.

5.2 MODULE 2 - USER INPUT AND FRONT PANEL FUNCTION KEY
PARAMETERS (
)

PARAMETER MENU

The two user inputs are individually programmable to perform specific meter
control functions. While in the Display Mode or Program Mode, the function is
executed the instant the user input transitions to the active state.
The front panel function keys are also individually programmable to perform
specific meter control functions. While in the Display Mode or when viewing
meter values in Quick Programming mode, the primary function is executed the
instant the key is pressed. Holding the function key for three seconds executes
a secondary function. It is possible to program a secondary function without a
primary function.
In most cases, if more than one user input and/or function key is programmed
for the same function, the maintained (level trigger) actions will be performed
while at least one of those user inputs or function keys are activated. The
momentary (edge trigger) actions will be performed every time any of those
user inputs or function keys transition to the active state.

Note: In the following explanations, not all selections are available for both
user inputs and front panel function keys. Alternating displays are shown
with each selection. Those selections showing both displays are available for
both. If a display is not shown, it is not available for that selection.
will represent both user inputs.
will represent all five function keys.

NO FUNCTION

«
ª

No function is performed if activated. This is the factory setting for all user
inputs and function keys. No function can be selected without affecting basic
start-up.

PROGRAMMING MODE LOCK-OUT

«
ª

1-717-767-6511

Programming Mode is locked-out, as long as activated
(maintained action). A security code can be configured to
allow programming access during lock-out.

451

INPUT A ZERO (TARE) DISPLAY

HOLD ALL FUNCTIONS

The Zero (Tare) Display provides a way to zero the Input A value at various
input levels, causing future Display readings to be offset. This function is useful
in weighing applications where the container or material on the scale should not
be included in the next measurement value. When activated (momentary
action),
flashes and the Input A value is set to zero. At the same time, the
Input A value (that was on the display before the Zero Display) is subtracted
from the Input A Display Offset Value and is automatically stored as the new
Display Offset Value (
). If another Zero (tare) Display is performed, the
display will again change to zero and the Input A reading will shift accordingly.

INPUT B ZERO (TARE) DISPLAY

SYNCHRONIZE METER READING

«
ª

The meter suspends all functions as long as activated
(maintained action). When the user input is released, the
meter synchronizes the restart of the A/D’s with other
processes or timing events.

Input assignment for the totalizer is programmed in Module 5, Totalizer
(Integrator) Parameters. Only the assigned input or calculation will be active for
the following Totalizer User Functions.

STORE BATCH READING IN TOTALIZER

The Zero (Tare) Display provides a way to zero the Input B value at various
input levels, causing future Display readings to be offset. This function is useful
in weighing applications where the container or material on the scale should not
be included in the next measurement value. When activated (momentary
action),
flashes and the Input B value is set to zero. At the same time, the
Input B value (that was on the display before the Zero Display) is subtracted
from the Input B Display Offset Value and is automatically stored as the new
Display Offset Value (
). If another Zero (tare) Display is performed, the
display will again change to zero and the Input B reading will shift accordingly.

The assigned value is one time added (batched) to the Totalizer at transition
to activate (momentary action). The Totalizer retains a running sum of each
batch operation until the Totalizer is reset. When this function is selected, the
normal operation of the Totalizer is overridden.

INPUT A RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE DISPLAY

RESET TOTALIZER

«
ª

The meter disables processing the input, holds all display
contents, and locks the state of all outputs as long as activated
(maintained action). The serial port continues data transfer.

«
ª

This function will switch the Input A Display between Relative and Absolute.
The Relative is a net value that includes the Display Offset Value. The Input A
Display will normally show the Relative unless switched by this function. The
Absolute is a gross value (based on Module 1 DSP and INP entries) without
the Display Offset Value. The Absolute display is selected as long as the user
input is activated (maintained action) or at the transition of the function key
(momentary action). When the user input is released, or the function key is
pressed again, the input A display switches back to Relative display.
(absolute) or
(relative) is momentarily displayed at transition to indicate
which display is active.

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and the Totalizer resets to
zero. The Totalizer then continues to operate as it is configured. This selection
functions independent of the selected display.

RESET AND ENABLE TOTALIZER

«
ª

INPUT B RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE DISPLAY

This function will switch the Input B Display between Relative and
Absolute. The Relative is a net value that includes the Display Offset Value. The
Input B Display will normally show the Relative unless switched by this
function. The Absolute is a gross value (based on Module 1 DSP and INP
entries) without the Display Offset Value. The Absolute display is selected as
long as the user input is activated (maintained action) or at the transition of the
function key (momentary action). When the user input is released, or the
function key is pressed again, the input B display switches back to Relative
display.
(absolute) or
(relative) is momentarily displayed at
transition to indicate which display is active.

«
452

RESET MAXIMUM

«
ª

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and the Maximum resets
to the present assigned value. The Maximum function then continues from that
value. This selection functions independent of the selected display.

HOLD DISPLAY

ENABLE TOTALIZER

The shown display is held but all other meter functions
continue as long as activated (maintained action).

www.redlion.net

RESET MINIMUM

CHANGE DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and the Minimum reading
is set to the present assigned value. The Minimum function then continues from
that value. This selection functions independent of the selected display.

When activated (momentary action), the display intensity changes to the next
intensity level (of 4). The four levels correspond to Display Intensity Level (
) settings of 0, 3, 8, and 15.

SETPOINT SELECTIONS

RESET MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM

«
ª

When activated (momentary action),
flashes and the Maximum and
Minimum readings are set to the present assigned values. The Maximum and
Minimum function then continues from that value. This selection functions
independent of the selected display.

The following selections are functional only with the Setpoint plug-in card
installed. Refer to the Setpoint Card Bulletin shipped with the Setpoint plug-in
card for an explanation of their operation.

Setpoint
Card
Only

Note: Following display functions are only available on User Input.

⎧
⎨
⎩

- Select main or alternate setpoints

SELECT SETPOINT LIST

ADVANCE DISPLAY

«
ª

ª
When activated (momentary action), the display advances to the next display
that is not locked out from the Display Mode.

SELECT DISPLAY A

«
ª

Two lists of values are available for
,
,
,
. The two lists are
named
and
. If a user input is used to select the list then
is
selected when the user input is not active and and
is selected when the
user input is active (maintained action). If a front panel key is used to select the
list then the list will toggle for each key press (momentary action). The display
will only indicate which list is active when the list is changed.
To program the values for
and
, first complete the programming
of all the parameters. Exit programming and switch to the other list. Re-enter
programming and enter the values for
,
,
,
. If any other
parameters are changed then the other list values must be reprogrammed.

When activated (momentary action), the display advances to Display A,
if enabled.

PRINT REQUEST

SELECT DISPLAY B

«
ª
When activated (momentary action), the display advances to Display B,
if enabled.

«
ª

The meter issues a block print through the serial port when activated, and the
serial type is set to
. The data transmitted during a print request and the serial
type is programmed in Module 7. If the user input is still active after the
transmission is complete (about 100 msec), an additional transmission occurs.
As long as the user input is held active, continuous transmissions occur.

SELECT DISPLAY C

«
ª
When activated (momentary action), the display advances to Display C,
if enabled.

SELECT DISPLAY _

«
ª
When activated (momentary action), the display advances to the Display _
(no annunciator), if enabled.

1-717-767-6511

453

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY ASSIGNMENT AND
PROGRAM LOCK-OUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 3 is the programming for the Display, Display assignments, Display
lock-out and “Full” and “Quick” Program lock-out.
When in the main Display Mode, the available displays (A,B,C,_) can be
read consecutively by repeatedly pressing the DSP key. An annunciator
indicates the display being shown (_ = No annunciator). A meter display value
can be programmed to one of the displays, to the quick programming mode or
be locked from being visible. It is recommended that the meter display value be
set to
when it is not being used in the application.
“Full” Programming Mode permits all parameters to be viewed and
modified. This Programming Mode can be locked with a security code and/or
user input. When locked and the PAR key is pressed, the meter enters a Quick
Programming Mode. In this mode, the setpoint values can still be read and/or
changed per the selections below. The display Intensity Level (
)
parameter also appears whenever Quick Programming Mode is enabled and the
security code greater than zero.

SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 SP-4 SETPOINT ACCESS*

«
ª

The setpoint displays can be programmed for
,
or
(see the
following table). Accessible only with the Setpoint plug-in card installed.
SELECTION

DESCRIPTION

Not visible in Quick Programming Mode Only
Visible in Quick Programming Mode Only
Visible and changeable in Quick Programming Mode Only

PROGRAM MODE SECURITY CODE*

DISPLAY ASSIGNMENT

ª
«

ª
E

«
«

There are six meter values that can be individually programmed for one of
the main displays (A,B,C or _), or programmed to be viewable in Quick
Programming mode (rEd), or programmed to be locked out from display (LOC)
(see the following table). If two or more values are assigned to the same display
the last value assigned will be the one that is displayed.

* Factory Setting can be used without affecting basic start-up.

Not visible in Display Mode or Quick Programming Mode

LOC
rEd

Visible in Quick Programming Mode only
Assign to Display _ (No annunciator)
Assign to Display A

dSP-A
dSP-b
dSP-C

Assign to Display B
Assign to Display C

PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS
SECURITY
CODE

USER INPUT
CONFIGURED

USER INPUT
STATE

WHEN PAR KEY IS
PRESSED

“FULL” PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS

not

————

“Full” Programming

not

————

Quick Programming w/Display Intensity

Immediate access.
After Quick Programming with correct code # at

prompt.

Active

Quick Programming w/Display Intensity

After Quick Programming with correct code # at

prompt.

Not Active

“Full” Programming

Immediate access.

Active

Quick Programming

No access

Not Active

“Full” Programming

Immediate access.

Throughout this document, Programming Mode (without Quick in front) always refers to “Full” Programming (all meter parameters are accessible).

454

www.redlion.net

5.4 MODULE 4 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

INPUT A OFFSET VALUE*

ª
Unless a Zero Display was performed or an offset from Module 1 scaling is
desired for Input A, this parameter can be skipped. The Display Offset Value is
the difference between the Absolute (gross) Display value and the Relative (net)
Display value for the same input level. The meter will automatically update this
Display Offset Value after each Zero Display. The Display Offset Value can be
directly keyed-in to intentionally add or remove display offset. See Relative /
Absolute Display and Zero Display explanations in Module 2.

sec.

DISPLAY UPDATE RATE

updates/sec.

ª
This parameter determines the rate of display update.

INPUT B OFFSET VALUE*

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT

ª
Unless a Zero Display was performed or an offset from Module 1 scaling is
desired for Input B, this parameter can be skipped. The Display Offset Value is
the difference between the Absolute (gross) Display value and the Relative (net)
Display value for the same input level. The meter will automatically update this
Display Offset Value after each Zero Display. The Display Offset Value can be
directly keyed-in to intentionally add or remove display offset. See Relative /
Absolute Display and Zero Display explanations in Module 2.

«
ª
The Units Label Kit Accessory contains a sheet of custom unit overlays
which can be installed in to the meter’s bezel display assembly. The backlight
for these custom units is activated by this parameter.

CALCULATION FUNCTION

MAX CAPTURE ASSIGNMENT

ª DBC

«
ª
Select the desired parameter that will be assigned to the Max Capture.

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

«
ª

sec.

D"C D"C D"C BCD D"C D("C)

This parameter determines the math calculation that will be performed on Input
A and Input B and shown on the calculation display. The above formulas
represent the available calculations; = Input A relative value, = Input B
relative value, and = Calculation Constant Value (
). For the average
between A and B inputs, scale the display (Input A & Input B E41 x) values in
half and then use C A b.
Note: = add, - = subtract, = division, D("C) is displayed in the PAX
as "C and the function performs with A divided b then 1 is subtracted and
the result is multiply by c.

CALCULATION DECIMAL POINT

«
ª

MIN CAPTURE ASSIGNMENT

This parameter determines the decimal point location for the Calculation
Display. For the $"C, $"C, and $"C calculation functions, Input A
“Display Decimal Point”, Input B “Display Decimal Point” and “Calculation
Decimal Point” must all be in the same position.

«
ª
Select the desired parameter that will be assigned to the Min Capture.

* The decimal point position is dependent on the selection made in the
“Display Decimal Point” parameter.

1-717-767-6511

455

CALCULATION CONSTANT VALUE

CALCULATION FILTER SETTING

The constant value is used in the Calculation Function formulas to provide
offsetting or scaling capabilities. For the $"C, $"C, and $"C
calculation functions, the Constant decimal point matches that Calculation
Decimal point position. For these functions, the “Constant Value” must be
lowered to a value of 0 for no offset.
For the BCD, D"C, and D("C) calculation functions, there is no
“Constant Value” decimal point shown. However, when Input A “Display
Decimal Point”, Input B “Display Decimal Point” and “Calculation Decimal
Point” are in the same position, then the “Constant Value” decimal point will be
assumed to be at the same location as the “Calculation Decimal Point”. For the
Calculation Display to have the same resolution as Inputs A & B, the “Constant
Value” must be a value of 1 with trailing 0's for each assumed decimal point
location. Example: With Input A, Input B and the Calculation decimal points
entered as 0.00, then the “Constant Value” would be entered as 100 for no gain.

CALCULATION ROUNDING*

«
ª
Rounding selections other than one, cause the Calculation Display to ‘round’ to
the nearest rounding increment selected (ie. rounding of ‘0.005’ causes 0.121 to
round to 0.120 and 0.124 to round to 125). Rounding starts at the least significant
digit of the Calculation Display. Remaining parameter entries (scaling point
values, setpoint values, etc.) are not automatically adjusted to this display rounding
selection. The displayed decimal point reflects that programmed in
.

The calculation filter setting is a time constant expressed in tenths of a
second. The filter settles to 99% of the final display value within approximately
3 time constants. This is an Adaptive Digital Filter which is designed to steady
the Calculation Display reading. A value of ‘0’ disables filtering.

CALCULATION FILTER BAND*

display units

ª
The digital filter will adapt to variations in the calculation filter. When the
variation exceeds the calculation filter band value, the digital filter disengages.
When the variation becomes less than the band value, the filter engages again.
This allows for a stable readout, but permits the display to settle rapidly after a
large process change. The value of the band is in display units, independent of
the Display Decimal Point position. A band setting of ‘0’ keeps the digital filter
permanently engaged.

* The decimal point position is dependent on the selection made in the
“Calculation Decimal Point” parameter.

5.5 MODULE 5 - TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

E
The totalizer accumulates (integrates) the relative Input value using one of
two modes. The first is using a time base. This can be used to provide an
indication of total flow, usage or consumption over time. The second is through
a user input or function key programmed for Batch (one time add on demand).
This can be used for weighing applications where accumulation is based on a
completed event. If the Totalizer is not needed, its display can be locked-out and
this module can be skipped during programming.

TOTALIZER TIME BASE

«
ª

- seconds (÷ 1)
- minutes (÷ 60)

- hours (÷ 3600)
- days (÷ 86400)

This is the time base used in Totalizer accumulations. If the Totalizer is being
accumulated through a user input programmed for Batch, then this parameter
does not apply.

TOTALIZER ASSIGNMENT

«
ª

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR*

A-rEL b-rEL

CALC

This parameter determines which value is to be totalized.

TOTALIZER DECIMAL POINT*

«
ª

For most applications, this should match the decimal point position of the
meter value selected in the totalizer assignment. If a different location is
desired, refer to Totalizer Scale Factor.

456

For most applications, the Totalizer reflects the same decimal point location
and engineering units as the assigned Input Display. In these cases, the Totalizer
Scale Factor is 1.000. The Totalizer Scale Factor can be used to scale the
Totalizer to a different value than the Input Display. Common possibilities are:
1. Changing decimal point location (example tenths to whole)
2. Average over a controlled time frame.
Details on calculating the scale factor are shown later.
If the Totalizer is being accumulated through a user input programmed for
Batch, then this parameter does not apply.

www.redlion.net

TOTALIZER LOW CUT VALUE*

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR CALCULATION EXAMPLES

A low cut value disables Totalizer when the Input Display value falls below
the value programmed.

1. When changing the Totalizer Decimal Point (
) location from the
Input Display Decimal Point (
), the required Totalizer Scale Factor is
multiplied by a power of ten.
Example: Input (
) = 0.0
Input (
) = 0.00

TOTALIZER POWER UP RESET

«
ª

NO
yEs

Do not reset totalizer
Reset totalizer

The Totalizer can be reset to zero on each meter power-up by setting this
parameter to reset.

* The decimal point position is dependent on the selection made in the
“Totalizer Decimal Point” parameter.

Totalizer

Scale
Factor

Totalizer

Scale
Factor

0.00
0.0
0
x10
x100

10
1
.1
.01
.001

0.000
0.00
0.0
0
x10

10
1
.1
.01
.001

(x = Totalizer display is round by tens or hundreds)
2. To obtain an average reading within a controlled time frame, the selected
Totalizer Time Base is divided by the given time period expressed in the same
timing units.
Example: Average flow rate per hour in a 4 hour period, the scale factor
would be 0.250. To achieve a controlled time frame, connect an external timer
to a user input programmed for
. The timer will control the start (reset)
and the stopping (hold) of the totalizer.

TOTALIZER HIGH ORDER DISPLAY
When the total exceeds 5 digits, the front panel annunciator flashes (if
assigned to A, B, or C display). In this case, the meter continues to totalize up
to a 9 digit value. The high order 4 digits and the low order 5 digits of the total
are displayed alternately. The letter “ ” denotes the high order display.

TOTALIZER BATCHING
The Totalizer Time Base and scale factor are overridden when a user input or
function key is programmed for store batch (
). In this mode, when the user
input or function key is activated, the Input Display reading is one time added
to the Totalizer (batch). The Totalizer retains a running sum of each batch
operation until the Totalizer is reset. This is useful in weighing operations, when
the value to be added is not based on time but after a filling event.

TOTALIZER USING TIME BASE
Totalizer accumulates as defined by:

Input Display x Totalizer Scale Factor
Totalizer Time Base
Where:
Input Display - the present input reading
Totalizer Scale Factor - 0.001 to 65.000
Totalizer Time Base - (the division factor of

)

1-717-767-6511

457

Modules 6, 7, and 8 are accessible only with the appropriate plug-in cards installed. A quick overview of Module 6 is listed
below. Refer to the corresponding plug-in card bulletin for a more detailed explanation of each parameter selection.

5.6 MODULE 6 - SETPOINT (ALARM) PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Repeat programming for each setpoint.

SELECT SETPOINT

SP-1
SP-2

SP-3
SP-4

* Setpoint 2 or Setpoint 4 deviation and band action setpoints are relative to
the value of setpoint 1 or Setpoint 3 respectively. It is not possible to configure
setpoint 1 or 3 as deviation or band actions. It is possible to use setpoint 1 or 3
for an absolute action, while its value is being used for deviation or band.
** These modes only appear, and are the only modes that appear, when the
setpoint assignment
is set to
. The lower Totalizer action,
,
allows setpoints to function off of the lower 5 digits of the Totalizer. The upper
Totalizer action,
, allows setpoints to function off of the upper 4 digits
of the Totalizer. To obtain absolute low alarms for the Totalizer, program the
or
output logic as reverse.

Setpoint Alarm Figure
With reverse output logic

, the below alarm state is opposite.

The parameters listed below are different from those listed in the Setpoint
Card Literature. Use the separate Setpoint Option Card Literature for all other
setpoint parameters.

SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

«
ª
E

NONE A-rEL A-Abs b-rEL
b-AbS CALC tot

Selects the meter value that is used to trigger the Setpoint Alarm. The S&settings cause the setpoint to trigger off of the relative (net) input value. The
relative input value is the absolute input value that includes the Display Offset
Value. The "C4 settings cause the setpoint to trigger off of the absolute (gross)
input value. The absolute input value is based on Module 1 ET1 and */1 entries.

Band Inside Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

bNdIn

SETPOINT ACTION

« NO
ª

AU-LO
bNdIn

Ab-HI
Ab-LO
AU-HI
*
*
dE-HI
dE-LO
bANd *
totLo ** tothI **

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (alarm output).
See the Setpoint Alarm Figures in the Setpoint Card Bulletin for a visual
detail of each action. The Inside Band action is shown here as it only applies to
the PAXDP.

458

- SETPOINT VALUE
- SETPOINT HYSTERESIS
- ON TIME DELAY
- OFF TIME DELAY
- OUTPUT LOGIC
- RESET ACTION

No Setpoint Action

Absolute high, with balanced hysteresis

- STANDBY OPERATION

Absolute low, with balanced hysteresis

- SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS

Absolute high, with unbalanced hysteresis

Absolute low, with unbalanced hysteresis

Deviation high, with unbalanced hysteresis *

Deviation low, with unbalanced hysteresis *

Outside band, with unbalanced hysteresis *

Inside band, with unbalanced hysteresis *

Lower Totalizer absolute high, unbalance hysteresis **

Upper Totalizer absolute high, unbalance hysteresis **

www.redlion.net

-19999 to 99999
1 to 65000
to
to

nor
AUto
LAtC1
NO
OFF
nor

sec
sec

rEv
LAtC2
YES
rEv
FLASH

5.7 MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 7 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the
PAXDP with those of the host computer or other serial device, such as a
terminal or printer. This programming module can only be accessed if an RS232
or RS485 Serial Communications card is installed.
This section also includes an explanation of the commands and formatting
required for communicating with the PAXDP. In order to establish serial
communications, the user must have host software that can send and receive
ASCII characters or utilizes Modbus protocol. For serial hardware and wiring
details, refer to section 3.6 Serial Communication Wiring.

PARITY BIT

This section replaces the bulletin shipped with the RS232 and RS485 serial
communications plug-in cards. Discard the separate bulletin when using those
serial plug-in cards with the PAXDP. Also, this section does NOT apply to the
DeviceNet, or Profibus-DP communication cards. For details on the operation
of the Fieldbus cards, refer to the bulletin shipped with each card.

METER UNIT ADDRESS

«
ª

to
to

(RLC Protocol)
(Modbus)

COMMUNICATIONS TYPE

«
ª

Enter the serial meter (node) address. The address range is dependent on the
parameter. With a single unit, configured for RLC protocol (
=
), an address is not needed and a value of zero can be used. With multiple
units (RS485 applications), a unique 2 digit address number must be assigned
to each meter.

- RLC Protocol (ASCII)
- Modbus RTU †
- Modbus ASCII

Select the desired communications protocol. Modbus is preferred as it
provides access to all meter values and parameters. Since the Modbus protocol
is included within the PAXDP, the PAX Modbus option card, PAXCDC4,
should not be used. The PAXCDC1 (RS485), or PAXCDC2 (RS232) card
should be used instead.

TRANSMIT DELAY

«
ª

BAUD RATE

Following a transmit value (‘*’ terminator) or Modbus command, the
PAXDP will wait this minimum amount of time in seconds before issuing a
serial response.

CRIMSON SOFTWARE
DATA BIT

«
ª
Select either 7 or 8 bit data word lengths. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

When communicating with Crimson 2 software, the PAXDP must be set in
default configuration type of:
Communications Type: MODBUS RTU †
Baud Rate: 38400
Data Bit: 8
ParityBit: no
Meter Unit Address: 247

† The Communication Type factory settings must be changed from the
Modbus RTU for Crimson 2 communications.

1-717-767-6511

459

Parameters below only appear when communications type (

) parameter is set to

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

PRINT OPTIONS

Select
for full print or Command T transmissions (meter address,
parameter data and mnemonics) or
for abbreviated print transmissions
(parameter data only). This will affect all the parameters selected in the print
options. (If the meter address is 00, it will not be sent during a full
transmission.)

- Enters the sub-menu to select the meter parameters to appear during a
print request. For each parameter in the sub-menu, select
for that parameter
information to be sent during a print request or
for that parameter
information not to be sent. A print request is sometimes referred to as a block
print because more than one parameter information (meter address, parameter
data and mnemonics) can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION

INP A
INP b
CALC
tot
HILO
SPNt

Input A Value
Input B Value
Calculation
Total Value
Max. & Min.
Setpoint Values

SERIAL MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS
Modbus Communications requires that the Serial Communication Type
Parameter (
) be set to “
” or “
”.

SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
FC03: Read Holding Registers

FC17: Report Slave ID

1. Up to 32 registers can be requested at one time.
2. HEX <8000> is returned for non-used registers.

The following is sent upon FC17 request:
RLC-PAXDP ab<0100h><20h><20h><10h>
16 Guid/Scratch Pad
Max Register Reads (32)
Max Register Writes (32)
Software Version Number
b = Linear Card “0” = None, “1” = Yes
a = SP Card, “0”-No SP, “2” or “4” SP

FC04: Read Input Registers

1. Up to 32 registers can be requested at one time.
2. Block starting point can not exceed register boundaries.
3. HEX <8000> is returned in registers beyond the boundaries.
4. Input registers are a mirror of Holding registers.

FC06: Preset Single Register
1. HEX <8001> is echoed back when attempting to write to a read only
register.
2. If the write value exceeds the register limit (see Register Table), then that
register value changes to its high or low limit. It is also returned in the
response.

FC16: Preset Multiple Registers
1. No response is given with an attempt to write to more than 32 registers at
a time.
2. Block starting point cannot exceed the read and write boundaries (4000141280).
3. If a multiple write includes read only registers, then only the write registers
will change.
4. If the write value exceeds the register limit (see Register Table), then that
register value changes to its high or low limit.

FC08: Diagnostics
The following is sent upon FC08 request:
Module Address, 08 (FC code), 04 (byte count), “Total Comms” 2 byte count,
“Total Good Comms” 2 byte count, checksum of the string
“Total Comms” is the total number of messages received that were addressed
to the PAXDP. “Total Good Comms” is the total messages received by the
PAXDP with good address, parity and checksum. Both counters are reset to 0
upon response to FC08 and at power-up.

460

a = “0”(none), “2”, “4” SP card installed
b = “0”(none) or “1” Linear Card installed),

SUPPORTED EXCEPTION CODES
01: Illegal Function
Issued whenever the requested function is not implemented in the meter.

02: Illegal Data Address
Issued whenever an attempt is made to access a single register that does not
exist (outside the implemented space) or to access a block of registers that falls
completely outside the implemented space.

03: Illegal Data Value
Issued when an attempt is made to read or write more registers than the meter
can handle in one request.

07: Negative Acknowledge
Issued when a write to a register is attempted with an invalid string length.

www.redlion.net

PAXDP MODBUS REGISTER TABLE

The below limits are shown as Integers or HEX < > values. Read and write functions can be performed in either Integers or Hex as long as the conversion was done
correctly. Negative numbers are represented by two’s complement.
Note 1: The PAXDP should not be powered down while parameters are being changed. Doing so may corrupt the non-volatile memory resulting in checksum errors.
REGISTER
ADDRESS 1

LOW LIMIT

HIGH LIMIT

FACTORY
SETTING

ACCESS

COMMENTS

FREQUENTLY USED REGISTERS

1
2

40001

Input A Relative Value (Hi word)

40002

Input A Relative Value (Lo word)

40003

Input B Relative Value (Hi word)

40004

Input B Relative Value (Lo word)

40005

Calculation Value (Hi word)

40006

Calculation Value (Lo word)

40007

Maximum Value (Hi word)

40008

Maximum Value (Lo word)

40009

Minimum Value (Hi word)

40010

Minimum Value (Lo word)

40011

Total Value (Hi word)

40012

Total Value (Lo word)

40013

Setpoint 1 Value (Hi word)

40014

Setpoint 1 Value (Lo word)

40015

Setpoint 2 Value (Hi word)

40016

Setpoint 2 Value (Lo word)

40017

Setpoint 3 Value (Hi word)

40018

Setpoint 3 Value (Lo word)

40019

Setpoint 4 Value (Hi word)

40020

Setpoint 4 Value (Lo word)

N/A

Read Only

Process value of present input level. This value is affected
by Input Type, Resolution, Scaling & Offset Value
(Relative Value = Absolute Input Value + Offset Value)

N/A

Read Only

Process value of present input level. This value is affected
by Input Type, Resolution, Scaling & Offset Value
(Relative Value = Absolute Input Value + Offset Value)

N/A

Read Only

Calculation Result of Math Function

-19999

99999

N/A

Read/Write

-19999

99999

N/A

Read/Write

-199999000

999999000

N/A

Read/Write

-19999

99999

100

Read/Write

-19999

99999

200

Read/Write

-19999

99999

300

Read/Write

-19999

99999

400

Read/Write
Status of Setpoint Outputs: Bit State: 0=Off, 1=On,
Bit 3 = SP1, Bit 2 = SP2, Bit 1 = SP3, Bit 0 = SP4
Outputs can only be activated/reset with this register
when respective bits in Manual Mode (MMR) register
are set

40021

Setpoint Output Register (SOR)

N/A

Read/Write
See Note

40022

Manual Mode Register (MMR)

Read/Write

Bit State: 0=Auto Mode, 1=Manual Mode
Bit 4 = SP1, Bit 3 = SP2, Bit 2 = SP3, Bit 1 = SP4,
Bit 0 = Linear Output

40023

Reset Output Register

Read/Write

Bit State: 1= Reset Output; Bit is returned to zero
following reset processing
Bit 3 = SP1, Bit 2 = SP2, Bit 1 = SP3, Bit 0 = SP4

40024

Analog Output Register (AOR)

4095

Read/Write

Functional only if Linear Output is in manual mode
(MMR bit 0 = 1). Linear Output Card is written to only
if Linear Out (MMR bit 0) is set

40025

Input A Absolute Value (Hi word)

40026

Input A Absolute Value (Lo word)

N/A

Read Only

Gross value of present Input A level. This value is
affected by Input Type, Resolution, Scaling, but not
affected by Offset Value

40027

Input B Absolute Value (Hi word)

40028

Input B Absolute Value (Lo word)

N/A

Read Only

Gross value of present Input B level. This value is
affected by Input Type, Resolution, Scaling, but not
affected by Offset Value

40029

Input A Offset Value (Hi word)

40030

Input A Offset Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

Read/Write

Relative Input Value (standard meter value) is sum of
Input Offset Value and Input Absolute Value

40031

Input B Offset Value (Hi word)

40032

Input B Offset Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

Read/Write

Relative Input Value (standard meter value) is sum of
Input Offset Value and Input Absolute Value

40033

Main Setpoint 1 Value (Hi word)

40034

Main Setpoint 1 Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

100

Read/Write

Setpoint List A

40035

Main Setpoint 2 Value (Hi word)

40036

Main Setpoint 2 Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

200

Read/Write

Setpoint List A

40037

Main Setpoint 3 Value (Hi word)

40038

Main Setpoint 3 Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

300

Read/Write

Setpoint List A

40039

Main Setpoint 4 Value (Hi word)

40040

Main Setpoint 4 Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

400

Read/Write

Setpoint List A

40041

Alternate Setpoint 1 Value (Hi word)

40042

Alternate Setpoint 1 Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

100

Read/Write

Setpoint List B

For Input Registers, replace the 4xxxx with a 3xxxx in the above register address. The 3xxxx are a mirror of the 4xxxx Holding Registers.
An attempt to exceed a limit will set the register to its high or low limit value.

1-717-767-6511

461

LOW LIMIT

HIGH LIMIT

FACTORY
SETTING

ACCESS

COMMENTS

FREQUENTLY USED REGISTERS (Continued)

40043

Alternate Setpoint 2 Value (Hi word)

40044

Alternate Setpoint 2 Value (Lo word)

40045

Alternate Setpoint 3 Value (Hi word)

40046

Alternate Setpoint 3 Value (Lo word)

40047

Alternate Setpoint 4 Value (Hi word)

40048

Alternate Setpoint 4 Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

200

Read/Write

Setpoint List B

-19999

99999

300

Read/Write

Setpoint List B

-19999

99999

400

Read/Write

Setpoint List B

CH A

CH B

INPUT PARAMETERS

SEE MODULE 1 FOR DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

40101

40201

Input Range

Read/Write

0=Volt, 1=Current, 2=Volt Square Root Extraction,
3= Current Square Root Extraction

40102

40202

ADC Conversion Rate (samples/sec)

Read/Write

0=5.3, 1=7.5, 2=16.7, 3=19.8, 4=20, 5=30, 6=105

40103

40203

Decimal Point

Read/Write

0=0, 1=0.0, 2=0.00, 3=0.000, 4=0.0000

40104

40204

Rounding Factor

Read/Write

0=1, 1=2, 2=5, 3=10, 4=20, 5=50, 6=100

40105

40205

Digital Input Filter

250

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40106

40206

Filter Band

250

Read/Write

1=1 display unit

40107

40207

Number of Scaling Points

Number of LInearization Scaling Points

40108

40208

Reserved

40109

40209

Input 1 Input Value (Hi word)

40110

40210

Input 1 Input Value (Lo word)

Read/Write

N/A

-19999

99999

Read/Write

-19999

99999

Read/Write

...

-19999

99999

Read/Write

-19999

99999

Read/Write

SCALING POINTS PARAMETERS

40111

40211

Display 1 Input Value (Hi word)

40112

40212

Display 1 Input Value (Lo word)

thru

40169

40269

Input 16 Input Value (Hi word)

40170

40270

Input 16 Input Value (Lo word)

40171

40271

Input 16 Input Value (Hi word)

40172

40272

Input 16 Input Value (Lo word)

1=0.001

SEE MODULE 2 FOR DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETERS

40301

User Input 1 Action

Read/Write

0= NO
1 = PLOC
2 = A-rEL
3 = b-rEL
4 = A-drL
5 = b-drL
6 = d-HLd
7 = A-HLd

40302

User Input 2 Action

Read/Write

See User Input 1 above
= NO
= A-rEL
= b-rEL
= A-drL
= b-drL

8 = SYNC
9 = bAt
10 = rtot1
11 = rtot2
12 = E-tot
13 = r-HI
14 = r-Lo
15 = r-HL

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

5 = bAt
6 = rtot
7= r-HI
8 = r-Lo
9 = r-HL

dISP
dSP-A
dSP-b
dSP-C
dSP-_
d-LEV
LISt
r-1

24
25
26
27
28
29
30

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

r-2
r-3
r-4
r-34
r-234
r-ALL
Print

10 = d-LEV
11 = LISt
12 = r-1
13 = r-2
14 = r-3

15
16
17
18
19

=
=
=
=
=

r-4
r-34
r-234
r-ALL
Print

40303

User F1 Key Action

Read/Write

0
1
2
3
4

40304

User F2 Key Action

Read/Write

See User F1 Key Description

40305

User Reset Key Action

Read/Write

See User F1 Key Description

40306

User F1 Second Action

Read/Write

See User F1 Key Description

40307

User F2 Second Action

Read/Write

See User F1 Key Description

DISPLAY/QUICK PRO MENU LOCKS

Registers 40113-40168, 40213-40268 not shown but
follow ordering as shown for Input 1, Display 1

USER INPUT/FUNCTION KEYS

1=0.001

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

SEE MODULE 3 FOR DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETERS

40311

Input A Display Lock

Read/Write

0=Loc, 1=Red, 2=Disp _, 3=Disp A, 4= Disp B, 5=Disp C

40312

Input B Display

Read/Write

0=Loc, 1=Red, 2=Disp _, 3=Disp A, 4= Disp B, 5=Disp C

40313

Calculation Display

Read/Write

0=Loc, 1=Red, 2=Disp _, 3=Disp A, 4= Disp B, 5=Disp C

40314

Maximum (Hi) Value

Read/Write

0=Loc, 1=Red, 2=Disp _, 3=Disp A, 4= Disp B, 5=Disp C

40315

Minimum (Lo) Value

Read/Write

0=Loc, 1=Red, 2=Disp _, 3=Disp A, 4= Disp B, 5=Disp C

40316

Total Display

Read/Write

0=Loc, 1=Red, 2=Disp _, 3=Disp A, 4= Disp B, 5=Disp C

40317

SP1 Quick Pro

Read/Write

0 = Lock, 1=Read, 2=Enter

40318

SP2 Quick Pro

Read/Write

0 = Lock, 1=Read, 2=Enter

40319

SP3 Quick Pro

Read/Write

0 = Lock, 1=Read, 2=Enter

40320

SP4 Quick Pro

Read/Write

0 = Lock, 1=Read, 2=Enter

40321

Program Mode Security Code

250

Read/Write

40322

Display Intensity Level

Read/Write

0 = Min Intensity, 15 = Max Intensity

462

www.redlion.net

LOW LIMIT

HIGH LIMIT

FACTORY
SETTING

ACCESS

SECONDARY PARAMETERS

COMMENTS
SEE MODULE 4 FOR DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETERS

40029

Input A Offset Value (Hi word)

40030

Input A Offset Value (Lo word)

40031

Input B Offset Value (Hi word)

40032

Input B Offset Value (Lo word)

40331

Max (Hi) Value Assignment

40332

Max (Hi) Capture Delay Time

40333

Min (Lo) Value Assignment

40334

Min (Lo) Capture Delay Time

40335

-19999

99999

Read/Write

*Value shown here for reference

-19999

99999

Read/Write

*Value shown here for reference

Read/Write

0=A-Rel, 1=A-Abs, 2=b-Rel, 3=bAbs, 4=Calc

32750

Read/Write

0=Max Update Rate, 1=0.1 sec

Read/Write

0=A-Rel, 1=A-Abs, 2=b-Rel, 3=bAbs, 4=Calc

32750

Read/Write

0=Max Update Rate, 1=0.1 sec

Display Update Time

Read/Write

0=1 Rdg/sec, 1=2 Rdgs/sec, 2=5 Rdgs/sec,
3=10 Rdgs/sec, 4=20 Rdgs/sec

40336

Units Annunciator Backlight

Read/Write

0=Off, 1=On

40337

Calculation Function

Read/Write

0 = C+A+B
1 = C-A-B
2 = C+A-B
5 = C(A/B-1)
3 = A*B/C
4 = C*A/B
A=Input A, B=Input B, C=Calculation Constant

40338

Calculation Display Decimal Point

Read/Write

0=0, 1=0.0, 2=0.00, 3=0.000, 4=0.0000

40339

Calculation Constant Value High

40340

Calculation Constant Value Low

-19999

99999

1000

Read/Write

40341

Calculation Display Rounding Factor

Read/Write

0=1, 1=2, 2=5, 3=10, 4=20, 5=50, 6=100

40342

Calculation Display Filter Value

250

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40343

Calculation Filter Band

250

Read/Write

1=1 display unit

TOTALIZER PARAMETERS

40351

Total Assignment

Read/Write

0=A-Rel, 1= b-Rel, 2= Calc

40352

Total Decimal Point

Read/Write

0=0, 1= 0.0, 2=0.00, 3=0.000, 4=0.0000

40353

Total Timebase

Read/Write

0=Second, 1=Minute, 2=Hour, 3=Day

40354

Total Scale Factor

65000

1000

Read/Write

1=0.001

40355

Total Low Cut Value (Hi word)

-19999

99999

-19999

Read/Write

40356

Total Low Cut Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

-19999

Read/Write

40357

Total Reset at Power Up

Read/Write

SETPOINT 1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS

SEE MODULE 6 FOR DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
(APPLIES ONLY IF SP OPTION CARD, PAXCDS, IS INSTALLED)

Note: SP Values are located at Registers 40013-40021
40361

Assignment

0 = No, 1 = Yes

Read/Write

0=None

1=A-Rel

2=A-Abs

4=b-Abs

5=Calc

6=Tot

3=b-Rel

40362

Action

Read/Write

0=No, 1=Ab-HI, 2=Ab-Lo, 3=AU-HI, 4=AU-LO,
9=totLo, 10=totHI; Do not use 5-8.

40363

Hysteresis

65000

Read/Write

1=1 Display Unit

40364

On Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40365

Off Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40366

Output Logic

Read/Write

0=Normal, 1=Reverse

40367

Reset

Read/Write

0=Auto, 1=Latch1, 2=Latch2

40368

Standby

Read/Write

0=No, 1 = Yes

40369

Lit - Annunciator

Read/Write

0=Off, 1=Normal, 2=Reverse, 3=Flash

SETPOINT 2 OUTPUT PARAMETERS

1
2

0=None

1=A-Rel

2=A-Abs

4=b-Abs

5=Calc

6=Tot

3=b-Rel

40371

Assignment

Read/Write

40372

Action

Read/Write

0=No, 1=Ab-HI, 2=Ab-Lo, 3=AU-HI, 4=AU-LO, 5=dEHI, 6=dE-LO, 7=bANd, 8=bNdIn, 9=totLo, 10=totHI

40373

Hysteresis

65000

Read/Write

1=1 Display Unit

40374

On Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40375

Off Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40376

Output Logic

Read/Write

0=Normal, 1=Reverse

40377

Reset

Read/Write

0=Auto, 1=Latch1, 2=Latch2

40378

Standby

Read/Write

0=No, 1 = Yes

40379

Lit - Annunciator

Read/Write

0=Off, 1=Normal, 2=Reverse, 3=Flash

1-717-767-6511

463

LOW LIMIT

HIGH LIMIT

FACTORY
SETTING

ACCESS

COMMENTS

SETPOINT 3 OUTPUT PARAMETERS

0=None

1=A-Rel

2=A-Abs

4=bAbs

5=Calc

6=Tot

3=b-Rel

40381

Assignment

Read/Write

40382

Action

Read/Write

0=No, 1=Ab-HI, 2=Ab-Lo, 3=AU-HI, 4=AU-LO, 9=totLo,
10=totHI; Do not use 5-8.

40383

Hysteresis

65000

Read/Write

1=1 Display Unit

40384

On Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40385

Off Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40386

Output Logic

Read/Write

0=Normal, 1=Reverse

40387

Reset

Read/Write

0=Auto, 1=Latch1, 2=Latch2

40388

Standby

Read/Write

0=No, 1 = Yes

40389

Lit - Annunciator

Read/Write

0=Off, 1=Normal, 2=Reverse, 3=Flash

SETPOINT 4 OUTPUT PARAMETERS

2=A-Abs

5=Calc

6=Tot

3=b-Rel

Read/Write

40392

Action

Read/Write

0=No, 1=Ab-HI, 2=Ab-Lo, 3=AU-HI, 4=AU-LO, 5=dE-HI,
6=dE-LO, 7=bANd, 8=bNdIn, 9=totLo, 10=totHI

40393

Hysteresis

65000

Read/Write

1=1 Display Unit

40394

On Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40395

Off Delay

32750

Read/Write

1=0.1 Second

40396

Output Logic

Read/Write

0=Normal, 1=Reverse

40397

Reset

Read/Write

0=Auto, 1=Latch1, 2=Latch2

40398

Standby

Read/Write

0=No, 1 = Yes

40399

Lit - Annunciator

Read/Write

0=Off, 1=Normal, 2=Reverse, 3=Flash
SEE MODULE 7 FOR DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

40401

Type

Read/Write

0=RLC Protocol, 1=Modbus RTU, 2=Modbus ASCII

40402

Baud Rate

Read/Write

0=300, 1=600, 2=1200, 3=2400, 4=4.8k, 5=9.6k,
6=19.2k, 7=38.4k

40403

Data Bits

Read/Write

0=7 bits, 1=8 bits

40404

Parity

Read/Write

0=None, 1=Even, 2=Odd

247

Read/Write

1=0.001 Second

Read/Write

0=No, 1=Yes
Not used when communications type is Modbus

40405

Address

40406

Transmit Delay

250

40407

Abbreviated Transmission (RLC
only)

40408

Print Options

Read/Write

40409

Load Serial Settings

Read/Write

RLC Protocol: 0-99
Modbus: 1-247

0=No, 1=Yes
Not used when communications type is Modbus
Bit 0 - Print Input A Value
Bit 1 - Print Input B Value
Bit 2 - Print CALC Value
Bit 3 - Print Max & Min Values
Bit 4 - Print Total Value
Bit 5 - Print Setpoint Values
Changing 40401-40406 will not update the PAXDP until
this register is written with a 1. After the write, the
communicating device must be changed to the new
PAXDP settings and the register returns to 0.
SEE MODULE 8 FOR DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
(APPLIES ONLY WHEN LINEAR OUTPUT CARD, PAXCDL
IS INSTALLED)

ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS

1=A-Rel

4=bAbs

Assignment

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS

0=None

40391

40411

Type

Read/Write

0 = 0-20 mA, 1 = 4-20 mA, 2 = 0-10 V

40412

Assignment

Read/Write

0=NONE, 1=A-REL, 2=A-AbS, 3=b-rEL, 4=b-AbS,
5=CALC, 6=tot, 7=HI, 8=LO

40413

Analog Low Value (Hi word)

40414

Analog Low Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

Read/Write

Display value that corresponds with 0 V, 0 mA or
4 mA output

40415

Analog High Value (Hi word)

40416

Analog High Value (Lo word)

-19999

99999

10000

Read/Write

Display value that corresponds with 10 V or
20 mA output

40417

Update Time

100

Read/Write

0=Max update rate, 1=0.1 second

464

www.redlion.net

LOW LIMIT

HIGH LIMIT

FACTORY
SETTING

ACCESS

COMMENTS

FACTORY SERVICE

40501

Factory Service Register

N/A

Read/Write

Factory Use Only - Do Not Modify

40502

Factory Service Data Register

N/A

Read/Write

Factory Use Only - Do Not Modify

40503

Main Display Number

Read/Write

0=Display_, 1=Display A, 2=Display B, 3=Display C

Read Only

Bit Cleared = No Error, Bit Set = Error
Bit 0 = Input A Hardware Error (ErInA)
Bit 1 = Input B Hardware Error (ErInb)
Bit 2 = Key Stuck at power-up Error (ErKEY)
Bit 3 = Power Down Data Checksum Error (EEPdn)
Bit 4 = Parameter Checksum Error (EEPar)
Bit 5 = Calibration Data Checksum error (EECal)
Bit 6 = Linear Output Card Calibration Checksum Data
Error (EELin)
Cleared = No Error, Bit Set = Error
0 = Input A Display Underflow (<-19999)
1 = Input A Display Overflow (>99999)
2 = Input A Signal Underrange (<13 V or <-26 mA)
3 = Input A Signal Overrange (>13 V or >26 mA)
4 = Input A Display Underflow (<-19999)
5 = Input A Display Overflow (>99999)
6 = Input A Signal Underrange (<13 V or <-26 mA)
7 = Input A Signal Overrange (>13 V or >26 mA)
0
1
4
5

40504

Power Up Errors

N/A

40505

Input A/B Error

N/A

Read Only

Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

40506

Total & Calculation Error

N/A

Read Only

Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

41001-41010

Slave ID

N/A

Read Only

= Calculation Display Underflow (<-19999)
= Calculation Display Overflow (>99999)
= Total Value Display Underflow (<-99999900)
= Total Value Display Overflow (>999999000)

RLC-PAXDP a b <0100h><20h><20h><10h>
16 Scratch
32 Reads
32 Writes
Version Number
b = Linear Card “0”=None, “1”=Yes
a = SP Card, “0”-No SP, “2” or “4” SP
(a = “0”, “2”, “4” SP card installed; b = “0” or “1” Linear
Card installed), 1.00 version (or higher)32 reads, 32
writes 16 scratch

41101-41116

1
2

GUID/Scratch

N/A

Read/Write

Reserved (may be used in future RLC software)

E
SERIAL RLC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS
(

RLC Communications requires the Serial Communications Type Parameter
) be set to
.

SENDING SERIAL COMMANDS AND DATA

Command String Construction

Command Chart
Command Description

N
T

Notes

Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
Node (Meter) Address
a one or two digit node address. Not required
Specifier
when address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by register ID character.

Value change (write)

Reset

Block Print Request
(read)

Write to register of the meter. Must be followed
by register ID character and numeric data.
Reset a register or output. Must be followed
by register ID character
Initiates a block print output. Registers are
defined in programming.

The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to invalid commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
1. The first characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed by a
1 or 2 character address number. The address number of the meter is
programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node address
itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the address specifier, the next character is the command character.
3. The next character is the Register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a Register ID character.
It prints according to the selections made in print options.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See Timing Diagram figure for differences
between terminating characters.

1-717-767-6511

465

VALUE DESCRIPTION

Full Transmission

2 byte Node (Meter) Address field [00-99]

INA

Input B
Relative Value

INB

T, R (reset command zeros
or tares input)

Calculation Value

CLC

(Carriage return)

Total

TOT

T, R (reset command zeros Total)

(Line feed)

Min

MIN

T, R (reset command loads
current reading)

(Space)

T, R (reset command loads
current reading)

(Carriage return)

(Line feed)

Max

MAX

Input A Absolute (Gross)
Value

ABA

Input B Absolute
(Gross) Value

ABB

Input A Offset

OFA

T, V

Input B Offset

OFB

T, V

Setpoint 1

SP1

T, V, R (reset command resets
setpoint output)

Setpoint 2

SP2

T, V, R (reset command resets
setpoint output)

Setpoint 3

SP3

T, V, R (reset command resets
setpoint output)

Setpoint 4

SP4

T, V, R (reset command resets
setpoint output)

Auto/Manual Register

MMR

T, V

Analog Output Register

AOR

T, V

Setpoint Register

SOR

T, V

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

7-18

12 byte numeric data field: 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one
byte for decimal point

These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted (bytes 1 and 2) are the unit address. If the
address assigned is 00, two spaces are substituted. A space (byte 3) follows the
unit address field. The next three characters (bytes 4 to 6) are the register
mnemonic. The numeric data is transmitted next.
The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12 characters long. When the requested
value exceeds eight digits for count values or five digits for rate values. Byte 8
is always a space. The remaining ten positions of this field (bytes 9 to 18)
consist of a minus sign (for negative values), a floating decimal point (if
applicable), and eight positions for the requested value. The data within bytes 9
to 18 is right-aligned with leading spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with (byte 19), and
(byte 20). When a block print is finished, an extra (byte 21), (byte
22), and (byte 23) are used to provide separation between the
transmissions.
Byte

1-12

Command String Examples:

13
14
15
16
17

Description

12 byte data field, 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte
for decimal point
(Carriage return)
(Line feed)
(Space)
(Carriage return)
(Line feed)

These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the address and register mnemonics,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.

1. Address = 17, Write 350 to Setpoint 1
String: N17VM350*
2. Address = 5, Read Input A value
String: N5TA*
3. Address = 0, Reset Setpoint 4 output
String: RS*

Meter Response Examples:

1. Address = 17, full field response, Input A = 875
17 INA
875
2. Address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 2 = -250.5
SP2
-250.5
3. Address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block print
250

466

(Space)

4-6

Abbreviated Transmission

1. Register Names are also used as Register Mnemonics during full transmission.
2. The registers associated with the P command are set up in Print Options
(Module 7). Unless otherwise specified, the Transmit Details apply to both T
and V Commands.

Description

1, 2

Input A
Relative Value

T, R (reset command zeros
or tares input)

Byte

www.redlion.net

Auto/Manual Mode Register (MMR) ID: U
This register sets the controlling mode for the outputs. In Auto Mode (0) the
meter controls the setpoint and analog output. In Manual Mode (1) the outputs
are defined by the registers SOR and AOR. When transferring from auto mode
to manual mode, the meter holds the last output value (until the register is
changed by a write). Each output may be independently changed to auto or
manual. In a write command string (VU), any character besides 0 or 1 in a field
will not change the corresponding output mode.
U abcde

Setpoint Output Register (SOR) ID: X

e = Analog Output
d = SP4
c = SP3
b = SP2
a = SP1

Example: VU00011 places SP4 and Analog in manual.

COMMAND RESPONSE TIME
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). When sending commands and data to the meter, a delay must be
imposed before sending another command. This allows enough time for the
meter to process the command and prepare for the next command.
At the start of the time interval t1, the computer program prints or writes the
string to the com port, thus initiating a transmission. During t1, the command
characters are under transmission and at the end of this period, the command
terminating character (*) is received by the meter. The time duration of t1 is
dependent on the number of characters and baud rate of the channel.

Timing Diagrams
NO REPLY FROM METER

t1 = (10 * # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies from 2 msec to 15 msec. If no response from the meter is
expected, the meter is ready to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character and the Serial Transmit Delay parameter
(
). The standard command line terminating character is '*'. This
terminating character results in a response time window of the Serial Transmit
Delay time (
) plus 15msec. maximum. The
parameter should be
programmed to a value that allows sufficient time for the release of the sending
driver on the RS485 bus. Terminating the command line with '$' results in a
response time window (t2) of 2 msec minimum and 15 msec maximum. The
response time of this terminating character requires that sending drivers release
within 2 msec after the terminating character is received.
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel.

RESPONSE FROM METER

t3 = (10 * # of characters) / baud rate.
At the end of t3, the meter is ready to receive the next command. The
maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the times t1,
t2 and t3.

1-717-767-6511

467

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Character Frame Figure

Parity bit

After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The PAX meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and
sets the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Stop bit

The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single bit
period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of a
new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit. If 7 data bits and no parity is selected, then 2
stop bits are sent from the PAXDP.

5.8 MODULE 8 - ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

E
Module 8 is the programming for the analog output parameter. To have an analog output signal, an analog output
plug-in card needs to be installed (See Ordering Information). This section replaces the bulletin that comes with
the analog plug-in card. Please discard the separate literature when using the plug-in card with the PAXDP.

ANALOG TYPE

«
ª

SELECTION

ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE

RANGE

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V

Enter the analog output type. For 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
use terminals 18 and 19. For 0-10 V use terminals 16 and
17. Only one range can be used at a time.

«
ª

468

ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE

«
ª

ANALOG ASSIGNMENT

-19999 to 99999
Enter the Display Value that corresponds to 20 mA (0-20
mA) , 20 mA (4-20 mA) or 10 VDC (0-10 VDC).

NONE A-rEL A-Abs b-rEL
b-AbS CALC tot
HI
LO
Enter the source for the analog output to retransmit:
rEL = Relative (net) Input Value. The Relative Input
Value is the Absolute Input Value that includes
the Display Offset Value.
AbS = Absolute (gross) Input Value. The Absolute Input
Value is based on Module 1 dSP and INP entries.
CALC = Calculation Value
tot = Totalizer Value
LO = Minimum Display Value
HI = Maximum Display Value

-19999 to 99999
Enter the Display Value that corresponds to 0 mA (0-20
mA) , 4 mA (4-20 mA) or 0 VDC (0-10 VDC).

ANALOG UPDATE TIME

«
ª

www.redlion.net

0.0 to 10.0
Enter the analog output update rate in seconds. A value
of 0.0 allows the meter to update the analog output at the
ADC Conversion Rate.

5.9 MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

ANALOG OUTPUT CARD CALIBRATION

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

«
ª

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS

«
ª

Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
The meter will display
and then return to
.
Press DSP key to return to Display Mode. This will
overwrite all user settings with the factory settings.

Before starting, verify that the precision voltmeter (voltage output) or current
meter (current output) is connected and ready. Perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display
and press PAR.
2. Use the arrow keys to choose
and press PAR.
3. Using the chart below, step through the five selections to be calibrated. At
each prompt, use the PAX arrow keys to adjust the external meter display to
match the selection being calibrated. When the external reading matches, or
if this range is not being calibrated, press PAR.
SELECTION

0.00
4.00
20.00
0.00
10.00

CALIBRATION

EXTERNAL METER

4. When

ACTION

Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust

if
if
if
if
if

necessary,
necessary,
necessary,
necessary,
necessary,

press
press
press
press
press

PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR
PAR

appears remove the external meters and press PAR twice.

INPUT CALIBRATION
WARNING: Calibration of this meter requires a signal source with an
accuracy of 0.01% or better and an external meter with an accuracy of
0.005% or better.
Before starting, verify that the Input Ranger Jumper is set for the range to be
calibrated. Also verify that the precision signal source is connected and ready.
Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating the meter.
and PAR
can be chosen to exit the calibration mode without any changes taking place.
Then perform the following procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to display (
) and press PAR.
2. Choose the input channel/range to be calibrated by using the arrow keys and
press PAR. ( and PAR can be chosen to exit the calibration mode without
any changes taking place.)
3. When the zero range limit appears on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage range: dead short applied
- Current range: open circuit
4. Press PAR and the top range limit will appear on the display after
approximately 1 second.
5. With the top range limit on the display, apply the appropriate:
- Voltage range: 10 VDC
- Current range: 20 mADC
6. Press PAR and
.
will appear on the display after approximately 1
second.
7. When
appears, press PAR twice.
8. If the meter is not field scaled, then the input display should match the value
of the input signal.
9. Repeat the above procedure for each input range to be calibrated.

1-717-767-6511

469

TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

CHECK: Power level, power connections, Module 3 programming

PROGRAM LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Active (lock-out) user input
ENTER: Security code requested

DISPLAY LOCKED-OUT

CHECK: Module 3 programming

INCORRECT INPUT DISPLAY VALUE

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Jumper position, input connections, input signal level,
Module 4 Display Offset is zero, press DSP for Input Display
PERFORM: Module 9 Calibration (If the above does not correct the problem.)

“OLOL” in DISPLAY (SIGNAL HIGH)

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Range Jumper position, input connections, input signal level

“ULUL” in DISPLAY (SIGNAL LOW)

CHECK: Module 1 programming, Input Range Jumper position, input connections, input signal level

JITTERY DISPLAY

INCREASE: Module 1 filtering, rounding, input range
CHECK: Wiring is per EMC installation guidelines

MODULES or PARAMETERS NOT ACCESSIBLE

CHECK: Corresponding plug-in card installation

ERROR CODE (Err xxx or EE xxx)

PRESS: Reset KEY (If cannot clear contact factory.)

For further assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

PARAMETER VALUE CHART
Programmer ________________ Date ________
PAXDP MODEL NUMBER ________
Meter# _____________ Security Code ________
1-INP Signal Input Parameters
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

rANGE
rAtE
dECPt

INPUT RANGE
UPDATE RANGE
DISPLAY RESOLUTION

round
FILtr
bANd
PtS
StyLE
INP 1
dSP 1
INP 2
dSP 2
INP 3
dSP 3
INP 4
dSP 4
INP 5
dSP 5
INP 6
dSP 6

DISPLAY ROUNDING
INCREMENT
FILTER SETTING
FILTER ENABLE BAND
SCALING POINTS
SCALING STYLE
INPUT VALUE 1
DISPLAY VALUE 1
INPUT VALUE 2
DISPLAY VALUE 2
INPUT VALUE 3
DISPLAY VALUE 3
INPUT VALUE 4
DISPLAY VALUE 4
INPUT VALUE 5
DISPLAY VALUE 5
INPUT VALUE 6
DISPLAY VALUE 6

470

FACTORY
SETTING

VoLt

2
Ey

INPUT A
USER SETTING

INPUT B
USER SETTING

DISPLAY

INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP
INP
dSP

7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16

www.redlion.net

PARAMETER

INPUT VALUE 7
DISPLAY VALUE 7
INPUT VALUE 8
DISPLAY VALUE 8
INPUT VALUE 9
DISPLAY VALUE 9
INPUT VALUE 10
DISPLAY VALUE 10
INPUT VALUE 11
DISPLAY VALUE 11
INPUT VALUE 12
DISPLAY VALUE 12
INPUT VALUE 13
DISPLAY VALUE 13
INPUT VALUE 14
DISPLAY VALUE 14
INPUT VALUE 15
DISPLAY VALUE 15
INPUT VALUE 16
DISPLAY VALUE 16

FACTORY
SETTING

INPUT A
USER SETTING

INPUT B
USER SETTING

2-FNC

User Input and Function Key Parameters

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

USr-1
USr-2
F1
F2
rSt
Sc-F1
Sc-F2

USER INPUT 1
USER INPUT 2
FUNCTION KEY 1
FUNCTION KEY 2
RESET KEY
2nd FUNCTION KEY 1
2nd FUNCTION KEY 2

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

3-LOC

Display and Program Lockout Parameters

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

INP A
INP b
CALC
HI
LO

INPUT A ASSIGNMENT
INPUT B ASSIGNMENT
CALCULATION ASSIGNMENT
MAX DISPLAY LOCKOUT
MIN DISPLAY LOCKOUT
TOTAL DISPLAY LOCKOUT

SP-1
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
COdE

4-SEC

SETPOINT 1 ACCESS
SETPOINT 2 ACCESS
SETPOINT 3 ACCESS
SETPOINT 4 ACCESS
SECURITY CODE

USER SETTING

dSP-a
dSP-b
dSP-C
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
0

Secondary Function Parameters

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

OFS-A
OFS-b
HI-AS
HI-t
LO-AS
LO-t
dSP-t
b-LIt
CFunc
C dP
conSt
C rnd
C fLt
C bNd

INPUT A OFFSET VALUE

6-SPt

Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters

MAX CAPTURE ASSIGNMENT

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT
CALCULATION FUNCTION

asIN
dECPt
tbASE
SCFAC
Locut
P-uP

TOTALIZER ASSIGNMENT

7-SrL

Serial Communication Parameters

USER SETTING

A-rEL

TOTALIZER DECIMAL POINT
TOTALIZER TIME BASE
TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR
TOTALIZER LOW CUT VALUE

TOTALIZER POWER-UP RESET

FACTORY
USER SETTING
SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

tYPE
bAUd
dAtA
PAr
Addr
dELAY
Abrv
Opt
INP A
INP b
CALC
tot
HILO
SPNt

COMMUNICATIONS TYPE

8-Out
A-rEL
A-rEL

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME
DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

FACTORY
SETTING

PARAMETER

38400
8
NO
247

BAUD RATE
DATA BIT
PARITY BIT
METER ADDRESS
TRANSMIT DELAY

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

ABBREVIATED PRINTING
PRINT OPTIONS
INPUT A VALUE
INPUT B VALUE
CALCULATION
PRINT TOTAL VALUE
PRINT MAX & MIN VALUES
PRINT SETPOINT VALUES
.

USER SETTING

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME
MIN CAPTURE ASSIGNMENT

Totalizer (Integrator) Parameters

DISPLAY

Shaded area available when communications type is

FACTORY
SETTING

INPUT B OFFSET VALUE

1
OFF
D"C

Analog Output Parameters
FACTORY
USER SETTING
SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

tYPE
ASIN
AN-LO
AN-HI
udt

ANALOG TYPE

4-20
0
0
10000

ANALOG ASSIGNMENT
ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE
ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE

ANALOG UPDATE TIME

CALCULATION DECIMAL POINT

9-FCS

CALCULATION CONSTANT VALUE
CALCULATION ROUNDING
CALCULATION FILTER SETTING
CALCULATION FILTER BAND

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

SPSEL
ASN-n
ACt-n
SP-n

SELECT SETPOINT
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT
SETPOINT ACTION
SETPOINT VALUE (main)
SETPOINT VALUE (alternate) *

HYS-n
tON-n
tOF-n
out-n
rSt-n
Stb-n
Lit-n

FACTORY
SETTING

5-tOt

SETPOINT HYSTERESIS

FACTORY
USER SETTING
SETTING

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

d-LEV

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

SP-1
FACTORY
SETTING

Factory Setting Parameters

SP-2

USER SETTING

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

SP-3
FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

SP-4
FACTORY
SETTING

NO
NONE
NO
100
100
2

NO
NONE
NO
200
200
2

NO
NONE
NO
300
300
2

NO
NONE
NO
400
400
2

nor
AUto
NO
nor

USER SETTING

ON TIME DELAY
OFF TIME DELAY
OUTPUT LOGIC
RESET ACTION
STANDBY OPERATION
SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS

*Select alternate list to program these values.

1-717-767-6511

471

PAXDP PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

472

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXLSG - PAX LITE STRAIN GAGE METER /
MILLIVOLT METER
3 1/2-DIGIT, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH LED READOUT
HIGH SENSITIVITY, 10 mV FULL SCALE
WIDE RANGE GAIN AND OFFSET ADJUSTMENTS
BUILT-IN EXCITATION 5 OR 10 VDC
APPLICABLE AS REGULAR MILLIVOLT INDICATOR
(Single-ended or Differential Input)
SELECTABLE DECIMAL POINTS
OVER-RANGE INDICATION
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

UL
R

OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY WITH BACKLIGHT

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Model PAXLSG expands the PAX Lite capabilities into the indication of
pressure, load, force, and other parameters measured with strain gages. The unit
features broad range scaling and can be used with a wide variety of strain gage
resistances and bridge configurations. A built-in excitation source is jumper
selectable for 5 or 10 VDC @ 120 mA maximum, and can power up to four full
350 Ω bridges in load averaging applications. Although designed primarily for
strain-gage indication, the PAXLSG is also ideal for single-ended or differential
millivolt input applications, with full-scale input ranges from 0 to 10 mV thru 0
to 2 VDC. Adjustable scaling and offset allow direct readout in nearly any
engineering unit.
The meter has a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing of noise
effects to CE requirements, allowing the meter to provide a tough yet reliable
application solution.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

1-717-767-6511

473

.
.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4
4

Wiring the Meter . . . .
Scaling the Meter . . .
Calibrating the Meter.
Applications . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

SG - Strain Gage Meter

Accessories Part Numbers

474

TYPE

MODEL NO.

Accessories

PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

www.redlion.net

PAXLBK30

.
.
.
.

5
6
7
8

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 3 1/2-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high, 7-segment LED, (-) minus sign
displayed when voltage is negative. Decimal points inserted before 1st, 2nd,
or 3rd least significant digits by DIP switch selection.
2. OVER-RANGE INDICATION: Indicated by blanking 3 least significant
digits.
3. POWER:
AC Power: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 6 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs.
4. INPUT SIGNAL: Single-ended or differential input, ±2.0 V max. Gain
(Sensitivity) is adjustable from 200 Units of Numerical Readout/millivolt input
(gives full scale readout of 1999 at 10 mV input), to less than 1 Unit of
Numerical Readout/mV (gives full scale readout of 1999 at 2.0 V input).
Maximum common mode voltage swing with respect to signal ground, 0 to 7 V.
Note: Absolute maximum voltage that can be applied between the two input
terminals or between input and signal common is 50 VDC.
5. INPUT IMPEDANCE: 100 MΩ
6. LINEARITY: ±(0.05% ±1 digit)
7. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode Rejection: 84 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: 50 dB with respect to excitation common;
110 dB with respect to earth ground.
8. RESPONSE TIME: 2.0 seconds to settle from step input.
9. READING RATE: 2.5 updated readings/second, nominal.
10. EXCITATION SUPPLY:
Jumper Selectable: 5 VDC @ 60 mA max., ±2%
10 VDC @ 120 mA max., ±2%
Temperature coefficient (ratio metric): 20 ppm/°C max.
11. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Span Temperature Coeff.: 100 PPM/°C
Offset Temperature Coeff.: 100 PPM/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
IP20 Enclosure rating (Rear of unit), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion B
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion B
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Criterion A
30 A/m
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
13. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
14. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use.
IP20 Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
15. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs (0.24 kg)

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized
using the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled by a DIP switch.

1-717-767-6511

475

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of
the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 SETTING

THE

SWITCHES

Excitation Range Jumper
A jumper is used for selection of the 5 or 10 volt range. It is important that
only one jumper position is used at a time.

Set-Up DIP Switches
Two banks of DIP switches are located inside the meter. The 9 position bank
of switches is used for calibrating the meter. The values of these switches is
discussed in section 5.0 Calibrating the Meter.
The bank of 4 switches located near the front display are used for the
selection of decimal points and backlight annunciator. Selecting “ON” position
enables the function.
SWITCH

FUNCTION

Decimal Point 1 (000.0)

Decimal Point 2 (00.00)

Decimal Point 3 (0.000)

Backlight Annunciator for Units Label

PAXLSG Jumper Selection
FRONT DISPLAY

JUMPER SELECTIONS
The

indicates factory setting.

Main
Circuit
Board

4
3
2
1

D.P./ BACKLIGHT

EXCITATION
SELECT

OFFSET

SPAN

JUMPERS

AND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
OFFSET

REAR TERMINALS

476

www.redlion.net

GAIN
COARSE FINE

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied
to the meter (AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

3.1 POWER WIRING
AC Power

Excitation Power

Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

Terminal 3: Common
Terminal 4: Excitation +

E
3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
2-Wire Single Ended Input

4-Wire Bridge Input

6-Wire Bridge Input

DEADLOAD COMPENSATION

BRIDGE COMPLETION RESISTORS

In some cases, the combined deadload and liveload output may exceed the
range of the input. To use this range, the output of the bridge can be offset a
small amount by applying a fixed resistor across one arm of the bridge. This
shifts the electrical output of the bridge downward to within the operating range
of the meter. A 100 K ohm fixed resistor shifts the bridge output approximately
-10 mV (350 ohm bridge, 10 V excitation).
Connect the resistor between +SIG and -SIG. Use a metal film resistor with a
low temperature coefficient of resistance.

1-717-767-6511

477

4.0 SCALING

THE

METER
PAXLSG SCHEMATIC

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

COARSE GAIN SELECT SWITCHES

The Pax Lite Strain Gage Indicator (PAXLSG) consists of a digital voltmeter
combined with a high-gain, differential input amplifier that has provision for wide
range scaling adjustment (shown above). The unit also incorporates an excitation
power supply (5 or 10 VDC) that delivers up to 120 mA. In the simplified
schematic above, K1, K2, and K3 form a high-gain, high-stability, differential
input preamplifier with a single ended output. The gain of this preamplifier is set
up by coarse gain select switches S5 through S9. These switches can be turned on
in combination to provide discrete steps of gain-range adjustment. The output of
the preamplifier (K3 output) is applied to the summing amplifier (K4) through
coarse and fine adjustable potentiometers. These adjustable potentiometers
provide final vernier gain adjustment over a range of slightly more than 2:1. An
adjustable offset voltage signal is also added in at the input of K4 for zero-balance
or for applications where the transfer curve must be offset from zero.

GAIN ADJUSTMENTS

Gain is defined as the Units of Numerical change seen on the display per mV
(millivolt) of input signal change (disregarding display decimal points). In effect,
gain determines the slope of the transfer curve and is expressed in Units/mV.

Note: Disregarded Decimal Points in Readout.
For example, if an PAXLSG is to display 50.0 @ 2 mV (min.) and 169.0 @
19 mV (max.), the required gain will be:
= 70 Units/mV

Note: Remember, display decimal points are disregarded.
To establish this gain, the settings of the coarse gain select switches must first
be determined. These switches establish the maximum end of the 2:1 adjustment
range of the coarse and fine vernier gain adjustments.

478

S6 (Gain 50) + S7 (Gain 16) + S8 (Gain 6.6) = 72.6 Units/mV

With these switches ON, the coarse and fine vernier adjustments cover a gain
range from about 36 Units/mV (½ of max.) to 72.6 Units/mV. The required gain
of 70 Units/mV falls within this adjustable range.

COARSE AND FINE GAIN ADJUSTMENTS
Once the gain select switches have been set, the final gain calibration is made
with the Coarse and Fine Gain adjustments. Both of these adjustments are 15Turn, screwdriver adjustable potentiometers that increase gain with clockwise
rotation. The Coarse adjustment has a 2:1 range. The Fine adjustment has a
range of 5-10% (depending on the setting of the Coarse adjustment). Both pots
are located at the rear of the meter.

OFFSET ADJUSTMENTS

GAIN = (Max. Num. Readout) - (Min. Num. Readout)
(Max. mV Input Sig.) - (Min. mV Input Sig.)

GAIN = 1690 Units - 500 Units
19 mV - 2 mV

Each of the coarse gain select switches is marked with the amount of
maximum gain it will contribute when turned on. They are turned on singly or
in combination (adding up each of their gain contributions), to arrive at a
maximum gain value that is just above the desired gain value. To achieve the
desired gain of 70 Units/mV in the example just given, the following switches
would be turned on:

Offset adjustments move the transfer curve up-and-down along the vertical axis
without changing the slope (Gain). They are used to “balance” the output of
transducers or to intentionally introduce an offset, such as tare-load compensation.
The Fine Offset Adjustment is a 15-turn screwdriver adjustable potentiometer,
located at the rear of the meter. It has a range of ±125 Numerical Units of offset
which is sufficient for balancing the output of most transducers.
The Coarse Offset Switches (S2, 3, and 4) can be used to add additional steps
of offset. Like the coarse gain select switches, the offset switches are marked
with the approximate value of offset contributed by each switch, and they can
be turned on in combinations with each switch, contributing its value to the
total. Switch S1 selects the polarity of the offset signal and can be set to either
add or subtract the offset contribution of the switches. The maximum offset that
can be obtained with all switches ON and the Fine Offset at its maximum is
±1000, which is one half of the full scale readout.

www.redlion.net

5.0 CALIBRATING

THE

METER

There are three different methods that can be used to calibrate the PAXLSG,
and the method chosen depends largely on the nature of the application. The
three methods are:

VOLTAGE CALIBRATION
In this method, the transducer signal is simply replaced with an accurately
measured input voltage that can be varied through the range normally delivered
by the transducer (See Voltage Calibration Circuit, below). The PAXLSG is then
adjusted to provide the proper readout.

SYSTEM CALIBRATION
In this method, the transducer is connected to the input of the PAXLSG in the
final installation, or in a bench set-up simulating the actual installation.
Accurately known inputs are then applied to the transducer (i.e. load, pressure,
force, etc.), and the PAXLSG adjustments are made to provide the desired
indication. This method is usually preferable to the Voltage Calibration method
since it calibrates both the transducer and the PAXLSG as a combination, and
reduces the inherent risk of inaccuracy or errors accumulated by separate
calibration. However, it can only be used in applications where the parameter to
be indicated can be easily varied and accurately measured or established. It is
also very awkward to use if an offset or transducer unbalance must be dealt with
because of Offset/Gain adjustment interaction.

Rs = 1500 - 500 = 1000 Units
Vs = 18 mV - 2 mV = 16 mV
GAIN = 1000 = 62.5 Units/mV
16

Note: While most strain gage readout applications are zero-based (i.e. zero
readout @ zero input) this example was intentionally chosen because it included
an offset reading at zero input. It will be used in the Calibration Procedure
below to illustrate the most convenient way to handle offset situations without
excessive interaction of gain and offset adjustments. If a zero-based example
had been given, the minimum readout and input voltage would have both been
zero. Rs and Vs would then simply be the maximum values of readout and input
voltage respectively, gain would just be the ratio of (Max. Readout/Max. Input
mV), and Steps 7 and 8 of the procedure below could be eliminated.

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

1. Set the Coarse Gain Select Switches, S5 through S9 to establish a maximum
range just exceeding the required gain. Referring to the example given, the
required gain was calculated to be 62.5 Units/mV. Setting switches S6 and S7
ON gives 50 + 16 = 66 Units/mV, which is just above the required amount. The
following chart gives an approximate gain adjustment value for each switch:
SWITCH NUMBER

SPAN VALUE

140

COMBINATION VOLTAGE/SYSTEM CALIBRATION

In applications where tare-load, offset, or substantial transducer unbalance
exists and where high accuracy is required in the final indication, it may be
desirable to voltage calibrate the unit first to get it very close to its final settings.
Then, after final installation, the unit can be “tweaked” to its final settings while
using accurately known inputs to the system. These various factors make it
impossible to set up one calibration procedure to cover all applications.
However, using the following information on Voltage Calibration together with
the examples given should provide a good basis for handling virtually any
calibration requirement.

6.6

3.3

CALIBRATION EXAMPLE

“Voltage Calibration” can be easily performed for any application, using the
calibration circuit shown below.

VOLTAGE CALIBRATION CIRCUIT
(Using 350 Ohm Dummy Bridge)

This 350 Ohms “Dummy Bridge” circuit delivers calibration voltages in
ranges of 0 to ±22 mV, 0 to +44 mV, or 0 to -44 mV, depending on the setting
of R2. The range can be increased or decreased by adjusting the value of R3
(shown as 40 K). An accurate reference millivoltmeter is used to set up the
calibration voltage, and a “Zero Switch” facilitates balancing without
readjusting the calibration voltage. High-stability metalized resistors (1% tol.)
should be used. The use of a dummy bridge insures a common-mode voltage
during calibration that is very similar to that of the actual transducer.SET-UP:
Before starting the procedure, the Input Swing Voltage (Vs), the Readout
Span (Rs) and the required GAIN must be determined.

WHERE:
Rs = (Max. Numerical Display) - (Min. Numerical Display) Disregard Decimal Points
Vs = (mV in @ Max. Display) - (mV in @ Min. Display)
GAIN = Rs = Units/mV
Vs

All offset switches, S2, 3, and 4, should be off.
2. Connect the unit to the Calibration Circuit as shown. Set the excitation
voltage range jumper to the 10 V position.
3. Place unit in the case and turn power on to the unit. Allow 10 minutes of
warm-up time for stabilization.
4. Close the “Zero Switch” of the calibration circuit to obtain zero input voltage.
Adjust the fine offset control to get a zero readout.
5. Open the “Zero Switch” of the calibrating circuit and set the input voltage to
the calculated swing voltage, Vs. (Vs is 16 mV in the example given.) Now,
adjust the Gain Coarse and Fine Controls to get a readout equal to the
Readout Span.
(Rs = 1000 Units in the example given.)
6. Repeat Step 4 and readjust zero if required. If zero readjustment was needed,
repeat Step 5, then back to Step 4, etc., until Zero and Rs readings are
acceptable.
*7. Set the calibration voltage to the minimum input level (2 mV in this
example). Record the meter reading (125 in this example). Power the meter
down and remove it from the case. Set the Coarse Offset Select Switches to
get the corresponding minimum readout (add the switch offset value(s) to the
recorded meter reading). In the example given, the minimum readout was
500 units @ 2 mV, therefore setting switches 3 and 4 gives us 125 (meter
reading) + 125 (SW4) + 250 (SW3) = 500. The following chart gives an
approximate offset adjustment value for each switch.
SWITCH NUMBER

OFFSET VALUE

500

250

125

*8. Place unit in the case and turn power on to the unit. Use the fine offset
adjustment to fine tune the desired minimum reading (500 in this example).
Vary the input from the minimum to maximum levels and check the
corresponding readouts. Fine-tune if necessary by readjusting the fine gain
adjustment at the maximum end and the fine offset adjustment at the
minimum end. (In the example, readout is 500 @ 2 mV min. and 1500 @ 18
mV max.) Alternate between minimum and maximum inputs as required
until readout is within desired tolerance at the extremes.9. Set appropriate
decimal point switch (S2 for the example given).
The unit is now ready for installation.
* Steps 7 and 8 are not required in zero-based applications.

EXAMPLE: Readout is to be 5.00 Units @ 2 mV minimum, and 15.00 Units
@ 18 mV maximum. The transducer is a 350 Ω strain-gage bridge requiring
10 VDC excitation.

1-717-767-6511

479

6.0 APPLICATIONS
EXAMPLE #1
CALIBRATION

PRESSURE READOUT & SYSTEM

This illustration depicts a common application using a PAXLSG with a
strain gage pressure transducer for pressure indication. The gain required to
display 150 Units @ 20 mV is 150/20, or 7.5 Units/mV. Setting the Coarse
Gain Select Switches S8 and S9 ON, gives a gain range of 6.6 + 3.3, or 9.9
Units/mV maximum, which brackets the required gain. The transducer curve
is zero-based (i.e. zero readout at zero input), and can be easily System
Calibrated. A variable pressure input is applied to the transducer with a “DeadWeight Tester” and the Fine Offset is adjusted to give a readout of zero with
no pressure applied. Then 150 PSI is applied, the Coarse and Fine Gain
controls are adjusted for a readout of 150. Pressure is removed, zero is checked
and readjusted with the Fine Offset control if needed. Pressure is varied
between zero and maximum, with the Fine Gain and Offset adjustments
retrimmed as needed until the readout is within tolerance.

EXAMPLE #2 THE MODEL PAXLSG AS A MILLIVOLT
METER
The PAXLSG can be used as a scaleable millivolt meter and will accept either
single-ended or differential inputs when connected as shown. Input signals are
referenced to the negative (common) side of the excitation supply (Terminal 3).
Maximum common-mode voltage (for differential input) is 0 to +7 VDC.

EXAMPLE #3
MULTIPLE
AVERAGE READING

LOAD-CELL INPUT,

The 120 mA excitation output capability of the PAXLSG allows it to operate
multiple strain gage bridges. In this example, it is used to indicate the quantity
of granular material held in a hopper that is supported by three load cells in a
tripod mounting arrangement. The tare-weight of the empty hopper is about
30% of the full weight, requiring a significant offset for a zero readout when
empty. The PAXLSG is first Voltage-Calibrated (using the known output of the
load cells at the empty and full conditions). Then the unit is installed and fine
trimmed (System Calibration) using known loads.

480

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXS - STRAIN GAGE INPUT
This is a brief overview of the PAXS. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 378.
5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY
LOAD CELL, PRESSURE AND TORQUE BRIDGE INPUTS
DUAL RANGE INPUT: ±24 mV OR ±240 mV
SELECTABLE 5 VDC OR 10 VDC BRIDGE EXCITATION
PROGRAMMABLE AUTO-ZERO TRACKING
FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)
COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)
CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

PAXS SPECIFICATIONS
SENSOR INPUTS:
MAX
CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

INPUT RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

IMPEDANCE

±24 mVDC

0.02% of
reading +3 μV

0.07% of
reading +4 μV

100 Mohm

30 V

1 μV

±240 mVDC

0.02% of
reading +30 μV

0.07% of
reading +40 μV

100 Mohm

30 V

10 μV

1-717-767-6511

481

This page intentionally left blank.
482

www.redlion.net

TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLERS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

483

QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
CONTROL
CUB5RT/TC

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

CUB4RT

I N D I C AT I O N
PAXLRT

PAXLTC

RTD/Thermocouple Meter With
Output Option Card Capability

RTD Temperature Indicator

1/8 DIN RTD Temperature
Indicator

1/8 DIN Thermocouple
Temperature Indicator

39 mm (H) x 75 mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97 mm (W)

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

5 Digit, .48" (12mm) Reflective
and Red Backlight LCD

4 Digit, .56" (14mm) Red LED

RTD
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427

RTD
Pt385 and Pt392

Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV

RTD (CUB5RT)
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427
Input Ranges
Thermocouple (CUB5TC)
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV

Control

Yes

Outputs

Single Form C Relay
Dual Sinking

Communications

RS232
RS485

F
Other Features/
Options

User Input
Min/Max Memory
Custom Units Indicato

Programmable F or C
Annunciator

Programmable Offset,
Peak/Valley Memory,
Custom Units Overlay

Power Source

9 to 28 VDC

9 - 26 VDC @ 25 mA
With Backlighting 65 mA

85 to 250 VAC

Page Number

Page 489/501

Page 521

Page 513

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

484

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
PAXLT

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

RTD and Thermocouple Meter
With Setpoint Capability

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

5 Digit, .56" (14mm) Red LED

RTD
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427
Input Ranges
Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV

CONTROL
DP5T

1/8 DIN RTD and Thermocouple
Temperature Indicator

PAXT

PID CONTROL
T16

1/8 DIN RTD and Thermocouple
Temperature Indicator

1/16 DIN Temperature Controller

50 mm (H) x 97mm (W)

48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm) Red LED

4 1/2 Digit, .56" (14mm)
Standard Green or Sunlight
Readable Red LED,
Adjustable Intensity

2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .3" (7mm) Red
Sec. Display .2" (5mm)
Green LED

Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and C
RTD
Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, and Cu427
Direct
10 Ohm, 100 Ohm, and mV

Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C, and mV
RTD
2 or 3 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385, .00391 and
.00672)

Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD
2 or 3 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385 and .00391)

Control

Yes

On/Off

On/Off, PID

Outputs

Dual Form C

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling
Output, Dual Alarms
(Relay, SSR Drive)

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Communications

User Input
Min/Max Memory,
Custom Units Overlay

Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer,
Custom Units Overlay

Analog Output*,
Min/Max Memory,
Integrator/Totalizer, Linearizer,
Custom Units Overlay

Analog Output

Power Source

50 to 250 VAC
21.6 to 250 VDC

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

Page Number

Page 528

Page 539

Page 540

Page 541

Other Features/
Options

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

1-717-767-6511

485

QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
PID CONTROL
T48

TCU

TSC

P16

1/8 DIN Temperature Controller

1/8 DIN Temperature Setpoint
Controller

1/16 DIN Process Controller

48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)

96 mm (H) x 48mm (W)

48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)

Display

2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED

2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .3" (7mm) Red
Sec. Display .2" (5mm)
Green LED

Input Ranges

Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD
2, 3, or 4 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385 and .00391)

Process Input
0 to 10 VDC or
0 to 20 mA

On/Off, PID

Description 1/16 DIN Temperature Controller

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Control

Outputs

Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling Main Control (Heat/Cool), Cooling
Output, Dual Alarms
Output, Dual Alarms
Output, Dual Alarms
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
Field Replaceable
Field Replaceable
Field Replaceable

Main Control (Direct/Reverse),
Secondary Output,
Dual Alarms

Communications

RS485

Other Features/
Options

Heater Current Monitor,
Analog Output,
Remote Setpoint

Analog Output

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

115/230 VAC

85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

Page Number

Page 566

Page 574

Page 583

Page 590

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

486

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Temperature Controllers
PSC

CONTROL
TLA

1/8 DIN Process Controller

1/8 DIN Process Setpoint
Controller

1/16 DIN Temperature Limit
Alarm

48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)

96 mm (H) x 48mm (W)

48 mm (H) x 48mm (W)

2 x 4 Digit,
Main Display .4" (10mm) Red
Sec. Display .3" (7mm)
Green LED

Process Input
0 to 10 VDC or
0 to 20 mA

Thermocouple
T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, and mV
RTD
2, or 3 Wire 100 Ohm
(ALPHA = .00385 and .00391)

Control

On/Off, PID

On/Off

Outputs

Main Control (Direct/Reverse),
Secondary Output,
Dual Alarms
(Relay Only)

Main Control (Direct/Reverse),
Secondary Output, Dual Alarms
(Relay, SSR Drive, Triac)
Field Replaceable

Limit Alarm
Relay
Alarm Output
Single or Dual Relay

RS485

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Display

Input Ranges

Communications

P48

PID CONTROL
PCU

1/16 DIN Process Controller

F
Other Features/
Options

Dual Setpoint,
Remote Setpoint,
Analog Output

Motorized Valve Positioner,
Analog Output,
Remote Setpoint

Analog Output

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

115/230 VAC

85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

Page Number

Page 591

Page 596

Page 604

Page 611

*See website for product information.
Field Installable Option Card

1-717-767-6511

487

REPLACEMENT Guide
CURRENT PRODUCT

WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES

MODEL NUMBER

Q Display:

4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED

Q Construction:
Q Power

APLTC

Q Display:

4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED

Metal Front Bezel

Q Power

Source: 115/230 VAC

Q Measurement:

Thermocouple

IMR

Q Display:

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC
Q Measurement: RTD
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card

Metal Front Bezel

Source: 115/230 VAC

Q Measurement:

RTD

PAXT
Q Display:

6 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 85 to 250 VAC
Q Measurement: Thermocouple
Q Requires Appropriate Option Card

Q Display:

4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED

Q Construction:

Metal Front Bezel

Q Power

IMT

Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Measurement: Thermocouple

PAXT
Q Display:

5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective, Green and Red Backlight
LCD

Q Display:

5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective and Red Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: 9 to 26 VDC
Q Measurement: Thermocouple
CUB4TC

Q Power

CUB5TC

Thermocouple

5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective, Green and Red Backlight
LCD

5 Digit, .48" (12 mm)
Reflective and Red Backlight LCD
Q Power Source: 9 to 26 VDC
Q Measurement: RTD
CUB4RT

Source: 9 to 28 VDC

Q Measurement:

Q Display:

Q Power

CUB5RT

Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.

488

Thermocouple

PAXLTC

4 Digit, .56" (14 mm)
Red LED

Q Power

Source: 85 to 250 VAC

Q Measurement:

Q Display:

Q Construction:

FEATURES

www.redlion.net

Source: 9 to 28 VDC

Q Measurement:

RTD

MODEL CUB5TC - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 5-DIGIT
THERMOCOUPLE METER
z CONFORMS TO ITS-90 TEMPERATURE STANDARD
z COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (Enable/Disable)
z MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DISPLAY CAPTURE
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.48" (12.2 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z OPTIONAL SETPOINT OUTPUT MODULES
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULES (RS232 or RS485)
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z FRONT PANEL OR CRIMSON PROGRAMMABLE
z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT
z THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS
Thermocouple types T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, or mV

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z SELECTABLE °F or °C WITH 1 or 0.1 DEGREE RESOLUTION
z °F OR °C DISPLAY ANNUNCIATORS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The CUB5TC accepts a thermocouple input and provides a temperature display
in Celcius or Farenheit. The meter also features minimum and maximum
display capture, display offset, °F or °C indicator, and programmable user input.
The display can be toggled either manually or automatically between the
selected displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective and red/green backlight. The backlight version is user
selectable for the desired color and also has variable display intensity.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
setpoint output modules. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

1-717-767-6511

489

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

CUB5

DESCRIPTION

CUB5TC

Optional Plug-in Cards

CUB5TCR0

Thermocouple Meter with Backlight Display

CUB5TCB0

CUB5RLY

Single Relay Output Card

CUB5RLY0

CUB5SNK

Dual Sinking Output Card

CUB5SNK0

RS485 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM1

RS232 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM2

USB Programming Card for CUB5 Products

CUB5USB0

CUB5COM
CUB5USB
MLPS1

Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC

MLPS1000

CBLPROG

RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBLPROG0

CBPRO

RS485 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBPRO007

SFCRD

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 1
USB Programming Cable

SFCRD200

Accessories

CBLUSB
1

PART NUMBER

Thermocouple Meter with Reflective Display

CBLUSB00

Crimson 2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit LCD 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits
CUB5TCR0: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5TCB0: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a NEC Class 2 or
SELV rated power supply.
INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0

MODEL
NO.

DISPLAY COLOR

CUB5TCR0
CUB5TCB0
CUB5TCB0

--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)

10 mA
85 mA
95 mA

40 mA
115 mA
125 mA

3. READOUT:
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degrees
Scale: °F or °C
Offset Range: -999 to 9999 display units
4. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Isolation: TC+ and TC- terminals are not electrically isolated from the power
supply or optional comms cards.
Response Time: 500 msec.
Open Sensor Display: OPEN
Overrange/Underrange Input: OLOL/ULUL
Overrange/Underrange Display : “.....”/“-.....”
Maximum Input Voltage: 30 VDC, TC+ to TCMaximum Input Voltage TC-: 3 VDC max. with respect to common

TC TYPE

T
E
J
K
R
S
B

RANGE

-200 to 400°C
-328 to 752°F
-200 to 871°C
-328 to 1600°F
-200 to 760°C
-328 to 1400°F
-200 to 1372°C
-328 to 2502°F
-50 to 1768°C
-58 to 3214°F
-50 to 1768°C
-58 to 3214°F
200 to 1820°C
392 to 3308°F

ACCURACY ACCURACY
@ 23°C
@ -35 to 75°C
±°C
±°C

2.3
2.7
1.9
2.3
4.5
4.5
9.1<540°C
4.5>540°C

-200 to 1300°C
-328 to 2372°F

2.8

-10.00 to 65.00

0.02 mV

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

(+) blue
5.8
(-) red
(+) purple
4.9
(-) red
(+) white
4.3
(-) red
(+) yellow
5.8
(-) red
no
15.0
standard
no
15.0
standard
42.6<540°C no
15.0>540°C standard
(+) orange
8.1
(-) red
no
0.08 mV
standard

BS 1843

(+) white
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) yellow
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
no
standard
(+) orange
(-) blue
no
standard

490

The specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization conformity,
and thermocouple cold junction compensation. Total system accuracy is the sum
of meter and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the
meter readout at the temperature of interest.
5. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect terminal to common
(USR COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1:
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control,
and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and max/min values when power is removed.

www.redlion.net

8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCR0: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCB0 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL

Red Display

Green Display

1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5

Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)

TEMPERATURE

-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS

The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
SINGLE RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.

1.0 INSTALLING
INSTALLATION

THE

DUAL SINKING OUTPUT CARD
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 100 mA max.
VDS ON: 0.7 V @ 100 mA
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Note: Non-grounded (isolated) thermocouple probes must be used when
multiple units are connected in an RS485 network, or measurement
errors will occur.
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable (refer to CUB5COM bulletin)
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity

METER

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the
unit. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to
the back of the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel
cutout.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

1-717-767-6511

491

2.0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS
WARNING: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before
accessing inside of the meter.
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare
metal object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled
clean workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges.
Dirt, oil or other contaminants that may contact the cards can
adversely affect circuit operation.

Setpoint Card
Comms Card

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

492

b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

www.redlion.net

3.1 POWER WIRING

3.2 USER INPUT WIRING

DC Power

Sinking Logic

+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC

USR COMM
USR

}

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Input Common.

The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .7 V).

3.3 INPUT WIRING
Thermocouple

CAUTION: Power input common and sensor input common are NOT isolated
from user input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the power input common and the sensor input common must
be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages; or
input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous
live voltage may be present at the User Inputs and User Input Common
terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of
the user input common with respect to earth common; and the common of
the isolated plug-in cards with respect to input common.

3.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load must
be wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.

3.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

1-717-767-6511

493

4.0 REVIEWING

BUTTON

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

ENTERING PROGRAM MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

RST

Resets values (MIN / MAX) or outputs

Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

“1” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL BUTTON)

It is recommended that all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing and holding the SEL button. If it is not accessible then it is locked by
either a security code, or a hardware lock.

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST BUTTONS)

It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module
in sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user
input or programming security code.

The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST button is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL button.

494

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.
Pressing both the SEL and the RST button on power-up will also load the
factory settings and display rESEt. This allows operation in the event of a
memory failure or corrupted data.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

www.redlion.net

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

USrIN

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU

THERMOCOUPLE TYPE

tYPE
ª

tc-J

SELECTION TC TYPE

tc-t
tc-E
tc-j
tc-K
tc-r

E
J
K

SELECTION

TC TYPE

tc-S
tc-b
tc-n
VOLt

Filter values represent no filtering (0), up to heavy filtering (3). A value of 1
for the filter uses 1/4 of the new input and 3/4 of the previous display to
generate the new display. A filter value of 2 uses 1/8 new and 7/8 previous. A
filter value of 3 uses 1/16 new and 15/16 previous.

B
N

Select the thermocouple type used for the application. The appropriate curve
will be automatically loaded for the selected type.
Selecting VOLt displays the millivolt input signal with 10 μV resolution.

COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION

CJC

yES

bANd

TEMPERATURE SCALE

°F

USrIN

°C

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

0.0

Select the decimal point location for the desired display resolution. This
selection applies for the Input, MAX and MIN displays. This parameter does
not appear if tYPE = VOLt or for types R, S or B thermocouples which have a
fixed 1 degree resolution.

OFSEt
ª

USER INPUT FUNCTION

DISPLAY MODE

Select the temperature scale. This selection applies for the Input, MAX and
MIN displays. This parameter does not appear if tYPE = VOLt.

dECPt

00 to 199 display units

This parameter enables or disables internal cold junction compensation. For
most applications, cold junction compensation should be enabled (yES). This
parameter does not appear if tYPE = VOLt.

SCALE «
ª
°F

FILTER BAND

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

-999 to 9999

DESCRIPTION

NO
P-Loc

No Function

User Input disabled.

rESEt

Reset (Edge triggered)

d-HLd

Display Hold

d-SEL
d-LEV
COLOr

Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Backlight Color
(Edge Triggered)

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).

P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).

Setpoint 1 Reset

Resets setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset

Resets setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Resets the assigned value(s) to the
current input value.

Program Mode Lock-out

Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).
Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation (backlight version only).
Change backlight color with each
activation (backlight version only).

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

FILtr
ª

FILTER SETTING

U-ASN

0,1 2 3

dSP

HI
LO

HI-LO
dSP

1-717-767-6511

495

5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU

CALIBRATION

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

HI-En

YES

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

HI-t

2.0

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

LO-En
ª

YES

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

2.0

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

FCS

yES

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

Cold Junction Calibration
1. Install all option cards needed for your application and the rear cover,
or invalid results will occur.
2. The ambient temperature must be within 20°C to 30°C.
3. Connect a thermocouple (types T, E, J, K, or N only) with an accuracy of 1°C
or better to the meter.
4. Enter programming mode and verify the following settings in Module 1:

tYPE = thermocouple type connected to the unit
CJC = YES; SCALE = °C; dECPt = 0.0; OFSEt = 0

Select YES to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

CodE

1. Connect a precision DC voltage source with an accuracy of 0.01% or better
to the TC+ (positive) and the TC- (negative) terminals of the CUB5TC. Set
the output of the voltage source to zero.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button to select INP.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 0.0u.
5. With the voltage source set to zero, press SEL. Display reads CALC for about
eight seconds.
6. When display reads 60.0u, apply 60.000 mV input signal. Press SEL. Display
reads CALC for about eight seconds.
7. When display reads CAL NO, press SEL twice to exit Module 2 and return to
the normal display mode.
8. Proceed to Cold Junction Calibration.

Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

LO-t

Input Voltage Calibration

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

CodE

The CUB5TC uses stored voltage calibration and cold
junction temperature values to provide accurate
temperature and voltage measurements. Over time, the
electrical characteristics of the components inside the
meter could slowly change. The result is that the stored
calibration values may no longer accurately define the input circuit. For most
applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration of the CUB5TC involves a voltage calibration and a cold
junction calibration. It is recommended that both calibrations be performed.
The voltage calibration MUST precede the cold junction calibration. Allow 30
minute warm up before performing any calibration related procedure. The
following procedures should be performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to
35 °C (59 to 95 °F).
Calibration should only be performed by individuals experienced in
calibrating electronic equipment.
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the CUB5TC.

5. Place the thermocouple in close thermal contact to a reference thermometer
probe. (Use a reference thermometer with an accuracy of 0.25°C or better.)
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (A calibration bath of known temperature
could be used in place of the thermometer.)
6. Compare the unit display with the reference temperature indicator (or
calibration bath). If a difference of more than ±1.0 °C exists, note the
difference (CJ error) and continue with cold junction calibration.
CJ Error = Reference Temperature - Unit Display.

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press SEL button to exit the module.
Pressing both the SEL and the RST button on power-up
will also load the factory settings and display rESEt. This allows operation in
the event of a memory failure or corruted data.

7. Enter programming mode. Step through Module 2 to the Service Access
Code parameter and select CodE 48. Press and hold the SEL button until the
unit displays CAL NO. Press the RST button to select CJC.
8. Press SEL. Display reads CJC followed by the current cold junction value.
Calculate a new cold junction value as follows:
New cold junction = Current cold junction + CJ Error (noted above)

9. Press RST and set the display to the new cold junction value. Press and hold
SEL. Display reads CALC for about four seconds and then returns to CAL NO.
10. Press SEL twice to exit calibration and return to the normal display mode.
Verify the input reading is correct. If not, repeat steps 6 through 10.

496

www.redlion.net

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

dSP-t «
ª
1

0.5

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

d-LEV

seconds

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

yES

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

rSt
ª

dSP

NO
HI

LO
HI-LO

dSP

This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

yES

000

not

P-Loc

______

DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

rEd

999

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds.

COLOr

000

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

ScroL

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.

CodE
yES

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL

Active

Full Programming

Immediate Access

1-99

Quick Programming

After Quick
Programming with
correct code entry at
CodE prompt *

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

Programming Lock

No Access

1-99

Quick Programming

No Access

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

P-Loc

rEd

6rn

Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.

Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

1-717-767-6511

497

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU

The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional output
module is installed in the meter.

SETPOINT VALUE

SPt-n
ª

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSEL

SP-1

SETPOINT 2 ENABLE

YES

100

-9999 to 99999

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

SP-2

Enb-2

Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and setpoint 2 is disabled.

HYSTERESIS VALUE

HYS-n
ª

59999

ON TIME DELAY
SETPOINT ACTION

Act-n «
ª HI-Ub

LO-bL

HI-bL

HI-Ub

LO-Ub

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub

tON-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

tOF-n

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

0.0

OFF TIME DELAY

0.0

599.9 Sec

OUTPUT RESET ACTION

rSt-n
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

HI-bL

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

LO-bL

Auto

LAtCH

L-dLY

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

498

HI-Ub

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

LO-Ub

the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power cycle.

www.redlion.net

When the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action), the
corresponding “on” output is reset immediately and remains off until the
trigger point is crossed again. (Previously latched alarms will be off if power
up Display Value is lower than setpoint value.)

STANDBY OPERATION

Stb-n

YES

When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and OutputReset Action.

PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION

brn-n
ª

OFF

Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a temperature probe failure
(open), the output can be programmed to be on or off.

CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/OUTPUT STATE

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

YES

This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

rEn-n

ChC-n

YES

5.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
PARAMETER MENU

1-717-767-6511

499

CUB5TC PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press and hold SEL button
to enter Programming Mode.

500

www.redlion.net

MODEL CUB5RT - MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 5-DIGIT RTD METER
z MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DISPLAY CAPTURE
z LCD, REFLECTIVE OR GREEN/RED LED BACKLIGHTING
z 0.48" (12.2 mm) HIGH DIGITS
z OPTIONAL SETPOINT OUTPUT MODULES
z OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULES (RS232 or RS485)
z OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE
z FRONT PANEL OR CRIMSON PROGRAMMABLE
z DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT SETPOINT OUTPUT
z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z RTD INPUTS
RTD types Pt385, Pt392, Ni672, Cu427
z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z SELECTABLE °F or °C WITH 1 or 0.1 DEGREE RESOLUTION
z °F OR °C DISPLAY ANNUNCIATORS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

The CUB5 provides the user the ultimate in flexibility, from its complete user
programming to the optional setpoint control and communication capability.
The CUB5RT accepts an RTD input and provides a temperature display in
Celcius or Farenheit. The meter also features minimum and maximum display
capture, display offset, °F or °C indicator, and programmable user input. The
display can be toggled either manually or automatically between the selected
displays.
The CUB5 display has 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits. The LCD is available in
two versions, reflective and red/green backlight. The backlight version is user
selectable for the desired color and also has variable display intensity.
The capability of the CUB5 can be easily expanded with the addition of
option modules. Setpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the
setpoint output modules. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS485
is added with a serial option module.
The CUB5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion® Micro-Line/Sensor
Power Supply (MLPS1000), which attaches directly to the back of a CUB5. The
MLPS1 is powered from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the
unit and sensors.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 2.15" (54.6) H x 3.00" (76.2) W.

1-717-767-6511

501

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

CUB5

Optional Plug-in Cards

Accessories

MODEL NO.

CUB5RT

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

RTD Meter with Reflective Display

CUB5RTR0

RTD Meter with Backlight Display

CUB5RTB0

CUB5RLY

Single Relay Output Card

CUB5RLY0

CUB5SNK

Dual Sinking Output Card

CUB5SNK0

CUB5COM

RS485 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM1

CUB5USB

USB Programming Card for CUB5 Products

CUB5USB0

MLPS1

Micro-Line Power Supply, 85 to 250 VAC

MLPS1000

CBLPROG

RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBLPROG0

CBPRO

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP 1

SFCRD200

CBLUSB

USB Programming Cable

CBLUSB00

Crimson 2 software is a free download from http://www.redlion.net/

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit LCD 0.48" (12.2 mm) high digits
CUB5RTR0: Reflective LCD with full viewing angle
CUB5RTB0: Transmissive LCD with selectable red or green LED backlight,
viewing angle optimized. Display color change capability with output state
when using an output module.
2. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC with short circuit and input
polarity protection. Must use an RLC model MLPS1 or a NEC Class 2 or
SELV rated power supply.

MODEL
NO.

DISPLAY COLOR

CUB5RTR0
CUB5RTB0
CUB5RTB0

--Red (max intensity)
Green (max intensity)

INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
@ 9 VDC WITHOUT @ 9 VDC WITH
CUB5RLY0
CUB5RLY0

10 mA
85 mA
95 mA

40 mA
115 mA
125 mA

3. READOUT:
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degrees
Scale: °F or °C
Offset Range: -19999 to 19999 display units
4. RTD INPUTS:
Isolation: Input and EXC terminals are not electrically isolated from the
power supply or optional comms cards.
Response Time: 500 msec.
Failed Sensor Display: OPEN or Short
Overrange/Underrange Input: OLOL/ULUL
Overrange/Underrange Display : “.....”/“-.....”
Maximum Input Voltage: 30 VDC
Type: 2, 3 or 4 wire
Excitation current: 100 ohm range: 165 μA
10 ohm range: 2.5 mA
Lead resistance: 100 ohm range: 10 ohm/lead max.
10 ohm range: 3 ohms/lead max.
Balanced Lead Resistance: Automatically compensated up to max per lead.
Unbalanced Lead Resistance: Uncompensated.
INPUT TYPE

100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00392
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427

RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-80 to 260°C

0.2°C

0.5°C

-100 to 260°C

0.4°C

0.9°C

STANDARD

IEC 751
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard

*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy at
23°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a -35 to 75°C and 0
to 85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the -35 to
75°C operating range includes meter tempco effects. The specification includes
the A/D conversion errors and linearization conformity. Total system accuracy
is the sum of meter and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by field
calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.

502

5. USER INPUT (USR): Programmable input. Connect terminal to common
(USR COMM) to activate function. Internal 10KΩ pull-up resistor to +9 to
28 VDC.
Threshold Levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/9257C/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #E179259-V01-S02
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Criterion A
30 A/m
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM memory retains all programming
parameters and max/min values when power is removed.
8. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5 inch-lbs (0.565 N-m) max.

www.redlion.net

9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCR0: -35 to 75°C
Operating Temperature Range for CUB5TCB0 depends on display color
and intensity level as per below:
INTENSITY LEVEL

Red Display

Green Display

1&2
3
4
5
1&2
3
4
5

10. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for
indoor use. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2. High impact plastic
case with clear viewing window. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
11. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz (100 g)

TEMPERATURE

-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35
-35

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

75°C
70°C
60°C
50°C
75°C
65°C
50°C
35°C

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS
ADDING OPTION CARDS

The CUB5 meters can be fitted with optional output cards and/or serial
communications cards. The details for the plug-in cards can be reviewed in the
specification section below. The plug-in cards, that are sold separately, can be
installed initially or at a later date.
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
SINGLE RELAY CARD
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.

1.0 INSTALLING
INSTALLATION

THE

DUAL SINKING OUTPUT CARD
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, N Channel open drain MOSFET
Current Rating: 100 mA max.
VDS ON: 0.7 V @ 100 mA
VDS MAX: 30 VDC
Offstate Leakage Current: 0.5 mA max.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Note: Non-grounded (isolated) RTD probes must be used when multiple units
are connected in an RS485 network, or measurement errors will occur.
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable (refer to CUB5COM bulletin)
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity

METER

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap product.
Do NOT use solvents. Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the
aging process of the bezel.
Do not use tools of any
kind (screwdrivers, pens,
pencils, etc.) to operate the
keypad of the unit.

1-717-767-6511

503

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

REMOVING THE REAR COVER

provide enough pressure to release the tab locks. To replace the cover, align the
cover with the input terminals and press down until the cover snaps into place.
The Plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that perform specific
functions. The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter.
Range Jumpers

Setpoint Card
Comms Card

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

WIRING OVERVIEW

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

504

b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

www.redlion.net

3.1 POWER WIRING

3.2 USER INPUT WIRING

DC Power

Sinking Logic

+9 to +28 VDC: +VDC
Power Common: -VDC

USR COMM
USR

}

Connect external switching device between the
User Input terminal and User Input Common.

The user input of the meter is
internally pulled up to +9 to +28 V
with 10 K resistance. The input is
active when it is pulled low (<0 .7 V).

3.3 INPUT WIRING
3-WIRE RTD

2-WIRE RTD

3.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
SINGLE SETPOINT RELAY PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

DUAL SETPOINT N-FET OPEN DRAIN PLUG-IN CARD

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

F
Output Common is not isolated from DC Power Common. Load
must be wired between OSNK terminal and V+ of the load supply.

3.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN CARD

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

1-717-767-6511

505

4.0 REVIEWING

BUTTON

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

ENTERING PROGRAM MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Press and hold for 2 seconds to activate

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

RST

Resets values (MIN / MAX) or outputs

Advances through the program menu
Increments selected parameter value or selection

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

“1” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the right of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL BUTTON)

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST BUTTONS)

It is recommended to start with Module 1 and proceed through each module
in sequence. When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the
parameter programming and lock out parameter programming with the user
input or programming security code.

The Programming Menu is organized into separate modules. These modules
group together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate
between Pro and the present module. The RST button is used to select the desired
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL button.

506

PROGRAMMING TIPS

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

www.redlion.net

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display
Parameter

USrIN

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU

RTD TYPE

tYPE
ª

Pt385

SELECTION

TYPE

RANGE JUMPERS

Pt385
Pt392
Ni672
Cu427

RTD Platinum 385

100 ohm

RTD Platinum 392

100 ohm

RTD Nickel 672

100 ohm

RTD Copper 10 Ω

10 ohm

Select the RTD type used for the application. The appropriate curve will be
automatically loaded for the selected type. The position of the Input Range
Jumper must match the RTD type selected.

SCALE

°F

bANd

FILTER BAND

00 to 199 display units

TEMPERATURE SCALE

°F

°C

Select the temperature scale. This selection applies for the Input, MAX and
MIN displays.

USrIN

USER INPUT FUNCTION

DISPLAY MODE

DESCRIPTION

NO
P-Loc

No Function

rESEt

Reset (Edge triggered)

d-HLd

Display Hold

Select the decimal point location for the desired display resolution. This
selection applies for the Input, MAX and MIN displays.

d-SEL
d-LEV
COLOr

Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)
Backlight Color
(Edge Triggered)

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).

P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).

Setpoint 1 Reset

Resets setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset

Resets setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

dECPt
ª

OFSEt
ª

-19999 to 19999

FILtr
ª

See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Resets the assigned value(s) to the
current input value.

Program Mode Lock-out

0.0

User Input disabled.

FILTER SETTING

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

U-ASN

0,1 2 3

If the displayed temperature is difficult to read due to small process
variations or noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display.
Software filtering effectively combines a fraction of the current input reading
with a fraction of the previous displayed reading to generate the new display.
Filter values represent no filtering (0), up to heavy filtering (3). A value of 1
for the filter uses 1/4 of the new input and 3/4 of the previous display to
generate the new display. A filter value of 2 uses 1/8 new and 7/8 previous. A
filter value of 3 uses 1/16 new and 15/16 previous.

dSP

HI
LO

HI-LO
dSP

1-717-767-6511

507

5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU

CALIBRATION

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

HI-En

YES

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

HI-t

2.0

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

CodE

The CUB5RT uses stored resistance calibration values
to provide accurate temperature measurements. Over
time, the electrical characteristics of the components
inside the meter could slowly change. The result is that
the stored calibration values may no longer accurately
define the input circuit. For most applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years
should be sufficient.
Calibration of the CUB5RT involves a resistance calibration. Allow 30
minute warm up before performing any calibration related procedure. The
following procedures should be performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to
35 °C (59 to 95 °F).
Calibration should only be performed by individuals experienced in
calibrating electronic equipment.
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the CUB5RT.

10 OHM RTD Range Calibration
1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 10 ohm.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button. Display reads CAL r10.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 00r.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using a three wire
link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
6. When the display reads 15.0r, apply a precision resistance of 15 ohms (with an
accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using a
three wire link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
7. When display reads CAL NO, press the SEL button to exit calibration, or
proceed to the 100 ohm RTD Range Claibration.

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

LO-En

YES

Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

LO-t

2.0

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

100 OHM RTD Range Calibration

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

FCS

yES

1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 100 ohm.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press and hold the SEL button for 2 seconds. Unit
will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button until the display reads CAL r100.
4. Press the SEL button. Display reads 0.0r.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using a three wire
link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
6. When the display reads 300.0r, apply a precision resistance of 300 ohms (with
an accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals INP+, EXC, and COMM using
a three wire link. Press SEL. Display reads CALC for about 15 seconds.
7. When display reads CAL NO, press the SEL button to exit calibration.

Select YES to perform any of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

RESISTANCE DISPLAY MODE
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

CodE

508

CodE

Entering Code 85 will place the CUB5RT in a resistance
display mode. This mode is useful for diagnostic purposes
before and after calibration, or to display the measured
resistance of a connected RTD probe. If the RTD type is set
for Cu427 with the jumper set to the 10 ohm position, the display will read
resistance in 0.000 ohms resolution. For all other RTD types, with the jumper in
the 100 ohm position, the display will read in 0.00 ohms resolution.
Re-entering code 85 toggles the display back to the temperature display mode
without having to remove power from the meter. If power is removed, the
display always returns to the temperature display mode when power is reapplied.

www.redlion.net

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

dSP-t «
ª
1

0.5

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

d-LEV

seconds

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

yES

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

rSt
ª

dSP

NO
HI

LO
HI-LO

dSP

This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

yES

000

not

P-Loc

______

DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY)

rEd

999

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds.

COLOr

000

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

ScroL

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed. This parameter is active for backlight units only.

CodE
yES

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL

Active

Full Programming

Immediate Access

1-99

Quick Programming

After Quick
Programming with
correct code entry at
CodE prompt *

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

Programming Lock

No Access

1-99

Quick Programming

No Access

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

P-Loc

rEd

6rn

Enter the desired display color, red or green. This parameter is active for
backlight units only.

Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

1-717-767-6511

509

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU

The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when an optional output
module is installed in the meter.

SETPOINT VALUE

SPt-n
ª

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSEL

SP-1

SETPOINT 2 ENABLE

YES

100

-9999 to 99999

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

SP-2

Enb-2

Select YES to enable Setpoint 2 and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and setpoint 2 is disabled.

HYSTERESIS VALUE

HYS-n
ª

59999

ON TIME DELAY
SETPOINT ACTION

Act-n «
ª HI-Ub

LO-bL

HI-bL

HI-Ub

LO-Ub

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub

tON-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

tOF-n

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

0.0

OFF TIME DELAY

0.0

599.9 Sec

OUTPUT RESET ACTION

rSt-n
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

HI-bL

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

LO-bL

Auto

LAtCH

L-dLY

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

LAtCH = Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

510

HI-Ub

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

LO-Ub

www.redlion.net

STANDBY OPERATION

Stb-n

YES

When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and OutputReset Action.

PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION

brn-n
ª

OFF

Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a temperature probe failure
(open or short), the output can be programmed to be on or off.

CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/OUTPUT STATE

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

YES

This parameter enables the backlight CUB5 to switch the backlight color when
the output state changes. This parameter is only active for the backlight version.

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

rEn-n

ChC-n

YES

5.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
PARAMETER MENU

1-717-767-6511

511

CUB5RT PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press and hold SEL button
to enter Programming Mode.

512

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXLTC - PAX LITE THERMOCOUPLE METER
z PROGRAMMABLE TC TYPE (T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N or mV SCALE)
z CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
z SELECTABLE °F OR °C WITH 0.1 OR 1 DEGREE DISPLAY
RESOLUTION
z STATE-OF-THE-ART DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FOR GREATER
ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY
z FULL 4-DIGIT, HIGH VISIBILITY, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH RED LED
DISPLAY
z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL FILTERING ENHANCES STABILITY
z PEAK/VALLEY (HI/LO READING) MEMORY

UL
R

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY WITH BACKLIGHT

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Pax Lite Thermocouple Meter accepts inputs from standard
thermocouples and precisely linearizes them. A full 4-digit display
accommodates a wide range of temperature inputs. The unit automatically
compensates for cold junction, NBS linearity and the meter’s zero and span.
The meter features a readout choice of either Fahrenheit or Celsius with 0.1
or 1 degree resolution. English Style display prompts and front panel buttons aid
the operator through set-up and operation. With a few simple steps the unit can
be used as a millivolt meter by selecting “
” for thermocouple type. This
mode is useful in monitoring and displaying the actual voltage produced at the
thermocouple probe junction and as an aid in troubleshooting for a faulty
thermocouple probe.
The meter provides a Peak (HI) and Valley (LO) reading memory with
selectable capture delay time. The capture delay is used to prevent detection of
false Peak or Valley readings that may occur during start-up or unusual process
events. The Peak and Valley readings are stored at power-down to allow
monitoring the process limits over any length of time (shifts, days, etc.).
Programmable digital filtering enhances the stability of the reading. All setup data is stored in EEPROM, which will hold data for a minimum of 10 years
without power. The meter has several built-in diagnostic functions to alert
operators of any malfunction.
Extensive testing of noise interference mechanisms and full burn-in makes
the indicator extremely reliable in industrial environments. The front bezel
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for wash down applications.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired. Do not use this unit to directly
command motors, valves, or other actuators not equipped with safeguards. To
do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or equipment in the event of a fault
to the unit.

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DEFINITION OF TERMS
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) I:
Signal level, special equipment or parts of equipment, telecommunication,
electronic, etc. with smaller transient overvoltages than Installation
Category (overvoltage category) II.
INSTALLATION CATEGORY (overvoltage category) II:
Local level, appliances, portable equipment, etc. with smaller transient
overvoltages than Installation Category (overvoltage category) III.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.

1-717-767-6511

513

TABLE

CONTENTS

Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4
4

Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

TC - Thermocouple Temperature Meter

Accessories Part Numbers*

TYPE

MODEL NO.

Accessories

PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK30

*This meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels. The label kit is only
needed if another units label is desired.

514

www.redlion.net

.
.
.
.

5
6
7
8

RANGE

ACCURACY

WIRE COLOR

-200 to +400ºC
-328 to +752ºF

0.8ºC
1.4ºF

blue

-200 to +1000ºC
-328 to +1832ºF

0.8ºC
1.4ºF

purple

-200 to +760ºC
-328 to +1400ºF

0.8ºC
1.4ºF

white

-200 to +1250ºC
-328 to +2282ºF

0.8ºC
1.4ºF

yellow

0 to +1768ºC
+32 to +3214ºF

2.1ºC
3.8ºF

black

0 to +1768ºC
+32 to +3214ºF

2.1ºC
3.8ºF

black

+150 to +1820ºC
+302 to +3308ºF

2.3ºC
4.1ºF

grey

-200 to +1300ºC
-328 to +2372ºF

0.8ºC
1.4ºF

orange

-10.00 to +80.00 mV

0.01%

7. INPUT IMPEDANCE: 20 MΩ, all types
8. LEAD RESISTANCE EFFECT: 20 μV/350 Ω
Max Input Voltage Protection: 70 VDC continuous
9. OPEN THERMOCOUPLE DETECTION: Display Flashes: “
”
10. COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION: Automatic, 0.02 degree/degree.
Disabled for linear mV scale.
11. READING RATE: 2.5 readings/second
12. RESPONSE TIME: 2 seconds to settle for step input (increases with
programmable digital filtering)
13. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode Rejection: 45 dB @ 50/60 Hz (may be improved by
programmable digital filtering)
Common Mode Rejection: 120 dB, DC to 50/60 Hz
14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50 °C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80 °C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max (non-condensing) from 0 to
50 °C
Span Drift: 40 ppm/°C
Zero Drift: 1 μV/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.

15. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL3101-1, CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL/7470A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 03ME09282-08292003
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
16. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor use. One
piece bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
17. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
18. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs. (0.24 Kg)

ACCESSORIES
UNITS LABEL KIT (PAXLBK)
Each meter has a units indicator with backlighting that can be customized using
the Units Label Kit. The backlight is controlled in the programming.
Each meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels which can be installed into
the meter’s bezel display assembly.

1-717-767-6511

515

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back
of the bezel. The unit should be installed
fully assembled. Insert the unit into
the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 WIRING

THE

METER

POWER WIRING

Primary AC power is connected to Terminals 1 and 2. To reduce the chance of
noise spikes entering the AC line and affecting the indicator, the AC power should
be relatively “clean” and within the specified limits. Drawing power from heavily
loaded circuits or circuits which also power loads that cycle on and off,
(contactors, relays, motors, machinery, etc.) should be avoided.

PROGRAM DISABLE INPUT WIRING

PGM.DIS. (Terminal 3) is a digital input that is active when connected to
Comm (Terminal 4). Any form of mechanical switch or current sinking logic with
less than 0.7 V saturation may be used. The use of shielded cable is recommended.
Follow the EMC Installation Guidelines for shield connection.

AC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

F SIGNAL WIRING (TC SENSOR)

Remove power and connect the negative thermocouple lead (always red) to
TC- (Terminal 6) and the positive lead to TC+ (Terminal 5). Be certain that
connections are clean and tight. If the thermocouple probe is to be mounted
away from the meter, thermocouple extension grade wire must be used (copper
wire will not work). Use the correct type and observe the correct polarity.
Always refer to the sensor manufacturer’s instructions for probe wiring
connections, if available. For multi-probe temperature averaging applications,
two or more thermocouple probes may be connected at the meter. (Always use
the same type.) In order to minimize the chances of coupling noise into the
wires and subsequently causing bouncy and erroneous readings, proper
guidelines for thermocouple wire routing must be followed.

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

Thermocouple

516

www.redlion.net

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

3.0 REVIEWING

THE

grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode or Display Input Reading

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

Display Peak (HI) Reading

Increment value or change selection

Display Valley (LO) Reading

Decrement value or change selection

PEAK/VALLEY DETECTION

The meter will automatically record the highest input reading (peak) and the
lowest input reading (valley) for later recall. These values are stored at powerdown to allow monitoring the process limits over any length of time (shifts, days,
etc.). A selectable capture delay time is used to prevent detection of false peak or
valley readings caused by sudden short spikes or unusual process events.
The peak and valley readings can be viewed and reset using the front panel
keys as described below.

Reset Peak and/or Valley to the current Input reading:
To reset Peak and Valley, press S and T simultaneously.
To reset Peak only, press and hold S then press PAR.
To reset Valley only, press and hold T then press PAR.
In each case, the meter displays
followed by the current Input reading.

View Peak, Valley and Input readings:
To view Peak, press S. Meter displays followed by the Peak reading.
To view Valley, press T. Meter displays followed by the Valley reading.
To view Input, press PAR. Meter displays
followed by the current
Input reading.
Note: The decimal point to the right of digit 1 flashes while the peak or valley
reading is displayed.

1-717-767-6511

517

4.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

The Thermocouple Meter has up to seven programmable parameters that are
entered in the sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
Depending on the thermocouple type selected, some parameters are not
applicable and are bypassed in the sequence.
The last programming step offers the choice of entering calibration mode.
From this mode, the user can restore the meter to factory default settings, or
recalibrate the signal input and cold junction temperature if necessary. To
prevent inadvertent entries, an access code must be keyed-in to perform any
operations in calibration mode.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out using the Program Disable input
terminal. With the PGM.DIS. terminal connected to COMM, the meter displays
“ ” when the PAR key is pressed, and will not enter programming mode.

DECIMAL POINT POSITION

«
ª
Select the decimal point position by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
This sets the display resolution to 1 or 0.1 degree. This parameter is not
available for thermocouple types R, S and B, where the display resolution is
always 1 degree. When mV indicator mode is selected for thermocouple type,
the display resolution is fixed at 0.01 mV (10 μV).
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY OFFSET

Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.

PROGRAMMING MODE TIMEOUT
The Programming Mode has an automatic time out feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the normal
display mode. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to
the parameter currently being programmed will not be saved.

PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS
In Programming Mode, the display alternates between the parameter and the
current selection or value for that parameter. The dual display with arrows is
used below to illustrate the alternating display. The selection choices or value
range for each parameter is shown to the right of the alternating display.

The temperature display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be used
to compensate for probe errors or errors due to variances in probe placement, or
to adjust the readout to a reference thermometer. Set the desired display offset
value by pressing (and/or holding) the up or down arrow keys. When the desired
offset value is displayed, press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to
the next parameter. The display resolution for the offset value is the same as the
decimal point position programmed above. The display offset is not available
when mV indicator mode is selected for thermocouple type.

DIGITAL FILTERING
THERMOCOUPLE TYPE

ª
SELECTION TC TYPE

tc-t
tc-j

SELECTION

This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering applied to the input signal.
If the temperature display is difficult to read due to small variations or noise,
increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display. Although the
digital filter features a “moving window” to help minimize response time,
higher levels of filtering will result in slightly longer response times.

TC TYPE

mV indicator

Select the thermocouple type by pressing the arrow keys ( or ) to sequence
through the selection list. When the desired selection is displayed, press the PAR
key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter. Refer to the
thermocouple range and accuracy specification for additional TC information.

- no digital filtering

- increased filtering

- normal filtering

- maximum filtering

Set the desired level of input filtering by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.

PEAK (HI)/ VALLEY (LO) CAPTURE DELAY TIME
TEMPERATURE SCALE

«
ª

Select the desired temperature scale by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
This setting does not change the Custom Units Overlay display (if installed).
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.

518

seconds

When the Input display is above the present HI value or below the present
LO value for the entered delay time, the meter will capture the Input display as
the new HI or LO reading. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden
short spikes or Input display variations that may occur during start-up.
Set the desired capture delay time by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.

www.redlion.net

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT

The Units Label Kit Accessory contains a sheet of custom unit overlays,
which can be installed in the meter bezel display assembly. The unit of measure
for the meter display is then visible when the label backlight is illuminated. The
two most commonly used temperature unit labels (°F and °C) are supplied with
the meter. Press the up or down arrow keys to select whether the units label
backlight is illuminated. Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance
to the next parameter.

Before exiting Programming Mode, the meter offers the choice of entering
Calibration Mode. To exit Programming Mode without entering Calibration
Mode, select
and press the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and
returns to the normal display mode. All programmed selections are now
transferred to non-volatile memory and are retained if power is removed from
the meter.
(If power loss occurs during Programming Mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)

5.0 CALIBRATING

THE

METER

CALIBRATION MODE

«
ª

COLD JUNCTION TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION

To enter Calibration Mode, select
<>
at the end of Programming
Mode, and press the PAR key. In Calibration Mode, the user can restore the
meter to factory default settings or recalibrate the signal input if necessary.
To prevent inadvertent entries, an access code must be entered to perform any
operation in Calibration Mode. Upon entering Calibration Mode, the meter
initially displays Code 50. Press the up or down arrow keys to select the access
code for the desired operation. If an access code other than those shown below
is entered, the meter exits Calibration Mode and returns to normal display mode.

FACTORY SETTINGS

1. Connect a calibrated thermocouple (types T, E, J, K or N only) to the panel
meter. Select the thermocouple type used in programming.
2. Connect the reference thermometer to the measuring end of the thermocouple.
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (As an alternative, the PAXLTC thermocouple
probe may be placed in a calibration bath of known temperature.)
3. From the normal indicator display mode, compare the display temperature to
that of the reference thermometer. Allow 10 minutes for the temperature to
equalize. The meter and the reference thermometer should agree to within 1° F
(0.6° C).
4. If cold junction re-calibration is necessary (temperature out of tolerance), enter
meter calibration mode and enter access Code 48. The meter display will
alternate between
and the old cold junction reading. At this point, key-in
the new cold junction temperature according to the formula:

WHERE:

New Cold Junction Reading = Old Cold Junction Reading + Difference
(Difference = Reference Thermometer Temperature - Meter Display Temperature)

ª
The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown in the
previous section in the alternating display illustrations. All programming
parameters can be restored to the factory default settings by entering the access
Code 66 and pressing the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and then
returns to Code 50. This procedure resets only parameters that are accessed
through Programming Mode. The Calibration Mode settings (input calibration
levels) are not affected.

5. Press PAR. The meter briefly displays
junction value.

VOLTAGE CALIBRATION

Following cold junction calibration, the display
<>
/ appears.
Enter
if input voltage calibration is desired. If is entered, the meter exits
calibration and returns to normal display mode.
DISPLAY

PARAMETERS

0.000 mV
30.000 mV
60.000 mV

METER INPUT CALIBRATION

«
ª
The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory. If the meter appears to be
indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to the troubleshooting section before
attempting this procedure. When re-calibration is required (generally every 2
years), the procedure should only be performed by qualified technicians using
appropriate equipment. A precision thermometer (RTD, thermistor or similar
type with an accuracy of ±0.3° C) and an accurate voltage source (0.01%) are
required. The procedure consists of setting the cold junction temperature and
applying accurate voltages to the meter input in a series of three steps. Allow a
60-minute warm-up before starting calibration.

to acknowledge the new cold

DESCRIPTION/COMMENT

Apply 0.000 mV, wait 20 seconds, press PAR.
Apply 30.000 mV, wait 20 seconds, press PAR.
Apply 60.000 mV, wait 20 seconds, press PAR.

The meter briefly displays End and returns to the normal display mode.
Calibration is now complete.
It is recommended to check calibration by selecting mV indication mode for
thermocouple type (
< >
) and verifying unit accuracy at various
points over the range of the meter (-10 to +80 mV).

1-717-767-6511

519

TROUBLESHOOTING

The majority of all problems with the meter can be traced to improper connections or improper programming set-ups. Be sure all connections
are clean and tight and check the programming set-ups for correct data.
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
PROBLEM

NO DISPLAY
“

“

” IN DISPLAY

” or “

” IN DISPLAY

POSSIBLE CAUSE

REMEDIES

1. Power off, improperly connected, or brown-out.

1a. Check wiring.
1b. Verify power.

1. Program data error.

1. Press PAR and check data set-ups.

1. Input display out of range.

1a. Change display resolution to “1” degree.
1b. Reduce offset value.
2a. Check data set-ups.
2b. Check for electrical disturbance.
2c. Disconnect and reconnect power.

2. Loss of data set-ups.

1. Loss of data set-ups.

1a. Check data set-ups.
1b. Disconnect and reconnect power.
1c. Check for electrical disturbance.

1. Electrical “Noise” in process or sensor lines.
2. Process inherently unstable.
3. Corroded or dirty thermocouple wire connections.

1a.
1b.
2.
3.

DISPLAY WANDERS

JITTERY DISPLAY

Increase digital filtering.
Re-route sensor wires.
Dampen process to eliminate oscillations.
Clean and tighten connections.

“

” IN DISPLAY

1. Probe unconnected.
2. Broken or burnout probe.

1. Connect probe.
2. Repair or obtain new probe.

“

” IN DISPLAY

1. Excessive positive probe temperature.

1. Reduce temperature.

“

” IN DISPLAY

1. Excessive negative probe temperature.

1. Increase temperature.

520

www.redlion.net

MODEL PAXLRT - PAX LITE RTD METER
ACCEPTS STANDARD 3-WIRE 100 Ω RTD SENSORS (ALPHA =
0.00385 or ALPHA = 0.00392)
CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
SELECTABLE °F OR °C WITH 0.1 OR 1 DEGREE DISPLAY
RESOLUTION
STATE-OF-THE-ART DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FOR GREATER
ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY
FULL 4-DIGIT, HIGH VISIBILITY, 0.56" (14.2 mm) HIGH RED LED
DISPLAY
PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL FILTERING

UL
R

PEAK/VALLEY (HI/LO READING) MEMORY
NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

US LISTED

CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY WITH BACKLIGHT

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Pax Lite RTD Meter accepts standard RTD inputs and precisely linearizes
them into temperature readings. A full 4-digit display accommodates a wide
range of temperature inputs. State-of-the-art digital circuitry virtually eliminates
errors due to drift.
The meter features a readout choice of either Fahrenheit or Celsius with 0.1 or
1 degree resolution. English Style display prompts and front panel buttons aid the
operator through set-up and operation. Programmable digital filtering enhances
the stability of the reading. All set-up data is stored in EEPROM, which will hold
data for a minimum of 10 years without power.
The meter provides a Peak (HI) and Valley (LO) reading memory with
selectable capture delay time. The capture delay is used to prevent detection of
false Peak or Valley readings that may occur during start-up or unusual process
events. The Peak and Valley readings are stored at power-down to allow
monitoring the process limits over any length of time (shifts, days, etc.).
The meter has several built-in diagnostic functions to alert operators of any
malfunction. Extensive testing of noise interference mechanisms and full burnin makes the meter extremely reliable in industrial environments. The front bezel
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for wash down applications.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Risk of Danger
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5" (127) W.

1-717-767-6511

521

TABLE

CONTENTS

Ordering Information . . . . . . .
General Meter Specifications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Meter . . . . . . . .
Wiring the Meter . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

2
3
3
4
4

Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display
Programming the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORDERING INFORMATION
Meter Part Numbers

PAXL

RT - RTD Temperature Meter

Accessories Part Numbers*

TYPE

MODEL NO.

Accessories

PAXLBK

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Units Label Kit Accessory

PAXLBK30

*This meter is shipped with °F and °C overlay labels. The label kit is only
needed if another units label is desired.

522

www.redlion.net

.
.
.
.

5
6
7
7

GENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 4-digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high LED, minus sign displayed for
negative temperatures.
Overrange/Underrange Input: Flashing “
” or “
”
Overrange/Underrange Display: “ ” or “
”
2. POWER: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. between input and supply (300 V working
voltage)
3. CONTROLS: Three front panel push buttons for meter set-up. Rear terminal
input for disabling the front panel.
4. RESOLUTION: 0.1 or 1 degree
5. RANGE: Decimal Point Dependent
0.1° res: -199.9° to 850.0 °C (-199.9° to 999.9 °F);
1° res: -200° to 850 °C (-328° to 1562 °F)
6. OPEN/SHORTED RTD DETECTION: Display flashes: “
” or “
”
7. LEAD RESISTANCE EFFECT: 20 Ω max., 2.5 °C/Ω error for V exc. and
common lead unbalance
8. ACCURACY: 0.3 °C, @ 23 °C and 30 min. warm-up
9. READING RATE: 2.5 readings/second
10. RESPONSE TIME: 2 seconds to settle for step input (increases with
programmable digital filtering)
11. LOW FREQUENCY NOISE REJECTION:
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (may be improved by
programmable digital filtering)
Common Mode Rejection: 120 dB, DC to 50/60 Hz
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL61010-1, CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
2 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class B
Note:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
13. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50 °C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80 °C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max (non-condensing) from 0 to
50 °C
Span Drift: 50 ppm/ °C
Zero Drift: 0.001 °C/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
14. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor use. One
piece bezel/case. Flame resistant. Panel gasket and mounting clip included.
15. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
16. WEIGHT: 0.65 lbs. (0.24 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

523

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation
The PAX meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. The
unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel cutout
to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the unit to the back
of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the
unit into the panel cutout.

While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]). Do not over-tighten the screws.

2.0 WIRING

THE

METER

POWER WIRING

Primary AC power is connected to Terminals 1 and 2. To reduce the chance of
noise spikes entering the AC line and affecting the indicator, the AC power should
be relatively “clean” and within the specified limits. Drawing power from heavily
loaded circuits or circuits that also power loads that cycle on and off (contactors,
relays, motors, machinery, etc.) should be avoided.

PROGRAM DISABLE INPUT WIRING

PGM.DIS. (Terminal 3) is a digital input that is active when connected to RTD(Terminal 6). Any form of mechanical switch or current sinking logic with less
than 0.7 V saturation may be used. The use of shielded cable is recommended.
Follow the EMC Installation Guidelines for shield connection.

AC Power
Terminal 1: VAC
Terminal 2: VAC

SIGNAL WIRING (RTD SENSOR)

RTD sensors are used in applications where a high degree of accuracy is
required. Most RTD sensors available are the 3-wire type. The 3rd additional
wire is a sense lead for canceling the effects of lead resistance at the probe. The
sense lead connects to Terminal 5 (RTD+), the common lead to Terminal 6
(RTD-), and the excitation lead to Terminal 4 (+ Excitation). The excitation and
sense leads are generally the same color because they are functionally the same
and may be interchanged at the meter. Four wire sensors have an additional
sense lead connected (at the probe) to the common lead. Leave the extra sense
lead disconnected when using a four wire probe with the PAXLRT meter.
Always refer to the sensor manufacturer’s instructions for probe wiring
connections, if available. Two wire RTD sensors may be used with the PAXLRT
by shorting Terminal 4 to Terminal 5, if the distance between sensor and meter
is less than 30 feet. The total lead resistance can be used to predict the
temperature error for 2-wire sensors, according to 2.5°C/Ω of lead resistance.
Note: Extended cable runs can be made provided the lead resistance is less
than 20 Ω/lead and the resistance is equal in each lead.

3-Wire RTD

524

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
back of the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter’s voltage and
current ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers embossed on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip
the wire, leaving approximately 0.3" (7.5 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires
should be tinned with solder). Insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp
terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.)

2-Wire RTD

www.redlion.net

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be mounted in a metal enclosure, which is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.

3.0 REVIEWING

THE

4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode or Display Input Reading

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

Display Peak (HI) Reading

Increment value or change selection

Display Valley (LO) Reading

Decrement value or change selection

PEAK/VALLEY DETECTION

1-717-767-6511

525

4.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

The RTD Meter has seven programmable parameters that are entered in the
sequence shown above, using the front panel push buttons.
The last programming step offers the choice of entering calibration mode.
From this mode, the user can restore the meter to factory default settings or
recalibrate the signal input if necessary. To prevent inadvertent entries, an access
code must be keyed-in to perform any operations in calibration mode.
Note: Programming mode can be locked out using the Program Disable input
terminal. With the PGM.DIS. terminal connected to RTD-, the meter displays
“ ” when the PAR key is pressed, and will not enter programming mode.

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY

DIGITAL FILTERING

«
ª

This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering
applied to the input signal. If the temperature display is difficult to read due to
small variations or noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the
display. Although the digital filter features a “moving window” to help minimize
response time, higher levels of filtering will result in slightly longer response
times.

Press the PAR key to enter Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
followed by the first programming parameter described below.

PROGRAMMING MODE TIMEOUT
The Programming Mode has an automatic timeout feature. If no keypad
activity is detected for approximately 60 seconds, the meter automatically exits
Programming Mode. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the normal
display mode. When automatic timeout occurs, any changes that were made to
the parameter currently being programmed will not be saved.

RTD TYPE

TEMPERATURE SCALE

«
¶

PEAK (HI)/ VALLEY (LO) CAPTURE DELAY TIME

When the Input display is above the present HI value or below the present LO
value for the entered delay time, the meter will capture the Input display as the
new HI or LO reading. A delay time helps to avoid false captures of sudden short
spikes or Input display variations that may occur during start-up.
Set the desired capture delay time by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.

«
ª
The Units Label Kit Accessory contains a sheet of custom unit overlays,
which can be installed in the meter bezel display assembly. The unit of measure
for the meter display is then visible when the label backlight is illuminated. The
two most commonly used temperature unit labels (°F and °C) are supplied with
the meter. Press the up or down arrow keys to select whether the units label
backlight is illuminated. Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to
the next parameter.

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT

«
ª

Select the decimal point position by pressing the up or down arrow keys. This
sets the display resolution to 1 or 0.1 degree. Press the PAR key to save the
selection and advance to the next parameter.

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY OFFSET

Before exiting Programming Mode, The meter offers the choice of entering
Calibration Mode. To exit Programming Mode without entering Calibration
Mode, select
and press the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and
returns to the normal display mode. All programmed selections are now
transferred to non-volatile memory and are retained if power is removed from
the meter.
(If power loss occurs during Programming Mode, verify parameter changes
and reprogram, if necessary, when power is restored.)

The temperature display can be corrected with an offset
value. This can be used to compensate for probe errors or errors due to variances
in probe placement, or to adjust the readout to a reference thermometer. Set the
desired display offset value by pressing (and/or holding) the up or down arrow
keys. When the desired offset value is displayed, press the PAR key to save the
selection and advance to the next parameter. The display resolution for the offset
value is the same as the decimal point position programmed above.

526

seconds

DECIMAL POINT POSITION

- maximum filtering

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT

Select the RTD type by pressing the up or down arrow keys ( or ). When
the desired selection is displayed, press the PAR key to save the selection and
advance to the next parameter.

- increased filtering

- normal filtering

Set the desired level of input filtering by pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Press the PAR key to save the selection and advance to the next parameter.

- no digital filtering

www.redlion.net

5.0 CALIBRATING

THE

METER

CALIBRATION MODE

METER INPUT CALIBRATION

The meter has been fully calibrated at the factory. If the meter appears to be
indicating incorrectly or inaccurately, refer to the troubleshooting section
before attempting this procedure. When re-calibration is required (generally
every 2 years), the procedure should only be performed by qualified
technicians using appropriate equipment. Resistance source accuracies of
0.02% or better are required.
The procedure consists of applying accurate signal levels to the meter input
in a series of two steps. Allow a 30-minute warm-up period before starting
calibration. To begin the input calibration, enter access Code 48 and press the
PAR key.

FACTORY SETTINGS

«
ª
The factory settings for the programming parameters are shown in the
previous section in the alternating display illustrations. All programming
parameters can be restored to the factory default settings by entering the access
Code 66 and pressing the PAR key. The meter briefly displays
and then
returns to Code 50. This procedure resets only parameters that are accessed
through Programming Mode. The Calibration Mode settings (input calibration
levels) are not affected.

ENTER ZERO REFERENCE
Meter displays . Apply 0 ohms to the meter input by shorting Terminals 4,
5, and 6. Allow the meter to stabilize at least 20 seconds after shorting the
terminals, and then press PAR.
APPLY PRECISION RESISTANCE
Meter displays
. Connect a precision 300 ohm resistor across Terminals
5 and 6. Terminals 4 and 5 remain shorted. (Note: Be certain to short Terminals
4 and 5 at the resistor as shown in the drawing below. Shorting terminals may
lead to incorrect calibration.)

Allow the meter to stabilize at least 20 seconds after making the connections,
and then press PAR. The meter briefly displays
and returns to the normal
display mode. Calibration is now complete. It is recommended to check
calibration by comparing the displayed temperature with a precision thermometer.

TROUBLESHOOTING

The majority of all problems with the meter can be traced to improper connections or improper programming set-ups. Be sure all connections are
clean and tight and check the programming set-ups for correct data.
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.
PROBLEM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

1. Power off, improperly connected, or brown-out.

1a. Check wiring.
1b. Verify power.

1. Program data error.

1. Press PAR and check data set-ups.

1. Input display out of range.

1a. Change display resolution to “1” degree.
1b. Reduce offset value.
2a. Check data set-ups.
2b. Check for electrical disturbance.
2c. Disconnect and reconnect power.

“
“

” IN DISPLAY
” or “

” IN DISPLAY

2. Loss of data set-ups.

DISPLAY WANDERS

1. Loss of data set-ups.

1a. Check data set-ups.
1b. Disconnect and reconnect power.
1c. Check for electrical disturbance.

JITTERY DISPLAY

1. Electrical “Noise” in process or sensor lines.
2. Process inherently unstable.

1a. Increase digital filtering.
1b. Re-route signal wires.
2. Dampen process to eliminate oscillations.

“

” IN DISPLAY

1.
2.
3.
4.

“

” IN DISPLAY

1. Input shorted.

Probe unconnencted.
Broken or burnout probe.
Excessive probe temperature.
Input overload.

Connect probe.
Repair or obtain new probe.
Reduce temperature.
Check input levels.

1. Check input connections.

1-717-767-6511

527

MODEL PAXLT - PAX LITE TEMPERATURE METER
z 5 DIGIT, 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
z DISPLAYS °C OR °F WITH 1° OR 0.1° RESOLUTION
z BACKLIGHT OVERLAYS INCLUDED (°C AND °F)
z MAX AND MIN READING MEMORY
z TC COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (ON/OFF)
z PROGRAMMABLE TEMPERATURE OFFSET
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z DUAL 5 AMP FORM C RELAYS
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED
z THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS

z NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

z CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The PAXLT is a versatile meter that accepts a variety of thermocouple and
RTD inputs and provides a temperature display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. The
readout conforms to ITS-90 standards, with 1° or 0.1° resolution. The 5-digit
display has 0.56" high digits with adjustable intensity. Backlight overlay labels
for °F and °C are included.
The meter features a Maximum and Minimum reading memory, with
programmable capture time. The capture time is used to prevent detection of
false max or min readings which may occur during start-up or unusual process
events. Either value can be displayed if desired. The display can be toggled
manually or automatically between the selected values.
Other features include thermocouple cold junction compensation, display
offset and a programmable user input to perform a variety of meter control
functions. Two setpoint outputs are provided, each with a Form C relay. Output
modes and setup options are fully programmable to suit a variety of control
requirements.
The PAXLT can be universally powered from a wide range of AC or DC
voltage. The meter has been specifically designed for harsh industrial
environments. With a NEMA 4X/IP65 sealed bezel and extensive testing to meet
CE requirements, the meter provides a tough yet reliable application solution.

All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to
it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this meter to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the meter

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PAXLT

DESCRIPTION

TC/RTD Temperature Meter with dual Relay Output

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

528

PART NUMBER

PAXLT000

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 5 digit, 0.56" (14.2 mm) intensity adjustable Red LED
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC POWER: 50 to 250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 12 VA
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs
DC POWER: 21.6 to 250 VDC, 6 W
DC Out: +24 VDC @ 100 mA if input voltage is greater than 50 VAC/VDC
+24 VDC @ 50 mA if input voltage is less than 50 VDC
3. READOUT:
Display Range: -19999 to 99999
Scale: °F or °C
Resolution: 1° or 0.1°
Response Time: 500 msec min.
Display Overrange/Underrange Indication: "….." / "-…."
Input Overrange/Underrange Indication:
/
4. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS:
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 VDC

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is
2.1" (53.4) H x 5.0" (127) W.

www.redlion.net

Failed Sensor Indication:
TC TYPE

T
E
J
K
R
S
B

ACCURACY
@ 23°C
±°C *

RANGE

-200 to 400°C
2.3
-328 to 752°F
-200 to 871°C
2.7
-328 to 1600°F
-200 to 760°C
1.9
-328 to 1400°F
-200 to 1372°C
2.3
-328 to 2502°F
-50 to 1768°C
4.5
-58 to 3214°F
-50 to 1768°C
4.5
-58 to 3214°F
200 to 1820°C 9.1<540°C
392 to 3308°F 4.5>540°C

-200 to 1300°C
-328 to 2372°F
C
0 to 2315°C
(W5/W26) 32 to 4199°F

2.8

-10.00 to 65.00

1.9
0.02 mV

ACCURACY
@ 0 to 50°C
±°C *

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

(+) blue
(-) red
(+) purple
4.9
(-) red
(+) white
4.3
(-) red
(+) yellow
5.8
(-) red
no
15.0
standard
no
15.0
standard
42.6<540°C no
15.0>540°C standard
(+) orange
8.1
(-) red
no
6.1
standard
no
0.08 mV
standard
5.8

BS 1843

(+) white
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) yellow
(-) blue
(+) brown
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
(+) white
(-) blue
no
standard
(+) orange
(-) blue
no
standard
no
standard

*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy at
23°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0 to
85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco and cold junction tracking effects.
The specification includes the A/D conversion errors, linearization
conformity, and thermocouple cold junction compensation. Total system
accuracy is the sum of meter and probe errors. Accuracy may be improved by
field calibrating the meter readout at the temperature of interest.
5. RTD INPUTS:
Type: 2, 3 or 4 wire
Excitation Current:
100 ohm range: 165 μA; 10 ohm range: 2.5 mA
Lead Resistance:
100 ohm range: 10 Ω/lead max.; 10 ohm range: 3 Ω/lead max.
Balanced Lead Resistance: Automatically compensated up to max per lead
Unbalanced Lead Resistance: Uncompensated
Max. Continuous Overvoltage: 30 VDC
Failed Sensor Indication:
or
RTD TYPE

100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00392
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427

RANGE

ACCURACY*
@ 23°C

ACCURACY*
@0 to 50°C

STANDARD

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

IEC 751

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-80 to 260°C

0.2°C

0.5°C

-100 to 260°C

0.4°C

0.9°C

no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard

*After 20 min. warm-up. Accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy at
23°C and 15 to 75% RH environment; and Accuracy over a 0 to 50°C and 0 to
85% RH (non condensing) environment. Accuracy specified over the 0 to 50°C
operating range includes meter tempco effects.
The specification includes the A/D conversion errors and linearization
conformity. Total system accuracy is the sum of meter and probe errors.
Accuracy may be improved by field calibrating the meter readout at the
temperature of interest.
6. USER INPUT: Programmable input
Software selectable for active logic state: active low, pull-up (24.7 KΩ to +5
VDC) or active high, pull-down resistor (20 KΩ).
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 10 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
max/min values when power is removed.
8. OUTPUTS:
Type: Dual Form C contacts
Isolation to Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8
H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC snubber
extends relay life for operation with inductive loads.
Response Time: Turn On or Off: 4 msec max.

9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters
10. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-14 AWG copper wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.51 N-m) max.
11. CONSTRUCTION: This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 outdoor use. IP20
Touch safe. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. One piece
bezel/case. Flame resistant. Synthetic rubber keypad. Panel gasket and
mounting clip included.
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Consult Factory.
13. WEIGHT: 10.4 oz. (295 g)

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

Installation

The PAX Lite meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed.
The unit is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. Prepare the panel
cutout to the dimensions shown. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel. The unit should be
installed fully assembled. Insert the unit into the panel cutout.
While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the unit
so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case. The panel latch
should be engaged in the farthest forward slot
possible. To achieve a proper seal, tighten
the latch screws evenly until the unit
is snug in the panel (Torque to
approximately 7 in-lbs [79N-cm]).
Do not over-tighten the screws.

Installation Environment

1-717-767-6511

PANEL CUT-OUT

529

2.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPER
FRONT DISPLAY

INPUT RANGE JUMPER (RTD ONLY)
This jumper is used to select the proper input range for the RTD probe being
used (10 ohm or 100 ohm). For thermocouple inputs, this jumper has no effect
and can be left in either position.
To access the jumper, remove the meter base from the case by firmly
squeezing and pulling back on the side rear finger tabs. This should lower the
latch below the case slot (which is located just in front of the finger tabs). It is
recommended to release the latch on one side, then start on the other side latch.

Main
Circuit
Board

10 OHM

100 OHM

RTD RANGE
JUMPER

REAR TERMINALS

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

530

c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

www.redlion.net

3.1 POWER WIRING
Power
Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC -

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
CAUTION: Sensor input common (Terminal 7) is NOT isolated from user common (Terminal 9). In order to preserve the safety
of the meter application, the sensor input common must be suitably isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltages;
or input common and user common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous live voltage may be
present at the user input and user common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of the
sensor input common and the user common with respect to earth ground.

THERMOCOUPLE

3.3 USER INPUT WIRING
Terminal 8: User Input
Terminal 9: User Common

Current Sinking (Active Low Logic)

2-WIRE RTD

3-WIRE RTD

3.4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
Terminal 10: NC 1
Terminal 11: NO 1
Terminal 12: Relay 1 Common
Terminal 13: NC 2
Terminal 14: NO 2
Terminal 15: Relay 2 Common

Current Sourcing (Active High Logic)

1-717-767-6511

531

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

BUTTON DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

AND

DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

SEL

Index display through enabled values

Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value

RST

Resets values (min/max) or outputs

Increment selected digit of parameter value

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“SP1” - Indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“SP2” - Indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

Pressing the SEL button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the enabled display values.

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR BUTTON)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR button. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a
security code or a hardware lock.

MODULE ENTRY (SEL & PAR BUTTONS)

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

532

www.redlion.net

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

5.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

INPUT TYPE

«
ª

SELECTION INPUT TYPE

SELECTION

INPUT TYPE

Platinum 385 100 Ω

Platinum 392 100 Ω

Nickel 672 100 Ω

Copper 427 10 Ω

Select the thermocouple or RTD type used for the application. For RTDs,
position the Input Range Jumper to match the RTD type (10Ω or 100Ω).
Selecting
displays a millivolt signal readout with 10 μV resolution.

COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION

«
ª

Software filtering effectively combines a fraction of the current input reading
with a fraction of the previous displayed reading to generate the new display.
Filter values represent no filtering (0), up to heavy filtering (3). A value of 1
for the filter uses 1/4 of the new input and 3/4 of the previous display to
generate the new display. A filter value of 2 uses 1/8 new and 7/8 previous. A
filter value of 3 uses 1/16 new and 15/16 previous.

FILTER BAND

display units

This parameter enables or disables internal cold junction compensation for
thermocouples. For most applications, cold junction compensation should be
enabled ( ). This parameter only appears for thermocouple input selections.

USER INPUT FUNCTION

TEMPERATURE SCALE

DISPLAY MODE

DESCRIPTION

No Function

Select the desired temperature scale. This selection applies for the Input,
MAX and MIN displays. This parameter does not appear when mV or RTD
resistance display is enabled.

Program Mode Lock-out
Reset *

User Input disabled.
See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Reset the assigned value(s) to the
current input value.

Display Hold

Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).

Display Select *

Advance once for each activation.

Display Intensity Level *

Increase intensity one level for each
activation.

Set the decimal point for the desired display resolution. This selection applies
for the Input, MAX and MIN displays, and also affects the Setpoint and Display
Offset values. For mV or RTD resistance displays, the decimal point location is
fixed and this parameter does not appear.

Setpoint 1 Reset *

Reset setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset *

Reset setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset *

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

* Indicates Edge Triggered function. All others are Level Active functions.

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

«
ª

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

ª
Select the value(s) to which the User Input Function is assigned. The User
Input Assignment only applies if a selection of reset or display hold is selected
in the User Input Function menu.

FILTER SETTING

USER INPUT ACTIVE LEVEL

ª
If the displayed temperature is difficult to read due to small process
variations or noise, increased levels of filtering will help to stabilize the display.

ª
Select whether the user input is configured as active low or active high.

1-717-767-6511

533

5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

TOGGLE RTD INPUT DISPLAY MODE

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

Entering Code 85 toggles the selected RTD input display
mode between a temperature or resistance readout. The
resistance readout is useful for diagnostic purposes before
and after calibration, or to display the measured resistance
of a connected RTD probe.
For RTD type
(Input Range Jumper in 10Ω position), resistance is
displayed in
ohms resolution. For all other RTD types (100Ω position),
resistance is displayed in
ohms resolution.
Upon entering Code 85, the meter displays either
or
to indicate
temperature or resistance readout selected. The display then returns to
.
Press the PAR button to exit the module.

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

«
ª

sec.

«
ª
Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

sec.

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

«
ª
Select

to perform any of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

«
ª

ª
534

10 OHM RTD Range Calibration
1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 10 ohm position.
2. With the display at
, press the PAR key. Unit displays
.
3. Press SEL to select 10 ohm range. Display reads
.
4. Press PAR. Display reads
.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals RTD (4), TC (6) and COMM (7) using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
6. When the display reads
, apply a precision resistance of 15 ohms (with
an accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals RTD, TC and COMM using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
7. When display reads
, press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to
the normal display mode.

100 OHM RTD Range Calibration

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display
and then
return to
. Press the PAR button to exit the module

VIEW MODEL AND VERSION DISPLAY

The PAXLT uses stored calibration values to provide
accurate temperature measurements. Over time, the
electrical characteristics of the components inside the
meter could slowly change, with the result being that the
stored calibration values may no longer accurately define the input circuit. For
most applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years should be sufficient.
Calibration for thermocouple inputs involves a voltage calibration and a cold
junction calibration. It is recommended that both calibrations be performed. The
voltage calibration must precede cold junction calibration.
Calibration of the meter should only be performed by persons experienced in
calibrating electronic equipment. Allow a minimum 30 minute warm up before
performing any calibration procedures. The following procedures should be
performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to 35°C (59 to 95°F).
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the meter.

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

CALIBRATION

Entering Code 50 will display the version (x.x) of the
meter. The display then returns to
. Press the PAR
button to exit the module.

1. Set the Input Range Jumper to 100 ohm position.
2. With the display at
, press the PAR key. Unit displays
.
3. Press SEL twice to select 100 ohm range. Display reads
.
4. Press PAR. Display reads
.
5. Apply a direct short to terminals RTD (4), TC (6) and COMM (7) using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
6. When the display reads
, apply a precision resistance of 300 ohms (with
an accuracy of 0.01% or better) to terminals RTD, TC and COMM using a
three wire link. Press PAR. Display reads
for about 10 seconds.
7. When display reads
, press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to
the normal display mode.

www.redlion.net

THERMOCOUPLE Voltage Calibration
1. Connect a precision DC voltage source with an accuracy of 0.01% or better
to the TC and COMM terminals. Set the voltage source to zero.
2. With the display at
, press the PAR key. Unit displays
.
3. Press SEL until the display reads
to select thermocouple input.
4. Press PAR. Display reads
.
5. With the voltage source set to zero, press PAR. Display reads
for about
6 seconds.
6. When the display reads
, set the voltage source output to 60.000 mV.
Press PAR. Display reads
for about 6 seconds.
7. When display reads
, press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to
the normal display mode. Proceed to Cold Junction Calibration.

THERMOCOUPLE Cold Junction Calibration
1. The ambient temperature must be between 20°C and 30°C.
2. Connect a thermocouple (types T, E, J, K or N only) with an accuracy of 1°C
or better to the meter.
3. Enter programming mode and verify the following settings in Module 1:
= thermocouple type connected to the meter
= ;
= ;
= ;
=

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

4. Place the thermocouple in close thermal contact to a reference thermometer
probe. (Use a reference thermometer with an accuracy of 0.25°C or better.)
The two probes should be shielded from air movement and allowed sufficient
time to equalize in temperature. (A calibration bath of known temperature
could be used in place of the thermometer.)
5. Compare the unit display with the reference temperature indicator (or
calibration bath). If a difference of more than +/- 1.0°C exists, note the
difference (CJ Error) and continue with cold junction calibration.
CJ Error = Reference Temperature - Unit Display
6. Enter programming mode and proceed through Module 2 to the Service
Access Code. Select
and press PAR. Unit displays
. Press
RST to select
.
7. Press PAR. Display reads
followed by the current cold junction value.
Calculate a new cold junction value as follows:
New cold junction = Current cold junction + CJ Error (noted above)
8. Press PAR and set the display to the new cold junction value. Press PAR to
enter the new value. Display reads
for 6 seconds and returns to
.
9. Press PAR twice to exit calibration and return to the normal display mode.
Verify the input reading is correct. If not, repeat steps 5 through 9.

FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

«
ª

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

seconds

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed.

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

ª
The

ª
selection allows the SEL key to toggle through the enabled displays.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

«
ª
This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

«
ª
The
selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds. This parameter only appears
when the MAX or MIN displays are enabled.

The Security Code determines the programming mode and the accessibility
of programming parameters. This code can be used along with the Program
Mode Lock-out (
) in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Two programming modes are available. Full Programming mode allows all
parameters to be viewed and modified. Quick Programming mode permits only
user selected values to be modified, but allows direct access to these values
without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Entering a Security Code from 1-99 enables Quick Programming mode, and
displays a sublist to select which values appear in the Quick Programming
menu. Values set to
in the sublist are accessible in Quick Programming.
These values include the Setpoints (
,
) and Display Intensity (
).
Programming any Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the
prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Quick
Programming mode, if enabled, is accessed before the
prompt appears.
USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “PAR”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

not

______

UNITS LABEL BACKLIGHT

«
ª

Active

The PAXLT includes two units overlay labels (°C and °F) which can be
installed into the meter's bezel display assembly. The backlight for the units
label is activated by this parameter.

Full Programming

1-99

Quick Programming

Immediate Access
After Quick Programming
1-99
Quick Programming with correct code entry
prompt *
at
With correct code entry
100-999
prompt
prompt *
at
0
Programming Lock
No Access
100-999

Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

0-999

prompt
Full Programming

No Access
With correct code entry
prompt *
at
Immediate Access

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

1-717-767-6511

535

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

SETPOINT VALUE

SETPOINT SELECT

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

HYSTERESIS VALUE

«
ª

SETPOINT ENABLE

«
ª
Select
to enable Setpoint and access the setup parameters. If
selected, the unit returns to
and Setpoint is disabled.

SETPOINT ACTION

«
ª

ON TIME DELAY

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

«
ª

Sec

OFF TIME DELAY

«
ª
High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

Sec

OUTPUT RESET ACTION

«
ª
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

536

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

= Automatic action; This action allows the output to automatically reset
off at the trigger points per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output
Figures. The “on” output may be manually reset (off) immediately by the
front panel RST button or user input.The output remains off until the trigger
point is crossed again.

www.redlion.net

= Latch with immediate reset action; This action latches the output on at
the trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, or meter power cycle. When the user input
or RST button is activated (momentary action), the corresponding “on” output
is reset immediately and remains off until the trigger point is crossed again.
(Previously latched alarms will be off if power up Display Value is lower than
setpoint value.)
= Latch with delay reset action; This action latches the output on at the
trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures.
Latch means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST
button or user input manual reset, or meter power cycle. When the user input
or RST button is activated (momentary action), the meter delays the event
until the corresponding “on” output crosses the trigger off point. (Previously
latched outputs are off if power up Display Value is lower than setpoint
value. During a power cycle, the meter erases a previous
reset if it is
not activated at power up.)

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

«
ª
This parameter enables the RST button or user input to reset the output when
the display is reset.
Note: For this parameter to operate, the RST button or User Input being used
must be set to
and the Input value must be displayed. If these conditions
are not met, the output will not reset.

STANDBY OPERATION

«
ª
When
, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and Output Reset Action.

PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION

«
ª
Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a temperature probe failure
(TC open; RTD open or short), the output can be programmed to be on or off.

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

1-717-767-6511

537

PAXLT PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

Press PAR key to enter
Programming Mode.

538

www.redlion.net

MODEL DP5T - THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUT
This is a brief overview of the DP5T. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
DP5 Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 358.
THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS
CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
TIME-TEMPERATURE INTEGRATOR
5-DIGIT 0.56" HIGH RED LED DISPLAY
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS/USER INPUT
9 DIGIT TOTALIZER (INTEGRATOR) WITH BATCHING

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

RANGE

ACCURACY* ACCURACY*
STANDARD
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)

-200 to 400°C
-270 to -200°C

1.2°C
**

2.1°C

-200 to 871°C
-270 to -200°C

1.0°C
**

2.4°C

-200 to 760°C

1.1°C

2.3°C

-200 to 1372°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.4°C

-50 to 1768°C

1.9°C

-50 to 1768°C

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

BS 1843

ITS-90

(+) blue
(-) red

(+) white
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) purple (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) white
(-) red

ITS-90

(+) yellow (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

1.9°C

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

100 to 300°C
300 to 1820°C

3.9°C
2.8°C

5.7°C
4.4°C

ITS-90

no
standard

-200 to 1300°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.1°C

ITS-90

(+) orange (+) orange
(-) red
(-) blue

C
(W5/W26)

0 to 2315°C

1.9°C

6.1°C

ASTM no
E988-90*** standard

(+) yellow
(-) blue

no
standard

RANGE

100 ohm Pt
-200 to 850°C
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
-200 to 850°C
alpha = .003919
120 ohm Nickel
-80 to 260°C
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
-100 to 260°C
alpha = .00427

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

0.4°C

1.6°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

0.2°C

0.5°C

0.4°C

0.9°C

STANDARD
***

IEC 751
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard

DIRECT READOUT:
Input range: -10 to 65 mV
0 to 400 ohms, high range
0 to 25 ohms, low range
Display range: -19999 to 99999
INPUT TYPE

RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

Direct
mV range
Direct
100 ohm range
Direct
10 ohm range

-10 to 65mV
(1 μV res.)
0 to 400 Ω
(10 MΩ res.)
0 to 25 Ω
(1 MΩ res.)

0.02% of reading
+ 4μV
0.02% of reading
+ 0.04 Ω
0.04% of reading
+ 0.005 Ω

0.12% of reading
+ 5μV
0.12% of reading
+ 0.05 Ω
0.20% of reading
+ 0.007 Ω

1-717-767-6511

539

MODEL PAXT - THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUT
This is a brief overview of the PAXT. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
PAX Analog Input Panel Meters Bulletin starting on page 378.
THERMOCOUPLE AND RTD INPUTS
CONFORMS TO ITS-90 STANDARDS
CUSTOM SCALING FOR NON-STANDARD PROBES
TIME-TEMPERATURE INTEGRATOR
5-DIGIT 0.56" RED SUNLIGHT READABLE OR STANDARD
GREEN DISPLAY
VARIABLE INTENSITY DISPLAY

OPTIONAL CUSTOM UNITS OVERLAY W/BACKLIGHT
FOUR SETPOINT ALARM OUTPUTS (W/OPTION CARD)

US LISTED

COMMUNICATION AND BUS CAPABILITIES (W/OPTION CARD)

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

RETRANSMITTED ANALOG OUTPUT (W/OPTION CARD)
CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

INPUT
TYPE

RANGE

ACCURACY* ACCURACY*
STANDARD
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)

-200 to 400°C
-270 to -200°C

1.2°C
**

2.1°C

-200 to 871°C
-270 to -200°C

1.0°C
**

2.4°C

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

BS 1843

ITS-90

(+) blue
(-) red

(+) white
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) purple (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

ITS-90

(+) white
(-) red

ITS-90

(+) yellow (+) brown
(-) red
(-) blue

(+) yellow
(-) blue

-200 to 760°C

1.1°C

2.3°C

-200 to 1372°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.4°C

-50 to 1768°C

1.9°C

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

-50 to 1768°C

1.9°C

4.0°C

ITS-90

no
standard

(+) white
(-) blue

100 to 300°C
300 to 1820°C

3.9°C
2.8°C

5.7°C
4.4°C

ITS-90

no
standard

-200 to 1300°C
-270 to -200°C

1.3°C
**

3.1°C

ITS-90

(+) orange (+) orange
(-) red
(-) blue

C
(W5/W26)

0 to 2315°C

1.9°C

6.1°C

ASTM no
E988-90*** standard

no
standard

540

100 ohm Pt
alpha = .00385
100 ohm Pt
alpha = .003919
120 ohm Nickel
alpha = .00672
10 ohm Copper
alpha = .00427

RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°C)

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-200 to 850°C

0.4°C

1.6°C

-80 to 260°C

0.2°C

0.5°C

-100 to 260°C

0.4°C

0.9°C

STANDARD
***

IEC 751
no official
standard
no official
standard
no official
standard

CUSTOM RANGE: Up to 16 data point pairs
Input range: -10 to 65 mV
0 to 400 ohms, high range
0 to 25 ohms, low range
Display range: -19999 to 99999
INPUT TYPE

RANGE

ACCURACY*
(18 to 28°°C)

ACCURACY*
(0 to 50°°C)

Custom
mV range
Custom
100 ohm range
Custom
10 ohm range

-10 to 65mV
(1 μV res.)
0 to 400 Ω
(10 MΩ res.)
0 to 25 Ω
(1 MΩ res.)

0.02% of reading
+ 4μV
0.02% of reading
+ 0.04 Ω
0.04% of reading
+ 0.005 Ω

0.12% of reading
+ 5μV
0.12% of reading
+ 0.05 Ω
0.20% of reading
+ 0.007 Ω

www.redlion.net

MODELS T16 & P16 - TEMPERATURE/PROCESS CONTROLLERS
z PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
z T16 ACCEPTS TC AND RTD
z P16 ACCEPTS 0-10 V AND 0/4-20 mA SIGNALS
z ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID SETTINGS
z DC ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTIONAL)
z USER PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION BUTTON
z PC OR FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMING
z PC CONFIGURABLE WITH TP16KIT
UL Recognized Component,
File #E156876

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

PC PROGRAMMING KIT

The Model T16 Controller accepts signals from a variety of temperature
sensors (thermocouple or RTD), while the Model P16 Controller accepts either a
0 to 10 VDC or 0/4 to 20 mA DC input signal. Both controllers can provide an
accurate output control signal (time proportional or DC Analog Output) to
maintain a process at a setpoint value. Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the
process/temperature and setpoint simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform
the operator of the controller and output status. The comprehensive programming
allows these controllers to meet a wide variety of application requirements.

The optional TP16KIT contains a programming module with a 9 pin RS232
connector, cable and Crimson, a Windows® based configuration software. The
software allows downloading, uploading and storage of T16 and P16 program
files. All controllers have a communications port that allows configuration by
PC even without controller power connected. Controller calibration is also
possible using the software when the proper calibration equipment and
controller power is connected.

MAIN CONTROL

CONSTRUCTION

The controller operates in the PID Control Mode for both heating and
cooling, with on-demand auto-tune, that establishes the tuning constants. The
PID tuning constants may be fine-tuned through the front panel and then locked
out from further modification. The controller employs a unique overshoot
suppression feature, that allows the quickest response without excessive
overshoot. Switching to Manual Mode provides the operator direct control of the
output. The controller may also be programmed to operate in On/Off mode with
adjustable hysteresis.

The controller is constructed of a lightweight, high impact, black plastic
textured case and bezel with a clear display window. The front panel meets
NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly installed. In applications that do
not require protection to NEMA 4X, multiple controllers can be stacked
horizontally or vertically. Modern surface-mount technology, extensive testing,
plus high immunity to noise interference makes the controller extremely reliable
in industrial environments.

SAFETY SUMMARY

ALARMS
Optional alarm(s) can be configured independently for absolute high or low
acting with balanced or unbalanced hysteresis. They can also be configured for
deviation and band alarm. In these modes, the alarm trigger values track the
setpoint value. Adjustable alarm hysteresis can be used for delaying output
response. The alarms can be programmed for Automatic or Latching operation.
A selectable standby feature suppresses the alarm during power-up until the
temperature stabilizes outside the alarm region.

ANALOG OUTPUT OPTION

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the controller to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the controller. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended.

The optional DC Analog Output (10 V or 20 mA) can be configured and
scaled for control or re-transmission purposes. The programmable output update
time reduces valve or actuator activity.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

541

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: 2 Line by 4-digit, LCD negative image transmissive with
backlighting.
Top (Process) Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high digits with red backlighting.
Bottom (Parameter) Display: 0.2" (5.1 mm) high digits with green
backlighting.
2. ANNUNCIATORS:
Status Annunciators:
O1 - Main control output is active.
O2 - Cooling output is active (when Alarm 2 is used for cooling).
A1 - Alarm 1 output is active.
A2 - Alarm 2 output is active.
°F, °C - Temperature units.
%PW - Output power percentage is shown in Bottom display.
MAN - Controller is in Manual Mode.
R - Ramping Setpoint indicator.
% - Percent indicator (P16 models only).
Display Messages:
OLOL - Measurement exceeds + sensor range
ULUL - Measurement exceeds - sensor range
OPEN - Open sensor is detected (T16 only)
SHrt - Shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
SENS - Measurement exceeds controller limits (P16 only)
dddd - Display value exceeds + display range
-ddd - Display value exceeds - display range
3. POWER:
Line Voltage Models:
85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 8 VA
Low Voltage Models:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC, 4 W
AC Power: 24 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 7 VA
4. CONTROLS: Three rubber push buttons for modification and setup of
controller parameters. One additional button (F1) for user programmable
function. One external user input (models with alarms) for parameter lockout
or other user programmable functions.
5. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters.
6. ISOLATION LEVEL:
AC power with respect to all other I/O: 250 V working (2300 V for 1 min.)
Sensor input to analog output: 50 V working (500 V for 1 minute)
Relay contacts to all other I/O: 300 V working (2300 V for 1 minute)
DC power with respect to sensor input and analog output: 50 V working
(500 V for 1 minute)
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to US and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS

1. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec (10 Hz rate)
Step Response Time: 300 msec typical, 400 msec max to within 99% of final
value with step input.
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
Analog Output: Upscale drive when assigned to retransmitted input.
Normal Mode Rejection: >40 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: >120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Overvoltage Protection: 120 VAC @ 15 sec max
2. RTD INPUTS: (T16 only)
Type: 2 or 3 wire
Excitation: 150 μA typical
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω max per input lead
Resolution: 1° or 0.1° for all types

542

TYPE

INPUT TYPE

RANGE

STANDARD

385

100 Ω platinum,
Alpha = .00385

-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1112°F

IEC 751

392

100 Ω platinum,
Alpha = .003919

-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1112°F

No official
standard

672

120 Ω nickel,
Alpha = .00672

-80 to +215°C
-112 to +419°F

No official
standard

Ohms

Linear Resistance

0.0 to 320.0 Ω

N/A

Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part I
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 kV contact
Level 3; 8 kV air
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 kV I/O
Level 3; 2 kV power
RF conducted interference EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Measurement input signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install one ferrite core one turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to I/O
cables at unit.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Process and analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install one ferrite core one turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to I/O
cables and power cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g’s (10 g relay), 11 msec
in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
9. CONNECTION: Wire-clamping screw terminals
10. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch.
Panel latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking.
Black plastic textured bezel with transparent display window. Controller
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use when properly installed.
Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
11. WEIGHT: 6.3 oz (179 g)
3. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS: (T16 only)
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C, and Linear mV
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ for all types
Lead Resistance Effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
Cold Junction Compensation: Less than ±1°C typical (1.5°C max) error
over ambient temperature range.
Resolution: 1° for types R, S, B and 1° or 0.1° for all other types
TYPE

DISPLAY RANGE

-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to +750°C
E
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
J
-328 to +1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
K
-328 to +2282°F
0 to +1768°C
R
+32 to +3214°F
0 to +1768°C
S
+32 to +3214°F
+149 to +1820°C
B
+300 to +3308°F
-200 to +1300°C
N
-328 to +2372°F
C
0 to +2315°C
W5/W6 +32 to +4199°F
-5.00 mV to
mV
56.00 mV

www.redlion.net

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

(+) Blue
(-) Red
(+) Violet
(-) Red
(+) White
(-) Red
(+) Yellow
(-) Red
No
standard
No
standard
No
standard
(+) Orange
(-) Red
No
standard
N/A

BS 1843

STANDARD

(+) White
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) Brown
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) Yellow
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) Brown
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) White
ITS-90
(-) Blue
(+) White
ITS-90
(-) Blue
No
ITS-90
standard
(+) Orange
ITS-90
(-) Blue
No
ASTM
standard E988-96
N/A

N/A

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

5. TEMPERATURE INDICATION ACCURACY: (T16 only)
± (0.3% of span, +1°C) at 23 °C ambient after 20 minute warm up. Includes
NIST conformity, cold junction effect, A/D conversion errors and
linearization conformity.
Span Drift (maximum): 130 PPM/°C
6. USER INPUT: (Only controllers with alarms have a user input terminal.)
Internally pulled up to +7 VDC (100 KΩ), VIN MAX = 35 V, VIL = 0.6 V max,
VIH = 1.5 V min, IOFF = 40 μA max
Response Time: 120 msec max
Functions: Programmable

4. SIGNAL INPUT: (P16 only)
MAX
INPUT RANGE ACCURACY * IMPEDANCE CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

10 VDC
(-1 to 11)

0.30 % of
reading
+0.03V

1 MΩ

50 V

10 mV

20 mA DC
(-2 to 22)

0.30 % of
reading
+0.04mA

10 Ω

100 mA

10 µA

* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages over 0 to 50 °C ambient range
after 20 minute warm-up.

OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Sensor Fail Response: Upscale
Annunciator: “A1” and “A2” programmable for normal or reverse acting
4. COOLING: Software selectable (overrides Alarm 2).
Control: PID or On/Off
Output: Time proportioning
Cycle Time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Heat/Cool Deadband Overlap: Programmable
5. ANALOG DC OUTPUT: (optional)
Action: Control or retransmission
Update Rate: 0.1 to 250 sec

1. CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS:
Relay Output:
Type: Form A
Contact Rating: 3 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC; 1/10 HP @ 120 VAC
(inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy)
Logic/SSR Output (main control output only):
Rating: 45 mA max @ 4 V min., 7 V nominal
2. MAIN CONTROL:
Control: PID or On/Off
Output: Time proportioning or DC Analog
Cycle Time: Programmable
Auto-Tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, derivative
time, and output dampening time. Also sets input filter and (if applicable)
cooling gain.
Probe Break Action: Programmable
3. ALARMS: (optional) 2 relay alarm outputs.
Modes:
None
Absolute High Acting (Balanced or Unbalanced Hysteresis)
Absolute Low Acting (Balanced or Unbalanced Hysteresis)
Deviation High Acting
Deviation Low Acting
Inside Band Acting
Outside Band Acting
Heat (Alarm 1 on Analog Output models only)
Cool (Alarm 2)

OUTPUT
RANGE **

ACCURACY *

COMPLIANCE

RESOLUTION

0 to 10 V

0.3% of FS
+ ½ LSD

10 kΩ min

1/8000

500 Ω max

1/8000

500 Ω max

1/6400

0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

0.3% of FS
+ ½ LSD
0.3% of FS
+ ½ LSD

* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages over 0 to 50 °C ambient range
after 20 minute warm-up.
** Outputs are independently jumper selectable for either 10 V or 20 mA. The
output range may be field calibrated to yield approximately 5% overrange
and a small underrange (negative) signal.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

T16

P16

MAIN CONTROL

2 ALARMS & USER INPUT

Relay

PART NUMBERS
18-36 VDC/24 VAC

85 to 250 VAC

—

T1610010

T1610000

Relay

Yes

T1611110

T1611100

Logic/SSR

—

T1620010

T1620000
T1621100

Logic/SSR

Yes

T1621110

Analog Out *

Yes

T1641110

T1641100

Relay

—

P1610010

P1610000

Relay

Yes

P1611110

P1611100

Logic/SSR

—

P1620010

P1620000

Logic/SSR

Yes

P1621110

P1621100

Analog Out *

Yes

P1641110

P1641100

* Analog out may be used for retransmitted signals. When using analog output for retransmitted signals,
AL1 becomes main control O1, if selected for heating in the analog out models.

ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.

TP16

RLY

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Programming Kit 1 : Includes Software, Comms Module w/
9-pin connector and cable, and 115 VAC Power Adapter

TP16KIT1

Programming Kit 2 : Includes Software, Comms Module w/
9-pin connector and cable

TP16KIT2

External SSR Power Unit (for Logic/SSR models)

RLY50000

25 A Single Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY60000

40 A Single Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY6A000

Three Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY70000

1-717-767-6511

543

BLOCK DIAGRAM

*A1 becomes main control O1, if selected for heating in the
analog out models.

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Although this controller is designed with a high degree of immunity to
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in each
application. The type of the electrical noise, source or coupling method into the
controller may be different for various installations. The controller becomes
more immune to EMI with fewer I/O connections. Cable length, routing, and
shield termination are very important and can mean the difference between a
successful or troublesome installation. Listed are some EMC guidelines for
successful installation in an industrial environment.
1. The controller should be mounted in a metal enclosure that is properly
connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the controller is mounted to
earth ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is more than 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the controller and leave the other end of
the shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run through metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.

544

4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the controller as possible. Loop the cable
through the core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for
additional protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the
controller to suppress power line interference. Install them near the power
entry point of the enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or
equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for Signal and Control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (Red Lion Controls # FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (Red Lion Controls # LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: Red Lion Controls # SNUB0000.

www.redlion.net

1.0 SETTING

THE

JUMPERS

(ANALOG OUTPUT MODELS ONLY)

To insure proper operation, the Analog Output jumpers must be set to the
same range selected in programming Module 2-OP. The default jumper
setting is for 20 mA. The default setting in Module 2-OP is 4-20
mA. To access the jumpers, insert a flat-blade screwdriver
between the front panel and the side case slot. This
should disengage the top and bottom front panel
latches from the case grooves. Pull the
front panel assembly with the controller
boards out of the case. The jumpers
are located inside the controller
on the left board along the
back top section.

VIEW FROM TOP OF UNIT

2.0 INSTALLING

THE

CONTROLLER

The T16 and P16 controllers meet NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor
use to provide a watertight seal in steel panels with a minimum thickness of
0.09", or aluminum panels with a
minimum thickness of 0.12". The
controllers are designed to be
mounted into an enclosed panel.
The bezel assembly must be in
place during installation of
the controller.

Instructions:
1. Prepare the panel cutout to the proper dimensions.
2. Remove the panel latch from the controller. Discard the cardboard sleeve.
3. Carefully remove the center section of the panel gasket and discard. Slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the controller, seating it against the lip at the
front of the case.
4. Insert the controller into the panel cutout. While holding the controller in
place, push the panel latch over the rear of the controller, engaging the tabs
of the panel latch in the farthest forward slot possible.
5. To achieve a proper seal, tighten the panel latch
screws evenly until the controller is snug in the
panel, torquing the screws to approximately 7 inlb (79 N-cm). Overtightening can result in
distortion of the controller, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seal.
Note: The installation location of the controller is
important. Be sure to keep it away from heat
sources (ovens, furnaces, etc.) and away from
direct contact with caustic vapors, oils, steam, or
any other process by-products in which exposure
may affect proper operation.

Multiple Controller Stacking
The controller is designed to allow for close spacing of multiple controllers
in applications that do not require protection to NEMA 4X. Controllers can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the controller. For horizontal stacking, the
panel latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the controller. The
minimum spacing from centerline to centerline of controllers is 1.96" (49.8
mm). This spacing is the same for vertical or
horizontal stacking.
Note: When stacking
controllers, provide
adequate panel
ventilation to ensure
that the maximum
operating temperature
range is not exceeded.

1-717-767-6511

545

3.0 WIRING

THE

CONTROLLER

WIRING CONNECTIONS
All wiring connections are made to the rear screw terminals. When wiring the
controller, use the numbers on the label and those embossed on the back of the
case, to identify the position number with the proper function.
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation, local

codes and regulations. It is recommended that power (AC or DC) supplied to the
controller be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. Strip the wire, leaving
approximately 1/4" (6 mm) bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be tinned
with solder). Insert the wire under the clamping washer and tighten the screw
until the wire is clamped tightly.

VDC

CONTROLLER POWER CONNECTIONS

VAC

For best results, the power should be relatively “clean” and within
the specified limits. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits or
from circuits that also power loads that cycle on and off should be
avoided. It is recommended that power supplied to the controller be
protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.

INPUT CONNECTIONS
For two wire RTDs, install a copper sense lead of the same gauge and length
as the RTD leads. Attach one end of the wire at the probe and the other end to
input common terminal. Complete lead wire compensation is obtained. This is

RTD and Resistance

the preferred method. If a sense wire is not used, then use a jumper. A
temperature offset error will exist. The error may be compensated by
programming a temperature offset.

Thermocouple and Millivolt

Voltage and Current

CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Alarm Models

Main Control Relay Models

F
Main Control Logic/SSR Models

*A1 becomes main control O1, if selected for
heating in the analog out models.

ANALOG DC OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

546

USER INPUT CONNECTIONS

www.redlion.net

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT KEYS

FRONT PANEL KEYS

AND

DISPLAY

The Arrow keys are used to scroll through parameter
selections/values and in the Configuration Loop they are used to
scroll to the appropriate Parameter Module.

The F1 key is pressed to exit (or escape) directly to the start of the
Display Loop. While in the Display Loop, the F1 key can be pressed to
activate its programmed function.
The Loop key is pressed to advance to the next parameter, to activate
a changed selection/value, and when held for three seconds, enter the
Hidden Loop.

5.0 PROGRAMMING: DISPLAY LOOP
DISPLAY LOOP

Note: Setpoint and Output Power are the only parameters visible in the Display Loop with Factory Settings. The remaining parameters can
be selected for the Display Loop within Module 3.
Parameter availability is model and programming dependent.

DISPLAY LOOP
At power up, all display segments light, and then the programmed input type
and the controller’s software version will flash. Then the Temperature/Process
Value is shown in the top display, and the Setpoint Value is shown in the bottom
display. This is the Display Loop. If the Setpoint is hidden or locked, the Display
Loop will default to Output Power. If Output Power is also hidden or locked out,
the bottom display is blank. During programming, the F1 key can be pressed to
return the controller to this point. (Only in the Display Loop will the F1 key
perform the user
function programmed in Input Module
.)

When the
is pressed the controller advances to the next parameter in the
Display Loop. Except for Setpoint and % Output Power, the bottom display
alternates between the parameter name and its selection/value. The arrow keys
are pressed to change the selection/value for the shown parameter. The new
selection/value is activated when the
is pressed. Display Loop parameters
may be locked out or hidden in Lockout Module
. Some parameters are
model and programming dependent.

1-717-767-6511

547

The values shown for the displays are the factory settings.
INTEGRAL TIME

SETPOINT VALUE (SP1) *

SP
0
0.0

Intt «
ª 120

-999 to 9999
T16

Integral action shifts the center point position of the proportional band to
eliminate error in the steady state. The higher the integral time, the slower the
response. The optimal integral time is best determined during PID Tuning. If
time is set to zero, the previous Integral output power value is maintained.
Offset Power can be used to provide Manual Reset.

P16

SETPOINT VALUE (SP2) *

0 to 9999 seconds

-999 to 9999
DERIVATIVE TIME

T16

2.0

P16

Typically, the controller is operating with the Setpoint value in the bottom
display. There is no annunciator nor parameter indication for Setpoint in the
Display Loop. The parameter name alternates with the setpoint value in the
Hidden Loop. The Setpoint value can be changed, activated and stored by
pressing the arrow keys. This is the only parameter that can be configured as
read only in the Display Loop, but read/write in the Hidden Loop. It is possible
to store a second Setpoint value that can be selected in the Hidden Loop, by the
F1 key or the user input. Both Setpoint values are limited by the Setpoint Low
and High Limits in Input Module
.
% OUTPUT POWER *

OP
0.0

-100 to 100.0

The % Output Power is shown with the %PW annunciator. The parameter
name alternates with the % Output Power value in the Hidden Loop. While the
controller is in Automatic Mode, this value is read only. When the controller is
placed in Manual Mode, the value can be changed, activated and stored by
pressing the arrow keys. For more details on % Output Power, see Control
Mode Explanations.
OUTPUT POWER OFFSET

OPOF «
ª
0.0

-100 to 100.0

When the Integral Time is set to zero and the controller is in the Automatic
Mode, this parameter will appear after % Output Power. It is also shown with
the %PW annunciator illuminated. The power offset is used to shift the
proportional band to compensate for errors in the steady state. If Integral Action
is later invoked, the controller will re-calculate the internal integral value to
provide “bumpless” transfer and Output Power Offset will not be necessary.

PROPORTIONAL BAND

ProP «
ª
4.0

dErt «
ª
30

Derivative time helps to stabilize the response, but too high of a derivative
time, coupled with noisy signal processes, may cause the output to fluctuate too
greatly, yielding poor control. Setting the time to zero disables derivative action.
ALARM 1 VALUE

AL-1 «
ª
0
0.0

T16

-999 to 9999

P16

On models with alarms, the value for Alarm 1 can be entered here. The value
is either absolute (absolute alarm types) or relative to the Setpoint value
(deviation and band alarm types.) When Alarm 1 is programmed for HEAt or
NonE, this parameter is not available. For more details on alarms, see Alarm
Module
.
ALARM 2 VALUE

AL-2 «
ª
0
0.0

T16

-999 to 9999

P16

On models with alarms, the value for Alarm 2 can be entered here. The value
is either absolute (absolute alarm types) or relative to the Setpoint value
(deviation and band alarm types.) When Alarm 2 is programmed for CooL or
NonE, this parameter is not available. For more details on alarms, see the Alarm
Module 4-AL.

* Alternating indication only used in the Hidden Loop.

0.0 to 999.9
(% of full input range)

The proportional band should be set to obtain the best response to a process
disturbance while minimizing overshoot. A proportional band of 0.0% forces
the controller into On/Off Control with its characteristic cycling at Setpoint. For
more information, see Control Mode and PID Tuning Explanations.

548

0 to 9999 seconds per repeat

www.redlion.net

6.0 PROGRAMMING: HIDDEN LOOP
To enter Hidden Loop, press

for 3 seconds.

HIDDEN LOOP

Note: Parameters shown bold are the only parameters visible in the Hidden Loop with Factory Settings. Setpoint and Output Power are
factory set for the Display Loop. The remaining parameters can be selected for the Hidden Loop within Module 3.
Parameter availability is model and programming dependent.

HIDDEN LOOP
When
is pressed and held for three seconds, the controller advances to the
Hidden Loop. The Temperature/Process Value is shown in the top display. The
bottom display alternates between the parameter and its selection/value.
or
is pressed to change the selection/value for the shown parameter. The new
selection/value is activated after
is pressed. When
is pressed, the
controller returns to the Display Loop and stores changed selection/values to
permanent memory. Hidden Loop parameters may be locked out in Lockout
Module 3-LC. Some parameters are model and programming dependent.

ACCESS CODE

CodE «
ª
0

1 to 125

If the Access Code is set from 1 to 125, in Lockout Module
, Access
Code will appear here. By entering the proper Code, access to the Hidden Loop
is permitted. With the factory setting of 0, Access Code will not appear in the
Hidden Loop. A universal code of 111 can be entered to gain access,
independent of the programmed code number.

SPrP «
ª
0.0

SP1 or SP2

The SPSL function allows the operator to switch from or to, setpoint 1 and
setpoint 2. In the Display Loop, there is no annunciator indicating the selected
Setpoint, however, the selected Setpoint value is displayed and activated.

0.0 to 999.9

The setpoint ramp rate can reduce sudden shock to the process and reduce
overshoot on startup or after setpoint changes, by ramping the setpoint at a
controlled rate. R annunciator flashes while ramping. With the T16, the ramp rate
is always in tenths of degrees per minute, regardless of the resolution chosen for
the process display. With the P16, the ramp rate is in least-significant (display
units) digits per minute. A value of 0.0 or 0 disables setpoint ramping. Once the
ramping setpoint reaches the target setpoint, the setpoint ramp rate disengages
until the setpoint is changed again. If the ramp value is changed during ramping,
the new ramp rate takes effect. If the setpoint is ramping prior to starting AutoTune, the ramping is suspended during Auto-Tune and then resumed afterward.
Deviation and band alarms are relative to the target setpoint, not the ramping
setpoint. A slow process may not track the programmed setpoint rate. At power
up, the ramping setpoint is initialized at the ambient temperature/process value.
CONTROL MODE TRANSFER

trnF «
ª Auto

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSL «
ª SP1

SETPOINT RAMP RATE

Auto USEr

In Automatic Mode, the percentage of Output Power is automatically
determined by the controller. In Manual/User USEr Mode, the percentage of
Output Power is adjusted manually while in the Display Loop. The Control
Mode can also be transferred through the F1 Key or User Input. For more
information, see Control Mode Explanations.

1-717-767-6511

549

AUTO-TUNE START

tUNE «
ª
NO

ACCESS CODE

CodE «
ª
0

NO YES

The Auto-Tune procedure of the controller sets the Proportional Band,
Integral Time, Derivative Time, Digital Filter, Control Output Dampening
Time, and Relative Gain (Heat/Cool) values appropriate to the characteristics of
the process. This parameter allows front panel starting YES or stopping NO of
Auto-Tune. For more information, see PID Tuning Explanations.

-1 to -125

If the Access Code is set from -1 to -125, in Lockout Module 3-LC, Access
Code will appear here. By entering the proper Code, access to the Configuration
Loop is permitted (with a negative Code value, the Hidden Loop can be
accessed without the use of a code). With the factory setting of 0 or with an
active User Input configured for Program Lock (PLOC), Access Code will not
appear here. An active user input configured for Program Lock (PLOC) always
locks out the Configuration Loop, regardless of Access Code.

ALARMS RESET

ALrS «
ª 1-2

1-2

With alarm models, the alarms can be manually reset. The up key resets
Alarm 1 and the down key resets Alarm 2.

7.0 PROGRAMMING: CONFIGURATION LOOP
CONFIGURATION LOOP

To access the Configuration Loop, press the up key when CNFP/NO is displayed
in the Hidden Loop. The arrow keys are used to select the parameter module (19). To enter a specific module press
while the module number is displayed.
In the Configuration Loop, CNFP will alternate with the parameter number in the
bottom display. The Temperature/Process Value is shown in the top display.
After entering a parameter module, press
to advance through the
parameter names in the module. To change a parameter’s selection/value, press
the arrow keys while the parameter is displayed. In the modules, the top display
shows the parameter name, and the bottom display shows the selection/value.
Use
to enter any selection/values that have been changed. The change is not
committed to permanent memory until the controller is returned to the Display
Loop. If a power loss occurs before returning to the Display Loop, the new
values must be entered again.
At the end of each module, the controller returns to CNFP/NO. At this location,
pressing
again returns the display to the the Display Loop. Pressing the Up
key allows re-entrance to the Configuration Loop. Whenever
is pressed, End
momentarily appears as the parameters are stored to permanent memory and the
controller returns to the Display Loop.

550

www.redlion.net

7.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT PARAMETERS (

) T16 ONLY

PARAMETER MENU

INPUT TYPE

tYPE
tc-j

SELECTION TYPE

tc-t
tc-E
tctc-K
tc-r
tc-S
tc-b

T TC
E TC
J TC
K TC
R TC
S TC
B TC

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT

SELECTION

tc-N
tc-C
LIN
r385
r392
r672
rLIN

SPLO
0

TYPE

N TC
C TC

The controller has a programmable low setpoint limit value to restrict the
setting range of the setpoint. Set the limit so that the setpoint value cannot be
set below the safe operating area of the process.

Linear mV
RTD 385
RTD 392
RTD 672

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT

Linear Ohms

SPHI
9999

Select the input type that corresponds to the input sensor.
TEMPERATURE SCALE

SCAL
°F

°F Fahrenheit
°C Celsius

DECIMAL RESOLUTION

DIGITAL FILTERING

0 = least to 4 = most

The filter is an adaptive digital filter that discriminates between measurement
noise and actual process changes. If the signal is varying too greatly due to
measurement noise, increase the filter value. If the fastest controller response is
needed, decrease the filter value.
SHIFT/OFFSET

SHft
0

USER INPUT FUNCTION (OPTIONAL)

InPt
PLOC
SELECTION

0 to 0.0 for temperature and resistance inputs
0.00 for mV inputs

Select whole degrees, or tenths of degrees for Temperature display, Setpoint
values, and related parameters. For Linear Resistance inputs rLIN, the same
parameter selections apply in ohms or tenths of an ohm. For mV inputs LIN,
only hundredths of a mV resolution is available.

FLtr
1

-999 to 9999

The controller has a programmable high setpoint limit value to restrict the
setting range of the setpoint. Set the limit so that the setpoint value cannot be
set above the safe operating area of the process.

Select either degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius. For linear mV and ohms input
types, this has no effect. If changed, adjust related parameter values, as the
controller does not automatically convert them.

dCPt
0

-999 to 9999

-999 to 9999 degrees

This value offsets the controller’s temperature display value by the entered
amount. This is useful in applications in which the sensor cannot provide the
actual temperature signal due to mounting constraints, inaccuracy, etc.

NONE
PLOC
ILOC
trnF

FUNCTION

No Function
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock

SELECTION

SPt
SPrP
ALrS

FUNCTION

Setpoint 1 or 2 Select
Setpoint Ramp Disable
Reset Both Alarms

Auto/Manual Select

The controller performs the selected User Input function (User Input
available only on models with alarms), when the User terminal 1 is connected
(pulled low) to Common terminal 8.
No Function: No function is performed.
Program Lock: The Configuration Loop is locked, as long as activated
(maintained action).
Integral Action Lock: The integral action of the PID computation is disabled
(frozen), as long as activated (maintained action).
Auto/Manual Select: This function selects (maintained action) Automatic
(open) or Manual Control (activated).
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select: This function selects (maintained action) Setpoint
1(open) or Setpoint 2 (activated) as the active setpoint.
Setpoint Ramp Disable: The setpoint ramping feature is disabled, as long as
activated (maintained action). Any time the user input is activated with a
ramp in process, ramping is aborted.
Reset Alarms: Active alarms are reset, as long as activated (maintained action).
Active alarms are reset until the alarm condition is cleared and triggered
again (momentary action).

1-717-767-6511

551

F1 KEY FUNCTION

The controller performs the selected F1 Key Function, when
is pressed
while in the Display Loop. In any other loop or module location, pressing
will perform an escape to the Display Loop.
No Function: No function is performed.
Auto/Manual Select: This function toggles (momentary action) the controller
between Automatic and Manual Control.
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select: This function toggles (momentary action) the controller
between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2.
Reset Alarms: This function can be used to reset one or both of the alarms
when activated (momentary action) The alarm will remain reset until the
alarm condition is cleared and triggered again.

F1In
NONE
SELECTION

NONE
trnF
SPt

FUNCTION

SELECTION

No Function

A1rS
A2rS
ALrS

Auto/Manual Select
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select

FUNCTION

Reset Alarm 1
Reset Alarm 2
Reset Both Alarms

7.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT PARAMETERS (

) P16 ONLY

PARAMETER MENU

INPUT TYPE

tYPE
Curr

SELECTION

TYPE

Curr
VOLt

Current
Voltage

SCALING
To scale the controller, two scaling points are necessary. Each scaling point has
a coordinate pair of Display Values and Input Values. It is recommended that the
two scaling points be at the low and high ends of the input signal being measured.
Process value scaling will be linear between and continue past the entered points
to the limits of the input range. (Factory settings example will display 0.0 at 4.00
mA input and display 100.0 at 20.00 mA input.) Reverse acting indication can be
accomplished by reversing the two signal points or the Display value points, but
not both. If both are reversed, forward (normal) acting indication will occur. In
either case, do not reverse the input wires to change the action.

Select the input type that corresponds to the input signal.
PERCENT ANNUNCIATOR

PCt
NO

YES On
NO Off

DISPLAY VALUE SCALING POINT 1

This only illuminates the % annunciator. It does not perform any type of
percent function, but is useful in applications that have been scaled in percent.

INPUT VALUE SCALING POINT 1

0 0.0 0.00 0.000

This selection affects the decimal point placement for the Process value, and
related parameters.

ROUNDING INCREMENT

rnd
0.1

1 to 100

In steps of 1 least significant digit,
regardless of decimal point.
Rounding selections other than 1 cause the process value display to round to
the nearest rounding increment selected. (For example, rounding of 5 causes 122
to round to 120 and 123 to round to 125.) Rounding starts at the least significant
digit of the process value. Setpoint values, Setpoint limits, Alarm values, Input
Scaling values, and Analog Scaling values are not affected by rounding.
DIGITAL FILTERING

FLtr
1

INP1
4.00

0.00 to 20.00 mA
0.00 to 10.00 V

For Key-in Method, enter the first coordinate Input Value by using the arrow
keys. To allow the P16 to “learn” the signal, use the Applied Method. For Applied
Method, press . The ° annunciator is turned on to indicate the applied method.
Adjust the applied signal level externally until the appropriate value appears
under INP1. Using either method, press
to store the value for INP1. (The
controller can be toggled back to the Key-in Method by pressing
before .)
DISPLAY VALUE SCALING POINT 2

dSP2
100.0

-999 to 9999

Enter the second coordinate Display Value by using the arrow keys.

0 = least to 4 = most

552

-999 to 9999

Enter the first coordinate Display Value by using the arrow keys.

DECIMAL RESOLUTION

dCPt
0.0

dSP1
0.0

www.redlion.net

INPUT VALUE SCALING POINT 2

INP2
20.00

F1 KEY FUNCTION

F1In
NONE

0.00 to 20.00 mA
0.00 to 10.00 V

For Key-in Method, enter the second coordinate Input Value by using the
arrow keys. To allow the P16 to “learn” the signal, use the Applied Method. For
Applied Method, press
. The ° annunciator is turned on to indicate the
applied method. Adjust the applied signal level externally until the appropriate
value appears under INP2. Using either method, press
to store the value for
INP2. (The controller can be toggled back to the Key-in Method by pressing
before .)
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT

SPLO

-999 to 9999

SELECTION

NONE
trnF
SPt

FUNCTION

No Function
Auto/Manual Select
Setpoint 1 or 2 Select

SELECTION

A1rS
A2rS
ALrS

FUNCTION

Reset Alarm 1
Reset Alarm 2
Reset Both Alarms

The controller performs the selected F1 key function, when
is pressed
while in the Display Loop. In any other loop or module location, pressing
will perform an escape to the Display Loop.
No Function: No function is performed.
Auto/Manual Select: This function toggles (momentary action) the controller
between Automatic and Manual Control.
Setpoint 1 or 2 Selection: This function toggles (momentary action) the
controller between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2.
Reset Alarms: This function can be used to reset one or both of the alarms
when activated (momentary action). The alarm will remain reset until the
alarm condition is cleared and triggered again.

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT

SPHI
999.9

-999 to 9999

USER INPUT FUNCTION (OPTIONAL)

InPt
PLOC
SELECTION

NONE
PLOC
ILOC
trnF

FUNCTION

No Function
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock

SELECTION

SPt
SPrP
ALrS

FUNCTION

Setpoint 1 or 2 Select
Setpoint Ramp Disable
Reset Both Alarms

Auto/Manual Select

1-717-767-6511

553

7.2 MODULE 2 - OUTPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

SENSOR FAIL POWER LEVEL

CYCLE TIME

CYCt
2.0

OPFL
0

0.0 to 250.0 seconds

The Cycle Time is entered in seconds with one tenth of a second resolution.
It is the total time for one on and one off period of the time proportioning
control output O1. With time proportional control, the percentage of power is
converted into an output on-time relative to the cycle time value set. (If the
controller calculates that 65% power is required and a cycle time of 10.0
seconds is set, the output will be on for 6.5 seconds and off for 3.5 seconds.)
For best control, a cycle time equal to one-tenth or less, of the natural period of
oscillation of the process is recommended. When using the Analog Output
signal for control, the Cycle Time setting has no effect. If the O1 output is not
being used, a cycle time of 0 can be entered to prevent the output and indicator
from cycling.

0 to 100 percent O1
-100 to 100 percent O1/O2

This parameter sets the power level for the control outputs in the event of a
sensor failure. If Alarm 2 is not selected for cooling, the range is from 0% (O1
output full off) to 100% (O1 output full on). If A2 is selected for cooling, the
range is from -100 to +100%. At 0%, both O1 and O2 are off; at 100%, O1 is
on; and at -100%, O2 is on. The alarm outputs are upscale drive with an open
sensor, and downscale drive with a shorted sensor (RTD only), independent of
this setting. Manual Control overrides the sensor fail preset.
OUTPUT POWER DAMPENING

OPdP
3
1

CONTROL ACTION

OPAC
rEv

drct Direct (cooling)
rEv Reverse (heating)

This determines the control action for the PID loop. Programmed for direct
action (cooling), the output power will increase if the Process value is above the
Setpoint value. Programmed for reverse action (heating), the output power
decreases when the Process Value is above the Setpoint Value. For heat and cool
applications, this is typically set to reverse. This allows O1 or A1 (models with
Analog Output) to be used for heating, and A2/O2 to be used for cooling.

ON/OFF CONTROL HYSTERESIS

2
0.2

0 to 100 percent O1
-100 to 100 percent O1/O2

This parameter may be used to limit controller power at the lower end due to
process disturbances or setpoint changes. Enter the safe output power limits for
the process. If Alarm 2 is selected for cooling, the range is from -100 to +100%.
At 0%, both O1 and O2 are off; at 100%, O1 is on; and at -100%, O2 is on.
When the controller is in Manual Control Mode, this limit does not apply.

P16

AUTO-TUNE CODE

0 to 100 percent O1
-100 to 100 percent O1/O2

This parameter may be used to limit controller power at the upper end due to
process disturbances or setpoint changes. Enter the safe output power limits for
the process. If Alarm 2 is selected for cooling, the range is from -100 to +100%.
At 0%, both O1 and O2 are off; at 100%, O1 is on; and at -100%, O2 is on.
When the controller is in Manual Control Mode, this limit does not apply.

554

1 to 250
T16

The controller can be placed in the On/Off Control Mode by setting the
Proportional Band to 0.0%. The On/Off Control Hysteresis (balanced around
the setpoint) eliminates output chatter. In heat/cool applications, the control
hysteresis value affects both Output O1 and Output O2 control. It is suggested
to set the hysteresis band to Factory Setting prior to starting Auto-Tune. After
Auto-Tune, the hysteresis band has no effect on PID Control. On/Off Control
Hysteresis is illustrated in the On/Off Control Mode section.

OUTPUT POWER UPPER LIMIT

OPHI
100

P16

The Dampening Time, entered as a time constant in seconds, dampens
(filters) the calculated output power. Increasing the value increases the
dampening effect. Generally, dampening times in the range of one-twentieth to
one-fiftieth of the controller’s integral time (or process time constant) are
effective. Dampening times longer than these may cause controller instability
due to the added lag effect.

CHYS

OUTPUT POWER LOWER LIMIT

OPLO
0

0 to 250 seconds
T16

tcod
0

0 fastest to 2 slowest

Prior to starting Auto-Tune, this code should be set to achieve the necessary
dampening level under PID Control. This value allows customization of the PID
values that Auto-Tune will calculate. For the process to be controlled
aggressively (fastest process response with possible overshoot), set the AutoTune Code to 0. For the process to be controlled conservatively (slowest
response with the least amount of overshoot), set this value to 2. If the Auto-Tune
Code is changed, Auto-Tune needs to be reinitiated for the changes to affect the
PID settings. For more information, see PID Tuning Explanations Section.

www.redlion.net

ANALOG LOW SCALING (OPTIONAL)

ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE (OPTIONAL)

ANtP
4-20

0-10 V 0-20 mA
4-20 mA

0.0

Select the type of output and range. The Analog output jumpers are factory
set to current. They must be changed if voltage output is desired. The Analog
output can be calibrated to provide up to approximately 5% over range
operation (0 mA current can only go slightly negative).

The Analog Output assignment value that corresponds to 0 V, 0 mA or 4 mA
output as selected.
ANALOG HIGH SCALING (OPTIONAL)

ANHI
100.0

ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT (OPTIONAL)

ANAS
OP

OP Main Control % Output Power
InP Input Signal Retransmission
SP Active Setpoint

This setting selects the parameter that the Analog Output will retransmit or
track.

-999 to 9999

The Analog Output assignment value that corresponds to 10 V or 20 mA
output as selected. An inverse acting output can be achieved by reversing the
low and high scaling points.

ANALOG UPDATE TIME (OPTIONAL)

ANUt
0

0 to 250 seconds
0 = update rate of 0.1 second

The update time of the Analog Output can be used to reduce excess valve
actuator or pen recorder activity.

7.3 MODULE 3 - LOCKOUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

SELECTION

dISP
HIdE
LOC
dSPr

ACCESS CODE

DESCRIPTION

CodE
0

Display: accessible in Display Loop.
Hide: accessible in Hidden Loop.

-125 to

Locked: not accessible in either loop.
(SP only)

Display/read: read only in Display Loop,
but read/write in Hidden Loop.

0
-1 to -125
1 to 125

The following parameters can be configured for LOC, HIdE, and dISP.

Full access to Display, Hidden,
and Configuration Loops
Code necessary to access
Configuration Loop only.
Code necessary to access
Hidden and Configuration Loops.

The following parameters can be configured for LOC or HIdE only.
SETPOINT
ACCESS

SP
dISP

OUTPUT
POWER
ACCESS

OP
dISP

PID VALUES
ACCESS

PId
HIdE

ALARM
VALUES
ACCESS

AL
HIdE

SETPOINT
SELECT
ACCESS

SETPOINT
RAMP
ACCESS

CONTROL
TRANSFER
ACCESS

SPrP
HIdE

trnF
LOC

SPSL
LOC
AUTO-TUNE
START
ACCESS

tUNE
HIdE
1-717-767-6511

RESET
ALARMS
ACCESS

ALrS
LOC
555

7.4 MODULE 4 - ALARM PARAMETERS (

) (OPTIONAL)

PARAMETER MENU

AVAILABLE ALARM ACTIONS

NONE

None

No action, the remaining Alarm
parameters are not available.

AbHI

Absolute High
(balanced hysteresis)

The alarm energizes when the Process
Value exceeds the alarm value + 1/2
the hysteresis value.

AbLO

Absolute Low
(balanced hysteresis)

The alarm energizes when the Process
Value falls below the alarm value -1/2
the hysteresis value.

AuHI

Absolute High
(unbalanced hysteresis)

AuLO

Absolute Low
(unbalanced hysteresis)

d-HI

Deviation High

Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value

d-LO

Deviation Low

Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value

b-IN

Band Acting
(inside)

Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value

b-ot

Band Acting
(outside)

Alarm 1 and 2 value tracks the
Setpoint value

The alarm energizes when the Process
Value exceeds the alarm value.

HEAt

Heat (A1 Analog
models only)

If heating is selected, the remaining
Alarm 1 parameters are not available.

The alarm energizes when the Process
Value falls below the alarm value.

CooL

Cool
(A2 only)

If cooling is selected, the remaining
Alarm 2 parameters are not available.

ALARM ACTION FIGURES

Note: Hys in the above figures refers to the Alarm Hysteresis.

556

www.redlion.net

ALARM ACTION ALARM 1

ACt1
AuHI

ALARM ANNUNCIATOR ALARM 2

Lit2
nor

NONE AbHI AbLO AuHI AuLO
d-HI d-LO b-IN b-ot HEAt

nor Normal
rEv Reverse

Select the action for the alarms. See Alarm Action Figures for a visual
explanation.

With normal selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “on” alarm output 2.
With reverse selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “off” alarm output.

ALARM ANNUNCIATOR ALARM 1

ALARM RESET MODE ALARM 2

nor

rSt2
Auto

nor Normal
rEv Reverse

With normal selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “on” alarm output 1.
With reverse selection, the alarm annunciator indicates “off” alarm output.
ALARM RESET MODE ALARM 1

rSt1
Auto

Auto Automatic
LAtc Latched

ALARM STANDBY ALARM 1

YES Standby on
NO Standby off

Standby prevents nuisance (typically low level) alarms after a power up or
setpoint change. After powering up the controller or changing the setpoint, the
process must leave the alarm region (enter normal non-alarm area of operation).
After this has occurred, the standby is disabled and the alarm responds normally
until the next controller power up or setpoint change.
ALARM VALUE ALARM 2

ALARM VALUE ALARM 1

AL-1

AL-2
20
2.0

-999 to 9999
T16
P16

The alarm values are entered as process units or degrees. They can also be
entered in the Display or Hidden Loops. When the alarm is configured as
deviation or band acting, the associated output tracks the Setpoint as it is
changed. The value entered is the offset or difference from the Setpoint.

-999 to 9999
ALARM HYSTERESIS

T16

AHYS

P16

ACt2
AuHI

Stb2
NO

YES Standby on
NO Standby off

0
0.0

In Automatic mode, an energized alarm turns off automatically after the
Temperature/Process value leaves the alarm region. In Latched mode, an
energized alarm requires an F1 key or user input alarm reset to turn off. After an
alarm reset, the alarm remains reset off until the trigger point is crossed again.
ALARM STANDBY ALARM 2

Stb1
NO

Auto Automatic
LAtc Latched

NONE AbHI AbLO AuHI AuLO
d-HI d-LO b-IN b-ot CooL

1
0.1

0 to 250
T16
P16

The Hysteresis Value is either added to or subtracted from the alarm value,
depending on the alarm action selected. The same value applies to both alarms.
See the Alarm Action Figures for a visual explanation of how alarm actions are
affected by the hysteresis.

Select the action for the alarms. See Alarm Action Figures for a visual
explanation.

1-717-767-6511

557

7.5 MODULE 5 - COOLING (SECONDARY) PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

To enable Cooling in Heat/Cool applications, the Alarm 2 Action must first
be set for Cooling. (For P16 Controllers, the cooling output is sometimes
referred to as secondary output.) When set to cooling, the output no longer
operates as an alarm but operates as a cooling output. The O2 terminals are the
same as A2, however a separate O2 annunciator indicates Cooling Operation.
Cooling output power ranges from -100% (full cooling) to 0% (no cooling,
unless a heat/cool overlap is used). The Power Limits in Output Module
also limit the cooling power. In applications requiring only a Cooling output,
the main 01 output should be used.
CYCLE TIME

CYC2
2.0

0.0 to 250.0 seconds

DEADBAND/OVERLAP

db-2
0

-999 to 9999

This defines the overlap area in which both heating and cooling are active
(negative value) or the deadband area between the bands (positive value). If a
heat/cool overlap is specified, the percent output power is the sum of the heat
power (O1) and the cool power (O2). If Relative Gain is zero, the cooling
output operates in the On/Off Control Mode, with the On/Off Control
Hysteresis CHYS in Output Module 2-OP becoming the cooling output hysteresis.
The function of Deadband is illustrated in the Control Mode Explanations. For
most applications, set this parameter to 0.0 prior to starting Auto-Tune. After
the completion of Auto-Tune, this parameter may be changed.

This cycle time functions like the O1 Output Cycle Time but allows
independent cycle time for cooling. A setting of zero will keep output O2 off.
RELATIVE GAIN

GAN2
1.0

0.0 to 10.0

This defines the gain of the cooling relative to the heating. It is generally set
to balance the effects of cooling to that of heating. This is illustrated in the
Heat/Cool Relative Gain Figures. A value of 0.0 places the cooling output into
On/Off Control.

HEAT/COOL RELATIVE GAIN FIGURES

Heat/Cool Deadband = 0

Heat/Cool Deadband < 0

Heat/Cool Deadband > 0

558

www.redlion.net

7.5 MODULE 9 FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

RTD Resistance (T16)

CALIBRATION

RTD calibration requires a precision 277.0 ohm resistor with an accuracy of
0.1 Ω (or better). Connect a jumper between terminals 9 and 10 with a 0 ohm
jumper between 9 and 8 at StP1 and the 277.0 ohm resistor between 9 and 8 at
StP2. If using thermocouple only, the RTD calibration need not be performed.

CodE
48
The controller is fully calibrated from the factory. Recalibration is
recommended every two years by qualified technicians using appropriate
equipment. Calibration may be performed by using the front panel or with the
TP16KIT. The front panel method is explained below. (Refer to the TP16KIT
bulletin for calibration instructions using TP16KIT cable and software.)
Calibration may be aborted by disconnecting power to the controller before
exiting Factory Service Module 9-FS. In this case, the existing calibration
settings remain in effect.
Note: Allow the controller to warm up for 30 minutes minimum and follow
the manufacturer’s warm-up recommendations for the calibration source or
measuring device.

PROMPT

[CodE]
[CAL]
[CJC]
[rtd]
[StP1]
[StP2]

APPLY

FRONT PANEL ACTION

Press
.

Press

Press
0.0 ohm

until

Press

for

48, press

YES, press

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

277.0 ohm After 5 seconds (minimum), press

Input Calibration (P16)
Millivolt Calibration (T16)
Millivolt calibration requires a precision voltage source with an accuracy of
0.03% (or better) connected to terminals 8 (comm.) and 9 (+). When calibrating
the input, the millivolt calibration must be performed first, then the Cold Junction
or RTD Resistance.
PROMPT

APPLY

[CodE]
[CAL]
[StP1]
[StP2]
[StP3]
[StP4]
[StP5]

FRONT PANEL ACTION

Press

until

48, press

Press

for

YES, press

0.0 mV

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

14.0 mV

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

28.0 mV

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

42.0 mV

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

56.0 mV

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

Process calibration requires a precision signal source with an accuracy of
0.03% (or better) that is capable of generating 10.0 V connected to terminals 8
(COMM) and 9 (+10V) and 20.00 mA connected to terminals 8 (COMM) and
10 (20mA). The current calibration can be skipped by pressing
at the not
applicable prompts if using the controller for process voltage only.
PROMPT

[CodE]
[CAL]
[StP1]
[StP2]
[StP3]
[StP4]
[StP5]
[StPA]
[StPb]

Cold Junction (T16)

APPLY

FRONT PANEL ACTION

Press

until

Press

for

48, press

YES, press

0.0 V

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

2.5 V

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

5.0 V

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

7.5 V

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

10.0 V

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

0.0 mA

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

20.0 mA

After 5 seconds (minimum), press

Cold Junction calibration requires a thermocouple of known accuracy of
types T, E, J, K, C or N (connected to terminals 8 and 9) and a calibrated
external reference thermocouple probe measuring in °C with resolution to
tenths. The two probes should be brought in contact with each other or in some
way held at the same temperature. They should be shielded from air movement
and allowed sufficient time to equalize in temperature. (As an alternative, the
T16 thermocouple may be placed in a calibration bath of known temperature.)
If performing the millivolt calibration prior, verify that the correct input type is
configured in Input Module 1-IN before performing the following procedure.
(After the millivolt calibration the controller will default to type J.) If using RTD
only, the cold junction calibration need not be performed.
PROMPT

COMPARE

[CodE]
[CAL]
[CJC]

FRONT PANEL ACTION

Press
Press
Press
Top display to
external
reference

until

48, press

YES, press

.
for

Press
or
to adjust the
bottom display until the top
process display matches the
external reference then press

1-717-767-6511

559

Analog Output Calibration (T16 and P16)

RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS

Set the controller Analog jumpers to the output type being calibrated.
Connect an external meter with an accuracy of 0.05% (or better) that is capable
of measuring 10.00 V or 20.00 mA to terminals 6 (+V/I) and 7 (-V/I). The
voltage or current calibration that is not being used must be skipped by pressing
until End appears.

PROMPT

[CodE]
[CAL]
[CJC]
[rtd]
[ANCL]
[C 0v]

EXTERNAL
METER

CodE
66
Press and hold
to display CodE 66. Press . The controller will display
rSEt and then return to CNFP. Press
to return to the Display Loop. This will
overwrite all user settings with Factory Settings.

FRONT PANEL ACTION

Press

until

, press

Press

. (T16 only)

Press

. (T16 only)

Press

for

, press

NOMINAL CALIBRATION SETTINGS

CodE
77

0.00 V

Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .

C 10v

10.00 V

Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .

C 0c]

0.00 mA

Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .

C 20c

20.00 mA

Press
or
until external meter
matches listing, press .

Press and hold
to display CodE 77. Press . Press and hold
to display
CodE 77 again. Press . The controller will then return to CNFP. Press
to
return to the Display Loop. This will not overwrite any user settings but will
erase the controller calibration values. This procedure does not require any
calibration signals nor external meters. This can be used to clear calibration
error flag E-CL.
CAUTION: This procedure will result in up to ±10% reading error and the
controller will no longer be within factory specifications. For this reason, this
procedure should only be performed if meter error is outside of this range to
temporarily restore operation until the unit can be accurately calibrated.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support.
PROBLEM
NO DISPLAY

CAUSE
1.
2.
3.
4.

Power off.
Brown-out condition.
Loose connection or improperly wired.
Bezel assembly not fully seated into rear of controller.

CONTROLLER NOT WORKING 1. Incorrect setup parameters.

REMEDIES
1.
2.
3.
4.

Check power.
Verify power reading.
Check connections.
Check installation.

1. Check setup parameters.

E-E2 IN DISPLAY

1. Loss of setup parameters due to noise spike or other 1. Press F1 to escape, then check all setup parameters.
EMI event.
a. Check sensor input and AC line for excessive noise.
b. If fault persists, replace controller.

E-CL IN DISPLAY

1. Loss of calibration parameters due to noise spike or 1. Press F1 to escape, then check controller accuracy.
other EMI event.
a. Recalibrate controller. (See Factory Service Module code 77.)
b. Reset parameters to factory default settings.

dddd or -ddd IN DISPLAY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Display value exceeds 4 digit display range.
Defective or miscalibrated cold junction circuit.
Loss of setup parameters.
Internal malfunction.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Change resolution to display whole number and verify reading.
Perform cold junction calibration.
Check setup parameters.
Perform Input calibration.

OPEN IN DISPLAY (T16)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Probe disconnected.
Broken or burned-out probe.
Corroded or broken terminations.
Excessive process temperature.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect probe.
Replace probe.
Check connections.
Check process parameters.

SENS IN DISPLAY (P16)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Input exceeds range of controller.
Incorrect input wiring.
Defective transmitter.
Internal malfunction.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check input parameters.
Check input wiring.
Replace transmitter.
Perform input calibration.

OLOL IN TOP DISPLAY

1. Input exceeds range of controller.
2. Temperature exceeds range of input probe.
3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive high temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Check input parameters.
Change to input sensor with a higher temperature range.
Replace transmitter or probe.
Reduce temperature.
Perform input calibration.

1. Input is below range of controller.
2. Temperature below range of input probe.
3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive low temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Check input parameters.
Change to input sensor with a lower temperature range.
Replace transmitter or probe.
Raise temperature.
Perform input calibration.

1. RTD probe shorted.

1. Check wiring and/or replace RTD probe.

ULUL

IN TOP DISPLAY

SHrt IN DISPLAY (T16)

CONTROLLER SLUGGISH OR 1. Incorrect PID values.
2. Incorrect probe location.
NOT STABLE

560

www.redlion.net

1. See PID control.
2. Evaluate probe location.

CONTROL MODE EXPLANATIONS
ON/OFF CONTROL
The controller operates in On/Off Control when the Proportional Band is set
to 0.0%. In this control mode, the process will constantly oscillate around the
setpoint value. The On/Off Control Hysteresis (balanced around the setpoint)
can be used to eliminate output chatter. Output O1 Control Action can be set to
reverse for heating (output on when below the setpoint) or direct for cooling
(output on when above the setpoint) applications.

ON/OFF CONTROL - HEAT/COOL OUTPUT FIGURES

ON/OFF CONTROL REVERSE OR DIRECT ACTING FIGURES

Note: CHYS in the On/Off Control Figures refers to the On/Off Control Hysteresis
(CHYS) in parameter Module 2.

For heat and cool systems, O1 Control Action is set to reverse (heat) and the
Alarm 2 Action is set to cooling (O2). The Proportional Band is set to 0.0 and
the Relative Gain in Cooling to 0.0. The Deadband in Cooling sets the amount
of operational deadband or overlap between the outputs. The setpoint and the
On/Off Control Hysteresis applies to both O1 and O2 outputs. The hysteresis is
balanced in relationship to the setpoint and deadband value.

PID CONTROL
In PID Control, the controller processes the input and then calculates a
control output power value by use of a modified Proportional Band, Integral
Time, and Derivative Time control algorithm. The system is controlled with the
new output power value to keep the process at the setpoint. The Control Action
for PID Control can be set to reverse for heating (output on when below the
setpoint) or direct for cooling (output on when above the setpoint) applications.
For heat and cool systems, the heat (O1) and cool (O2) outputs are both used.
The PID parameters can be established by using Auto-Tune, or they can be
Manually tuned to the process.

1-717-767-6511

TYPICAL PID RESPONSE CURVE

561

TIME PROPORTIONAL PID CONTROL

MANUAL CONTROL MODE

In Time Proportional applications, the output power is converted into output
On time using the Cycle Time. For example, with a four second cycle time and
75% power, the output will be on for three seconds (4 × 0.75) and off for
one second.
The cycle time should be no greater than 1/10 of the natural period of
oscillation for the process. The natural period is the time it takes for one
complete oscillation when the process is in a continuously oscillating state.

In Manual Control Mode, the controller operates as an open loop system
(does not use the setpoint and process feedback). The user adjusts the
percentage of power through the % Power display to control the power for
Output O1. When Alarm 2 is configured for Cooling (O2), Manual operation
provides 0 to 100% power to O1 (heating) and -100 to 0% power to O2
(Cooling). The Low and High Output Power limits are ignored when the
controller is in Manual.

LINEAR PID CONTROL

MODE TRANSFER

In Linear PID Control applications, the Analog Output Assignment ANAS is set
to % Output Power, OP. The Analog Low Scaling, ANLO , is set to 0.0 and the
Analog High Scaling, ANHI , is set to 100.0. The Analog Output will then be
proportional to the PID calculated % output power for Heat or Cooling per the
Control Action OPAC. For example, with 0 VDC to 10 VDC (scaled 0 to 100%)
and 75% power, the analog output will be 7.5 VDC.

When transferring the controller mode between Automatic and Manual, the
controlling outputs remain constant, exercising true “bumpless” transfer. When
transferring from Manual to Automatic, the power initially remains steady, but
Integral Action corrects (if necessary) the closed loop power demand at a rate
proportional to the Integral Time.

AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODE
In Automatic Control Mode, the percentage of output power is automatically
determined by PID or On/Off calculations based on the setpoint and process
feedback. For this reason, PID Control and On/Off Control always imply
Automatic Control Mode.

PID TUNING EXPLANATIONS
AUTO-TUNE
Auto-Tune is a user-initiated function that allows the controller to
automatically determine the Proportional Band, Integral Time, Derivative Time,
Digital Filter, Control Output Dampening Time, and Relative Gain (Heat/Cool)
values based upon the process characteristics. The Auto-Tune operation cycles
the controlling output(s) at a control point three-quarters of the distance
between the present process value and the setpoint. The nature of these
oscillations determines the settings for the controller’s parameters.
Prior to initiating Auto-Tune, it is important that the controller and system be
first tested. (This can be accomplished in On/Off Control or Manual Control
Mode.) If there is a wiring, system or controller problem, Auto-Tune may give
incorrect tuning or may never finish. Auto-Tune may be initiated at start-up,
from setpoint or at any other process point. However, ensure normal process
conditions (example: minimize unusual external load disturbances) as they will
have an effect on the PID calculations.
Start Auto-Tune
Below are the parameters and factory settings that affect Auto-Tune. If these
setting are acceptable then Auto-Tune can be started just by performing two
steps. If changes are needed, then they must be made before starting Auto-Tune.
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

tYpE

Input Type

FLtr

Digital Filtering

CHYS

On/Off Control
Hysteresis

tcod

Auto-Tune Code

db-2

Deadband

tUnE

Auto-Tune Access

FACTORY
SETTING

MODULE

tc- T16
Curr P16
1
2 T16
0.2 P16
[0]

1-IN

[0]

5-O2

[HidE]

3-LC

1-IN
2-OP
2-OP

1. Enter the Setpoint value in the Display Loop.
2. Initiate Auto-Tune by changing Auto-Tune Start tUNE to YES in the Hidden
Loop.
Auto-Tune Progress
The controller will oscillate the controlling output(s) for four cycles. The
bottom display will flash the cycle phase number. Parameter viewing is
permitted during Auto-Tune. The time to complete the Auto-Tune cycles is
process dependent. The controller should automatically stop Auto-Tune and
store the calculated values when the four cycles are complete. If the controller
remains in Auto-Tune unusually long, there may be a process problem. AutoTune may be stopped by entering NO in Auto-Tune Start tUNE.

562

www.redlion.net

AUTO-TUNE CODE FIGURE

AUTO-TUNE OPERATION
(REVERSE ACTING)

PID Adjustments
In some applications, it may be necessary to fine tune the Auto-Tune
calculated PID parameters. To do this, a chart recorder or data logging device is
needed to provide a visual means of analyzing the process. Compare the actual
process response to the PID response figures with a step change to the process.
Make changes to the PID parameters in no more than 20% increments from the
starting value and allow the process sufficient time to stabilize before evaluating
the effects of the new parameter settings.

In some unusual cases, the Auto-Tune function may not yield acceptable
control results or induced oscillations may cause system problems. In these
applications, Manual Tuning is an alternative.

PROCESS RESPONSE EXTREMES

MANUAL TUNING
A chart recorder or data logging device is necessary to measure the time
between process cycles. This procedure is an alternative to the controller’s AutoTune function. It will not provide acceptable results if system problems exist.
1. Set the Proportional Band (ProP) to 10.0% for temperature models (T16) and
100.0% for process models (P16).
2. Set both the Integral Time (Intt) and Derivative Time (dErt) to 0 seconds.
3. Set the Output Dampening Time (OPdP) in Output Module 2-OP to 0 seconds.
4. Set the Output Cycle Time [CYCt] in Output Module 2-OP to no higher than
one-tenth of the process time constant (when applicable).
5. Place the controller in Manual USEr Control Mode trnF in the Hidden Loop
and adjust the % Power to drive the process value to the Setpoint value.
Allow the process to stabilize after setting the % Power. Note: trnF must be
set to HidE in Parameter Lockouts Module 3-LC.
6. Place the controller in Automatic (Auto) Control Mode trnF in the Hidden
Loop. If the process will not stabilize and starts to oscillate, set the
Proportional Band two times higher and go back to Step 5.

7. If the process is stable, decrease Proportional Band setting by two times and
change the Setpoint value a small amount to excite the process. Continue
with this step until the process oscillates in a continuous nature.
8. Fix the Proportional Band to three times the setting that caused the oscillation
in Step 7.
9. Set the Integral Time to two times the period of the oscillation.
10. Set the Derivative Time to 1/8 (0.125) of the Integral Time.
11. Set the Output Dampening Time to 1/40 (0.025) the period of the oscillation.

1-717-767-6511

563

PARAMETER VALUE CHART

Programmer:______________________Date:_________
Controller Number:_______ Security Code:_______

DISPLAY LOOP
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

SETPOINT VALUE SP1

SP
SP
OP
ProP *

SETPOINT VALUE SP2

Intt *

INTEGRAL TIME

OUTPUT POWER PERCENT
PROPORTIONAL BAND

* DERIVATIVE TIME

dErt
AL-1 *
AL-2 *

ALARM 1 VALUE
ALARM 2 VALUE

OUTPUT MODULE (2-OP)
FACTORY SETTING

USER SETTING

0 T16
0.0 P16
20 T16
2.0 P16
0.0
4.0 T16
100.0 P16
120 T16
40 P16
30 T16
4 P16
0
0

* Factory Setting places these parameters in the Hidden Loop (set to
Lockout Module 3-LC.

HidE in

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

CYCt
OPAC
OPLO
OPHI
OPFL
OPdP

CYCLE TIME

CHYS
tcod
AntP
ANAS
ANUt
ANLO
ANHI

ON/OFF CONTROL HYSTERESIS

CONTROL ACTION
OUTPUT POWER LOWER LIMIT
OUTPUT POWER UPPER LIMIT
SENSOR FAIL POWER PRESET
OUTPUT POWER DAMPENING

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

2.0
rEv
0
100
0
3 T16
1 P16
2 T16
0.2 P16

AUTO-TUNE CODE
ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE
ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT
ANALOG UPDATE TIME
ANALOG LOW SCALING
ANALOG HIGH SCALING

4-20
OP
0
0.0
100.0

HIDDEN LOOP
DISPLAY

SPSL
SPrP
trnF
tUNE

PARAMETER

FACTORY SETTING

SETPOINT SELECT

USER SETTING

SP1
0.0
Auto
NO

SETPOINT RAMP RATE
CONTROL MODE TRANSFER
AUTO-TUNE START

DISPLAY

INPUT MODULE (1-IN ) T16 ONLY
DISPLAY

tYPE
SCAL
dCPt
FLtr
SHFt
SPLO
SPHI
InPt
F1In

PARAMETER

FACTORY SETTING

INPUT TYPE

USER SETTING

tc°F
0
1
0
0
9999
PLOC
NONE

TEMPERATURE SCALE
DECIMAL RESOLUTION
DIGITAL FILTERING
SHIFT/OFFSET
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT
USER INPUT FUNCTION
F1 KEY FUNCTION

tYPE
PCt
dCPt
rnd
FLtr
dSP1
InP1
dSP2
InP2
SPLO
SPHI
InPt
F1In

564

PARAMETER

INPUT TYPE
PERCENT ANNUNCIATOR
DECIMAL RESOLUTION
ROUNDING INCREMENT
DIGITAL FILTERING
DISPLAY VALUE SCALING 1
INPUT VALUE SCALING 1
DISPLAY VALUE SCALING 2
INPUT VALUE SCALING 2
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT
USER INPUT FUNCTION
F1 KEY FUNCTION

FACTORY SETTING

Curr
NO
0.0
0.1
1
0.0
4.00
100.0
20.00
0.0
999.9

SP
OP
PId
AL
CodE
SPSL
SPrP
trnF
tUNE
ALrS

PARAMETER

SETPOINT ACCESS
OUTPUT POWER ACCESS
PID VALUE ACCESS
ALARM VALUE ACCESS
ACCESS CODE
SETPOINT SELECT ACCESS
SETPOINT RAMP ACCESS
TRANSFER CONTROL ACCESS
AUTO-TUNE ACCESS
RESET ALARMS ACCESS

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

dISP
dISP
HIdE
HIdE
0
LOC
HIdE
LOC
HIdE
LOC

ALARM MODULE (4-AL)
DISPLAY

INPUT MODULE (1-IN ) P16 ONLY
DISPLAY

LOCKOUT MODULE (3-LC)

USER SETTING

ACt1
Lit1
rSt1
Stb1
AL-1
ACt2
Lit2
rSt2
Stb2
AL-2
AHYS

PARAMETER

ALARM 1 ACTION
ALARM 1 ANNUNCIATOR
ALARM 1 RESET MODE
ALARM 1 STANDBY
ALARM 1 VALUE
ALARM 2 ACTION
ALARM 2 ANNUNCIATOR
ALARM 2 RESET MODE

FACTORY
SETTING

USER SETTING

AuHI
nor
Auto
NO
0
AuHI
nor
Auto

ALARM 2 STANDBY
ALARM 2 VALUE
ALARM 1 & 2 HYSTERESIS

0
1 T16
0.1 P16

COOLING MODULE (5-O2)
DISPLAY

CYC2
GAN2
db-2

www.redlion.net

PARAMETER

CYCLE TIME
RELATIVE GAIN
DEADBAND

FACTORY
SETTING

2.0
1.0
0

USER SETTING

HIDDEN
LOOP

Percent
Symbol

Heat/Cool
Deadband/Overlap

Cooling
Relative Gain

1-717-767-6511

Factory
Service Code

Cooling
Cycle Time

Alarm 1
Value

Alarm 1
Standby

Alarm 1
Action

Alarm 1
Reset Mode

Output
Power
Access

Alarm 1
Annunciator

Analog Low
Scaling

Alarm 2
Standby

Alarm 2
Annunciator

Alarm 2
Action

Alarm 2
Reset Mode

Setpoint
Ramp Rate
Access

Setpoint
Select
Access

Analog High
Scaling

On/Off Control
Hysteresis

Alarm 2
Value

Alarm 1 & 2
Hysteresis

Reset Alarms
Access

- T16 only
- P16 only

Auto-Tune
Auto/Manual
Off/On Access
Transfer
Access

Auto-Tune
Code

F1 Key
Function

Input
Value 1

Advances to the next
module, then changes
parameter selection/value.

Display
Value 1

User Input
Function

Output Power
Dampening

Setpoint
High Limit

Sensor Fail
Power Preset

Access
Code

Analog Output
Update Time

Output Power
High Limit

Setpoint
Low Limit

Rounding
Increment

Alarm
Values
Access

Analog Output
Assignment

Decimal
Resolution

Shift/Offset

Output Power
Low Limit

Input
Value 2

Temp
Scale

Digital
Filtering

Enters displayed module,
then advances to the next
parameter.

PID
Values
Access

Analog
Output Range

Control
Action

Display
Value 2

Ends and returns to
start of Display Loop.

Parameter availability is model and program dependent.

Setpoint
Access

Cycle
Time

Input
Type

DISPLAY
LOOP

T16 & P16 PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

565

MODEL T48 - 1/16 DIN TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
TEMPERATURE AND SETPOINT
STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES
ACCEPTS 10 TYPES OF SENSOR INPUTS (Thermocouple or RTD)
OPTIONAL HEATER CURRENT MONITOR AND HEATER BREAK
ALARM
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS
OPTIONAL TWO LINEAR DC OUTPUTS (0 to 10 V, 0/4 to 20 mA)
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODES
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP

OPTIONAL TRIAC OUTPUT

PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (Digital) FOR ADDED FLEXIBILITY

SECOND SETPOINT SETTING

SENSOR ERROR COMPENSATION (Offset) AND BREAK
DETECTION

OPTIONAL REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT (0/4 to 20 mA)

HEATING AND OPTIONAL COOLING OUTPUTS
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS

OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
PC SOFTWARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
UL Recognized Component,
File # E156876

FIELD REPLACEABLE OUTPUT BOARD
(Relay or Logic/SSR Drive)

DESCRIPTION

The T48 Controller accepts signals from a variety of temperature sensors
(thermocouple or RTD elements), precisely displays the process temperature,
and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional or linear DC)
to maintain the process at the desired temperature. The controller’s
comprehensive yet simple programming allows it to meet a wide variety of
application requirements.
The controller operates in the PID control mode for both heating and cooling,
with on-demand auto-tune, which will establish the tuning constants. The PID
tuning constants may be fine-tuned by the operator at any time and then locked
out from further modification. The controller employs a unique overshoot
suppression feature, which allows the quickest response without excessive
overshoot. The unit can be transferred to operate in the manual mode, providing
the operator with direct control of the output. The controller may also be
programmed to operate in the ON/OFF control mode with adjustable hysteresis.
A second setpoint is available on select models to allow quick selection of a
different setpoint setting.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process temperature and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. On many models the main control output and the alarm outputs
are field replaceable.
Optional alarm(s) can be configured to activate according to a variety of actions
(Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, Band IN or OUT, and Heater Current
Break) with adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the alarm during
power-up until the temperature stabilizes outside the alarm region. The second
alarm can be configured as a secondary PID output (heat/cool applications).
Optional Main Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) can be used for control or
temperature re-transmission purposes. Programmable output update time
reduces valve or actuator activity. The output range can be scaled independent
of the input range.
Optional Second Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) provides an independent
temperature re-transmission, while the main Linear DC output is being used for
control. The output range can be scaled independent of the input range.
Optional Heater Current Monitor provides a direct readout of process heater
current. An alarm can be programmed to signal when the heater has failed. This
provides early warning of system failure before product quality is affected.
Optional Remote Setpoint input (0/4 to 20 mA) allows for cascade control
loops, where tighter control is required; and allows for remotely driven setpoint

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PANEL CUT-OUT

566

www.redlion.net

signal from computers or other similar equipment. Straightforward end point
scaling with independent filtering and local/remote transfer option expand the
controller’s flexibility.
The optional RS485 serial communication interface provides two-way
communication between a T48 and other compatible equipment such as a
printer, PLC, HMI, or a host computer. In multipoint applications (up to
thirty-two), the address number of each T48 on the line can be programmed
from 0 to 99. Data from the T48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm
output(s) may be reset by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. PC software, SFCRM, allows for easy configuration of
controller parameters. These settings can be saved to disk for later use or used
for multi-controller down loading. On-line help is provided within the software.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a tinted
front panel. The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly
installed. Multiple units can be stacked horizontally or vertically. Modern
surface-mount technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise
interference makes the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.

Cold junction compensation: Less than ±1°C (±1.5°C max), error over 0
to 50°C max. ambient temperature range. Defeated for Linear mV
indication mode.
Resolution: 1° for all types, or 0.1° for T, E, J, K, and N only.
TC TYPE

T
E
J
K
R
S
B

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the T48 to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators not
equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the controller. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended.

N
mV

RTD TYPE

385

1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Temperature Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages:
-

Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears

when
when
when
when
when
when

392
OHMS

DV
O1
A1
A2

BS 1843

blue (+)
red (-)
violet (+)
red (-)
white (+)
red (-)
yellow (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
grey (+)
red (-)
orange (+)
red (-)
no standard

white (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
yellow (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
no standard
orange (+)
blue (-)
no standard

RANGE

-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
1.0 to 320.0

8. INDICATION ACCURACY: ±(0.3% of Span +1°C.) includes NIST
conformity, cold junction effect and A/D conversion errors at 23°C after 20
min. warm-up.
9. USER INPUT: Internally pulled up to +5 VDC (1 MΩ).
VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 V max., VIH = 3.65 V min.,
IOFF = 1μA max.
Response Time: 120 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Setpoint Ramp Enable
Reset Alarms
Setpoint 1/Setpoint 2 Select
Local/Remote Setpoint Select Serial block print

measurement exceeds + sensor range.
measurement exceeds - sensor range.
open sensor is detected.
shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.

LED Status Annunciators:
%P
MN

-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to +750°C
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
-328 to 1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F
0 to 1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
0 to 1768°C
+32 to 3214°F
+149 to +1820°C
+300 to +3308°F
-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F
-5.00 to +56.00

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

7. RTD INPUT: 2 or 3 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760),
alpha = 0.0039162
Excitation: 150 μA typical
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω max. per input lead

SPECIFICATIONS

“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“OPEN”
“SHrt”
“...”
“-..”

RANGE

- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Flashing: Controller is in manual mode.
On: Local Setpoint (Remote Setpoint option)
Off: Remote Setpoint
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error) from
temperature setpoint or shows heater current.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active (for A1 option.).
- Alarm #2 is active OR
- Cooling output (O2) is active

2. POWER:
AC Versions: 85 VAC min. to 250 VAC max., 50 to 60 Hz, 8 VA max.
DC Versions:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC; 7 W
AC Power: 24 VAC ± 10%; 50 to 60 Hz, 9 VA
3. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modification and setup of
controller functions and one external input user for parameter lockout or
other functions.
4. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2 PROM retains all programmable parameters and
values.
5. MAIN SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: Less than 300 msec typ., 400 msec max. (to within 99% of
final value w/step input; typically, response is limited to response time of
probe)
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering.)
Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC max. for 15 seconds max.
6. THERMOCOUPLE INPUT:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, Linear mV, software selectable
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ all types
Lead resistance effect: 0.25 μV/Ω

10. CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS: (Heating, Cooling or Alarm)
Relay outputs with Form A contacts:
Contact Rating: 3 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load)
1/10 HP @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life
expectancy.)
Logic/SSR Drive Outputs:
Rating: 45 mA @ 4 V min., 7 V nominal
Triac Outputs:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min Load Current: 10 mA
Offstate Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal transient snubber
11. MAIN CONTROL:
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or Linear DC
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable
12. ALARMS: 1 or 2 alarms (optional)
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting

1-717-767-6511

567

Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Heater break alarm
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Probe Break Action: Upscale
Annunciator: LED backlight for “A1”, “A2”
13. COOLING: Software selectable (overrides alarm 2)
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time Proportioning
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Heat/Cool Deadband Overlap: Programmable
14. MAIN AND SECOND LINEAR DC OUTPUT: (optional)
Main: Control or Re-transmission, programmable update rate from 0.1 sec to
250 sec
Second: Re-transmission only, fixed update rate of 0.1 sec
OUTPUT **
RANGE

0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

ACCURACY *
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY *
(0 to 50°C)

0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD

0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD

COMPLIANCE

RESOLUTION

10k ohm min.

1/3500

500 ohm max.

1/3500

500 ohm max.

1/2800

* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages after 20 minutes warm-up. Output
accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an 18 to 28°C range at 10
to 75% RH environment; and accuracy over a 0 to 50°C range at 0 to 85%
RH (non-condensing) environment. Accuracy over the wide temperature
range reflects the temperature coeffecient of the internal circuitry.
** Outputs are independently jumper selectable for either 10 V or 20 mA. The
output range may be field calibrated to yield approximately 10% overrange
and a small underrange (negative) signal.
15. REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT: (optional)
Input type:
0/4 to 20 mA
Input Resistance: 10 Ω
Overrange: -5% to 105%
Overload: 100 mA (continuous)
Scale Range: -999 to 9999 degrees or -99.9 to 999.9 degrees.
Resolution: 1 part in 10,000.
Accuracy:
At 25° C: ±(0.1 % of full scale +½ LSD)
Over 0 to 50°C range: ±(0.2% of full scale +½ LSD)
Reading Rate: 10/sec.
Setpoint Filtering: Programmable Digital
Setpoint Ramping: Programmable, 0.1 to 999.9 degrees/minute.
16. HEATER CURRENT MONITOR INPUT: (optional)
Type: Single phase, full wave monitoring of load currents controlled by main
output (01).
Input: 100 mA AC output from current transformer (RLC #CT004001) or
any CT with 100 mA AC output.
Display Scale Range: 1.0 to 999.9 Amps or 0.0 to 100.0%
Input Resistance: 5 Ω
Accuracy:
At 25° C: ±(0.5 % of full scale +½ LSD), (5 to 100% of Range)
Over 0 to 50°C range: ±(1.0% of full scale +½ LSD), (5 to 100% of Range)
Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz.
Alarm Mode: Dual acting; heater element fail detect and control device fail
detect.
Overrange: 105% Capacity
Overload: 200 mA (continuous).
17. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS: (optional)
Type: RS485 multipoint, balanced interface
Baud Rate: 300 to 9600
Data Format: 7O1, 7E1, 7N2, 8N1
Node Address: 0-99, max of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 2-100 msec or 100-200 msec
Data Encoding: ASCII
Isolation w.r.t Main Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min. (50 V working)
Not isolated w.r.t. Remote Setpoint or Heater Current inputs, or Analog
Output common
Note: RS485 and the Analog Output commons are not internally isolated
within the controller. The terminating equipment of these outputs must not
share the same common (ie. earth ground).

568

18. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Range: -40 to 80°C
Span Drift (max.): 130 ppm/°C, main input
Zero Drift (max.): 1μV/°C, main input
Operating and Storage Humidity:
85% max. relative humidity (non-condensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
19. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
AC line with respect to all Inputs and outputs: 250 V working (2300 V for
1 minute).
Main input with respect to Analog Outputs, Remote Setpoint Input,
Heater Current Input: 50 V working (2300 V for 1 minute).
All other inputs and outputs with respect to relay contacts: 2000 VAC
Not isolated between Analog Outputs, Remote Setpoint and Heater Current
commons.
20. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1369-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 96ME50224-040396
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. No loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m.
Unit is panel mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or
equivalent) that provides at least 20 dB shielding effectiveness. Metal
panel is connected to earth ground.
Power Line and I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC#LFIL0000 or equivalent.
OR
Install 2 ferrite cores, RLC#FCOR0000 or equivalent, to AC lines at
unit for frequencies above 5 MHz.
I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
21. CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals
22. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch. Panel
latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking. One piece
tinted plastic bezel. Bezel assembly with circuit boards can be removed from the
case to change the output board without removing the case from the panel or
disconnecting wiring. Unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use,
when properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
23. WEIGHT: 0.38 lbs (0.17 kgs)

www.redlion.net

BASIC OPERATION
The T48 controls a process temperature by measuring the temperature via an
input probe, then calculating a control output power value by use of a modified
PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new output power
value to keep the process temperature at setpoint. The PID control algorithm
incorporates features which provide for high control accuracy and low
temperature overshoot from process disturbances.

FRONT PANEL FEATURES
In the normal operating mode, the unit displays the process temperature
in the upper display. One of the following parameters can be viewed in the
lower display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Temperature Deviation
- Heater Current
- Temperature symbol (F or C)
- Blank Display
The user scrolls through these parameters by pressing the D button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the P button
and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then entered
by the P button, which advances the user to the next parameter. Pressing the D
button immediately returns the controller to the normal operating mode without
changing the currently selected parameter.

HARDWARE FEATURES
A fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance, thus providing excellent temperature control.
Measurement accuracy of 0.3% of span ±1°C or better, provides close process
control conforming to the desired control setpoint value. The T48 accepts a
variety of both thermocouple and RTD temperature probes. An output board
contains the Main Control output, Alarm 1 output, Alarm 2/Cooling output,
and/or Linear DC output. Since the controller is serviceable from the front of
the panel, the output board (on some models) may be easily changed or replaced
without disturbing the wiring behind the panel. No re-programming is required
when changing or replacing the output board for units without the Linear DC
output option. Units with the linear output option require calibration procedure
for the new linear output.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
temperature control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.

A Second Linear DC output is dedicated for retransmission of input
temperature. The output can be scaled and converted independent of the input
and Main Linear DC output. This output is isolated from the input.

SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
A second setpoint value can be programmed which can be made active by a
user input and/or through the front panel on selected models.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature reduces
thermal shock to the process and helps to minimize temperature overshoot.

INPUT FEATURES
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating temperature characteristics, helping to provide better
temperature control. A programmable temperature shift function can be used to
compensate for probe errors or to have multiple T48 units indicate the same
nominal temperature.
The programmable User Input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), transfer to
second setpoint, etc.

OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Automatic sensor probe break detection,
for fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). Programmable output cycle time,
output hysteresis and dampening can reduce output activity without degrading
control accuracy. The main outputs can operate in PID, ON/OFF, or manual
control modes.

CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS
In addition to the Linear DC outputs, there are up to three types of ON/OFF
outputs.These outputs can be relay, logic, or triac for control or alarm purposes.
Relay outputs can switch user applied AC or DC voltages. Logic/SSR drive
outputs supply power to external SSR power units. One Logic/SSR Drive
output can control up to four SSR power units at one time. The Triac output
supplies one Amp of AC current for control of an external AC relay or triac
device.

AUTO-TUNE

REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT
The remote setpoint input facilitates the use of a remote signal to drive the
controller’s setpoint. The remote signal can be scaled independent to that of the
controller’s range. The controller’s response to local/remote setpoint transfers
can be programmed. Also, the remote signal is filtered by use of an adaptive
filter. With this filter, relatively large filtering time constants can be used
without suffering from long settling times. The time constant and filter disable
band are programmable. Additionally, the remote signal can also be velocity
limited (or ramped) to slow the controller’s response to changes in setpoint.
This results in a steady control response with no overshoot.

HEATER CURRENT MONITOR
The T48 provides a direct readout of process heater current. This provides
valuable information regarding single phase heater system integrity. It is
especially useful on extruder and large oven applications where adjacent
controllers mask the effect of a failed heater. The heater break alarm senses two
types of heater system faults:
1) Main control output is “on” and heater current is below alarm value. This
indicates failed heater or failed parts of heater, breaker trip, failed power
control device, etc.
2) Main control output is “off” and heater current is above 10% of alarm value.
This indicates a failed power control device, wiring fault, etc.

The T48 has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular thermal process. After
completion of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for
that process and loaded into non-volatile memory. The operator may view and
modify the parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.

RS485 Communications
The RS485 communications option allows the connection of up to 32 devices
on a single pair of wires with a distance of up to 4,000 feet and a maximum
baud rate of 9600. Since the same pair of wires are used for both transmit and
receive, only one way communication is possible at any given time. The
controller has a programmable response time to allow the host device adequate
time to release the communication line for a transmission.
Selected parameters from the T48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm
output(s) may be reset by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. It is also possible to invoke Auto-tune through the serial port.
Serial communications used with SFCRM software allows for easy controller
parameter configuration by computer.

HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS

The T48 is available with dual outputs to provide heating and cooling to
those processes that require them. For example, many extruder applications
require both heating and cooling to maintain accurate extruder barrel and die
temperatures. The T48 is easily configured for these types of applications.

1-717-767-6511

569

CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING

Configuration 2, Outputs (2-OP) *

Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial set-up.
The following four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any
required user-interface level:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode

UNPROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *

The Unprotected Parameters Mode is accessible from the Normal Display
Mode when program disable is inactive or when the proper access code number
from the Protected Parameter Mode is entered. The Configuration Parameter
Modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”

Enter setpoint
Enter output power
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Select configuration access point
Return to normal display mode

PROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *

The Protected Parameters Mode is enabled when program disable is active.
This mode prevents access to the Configuration Parameter Modes without the
proper access code number. Only the parameters that are enabled in the
Configuration 3 parameter (lock-out section) can be accessed.
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”

Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter value to access unprotected parameters and
configuration parameters

HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *

The Hidden Function Mode is accessible from the Normal Display Mode.
The functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in Configuration 3
parameter (lock-out section).
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”

Select local (SP1 or SP2) or remote setpoint
Transfer between automatic (PID) control and manual control
Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
Reset latched alarms

CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE

The Configuration Parameter Mode allows the operator to set-up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the Configuration Access
Point, allowing the user to return to the Normal Display Mode.

Configuration 1, Inputs (1-IN)
“tYPE”
“SCAL”
“dCPt”
“FLtr”
“SHFt”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”

Select input probe type
Select temperature scale
Select temperature resolution
Select level of input filtering
Enter input correction shift (offset)
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function

“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcOd”
“ANtP”
“ANAS”
“ANut”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”

Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select output control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter probe fail power preset
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Main Linear DC analog output range
Main Linear DC analog output source
Main Linear DC analog output update time
Main Linear DC analog output scaling low
Main Linear DC analog output scaling high

Configuration 3, Parameter Lock-Outs (3-LC) *
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“Hcur”
“UdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”

Select setpoint access level
Select power access level
Enable deviation display
Enable heater current display
Enable temperature scale display
Enter parameter access code
Select PID access level
Select alarm access level
Enable alarm reset access
Enable local/remote selection
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation

Configuration 4, Alarms (4-AL) *
“ACt1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“ACt2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”

Select operation mode of alarm #1, or select heat output
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2, or select cooling output
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms

Configuration 5, Cooling (5-O2) *
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”

- Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
- Enter cooling relative gain
- Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap

Configuration 6, Serial Communications (6-SC) *
“bAUd”
“ConF”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PoPt”

Select baud rate
Select character frame format
Enter address
Select abbreviated or full transmission
Select print options

Configuration 7, Remote Setpoint Input (7-N2) *
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“FLtr”
“bAnd”
“trnF”

Enter remote setpoint display scaling value #1
Enter remote setpoint process scaling value #1
Enter remote setpoint display scaling value #2
Enter remote setpoint process scaling value #2
Enter remote setpoint filter time constant
Enter remote setpoint filter disable band
Select Local/Remote setpoint transfer response

Configuration 7 - Heater Current Parameters (7-N2) *
“Hcur”

- Enter full scale rating of CT

Configuration 8, Second Linear DC Analog Output (8-A2) *
“A2tP”
“A2LO”
“A2HI”

- Second linear DC analog range
- Second linear DC analog scaling low
- Second linear DC analog scaling high

Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations (9-FS)
“Code 48”
“Code 66”

- Calibrate Instrument
- Reset parameters to factory setting

* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

570

www.redlion.net

MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING
The T48 is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel
latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum spacing
from center line to center line of units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This spacing is the
same for vertical or horizontal stacking.
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that
the maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
VERTICAL UNIT STACKING

ACCESSORY - EXTERNAL SSR POWER UNIT
The external SSR Power Unit is used with T48s equipped with Logic/SSR
Drive outputs to switch loads up to 240 VAC @ 45 Amps, 25°C ambient. The
unit is operated by applying a low level DC control signal to the isolated
input. The unit features zero cross detection circuits which reduces radiated
RFI when switching load currents. With no contacts to wear out, the SSR
Power Unit provides virtually limitless operational life. The unit is supplied
with an integral heat sink for immediate installation.

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
HORIZONTAL UNIT STACKING

PANEL CUT-OUT SPACING FOR MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING.
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT SHOWN.

ACCESSORY - CURRENT TRANSFORMER-50 A
The external Current Transformer is used when specifying the T48s
equipped with the Heater Current Monitor.

External SSR Power Unit:
Part Number: RLY50000
Switched Voltage Range: 50 to 280 VAC
Load Current: 45 Amps max. @ 25°C ambient temperature
35 Amps max. @ 50°C ambient temperature
On State Input: 3 to 32 VDC @ 1500 Ω impedance. (isolated)
(Use Logic/SSR drive output.)
Off State Input: 0.0 to 1.0 VDC
Size: 5.5" (14 cm) L x 4.75" (12 cm) W x 2.62" (6.6 cm) H

ACCESSORY - CURRENT TRANSFORMER-40 A
The external Current Transformer is used when specifying the T48s
equipped with the Heater Current Monitor.

Part Number: CT005001
Current Ratio: 50 : 0.1 (Amperes)
Operation Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz
Insulation Class: 0.6 KV BIL, 10 KV full wave.
Terminals: Brass studs No. 8-32 UNC with flat washer and hex nuts.
Window Diameter: 1.13" (28.7 mm)
Weight: 8 oz (226.0 g)

Current Transformers:
Part Number: CT004001
Current Ratio: 40 : 0.1 (Amperes)
Max Heater Current: 50 A
Dielectric Strength: 1000 VAC (For 1 minute)
Vibration Resistance: 50 Hz (Approx 10 G)
Terminals: Solder Type
Window Diameter: 0.228" (5.8 mm)
Weight: 0.406 oz (11.5 g)

1-717-767-6511

571

APPLICATION
(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)

PLASTICS EXTRUDER APPLICATION
Several T48 controllers are employed to control the
temperature of a plastics extruder. Each T48 controls a
heating element and a cooling water solenoid to maintain
each extruder zone at the desired temperature. The Heater
Current Monitor option is used to provide a readout of the
heater current. The multi-function User Input can be
programmed to allow selection of manual operation when
connected to common. This allows the user to hold the
control output of the controller during abnormal process
conditions.

OEM PAINT SPRAYER APPLICATION
An OEM manufacturing spray painting equipment utilizes
the T48 to maintain optimum paint temperature. In addition to
the low cost, the 1/16 DIN package size permits the OEM to
design temperature control into various sized painting
equipment, from small hand sprayers to large paint booths. The
heating element used to heat the paint, is connected to the Main
Control Output (OP1) programmed for On/Off control. Alarm 1
is programmed as Band Inside Acting, so that as long as the
paint temperature is within manufacturer’s specifications for
temperature, the “GO” light is on. Alarm 2 is programmed as
Band Outside acting so that the “NO GO” light is lit when the
paint temperature is more than 12° outside the manufacturer’s
specifications of 140 to 150°F.

(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)

MULTIPLE UNIT/REMOTE SETPOINT APPLICATION
Eight T48 controllers are used in a drying oven. Each T48 controls a zone
within the oven. Depending upon the material to be dried, and its initial
moisture content, the drying setpoint temperature varies. A master T48
controller transmits setpoint via linear DC output. This signal is received as
a remote setpoint signal by the other slave controllers.

Whenever the master controller’s setpoint is changed, the slave controller’s
setpoint changes automatically.
The remote setpoint input at each slave controller can be scaled
independently.

(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)

572

www.redlion.net

MODELS WITHOUT RS485 AND LINEAR DC ANALOG OUTPUT
DEDICATED
MAIN CONTROL
01 OUTPUT

DEDICATED
ALARM 1
A1 OUTPUT

(ALARM 2)
A2 OR 02
(COOL)*

REMOTE
SETPOINT
INPUT @

HEATER
CURRENT
INPUT @

REPLACEMENT
OUTPUT
BOARD

18-36 VDC/24 VAC

85 TO 250 VAC

RBD48100

T4810010

T4810000

RBD48111

T4811000

RBD48111

T4811110

T4811100

RBD48111

T4811113

T4811103

RBD48111

T4811114

T4811104

RBD48200

T4820010

T4820000

RBD48211

T4821000

RBD48211

T4821110

T4821100

RBD48211

T4821113

T4821103

RBD48211

T4821114

T4821104

T4832210

T4832200

Relay
Relay

Relay

YES
YES

Logic/SSR
Logic/SSR

Relay

Logic/SSR

Relay

Logic/SSR

Relay

Logic/SSR

Relay

Triac

Logic/SSR

YES
YES

PART NUMBERS

* - This output is programmable as either Control (PID) or as an Alarm.
@ - These part numbers are equipped with a second setpoint.
Option Boards are installed at the factory for the appropriate models. These boards are only needed for field replacement.

MODELS WITH RS485 OR LINEAR DC ANALOG OUTPUT
DEDICATED
MAIN CONTROL
O1 OUTPUT

MAIN CONTROL
O1 OR A1
(ALARM 1) *

DEDICATED
ALARM 1
A1 OUTPUT

(ALARM 2)
A2 OR O2
(COOL) *

REMOTE
SETPOINT
INPUT @

HEATER
CURRENT
INPUT @

Relay

RS485
@

Relay

T4810002
T481010A

YES

T4810111

T4810101

YES

T4810115

T4810105

YES

T4810116

T4810106

YES

T4810117

T4810107

YES

T4810118

T4810108

YES

T4810119

T4810109

Logic/SSR

Relay

YES
YES
YES
YES

Relay

Logic/SSR

YES

T4811102

YES

T4820211

T4820201

YES

T4820215

T4820205

YES

T4820216

T4820206

YES

T4820218

T4820208

YES

T4820219

T4820209

YES

T4821112

T4821102

YES
YES
YES

Relay

YES

T4811112

YES

SECOND
PART NUMBERS
ANALOG
OUTPUT** @ 18-36 VDC/24 VAC 85 TO 250 VAC

T481011A

YES
Relay

MAIN
ANALOG
OUTPUT** @

* - This output is programmable as either Control (PID) or as an Alarm.
** - This output is jumper and program selectable for either a current or voltage Linear DC output.
@ - These part numbers are equipped with a second setpoint.
- Replacement Output Board RBD48100 may be used.
2
- Replacement Output Board RBD48111 may be used.
1

ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

External SSR Power Unit (for Logic/SSR output models)
RLY

CT
SFCRM

RLY50000

Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount SSR

RLY60000

Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount SSR

RLY6A000

Three Phase DIN Rail Mount SSR

RLY70000

40 Ampere Current Transformer (for Heater Current Input models)

CT004001

50 Ampere Current Transformer (for Heater Current Input models)

CT005001

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP (for RS485 models)

SFCRM

ICM4

RS232/RS485 Serial Converter Module

ICM40030

ICM5

Three way isolated RS232/RS485 Serial Converter

ICM50000

* Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net

1-717-767-6511

573

MODEL TCU - TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNIT
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
FULL PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (USES OUTPUT MODULES)
OPTIONAL COOLING OUTPUT (USES OUTPUT MODULE)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR TEMPERATURE RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL HEATER CURRENT MONITOR AND BREAK ALARM
OPTIONAL MOTORIZED VALVE POSITION CONTROL AND
VALVE FAIL ALARM
OPTIONAL SECOND ANALOG INPUT FOR REMOTE SETPOINT
AND CASCADE CONTROL

OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES

US LISTED

PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (DIGITAL) FOR ADDED
FLEXIBILITY

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

100 msec SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
TEMPERATURE AND SETPOINT, SECOND ANALOG INPUT OR
HEATER CURRENT
ACCEPTS 10 DIFFERENT TYPES OF SENSOR INPUTS
(Thermocouple or RTD)

SENSOR ERROR COMPENSATION (Slope and Offset) AND
BREAK DETECTION
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC AND LOCAL/REMOTE SETPOINT
CONTROL MODES
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR Drive and Triac)

DESCRIPTION

The TCU Controller accepts signals from a variety of temperature sensors
(thermocouple or RTD elements), precisely displays the process temperature,
and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional or linear) to
maintain a process at the desired control point. A comprehensive set of easy to
use steps allows the controller to solve various application requirements.
The controller can operate in the PID control mode for both heating and
cooling, with on-demand auto-tune, which will establish the tuning constants.
The PID tuning constants may be fine-tuned by the operator at any time and then
locked out from further modification. The controller employs a unique overshoot
suppression feature, which allows the quickest response without excessive
overshoot. The unit can be transferred to operate in the manual mode, providing
the operator with direct control of the output. The controller may also be
programmed to operate in the ON/OFF control mode with adjustable hysteresis.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process temperature and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. Replaceable and interchangeable output modules (relay, SSR
drive, or triac) can be installed for the main control output, alarm output(s) and
cooling output.
Optional dual alarms can be configured to activate according to a variety of
actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, Band IN or OUT, Heater
Break and Valve Fail Detect) with adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature
suppresses the output during power-up until the temperature stabilizes outside
the alarm region. An optional secondary output is available (for processes that
require cooling) which provides increased control accuracy and response.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.

PANEL CUT-OUT

574

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)

OPTIONS
A linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to interface
with actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The output signal
can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following: % output
power, process temperature value, process temperature value deviation or
setpoint value. For Linear DC control applications, the adjustable output
demand dampening, output deadband and output update time parameters
expand the versatility of the TCU with final control devices.
The optional Heater Current Monitor serves as a digital ammeter for heater
current monitoring. Current transformer accessory (CT005001), is required. An
alarm event output can be programmed to signal when the heater or heater
control devices have failed, before damage to process material occurs. The
Heater Break alarm triggers under two conditions:
1) The main output (OP1) is “on” and the heater current is below the heater
current alarm value, indicating an aged or failed heater.
2) Output (OP1) is “off” and the heater current is more than 10% of the alarm
value, indicating a shorted heater control device or other problem.
The optional Motorized Valve Positioner directly controls the position of a
valve by the use of twin outputs (open and close) to control the direction of
motor rotation. The motor position defines the opening position of the valve.
Two control modes are possible: position control, which makes use of the
slidewire feedback signal supplied with the positioner and velocity control, in
which no slidewire feedback signal is used. Parameters are provided to adjust
the operation of the valve. These include:
Valve activity hysteresis
Valve update time
Variable control dampening
Slidewire signal fail action
Adjustable valve position limits.
The valve positioner TCU achieves tight process control, yet minimizes
unnecessary valve activity. An alarm event output or display alarm can be
programmed under loss of slidewire feedback or under valve fail detection.
The optional Second Analog Input (0-20 mA DC) can be configured as a
remote setpoint signal or as a secondary process signal. Configuration of the
second analog input as a remote setpoint signal allows ratio control, master
setpoint/multiple slave operation, and the ability to cascade the TCU with
another controller (external cascade). Configuration of the second input as a
secondary process signal allows operation as a two-process cascade controller
within a single unit (internal cascade). In either control mode, parameters are
provided to scale, configure, communicate and monitor the activity of both
analog inputs. A square law linearizer function can be used to linearize signals
derived from flow transmitters.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communication interface provides twoway communication between a TCU unit and other compatible equipment such
as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In multipoint
applications the address number of each unit on the line can be programmed from
0-99. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair of wires. The
Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be interrogated or
changed by sending the proper command code via serial communications. Alarm
output(s) may also be reset via the serial communications interface option.
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for wash down and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount
technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference makes
the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the TCU to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red
Lion Controls model IMT (thermocouple) or model IMR (RTD) units may be
used for this purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power
feeds independent from other equipment.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Temperature Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages (Model dependent):
-

Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears

when
when
when
when

measurement exceeds + sensor range.
measurement exceeds - sensor range.
open sensor is detected.
shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)

Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears

when
when
when
when

display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.
loss of slidewire signal is detected.
valve actuator error is detected.

2. POWER: 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line variation effect, 48
to 62 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
LED Backlight Status Indicators (Model dependent):
%PW
DEV
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2
OPN
CLS
CUR
SEC
MAN
REM

- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error)
from temperature setpoint.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active.
- Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option).
- Cooling output is active (for Cooling Option).
- Valve positioner OPEN output is active
(for Valve Positioner option).
- Valve positioner CLOSE output is active
(for Valve Positioner option).
- Lower auxiliary display shows heater current
(for Heater Current Monitor option).
- Lower auxiliary display shows second analog input
(For Second Analog Input option).
- Flashing: Controller is in manual mode.
- ON: controller is in remote setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input option).
- OFF: controller is in local setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input option).
- Flashing: controller is in Manual control mode
(Second Analog Input optional).

4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modifying and setup of
controller functions and one external input for parameter lockout or other
functions.
5. MAIN SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: 300 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe)
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
DC Linear: Programmable preset output
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering.
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC for 30 seconds.
6. THERMOCOUPLE:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, Linear mV
Input Impedance: 20 M Ω all types
Lead resistance effect: 20 μV/350 Ω
Cold junction compensation: Less than ±1°C error over 0 - 50°C ambient
temperature range. Disabled for Linear mV type.
Resolution: 1°C/F all types, or 0.1°C/F for T, E, J, K, and N only.
7. RTD: 2, 3 or 4 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760),
alpha = 0.003916
Excitation: 0.175 mA
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 7 Ω maximum
TC TYPE

SAFETY SUMMARY

“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“OPEN”
“SHrt”

“....”
“-...”
“SLid”
“VALV”

T
E
J
K
R
S
B
N
mV
RTD
(385)
RTD
(392)
OHMS

1-717-767-6511

RANGE

ACCURACY

-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to 750°C
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
-328 to +1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
+200 to +1820°C
+300 to +3308°F
-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F
-5.00 to 56.00
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
1.0 to 320.0

0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.15% + 1.5°C
0.15% + 2.7°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.7°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.15% + 2.5°C
0.15% + 4.5°F
0.20% + 1.5°C
0.20% + 2.5°F
0.15% + 1 LSD
0.10% + 0.5°C
0.10% + 0.9°F
0.10% + 0.5°C
0.10% + 0.9°F
0.15% + 1 LSD

WIRE COLOR
(ANSI)

blue
violet
white
yellow
black
black
grey
orange
__

575

8. RANGE AND ACCURACY:
Errors include NIST conformity and A/D conversion errors at 23°C after 20
min. warm-up. Thermocouple errors include cold junction effect. Errors are
expressed as ±percent of reading and ± 3/4 LSD unless otherwise noted.
9. OUTPUT MODULES [Optional] (For All Output Channels):
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See Ordering Information.)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating. (Decreasing load
and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA max.
Offstate Leakage Current: 7mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused
10. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT (Heating or Cooling):
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable
11 . COOLING OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Heat/Cool Deadband Overlap: Programmable
12. LINEAR DC OUTPUT (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA)
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance)
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV)
Min. Load Resistance: 10 KΩ (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or temperature
(Available for heat or cool, but not both.)
13. HEATER CURRENT MONITOR (Optional):
Type: Single phase, full wave monitoring of load currents controlled by main
output (OP1)
Input: 100 mA AC output from current transformer RLC part number
CT005001 or any current transformer with 100 mA AC output
Display Scale Range: 1.0 to 999.9 amperes or 100.0%
Input resistance: 5 Ω
Accuracy: 1% of full scale ±1 LSD (10 to 100% of range)
Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz
Alarm mode: Dual acting; heater element fail detect and control device fail
detect
Overload: 200 mA (steady state)
Min. output “on” time for Heater break alarm detect: 400 msec
14. MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER (Optional):
Two Outputs: Valve open and valve close or Linear DC (optional)
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Three Inputs: Slidewire feedback, signal fail detect (Isolated from main
input)
Slidewire Resistance: 100 to 100 KΩ
Slidewire Exciting Voltage: 0.9 VDC
Slidewire Fail Action: programmable
Control Mode: Position mode (with slidewire) and velocity mode (w/o
slidewire).
Control Deadband: 1% to 25.0% (position mode)
0.1 to 25.0 seconds (velocity mode)

576

Update Time: 1 to 250 seconds
Motor Time (open, close): 1 to 9999 seconds
Position Limits: Adjustable 0.0 to 100.0% of valve stroke
Valve Fail Time: Off to 9999 seconds
Alarm mode: Dual acting; loss of slidewire feedback signal and valve fail
detection
15. SECOND ANALOG INPUT:
Range: 0 to 20 mA (Isolated from main input)
Overload: 100 mA (steady state)
Input Resistance: 10 Ω
Voltage Drop (@ 20 mA): 0.2 V
Accuracy: 0.15% of reading ±10 μA ±1 LSD
Scale Range: -999 to 9999
16. SERIAL COMMUNICATION:
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300 to 9600
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit
Unit Address: Programmable from 0 to 99, max. of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs
17. USER INPUT (Optional): Internally pulled up to +5 VDC.
VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 3.0 VMIN,
Available on all second input (HCM, MVP & ANA) models, and on models
with RS485.
Response Time: 100 msec max.
Functions: Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms
Print Request
Local/Remote Setpoint Select
18. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Heater break
Valve fail
Second Analog Input monitoring
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Probe Break Action: Upscale
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with cooling output or motorized valve position option.)
19. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80°C
Span Drift (maximum): 100 ppm/°C, main input; 150 ppm/°C, second input
Operating and Storage Humidity:
85% max. (non-condensing) from 0 to 50°C
Zero Drift (maximum): 1 μV/°C, main input;2 μA/°C, second input
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
20. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
All inputs and outputs with respect to AC line: 2300 V
Analog Outputs, Second Analog Input, Heater Current Input or
Slidewire Input with respect to main input: 500 V
21. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529

www.redlion.net

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference

EN 55011

Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A

Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Analog output signal, Heater Current Monitor input and Motorized
Valve Positioner input signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
a. Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
b. Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to
cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
22. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block
Wire Range: 12-30 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5-7 inch-lbs (56-79 N-cm)
23. CONSTRUCTION: NEMA 2 For Standard Models.
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included)
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing two captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included). This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
24. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs (0.6 kgs)

entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode when making a parameter change. The controller’s
configuration and parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.

HARDWARE FEATURES

The fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance, thus providing excellent temperature control. Measurement
accuracy of 0.15% or better, provides closer process control conforming to the
desired control setpoint value. One model accepts a variety of both thermocouple
or RTD temperature probes. The AC input power is switch selectable, allowing
the unit to operate from either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the output modules may be easily changed
or replaced without disturbing the wiring behind the panel. No re-programming is
required when changing or replacing modules.
The optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated model utilizes two bezel securing screws
and a neoprene gasket to guarantee a water tight seal, when properly installed.
The standard model simply requires pressing a latch to remove the unit.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
temperature control. The recommended two-year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.

SETPOINT FEATURES

The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature reduces
thermal shock to the process and helps to minimize temperature overshoot.The
setpoint may also be transmitted by the optional linear DC output for slave
control loops.
The second analog input may be configured as a remote setpoint. As such, the
controller is easily switched from local/remote setpoint operation via the front
panel or user input. Ratio and bias parameters provide on-line scaling of the
remote setpoint. Absolute limit values and maximum rate of change of the
remote setpoint further enhance controller flexibility.

INPUT FEATURES

ACCESSORIES:
External SSR Power Unit:
Switched Voltage Range: 50 to 280 VAC (Nominal: 240 VAC)
Load Current: 45 Amps @ 25°C ambient temperature
35 Amps @ 50°C ambient temperature
On State Input: 3 to 32 VDC @ 1500 Ω impedance. (isolated)
(Use Logic/SSR drive output module.)
Off State Input: 0.0 to 1.0 VDC
Size: 5.5" (14 cm) L x 4.75" (12 cm) W x 2.62" (6.6 cm) H
Current Transformer:
Current Ratio: 50:0.1 (Amperes)
Accuracy: ±5.0%
Operating Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz
Insulation Class: 0.6 Kv BIL 10 Kv full wave
Terminals: Brass studs No. 8-36, (flat washer, washer, nut)
Weight: 8.0 oz (226 g)
Approvals: UL recognized component

A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating temperature characteristics, helping to provide better
temperature control. A programmable temperature shift and slope function can
be used to compensate for probe errors or to have multiple TCU units indicate
the same nominal temperature.
The programmable User Input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), etc.
The second analog input has independent scaling parameters to match the
units of other processes or transmitters, or to match the controller’s range.

OUTPUT FEATURES

BASIC OPERATION

The TCU controls a process temperature by measuring the temperature via an
input probe, then calculating a control output power value by use of a modified
PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new output power
value to keep the process temperature at setpoint. The PID control algorithm
incorporates features which provide for high control accuracy and low
temperature overshoot from process disturbances.

FRONT PANEL FEATURES

In the normal operating mode, the unit will display the process temperature
in the upper display. One of six other parameters can be viewed in the lower
display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Temperature Deviation
- Heater Current
- Second Input Process Value
- Temperature Symbol (F or C)

Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Automatic sensor probe break detection, for
fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). With adjustable time proportioningcycle time, and programmable DC linear output, the controller can satisfy a
wide variety of output requirements.
Programmable dampening output hysteresis and output update time parameters
can dramatically reduce actuator activity without degrading control accuracy.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be setup to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.

AUTO-TUNE

The TCU has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular thermal process. After
completion of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for
that process and loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and
modify the parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.

The six parameters can be scrolled through by pressing the DSP button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then

1-717-767-6511

577

OPTIONS

INTERNAL CASCADE

HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

The TCU has dual outputs for providing heating and cooling to those
processes that require them. Many extruder applications require both heating
and cooling to maintain accurate extruder barrel and die temperatures. The TCU
is easily configured for these applications.
Cooling Configuration Parameters
“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”

- Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
- Enter cooling relative gain
- Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap

HEATER CURRENT MONITOR

Cascade control allows the process to be divided into two control loops: the
primary control loop and the secondary control loop. The secondary loop
receives it’s setpoint from the primary loop to control an intermediate variable
(steam pressure). The control level of the intermediate variable is the input to
the primary process. The primary loop (temperature) controller maintains loop
regulation by manipulating the setpoint of the secondary controller. The
setpoint of the secondary controller, in turn, changes the intermediate variable.
The secondary loop can react faster to disturbances of the intermediate variable,
thereby minimizing the effects to the primary control loop. Control loops
cascaded in such a manner provide greater control quality than would be
possible with single loop control. A single TCU can accomplish two-process
cascade control.
Internal Cascade Configuration Parameters
“OPer”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“OPd2”

Select cascade mode
Select second input square root linearization
Select second input decimal point
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Output dampening of secondary

Internal Cascade Operational Parameters
The Heater Current Monitor serves as a heater element fail sentry, so
operators can take corrective action before significant process errors occur in
the event of a failure. The actual heater current can be viewed in the secondary
display and/or a heater break alarm output can be programmed.
Heater Current Monitor Configuration Parameters
“HCur”
ACt1”, “ACt2”

“SP-2”
“Pb-2”
“It-2”
“dt-2”

View secondary setpoint value
Enter secondary proportional band
Enter secondary integral time
Enter secondary derivative time

EXTERNAL CASCADE

- Enter full scale current of current transformer
- Program alarm(s) as heater break alarm

MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER

The motorized valve positioner controls the position of a valve directly, by use
of “open” and “close” control outputs. The slidewire feedback signals of the valve
may optionally be connected to the controller. Alternatively, the controller may be
configured for linear input valve control using the 4 to 20 mA DC output.
Motorized Valve Positioner Configuration Parameters

578

Position mode:

“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“Act1”

Enter or measure valve closed position
Enter or measure valve open position
Enter Valve update time
Enter valve control deadband
Enter valve fail detect time
Program alarm as valve fail output

Velocity mode:

“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VONt”

Enter Valve update time
Enter valve open time
Enter valve close time
Enter valve control deadband
(minimum on time)

Similar to internal cascade control, external cascade control differs by the
employment of two controllers, one of which is equipped with a second analog
input configured as a remote setpoint. A PCU controls the secondary loop, while
a TCU controls the primary loop.
External Cascade Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPtr”

Select ratio mode
Select second input square root linearization
Select second input decimal point
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Enter scaling units of second input
Local/Remote select options

External Cascade Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”

www.redlion.net

- Remote setpoint ratio
- Remote setpoint bias

SETPOINT MASTER CONTROL
Setpoint Master Control allows automatic setpoint changes to slave
controller units (up to 50 units total) from a master TCU controller.
The linear DC output of the master is looped with the second analog
input of the slave TCU controllers. Each slave unit can have unique
remote setpoint ratio and bias values.
Setpoint Slave Configuration Parameters
“OPEr” - Select remote setpoint mode
“root” - Select second input square root
Linearization
“dPt2” - Select second input decimal point
“dSP1” - Enter scaling units of second input
“INP1” - Enter scaling units of second input
“dSP2” - Enter scaling units of second input
“INP2” - Enter scaling units of second input
“SPLO”
- Limit range of remote setpoint
“SPHI”
“SPrP” - Limit rate of change of remote
setpoint

Setpoint Slave Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”

- Second input ratio
- Second input bias

CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING

Configuration 1, Inputs
“tYPE”
“SCAL”
“dCPt”
“FLtr”
“SPAN”
“SHFt”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”
“HCur”

The TCU has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.

“Pb-2”

“It-2”

“dt-2”

“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”

Enter Setpoint
Enter output power
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter Remote Setpoint ratio value
Enter Remote Setpoint bias value
View internal cascade secondary setpoint
demand
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
Enter internal cascade, secondary integral
time
Enter internal cascade, secondary
derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Select basic configuration mode
Return to normal display mode

“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
“ANdb”
“ANUt”

Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter probe fail power preset
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC output low scaling value *
Enter linear DC output high scaling value *
Enter linear DC output control deadband *
Enter linear DC output update time *

Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“IN-2”
“HCur”
“UdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“PId2”
“rtbS”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”

These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE
The configuration parameter mode allows the operator to set-up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the configuration selection
stage allowing the user to return to the normal display mode.

Select input probe type
Select temperature scale
Select temperature resolution
Select level of input filtering
Enter input correction span (slope)
Enter input correction shift (offset)
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function *
Enter full scale heater current *

Configuration 2, Outputs

UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *
The unprotected parameter mode is accessible when program disable is
inactive or when the proper access code number from the protected mode is
entered.The configuration parameter modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“rtio”
“bIAS”
“SP-2”

Configuration 4, Alarms
“Act1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”

Select degree of setpoint access
Select degree of power access
Enable deviation display *
Enable second input display *
Enable heater current display
Enable temperature scale display
Enter parameter access code
Select degree of PID access
Select degree of secondary PID access *
Select degree of ratio/bias access *
Select degree of alarm access *
Enable alarm reset access *
Enable local/remote setpoint selection *
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation

Select operation mode of alarm #1
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms

Configuration 5, Cooling

“CYC2” - Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
“GAN2” - Enter cooling relative gain
“db-2” - Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap

1-717-767-6511

579

Configuration 6, Serial Communications
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”

Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic
transmissions
- Enter automatic print rate
- Select parameters to be included in print-out

Configuration 7, Second Input

Configuration 8, Motorized Valve Positioner

Velocity mode:

“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VONt”

The hidden function mode is accessible from the normal operating mode. The
four functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in configuration 3
parameter lock-out section.
“SPSL” - Select Local/Remote Setpoint
“trnF” - Transfer between automatic (PID) control
and manual control
“tUNE” - Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
“ALrS” - Reset latched alarms

“OPEr” - Select remote setpoint or internal
cascade mode
“root” - Select second input square root linearization
“dPt2” - Select second input decimal point
“dSP1” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“INP1” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“dSP2” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“INP2” - Enter scaling parameters of second input
“SPtr” - Enter local/remote select options
“OPd2” - Enter Secondary output control dampening

Position mode:

HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *

PROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *
The protected parameters mode is enabled when program disable is active.
This mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access
code number. Only the parameters that are selected in the configuration 3
parameter lock-out section can be accessed.

Enter or measure valve closed position
Enter or measure valve open position
Enter valve update time
Enter valve control deadband
Enter valve fail detect time
Enter valve update time
Enter valve open time
Enter valve close time
Enter valve control deadband
(minimum on time)

“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“rtio”
“bIAS”
“SP-2”
“Pb-2”

“It-2”

“dt-2”

“AL-1” “AL-2” “CodE” -

Enter Proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter remote setpoint ratio value
Enter remote setpoint bias value
Enter internal cascade, secondary setpoint
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
Enter internal cascade, secondary
integral time
Enter internal cascade, secondary
derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter access value to unprotected
parameters & configuration parameters

These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

ACCESSORY - EXTERNAL SSR POWER UNIT

ACCESSORY - CURRENT TRANSFORMER

The external SSR Power Unit is used with the Logic/SSR Drive Module
(OMD00003) to switch loads up to 240 VAC @ 45 amps, 25°C ambient.
The unit is operated by applying a low level DC control signal to the
isolated input. The unit features zero cross detection circuits which reduces
radiated RFI when switching load currents. With no contacts to wear out,
the SSR Power Unit provides virtually limitless operational life. The unit is
supplied with an integral heat sink for immediate installation.

The external Current Transformer is used when specifying TCUs
equipped with the Heater Current Monitor. The primary current rating is 50
amperes.

580

www.redlion.net

OUTPUT MODULES
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS

Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See ordering information.)
Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).

Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 ampere @ 35°C
0.75 ampere @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused

Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA maximum.

APPLICATION
Several TCU controllers are
employed to control the temperature of
a plastics extruder. Each TCU controls
a heating element and a cooling water
solenoid to maintain each extruder
zone at a desired temperature. The
heater current monitor of the TCU is
used for early detection of heater
element failure. The linear DC output
is used to retransmit the process
temperature to a control computer for
data logging purposes.

1-717-767-6511

581

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODELS WITHOUT SECOND INPUT OPTIONS
4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT

NEMA 4X/P65
BEZEL

0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

COOLING
OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER
115/230 VAC

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
TCU00000
NO
NO
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU00001
NO
NO
NO
1
YES
NO
TCU00002
NO
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU01001
NO
YES
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU01004
NO
YES
NO
1
YES
YES
TCU01005
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
TCU10000
YES
NO
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU10001
YES
NO
NO
1
YES
NO
TCU10002
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU11001
YES
YES
NO
1
YES
NO
TCU11002
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU11004
YES
YES
NO
1
YES
YES
TCU11005
YES
NO
YES
2
NO
NO
TCU12001
YES
NO
YES
2
NO
YES
TCU12004
YES
NO
YES
1
YES
YES
TCU12005
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared common terminals (Form A Type).
As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with
any type of output module.

HEATER CURRENT MONITOR MODELS (HCM)
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL

4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT

0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

COOLING
OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER

YES
NO
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU10204
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU11208
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared common
terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output
module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.

SECOND ANALOG INPUT MODELS (ANA)
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL

4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT

0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

COOLING
OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER

YES
NO
NO
2
NO
YES
TCU10104
YES
YES
NO
2
NO
NO
TCU11108
YES
NO
YES
2
NO
NO
TCU12108
These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared
common terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type
of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.

MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER MODELS (MVP)
4 to 20 mA

NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL

YES
YES
YES

04toto10
20 VDC
mA

0 ALARM
to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT

COOLING

ANALOG
OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

COOLING
OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER

NO
YES
NO

NO
NO
YES

1
1
1

NO
NO
NO

YES
NO
NO

TCU10307
TCU11306
TCU12306

ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION

Relay Module
Triac Module
Logic/SSR Drive Module
SSR Power Unit
Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount SSR
Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount SSR
Three Phase DIN Rail Mount SSR
50:0.1 Ampere Current Transformer
40:0.1 Ampere Current Transformer

PART NUMBER

OMD00000
OMD00001
OMD00003
RLY50000
RLY60000
RLY6A000
RLY70000
CT005001
CT004001

Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the
controller, be sure to purchase the appropriate output module for the Main Control
Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s), the cooling output, and valve positioner
outputs. The controller can be fitted with any combination of output modules.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input
of an SSR power unit. It should never be connected to line voltage.
All output modules are packaged separately and must be installed by the user.

582

www.redlion.net

MODEL TSC - TEMPERATURE SETPOINT CONTROLLER
AUTOMATIC PROGRAM DELAY FOR PROFILE CONFORMITY,
PLUS PROGRAM LINKING, REPEATING AND AUTO POWER-ON
FUNCTIONS FOR ENHANCED CAPABILITY
DUAL EVENT OUTPUTS FOR TIMED ACTIVATION OF PROCESS
EQUIPMENT SUCH AS STIRRERS, FANS, HEATERS, ETC. (Uses
Alarm Output Channels)
FOUR SETPOINT & PID PARAMETER SETS FOR QUICK RECALL
OF SETPOINTS AND/OR GAIN VALUES DURING BATCH OR
PROCESS CHANGEOVER
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT FOR CONTROLLER AND
SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROL
100 MSEC SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS

UL
R

DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
TEMPERATURE AND SETPOINT OR TEMPERATURE AND
PROFILE STATUS

US LISTED

ACCEPTS ANY ONE OF 10 DIFFERENT TYPES OF SENSOR
INPUTS (Thermocouple or RTD)

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROLLER FOR TIME VS.
TEMPERATURE (RAMP/SOAK) AND SPECIAL BATCH/RECIPE
APPLICATIONS
ADVANCED PROGRAM PROFILING IN A 1/8 DIN PACKAGE
ON-LINE MONITORING AND CONTROL OF PROGRAM STATUS,
TIME, AND SETPOINT VALUE (Program Run, Pause, Stop,
Advance, Modify Time, & Setpoint Value)

FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR drive, and Triac)
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (Uses Output Modules)
OPTIONAL COOLING OUTPUT (Uses Output Module)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR TEMPERATURE RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

DESCRIPTION

The TSC is a setpoint controller suitable for time vs. temperature, process
control applications. The TSC accepts signals from a variety of temperature
sensors (thermocouple and RTD elements), precisely displays the process
temperature, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional
or linear) to maintain a process at the desired control point. A comprehensive set
of easy to use steps allows the controller to satisfy various applications. The user
input can be programmed to perform a variety of controller functions.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the measured temperature value and
setpoint or temperature and profile status simultaneously. Front panel indicators
inform the operator of controller status and output states. Replaceable output
modules (Relay, logic/SSR drive or Triac) can be fitted to the main control output,
alarm output(s) or timed event output(s), and cooling output.
The TSC has been designed to simplify the set-up and operation of a controlled
setpoint profile program. The setpoint program is easily entered and controlled
through the front panel. Full display capabilities keep the operator informed of the
process temperature, profile status, output states, and setpoint value.

The controller can operate in the standard PID control mode for both heating
or cooling with on-demand auto-tune which establishes the PID gain set. The
PID gain set can be fine tuned by the operator at any time or may be locked from
further modification. The unit can be transferred to the manual control mode
providing the operator with direct control of the output.
The TSC features four programs or profile recipes, each with up to eight
ramp/soak segments, which can be easily stored and executed at any time.
Longer profiles can be achieved by linking one or more profiles together,
creating a single profile of up to 32 ramp/soak segments. Temperature profile
conformity is assured during either soak (hold) phases or both ramp and hold
phases by an adjustable error band parameter. The program repeat function
cycles the profile either continuously or a set number of times. Power-on options
automatically re-start, stop, or resume a running profile. The profile can be
controlled via the front panel buttons, the user input, or the optional serial
communications port.
Four control points, each having a setpoint and PID parameter set, are
available for instant front panel implementation during batch changeover, or

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

583

DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)

other process conditions. A control point may have its PID gain set values
disabled when implementing the control point.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communications interface provides the
capability of two-way communication between a TSC unit and other compatible
equipment such as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In
multipoint applications the address number of each unit on the line can be
programmed from 0-99. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair
of wires. The Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be
interrogated or changed by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. Alarm output(s) may also be reset via the serial
communications interface option.
Optional alarm output(s) may be configured to operate as a timed event
output or as a standard alarm output. As an alarm output it may be configured to
activate according to a variety of actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or
LO, or Band IN or OUT) with adjustable hysteresis. Also, a standby feature
suppresses the output(s) on power-up until the temperature stabilizes outside the
alarm region. Timed event output(s) allow the controller to activate other
equipment while a programmed profile is running. Each profile can define up to
16 event states (phases), for each output(s).
An optional secondary output is available for processes that require cooling
which provides increased control accuracy and response.
The optional linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to
interface with final actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The
output signal can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following:
% Output Power
Measurement Value
Measurement Value Deviation
Setpoint Value
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for washdown and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount technology,
extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference, makes the controller
extremely reliable in industrial environments.

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the TSC to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red
Lion Controls model IMT (thermocouple) or model IMR (RTD) units may be
used for this purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power
feeds independent from other equipment.

Start Mode: Ramps from process temperature.
Program Auto Cycle: 1 to 249, or continuous.
Event Outputs: 2, time activated with profile [uses Alarm output(s)].
Control: Front panel buttons, user input, or RS485 communications.
6. CONTROL POINTS:
Setpoints: 4
PID gain sets: 4
Control: Front panel buttons or user input.
7. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: 300 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe).
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output.
Display: “OPEN”.
Alarms: Upscale drive.
DC Linear: Programmable preset output.
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 db @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering).
Common Mode Rejection: 100 db, DC to 50/60 Hz.
Protection: Input overload voltage; 240 VAC @ 30 sec max.
8. THERMOCOUPLE:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N or Linear mV.
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ, all types.
Lead Resistance Effect: 20 μV/350 Ω.
Cold Junction Compensation: Less than ±1°C error over 0-50°C ambient
temperature range. Disabled for linear mV type.
Resolution: 1°C/F all types, or 0.1°C/F for T, E, J, K, and N only.
9. RTD: 2, 3 or 4 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760), alpha =
0.003916
Excitation: 0.175 mA
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 7 Ω max.
10. RANGE AND ACCURACY:
Errors include NIST conformity and A/D conversion errors at 23°C after 20
minutes warm-up. Thermocouple errors include cold junction effect. Errors
are expressed as ±(% of reading) and ±3/4 LSD unless otherwise noted.
TC TYPE

T
E
J
K
R

SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Temperature Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) Red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) Green LED
Display Messages:

“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“OPEN”
“SHrt”
“....”
“-...”

Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears

when
when
when
when
when
when

S
B

measurement exceeds + sensor range.
measurement exceeds - sensor range.
open sensor is detected.
shorted sensor is detected (RTD only).
display value exceeds + display range.
display value exceeds - display range.

2. POWER: 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line variation effect,
48-62 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
6 LED Backlight Status Indicators:
%PW
PGM

MAN
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2

Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
Lower auxiliary display shows profile status or profile
time remaining.
Controller is in manual mode.
Main control output is active.
Alarm #1 is active.
Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option)
Cooling output is active (for Cooling Option).

4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for setup and modification of
controller functions and one external input.
5. SETPOINT PROFILE:
Profiles: 4
Segments Per Profile: 8 ramp/hold segments (linkable to 32 segments).
Ramp Rate: 0.1 to 999.9 degrees/minute or no ramp.
Hold Time: Off or from 0.1 to 999.9 minutes, can be extended to 500 hours
by linking.
Error Band Conformity: Off or from 1 to 9999 degrees deviation, + value
for hold phases, - value for both ramp and hold phases.
Power-On Modes: Stop, auto-start, or profile resume.

584

N
mV
RTD
(385)
RTD
(392)
OHMS

RANGE

ACCURACY

-200 to +400°C
-328 to +752°F
-200 to 750°C
-328 to +1382°F
-200 to +760°C
-328 to +1400°F
-200 to +1250°C
-328 to +2282°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
0 to +1768°C
+32 to +3214°F
+200 to +1820°C
+300 to +3300°F
-200 to +1300°C
-328 to +2372°F
-5.00 to 56.00
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F
1.0 to 320.0

WIRE COLOR
(ANSI)

blue
violet
white
yellow
black
black
grey
orange
__

11. OUTPUT MODULES [Optional] (For All Output Channels):
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with RS485 option)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. rating.(Decreasing load and/or
increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical.
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Ratings:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max Load Current: 1 AMP @ 35°C
0.75 AMP @ 50°C
Min Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.

www.redlion.net

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

12. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT (Heating or Cooling):
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC.
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Auto-tune: When performed, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable.
13. COOLING OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable.
Heat/Cool DeadBand: Programmable.
14. LINEAR DC DRIVE (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA).
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance).
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV).
Min. Load Resistance: 10 KΩ (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or temperature.
(Available for heat or cool, but not both.)
15. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module.
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Timed event output(s)
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched.
Delay: Programmable; enable or disable.
Hysteresis: Programmable.
Probe Break Action: Upscale.
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with cooling output).
16. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional):
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface.
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300-9600.
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity.
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit.
Unit Address: Programmable from 0-99, max. of 32 units per line.
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common.
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs.
17. USER INPUT: VIN max = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 2.0 VMIN,
Response time 100 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Transfer
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms

Print Request
Load Control Point
Run/Hold Profile 1
Run/Stop Profile 1

IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to power
lines at unit.
or
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
a. Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to
power lines at unit.
or
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
b. Install 1 ferrite core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to
analog output cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
20. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block.
21. CONSTRUCTION:
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic.
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included).
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing 2 captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included).This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
22. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs. (0.6 kgs)

BASIC OPERATION

The TSC controls the temperature profile of a system by measuring the
temperature via an input probe, compares the actual temperature to the setpoint
profile in progress, and calculates the new output power value by use of a
modified PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new
output power value so the process temperature conforms to the programmed
profile. The PID control algorithm incorporates features which provide
minimum overshoot and excellent temperature control accuracy for a process.

FRONT PANEL FEATURES

In the normal display mode, the unit will display the process temperature in
the upper display. One of five other parameters may be selected for viewing in
the lower display:

18. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Span Drift: ≤ 100 ppm/°C
Zero Drift: ≤ 1 μ V/°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
19. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Target Setpoint Profile Phase Time Remaining
% Output Power Temperature Symbol (F/C)
Profile Status

The program profile status display indicates the active profile number with
the current ramp or hold phase of the profile. The profile can be started, stopped,
advanced, etc. from the front panel when the profile status display is viewed, if
not locked from access.
The phase time remaining display, shows the time remaining in a ramp or
hold phase and, if not locked from access, may be changed on-line to effect
temporary changes to the program. Additionally, the target setpoint and %
output power (manual mode only) may also be changed on-line or locked from
operator access.
From the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then
entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode from any parameter module. The controller configuration and
parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.

1-717-767-6511

585

CONFIGURATION MODE

Configuration 5,.Cooling *

The configuration modules serve to provide the basic set-ups required by
the controller. It is divided into sections which group together related
programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon completion of
each section, the program returns to the configuration selection stage, which
allows the user to return to the normal display mode, or advance to a later
configuration stage.
Configuration 1, Inputs

“tYPE”
“SCAL”
“dCPt”
“FLtr”
“SPAN”
“SHFt”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”

Configuration 2, Outputs

“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”

Select input probe type
Select temperature scale
Select temperature resolution
Select degree of input filtering
Enter input correction span (slope)
Enter input correction shift (offset)
Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function

Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter probe fail power preset
Enter ON/OF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning damping
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC low scaling value *
Enter linear DC high scaling value *

“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”

Configuration 6, Serial Communications *
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”

“P-tr”
“UdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“CPAC”
“PrAC”
“trnF”
“tUNE”

Configuration 4, Alarms *
“Act 1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”

“CSEt”
“SP-x”
“PId”
“PB-x”
“It-x”
“dt-x”

Configuration 8, Profiles
“PSEt”

“PnCC”

- Select degree of setpoint access
- Select degree of power access
- Select degree of profile status
access
- Select degree of phase time remaining
access
- Enable temperature units display
- Enter parameter access code
- Select degree of PID access
- Select degree of alarm access *
- Enable manual reset of alarms *
- Enable control point access
- Enable ramp/hold program access
- Enable automatic/manual transfer
- Enable auto-tune invocation
-

HARDWARE FEATURES

NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL
The fast 100 msec input sampling rate
provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance for excellent temperature
control. Measurement accuracy of 0.15%
provides closer process control conforming to
the desired control setpoint value.
The unit accepts a variety of both
thermocouple or RTD temperature probes.
The A.C. input power is switch selectable,
allowing the unit to operate from either 115
VAC or 230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the
output modules may be easily changed or
replaced without disturbing the wiring behind
the panel and NO re-programming is required.
The standard model simply requires pressing a
latch to remove the unit. The NEMA 4X/IP65
rated model utilizes two panel securing screws
and a neoprene gasket to guarantee a water
tight seal, when properly installed.
Low-drift, highly stable circuit design ensures years of reliable and accurate
temperature control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is
easily accomplished via the programming menu.

586

Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic
transmissions
- Enter automatic print rate
- Select parameters to be included
in print-out

Configuration 7, Control Points

Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“P-CS”

- Enter cooling time proportioning cycle time
- Enter cooling relative gain
- Enter heat/cool deadband or overlap

“PnLn”
“PnEb”
“PnPC”
“Pnr1”
“PnL1”
“PnH1”
.
.
.
.
“Pnr8”
“PnL8”
“PnH8”
“Pn 1”
.
.
.
.
“Pn16”

- Select control point number for set-up 1, 2,
3, & 4
- Enter setpoint value for selected control
point
- Select if PID gain set to be loaded with
setpoint
- Enter proportional band for selected
control point *
- Enter integral time for selected control
point *
- Enter derivative time for selected control
point *

- Select profile or event output for set-up 1,
2, 3, or 4
- Enter program-repeat cycle count for
selected profile
- Select link option for selected profile
- Enter error band for temperature
conformity for selected profile
- Enter power-down resume status for
selected profile
- Enter ramp rate 1 for selected profile *
- Enter setpoint level 1 for selected profile *
- Enter hold time 1 for selected profile *
-

Enter ramp rate 8 for selected profile *
Enter setpoint level 8 for selected profile
Enter hold time 8 for selected profile *
Select event outputs at phase 1 for
selected profile *

- Select event outputs at phase 16 for
selected profile *

Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations
(Detailed in the operator’s manual)

* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming

SETPOINT FEATURES

The controller’s setpoint can be protected from out of range values, by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can also be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate, independent of a
programmed profile. This feature reduces thermal shock to the process and
also helps to minimize temperature overshoot.
The active setpoint, which can be a running profile, may also be transmitted
by the linear DC output for slave control loops.
Four control points are available which can be implemented at any time.
Each control point is programmed independently, with each having a setpoint
and a PID gain set value. With gain value changes, the output power control
signal will not “bump” resulting in a smooth control transition.

INPUT FEATURES

A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating temperature characteristics, helping to provide
better temperature control.
A programmable temperature shift and slope function can be used to
compensate for probe errors or to have multiple TSC units indicate the same
nominal temperature.
A programmable User Input is available to control a variety of controller
functions, such as profile control, auto/manual transfer, serial communication
print requests, etc.

www.redlion.net

OUTPUT FEATURES

Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
too much power can cause damage. Automatic sensor probe break detection, for
fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). With adjustable time proportioningcycle time and programmable D.C. Linear output, the controller can satisfy a
wide variety of output requirements.
During execution of a profile, two independent, timed event outputs are
available to control or signal other equipment. The event outputs use the alarm
channels.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be setup to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.

AUTO-TUNE

HIDDEN FUNCTIONS MODE *

The hidden mode is accessible from the normal operating mode by holding
the PAR button for 3 seconds. The five functions in this mode may be lockedout individually in configuration 3 parameter lock-outs section.
“ CP”
“Prun”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”

- Load control point x
- Control ramp/hold profile state
- Transfer between automatic (PID) control
and Manual control
- Invoke/Cancel PID auto-tune
- Reset latched alarms

OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITHOUT RS485 OPTION
The Dual Alarm or the Cooling with Alarm output, without the RS485 option,
has independent outputs. Therefore, the cooling output and/or alarm output(s)
can be installed with any combination of output modules.

The model TSC has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular thermal process. After
completion of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for
that process and loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and
modify the parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked at start-up, while ramping, or at setpoint,
depending on the process requirements. A programmable auto-tune damping
factor produces various levels of process control and response characteristics.

PROFILE PROGRAMMING

Profiles are programmed independently of each other and are separate from
the configuration of other controller parameters. Each profile has parameters for
error band (profile conformity), linking, auto-start and program repeat cycles.
Profiles may be altered during execution, so changes take effect as the
programmed profile advances.

CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING

The model TSC has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front panel program disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Hidden Mode
Protected Mode
Unprotected Mode
Configuration Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.

OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITH RS485 OPTION
The Dual Alarm or the Cooling with Alarm output, with RS485 option, does
not have independent outputs. In this case, the cooling output and/or alarm
output(s) must have the same type of output modules installed since they share
the common terminal.

UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE

The unprotected mode is accessible when program disable is inactive or when
the proper access code number from the protected mode is entered. Only from
this mode can the configuration modes be accessed.
“SP”
“OPOF”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”

Enter setpoint *
Enter %output power offset *
Enter output power *
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time *
Enter derivative time *
Enter value for alarm #1 *
Enter value for alarm #2 *
Select basic configuration module
Return to normal display mode

F
* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming

PROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *

The protected mode is accessible when program disable is active, also this
mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access code
number. Only the parameters that are selected in the configuration 3 parameter
lock-outs section can be accessed.
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”
“End”

Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter access value to unprotected mode
Return to normal display mode

1-717-767-6511

587

OUTPUT MODULES
Units equipped with RS485 option must have the Dual Alarm or Cooling
w/alarm options fitted with the same type of output modules. The controller’s
main output (OP1) can be fitted with any output module. Output modules are
shipped separately and must be installed by the user.
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
Logic/SSR Drive: can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical.
Drive: 45 mA max.

Relay:
Type: Form -C (Form-A with RS485 option only)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive).
Life Expectancy:100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).

Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC.
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz.
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.

APPLICATION

TSC GLASS TEMPERING APPLICATION
A manufacturer of glass items needs to
anneal (temper) their products to reduce the
brittleness of the glass structure. The tempering
process requires the glass to be heated and
subsequently cooled at a controlled rate to
change the structure of the glass. Different
tempering profiles are required for different
types of glass products.
A TSC is employed to control the
temperature profile of the annealing oven.
Four different temperature profiles are stored in
the controller. The 4 to 20 mA analog output
option is utilized to cool the annealing oven
during the cool down ramp phases. An event
output is used to quickly cool the oven at the
end of the batch run (alarm 1). Alarm 2 is used
to signal the operator whenever the
temperature is outside the prescribed program
profile.
Note: Units equipped with the RS485 option
have different terminal designators. See
“Output Variations with or without the
RS485 Option”.

The programming for this profile is as follows:
Parameter Value

588

“P1r1”

5.0

“P1L1”
“P1H1”
“P1r2”
“P1L2”
“P1H2”

300
40.0
3.0
150
0.0

“P1r3”
“P1 1”
“P1 2”
“P1 3”
“P1 4”

-0.1
1F2F
1F2F
1F2F
1N2F

Description

Ramp from ambient temp. during heat phase at
5.0°/min.
Target setpoint level 300°
Heat at 300° for 40.0 minutes
Ramp down 3.0°/min. during cooling phase
Target Setpoint is 150°
Do not hold at 150° (used as “phantom” hold time
for triggering event output for auxiliary cooling)
End Program
Turn off output 1 (output 2 is alarm)
Keep off output 1
Keep off output 1
Turn on output 1 for Auxiliary Exhaust Fan

www.redlion.net

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

TSC

PMK5

RLY
RLY6

DESCRIPTION

Temperature
Setpoint
Controller

NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL

4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 VDC
ALARM OUTPUTS COOLING OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT ANALOG OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER

YES

TSC01001

YES

TSC11001

YES

TSC11002

YES

TSC11004

YES

TSC11005

YES

TSC12004

YES

TSC12005

Relay Module

OMD00000

Triac Module

OMD00001

Logic/SSR Drive Module

OMD00003

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/4 DIN to 1/8 DIN)

PMK50000

SSR Power Unit

RLY50000

Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY60000

Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY6A000

Three Phase DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY70000

These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with cooling outputs, with shared common terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should
be fitted with the same type of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.

Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the controller, be sure to purchase the
appropriate output module for the Main Control Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s) and cooling output.
The controller can be fitted with any combination of output modules that do not have the RS485 option.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input of an SSR power unit. It
should never be connected to a line voltage.
All modules are shipped separately and must be installed by the user.

1-717-767-6511

589

MODEL P16 - 1/16 DIN PROCESS CONTROLLER
This is a brief overview of the P16. For complete specifications and programming information, see the
T16/P16 Temperature/Process Controller Bulletin starting on page 541.
z PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
z ACCEPTS 0-10 V AND 0/4-20 mA SIGNALS
z ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID SETTINGS
z DC ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTIONAL)
z USER PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION BUTTON
z PC OR FRONT PANEL PROGRAMMING
z PC CONFIGURABLE WITH TP16KIT

UL Recognized Component,
File #E156876

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec (10 Hz rate)
Step Response Time: 300 msec typical, 400 msec max to within 99% of
final value with step input.
Failed Sensor Response:
Main Control Output(s): Programmable preset output
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale drive
Analog Output: Upscale drive when assigned to retransmitted input.
Normal Mode Rejection: >40 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: >120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Overvoltage Protection: 120 VAC @ 15 sec max
4. SIGNAL INPUT: (P16 only)
* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages over 0 to 50 °C ambient range
after 20 minute warm-up.
INPUT
RANGE

590

MAX
ACCURACY * IMPEDANCE CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
OVERLOAD

10 VDC
(-1 to 11)

0.30 % of
reading
+0.03V

1 MΩ

50 V

10 mV

20 mA DC
(-2 to 22)

0.30 % of
reading
+0.04mA

10 Ω

100 mA

10 µA

www.redlion.net

MODEL P48 - 1/16 DIN PROCESS CONTROLLER
PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
ACCEPTS 0 to 10 VDC or 0/4 to 20 mA DC INPUTS
OPTIONAL TWO LINEAR DC OUTPUTS (0 to 10 V, 0/4 to 20 mA)
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS
OPTIONAL REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT (0/4 to 20 mA)
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
SECOND SETPOINT SETTING
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (Digital) FOR ADDED FLEXIBILITY
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODES

STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES
PC SOFTWARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION

ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS

NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL

DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
PROCESS AND SETPOINT

DESCRIPTION
The P48 Controller accepts either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 0/4 to 20 mA DC signal,
precisely displays the input process signal according to the programmable
scaling points, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional
or linear DC) to maintain the process at the desired control point. The
controller’s comprehensive yet simple programming allows it to meet a wide
variety of application requirements.
In the PID control mode the controller operates with on-demand auto-tune,
which will establish the tuning constants. The PID tuning constants may be finetuned by the operator at any time and then locked out from further modification.
The controller employs a unique overshoot suppression feature, which allows
the quickest response without excessive overshoot. The unit can be transferred
to operate in the manual mode, providing the operator with direct control of the
output. The controller may also operate in the ON/OFF control mode with
adjustable hysteresis. a second setpoint is available to allow quick selection of
a different setpoint setting.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. On some models, the main control output and the alarm outputs
are field replaceable.
Optional alarm(s) can be configured to activate according to a variety of
actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, and Band IN or OUT) with

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

UL Recognized Component,
File # E156876

adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the alarm during power-up
until the process stabilizes outside the alarm region. The second alarm can be
configured as a secondary PID output (heat/cool applications).
Optional Main Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) can be used for control or
process re-transmission purposes. Programmable output update time reduces
valve or actuator activity. The output range can be scaled independent of the
input range.
Optional Second Linear DC output (10 V or 20 mA) provides an independent
process re-transmission, while the main Linear DC output is being used for
control. The output range can be scaled independent of the input range.
Optional Remote Setpoint input (0/4 to 20 mA) allows for cascade control
loops; and allows for remotely driven setpoint signal from computers or other
similar equipment. Straightforward end point scaling with independent filtering
and local/remote transfer option expand the controller’s flexibility.
The optional RS485 serial communication interface provides two-way
communication between a P48 and other compatible equipment such as a printer,
PLC, HMI, or a host computer. In multipoint applications (up to thirty-two), the
address number of each P48 on the line can be programmed separately from 0 to
99. Data from the P48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm output(s) may
be reset by sending the proper command code via serial communications. PC
software, SFCRM, allows for easy configuration of controller parameters. These
settings can be saved to disk for later use or used for multi-controller down
loading. On-line help is provided within the software.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a tinted
front panel. The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly
installed. Multiple units can be stacked horizontally or vertically. Modern surfacemount technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference
makes the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

591

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the P48 to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the controller. An independent and
redundant process limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Process Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages:
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“SENS”
“...”
“-..”

Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears

when
when
when
when
when

measurement exceeds + input range.
measurement exceeds - input range.
measurement exceeds controller limits.
display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.

LED Status Annunciators:
%P
MN
DV
O1
A1
A2

- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Flashing: Controller is in manual mode.
On: Local Setpoint (Remote Setpoint option)
Off: Remote Setpoint
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error) from
setpoint.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active (for A1 option).
- Alarm #2 is active OR
- Secondary output (02) is active.

OUTPUT **
RANGE

0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA

10 VDC
(-1 to 11)
20 mA DC
(-2 to 22)

MAX
ACCURACY * ACCURACY *
IMPEDANCE CONTINUOUS RESOLUTION
(18 to 28°C)
(0 to 50°C)
OVERLOAD

0.10% of
reading
+0.02 V
0.10% of
reading
+0.03 mA

0.30% of
reading
+0.03 V
0.30% of
reading
+0.04 mA

1 M ohm

300 V

10 mV

10 ohm

100 mA

10 µA

* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages after 20 minutes warm-up. The
controller’s accuracy is specified in two ways: accuracy over an 18 to
28°C range at 10 to 75% RH environment; and accuracy over a 0 to 50°C
range at 0 to 85% RH (non-condensing) environment. Accuracy over the
wide sensor range reflects the coefficient of the internal circuitry.
6. MAIN SIGNAL INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: Less than 300 msec typ., 400 msec max. (to within 99% of
final value w/step input; typically, response is limited to response time of
sensor)
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering.)
Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC max. for 15 sec. max.
7. USER INPUT: Internally pulled up to +5 VDC (1 MΩ).
VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC; VIL = 0.85 V max.; VIH = 3.65 V min.;
IOFF = 1μA max.
Response Time: 120 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Reset Alarms
Local/Remote Setpoint Select

Setpoint Ramp Enable
Setpoint 1/Setpoint 2 Select
Serial block print

8. CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS:
Relay outputs with Form A contacts:
Contact Rating: 3 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load)
1/10 HP @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life
expectancy.)

592

9. MAIN CONTROL:
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or Linear DC
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
10. ALARMS: 1 or 2 alarms (optional)
Modes:
Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable
Annunciator: LED backlight for “A1”, “A2”
11. SECONDARY OUTPUT: Software selectable (overrides alarm 2)
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time Proportioning
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Deadband /Overlap: Programmable
12. MAIN AND SECOND LINEAR DC OUTPUT: (optional)
Main: Control or re-transmission, programmable update rate from 0.1 sec to
250 sec
Second: Re-transmission only, fixed update rate of 0.1 sec

4 to 20 mA

ACCURACY *
(18 to 28°C)

ACCURACY *
(0 to 50°C)

0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.10% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD

0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD
0.30% of FS
+ 1/2 LSD

COMPLIANCE

RESOLUTION

10k ohm min.

1/3500

500 ohm max.

1/3500

500 ohm max.

1/2800

* Accuracies are expressed as ± percentages after 20 minutes warm-up. Output
accuracy is specified in two ways: Accuracy over an 18 to 28°C range at 10
to 75% RH environment; and accuracy over a 0 to 50°C range at 0 to 85%
RH (non-condensing) environment. Accuracy over the wide sensor range
reflects the coeffecient of the internal circuitry.
** Outputs are independently jumper selectable for either 10 V or 20 mA. The
output range may be field calibrated to yield approximately 10% overrange
and a small underrange (negative) signal.
13. REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT: (optional)
Input type: 0/4 to 20 mA
Input Resistance: 10Ω
Overrange: -5% to 105%
Overload: 100 mA (continuous)
Scale Range: -999 to 9999
Resolution: 1 part in 10,000.
Accuracy:
At 25° C: ±(0.1 % of full scale +½ LSD)
Over 0 to 50°C range: ±(0.2% of full scale +½ LSD)
Reading Rate: 10/sec.
Setpoint Filtering: Programmable Digital
Setpoint Ramping: Programmable, 1 to 9999 units/minute.
14. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS: (optional)
Type: RS485 multipoint, balanced interface
Baud Rate: 300 to 9600
Data Format: 7O1, 7E1, 7N2, 8N1
Node Address: 0 to 99, max of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 2 to 100 msec or 100 to 200 msec
Data Encoding: ASCII
Isolation w.r.t Main Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min. (50 V working)
Not isolated w.r.t. Remote Setpoint or Analog Output common
Note: RS485 and the Analog Output commons are not internally isolated
within the controller. The terminating equipment of these outputs must not
share the same common (ie. earth ground).
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Range: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity:
85% max. relative humidity (non-condensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2g’s.
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 20 g, 11 msec in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
AC line with respect to all Inputs and outputs: 250 V working (2300 V for
1 minute).
Main input with respect to Analog Outputs and Remote Setpoint Input:
50 V working (2300 V for 1 minute).

www.redlion.net

All other inputs and outputs with respect to relay contacts: 2000 VAC
Not isolated between Analog Output and Remote Setpoint commons.
17. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL873, CSA 22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms 2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Simulation of cordless telephones ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. No loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m.
Unit is panel mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or
equivalent) that provides at least 20 dB shielding effectiveness. Metal
panel is connected to earth ground.
Power Line and I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Analog output may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC#LFIL0000 or equivalent.
OR
Install 2 ferrite cores, RLC#FCOR0000 or equivalent, to AC lines at
unit for frequencies above 5 MHz.
I/O cables routed in metal conduit connected to earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
18. CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals
19. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch.
Panel latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking.
One piece tinted plastic bezel. Bezel assembly with circuit boards can be
removed from the case to change the output board without removing the case
from the panel or disconnecting wiring. Unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65
requirements for indoor use, when properly installed. Installation Category
II, Pollution Degree 2.
20. WEIGHT: 0.38 lbs (0.17 kgs)

FRONT PANEL FEATURES
In the normal operating mode, the unit displays the process value in the upper
display. One of the following parameters can be viewed in the lower display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Process Deviation
- Blank Display
The user scrolls through these parameters by pressing the D button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the P button
and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then entered
by the P button, which advances the user to the next parameter. Pressing the D
button immediately returns the controller to the normal operating mode without
changing the currently selected parameter.

HARDWARE FEATURES
A fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance, thus providing excellent process control. Measurement
accuracy of 0.1% or better, provides close process control conforming to the
desired control setpoint value.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
process control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.

REMOTE SETPOINT INPUT
The remote setpoint input facilitates the use of a remote signal to drive the
controller’s setpoint. The remote signal can be scaled independent to that of the
controller’s range. The controller’s response to local/remote setpoint transfers
can be programmed. Also, the remote signal is filtered by use of an adaptive
filter. With this filter, relatively large filtering time constants can be used
without suffering from long settling times. The time constant and filter disable
band are programmable. Additionally, the remote signal can also be velocity
limited (or ramped) to slow the controller’s response to changes in setpoint. This
results in a steady control response with no overshoot.

LINEAR DC ANALOG OUTPUTS
The Main Linear DC output has independent scaling, programmable output
update time and filter (damping) time. These parameters permit flexibility in
process configuration. The output can be set for 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to
20 mA ranges and can be configured for control or for re-transmission of input
or setpoint values.
A Second Linear DC output is dedicated for the re-transmission of the
process input signal. The output can be scaled and converted independent of the
input signal and Main Linear DC output. This output is isolated from the input.

SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
A second setpoint can be selected by the user input and/or through the front
panel.
The setpoint ramp feature can be used to control the setpoint value at start-up
or any time a setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature
reduces shock to the process and helps to minimize overshoot.

INPUT FEATURES

BASIC OPERATION
The P48 controls a process by receiving a linear DC signal representing the
process value, then calculating a control output power value by use of a
modified PID control algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new
output power value to keep the process at setpoint. The PID control algorithm
incorporates features which provide for high control accuracy and low
overshoot from process disturbances.

A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating process characteristics, helping to provide better
control.
The programmable user input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), etc.

OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Programmable output cycle time, output
hysteresis, and dampening can reduce output activity without degrading control
accuracy. The main outputs can operate in PID, ON/OFF, or manual control
modes.

CONTROL AND ALARM OUTPUTS
In addition to the Linear DC output, there are up to three relay outputs
available. Relay outputs can switch user applied AC or DC voltages for control
or alarm purposes.

1-717-767-6511

593

AUTO-TUNE

CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE

The P48 has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular process. After completion
of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for that process
and loaded into non-volatile memory. The operator may view and modify the
parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.

RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
The RS485 communications option allows the connection of up to 32 devices
on a single pair of wires with a distance of up to 4,000 feet and a maximum baud
rate of 9600. Since the same pair of wires are used for both transmit and receive,
only one way communication is possible at any given time. The controller has a
programmable response time to allow the host device adequate time to release
the communication line for a transmission.
Selected parameters from the P48 can be interrogated or changed, and alarm
output(s) may be reset by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. It is also possible to invoke Auto-tune through the serial port.
Serial communications used with SFCRM software allows for easy controller
parameter configuration by computer.

DUAL TIME PROPORTIONAL SYSTEMS
The P48 is available with dual time proportional outputs. The dual outputs
can be used for level or heat/cool applications. The A2 output can be configured
for Secondary (cool) control. This allows for dual PID control or ON/OFF
control with unbalanced hysteresis.

CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial set-up.
The following four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any
required user-interface level:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode

UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *

The Unprotected Parameter Mode is accessible from the Normal Display
mode when program disable is inactive or when the proper access code number
from the Protected Parameter Mode is entered. The Configuration Parameter
Modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”

Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter value to access unprotected parameters and
configuration parameters

The Hidden Function Mode is accessible from the Normal Display Mode.
The functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in Configuration 3
parameter (lock-out section).
-

Select input signal type
Select scaled display decimal point position
Enter rounding increment and trailing zeros for scaled display
Select level of input filtering
- Scale main input

Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function

Configuration 2, Outputs (2-OP) *
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcOd”
“ANtP”
“ANAS”
“ANut”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”

Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select output control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Main Linear DC analog output range
Main Linear DC analog output source
Main Linear DC analog output update time
Main Linear DC analog output scaling low
Main Linear DC analog output scaling high

Configuration 3, Parameter Lock-Outs (3-LC) *
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“bdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”

Select setpoint access level
Select power access level
Enable deviation display
Enable blank display
Enter parameter access code
Select PID access level
Select alarm access level
Enable alarm reset access
Enable local/remote selection
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation

Configuration 4, Alarms (4-AL) *
“ACt1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“ACt2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”

Select operation mode of alarm #1, or select main output
Select reset mode of alarm #1
Enable activation delay of alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #1
Select operation mode of alarm #2, or select second output
Select reset mode of alarm #2
Enable activation delay of alarm #2
Enter value for alarm #2
Enter hysteresis value for both alarms

- Enter time proportioning cycle time
- Enter relative gain
- Enter deadband or overlap

Configuration 6, Serial Communications (6-SC) *
“bAUd”
“ConF”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PoPt”

Select baud rate
Select character frame format
Enter address
Select abbreviated or full transmission
Select print options

Configuration 7, Remote Setpoint Input (7-N2) *

HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *

“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”

“tYPE”
“dCPt”
“rnd”
“FLtr”
“dSP1”
“InP1”
“dSP2”
“InP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”

“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”

The Protected Parameters Mode is enabled when program disable is active.
This mode prevents access to the configuration modes without the proper access
code number. Only the parameters that are enabled in the Configuration 3
parameter (lock-out section) can be accessed.
-

Configuration 1, Inputs (1-IN)

Configuration 5, Second Output (5-O2) *

PROTECTED PARAMETERS MODE *

“ProP”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”

The Configuration Parameter Mode allows the operator to set-up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the Configuration Access
Point allowing the user to return to the Normal Display Mode.

Select local (SP1 or SP2) or remote setpoint
Transfer between automatic (PID) control and manual control
Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
Reset latched alarms

“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“FLtr”
“bAnd”
“trnF”

Configuration 8, Second Linear DC Analog Output (8-A2) *
“A2tP”
“A2LO”
“A2HI”

- Second linear DC analog range
- Second linear DC analog scaling low
- Second linear DC analog scaling high

Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations (9-FS)
“Code 48”
“Code 66”

- Calibrate Instrument
- Reset parameters to factory setting

* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

594

www.redlion.net

MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING

APPLICATION

The P48 is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be
stacked either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel
latch with the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel
latch screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum
spacing from center line to center line of units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This
spacing is the same for vertical or horizontal stacking.

WATER PROCESSING APPLICATION

Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that
the maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.

A city water company needs to maintain a steady flow of water for their
customer needs. They have an existing 0 to 10 VDC flow transmitter to
measure the water flow. They need to control the water flow, have a high and
low alarm, and keep a recorded chart of the flow for later reference. The Main
Linear DC output of the P48 can be used to control the position of water
output values per the desired flow setpoint value. The P48 relay outputs can
be programmed to give a high flow alarm and a low flow alarm. With the
Second Linear DC output model, the flow measurement to the P48 can be
converted from 0-10 V to 4-20 mA and retransmitted to a 4-20 mA chart
recorder.
ALARM
POWER
+

CHART
RECORDER

HIGH
ALARM

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
VERTICAL UNIT STACKING

LOW
ALARM

PANEL LATCH INSTALLED FOR
HORIZONTAL UNIT STACKING

PANEL CUT-OUT SPACING FOR MULTIPLE UNIT STACKING.
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT SHOWN.
UNIT POWER

CONTROL
VALVE

FLOW
SENSOR

WATER FLOW

(Terminal assignments are model number dependent.)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Options and Output Boards are factory configured per the part number specified. Part numbers without replacement output boards listed must be returned
to the factory for output board replacement.
DEDICATED MAIN CONTROL DEDICATED
MAIN CONTROL
O1 or
ALARM 1
O1 OUTPUT
A1(ALARM 1)* A1 OUTPUT

A2 (ALARM 2)
OR O2
(SECONDARY)*

REMOTE
SETPOINT
INPUT @

RS485 @

PART NUMBERS
MAIN
SECOND
REPLACEMENT
ANALOG
ANALOG
OUTPUT
OUTPUT** @ OUTPUT** @
BOARD
18-36 VDC/24 VAC 85 to 250 VAC

YES

P4800011

RBD48100

P4810010

P4810000

YES

P4810111

P4810101

YES

P4810115

P4810105

Relay
Relay

Relay

YES
YES

YES

P4800001

P4810117

P4810107

P481011A

P481010A

RBD48111

P4811110

P4811100

RBD48111

P4811112

P4811102

* This output is programmable as either Control (PID) or as an Alarm.
** This output is jumper and program selectable for either a current or a voltage Linear DC output.
@ These part numbers are equipped with a second setpoint.
Option Boards are installed at the factory for the appropriate models. These boards are only needed for field replacement.

ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.
SFCRM

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Softwware for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP (for RS485 models)

SFCRM

ICM4

RS232/RS485 Serial Converter Module

ICM40030

ICM5

Three Way Isolated RS232/RS485 Serial Converter Module

ICM50000

*Crimson Software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net

1-717-767-6511

595

MODEL PCU - PROCESS CONTROL UNIT
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
FULL PID CONTROL WITH REDUCED OVERSHOOT
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (USES OUTPUT MODULES)
OPTIONAL SECONDARY OUTPUT (USES OUTPUT MODULE)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA OR 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR PROCESS VALUE RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL MOTORIZED VALVE POSITION CONTROL AND
VALVE FAIL ALARM
OPTIONAL SECOND ANALOG INPUT FOR REMOTE SETPOINT
AND CASCADE CONTROL
OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

UL
R

STATUS INDICATORS FOR OUTPUTS AND CONTROL MODES
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT (DIGITAL) FOR ADDED
FLEXIBILITY

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

100 MSEC SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS
DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
PROCESS VALUE AND SETPOINT OR SECOND ANALOG INPUT

MANUAL/AUTOMATIC AND LOCAL/REMOTE SETPOINT
CONTROL MODES
SETPOINT RAMPING FOR PROCESS STARTUP
PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS
FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR Drive and Triac)

ACCEPTS EITHER 0 to 10 VDC OR 0 to 20 mA DC INPUTS

DESCRIPTION

The PCU Controller accepts either 0 to 10 VDC or a 0 to 20 mA DC input
signal, precisely scales the process signal according to programmable scaling
points, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional, linear,
or valve position) to maintain a process at the desired control point. A
comprehensive set of easy to use program instructions allows the controller to
solve various applications.
The controller can operate in the PID control mode for both the main output
and optional secondary output, with on-demand auto-tune, that establishes the
tuning constants. The PID tuning constants may be fine-tuned by the operator
at any time and then locked-out from further modification. The controller
employs a unique overshoot suppression feature, which allows the quickest
response without excessive overshoot. The unit can be transferred to operate in
the manual mode, providing the operator with direct control of the output. The
controller may also be programmed to operate in the ON/OFF control mode
with adjustable hysteresis.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process value and setpoint
simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the controller and
output status. Replaceable and interchangeable output modules (Relay,
Logic/SSR Drive, or Triac) can be installed for the main control output, alarm
output(s) and secondary output.

Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

596

www.redlion.net

OPTIONS
Optional dual alarms can be configured to activate according to a variety of
actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, Band IN or OUT and Valve
Fail Detect) with adjustable hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the output
during power-up until the process stabilizes outside the alarm region. An
optional secondary output is available (for processes that require cooling) that
provides increased control accuracy and response.
A linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to interface
with actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The output signal
can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following: % output
power, measurement value, process measurement value deviation or setpoint
value. Valve Positioner and Second Analog Input Models have the adjustable
output demand dampening, output deadband and output update time parameters
to expand the versatility of the PCU to control devices.
The optional Motorized Valve Positioner directly controls the position of a
valve by the use of twin outputs (open and close) to control the direction of
motor rotation. The motor position defines the opening position of the valve.
Two control modes are possible: position control, that makes use of the
slidewire feedback signal supplied with the positioner and velocity control, in
which no slidewire feedback signal is used. Parameters are provided to adjust
the operation of the valve. These include:
-

Valve activity hysteresis
Valve update time
Variable control dampening
Slidewire signal fail action
Adjustable valve position limits

The Valve Positioner PCU achieves tight process control, yet minimizes
unnecessary valve activity. An alarm event output or display alarm can be
programmed under loss of slidewire feedback or under valve fail detection.
The optional Second Analog Input (0 to 20 mA DC) can be configured as a
remote setpoint signal or as a secondary process signal. Configuration of the
second analog input as a remote setpoint signal allows ratio control, master
setpoint/multiple slave operation, and the ability to cascade the PCU with
another controller (external cascade). Configuration of the second input as a
secondary process signal allows operation as a two-process cascade controller
within a single unit (internal cascade). In either control mode, parameters are
provided to scale, configure, communicate and monitor the activity of both
analog inputs. A square law linearizer function can be used to linearize signals
derived from flow transmitters.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communication interface provides twoway communication between a PCU unit and other compatible equipment such
as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In multipoint
applications the address number of each unit on the line can be programmed
from zero to ninety-nine. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair
of wires. The Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be
interrogated or changed by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. Alarm output(s) may also be reset via the serial
communications interface option.
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for wash down and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount
technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference makes
the controller extremely reliable in industrial environments.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the PCU to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons
or equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red Lion Controls
offers various units (such as an IMP, IMD1 or IMD2) that may be used for this
purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power feeds
independent from other equipment.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Process Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages (Model dependent):
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“SENS”

- Appears when measurement exceeds +105% input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds -5% input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds “OLOL” & “ULUL”
range.

“....”
“-...”
“SLid”
“VALV”

Appears
Appears
Appears
Appears

when
when
when
when

display values exceed + display range.
display values exceed - display range.
loss of slidewire signal is detected.
valve actuator error is detected.

2. POWER: Switch selectable 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line
variation effect, 48 to 62 Hz, 10 VA.
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
LED Backlight Status Indicators (Model dependent):
%PW
DEV
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2
OPN
CLS
SEC
MAN
REM

- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Lower auxiliary display shows deviation (error)
from process setpoint.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active.
- Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option).
- Secondary output is active
(for Secondary Output Option).
- Valve positioner OPEN output is active
(for Valve Positioner Option).
- Valve positioner CLOSE output is active
(for Valve Positioner Option).
- Lower auxiliary display shows second analog input
(for Second Analog Input Option).
- Flashing: Controller is in Manual control mode.
- ON: controller is in remote setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input Option).
- OFF: controller is in local setpoint mode
(Second Analog Input Option).
- Flashing: controller is in Manual control mode
(Second Analog Input Optional).

4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modifying and setup of
controller functions and one external input for parameter lockout or other
functions.
5. SIGNAL INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec typ.
Response Time: 300 msec typ. (to within 99% of final value w/step input)
Signal Overdrive Threshold:
10 V Range: 13 V typ.
20 mA Range: 26 mA typ.
Signal Overdrive Response:
Main Control Output: Programmable preset output
Display: “SENS”
Alarms: Upscale drive
DC Linear: Programmable preset output
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 dB typ. @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering).
Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB typ., DC to 60 Hz
Protection: Input overload 120 VAC for 30 seconds.
Range And Accuracy:
6.
SIGNAL
RANGE

ACCURACY (%
OF UNSCALED
READING)

0 to 10 VDC

±(0.15% + 3 mV)

0 to 20 mA DC ±(0.15% + 6 µA)

MAXIMUM
INPUT

INPUT
IMPEDANCE

RESOLUTION

300 VDC

1 MΩ

10 mV

200 mA DC

10 Ω

10 µA

OUTPUT MODULES [Optional] (For All Output Channels):
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See Ordering Information.)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load) max.
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating. (Decreasing load
and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typ.
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 400 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused
7. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT:
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Auto-tune: When selected, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Signal Overdrive Action: Programmable

1-717-767-6511

597

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

8. SECONDARY OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Cycle time: Programmable
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable
Deadband Overlap: Programmable
9. LINEAR DC OUTPUT (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA)
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance)
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV)
Min. Load Resistance: 10 KΩ (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or process value
(Available for OP1 or OP2, but not both.)
10. MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER (Optional):
Two Outputs: Valve open and valve close or Linear DC (optional)
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules
Three Inputs: Slidewire feedback, signal fail detect (Isolated from main
input)
Slidewire Resistance: 100 Ω to 100 KΩ
Slidewire Exciting Voltage: 0.9 VDC typ.
Slidewire Fail Action: programmable
Control Mode: Position mode (with slidewire) and velocity mode (w/o
slidewire).
Control Deadband: 1% to 25.0% (position mode)
0.1 to 25.0 seconds (velocity mode)
Update Time: 1 to 250 seconds
Motor Time (open, close): 1 to 9999 seconds
Position Limits: Adjustable 0.0 to 100.0% of valve stroke
Valve Fail Time: Off to 9999 seconds
Alarm mode: Dual acting; loss of slidewire feedback signal and valve fail
detection
11. SECOND ANALOG INPUT:
Range: 0 to 20 mA (Isolated from main input)
Overload: 100 mA MIN (steady state)
Input Resistance: 10 Ω typ.
Voltage Drop (@ 20 mA): 0.2 V typ.
Accuracy: 0.15% of reading ±10 μA ±1 LSD
Scale Range: -999 to 9999
12. SERIAL COMMUNICATION:
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300 to 9600
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit
Unit Address: Programmable from 0 to 99, max. of 32 units per line
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs
13. USER INPUT (Optional): Internally pulled up to +5 VDC.
VIN = 5.25 VDC MAX, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 3.0 VMIN,
Available on all second input (MVP & ANA) models, and on models with
RS485.
Response Time: 100 msec max.
Functions: Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Mode Select
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms
Print Request
Local/Remote Setpoint Select
14. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Valve fail
Second Analog Input monitoring
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable
Hysteresis: Programmable

598

Signal Overdrive Action: Upscale
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with secondary output or motorized valve position option.)
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 80°C
Span Drift (maximum): 100 ppm/°C, main input; 150 ppm/°C, second input
Zero Drift (maximum):
4 to 20 mA DC Range: 0.5 μA/°C
0 to 10 VDC Range: 0.2 mV/°C
Second Input: 2 μA/°C
Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
All inputs and outputs with respect to AC line: 2300 VMIN
Analog Outputs, Second Analog Input or Slidewire Input with respect to
main input: 500 VMIN
17. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report #96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Level 3; 10 V/rms2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Level 4; 30 A/m
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:.
Process and/or analog output signals may deviate during EMI
disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Process and/or analog output signals may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent and 1 ferrite
core 1 turn, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to cable at unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.
18. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block
Wire Range: 12-30 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5-7 inch-lbs (56-79 N-cm)
19. CONSTRUCTION: NEMA 2 For Standard Models.
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included)
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing two captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included) This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65
indoor use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
20. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs (0.6 kgs)

www.redlion.net

BASIC OPERATION
The PCU controls a process by measuring the input signal and then calculating
a control output power value by use of a modified PID control algorithm. The unit
controls the system with the new output power value to keep the process at
setpoint. The PID control algorithm incorporates features that provide for high
control accuracy and low overshoot from process disturbances.

Programmable dampening output hysteresis and output update time parameters
can dramatically reduce actuator activity without degrading control accuracy.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be set up to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.

FRONT PANEL FEATURES

AUTO-TUNE

In the normal operating mode, the unit displays the scaled process value in the
upper display. One of four other parameters can be viewed in the lower display:
- Setpoint
- % Power Output
- Deviation
- Second Input Process Value
The parameters can be scrolled through by pressing the DSP button. If
enabled, the control setpoint or power output (manual mode only) can be
directly modified in this mode.
In the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then
entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode when making a parameter change. The controller’s configuration
and parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.

The PCU has an auto-tune feature that, on demand, automatically determines
the PID control parameters for a particular process. After completion of autotune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for that process and
loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and modify the
parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked either at start-up or at setpoint, depending on the
process requirements. An auto-tune programmable dampening factor produces
various levels of process control and response characteristics.

OPTIONS
RATIO CONTROL

HARDWARE FEATURES
The fast 100 msec input sampling rate provides quick controller response to
a process disturbance, thus providing excellent process control. Measurement
accuracy of 0.15% or better, provides closer process control conforming to the
desired control setpoint value. The unit accepts either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 0 to
20 mA DC input signal. The AC input power is switch selectable, allowing the
unit to operate from either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the output modules may be easily
changed or replaced without disturbing the wiring behind the panel. No reprogramming is required when changing or replacing modules.
The optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated model utilizes two bezel securing screws
and a neoprene gasket to guarantee a water tight seal, when properly installed.
The standard model simply requires pressing a latch to remove the unit.
Low-drift, highly stable circuitry ensures years of reliable and accurate
process control. The recommended two-year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.

The PCU configured for ratio operation controls a process as a ratio of
another process or to another variable. Ratio control is commonly used for flow
applications, however, any two process variables can be controlled in a
ratio mode.
Ratio Control Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPtr”
“InPt”

SETPOINT FEATURES
The controller setpoint can be protected from out of range values by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate. This feature reduces
shock to the process and helps to minimize overshoot. The setpoint may also be
transmitted by the optional linear DC output for slave control loops.
The second analog input may be configured as a remote setpoint. As such, the
controller is easily switched from local/remote setpoint operation via the front
panel or user input. Ratio and bias parameters provide on-line scaling of the
remote setpoint. Absolute limit values and maximum rate of change of the
remote setpoint further enhance controller flexibility.

- Select ratio mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point
- Enter scaling units of second input
- Local/Remote Select options
- Program User Input for Local/Remote
Setpoint selection

Ratio Control Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”

- Remote setpoint ratio
- Remote setpoint bias

MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER

INPUT FEATURES
A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating characteristics, helping to provide better process
control. Programmable scaling points allow the controller to display in any
engineering unit; flow, level, pressure, etc. Scaling points are used in
conjunction with the programmable rounding increment to stabilize a jittery or
otherwise hard to read process signal for better indication.
The programmable User Input can be used to control a variety of functions,
such as auto/manual transfer of the controller, reset alarm output(s), etc.
The second analog input has independent scaling parameters to match the
units of other processes or transmitters, or to match the controller’s range.

OUTPUT FEATURES
Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
excessive power can cause damage. Automatic signal overdrive detection, for
fail-safe operation, causes the controller to default to a programmed output
power (upscale or downscale burnout). With adjustable time proportioning
cycle time, and programmable DC linear output, the controller can satisfy a
wide variety of output requirements.

The motorized valve positioner controls the position of a valve directly, by
use of “open” and “close” control outputs. The slidewire feedback signals of
the valve may optionally be connected to the controller. Alternatively, the
controller may be configured for linear input valve control using the 4 to 20 mA
DC output.

1-717-767-6511

599

Motorized Valve Positioner Configuration Parameters
Position mode:

Velocity mode:

“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“Act1”
“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VOnt”

Enter or measure valve closed position
Enter or measure valve open position
Enter Valve update time
Enter valve control deadband
Enter valve fail detect time
Program alarm as valve fail output
Enter Valve update time
Enter valve open time
Enter valve close time
Enter valve control deadband
(minimum on time)

Internal Cascade Operational Parameters
“SP-2”
“Pb-2”
“It-2”
“dt-2”

View secondary setpoint value
Enter secondary proportional band
Enter secondary integral time
Enter secondary derivative time

EXTERNAL CASCADE

INTERNAL CASCADE

Cascade control allows the process to be divided into two control loops: the
primary control loop and the secondary control loop. The secondary loop receives
its setpoint from the primary loop to control an intermediate variable (steam
pressure). The control level of the intermediate variable is the input to the primary
process. The primary loop (main input) controller maintains loop regulation by
manipulating the setpoint of the secondary controller. The setpoint of the
secondary controller, in turn, changes the intermediate variable. The secondary
loop can react faster to disturbances of the intermediate variable, thereby
minimizing the effects to the primary control loop. Control loops cascaded in such
a manner provide greater control quality than would be possible with single loop
control. A single PCU can accomplish two-process cascade control.
Internal Cascade Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“OPd2”

- Select cascade mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point

- Enter scaling units of second input
- Output dampening of secondary

Setpoint Master Control allows automatic setpoint changes to slave
controller units (up to 50 units total) from a master PCU controller. The
linear DC output of the master is looped with the second analog input
of the slave PCU controllers. Each slave unit can have unique remote
setpoint ratio and bias values.
Setpoint Slave Configuration Parameters
“OPEr”
“root”

“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”

- Select remote setpoint mode
- Select second input square root
linearization
- Select second input decimal point

- Enter scaling units of second input
- Limit range of remote setpoint
- Limit rate of change of remote
setpoint

Setpoint Slave Operational Parameters
“rtio”
“bIAS”

600

- Enter scaling units of second input
- Local/Remote select options

External Cascade Operational Parameters

SETPOINT MASTER CONTROL

- Select ratio mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point

- Second input ratio
- Second input bias

www.redlion.net

“rtio”
“bIAS”

- Remote setpoint ratio
- Remote setpoint bias

CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING

Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“dEv”
“IN-2”
“bdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“PId2”
“rtbS”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”

The PCU has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front Panel Program Disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Unprotected Parameter Mode
Configuration Parameter Mode
Protected Parameter Mode
Hidden Function Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.
UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *
The unprotected parameter mode is accessible when program disable is
inactive or when the proper access code number from the protected mode is
entered. The configuration parameter modes can be accessed only from this mode.
“SP”
“OP”
“Prop”
“Intt”
“dErt”
“rtio”
“bIAS”
“SP-2”

“Pb-2”

“It-2”

“dt-2”

“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CNFP”
“End”

Enter Setpoint
Enter output power
Enter proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter Remote Setpoint ratio value
Enter Remote Setpoint bias value
View internal cascade secondary setpoint
demand
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
Enter internal cascade, secondary integral
time
Enter internal cascade, secondary derivative
time
Enter value for alarm #1
Enter value for alarm #2
Select basic configuration mode
Return to normal display mode

Configuration 4, Alarms

“tYPE”
“root”
“dCPt”
“rnd”
“FLtr”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”

Configuration 2, Outputs

“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“OPdP”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”
“ANdb”
“ANUt”

- Select input signal type
- Select square root linearization of main
input *
- Select scaled display decimal point position
- Enter rounding increment and trailing zeroes
for scaled display
- Select level of input filtering

“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”

Enter setpoint lower limit
Enter setpoint higher limit
Enter setpoint ramp rate
Select user input function *

Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter signal overdrive power preset
Enter output control dampening
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning dampening
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC output low scaling value *
Enter linear DC output high scaling value *
Enter linear DC output control deadband *
Enter linear DC output update time *

- Enter time proportioning cycle time
- Enter relative gain
- Enter deadband or overlap

Configuration 6, Serial Communications
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”

“OPEr”

“root”
“dPt2”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPtr”
“OPd2”

Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic
transmissions
- Enter automatic print rate
- Select parameters to be included in print-out

Configuration 7, Second Input

- Select remote setpoint or internal cascade
mode
- Select second input square root linearization
- Select second input decimal point
- Entering scaling parameters of second input
- Enter local/remote select options
- Enter Secondary output control dampening

Configuration 8, Motorized Valve Positioner
Position mode:

Velocity mode:

- Scale main input
-

Select degree of setpoint access
Select degree of power access
Enable deviation display *
Enable second input display *
Enable blank display
Enter parameter access code
Select degree of PID access
Select degree of secondary PID access *
Select degree of ratio/bias access *
Select degree of alarm access *
Enable alarm reset access *
Enable local/remote setpoint selection *
Enable auto/manual mode selection
Enable auto-tune invocation

Configuration 5, Secondary Output

CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODE
The configuration parameter mode allows the operator to set up the basic
requirements of the controller. It is divided into sections which group together
related programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each section, the program returns to the configuration selection
stage allowing the user to return to the normal display mode.
Configuration 1, Inputs

“Act1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”

“VPS1”
“VPS2”
“VUdt”
“VPdb”
“VFAL”
“VUdt”
“VOPt”
“VCLt”
“VOnt”

HIDDEN FUNCTION MODE *
The hidden function mode is accessible from the normal operating mode. The
four functions in this mode may be locked-out individually in configuration 3
parameter lock-out section.
“SPSL”
“trnF”
“tUNE”
“ALrS”

- Select Local/Remote Setpoint
- Transfer between automatic (PID) control
and manual control
- Invoke/cancel PID Auto-tune
- Reset latched alarms

These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

1-717-767-6511

601

Enter Proportional band
Enter integral time
Enter derivative time
Enter remote setpoint ratio value
Enter remote setpoint bias value
Enter internal cascade, secondary setpoint
Enter internal cascade, secondary
proportional band
- Enter internal cascade, secondary integral
time
- Enter internal cascade, secondary derivative
time

“AL-1”
“AL-2”
“CodE”

- Enter value for alarm #1
- Enter value for alarm #2
- Enter access value to unprotected
parameters & configuration parameters

These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

OUTPUT MODULES
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS

Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with some models. See ordering information.)
Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive) maximum.
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).

Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA maximum.

APPLICATION

A chemical company would like to
maintain the level of an acid solution tank to
insure constant availability for their process.
They have chosen a PCU controller which
has a continuous level probe with a 4 to 20
mA output proportional to tank level,
connected to the input terminals. The tank is
filled by controlling the position of a
proportional control valve. The control valve
is controlled by a 3 to 15 PSI air signal.
The PCU uses the level control input as its
feedback. The 4 to 20 mA input signal is
scaled so that 4 mA equals 0% and 20 mA
equals 100%.
The 4 to 20 mA output of the PCU is taken
to an I/P converter to convert the 4 to 20 mA
output to a 3 to 15 PSI signal for the control
valve. The relay outputs of the PCU are used
for high and low level alarms.

602

www.redlion.net

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODELS WITHOUT SECOND INPUT OPTIONS
NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL

4 to 20 mA
ANALOG OUTPUT

0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

COOLING
OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER

NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES

NO
2
NO
2
1
NO
2
1
2
1
2
2
1

NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES

PCU01000
PCU01001
PCU10000
PCU10001
PCU10002
PCU11000
PCU11001
PCU11002
PCU11004
PCU11005
PCU12001
PCU12004
PCU12005

These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with secondary outputs, with shared common terminals (Form A Type). As a result,
these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output module. The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.

SECOND ANALOG INPUT MODELS (RSP)
NEMA 4/XIP65
BEZEL

4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT

0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

COOLING
OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER

YES
YES
YES

NO
YES
NO

NO
NO
YES

2
2
2

NO
NO
NO

YES
NO
NO

PCU10104
PCU11108
PCU12108

These models have dual alarm outputs, or single alarm with secondary outputs, with shared common
terminals (Form A Type). As a result, these outputs should be fitted with the same type of output module.
The main output (OP1) may be fitted with any type of output module.

MOTORIZED VALVE POSITIONER MODELS (MVP)
NEMA 4/XIP65
BEZEL

4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT

0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

COOLING
OUTPUT

RS485 COM

PART NUMBER

YES
YES
YES

NO
YES
NO

NO
NO
YES

1
1
1

NO
NO
NO

YES
NO
NO

PCU10307
PCU11306
PCU12306

ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Relay Module

OMD00000

Triac Module

OMD00001

Logic/SSR Drive Module

OMD00003

SSR Power Unit

RLY50000

Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY60000

Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY6A000

Three Phase DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY70000

Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the controller, be sure to
purchase the appropriate output module for the Main Control Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s),
the secondary output, and valve positioner outputs.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input of an SSR power unit.
It should never be connected to line voltage.
All modules are packaged separately and must be installed by the user.

1-717-767-6511

603

MODEL PSC - PROCESS SETPOINT CONTROLLER
AUTOMATIC PROGRAM DELAY FOR PROFILE CONFORMITY,
PLUS PROGRAM LINKING, REPEATING AND AUTO POWER-ON
FUNCTIONS FOR ENHANCED CAPABILITY
DUAL EVENT OUTPUTS FOR TIMED ACTIVATION OF PROCESS
EQUIPMENT SUCH AS STIRRERS, FANS, HEATERS, ETC. (Uses
Alarm Output Channels)
FOUR SETPOINT & PID PARAMETER SETS FOR QUICK
RECALL OF SETPOINTS AND/OR GAIN VALUES DURING BATCH
OR PROCESS CHANGEOVER
PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT FOR CONTROLLER AND
SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROL
100 MSEC SAMPLING PERIOD WITH 0.15% ACCURACY
ON DEMAND AUTO-TUNING OF PID CONTROL SETTINGS

UL
R

DUAL LED DISPLAYS FOR SIMULTANEOUS INDICATION OF
PROCESS AND SETPOINT OR PROCESS AND PROFILE STATUS
ACCEPTS EITHER 0 to 10 VDC OR 4 to 20 mA DC INPUT SIGNAL

US LISTED

FIELD REPLACEABLE AND INTERCHANGEABLE OUTPUT
MODULES (Relay, Logic/SSR drive, and Triac)

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

SETPOINT PROGRAM CONTROLLER FOR TIME VS. PROCESS
(RAMP/SOAK) AND SPECIAL BATCH/RECIPE APPLICATIONS
ADVANCED PROGRAM PROFILING IN A 1/8 DIN PACKAGE
ON-LINE MONITORING AND CONTROL OF PROGRAM STATUS,
TIME, AND SETPOINT VALUE (Profile Run, Pause, Stop, Advance,
Modify Time, & Setpoint Value)

DESCRIPTION

The PSC is a setpoint controller suitable for time vs. process control
applications. The PSC Controller accepts either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA
DC input signal, precisely scales the process signal, according to programmable
scaling points, and provides an accurate output control signal (time proportional
or linear) to maintain a process at the desired control point. A comprehensive set
of easy to use steps allows the controller to satisfy various applications. The user
input can be programmed to perform a variety of controller functions.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the measured process value and
setpoint or the process and profile status simultaneously. Front panel indicators
inform the operator of controller status and output states. Replaceable output
modules (Relay, logic/SSR drive or Triac) can be fitted to the main control
output, alarm output(s) or timed event output(s), and secondary output.
The PSC has been designed to simplify the set-up and operation of a
controlled setpoint profile program. The setpoint program is easily entered and
controlled through the front panel. Full display capabilities keep the operator
informed of the process value, profile status, output states, and setpoint value.

OPTIONAL DUAL ALARM OUTPUTS (Uses Output Modules)
OPTIONAL SECONDARY OUTPUT (Uses Output Module)
OPTIONAL LINEAR 4 to 20 mA OR 0 to 10 VDC OUTPUT FOR
CONTROL OR PROCESS RE-TRANSMISSION
OPTIONAL RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL

The controller can operate in the standard PID control mode for both Output
1 and Output 2 with on-demand auto-tune which establishes the PID gain set.
The PID gain set can be fine tuned by the operator at any time or may be locked
from further modification. The unit can be transferred to the manual control
mode providing the operator with direct control of the output.
The PSC features four programs or profile recipes, each with up to eight
ramp/soak segments, which can be easily stored and executed at any time.
Longer profiles can be achieved by linking one or more profiles together,
creating a single profile of up to 32 ramp/soak segments. Process profile
conformity is assured during either soak (hold) phases or both ramp and hold
phases by an adjustable error band parameter. The program repeat function
cycles the profile either continuously or a set number of times. Power-on options
automatically re-start, stop, or resume a running profile. The profile can be
controlled via the front panel buttons, the user input, or the optional serial
communications port.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Note: Recommended minimum clearance (behind the panel) for mounting clip installation is 5.5" (140) H x 2.1" (53.4) W.
PANEL CUT-OUT

604

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)

Four control points, each having a setpoint and PID parameter set, are
available for instant front panel implementation during batch changeover, or
other process conditions. A control point may have its PID gain set values
disabled when implementing the control point.
The optional RS485 multidrop serial communications interface provides the
capability of two-way communication between a PSC unit and other compatible
equipment such as a printer, a programmable controller, or a host computer. In
multipoint applications the address number of each unit on the line can be
programmed from 0 to 99. Up to thirty-two units can be installed on a single pair
of wires. The Setpoint value, % Output Power, Setpoint Ramp Rate, etc. can be
interrogated or changed by sending the proper command code via serial
communications. Alarm output(s) may also be reset via the serial
communications interface option.
Optional alarm output(s) may be configured to operate as a timed event
output or as a standard alarm output. As an alarm output it may be configured to
activate according to a variety of actions (Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or
LO, or Band IN or OUT) with adjustable hysteresis. Also, a standby feature
suppresses the output(s) on power-up until the process stabilizes outside the
alarm region. Timed event output(s) allow the controller to activate other
equipment while a programmed profile is running. Each profile can define up to
16 event states (phases), for each output(s).
An optional secondary output is available for processes that require cooling
which provides increased control accuracy and response.
The optional linear 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signal is available to
interface with final actuators, chart recorders, indicators, or other controllers. The
output signal can be digitally scaled and selected to transmit one of the following:
% Output Power
Measurement Value
Measurement Value Deviation
Setpoint Value
An optional NEMA 4X/IP65 rated bezel is available for washdown and/or
dirty environments, when properly installed. Modern surface-mount technology,
extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise interference, makes the controller
extremely reliable in industrial environments.

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the PSC to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit. An independent and redundant
temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly recommended. Red
Lion Controls offers various units (such as an IMP, IMD1 or IMD2) that may be
used for this purpose. The indicators should have input sensors and AC power
feeds independent from other equipment.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. DISPLAY: Dual 4-digit
Upper Process Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) Red LED
Lower Auxiliary Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) Green LED
Display Messages:
“OLOL”
“ULUL”
“SENS”
“....”
“-...”

- Appears when measurement exceeds +105% of input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds -5% of input range.
- Appears when measurement exceeds “OLOL” & “ULUL”
range.
- Appears when display value exceeds + display range.
- Appears when display value exceeds - display range.

2. POWER: 115/230 VAC (+10%, -15%) no observable line variation effect,
48-62 Hz, 10 VA, switch selectable.
3. ANNUNCIATORS:
6 LED Backlight Status Indicators:
%PW
PGM
MAN
OP1
AL1
AL2
OP2

- Lower auxiliary display shows power output in (%).
- Lower auxiliary display shows profile status or profile time
remaining.
- Controller is in manual mode.
- Main control output is active.
- Alarm #1 is active.
- Alarm #2 is active (for Dual Alarm Option).
- Secondary output is active (for Secondary Option).

4. CONTROLS: Four front panel push buttons for modifying and setup of
controller functions and one external input.
5. SETPOINT PROFILE:
Profiles: 4
Segments Per Profile: 8 ramp/hold segments (linkable to 32 segments).
Ramp Rate: 0.1 to 999.9 units/minute or no ramp.
Hold Time: Off or from 0.1 to 999.9 minutes, can be extended to 500 hours
by linking.

Error Band Conformity: Off or from 1 to 9999 units deviation, + value for
hold phases, - value for both ramp and hold phases.
Power-On Modes: Stop, auto-start, or profile resume.
Start Mode: Ramps from process value.
Program Auto Cycle: 1 to 249, or continuous.
Event Outputs: 2, time activated with profile [uses Alarm output(s)].
Control: Front panel buttons, user input, or RS485 communications.
6. CONTROL POINTS:
Setpoints: 4
PID gain sets: 4
Control: Front panel buttons or user input.
7. SIGNAL INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Response Time: 300 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input).
Signal Overdrive Threshold:
10 V Range: 13 V
20 mA Range: 26 mA
Signal Overdrive Response:
Main Control Output: Programmable preset output.
Display: “SENS”
DC Linear: Programmable preset output.
Normal Mode Rejection: 40 db @ 50/60 Hz (improves with increased
digital filtering).
Common Mode Rejection: 100 db, DC to 50/60 Hz.
8. RANGE AND ACCURACY:
Signal Range

Accuracy (% of
Unscaled Reading)

Max. Input

Input
Impedance

Resolution

0 to 10 VDC

±(0.15% + 3 mV)

300 VDC

1M Ω

10 mV

0 to 20 mADC

±(0.15% + 6 µA)

200 mADC

10 Ω

10 µA

9. OUTPUT MODULES (For All Output Channels):
(Optional - Must be ordered separately)
Relay:
Type: Form-C (Form-A with RS485 option)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @
120 VAC (inductive load).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. rating. (Decreasing load and/or
increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).
Logic/SSR Drive: Can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical
Drive: 45 mA max.
Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Ratings: Voltage: 120/240 VAC
Max Load Current: 1 AMP @ 35°C
0.75 AMP @ 50°C
Min Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max. @ 60 Hz
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.
10. MAIN CONTROL OUTPUT:
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC.
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Auto-tune: When performed, sets proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time values.
Probe Break Action: Programmable.
11. SECONDARY OUTPUT (Optional):
Control: PID or ON/OFF.
Output: Time proportioning or linear DC
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output modules.
Cycle time: Programmable.
Proportional Gain Adjust: Programmable.
DeadBand Overlap: Programmable.
12. LINEAR DC DRIVE (Optional): With digital scale and offset,
programmable deadband and update time.
4 to 20 mA:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 25 μA).
Compliance: 10 V (500 Ω max. loop impedance).
0 to 10 VDC:
Resolution: 1 part in 3500 typ.
Accuracy: ±(0.1% of reading + 35 mV).
Min. Load Resistance: 10 K Ω (1 mA max.)
Source: % output power, setpoint, deviation, or process value.
(Available for OP1 or OP2, but not both.)

1-717-767-6511

605

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

13. ALARMS (Optional):
Hardware: Plug-in, replaceable output module.
Modes: Absolute high acting
Absolute low acting
Deviation high acting
Deviation low acting
Inside band acting
Outside band acting
Timed event output(s)
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched.
Delay: Programmable; enable or disable.
Hysteresis: Programmable.
Annunciator: LED backlight for “AL1”, “AL2”, (Alarm #2 not available
with secondary output).
14. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (Optional):
Type: RS485 Multi-point, Balanced Interface.
Communication Format:
Baud Rate: Programmable from 300 to 9600.
Parity: Programmable for odd, even, or no parity.
Frame: 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 or no parity bit, 1 stop bit.
Unit Address: Programmable from 0-99, max. of 32 units per line.
Transmit Delay: 100 msec min., 200 msec max.
RS485 Common: Isolated from signal input common.
Auto Print Time: Off to 9999 seconds between print-outs.
15. USER INPUT: VIN MAX = 5.25 VDC, VIL = 0.85 VMAX; VIH = 2.0 VMIN
Response time: 100 msec max.
Functions:
Program Lock
Integral Action Lock
Auto/Manual Transfer
Setpoint Ramp Select
Reset Alarms

Print Request
Load Control Point
Run/Hold Profile 1
Run/Stop Profile 1

16. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0° to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -40° to 80°C
Span Drift: 90 ppm/°C
Zero Drift: 0 to 10 VDC Range - 0.2 mV/°C
4 to 20 mA DC Range - 0.5 μA/°C
Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
17. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
UL Recognized Component, File # E156876, UL873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 2 or 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL1239-156876/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report #96ME50279-070794
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Level 3; 10 V/m1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Level 3; 10 V/rms2
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
Notes:
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Measurement input and/or analog output signal may deviate during
EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 Vrms:
Measurement input and/or analog output signal may deviate during
EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of the manual for additional
information.

606

18. CONNECTION: Jaw-type terminal block.
19. CONSTRUCTION:
Front Panel: Flame and scratch resistant tinted plastic.
Case: High impact black plastic. (Mounting collar included).
NEMA 4X/IP65 model only: Sealed bezel utilizing 2 captive mounting
screws (panel gasket included). This unit is rated for NEMA 4X/IP65 indoor
use. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
20. WEIGHT: 1.3 lbs. (0.6 kgs)

BASIC OPERATION

The PSC controls the process profile of a system by measuring the input
signal, comparing it to the setpoint value of the profile in progress, and
calculates the new output power value by use of a modified PID control
algorithm. The unit controls the system with the new output power value so the
process value conforms to the profile. The PID control algorithm incorporates
features which provide high control accuracy and low disturbance overshoot.

FRONT PANEL FEATURES

In the normal display mode, the unit will display the scaled process value in
the upper display. One of five other parameters may be selected for viewing in
the lower display:
Target setpoint
% Output Power
Profile Status
Profile phase time remaining
Blank the lower display.
The profile status display indicates the active program number with the
current ramp or hold phase of the program. The profile can be started, stopped,
advanced, etc., from the front panel when the profile status display is viewed, if
not locked from access.
The phase time remaining display, shows the time remaining in a ramp or hold
phase and, if not locked from access, may be changed on-line to effect temporary
changes to the profile. Additionally, the target setpoint and % output power
(manual mode only) may also be changed on-line or locked from operator access.
From the normal operating mode, parameters are selected by use of the PAR
button and modified by use of the UP and DOWN buttons. Parameters are then
entered by the PAR button, which advances the user to the next parameter.
Pressing the DSP button immediately returns the controller to the normal
operating mode from any parameter module. The controller configuration and
parameter settings are stored in an internal E2PROM device.

HARDWARE FEATURES

NEMA 4X/IP65 BEZEL
The fast 100 msec input sampling rate
provides quick controller response to a
process disturbance for excellent process
control. Measurement accuracy of 0.15%
provides closer process control conforming
to the desired control setpoint value.
The unit will accept either a 0 to 10 VDC
or a 4 to 20 mADC input signal. The A.C.
input power is switch selectable, allowing
the unit to operate from either 115 VAC or
230 VAC. Since the controller is
serviceable from the front of the panel, the
output modules may be easily changed or
replaced without disturbing the wiring
behind the panel and NO re-programming
is required. The standard model simply
requires pressing a latch to remove the unit.
The NEMA 4X/IP65 rated model utilizes
two panel securing screws and a neoprene
gasket to guarantee a water tight seal, when
properly installed.
Low-drift, highly stable circuit design ensures years of reliable and accurate
process control. The recommended two year re-calibration interval is easily
accomplished via the programming menu.

www.redlion.net

CONFIGURATION MODE

Configuration 4, Alarms *

“FLtr”
“dSP1”
“INP1”
“dSP2”
“INP2”
“SPLO”
“SPHI”
“SPrP”
“InPt”

- Select current or voltage
- Select scaled display decimal point position
- Enter rounding increment and trailing zeros for scaled
display
- Select degree of input filtering
- Enter display reading for scaling point #1
- Key-in or apply signal level for scaling point #1
- Enter display reading for scaling point #2
- Key-in or apply signal level for scaling point #2
- Enter setpoint lower limit
- Enter setpoint higher limit
- Enter setpoint ramp rate
- Select user input function
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.

“CYC2”
“GAN2”
“db-2”

- Enter time proportioning cycle time
- Enter relative gain
- Enter deadband or overlap

Configuration 6, Serial Communications *
“bAUd”
“PArb”
“Addr”
“Abrv”
“PrAt”
“PoPt”

Select baud rate
Select parity bit
Enter unit address number
Select abbreviated or full mnemonic transmissions
Enter automatic print rate
Select parameters to be included in print-out

Configuration 7, Control Points
“CSEt”
“SP-x”
“PID”
“PB-x”
“It-x”
“dt-x”

Enter time proportioning cycle time
Select control action
Enter output power low limit
Enter output power high limit
Enter signal overdrive power preset
Enter ON/OFF control hysteresis
Select auto-tuning damping
Select linear DC output assignment *
Enter linear DC low scaling value *
Enter linear DC high scaling value *

Select control point number for set-up 1, 2, 3, & 4
Enter setpoint value for selected control point
Select if PID gain set to be loaded with setpoint
Enter proportional band for selected control point *
Enter integral time for selected control point *
Enter derivative time for selected control point *

Configuration 8, Profiles
“PSEt”
“PnCC”
“PnLN”
“PnSt”
“PnEb”
“Pnr1”
“PnL1”
“PnH1”
.
.
“Pnr8”
“PnL8”
“PnH8”
“Pn 1”
.
.
“Pn16”

Configuration 3, Parameter lock-outs
“SP”
“OP”
“P-CS”
“P-tr”
“bdSP”
“CodE”
“PId”
“AL”
“ALrS”
“CPAC”
“PrAC”
“trnF”
“tUNE”

Configuration 5, Secondary Output *

Configuration 2, Outputs
“CYCt”
“OPAC”
“OPLO”
“OPHI”
“OPFL”
“CHYS”
“tcod”
“ANAS”
“ANLO”
“ANHI”

“Act 1”
“rSt1”
“Stb1”
“AL-1”
“Act2”
“rSt2”
“Stb2”
“AL-2”
“AHYS”

Select degree of setpoint access
Select degree of power access
Select degree of profile status access
Select degree of phase time remaining access
Enable blank display
Enter parameter access code
Select degree of PID access
Select degree of alarm access *
Enable manual reset of alarms *
Enable control point access
Enable ramp/hold program access
Enable automatic/manual transfer
Enable auto-tune invocation

* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other

Select profile or event output for set-up 1, 2, 3, or 4
Enter program-repeat cycle count for selected profile
Select link option for selected profile
Enter power-down resume status for selected profile
Enter error band for process conformity for selected profile
Enter ramp rate 1 for selected profile *
Enter setpoint level 1 for selected profile *
Enter hold time 1 for selected profile *
Enter ramp rate 8 for selected profile *
Enter setpoint level 8 for selected profile *
Enter hold time 8 for selected profile *
Select event outputs at phase 1 for selected profile

Select event outputs at phase 16 for selected profile

Configuration 9, Factory Service Operations
(Detailed in the operator’s manual)

programming.

SETPOINT FEATURES

The controller’s setpoint can be protected from out of range values, by
programming the setpoint range limit values. Additionally, safeguards from
inadvertent data entry can also be programmed.
The setpoint ramp feature ramps the setpoint value at start-up or any time a
setpoint change is made, at a user programmable rate, independent of a
programmed profile. This feature reduces shock to the process and also helps to
minimize overshoot.
The active setpoint, which can be a running profile, may also be transmitted
by the linear DC output for slave control loops.
Four control points are available which can be implemented at any time. Each
control point is programmed independently, with each having a setpoint and a
PID gain set value. With gain value changes, the output power control signal
will not “bump” resulting in a smooth control transition.

INPUT FEATURES

OUTPUT FEATURES

Programmable output power limits provide protection for processes where
too much power can cause damage. Automatic signal overdrive detection can be
used to define the state of the output channels, when this situation occurs. With
adjustable time proportioning-cycle time and programmable D.C. Linear output,
the controller can satisfy a wide variety of output requirements.
During execution of a profile, two independent timed event outputs are
available to control or signal other equipment. The event outputs use the
alarm channels.
The RS485 Communication option allows the user to access various
controller parameters such as the setpoint, % output power, % proportional
band, etc. The controller may be setup to transmit various parameters at a
programmable automatic print rate.

AUTO-TUNE

A programmable input filter can be used to stabilize readings from a process
with varying or oscillating characteristics, helping to provide better
process control.
Scaling points allow the controller to display in any engineering unit; flow,
level, pressure temperature, etc. Scaling points are used in conjunction with the
programmable rounding increment to stabilize a jittery or otherwise hard to read
process signal for better indication.
A programmable User Input is available to control a variety of controller
functions, such as profile control, auto/manual transfer, serial communication
print requests, etc.

The model PSC has an auto-tune feature which, on demand, automatically
determines the PID control parameters for a particular process. After completion
of auto-tune, the PID parameters are automatically optimized for that process
and loaded into nonvolatile memory. The operator may view and modify the
parameters as desired.
Auto-tune may be invoked at start-up, while ramping, or at setpoint,
depending on the process requirements. A programmable auto-tune damping
factor produces various levels of process control and response characteristics.

PROFILE PROGRAMMING

Profiles are programmed independently of each other and are separate from the
configuration of other controller parameters. Each profile has parameters for error
band (profile conformity), linking, auto-start and program repeat cycles. Profiles
may be altered during execution, so changes take effect as the profile advances.

1-717-767-6511

607

CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING

The model PSC has been designed to reduce the operator interaction with the
controller while still maintaining a high degree of control accuracy and user
flexibility. Front panel program disable allows all of the controller’s set-ups to be
locked-out from further operator intervention after the initial parameter set-up.
The programming of the controller is divided into four sections:
Hidden Mode
Protected Mode
Unprotected Mode
Configuration Mode
These four programming modes allow the controller to adapt to any required
user-interface level.

OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITH RS485 OPTION

The Dual Alarm or the Secondary with Alarm output, with RS485 option,
does not have independent outputs. In this case, the secondary output and/or
alarm output(s) must have the same type of output modules installed since they
share the common terminal.

UNPROTECTED PARAMETER MODE

OUTPUT MODULES

Units equipped with RS485 option must have the Dual Alarm or Secondary
w/alarm options fitted with the same type of output modules. The controller’s
main output (OP1) can be fitted with any output module. Output modules are
shipped separately and must be installed by the user.
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS

PROTECTED PARAMETER MODE *

Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter

proportional band
integral time
derivative time
value for alarm #1
value for alarm #2
access value to unprotected mode

* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

HIDDEN FUNCTIONS MODE *

Relay:
Type: Form -C (Form-A with RS485 option only)
Rating: 5 Amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive).
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at maximum load rating.
(Decreasing load and/or increasing cycle time, increases life expectancy).

Invoke control point x
Control ramp/hold profile state
Transfer between automatic (PID) control and Manual control
Invoke/Cancel PID auto-tune
Reset latched alarms

* These parameters may not appear due to option configuration or other
programming.

OUTPUT VARIATIONS WITHOUT RS485 OPTION

The Dual Alarm or the Secondary with Alarm output, without the RS485
option, has independent outputs. Therefore, the secondary output and/or alarm
output(s) can be installed with any combination of output modules.

Logic/SSR Drive: can drive multiple SSR Power Units.
Type: Non-isolated switched DC, 12 VDC typical.
Drive: 45 mA max.

Triac:
Type: Isolated, Zero Crossing Detection.
Rating:
Voltage: 120/240 VAC.
Max. Load Current: 1 Amp @ 35°C
0.75 Amp @ 50°C
Min. Load Current: 10 mA
Off State Leakage Current: 7 mA max @ 60 Hz.
Operating Frequency: 20 to 500 Hz.
Protection: Internal Transient Snubber, Fused.

608

www.redlion.net

APPLICATION
A chemical treatment process requires the PH level of a solution
be ramped at staged levels over specific time periods during
start-up. The PSC unit is installed to meet this requirement.
After the tank is filled, the PSC’s user input is triggered to run
profile 1 to start the process. Alarm output 2 signals the operator
if the PH level deviates outside the running profile. The error band
(profile conformance) is programmed to the desired value to
prevent the PH level from deviating from the programmed
setpoint profile. Timed event output 1 signals that the profile
process is complete.

1-717-767-6511

609

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PSC

Process
Setpoint
Controller

PMK5
RLY
RLY

NEMA 4X/IP65
BEZEL

4 to 20 mA
ANALOG
OUTPUT

0 to 10 VDC
ANALOG
OUTPUT

ALARM
OUTPUTS

SECONDARY
OUTPUT

YES

RS485 COM

PART
NUMBER

PSC11001

YES

PSC11004

YES

PSC11005

YES

PSC12004

YES

PSC12005

Relay Module

OMD00000

Triac Module

OMD00001

Logic/SSR Drive Module

OMD00003

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/4 DIN to 1/8 DIN)

PMK50000

SSR Power Unit

RLY50000

Single Phase 25 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY60000

Single Phase 40 A DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY6A000

Three Phase DIN Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY70000

Note: Output Modules are NOT supplied with the controller. When specifying the controller, be sure to
purchase the appropriate output module for the Main Control Output and if necessary, the alarm output(s)
and secondary output. The controller can be fitted with any combination of output modules that do not
have the RS485 option.
The Logic/SSR Drive Module is a switched DC source, intended to drive the DC input of an SSR power
unit. It should never be connected to a line voltage.
All modules are shipped separately and must be installed by the user.

610

www.redlion.net

MODEL TLA - TEMPERATURE LIMIT ALARM
z FM APPROVED, UL RECOGNIZED
z 2-LINE BY 4-DIGIT DISPLAY
z EXCEED, OUTPUT, AND ALARM ANNUNCIATORS
z FOUR BUTTON SILICONE RUBBER KEYPAD
z THERMOCOUPLE OR RTD SENSOR INPUT
z REMOTE RESET INPUT
z MAIN LIMIT OUTPUT: 5A RELAY. SELECTABLE FOR HIGH OR
LOW TRIP ACTIVATION
z OPTIONAL ALARMS: 5A RELAY(S)
z OPTIONAL NEMA 4X/IP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL
z PARAMETER SECURITY VIA PROGRAMMABLE LOCKOUTS

UL Recognized Component,
File # E179259

APPROVED

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The TLA is a Factory Mutual approved temperature limit alarm, intended to
provide an independent shutdown for thermal processes. The TLA accepts
signals from a variety of temperature sensors (thermocouple or RTD elements),
and its comprehensive programming allows it to meet a wide variety of
application requirements.
Dual 4-digit displays allow viewing of the process temperature and limit
setpoint simultaneously. Front panel indicators inform the operator of the
process and output status. The main limit output and alarm outputs are field
replaceable.
The limit output is selectable for high or low trip activation. If the process
temperature goes above the limit setpoint for a high trip, or below the limit
setpoint for a low trip, the limit relay will de-energize to initiate a process
shutdown. The limit output cannot be reset until the process temperature returns
to the proper operating range; manual reset is required (local or remote). Sensor
failure will initiate a process shutdown.
Relay alarm(s) can be configured to activate according to a variety of actions
(Absolute HI or LO, Deviation HI or LO, and Band IN or OUT) with adjustable
hysteresis. A standby feature suppresses the alarm during power-up until the
process stabilizes outside the alarm region.
The unit is constructed of a lightweight, high impact plastic case with a tinted
front panel. The front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications when properly
installed. Multiple units can be stacked horizontally or vertically. Modern
surface-mount technology, extensive testing, plus high immunity to noise
interference makes the TLA extremely reliable in industrial environments.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PANEL CUT-OUT

1-717-767-6511

611

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 2 line by 4-digit LED
Upper (Main) Display: 0.4" (10.2 mm) high red LED
Lower (Secondary) Display: 0.3" (7.6 mm) high green LED
Display Messages:
“OLOL” - Appears when measurement exceeds + sensor range.
“ULUL” - Appears when measurement exceeds - sensor range.
“OPEN” - Appears when open sensor is detected.
“SHrt” - Appears when shorted sensor is detected (RTD only)
“...” - Appears when display values exceed + display range.
“-..” - Appears when display values exceed - display range.
LED Status Annunciators:
EX - Temperature exceeds limit setpoint
OUT - Limit output is de-energized
A1 - Alarm #1 is active
A2 - Alarm #2 is active
2. POWER:
Line Voltage Models: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 8 VA.
Low Voltage Models:
DC Power: 18 to 36 VDC, 7 W.
AC Power: 24 VAC +/-10%, 50/60 Hz, 9 VA
3. CONTROLS: Four rubber push buttons: R, P, Up, Down
4. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programmable parameters and
values.
5. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Range: FM rated @ 0 to 65°C, UL rated @ 0 to 55°C
Storage Range: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 65°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
6. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATINGS:
AC line with respect to all inputs and outputs: 2300 V for 1 minute (250
V working)
Relay contacts to all other inputs and outputs: 2300 VAC
DC Power with respect to sensor input: 50 V working (500 V for 1 minute)
7. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
Factory Mutual Approved, Report #3014646, FM 3545, FM 3810
UL Recognized Component, File #E156876, UL 873, CSA C22.2 No. 24
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL 50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS

1. SENSOR INPUT:
Sample Period: 100 msec
Step Response Time: Less than 300 msec typ., 400 msec max. (to within
99% of final value)
Normal Mode Rejection: Greater than 40 dB @ 50/60 Hz
Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 120 dB, DC to 60 Hz
Overvoltage Protection: Input overload 120 VAC for 15 seconds max.
2. Failed Sensor Response:
Main Output: Sensor failure will initiate a process shutdown
Display: “OPEN”
Alarms: Upscale
3. INDICATION ACCURACY: ±(0.3% of Span +1°C) at 23°C ambient after
20 minute warm-up. (Includes NIST conformity, cold junction effect, A/D
conversion errors and linearization conformity.
Span Drift (maximum): 130 PPM/°C
4. RTD INPUT: 2 or 3 wire, 100 Ω platinum, alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760),
alpha = 0.0039162
Excitation: 150 μA typical
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 degree
Lead Resistance: 15 Ω max. per input lead

612

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326
Immunity:
Electrostatic discharge

Electromagnetic RF fields
Fast transients (burst)

Surge

RF conducted interference
Voltage dip/interruptions
Emissions:
Emissions

EN 61000-4-2 Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1 kV L-L, 2 kV
L&N-E power
1 kV signal
EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
EN 55011

Class A

Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
8. CONNECTION: Wire clamping screw terminals
Wire Gage Capacity: Two 14 AWG (2.55 mm), four 18 AWG (1.02 mm), or
four 20 AWG (0.61 mm).
Terminal Torque: 1.0Nm (8.9 in-lbs.).
1.4Nm (12.4 in-lbs.) max.
9. CONSTRUCTION: Black plastic alloy case and collar style panel latch.
Panel latch can be installed for vertical or horizontal instrument stacking.
One piece tinted plastic bezel. Bezel assembly with circuit boards can be
removed from the case to change the output board without removing the case
from the panel or disconnecting wiring. Unit meets NEMA 4X/IP65
requirements for indoor use, when properly installed. Flame resistant.
Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
10. WEIGHT: 0.38 lbs (0.17 kgs)

5. THERMOCOUPLE INPUT:
Types: T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, Linear mV, software selectable
Input Impedance: 20 MΩ all types
Lead resistance effect: 0.25 μV/Ω
Cold junction compensation: Less than ±1°C typ., (±1.5°C max), error over
0 to 65°C max. ambient temperature range. Defeated for Linear mV
indication mode.
Resolution: 1° for all types, or 0.1° for T, E, J, K, and N onlY.
TC TYPE

T
E
J
K
R
S

RTD TYPE

RANGE

385

-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F

392

-200 to +600°C
-328 to +1100°F

OHMS

2.0 to 320.0

RANGE

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

BS 1843

blue (+)
red (-)
violet (+)
red (-)
white (+)
red (-)
yellow (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
black (+)
red (-)
grey (+)
red (-)
orange (+)
red (-)
no standard

white (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
yellow (+)
blue (-)
brown (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
white (+)
blue (-)
no standard
orange (+)
blue (-)
no standard

6. REMOTE RESET INPUT: Internally pulled up to +5 VDC (1MΩ).
VIL: 0.85 V max., VIH: 3.65 V min., VIN MAX: 5.25 VDC, IOFF: 1μA max.

www.redlion.net

OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. LIMIT AND ALARM OUTPUT RELAYS:
Contact Rating: 5 A @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load) 1/10 HP @ 120
VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles at max. load rating. (Decreasing load
increases life expectancy.)
2. LIMIT OUTPUT: TLA21000: Form-C relay; TLA11100: Form-A relay.
Selectable for high or low trip activation. If the process temperature goes
above the limit setpoint for a high trip, or below the limit setpoint for a low
trip, the limit relay will de-energize to initiate a process shutdown. The limit
output cannot be reset until the process temperature returns to the proper
operating range; manual reset is required (local or remote).
Annunciators:
“EX” - Lit when the process temperature exceeds the limit setpoint.
“OUT” - Lit when the limit output is de-energized.

3. ALARM OUTPUTS (Optional): One or two Form-A relays.
Modes:
Absolute High Acting
Absolute Low Acting
Deviation High Acting
Deviation Low Acting
Inside Band Acting
Outside Band Acting
Reset Action: Programmable; automatic or latched. Latched alarms can be
reset regardless of limit exceed condition.
Standby Mode: Programmable; enable or disable.
Hysteresis: Programmable.
Annunciator: “A1” and “A2” programmable for normal or reverse acting.

ORDERING INFORMATION
85 to 250 VAC
LIMIT OUTPUT

ALARM 1 OUTPUT

Form-C Relay

Form-A Relay

ALARM 2 OUTPUT

REPLACEMENT
OUTPUT BOARD

PART NUMBERS

RBDLA210

TLA21000

Form-A Relay

RBD48111

TLA11100

ALARM 2 OUTPUT

REPLACEMENT
OUTPUT BOARD

PART NUMBERS

RBDLA210

TLA21010

RBD48111

TLA11110

18 to 36 VDC / 24 VAC
LIMIT OUTPUT

ALARM 1 OUTPUT

Form-C Relay

Form-A Relay

5. In very electrically noisy environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure.
The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubbers:
RLC #SNUB0000

1-717-767-6511

613

1.0 INSTALLING THE TLA
The TLA meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements for indoor use to provide a
watertight seal in steel panels with a minimum thickness of 0.09 inch, or
aluminum panels with a minimum thickness of 0.12 inch. The units are intended
to be mounted into an enclosed panel. It is designed so that the units can be
stacked horizontally or vertically. The bezel assembly MUST be in place during
installation of the unit.

Instructions:
1. Prepare the panel cutout to the dimensions.
2. Remove the panel latch from the unit. Discard the cardboard sleeve.
3. Carefully remove the center section of the panel gasket and discard. Slide
the panel gasket over the unit from the rear, seating it against the lip at the
front of the case.
4. Insert the unit into the panel cutout. While holding the unit in place, push the
panel latch over the rear of the unit, engaging the tabs of the panel latch in
the farthest forward slot possible.
5. To achieve a proper seal, tighten the panel
latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in
the panel, torquing the screws to
approximately 7 in-lbs (79 N-cm). Over
tightening can result in distortion of the panel,
and reduce the effectiveness of the seal.
Note: The installation location of the TLA is
important. Be sure to keep it away from heat
sources (ovens, furnaces, etc.), and away from
direct contact with caustic vapors, oils, steam,
or any other process byproducts in which
exposure may affect proper operation.

Multiple Unit Stacking
The TLA is designed for close spacing of multiple units. Units can be stacked
either horizontally or vertically. For vertical stacking, install the panel latch with
the screws to the sides of the unit. For horizontal stacking, the panel latch
screws should be at the top and bottom of the unit. The minimum spacing from
center line to center line of units is 1.96" (49.8 mm). This spacing is the same
for vertical or horizontal stacking.

F
Note: When stacking units, provide adequate panel ventilation to ensure that
the maximum operating temperature range is not exceeded.
Caution: Disconnect power to the unit and to the output control circuits
to eliminate the potential shock hazard when removing the bezel
assembly.

Unit Removal Procedure
To remove a unit from the panel, first loosen the panel latch screws. Insert
flat blade screwdrivers between the latch and the case on either side of the unit,
so that the latches disengage from the grooves in the case. Push the unit through
the panel from the rear.

Caution: The bezel assembly contains electronic circuits that can be damaged
by static electricity. Before removing the assembly, discharge static charge on
your body by touching an earth ground point. It is also important that the
bezel assembly be handled only by the bezel itself. Additionally, if it is
necessary to handle a circuit board, be certain that hands are free from dirt,
oil, etc., to avoid circuit contamination that may lead to malfunction. If it
becomes necessary to ship the unit for repairs, place the unit in its case
before shipping.

Installing Bezel Assembly
To install the bezel assembly, insert the assembly into the case until the bezel
is fully seated against the lip of the case. Properly installing the bezel assembly
is necessary for watertight sealing.

Removing Bezel Assembly
The bezel assembly must be removed from the case to replace the output
board. To remove the bezel assembly, insert a flat blade screwdriver into the pry
slot on either side of the unit. Twist the screwdriver handle until the unit is
ejected enough to allow removal.

614

www.redlion.net

2.0 WIRING THE TLA
After the unit has been mechanically mounted, it is ready to be wired. All
wiring connections are made to the rear screw terminals. When wiring the unit,
use the numbers on the label and those embossed on the back of the case, to
identify the position number with the proper function.
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation, local
codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied to the unit (AC
or DC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. Strip the wire, leaving
approximately 1/4" (6 mm) bare wire exposed (stranded wires should be tinned
with solder). Insert the wire under the clamping washer and tighten the screw
until the wire is clamped tightly.
Caution: Unused terminals are NOT to be used as tie points. Damage to the
TLA may result if these terminals are used.

POWER WIRING
AC Power
Primary AC power is connected to terminals #11 and #12, labeled AC. To
reduce the chance of noise spikes entering the AC line and affecting the TLA,
an AC feed separate from that of the load should be used to power the TLA. Be
certain that the AC power to the TLA is relatively “clean” and within the
variation limit. Connecting power from heavily loaded circuits or circuits that
also power loads that cycle on and off (contacts, relays, motors, etc.), should be
avoided.

RTD
When connecting the RTD, be certain that the connections are clean and
tight. RTD sensors have a higher degree of accuracy and stability than
thermocouple sensors. Most RTD sensors available are the three wire type. The
third wire is a sense lead for canceling the effects of lead resistance of the probe.
Four wire RTD elements may be used by leaving one of the sense leads
disconnected. Two wire RTD sensors may be used in either of two ways:
A) Attach the RTD to terminals #8 and #10. Install a copper sense wire of the
same wire gauge as the RTD leads. Attach one end of the wire at the probe
and the other end to terminal #9. Complete lead wire compensation is
obtained. This is the preferred method.
B) Attach the RTD to terminals #8 and #10. Install a shorting wire between
terminals #9 and #10. A temperature offset error of 2.5°C/ohm of lead
resistance exists. The error may be compensated by programming a
temperature offset.
Note: With extended cable runs, be sure the lead resistance is less than 15
ohms/lead.

DC Power
DC Power (18 to 36 VDC) is connected to terminals #11 and #12 labeled
DC+ and DC- respectively.
CAUTION: Observe proper polarity when connecting DC voltages.
Damage to the unit may occur if polarity is reversed.

RTD Connection

RELAY CONNECTIONS

SIGNAL WIRING
Thermocouple
When connecting the thermocouple, be certain that the connections are clean
and tight. If the thermocouple probe cannot be connected directly to the TLA,
thermocouple wire or thermocouple extension-grade wire must be used to
extend the connection points (copper wire does not work). Always refer to the
thermocouple manufacturer’s recommendations for mounting, temperature
range, shielding, etc. For multi-probe temperature averaging applications, two
or more thermocouple probes may be connected to the TLA (always use the
same type). Paralleling a single thermocouple to more than one TLA is not
recommended. Generally, the red wire from the thermocouple is negative and
connected to the TLA’s common.

To prolong contact life and suppress electrical noise interference due to the
switching of inductive loads, it is good installation practice to install a snubber
across the contactor. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Note: Snubber leakage current can cause some electromechanical devices to be
held ON.
*Terminal numbers are model dependent. See Terminal Configurations for
description.

REMOTE RESET WIRING

Thermocouple Connection

The use of shielded cable is recommended. Follow the EMC installation
guidelines for shield connection.
Terminal #6 is the Remote Reset. Any form of mechanical switch may be
connected to terminal #6 (REMOTE RESET) and terminal #8 (COMM.).
Sinking open collector logic with less than 0.7 V saturation and off-state leakage
current of less than 1 μA may also be used.

1-717-767-6511

615

3.0 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION

The front panel bezel material is flame and scratch resistant, tinted plastic that
meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements, when properly installed. Continuous
exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of the bezel. The
bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and neutral soap product. Do NOT
use solvents. There are two 4-digit LED displays, a red upper Main Display and
a lower green Secondary Display.
There are up to four panel annunciators, with red backlighting, that illuminate
to inform the operator of the TLA and output status. See the front panel diagram
for a description of the annunciators. Four front panel buttons are used to access
different modes and parameters. The following is a description of each button.
Do NOT use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc) to operate the
keypad of this unit.

Button Functions
R - The Reset (R) button is used to reset the limit and alarm relays. The limit output
cannot be reset until the process temperature returns to the proper operating
range. Latched alarms can be reset regardless of limit exceed condition.
P - The Parameter (P) button is used to access programming, enter the change,
and scroll through the available parameters in any mode.
UP, DN - The Up/Down buttons are used to modify parameters.

TLA POWER-UP
Upon applying power, the TLA delays input indication and control action for
five seconds to perform several self-diagnostic tests and to display basic TLA
information. Initially, the TLA illuminates both displays and all annunciators to
verify that all display elements are functioning. The TLA then displays the
programmed input sensor type in the main (top) display and the revision number
of the TLA’s operating system in the secondary (bottom) display. The TLA

checks for correct internal operation and displays an error message (E-xx) if an
internal fault is detected. (See the Troubleshooting section for further
information.)
Upon completion of this sequence, the TLA begins displaying the input value
and setpoint, and updates the outputs based upon this condition.

TLA CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW
The TLA is programmed with certain parameter settings from the factory.
Factory settings are listed in parentheses in the various Configuration of
Parameters tables. In many cases, these settings must be changed to the
particulars of the application before proper operation can be started.
The TLA is typically in the Normal Display Mode. In this mode, the process
temperature is displayed in the main (top) display, and the limit setpoint is
displayed in the secondary (bottom) display. When changes to the parameter
configurations are needed, the P button is pressed, and the TLA will enter into
the Parameter Mode.

PARAMETER CONFIGURATION BASIC STARTUP
For basic start-up, it is important to verify or change Input Parameter Module
(1-IN) parameters tYPE and SCAL, and Output Parameter Module (2-OP)
parameter LiAC (Limit Trip Action). For alarm set-up, it is important to verify
or change Alarms Parameter Module (4-AL) parameters ACt1, AL-1, ACt2, and
AL-2.
If the above Input parameters or the input wiring connections are not correct,
then the main (top) display may display an error message or incorrect value.
Verify the input programming and wiring. (If incorrect display continues, refer
to the Troubleshooting section.) All other parameter configurations are
important but will not prevent the TLA from showing a correct display.

4.0 PARAMETER MODE
F

The Parameter Mode is accessed by pressing the P Button from the Normal
Display Mode. While in the Parameter Mode, the temperature is displayed in the
main (top) display, and the parameter is displayed in the secondary (bottom)
display. The correct password must be entered before any parameters can be
accessed. To modify values, use the UP or DOWN button while the parameter is
displayed. Use the P button to accept the new value, and to scroll through the
parameters. The TLA will automatically return to the normal display mode if no
action is taken. The TLA responds to the new values immediately, but the change

is not committed to non-volatile memory until the TLA is returned to the Normal
Display Mode. If power loss occurs before returning to the normal display mode,
the new values must be re-entered.
To gain access to the Configuration Parameter Modules continue to CNFP
and press the UP button. These modules allow access to the fundamental set-up
parameters of the TLA. If the setpoint or alarm values are modified, the CNFP
step will be skipped.

Parameter Mode Reference Table
DISPLAY

PASS

PARAMETER

Password to access parameters

RANGE

0 to 250

Limit setpoint

-999 to 9999

AL-1 *

Alarm #1

-999 to 9999

AL-2 *

Alarm #2

-999 to 9999

CNFP

Configuration parameter modules

End

End of Parameter Mode

“Up” button: enter
configuration modules.

DESCRIPTION

If an incorrect value is entered, the TLA will display “End”
momentarily, and then return to the normal display mode. The
default password is 10. The wildcard password is 222 (in case the
password is forgotten).
Range limited by SPLO & SPHI.
The Alarm parameters can be independently locked out from
appearing. See Configuration Module 3, Parameter Lock-outs.
These modules allow access to the fundamental set-up parameters
of the TLA. The modules are grouped into related
programming steps, such as inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Upon
completion of each module, the program returns to “CNFP”.
When the parameter list has been scrolled through, the TLA
will display “End” momentarily, and then return to the normal
display mode.

* Model Number Dependent.

616

www.redlion.net

CONFIGURATION PARAMETER MODULES
The Configuration Parameter modules are accessed by pressing the UP button
from CNFP in the Parameter Mode. The UP or DOWN buttons can be pressed to
move to the desired Parameter Module. The P button is then pressed to enter into
that module. The main (top) display will be the parameter, and the secondary
(bottom) display will be the parameter value. The UP or DOWN buttons are used
to modify the desired parameter value, and the P button enters the new value, and
moves to the next parameter. The TLA responds to the new values after the P

button is pressed, however, the change is not committed to permanent memory
until the TLA is returned to the Normal Display Mode. If power loss occurs before
returning to the Normal Display Mode, the new values must be entered again. At
the end of each module, the TLA will go back to CNFP. Other Parameter Modules
can be accessed by pressing the UP or DOWN buttons, or pressing P will return
to the Normal Display Mode.
Parameters that are model number, or program dependent will only be
displayed when the appropriate options are installed or programmed.

CONFIGURE MODULE 1 - INPUT PARAMETERS (1-IN)
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

tYPE

Input Type

SCAL

RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

tc-t - Type T TC
tc-E - Type E TC
tc-J - Type J TC
tc-K - Type K TC
tc-r - Type R TC
tc-S - Type S TC
tc-b - Type B TC
tc-N - Type N TC
LIN - Linear mV
r385 - 385 curve RTD
r392 - 392 curve RTD
rLIN - Linear ohms
(tc-J)

Select from the list of various thermocouple and RTD sensors.

Temperature Scale

°F or °C
(°F)

Select either degrees Fahrenheit (F) or degrees Celsius (C). If
changed, be sure to check all parameters.

dCPt

Temperature Resolution

0 or 0.0
(0)

Select either 1 or 0.1 degree resolution. If changed, be sure to
check all parameters.

FLtr

Digital Input Filtering and
Display Update

0 to 4
0 - least input filtering
3 - most input filtering
4 - most input filtering and slower 500
msec display update rate (outputs still
update at 100 msec rate)
(1)

Select the relative degree of input signal filtering and display update
rate. The filter is an adaptive digital filter that discriminates between
measurement noise and actual process changes. Therefore, the
influence on step response time is minimal. If the signal is varying
too greatly due to measurement noise, increase the filter value.
Conversely, if the fastest TLA response is desired, decrease the
filter value.

SHFt

Input Signal Shift
(correction offset)

-999 to 9999
1 or 0.1 degree
(0)

If the TLA temperature disagrees with a reference temperature
instrument or if the temperature sensor has a known calibration, the
TLA temperature can be compensated by a correction offset. The
following equation expresses the relationship: Desired Display Temp
= (TLA Temp) + SHFt. Normally set to 0.

SPLO

Limit Setpoint Lower Limit

SPHI

Limit Setpoint Upper Limit

-999 to 9999
1 or 0.1 degree
(0)
-999 to 9999
1 or 0.1 degree
(9999)

The TLA has programmable high and low setpoint limit values to
restrict the setting range of the limit setpoint. Set the limit values so
that the temperature setpoint value cannot be set outside the safe
operating area of the process. SPHI must be above SPLO.

CONFIGURE MODULE 2 - OUTPUT PARAMETERS (2-OP)
DISPLAY

LiAc

PARAMETER

Limit Output Trip Action

RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)

LO - Low Acting
HI - High Acting
(HI)

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

1-717-767-6511

617

CONFIGURE MODULE 3 - LOCKOUT PARAMETERS (3-LC)
DISPLAY

PASS

PARAMETER

Password

AL *

Alarms #1 and #2 access
level

FPrS

Front panel reset

RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

The password is required to access all parameters. The password can be
set to any value between 0 and 250. A wildcard password, 222, can be
used as an alternative to the programmed password.

0 to 250
(10)
LOC - lockout, prevents the alarms from
appearing
rEd - read only, alarms appear, but cannot
be modified
Ent - enter, alarms appear, and can be
modified
(Ent)
NO - disabled
YES - active
(YES)

The alarm(s) parameter in the Parameter Mode can be configured to be
completely locked out, read only, or fully accessible.

The front panel R button can be enabled or disabled. The Remote Reset
input is not affected by this setting.

* Model Number Dependent.

CONFIGURE MODULE 4 - ALARMS PARAMETERS (4-AL)
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

RANGE
(FACTORY SETTING)

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

Act1

Alarm 1 action mode

A-HI - absolute high
A-LO - absolute low
d-HI - deviation high
d-LO - deviation low
b-IN - band inside
b-Ot - band outside
(A-HI)

When deviation low-acting with positive alarm value (d-LO), deviation highacting with negative value (d-HI), or band inside-acting (b-IN) is selected for the
alarm action, the indicator is OFF when the alarm output is ON. See the Alarms
section for complete details of each action. If changed, check alarm values.

rSt1

Alarm 1 reset mode

Auto - automatic
LATC - manual reset
(Auto)

Automatic reset alarms are reset by the TLA when the alarm condition clears.
Latched alarms require operator action to reset the alarm condition. The front
panel R button, if enabled, can be used to reset a latched alarm (see FPrS in
Configure Module 3). A latched alarm condition may also be reset via the
Remote Reset input. See the Reset Action diagram in the Alarms section.

Stb1

Alarm 1 standby function
(delay)

NO or YES
(NO)

The alarm(s) may be independently configured to exhibit a power-on, standby
delay which suppresses the alarm output from turning ON until the temperature
first stabilizes outside the alarm region. After this condition is satisfied, the alarm
standby delay is canceled and the alarm triggers normally, until the next TLA
power-on. This feature also works for deviation and band alarms when the
setpoint is changed via keypad. This action suppresses “nuisance” alarms. See
the Alarm Standby diagram in the Alarms section.

AL-1

Alarm 1 value

Act2 *

Alarm 2 action mode

A-HI - absolute high
A-LO - absolute low
d-HI - deviation high
d-LO - deviation low
b-IN - band inside
b-Ot - band outside
(A-HI)

rSt2 *

Alarm 2 reset mode

Auto - automatic
LATC - manual reset
(Auto)

Stb2 *

Alarm 2 standby function
(delay)

AL-2 *

Alarm 2 value

AHYS

Alarm hysteresis value

-999 to 9999
(0)

The alarm values are either absolute values, or relative to the limit setpoint value
(deviation and band alarms). An absolute alarm value is the value that is entered
for the alarm. A relative alarm value is the mathematical sum of the temperature
limit setpoint value and the alarm value (positive or negative), thus a relative
alarm tracks the limit setpoint value as it is changed. If the alarm action is set as a
Band Alarm, then only a positive alarm value can be entered.
The Alarm 2 parameters are programmed independently of alarm 1. See the
corresponding Alarm 1 parameter for description.

NO or YES
(NO)
-999 to 9999
(0)
1 to 250
(1)

The alarm value(s) have a programmable hysteresis band to prevent alarm
output chatter near the alarm trigger point. The hysteresis value should be set
to eliminate this effect. A value of 2 to 5 is usually sufficient for most
applications. A single alarm hysteresis value applies to both alarms. See the
Alarm Action Figures, in the Alarms section, for the effect of hysteresis on the
various alarm types.

* Model Number Dependent.

618

www.redlion.net

CONFIGURE MODULE 9 - FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS (9-FS)
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

CodE

Factory service function
code

RANGE

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

48 - Calibrate instrument

TLA calibration. Refer to the Calibration section for details.

66 - Reset parameters to factory
settings

Entering code 66 restores all parameters to factory settings. The
unit indicates the operation after the P button is pressed, by
displaying “rSEt” in the lower display momentarily.

77 (twice in succession) Reset TLA calibration to nominal
values

Caution: this operation erases the TLA calibration values and
defaults the values to nominal settings. Reading errors of ±10%
may result. Do not perform this operation unless the TLA has lost
calibration. Loss of calibration is signaled by an “E-CL” error
flag at power-up. To clear this flag, perform calibration procedure
as noted in the Calibration section. Alternatively, “stepping” through
one of the calibration procedures clears the error flag, but does NOT
validate the calibration accuracy in any manner.

USER PARAMETER VALUE CHART
TLA Number _____________

MNEMONIC

PARAMETER

pass
sp
aL-1
AL-2

Password

1-IN

Input Parameters

Limit Setpoint
Alarm 1 Value
Alarm 2 Value

MNEMONIC

PARAMETER

tYPE
SCAL
dCPt
FLtr
SHFt
SPLO
SPHI

Input Sensor Type

2-OP

USER SETTING

3-LC

PARAMETER

PASS
AL
FPrS

Password

4-AL
USER SETTING

Temperature Scale Units
Temperature Resolution
Digital Filtering
Input Offset
Limit Setpoint Lower Limit
Limit Setpoint Upper Limit

Lockout Parameters

MNEMONIC

USER SETTING

Alarm(s) Access Level
Front Panel Reset

Configure Alarm Parameters

MNEMONIC

PARAMETER

Act1
rst1
stb1
aL-1
Act2
rst2
stb2
aL-2
aHYS

Alarm 1 Action Mode

USER SETTING

Alarm 1 Reset Mode
Alarm 1 Standby Enabled
Alarm 1 Value
Alarm 2 Action Mode
Alarm 2 Reset Mode
Alarm 2 Standby Enabled
Alarm 2 Value
Alarm Hysteresis Value

Output Parameters

MNEMONIC

PARAMETER

LiAc

Limit Output Trip Action

USER SETTING

1-717-767-6511

619

LIMIT OUTPUT ACTION

High Trip Action

The limit output is selectable for high or low trip activation. If the process
temperature goes above the limit setpoint for a high trip, or below the limit
setpoint for a low trip, the limit relay will de-energize to initiate a process
shutdown. The limit output cannot be reset until the process temperature returns
to the proper operating range; manual reset is required. The following action
figures describe the status of the limit output and the front panel indicators for
various over/under setpoint, and reset conditions. Reset is either by the front
panel R button, if enabled, or by the Remote Reset input, terminal #6. Refer to
Configure Module 2 - Output Parameters for details of configuring the limit
output. Refer to Configure Module 3 - Lockout Parameters for details of
configuring the front panel Reset button.

Low Trip Action

5.0 ALARMS (OPTIONAL)
The alarm action figures describe the status of the alarm output and the front
panel indicator for various over/under temperature conditions. The alarm output
wave form is shown with the output in the automatic reset mode. Select the

alarm action with care -- in some configurations, the front panel indicator (LED)
might be OFF while the output is ON. Refer to Configure Module 4 - Alarm
Parameters for details of configuring the alarms.

620

www.redlion.net

Alarm Reset Sequence

Alarm Standby Delay Sequence

CALIBRATION CHECKS

RTD Ohms Reading Check

The instrument has been fully calibrated at the factory for all input types. If
the unit appears to be indicating or controlling incorrectly, see the
Troubleshooting section before attempting this procedure.
If the TLA is suspected of reading incorrectly, the instrument may be checked
for indication accuracy without disturbing the factory calibration. The following
procedures may be used for this purpose.
Note: Allow ½ hour warm-up before checking these parameters.

1. Connect RTD simulator (with an accuracy of 0.1 ohm or better) capable of
operating with less than 150 μA to terminals #8, #9, & #10.
2. Configure Input Parameters Module 1 for linear ohms (rLin) input, under tYPE.
3. Compare the TLA read-out with the RTD simulator at various points over the
range 2.0 to 300.0 ohms. The tolerance is ±(0.3% of span + 1 LSD).
4. Calibrate the TLA RTD ohms if out of tolerance.

mV Reading Check

If error flag “E-CL” appears at power-up, a loss of calibration parameters due
to noise spikes has occurred. Entering code 77 twice in Factory Service
Operations Module (9-FS) erases the TLA calibration values and defaults the
values to nominal settings. Reading errors of ±10% may result. It is
recommended that the TLA be fully recalibrated. If using thermocouple only,
the RTD calibration need not be performed.
Note: the “E-CL” flag may be cleared by “stepping” through cold junction
calibration procedure without the need to change any calibration values. A
±10% reading error will still exist.

1. Connect a DC mV source with an accuracy of 0.03% or better to terminal #8
(-) & #9 (+).
2. Configure Input Parameters Module 1 for linear mV (Lin) input, under tYPE.
3. Compare the TLA read-out to the standard at various points over the range (5.00 mV to 56.00 mV). The tolerance is ±(0.15% of reading + 1 LSD).
4. Calibrate the TLA if the readings are out of tolerance.

Thermocouple Cold Junction Temperature Check

Error Flag E-CL

1. Connect a thermocouple probe of known accuracy (Types T, E, J, K, N only)
to TLA. Select the probe used in Configure Module 1.
2. Connect a reference temperature probe to measuring end of thermocouple to
monitor temperature. Allow sufficient time for temperatures to equalize.
3. Compare TLA display with reference temperature probe. The TLA display
should equal the calibrated probe temperature. (Tolerance is ±1ºC.)
4. Calibrate the cold junction temperature if out of tolerance.

1-717-767-6511

621

6.0 CALIBRATION
When re-calibration is required (generally every two years), this procedure
should be performed by qualified technicians using appropriate equipment.
Equipment source accuracy of 0.03% or better is required.
The procedure consists of: applying accurate mV signals, setting the
thermocouple cold junction temperature, and applying precision resistance,
among others. Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before starting this procedure.
Do not use thermocouple wire for the millivolt or RTD ohms calibration.

This procedure may be aborted by disconnecting power to the TLA before
exiting the configuration mode. The existing calibration settings remain in
affect.
Note: After completing any of the calibration sequences, the TLA defaults the
input sensor type to thermocouple type “J” (tc-J). Be sure to set input sensor
for proper type.
Note: The TLA must be restored to normal display mode before any data is
stored.

Factory Service Operations - Calibration (9-FS)
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

RANGE

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

CodE

Enter function code

CAL

Millivolt calibration

yes/no

Calibration required for both RTD and TC input. If this procedure is performed,
the cold junction temp or RTD ohms calibration procedures in turn must be
completed.

CJC

Thermocouple cold junction
temperature calibration

yes/no

Not required if only using RTD input. This procedure can only be performed
AFTER an accurate mV calibration.

rtd

RTD resistance calibration

yes/no

Not required if only using TC input. This procedure can only be performed
AFTER an accurate mV calibration.

Millivolt Calibration (CAL)

Calibrate instrument.

RTD Ohms Calibration (RTD)

Connect precision millivolt source with an accuracy of 0.03% to terminals #8
(-) & #9 (+). Cold Junction or RTD ohms calibration MUST be performed after
millivolt calibration.
DISPLAY

ACTION

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

StP1

Apply 0.0 mV

Wait 10 seconds, press P.

StP2

Apply 14.0 mV

Wait 10 seconds, press P.

StP3

Apply 28.0 mV

Wait 10 seconds, press P.

StP4

Apply 42.0 mV

Wait 10 seconds, press P.

StP5

Apply 56.0 mV

Wait 10 seconds, press P.

This procedure must be performed AFTER an accurate mV calibration.
Connect one leg of precision resistance (accuracy of 0.1 ohm) to terminals #9
and #10 together, and the other leg to #8.
DISPLAY

ACTION

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

Rtd1

Connect 0.0 ohm
(jumper wire)

Wait 10 seconds, press P.

Rtd2

Connect 277.0 ohm

Wait 10 seconds, press P.

Thermocouple Cold Junction Calibration (CJC)

This procedure must be performed AFTER an accurate mV calibration.
1. Exit Factory Service Operations (continually press P until “End”), and return
to Normal Display Mode.
2. Connect a thermocouple probe of known accuracy to the TLA (Types T, E, J,
K, and N only). Select the probe type used in Configure Module 1.
3. Connect a reference temperature probe to the measuring end of the TLA
thermocouple probe. The two probes should be shielded from air movement
and allowed sufficient time to equalize in temperature. (As an alternative, the
TLA thermocouple probe may be placed in a calibration bath of known
temperature.)
4. Compare TLA display with reference temperature probe (or calibration bath).
If the displayed TLA temperature does not equal the reference probe
temperature, calculate the CJ error as follows:
CJ Error = reference probe temperature - displayed TLA temperature
5. Enter Factory Service Operations Module (9-FS).

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION/ COMMENTS

CJC

Cold Junction
Temperature

Observe the indicated cold junction
temperature. Add the calculated CJ Error to
the displayed value. Enter the sum as the new
value for CJC. Exit 9-FS and repeat step 4.
Note: If the initial value for CJC is not within
the range of 15°C to 40°C, enter 25.0° for
CJC and repeat the Cold Junction Calibration
procedure.

622

www.redlion.net

7.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
The majority of problems can be traced to improper connections or incorrect
set-up parameters. Be sure all connections are clean and tight, that the correct
output board is fitted, and that the set-up parameters are correct.

PROBLEMS

For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

REMEDIES

NO DISPLAY

1. Power off.
2. Brown-out condition.
3. Loose connection or improperly wired.
4. Bezel assembly not fully seated into rear of TLA.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check power.
Verify power reading.
Check connections.
Check installation.

TLA NOT WORKING

1. Incorrect parameter set-up.

1. Check set-up parameters.

“E-FP” IN DISPLAY

1. Defective front panel button.

1. Press R to escape, then check all buttons for proper operation.
2. Replace unit.

“E-UP” IN DISPLAY

1. Internal problem with TLA.

1. Replace unit.

“E-E2” IN DISPLAY

1. Loss of setup parameters due to noise spike or
other EMI event.

1. Press R to escape, then check all set-up parameters.
a. Check sensor input and AC line for excessive noise.
b. If fault persists, replace TLA.

“E-CL” IN DISPLAY

1. Loss of calibration parameters due to noise
spike or other EMI event.

1. Press R to escape, then check TLA accuracy.
a. Recalibrate TLA. (See Factory Service Module code 77.)
b. Reset parameters to factory default settings.

“...” or “-..” IN DISPLAY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Display value exceeds display range.
Defective or mis-calibrated cold junction circuit.
Loss of set-up parameters.
Internal malfunction.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Change resolution to display whole number and verify reading.
Perform cold junction calibration.
Check set-up parameters.
Perform Input calibration.

“OPEN” IN DISPLAY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Probe disconnected.
Broken or burned-out probe.
Corroded or broken terminations.
Excessive process temperature.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect probe.
Replace probe.
Check connections.
Check process parameters.

“OLOL” IN UPPER DISPLAY

1. Check input parameters.
2. Change to input sensor with a higher
temperature range.
3. Replace transmitter or probe.
4. Reduce temperature.
5. Perform input calibration.

1. Input exceeds range of TLA.
2. Temperature exceeds range of input probe.

“ULUL” IN UPPER DISPLAY

1. Input is below range of TLA.
2. Temperature below range of input probe.
3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive low temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

“OLOL” OR “ULUL” IN LOWER
DISPLAY

1. Signal input exceeds allowable range by 5%.

1. Check remote signal source.

3. Defective or incorrect transmitter or probe.
4. Excessive high temperature for probe.
5. Loss of setup parameters.
Check input parameters.
Change to input sensor with a lower temperature range.
Replace transmitter or probe.
Raise temperature.
Perform input calibration.

1-717-767-6511

623

8.0 INSTALLING

OUTPUT BOARD

The TLA is supplied with an output board installed.

Replacing Output Board
1. Remove the bezel assembly.
2. Lift up on the top bezel board latch while gently pulling out on the bezel/
display board assembly. Do NOT remove the display board from the bezel.
3. Remove the output board by pulling it away from the other boards. Replace
the output board by aligning the board to board connector. Be certain the
connector is fully mated.
4. Connect the bezel/ display board assembly by guiding the board ends into the
bezel latches. Slide the assembly on evenly until the display board connector
is completely engaged and bezel latches are fully seated onto the boards.

9.0 TERMINAL CONFIGURATIONS
DC Models

AC Models
Form-A Limit Relay with 2 Alarms

Form-A Limit Relay with 2 Alarms

Form-C Limit Relay with 1 Alarm

624

www.redlion.net

LARGE
DISPLAYS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

625

QUICK Specs
Large Displays
L E D D I S P L AY
LD2

LD4

4 and 6 Digit, 4" (101 mm)
Red LED

Description

4 and 6 Digit, 2.25" (57 mm)
Red LED

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

4 DIGIT
101 mm (H) x 303 mm (W)
6 DIGIT
101 mm (H) x 404 mm (W)

4 DIGIT
199 mm (H) x 505 mm (W)
6 DIGIT
199 mm (H) x 657 mm (W)

Basic Count Input

Input

ANALOG INPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
Process, DC Voltage, DC Current, Process, DC Voltage, DC Current,
Available
Inputs

Setpoint
Capability

LPAX

EPAX

ANALOG INPUTS
5 Digit, 1.5" (38 mm) Red LED
DIGITAL INPUTS
6 Digit, 1.5" (38 mm) Red LED

ANALOG INPUTS
5 Digit, 4" (101 mm) Red LED
DIGITAL INPUTS
6 Digit, 4" (101 mm) Red LED

121 mm (H) x 254 mm (W)

183 mm (H) x 630 mm (W)

Via a Plug-in Personality Module Via a Plug-in Personality Module
ANALOG INPUTS
Process, Voltage, Current,
Temperature, and Strain Gage

ANALOG INPUTS
Process, Voltage, Current,
Temperature, and Strain Gage

DIGITAL INPUTS
Count, Rate, Count/Rate, Timer,
and Real Time Clock

DIGITAL INPUTS
Count, Count/Rate, Timer, and
Serial Slave

N/A

4 Digit Model Available

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing

Dual Form C
Quad Form A
Quad Sinking
Quad Sourcing
RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Communications

N/A

RS232
RS485
Modbus
DeviceNet
Profibus
Ethernet w/ICM8

Other Features/
Options

NEMA 4 Version

NEMA 4 Enclosure,
Mounting Brackets,
Custom Units Label
(5 Digit Only)

NEMA 4 Enclosure,
Mounting Brackets

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC
11 to 16 VDC

85 to 250 VAC
18 to 36 VDC
24 VAC

85 to 250 VAC

Page Number

Page 629

Page 682

Page 694

626

www.redlion.net

REPLACEMENT Guide
CURRENT PRODUCT

WHAT YOU’RE USING NOW
MODEL NUMBER

FEATURES

MODEL NUMBER

Q Display:

5 or 6 Digit, 4" (101 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Input Models: Various Models
Panel Cut-Out Dimension Differences

Q Display:

4 or 6 Digit, 3.3" (84 mm)
Red LED
Q Power Source: 115/230 VAC
Q Input Models: Various Models
LDD

FEATURES

EPAX

Note: Refer to the current product literature, as some differences may exist.

1-717-767-6511

627

This page intentionally left blank.
628

www.redlion.net

MODEL LD - LARGE DISPLAY
z 2.25" & 4" HIGH RED LED DIGITS
z AVAILABLE IN 4 OR 6 DIGIT VERSIONS
z SINGLE OR DUAL COUNTER with RATE INDICATOR *
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING AND DECIMAL POINTS *
z BUILT-IN BATCH COUNTING CAPABILITY *
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT *
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED
z DUAL 5 AMP FORM C RELAY *
z ALUMINUM NEMA 4X CASE CONSTRUCTION
* Programmable models only

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Large Display is a versatile display that can be configured as a single or
dual counter with rate indication, scaling, serial communications and a dual
relay output. There are also basic models that have a single counter with
direction control only (no scaling or relay output).
The 4 & 6 digit displays are available in either 2.25" or 4" high red LED digits
with adjustable display intensities. The 2.25" high models are readable up to 130
feet. The 4" high models are readable up to 180 feet. All versions are constructed
of a NEMA 4X enclosure in light weight aluminum.
The 6-digit programmable models have two signal inputs and a choice of
eight different count modes. These include bi-directional, quadrature and anticoincidence counting, as well as a dual counter mode. When programmed as a
dual counter, each counter has separate scaling and decimal point selection.
Rate indication is available on the programmable models only. The rate
indicator has separate scaling and decimal point selection, along with
programmable display update times. The meter display can be toggled either
manually or automatically between the count and rate values.
The programmable models also come with a dual Form C relay output and
RS232 or RS485 serial communications. The outputs can activate based on
either counter or rate setpoint values. An internal batch counter can be used to
count setpoint output activations.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 2.25" (57 mm) or 4" (101 mm) intensity adjustable Red LED
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC POWER: 50 to 250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 26 VA
DC POWER: 21.6 to 250 VDC, 11 W
DC Out: +24 VDC @ 100 mA if input voltage is greater than 50
VAC/VDC
+24 VDC @ 50 mA if input voltage is less than 50 VDC
Isolation: 2300 VRMS for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs
3. COUNT INPUT(S):
Counter(s) have DIP switch selectable pull-up (7.8 KΩ) or pull-down
resistors (3.9 KΩ) that determine active high or active low input logic.
Counters are DIP switch selectable for high or low frequency (Damping
capacitor provided for switch contact bounce. Limits input frequency to
50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec min.)
Input A Trigger levels: VIL = 1.25 V max; VIH = 2.75 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Input B Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Overflow Indication: Display "
" alternates with overflowed count value
LD200400, LD200600, LD400400, & LD400600:
Count Speed: 25 KHz max. @ 50% duty cycle (no scaling)
LD2006P0 & LD4006P0:
Counter A & B Frequency:
Maximum Count Rates: 50% duty cycle, count mode dependent.
With setpoints disabled: 25 KHz, all modes except Quadrature x4 (23 KHz).
With setpoint(s) enabled: 20 KHz, all modes except Dual Counter (14 KHz),
Quadrature x2 (13 KHz) and Quadrature x4 (12 KHz).

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

G
PART
NUMBER

1-717-767-6511

X (Length)

Y (Height)

Z (Center)

LD2004xx 12 (304.8)

4 (101.6)

8 (203.2)

LD2006xx 16 (406.4)

4 (101.6)

12 (304.3)

LD4004xx 20 (508)

7.875 (200) 16 (406.4)

LD4006xx 26 (660.4)

7.875 (200) 22 (558.8)

629

4. RATE INPUT: Models LD2006P0 & LD4006P0 only
Display Range: 0 to 99999
Min Freq.: 0.01 Hz
Max Freq.: See Count Input specification
Accuracy: ±0.01%
Rate Overflow Indication: Display "
"
5. RESET/USER INPUT:Function programmable for LD2006P0 &LD4006P0
Reset/User Input: DIP switch selectable pull-up (7.8 KΩ) or pull-down
resistor (3.9 KΩ) that determines active high or active low input logic.
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 10 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
6. COMMUNICATIONS (LD2006P0 & LD4006P0 only):
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4 k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Type: RS232 half duplex (isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4 k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
7. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
count values when power is removed.
8. OUTPUT (LD2006P0 & LD4006P0 only):
Relays: Form C contacts rated at 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC
(resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: -30 to 65 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s (1g relay).
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g’s (10g relay), 11 msec in
3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters
10. CONNECTIONS:
Internal removable terminal blocks are used for power and signal wiring.
Remove end plates with ¼" nut driver. For LD4 versions, all wiring is on right
side of unit. For LD2 versions, power and signal wiring connections are on
the right side and the relays and serial options are on the left side.
Wire Strip Length: 0.4" (10 mm)
Wire Gage: 24-12 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5.3 inch-lbs (0.6 N-m) max.

11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A LD200400
Criterion B LD2006P0
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions LD200400
EN 55011
Class B
Emissions LD2006P0
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
12. CONSTRUCTION: Aluminum enclosure, and steel side panels with textured
black polyurethane paint for scratch and corrosion resistance protection. Sealed
front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications. Installation Category II,
Pollution Degree 2.
13. WEIGHT:
LD2004XX - 3.5 lbs (1.59 kg)
LD2006XX - 4.5 lbs (2.04 kg)
LD4004XX - 8 lbs (3.63 kg)
LD4006XX - 10.5 lbs (4.76 kg)

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Basic
(No front
panel keys)

Programmable
(With front
panel keys)

1.0 INSTALLING

DESCRIPTION

LD200400

2.25" High 6-Digit Red LED Counter

LD200600

4" High 4-Digit Red LED Counter

LD400400

4" High 6-Digit Red LED Counter

LD400600

2.25" High 6-Digit Red LED Count/Rate Indicator w/ dual
Relay Output & RS232/RS485 Serial Communications

LD2006P0

4" High 6-Digit Red LED Count/Rate Indicator w/ dual
Relay Output & RS232/RS485 Serial Communications

LD4006P0

THE

METER

INSTALLATION

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature. Placing the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should
be avoided. The unit should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the front overlay. Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.)
to operate the keypad of the unit.

630

PART NUMBER

2.25" High 4-Digit Red LED Counter

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
This display is designed to be
wall mounted or suspended
from a ceiling truss or
other suitable structure
capable of supporting the
LD. Caution should be
exercised when hanging
the display to provide for
the safety of personnel. If
hanging the LD, run the
suspension cables (or chains)
through the mounting bracket
holes. For wall mounting use
#10-32 size bolts.

www.redlion.net

2.0 SETTING

THE

DIP SWITCHES

SETTING THE 8 DIP SWITCHES

SWITCH 6 (RESET/USER INPUT) {See Note 1}

To access the switches, remove the right side plate of the meter. A bank of
eight switches is located inside the unit.
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing
inside of the meter.

SWITCH 1 (Input A)
LOGIC: Input A trigger levels VIL = 1.25 V max.; VIH = 2.75 V min.;
VMAX = 28 VDC
MAG: 200 mV peak input sensitivity; 100 mV hysteresis; maximum voltage:
40 V peak (28 Vrms); Must also have SRC switch ON. (Not
recommended with counting applications.)

SWITCH 2 (Input A) {See Note 1}
SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12 VDC, IMAX = 2.1 mA.
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

SWITCH 3 (Input A)
HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.

SWITCH 4 (Input B) {See Note 1}

SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12VDC, IMAX = 2.1 mA.
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

SWITCH 7 (POWER UP RESET)
ENABLE: In this position, the counter resets to zero at power up.
DISABLE: In this position, the counter does not reset at power up.
Note: This switch has no function for programmable models. Power-up reset is
selected through a programming parameter.

SWITCH 8 (Input B)
DIRECTION CONTROL: In this position Input B is used to control the
count direction of Input A when Input A is set to Count with Direction
mode (default mode).
INTENSITY ADJUST: In this position Input B is used to adjust the LED
intensity. There are five distinct LED levels that can be changed by pulsing
Input B. After setting the desired intensity, move switch to OFF position
for Direction Control. Units with keypads can program the LED intensity
level using Programming Menu 3.
Note 1: When the DIP switch is in the SNK position (OFF), the input is
configured as active low. When the switch is in the SRC position (ON), the
input is configured as active high.

SNK.: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12 VDC, IMAX = 2.1 mA.
SRC.: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

LOGIC
Input A

SWITCH 5 (Input B)

SNK.
HI FREQ.

HI Frequency: Removes damping capacitor and allows max. frequency.
LO Frequency: Adds a damping capacitor for switch contact bounce. Limits
input frequency to 50 Hz and input pulse widths to 10 msec.

Input B

SNK.
HI FREQ.

Reset/User Input SNK.
Pwr Up Reset DISABLE
Input B Direction Control

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

MAG.
SRC.
LO FREQ.
SRC.
LO FREQ.
SRC.
ENABLE
ON

Intensity Adjust

Factory Setting

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

1-717-767-6511

631

WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via pluggable terminal blocks located inside
the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter's voltage and current
ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When
wiring the meter, compare the numbers on the label on the back of the meter case
against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip the wire,
leaving approximately 0.4" (10 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires should
be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw clamp terminal and
tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.) Each terminal can
accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two #18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four
#20 AWG (0.61 mm).

LD2 Left Side

WIRING CONNECTIONS
Internal removable terminal blocks are used for power and signal wiring.
Access to terminal blocks is through conduit fittings. Remove end plates with
¼" nut driver. For LD4 versions, all wiring is on right side of unit. For LD2
versions, power and input wiring connections are on the right side and the relay
and serial options are on the left side.
Connect drain wire from shielded cable(s) to screw on side plate for proper
grounding.

LD4
Only programmable models
have terminals TBC and TBD.

LD2 Right Side

3.1 POWER WIRING
The power wiring is made via the 3 position terminal block (TBA) located
inside the unit (right side). The DC out power is located on TBB (right side).

DC Out Power

Power

Terminal 4: + 24 VDC OUT
Terminal 6: User Common

Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC Terminal 3: Protective Conductor
Terminal

3.2 RESET/USER INPUT WIRING
The Reset/User Input is located on the right side.

Sinking Logic

Sourcing Logic

Terminal 5: Reset/User
Terminal 6: User Comm

DIP switch 6 OFF

3.3 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
G

The setpoint relays use a six position terminal block (TBC) located inside the
unit: LD4 (right side) and LD2 (left side).
Terminal 1: NC 1
Terminal 2: NO 1
Terminal 3: Relay 1 Common
Terminal 4: NC 2
Terminal 5: NO 2
Terminal 6: Relay 2 Common

632

www.redlion.net

DIP switch 6 ON

3.4 INPUT WIRING
The Large Display has two signal inputs, A and B. These inputs are wired to
terminal block TBB located inside the unit on the right side.
Terminal 1: Input A
Terminal 3: Input B
Terminal 2: Input Common

All other models are non-programmable and provide Count with Direction
Mode only. Input A accepts the count signal, while Input B controls the count
direction (up/down).
Input B can also be used to adjust the LED display intensity by setting DIP
Switch 8 to the ON position (See Section 2.0, Setting the DIP Switches). For
programmable models, this only applies in Count with Direction mode.

Programmable models LD2006P0 and LD4006P0 provide a choice of eight
different Count Modes. The Count Mode selected determines the action of
Inputs A and B. Section 5.1, Input Setup Parameters, provides details on count
mode selection and input action.
CAUTION: User common is NOT isolated from input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the DC common must be suitably
isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may
be present at the User Input and Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of the input common with
respect to earth ground.
Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

AC Inputs From Tach Generators, Etc.

Magnetic Pickup
Input A

Current Sinking Output

Input A

Interfacing With TTL

Current Sourcing Output

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink

Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source

Current Sink Output; Quad/Direction

Input A

LD2006P0 and LD4006P0 only.
Shaded areas not recommended for counting applications.

* Switch position is application dependent.

3.5 SERIAL WIRING
The serial connections are made via terminal block TBD located inside the
unit on the left side for the LD2 and on the right side for the LD4.

1-717-767-6511

633

RS232 Communications

RS485 Communications

The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the LD is limited to 38.4k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that is,
data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.

Terminal Block Connection Figure
RS232 is intended to allow two devices to communicate over distances up to
50 feet. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) transmits data on the Transmitted Data
(TXD) line and receives data on the Received Data (RXD) line. Data Computer
Equipment (DCE) receives data on the TXD line and transmits data on the RXD
line. The LD emulates a DTE. If the other device connected to the meter also
emulates a DTE, the TXD and RXD lines must be interchanged for
communications to take place. This is known as a null modem connection. Most
printers emulate a DCE device while most computers emulate a DTE device.
Some devices cannot accept more than two or three characters in succession
without a pause in between. In these cases, the meter employs a busy function.
As the meter begins to transmit data, the RXD line (RS232) is monitored to
determine if the receiving device is “busy”. The receiving device asserts that it
is busy by setting the RXD line to a space condition (logic 0). The meter then
suspends transmission until the RXD line is released by the receiving device.

Terminal Block Connection Figure

Sections 4 and 5 apply to Programmable Models Only

4.0 REVIEWING THE FRONT PANEL KEYS AND DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

S
SELS

Index display through selected displays

Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value

T
RSTT

Resets count display(s) and/or outputs

Increment selected digit position of parameter value

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“ ” - To the left of the display is the rate value.

“ 1 ” - To the right of digit 6 indicates setpoint 1 output status.
“ 2 ” - To the right of digit 1 indicates setpoint 2 output status.

- Counter A has no designator.

“ ” - To the left of the display is the Counter B value (dual count or batch).
Pressing the SELS key toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between
the rate and count values.

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR key. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a security
code or a hardware lock.

634

MODULE ENTRY (SELS & PAR KEYS)

The Programming Menu is organized into five modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
S key is used to select the desired module.
Pro and the present module. The SELS
The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR key.

www.redlion.net

MODULE MENU (PAR KEY)

Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The PAR key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to Pro NO. Programming
may continue by accessing additional modules.

PROGRAMMING TIPS
It is recommended to start with Module 1 for counting or Module 2 for rate.
When programming is complete, it is recommended to record the parameter
programming and lock out parameter programming with the user input or
programming security code.

FACTORY SETTINGS

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
S and RSTT
T keys are used to
the selections/value for that parameter. The SELS
move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR key,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to
the next parameter.
For numeric values, the value is displayed with one digit flashing (initially the
T key increments the digit by one or the user
right most digit). Pressing the RSTT
T key and the digit will automatically scroll. The SELS
S key
can hold the RSTT
will select the next digit to the left. Pressing the PAR key will enter the value and
move to the next parameter.

Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful when
encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Ab «

Parameter

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR KEY)

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the PAR key with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and return
the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to the
Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

5.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Shaded area selections only apply when Counter B is enabled (Dual Count
mode or batch counter).

COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR

COUNT MODE

ª
Select the count mode that corresponds with your application. The input
actions are shown in the boxes below. For simple counting applications, it is
recommended to use Count with Direction for the count mode. Simply leave the
direction input unconnected.
DISPLAY

INPUT A ACTION

INPUT B ACTION

Count with Direction

MODE

Counter A

Counter A Direction

Rate/Counter

Rate only

Counter A Add

Dual Counter

Counter A Add

Counter B Add

Quadrature x1

Count A

Quad A

Quadrature x2

Count A

Quad A

Quadrature x4

Count A

Quad A

2 Input Add/Add

Counter A Add

2 Input Add/Subtract

Counter A Add

Counter A Subtract

COUNTER A RESET ACTION

«
ª
When Counter A is reset, it returns to Zero or Counter A Count Load value.
This reset action applies to all Counter A resets, except a Setpoint generated
Counter Auto Reset programmed in Module 4.

Note: The Rate indicator signal is derived from Input A in all count modes.

COUNTER A COUNT DIRECTION
COUNTER A DECIMAL POINT

ª
This selects the decimal point position for Counter A and the setpoint value,
if assigned to Counter A. The selection will also affect Counter A scale
factor calculations.

Reverse (
) switches the normal Counter A count direction shown in the
Count Mode parameter chart.

1-717-767-6511

635

COUNTER A COUNT LOAD VALUE

Counter A resets to this value if Reset to Count Load action is selected. To
enter a negative Count Load value, increment digit 6 to display a “-” sign.*

COUNTER B BATCH COUNT ENABLE

EXAMPLE: The counter display is used to indicate the total number of feet
used in a process. It is necessary to know the number of pulses for the desired
units to be displayed. The decimal point is selected to show the resolution in
hundredths.
Scale Factor = Desired Display Units x Decimal Point Position
Number of Pulses
Given that 128 pulses are equal to 1 foot, display total feet with a onehundredth resolution.
Scale Factor = 1.00 x 100
128
Scale Factor = 0.007812 x 100
Scale Factor = 0.7812

ª
The Counter B Batch Count function internally counts the number of output
activations of the selected setpoint(s). The count source for the batch counter
can be SP1, SP2 or both. Batch counting is available in all count modes except
Dual Counter, which uses an external input signal for Counter B.

USER INPUT FUNCTION

«
ª
DISPLAY

COUNTER B DECIMAL POINT

«
ª

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out

See Programming Mode
Access chart (Module 3).

Maintained Reset

COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR
to

ª
The number of input or batch counts is multiplied by the scale factor to
obtain the desired process value. A scale factor of 1.0000 will result in the
display of the actual number of input or batch counts. (Details on scaling
calculations are explained at the end of this section.)*

COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP

«
ª
The selected counter(s) will reset at each meter power-up.

DESCRIPTION

No Function

Inhibit

This selects the decimal point position for Counter B. The selection will also
affect Counter B scale factor calculations.

MODE

Inhibit counting for the
selected counter(s).
Level active reset of the
selected counter(s).

Store

Freeze display for the selected
counter(s) while allowing
counts to accumulate internally.

Store and Reset

Edge triggered reset of the
selected counter(s) after
storing the count.

Display Select *

Advance once for each
activation.

Display Intensity Level *

Increase intensity one level
for each activation.

Setpoint 1 Reset *

Reset setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset *

Reset setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset *

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2
outputs.

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active
parameters selected in the Print
Options menu (Module 5).

Print and Reset *

Same as Print Request followed
by a momentary reset of the
selected counter(s).

* Indicates Edge Triggered function. All others are Level Active functions.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

«
ª
The User Input Assignment is only active when Counter B is enabled and the
user input selection perfroms a Reset, Inhibit or Store function on one or both
of the counters.

636

*For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.

Shaded area selections only apply when Counter B is enabled (Dual Count
mode or batch counter).

www.redlion.net

5.2 MODULE 2 - RATE SETUP PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

RATE ENABLE

RATE LOW UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY UPDATE)

seconds

This parameter enables the rate display. For maximum input frequency, Rate
Enable should be set to
when not in use. When set to
, the remaining rate
parameters are not accessible.

RATE DECIMAL POINT

RATE HIGH UPDATE TIME (DISPLAY ZERO)

seconds

This selects the decimal point position for rate displays and any setpoint value
assigned to these displays. This parameter does not affect rate scaling calculations.

The High Update Time is the maximum amount of time before the Rate
display is forced to zero. (For more explanation, refer to Rate Value
Calculation.) The High Update Time must be higher than the Low Update Time
and higher than the desired slowest readable speed (one divided by pulses per
second). The factory setting of 2.0, will force the display to zero for speeds
below 0.5 Hz or a pulse every 2 seconds.

RATE INPUT SCALING STYLE

SCALING CALCULATION FOR KEY-IN STYLE

RATE SCALING DISPLAY VALUE

SCALING FOR RATE INDICATION

ª
Enter the desired Rate Display value for the Scaling Point. This value is
entered using the front panel buttons for either Scaling Style.*

RATE SCALING INPUT VALUE

ª
Enter the corresponding Rate Input value using the Scaling Style selected. *

Key-in Style:
Enter the Rate Input value using the front panel buttons. This value is always
in pulses per second (Hz).*

Apply Style:
The meter initially shows the stored Rate Input value. To retain this value,
press PAR to advance to the next parameter. To enter a new value, apply the rate
T and the applied input frequency (in Hz) will
input signal to Input A. Press RSTT
appear on the display. To insure the correct reading, wait several rate sample
periods (see Rate Low Update Time) or until a consistent reading is displayed.
Press PAR to store the displayed value as the new Rate Input value.

DISPLAY (

)

INPUT (

)

# of pulses per unit

Minute

# of pulses per unit

Hour

3600

# of pulses per unit

NOTES:
1. If # of pulse per unit is less than 1, then multiply both Input and Display
values by 10 or 100 as needed for greater accuracy.
2. If the Display value is raised or lowered, then Input value must be raised
or lowered by the same proportion (i.e. Display value for per hour is
entered by a third less (1200) then Input value is a third less of # of pulses
per unit). The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered, then
Display value must be raised or lowered by the same proportion.
3. Both values must be greater than 0.
EXAMPLE:
1. With 15.1 pulses per foot, show feet per minute in tenths. Scaling Display
= 60.0 Scaling Input = 15.1.
2. With 0.25 pulses per gallon, show whole gallons per hour. (To have greater
accuracy, multiply both Input and Display values by 10.) Scaling Display
= 36000 Scaling Input = 2.5.

*For value entry instructions, refer to selection/value entry in the Programming
The Meter section.

1-717-767-6511

637

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SELS)

«
The
displays.

S key to toggle through the enabled
selection allows the SELS

FRONT PANEL COUNTER RESET ENABLE (RSTT)

«
ª
T key to reset the selected counter(s). The
The
selection allows the RSTT
shaded selections are only active when Counter B is enabled (Dual Count Mode
or batch counter).

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

ª
G

The
selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is about every 4 seconds.

not

1-99

0
Active

1-99
100-999

Not Active

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed.

638

______

100-999

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

0-999

Full Programming
Quick
Programming
prompt
Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

Immediate Access
After Quick Programming
with correct code entry
prompt *
at
With correct code entry
prompt *
at
No Access
No Access

With correct code entry
prompt
prompt *
at
Full Programming
Immediate Access

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

www.redlion.net

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

ª
Select

ª
to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with the factory default
settings. The meter will display
and then return to
. Press the
PAR key to exit the module.

VIEW MODEL AND VERSION DISPLAY

«
ª
Entering Code 50 will display the model and version (x.x) of the meter. The
display then returns to
. Press the PAR key to exit the module.

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

tOUt-n
SPt-n
OUt-n
LIt-n
P-UP-n
tYPE-n
StbY-n
AUtO-n
OFF2-1
OFF1-2
rSt-n

DESCRIPTION

RATE ASSIGNMENT

TIMED OUT

BOUNDARY

LATCH

TIMED OUT

BOUNDARY

LATCH

Setpoint Output Time-out Value

Yes

Setpoint Value

Yes

Setpoint Output Logic

Yes

Setpoint Annunciator

Yes

Setpoint Output Power-up State

Yes

Setpoint Boundary Type

Yes

Standby Operation (Low ActingOnly)

Yes

Counter Auto Reset

Yes

SP1 Output Off at SP2 (SP1 only)

Yes

SP2 Output Off at SP1 (SP2 only)

Yes

Output Reset with Manual Reset

Yes

* BOUNDARY Setpoint Action not applicable for Counter B assignment.

SETPOINT ENABLE

SETPOINT SELECT

ª
Select the Setpoint Output to be programmed, starting with Setpoint 1. The
“ ” in the following parameters reflects the chosen Setpoint number. After the
selected setpoint is completely programmed, the display returns to
.
Repeat steps for Setpoint 2 if both Setpoints are being used. Select
to exit the
Setpoint programming module.

Select
to enable the chosen setpoint and access the setup parameters. If
is selected, the unit returns to
and the setpoint is disabled.

1-717-767-6511

639

SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

SETPOINT BOUNDARY TYPE

Select the display the Setpoint is to be assigned.

High Acting Boundary Type activates the output when the assigned display
value (
) equals or exceeds the Setpoint value. Low Acting activates the
output when the assigned display value is less than or equal to the Setpoint.

SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION

SETPOINT STANDBY OPERATION

This parameter selects the action of the Setpoint output as described in the
chart below. Boundary mode is not applicable for Counter B assignment.
SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION

Latched Output Mode
Timed Output Mode
Boundary Mode
(High Acting)
Boundary Mode
(Low Acting)

OUTPUT ACTIVATES

OUTPUT DEACTIVATES

When Count =
Setpoint
When Count =
Setpoint
When Count ≥
Setpoint
When Count ≤
Setpoint

At Manual Reset
=
)
(if
After Setpoint
Output Time-Out
When Count
< Setpoint
When Count
> Setpoint

seconds

This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to timed output
mode (
). Enter the value in seconds that the output will be active, once
the Setpoint Value is reached.

Count A:
Count B:
Rate:

to
to
to

Enter the desired Setpoint value. To enter a negative setpoint value,
increment digit 6 to display a “-” sign (Counter A only).

«
This parameter automatically resets the Setpoint Assigned Counter (A or B)
each time the Setpoint value is reached. The automatic reset can occur at output
start, or output end if the Setpoint Output Action is programmed for timed
output mode. The Reset-to-Count Load selections (“
”) only apply to
Counter A assignment. This reset may be different from the Counter A Reset
Action selected in Module 1.
SELECTION

ACTION

SETPOINT 1 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 2 (SP1 Only)

«
ª

SETPOINT OUTPUT LOGIC

This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 1 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 2 output (O1 off at O2). The “
” setting only applies if Setpoint 2
Output Action is programmed for timed output.

«
ª
Normal (
) turns the output “on” when activated and “off” when
deactivated. Reverse (
) turns the output “off” when activated and “on”
when deactivated.

SETPOINT 2 OUTPUT OFF AT SETPOINT 1 (SP2 Only)

«
ª

SETPOINT ANNUNCIATOR

This parameter will deactivate Setpoint 2 output at the Start or End of
Setpoint 1 output (O2 off at O1). The “
” setting only applies if Setpoint 1
Output Action is programmed for timed output.

ª
G

COUNTER AUTO RESET

NO
ZEr-St
CLd-St
ZEr-En
CLd-En

SETPOINT VALUE

SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT

Normal (
) displays the setpoint annunciator when the corresponding output
is “on”. Reverse (
) displays the setpoint annunciator when the output is “off”.

SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH MANUAL RESET

SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE

«
ª
will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down.
will activate the output at power up.
will deactivate the
output at power up.

640

Selecting
causes the Setpoint output to deactivate (reset) when the
T
Setpoint Assigned Counter is reset. The counter reset can occur by the RSTT
key, User Input or Counter Reset at Power-up.
This output reset will not occur when the Assigned Counter is reset by a
Setpoint generated Counter Auto Reset.

www.redlion.net

5.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 5 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the meter
with those of the host computer or other serial device.

PRINT OPTIONS

«
ª

BAUD RATE

«
ª
Set the baud rate to match that of other serial communications equipment.
Normally, the baud rate is set to the highest value that all of the serial
communications equipment is capable of transmitting and receiving.

DATA BIT

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting
displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as
in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as
will not be sent.
The “Print All” (
) option selects all meter values for transmitting
), without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
(
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, Counter B or Scale Factor B will only be sent if Counter
B is enabled (Dual Counter mode or batch count). Likewise, the Rate value will
not be sent unless the Rate Display is enabled.

DISPLAY

ª
Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

PARITY BIT

«
ª

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY
SETTING

MNEMONIC

Counter A

CTA

Counter B

CTB

Rate Value

RTE

Scale Factor A

SFA

Scale Factor B

SFB

Setpoint 1

SP1

Setpoint 2

SP2

Counter A Count Load

CLD

Odd

This parameter only appears when the Data Bit parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to , an additional stop bit is used
to force the frame size to 10 bits.

«
ª
Selecting
causes the meter to automatically transmit serial data per the
Print Options selection list. This occurs without using the User Input terminal
Print Request function (Module 1), and without requiring any serial data request
commands. This makes the User Input available to perform other functions,
while still allowing the meter to output serial data.
The selected data is transmitted repeatedly every 1.5 seconds during normal
operating mode, and pauses during programming mode.

METER ADDRESS

AUTOMATIC DATA TRANSMIT

ª
Enter the serial node address. With a single unit, an address is not needed
and a value of zero can be used (RS232 applications). Otherwise, with multiple
bussed units, a unique address number must be assigned to each meter. The
node address applies specifically to RS485 applications.

COPY PROGRAM SETTINGS

«
ª

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

«
ª
This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value command or a Block Print Request. Select
for a full print transmission, consisting of the meter address, mnemonics, and
for abbreviated print transmissions, consisting of the
parameter data. Select
parameter data only. This setting is applied to all the parameters selected in the
PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 0, the address will not be sent
during a full transmission.)

This parameter is used to copy all the program settings from one LD meter
directly to another LD meter(s), through the serial terminal block connections
(RS232 or RS485). No PC connection or additional software is required.
Copying program setttings eliminates or greatly reduces programming time
when multiple meters use identical, or very similar, settings for an application.
Copy Requirements:
To copy program settings from one meter to another requires the following:
1. Each meter must have the same software version. The version is displayed
during the meter power-up sequence, or by entering Code 50 in the Factory
Service Operations. (See Module 3 for details)

1-717-767-6511

641

2. Each meter receiving the program settings (receiver) must have the baud rate
set to 9600 baud. This is the factory default setting, so a new meter should
arrive ready for copying. The meter sending the program settings (master)
should be set to the desired baud rate for the application (if different than
9600). This baud rate setting will then be copied to the receiver(s).
Copy Connections:
To connect the LD meters for copying, refer to section 3.5 Serial Wiring for
details. The meter shown in the figures as LD METER will be the master.
1. RS232 - Allows copying from the master meter to a single receiver only.
2. RS485 - Allows copying from the master meter to one or more receivers
simultaneously. Up to 31 receiving meters can be connected during copying.

Sending Serial Commands and Data

Command Chart
Command Description

N
T
V
R
P

Notes

Command String Construction

The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:
1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints all the active selections chosen in the Print Options menu parameter.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See timing diagram figure for differences in
meter response time when using the * and $ terminating characters.

Receiving Data From The Meter

Full Field Transmission

Byte

Description

1, 2

2 byte Node Address field [00-99]

(Space)

4-6

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

7-18

12 byte data field; 10 for number, one for sign, one for decimal point

(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

Copy Procedure:
1. Connect the master and receiver(s) using RS232 or RS485 terminals.
2. Apply power to the meters. The receiving meter(s) must be operating in the
normal display mode (not programming mode).
3. On the master meter, proceed to the Copy Program Settings parameter and
select
to begin copying.
4. During the copy process (~ 2 sec.), the master meter displays an upload message
(
) while the receiver(s) displays a download message (
). This
indicates successful communication between the master and receiver(s).
5. When copying is completed, all receivers display the power-up sequence and
return to normal operating mode, programmed with all the same settings as
the master meter. The master remains at the
prompt, ready for another
receiver(s) to be connected for copying.

Counter A

CTA

T, V, R
T, V, R

Transmit Details (T and V)

6 digit positive/5 digit
negative (with minus sign)
5 digit, positive only

Counter B

CTB

Rate

RTE

5 digit, positive only

Scale Factor A

SFA

T, V

6 digit, positive only

Scale Factor B

SFB

T, V

6 digit, positive only

SP1

T, V, R

SP2

T, V, R

CLD

T, V, R

F
G
H

Setpoint 1
(Reset Output 1)
Setpoint 2
(Reset Output 2)
Counter A Count
Load Value

per setpoint Assignment,
same as Counter or Rate
per setpoint Assignment,
same as Counter or Rate
6 digit positive/5 digit
negative (with minus sign)

The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12
characters long. When a requested counter or rate value exceeds the meter’s
display limits, an * (used as an overflow character) replaces a space in byte 7.
Byte 8 is always a space.
The remaining ten positions of this field consist of a minus sign (for negative
values), a floating decimal point (if applicable), and eight positions for the
requested value. The data within bytes 9 to 18 is right-aligned with leading
spaces for any unfilled positions.
The end of the response string is terminated with a and . After the
last line of a block print, an extra , and are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.

642

MNEMONIC

Applicable
Commands

www.redlion.net

Abbreviated Transmission
Byte

Meter Response Examples:

Description

12 byte data field, 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign,
one byte for decimal point
(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

1-12

1. Node address = 17, full field response, Counter A = 875
17 CTA
875
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 1 = -250.5
SP1
-250.5
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 1 = 250, last line of block
print
250

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register ID,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.

Communication Format

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Timing Diagram Figure

Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and sets the
parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Character Frame Figure

1-717-767-6511

643

Press PAR key to enter
Programming Mode.

PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

644

www.redlion.net

MODEL LD - LARGE DISPLAY TIMER AND CYCLE COUNTER
z 2.25" or 4" HIGH RED LED DIGITS
z 6-DIGIT BI-DIRECTIONAL TIMING CAPABILITY
z 5-DIGIT CYCLE COUNTING CAPABILITY
z SELECTABLE TIMER RANGES AND OPERATING MODES
z ELAPSED TIMER AND PRESET TIMER FUNCTIONALITY
z SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS (RS232 or RS485)
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

z 5 AMP FORM C RELAY OUTPUT
z ALUMINUM NEMA 4X CASE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The Large Display Timer and Cycle Counter is a versatile display that
functions as an Elapsed Timer or Preset Timer, with full-featured user
programmability. The meter includes a built-in Cycle Counter, relay output and
serial communications capability. The 6 digit displays are available in either
2.25" or 4" high red LED digits with adjustable display intensity. The 2.25" high
models are readable up to 130 feet. The 4" high models are readable up to 180
feet. Both versions are constructed of a NEMA 4 enclosure in light weight
aluminum.
The Timer has two signal inputs and eight input operating modes. These
modes provide level active or edge triggered start/stop operation. The Timer
features 18 selectable timer ranges to cover a wide variety of timing
applications. The built-in Cycle Counter can be linked to timer operation to
count timing cycles, or function as a totally independent counter, accepting
count speeds up to 500 Hz. The display can be toggled either manually or
automatically between the Timer and Counter values.
In addition to the Timer/Counter inputs, a programmable User Input is
provided to perform a variety of meter functions. DIP switches are used to
configure the inputs for current sinking (active low) or current sourcing (active
high) operation.
The Setpoint Output can be assigned to the Timer or Counter value, and
configured to suit a variety of control and alarm requirements. The meter also
includes RS232 or RS485 serial communications.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

G
PART
NUMBER

X (Length)

Y (Height)

LD2T06P0 16 (406.4) 4 (101.6)

Z (Center)

12 (304.8)

LD4T06P0 26 (660.4) 7.875 (200) 22 (558.8)

1-717-767-6511

645

Maximum Count Rate:
All Count Sources except Input B: 10 Hz
Input B Count Source:
With Timer Input Filter ON: 10 Hz
With Timer Input Filter OFF: 500 Hz
5. TIMER SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A and INP B)
DIP switch selectable pull-up (7.8 KΩ) or pull-down (3.9 KΩ) resistors
determine active high or active low input logic.
Input A:
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.25 V max; VIH = 2.75 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Input B:
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Inputs A and B:
Timer Input Pulse Width: 1 msec min.
Timer Start/Stop Response Time: 1 msec max.
Filter: Software filtering provided for relay or switch contact debounce.
Filter enabled or disabled through programming. If enabled, results in
50 msec start/stop response time for successive pulses applied to the
same input terminal.
6. RESET/USER INPUT Programmable Function Input:
DIP switch selectable pull-up (7.8 KΩ) or pull-down (3.9 KΩ) resistor
that determines active high or active low input logic.
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 10 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
7. COMMUNICATIONS:
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Type: RS232 half duplex (isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
8. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
timer/count values when power is removed.
9. OUTPUT:
Relay: Form C contacts rated at 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC
(resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
10. CONNECTIONS:
Internal removable terminal blocks are used for power and signal wiring.
Remove end plates with ¼" nut driver. For LD4 versions, all wiring is on
right side of unit. For LD2 versions, power and signal wiring connections are
on the right side and the relay and serial output options are on left side.
Wire Strip Length: 0.4" (10 mm)
Wire Gage: 24-12 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5.3 inch-lbs (0.6 N-m) max
11. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C

Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z direction for 1.5
hours, 2 g’s (1g relay).
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g’s (10g relay), 11 msec in
3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters
12. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Surge

EN 61000-4-5

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Voltage dip/interruptions

EN61000-4-11

Emissions:
Emissions LD200400
EN 55011
Class B
Emissions LD2006P0
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
13. CONSTRUCTION: Aluminum enclosure, and steel side panels with textured
black polyurethane paint for scratch and corrosion resistance protection. Sealed
front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications. Installation Category II,
Pollution Degree 2.
14. WEIGHT:
LD2T06P0 - 4.5 lbs (2.04 kg)
LD4T06P0 - 10.5 lbs (4.76 kg)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

1.0 INSTALLING

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

2.25" High 6-Digit Red LED Timer/Cycle Counter w/
Relay Output & RS232/RS485 Serial Communications
4" High 6-Digit Red LED Timer/Cycle Counter w/ Relay
Output & RS232/RS485 Serial Communications

THE

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

646

LD2T06P0
LD4T06P0

METER

INSTALLATION

Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Criterion A LD200400
Criterion B LD2006P0
10 V/m
Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Criterion A
0.5 cycle

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
This display is designed to be
wall mounted or suspended
from a ceiling truss or other
suitable structure capable
of supporting the LDA.
Caution
should
be
exercised when hanging
the display to provide for
the safety of personnel. If
hanging the LDA, run the
suspension cables (or chains)
through the mounting bracket
holes. For wall mounting use
#10-32 size bolts.

www.redlion.net

2.0 SETTING

THE

DIP SWITCHES

To access the switches, remove the right side plate of the meter. A bank of eight
switches is located inside the unit. Note: Some switches are not used and should
remain in the factory set position.
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter and load circuits before accessing
inside of the meter.

SWITCH 6 (USER INPUT) {See Note 1}
SNK: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12VDC, IMAX = 2.1 mA.
SRC: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

SWITCH 7 (Unused)
This switch is not used and should remain in the factory set position.

SWITCH 8 (Input B)

SWITCH 1 (Unused)
This switch is not used and should remain in the factory set position.

SWITCH 2 (Input A) {See Note 1}
SNK: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12 VDC, IMAX = 2.1 mA.
SRC: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

SWITCH 3 (Input A)
FILTER ON: Provides hardware debounce for Input A to allow relay or
switch contacts to be used as a signal source. Software debounce for Inputs
A and B is provided in the programming menu (Module 1).

NORMAL: Input B performs the normal functions described in the Timer
Input Operation parameter of the programming menu (Module 1).
INTENSITY ADJUST: In this position, Input B is used to adjust the LED
display intensity. Five distinct LED levels can be set by pulsing Input B.
The display intensity level can also be set in the programming menu
(Module 3).
Note 1: When the DIP switch is in the SNK position (OFF), the input is
configured as active low. When the switch is in the SRC position (ON), the
input is configured as active high.
UNUSED

SWITCH 4 (Input B) {See Note 1}
SNK: Adds internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12 VDC, IMAX = 2.1 mA.
SRC: Adds internal 3.9 KΩ pull-down resistor, 7.2 mA max. @ 28 VDC max.

SWITCH 5 (Input B)

Input A
Input B

FILTER ON: Provides hardware debounce for Input B to allow relay or
switch contacts to be used as a signal source. Software debounce for Inputs
A and B is provided in the programming menu (Module 1).

SNK
FILTER OFF
SNK
FILTER OFF

Reset/User Input SNK
UNUSED
Input B Normal

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SRC
ON
SRC
ON
SRC
ON

Intensity Adjust

Factory Setting

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

1-717-767-6511

647

LD2 Left Side

LD4

LD2 Right Side

3.1 POWER WIRING
The power wiring is made via the 3 position terminal block (TBA) located
inside the unit (right side). The DC out power is located on TBB (right side).

DC Out Power

Power

Terminal 4: + 24 VDC OUT
Terminal 6: User Common

Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC Terminal 3: Protective Conductor
Terminal

3.2 RESET/USER INPUT WIRING
The Reset/User Input is located on the right side
Terminal 5: Reset/User
Terminal 6: Comm

Sinking Logic

DIP switch 6 OFF

3.3 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
The setpoint relay uses a three position terminal block (TBC) located on the
left side of the LD2 model, and on the right side for the LD4 model.
Terminal 1: NC
Terminal 2: NO
Terminal 3: Relay Common

648

www.redlion.net

Sourcing Logic

DIP switch 6 ON

3.4 INPUT WIRING
The Large Display Timer is equipped with two signal inputs, A and B. These
inputs are wired using the six position terminal block (TBB) located inside the
unit on the right side.

Terminal 1: Input A
Terminal 3: Input B
Terminal 2: Input Common

CAUTION: DC common is NOT isolated from input common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter application, the DC common must be suitably
isolated from hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous voltage may
be present at the User Input and Input Common terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the potential of the input common with
respect to earth ground.
Current Sinking Output

Two Wire Proximity, Current Source

Current Sourcing Output

Interfacing With TTL

Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Sink
Input A

Switch or Isolated Transistor; Current Source

Input A

* Switch position is application dependent.

3.5 SERIAL WIRING
The serial connections are made via terminal block TBD located inside the
unit on the left side for the LD2 and on the right side for the LD4.

communications to take place. This is known as a null modem connection. Most
printers emulate a DCE device while most computers emulate a DTE device.
Some devices cannot accept more than two or three characters in succession
without a pause in between. In these cases, the meter employs a busy function.
As the meter begins to transmit data, the RXD line (RS232) is monitored to
determine if the receiving device is “busy”. The receiving device asserts that it
is busy by setting the RXD line to a space condition (logic 0). The meter then
suspends transmission until the RXD line is released by the receiving device.

RS485 Communications

RS232 Communications

G
Terminal Block Connection Figure
RS232 is intended to allow two devices to communicate over distances up to
50 feet. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) transmits data on the Transmitted Data
(TXD) line and receives data on the Received Data (RXD) line. Data Computer
Equipment (DCE) receives data on the TXD line and transmits data on the RXD
line. The LD emulates a DTE. If the other device connected to the meter also
emulates a DTE, the TXD and RXD lines must be interchanged for

1-717-767-6511

Terminal Block Connection Figure

649

4.0 REVIEWING THE FRONT PANEL KEYS AND DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter
Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value
Increment selected digit position of parameter value

S
SELS

Select display (Timer or Cycle Counter)

T
RSTT

Reset value(s) per front panel reset setting

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
“ ” - Decimal point to the far right of the display can be programmed to flash
when the timer is running, to provide a “Timer Run” indicator.

“ ” - To the left of the display is the Cycle Counter value.
“ ” - Between digits 5 and 6 indicates the setpoint status.

If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds between the Timer and Cycle Counter values.

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR KEY)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR key. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a security
code or a hardware lock (See Module 3).

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the PAR key with
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and return
the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to the
Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

MODULE ENTRY (SELS & PAR KEYS)

The Programming Menu is organized into five modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
S key is used to select the desired module.
and the present module. The SELS
The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR key.

MODULE MENU (PAR KEY)

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 3. This is useful when
encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
S and RSTT
T keys are used to
the selections/value for that parameter. The SELS
move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR key,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter
to the next parameter.
For numeric values, the value is displayed with one digit flashing (initially the
T key increments the digit by one or the user
right most digit). Pressing the RSTT
T key and the digit will automatically scroll. The SELS
S key
can hold the RSTT
will select the next digit to the left. Pressing the PAR key will enter the value and
move to the next parameter.

650

www.redlion.net

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

5.1 MODULE 1 - TIMER INPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

TIMER INPUT FILTER

TIMER RANGE

(

ª
RANGE
MAXIMUM
SELECTION DISPLAY

18 TIMER RANGE SELECTIONS
= SEC;

DISPLAY
RESOLUTION

= MIN;

= DAY)

= HR;

RANGE
SELECTION

MAXIMUM
DISPLAY
DISPLAY RESOLUTION

Provides a 50 msec software debounce for the Timer Inputs (A and B). Select
when using relays or switch contacts as a signal source.

MINUTES/SECONDS

SECONDS
1 SEC

1 SEC

0.1 SEC

0.01 SEC

0.001 SEC

HOURS/MINUTES
1 MIN

MINUTES
1 MIN

0.1 MIN

0.01 MIN

HOURS/MINUTES/SECONDS

TIMING DIRECTION

«
ª
Bi-directional timing capability. Select the timing direction desired for the
application.

1 SEC

HOURS
1 HR

DAYS/HOURS/MINUTES

0.1 HR

TIMER START VALUE

1 MIN

0.01 HR

ª
TIMER INPUT OPERATION

This parameter determines how the Timer Input Signals affect the Run/Stop
status of the Timer. Timing diagrams are shown below for level active and edge
triggered (1-input or 2-input) operation. For single input modes (Input A only),
Input B provides a level active Timer Inhibit function. In the Display Hold
mode, the timer display value remains held and only updates when a Timer
Start (Input A) or Timer Stop (Input B) edge occurs.
The timer reset ( ) operating modes are identical to the other modes in the
diagrams, except the timer display value is reset at the Time Start edges.
The Timer can also be stopped at a Timer Stop Value or at Setpoint output
activation or deactivation. This type of Stop condition is cleared when a Timer
Reset occurs, or another start edge is applied on the timer input.

TIMER STOP VALUE

«
ª

For Reset Modes (

ª
The Timer stops when this value is reached regardless of the signal levels on
the timer inputs. Selecting
displays a sub-menu where the Stop Value is
entered in the same display format as the Timer Range selected. This stop
condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs or another start edge is applied
on the timer input. Select
if a Stop Value is not desired.

), the timer is reset at Time Start edge.

,
Edge Triggered Operation -1 Input

Level Active (Gated) Operation
Time
Start

Time Time
Stop Start

Time
Stop

Time
Start

Time
Stop

FLASH TIMER RUN INDICATOR
Time
Stop

Time
Start

INPUT A

INPUT B - Timer Inhibit (Level Active)

«
ª
Select

Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input
Time
Start

Time
Start

Time Start,
Display Update

INPUT A
Time
Stop

Time
Stop

Time Stop,
Display Update

INPUT B

Display
Update

to have the Timer Run indicator flash when the timer is running.

TIMER RUN STATE AT POWER-UP

Edge Triggered Operation - 2 Input,
with Display Hold
Time Start,
Display Update

INPUT A

INPUT B

«
ª
Determines the Run/Stop state of the Timer at Power-up. This parameter
does not apply to
Input Operation.
- Timer Stopped at power-up, regardless of prior Run/Stop state
- Timer assumes the Run/Stop state it was in prior to power-down

1-717-767-6511

651

USER INPUT FUNCTION (Cont’d)

TIMER RESET AT POWER-UP

DISPLAY

ª
The Timer can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.

MODE

DESCRIPTION

Inhibit

Inhibit timing or counting for the
selected value(s).

Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)

Increase intensity one level
for each activation.

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active
parameters selected in the Print
Options menu (Module 5).

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed
by a momentary reset of the
selected value(s).

Reset Output

Edge triggered deactivation of
the Setpoint Output.

USER INPUT FUNCTION

«
ª
DISPLAY

MODE

DESCRIPTION

No Function

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out
Display Select
(Edge triggered)
Maintained Reset

See Programming Mode
Access chart (Module 3).
Toggle display with each
activation.
Level active reset of the
selected value(s).

Display Hold

Freeze display for the selected
value(s) while allowing time or
counts to accumulate internally.

Hold and Reset

Edge triggered reset of the
selected value(s) after
storing the time or count.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

«
ª
The User Input Assignment only applies if the cycle counter is enabled and
a selection of reset, display hold, hold and reset, inhibit, or print and reset is
selected in the User Input Function menu.

5.2 MODULE 2 - CYCLE COUNTER PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

CYCLE COUNTER ENABLE

CYCLE COUNTER COUNTING DIRECTION

ª
When set to

ª
, the remaining Cycle Counter parameters are not accessible.

Bi-directional counting capability. Select the counting direction desired for
the application.

CYCLE COUNTER COUNT SOURCE

CYCLE COUNTER START VALUE

«
G

This parameter selects the source from which the Cycle Counter derives
counts. The Timer Reset (
) selection generates a count when either a
manual or automatic timer reset occurs (See Module 4 for programming
Automatic Reset). The Input B (
) selection generates a count each time
Input B is activated. This selection overrides the timer inhibit function of Input
B, when the timer is programmed for Level or Edge-1 operating mode (See
Module 1 for Timer Input Operating Modes).
The User Input (
) selection generates a count each time the User
Input is activated. When selected as the count source, the User Input can still be
set to perform a User Function described in Module 1. In this case, the Cycle
Counter will count the number of times the selected User Function occurred.
The Output ON/OFF selections generate a count when the Setpoint output
either activates or deactivates.

The Cycle Counter returns to this value whenever a Counter Reset occurs.
Non-zero values are normally used for “down counting” applications, but can
also provide an offset value when counting up.

652

CYCLE COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP

«
ª
The Cycle Counter can be programmed to Reset at each meter power-up.

www.redlion.net

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SELS)

«
ª
S key to toggle between the timer and cycle
The
selection allows the SELS
counter displays.

the Setpoint values and Timer Stop value to be modified, but allows direct
access to these values without having to enter Full Programming mode.
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the
prompt in order to access Full Programming mode. Depending on
the code value, Quick Programming may be accessible before the
prompt
appears (see chart).

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “PAR”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
KEY IS PRESSED

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RSTT)

not

______

Full Programming

Immediate Access

1-99

Quick
Programming

After Quick Programming
with correct code entry
prompt *
at

100-999

T key to reset the selected value(s). The
The
selection allows the RSTT
shaded selections only appear if the cycle counter is enabled.

0
Active

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

1-99
100-999

Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

0-999

prompt
Programming
Lock
Quick
Programming
prompt
Full Programming

With correct code entry
prompt *
at
No Access
No Access
With correct code entry
prompt *
at
Immediate Access

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

The
selection allows the display to automatically scroll between the
timer and cycle counter values. The scroll rate is about every 4 seconds.

LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

«
ª

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed.

The
selection will return the meter to the factory default settings. The
meter will display
and then return to
, at which time all settings have
been changed.

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

«
ª

1-717-767-6511

653

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 4 is the programming module for the Setpoint Output parameters.
Some parameters will not appear depending on the Setpoint Assignment and
Setpoint Output Action selected.

SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT

ª
SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT

This parameter is only active if the Setpoint Action is set to Timed Output mode
(
). Enter the time duration the Setpoint Output will remain ON once it is
activated. This value is always entered in minutes, seconds, and hundredths of
seconds format. The maximum value is 99 minutes 59.99 seconds.

«
ª
Select the display for Setpoint assignment.

STOP TIMER

SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION

«
ª

Stops the Timer when the Setpoint output activates (
) or deactivates
). Select
if the output should not affect the Timer Run/Stop status.
The Timer Stop condition is cleared when a Timer Reset occurs, or a Time
Start edge is applied on the Timer input.

(

This parameter selects the action of the Setpoint output as shown below.
SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION

OUTPUT ACTIVATES

OUTPUT DEACTIVATES

At Manual Reset
When Time or Count
Latched Output Mode
=
)
(if
= Setpoint On value
When Time or Count
After Setpoint
Timed Output Mode
= Setpoint On value
Output Time-Out
When Time or Count When Time or Count
On-Off Output Mode
= Setpoint On value = Setpoint Off value

TIMER/COUNTER AUTO RESET

«
ª

SETPOINT ON

Automatically resets the Setpoint Assigned display value when the Setpoint
Output activates (
) or deactivates (
). Select
if the output should
not cause a display reset.

This parameter determines when the Setpoint output will activate. The output
can activate at a programmed Setpoint Value or can be set to activate when the
Timer starts (
) or stops (
).
Selecting
displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Value is entered. If
the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same display
format as the selected Timer Range.

SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

«
ª

«
ª
Select
to have the Setpoint Output deactivate (reset) when the Setpoint
Assigned display resets. Reset can occur by the RSTT key or the User Input,
if programmed for that function. Select
if the Setpoint output should not
reset when the display resets.

SETPOINT OFF

«
G

SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE

The Setpoint Off parameter only appears if the Setpoint Action is set to OnOff Output mode (
). In this mode, the Setpoint OFF parameter
determines when the Setpoint Output will deactivate. The output can be
programmed to deactivate at a Setpoint Off Value or can be set to deactivate
when the Timer starts (
) or stops (
).
Selecting
displays a sub-menu where the Setpoint Off Value is
entered. If the Setpoint is assigned to the Timer, the value is entered in the same
display format as the selected Timer Range.

«
ª
654

ª
will restore the output to the same state it was at before the meter was
powered down.
will activate the output at power up.
will deactivate the
output at power up. This parameter is not active when the Setpoint Action is
selected for timed output mode.

to
www.redlion.net

5.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

«
ª
BAUD RATE

This parameter determines the formatting of data transmitted from the meter
in response to a Transmit Value command or a Block Print Request. Select
for a full print transmission, consisting of the meter address, mnemonics, and
parameter data. Select
for abbreviated print transmissions, consisting of the
parameter data only. This setting is applied to all the parameters selected in the
PRINT OPTIONS. (Note: If the meter address is 0, the address will not be sent
during a full transmission.)

PRINT OPTIONS

DATA BIT

«
ª
Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

PARITY BIT

«
ª
This parameter only appears when the Data Bit parameter is set to a 7-bit
data word length. Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial equipment
on the serial link. The meter ignores parity when receiving data and sets the
parity bit for outgoing data. If parity is set to , an additional stop bit is used
to force the frame size to 10 bits.

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting
displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as
in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as
will not be sent.
The “Print All” (
) option selects all meter values for transmitting
(
), without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, the Cycle Counter and Cycle Counter Start values will
only be sent when the Cycle Counter is enabled. If disabled, these parameters
are inactive and will not be transmitted. Likewise, only the Setpoint parameters
that apply to the programmed Setpoint Output Action will be transmitted.
DISPLAY

METER ADDRESS

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

FACTORY
SETTING

MNEMONIC

Timer

TMR

Cycle Counter

CNT

Timer Start

TST

Timer Stop

TSP

Counter Start

CST

Setpoint ON

SPT

Setpoint OFF

SOF

Setpoint Time-out

STO

655

Sending Serial Commands and Data

Command Chart
Command Description

N
T
V
R
P

Notes

Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value Change (write) followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.
Reset a value or the output. Must be followed
Reset
by a register ID character
Block Print Request Initiates a block print output. Registers in the
(read)
print block are selected in Print Options.
Node (meter)
Address Specifier

Applicable
Commands

Value Description MNEMONIC

Transmit Details (T and V)

Timer

TMR

T, V, R

6 digit, per Timer Range

Cycle Counter

CNT

T, V, R

5 digit

Timer Start

TST

T, V

6 digit, per Timer Range

Timer Stop

TSP

T, V

6 digit, per Timer Range

Counter Start

CST

T, V

5 digit

Setpoint ON
(Reset Output)

SPT

T, V, R

per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter

Setpoint OFF

SOF

T, V

per Setpoint Assignment,
same as Timer or Counter

Setpoint
Time-out

STO

T, V

6 digit, mm.ss.ss format

Command String Construction

Command String Examples:

The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:

1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the Setpoint On value
String: N17VF350$

Receiving Data From The Meter

Full Field Transmission

Abbreviated Transmission

Byte

Description

Byte

1, 2

2 byte Node Address field [00-99]

1-12

(Space)

4-6

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

7-18

12 byte data field; 9 bytes for number and three bytes for decimal
points

(carriage return)

(line feed)

Description

12 byte data field, 9 bytes for number and three bytes for
decimal points
(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

* (Space)

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register
mnemonic, leaving only the numeric part of the response.

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 18) is 12
characters long. When a display overflow exists for a requested timer or cycle
counter value, an * (used as an overflow character) replaces a space in byte 7.
Byte 8 is always a space.
The remaining ten positions of this field consist of seven positions for the
requested value with decimal points positioned for the selected timer range. The

656

www.redlion.net

Communication Format

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Timing Diagram Figure

Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The LD Timer ignores the parity bit of incoming data and sets
the parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Character Frame Figure

1-717-767-6511

657

Press PAR key to enter
Programming Mode.

LD TIMER PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

658

www.redlion.net

MODEL LD - LARGE DC VOLT/CURRENT/PROCESS DISPLAY
z 2.25" & 4" HIGH RED LED DIGITS
z PROGRAMMABLE SCALING AND DECIMAL POINTS
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z DUAL 5 AMP FORM C RELAY
z ALUMINUM NEMA 4X CASE CONSTRUCTION
z RS232/RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.

UL
R

US LISTED

z UNIVERSALLY POWERED

LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
3RSD

51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The Large Display is a versatile display available as a DC volt, current, or
process meter with scaling, serial communications and dual relay outputs. The 5
digit displays are available in either 2.25" or 4" high red LED digits with
adjustable display intensities. The 2.25" high models are readable up to 130 feet.
The 4" high models are readable up to 180 feet. Both versions are constructed
of a NEMA 4X enclosure in light weight aluminum.
All models also come with dual Form C relay outputs and RS232 / RS485
serial communications.

1. DISPLAY: 5 digit, 2.25" (57 mm) or 4" (101 mm) intensity adjustable Red LED
(-99999 to 99999)
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC POWER: 50 to 250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 26 VA
DC POWER: 21.6 to 250 VDC, 11 W
DC Out: +24 VDC @ 100 mA if input voltage is greater than 50 VAC/VDC
+24 VDC @ 50 mA if input voltage is less than 50 VDC
Isolation: 2300 Vrms for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs
3. INPUT RANGES: Jumper Selectable
D.C. Voltages: 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 10 V

INPUT
RANGE

ACCURACY @
INPUT
23 °C LESS
IMPEDANCE
THAN 85% RH

200 mV

0.1% of span

1.027 MΩ

0.1% of span

1.027 MΩ

20 V

0.1% of span

200 V
10 V

MAX
INPUT
SIGNAL

RESOLUTION

TEMP.
COEFFICIENT

75 VDC

10 µV

70 ppm /°C

75 VDC

0.1 mV

70 ppm /°C

1.027 MΩ

250 VDC

1 mV

70 ppm /°C

0.1% of span

1.027 MΩ

250 VDC

10 mV

70 ppm /°C

0.1% of span

538 KΩ

30 V

1 mV

70 ppm /°C

RESOLUTION

TEMP.
COEFFICIENT

D.C. Currents: 200 μA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

LD2A

2.25" High 5 Digit Red LED Volt/Current Meter w/
Relay Output and RS232/RS485 Serial Comms

LD2A05P0

LD4A

4" High 5 Digit Red LED Volt/Current Meter w/
Relay Output and RS232/RS485 Serial Comms

LD4A05P0

INPUT
RANGE

200 µΑ
2 mA
20 mA
200 mA

ACCURACY @
23 °C LESS
THAN 85% RH

0.1% of span
0.1% of span
0.1% of span
0.1% of span

INPUT
IMPEDANCE

MAX
INPUT
SIGNAL

1.111 KΩ 15 mA
50 mA
111 Ω
150 mA
11 Ω
500 mA
1Ω

10 nA

70 ppm /°C

0.1 µA

70 ppm /°C

1 µA

70 ppm /°C

10 µA

70 ppm /°C

D.C. Process: 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 VDC, 0/1 to 10 VDC
INPUT RANGE

SELECT RANGE

4 - 20 mA

Use the 20 mA range

1 - 5 VDC

Use the 10V range

1 - 10 VDC

Use the 10V range

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

G
PART
NUMBER

1-717-767-6511

X (Length)

Y (Height)

Z (Center)

LD2A05P0 16 (406.4)

4 (101.6)

LD4A05P0 26 (660.4)

7.875 (200) 22 (558.8)

12 (304.3)

659

6. DISPLAY RESPONSE TIME: 500 msec min.
7. USER INPUT:
Software selectable pull-up (8.6 KΩ) or pull-down resistor
(3.9 KΩ) that determines active high or active low input logic.
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response Time: 5 msec typ.; 50 msec debounce (activation and release)
8. COMMUNICATIONS:
Type: RS485 or RS232
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Data: 7/8 bits
Parity: no, odd or even
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4 K
Bus Address: Selectable 0 to 99, Max. 32 meters per line (RS485)
9. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters and
max/min values when power is removed.
10. OUTPUT:
Type: Single FORM-C relay
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 150 Vrms
Contact Rating: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8
H.P. @ 120 VAC (inductive load)
Life Expectancy: 100,000 minimum operations
Response Time:
Turn On Time: 4 msec max.
Turn Off Time: 4 msec max.
11. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s (1 g relay).
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g’s (10 g relay), 11 msec
in 3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters
12. CONNECTIONS:Internal removable terminal blocks
Wire Strip Length: 0.4" (10 mm)
Wire Gage: 24-12 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5.3 inch-lbs (0.6 N-m) max.
Cable Diameter: Outside diameter must be 0.181" (4.6 mm) to 0.312" (7.9
mm) to maintain NEMA 4 rating of cord grips.

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

METER

INSTALLATION

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the operating
temperature. Placing the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be
avoided. The unit should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap
product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of
the front overlay. Do not use tools of any kind (screwdrivers, pens, pencils, etc.)
to operate the keypad of the unit.

2.0 SETTING

THE

13. CONSTRUCTION: Aluminum enclosure, and steel side panels with textured
black polyurethane paint for scratch and corrosion resistance protection. Sealed
front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications. Installation Category II,
Pollution Degree 2.
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
File # E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Enclosure rating, UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843B/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating, IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion B
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion B
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion B
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion B
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
15. WEIGHT:
LD2A05XX - 4.5 lbs (2.04 kg)
LD4A05XX - 10.5 lbs (4.76 kg)

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
This display is designed to be
wall mounted or suspended
from a ceiling truss or
other suitable structure
capable of supporting the
LDA. Caution should be
exercised when hanging
the display to provide for
the safety of personnel. If
hanging the LDA, run the
suspension cables (or chains)
through the mounting bracket
holes. For wall mounting use
#10-32 size bolts.

JUMPERS

660

www.redlion.net

3.0 WIRING

THE

METER

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

WIRING OVERVIEW

Although this meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must be
followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the meter may be different for various
installations. The meter becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. The meter should be properly connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.

Electrical connections are made via pluggable terminal blocks located inside
the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter's voltage and current
ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When
wiring the meter, compare the numbers on the label on the back of the meter case
against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Strip the wire,
leaving approximately 0.4" (10 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded wires should
be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw clamp terminal and
tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify tightness.) Each terminal can
accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two #18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four
#20 AWG (0.61 mm).

4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
Internal removable terminal
blocks are used for power and
signal wiring. Access to
terminal blocks is through
conduit fittings. Remove end
plates with ¼" nut driver. For
LD4 versions, all wiring is on
right side of unit. For LD2
versions, power and relay
wiring is on the right side and
the input, serial, DC out and
user input is on the left side.
Connect drain wire from
shielded cable(s) to screw on
side plate for proper grounding.

LD4

LD2

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

LEFT SIDE VIEW

3.1 POWER WIRING

The power wiring is made via the 3 position terminal block (TBA) located
inside the unit (right side). The DC out power is located: LD2 - left side, LD4
- right side

Power
Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC Terminal 3: Protective Conductor
Terminal

DC Out Power
Terminal 4: + 24 VDC OUT
Terminal 6: User Common

1-717-767-6511

661

3.2 USER INPUT WIRING
The User Input is located: LD2 - left side, LD4 - right side

Sinking Logic

Terminal 5: User Input
Terminal 6: User Comm

Sourcing Logic

3.3 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING
The setpoint relays use a six position terminal block (TBB) located inside the
(right side).
Terminal 1: NC 1
Terminal 2: NO 2
Terminal 3: Relay 1 Common
Terminal 4: NC 1
Terminal 5: NO 2
Terminal 6: Relay 2 Common

3.4 INPUT WIRING
CAUTION: Analog common is NOT isolated from user input
common. In order to preserve the safety of the meter
application, the DC common must be suitably isolated from
hazardous live earth referenced voltage; or input common must
be at protective earth ground potential. If not, hazardous
voltage may be present at the User Input and Input Common
terminals. Appropriate considerations must then be given to the
potential of the input common with respect to earth ground.
Always connect the analog signal common to terminal 2.

Before connecting signal wires, the Input Range Jumper should be verified
for proper position.

3.5 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
Voltage Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal
(self powered)

Current Signal (2 wire
requiring excitation)

Current Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)

Terminal 1: +VDC
Terminal 2: -VDC

Terminal 3: +ADC
Terminal 2: -ADC

Terminal 4: +EXC
Terminal 3: +ADC

Terminal 3: +ADC (signal)
Terminal 2: -ADC (common)
Terminal 4: +EXC

G
Voltage Signal (3 wire
requiring excitation)
Terminal 1: +VDC (signal)
Terminal 2: -VDC (common)
Terminal 4: +EXC

662

www.redlion.net

3.6 SERIAL WIRING
The serial connections are made via terminal block TBD located inside the
unit on the left side for the LD2 and on the right side for the LD4.

RS485 Communications

The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the LDA is limited to 38.4k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that is,
data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.

RS232 Communications

4.0 REVIEWING

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

BUTTON DISPLAY MODE OPERATION
PAR

Terminal Block Connection Figure

AND

DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

S
SELS

Index display through selected displays

Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value

T
RSTT

Resets display

Increment selected digit of parameter value

OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS
MAX - Maximum display capture value
MIN - Minimum display capture value

“1” - To the left of the display indicates setpoint 1 output activated.
“2” - To the left of the display indicates setpoint 2 output activated.

S button toggles the meter through the selected displays. If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically every four seconds
Pressing the SELS
between the enabled display values.

1-717-767-6511

663

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR BUTTON)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR BUTTON)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR button. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a
security code or a hardware lock.

The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the PAR button with Pro NO
displayed. This will commit any stored parameter changes to memory and
return the meter to the Display Mode. (If power loss occurs before returning to
the Display Mode, verify recent parameter changes.)

MODULE ENTRY (SELS & PAR BUTTONS)

The Programming Menu is organized into five modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
S button is used to select the desired
Pro and the present module. The SELS
module. The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR button.

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful
when encountering programming problems.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
S and RSTT
T buttons are used to
the selections/value for that parameter. The SELS
move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR button,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter to
the next parameter.
For numeric values, the value is displayed with one digit flashing (initially
S button increments the digit by one or
the right most digit). Pressing the RSTS
S button and the digit will automatically scroll. The
the user can hold the RSTS
T button will select the next digit to the left. Pressing the PAR button will
SELT
enter the value and move to the next parameter.

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

USrIN

Parameter

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS (1-INP)
PARAMETER MENU

DISPLAY DECIMAL POINT

INPUT RANGE

rAN6E
G ª

200v

RANGE
SELECTION
RESOLUTION

200uA
0.002A
0.2u
2u
10u

200.00 μA
2.0000 mA
200.00 mV
2.0000 V

RANGE
SELECTION
RESOLUTION

0.02A
0.2A
20u
200u

20.000 mA
200.00 mA
20.000 V
200.00 V

dECPt
ª

0.0

0.00

0.000

0.0000

0.00

Select the decimal point location for the Input, MIN and MAX displays. This
selection also affects the dSP1 and dSP2 parameters and setpoint values and offset value.

10.000 V

DISPLAY OFFSET VALUE

OFSEt
ª

-19999 to 19999

0.00

The display can be corrected with an offset value. This can be used to
compensate for signal variations or sensor errors. This value is automatically

664

www.redlion.net

updated after a Zero Display to show how far the display is offset. A value of
zero removes the effects of offset. The decimal point follows the dECPt selection.

FILTER SETTING

FILtr
ª

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

dSP 2 «
ª 100.00

-19999 to 99999

Enter the second Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the
same for KEY and APLY scaling styles. The decimal point follows the dECPt
selection.

0,1 2 3

General Notes on Scaling

FILTER BAND

bANd

USER INPUT FUNCTION

0 to 199 display units

USrIN

DISPLAY MODE

NO
P-Loc
ZErO
rESEt

DESCRIPTION

No Function

User Input disabled.

Program Mode Lock-out
Zero Input
(Edge triggered)
Reset (Edge triggered)

SCALING STYLE

StYLE
ª

KEy

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

INP 1
ª

0 to 29999

0.00

For Key-in (KEY) style, enter the first Input Value using the front panel buttons.
(The Input Range selection sets the decimal location for the Input Value).
For Apply (APLY) style, the meter shows the previously stored Input Value. To
S button to advance to the next parameter. To
retain this value, press the SELS
T button and apply the input signal to the
change the Input Value, press the RSTT
meter. Adjust the signal source externally until the desired Input Value appears.
S button to enter the value being displayed.
Press the SELS

DISPLAY VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 1

dSP 1
ª

Display Hold

d-SEL
d-LEV

Display Select
(Edge Triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge Triggered)

Print Request

Serial transmit of the active parameters
selected in the Print Options menu
(Module 5).

P-r5t
rSt-1
rSt-2
rSt12

Print and Reset

Same as Print Request followed by a
momentary reset of the assigned value(s).

Setpoint 1 Reset

Resets setpoint 1 output.

Setpoint 2 Reset

Resets setpoint 2 output.

Setpoint 1 and 2 Reset

Reset both setpoint 1 and 2 outputs.

Advance once for each activation.
Increase intensity one level for each
activation.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

U-ASN
ª

dSP

HI
LO

HI-LO
dSP

-19999 to 99999

0.00

Enter the first Display Value by using the front panel buttons. This is the same
for KEY and APLY scaling styles. The decimal point follows the dECPt selection.

INPUT VALUE FOR SCALING POINT 2

INP 2 «
ª 100.00

Holds the assigned display, but all other
meter functions continue as long as
activated (maintained action).

d-HLd
APLY

KEy

See Programming Mode Access chart
(Module 3).
Zero the Input Display value causing
Display Reading to be Offset.
Resets the assigned value(s) to the current
input value.

0 to 29999

USER INPUT ACTIVE LEVEL

U-Act

Select whether the user input is configured as active low or active high.

For Key-in (KEY) style, enter the known second Input Value using the front
panel buttons.
For Apply (APLY) style, the meter shows the previously stored Input Value for
S button to advance to the
Scaling Point 2. To retain this value, press the SELS
T button and apply the
next parameter. To change the Input Value, press the RSTT
input signal to the meter. Adjust the signal source externally until the desired
S button to enter the value being displayed.
Input Value appears. Press the SELS

1-717-767-6511

665

5.2 MODULE 2 - SECONDARY FUNCTION PARAMETERS (2-SEC)
PARAMETER MENU

HI-En

MAX DISPLAY ENABLE

CALIBRATION

YES

Enables the Maximum Display Capture capability.

HI-t

2.0

MAX CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

LO-En

YES

Enables the Minimum Display Capture capability.

LO-t

2.0

MIN CAPTURE DELAY TIME

0.0 to 999.9 sec.

FACTORY SERVICE OPERATIONS

FCS

yES

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

Entering Code 66 will overwrite all user settings with
the factory settings. The meter will display rESEt and then
return to CodE 00. Press the PAR button to exit the module.

VIEW MODEL AND VERSION DISPLAY

CodE

666

1. Connect the negative lead of a precision DC current source with an accuracy
of 0.01% or better to the COMM terminal. Leave the positive lead of the DC
current source unconnected.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press the PAR button. Unit will display CAL NO
3. Press the RST button to select the range to be calibrated.
4. Press the PAR button. Display reads 0.0A
5. With the positive lead of the DC current source unconnected, press PAR.
Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
6. When the display reads the selected range, connect the positive lead of the DC
current source to the current input and apply full-scale input signal for the
range. (Note: For 200 mA range, apply 100 mA as indicated on the display.)
Press PAR. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each input range to be calibrated. When display
reads CAL NO, press the PAR button to exit calibration.

Voltage Calibration

Select yES to perform either of the Factory Service Operations shown below.

CodE

Current Calibration

MIN DISPLAY ENABLE

The LD uses stored calibration values to provide accurate
measurements. Over time, the electrical characteristics of
the components inside the LD will slowly change with the
result that the stored calibration values no longer accurately
define the input circuit. For most applications, recalibration every 1 to 2 years
should be sufficient.
Calibration of the LD involves a calibration which should only be performed
by individuals experienced in calibrating electronic equipment. Allow 30 minute
warm up before performing any calibration related procedure. The following
procedures should be performed at an ambient temperature of 15 to 35 °C (59 to
95 °F).
CAUTION: The accuracy of the calibration equipment will directly affect the
accuracy of the LD.

1. Connect a precision DC voltage source with an accuracy of 0.01% or better
to the volt input and COMM terminals of the LD. Set the output of the voltage
source to zero.
2. With the display at CodE 48, press the PAR button. Unit will display CAL NO.
3. Press the RST button to select the range to be calibrated.
4. Press the PAR button. Display reads 0.0v.
5. With the voltage source set to zero (or a dead short applied to the input), press
PAR. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
6. When the display reads the selected range, apply full-scale input signal for the
range. (Note: For 200V range, apply 100V as indicated on the display.) Press
PAR. Display reads CALC for about 8 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each input range to be calibrated. When display
reads CAL NO, press the PAR button to exit calibration

Entering Code 50 will display the model (LDA) and
version (x.x) of the meter. The display then returns to
CodE 00. Press the PAR button to exit the module.

www.redlion.net

5.3 MODULE 3 - DISPLAY

AND

FRONT PANEL BUTTON
PARAMETERS (3-dSP)

PARAMETER MENU

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

DISPLAY UPDATE TIME

dSP-t
ª

0.5

CodE

seconds

This parameter sets the display update time in seconds.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL)

SEL

yES

The yES selection allows the SEL button to toggle through the enabled
displays.

FRONT PANEL RESET ENABLE (RST)

rSt
ª

dSP

NO
HI

LO
HI-LO

000

yES

999

not

P-Loc

______

ZERO DISPLAY WITH DISPLAY RESET

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY MODE WHEN “SEL”
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
BUTTON IS PRESSED

dSP

This selection allows the RST button to reset the selected value(s).

ZErO

000

Active

1-99

Full Programming

Immediate Access

After Quick Programming
Quick Programming with correct code entry at
CodE prompt *

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

Programming Lock

No Access

1-99

Quick Programming

No Access

100-999

CodE prompt

With correct code entry
at CodE prompt *

0-999

Full Programming

Immediate Access

P-Loc
Not Active

FULL PROGRAMMING
MODE ACCESS

DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE

ScroL

yES

The yES selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the
enabled displays. The scroll rate is every 4 seconds. This parameter only appears
when the MAX or MIN displays are enabled.

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

d-LEV
ª

Enter the desired Display Intensity Level (1-5). The display will actively dim
or brighten as levels are changed.

1-717-767-6511

667

5.4 MODULE 4 - SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (4-SPt)
PARAMETER MENU

SETPOINT VALUE

SETPOINT SELECT

SPSEL

SP-1

SPt-n

SP-2

Enb-n

YES

Select YES to enable Setpoint n and access the setup parameters. If NO is
selected, the unit returns to SPSEL and Setpoint n is disabled.

SETPOINT ACTION

Act-n «
ª HI-Ub

HI-bL

LO-bL

HI-Ub

LO-Ub

High Acting, with balanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with balanced hysteresis

High Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

Low Acting, with unbalanced hysteresis

99999

59999

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (output). See Setpoint Output
Figures for a visual detail of each action.

HI-bL
LO-bL
HI-Ub
LO-Ub

-19999

HYSTERESIS VALUE

100

Enter the desired setpoint value. The decimal point position for the setpoint
and hysteresis values follow the selection set in Module 1.

HYS-n

SETPOINT ENABLE

ON TIME DELAY

tON-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

OFF TIME DELAY

High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

HI-bL

Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

LO-bL

tOF-n

0.0

599.9 Sec

OUTPUT RESET ACTION

rSt-n

Auto

LAtCH

L-dLY

Enter the reset action of the output. See figure for details.

Auto = Automatic action; This action allows the output to automatically reset off
High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

HI-Ub

Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

LO-Ub

668

www.redlion.net

corresponding “on” output is reset immediately and remains off until the
trigger point is crossed again. (Previously latched alarms will be off if power
up Display Value is lower than setpoint value.)
L-dLY = Latch with delay reset action; This action latches the output on at the
trigger point per the Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Output Figures. Latch
means that the output can only be turned off by the front panel RST button
or user input manual reset, serial reset command or meter power cycle. When
the user input or RST button is activated (momentary action), the meter
delays the event until the corresponding “on” output crosses the trigger off
point. (Previously latched outputs are off if power up Display Value is lower
than setpoint value. During a power cycle, the meter erases a previous L-dLY
reset if it is not activated at power up.)

OUTPUT RESET WITH DISPLAY RESET

rEn-n
ª

YES

STANDBY OPERATION

Stb-n

YES

When YES, the output is disabled (after a power up) until the trigger point is
crossed. Once the output is on, the output operates normally per the Setpoint
Action and Output Reset Action.

Setpoint Output Reset Actions

5.5 MODULE 5 - SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-SSEr)
PARAMETER MENU

Module 5 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the LD
with those of the host computer or other serial device.

DATA BIT

9600

300
600

1200
2400

7-bit

8-bit

7-bit

Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

BAUD RATE

bAUd

dAtA

4800
9600

19200
38400

PARITY BIT

PAr

Odd

EVEN

1-717-767-6511

669

METER ADDRESS

Addr

PRINT OPTIONS

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

Abbr

YES

OPt

DISPLAY

INP
HI
LO
SPt-1
SPt-2

FACTORY
SETTING

DESCRIPTION

Input

YES
NO
NO
NO
NO

Maximum
Minimum
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2

MNEMONIC

INP
MAX
MIN
SP1
SP2

Value Description MNEMONIC

Input

INP

T, R

5 digit

Maximum

MAX

T, R

5 digit

Command Chart

Minimum

MIN

T, R

5 digit

Notes

Setpoint 1

SP1

T, R, V

5 digit positive/4 digit negative

Address a specific meter. Must be
followed by one or two digit node
address. Not required when node
address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must
be followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.

Setpoint 2

SP2

T, R, V

5 digit positive/4 digit negative

Command

Description

Node (meter)
Address Specifier

Transmit Value (read)

Value Change (write)

Reset

Initiates a block print output. Registers
Block Print Request (read) in the print block are selected in Print
Options.

Reset a min or max value or the output.
Must be followed by a register ID
character

YES

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (P ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting (YES),
without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. The Setpoint value will not be sent unless the setpoint is enabled

Sending Serial Commands and Data

670

Command String Examples:
1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the Setpoint 1 value
String: N17VD350$
2. Node address = 5, Read Input, response time of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
3. Node address = 31, Request a Block Print Output, response time of 2 msec min
String: N31P$

www.redlion.net

Receiving Data From The Meter

Full Field Transmission
Byte

Description

1, 2

2 byte Node Address field [00-99]

(Space)

4-6

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

7-15

9 byte data field; 7 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte for
decimal point

(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

Abbreviated Transmission
Byte

Description

9 byte data field, 7 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one
byte for decimal point
(carriage return)

1-9
11

(line feed)

* (Space)

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register ID,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.

Meter Response Examples:
1. Node address = 17, full field response, Input = 875
17 INP
875
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 1 = -250.5
SP1
-250.5

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 15) is 9
characters long. This field consists of a minus sign (for negative values), a
floating decimal point (if applicable), and five positions for the requested value.
The data within bytes 9 to 15 is right-aligned with leading spaces for any
unfilled positions. When a requested value exceeds the meter’s display limits,
decimal points are transmitted instead of a numeric value.
The end of the response string is terminated with a and . After the
last line of a block print, an extra , and are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.

3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block
print
250

Timing Diagram Figure

1-717-767-6511

671

Communication Format

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Parity Bit
After the data bits, the parity bit is sent. The transmitter sets the parity bit to
a zero or a one, so that the total number of ones contained in the transmission
(including the parity bit) is either even or odd. This bit is used by the receiver
to detect errors that may occur to an odd number of bits in the transmission.
However, a single parity bit cannot detect errors that may occur to an even
number of bits. Given this limitation, the parity bit is often ignored by the
receiving device. The meter ignores the parity bit of incoming data and sets the
parity bit to odd, even or none (mark parity) for outgoing data.

Character Frame Figure

672

www.redlion.net

Press PAR key to enter
Programming Mode.

LD PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

1-717-767-6511

673

MODEL LD - LARGE SERIAL SLAVE DISPLAY
z 2.25" or 4" HIGH RED LED DIGITS
z DISPLAYS UP TO 6 DIGITS OF SERIAL ASCII DATA
z DUAL DISPLAY BUFFER ALLOWS ALTERNATING DISPLAYS
z RS232 OR RS485 SERIAL INTERFACE
z CONNECTS DIRECTLY TO RED LION PRODUCTS WITH SERIAL
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUT
z UNIVERSALLY POWERED
z ALUMINUM NEMA 4X/IP65 CASE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Large Serial Slave Display is a versatile display that accepts serial ASCII
data from a host device and displays the received characters. The displayable
data includes numeric, 7-segment alphabetic and certain punctuation characters.
The 6-digit displays are available in either 2.25" or 4" high red LED digits
with adjustable display intensity. The 2.25" high models are readable up to 130
feet. The 4" high models are readable up to 180 feet. Both versions are
constructed of a NEMA 4X/IP65 enclosure in light weight aluminum.
The Serial Slave has two internal display buffers, allowing two separate
display values or messages to be viewed. The main (primary) display typically
shows dynamic data (count, rate, process, etc.), usually received directly from
another meter. The secondary display typically shows a fixed message or value,
such as a system or machine identifier, or a target production value. The main
and secondary displays can be toggled either manually or automatically at a user
selected toggle speed. Both displays are retained in memory when power is
removed from the unit.
For single meter remote display applications, the Serial Slave can be
connected directly to a Red Lion (or compatible) meter with RS232 or RS485
serial communications. The slave can display the meter value on its main display
without requiring a PC or other serial interface.
Multiple slaves are connected using an RS485 serial bus. If unique meter
addresses are assigned, specific data can be displayed by a single slave on the
bus. When multiple slaves are assigned the same address, common data can be
displayed by multiple units in different locations.
Serial communications parameters are fully programmable, with baud rates
up to 38.4Kbps. Special command characters allow display selection and
display intensity adjustment through the serial input. In addition to the serial
input, a programmable User Input is provided to perform a variety of meter
functions.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to
it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: 6-digit 2.25" (57 mm) or 4" (101 mm) adjustable intensity Red LED
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC POWER: 50 to 250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 26 VA
DC POWER: 21.6 to 250 VDC, 11 W
Isolation: 2300 VRMS for 1 min. to all inputs and outputs
3. SERIAL INPUT:
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Type: Multi-point balanced interface (isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Type: Half duplex (isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38400
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
4. USER INPUT (Programmable Function Input):
Active low logic, internal 7.8 KΩ pull-up resistor to +12V.
Trigger levels: VIL = 1.0 V max; VIH = 2.4 V min; VMAX = 28 VDC
Response time: 10 msec typ; 50 msec debounce (activation & release)
5. MEMORY: Nonvolatile E2PROM retains all programming parameters, main
and secondary displays when power is removed.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

G
PART
NUMBER

X (Length)

Y (Height)

LD2SS6P0 16 (406.4) 4 (101.6)

Z (Center)

12 (304.8)

LD4SS6P0 26 (660.4) 7.875 (200) 22 (558.8)

674

www.redlion.net

6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
Type 4X Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A LD200400
Criterion B LD2006P0
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion A
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
Emissions LD200400
EN 55011
Class B
Emissions LD2006P0
EN 55011
Class A
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.

7. CONNECTIONS:
Internal removable terminal blocks used for power and signal wiring.
Remove end plates with ¼" nut driver.
For LD2 versions power is on the right side and serial wiring is on the left
side. For LD4 versions, all wiring is on the right side of the unit.
Wire Strip Length: 0.4" (10 mm)
Wire Gage: 24-12 AWG copper wire
Torque: 5.3 inch-lbs (0.6 N-m) max
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Storage temperature: -40 to 70 °C
Operating and storage humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6: Operational 5 to 150 Hz, in X, Y, Z
direction for 1.5 hours, 2 g’s (1g relay).
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27: Operational 30 g’s (10g relay), 11 msec in
3 directions.
Altitude: Up to 2,000 meters
9. CONSTRUCTION: Aluminum enclosure, and steel side panels with
textured black polyurethane paint for scratch and corrosion resistance
protection. Sealed front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications.
Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
10. WEIGHT:
LD2SS6P0 - 4.5 lbs (2.04 kg)
LD4SS6P0 - 10.5 lbs (4.76 kg)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PART NUMBER

2.25" High 6-Digit Red LED Serial Slave Display,
RS232/RS485 Serial Communications
4" High 6-Digit Red LED Serial Slave Display,
RS232/RS485 Serial Communications

1.0 INSTALLING

DESCRIPTION

THE

The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed.

INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

THE

LD4SS6P0

METER

INSTALLATION

2.0 WIRING

LD2SS6P0

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
This display is designed to
be wall mounted or
suspended from a ceiling
truss or other suitable
structure capable of
supporting the LDSS.
Caution should be
exercised when hanging
the display to provide for
the safety of personnel. If
hanging the LDSS, run the
suspension cables (or chains)
through the mounting bracket
holes. For wall mounting use #1032 size bolts.

METER

1. The meter should be properly connected to protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the meter and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.

1-717-767-6511

675

3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be ran in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC# FCOR0000)

TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward # 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC# LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom # 1 VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer's instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
7. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC# SNUB0000.

WIRING OVERVIEW
Electrical connections are made via pluggable terminal blocks located inside
the meter. All conductors should conform to the meter's voltage and current
ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes and regulations. It is recommended that the power
supplied to the meter (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the meter, compare the numbers on the label on the back of the
meter case against those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position.
Strip the wire, leaving approximately 0.4" (10 mm) bare lead exposed (stranded
wires should be tinned with solder.) Insert the lead under the correct screw
clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire to verify
tightness.) Each terminal can accept up to one #14 AWG (2.55 mm) wire, two
#18 AWG (1.02 mm), or four #20 AWG (0.61 mm).

LD2SS6P0 Left Side

LD4SS6P0 Right Side
LD2SS6P0 Right Side

2.1 POWER WIRING
The power wiring is made via the 3 position terminal block (TBA) located inside unit (right side).

AC Power
Terminal 1: VAC/DC +
Terminal 2: VAC/DC Terminal 3: Earth Ground

G
2.2 USER INPUT WIRING
Sinking Logic

The User Input is wired to Terminals 1 and 2 of TBB as shown.
Terminal 5: User Input
Terminal 6: Common

676

www.redlion.net

2.3 SERIAL WIRING
The serial connections are made via terminal block TBD located inside the
unit on the left side for the LD2 and on the right side for the LD4.

RS485 Communications

The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the LDSS is limited to 38.4k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that is,
data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.

RS232 Communications

Terminal Block Connection Figure

3.0 REVIEWING THE FRONT PANEL KEYS AND DISPLAY

KEY

DISPLAY MODE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION

PAR

Access Programming Mode

Store selected parameter and index to next parameter

S
SELS

Select display (main or secondary)

Advance through selection list/select digit position in
parameter value

T
RSTT

Reset display(s) per front panel reset
setting

Increment selected digit of parameter value

DISPLAY DESIGNATOR
“ 2 ” - To the far right of the display indicates the secondary display is shown.

If display scroll is enabled, the display will toggle automatically between the main and secondary display at the selected scroll interval.

1-717-767-6511

677

4.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

METER

PROGRAMMING MENU

PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (PAR KEY)

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (PAR KEY)

It is recommended all programming changes be made off line, or before
installation. The meter normally operates in the Display Mode. No parameters
can be programmed in this mode. The Programming Mode is entered by
pressing the PAR key. If it is not accessible, then it is locked by either a security
code or a hardware lock (See Module 2).

MODULE ENTRY (SELS & PAR KEYS)

The Programming Menu is organized into two modules. These modules group
together parameters that are related in function. The display will alternate between
S key is used to select the desired module.
and the present module. The SELS
The displayed module is entered by pressing the PAR key.

MODULE MENU (PAR KEY)
Each module has a separate module menu (which is shown at the start of each
module discussion). The PAR key is pressed to advance to a particular parameter
to be changed, without changing the programming of preceding parameters.
After completing a module, the display will return to
. Programming
may continue by accessing additional modules.

SELECTION / VALUE ENTRY

PROGRAMMING TIPS

FACTORY SETTINGS
Factory Settings may be completely restored in Module 2. This is useful when
encountering programming problems or in the event of corrupted program data.

ALTERNATING SELECTION DISPLAY
In the explanation of the modules, the following dual display with arrows will
appear. This is used to illustrate the display alternating between the parameter
on top and the parameter’s Factory Setting on the bottom. In most cases,
selections and values for the parameter will be listed on the right.

For each parameter, the display alternates between the present parameter and
S and RSTT
T keys are used to
the selections/value for that parameter. The SELS
move through the selections/values for that parameter. Pressing the PAR key,
stores and activates the displayed selection/value. This also advances the meter
to the next parameter.
For numeric values, the value is displayed with one digit flashing (initially the
T key increments the digit by one or the user
right most digit). Pressing the RSTT
T key and the digit will automatically scroll. The SELS
S key
can hold the RSTT
will select the next digit to the left. Pressing the PAR key will enter the value and
move to the next parameter.

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display

Parameter

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

4.1 MODULE 1 - INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

Module 1 is the programming module for the Input Setup Parameters. This
includes the Serial Input setup parameters and the User Input function. Set the
Serial Input parameters to match the settings of the host device.

DATA BIT

«
ª

BAUD RATE

Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length to match that of the host device.

«
ª
Set the baud rate to match that of the host device. Normally, the baud rate is
set to the highest value that all the serial communications equipment is capable
of transmitting and receiving.

678

www.redlion.net

PARITY BIT

USER INPUT FUNCTION

This parameter only appears when the Data Bit parameter is set to 7-bit. Set
the parity bit to match that of the host device. If parity is set to , an additional
stop bit is used to force the frame size to 10 bits.

DISPLAY

User Input disabled.

Momentary Reset
(Edge triggered)

Maintained Reset

Display Hold

Enter the meter (node) address. With a single slave unit, an address is not
required and a value of zero should be used. This is the case with an RS232
connection, where only one Serial Slave is connected to the host.
With multiple Serial Slaves connected on an RS485 bus, a unique address
number must be assigned to each unit in order to send data to a specific slave
on the bus. If multiple slaves are assigned the same address (including zero),
common data can be sent to, and displayed by multiple slave units on the bus.

Display Select
(Edge triggered)
Display Intensity Level
(Edge triggered)

See Programming Mode
Access chart (Module 2).
Momentary reset of the assigned
display(s).
Level active reset of the
assigned display(s).
Freeze the assigned display(s)
as long as the input is active.
Toggle between main and
secondary display (if enabled).
Increase intensity one level for
each activation.

USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT

DATA RECEIVE DELAY TIME

DESCRIPTION

No Function
Program Mode Lock-out

METER ADDRESS

MODE

ª
Upon receiving a terminator character , the Serial Slave disables serial
data reception for the time duration entered in this parameter. Using a delay
allows the Serial Slave to ignore additional characters such as a or second
, which often follow a serial data string. This value is entered in seconds
and hundredths of seconds format, with a 10 msec minimum delay time.
(See "Data Receive Delay Timing" in the Communications section for
additional timing details.)

4.2 MODULE 2 - DISPLAY

AND

Select the display to which the User Input Function applies. The User Input
Assignment only appears if the secondary display is enabled and a selection of
reset or display hold is chosen for the User Input Function.
Assignment choices include the main (primary) and/or secondary display,
or the display which is shown at the moment the User Input is activated (
).
Note: For reset selection, main display resets to zero. Secondary display
resets to all blanks.

FRONT PANEL KEY
PARAMETERS (

)

PARAMETER MENU

SECONDARY DISPLAY ENABLE

DISPLAY SCROLL INTERVAL

«
ª

Select
to enable the secondary display. A “2” on the far right of the display
always appears when the secondary display is shown.

Select the time interval at which the display automatically toggles between
the main and secondary displays. Select
to disable automatic scrolling. This
parameter only appears if the secondary display is enabled.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SELS)

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY RESET ENABLE (RSTT)

ª
Select
to allow the SELS key to toggle between the main and secondary
displays. This parameter only appears if the secondary display is enabled.

ª
T key to reset the main (primary) and/or
This parameter allows the RSTT
secondary display (if enabled), or the display which is currently shown (
).
T key.
Select
to disable the RSTT
Note: Main display resets to zero. Secondary display resets to all blanks.

1-717-767-6511

679

DISPLAY RESET AT POWER-UP

PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE

This parameter allows the Main and/or Secondary display (if enabled) to
automatically reset when power is applied to the unit.

The Security Code determines the user access to Programming mode. This
code can be used independently or along with the Program Mode Lock-out
(
) selection in the User Input Function parameter (Module 1).
Programming a Security Code other than 0, requires this code to be entered
at the
prompt in order to access Programming mode.

DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL

«
ª

USER INPUT USER INPUT SECURITY PROGRAMMING ACCESS
FUNCTION
STATE
CODE
WHEN “PAR” PRESSED

not

______

Enter the desired display intensity level. The display will actively brighten or
dim as the level is changed.

Immediate Access

1-999

With correct code entry
prompt *
at

Programming Locked
No Access

1-999

With correct code entry
prompt *
at

0-999

Immediate Access

Active

LEADING ZERO DISPLAY ENABLE

Not Active

* Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.

ª
Select
to insert blanks in place of any leading zeros received in a serial
data string. This is typical when sending numeric values to the slave. Select
to enable display of any leading zeros in the string. This parameter setting only
applies to the Main display.

LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

«
ª
The
displays

Serial Slave Communications

Data and Command String Formatting

Displayable Characters

The ASCII characters that the Serial Slave can display are as follows:
Numeric: 0 to 9
Alphabetic (7-segment): A, b, C, c, d, E, e, F, G, g, H, h, I , i, J, K, L, l, N, n,
O, o, P, q, r, S, t, U, u, V, v, Y, Z
Non-displayable alphabetic characters will be replaced with a blank if
received. These include M, W and X.
Note: Both uppercase and lowercase ASCII characters are accepted. If a
displayable difference exists, characters will be shown in the case received.
Punctuation: period, comma, and colon (all displayed as decimal point);
minus (dash), blank

Display and Serial Buffer Capacity

The Serial Slave display is right aligned and has the capacity of displaying six
characters. When less than six characters are received, blank spaces are placed
in front of the characters. If more than six characters are received, only the last
six are displayed.
The unit has two internal display buffers, allowing two separate values or
messages to be viewed. The main display is always enabled and viewable. The
secondary display may be enabled or disabled through programming. When
enabled, this display is indicated by a “2” on the far right of the display. The
main and secondary displays can be toggled either manually or automatically at
a user selectable toggle speed. A serial command can also be sent to select which
display is shown. Both displays are retained in memory when power is removed
from the unit.
The Serial Slave has an internal 64 character buffer for received data. If more
than 64 characters are sent, the additional characters are discarded until a string
terminator is received. At that point, the last six characters at the end of
the buffer are displayed.
A carriage return is the only valid string terminator for the Serial Slave.
However, if an <*> or <$> is received, the slave will empty and reset its internal
character buffer without processing the string. These characters are used as valid
command terminators for serial commands sent to other Red Lion meters. Since
these commands are not applicable to the Serial Slave, the slave discards the
command and prepares its character buffer for a new data string.

680

selection returns the slave to the factory default settings. The unit will
and returns to
, with the factory settings loaded.

Data sent to the Serial Slave must be formatted as either main display data,
secondary display data or command strings sent to perform specific display
functions. The format for sending data is shown below:
N xx I d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1
N - Required to address a specific slave unit in a multiple unit loop.
xx - Two-digit meter address. Single digit address requires leading zero.
I - Format identifier character (see below). Omit for main display data.
d6-d1 - The last 6 characters before the will be shown, if displayable.
- Carriage Return (0DH) used as string terminator character.
The format identifier character dictates how the Serial Slave interprets a
data string as follows:
(omit) - No character indicates main display data
# - Indicates secondary display data
@ - Display select command, followed by display identifier character
main <1> or secondary <2> (ex: @1 select main display)
% - Display intensity command, followed by intensity level character
<1> to <5> (ex: %3 set display intensity level to 3)

Downloading Data from a G3 to an LDSS
Communications:
Port: RS232 Comms Raw Serial Port
Port Driver: Raw Serial Port
Programming:
PortPrint(2, "N01" + IntToText(Var1, 10, 6) + "\r");

This program is called from the Global On Tick. It sends "N01" (the address
of the LDSS), followed by the ASCII equivalent of Var1, then a carriage return.

www.redlion.net

Data Receive Delay Timing
Upon receiving a string terminator character , the Serial Slave requires
a delay time to process the received data and prepare for the next string. During
this delay, the meter disables serial data reception.
The Data Receive Delay Time is programmable in Module 1, with a
minimum delay of 10 mSec. By extending this delay, the Serial Slave can ignore
data sent by the host which is not intended for display. This data includes
additional characters such as a or redundant , which might follow a
serial data string. This could also include additional data strings sent as part of
a data block, where only the first string is intended for the Serial Slave display.
In this case, the delay time should be programmed to exceed the total
transmission time for the entire data block. This results in the Serial Slave
displaying the first string of the data block and disabling data reception during
transmission of the additional strings.
The Receive Delay Time must be set to expire at a point where no data is
being sent to the Serial Slave. This prevents the unit from enabling data
reception in the middle of a character or data string, which could result in an
incorrect display when the string is processed.

Timing Diagram for Data Reception

LD SERIAL SLAVE PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

1-717-767-6511

681

MODEL LPAX- 5 DIGIT LARGE PAX DISPLAY FOR ANALOG INPUTS
z LARGE LED DISPLAY READABLE TO 70 FEET
z VARIOUS ANALOG INPUT MODULES;
DC VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
PROCESS SIGNALS
TRUE RMS VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
THERMOCOUPLE OR RTD
STRAIN GAGE/BRIDGE
z ALARMS, ANALOG OUTPUT, AND COMMUNICATION
z CUSTOM UNITS LABEL WITH BACKLIGHT
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS

UL
R

z PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS

US LISTED

z UNIVERSAL AC/DC POWERED MODELS

IND. CONT. EQ.

z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

51EB

z NEMA 4/IP65

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The LPAX Display is a versatile display that can increase productivity by
offering the plant floor or production area a large visual display of their current
status. Whether your measurement is temperature, weight, or flow, the LPAX
can satisfy your requirement. With the use of a units label and backlighting, the
display can be tailored to show the actual engineering unit, which further
enhances the display. This LPAX display accepts various analog inputs through
the use of input modules (MPAX) which allow the unit to adapt to most any
application. The MPAX Modules offer the same features as our highly
successful PAX Series Panel Meters. Additional plug-in option cards can add
alarms, analog output, and communication/bus capabilities, making the LPAX a
truly Intelligent Panel Meter.

Additional specifications, wiring, programming, and information for the
individual MPAX models are contained in the corresponding standard PAX
literature. This PAX literature is shipped with the ordered MPAX model.
1. DISPLAY: 1.5" (38 mm) Red LED
5-Digit: (-19999 to 99999)
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Modules: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 18 VA
DC Modules: 11 to 36 VDC or 24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 14 W
3. INPUT: Accepts analog input modules, see “Selecting your display
components.”
4. ANNUNCIATORS:
LPAX0500: MAX, MIN, TOT, SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4
Optional units label with backlight
5. KEYPAD: Five tactile membrane switches integrated into the front panel
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 1010-1
Recognized to US and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4 Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
EMC specifications determined by the MPAX module.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected
to it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

PANEL CUT-OUT

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

682

www.redlion.net

7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: Determined by the MPAX module
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS:
Max. panel thickness is 0.375" (9.5 mm)
Min. panel thickness for NEMA 4/IP65 sealing is 0.060" (1.57 mm)
9. MODULE INSTALLATION:
24-pin shrouded connector on LPAX engages connector on MPAX module
upon installation. Shroud ensures proper alignment by providing a lead-in for
the module connector.

10. CONNECTIONS: All wiring connections are made to the MPAX module
via high compression cage-clamp terminal blocks. Wiring instructions are
provided with the MPAX module.
CAUTION: DISCONNECT ALL POWER BEFORE
INSTALLING OR REMOVING MODULE
11. CONSTRUCTION: Steel front panel, enclosure, and rear cover with
textured black polyurethane paint for scratch and corrosion resistance
protection. Sealed front panel meets NEMA 4/IP65 specifications for indoor
use when properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
Panel gasket and keps nuts included.
12. WEIGHT: 2.7 lbs (1.2 kg) (less module)

About the MPAX Input Modules
The MPAX Module serves as the input to the LPAX Display. There are several different modules to cover a variety of inputs. The MPAX module provides input
scaling which allows the LPAX to display most any engineering unit. Once the MPAX is inserted into the LPAX, the unit has the same functions and capabilities of
our PAX Series Intelligent Panel Meters. A full set of PAX programming instructions will be included with the MPAX Module.
Note: The MPAX provides the operating power for the LPAX, therefore you must select either the AC or DC MPAX corresponding with your application and available
power.

Selecting Your Display Components
To build a complete display unit, you will need an LPAX and an MPAX Input Module. The LPAX is only a display and will not operate without an MPAX Module.
Please use the following chart to identify the appropriate MPAX Module (including supply power) and LPAX Display that will satisfy your application.
SIGNAL TYPE

MPAX MODULES

INPUT RANGES

85-250 VAC

11 to 36 VDC/ 24 VAC

LPAX DISPLAYS

Universal DC Inputs

DC Voltage 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 300 V
DC Current 200 µA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, 2 Amp
Resistance 100 ohm, 1000 ohm, 10 K ohm

MPAXD000

MPAXD010

LPAX0500

Process Inputs

0-20 mA or 0-10 VDC

MPAXP000

MPAXP010

LPAX0500

Temperature Inputs

Thermocouples-T, E, J, K, R, S, B, N, C, or Custom Scaling
RTD’s-100 ohm Pt (platinum) 385/392, 120 ohm Nickel 672, or
10 ohm Copper 427

MPAXT000

MPAXT010

LPAX0500

Strain Gage/ Load Cell

24 mV or 240 mV

MPAXS000

MPAXS010

LPAX0500

True RMS AC
Voltage/Current

AC Voltage 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 300 V
AC Current 200 uA, 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, 5 Amp

MPAXH000

N/A

LPAX0500

*For detailed Module specifications, see corresponding PAX literature. (i.e. For MPAXD specifications, see the PAXD literature)

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS AND ACCESSORIES
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards

LINEAR DC OUTPUT (PAXCDL)

The MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional plug-in cards.
However, only one card from each function type can be installed at a time. The
function types include Setpoint Alarms (PAXCDS), Communications
(PAXCDC), and Analog Output (PAXCDL). The cards can be installed initially
or at a later date. Each optional plug-in card is shipped with installation and
programming instructions.

Either a 0(4)-20 mA or 0-10 V retransmitted linear DC output is available
from the analog output plug-in card. The programmable output low and high
scaling can be based on the input, max, min, or total display value. Reverse
slope output is possible by reversing the scaling point positions.

COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)

UNITS LABEL (LX)

A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming
the unit via Crimson, a Windows® based program, the RS232 or RS485 Cards
must be used.
PAXCDC1* - RS485 Serial
PAXCDC2* - RS232 Serial
PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet

PAXCDC4* - Modbus
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

*Units available in various connector configurations.

SETPOINT CARDS (PAXCDS)
The MPAX series has four setpoint alarm output plug-in cards. Only one of
these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the outputs can be reversed
in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector

PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card
The LPAX Display has an area on the front panel designed for a custom units
label. The units label is applied directly to the panel in the embossed area. The
units backlight is then turned on via programming.
Available on 5-digit version only. Refer to the LPAX Accessories Bulletin for
a list of available units labels.

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE (CRIMSON)

Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
LPAX meter from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands,
that make it easy to program the LPAX meter. The LPAX program can then be
saved in a PC file for future use. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.

1-717-767-6511

683

1.0 ASSEMBLING THE DISPLAY
CAUTION: The MPAX main circuit board and the option cards
contain static sensitive components. Before handling the module
or the cards, discharge static charges from your body by
touching a grounded bare metal object. Handle the module by
the rear plastic cover only, and the option cards by the board
edges. Dirt, oil or other contaminants that contact the circuit
boards or components can adversely affect circuit operation.

WARNING: Exposed line voltage exists on the MPAX main circuit
board and the option cards. DO NOT apply power to the
module OR load circuits until the module is properly installed
in the LPAX case.
NOTE: All module and option card labels must be installed as
shown for safety purposes.

Prior to installing the LPAX Display, it is recommended that the MPAX
and any option cards be assembled first. This will allow you the
opportunity to insure all the boards are fitted properly into their
connectors.

Installing the Option Cards
If your application requires option
cards, they should be installed into the
MPAX before it is installed into the
LPAX Display. Refer to the
literature enclosed with the option
cards for installation instruction.

Installing the MPAX
To install the MPAX Module,
align the module with the opening
in the LPAX case, as illustrated.
The module must be oriented as
shown, with terminal #1 toward the
top of the LPAX case. Carefully
slide the module into the LPAX case.
The LPAX and MPAX connectors will begin
Figure 1, Installing an MPAX Module and Option Cards
to engage about ¼" from the bottom. At this point,
apply a small amount of pressure to the rear of the
Installing the Labels
MPAX module to fully engage the connection. Be sure the
Each option card and the MPAX are shipped with a connection label. These
module fully snaps into the slots at the rear of the LPAX case. The
labels must be applied to the rear of the LPAX in the positions shown in the
display is ready for installation.
drawing.

Removing The MPAX Module

To remove the MPAX Module from the LPAX Display, first
remove all power and load circuits. Then insert a flat
screwdriver blade (3/16" or 1/4") into the narrow slot
between the LPAX rear cover plate and the
module’s plastic cover as illustrated in Figure
2. Twist the screwdriver in the direction
shown to disengage the internal
connectors
while
firmly
squeezing and pulling back
on the rear finger tabs
(top and bottom).
Carefully slide the
module out of the
LPAX case, keeping it
properly aligned with
the case opening.

Figure 2, Removing an MPAX Module

684

www.redlion.net

2.0 INSTALLING THE DISPLAY
LPAX DISPLAY INSTALLATION
The LPAX display is intended to be mounted into a panel or
enclosure. The display is provided with a gasket to provide a
water-tight seal. The recommended minimum panel thickness
for NEMA 4/IP65 sealing is 0.060" (1.57 mm).
For panel mounting, prepare the panel cut-out to the
dimensions shown. The supplied template may be used to
mark the cut-out and hole locations on the panel. After
the panel cut-out has been deburred, slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the display and onto the
mounting studs. Insert the display into the panel
cut-out as illustrated in Figure 3. Install six # 10-32
keps nuts (supplied) and tighten evenly for uniform
gasket compression. Do not over-tighten the nuts.
By using additional mounting accessories, the
LPAX can be surface-wall mounted, suspended, or
bottom mounted. Separate installation instructions
are provided with the mounting accessories.

Environment And Cleaning
The display should be installed in a location that
does not exceed the maximum operating temperature
and provides good air circulation. Placing the system
near devices that generate excessive heat should be
avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth
and neutral soap product. Do NOT use solvents.
Continuous exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate
the aging process of the bezel.

Figure 3, Installing The LPAX Into A Panel

3.0 WIRING AND PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAY
Once assembled, the LPAX and MPAX have all the same functions and
capabilities of our PAX Series Intelligent Panel Meters. Therefore, you will find
the appropriate PAX information packed with the MPAX Module. Simply
follow the instructions to wire and program the display for your application.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For technical assistance, contact technical support.

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Display

LPAX

Analog
Input
Module

MPAX

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards
PAXCDC

PAXCDL
LX*
SFCRD**
Accessories

ENC9
SHR
MB

DESCRIPTION

5-Digit, Large Display for Analog MPAX Modules
Universal DC Input Module, AC Powered
Universal DC Input Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Process Input Module, AC Powered
Process Input Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Thermocouple and RTD Module, AC Powered
Thermocouple and RTD Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
AC True RMS Voltage and Current Module, AC Powered
Strain Gage Input Module, AC Powered
Strain Gage Input Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card
Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card
Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card
Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card
RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block
Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block
Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector
DeviceNet Communications Card
Modbus Communications Card
Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
Profibus-DP Communications Card
Analog Output Card
Custom Units Label
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP
NEMA 4 Enclosure for LPAX
Shroud for LPAX
Mounting Bracket for LPAX

PART NUMBERS

LPAX0500
MPAXD000
MPAXD010
MPAXP000
MPAXP010
MPAXT000
MPAXT010
MPAXH000
MPAXS000
MPAXS010
PAXCDS10
PAXCDS20
PAXCDS30
PAXCDS40
PAXCDC10
PAXCDC1C
PAXCDC20
PAXCDC2C
PAXCDC30
PAXCDC40
PAXCDC4C
PAXCDC50
PAXCDL10
Listed Separately
SFCRD200
ENC90000
SHRLPAX0
MBLPAX00

* See the LPAX Accessory Bulletin or our web site for available units labels.
** Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/

1-717-767-6511

685

MODEL LPAX- 6 DIGIT LARGE PAX DISPLAY FOR DIGITAL INPUTS
z LARGE LED DISPLAY READABLE TO 70 FEET
z VARIOUS DIGITAL INPUT MODULES;
COUNT AND RATE INPUT
CLOCK/TIMER
SERIAL SLAVE
z ALARMS, ANALOG OUTPUT, AND COMMUNICATION
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS
z PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS
z UNIVERSAL AC/DC POWERED MODELS

UL
R

z PC SOFTWARE FOR METER CONFIGURATION
z NEMA 4/IP65

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The LPAX Display is a versatile display that can increase productivity by
offering the plant floor or production area a large visual display of their current
status. Whether your measurement is rate, count, or time, the LPAX can satisfy
your requirement. These LPAX displays accept various digital inputs through
the use of input modules (MPAX) which allow the unit to adapt to most any
application. The MPAX Modules offer the same features as our highly
successful PAX Series Panel Meters. Additional plug-in option cards can add
alarms, analog output, and communication/bus capabilities, making the LPAX a
truly Intelligent Panel Meter.

Additional specifications, wiring, programming, and information for the
individual MPAX models are contained in the corresponding standard PAX
literature. This PAX literature is shipped with the ordered MPAX model.
1. DISPLAY: 1.5" (38 mm) Red LED
6-Digit (LPAX0600): (-99999 to 999999)
6-Digit (LPAXCK00): (0 to 999999)
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Modules: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 18 VA
DC Modules: 11 to 36 VDC or 24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 14 W
3. INPUT: Accepts digital input modules, see “Selecting Your Display
Components and Option Cards.”
4. ANNUNCIATORS:
LPAX0600: A, B, C, SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4
LPAXCK00: TMR, CNT, DAT, SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4
5. KEYPAD: Five tactile membrane switches integrated into the front panel
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA 22.2 No. 1010-1
Recognized to US and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S and Canadian safety standards
Type 4 Enclosure rating (Face Only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8843/UL
CB Scheme Test Report # 04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
EMC specifications determined by the MPAX module.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected
to it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

PANEL CUT-OUT

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

686

www.redlion.net

About the MPAX Input Modules
The MPAX Module serves as the input to the LPAX Display. There are several different modules to cover a variety of inputs. The MPAX module provides input
scaling which allows the LPAX to display most any engineering unit. Once the MPAX is inserted into the LPAX, the unit has the same functions and capabilities of
our PAX Series Intelligent Panel Meters. A full set of PAX programming instructions will be included with the MPAX module.
Note: The MPAX provides the operating power for the LPAX, therefore you must select either the AC or DC MPAX corresponding with your application and available
power.

Selecting Your Display Components and Option Cards
To build a complete display unit, you will need an LPAX and an MPAX Input Module. The LPAX is only a display and will not operate without an MPAX module.
Please use the following chart to identify the appropriate MPAX module (including supply power) and LPAX Display that will satisfy your application.
MPAX MODULES*
SIGNAL TYPE
85-250 VAC

11 to 36 VDC / 24 VAC

LPAX
DISPLAYS

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARD COMPATABILITY
SETPOINT

COMMS

ANALOG

REAL-TIME
CLOCK

Count/Rate/Serial Slave

MPAXI000

MPAXI010

LPAX0600

YES

Count

MPAXC000

MPAXC010

LPAX0600

YES

Rate

MPAXR000

MPAXR010

LPAX0600

YES

Clock/Timer

MPAXCK00

MPAXCK10

LPAXCK00**

YES

Timer

MPAXTM00

MPAXTM10

LPAXCK00**

YES

*For detailed module and plug-in card specifications, see corresponding PAX literature. (i.e. For MPAXI specifications, see the PAXI literature)
**The LPAXCK will only operate with the Clock/Timer MPAX input module.

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS AND ACCESSORIES
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards
The MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional plug-in cards.
However, only one card from each function type can be installed at a time. The
function types include Setpoint Alarms (PAXCDS), Communications
(PAXCDC), and Analog Output (PAXCDL). The cards can be installed initially
or at a later date. Each optional plug-in card is shipped with installation and
programming instructions.

COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming
the unit via Crimson (for MPAXI) or SFPAX (for MPAXCK or MPAXTM), the
RS232 or RS485 Cards must be used.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal)
PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (Connector)

PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC40 - Modbus (Terminal)
PAXCDC4C - Modbus (Connector)
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

SETPOINT CARDS (PAXCDS)
The MPAX series has four setpoint alarm output plug-in cards. Only one of
these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the outputs can be reversed
in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
Dual relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
Quad relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector

LINEAR DC OUTPUT (PAXCDL)

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
CRIMSON - MPAXI Only
Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
LPAX meter from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands,
that make it easy to program the LPAX meter. The LPAX program can then be
saved in a PC file for future use. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.
SFPAX - MPAXCK and MPAXTM Only
The SFPAX is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
LPAX meter from a PC. Using the SFPAX makes it easier to program the LPAX
meter and allows saving the PAX program in a PC file for future use. On-line
help is available within the software. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.

1-717-767-6511

687

Removing The MPAX Module

To remove the MPAX Module from the LPAX Display, first
remove all power and load circuits. Then insert a flat
screwdriver blade (3/16" or 1/4") into the narrow slot
between the LPAX rear cover plate and the
module’s plastic cover as illustrated in
Figure 2. Twist the screwdriver in the
direction shown to disengage the
internal connectors while
firmly squeezing and
pulling back on the
rear finger tabs (top
and
bottom).
Carefully slide the
module out of the
LPAX case, keeping it
properly aligned with
the case opening.

Figure 2, Removing an MPAX Module

688

www.redlion.net

2.0 INSTALLING THE DISPLAY
LPAX DISPLAY INSTALLATION
The LPAX display is intended to be mounted into a panel or
enclosure. The display is provided with a gasket to provide a watertight seal. The recommended minimum panel thickness for
NEMA 4/IP65 sealing is 0.060" (1.57 mm).
For panel mounting, prepare the panel cut-out to the
dimensions shown. The supplied template may be used to
mark the cut-out and hole locations on the panel. After
the panel cut-out has been deburred, slide the panel
gasket over the rear of the display and onto the
mounting studs. Insert the display into the panel cutout as illustrated in Figure 3. Install six # 10-32 keps
nuts (supplied) and tighten evenly for uniform
gasket compression. Do not over-tighten the nuts.
By using additional mounting accessories, the
LPAX can be surface-wall mounted, suspended, or
bottom mounted. Separate installation instructions are
provided with the mounting accessories.

Environment And Cleaning
The display should be installed in a location that does
not exceed the maximum operating temperature and
provides good air circulation. Placing the system near
devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and
neutral soap product. Do NOT use solvents. Continuous
exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging process of the bezel.

Figure 3, Installing The LPAX Into A Panel

TROUBLESHOOTING
For technical assistance, contact technical support.

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Display

LPAX

Digital
Input
Module

MPAX

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards

PAXCDC*

PAXCDL*
PAXRTC*
SFCRD**
Accessories

SFPAX**
ENC9
SHR
MB

DESCRIPTION

6-Digit Display for Digital MPAX Modules
6-Digit Display for MPAXCK (Clock/Timer) and MPAXTM Only
Count/Rate Indicator Module, AC Powered
Count/Rate Indicator Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Count Indicator Module, AC Powered
Count Indicator Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Rate Indicator Module, AC Powered
Rate Indicator Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Clock/Timer Module, AC Powered
Clock/Timer Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Timer Module, AC Powered
Timer Module, DC/24 VAC Powered
Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card
Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card
Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card
Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card
RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block
Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block
Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector
DeviceNet Communications Card
Modbus Communications Card
Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector
Profibus-DP Communications Card
Analog Output Card
Real Time Clock Card for MPAXCK (Clock/Timer) Only
Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP (for MPAXI)
PC Configuration Software for Windows 95/98 on 3.5" disk (for MPAXCK and MPAXTM)
NEMA 4 Enclosure for LPAX
Shroud for LPAX
Mounting Bracket for LPAX

PART NUMBERS

LPAX0600
LPAXCK00
MPAXI000
MPAXI010
MPAXC000
MPAXC010
MPAXR000
MPAXR010
MPAXCK00
MPAXCK10
MPAXTM00
MPAXTM10
PAXCDS10
PAXCDS20
PAXCDS30
PAXCDS40
PAXCDC10
PAXCDC1C
PAXCDC20
PAXCDC2C
PAXCDC30
PAXCDC40
PAXCDC4C
PAXCDC50
PAXCDL10
PAXRTC00
SFCRD200
SFPAX
ENC90000
SHRLPAX0
MBLPAX00

*Refer to “Selecting Your Display Components and Option Cards.”
**Available as a FREE download from the Red Lion website. www.redlion.net

1-717-767-6511

689

MODEL LPAXDA- 5 DIGIT LARGE PAX DISPLAY FOR DUAL ANALOG INPUTS

US LISTED

LARGE LED DISPLAY READABLE TO 70 FEET

DUAL PROCESS SIGNAL INPUT MODULE

ALARMS, ANALOG OUTPUT, AND COMMUNICATION

CUSTOM UNITS LABEL WITH BACKLIGHT

PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS

UNIVERSAL AC/DC POWERED MODELS

CRIMSON SOFTWARE FOR METER CONFIGURATION

NEMA 4/IP65

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The LPAXDA Display is a versatile display that can increase productivity by
offering the plant floor or production area a large visual display of their current
status. With the use of a units label and backlighting, the display can be tailored
to show the actual engineering unit, which further enhances the display. This
LPAXDA display accepts various analog inputs through the use of input
modules (MPAXDP) which allow the unit to adapt to most any application. The
MPAXDP Modules offer the same features as our highly successful PAXDP
Series Panel Meters. Additional plug-in option cards can add alarms, analog
output, and communication/bus capabilities, making the LPAXDA a truly
Intelligent Panel Meter.

Additional specifications, wiring, programming, and information for the
individual MPAX models are contained in the corresponding standard PAX
literature. This PAX literature is shipped with the ordered MPAX model.
1. DISPLAY: 1.5" (38 mm) Red LED
5-Digit: (-19999 to 99999)
2. POWER REQUIREMENTS:
AC Modules: 85 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 21 VA
DC Modules: 18 to 36 VDC, 13 W or 24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 16 VA
3. INPUT: Accepts analog input modules, see “Selecting your display
components.”
4. ANNUNCIATORS:
LPAXDA00: A, B, C, SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4
Optional units label with backlight
5. KEYPAD: Five tactile membrane switches integrated into the front panel
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL3101-1, CSA 22.2 No. 1010-1
Recognized to US and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File # E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4 Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #UL/8843/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
EMC specifications determined by the MPAX module.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected
to it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

PANEL CUT-OUT

690

www.redlion.net

About the MPAX Input Modules
The MPAX Module serves as the input to the LPAX Display. The MPAX module provides input scaling which allows the LPAX to display most any engineering
unit. Once the MPAX is inserted into the LPAX, the unit has the same functions and capabilities of our PAX Series Intelligent Panel Meters. A full set of PAX
programming instructions will be included with the MPAX Module.
Note: The MPAX provides the operating power for the LPAX, therefore you must select either the AC or DC MPAX corresponding with your application and available
power.

Selecting Your Display Components
To build a complete display unit, you will need an LPAXDP and an MPAXDP Input Module. The LPAX is only a display and will not operate without an MPAX
Module. Please use the following chart to identify the appropriate MPAX Module (including supply power) and LPAX Display that will satisfy your application.
SIGNAL TYPE

Dual Process Inputs

MPAX MODULES

INPUT RANGES

0-20 mA or 0-10 VDC

85-250 VAC

11 to 36 VDC/ 24 VAC

MPAXDP00

MPAXDP10

LPAX DISPLAY

LPAXDA00

*For detailed Module specifications, see corresponding PAX literature. (i.e. For MPAXDP specifications, see the PAXDP literature)

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS AND ACCESSORIES
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards

LINEAR DC OUTPUT (PAXCDL)

COMMUNICATION CARDS (PAXCDC)

UNITS LABEL (LX)

PAXCDC4* - Modbus
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

*Units available in various connector configurations.

PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card
The LPAX Display has an area on the front panel designed for a custom units
label. The units label is applied directly to the panel in the embossed area. The
units backlight is then turned on via programming.
Refer to the LPAX Accessories Bulletin for a list of available units labels.

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

Crimson 2 (SFCRD2) is a Windows® based program for configuring and
updating the firmware of the MPAXDP meter from a PC. Using Crimson 2
makes programming the MPAXDP meter easier and allows the user to save the
MPAXDP database in a PC file for future use. Crimson is available as a free
download from Red Lion’s website, or it can be purchased on CD.
The first time Crimson 2 is run from the File menu, select “New” to display
a dialog and select the MPAXDP. The screen will display icons that represent
the various programming sections of the MPAXDP. Double-click on an icon to
configure the programming parameters pertaining to the selection. Tool Tip help
is available for each of the program parameters. A PAX serial plug-in card is
required to program the meter using the software.

1-717-767-6511

691

Removing The MPAX Module

Figure 2, Removing an MPAX Module

692

www.redlion.net

Figure 3, Installing The LPAX Into A Panel

TROUBLESHOOTING
For technical assistance, contact technical support.

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Display

LPAXDA

Analog
Input Module

MPAXDP

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards
PAXCDC

PAXCDL
LX
SFCRD2
Accessories

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

5-Digit, Large Display for Analog MPAXDP Modules

LPAXDA00

Dual Process Input Module, AC Powered

MPAXDP00

Dual Process Input Module, DC/24 VAC Powered

MPAXDP10

Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS10

Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

DeviceNet Communications Card

PAXCDC30

Modbus Communications Card

PAXCDC40

Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC4C

Profibus-DP Communications Card

PAXCDC50

Analog Output Card

PAXCDL10

Custom Units Label *

Listed Separately

PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP

SFCRD200

ENC9

NEMA 4 Enclosure for LPAX

ENC90000

SHR

Shroud for LPAX

SHRLPAX0

Mounting Bracket for LPAX

MBLPAX00

* See the LPAX Accessory Bulletin or our web site for available units labels.

1-717-767-6511

693

MODEL EPAX- 5 DIGIT EXTRA LARGE PAX DISPLAY FOR ANALOG INPUTS
z LARGE LED DISPLAY READABLE TO 180 FEET
z VARIOUS ANALOG INPUT MODULES;
DC VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
PROCESS SIGNALS
TRUE RMS VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
THERMOCOUPLE OR RTD
STRAIN GAGE/BRIDGE
z ALARMS, ANALOG OUTPUT, AND COMMUNICATION

UL
R

z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS
z UNIVERSAL AC POWERED (85 to 250 VAC)

US LISTED

z CRIMSON PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

z NEMA 4X/IP65

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The EPAX is a versatile display that can increase productivity by offering the
plant floor or production area a large visual display of their current status.
Whether your measurement is voltage, current, process, temperature, or strain
gage, the EPAX can satisfy your requirement. The EPAX accepts various analog
inputs through the use of input modules (MPAX) which allow the unit to adapt
to most any application. The MPAX Modules offer the same features as our
highly successful PAX Series Panel Meters. Additional plug-in option cards can
add alarms, analog output, and communication/bus capabilities, making the
EPAX a truly Intelligent Panel Meter.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected
to it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

TOP
MIDDLE
BOTTOM

Setpoint Indication: Four vertical dots on the right side of the unit identify
the setpoint “ON” condition, with SP 1 being the top position through SP
4 at the bottom.
5. EPAX Programming: The unit is a large display, designed to be remotely
mounted. Therefore, the unit does not have a programming keypad. Unit
programming should be accomplished by one of the following methods:
Rear Terminal Block: External switches can be wired via the terminal block
to allow unit programming. A minimum of 3 switches would be required.
Optional Programming Remote (EPAXPGM0): This option provides a 10
foot interconnecting cable and programming box. The Programming
Remote contains buttons similar to the PAX, allowing easy programming
of the EPAX display.
Optional Serial Programming: Like all PAX units, you can purchase an RS232
or RS485 Comms Card and program the unit via Crimson, a Windows®
based software program.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

694

Maximum
Minimum
Total

www.redlion.net

9. MODULE INSTALLATION:
24-pin shrouded connector on EPAX engages connector on MPAX module
upon installation. Shroud ensures proper alignment by providing a lead-in for
the module connector.
10. CONNECTIONS: Wiring connections are made to the EPAX terminal
block and MPAX module via high compression cage-clamp terminal blocks.
MPAX Module Wiring: Instructions are provided in the corresponding PAX
Bulletin.
EPAX Terminal Block Wiring:
Wire Strip Length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire Gage: 30-12 AWG copper wire
Maximum Torque: 5-7 inch-lbs (0.58-0.81 N-m)

6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843A/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
EMC specifications determined by the MPAX module.
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: Determined by the MPAX module
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS:
Max. panel thickness is 0.375" (9.5 mm)
Min. panel thickness for NEMA 4/IP65 sealing is 0.060" (1.52 mm)

CAUTION: DISCONNECT ALL POWER BEFORE
INSTALLING OR REMOVING MODULE
11. CONSTRUCTION: Aluminum front panel, enclosure, and rear cover with
textured black polyurethane paint for scratch and corrosion resistance
protection. Sealed front panel meets NEMA 4X/IP65 specifications for
indoor use when properly installed. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree
2. Panel gasket and keps nuts included.
12. WEIGHT: 5 lbs (2.25 kg) (less module)

About the MPAX Input Modules
The MPAX Module serves as the input to the EPAX Display. There are several different modules to cover a variety of inputs. The MPAX module provides input
scaling which allows the EPAX to display most any engineering unit. Once the MPAX is inserted into the EPAX, the unit has the same functions and capabilities of
our PAX Series Intelligent Panel Meters. A full set of PAX programming instructions will be included with the MPAX module.

Selecting Your Display Components and Option Cards
To build a complete display unit, you will need an EPAX and an MPAX Input Module. The EPAX is only a display and will not operate without an MPAX module.
Please use the following chart to identify the appropriate MPAX module and EPAX Display that will satisfy your application.
SIGNAL TYPE

MPAX MODULES*
85-250 VAC

EPAX
DISPLAYS

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARD
COMPATABILITY
SETPOINT

COMMS

ANALOG

Universal DC Inputs

MPAXD000

EPAX0500

YES

Process Inputs

MPAXP000

EPAX0500

YES

Temperature Inputs

MPAXT000

EPAX0500

YES

Strain Gage/Loadcell

MPAXS000

EPAX0500

YES

True RMS AC Voltage/Current

MPAXH000

EPAX0500

YES

Dual Process Inputs

MPAXDP00

EPAX0500

YES

* For detailed module and plug-in card specifications,
see corresponding PAX literature. (i.e. For MPAXD
specifications, see the PAXD literature)

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS AND ACCESSORIES
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards
The PAX and MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional
plug-in cards. The details for each plug-in card can be reviewed in the
specification section of the PAX Bulletin. Only one card from each function type
can be installed at one time. The function types include Setpoint Alarms
(PAXCDS), Communications (PAXCDC), and Analog Output (PAXCDL). The
plug-in cards can be installed initially or at a later date.

SETPOINT ALARMS PLUG-IN CARDS (PAXCDS)
The PAX and MPAX series has 4 available setpoint alarm output plug-in
cards. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. (Logic state of the
outputs can be reversed in the programming.) These plug-in cards include:
PAXCDS10 - Dual Relay, FORM-C, Normally open & closed
PAXCDS20 - Quad Relay, FORM-A, Normally open only
PAXCDS30 - Isolated quad sinking NPN open collector
PAXCDS40 - Isolated quad sourcing PNP open collector

ANALOG OUTPUT PLUG-IN CARD (PAXCDL)

COMMUNICATION PLUG-IN CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming
the unit via Crimson, the RS232 or RS485 Cards must be used.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal) PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal) PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC40 - Modbus (Terminal)
PAXCDC4C - Modbus (Connector)
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
EPAX meter from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands,
that make it easy to program the EPAX meter. The EPAX program can then be
saved in a PC file for future use. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.

Either a 0(4)-20 mA or 0-10 V retransmitted linear DC output is available
from the analog output plug-in card. The programmable output low and high
scaling can be based on various display values. Reverse slopes output is possible
by reversing the scaling point positions.
PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card

1-717-767-6511

695

WARNING: Exposed line voltage exists on the MPAX main circuit
board and the option cards. DO NOT apply power to the
module OR load circuits until the module is properly installed
in the EPAX case.
NOTE: All module and option card labels must be installed as
shown for safety purposes.

Prior to installing the EPAX Display, it is recommended that
the MPAX and any option cards be assembled first. This will
allow you the opportunity to insure all the boards are fitted
properly into their connectors.

Installing the Option Cards
If your application requires option cards, they should be
installed into the MPAX before it is installed into the EPAX
Display. Refer to the literature enclosed with the option cards for
installation instruction.

Installing the MPAX
Remove the MPAX case (plastic) from the rear of the
EPAX by removing the two screws and pulling off the metal
holding bracket. Install the MPAX into plastic case by
aligning the front connector of the MPAX with the hole in
the front of the plastic case. The module must be oriented
as shown with terminal #1 toward the top of the EPAX
case. Next, insert the MPAX case into the EPAX by lightly
pushing the connector of the MPAX into the connector of
the EPAX PC board. Place holding bracket over the plastic
case and install the two screws.

Installing the Labels
Each option card and the MPAX are shipped with a connection
label. These labels must be applied to the rear of the EPAX in the
positions shown in the drawing.

Figure 1, Installing an MPAX Module and Option Cards

Removing The MPAX Module
To remove the MPAX Module from the EPAX Display, first remove
all power and load circuits. Then insert a flat screwdriver blade
(3/16" or 1/4") into the narrow slot between the EPAX rear cover
plate and the module’s plastic cover as illustrated in
Figure 2. Twist the screwdriver in the direction
shown to disengage the internal connectors
while firmly squeezing and pulling back
on the rear finger tabs (top and
bottom). Carefully slide the
module out of the EPAX
case, keeping it
properly
aligned with
the
case
opening.

Figure 2, Removing an MPAX Module

696

www.redlion.net

2.0 INSTALLING THE DISPLAY
EPAX DISPLAY INSTALLATION
The EPAX display is intended to be mounted
into a panel or enclosure. The display is provided
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
with a gasket to provide a water-tight seal. The
recommended minimum panel thickness for
NEMA 4/IP65 sealing is 0.060" (1.57 mm).
For panel mounting, prepare the panel
cut-out to the dimensions shown in
Figure 3. The supplied template may be
used to mark the cut-out and hole
locations on the panel. After the panel
cut-out has been deburred, slide the
panel gasket over the rear of the display
and onto the mounting studs. Insert the
display into the panel cut-out as
illustrated in Figure 4. Install 14 # 10-32
keps nuts (supplied) and tighten evenly
for uniform gasket compression. Do not
over-tighten the nuts.
By using additional mounting accessories,
Figure 3, Panel Cut-out for the EPAX
the EPAX can be surface-wall mounted,
suspended, or bottom mounted. Separate installation
instructions are provided with the mounting accessories.

Environment And Cleaning
The display should be installed in a location that does not exceed
the maximum operating temperature and provides good air
circulation. Placing the system near devices that generate
excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and
neutral soap product. Do NOT use solvents. Continuous
exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging
process of the bezel.

Figure 4, Installing The EPAX Into A Panel

1-717-767-6511

697

3.0 WIRING AND PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAY
Once assembled, the EPAX and MPAX have all the
same functions and capabilities of our PAX Series
Intelligent Panel Meters. Therefore, you will find the
appropriate PAX information packed with the MPAX
Module. Simply follow the instructions to wire and
program the display for your application.

Note: Both the EPAX and the MPAX module
require power. It is recommended to connect the
primary AC power to the EPAX terminal block, then
jumper to the MPAX module.

EPAX PROGRAMMING
The unit is a large display, designed to be remotely mounted. Therefore, the unit
does not have a programming keypad. Unit programming must be accomplished by
one of the following three methods:

Optional Programming Remote (EPAXPGM0)
This optional programming remote
plugs into the EPAX through an
RJ12 connector and a 10 foot cable.
The buttons on the programming box
function the same as the PAX unit.
Simply program the EPAX exactly
as the PAX instructions indicate. The
programming box can be left
connected to the EPAX for future
programming changes or can be
disconnected and used to program
additional EPAX units.

Rear Terminal Block
External normally open switches can be wired via the terminal block to allow
unit programming. A minimum of 3 switches would be required. Each
external switch must be wired between the key and the common terminal.

EPAX TERMINAL BLOCK

RJ12 CONNECTOR ON BOTTOM OF UNIT

G
Optional Serial Programming
Like all PAX units, you can purchase an RS232 or RS485 Communications
Card and program the unit via Crimson, a Windows® based software program.

698

www.redlion.net

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Display

EPAX

Analog
Input
Module

Plug-In
Cards

MPAX

PAXCDS

PAXCDC*

PAXCDL*
PGM
SFCRD**
Accessories

ENC12
SHR
EN/SH

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

5-Digit Extra Large Display for Analog MPAX Modules

EPAX0500

Universal DC Input Module, AC Powered

MPAXD000

Dual Process Input Module, AC Powered

MPAXDP00

Process Input Module, AC Powered

MPAXP000

Thermocouple and RTD Module, AC Powered

MPAXT000

AC True RMS Voltage and Current Module, AC Powered

MPAXH000

Strain Gage/Bridge Input Module, AC Powered

MPAXS000

Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS10

Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

DeviceNet Communications Card (Terminal Block)

PAXCDC30

Modbus Communications Card

PAXCDC40

Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC4C

Profibus-DP Communications Card

PAXCDC50

Analog Output Card

PAXCDL10

Programming Remote for EPAX with 10 foot cable

EPAXPGM0

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP

SFCRD200

NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure for EPAX

ENC12000

Shroud for EPAX

SHREPAX0

EPAX NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure and Shroud

EPAXENSH

*Refer to “Selecting Your Display Components and Option Cards.”
**Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/

TROUBLESHOOTING
For technical assistance, contact technical support.

1-717-767-6511

699

MODEL EPAX- 6 DIGIT EXTRA LARGE PAX DISPLAY FOR DIGITAL INPUTS
z LARGE LED DISPLAY READABLE TO 180 FEET
z VARIOUS DIGITAL INPUT MODULES;
COUNT AND RATE INPUT
CLOCK/TIMER
SERIAL SLAVE
z ALARMS, ANALOG OUTPUT, AND COMMUNICATION
z PROGRAMMABLE USER INPUTS
z UNIVERSAL AC POWERED (85 to 250 VAC)

UL
R

z PC SOFTWARE FOR METER CONFIGURATION

US LISTED

z NEMA 4X/IP65

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The EPAX Display is a versatile display that can increase productivity by
offering the plant floor or production area a large visual display of their current
status. Whether your measurement is rate, count, or time, the EPAX can satisfy
your requirement. The EPAX displays accept various digital inputs through the
use of input modules (MPAX) which allow the unit to adapt to most any
application. The MPAX Modules offer the same features as our highly
successful PAX Series Panel Meters. Additional plug-in option cards can add
alarms, analog output, and communication/bus capabilities, making the EPAX a
truly Intelligent Panel Meter.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in this and
corresponding literature, or on equipment, must be observed to ensure personal
safety and to prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected
to it. If equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
The protective conductor terminal is bonded to conductive
parts of the equipment for safety purposes and must be
connected to an external protective earthing system.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

TOP
MIDDLE
BOTTOM

CLOCK

Display A
Display B
Display C

Timer
Count
Date

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

700

COUNT/RATE

www.redlion.net

6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL61010A-1, CSA C22.2
No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL Listed, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Type 4X Indoor Enclosure rating (Face only), UL50
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/8843/UL
CB Scheme Test Report #04ME11209-20041018
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
IP65 Enclosure rating (Face only), IEC 529
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
EMC specifications determined by the MPAX module.
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: Determined by the MPAX module
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 60°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 85% max. RH (non-condensing)
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS:
Max. panel thickness is 0.375" (9.5 mm)
Min. panel thickness for NEMA 4/IP65 sealing is 0.060" (1.52 mm)

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARD COMPATABILITY

85-250 VAC

EPAX
DISPLAYS

SETPOINT

COMMS

ANALOG

REAL-TIME
CLOCK

Count/Rate/Serial Slave

MPAXI000

EPAX0600

YES

Count

MPAXC000

EPAX0600

YES

Rate

MPAXR000

EPAX0600

YES

Real-Time Clock/Timer

MPAXCK00

EPAX0600

YES

Timer

MPAXTM00

EPAX0600

YES

SIGNAL TYPE

* For detailed module and plug-in card specifications,
see corresponding PAX literature. (i.e. For MPAXI
specifications, see the PAXI literature)

OPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS AND ACCESSORIES
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in cards.

Adding Option Cards
The PAX and MPAX series meters can be fitted with up to three optional plugin cards. The details for each plug-in card can be reviewed in the specification
section of the PAX Bulletin. Only one card from each function type can be
installed at one time. The function types include Setpoint Alarms (PAXCDS),
Communications (PAXCDC), and Analog Output (PAXCDL). The plug-in cards
can be installed initially or at a later date.

COMMUNICATION PLUG-IN CARDS (PAXCDC)
A variety of communication protocols are available for the PAX and MPAX
series. Only one of these cards can be installed at a time. When programming the
unit via Crimson (for MPAXI000) or SFPAX (for MPAXCK00 or MPAXTM00),
the RS232 or RS485 Cards must be used.
PAXCDC10 - RS485 Serial (Terminal) PAXCDC1C - RS485 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC20 - RS232 Serial (Terminal) PAXCDC2C - RS232 Serial (Connector)
PAXCDC30 - DeviceNet
PAXCDC40 - Modbus (Terminal)
PAXCDC4C - Modbus (Connector)
PAXCDC50 - Profibus-DP

PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

ANALOG OUTPUT PLUG-IN CARD (PAXCDL)
Either a 0(4)-20 mA or 0-10 V retransmitted linear DC output is available
from the analog output plug-in card. The programmable output low and high
scaling can be based on various display values. Reverse slopes output is possible
by reversing the scaling point positions.

CRIMSON - MPAXI000 Only
Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
EPAX meter from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands,
that make it easy to program the EPAX meter. The EPAX program can then be
saved in a PC file for future use. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.
SFPAX - MPAXCK00 and MPAXTM00 Only
The SFPAX is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
EPAX meter from a PC. Using the SFPAX makes it easier to program the EPAX
meter and allows saving the PAX program in a PC file for future use. On-line
help is available within the software. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.

PAXCDL10 - Retransmitted Analog Output Card

1-717-767-6511

701

WARNING: Exposed line voltage exists on the MPAX main circuit
board and the option cards. DO NOT apply power to the
module OR load circuits until the module is properly installed
in the EPAX case.
NOTE: All module and option card labels must be installed as
shown for safety purposes.

Prior to installing the EPAX Display, it is recommended that the
MPAX and any option cards be assembled first. This will
allow you the opportunity to insure all the boards are fitted
properly into their connectors.

Installing the MPAX
Remove the MPAX case (plastic) from the rear of the
EPAX by removing the two screws and pulling off the
metal holding bracket. Install the MPAX into plastic case
by aligning the front connector of the MPAX with the hole
in the front of the plastic case. The module must be oriented
as shown with terminal #1 toward the top of the EPAX
case. Next, insert the MPAX case into the EPAX by lightly
pushing the connector of the MPAX into the connector of
the EPAX PC board. Place holding bracket over the plastic
case and install the two screws.

Installing the Labels
Each option card and the MPAX are shipped with a
connection label. These labels must be applied to the rear of the
EPAX in the positions shown in the drawing.
Figure 1, Installing an MPAX Module and Option Cards

Figure 2, Removing an MPAX Module

702

www.redlion.net

Environment And Cleaning
The display should be installed in a location that does not exceed
the maximum operating temperature and provides good air
circulation. Placing the system near devices that generate
excessive heat should be avoided.
The bezel should be cleaned only with a soft cloth and
neutral soap product. Do NOT use solvents. Continuous
exposure to direct sunlight may accelerate the aging
process of the bezel.

Figure 4, Installing The EPAX Into A Panel

1-717-767-6511

703

3.0 WIRING AND PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAY
Once assembled, the EPAX and MPAX have all the same functions and
capabilities of our PAX Series Intelligent Panel Meters. Therefore, you
will find the appropriate PAX information packed with the MPAX
Module. Simply follow the instructions to wire and program the display
for your application.

Note: Both the EPAX and the MPAX module require power. It is
recommended to connect the primary AC power to the EPAX terminal
block, then jumper to the MPAX module.

EPAX PROGRAMMING
The unit is a large display, designed to be remotely mounted. Therefore,
the unit does not have a programming keypad. Unit programming must be
accomplished by one of the following three methods:

EPAX TERMINAL BLOCK

RJ12 CONNECTOR ON BOTTOM OF UNIT

Optional Serial Programming
Like all PAX units, you can purchase an RS232 or RS485 Comms Card and
program the unit via Windows® based software programs.

704

www.redlion.net

ORDERING INFORMATION
TYPE

MODEL NO.

Display

EPAX

Digital
Input
Module

MPAX

PAXCDS

Optional
Plug-In
Cards

PAXCDC*

PART NUMBERS

EPAX0600

Count/Rate Indicator Module, AC Powered

MPAXI000

Count Indicator Module, AC Powered

MPAXC000

Rate Indicator Module, AC Powered

MPAXR000

Real-Time Clock Module, AC Powered

MPAXCK00

Timer Module, AC Powered

MPAXTM00

Dual Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS10

Quad Setpoint Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Setpoint Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Setpoint Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

DeviceNet Communications Card

PAXCDC30

Modbus Communications Card

PAXCDC40

Extended Modbus Communications Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC4C

Profibus-DP Communications Card

PAXCDC50

PAXCDL*

Analog Output Card

PAXCDL10

PAXRTC*

Real-Time Clock Card (Replacement Only)

PAXRTC00

Programming Remote for EPAX with 10 foot cable

EPAXPGM0

SFCRD**

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP (for
MPAXI000 Module)

SFCRD200

SFPAX**

PC Configuration Software for Windows 95/98 on 3.5" disk (for MPAXCK00 and
MPAXTM00 Modules)

PGM

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

6-Digit Extra Large Display for Digital MPAX Modules

ENC12
SHR
EN/SH

SFPAX

NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure for EPAX

ENC12000

Shroud for EPAX

SHREPAX0

EPAX NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure and Shroud

EPAXENSH

*Refer to “Selecting Your Display Components and Option Cards.”
**Available as a FREE download from the Red Lion website. www.redlion.net

TROUBLESHOOTING
For technical assistance, contact technical support.

1-717-767-6511

705

This page intentionally left blank.
706

www.redlion.net

SIGNAL
CONDITIONERS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

707

QUICK Specs
Signal Conditioners

FREQUENCY INPUT
IFMA
IFMR

Description

ANALOG INPUT
AFCM
IAMS

Frequency to Analog Converter

Speed Switch

Analog to Frequency Converter

Universal Conversion Module

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

79 mm (H) x 28 mm (W)
x 107 mm(D)

93 mm (H) x 6.2 mm (W)
x 93 mm(D)

109 mm (H) x 24 mm (W)
x 104 mm(D)

Input

Programmable to accept
a variety of sensors
25 KHz Max.

0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
2 to 10 mA 4 to 20 mA,
0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC,
0 to 10 VDC and 2 to 10 VDC

DC Current, DC Voltage,
Process, RTD, Thermocouple,
Linear Resistance and
Potentiometer

Outputs

0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC,
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

Single Form C Relay

0 to 50 Hz, 0 to 100 Hz,
0 to 250 Hz, 0 to 500 Hz,
0 to 1KHz, 0 to 2.5 KHz,
0 to 5 KHz and 0 to 10 KHz

Setpoint - Dual Form "A" Relay
Output
Analog - 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA,
0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC
or the reverse of each

Low Frequency Cut-out,
Overrange Indication,
3 Way Isolation

Hysteresis and Offset

3 Way Isolation

Power Source

85 to 250 VAC

19.2 to 30 VDC

21.6 to 253 VAC or
19.2 to 300 VDC

Recommended
Applications

Converts a Frequency
Input to an Analog
Current or Voltage

Provides a Contact Ouput
at a Setpoint Speed,
Overspeed, Underspeed,
or Zero Speed

Used to Isolate and Convert
Various Analog Signals to
Frequencies Signals

Used to Isolate and Convert
Various Analog Signals to
Standard Control Signals

Page Number

Page 713

Page 721

Page 729

Page 731

Other Features/
Options

708

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Signal Conditioners
IAMA

ANALOG INPUT
IAMA6
AAMA

H
AIMI

DC Current, DC Voltage
and Process Converter

Universal Conversion Module

Loop Powered Isolator

79 mm (H) x 28 mm (W)
x 107 mm(D)

93 mm (H) x 6 mm (W)
x 102 mm(D)

99 mm (H) x 18 mm (W)
x 115 mm (D)

79 mm (H) x 25 mm
(W) x 93 mm(D)

Display

0 to 500 mV
0 to 100 VDC or
0 to 100 mA DC

0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC,
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

0 to 500 mV, 0 to 20 VDC,
0 to 20 mA, +/- 500 mV, or
+/- 20 VDC

0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

Outputs

0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC,
0 to 1 mA DC, 0 to 20 mA
or 4 to 20 mA

0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC,
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

0 to 10 VDC, +/-10 VDC,
or 4 to 20 mA

0 to 20 mA

Other Features/
Options

3 Way Isolation, Linear or
Square Root Extraction

3 Way Isolation

3 Way Isolation,
Accepts Positive and
Negative Signals

2 Way Isolation

Power Source

11 to 36 VDC, 24 VAC

19.2 to 30 VDC

18 to 30 VDC

Loop Powered

Recommended
Applications

Used to Isolate and Convert
Various Analog Signals to
Standard Control Signals

Provides Ground Potential
Isolation of Analog
Control Circuits

Page Number

Page 742

Page 750

Page 753

Page 758

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

1-717-767-6511

709

QUICK Specs
Signal Conditioners

ANALOG INPUT
IRMA
ITMA

Description

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

RTD to Analog Converter

Thermocouple to
Analog Converter

Serial Converter Modules

Serial to Ethernet Converter
for Red Lion Products

Model Dependent

79 mm (H) x 25 mm (W)
x 98 mm (D)

135 mm (H) x 45 mm (W)
x 106 mm (D)

J, K, T, E, or mV

RS232, RS485

Protocols - RS232, RS485,
and Ethernet

2, 3, or 4 Wire RTD
Input 100 Ohm Platinum (385 or 392)
or Resistance

Outputs

4 to 20 mA or mV

Other Features/
Options

2 Way Isolation,
Sensor Break Detection

Power Source

12 to 42 VDC
9 to 32 VDC, Loop Powered

Recommended
Applications

Used to Convert an RTD Input
to a 4 to 20 mA Output

Page Number

Page 763

710

C O M M U N I C AT I O N
ICM4/5
ICM8

4 to 20 mA or mV

2 Way Isolation,
Sensor Break Detection

12 to 42 VDC
9 to 32 VDC, Loop Powered

Used to Convert a Thermocouple
Input to a 4 to 20 mA Output

Page 775

www.redlion.net

RS232, RS485

Protocols - RS232, RS485,
and Ethernet

N/A

9 to 32 VDC

24 VDC

Used to Convert
Serial Communications

Used to enable Red Lion
Products to Communication
via Ethernet

Page 788

Page 796

QUICK Specs
Signal Conditioners

C O M M U N I C AT I O N
SWITCH08
GCM

Description

8 Port Ethernet switch

Serial Converter Modules

101 mm (H) x 134 mm (W)
x 35 mm (D)

25 mm (H) x 54 mm (W)
x 110 mm (D) w/socket

Input

N/A

Serial 20 mA Current Loop

Outputs

N/A

RS232, (GCM232)
RS422/485, (GCM422)

Other Features/
Options

Unmanaged Switch
Auto Half/Full Duplex
Auto Crossing Detection

N/A

Power Source

24 VDC

9 to 28 VDC (GCM232)
9 to 26 VDC (GCM422)

Recommended
Applications

Multi-Drop Ethernet

Used to Convert
20 mA Current Loop to RS232
or RS422/485

Page Number

Page 802

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

*See website for product information.

1-717-767-6511

711

This page intentionally left blank.
712

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL IFMA - DIN-RAIL FREQUENCY TO ANALOG CONVERTER
SIMPLE ON-LINE RANGE SETTING
(Using Actual Input Signal or Signal Generator)
USER SETTABLE FULL SCALE FREQUENCY FROM
1 Hz to 25 KHz
FOUR OUTPUT OPERATING RANGES
(0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA)
PROGRAMMABLE INPUT CIRCUIT ACCEPTS OUTPUTS FROM A
VARIETY OF SENSORS
85 to 250 VAC and 9 to 32 VDC POWERED VERSIONS
AVAILABLE
LOW FREQUENCY CUT-OUT AND OVERRANGE INDICATION
3-WAY ELECTRICAL ISOLATION (POWER/INPUT/OUTPUT)
INPUT AND OUTPUT INDICATION LEDs
UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808

DESCRIPTION

The Model IFMA accepts a frequency input, and outputs an analog voltage or
current in proportion to the input frequency, with 0.1% accuracy. The full scale
input frequency can be set to any value from 1 Hz to 25 KHz, either with a
frequency source, or digitally with the on-board rotary switch and push-button.
The IFMA utilizes a seven position DIP switch, a rotary switch, a push-button
and two indication LEDs to accomplish input circuit configuration, operational
parameter set-up, and Input/Output indication. The input circuitry is DIP switch
selectable for a variety of sources.
The indication LEDs are used during normal operation to display the input
and output status of the IFMA. These LEDs are also used to provide visual
feedback to the user of the existing parameter settings during parameter set-up.
The IFMA operates in one of four output modes. The programmable minimum
and maximum response times provide optimal response at any input frequency.
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat profile rail according to EN
50 022 - 35 x7.5 and 35 x 15, and G profile rail according to EN 50 035 - G 32.

SAFETY SUMMARY

Low Bias: Input trigger levels VIL = 0.25 V, VIH = 0.75 V; for increased
sensitivity when used with magnetic pickups.
Hi Bias: Input trigger levels VIL = 2.5 V, VIH = 3.0 V; for logic level signals.
Max. Input Signal: ±90 V; 2.75 mA max. (With both Current Sourcing and
Current Sinking resistors switched off.)
5. SIGNAL VOLTAGE OUTPUT (Selectable):
0 to 5 VDC @ 10 mA max.
0 to 10 VDC @ 10 mA max.
6. SIGNAL CURRENT OUTPUT (Selectable):
0 to 20 mA @ 10 VDC min.
4 to 20 mA@ 10 VDC min.
7. OUTPUT COMPLIANCE:
Voltage: 10 V across a min. 1KΩ load (10 mA). Factory calibrated for loads
greater than 1 MΩ.
Current: 20 mA through a max. 500Ω load (10 VDC).
8. ACCURACY: ±0.1% of full scale range (±0.2% for 0 to 5 VDC range).
9. RESOLUTION:
Voltage : 3.5 mV min.
Current: 5 μA min.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER:
AC Operation: 85 to 250 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz; 6.5 VA
DC Operation: 9 to 32 VDC; 2.5 W
Power Up Current: Ip = 600 mA for 50 msec. max.
2. SENSOR POWER: (AC version only) +12 VDC ±25% @ 60 mA max.
3. OPERATING FREQUENCY RANGE:
From 0 Hz to 25 KHz; user selectable.
4. SIGNAL INPUT: DIP switch selectable to accept signals from a variety of
sources, including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits,
magnetic pickups, and all standard RLC sensors.
Current Sourcing: Internal 1 KΩ pull-down resistor for sensors with current
sourcing output. (Max. sensor output current = 24 mA @ 24 V output.)
Current Sinking: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-up resistor for sensors with current
sinking output. (Max. sensor current = 3 mA.)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE
SUPPLY VOLTAGES
9 to 32 VDC
85 to 250 VAC

IFMA
Pulse Rate to Analog Converter
IFMA0035
IFMA0065
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the
RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.

1-717-767-6511

713

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

10. RESPONSE TIME: 5 msec +1 period to 10 sec +1 period; user selectable
11. INPUT IMPEDANCE: 33 KΩ min. with the sink and source DIP switches
in the OFF position (See Block Diagram).
12. INPUT AND POWER CONNECTIONS: Screw in terminal blocks.
13. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN VOLTAGE (Dielectric Withstand): 2200
V between power & input, and power & output; 500 V between input &
output for 1 minute.
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1683A-176645/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 97ME50135-042297
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
EMC EMISSIONS:
Meets EN 50081-2: Industrial Environment.
CISPR 11 Radiated and conducted emissions
EMC IMMUNITY:
Meets EN 50082-2: Industrial Environment.
ENV 50140 - Radio-frequency radiated electromagnetic field 1
ENV 50141 - Radio-frequency conducted electromagnetic field

EN 61000-4-2 - Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 2
EN 61000-4-4 - Electrical fast transient/burst (EFT)
EN 61000-4-8 - Power frequency magnetic field
Notes:
1. For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted on a rail in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or
equivalent) and I/O cables are routed in metal conduit connected to
earth ground.
2. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge, precautions should be taken when the device is
mounted outside an enclosure. When working in an enclosure (ex. making
adjustments, setting switches, etc.) typical anti-static precautions should
be observed before touching the unit.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C
to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is green, high impact plastic. Installation
Category II, Pollution Degree 2
17. WEIGHT: 6 oz. (0.17 Kg)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

OVERVIEW
The Model IFMA continuously monitors a frequency input and outputs a
voltage or current signal in proportion to the input signal. The output is accurate
to ±0.1% of full scale for Operating Modes 2, 3, and 4. Operating Mode 1 is
accurate to ±0.2% of full scale. The green Input LED blinks at the rate of the
input frequency. At about 100 Hz, the Input LED will appear to be solid on. At
very low frequencies, the Input LED blinks slowly and may also appear to be
solid on. A loss of signal may also cause the Input LED to remain on, depending
on the DIP switch set-up. In this case, the red LED also turns on.
The Minimum Response Time parameter sets the minimum update time of the
output. The actual response time is the Minimum Response Time plus up to one
full period of the input signal. The IFMA counts the negative edges occurring
during the update time period, and computes the average frequency value for that
time. This action filters out any high frequency jitter that may be present in the
input signal. The longer the Minimum Response Time, the more filtering occurs.
The Maximum Response Time parameter sets the Low Frequency Cut-out
response time for the unit. If a new edge is not detected within the time specified
by the Maximum Response Time setting, the unit sets the output to the
existing Low Frequency Cut-out Value setting depending on the selected range
and calibration setting.

714

The unit also indicates Low Frequency Cut-out by turning ON the output
LED. The Maximum Response Time can be set shorter than the Minimum
Response Time. In this case, as long as the input signal period is shorter than the
Maximum Response Time, the unit continues to indicate the input frequency at
its output. But, if the input period at any time exceeds the Maximum Response
Time, the unit immediately takes the output to the Low Frequency Cut-out
Value, regardless of the Minimum Response Time setting.
The IFMA is calibrated at the factory for all of the selected ranges. However,
the user can adjust the minimum calibration to any value less than the Full Scale
value, and the Full Scale value to any value greater than the minimum value. If the
minimum and full scale values are brought closer together, the accuracy of the unit
decreases proportionate to the decreased range of the unit (See Calibration).

www.redlion.net

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

POWER AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. The unit becomes more immune to EMI with fewer I/O
connections. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful installation or troublesome
installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the rail where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

AC Power
Primary AC power is connected to terminals 10 and 12 (labeled AC). For best
results, the AC Power should be relatively “clean” and within the specified
variation limits. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits or from circuits
that also power loads that cycle on and off, should be avoided.
DC Power
The DC power is connected to terminals 10 and 12. The DC plus (+) power
is connected to terminal 10 and the minus (-) is connected to terminal 12.
It is recommended that separate supplies be used for sensor power and unit
power. Using the same supply for both will negate isolation between input and
power.
Current Output
When using Operating Mode 3 or 4, the output device is connected to
terminals 1(I+) and 3 (I-).
Voltage Output
When using Operating Mode 1 or 2, the output device is connected to
terminals 4 (V+) and 6 (V-).
Note: Although signals are present at
voltage and current outputs at the
same time, only the selected mode is
in calibration at any one time.
Example: Operating Mode 2 is
selected. The voltage level present
at the voltage terminals is in
calibration, but the signal
appearing at the current terminals
does not conform to either of the
current output modes.

1-717-767-6511

715

INPUT CIRCUITS, SENSOR CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATION SWITCH SET-UP

S2 - ON: For logic level signals. Sets the input bias levels to VIL = 2.5 V, VIH
= 3.0 V.
OFF: For increased sensitivity when used with magnetic pickups. Sets the
input bias levels to VIL = 0.25 V, VIH = 0.75 V.
S3 - ON: Connects a 3.9 KΩ pull-up resistor for sensors with current sinking
output. (Max. sensor current = 3 mA.)

The Model IFMA uses a comparator amplifier connected as a Schmidt
trigger circuit to convert the input wave form into the pulse form required for
proper circuit operation. Three set-up switches are used to configure the input
circuit to accept signals from a wide variety of sources, as follows:
S1 - ON: Connects a 1 KΩ pull-down resistor for sensors with sourcing outputs.
(Maximum sensor output current is 24 mA @ 24 VDC output.)

CONNECTIONS & CONFIGURATION SWITCH SET-UP FOR VARIOUS SENSOR OUTPUTS
Note: Separate power supplies must be used for sensor power and input power to maintain the isolation breakdown voltage specification. If isolation between power
and input is not needed, then a single supply can be used for both unit and sensor power.
SENSORS WITH CURRENT SINK OUTPUT (NPN O.C.)

MAGNETIC PICKUPS

AC VERSION

RECOMMENDED RULES FOR MAGNETIC PICKUP CONNECTIONS
1. Connect the shield to the common Terminal “9” at the input of the IFMA. DO NOT
connect the shield at the pickup end. Leave the shield “open” at the pickup and insulate
the exposed shield to prevent electrical contact with the frame or case. (Shielded cable,
supplied on some RLC magnetic pickups, has open shield on pickup end.)

2-WIRE PROXIMITY SENSORS

DC VERSION

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

SENSORS WITH CURRENT SOURCE OUTPUT (PNP O.C.)

AC VERSION

DC VERSION
AC VERSION

DC VERSION

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

*Check sensor power requirements before

OLDER STYLE RLC SENSORS WITH -EF OUTPUT
AC VERSION

wiring.

DC VERSION

A.C. INPUTS FROM INVERTERS, A.C. TACHOMETERS,
GENERATORS, ETC.

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

INPUT FROM CMOS OR TTL

CONFIGURING THE IFMA
To begin set-up, place DIP switch 4 to the on (up) position. DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 access unit configuration settings.
Upon entry to a set-up parameter, the Input LED blinks the current numerical value of a setting at a 1 Hz rate. A setting
of “1” is indicated by one blink (½ sec on, ½ sec off), through a setting of “9”, which is indicated by nine blinks. A setting
of “0” is indicated by a single short flash (40 msec on, 1 sec off). The decimal point position is the last number blinked.
After the entire value is indicated, the IFMA pauses two seconds and repeats the value.
During entry of a new value, if the Mode switch (S4) or any of the CFG DIP switch positions are changed before the
push button is pressed, the IFMA aborts the entry process and retains the previous setting.
DIP SWITCH

716

DESCRIPTION

SECTION

Operating Mode

(1.0)

Input Range Setting Using an Input Signal or Frequency Generator

(2.0)

Input Range Setting Using the Rotary Switch

(3.0)

Minimum Response Time

(4.0)

Note: To return to normal operation,
place DIP switch 4 in the down
(RUN) position.

Maximum Response Time (Low Frequency Cut-Out Setting)

(5.0)

( ) Indicates Configuration Section

Analog Output Minimum Value

(6.0)

Analog Output Full Scale Value

(6.0)

www.redlion.net

OUTPUT INDICATION
Over range on the output : The Output LED (red) turns on and the
Output is “clamped” at the maximum level.
Low Frequency Cut-Out : The Output LED (red) turns on to
indicate the input frequency is below the Zero Frequency setting.
Invalid Entry during Set-up : The Input LED (green) and the
Output LED (red) alternately blink until a valid entry is made.

FACTORY SETTINGS

Parameter
Operating Mode
Input Range
Minimum Response
Maximum Response

Setting
4
10.000
0
0

Value
4 to 20 mA
10 KHz
5 msec
1024 times Input Range Period (102 msec, 9.8 Hz)

1.0 Operating Mode (Analog Output)
1.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON (up) position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
1.2 Green input LED blinks the Setting corresponding to the Operating Mode shown below, pauses
and repeats the value.
Step 1.1

Setting
1
2
3
4

Step 1.2

Operating Mode
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

Factory calibration values are restored when the Operating Mode is changed.
If existing operating mode setting is your desired requirement, this section is complete*.
Otherwise, continue with Step 1.3.
1.3 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly to indicate the Operating mode
setting is now accessed.
1.4 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for the output desired (see the list in Step
1.2).
1.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks value entered, pauses, and repeats the new
Operation setting.

Step 1.3

If the new Operating mode setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Operating mode setting is not the desired setting, repeat from Step 1.3.
If the Red output LED blinks, the rotary switch numerical value is invalid. Repeat Steps 1.4
and 1.5.

Step 1.4

Setting ‘2’
Selected

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the Down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

2.0 On-Line Input Range Setting Using Actual Input Signal Or Frequency Generator

Step 2.1

2.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
2.2 The Green input LED blinks the existing Input Range setting as shown in the examples below.
Six full digits of numerical information blink with a short pause between digits and a longer
pause before repeating. The first five digits are the existing input range setting of the frequency
magnitude. The sixth digit is the frequency resolution (the number of digits to the right of the
decimal point).
Factory Setting Example
1 blink
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
4 sec pause

Step 2.2

Step 2.4

2 blinks
2 sec pause
5 blinks
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
5 blinks
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
2 blinks
4 sec pause

0
Frequency
setting

0
0
0
0

Frequency
1

Additional Example:

Resolution

Resolution
0

Result: 10.000 KHz

2
5

5
0
2

Frequency
2

Frequency
setting

Resolution

Resolution
0

Result: 250.50 Hz

If the existing Input Range setting is your desired requirement, this section is complete*.
Otherwise, continue with Step 2.3.

PREFERRED
METHOD

2.3 Apply the maximum input signal.
2.4 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. The acquisition process takes two
seconds plus one period of the input signal.
If the new input range setting is valid, the Green input LED turns on solid. Continue to Step 2.5.
If Red output LED blinks, the new input range setting is invalid, outside the acceptable 1 Hz
to 25 KHz range. Repeat Steps 2.3 and 2.4.
2.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the new Input Range setting. This section
is complete*. Verify the Input Range setting as shown in Step 2.2.

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the Down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

1-717-767-6511

717

3.0 Input Range Setting Using The Rotary Switch

H
Step 3.1

3.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON(up) position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
3.2 The Green input LED blinks the existing Input Range setting, pauses and repeats. Six full digits
of numerical information blink with a short pause between digits and a longer pause at the end,
before repeating. The first five digits are the existing input range setting magnitude. The sixth
digit is the frequency resolution (the number of digits to the right of the decimal point).
If the existing Input Range setting is your desired requirement, this section is complete*.
Otherwise, continue with Step 3.3.

Step 3.2

3.3 Determine the Input Range frequency and record in the space provided below.

Input Range Frequency
First 5 of 6 digits

Resolution
6th digit

Example: 95.5 Hz
Step 3.4

Step 3.5

Setting ‘2’
Selected

ALTERNATIVE
METHOD IF INPUT
SIGNAL IS NOT
AVAILABLE

5 • 5

Example: 15,500 Hz

5 •5

5 • 5

0 •

3.4 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. Input Range setting is now
accessed.
3.5 Turn the rotary switch to the first selected numerical value. Press the push-button. The Green
input LED continues to blink rapidly. First of six digits is entered.
3.6 Turn the rotary switch to the second selected numerical value. Press the push-button. The Green
input LED continues to blink rapidly. Second of six digits is entered.
3.7 Repeat Step 3.6 three more times, then go to Step 3.8. This enters a total of five of the required
six numerical digits.
3.8 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for resolution requirement. Press the
push-button. The Green input LED blinks the new Input Range setting (as described in Step
2.2), pauses, and repeats the value.
If the new Input Range setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Input Range setting is not the desired setting, repeat Steps 3.4, through 3.8.
If the Red output LED blinks, the numerical value entered is invalid. Repeat Steps 3.3 through 3.8.

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the Down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

4.0 Minimum Response Time Setting
4.1 Position DIP switch 4 to the ON(up) position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
4.2 The Green input LED blinks the corresponding Minimum Response Time Setting (see
following list), pauses and repeats.
Step 4.1

Step 4.2

Setting
0
1
2
3
4

Time
5 msec
10 msec
20 msec
50 msec
100 msec

Setting
5
6
7
8
9

Time
200 msec
500 msec
1 sec
5 sec (not valid for input range > 3906 Hz)
10 sec (not valid for input range > 3906 Hz)

If the existing Minimum Response Time setting is your desired requirement, this section is
complete*. Otherwise, continue with Step 4.3.
4.3 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. Minimum Response Time setting
is now accessed.
4.4 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for Minimum Response Time desired
(see list in Step 4.2).
4.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the value entered, pauses, and repeats the
new Minimum Response Time setting.

Step 4.3

If the new Minimum Response Time setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Minimum Response Time setting is not acceptable, repeat from step 4.3.
If the Red output LED blinks, the rotary switch numerical value is invalid. Repeat Steps 4.4
and 4.5.

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the Down position for normal operation, or change DIP

718

Step 4.4

Setting ‘2’
Selected

switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

www.redlion.net

5.0 Maximum Response Time Setting (Low Frequency Cut-Out Setting)
5.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON (up) position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
5.2 The Green input LED blinks the corresponding Maximum Response Time Setting (see
following list), pauses and repeats.
Step 5.1

Step 5.2

Setting
0
1
2
3
4

Time
1024 times Input Range period (40 msec min., 10 sec max.)
10 msec (100 Hz)
20 msec (50 Hz)
50 msec (20 Hz)
100 msec (10 Hz)

Setting
5
6
7
8
9

Time
200 msec (5 Hz)
500 msec (2 Hz)
1 sec (1 Hz)
5 sec (.2 Hz)
10 sec (.1 Hz)

If the existing Maximum Response Time setting is your desired requirement, this section is
complete*. Otherwise, continue with Step 5.3.
5.3 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. Maximum Response Time setting
is now accessed.
5.4 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for Maximum Response Time desired.
(see list in Step 5.2)
5.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the value entered, pauses, and repeats the
new Maximum Response Time setting.

Step 5.3

If the new Maximum Response Time setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Maximum Response Time setting is not acceptable, repeat from Step 5.3.
If the Red output LED blinks, the rotary switch numerical value is invalid. Repeat Steps 5.4
and 5.5.

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the Down position for normal operation, or change DIP
Step 5.4

Setting ‘9’
Selected

switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

6.0 Calibration
The IFMA is factory calibrated for all operating modes. These settings are
permanently stored in the unit’s configuration memory. The IFMA
automatically selects the proper calibration setting for the selected Operation
mode.
The Minimum and Full Scale output values established at the factory can be
changed using the calibration routines. The Minimum output value can be
adjusted to any value less than the Full Scale output value, and the Full Scale
value can be adjusted to any value greater than the Minimum value.
Changing the factory calibration settings does affect the accuracy of the unit.
Specified accuracy for modes 2, 3, and 4 holds until the factory calibration
range has been halved. This does not apply to mode 1, since it already uses only
half of the IFMA’s output range. When increasing the output range, the new
calibration settings can not exceed the factory Full Scale value by more than
10%. The 0 to 5 VDC range can be doubled.
The IFMA can store user calibration settings for only one mode at a time. If
calibration is changed for one operating mode, and the user then selects a
different operating mode, the unit reverts to factory calibration settings.
Calibration steps can be combined (added) to obtain a total calibration change.
This is done by repeated push-button entries of the same value, or different
values, before saving the change. The calibration steps as shown in the table at
right are approximations. A current or volt meter should be connected to the
appropriate output pins to verify the actual calibration setting.

Approximate Calibration Increments
ROTARY SWITCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

VOLTAGE
3 mV
5 mV
10 mV
25 mV
50 mV
100 mV
200 mV
400 mV

CURRENT
5 µA
10 µA
25 µA
50 µA
100 µA
200 µA
400 µA
800 µA

Calibration Direction
The default direction for calibration changes is up (increasing values) on
entry to either calibration routine. This direction can be toggled from within the
routine with the following steps:
1. Enter the calibration routine you wish to change (Minimum or Full Scale).
2. Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly.
3. Turn the rotary switch to position 9. Press the push-button.
4. The Output LED indicates the direction of calibration:
OFF = Increasing Value
ON = Decreasing Value

Analog Output Minimum Value
Step 6.2

Analog Output Full Scale Value
Step 6.2

Step 6.2

6.1 Connect a current or voltmeter of appropriate accuracy to the desired output pins (voltage or
current)
6.2 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown. The Green input
LED blinks slowly.

1-717-767-6511

719

6.0 Calibration (Cont’d)
6.3 Press the push-button to enable the rotary switch. The Green input LED now blinks at a faster
rate, indicating that calibration values are accessible.
6.4 Turn rotary switch to appropriate numerical setting for calibration (see list in Step 6.0), while
monitoring the output signal. Press the push-button. Calibration is raised or lowered by this
approximate value, depending on calibration direction.

If this setting meets your requirements, go to step 6.5. If more calibration is required, repeat
step 6.4 until the calibration meets your requirements.
If you overshoot your desired value, reverse calibration direction as shown in 6.0 and
continue calibration until the value meets your requirements.

Step 6.3

6.5 Turn the rotary switch to 0 and press the push-button. This saves the new user calibration setting.

Step 6.4

Setting ‘9’
Selected

If you want to return to factory calibration, exit Calibration and then re-enter. Turn rotary
switch to 0 and press push-button twice. This reloads the factory calibration setting for the
selected mode of operation.
When calibrating the Minimum output value, if the red output LED blinks while in the down
direction, the requested calibration setting is beyond the output’s absolute minimum value.
The calibration setting is held at the absolute minimum value. Reverse calibration direction
and repeat from step 6.4.
When calibrating Full Scale, if the red output LED blinks while in the up direction, the
requested calibration setting is beyond the output’s absolute maximum value. The calibration
setting is held at the maximum value. Reverse calibration direction and repeat from step 6.4.
If an attempt is made to calibrate the Full Scale value lower than the Minimum value, or
conversely, the Minimum value higher than the Full Scale value, the red output LED blinks,
and the IFMA sets the two values equal. Reverse calibration direction and repeat from step 6.4.

Calibration Example (Scaling):
A customer using the 0 to 10 VDC output range of the IFMA wants the Minimum value to be at 1 VDC. To do this,
connect a voltmeter to the output of the IFMA to monitor the output voltage. Access Configuration Mode by placing DIP
switch 4 to the ON (up) position. Access Analog Output Minimum value by placing DIP switches 5 and 7 up, and DIP
switch 6 down. Press the push-button to enable changes to the calibration value. Turn the rotary switch to position 8 and
press the push-button. The voltmeter should reflect an increase of about 400 mV. With the rotary switch still at position
8, press the push-button again. The voltmeter should now read approximately 800 mV. Turn the rotary switch to a
position lower than 8 to effect a smaller change in calibration. Continue adjusting the rotary switch and pressing the pushbutton until 1 VDC is displayed on the voltmeter. Turn the rotary switch to position 0 and press the push-button. This
action saves the new calibration setting for the Minimum value.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

APPLICATION

INSTALLATION
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including G profile rail according to
EN50035 - G32 , and top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022 - 35 x 7.5
and 35 x 15. The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing
the unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.
G Rail Installation
To install the IFMA on a “G”
style DIN rail, angle the module so
that the upper groove of the “foot”
catches under the lip of the top rail.
Push the module toward the rail
until it snaps into place. To remove
a module from the rail, push up on
the bottom of the module while
pulling out and away from the rail.
T Rail Installation
To install the IFMA on a “T”
style rail, angle the module so
that the top groove of the “foot”
is located over the lip of the top
rail. Push the module toward the
rail until it snaps into place. To
remove a module from the rail,
insert a screwdriver into the slot
on the bottom of the “foot”, and
pry upwards on the module until
it releases from the rail.

720

A customer needs a unit to output a signal to a chart recorder for a flow
rate system. There is an existing APLR rate indicator receiving an input
from a PSAC inductive proximity sensor. The IFMA Frequency to Analog
Converter is connected in parallel with the APLR to output the signal to the
chart recorder.
The flow rate is measured in gal/min. and needs to be converted to a 0 to
10 VDC signal. The Operating Mode of the IFMA is set for a 0 to 10 VDC
output signal. The PSAC measures 48 pulses/gal. with a maximum flow rate
of 525 gal/min. The Maximum Response Time is set to setting ‘9’ (10 sec).
The chart recorder will record 0 VDC at 0.125 gal/min, and 10 VDC at 525
gal/min.
The Input Range can be set one of two ways. By entering the calculated
maximum frequency with the rotary switch, or by applying the maximum
frequency signal of the process to the input of the IFMA. To set the input
with the rotary switch, first determine the maximum frequency generated by
the maximum output of the sensor using the following formula:

Max. Freq. = unit/measure x pulses/unit
seconds/measure
Max. Freq. = 525 GPM x 48 PPG = 420 Hz
60 sec.

Set the Input Range with the rotary switch to 420 Hz.

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL IFMR - DIN-RAIL SPEED SWITCH
z SIMPLE ON-LINE TRIP FREQUENCY SETTING (USING ACTUAL
INPUT SIGNAL OR FREQUENCY GENERATOR)
z USER SETTABLE TRIP FREQUENCY FROM 0.1 Hz to 25 KHz
z OVER-SPEED, UNDER-SPEED, AND ZERO-SPEED DETECTION
z RELAY LATCHING, ALARM OVERRIDE, AND ALARM RESET
FUNCTIONS
z PROGRAMMABLE INPUT CIRCUIT ACCEPTS OUTPUTS FROM
A VARIETY OF SENSORS
z HYSTERESIS AND OFFSET FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE
z 85 to 250 VAC and 9 to 32 VDC VERSIONS AVAILABLE
z INPUT AND RELAY STATUS INDICATION LED’S
UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808

DESCRIPTION
The Model IFMR accepts a frequency input, and controls a single relay
(SPDT) based on the value of the input frequency. The Trip frequency can be
set to any value from 0.1 Hz to 25 KHz. The IFMR can be set to trip on
overspeed, or underspeed (including zero speed). Offset and hysteresis values
can be incorporated into the trip setting to eliminate output chatter. LED
indicators for both the Input signal and the Relay status are provided. Two
separate input connections for external push-buttons are also provided. One
external input overrides the trip detection function, and holds the relay in the
release state as long as the input is pulled to common. The other external input
clears a latched trip condition when pulled to common.
The IFMR utilizes a seven position DIP switch, a rotary switch, a pushbutton and two indication LEDs to accomplish input circuit configuration,
operational parameter set-up, input signal, and relay status indication. The input
circuitry is DIP switch selectable for a variety of sources.
The indication LEDs are used during normal operation to display the input
signal and relay status of the IFMR. These LEDs are also used to provide visual
feedback to the user of the current parameter settings during parameter set-up.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

The IFMR operates in one of six output modes, as selected by the user. The
programmable Minimum Response Time provides optimum response vs. input
filtering for any input frequency. The offset and hysteresis settings provide
flexible adjustment of the relay trip and release points.
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat profile rail according to EN
50 022 - 35 x 7.5 and 35 x 15, and G profile rail according to EN 50 035 - G32.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
WARNING: SPEED SWITCHES MUST NEVER BE USED AS
PRIMARY PROTECTION AGAINST HAZARDOUS OPERATING
CONDITIONS. Machinery must first be made safe by inherent design,
or the installation of guards, shields, or other devices to protect personnel in
the event of a hazardous machine speed condition. The speed switch may be
installed to help prevent the machine from entering the unsafe speed.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER:
AC Powered Versions: 85 to 250 VAC; 48 to 62 Hz; 5.5 VA
DC Powered Versions: 9 to 32 VDC; 2.0 W
Power Up Current: Ip = 600 mA for 50 msec max.
2. SENSOR POWER: (AC version only) +12 VDC ±25% @ 60 mA max.
3. OPERATING FREQUENCY RANGE: 0 Hz to 25 KHz
4. SIGNAL INPUT: DIP switch selectable to accept signals from a variety of
sources, including switch contacts, outputs from CMOS or TTL circuits,
magnetic pickups, and all standard RLC sensors.
Current Sourcing: Internal 1 KΩ pull-down resistor for sensors with current
sourcing output. (Max. sensor output current = 24 mA @ 24 V output.)
Current Sinking: Internal 3.9 KΩ pull-up resistor for sensors with current
sinking output. (Max. sensor current = 3 mA.)
Low Bias: Input trigger levers VIL = 0.25 V, VIH = 0.75 V; for increased
sensitivity when used with magnetic pickups.
Hi Bias: Input trigger levels VIL = 2.5 V, VIH = 3.0 V; for logic level signals.
Max. Input Signal: ±90 V; 2.75 mA max. (with both Current Sourcing and
Current Sinking resistors switched off).

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS FOR AVAILABLE
SUPPLY VOLTAGES
9 to 32 VDC
85 to 250 VAC

IFMR
Speed Switch
IFMR0036
IFMR0066
For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer
to the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC distributor.

1-717-767-6511

721

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

5. CONTROL INPUTS: Active low (VIL = 0.5 V max.) internally pulled up to 5
VDC through a 100 KΩ resistor (ISNK = 50 μA). Response Time = 1 msec.
Alarm Reset: Unlatches the relay when pulled to common while the input
frequency is in the release region.
Alarm Override: Causes the IFMR to unconditionally release the relay
when pulled to common.
6. RELAY CONTACT OUTPUT: FORM “C” (SPDT) contacts max. rating.
5 A @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive load), 1/8 H.P. @ 120 VAC
(inductive load). The operate time is 5 msec nominal and the release time is
3 msec nominal.
7. RELAY LIFE EXPECTANCY: 100,000 cycles at max. rating. (As load
level decreases, life expectancy increases.)
8. ACCURACY: ±0.1% of the trip frequency setting.
9. INPUT IMPEDANCE: 33 KΩ min. with the sink and source DIP switches
in the OFF positions. (See Block Diagram)
10. MINIMUM RESPONSE TIME: From 5 msec. +1 period to 10 sec. +1
period in ten steps (excluding relay operate time).
11. HYSTERESIS AND OFFSET: From 0.25% to 33.33% of Trip Frequency
in nine steps. Hysteresis and/or Offset can also be set to 0 (Disabled).
12. INPUT AND POWER CONNECTIONS: Screw in terminal blocks
13. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN VOLTAGE (Dielectric Withstand):
2200 V between power & input, and power & output; 500 V between input
& output for 1 minute.
14. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E137808, UL508, CSA 22.2 No. 14
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # UL1683A-176645/USA,
CB Scheme Test Report # 97ME50135-042297
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic RF fields

EN 61000-4-3

Fast transients (burst)

EN 61000-4-4

RF conducted interference

EN 61000-4-6

Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011

Enclosure class A
Power mains class A

Notes:
1. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge, precautions should be taken when the device is
mounted outside an enclosure. When working in an enclosure (ex. making
adjustments, setting switches, etc.) typical anti-static precautions should
be observed before touching the unit.
2. For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted on a rail in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or
equivalent) and I/O cables are routed in metal conduit connected to
earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C to
50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
16. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is black, high impact plastic. Installation
Category II, Pollution Degree 2
17. WEIGHT: 6 oz. (0.17 Kg)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

722

Level 2; 4 Kv contact1
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Level 3; 10 V/m2
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Level 4; 30 A/m

www.redlion.net

OVERVIEW
The Model IFMR continuously monitors the input signal and controls an
output relay based on the frequency of the input signal, the chosen Operation
Mode (Underspeed or Overspeed), and the Trip and Release points the user has
selected. The green Input LED blinks at the rate of the input frequency. At about
100 Hz, the Input LED will appear to be solid on. At very low frequencies, the
Input LED blinks slowly and may also appear to be solid on. A loss of signal
may also cause the Input LED to remain on, depending on the DIP switch setup. In this case, the red Relay LED also turns on. The IFMR indicates the status
of the relay with the Relay LED (Red). Whenever the relay is in the Trip state,
the IFMR turns ON the Relay LED. In the Release state, the Relay LED is OFF.
For Overspeed detection, when the input frequency (averaged over the
Minimum Response Time) exceeds the Trip point, the IFMR trips the relay.
With the relay in the Trip condition, the input frequency must fall below the
Release point for the relay to release.
For Underspeed detection, the relay trips when the input frequency (averaged
over the Minimum Response Time) falls below the Trip point. The relay
releases only after the input frequency has exceeded the Release point. Two of
the Underspeed operating modes allow the machine or system that supplies the
input signal to reach normal operating speed before the IFMR responds to an
Underspeed condition. For Zero Speed applications, bear in mind that Zero
Speed detection and Underspeed detection are identical.
The Minimum Response Time parameter sets the minimum update time of
the output. The actual response time is the Minimum Response Time plus up to
one full period of the input signal. The IFMR counts the negative edges
occurring during the update time period, and computes the average frequency
value for that time. This action filters out any high frequency jitter that may be
present in the input signal. The longer the Minimum Response Time, the more
filtering occurs.
The Offset value is added to the Trip Frequency to determine the Trip Point
for Overspeed operation. For Underspeed operation the Trip point becomes the
Trip Frequency minus the Offset value.
If No Hysteresis has been selected, the Trip and Release points are identical,
which can lead to cycling or “chattering” of the relay at input frequencies
hovering around the Trip point. If Hysteresis is selected, the Release point is set
to the Trip point (including Offset) minus the Hysteresis value for Overspeed
detection. For Underspeed detection, the Release point is set to the Trip point
(including Offset) plus the Hysteresis value.
Two input pins (Alarm Override and Alarm Reset) are provided for the
optional connection of push-buttons. The Alarm Override pin causes the IFMR
to unconditionally Release the relay, regardless of the input frequency, or the
state of the relay, when pulled to common. When the Alarm Override pin is
released from common, the operation of the IFMR returns to normal, and the
status of the relay is updated based on the input frequency.
The Alarm Reset pin is only active when the IFMR is in one of the Latch
operation modes. With the Latch function selected, the relay “latches” into the
Trip state whenever a Trip condition is detected. The relay remains latched until
the Alarm Reset pin is pulled to common while the input frequency is in the
Release region. The Alarm Reset pin is ignored while the input frequency is in
the Trip region.

Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the rail where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In very electrically noisy environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

POWER AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
AC Power
Primary power is connected to terminals 10 and 12 (labeled AC). For best
results, the AC Power should be relatively “clean” and within the specified
variation limits. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits or from circuits
that also power loads that cycle on and off, should be avoided.
DC Power
The DC power is connected to
Terminals 10 and 12. The DC plus (+)
is connected to Terminal 10 and the
minus (-) is connected to Terminal 12.
It is recommended that separate
supplies be used for sensor power and
unit power. Using the same supply for
both will negate isolation between
input and power.
Output Wiring
Terminals 1, 2, and 3 are used to
connect to the relay output. Terminal 1
is the normally open contact. Terminal
3 is the normally closed contact, and
Terminal 2 is the output relay common.

1-717-767-6511

723

INPUT CIRCUITS, SENSOR CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATION SWITCH SET-UP

The Model IFMR Speed Switch uses a comparator amplifier connected as a
Schmidt trigger circuit to convert the input wave form into the pulse form
required for proper circuit operation. Three set-up switches are used to configure
the input circuit to accept signals from a wide variety of sources, as follows:
S1 - ON: Connects a 1 KΩ pull-down resistor for sensors with sourcing outputs.
(Maximum sensor output current is 24 mA @ 24 VDC output.)

S2 - ON: For logic level signals, sets the input bias levels to VIL = 2.5 V,
VIH = 3.0 V.
OFF: For increased sensitivity when used with magnetic pickups, sets the
input bias levels to VIL = 0.25 V, VIH = 0.75 V.
S3 - ON: Connects a 3.9 KΩ pull-up resistor for sensors with current sinking
output. (Max. sensor current = 3 mA.)

MAGNETIC PICKUPS

AC VERSION

DC VERSION

RECOMMENDED RULES FOR MAGNETIC PICKUP CONNECTIONS
1. Connect the shield to the common Terminal “9” at the input of the IFMR. DO NOT
connect the shield at the pickup end. Leave the shield “open” at the pickup and insulate
the exposed shield to prevent electrical contact with the frame or case. (Shielded cable,
supplied on some RLC magnetic pickups, has open shield on pickup end.)

2-WIRE PROXIMITY SENSORS

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

SENSORS WITH CURRENT SOURCE OUTPUT (PNP O.C.)

AC VERSION

DC VERSION
AC VERSION

DC VERSION

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

OLDER STYLE RLC SENSORS WITH -EF OUTPUT
AC VERSION

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

DC VERSION

SWITCH CONTACT INPUT

AC VERSION

DC VERSION

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

INPUT FROM CMOS OR TTL

*Check sensor power requirements before
wiring.

CONFIGURING THE IFMR
Upon entry to a set-up parameter, the Input LED blinks the current numerical value of a setting at a 1 Hz rate. A setting
of “1” is indicated by one blink (½ sec on, ½ sec off), through a setting of “9”, which is indicated by nine blinks. A setting
of “0” is indicated by a single short flash (40 msec on, 1 sec off). After the entire value is indicated, the IFMR pauses two
seconds and repeats the value.
During entry of a new value, if the Mode switch (S4) or any of the CFG DIP switch positions are changed before the push
button is pressed, the IFMR aborts the entry process and retains the previous setting.
To begin set-up, place DIP switch 4 to the on (up) position. DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 access unit configuration settings.
DIP SWITCH

724

DESCRIPTION

SECTION

Operating Mode

(1.0)

Set Trip Frequency Using an Input Signal or Frequency Generator

(2.0)

Set Trip Frequency Using the Rotary Switch

(3.0)

Set Minimum Response Time

(4.0)

Set Relay Trip Point

(5.0)

Set Relay Release Point

(6.0)

www.redlion.net

Note: To return to normal operation,
place DIP switch 4 in the down
(RUN) position.
( ) Indicates Configuration Section

RELAY INDICATION

FACTORY SETTINGS

Overspeed: The Relay LED (red) turns on to indicate the input signal
has exceeded the trip frequency.
Underspeed: The Relay LED (red) turns on to indicate the input
signal is below the trip frequency setting.
Invalid Entry during Set-up: The Input LED (green) and the Relay
LED (red) alternately blink until a valid entry is made.

Operating Mode
Trip Frequency
Minimum Response
Trip Point Offset
Trip Point Hysteresis

Setting
1
10000
0
0
1

Parameter
Low Speed Operation, Trip on Overspeed
10 KHz
5 msec
None
0.25%

1.0 Operating Mode
1.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON (up) position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
1.2 Green input LED blinks the setting corresponding to the Operating Mode shown below, pauses
and repeats the value.
Step 1.1

Step 1.2

Setting Operating Mode

1
2
3
4
5
6

OVERSPEED trip, automatic Release upon return to normal
OVERSPEED latched trip, Release only after ALM Reset pulled to Common
UNDERSPEED trip, automatic Release upon return to normal
UNDERSPEED trip, start-up condition* ignored, automatic Release upon return to normal
UNDERSPEED latched trip, Release only after ALM Reset pulled to Common
UNDERSPEED latched trip, start-up condition* ignored, Release only after ALM Reset
pulled to Common

* Refers to initial application of power to the IFMR, not the input frequency.

If existing operating mode setting is your desired requirement, this section is complete*.
Otherwise, continue with Step 1.3.

1.3 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly to indicate the Operating mode
setting is now accessed.

Step 1.3

1.4 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for output desired (see the list in Step 1.2).
1.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the value entered, pauses, and repeats the
new operation setting.
If the new Operating mode setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Operating mode setting is not the desired setting, repeat Steps 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5.
If Red output LED blinks, the rotary switch numerical value is invalid. Repeat Steps 1.4 and 1.5.
Step 1.4

Setting ‘2’
Selected

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

2.0 On-Line Trip Frequency Setting Using Actual Input Signal or Frequency Generator

Step 2.1

2.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
2.2 Green input LED blinks the existing Trip Frequency setting as shown in the examples below. Six
full digits of numerical information blink with a 2 sec. pause between digits and a 4 sec. pause
at the end, before repeating. The first five digits are the existing Trip Frequency magnitude. The
sixth digit is the frequency resolution (the number of digits to the right of the decimal point).
Factory Setting Example
1 blink
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
single flash
4 sec pause

Step 2.2

Step 2.4

2 blinks
2 sec pause
5 blinks
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
5 blinks
2 sec pause
single flash
2 sec pause
2 blinks
4 sec pause

0
Frequency
setting

0
0
0
0

Frequency
1

Additional Example

Resolution

Resolution
0

Result: 10,000 Hz

2
5

5
0
2

Frequency
2

Frequency
setting

Resolution

Resolution
0

Result: 250.50 Hz

If existing Trip Frequency setting is your desired requirement, this section is complete*.
Otherwise, continue with Step 2.3.

PREFERRED
METHOD

2.3 Apply the desired Trip Frequency to the signal input pin.
2.4 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. The acquisition process takes two
seconds plus one period of the input signal.
If the new Trip Frequency setting is valid, the Green input LED turns on solid. Continue to
Step 2.5.
If Red relay LED blinks, the new Trip Frequency is invalid, outside the acceptable 0.1 Hz to 25
KHz range. Repeat Steps 2.3 and 2.4.
2.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the new Trip Frequency setting. This section
is complete*.
To verify Trip Frequency setting, see Step 2.2.

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

1-717-767-6511

725

3.0 Set Trip Frequency Using The Rotary Switch

H
Step 3.1

3.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
3.2 The Green input LED blinks the existing Trip Frequency setting, pauses and repeats. Six full
digits of numerical information blink with a 2 sec. pause between digits and a 4 sec. pause at
the end, before repeating. The first five digits are the existing Trip Frequency magnitude. The
sixth digit is the frequency resolution (the number of digits to the right of the decimal point).
If the existing Trip Frequency setting is your desired requirement, this section is complete*.
Otherwise, continue with Step 3.3.
3.3 Determine the Trip Frequency and record in the space provided below.

Step 3.2

Trip Frequency
First 5 of 6 digits

Resolution
6th digit

Example: 95.5 Hz
9

5 • 5

Example: 15,500 Hz

5 •5

5 • 5

0 •

Step 3.4

Step 3.5

Setting ‘2’
Selected

ALTERNATIVE
METHOD IF INPUT
SIGNAL IS NOT
AVAILABLE

3.4 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. Trip Frequency setting is now
accessed.
3.5 Turn the rotary switch to the first selected numerical value. Press the push-button. The Green
input LED continues to blink rapidly. First of six numerical digits is entered.
3.6 Turn the rotary switch to the second selected numerical value. Press the push-button. The
Green input LED continues to blink rapidly. Second of six numerical digits is entered.
3.7 Repeat Step 3.6 three more times then go to Step 3.8. This enters a total of five of the required
six numerical digits.
3.8 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for resolution requirement. Press the
push-button. The Green input LED blinks the new Trip Frequency setting (as described in Step
2.2), pauses, and repeats the value.
If the new Trip Frequency setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Trip Frequency setting is not the desired setting, repeat Steps 3.4, through 3.8.
If the Red relay LED blinks, the numerical value entered is invalid. Repeat Steps 3.3
through 3.8.

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

4.0 Set Minimum Response Time
4.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
4.2 The Green input LED blinks the existing Minimum Response Time setting (see following list),
pauses and repeats.
Step 4.1

Step 4.2

Setting
0
1
2
3
4

Time
5 msec
10 msec
20 msec
50 msec
100 msec

Setting
5
6
7
8
9

Time
200 msec
500 msec
1 sec
5 sec (not valid for trip frequency > 3906 Hz)
10 sec (not valid for trip frequency > 3906 Hz)

Note: Minimum Response Times do not include the relay’s operate response time of 5 msec., or
the release response time of 3 msec.
4.3 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. Minimum Response Time setting
is now accessed.
4.4 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for Minimum Response Time desired
(see list in Step 4.2).
4.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the value entered, pauses, and repeats the
new setting.

Step 4.3

If the new Minimum Response Time setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Minimum Response Time setting is not the desired setting, repeat Steps 4.3, 4.4,
and 4.5.
If the Red relay LED blinks, the rotary switch numerical value is invalid. Repeat Steps 4.4 and
4.5.

Step 4.4

726

Setting ‘2’
Selected

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

www.redlion.net

5.0 Set Relay Trip Point (Offset)

Step 5.1

Step 5.2

For Overspeed operation, the Relay Trip point is internally set to the Trip Frequency plus the Offset
value. For Underspeed operation, the Relay Trip point is internally set to the Trip Frequency minus the
Offset value. The Offset value is equal to the Trip Frequency multiplied by the selected Offset
percentage.
Example: The Offset value is calculated as shown below.
Trip Frequency
= 250 Hz
Rotary Switch Setting = 4 (2.00%)
Offset Value
= 250 Hz x 2.00% (0.02) = 5 Hz
Trip Point:
OVERSPEED
= 250 + 5 = 255 Hz
UNDERSPEED
= 250 - 5 = 245 Hz
5.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
5.2 The Green input LED blinks the existing setting (see following list), pauses and repeats.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Step 5.3

Step 5.4

Setting ‘9’
Selected

Percentage
0.00% (NO Offset)
0.25% (0.0025)
0.50% (0.0050)
1.00% (0.0100)
2.00% (0.0200)
5.00% (0.0500)
10.00% (0.1000)
20.00% (0.2000)
25.00% (0.2500)
33.33% (0.3333)

5.3 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. Trip Point Offset setting is now
accessed.
5.4 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for Trip Point Offset desired (see list in Step
5.2).
5.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the value entered, pauses, and repeats the new
setting.
If the new Trip Point Offset setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Trip Point Offset setting is not the desired setting, repeat Steps 5.3, 5.4, and 5.5.
If the Red relay LED blinks, the rotary switch numerical value is invalid. Repeat Steps 5.4 and 5.5.

* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

6.0 Set Relay Release Point (Hysteresis)

Step 6.1

For Overspeed operation, the Relay Release point is set to the Relay Trip point minus the Hysteresis
value. For Underspeed operation, the Relay Release point is set to the Relay Trip point plus the
Hysteresis value. The hysteresis value is calculated by multiplying the hysteresis percentage by the
current trip frequency. If No Hysteresis (setting = 0) is selected, the Relay Trip and Release points are
identical, which can lead to chattering or cycling of the relay at input frequencies hovering around the
Relay Trip point.
Example: Using the Trip Frequency and Offset value as shown in the example above, the hysteresis
value is calculated as shown below.
Rotary Switch Setting = 3 (1.00%)
Hysteresis Value
= 250 Hz x 1.00% (0.01) = 2.5 Hz
Release Point:
OVERSPEED
= 250 + 5 - 2.5 = 252.5 Hz
UNDERSPEED
= 250 - 5 + 2.5 = 247.5 Hz

Step 6.2

6.1 Place DIP switch 4 to the ON position and DIP switches 5, 6, and 7 as shown.
6.2 The Green input LED blinks the existing setting (see following list), pauses, and repeats.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Step 6.3

Setting ‘9’
Selected

Step 6.4

Percentage
0.00% (NO Hysteresis)
0.25% (0.0025)
0.50% (0.0050)
1.00% (0.0100)
2.00% (0.0200)
5.00% (0.0500)
10.00% (0.1000)
20.00% (0.2000)
25.00% (0.2500)
33.33% (0.3333)

6.3 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks rapidly. Trip Point Hysteresis setting is now
accessed.
6.4 Turn the rotary switch to the selected numerical value for Hysteresis desired (see list in Step 6.2).
6.5 Press the push-button. The Green input LED blinks the value entered, pauses and repeats the new
setting.
If the new Trip Point Hysteresis setting is acceptable, this section is complete*.
If the new Trip Point Hysteresis setting is not the desired setting, repeat Steps 6.3, 6.4, and 6.5.
If the Red relay LED blinks, the rotary switch numerical value is invalid. Repeat Steps 6.4 and 6.5.
* Section complete; place DIP switch 4 to the down position for normal operation, or change DIP
switches 5, 6, and 7 for the next Configuration Section.

1-717-767-6511

727

INSTALLATION

The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including G profile rail according to
EN50035 - G32 , and top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022 - 35 x
7.5 and 35 x 15. The unit should be installed in a location that does not
exceed the maximum operating temperature and provides good air
circulation. Placing the unit near devices that generate excessive heat
should be avoided.
G Rail Installation
To install the IFMR on a “G”
style DIN rail, angle the module
so that the upper groove of the
“foot” catches under the lip of the
top rail. Push the module toward
the rail until it snaps into place. To
remove a module from the rail,
push up on the bottom of the
module while pulling out away
from the rail.

T Rail Installation
To install the IFMR on a
“T” style rail, angle the
module so that the top groove
of the “foot” is located over
the lip of the top rail. Push the
module toward the rail until it
snaps into place. To remove a
module from the rail, insert a
screwdriver into the slot on the
bottom of the “foot”, and pry
upwards on the module until it
releases from the rail.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

APPLICATION 1
An APLR is connected to an LMPC (logic magnetic pickup) that is
sensing the speed of a 60 tooth gear attached to a shaft. The shaft speed
should not exceed 2000 RPM.

The IFMR is placed in parallel with the APLR to activate an alarm when
an overspeed condition is detected, and to turn off the alarm when the speed
returns to normal. The Mode of Operation is set for Mode #1 (overspeed
trip, automatic release upon return to normal).
To set the value of the alarm, either apply the maximum input signal as
described in Section 2.0 or determine the Trip Frequency using the
following formula:
Trip Freq. = units/measure x pulses/unit
seconds/measure
Trip Freq. = 2000 RPM x 60 PPR = 2000 Hz
60 sec

Set the Trip Frequency with the rotary switch for 2000 Hz.
With Trip point Offset set at 0.00% (No Offset) and Trip Point Hysteresis
set at 0.25%; activation of the relay occurs at 2000 Hz, and release occurs
at 1995 Hz.

APPLICATION 2
The IFMR can be used in a speed monitoring system to detect when the
system drops below setpoint.
The IFMR is wired to a PSAC (inductive proximity sensor) that is sensing
a key way on the shaft of a motor. The motor is turning at 1750 RPM. When
the speed of the motor drops below 1250 RPM, the IFMR latches the output
until the user resets the output with an external push button.
The mode of operation of the IFMR is set for 5 (UNDERSPEED Latched
trip, release only after Alarm Reset pulled to common). Determine the Trip
Frequency using the following formula:
Trip Freq. = RPM x PPR
60
Trip Freq. = 1250 RPM x 1 PPR = 20.83 Hz.
60 sec.

Set the Trip Frequency with the rotary switch for 20.83 Hz.

728

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL AFCM - ANALOG TO FREQUENCY CONVERTER MODULE
z VOLTAGE/CURRENT TO FREQUENCY CONVERTER
z 3-WAY ISOLATION OF INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS
z UNIVERSAL CONVERSION MODULE - INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
SELECTED VIA DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
z ULTRA SLIM DESIGN – ONLY 0.244" WIDE
z 19 to 30 VDC POWER
UL Recognized Component,
File # E257265

DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The configurable analog to frequency converter is used to convert analog
standard signals to frequency signals or pulse width modulated (PWM) signals.
Input signal ranges are 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA, 2 - 10 mA,
0 - 10 V, 2 - 10 V, 0 - 5 V, or 1 - 5 V.
The DIP switches are accessible on the side of the housing and allow the
following parameters to be configured:
– Input signal
– Output values
– Output type (frequency or PWM)
– Filter type (for smoothing interferences on the input signal)
– Input over/under range fault detection

The device may only be installed and put into operation by qualified personnel.
The corresponding national regulations must be observed.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installationand operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT
1. INPUT SIGNAL RANGE (Configurable): 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA,
0 - 10 mA, 2 - 10 mA, 0 - 10 V, 2 - 10 V, 0 - 5 V, 1 - 5 V
2. MAX. INPUT SIGNAL:
Current inputs: 100 mA
Voltage inputs: 30 VDC
3. INPUT RESISTANCE:
Current inputs: 50 Ω, approx.
Voltage inputs: 110 KΩ, approx.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

OUTPUT
1. OUTPUT SIGNAL RANGE (Configurable):
Frequencies: 0 - 10 kHz, 0 - 5 kHz, 0 – 2.5 kHz, 0 - 1 kHz, 0 - 500 Hz 0 250 Hz, 0 - 100 Hz, 0 - 50 Hz
PWM: 7.8 kHz, 3.9 kHz, 1.9 kHz, 977 Hz, 488 Hz, 244 Hz, 122 Hz, 61 Hz
2. MIN. LOAD:
Frequency: 6 KΩ
PWM: 2 KΩ
3. MAX. LOAD CURRENT: 20 mA
4. OUTPUT: NPN open collector transistor
5. MAX. SWITCHING VOLTAGE: 30 V
6. OVER-RANGE/UNDER-RANGE FAULT DETECTION: Configurable
7. OUTPUT PROTECTION: Short circuit and polarity protection

GENERAL DATA

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

AFCM

DESCRIPTION

Analog to Frequency Converter Module

PART NUMBER

AFCM0000

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 19.2 - 30 VDC
2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE: 24 VDC
3. CURRENT CONSUMPTION: < 10 mA
4. POWER CONSUMPTION: < 200 mW
5. TRANSMISSION ERROR: < 0.1%
6. TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (MAX.): < 0.02%/K
7. STEP RESPONSE:
0% to 99%: < 15 msec + (1/T)
With Largest Filter: < 1 sec + (1/T)
8. TEST VOLTAGE (INPUT / OUTPUT / SUPPLY): 1.5 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
9. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE:
Operation: -20 t +65°C (-4 to 148°F)
Storage: -40 to +85°C (-4 to 183°F)
10. FAULT DETECTION: Red LED under clear cover top

1-717-767-6511

729

11. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:

OVER SAMPLING

Conformance With EMC Guideline 89/336/EEC And Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Immunity to Interference According to EN 61000-6-2

Discharge of static electricity (ESD)
Electromagnetic HF field
Fast transients (Burst)
Surge voltage capacities (Surge)
Conducted disturbance

EN
EN
EN
EN
EN

61000-4-2
61000-4-3
61000-4-4
61000-4-5
61000-4-6

Criterion B1
Criterion A2
Criterion B1
Criterion B1
Criterion A2

Noise Emission According to EN 61000-6-4

Noise emission of housing

EN 55011

Class A3

Criterion B: Temporary impairment to operational behavior that is corrected
by the device itself.
2 Criterion A: Normal operating behavior within the defined limits.
3 Class A: Area of application industry.
12. CONNECTIONS: Wire Gauge: 24-12 AWG, Stripping length: 0.47" (12 mm)
13. CONSTRUCTION: Polybutylenterephthalate PBT, black
14. MOUNTING: Standard DIN top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
- 35x7.5
15. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (54 g)
1

1 value
ON
ON

10 values
ON

50 values

100 values

DIP Switch S2
Using DIP switch S2, you can set the output values, the output type and fault
detection.

Output Signals
Frequency Output:
Variable frequency/period duration T

FREQUENCY
OUTPUT

0 - 10 kHz

PWM Output
(Pulse Wide Modulation):
Variable pulse to pause ratio/fixed
period duration T

0 - 5 kHz
0 – 2.5 kHz

0 - 1 kHz
ON

0 - 500 Hz

0 - 250 Hz

0 - 100 Hz

0 - 50 Hz

PWM
OUTPUT

7.8 Hz

3.9 Hz

1.9 Hz

977 Hz

488 Hz

244 Hz

122 Hz

61 Hz

Change can only be read by PWM input
ON
meters.

Fault Detection
5

INPUT OVER RANGE

Freeze at 100% measuring range end value
ON

105% measuring range end value
ON

110% measuring range end value

Fault detection OFF (continues past end value)

Using DIP switch S1, you can set the input values, and the values for Moving
Average Filter and Over sampling.
2

0 – 10V
ON

2 – 10V
ON

0 – 20 mA

4 – 20 mA

0 – 10 mA

2 – 10 mA

The moving average filter can group
values (1, 2, 4, 6) using moving window
averaging to form a new measured value. In
moving window averaging, the average of a
fixed number of measured values is taken,
whereby the oldest value is always dropped
and the most recent added.

Fault detection OFF (stops at start value)

The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022 - 35 x 7.5 and
35 x 15. The unit should be installed in a location that does not exceed the
maximum operating temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the
unit near devices that generate excessive heat should be avoided.

0 – 5V

110% measuring range end value

INSTALLATION

1 – 5V

105% measuring range end value
ON

ANALOG IN

ON
ON

INPUT UNDER RANGE

Freeze at 100% measuring range start value

DIP Switch S1

730

CONFIGURATION

Primary power is
connected to terminals
7 or 3 (19.2 – 30 VDC)
and 8 or 4 (GND 3).
For best results, the
Power should be
relatively “clean” and
within the specified
variation
limits.
Drawing power from
heavily loaded circuits
or from circuits that
also power loads that
cycle on and off,
should be avoided.
The input signal is
connected to terminal 1
(In UI) and 2 (GND 1).
Connections for the
output signal is on
terminals 5 (Out f) and
6 (GND 2).

WIRING CONNECTIONS

In order to smooth the measured values, an
average can be formed from several
measured values (1, 10, 50, 100). This
process is called Over sampling. In
oversampling, the average is updated every
time the selected number of values is
reached.

T Rail Installation

MOVING WINDOW
AVERAGING

1 value
ON
ON

2 values
ON

4 values

6 values

To install the AFCM on a “T”
style rail, angle the module so that
the top groove of the “foot” is
located over the lip of the top rail.
Push the module toward the rail
until it snaps into place. To
remove a module from the rail,
insert a screwdriver into the slot
on the bottom of the “foot”, and
pry upwards on the module until
it releases from the rail.

www.redlion.net

MODEL IAMS – INTELLIGENT UNIVERSAL SIGNAL
CONDITIONING MODULE
z UNIVERSAL INPUT, PROCESS, mA DC, VDC, TC, 100 (RTD,
POTENTIOMETER, AND LINEAR RESISTANCE
z UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY, 21.6 to 253 VAC/ 19.2 to 300 VDC
z 3-WAY ISOLATION (POWER/SIGNAL/OUTPUT)
z CHOOSE SETPOINTS AND/OR ANALOG OUTPUT MODELS
z PROGRAMMING/DISPLAY MODULE
z PROGRAMMING AVAILABLE IN SEVEN DIFFERENT
LANGUAGES

APPROVED

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
51EB

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The IAMS — Universal Signal Conditioners unmatched capability provides
users the ultimate in flexibility. As a signal conditioner, the unit provides
complete isolation and conversion capability to satisfy almost any application.
The Universal Input accepts Process, DC Current, DC Voltage, Thermocouples,
RTDs, Potentiometers, and Linear Resistance signals allowing the module to be
connected to most common sensors. The setpoint model allows dual setpoint
control capability through dual Form A relays. The analog model provides a
retransmitted analog signal. A third model provides both analog and control
capability. The power supply is also universal, accepting 21.6 to 253 VAC/ 19.2
to 300 VDC as its power source. Add the optional programming module and the
unit is easily programmed through menu style programming. The module can
also be used to provide a display of the process variable when it is not being used
for programming.
The IAMS features well over 100 combinations of inputs to outputs
configurations. Input specific terminals allow for the various signals and sensors
to be connected to the unit while the input ranges and resolutions are adjusted in
the input programming loop of the unit. The menu style programming allows the
user quick and easy set-up by using the PGMMOD, programming module. The
module is required to program the IAMS. However, if you are using more than

one IAMS, only one programming module is required. The module can store
programming from one unit and load it to a second unit reducing set-up time for
multiple installations. When the programming module is not being used for
programming, it can indicate the input parameters, just like a panel meter.
The unit’s overall full scale accuracy typically exceeds 0.1 % depending on
the range selection and scaling. The microprocessor based design provides ease
of field scaling and the onboard E2PROM stores scaling values for future recall.
All units come factory precalibrated for all input and output ranges. Factory or
custom field scaling can be selected in the Advanced programming loop. The
IAMS can be factory recalibrated in the field if desired.
The unit’s environmental operating temperature range is -20º C to 60º C. DIN
rail mounting saves time and panel space. The units are equipped with mounting
feet to attach to top hat profile rail according to EN50022 – 35 x 7.5 and 35 x 15.

SAFETY SUMMARY

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

CAUTION: Risk of Danger
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

WARNING

INSTALLATION

1-717-767-6511

To keep the safety distances, the relay contacts on the devices
must not be connected to both hazardous and non-hazardous
voltages at the same time.
The IAMS devices must be mounted on a DIN rail according to
DIN 46277.

731

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Programming Module .

.
.
.
.
.

2
2
3
4
4

Wiring the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Reviewing the Front Buttons and Display . . . 6
Programming the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Programming Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

IAMS

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Intelligent Universal Signal Cond with Analog Output

IAMS0001

Intelligent Universal Signal Cond w/Dual Setpoints

IAMS0010

Intelligent Universal Signal Cond w/Analog Output and
Dual Setpoints

IAMS0011

Programming Display Module

PGMMOD00

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. DISPLAY: See Display/ Programming Module
2. POWER:
AC Power: 21.6 to 253 VAC, 50/60 Hz
DC Power: 19.2 to 300 VDC,
3. CONSUMPTION: <2.5 W
4. FUSE: 400 mA SB/250 VAC
5. ISOLATION: Between input, supply and outputs - 2.3 kVAC/250 VAC
6. INPUTS:
Current Input:
Programmable Ranges: 0 to 20 and 4 to 20 mA DC
Measurement range: -1 to 25 mA
Input resistance: Nom. 20 Ω + PTC 50 Ω
Sensor error detection: 4 to 20 loop break, yes
Supply Voltage: 16-25 VDC, 20 mA max (Terminal 43 and 44)
Voltage Input:
Programmable Ranges: 0 to 1, 0.2 to 1, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 1 to 10, and 2 to 10
VDC
Measurement range: -20 mV to 12 VDC
Input resistance: Nom. 10 MΩ
Thermocouple Inputs:
Thermocouple Type: B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, W3, W5, and LR
Cold Junction Compensation: via internally mounted sensor < ±1.0 ºC
Sensor Error Detection: All TC types, yes
Sensor Error Current: When detecting 2 μA, otherwise 0 μA

732

TYPE

MIN. VALUE

MAX. VALUE

STANDARD

+400 °C

+1820 °C

IEC 60584-1

-100 °C

+1000 °C

IEC 60584-1

-100 °C

+1200 °C

IEC 60584-1

-180 °C

+1372 °C

IEC 60584-1

-200 °C

+900 °C

DIN 43710

-180 °C

+1300 °C

IEC 60584-1

-50 °C

+1760 °C

IEC 60584-1

-50 °C

+1760 °C

IEC 60584-1
IEC 60584-1

-200 °C

+400 °C

-200 °C

+600 °C

DIN 43710

0 °C

+2300 °C

ASTM E988-90

0 °C

+2300 °C

ASTM E988-90

-200 °C

+800 °C

GOST 3044-84

www.redlion.net

RTD, Linear Resistance, Potentiometer Inputs
RTD Types: Pt10, Pt20, Pt50, Pt100, Pt200, Pt250, Pt300, Pt400, Pt500,
Pt1000, Ni50, Ni100, Ni120, and Ni1000
INPUT TYPE

MIN. VALUE

MAX. VALUE

STANDARD

Pt100

-200 °C

+850 °C

IEC60751

Ni100

-60 °C

+250 °C

DIN 43760

Lin. R

0Ω

10000 Ω

Potentiometer

10 Ω

100 kΩ

Cable Resistance per wire: RTD, 50 Ω max.
Sensor Current: RTD, Nom. 0.2 mA
Sensor Error Detection: RTD, yes
Short Circuit Detection: RTD, < 15 Ω
7. STEP RESPONSE TIME: (0 to 90% or 100 to 10%)
Temperature input: ≤ 1 sec
Current/Voltage input: ≤ 400 msec
8. ACCURACY: The greater of the general and basic values.
GENERAL VALUES

Input Type

Absolute Accuracy

Temperature Coefficient

All

≤ ±0.1% of span

≤ ±0.1% of span/°C

BASIC VALUES

Input Type

Basic Accuracy

Temperature Coefficient

≤ ±4 µA

≤ ±0.4 µA/°C

Volt

≤ ±20 µV

≤ ±2 µV/°C

Pt100

≤ ±0.2 °C

≤ ±0.01 °C/°C

Lin. R

≤ ±0.1 Ω

≤ ±0.01 Ω/°C

Potentiometer

≤ ±0.1 Ω

≤ ±0.01 Ω/°C

TC Type:
E, J, K, L, N, T, U

≤ ±1 °C

≤ ±0.5 °C/°C

TC Type: B, R, S,
W3, W5, LR

≤ ±2 °C

≤ ±0.2 °C/°C

9. CALIBRATION TEMPERATURE: 20 to 28 ºC
10. RELAY OUTPUTS: Dual Form A. Contacts rated at 2 A AC or 1 A DC
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 25 % (1 to 2999 display counts)
On and off delay: 0 to 3600 sec
Sensor Error Detection: Break / Make / Hold
Max. Voltage: 250 Vrms
Max. Current: 2 A AC or 1 ADC
Max. Power: 500 VA

11. ANALOG OUTPUT:
Current Output:
Signal Range (Span): 0 to 20 mA
Programmable Measurement Range: 0 to 20, 4 to 20, 20 to 0, and 20 to 4
mA
Load Resistance: 800 Ω max.
Output Compliance: 16 VDC max.
Load Stability: = 0.01 % of span, 100 Ω load
Sensor Error Detection: 0 / 3.5 mA/ 23 mA / none
Output Limitation: For 4 to 20 and 20 to 4 mA signals - 3.8 to 20.5 mA
For 0 to 20 and 20 to 0 mA signals - 0 to 20.5 mA
Current Limit: = 28 mA
Voltage Output:
Signal Range: 0 to 10 VDC
Programmable Signal Ranges: 0 to 1, 0.2 to 1, 0 to 10, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 2 to
10, 1 to 0, 1 to 0.2, 5 to 0, 5 to 1, 10 to 0, and 10 to 2 V
Load: 500 K Ω min
12. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: -20 to +60 ºC
Operating and Storage Humidity: 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY:
EMC 2004/108/EC Emission and Immunity EN 61326
EMC Immunity Influence
<± 0.5% of span
Extended EMC Immunity: NAMUR NE 21,
A criterion, burst
<± 1% of span
SAFETY
LVD 2006/95/EC
EN 61010-1
Factory Mutual Approved, Report #3034432, FM 3600, 3611, 3810, and
ISA 82.02.01
FM, applicable in: Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D
Class I, Div. 2, Group IIC
Zone 2
Max. ambient temperature for T5
60°C
UL Listed, File # E324843, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95
LISTED by Und. Lab. Inc. to U.S. and Canadian safety standards
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
14. CONSTRUCTION: IP 50/IP20 Touch Safe, case body is black high impact
plastic. Pollution Degree 1.
15. CONNECTIONS: High compression cage-clamp terminal block. Use
60/75°C copper conductors only.
Wire strip length: 0.3" (7.5 mm)
Wire gage: 26 – 14 AWG stranded wire
Torque: 4.5 inch-lbs (0.5 N-m) max
16. WEIGHT: 5 oz (145 g)
5.6 oz (160 g) with programming module

ACCESSORY
Display/ Programming Module

The module easily connects to the front of the IAMS and is used to enter or adjust the
programming of the module. For applications that require more than one IAMS, the
same programming module can be used to program multiple units. In fact, it can store
the configuration from one module and download the same configuration to another
module. When the module is not being used for progamming, it can provide a display of
the process data and status.
Display: LCD display with 4 lines; line 1 is 0.2" (5.5 mm) and displays the input signal,
line 2 is 0.13" (3.33 mm) and displays units, line 3 is 0.13" (3.33 mm) and displays
analog output or tag number, line 4 shows communication and relay status
Programming Mode: Three push buttons combined with a simple and easily
understandable menu structure and help text guides you effortlessly through the
configuration steps. The actual configuration/set-up will be explained in the
Programming Section.
Password Protection: Programming access may be blocked by assigning a password.
The password is saved in the IAMS to guard against unautherized modifications to the
configuration. A default password of “2008” allows access to all configuration menus.

1-717-767-6511

733

1.0 INSTALLING

THE

UNIT

The IAMS is designed to mount to a top hat profile DIN rail. The unit should
be installed in a location that does not exceed the maximum operating
temperature and provides good air circulation. Placing the unit near devices that
generate excessive heat should be avoided.

2.0 INSTALLING

THE

PROGRAMMING MODULE

The PGMMOD, Programming/Display Module is designed to connect to the
front of the IAMS. Insert the top of the programming module first, then allow
the bottom to lock into the IAMS.
When programming is complete, leave the programming module in place to
display the process data or press the release tab on the bottom of the
programming module.

3.0 WIRING

THE

UNIT

WIRING OVERVIEW

Electrical connections are made via screw-clamp terminals located on the
sides of the unit. All conductors should conform to the unit’s voltage and current
ratings. All cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good
installation, local codes, and regulations. It is recommened that power supplied
to the unit (DC or AC) be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker.
When wiring the unit, compare the numbers on the terminal blocks against
those shown in wiring drawings for proper wire position. Insert the wire under
the correct screw-clamp terminal and tighten until the wire is secure. (Pull wire
to verify tightness.)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

734

2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional
protection. Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress
power line interference. Install them near the power entry point of the
enclosure. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are
recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. Switching of inductive loads produces high EMI. Use of snubbers across
inductive loads suppresses EMI.
Snubber: RLC#SNUB0000.

www.redlion.net

3.1 POWER WIRING
H

Supply:
31

Note: For DC power connection,
there is no polarity concerns.

3.2 INPUT SIGNAL WIRING
R TD, 2-wire

41 42 43 44

RTD, 3- / 4-wire

41 42 43 44

41 42 43 44
4th
wire

R es is tanc e, 2-wire

41 42 43 44

Resistance,
3- / 4-wire

Potentiometer

41 42 43 44

4th
wire
2-wire transmitter

Current

Voltage

41 42 43 44

- Tx +

(self-powered)

3.4 SETPOINT OUTPUT WIRING

3.3 ANALOG OUTPUT WIRING
Voltage, 1 V

Voltage, 10 V

Relays

11 12 13 14

21 22 23 24

Current

11 12 13 14

- mA +

Not Used

11 12 13 14
If not using the analog
option, pins 11 and 12
must be shorted.

1-717-767-6511

735

4.0 REVIEWING
H

THE

FRONT BUTTONS

AND

DISPLAY

DISPLAY: Total of four lines.

Display Mode

Programming Mode

Line 1

Displays input signal

Shows the selected parameter value

Line 2

Displays input units

Shows the selected parameter

Line 3

Displays output signal

Shows scrolling help text

Line 4

Displays communication and relay status

Shows communication and relay status

PUSH BUTTONS: Configuration of the unit is by the use of the three function keys.
These keys are only active in the programming mode.

∧

- increases the numerical value or choose the next selection

- Enters programming mode,
saves the chosen value and proceeds to the next selection

∨

- decreases the numerical value or choose the previous selection

5.0 PROGRAMMING

THE

UNIT

OVERVIEW
PROGRAMMING MENU
Warning: Save all programming
changes before entering
. Do this by
exiting the Program Mode at
the
prompt and
then reentering.

STEP BY STEP PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS:
PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (OK KEY)
A programming module, PGMMOD00 is required to program the unit. The
programing mode is entered by pressing the OK key. If the password protection
is enabled, entry of the password is required to gain access. If the password
protection is disabled, direct access to programming will occur.

FAST SET MENU

MENU ENTRY (ARROW & OK KEYS)
Upon entering the programming mode (set-up), the arrow keys will index
between the programming modules. Select the desired module, press the OK
key enter the module programming.

PARAMETER SELECTION AND ENTRY (ARROW & OK
KEYS)
In each of the Programming Modules are parameters that can be configured
to the desired action for a specific appplication. Each parameter has a list of
selections or a numeric value that can be entered. The parameters are displayed
on line #2 and the selection is on line #1. The arrow keys will move through the
selection list or increase or decrease the numeric values. Once the selection or
numeric value is set to the desired action, press the OK key to enter the data and
move to the next parameter.

PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (ARROW & OK KEYS)
After completing a programming module loop, the display will return to the
set-up position. At this time additional programming modules can be selected
for programming or the selection of “ ” can be entered. Entering “ ” will
exit the Programming Mode, save any changes, and enable the Display Mode.
(If power loss occurs before returning to the display mode, verify recent
parameter changes.)
Note: The unit will return to the Display Mode from any menu after 1
minute without a key press or by pressing and holding the OK key for
2 seconds. In these cases, verify recent parameter changes.

736

FAST SETPOINT MODE

∧

- displays setpoint 1 and increases the shown setpoint value

OK - saves the changed setpoint value and returns to the Display Mode

(Holding for 2 seconds returns to the Display Mode without saving.)

∨

- displays setpoint 2 and decreases the shown setpoint value

www.redlion.net

5.1 MODULE 1 - SIGNAL INPUT PARAMETERS
H

PARAMETER MENU - VOLTAGE, CURRENT AND POTENTIOMETER

PARAMETER MENU - TEMPERATURE

INPUT TYPE (

)

MAXIMUM RESISTANCE (

)

to
Enter the high resistance value.
Select the appropriate Input Type for the application.
Note: Changing the input parameters may affect the setpoint and/or
analog programming.

INPUT TYPE (

The next five parameters apply to the voltage, current, linear
resistance and potentiometer input types.

)

UNIT IDENTIFICATION (

If input type is selected for voltage, the following
parameters appear.
VOLTAGE RANGE (

)

Select one of the 69 available units as listed below.

)

Select the appropriate Voltage Range that corresponds to the external
signal. This selection should be high enough to avoid input signal
overload but low enough for the desired input resolution.

INPUT TYPE (

)

If input type is selected for current, the following
parameters appear.
CURRENT RANGE (

)

DECIMAL POINT (

Select the appropriate Current Range that corresponds to the external
signal. This selection should be high enough to avoid input signal
overload but low enough for the desired input resolution.

INPUT TYPE (

Select the appropriate decimal point location.

)

If input type is selected for linear resistance, the
following parameters appear.
WIRE CONNECTION (

)

DISPLAY LOW (

)

)
Enter the low display value.

Select the wires the sensor or signals has to connect to the unit.
MINIMUM RESISTANCE (

DISPLAY HIGH (

)

to
Enter the low resistance value.

Enter the high display value.

1-717-767-6511

737

The remaining parameters in this module apply to temperature
input type only.

INPUT TYPE (

TYPE:

)

WIRE CONNECTION:

If input type is selected for temperature, the following
parameters appear.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (

NICKEL SENSORS -Select the appropriate Nickel sensor.

THERMOCOUPLE -Select the appropriate Thermocouple sensor.

TYPE:

)

, or

Select the appropriate temperature sensor.

UNIT IDENTIFICATION (

RTD -Select the appropriate RTD sensor.

TYPE:

)

or
Select the appropriate unit for the temperature being displayed.

WIRE CONNECTION:

5.2 MODULE 6 - SETPOINT PARAMETERS (REQUIRES SETPOINT OPTION)
PARAMETER MENU - SETPOINT (

)

PARAMETER MENU - WINDOW (

RELAY ASSIGNMENT (

)

ACTIVATION DIRECTION (

)

Select the direction relay 1 should activate, increasing signal or
decreasing signal.

Select relay assignment to display units or percent of the input.

RELAY 1 HYSTERSIS (

RELAY 1 FUNCTION (R1.FUNC)

)

to
Enter relay 1 hysteresis value.

Select how relay 1 is to function. For
the relay is controlled by
setpoint one. Select
and the relay is controlled by 2 setpoints. For
the relay indicates sensor alarm only. Select
and the relay
indicates power status. For
the relay is disabled.

RELAY 1 ERROR ACTIVATION (

and
Select relay 1 error mode action.
RELAY 1 ON DELAY (

RELAY 1 FUNCTION (

)

Enter relay 1 On Delay Time.
RELAY 1 OFF DELAY (

)

Enter relay 1 Off Delay Time.

Select relay 1 operation, normally open or normally closed.
)

RELAY 1 FUNCTION (

)

If the relay function is selected for window, the following
parameters appear.

Enter the relay 1 setpoint value.

738

)

RELAY 1 SETPOINT VALUE (

)

If the relay function is selected for setpoint, the following
parameters appear.
RELAY 1 CONTROL (

)

www.redlion.net

RELAY 1 CONTROL (

RELAY 1 ON DELAY (

)

Select relay 1 contact to be open inside the window or closed in the
window.

RELAY 1 OFF DELAY (
SETPOINT LOW VALUE (

Enter relay 1 On Delay Time.

)

Enter relay 1 Off Delay Time.

Enter the window’s low value.
SETPOINT HIGH VALUE (

)

RELAY 1 FUNCTION (

)

If the relay function is selected for error mode, the
following parameters appear.

Enter the window’s high value.
RELAY WINDOW HYSTERSIS (

RELAY 1 ERROR ACTIVATION (

)

to
Select relay 1 error mode action.

Set the window’s hysteresis value.
RELAY 1 ERROR ACTIVATION (

The POW and OFF selection have no programming capabilites.

)
and

For Relay 2, repeat the steps listed for Relay 1.

Select relay 1 error mode action.

5.3 MODULE 8 - ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS
(REQUIRES ANALOG OUTPUT OPTION)
PARAMETER MENU

ANALOG OUTPUT TYPE (

OUTPUT LOW VALUE (

)

) For TEMP only

Enter the value for the output Low Value.

Select either Voltage or Current output.

OUTPUT RANGE (O.RANGE)

OUTPUT HIGH VALUE (

Select the appropriate range based on the analog output type
selected.
VOLTAGE -Select the appropriate voltage range.
RANGE:
,
,
,
,

) For TEMP only

or
Enter the value for the output High Value.

, or

CURRENT -Select the appropriate current range.

RANGE:

, or

OUTPUT ERROR (
,

) For CURR only
, or

This parameter is only available if the analog output type is selected for
current. Select the proper Error action, if needed.

1-717-767-6511

739

5.4 MODULE 9 - ADVANCED PARAMETERS
PARAMETER MENU

ADVANCED SETTING (

)

HIGH CALIBRATION POINT VALUE (High Input Signal)
to
Apply the high input signal, then enter the value for the High Value Point.

Select the advanced setting menu to make the desired change.
USE PROCESS CALIBRATION VARIABLES (

ADVANCED SETTING (

)

If the advanced setting is selected for memory, the
following parameter appears.

Use Process Calibration Varaibles.

ADVANCED SETTING (

)

MEMORY SETTING (

)

If the advanced setting is selected for simulation, the
following parameters appear.

or
Select save to save unit set-up to the display module or select load to
download saved set-up to the unit.

INPUT SIMULATION (

)

ADVANCED SETTING (

)

Enable Input Simulation.

If the advanced setting is selected for display, the following
parameters appear.
LCD CONTRAST (

INPUT SIMULATION VALUE (

)

Enter the Input Simulation Value, as selected in the input setup.

RELAY SIMULATION (

)

Select the desired Display Contrast.
LCD BACKLIGHT ADJUSTMENT (

)
Use the

to
Select the desired Display Backlight.
TAG NUMBER (

)

If the advanced setting is selected for password, the
following parameters appear.

to
Enter a custom 6 character device tag.

PASSWORD PROTECTION (

)

or
Enable Password protection.

or
Select the proper display for Line 3.

ADVANCED SETTING (

ENTER NEW PASSWORD (

)

If the advanced setting is selected for calibration (applied
input scaling), the following parameters appear as selected in
the input setup. A temperature example is shown.
CALIBRATION LOW (

to toggle between relay 1 and 2.

ADVANCED SETTING (

)

LINE 3 SET UP (

and

Enter New Password.
ENABLE FAST SET (

)

Enable fast set functionality of the setpoints. .

* Universal code 2008 will allow access to a locked unit.

Calibrate the input low to the process value.

ADVANCED SETTING (

LOW CALIBRATION POINT VALUE (Low Input Signal)

)

If the advanced setting is selected for LANGUAGE, the
following parameter appears.

to
Apply the low input signal, then enter the value for the Low Value Point.
CALIBRATION HIGH (

)

SELECT PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE (

or
Calibrate the input high to the process value.

740

Set programming language.

www.redlion.net

)

IAMS PROGRAMMING QUICK OVERVIEW

WINDOW

TEMPERATURE

1-717-767-6511

741

H
MODEL IAMA - UNIVERSAL SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULE
z 3-WAY ISOLATION OF ANALOG SIGNALS
z UNIVERSAL CONVERSION MODULE - INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
SELECTED VIA DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
z OVER 100 INPUT AND OUTPUT ANALOG CONVERSION
COMBINATIONS
z CHOOSE LINEAR OR SQUARE ROOT EXTRACTION MODEL
z ALL RANGES ARE FACTORY PRECALIBRATED. CUSTOM FIELD
CALIBRATION IS AVAILABLE FOR ALL RANGES WHILE
MAINTAINING THE FACTORY CALIBRATION FOR FUTURE USE
z 11 to 36 VDC AND 24 VAC MODULE POWER
UL Recognized Component,
File # E179259

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The IAMA – Universal Signal Conditioning Module Series can isolate and
convert over 100 combinations of analog signal ranges. The IAMA3535
converts and transmits signals linearly proportional to the input, while the
IAMA6262 transmits the scaled square root of the input signal. This allows the
IAMA6262 to provide a signal that is linear to flow rate in applications utilizing
a differential pressure transducer.
DIP switch range selection eliminates the need to order and stock different
modules for each input and output signal range, and allows quick and
convenient setup for over 100 standard signal conversions. By utilizing the
Field mode of calibration, the user can customize the input and output scaling
for odd applications, including reversal of the output relative to the input.
In addition to the conversion capabilities, the IAMA modules feature
optically isolated Input/Output signal circuits and transformer isolated Power to
Input, Power to Output circuits.
The modules’ overall full scale accuracy typically exceed 0.05% depending
upon range selection and scaling. The microprocessor based design provides
ease of field scaling and the onboard E2PROM stores scaling values for future
recall. Both models come factory precalibrated for all input and output ranges.
Factory or custom field scaling can be selected by a simple mode switch change.
The IAMA can be factory recalibrated in the field if desired.
The modules’ environmental operating temperature range is -20°C to +65°C.
DIN rail mounting saves time and panel space. The units are equipped with
universal mounting feet for attachment to standard DIN style rails, including top
hat profile rail according to EN50022 - 35x7.5 and 35 x 15 and G profile rail
according to EN50035-G32.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

742

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior
to installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

IAMA

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Linear Universal Signal Conditioning Module

IAMA3535

Square Root Universal Signal Conditioning Module

IAMA6262

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER: 11 to 36 VDC, 3 W max. or 24 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 4.8 VA max.
2. INPUT/OUTPUT RANGES: See Tables 2 and 3
3. ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS: Digital (DIP Switch Transition)
4. MAX INPUT SIGNAL:
Current Input: 110 mA DC, 1.1 VDC
Voltage Inputs: Terminal 7- 1 VDC +10%
Terminal 8- 10 VDC +10%
Terminal 9- 100 VDC +10%
5. INPUT RESISTANCE:
Current: 10 Ω
Voltage: > 100 K
6. INPUT PROTECTION: Surge suppressor diodes
7. MAX OUTPUT CURRENT:
Current Output: 22 mA
Voltage Output: 10 mA
8. LOAD RESISTANCE:
Current Output: ≤ 600 Ω
Voltage Output: ≥ 1 KΩ
9. OUTPUT COMPLIANCE:
Current: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA: 12 V min (≤ 600 Ω)
0 to 1 mA: 10 V min (≤10 KΩ)
Voltage: 10 VDC across a min. 1 KΩ load (10 mA). Factory calibrated for
loads of > 1 MΩ.
10. ISOLATION LEVEL INPUT TO OUTPUT: 1.5 kV @ 50/60 Hz, 1 min
11. STEP RESPONSE: To within 99% of full scale: 300 msec
12. ACCURACY (INCLUDING LINEARITY): Factory: ±0.1% of span
max. for all ranges except 1 mA, 2 mA, and 20 mV. These ranges are
accurate to ±0.2% of span max. All ranges can be field calibrated to 0.1%
of span max.
13. RESOLUTION: 0.01% full scale input, 0.01% full scale output

www.redlion.net

14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -20 to +65 °C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to +85 °C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from -20 to +65 °C
Temperature Coefficient: ± 0.01%/°C (100 PPM/°C) max.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
15. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL3101-1, CSA C22.2
No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/5141B/UL,
CB Scheme Test Report # 01ME11540-0702001
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Notes:
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 1
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O 2
Level 3; 2 Kv power 2
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Power mains class A
1. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Analog output signal deviation less than 5% of full scale.
For operation without loss of performance:
Install power line filter, RLC #LFIL0000 or equivalent on DC power
lines at unit.
OR
Install 2 ferrite cores, RLC #FCOR0000 or equivalent, to DC power
lines at unit.
2. Criteria A: No loss of performance within the unit’s specifications.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for additional
information.
16. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is black high impact plastic
17. CONNECTIONS: 14 AWG max
18. MOUNTING: Standard DIN top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
- 35x7.5 and 35 x 15 and G profile rail according to EN50035-G32.
19. WEIGHT: 4.5 oz. (127.57 g)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

OVERVIEW
The IAMA3535 continuously monitors a voltage or current input and
provides a linearly proportional voltage or current output, while the IAMA6262
transmits the scaled square root of the input signal. This allows the IAMA6262
to provide a signal that is linear to flow rate in applications utilizing a
differential pressure transducer. Both units have two modes of operation known
as Factory and Field modes. Factory mode is used when the default input and
output ranges are suitable. Field mode can be independently selected for both
the input and output, and allows the user to custom calibrate, or scale the signal.
If Factory mode is selected, the IAMAs use factory presets for the selected input
or output range. If Field mode is selected, the IAMAs can be custom scaled
within a selected input or output range. Field mode also allows the IAMA to
reverse its output in relation to its input.
The units are factory precalibrated for minimum and full scale for all input
and output ranges. The factory calibration values are permanently stored in
E2PROM and should not be changed in the field, unless unacceptable error or a
factory checksum error occurs. See Factory Recalibration for details. Field
scaling is achieved by applying minimum and full scale values from a
calibration source and storing the values by a single DIP switch transition. Field
scaling is available for all input and output ranges and the values are
permanently stored in E2PROM until reprogramming occurs.
After field scaling, the IAMAs can be changed between Factory and Field
modes for a particular range, which restores the respective setting. The Factory
and Field E2PROM locations contain the same calibration values when the
IAMA is received from the factory. Therefore, until the IAMA is field scaled,
factory and field modes perform identically. See SCALING PROCEDURE for
detailed instructions on field programming the IAMA.
The units can be scaled to any minimum scale and full scale values within the
extent of the selected range. The closer together the minimum and full scale
values are to each other, the less accurate the signal will be. For example, if the
0 to 1 V input range is selected, and the unit is scaled for 0 to 0.5 V, the signal
has the same resolution as the 0 to 1 V range. Since this resolution will be two
times the percentage of span for 0.5 V, more accuracy can be achieved by using
the 0 to 0.5 V range.
The input may exceed the full scale value for the selected range by 10% of
span, but the IAMA will not update the output beyond 10% over range.
The red and green LED’s indicate the status of the modules during scaling and
normal operation. Table 1, LED Indications, details the LED indications for
various unit conditions.
The IAMA – Signal Conditioning Module Series is designed for use in
industrial environments. Suppressor diodes protect both input and output
circuits from wiring errors and transient high voltage conditions.

INPUTS
The IAMAs accept a full range of process signal inputs and isolate and
convert these signals to common industrial control signals. The input signal
combinations are configured by making specific DIP switch selections on the 10
position DIP switch.

OUTPUTS
As with the input choices, the process signal output of the modules is DIP
switch selectable. A 1 position DIP switch is used to select between the 1 mA/20
mA output ranges. The maximum output current signal is 22 mA with ≤600 Ω
output resistance and the maximum output voltage signal is 11 V with ≥1 KΩ
output resistance.

ZERO AND SPAN
The input zero and span are set by first applying the minimum value then
transitioning S1-2 to store that value. Next, the full scale value is applied and the
DIP switch transition stores the value. The output scaling is performed in a
similar manner but the output is driven to the desired minimum and full scale
values by the calibration source applied to the input. S1-1 is used to store the
minimum and full scale output values.
The span is defined by: span = (full scale - minimum scale).

ILLEGAL RANGE SELECTIONS AND CHANGES
* Terminal number is dependent on max. input voltage.

MODULE ISOLATION
IAMA modules feature “3-Way” Signal Isolation. The 3-Way isolation is a
combination of optical and transformer isolation. The optical isolation provides
common mode voltage (CMV) isolation up to 1.5 kV between the sensor input and
the process signal output. The IAMA’s power is isolated from the sensor signal
input and the process signal output by a DC/DC transformer isolation circuit.

The ranges should only be selected before power is applied. If an invalid input
or output range is selected when power is applied the output is set to approximately
0 VDC and the red LED indicates the error according to Table 1. Power must be
removed and valid ranges selected for the IAMA to operate properly.
If S1 switches 3 through 10 are changed while the IAMA is operating, the red
LED indicates a range change according to Table 1, LED Indications and the
output goes to the previously stored range minimum scale value. Normal
operation will be resumed if the switches are placed back in the previous
positions or power is removed and restored.

1-717-767-6511

743

CHECKSUM ERRORS

FIELD OR FACTORY MODE SELECTION

A checksum is performed every time power is applied to the IAMA. If a
checksum error occurs, the LEDs will indicate where the error occurred
according to Table 1, LED Indications. Operation with a checksum error is not
recommended but can be done in critical situations. If an error occurs, recalibration of the field or factory ranges to be used must be performed.
If a field checksum error occurs, the IAMA will operate only in factory mode.
If a factory checksum occurs, the IAMA will operate only in a previously
calibrated field mode. Do not perform a field scaling until the factory checksum
is cleared. Since a checksum error is a high priority LED indication, the LEDs will
indicate the error until it is cleared. This will exclude other LED information.

SELECTING FIELD MODE (2 Methods):

TABLE 1, LED INDICATIONS
CONDITION

GREEN LED

RED LED

Normal Operation

Off

Scaling Mode

Alternate with Red

Alternate with Green

Under Range

Off

Slow Flash (0.8 sec rate)

Over Range

Off

Fast Flash (0.4 sec rate)

Invalid Range

Off

Illegal Range Change

Off

Factory Checksum

Off

On, short off

Field Checksum

On, short off

Off

User Factory Calibration Fast Flash for 2 sec Off

GETTING STARTED

One method for the Input (1 or 2 below) should be configured, and one
method for the Output (3 or 4 below) should be configured.
1. FACTORY preprogrammed settings for the Input, see Section 1.0
2. FIELD scaling method for the Input, see Section 2.0
3. FACTORY preprogrammed setting for the Output, see Section 3.0
4. FIELD scaling method for the Output, see Section 4.0
Note: The ranges should only be changed while power is removed from the IAMA.

TABLE 2, OUTPUT RANGE SETTINGS
RANGE DIP
SWITCHES

OUTPUT
RANGE
0-5V

VOLTAGE
OUTPUTS

0 - 10 V
0 - 1 mA

CURRENT
OUTPUTS

4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA

Note: DIP switch settings

0
0
0
0
1

0
0
1
1
0

0
1
0
1
0

0 = OFF

1 = ON

TABLE 3, INPUT RANGE SETTINGS
RANGE
0 - 20 mV
0 - 50 mV
0 - 100 mV
0 - 200 mV
0 - 500 mV
INPUT
VOLTAGE

0-1V
0-2V
1-5V
0-5V
0 - 10 V
0 - 20 V
0 - 50 V
0 - 100 V
0 - 1 mA
0 - 2 mA
0 - 5 mA

INPUT
CURRENT

0 - 10 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA
0 - 50 mA
0 - 100 mA

Note: DIP switch settings

744

RANGE DIP SWITCHES
6

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

0 = OFF

1. Scale the input or output according to SCALING PROCEDURE 2.0 or 4.0
2. Before applying power, set the input or output (or both) field/factory switch
to the up (field) position. Field calibration values will be restored upon
power-up. If the IAMA has not been previously field calibrated, the E2PROM
will contain the factory calibration values which will be restored.

SELECTING FACTORY MODE (2 Methods):
1. Before applying power to the IAMA set the input or output (or both)
field/factory switch to the down (factory) position. Factory calibration values
will be restored upon power-up.
2. While power is applied to the IAMA and it is operating in the field input
and/or output mode, set the desired field/factory switch(s) to the down
(factory) position. The factory calibration values will be restored.

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods must
be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the electrical
noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for various
installations. Cable length, routing, and shield termination are very important and
can mean the difference between a successful or troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the rail where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation, local
codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied to the unit be
protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use the numbers on
the label to identify the position number with the proper function. Strip the wire,
leaving approximately 1/4" (6 mm) of bare wire exposed. Insert the wire into
the terminal, and tighten the screw until the wire is clamped tightly.

1 = ON

www.redlion.net

POWER AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

INPUT CONNECTIONS

Power
Primary power is connected to terminals 2 and 3 (labeled VDC- and VDC+).
For best results, the Power should be relatively “clean” and within the specified
variation limits. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits or from circuits
that also power loads that cycle on and off, should be avoided.

Wiring for a current input is
connected to terminals 10 (IIN) and
12 (INPUT COMMON).

Current Output
Wiring for a current output is connected to terminals 1 (IOUT-) and 4 (IOUT+).
DIP switch S2 should be set for the desired full scale output current. (20 mA =
ON; 1 mA = OFF).
Voltage Output
Wiring for a voltage output is connected to terminals 5 (VOUT-) and 6
(VOUT+).
Note: Although signals are present at voltage and current outputs at the same
time, only the selected range is in calibration at any one time.
Example: A 0 to 10 VDC output is selected. The voltage level present at the
voltage output terminals is in calibration, but the signal appearing at
the current output terminals does not conform to any of the current
output ranges.

Current Input

Voltage Input
Wiring for a voltage input is
connected to terminal 12 (INPUT
COMMON) and one of the three
available voltage terminals listed
below, depending on maximum
input voltage.
Terminal 7: 1 VDC max.
Terminal 8: 10 VDC max.
Terminal 9: 100 VDC max.

SCALING PROCEDURE
The accuracy of the IAMA is dependent on the accuracy of the calibration source and the voltage
or current meter used in the scaling process.
If an out of range (see Table 1 for LED indications) or illegal (full scale less than minimum scale)
scaling is attempted, the factory calibration values will be stored in place of the field values. This will
prohibit erroneous operation of the IAMA. The scaling procedure will have to be repeated.
The final storage of the zero and full scale values to E2PROM is not done until the last transition of
the mode/calibration DIP switches (S1-1 or S1-2). Therefore, the scaling can be aborted any time
before the full scale value is saved. This is accomplished by cycling power to the IAMA. The IAMA
will restore the factory or previous field scaling values at power up depending on the setting of the
DIP switches. See Mode Selection for more detailed instructions for selecting factory and field modes
at power up. See Table 2 and 3 for the input and output range DIP switch settings.

1.0 INPUT SET-UP USING FACTORY CONFIGURATION
1.1 Remove power.
1.2 Connect signal wires to the correct input terminals based on the maximum
signal input.
Terminal 7: max. signal input 1 VDC
Terminal 8: max. signal input 10 VDC
Terminal 9: max. signal input 100 VDC
Terminal 10: max. signal input 100 mA
Terminal 12: signal common
1.3 Set Input Range switches (S1 switches 6 through 10) to the desired Input Range
(See Table 3). (0 to 10 VDC range shown).
Step 1.3

1.4 Set Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) to the off position.
Step 1.4

1.5 Apply power to the IAMA.
Solid illumination of Green LED if signal is within the minimum and maximum
limits of the selected input range.
Slow blinking of Red LED if signal decreases below minimum limit of selected input
range.
Rapid blinking of Red LED if signal increases above maximum limit of selected
input range.
1.6 Input set-up complete. Go to Step 3.0 or Step 4.0.

1-717-767-6511

745

2.0 INPUT SCALING USING FIELD CONFIGURATION

2.1 Remove power.
2.2 Connect signal source to the correct input terminals based on the maximum
signal input.
Terminal 7: max. signal input 1 VDC
Terminal 8: max. signal input 10 VDC
Terminal 9: max. signal input 100 VDC
Terminal 10: max. signal input 100 mA
Terminal 12: signal common

Step 2.3

2.3 Set Input Range switches (S1 switches 6 through 10) to the desired input range
(See Table 3). Select the lowest possible range that will support the desired
maximum signal. Example: if the desired span is 20 mV to 85 mV, the best range
selection is 0 to 100 mV. The 0 to 200 mV will also suffice, but the accuracy will
be reduced. (0 to 10 VDC range shown).
2.4 Set Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) to the off position.

Step 2.4

2.5 Apply power to the IAMA and allow a warm up period of five minutes. Follow
the manufacturer’s warm up procedure for the calibration source.
2.6 Set Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) to the on position.
The Red and Green LEDs will alternately blink.

Step 2.6

Step 2.8

2.7 Apply desired minimum scale signal.
2.8 Set Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) to the off position.
The Red and Green LEDs will alternately blink.
If the signal is equal or below the minimum limit of the selected range, the Red LED
blinks slowly and the Green LED turns off. Removing power aborts scaling,
begin at Step 2.1.
2.9 Apply maximum scale input.
The Red and Green LEDs will alternately blink.

Step 2.10

2.10 Set Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) to the on position.
Red LED extinguishes and Green LED becomes solid. Your scaled values are now
saved and recalled if the Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) is in the on
position when power is applied.
Red LED will blink slowly if signal is equal to or below minimum limit and blinks
rapidly if signal increases above maximum limit.
2.11 Input scaling complete. Go to Step 3.0 or Step 4.0.

3.0 OUTPUT SET-UP USING FACTORY CONFIGURATION
3.1 Remove power.
3.2 For voltage output values, go to Step 3.4
For current output values, continue at Step 3.3
3.3 Set 20 mA/1 mA switch (S2) to desired full scale output.
(20 mA - on; 1 mA - off)
Step 3.3 & 3.4

3.4 Set Output Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 1) to the off position.
3.5 Set Output Range switches (S1 switches 3, 4, and 5) to the desired Output Range
(See Table 2). (4 to 20 mA range shown)

Step 3.5

3.6 Connect external device to appropriate IAMA output terminals.
Terminal 6: + Voltage
Terminal 5: - Voltage
Terminal 4: + Current
Terminal 1: - Current
3.7 Apply power to the IAMA and allow a warm up period of five minutes. Output
set-up complete.

746

www.redlion.net

4.0 OUTPUT SCALING USING FIELD CONFIGURATION

H
4.1 Remove power.
4.2 For voltage output scaling, go to Step 4.4.
For current output scaling, continue at Step 4.3.
4.3 Set 20 mA/1 mA switch (S2) to desired full scale output.
(20 mA - on; 1 mA - off)
Step 4.4

Step 4.5

4.4 Set Output Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 1) to the off position.

4.5 Set Output Range switches (S1 switches 3, 4, and 5) to the desired Output Range
(See Table 2). Select the lowest possible range that will support the desired full
scale output. Example: if the desired span is 1 V to 4 V, the best range selection is
0 to 5 V. (0 to 5 VDC range shown)
4.6 Connect volt or current meter to appropriate IAMA output terminals.
Terminal 6: + Voltage
Terminal 5: - Voltage
Terminal 4: + Current
Terminal 1: - Current
4.7 An input signal is required to complete output scaling. If previous scaled input is
used (completed in Step 2.0), Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) and Input
Range switches (S1 switches 6 through 10) must remain in the same positions. If
another signal source is used, set Input Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 2) to off
position and Input Range switches (S1 switches 6 through 10) to the desired input
range (See Table 3).
4.8 Connect input signal source to the correct input terminals based on the maximum
signal input.
Terminal 7: max. signal input 1 VDC
Terminal 8: max. signal input 10 VDC
Terminal 9: max. signal input 100 VDC
Terminal 10: max. signal input 100 mA
Terminal 12: signal common
4.9 Apply power to the IAMA and allow a warm up period of five minutes.

Step 4.10

4.10 Set Output Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 1) to the on position.
The Red and Green LEDs will alternately blink.
If Red LED blinks slowly, increase signal until Red and Green LEDs alternately
blink.
4.11 Adjust the input signal until the desired * minimum output level is displayed on
the volt or current meter.
The Red and Green LEDs will alternately blink.

Step 4.12

4.12 Set Output Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 1) to the off position.
The Red and Green LEDs alternately blink.
If the signal is equal to or below the minimum limit of the selected range, the Red
LED blinks slowly and the Green LED turns off. Removing power aborts scaling.
Start over at Step 4.1.
4.13 Adjust the input signal until the desired * maximum output level is displayed on
the volt or current meter.

Step 4.14

4.14 Set Output Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 1) to the on position.
Red LED extinguishes and Green LED becomes solid. Your scaled values are now
saved and will be recalled if the Output Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 1) is in
the on position when power is applied.
4.15 Output scaling is complete.
* If the minimum output is higher than the maximum output the module reverses
its output behaviour accordingly.

1-717-767-6511

747

RECALIBRATING FACTORY STORED VALUES
WARNING: Read the complete procedure at least
once before attempting to recalibrate the factory
values. This procedure should only be
performed due to factory checksum error or
unacceptable error. This procedure should be
performed by qualified technicians using
accurate calibration equipment.

The following list outlines conditions that are unique to factory recalibration:
1. Unlike the field scaling procedures, there are no software under and over
range indications while performing a factory recalibration. Therefore,
care must be taken to insure the selected range extents are not exceeded.
The minimum scale and full scale calibration values must be set to the
extents of the range being calibrated.
For example: If the Input Range DIP switches are set for the 4-20 mA
range, minimum scale must be set at 4 mA, and full scale must be set
at 20 mA.
2. At least one input calibration must be completed before calibrating any
output range. When calibrating the input voltage range, it is
recommended that a range above 1 V be used to provide better accuracy.
3. If multiple input or output ranges are to be calibrated, DO NOT
REMOVE POWER TO CHANGE THE RANGE. Place the appropriate
Field/Fact. DIP switch; S1-1 for outputs, and S1-2 for inputs to the down
position, and set the remaining DIP switches for the range to be
calibrated. Note: Be sure to change the terminal wiring to match the Input
or Output range DIP switch settings before performing the calibration
procedure. Set calibration source to 0 V or 0 mA before changing wiring.

INPUT RECALIBRATION
1. To enter the factory calibration mode, set switches S1-1 and S1-2 down, S13 through S1-5 up, and S1-6 through S1-10 down.
2. Connect a signal source to the correct input terminals based on the
maximum signal input to be calibrated. If an output range will be calibrated
after the input range is calibrated, connect a voltage or current meter to the
appropriate output terminals at this time.
3. Apply power to the IAMA. After the version number indication, the green
LED will flash rapidly for 2 seconds indicating the factory calibration mode
has been entered. Allow the IAMA to warm up for 5 minutes minimum and
follow the manufacturer’s warm up procedure for the calibration source.
4. Set the Input Range DIP switches to the desired input range according to
Table 3.
5. Complete Steps 2.6 through 2.10 of Input Scaling Using Field
Configuration. Note: There will be no over or under range indication of the
LED’s during this procedure, so use care not to exceed the range extents.
6. If an output is to be calibrated, continue from #2 of Output Recalibration
below. If no further input or output calibration is to be completed, return
S1-1 and S1-2 to the down position and remove power from the IAMA.
Apply power and check for accurate operation of the newly calibrated range
or ranges.

OUTPUT RECALIBRATION
1. Complete 1 through 5 of the input recalibration procedure for at least
one range.
2. For current output, set 20 mA/1 mA switch (S2) to desired full scale output.
(20 mA - on; 1 mA - off)
3. Set Output Field/Fact. switch (S1 switch 1) to the off position.
4. Set the Output Range DIP switches to the desired output range according to
Table 2.
5. Complete Steps 4.10 through 4.14 of Output Scaling Using Field
Configuration. Note: There will be no over or under range indication of the
LED’s during this procedure, so use care not to exceed the range extents.
6. If no further calibration is to be completed, return S1-1 and S1-2 to the down
position and remove power from the IAMA. Apply power and check for
accurate operation of the newly calibrated range or ranges.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

G Rail Installation
To install the IAMA on a “G”
style DIN rail, angle the module
so that the upper groove of the
“foot” catches under the lip of the
top rail. Push the module toward
the rail until it snaps into place.
To remove a module from the
rail, push up on the bottom of the
module while pulling out and
away from the rail.

748

T Rail Installation
To install the IAMA on a “T”
style rail, angle the module so
that the top groove of the “foot”
is located over the lip of the top
rail. Push the module toward the
rail until it snaps into place. To
remove a module from the rail,
insert a screwdriver into the slot
on the bottom of the “foot”, and
pry upwards on the module until
it releases from the rail.

www.redlion.net

APPLICATION
Cost efficiency measurements of a printing company included the
reduction of bulk stock of the various inks used in their printing processes.
The company currently had various ink flow and level devices with different
current and voltage outputs and wanted to record these measurements into a
control room PC. Several IAMA Universal Signal Conditioning Modules
were the answer. The IAMA’s universal input allowed for easy signal
conditioning of the various output signals to the required PC’s Bus Board 0
to 10 VDC input signal. The factory calibration settings of the IAMA could
be used with the devices in which the flow and level pressure was linear to
the signal. The IAMA could also be scaled utilizing the field calibration
method with the devices where pressure affected the signal slope
specifications. In this case, the IAMA’s re-transmitted 0 to 10 VDC output
was field calibrated, negating the expense and time required to rewrite the
PC’s software parameters. In addition to accepting multiple signal types and
field calibration features, the IAMA also provides the necessary electrical
isolation between the control room PC and the hazards of the printing floor
electrical noise.

1-717-767-6511

749

H
MODEL IAMA - CONFIGURABLE 3-WAY ISOLATING AMPLIFIER
z 3-WAY ISOLATION OF ANALOG SIGNALS
z UNIVERSAL CONVERSION MODULE - INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
SELECTED VIA DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
z OVER 35 INPUT AND OUTPUT ANALOG CONVERSION
COMBINATIONS
z ULTRA SLIM DESIGN – ONLY 0.244" WIDE
z 19 to 30 VDC POWER

UL
R

LISTED

PROCESS CONTROL
EQUIPMENT FOR HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS 31ZN
CLASS 1, DIV 2
GROUPS A, B, C, D T5

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The IAMA can isolate and convert over 35 combinations of analog signal
ranges. The IAMA converts and transmits signals linearly proportional to the
input. DIP switch range selection eliminates the need to order and stock
different modules for each input and output signal range, and allows quick and
convenient setup for over 35 standard signal conversions. In addition to the
conversion capabilities, the IAMA modules feature optically isolated
Input/Output signal circuits and isolated Power to Input, Power to Output
circuits. The modules’ overall full scale accuracy typically exceed 0.04%. DIN
rail mounting saves time and panel space. The units are equipped with universal
mounting feet for attachment to standard top hat profile rail according to
EN50022 - 35x7.5.

ORDERING INFORMATION
IAMA

750

DESCRIPTION

Configurable 3-Way Isolating Amplifier

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

MODEL NO.

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

PART NUMBER

IAMA0006

1. POWER: 19.2 to 30 V DC, 450 mW max.
2. INPUT / OUTPUT RANGES: See table 1
3. SPAN ADJUSTMENT: Potentiometer, located below transparent top cover.
4. MAX INPUT SIGNAL:
Current: 50 mA
Voltage: 30 V
5. INPUT RESISTANCE:
Current: Approx. 50 Ω
Voltage: Approx. 100 kΩ
6. MAX OUTPUT SIGNAL:
Current: 28 mA/12.5 V
Voltage: 12.5 V/22 mA
7. LOAD RESISTANCE:
Current: 500 Ω max.
Voltage: 10 kΩ min
8. OUTPUT COMPLIANCE:
Current: 12.5 V max (500 Ω). Ripple: < 20 mV
Voltage: 22 mA (10 kΩ). Ripple: < 20 mV
9. TRANSMISSION ERROR:
The transmission error without adjustment is < 0.4%. Using the
potentiometer, the error can be adjusted to < 0.1%.
10. TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT:
Max.: < 0.01%/K
Typ.: < 0.002%/K
11. CUT-OFF FREQUENCY: 100 Hz
12. STEP RESPONSE (FROM 10 to 90 %): 3.5 msec
13. TEST VOLTAGE (Input/Output/Supply): 1.5 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.
14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -20°C to 65°C (-4°F to 149°F)
Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to 185°F)

www.redlion.net

INPUTS

15. TESTS/APPROVALS:

The IAMA accepts a full range of process signal inputs and isolates and
converts these signals to common industrial control signals. The input signal
combinations are configured by making specific DIP switch selections on the 6
and 2 position DIP switches.

PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
LISTED
31ZN
Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D T5
C

UL
R

A) This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C and D or non- hazardous locations only.
B) Warning - explosion hazard - substitution of components may impair
suitability for Class 1, Division 2.
C) Warning - explosion hazard - do not disconnect equipment unless power
has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
16. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:

OUTPUTS

As with the input choices, the process signal output of the modules is DIP
switch selectable. The maximum output current signal is 28 mA with =500 Ω
output resistance and the maximum output voltage signal is 12.5 V with =10 KΩ
output resistance. The transmission error without adjustment is < 0.4%. Using
the potentiometer, the error can be adjusted to < 0.1%.

TABLE 1 - CONFIGURATION

Conformance With EMC Guideline 89/336/EEC And Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Immunity to Interference According to EN 61000-6-21

RANGES

Discharge of static electricity (ESD)

EN 61000-4-2

Criterion B2

Electromagnetic HF field

EN 61000-4-3

Criterion A3

Fast transients (Burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Criterion B2

Surge voltage capacities (Surge)

EN 61000-4-5

Criterion B2

Conducted disturbance

EN 61000-4-6

Criterion A3

EN 550114

Class A5

Noise Emission According to EN 50081-2

Noise emission of housing

OUT

0 –10 V

0 – 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 – 10 V
2 – 10 V
0–5V
1–5V
0 – 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 – 10 V
2 – 10 V
0–5V
1–5V
0 – 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 – 10 V
2 – 10 V
0–5V
1–5V
0 – 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 – 10 V
2 – 10 V
0–5V
1–5V
0 – 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 – 10 V
2 – 10 V
0–5V
1–5V
0 – 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 – 10 V
2 – 10 V
0–5V
1–5V

off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON

off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON

2 – 10 V

EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000
Criterion B: Temporary impairment to operational behavior that is corrected
by the device itself.
3 Criterion A: Normal operating behavior within the defined limits.
4 EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11
5 Class A: Area of application industry.
17. CONNECTIONS: 12 AWG max., Stripping length: 0.47" (12 mm)
18. CONSTRUCTION: Polybutylenterephthalate PBT, black
19. MOUNTING: Standard DIN top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
- 35x7.5
20. WEIGHT: 2 oz. (54 g)
1
2

0–5V

1–5V

BLOCK DIAGRAM
0 – 20 mA

4 - 20 mA

1-717-767-6511

DIP SWITCHES
OUTPUT (S2)
3
4
5

off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off

off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
ON
off
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
ON
off
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
ON
off
ON
off

off
ON
off
ON
off
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
ON
off
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
ON
off
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off

INPUT (S1)
1
2

off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off

off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

751

WIRING CONNECTIONS

INSTALLATION

Primary power is connected to terminals 7 or 3 (19.2 – 30 VDC) and 8 or 4
(GND 3). For best results, the power should be relatively “clean” and within the
specified variation limits. Drawing power from heavily loaded circuits or from
circuits that also power loads that cycle on and off, should be avoided.
The input signal is connected to pins 1 (In U,I) and 2 (GND 1). Connections
for the output signal are made on pins 5 (Out U,I) and 6 (GND 2).

T Rail Installation
To install the IAMA on a “T”
style rail, angle the module so that
the top groove of the “foot” is
located over the lip of the top rail.
Push the module toward the rail
until it snaps into place. To
remove a module from the rail,
insert a screwdriver into the slot
on the bottom of the “foot”, and
pry upwards on the module until it
releases from the rail.

APPLICATION
Cost efficiency measurements of a printing company included the reduction
of bulk stock of the various inks used in their printing processes. The company
currently had various ink flow and level devices with different current and
voltage outputs and wanted to record these measurements into a control
room PC. Several IAMA Universal Signal Conditioning Modules were
the answer. The IAMA’s universal input allowed for easy signal
conditioning of the various output signals to the required PC’s Bus
Board 0 to 10 VDC input signal. In this case, the IAMA’s retransmitted 0 to 10 VDC output was field calibrated, negating the
expense and time required to rewrite the PC’s software
parameters. In addition to accepting multiple signal types,
the IAMA also provides the necessary electrical isolation
between the control room PC and the hazards of the
printing floor electrical noise.

752

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL AAMA - UNIVERSAL SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULE
z 3-WAY ISOLATION OF ANALOG SIGNALS
z UNIVERSAL CONVERSION MODULE - INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
CAN BE SELECTED VIA DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
z OVER 100 INPUT AND OUTPUT ANALOG CONVERSION
COMBINATIONS
z 18 to 30 VDC MODULE POWER

DESCRIPTION
The AAMA3535 Universal Signal Conditioning Module can isolate and
convert over 100 combinations of industry standard analog signal ranges. The
universal DIP switch selection feature eliminates the need to order and stock
different modules for each input and output signal.
In addition to the conversion capabilities, the AAMA3535 module features
an optically isolated Input/Output signal circuit and a transformer (galvanically)
isolated Power to Input, Power to Output circuit.
The AAMA3535 module meets the stringent IEC 801 Standard for surge
suppression, noise emission and noise immunity. The module is also CE marked
for European applications.
The module’s overall full scale accuracy can exceed 0.005% depending upon
range selection and calibration. A hybrid SMD calibration circuit stores all
range and amplification settings. The hybrid circuit maintains a very high
accuracy and low drift output signal.
The module’s environmental operating temperature range is -20°C to +65°C.
The modular high density packaging and mounting saves time and panel space.
The modules snap onto standard 35 mm flat DIN rail, and uses removable
terminal blocks for easy module wiring.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 18 to 30 VDC @ 60 mA
2. INPUT RANGES:
0 to 60 mV

0 to 100 mV

0 to 200 mV

0 to 300 mV

0 to 500 mV
±100 mV

0 to 1 V

0 to 5 V

0 to 10 V

0 to 20 V

±200 mV

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V

±10 V

±20 V

0 to 5 mA

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

1 to 5 V

3. ZERO/SPAN ADJUSTMENTS: Range Dependent
4. MAX. INPUT SIGNAL:
Current Input: 50 mA
Voltage Input: 30 V
5. INPUT RESISTANCE:
Current: 50 Ω
Voltage: 1 MΩ
6. INPUT PROTECTION: Surge suppressor diodes
7. OUTPUT RANGES:
0 to 5 V

±5 V

0 to 10 V

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

1 to 5 V

8. MAX. OUTPUT SIGNAL:
Current Output: 30 mA
Voltage Output: 15 V
9. LOAD RESISTANCE:
Current Output: ≤ 500 Ω max.
Voltage Output: ≥ 5 KΩ

±10 V

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

10. ISOLATION LEVEL INPUT/OUTPUT: 1.5 kV @ 50 Hz, 1 minute Opto
Isolation
11. POWER TO INPUT/OUTPUT: 1.0 kV @ 50 Hz, 1 minute Transformer
DC/DC
12. MAX. INPUT FREQUENCY: 30 Hz
13. RESPONSE TIME: 0.034 sec. max.
14. OVERALL FULL SCALE ACCURACY: 0.1% to 0.05% Dependent on
Calibration Source
15. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 to +65°C (-4 to 145°F)
16. TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT: 100 ppm/K
17. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is green, high impact plastic
18. CONNECTIONS: 14 AWG wire max.
19. MOUNTING: Standard DIN Top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
- 35 x 7.5 and 35 x 15
20. WEIGHT: 3.76 oz (106.59 g)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

AAMA

Universal Signal Conditioning

AAMA3535

The AAMA3535 module is ordered nonconfigured, allowing the user the
flexibility to select their input and output signals by setting the appropriate DIP
switch combination.

1-717-767-6511

753

INPUTS

BLOCK DIAGRAM

The AAMA3535 module accepts a full range of process signal inputs and
will isolate and/or convert these signals to common industrial control signals.
The input and output signal combinations are configured by making specific
DIP switch selections. The DIP switches can be easily accessed by pushing the
side tabs and sliding the module up in the case.

OUTPUTS
As with the input choices, the process signal outputs of the module are DIP
switch selectable. The maximum output current signal is 30 mA with ≤500 Ω
output resistance and the maximum output voltage signal is 15 V with ≥5 KΩ
output resistance.

DIP SWITCHES

MODULE ISOLATION
AAMA3535 modules feature “3-Way” Signal Isolation. The 3-Way isolation
is a combination of optical and transformer isolation. The optical isolation
provides common mode voltage (CMV) isolation up to 1.0 kV between the
sensor input and the process signal output. The module’s power is isolated from
the sensor signal input and the process signal output by a DC/DC transformer
isolation circuit.

SURGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
The Signal Conditioning Module is designed for use in industrial
environments. Stringent IEC testing has shown that the modules pass the IEC
801.2 (Electrostatic Discharge) and IEC 801.4 (Electrical Fast Transient/Burst)
tests. Suppressor diodes protect both input and output circuits from wiring errors.

ZERO AND SPAN

WIRING DIAGRAM

The AAMA3535 module incorporates two
potentiometers for adjusting separate zero and
span settings. The module provides a ±5% zero
and span fine calibration adjustment. To use this
calibration feature, the zero point should be set
first, by adjusting the potentiometer labeled
ZERO. Adjusting the Zero reference will
proportionally offset the output range. After the
Zero has been set, adjusting the SPAN
potentiometer will change the signal gain.

INPUT/OUTPUT DIP SWITCH SELECTION TABLES
DIP SWITCH SELECTIONS FOR 0-5 VOLT OUTPUT
DIP SWITCH 2
Input

DIP SWITCH 1
7

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

0-200 mV

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V

0-10 V

0-20 V

±100 mV

±200 mV

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V

±10 V

±20 V

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V
0-10 V
0-20 V

ON
ON

±200 mV
ON

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V
±5 V

±10 V
ON

1-5 V

±300 mV

4-20 mA

±60 mV
±100 mV

0-300 mV

0-5 V

ON
ON

0-200 mV
ON

ON
ON

0-100 mV

ON
ON

0-20 mA

Input
0-60 mV

8
ON

7
ON
ON

6
ON

± 60 mV

0-5 mA

±20 V
ON

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

4-20mA

Note: Blank space = DIP switch OFF.

754

www.redlion.net

1-5 V

DIP SWITCH SELECTIONS FOR 0-10 VOLT OUTPUT
DIP SWITCH 2
Input

DIP SWITCH 1
7

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

0-200 mV

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V

0-10 V

0-20 V

±100 mV

±200 mV

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V

±10 V

±20 V

ON
ON

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V
0-10 V
0-20 V

ON
ON

±200 mV
ON

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V
±5 V

±10 V
ON

1-5 V

±300 mV

4-20 mA

±60 mV
±100 mV

0-300 mV

0-5 V

0-200 mV
ON

ON
ON

0-100 mV

ON
ON

0-20 mA

Input
0-60 mV

8
ON

7
ON
ON

6
ON

±60 mV

0-5 mA

±20 V
ON

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

1-5 V

Note: Blank space = DIP switch OFF.

DIP SWITCH SELECTIONS FOR ±5 VOLT OUTPUT
DIP SWITCH 2
Input

0-60 mV

0-100 mV
0-200 mV

DIP SWITCH 1
7

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V

0-10 V

0-20 V

Input

0-60 mV

ON
ON

0-100 mV

0-200 mV
ON

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-10 V

0-5 V
ON

±60 mV

±100 mV

±200 mV

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V

±10 V

±20 V

0-20 V
ON

±100 mV

ON
ON

ON
ON
ON

±60 mV
±200 mV

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V
ON

±10 V
ON

±20 V

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

1-5 V

0-5 mA

1-5 V

Note: Blank space = DIP switch OFF.

1-717-767-6511

755

DIP SWITCH SELECTIONS FOR 1-5 VOLT OUTPUT
DIP SWITCH 2

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

0-200 mV

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V

0-10 V

0-20 V

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

DIP SWITCH 1

Input

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

ON
ON

ON
ON
ON

0-200 mV
ON

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V
0-5 V

0-10 V
ON

4-20 mA

1-5 V

0-20 V

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

1-5 V

Note: Blank space = DIP switch OFF.

DIP SWITCH SELECTIONS FOR ±10 VOLT OUTPUT
DIP SWITCH 2
Input

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

0-200 mV

0-300 mV

DIP SWITCH 1
7

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V

0-10 V

0-20 V

Input

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

ON
ON

ON
ON
ON

0-200 mV
ON

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V
0-5 V

±100 mV

±200 mV

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V

±10 V

ON
ON

0-300 mV

±60 mV

±20 V

0-10 V
ON

0-20 V
ON

ON
ON

±60 mV
±100 mV

±200 mV
ON

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V
ON

±10 V

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

1-5 V

Note: Blank space = DIP switch OFF.

756

www.redlion.net

±20 V
ON

0-5 mA

1-5 V

DIP SWITCH SELECTIONS FOR 0-20 mA OUTPUT
DIP SWITCH 2
Input

DIP SWITCH 1
7

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

0-200 mV

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V

0-10 V

0-20 V

±100 mV

±200 mV

±300 mV

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V

±5 V

±10 V

±20 V

ON
ON

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V
0-10 V
0-20 V

ON
ON

±200 mV
ON

±500 mV

±1 V

±2 V
±5 V

±10 V
ON

1-5 V

±300 mV

4-20 mA

±60 mV
±100 mV

0-300 mV

0-5 V

0-200 mV
ON

ON
ON

0-100 mV

ON
ON

0-20 mA

Input
0-60 mV

8
ON

7
ON

6
ON

±60 mV

0-5 mA

±20 V
ON

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

1-5 V

Note: Blank space = DIP switch OFF.

DIP SWITCH SELECTIONS FOR 4-20 mA OUTPUT
2

DIP SWITCH 2
5
6
7

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

0-200 mV

0-300 mV

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V

0-10 V

0-20 V

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

DIP SWITCH 1
4
5
6

Input

0-60 mV

0-100 mV

ON
ON

ON
ON
ON

0-200 mV
ON

0-500 mV

0-1 V

0-2 V

0-5 V
ON

0-10 V
ON

4-20 mA

1-5 V

0-300 mV

0-20 V
ON

0-5 mA

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

1-5 V

Note: Blank space = DIP switch OFF.

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Module accuracy is dependent upon your calibration reference. The higher
your calibration source accuracy, the lower the overall signal conditioner
conversion error.

CALIBRATION OF MODULES WITH 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V
Output adjustment of the 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V range:
1. Set DIP switches as shown in the DIP switch selection Tables.
2. Apply power, and let the unit stabilize for 5 minutes.
3. Set up output adjustment:
a. Apply low scale input range value; adjust zero pot for 0 V, ±0.5 mV.
b. Finally, apply full scale input from calibration source; adjust span pot for
full scale ±0.5 mV.

3. Set up output adjustment:
a. Apply low scale input range value from calibration source; record output
as MV1. (If using 0 to 20 mA output range, apply 2 mA for low scale
input value.)
b. Apply full scale input from calibration source; record output as MV2.
4. With full scale input value still applied:
a. First calculate the span pot adjustment point “A” using the formula:
A= MV2 X constant/ (MV2-MV1). Adjust the span pot for value “A”, plus
or minus the adjustment tolerance. (See below table for constant and
tolerance.)
b. Finally, adjust the zero pot for the nominal full scale output value, plus or
minus the adjustment tolerance.
The Constants and Adjustment Tolerances are as follows:

CALIBRATION OF MODULES
WITH ±5 V, ±10 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA OR 0 to 20 mA
Output adjustment of ±5 V, ±10 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA ranges:
1. Set DIP switches as shown in the DIP switch selection Tables.
2. Apply power, and let the unit stabilize for 5 minutes.

1-717-767-6511

INPUT RANGE

CONSTANT

ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCE

±5 V

10 V

±0.5 mV

±10 V

20 V

±0.5 mV

1 to 5 V

±1 mV

0 to 20 mA

18 mA

±1

4 to 20 mA

16 mA

±1

μA
μA

757

H
MODEL AIMI - 0 (4) TO 20 MA PASSIVE LOOP POWERED ISOLATOR
DESCRIPTION
The AIMI0202 passive isolator is used for the electrical isolation and
processing of analog 0(4) to 20 mA standard current signals. The AIMI0202
provides electrical isolation between the control electronics and process I/O. In
addition, interference signals above 75 Hz are effectively suppressed.
Input and output circuit do not require separate auxiliary power. The
AIMI0202 obtains power from the input signal. The modules are snapped onto
symmetrical DIN rails in accordance with EN 50 022.

VOLTAGE DROP AT INPUT
When using the AIMI0202, ensure that the current-driving voltage of the
measuring transducer is sufficient for driving the maximum current of 20 mA,
with a power loss of 2.5 V (2.5 V + (20 mA * RLOAD).
Voltage drop across the input is calculated by determining the load resistance
of the output loop, drawing a vertical line to the curve, then horizontally to the
voltage drop.
UE

SPECIFICATIONS
1. INPUT RANGE: 0(4) to 20 mA
2. MAXIMUM INPUT CURRENT/VOLTAGE: 50 mA/30 VDC
3. INPUT RESISTANCE@ 20mA: 125-1125 Ω (dependent on load)
4. VOLTAGE DROP AT INPUT: (See Chart at Right)
5. MAXIMUM INPUT FREQUENCY: <75 Hz
6. RESPONSE TIME: 5 msec. max.
7. OUTPUT SIGNAL: 0(4) to 20 mA
Max. Load Resistance: ≤ 1375 Ω @ 20 mA
8. ISOLATION VOLTAGE: 510 V, 50 Hz, for 1 minute
9. ACCURACY: ≤0.1% of full scale
10. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -10 to +70°C
11. TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT: ≤0.002%/K of the measured value
12. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is green, Polyamide PA
13. MOUNTING: Standard DIN style rail, including top hat (T) profile rail
according to EN50022 - 35 7.5 and 35 15, and G profile rail according
to EN50035 - G32.
14. WEIGHT: 2.976 oz (84.37 g)

25
20
15
10
5
UV = 2.5 V
0

200

400

600

800

1000

RB / Ω

WIRING CONNECTIONS
Connect transducer to input (Terminals 1 & 2), observing polarity. A power
supply may be required for loop powered transducers.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

The energy for the supply on the input side is taken from the analog input
signal. Due to the dynamic input resistance, a power loss of approximately 2.5
V drops at the module input.

ORDERING INFORMATION

758

MODEL NO.

INPUT

OUTPUT

PART NUMBER

AIMI

0 (4)-20 mA

AIMI0202

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL APMR - 3 PHASE FAULT DETECTION DIN RAIL MODULE
z PROTECTS AGAINST PHASE LOSS, UNBALANCE, UNDER
VOLTAGE, AND PHASE REVERSAL
z AVAILABLE IN 230, 380, OR 480 VAC
z LOW COST
z DIN RAIL MOUNTABLE
z INRUSH UNDER VOLTAGE DELAY
UL Recognized Component,
File # E137808

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The APMR protects three phase equipment, mostly motors, from destructive
line conditions. Specifically it detects Phase Reversal, Phase Loss, Phase
Unbalance and Low Voltage. All of these conditions, except for Phase Reversal,
produce excessive heating of motor windings, causing immediate or cumulative
damage to the motor. Phase Reversal will cause a motor to operate in the reverse
intended direction, possibly damaging machinery.
There are three models available; 230 VAC, 380 VAC, and 480 VAC. The
230 VAC model is used with 208, 220, 230, and 240 VAC rated equipment. The
380 VAC model is used with 380 and 415 VAC (European) equipment. The 480
VAC model is used with 440, 460, and 480 VAC rated equipment. The
electrical connection is three wire Delta or WYE configurations (no neutral
connection required).
The output is SPDT relay and LED. The relay is typically connected in series
with a motor contactor coil to inhibit motor start or to disconnect the motor in
the presence of a fault condition. The relay automatically resets when the fault
clears. The relay is typically used in a latching configuration so the motor has
to be restarted after the fault is cleared. The LED illuminates green when all
conditions are normal - no fault. When the LED is green, the relay is energized.
When a fault occurs, the LED turns red and the relay is de-energized. If phase
loss occurs on L1 or L3 the LED turns-off and the relay is de-energized.

1. POWER:
230 VAC: 185 min to 264 max, 3 VA (Typ)⇒Nominal is 185 to 240, 48 to 62 Hz.
380 VAC: 320 min to 457 max, 3 VA (Typ)⇒Nominal is 320 to 415, 48 to 62 Hz.
480 VAC: 380 min to 528 max, 3 VA (Typ)⇒Nominal is 380 to 480, 48 to 62 Hz.
2. OUTPUT: SPDT 10 A @ 240 VAC (resistive load); 1/2 HP @ 240 VAC
Response Time:
Phase Reversal: Not greater than 120 msec
Low Voltage: 0.1 to 20 sec, user adjustable
Phase Loss and Unbalance: Not greater than 100 ms
3. TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENTS:
Unbalance: ±0.5% Over temperature range
Undervoltage: ±200 PPM/°C
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 55°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 80°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from 0°C to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
5. ISOLATION BREAKDOWN RATING: 3000 V
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E137808, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

WARNING: 3 Phase Fault Detection Modules must never be used as
“Primary” protection against hazardous operating conditions. Machinery
must first be made safe by inherent design or the installation of guards,
shields, or other devices to protect personnel in the event of a hazardous
machine condition.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
7. MOUNTING: Universal mounting foot for attachment to standard DIN style
mounting rails, including top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022 - 35
X 7.5 and 35 X 15, and G profile rail according to EN50035 - G32.
8. CONNECTION: Compression type terminal block
9. CONSTRUCTION: High impact black plastic case. Installation Category II,
Pollution Degree 2.
10. WEIGHT: 7.0 oz. (0.20 Kg)

1-717-767-6511

759

FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
PHASE UNBALANCE

Unbalance occurs in 3 phase systems when single phase loads are added
without regard to voltage effects on the remaining phases. This unbalance in
phase voltage causes excessive motor current producing temperatures in excess
of specifications. The relationship between voltage unbalance and percentage
of temperature rise is approximately the square of the percent voltage
unbalance times two. ie., - % temperature rise = (% unbalance 2 X 2).
Therefore, a 4% voltage unbalance will result in approximately a 32%
increase in winding temperature. The effect of temperature rise is immediate
failure of winding insulation if unbalance is severe as with single phasing. If
unbalance is slight, gradual winding degradation will result in premature
insulation failure. The APMR will detect slight unbalances that thermal and
magnetic devices usually miss.

PHASE LOSS
Phase Loss is an extreme case of unbalance known as “single phasing”
where a total loss of one of the phases occurs. During this condition the motor
will continue to run and the full current is drawn from the remaining phases.
Unless the motor is lightly loaded motor failure will occur. The APMR will
detect Phase Loss even with regenerated voltages present.

PHASE REVERSAL
Reversing any two of the three phases will cause a motor to rotate opposite
the intended direction causing damage to machinery. Reversal can occur during
maintenance of distribution systems. The APMR will detect Phase Reversal
regardless of load conditions.

UNDERVOLTAGE
Undervoltage can occur during Brownouts, excessive system loading and
motor startups. An undervoltage Time Delay is provided with the undervoltage
detection to eliminate false tripping during startups when a motor draws many
times its operating current.

5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VB3
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
All conductors should meet voltage
and current ratings for each terminal.
Also, cabling should conform to
appropriate
standards
of
good
installation, local codes and regulations.
It is recommended that power supplied to
the unit be protected by a fuse or circuit
breaker. When wiring the unit, use the
number on the label to identify the
position number with the proper
function.
Strip
wire,
leaving
approximately 1/4" (6mm) of bare wire
exposed. Insert the wire into the terminal,
and tighten the screw until the wire is
clamped tightly.

1. The unit should be mounted in a metal enclosure, that is properly connected
to protective earth.
a. If the bezel is exposed to high Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) levels,
above 4 Kv, it should be connected to protective earth. This can be done
by making sure the metal bezel makes proper contact to the panel cut-out
or connecting the bezel screw with a spade terminal and wire to
protective earth.
2. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.

760

www.redlion.net

SETUP
1. Adjust the dials on the APMR to
the following settings:
a. Under Voltage to minimum
(CCW)
b. Under Voltage Delay to
minimum (CCW)
c. % Unbalanced to maximum
(CW)
2. Connect input wire from the
fused 3 phase line voltage to
Terminals 7 (L1), 9 (L2), and 11
(L3).
In Wye
systems,
connection to neutral wire is not
required. Do not wire output
contacts until Step 9.
3. TURN POWER ON. When the internal relay energizes, and the Red LED
glows green, the phase sequence is correct and the voltages on all three
phases are above the minimum under voltage setting.
a. If the internal output relay does not energize, and the LED stays red, TURN
POWER OFF and swap any two (2) of the three (3) input wires. This
corrects the phase sequence if the monitor was connected in reverse rotation.
Note: Insure that the motor is wired for correct rotation.
4. Select the proper under voltage trip point. (This is the dial marked Under
Voltage.) The under voltage setting should be the same as the minimum
operating voltage for the equipment to be protected.
Note: If the recommended setting is not known, turn the Undervoltage
adjustment knob CW until the relay de-energizes and the LED glows red.
Turn the knob CCW until the relay energizes and the LED glows green.
This procedure assumes that the line voltages are at an acceptable level
when the adjustments are made.

5. Set the Under Voltage Delay to the desired value. This is the maximum time
period that an under voltage condition can exist before de-energizing the
internal relay. The exact value of the delay depends on the type of equipment
being protected and the quality of the available three phase power. A setting
too low, will cause unnecessary interruptions due to momentary dips in the
line voltage. On the other hand, if the time delay is too long, damage to the
equipment can occur before a legitimate under voltage condition is detected.
Three phase motors have a starting current that is many times higher than
the normal full load current but lasts for only a few seconds. Setting the
delay slightly longer than the duration of this inrush period will prevent the
APMR from being tripped due to a low voltage condition caused by the
starting current.
Note: The under voltage delay applies only to under voltage conditions.
Exceeding the phase unbalance trip setting or a phase loss will deenergize the relay instantly regardless of the delay setting.
6. Phase Unbalance setting. Maximum permissible unbalance and phase
voltages that most three phase powered equipment can tolerate are very
seldom specified. In most locations, three phase voltages typically are not
perfectly balanced. Use your own discretion when setting this value. Too low
of a setting (CCW) can cause unnecessary tripping. Too high of a setting
(CW) does not provide adequate protection.
An alternative procedure is to turn the Unbalance adjustment CCW until the
relay de-energizes and the LED turns red. Turn the knob CW until the relay
energizes and the LED turns green.
Note: This procedure assumes that the line voltages are sufficiently balanced
when the adjustments are made. % Voltage Unbalance is defined by NEMA
as: [(Maximum Deviation From Average Voltage/Average Voltage) X 100]
where Average Voltage = (L1 + L2 + L3)/3.
Note: NEMA recommends not to operate motors with a phase unbalance
greater than 5%.
7. When the phase sequence is correct and the line voltages are within preset
limits, the internal relay of the APMR will energize. The LED indicator
glows green to show a normal condition.
8. TURN POWER OFF. Refer to the wiring diagram for proper output contact
connections.
9. After proper connections are made, TURN POWER ON. The internal relay
energizes allowing the monitored load to become active.

G Rail Installation

T Rail Installation

To install the APMR on
a “G” style DIN rail,
angle the module so that
the upper groove of the
“foot” catches under the
lip of the top rail. Push the
module toward the rail
until it snaps into place.
To remove a module from
the rail, push up on the
bottom of the module
while pulling out away
from the rail.

To install the APMR on a
“T” style rail, angle the
module so that the top
groove of the “foot” is
located over the lip of the
top rail. Push the module
toward the rail until it snaps
into place. To remove a
module from the rail, insert
a screwdriver into the slot on
the bottom of the “foot”, and
pry upwards on the module
until it releases from the rail.

1-717-767-6511

761

APPLICATION

A waste water treatment
plant had just completed a
costly repair program,
reconditioning several motors used in their pumping
process. The necessity to rebuild was the direct result
of unbalanced and low voltage supply lines causing
excessive heating to the motor windings. The
continual operation below acceptable levels of power
supply lead to the failure of the motor windings. The
APMR (3 phase fault detector) was included in the
repair program. This upgrade to the system will
automatically shut down the motors if an undesirable
power supply condition is detected. Not only is this a
safeguard against unbalance or low voltage, it will
also detect phase loss or reversal. An alarm will also
trigger in the control room, alerting the operators of
the shut down action.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate company numbers listed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NUMBERS FOR
AVAILABLE SUPPLY VOLTAGES

MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

APMR

3 Phase Fault Detection Module

480 VAC

380 VAC

230 VAC

APMR0096

APMR0086

APMR0016

For more information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your
local RLC distributor.

762

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL IRMA - INTELLIGENT RTD MODULE WITH ANALOG OUTPUT
USER PROGRAMMABLE INPUT
(RTD alpha=0.00385 (DIN 43760), alpha=0.00392, or resistance)
12 to 42 VDC LOOP POWERED (4 to 20 mA Output)
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLED
SIMPLE ADJUSTABLE RANGE SETTING (Using Input Signal)
RTD BREAK DETECTION
MOUNTS ON “T” AND “G” STYLE DIN RAILS
2-WAY ELECTRICAL ISOLATION (INPUT/OUTPUT & POWER)
HIGH-DENSITY PACKAGING (22.5 mm wide)
WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE

SAFETY SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION
The IRMA accepts a 2, 3, or 4 wire RTD or resistance input and converts it
into a 4 to 20 mA current output. The 4 to 20 mA output is linearly proportional
to the temperature or the resistance input. This output is ideal for interfacing to
indicators, chart recorders, controllers, or other instrumentation equipment.
The IRMA is loop-powered which means that the same two wires are
carrying both the power and the output signal. The unit controls the output
current draw from 4 to 20 mA in direct proportion to the input while consuming
less than 4 mA for operation. The conversion to a current output signal makes
the IRMA less susceptible to noise interference and allows accurate
transmission over long distances. Two-Way isolation allows the use of
grounded RTD’s which can provide additional noise reduction benefits.
The IRMA uses an eight position DIP switch to accomplish the input sensor
configuration, range selection, and unit calibration. A simple range setting
technique (Field Calibration) is used so the actual input signal adjusts the output
current for scaling. This technique eliminates the need for potentiometers which
are vulnerable to changes due to vibration.
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat rail (T) according to EN
50 022 - 35 X 7.5 and 35 X 15, and G profile according to EN 50 035 - G 32.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER: 12 to 42 VDC *(Loop powered). The power supply must have a
30 mA min. capacity.
[* Min. voltage must be increased to include the drop across any current
display indicator]
2. INPUT: RTD 2, 3, or 4 wire, 100 ohm platinum, alpha=0.00385 (DIN
43760), alpha=0.00392, or resistance [selectable via DIP switch]
Excitation: 0.170 mA nominal
Lead resistance: Less than 0.5°C with 15 ohms max. per lead
Note: There is no lead compensation for 2 wire input. Field calibration
should be accomplished with equivalent series resistance.
3. OUTPUT: 4 to 20 mA Linear output with Temperature or resistance input.
Ripple: Less than 15 mV peak-to-peak max., across 250Ω load resistor (up
to 120 Hz frequencies).
4. RANGE & ACCURACY: (12 Bit resolution)
Accuracy: ± ( 0.075% Range + 0.1°C [Conformity]) at 23°C after 20 min.
warm-up, conforming to ITS-90.
Note: RTD conformity does not apply to resistance input.
Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Span: The input span can be set to a min. of 1/8 of the full scale range,
anywhere within that range.
Range Accuracy:
INPUT

DIP SWITCH
RANGE TYPE RANGE

4 6 7 8

RTD alpha = 0.00385

RTD alpha = 0.00392
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

ORDERING INFORMATION

OHMS

Note: DIP switch settings

MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

IRMA

Intelligent RTD Module

IRMA2003

1-717-767-6511

0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

ON = 1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

TEMPERATURE &
OHMS RANGE

RANGE
ACCURACY

-160 to 654°C
-108 to 207°C
-5 to 414°C
194 to 608°C
-157 to 640°C
-106 to 203°C
-5 to 406°C
190 to 596°C
35.5 to 331.0 Ω
57.0 to 178.5 Ω
98.0 to 252.0 Ω
173.5 to 316.5 Ω

± 0.61°C
± 0.24°C
± 0.31°C
± 0.31°C
± 0.60°C
± 0.23°C
± 0.31°C
± 0.30°C
± 0.222 Ω
± 0.091 Ω
± 0.116 Ω
± 0.107 Ω

OFF = 0

763

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

5. SENSOR BREAK DETECTION: Upscale to 22.5 mA (nominal) or
Downscale to 3.6 mA (nominal) [selectable via DIP switch]
6. RESPONSE TIME: 400 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe.)
7. DIELECTRIC WITHSTAND VOLTAGE: 1500 VAC for 1 minute
Working Voltage: 50 VAC from input to output.
8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact 1
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 2
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Notes:
1. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge, precautions should be taken when the device is
mounted outside an enclosure. When working in an enclosure, (ex.
making adjustments, setting switches etc.) typical anti-static precautions
should be observed before touching the device.

FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
Open Sensor Detection

The output can be set to go Upscale or Downscale for the detection of an
open sensor. The Upscale setting makes the output go to 22.5 mA (nominal).
The Downscale setting makes the output go to 3.5 mA (nominal). This setting
is always active, so changes in the setting are effective immediately.

Calibration Malfunction
If the unit has scaling problems (current remains at 3.5 mA nominal), check
the voltage between the RTD- Input (-) and TEST pad (+) [located next to the
DIP switches on the side of the unit]. For normal operation the voltage is 0 V
(nominal). If the voltage is +3 V(nominal), a problem occurred storing
information in the E2PROM. When this happens, perform a Basic Calibration
and then a Field Calibration. Turn off power for 5 seconds. Turn on power and
check the voltage between the TEST pad (+) and RTD- Input (-). If the voltage
is still +3 V(nominal), contact the factory.

2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or equivalent).
I/O and power cables are routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -25°C to 75°C (-13°F to 167°F)
Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
Temperature Coefficient: ± 0.01% of input range per °C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
10. MOUNTING: Universal mounting foot for attachment to standard DIN
style mounting rails, including top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022 35 x 7.5 and 35 x 15, and G profile rail according to EN50035 - G32.
11. CONNECTION: Compression type terminal block
12. CONSTRUCTION: High impact green plastic case
13. WEIGHT: 2.7 oz (76.54 g)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

764

www.redlion.net

WIRING CONNECTIONS

DIP SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTIONS

All conductors should meet
voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also, cabling should
conform to appropriate standards of
good installation, local codes and
regulations. It is recommended that
power supplied to the unit be
protected by a fuse or circuit
breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the numbers on the label to identify
the position number with the proper
function. Strip the wire, leaving
approximately 1/4" (6 mm) of bare
wire exposed (stranded wire should
be tinned with solder). Insert the
wire into the terminal, and
tighten the screw until the
wire is clamped tightly.

SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

OUTPUT CAL

FIELD CAL

Field Calibration

BASIC CAL

Basic Calibration

385/392

OPEN SEN DN/UP

RTD/OHMS

Select Input Type Ohms (ON) / RTD (OFF)

RANGE

Sensor Range - 2 switch
combination setting

7
8

Output Calibration

Select RTD alpha - 0.00392 (ON) /
0.00385 (OFF)
Open Sensor Detection Upscale (ON) / Downscale (OFF)

Range switch settings (ON = 1 OFF = 0)
RANGE

INPUT AND POWER/OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
INPUT

When connecting the RTD or resistance device, be certain that the
connections are clean and tight. Attach the device to terminals #2 and #3. Install
a copper sense lead of the same gauge as those used to connect the device.
Attach one end of the wire at the probe where the lead connected to terminal #2
is attached and the other end to terminal #1. This configuration will provide
complete lead wire compensation. If a sense wire is not utilized, then Terminal
#1 should be shorted to terminal #2. To avoid errors due to lead wire resistance,
field calibration should be performed with a series resistance equal to the total
lead resistance in the system. Always refer to the probe manufacturer’s
recommendations for mounting, temperature range, shielding, etc.

DIP SWITCH

FACTORY SETTINGS

The unit is shipped from the factory calibrated for a 4 to 20 mA output using
a type 385 RTD in range 0. The IRMA should be calibrated by the operator for
the application environment it will be used in. If the unit is not recalibrated by
the operator, the following table lists the temperature ranges for each RTD type.
TYPE

RANGE

TEMPERATURE RANGE

385

150°C to 606°C

392

150°C to 595°C

POWER/OUTPUT
The unit has the power and current output sharing the same two wires (looppowered). Connect DC power to terminals #4 and #5, observing the correct
polarity, with a current meter/indicator connected in between so that the output
current can be monitored. Be certain that the DC power is relatively “clean”
and within the 12 to 42 VDC range at the terminals. The current meter voltage
drop must be included in the power supply considerations.

1-717-767-6511

765

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

1.0 Field Calibration
Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before starting Field Calibration. Field
Calibration scales the 4 to 20 mA output to a temperature or resistance input.
This procedure assigns an input value to 4 mA and an input value to 20 mA. The
microprocessor handles configuring the output so it is linear to the temperature
or resistance input. The Field Calibration procedure is described below.
Note: The unit needs to have the Field Calibration completed by the operator
before normal operation. To abort this calibration and reset to the previous
settings, set the FIELD CAL switch OFF prior to the final OFF setting of the
OUTPUT CAL switch (Step 1.11) and turn off power. Wait 5 seconds and then
turn on power and the previous settings will be loaded.

RTD temperature to resistance conversion table
Temperature
alpha
alpha
°C
0.00385 ohms 0.00392 ohms

Temperature
alpha
alpha
°C
0.00385 ohms 0.00392 ohms

-160

35.53

34.38

300

212.03

214.08

-150

39.71

38.64

350

229.69

232.07

-100

60.25

59.55

400

247.05

249.77

-50

80.30

79.96

410

250.49

253.28

100.00

450

264.13

267.18

119.40

119.75

500

280.92

284.30

100

138.5

139.20

550

297.42

301.13

150

157.33

158.36

590

310.41

314.38

190

172.17

173.48

600

313.63

317.66

200

175.85

177.23

640

326.38

330.68

250

194.09

195.80

650

329.54

333.90

Field Calibration with an Accurate Adjustable Resistance Source

Step 1.2

Step 1.3

1.1 Connect an Adjustable Resistance Source with an accuracy of 0.03% to the RTD
input terminals using a third sense wire.
For 2 wire sensors short terminal #1 to terminal #2.
1.2 Set the Type and Range for the RTD or resistance used in your application (DIP
switches #4, #6, #7 and #8). (RTD alpha=0.00385, Range 0 shown)
1.3 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON. [Current goes to 3.6 mA (nominal)]
1.4 Set the resistance source to the desired resistance for the 4 mA output. For 2 wire
sensors add the system lead resistance to the desired value.
1.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Current stays at 3.6 mA (nominal)]
1.6 Adjust the input resistance up until the output equals 4 mA.
1.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF. [Current increases to 22.3 mA (nominal)]

Step 1.5

1.8 Set the resistance source to the desired resistance for the 20 mA output. For 2 wire
sensors add the system lead resistance to the desired value.
1.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Current decreases to 20.5 mA (nominal)]
1.10 Adjust the input resistance down until the output equals 20 mA.

Step 1.7

1.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF.
1.12 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF.

Field Calibration Wiring

Step 1.9

1.13 Disconnect the resistance source from the IRMA and connect the actual sensor to
be used in the application.

Step 1.11

Step 1.12

766

www.redlion.net

2.0 Basic Calibration (Factory Calibration)
The Basic Calibration should only be performed with an ambient temperature between
21°C and 29°C. The Basic Calibration was performed on the unit at the factory and
generally does not need to be done again. This procedure initializes the unit by
calibrating the input circuitry. The Basic Calibration should be performed only if a
condition exists as described in the “Calibration Malfunction” section. After completion
of this calibration, the unit needs to be scaled in Field Calibration. The Basic Calibration
procedure is described below.
Note: To abort this calibration and reset to the previous settings, set the BASIC CAL
switch OFF prior to the final setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch (Step 2.15) and turn
off power for 5 seconds. Then turn on power and the previous settings will be loaded.

Step 2.1

Basic Calibration Wiring

Steps 2.3 to 2.15

Step 2.16

2.1 Connect an Adjustable Resistance Source with an accuracy of 0.03% to the RTD
input terminals using a third sense wire. Set the RANGE (#7), TYPE (#4),
OUTPUT CAL (#1), and FIELD CAL (#2) switches OFF. Set the BASIC CAL
switch (#3) ON.
2.2 Apply power and allow a 30 minute warm-up period. [Current goes to 3.5 mA
(nominal)]
2.3 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.4 Set the resistance source to 40 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.6 Set the resistance source to 60 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.8 Set the resistance source to 100 ohms wait 5 seconds.
2.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.10 Set the resistance source to 175 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.12 Set the resistance source to 250 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.13 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.14 Set the resistance source to 315 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.15 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.16 Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) OFF. [Current increases to 3.6 mA (nominal) or
more]
2.17 Perform a Field Calibration. (See Section 1.0)

1-717-767-6511

767

G Rail Installation

T Rail Installation

To install the
IRMA on a “G” style
DIN rail, angle the
module so that the
upper groove of the
“foot” catches under
the lip of the top rail.
Push the module
toward the rail until it
snaps into place. To
remove a module
from the rail, push up
on the bottom of the
module while pulling
out away from the
rail.

To install the IRMA
on a “T” style rail, angle
the module so that the
top groove of the “foot”
is located over the lip of
the top rail. Push the
module toward the rail
until it snaps into place.
To remove a module
from the rail, insert a
screwdriver into the slot
on the bottom of the
“foot”, and pry upwards
on the module until it
releases from the rail.

APPLICATION
An aluminum manufacturer had the
requirement to heat soak aluminum
ingots before they were to advance into
their hot roll mill. The system is being
controlled by a PLC that allows the
material to move to the next of twelve
zones as soon as the aluminum ingot
reaches the soak temperature. An
IRMA, RTD Loop powered signal
conditioner was used to transmit each
zone temperature, measured by an RTD
sensor, to the PLC. Because the heat
soak procedure was accomplished in an
eighty foot furnace tunnel, a relatively
long wire run was required to connect
each RTD with the PLC. The IRMA
transmitter converts and linearizes the
RTD signal into a 4 to 20 mA signal that
can be run long distances to connect to
the PLC.

TROUBLESHOOTING

For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

768

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL IRMA DC - INTELLIGENT RTD MODULE WITH ANALOG OUTPUT
USER PROGRAMMABLE INPUT
(RTD alpha = 0.00385 (DIN 43760), alpha = 0.00392, or resistance)
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLED
SIMPLE ADJUSTABLE RANGE SETTING (Using Input Signal)
RTD BREAK DETECTION
MOUNTS ON “T” AND “G” STYLE DIN RAILS
3-WAY ELECTRICAL ISOLATION (POWER/INPUT/OUTPUT)
MULTIPLE ANALOG OUTPUTS (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to
10 VDC)
WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE (-25°C to 75°C)
LED INDICATION (POWER & MEMORY ERROR)
9 to 32 VDC POWERED

DESCRIPTION

The IRMA accepts an RTD or resistance input and converts it into a voltage
or current output. The output is linearly proportional to the temperature or
resistance input. This output is ideal for interfacing to indicators, chart
recorders, controllers, or other instrumentation equipment.
The IRMA is DC powered. The DC power input is isolated from the signal
input and analog output. The unit scales the analog output proportionally to the
RTD or resistance input signal. The analog output may be configured for one of
the following: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to 10 VDC. Making the signal
conversion with the IRMA to a current output signal, makes the signal less
susceptible to noise interference and allows accurate transmission over long
distances. The 3-Way isolation allows the use of grounded RTD’s which can
provide additional noise reduction benefits.
The IRMA uses an eight position DIP switch to accomplish the input sensor
configuration, range selection, and unit calibration. A simple range setting
technique (Field Calibration) is used so the actual input signal adjusts the output
for scaling. This technique eliminates the need for potentiometers which are
vulnerable to changes due to vibration.
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat rail (T) according to EN 50
022 - 35 × 7.5 and 35 × 15, and (G) profile according to EN 50 035 - G 32.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

SAFETY SUMMARY

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER: 9 to 32 VDC; 1.75 W. 200 mA max. current. The power supply
must have 400 mA for 200 msec. surge capacity.
2. INPUT: RTD 2, 3, or 4 wire, 100 ohm platinum, alpha = 0.00385
(DIN 43760), alpha = 0.00392, or resistance [selectable via DIP switches].
Excitation: 0.170 mA nominal
Lead resistance: Less than 0.5°C with 15 ohms max. per lead
Note: There is no lead compensation for 2 wire input. Field calibration
should be performed with equivalent series resistance.
3. OUTPUT: All output signals scaled linearly using temperature or resistance
input. Unit is shipped set for the 4 to 20 mA output. 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20
mA selected via internal jumper.
Voltage Output Compliance:
0 to 10 VDC across min. 1 KΩ load (10 mA)
20 mV peak to peak max. ripple (for frequencies up to 120 Hz)
Current Output Compliance:
0 to 20 mA through max. 600Ω load (12 VDC)
4 to 20 mA through max. 600Ω load (12 VDC)
15 mV peak to peak max. ripple across 600Ω load (for frequencies up to
120 Hz)
4. RTD BREAK DETECTION: Nominal values shown in the following order:
(0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 10 VDC).
Upscale: 22.9 mA, 22.5 mA, and 11.5 VDC
Downscale: -0.5 mA, 3.5 mA, and -0.4 VDC
5. RESPONSE TIME: 400 msec. (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe.)
6. TEMPERATURE EFFECTS:
Temperature Coefficient: ± 0.025% of input range per °C
7. DIELECTRIC WITHSTAND VOLTAGE: 1500 VAC for 1 minute
Working Voltage: 50 VAC
Power input to Signal input, Power input to Signal output, & Signal input to
Signal output.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

IRMA

Intelligent RTD Module

IRMA3035

1-717-767-6511

769

8. RANGE & ACCURACY: (12 Bit resolution)
Accuracy: ± ( 0.075% Range + 0.1°C [Conformity]) at 23°C after 45 min.
warm-up, conforming to ITS-90.
Note: RTD Conformity does not apply to resistance input. For best accuracy,
calibration should be performed under operating conditions.
Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Span: The input span can be set to a min. of 1/8 of the full scale range,
anywhere within that range.
Range Accuracy
DIP SWITCH
RANGE TYPE RANGE

INPUT

RTD alpha = 0.00385

RTD alpha = 0.00392

OHMS

0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

8
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Note: DIP switch settings
Accuracy Example:
RTD 385 Range “0”
-160°C to 654°C

TEMPERATURE
& OHMS RANGE

RANGE
ACCURACY

-160 to 654°C
-108 to 207°C
-5 to 414°C
194 to 608°C
-157 to 640°C
-106 to 203°C
-5 to 406°C
190 to 596°C
35.5 to 331.0 Ω
57.0 to 178.5 Ω
98.0 to 252.0 Ω
173.5 to 316.5 Ω

± 0.61°C
± 0.24°C
± 0.31°C
± 0.31°C
± 0.60°C
± 0.23°C
± 0.31°C
± 0.30°C
± 0.222 Ω
± 0.091 Ω
± 0.116 Ω
± 0.107 Ω

ON = 1

Range

( ±0.61°C +

OFF = 0

Conformity

±0.1°C)

Total Error

±0.71°C

9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 kV contact1
Level 3; 8 kV air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m2
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 kV I/O
Level 3; 2 kV power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz − 80 MHz
Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 4; 30 A/m
Emission to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class B
Notes:
1. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge, precautions should be taken when the device is
mounted outside an enclosure. When working in an enclosure (ex. making
adjustments, setting switches etc.) typical anti-static precautions should
be observed before touching the unit.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Analog output signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or equivalent)
I/O and power cables are routed in metal conduit connected to earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -25°C to 75°C (-13°F to 167°F)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from -25°C to 75°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
11. MOUNTING: Universal mounting foot for attachment to standard DIN
style mounting rails, including top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
- 35 × 7.5 and 35 × 15, and G profile rail according to EN50035 - G32.
12. CONNECTION: Compression type terminal block
13. CONSTRUCTION: High impact black plastic case, Installation Category
I, Pollution Degree 2.
14. WEIGHT: 4.02 oz. (114.0 g)

770

BLOCK DIAGRAM

FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
Open Sensor Detection

The output can be set to go Upscale or Downscale for the detection of an
open sensor. The nominal values for each output range are listed under RTD
Break Detection in the Specifications section. This setting is always active, so
changes to the setting are effective immediately.

Unit Malfunction
If the unit has scaling problems (output remains at -0.5 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.5
VDC nominal), check the ERROR LED on the front of the unit. An E2PROM
problem is indicated when the ERROR LED is on. If the ERROR LED is on,
perform a Basic Calibration followed by a Field Calibration. Turn the power off
for 5 seconds. Turn power on and check if the ERROR LED is on. If the LED
is on, contact the factory.

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very
important and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome
installation. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation
in an industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the rail where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

www.redlion.net

WIRING CONNECTIONS

POWER
Connect DC power to terminals #10 and #12 observing proper polarity. Be
certain DC power is within the 9 to 32 VDC specifications.

All conductors should meet
voltage and current ratings for
each terminal. Also, cabling
should conform to appropriate
standards of good installation,
local codes and regulations. It
is recommended that power
supplied to the unit be
protected by a fuse or circuit
breaker. When wiring the unit,
use the numbers on the label
to identify the position
number with the proper
function. Strip the wire,
leaving approximately 1/4" (6
mm) of bare wire exposed
(stranded wire should be
tinned with solder). Insert the
wire into the terminal, and
tighten the screw until the
wire is clamped tightly.

POWER LED
The IRMA has a green LED located on the front to indicate that power is
applied to the unit.

DIP SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTIONS
LABEL

SWITCH

INPUT AND POWER/OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
INPUT

DESCRIPTION

OUTPUT CAL

Output Calibration

FIELD CAL

Field Calibration

BASIC CAL

Basic Calibration

385/392

OPEN SEN UP/DN

RTD/OHMS

Select Input Type Ohms (ON) / RTD (OFF)

RANGE

Sensor Range - 2 switch
combination setting

7
8

When connecting the RTD or resistance device, be certain that the
connections are clean and tight. Attach the device to terminals #8 and #9. Install
a copper sense lead of the same gauge as those used to connect the device.
Attach one end of the wire at the probe where the lead connected to terminal #8
is attached and the other end to terminal #7. This configuration will provide
complete lead wire compensation. If a sense wire is not utilized, then Terminal
#7 should be shorted to terminal #8. To avoid errors due to lead wire resistance,
field calibration should be performed with a series resistance equal to the total
lead resistance in the system. Always refer to the probe manufacturer’s
recommendations for mounting, temperature range, shielding, etc.

RTD Type
Open Sensor Detection Upscale (ON) / Downscale (OFF)

Range switch settings (ON = 1 OFF = 0)
RANGE

DIP SWITCH

FACTORY SETTINGS
The unit is shipped from the factory calibrated for a 4 to 20 mA output using
a type 385 RTD in range 0. The IRMA should be Field calibrated by the
operator for the application environment it will be used in. If the unit is not
recalibrated by the operator, the following table lists the temperature ranges for
each RTD type.
NOMINAL FACTORY FIELD CALIBRATION
TYPE

RANGE

TEMPERATURE RANGE

385

150°C to 606°C

392

150°C to 595°C

OUTPUT
Connect the output signal wires to the desired output terminals. For voltage
output, use terminals #4 and #6; for current output, use terminals #1 and #3
observing proper polarity. Only one output may be used at a time. The unit is
factory set for a 4 to 20 mA output. The voltage output will track the current
output linearly within ±2.5% deviation of range endpoints.
To select 0 to 20 mA, output you must open the case and cut the wire jumper.
The jumper is located to the left side of the board as shown in the drawing.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

1-717-767-6511

771

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

1.0 Field Calibration
Field Calibration scales the selected output to a temperature or resistance
input. This procedure assigns an input value to the low end and an input value
to the high end. The microprocessor handles configuring the output so it is
linear to the temperature or resistance input. The Field Calibration procedure is
described below.
Note: The unit needs to have the Field Calibration completed by the operator
before normal operation. To abort this calibration and reset to the previous
settings, set the FIELD CAL switch OFF prior to the final OFF setting of the
OUTPUT CAL switch (Step 1.11) and turn off power. Wait 5 seconds and then
turn on power and the previous settings will be loaded.

RTD temperature to resistance conversion table
Temperature
°C

alpha
0.00385

alpha
0.00392

Temperature
°C

alpha
0.00385

alpha
0.00392

-160

35.53

34.38

300

212.03

214.08

-150

39.71

38.64

350

229.69

232.07

-100

60.25

59.55

400

247.05

249.77

-50

80.30

79.96

410

250.49

253.28

100.00

450

264.13

267.18

119.40

119.75

500

280.92

284.30

100

138.5

139.20

550

297.42

301.13

150

157.33

158.36

590

310.41

314.38

190

172.17

173.48

600

313.63

317.66

200

175.85

177.23

640

326.38

330.68

250

194.09

195.80

650

329.54

333.90

Field Calibration with an Accurate Adjustable Resistance Source
Note: The nominal output value for the various output ranges are designated in the
following order: (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 VDC)
1.1 Connect resistance source to the RTD input terminals using a third sense wire.
(For 2 wire sensors, short terminal #7 to terminal #8.)
Step 1.2

Field Calibration Wiring

Step 1.3

1.2 Set the type and Range for the RTD or resistance used in your application. (DIP
switches #4, #6, #7 & #8). (RTD alpha = 0.00385, Range 0 shown). APPLY
OPERATING VOLTAGE and allow 45 minute warm-up period.
1.3 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON. [Output goes to -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.4 V
nominal]
1.4 Set the input resistance to the value intended to generate the analog low endpoint
(For 2 wire sensors, add the system lead resistance to the desired value.)

Step 1.5

1.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Output stays at -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.4
V nominal]
1.6 Adjust the input signal up until the analog output equals desired low value.[0 mA,
4 mA, or 0 V]

Step 1.7

1.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF. [Output increases to 22.9 mA, 22.5 mA,
or 11.5 V nominal]
1.8 Set the input resistance to the value intended to generate the analog high endpoint.
(For 2 wire sensors, add the system lead resistance to the desired value.)

Step 1.9

1.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Output decreases to 21.1 mA, 20.7 mA,
or 10.6 V nominal]
1.10 Adjust the input signal down until the output equals desired high value. [20 mA,
20 mA, or 10 V]
1.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF.

Step 1.11

1.12 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF.
Step 1.12

772

1.13 Disconnect the resistance source from the IRMA and connect the actual sensor to
be used in the application.

www.redlion.net

2.0 Basic Calibration
The Basic Calibration should only be performed with an ambient temperature between
21°C and 29°C. The Basic Calibration was performed on the unit at the factory and
generally does not need to be done again. This procedure initializes the unit by calibrating
the input. The Basic Calibration should be performed only if a condition exists as
described in the “Unit Malfunction” section. After completion of this calibration, the unit
needs to be scaled in Field Calibration. The Basic Calibration procedure is described
below.
Note: To abort this calibration and reset to the previous settings, set the BASIC CAL
switch(#3) OFF prior to the final setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) (Step 4.17)
and turn off power for 5 seconds. Then turn on power and the previous settings will be
loaded.
Note: The nominal output value for the various output ranges are designated in the
following order: (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 VDC)

Basic Calibration Wiring
Step 2.1

Steps 2.3 to 2.15

2.1 Connect an adjustable resistance source with an accuracy of 0.03% to the RTD input
terminals using a third sense wire. Set the RANGE (#7& #8), TYPE (#4), OUTPUT
CAL (#1), and FIELD CAL (#2) switches OFF. Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) ON.
2.2 Apply operating power and allow a 45 minute warm-up period. [Current goes to -0.9
mA, 3.4 mA, or -0.5 V(nominal)]
2.3 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.4 Set the resistance source to 40 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.6 Set the resistance source to 60 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.8 Set the resistance source to 100 ohms wait 5 seconds.
2.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.10 Set the resistance source to 175 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.12 Set the resistance source to 250 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.13 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.14 Set the resistance source to 315 ohms and wait 5 seconds.
2.15 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
2.16 Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) OFF. [Current increases to 3.6 mA (nominal) or
more]

Step 2.16

2.17 Perform a Field Calibration. (See Section 1.0)

1-717-767-6511

773

G Rail Installation

T Rail Installation

To install the
IRMA on a “G”
style DIN rail, angle
the module so that
the upper groove of
the “foot” catches
under the lip of the
top rail. Push the
module toward the
rail until it snaps
into place. To
remove a module
from the rail, push
up on the bottom of
the module while
pulling out away
from the rail.

To install the IRMA
on a “T” style rail,
angle the module so
that the top groove of
the “foot” is located
over the lip of the top
rail. Push the module
toward the rail until it
snaps into place. To
remove a module from
the rail, insert a
screwdriver into the
slot on the bottom of
the “foot”, and pry
upwards on the module
until it releases from
the rail.

APPLICATION
The temperature of certain industrial plastics is critical for melt flow of an
injection molding process. Different plastic grades and the complexity of the
mold determine required temperatures for efficient material flow. The master
control room monitors the temperature of the melt flow of each injection mold
machine. They will determine whether the operator may start the process on his
machine or override the injection molding process. The injection molding
machines are located throughout the plant, posing an RTD signal loss problem
from long cable runs. The IRMA DC powered unit is mounted at the machine
and uses the local 24 VDC for power. The signal loss problem is solved using
the 4 to 20 mA analog output for the long cable run to the master control room.

774

www.redlion.net

H
MODEL ITMA - INTELLIGENT THERMOCOUPLE MODULE WITH ANALOG OUTPUT
USER PROGRAMMABLE INPUT
(Thermocouple types J, K, T, & E, or millivolt)
12 to 42 VDC LOOP POWERED (4 to 20 mA Output)
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLED
SIMPLE ADJUSTABLE RANGE SETTING (Using Input Signal)
THERMOCOUPLE BREAK DETECTION
MOUNTS ON “T” AND “G” STYLE DIN RAILS
2-WAY ELECTRICAL ISOLATION (INPUT/OUTPUT & POWER)
HIGH-DENSITY PACKAGING (22.5 mm wide)
WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE

DESCRIPTION

The ITMA accepts a thermocouple or millivolt input and converts it into a 4
to 20 mA current output. The 4 to 20 mA output is linearly proportional to the
temperature or the millivolt input. This output is ideal for interfacing to
indicators, chart recorders, controllers, or other instrumentation equipment.
The ITMA is loop-powered which means that the same two wires are
carrying both the power and the output signal. The unit controls the output
current draw from 4 to 20 mA in direct proportion to the input change while
consuming less than 4 mA for power. The conversion to a current output signal
makes the ITMA less susceptible to noise interference and allows accurate
transmission over long distances. The 2-Way isolation allows the use of
grounded thermocouples which can provide additional noise reduction benefits.
The ITMA uses a ten position DIP switch to accomplish the input sensor
configuration, range selection, and unit calibration. A simple range setting
technique (Field Calibration) is used so the actual input signal adjusts the output
current for scaling. This technique eliminates the need for potentiometers which
are vulnerable to changes due to vibration.
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat rail (T) according to EN 50
022 - 35 × 7.5 and 35 × 15, and G profile according to EN 50 035 - G 32.

SAFETY SUMMARY

CAUTION: Read complete Instructions prior
to installation and operation of the unit.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER: 12 to 42 VDC *(Loop powered). The power supply must have a
30 mA min. capacity.
[* Min. voltage must be increased to include the drop across any current
display indicator]
2. INPUT: J, K, T, E, mV [selectable via DIP switch]
3. OUTPUT: 4 to 20 mA Linear output with Temperature or mV input.
Ripple: Less than 15 mV peak-to-peak max., across 250Ω load resistor (up
to 120 Hz frequencies).
4. RANGE & ACCURACY: (12 Bit resolution)
Accuracy: ± ( 0.075% Range + 0.25°C [Conformity] + 0.50°C [Ice Point])
at 23°C after 20 min. warm-up, conforming to ITS-90.
Note: TC Conformity and Ice Point do not apply to mV input.
Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Span: The input span can be set to a min. of 1/8 of the full scale range,
anywhere within that range.
Thermocouple Accuracy for each type and the corresponding ranges:
DIP SWITCH
TC
TEMPERATURE
RANGE TYPE RANGE
(INPUT)
& mV RANGE

6 7 8 9 10

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
K

0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

-136 to 111°C
69 to 575°C
338 to 800°C
-149 to 862°C
-200 to 541°C
427 to 1132°C
648 to 1372°C
-192 to 1372°C
-225 to 149°C
74 to 326°C
68 to 400°C
-200 to 400°C
-111 to 311°C
276 to 609°C
377 to 1000°C
-114 to 1000°C
-9 to 6 mV
-9 to 22 mV
-9 to 63 mV
-9 to 77 mV

Note: DIP switch settings

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ITMA

Intelligent Thermocouple Module

ITMA2003

RANGE
ACCURACY

Accuracy Example:
Type “J” Range “0”
-136°C to 111°C

1-717-767-6511

Range

( ±0.19°C +

WIRE COLOR
ANSI

± 0.19°C
± 0.38°C
White (+)
Red (-)
± 0.35°C
± 0.76°C
± 0.56°C
± 0.53°C Yellow (+)
Red (-)
± 0.54°C
± 1.17°C
± 0.28°C
± 0.19°C
Blue (+)
Red (-)
± 0.25°C
± 0.45°C
± 0.32°C
± 0.25°C
Violet (+)
Red (-)
± 0.47°C
± 0.84°C
± 0.0113 mV
± 0.0233 mV
N/A
± 0.0540 mV
± 0.0645 mV

ON = 1

BS1843

Yellow (+)
Blue (-)

Brown (+)
Blue (-)

White (+)
Blue (-)

Brown (+)
Blue (-)

N/A

OFF = 0

Conformity

Ice Point

Total Error

±0.25°C

+ ±0.50°C ) =

±0.94°C

775

5. TC BREAK DETECTION: Upscale to 22.5 mA (nominal) or Downscale to
3.6 mA (nominal) [selectable via DIP switch]
6. RESPONSE TIME: 400 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe.)
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -25°C to 75°C (-13°F to 167°F)
Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from -25°C
to 75°C.
Temperature Coefficient: ± 0.01% of input range per °C
Ice Point Compensation: ± 0.75°C for a 50°C change in temperature
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters.
8. DIELECTRIC WITHSTAND VOLTAGE: 1500 VAC for 1 minute, at 50
VAC working volts, from Input to Output
9. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact 1
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m 2
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Emissions to EN 50081-2
RF interference
EN 55011
Enclosure class A
Notes:
1. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge, precautions should be taken when the device is
mounted outside an enclosure. When working in an enclosure (ex. making
adjustments, setting switches etc.) typical anti-static precautions should be
observed before touching the unit.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Process signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or equivalent)
I/O and power cables are routed in metal conduit connected to earth
ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
10. MOUNTING: Universal mounting foot for attachment to standard DIN
style mounting rails, including top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
- 35 × 7.5 and 35 × 15, and G profile rail according to EN50035 - G32.
11. CONNECTION: Compression type terminal block
12. CONSTRUCTION: High impact black plastic case. Installation Category I,
Pollution Degree 2.
13. WEIGHT: 2.7 oz (76.54 g)

FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
Open Sensor Detection
The output can be set to go Upscale or Downscale for the detection of an
open sensor. The Upscale setting makes the output go to 22.5 mA (nominal).
The Downscale setting makes the output go to 3.5 mA (nominal). This setting
is always active, so changes in the setting are effective immediately.

Ice Point Compensation
The Ice Point Compensation for the thermocouple sensors can be enabled (DIP
Switch OFF) or disabled (DIP Switch ON). The mV sensor input is not affected
by this setting. Generally, the Ice Point Compensation is always enabled.

Calibration Malfunction
If the unit has scaling problems (current remains at 3.5 mA nominal), check
the voltage between the TC- Input (-) and TEST pad (+) [located next to the DIP
switches on the side of the unit]. For normal operation the voltage is -1.77 V
(nominal). If the voltage is +1.23 V(nominal), a problem occurred storing
information in the E2PROM. When this happens, perform a Basic Calibration
and then a Field Calibration. Turn off power for 5 seconds. Turn on power and
check the voltage between the TEST pad (+) and TC- Input (-). If the voltage is
still +1.23 V(nominal), contact the factory.

FACTORY SETTINGS
The unit is shipped from the factory calibrated for a 4 to 20 mA output using
a type J thermocouple in range 3. The ITMA should be Field calibrated by the
operator for the application environment it will be used in. If the unit is not
recalibrated by the operator, the following table lists the temperature ranges for
the given thermocouple types.
RANGE

TEMPERATURE RANGE

-50°C to 500°C

-85°C to 790°C

-195°C to 162°C

3°C to 602°C

WIRING CONNECTIONS

All conductors should meet voltage and current ratings for each terminal.
Also, cabling should conform to appropriate standards of good installation,
local codes and regulations. It is recommended that power supplied to the unit
be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker. When wiring the unit, use the numbers
on the label to identify the position number with the proper function. Strip the
wire, leaving approximately 1/4" (6 mm) of bare wire exposed (stranded wire
should be tinned with solder). Insert the wire into the terminal, and tighten the
screw until the wire is clamped tightly.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

776

TYPE

www.redlion.net

INPUT AND POWER/OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Input

When connecting the thermocouple, be certain that the connections are clean
and tight. The negative thermocouple lead is connected to Terminal #2 (TC-)
and the positive lead is connected to Terminal #1 (TC+). If the thermocouple
probe cannot be connected directly to the module, thermocouple wire or
thermocouple extension-grade wire must be used to extend the connection points
(copper wire does not work). Always refer to the thermocouple manufacturer’s
recommendations for mounting, temperature range, shielding, etc.

Power/Output

The unit has the power and current output sharing the same two wires (looppowered). Connect DC power to terminals #4 and #5, observing the correct
polarity, with a current meter/indicator connected in between so that the output
current can be monitored. Be certain that the DC power is relatively “clean” and
within the 12 to 42 VDC range at the terminals. The current meter voltage drop
must be included in power supply considerations.

DIP SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTIONS
SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

OUTPUT CAL

FIELD CAL

Field Calibration

BASIC CAL

Basic Calibration

ICE PT EN/DIS

OPEN SEN DN/UP

6
7

TC TYPE

8
9

RANGE

Output Calibration

Ice Point Compensation Disabled (ON) / Enabled (OFF)
Open Sensor Detection Upscale (ON) / Downscale (OFF)
Thermocouple Type - 3 switch
combination setting
Sensor Range - 2 switch
combination setting

TC Type and Range switch settings (ON = 1 OFF = 0)
TC
TYPE

J
K
T
E
mV

DIP SWITCH

6
0
0
0
0
1

7
0
0
1
1
1

8
0
1
0
1
1

RANGE

0
1
2
3

DIP SWITCH

9
0
0
1
1

10
0
1
0
1

1-717-767-6511

777

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

1.0 Field Calibration
Field Calibration scales the 4 to 20 mA output to a temperature or mV input. This
procedure assigns an input value to 4 mA and an input value to 20 mA. The
microprocessor handles configuring the output so it is linear to the temperature or mV
input. The Field Calibration procedure is described below.
Step 1.3 & 1.4

Step 1.5

Note: Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before calibrating. The unit needs to have the
Field Calibration completed by the operator before normal operation. To abort this
calibration and reset to the previous settings, set the FIELD CAL switch OFF prior to
the final OFF setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch (Step 1.13) and turn off power. Wait
5 seconds and then turn on power and the previous settings will be loaded.

Field Calibration with a Thermocouple Calibrator
Step 1.7

Field Calibration Wiring
Step 1.9

Step 1.11

Step 1.13

Step 1.14

1.1 Enable the Ice Point Compensation on the Thermocouple Calibrator and set it to the
Thermocouple type being used in your application.
1.2 Connect the thermocouple wire as selected in step 1 to the TC input terminals of the
ITMA and the thermocouple calibrator.
1.3 Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4) OFF to enable Ice Point Compensation.
1.4 Set the Type and Range for the thermocouple or mV used in your application (DIP
switches #6 through #10). (TC type “J”, Range 0 shown)
1.5 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON. [Current goes to 3.6 mA (nominal)]
1.6 Apply the input signal for the 4 mA output.
1.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Current stays at 3.6 mA (nominal)]
1.8 Adjust the input signal up until the output equals 4 mA.
1.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF. [Current increases to 22.3 mA (nominal)]
1.10 Apply the input signal for the 20 mA output.
1.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Current decreases to 20.5 mA (nominal)]
1.12 Adjust the input signal down until the output equals 20 mA.
1.13 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF.
1.14 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF.
1.15 Disconnect the thermocouple calibrator from the ITMA and connect the actual
sensor to be used in the application.

2.0 Field Calibration With an Accurate Adjustable Millivolt Source: (Alternate Method)
This calibration procedure can be used to assign the high and low input values if a
thermocouple calibrator is not available.
Step 2.2 & 2.3

Step 2.4

Step 2.6

Step 2.8
Field Calibration Wiring
Step 2.10

Note: To abort this calibration and reset to the previous settings, set the FIELD CAL
switch OFF prior to the final OFF setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch (Step 2.12) and
turn off power. Wait 5 seconds and then turn on power and the previous settings will
be loaded.
2.1 Connect the accurate Adjustable Millivolt Source to the TC input terminals.
2.2 Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4) ON to disable Ice Point Compensation.
2.3 Set the Type and Range for the thermocouple or mV used in your application (DIP
switches #6 through #10).(TC type “J”, Range 0 shown)
2.4 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON.[Current goes to 3.6 mA (nominal)]
2.5 Apply the input signal (mV equivalent for the thermocouple temperature) for the 4
mA output.
2.6 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Current stays at 3.6 mA (nominal)]
2.7 Adjust the input signal up until the output equals 4 mA.
2.8 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF. [Current increases to 22.3 mA (nominal)]
2.9 Apply the input signal (millivolt equivalent for the thermocouple temperature) for
the 20 mA output.
2.10 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Current decreases to 20.5 mA (nominal)]
2.11 Adjust the input signal down until the output equals 20 mA.

Step 2.12

Step 2.13

2.12 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF.
2.13 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF.
2.14 Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4) OFF to enable Ice Point Compensation.
2.15 Disconnect millivolt source from the ITMA and connect the actual sensor to be used
in the application.

Step 2.14

778

www.redlion.net

3.0 Ice Point Calibration
The Ice Point Calibration should only be performed with an ambient temperature
between 21°C and 29°C. This Calibration was performed on the unit at the factory during
the Basic Calibration and generally does not need to be done again. The Ice Point
Compensation can be adjusted through this calibration. The Ice Point Calibration
procedure is described below.

Step 3.1

Note: Calibration can be aborted by setting the BASIC CAL switch OFF prior to the
setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch OFF. (Step 3.6)
3.1 Connect a precision mV source with an accuracy of 0.02% to Terminal #1 TC+ Input
and Terminal #2 TC- Input. Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) and ICE PT EN/DIS
switch (#4) OFF. Set the BASIC CAL (#3) and FIELD CAL (#2) switches ON. The
positions of switches #5 thru #10 are not relevant for this calibration procedure.
3.2 Connect a precision thermometer (accuracy of 0.1°C) to the unused terminal (#3)
beside the TC Input terminals.
3.3 Apply power and allow a 30 minute warm-up period. [Current goes to 3.5 mA
(nominal)]
3.4 Using the temperature indicated by the precision thermometer, input an equivalent
1 mV/°C signal to the TC Input terminals and wait 5 seconds.

Ice Point Calibration Wiring
Step 3.5

3.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.

Step 3.5

3.6 Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) and FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF. [Current
increases to 3.6 mA (nominal) or more]

Step 3.6

1-717-767-6511

779

4.0 Basic Calibration

The Basic Calibration should only be performed with an ambient temperature
between 21°C and 29°C. The Basic Calibration was performed on the unit at the
factory and generally does not need to be done again. This procedure initializes the
unit by calibrating the input, and the Ice Point Compensation. The Basic Calibration
should be performed only if a condition exists as described in the “Calibration
Malfunction” section. After completion of this calibration, the unit needs to be scaled
in Field Calibration. The Basic Calibration procedure is described below.

Step 4.1

Basic Calibration Wiring

Steps 4.3 to 4.15

Step 4.16

Step 4.17

Note: To abort this calibration and reset to the previous settings, set the BASIC CAL
switch OFF prior to the final setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch (Step 4.17) and
turn off power for 5 seconds. Then turn on power and the previous settings will be
loaded.
4.1 Connect a precision mV source with an accuracy of 0.02% to Terminal #1 (TC+
Input) and Terminal #2 (TC- Input). Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4), RANGE
(#9
), TYPE (#6, #7, and #8), OUTPUT CAL (#1), and FIELD CAL (#2)
switches OFF. Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) ON.
4.2 Apply power and allow a 30 minute warm-up period. [Current goes to 3.5 mA
(nominal)]
4.3 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.4 Input -9 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.6 Input 6 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.8 Input 22 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.10 Input 41mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.12 Input 63 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.13 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.14 Input 77 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.15 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.16 Ice Point Calibration.
a. If ice point calibration is not desired, go to step 4.17.
b. To Enable ice point calibration, set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON.
1. Connect a precision thermometer (accuracy of 0.1°C) to the unused
terminal beside the TC Input terminals.
2. Allow 5 minutes for the temperature to equalize.
3. Using the temperature indicated by the precision thermometer, input an
equivalent 1 mV/°C signal to the TC Input terminals.
4.17 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.

Step 4.18

780

4.18 Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) and FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF. [Current
increases to 3.6 mA (nominal) or more]
4.19 Perform a Field Calibration. (See Section 1.0)

www.redlion.net

G Rail Installation

T Rail Installation

To install the
ITMA on a “G” style
DIN rail, angle the
module so that the
upper groove of the
“foot” catches under
the lip of the top rail.
Push the module
toward the rail until it
snaps into place. To
remove a module
from the rail, push up
on the bottom of the
module while pulling
out away from the rail.

To install the ITMA
on a “T” style rail,
angle the module so
that the top groove of
the “foot” is located
over the lip of the top
rail. Push the module
toward the rail until it
snaps into place. To
remove a module from
the rail, insert a
screwdriver into the slot
on the bottom of the
“foot”, and pry upwards
on the module until it
releases from the rail.

APPLICATION
A meat processing plant needs to keep daily records of the process area
temperature. FDA regulations require the temperature to be 22°C at all
times. The ITMA can be used for this application, with the added benefit of
being DIN rail mounted to save space.
The ITMA will sense the process area temperature, and transmit a 4 to 20
mA output to a chart recorder. The processing plant uses a “J” type
thermocouple with a range of -136°C to 111°C. The ITMA is field calibrated
to output 4 mA at 0°C and 20 mA at 44°C. See Section 1.0 for the Field
Calibration procedure.
The ITMA output receives its power from a PSDR1200 Signal
Conditioning Power Supply with a +24 VDC output.

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

1-717-767-6511

781

H
MODEL ITMA DC - INTELLIGENT THERMOCOUPLE MODULE WITH ANALOG OUTPUT
USER PROGRAMMABLE INPUT
(Thermocouple types J, K, T, & E, or millivolt)
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLED
SIMPLE ADJUSTABLE RANGE SETTING (Using Input Signal)
THERMOCOUPLE BREAK DETECTION
MOUNTS ON “T” AND “G” STYLE DIN RAILS
3-WAY ELECTRICAL ISOLATION (POWER/INPUT/OUTPUT)
MULTIPLE ANALOG OUTPUTS (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to
10 VDC)
WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE (-25°C to 75°C)
POWER & MEMORY ERROR INDICATION
9 to 32 VDC POWERED

DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The ITMA accepts a thermocouple or millivolt input and converts it into a
voltage or current output. The voltage or current output is linearly proportional
to the temperature or millivolt input. This output is ideal for interfacing to
indicators, chart recorders, controllers, or other instrumentation equipment.
The ITMA is DC powered. The DC power input is isolated from the signal
input and analog output. The unit scales the analog output proportionally to the
thermocouple or millivolt input signal. The analog output may be configured for
one of the following: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to 10 VDC. Making the
signal conversion with the ITMA to a current output signal, makes the signal
less susceptible to noise interference and allows accurate transmission over long
distances. The 3-Way isolation allows the use of grounded thermocouples which
can provide additional noise reduction benefits.
The ITMA uses a ten position DIP switch to accomplish the input sensor
configuration, range selection, and unit calibration. A simple range setting
technique (Field Calibration) is used so the actual input signal adjusts the output
for scaling. This technique eliminates the need for potentiometers which are
vulnerable to changes due to vibration.
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat rail (T) according to EN 50
022 - 35 × 7.5 and 35 × 15, and (G) profile according to EN 50 035 - G 32.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

782

CAUTION: Read complete instructions prior
to installation and operation of the unit.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER: 9 to 32 VDC; 1.75 W The power supply must have 300 mA for 200
msec. surge capacity.
2. INPUT: J, K, T, E, mV [selectable via DIP switch]
3. OUTPUT: All output signals scaled linearly using temperature or mV input.
Unit is shipped set for 4 to 20 mA output. 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA selected
via internal jumper.
Voltage Output Compliance:
0 to 10 VDC across min 1 KΩ load (10 mA)
20 mV peak to peak max. ripple (for frequencies up to 120 Hz)
Current Output Compliance:
0 to 20 mA through max. 600Ω load (12 VDC)
4 to 20 mA through max. 600Ω load (12 VDC)
15 mV peak to peak max. ripple across 600Ω load (for freq. up to 120 Hz)
4. TC BREAK DETECTION: Nominal values shown in the following order:
(0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 10 VDC).
Upscale: 22.9 mA, 22.5 mA, and 11.5 VDC
Downscale: -0.5 mA, 3.5 mA, and -0.4 VDC
5. RESPONSE TIME: 400 msec (to within 99% of final value w/step input;
typically, response is limited to response time of probe.)
6. TEMPERATURE EFFECTS:
Temperature Coefficient: ± 0.025% of input range per °C
Ice Point Compensation: ± 0.75°C for a 50°C change in temperature
7. DIELECTRIC WITHSTAND VOLTAGE: 1500 VAC for 1 minute
Working Voltage: 50 VAC
Power input to Signal input, Power input to Signal output, & Signal input to
Signal output.
8. RANGE & ACCURACY: (12 Bit resolution)
Accuracy: ± ( 0.075% Range + 0.25°C [Conformity] + 0.50°C [Ice Point])
at 23°C after 20 min. warm-up, conforming to ITS-90.
Note: TC Conformity and Ice Point do not apply to mV input

www.redlion.net

Relative Humidity: Less than 85% RH (non-condensing)
Span: The input span can be set to a min. of 1/8 of the full scale range,
anywhere within that range.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

Thermocouple Accuracy for each type and the corresponding ranges:
DIP SWITCH
TC
TEMPERATURE
RANGE TYPE RANGE
(INPUT)
& mV RANGE

RANGE
ACCURACY

6 7 8 9 10

0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Note: DIP switch settings
Accuracy Example:
Type “J” Range “0”
-136°C to 111°C

Range

( ±0.19°C +

ANSI

BS1843

± 0.19°C
± 0.38°C
White (+)
Red (-)
± 0.35°C
± 0.76°C
± 0.56°C
± 0.53°C
Yellow (+)
Red (-)
± 0.54°C
± 1.17°C
± 0.28°C
± 0.19°C
Blue (+)
Red (-)
± 0.25°C
± 0.45°C
± 0.32°C
± 0.25°C
Violet (+)
Red (-)
± 0.47°C
± 0.84°C
± 0.0113 mV
± 0.0233 mV
N/A
± 0.0540 mV
± 0.0645 mV

ON = 1

Yellow (+)
Blue (-)

FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
Brown (+)
Blue (-)

Electromagnetic RF fields
Fast transients (burst)
RF conducted interference
Emission to EN 50081-2
RF interference

The output can be set to go Upscale or Downscale for the detection of an open
sensor. The nominal values for each output range are listed under TC Break
Detection in the Specifications section. This setting is always active, so changes
to the setting are effective immediately.

Ice Point Compensation

Brown (+)
Blue (-)

Unit Malfunction

N/A

OFF = 0

The Ice Point Compensation for the thermocouple sensors can be enabled (DIP
Switch OFF) or disabled (DIP Switch ON). The mV sensor input is not affected
by this setting. Generally, the Ice Point Compensation is always enabled.
If the unit has scaling problems (output remains at -0.5 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.5
VDC nominal), check the ERROR LED on the front of the unit. An E2PROM
problem is indicated when the ERROR LED is on. If the ERROR LED is on,
perform a Basic Calibration followed by a Field Calibration. Turn the power off
for 5 seconds. Turn power on and check if the ERROR LED is on. If the LED
is on, contact the factory.

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Conformity

Ice Point

Total Error

±0.25°C

+ ±0.50°C ) =

±0.94°C

EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact1
Level 3; 8 Kv air
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m2
80 MHz - 1 GHz
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
EN 55011

Open Sensor Detection

White (+)
Blue (-)

9. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -25°C to 75°C (-13°F to 167°F)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity (noncondensing) from -25°C to 75°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
10. MOUNTING: Universal mounting foot for attachment to standard DIN
style mounting rails, including top hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
-35 × 7.5 and -35 × 15, and G profile rail according to EN50035 - G32.
11. CONNECTION: Compression type terminal block
12. CONSTRUCTION: High impact black plastic case
13. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge

WIRE COLOR

Enclosure class B

Notes:
1. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge, precautions should be taken when the device is
mounted outside an enclosure. When working in an enclosure (ex.
making adjustments, setting switches etc.) typical anti-static
precautions should be observed before touching the unit.
2. Self-recoverable loss of performance during EMI disturbance at 10 V/m:
Process signal may deviate during EMI disturbance.
For operation without loss of performance:
Unit is mounted in a metal enclosure (Buckeye SM7013-0 or equivalent)
I/O and power cables are routed in metal conduit connected to earth ground.
Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines section of this bulletin for
additional information.
14. WEIGHT: 4.02 oz. (114.0 g)

Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of the
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very
important and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome
installation. Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in
an industrial environment.
1. Use shielded (screened) cables for all Signal and Control inputs. The shield
(screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible. The
connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in order
of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the rail where the unit is mounted to earth
ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
2. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter.
3. Signal or Control cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as
possible from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy
components.
4. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
and Control cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the
core several times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

1-717-767-6511

783

WIRING CONNECTIONS

OUTPUT

All conductors should meet
voltage and current ratings for each
terminal. Also, cabling should
conform to appropriate standards of
good installation, local codes and
regulations. It is recommended that
power supplied to the unit be
protected by a fuse or circuit
breaker. When wiring the unit, use
the numbers on the label to identify
the position number with the proper
function. Strip the wire, leaving
approximately 1/4" (6 mm) of bare
wire exposed (stranded wire should
be tinned with solder). Insert the
wire into the terminal, and tighten
the screw until the wire is clamped
tightly.

POWER

Connect the output signal wires to the desired output terminals. For voltage
output, use terminals #4 and #6; for current output, use terminals #1 and #3
observing proper polarity. Only one output may be used at a time. The unit is
factory set for a 4 to 20 mA output. The voltage output will track the current
output nominally within a ±2.5% deviation range.
To select 0 to 20 mA, output you must open the case and cut the wire jumper.
The jumper is located to the left side of the board as shown in the drawing.

Connect DC power to terminals #10 and #12 observing proper polarity. Be
certain DC power is within the 9 to 32 VDC specifications.
POWER LED
The ITMA has a green LED located on the front to indicate that power is
applied to the unit.

DIP SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTIONS
LABEL

SWITCH

INPUT, OUTPUT, AND POWER CONNECTIONS
INPUT
Ensure thermocouple wire ends are stripped and clean. Connect positive
thermocouple lead to terminal #7 (TC+). Connect negative thermocouple lead
to terminal #8 (TC-). If the thermocouple probe cannot be connected directly to
the module, thermocouple wire or thermocouple extension-grade wire must be
used to extend the connection (copper wire does not work). Always refer to the
thermocouple manufacturer’s recommendations for: mounting, temperature
range, shielding, etc.

DESCRIPTION

OUTPUT CAL

Output Calibration

FIELD CAL

Field Calibration

BASIC CAL

Basic Calibration

ICE PT DIS/EN

OPEN SEN UP/DN

6
7

TC TYPE

8
9

RANGE

Ice Point Compensation Disabled (ON) / Enabled (OFF)
Open Sensor Detection Upscale (ON) / Downscale (OFF)
Thermocouple Type - 3 switch
combination setting
Sensor Range - 2 switch
combination setting

TC Type and Range switch settings (ON = 1 OFF = 0)
DIP SWITCH

DIP SWITCH

TC
TYPE

RANGE

TEMPERATURE RANGE

-50°C to 500°C

-85°C to 790°C

-195°C to 162°C

3°C to 602°C

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

784

www.redlion.net

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
1.0 Field Calibration
Note: The nominal output value for the various output ranges are designated in the following order: (0 to 20 mA, 4
to 20 mA, 0 to 10 VDC)
Allow a 30 minute warm-up period before starting Field Calibration. Field Calibration scales the voltage or current
output to a temperature or mV input. This procedure assigns an input value to analog output low and an input value
to analog output high. The microprocessor handles configuring the output so it is linear to the temperature or mV input.
The Field Calibration procedure is described below.
Note: The unit needs to have the Field Calibration completed by the operator before
normal operation. To abort this calibration and reset to the previous settings, set
the FIELD CAL switch(#2) OFF prior to the final OFF setting of the OUTPUT
Step 1.3 & 1.4
CAL switch (Step 1.13) and turn off power. Wait 5 seconds and then turn on power
and the previous settings will be loaded.

Field Calibration with a Thermocouple Calibrator
Step 1.5

Field Calibration Wiring
Step 1.7

Step 1.9

Step 1.11

Step 1.13

Step 1.14

1.1 Enable the Ice Point Compensation on the Thermocouple Calibrator and set it to
the Thermocouple type being used in your application.
1.2 Connect the thermocouple wire as selected in step 1 to the TC input terminals of
the ITMA and the thermocouple calibrator.
1.3 Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4) OFF to enable Ice Point Compensation.
1.4 Set the Type and Range for the thermocouple or mV used in your application (DIP
switches #6 through #10). (TC type “J”, Range 0 shown)
1.5 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON. [Output goes to -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.4 V
nominal]
1.6 Apply the input signal for the analog output low value.
1.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Output stays at -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or 0.4 V nominal]
1.8 Adjust the input signal up until the output equals desired low value.
1.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF. [Output increases to 22.9 mA, 22.5 mA,
or 11.5 V nominal]
1.10 Apply the input signal for the analog output high value.
1.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Output decreases to 21.1 mA, 20.7 mA,
or 10.6 V nominal]
1.12 Adjust the input signal down until the output equals desired high value.
1.13 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF.
1.14 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF.
1.15 Disconnect the thermocouple calibrator from the ITMA and connect the actual
sensor to be used in the application.

2.0 Field Calibration With an Accurate Adjustable Millivolt Source: (Alternate Method)

Step 2.2 & 2.3

Note: The nominal output value for the various output ranges are designated in the
following order: (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 VDC)
This calibration procedure can be used to assign the high and low input values if a
thermocouple calibrator is not available.

Step 2.4

Note: To abort this calibration and reset to the previous settings, set the FIELD CAL
switch(#2) OFF prior to the final OFF setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch (Step
2.12) and turn off power. Wait 5 seconds and then turn on power and the previous
settings will be loaded.

Step 2.6

Field Calibration Wiring

Step 2.8

Step 2.10

Step 2.12

Step 2.13

Step 2.14

2.1 Connect the accurate Adjustable Millivolt Source to the TC input terminals.
2.2 Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4) ON to disable Ice Point Compensation.
2.3 Set the Type and Range for the thermocouple or mV used in your application (DIP
switches #6 through #10).(TC type “J”, Range 0 shown)
2.4 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON.[Output goes to -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.4 V
nominal]
2.5 Apply the input signal (mV equivalent for the thermocouple temperature) for the
analog output low value.
2.6 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Output stays at -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or 0.4 V nominal]
2.7 Adjust the input signal up until the output equals desired low value.
2.8 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF. [Output increases to 22.9 mA, 22.5 mA,
or 11.5 V nominal]
2.9 Apply the input signal (millivolt equivalent for the thermocouple temperature) for
the analog output high value.
2.10 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON. [Output decreases to 21.1 mA, 20.7 mA,
or 10.6 V nominal]
2.11 Adjust the input signal down until the output equals desired high value.
2.12 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) OFF.
2.13 Set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF.
2.14 Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4) OFF to enable Ice Point Compensation.
2.15 Disconnect millivolt source from the ITMA and connect the actual sensor to be
used in the application.

1-717-767-6511

785

3.0 Ice Point Calibration
Note: The nominal output value for the various output ranges are designated in the
following order: (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 VDC)
The Ice Point Calibration should only be performed with an ambient temperature
between 21°C and 29°C. This Calibration was performed on the unit at the factory
during the Basic Calibration and generally does not need to be done again. The Ice
Point Compensation can be adjusted through this calibration. The Ice Point Calibration
procedure is described below.

Step 3.1

Step 3.5
Ice Point Calibration Wiring

Step 3.5

Note: Calibration can be aborted by setting the BASIC CAL switch(#3) OFF prior to
the setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch OFF. (Step 3.6)
3.1 Connect a precision mV source with an accuracy of 0.02% to Terminal #7 TC+
Input and Terminal #8 TC- Input. Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) and ICE PT
EN/DIS switch (#4) OFF. Set the BASIC CAL (#3) and FIELD CAL (#2)
switches ON. The positions of switches #5 thru #10 are not relevant for this
calibration procedure.
3.2 Connect a precision thermometer (accuracy of 0.1°C) to the unused terminal (#9)
beside the TC Input terminals.
3.3 Apply power and allow a 30 minute warm-up period. [Output goes to -0.9 mA,
3.4 mA, or -0.5V nominal]
3.4 Using the temperature indicated by the precision thermometer, input an equivalent
1 mV/°C signal to the TC Input terminals and wait 5 seconds.
3.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.

Step 3.6

3.6 Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) and FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF. [Output
increases to -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.38 V nominal, or more]

4.0 Basic Calibration
Note: The nominal output value for the various output ranges are designated in the
following order: (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 VDC)
The Basic Calibration should only be performed with an ambient temperature
between 21°C and 29°C. The Basic Calibration was performed on the unit at the
factory and generally does not need to be done again. This procedure initializes the
unit by calibrating the input, and the Ice Point Compensation. The Basic Calibration
should be performed only if a condition exists as described in the “Unit Malfunction”
section. After completion of this calibration, the unit needs to be scaled in Field
Calibration. The Basic Calibration procedure is described below.

Step 4.1

Basic Calibration Wiring

Steps 4.3 to 4.15

Step 4.16

Step 4.17

Step 4.18

786

Note: To abort this calibration and reset to the previous settings, set the BASIC CAL
switch(#3) OFF prior to the final setting of the OUTPUT CAL switch (Step 4.17)
and turn off power for 5 seconds. Then turn on power and the previous settings will
be loaded.
4.1 Connect a precision mV source with an accuracy of 0.02% to Terminal #7 (TC+
Input) and Terminal #8 (TC- Input). Set the ICE PT EN/DIS switch (#4),
RANGE (#9
), TYPE (#6, #7, and #8), OUTPUT CAL (#1), and FIELD
CAL (#2) switches OFF. Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) ON.
4.2 Apply power and allow a 30 minute warm-up period. [Output goes to -0.9 mA,
3.4 mA, or -0.5 V nominal]
4.3 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.4 Input -9 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.5 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.6 Input 6 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.7 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.8 Input 22 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.9 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.10 Input 41mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.11 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.12 Input 63 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.13 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.14 Input 77 mV and wait 5 seconds.
4.15 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.16 Ice Point Calibration.
a. If ice point calibration is not desired, go to step 4.17.
b. To Enable ice point calibration, set the FIELD CAL switch (#2) ON.
1. Connect a precision thermometer (accuracy of 0.1°C) to the unused
terminal beside the TC Input terminals.
2. Allow 5 minutes for the temperature to equalize.
3. Using the temperature indicated by the precision thermometer, input an
equivalent 1 mV/°C signal to the TC Input terminals.
4.17 Set the OUTPUT CAL switch (#1) ON and then OFF.
4.18 Set the BASIC CAL switch (#3) and FIELD CAL switch (#2) OFF. [Output
increases to -0.8 mA, 3.5 mA, or -0.4 V nominal, or more]
4.19 Perform a Field Calibration. (See Section 1.0)

www.redlion.net

G Rail Installation

T Rail Installation

To install the ITMA on
a “G” style DIN rail,
angle the module so that
the upper groove of the
“foot” catches under the
lip of the top rail. Push
the module toward the
rail until it snaps into
place. To remove a
module from the rail,
push up on the bottom of
the module while pulling
out away from the rail.

To install the ITMA on a
“T” style rail, angle the
module so that the top groove
of the “foot” is located over
the lip of the top rail. Push
the module toward the rail
until it snaps into place. To
remove a module from the
rail, insert a screwdriver into
the slot on the bottom of the
“foot”, and pry upwards on
the module until it releases
from the rail.

APPLICATION
The temperature of certain industrial plastics is critical for melt flow of
an injection molding process. Different plastic grades and the complexity
of the mold determine required temperatures for efficient material flow.
The master control room monitors the temperature of the melt flow of
each injection mold machine. They will determine whether the operator
may start the process on his machine or override the injection molding
process. The injection molding machines are located throughout the plant,
posing a thermocouple signal loss problem from long cable runs. The
ITMA DC powered unit is mounted at the machine and uses the local 24
VDC for power. The signal loss problem is solved using the 4 to 20 mA
analog output for the long cable run to the master control room.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ITMA

Intelligent Thermocouple Module

ITMA3035

1-717-767-6511

787

H
MODEL ICM4 - SERIAL CONVERTER MODULE (RS232C/RS485)
z ALLOWS COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN RS232 CONTROL
EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS WITH RS485 SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
z WIDE DC INPUT POWER RANGE (+9 to 32 VDC)
z HALF DUPLEX (RS485) AND FULL DUPLEX (RS422)
z LED INDICATION FOR RXD, TXD, and POWER
z UNIVERSAL MOUNTING FOOT FOR DIN RAIL INSTALLATION
UL Recognized Component,
File # E179259

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The ICM4 Serial Converter Module provides the capability of interfacing
equipment with RS485 serial communications to equipment with RS232
communications. Data format of the RS232 and RS485 equipment must be
the same.
For full duplex (RS422), the DIP switch on the side of the module must be in
the RS422 position. For half duplex (RS485), the DIP switch must be in the
RS485 position. In half duplex mode, the RS485 driver is enabled using the
leading edge of the first character transmitted (RXD input). After the last
character transmits, the converter waits one character time (at 9600 baud) to
disable the RS485 driver.
There are 3 LED’s that can be viewed from the front of the converter module.
A green power LED indicates power is on, a red RS232 TXD LED flashes when
the module is transmitting, and a green RS232 RXD LED flashes when the
module is receiving.
An external DC power source (+9 to 32 VDC) is required to power the ICM4.
The external power source and serial communications connections are made via
a 12 position removable terminal block located on the front of the module.
The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat profile rail according to
EN50022 - 35 x 7.5 and 35 x 15, and G profile rail according to EN50035 - G32.

1. POWER: +9 to 32 VDC @ 75 mA maximum. Above 26 VDC, derate max.
operating temperature to 40°C. Power supply must be Class 2 or SELV rated.
2. RS232 VOLTAGES:
Receive Data Pin: ± 30 VDC max.
Mark Condition: ≤ 0.8 VDC
Space Condition: ≥ 2.4 VDC
Transmit Data Pin:
Mark Condition: −8 VDC (typ.)
Space Condition: +8 VDC (typ.)
3. RS485 VOLTAGES:
Differential Output Voltage: ± 5 VDC max. under no load
Differential Input Voltage: ± 5 VDC max.
Mark Condition: ≤ −0.2 VDC
Space Condition: ≥ +0.2 VDC
RS485 Drive Capability: Up to 32 RS485 receivers connected in parallel.
RS485 Drive Disable Time: 4 msec. max.
4. MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH:
RS232: 50 feet
RS485: 4000 feet
5. BAUD RATE: 9600 min., 19200 max.
6. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL3101-1, CSA C22.2 No.
1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/5141B/UL,
CB Scheme Test Report # 01ME11540-0702001
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact
Level 3; 8 Kv air
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
Simulation of cordless telephone ENV 50204
Level 3; 10 V/m
900 MHz ± 5 MHz
200 Hz, 50% duty cycle
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference
EN 55022
Enclosure class B
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

788

www.redlion.net

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

SIDE VIEW OF ICM4

7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C. Derate max. operating
temperature to 40°C above 26 VDC.
Storage Temperature: -40 to + 75°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max.relative humidity
(non-condensing) from 0 to 50°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
8. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is black, high impact plastic. Installation
Category I, Pollution Degree 2.
9. MOUNTING: Standard DIN rail top hat (T) profile rail according to
EN50022- 35 X 7.5 and 35 X 15
10. WEIGHT: 3.2 oz. (90.7 g)

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Although this unit is designed with a high degree of immunity to
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI), proper installation and wiring methods
must be followed to ensure compatibility in each application. The type of
electrical noise, source or coupling method into the unit may be different for
various installations. In extremely high EMI environments, additional measures
may be needed. Cable length, routing and shield termination are very important
and can mean the difference between a successful or a troublesome installation.
Listed below are some EMC guidelines for successful installation in an
industrial environment.
1. DC power to the unit should be relatively clean and within the specified
limits. Connecting power to the unit from circuits that power inductive loads
that cycle on and off, such as contactors, relays, motors, etc., should be
avoided. This will reduce the chance of noise spikes entering the DC power
connection and affecting the unit.
2. The shield (screen) pigtail connection should be made as short as possible.
The connection point for the shield depends somewhat upon the application.
Listed below are the recommended methods of connecting the shield, in
order of their effectiveness.
a. Connect the shield only at the unit to earth ground (protective earth).
b. Connect the shield to earth ground at both ends of the cable, usually when
the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz.
c. Connect the shield to common of the unit and leave the other end of the
shield unconnected and insulated from earth ground.
3. Never run Signal cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC power lines,
conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and heaters, etc. The
cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly grounded. This is
especially useful in applications where cable runs are long and portable twoway radios are used in close proximity or if the installation is near a
commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the core several
times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

TYPICAL RS422 CONNECTIONS

Notes:
1. Connect shield drain wire to earth ground.
2. Place DIP switch on the side of the ICM4 in the 422 position.
3. RS422 polarity: Terminal “A” is negative with respect to Terminal “B” in
the mark (logic 1) condition.

1-717-767-6511

789

TYPICAL RS485 CONNECTIONS

TYPICAL RS232 CONNECTIONS

Notes:
1. Connect shield drain wire to earth ground.
2. Place DIP switch on the side of the ICM4 in the 485 position.
3. The transmit and receive data lines of the ICM4 should be wired together.

TYPICAL CONNECTION FOR SINGLE UNIT

790

TYPICAL CONNECTION FOR MULTIPLE UNITS

www.redlion.net

G Rail Installation

T Rail Installation

To install the ICM4
on a “G” style DIN
rail, angle the module
so that the upper
groove of the “foot”
catches under the lip of
the top rail. Push the
module toward the rail
until it snaps into
place. To remove a
module from the rail,
push up on the bottom
of the module while
pulling out away from
the rail.

To install the
ICM4 on a “T” style
rail, angle the module
so that the top groove
of the “foot” is
located over the lip of
the top rail. Push the
module toward the
rail until it snaps into
place. To remove a
module from the rail,
insert a screwdriver
into the slot on the
bottom of the “foot”,
and pry upwards on
the module until it
releases from the rail.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ICM4

DESCRIPTION

RS232/RS485 Converter Module

TROUBLESHOOTING
PART NUMBER

For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the
appropriate company numbers listed.

ICM40030

1-717-767-6511

791

H
MODEL ICM5 – THREE WAY ISOLATED SERIAL CONVERTER MODULE
(RS232C/RS485)
z ALLOWS COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN RS232 CONTROL
EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS WITH RS422/RS485 SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
z THREE WAY ISOLATION PROTECTS SERIAL EQUIPMENT FROM
GROUND LOOPS (1000 VDC)
z AUTOMATIC RS485 DRIVER CONTROL
z DIP SWITCH SELECTABLE BAUD RATES 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
z WIDE DC INPUT POWER RANGE (+9 to 26 VDC)
z HALF DUPLEX (RS485) AND FULL DUPLEX (RS422)
z LED INDICATION FOR RXD, TXD, and POWER
z 9 PIN D-SUB CONNECTOR FOR RS232 CONNECTION

z UNIVERSAL MOUNTING FOOT FOR DIN RAIL INSTALLATION

z SWITCHABLE TERMINATION AND BIASING RESISTORS

z SELECTABLE DTE & DCE OPERATION WORKS WITH ANY
RS232 CABLE

z MODULAR RJ JACK OR SCREW TERMINAL FOR RS485
CONNECTION

UL Recognized Component,
File # E179259

DESCRIPTION
The ICM5 Serial Converter Module provides the capability of interfacing
equipment with RS485 serial communications to equipment with RS232
communications while providing three way isolation. Data format of the RS232
and RS485 equipment must be the same.
The unit can be configured for full duplex (RS422), or half duplex (RS485)
operation. In half duplex mode, the RS485 driver is automatically enabled using
the leading edge of the first character that is received on the RS232 side. After
the last character is received, the converter waits one character time (at the
selected baud rate) to disable the RS485 driver.
An external DC power source (+9 to 26 VDC) is required to power the ICM5.
The external power source and RS485 communications connections are made
via a 7-position removable terminal block located on the front of the module. A
modular RS485 connector is also provided for fast and efficient connection to
other Red Lion devices that use a modular connector. The RS232 connection is
provided via a standard D-SUB 9-pin male connector. The ICM5 can be
configured for DTE or DCE operation, allowing the use of modem or nullmodem cables.
There are 3 LEDs that can be viewed from the front of the converter module.
A green power LED indicates power is on, a red RS232 TXD LED flashes when
the module is transmitting, and a green RS232 RXD LED flashes when the
module is receiving.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

792

The unit is equipped with a universal mounting foot for attachment to
standard DIN style mounting rails, including top hat profile rail according to EN
50 022 - 35x7.5 and 35x15, and G profile rail according to EN 50 035 - G32.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER: +9 to 26 VDC @ 125 mA maximum. 85 mA typical
Power Supply must be Class 2 or SELV rated.
2. RS232 VOLTAGES:
Receive Data Pin: ± 30 VDC max.
Mark Condition: ≤ 0.8 VDC
Space Condition: ≥ 2.4 VDC
Transmit Data Pin:
Mark Condition: -8 VDC (typ.)
Space Condition: +8 VDC (typ.)
3. RS485 VOLTAGES:
Differential Output Voltage: ± 5 VDC max. under no load
Differential Input Voltage: ± 5 VDC max.
Mark Condition: ≤ -0.2 VDC
Space Condition: ≥ +0.2 VDC
RS485 Drive Capability: Up to 32 RS485 receivers connected in parallel
RS485 Drive Disable Time: one character time (at the set baud rate)
4. MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH:
RS232: 50 feet (15.24 m)
RS485: 4000 feet (1219.2 m)
5. BAUD RATE: 9600 min., 115200 max.
6. ISOLATION: 1000 VDC
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C.
Storage Temperature: -40 to + 75°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. relative humidity
(non-condensing) from 0 to 50°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters

www.redlion.net

8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File #E179259, UL3101-1, CSA 22.2 No. 1010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate #US/5141A/UL,
CB Scheme Test Report #01ME11540-0702001
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment
for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Immunity to EN 50082-2
Electrostatic discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
Fast transients (burst)
RF conducted interference
Emissions to EN 50081-1
RF interference

Note:
1. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge to the unit in environments with static levels above
4 Kv, precautions should be taken when the device is mounted outside an
enclosure. When working in an enclosure, (ex. making adjustments, setting
switches etc.) typical anti-static precautions should be observed before
touching the unit.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines for additional information.
9. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is black, high impact plastic. Installation
Category I, Pollution Degree 2.
10. MOUNTING: Standard DIN rail top hat (T) profile rail according to
EN50022- 35 X 7.5 and 35 X 15
11. WEIGHT: 3.3 oz. (93.6 g)

EN 61000-4-2 Level 2; 4 Kv contact1
Level 3; 8 Kv air1
EN 61000-4-3 Level 3; 10 V/m
80 MHz - 1 GHz
EN 61000-4-4 Level 4; 2 Kv I/O
Level 3; 2 Kv power
EN 61000-4-6 Level 3; 10 V/rms
150 KHz - 80 MHz
EN 55022

Enclosure class B
Power mains class B

BLOCK DIAGRAM

3. Never run Signal cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC power lines,
conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and heaters, etc. The
cables should be run in metal conduit that is properly grounded. This is
especially useful in applications where cable runs are long and portable twoway radios are used in close proximity or if the installation is near a
commercial radio transmitter.
4. Signal cables within an enclosure should be routed as far away as possible
from contactors, control relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices, such as ferrite suppression cores, is effective. Install them on Signal
cables as close to the unit as possible. Loop the cable through the core several
times or use multiple cores on each cable for additional protection.
Install line filters on the power input cable to the unit to suppress power line
interference. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. The
following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent) are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal cables:
Fair-Rite # 0443167251 (RLC #FCOR0000)
TDK # ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward #28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner # FN610-1/07 (RLC #LFIL0000)
Schaffner # FN670-1.8/07
Corcom #1VR3
Note: Reference manufacturer’s instructions when installing a line filter.
6. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.

1-717-767-6511

793

SIDE VIEW OF ICM5

TYPICAL RS232 CONNECTIONS

DCE

Note:
Connect shield (drain wire) to earth ground.

* - Application Dependent

DTE

Note:
Connect shield (drain wire) to earth ground.

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Top Bank of 10 Switches
Switches 1-5 - BAUD
Select the appropriate baud rate. This
adjusts the time delay for the automatic
RS485 driver controller. Only one of the
baud switches should be in the ON position.

* - Application Dependent

TYPICAL RS422 CONNECTIONS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
BAUD RATE 9600
DCE
2 WIRE \ RS485
NO TERMINATION
NO PULL-UP OR PULL DOWN

Switches 6-7 - PULL UP / PULL DOWN
These switches connect 4.7 KΩ biasing resistors to the A and B lines of the
485 receiver. To minimize loading of the network, these should only be used if
no other device in the system provides biasing.

Switches 8-9 - OFF 4 WIRE / ON 2 WIRE
These switches can be used to internally jumper the A and B lines of the
RS485 driver and receiver together. This allows 2-wire operation without the
use of external jumper wires. To use the RJ-11 connector, the ICM5 must be in
2-wire mode. Both switches should be in the same position.

Switch 10 - 120 Ω TERMINATION

This switch connects a 120 Ω resistor across the A and B lines of the RS485
receiver. The use of the resistor prevents signal reflection, or echoing, at high
baud rates, over long distances. This should only be turned on if the ICM5 is
the first, or last, device in a multi-drop network that is experiencing reflection
due to long cable distances.

* - Application Dependent

Notes:
1. Connect shield (drain wire) to earth ground.
2. RS422 polarity: Terminal “A” is negative with respect to Terminal “B” in the
mark (logic 1) condition.

TYPICAL RS485 CONNECTIONS

Bottom Bank of 7 Switches
Switches 1-2 - OFF 422 / ON 485
These switches enable and disable the automatic RS485 driver control. In the
422 position, the driver is always enabled, allowing 4-wire full duplex
operation. In the 485 position, the driver is enabled as soon as characters are
received on the RS232 side. When the RS485 driver has transmitted the last
character, it waits one character time (at the selected baud rate), and then enters
a high-impedance state. The receiver is also enabled and disabled in a similar
fashion to prevent transmitted characters from being echoed back. This allows
2-wire, half-duplex operation, without the use of handshake lines. Both
switches should be in the same position.

Switch 3 - N/C
No Connection

Switches 4-7 - OFF DCE / ON DTE
These switches configure the RS232 port to act as a DCE or DTE device.
With all of the switches in the DCE position, pin 2 of the DB-9 connector is the
RS-232 receiver, and pin 3 is the RS232 transmitter. DTE configures pin 2 as
the transmitter, and pin 3 as the receiver. These switches allow the use of
modem or null-modem cables. All of these switches should be in the DCE or
DTE position. No other combinations are valid.

794

Note:
Connect shield (drain wire)
to earth ground.

www.redlion.net

* - Application Dependent

TYPICAL CONNECTION FOR RS485 DEVICES

G Rail Installation
To install the ICM5 on a "G" style DIN rail, angle the module so that the
upper groove of the "foot" catches under the lip of the top rail. Push the
module toward the rail until it snaps into place. To remove a module from the
rail, push up on the bottom of the module while pulling out away from the rail.

* - Application Dependent

TYPICAL RS485 CONNECTIONS USING RJ-11
T Rail Installation
To install the ICM5 on a "T" style rail, angle the module so that the top
groove of the "foot" is located over the lip of the top rail. Push the module
toward the rail until it snaps into place. To remove a module from the rail,
insert a screwdriver into the slot on the bottom of the "foot", and pry upwards
on the module until it releases from the rail.

* - Application Dependent

CONNECTING TO PARADIGM INTERFACE

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ICM5

RS232/RS485 Converter Module

ICM50000

CBJ

6" RJ-11 Jumper Cable

CBJ11BD5

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the
appropriate company numbers listed.

* - Application Dependent
1-717-767-6511

795

H
MODEL ICM8 – COMMUNICATION GATEWAY
z COMMUNICATION GATEWAY FOR RED LION PRODUCTS
z PROTOCOLS AVAILABLE: RS232, RS485 AND ETHERNET
z PROGRAMMABLE VIA CRIMSON SOFTWARE
z USB PROGRAMMING PORT
z EXTENSIVE BUILT-IN DRIVER LIST ALLOWS EASY DATA
MAPPING TO PLCs, PCs, AND SCADA SYSTEMS
z 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX ETHERNET CONNECTION CAN
CONNECT TO AN UNLIMITED NUMBER OF DEVICES VIA FOUR
PROTOCOLS SIMULTANEOUSLY

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The ICM8 is designed to act as a communication gateway offering multiple
protocol conversion for any Red Lion Product. With two serial ports (one RS232
and one RS485) and a 10 Base-T/100 Ethernet Port, the unit performs protocol
conversion, allowing disparate devices to communicate seamlessly with one
another. Programming the unit can be accomplished via the RS232 or the USB
Port using Crimson Software. It is important to note that this device is designed
to function with Red Lion Product and will not offer protocol conversion if a
Red Lion Products is not connected to at least one of the serial ports.
The ICM8’S DIN rail mounting saves time and panel space and snaps easily
onto standard top hat (T) profile DIN rail.

SAFETY SUMMARY

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use the controller to directly command motors, valves, or other
actuators not equipped with safeguards. To do so can be potentially harmful to
persons or equipment in the event of a fault to the controller. An independent and
redundant temperature limit indicator with alarm outputs is strongly
recommended.

SOFTWARE

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

The ICM8 is programmed with Windows® compatible Crimson 2.0 software.
The software is an easy to use graphical interface which can be purchased as part
of a kit that includes a manual and cables, or downloaded free of charge from
www.redlion.net.

SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

796

1. POWER: 24 VDC ± 10% 200 mA max. Must use a Class 2 or SELV rated
power supply.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
USB/PG Port: Adheres to USB specification 1.1. Device only using Type B
connection.
Serial Ports: Format and Baud Rates for each port are individually software
programmable up to 115,200 baud.
RS232/PG Port: RS232 port via RJ12
COMMS Ports: RS485 port via RJ11
Ethernet Port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX
3. LEDs:
STS – Status LED indicates condition of ICM8.
TX/RX – Transmit/Receive LEDs show serial activity.
Ethernet – Link and activity LEDs.
4. MEMORY:
On-board User Memory: 4 Mbytes of non-volatile Flash memory.
On-board SDRAM: 2 Mbytes

www.redlion.net

5. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
IEC 1010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 Criterion B 3
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4 Criterion B
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5 Criterion A
1kV L-L,2 kV
L&N-E power
RF conducted interference EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A
3 V/rms
Emissions:
Emissions
EN 55011
Class A

6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50°C
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to +70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 80% max relative humidity,
non-condensing, from 0 to 50°C
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
7. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is black high impact plastic and stainless
steel. Installation Category I, Pollution Degree 2.
8. POWER CONNECTION: Removable wire clamp screw terminal block.
Wire Gage Capacity: 24 AWG to 12 AWG
Torque: 4.45 to 5.34 in/lb (0.5 to 0.6 N-m)
9. MOUNTING: Snaps onto standard DIN style top hat (T) profile mounting
rails according to EN50022 -35 x 7.5 and -35 x 15.
10. WEIGHT: 12.3 oz (348g)

Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
3. This device was designed for installation in an enclosure. To avoid
electrostatic discharge to the unit in environments with static levels above
4 kV precautions should be taken when the device is mounted outside an
enclosure. When working in an enclosure (ex. making adjustments, setting
switches etc.) typical anti-static precautions should be observed before
touching the unit.

HARDWARE
INSTALLATION

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

It is very important that the power supply is mounted correctly if the unit is
to operate reliably. Please take care to observe the following points:
– The power supply must be mounted close to the unit, with usually not more
than 6 feet (1.8 m) of cable between the supply and the ICM8. Ideally, the
shortest length possible should be used.
– The wire used to connect the ICM8’s power supply should be at least 22gage wire. If a longer cable run is used, a heavier gage wire should be used.
The routing of the cable should be kept away from large contactors,
inverters, and other devices which may generate significant electrical
noise.
– A power supply with a Class 2 or SELV rating is to be used. A Class 2 or
SELV power supply provides isolation to accessible circuits from
hazardous voltage levels generated by a mains power supply due to single
faults. SELV is an acronym for “safety extra-low voltage.” Safety extralow voltage circuits shall exhibit voltages safe to touch both under normal
operating conditions and after a single fault, such as a breakdown of a layer
of basic insulation or after the failure of a single component has occurred.

Figure 1 - Attach ICM8 To DIN Rail

1-717-767-6511

797

EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
H

4. Never run Signal or Control cables in the same conduit or raceway with AC
power lines, conductors feeding motors, solenoids, SCR controls, and
heaters, etc. The cables should be run through metal conduit that is properly
grounded. This is especially useful in applications where cable runs are long
and portable two-way radios are used in close proximity or if the installation
is near a commercial radio transmitter. Also, Signal or Control cables within
an enclosure should be routed as far away as possible from contactors, control
relays, transformers, and other noisy components.
5. Long cable runs are more susceptible to EMI pickup than short cable runs.
Therefore, keep cable runs as short as possible.
6. In extremely high EMI environments, the use of external EMI suppression
devices is effective. The following EMI suppression devices (or equivalent)
are recommended:
Ferrite Suppression Cores for signal and control cables:
Fair-Rite part number 0443167251 (RLC part number FCOR0000)
TDK part number ZCAT3035-1330A
Steward part number 28B2029-0A0
Line Filters for input power cables:
Schaffner part number FN610-1/07 (RLC part number LFIL0000)
Schaffner part number FN670-1.8/07
Corcom part number 1 VR3
Visit RLC's web site at www.redlion.net for more information on EMI
guidelines, Safety and CE issues as they relate to Red Lion Controls products.

WIRING
POWER CONNECTION

PROGRAMMING PORTS
USB/PG

RS232/PG

798

www.redlion.net

COMMUNICATION PORTS
RS232/PG

* Use appropriate communications cable.
See Ordering Information for descriptions of
the available cables.

RS485

PORT 3 - ETHERNET CONNECTION

Standard Ethernet cable

1-717-767-6511

799

ICM8 PORT PIN OUTS

TROUBLESHOOTING

1. This module is designed to operate with Red Lion panel meters only.
Please make sure a Red Lion product is connected to either one of the
two serial ports for the gateway to be active.
2. The Ethernet port is equipped with data LEDs. If they are blinking,
the converter is active and the data is available at the port. Please
verify the receiving equipment is properly programmed.
3. If for any reason you have trouble operating, connecting, or simply
have questions concerning your new ICM8, contact Red Lion’s
technical support. For contact information, refer to the back page of
this bulletin for phone and fax numbers.
EMAIL: techsupport@redlion.net
Web Site: http://www.redlion.net

COMMUNICATING WITH THE ICM8
CONFIGURING THE ICM8

The ICM8 is configured using Crimson 2.0 software. Crimson 2.0 is
available as a free download from Red Lion’s website, or it can be ordered on
CD. Updates to Crimson 2.0 for new features and drivers are posted on the
website as they become available. By configuring the ICM8 using the latest
version of Crimson 2.0, you are assured that your unit has the most up to date
feature set. Crimson 2.0 software can configure the ICM8 through the
RS232/PG port or USB/PG port. The USB/PG port is connected using a
standard USB cable with a Type B connector.
The driver needed to use the USB port will be installed with Crimson 2.0.
The RS232/PG port uses a programming cable made by Red Lion to connect to
the DB9 COM port of your computer. If making your own cable, refer to the
“ICM8 Port Pin Outs” for wiring information.

RS232 PORTS

The ICM8 has one RS232 port. The port can be used for programming or
communications.

CABLES AND DRIVERS

Red Lion has a wide range of cables and drivers for use with many different
communication types. A list of these drivers and cables along with pin outs is
available from Red Lion’s website. New cables and drivers are added on a
regular basis. If making your own cable, refer to the “ICM8 Port Pin Outs” for
wiring information.

ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Ethernet communications can be established at either 10 BASE-T or 100
BASE-TX. The Crimson 2.0 manual contains additional information on
Ethernet communications.

800

www.redlion.net

RS485 PORT

LEDS

The ICM8 has one RS485 port.

STS – STATUS LED
The green Status LED provides information regarding the state of the ICM8.
This includes indication of the various stages of the start-up routine (power-up),
and any errors that may occur.

Startup Routing
INDICATION

Rapidly Flashing

ICM8 is currently running the boot loader and/or
being flash upgraded by Crimson

Steady

ICM8 is operating properly

USER COMMUNICATION PORTS - TX/RX LEDS

Note: All Red Lion devices connect A to A and B to B, except for Paradigm
devices. Refer to www.redlion.net for additional information.

LED

INDICATION

GREEN

Transmitting

RED

Receiving

ETHERNET LEDS
LED

INDICATION

YELLOW (Solid)

Link Established

YELLOW (Flashing)

Network Activity

GREEN

10 BASE-T Communications

AMBER

100 BASE-T Communications

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ICM8

Communication Gateway

PSDR

DIN Rail Power Supply

PSDRxxxx

Crimson 2.0 2, Manual and Download Cable

SFCRM200

RS-232 Programming Cable

CBLPROG0

USB Cable

CBLUSB00

SFCRM2

CBL

Communications Cables
DR

ICM80000

CBLxxxxx

DIN Rail Mountable Adapter Products

DRxxxxxx

Contact your Red Lion distributor or visit our website for complete selection.
2 Use this part number to purchase Crimson on CD with a printed manual, USB
cable, and RS-232 cable. Otherwise, download free of charge from www.redlion.net.
3 Red Lion offers RJ modular jack adapters. Refer to the DR literature for
complete details.
1

1-717-767-6511

801

SWITCH08 - DIN RAIL MOUNTED 8 PORT ETHERNET SWITCH

UNMANAGED SWITCH REQUIRES NO CONFIGURATION
SUPPORTS 10/100 MDPS NETWORK
AUTO HALF/FULL DUPLEX NEGOTIATION
AUTO-CROSSING DETECTION SUPPORTS STANDARD AND
CROSSOVER ETHERNET CABLES

UL Recognized Component,
File # E244362

DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The SWITCH08 is an eight-port Ethernet switch designed to simplify
network expansion, while improving the network’s efficiency. Eight 10/100
Base-T ports, with auto negotiation of half or full duplex connections requires
no setup, reducing installation time. The SWITCH08 also offers an
auto-crossing feature, which allows connections to be made with any
combination of standard or crossover Ethernet cables.
The SWITCH08 may be powered with two DC sources, allowing for
redundancy in critical applications. A relay output provides a warning signal if
the backup supply fails, ensuring continued operation when needed.

CAUTION: Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

SWITCH

802

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

8-Port Ethernet Switch

PART NUMBER

SWITCH08

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER: 24 VDC ±20 %, 4.8 W
2. RELAY OUTPUT: Single N.C. 24 VDC @ 100 mA max.
3. LEDs:
V1+ and V2+ - On when proper voltage is present at respective terminal
Link/Act - On indicates link established; blinking indicates network activity
on the port.
100 - On indicates 100 Mbps connection established; off indicates 10 Mbps
connection.
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to +55°C
Storage Temperature Range: -20 to +70°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 30-95%, non-condensing
Altitude: Up to 1500 meters
5. CONSTRUCTION: Brushed aluminum housing.
6. CONNECTIONS:
POWER: Removable wire clamp screw terminal block.
Wire Gage Capacity: 24 AWG to 12 AWG
Torque: 4.45 to 5.34 in/lb (0.5 to 0.6 N-m)
ETHERNET: 8-position RJ-45 female connector
7. MOUNTING: Snaps onto standard DIN style top hat (T) profile mounting
rails according to EN50022 -35 x 7.5 and -35 x 15.

9. WEIGHT: 0.61 lbs. (0.27 Kg)

POWER

MOUNTING

The SWITCH08 can be powered in various configurations with either one or
two +24 VDC SELV power supplies. How it is wired depends on whether or not
a backup power supply is desired for failsafe operation. (For example, if the
relay isn't used, a single power supply may be connected to +V1 only.)

Mount the SWITCH08 to a grounded standard DIN rail. The switch will be
grounded once it is snapped onto the rail. Additionally the noise immunity can
be improved in environments with high electromagnetic smog by a
low-impedance connection to the functional earth through terminal 7.

NOTE: MUST USE SELV POWER SUPPLIES

8. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
Fast transients (burst)
Surge
RF conducted interference
Magnetic interference
Emissions
Mechanical:
Shock

Vibration
Fall

EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-8
EN 55022

Criterion B
Criterion A
Criterion A
Criterion B
Criterion A
Criterion A
Class A

IEC 60068-2-27
Operation: 25g, 11 msec period,
half-sine shock pulse
Storage: 50g, 11 msec period,
half-sine shock pulse
IEC 60068-2-6
Operation/Storage: 5g, 150 Hz Criterion 3
IEC 60068-2-32
3.281 ft (1 m)

NOTE: The SWITCH08 module was designed for use with
SELV in accordance with IEC 950 / EN 60950 / VDE 0805

TROUBLESHOOTING

For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

RELAY OUTPUT
The N.C. relay output remains closed as long as the proper voltage is present
at both +V1 and +V2 terminals. In the event of a voltage failure at one of the
terminals, the contact is opened. This may be used to signal other systems that
one of the power supplies has failed.

1-717-767-6511

803

This page intentionally left blank.
804

www.redlion.net

SENSORS
I

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

805

QUICK Specs
Sensors
PROXIMITY SENSORS
HESS

PSA SERIES

PSAC

PSAFP SERIES

Round Proximity

Round Threaded Proximity

Round Amplified Proximity

Space Saving Flat Pack
Proximity

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

64 mm (H) x 10 mm (W)

Model Dependent

114 mm (H) x 19 mm (W)

Model Dependent

Recommended
Installation

Counters/Rate Meters

Max. Operating
Frequency

5 KHz

Model Dependent

5 KHz

Model Dependent

NPN O. C.

NPN Loaded Collector, 1 mA to
3 mA Swing

NPN O. C.

Max. Sensing
Distance

.040" (1 mm)

.059" (1.5 mm) to
.394" (10 mm)
Model Dependent

.040" (1 mm)

.078" (2 mm)
.393" (10 mm)

Operating
Power

8 to 30 VDC

Model Dependent

10 to 30 VDC

N/A

Mounting Brackets

Mounting Brackets, Quick
Disconnect Cables

Mounting Bracket and Spacer

Construction

Stainless Steel Case with
10 Foot Cable

Model Dependent

Stainless Steel Case

High Impact Plastic Case

Page Number

Page 813

Page 815

Page 818

Page 819

Description

Output

Options

806

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Sensors
MAGNETIC PICK-UPS
MPS

MP SERIES

LMP SERIES

ARC RINGS

Description

Magnetic Proximity Switch

Threaded Magnetic Pick-ups

Amplified Magnetic Pick-ups

"C" Face-Mounted Motor
Adapter Kits

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

115 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)

Model Dependent

102 mm (H) x 19 mm (W)

Refer to Drawing

Recommended
Installation

Counters/Timers

Rate Meters,
100 RPM Min.

Rate Meters, 25 RPM Min.

Magnetic: Rate Meters
Proximity: Counters/Rate Meters

Max. Operating
Frequency

60 Hz

Greater than
50 KHz Typical

10 KHz

Magnetic: Greater than 50 KHz
Typical
Proximity: 5 KHz

Output

SPDT Switch

AC Voltage Signal

NPN OC (LMPC) 5 VDC Signal
(LMPEC)

Magnetic: A/C Voltage Signal
Proximity: NPN O. C.

Max. Sensing
Distance

.125" (3 mm)

Model Dependent

0.125" w/24 DP Gear

Sensor Pregapped in
Ring Kits

N/A

Self Powered Two Wires

9 to 30 VDC

Magnetic: Self Powered
Proximity: 8 to 10 VDC

Explosion Proof
Model Available

In-Line Amplifier (ASTC)
Explosion-Proof Version
(MP75TX)

Mounting Brackets, Quick
Disconnect Cables

N/A

Construction

Brass

Threaded Stainless Steel Case

Stainless Steel Case

Cast Aluminum
w/ Junction Box

Page Number

Page 822

Page 823

Page 825

Page 827

Operating
Power

Options

1-717-767-6511

807

QUICK Specs
Sensors
MOTOR FEEDBACK
MOTOR MOUNT
MOTOR MOUNT

R O TA R Y P U L S E G E N E R AT O R S
LOW PROFILE
LOW PROFILE

Motor Mount Configurations

C-Face Encoders

Small Thru-Bore and Shaft
Encoders

Large Thru-Bore Encoders

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Refer to Drawing

Recommended
Installation

Motor Feedback Systems

Counters/Rate Meters

Max. Operating
Frequency

250 KHz

200 KHz

Line Driver

Standard: Quadrature Open
Collector, Others Include Line
Driver, Push Pull

N/A

5 to 28 VDC

Protective Cover Kit,
Various Bore Sleeves

N/A

Precision Shaft Couplings

Flex Mount Kits, Bore Insert Kits,
Magnetic Coupling Kit

Construction

Nylon Composite

Metal

Aluminum

Page Number

Page 833

Page 835

Page 837

Page 838

Description

Output

Max. Sensing
Distance

Operating
Power

Options

808

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Sensors
R O TA R Y P U L S E G E N E R AT O R S
INDUSTRIAL DUTY

INDUSTRIAL DUTY

INDUSTRIAL AND
HEAVY DUTY

HEAVY DUTY ENCODER

Shaft Encoders

Large Thru-Bore Encoders

Industrial and Heavy Duty
Encoder

Size 20 and 25 Flange Encoders

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Refer to Drawing

Recommended
Installation

Counters/Rate Meters

Max. Operating
Frequency

10 KHz

1 MHz

20 KHz

1 MHz

Single Channel or Quadrature,
NPN O.C.

Standard: Quadrature Open
Collector, Others Include Line
Driver, Push Pull

Single Channel or Quadrature,
Current Sinking.

Standard: Quadrature Open
Collector, Others Include Line
Driver, Push Pull

N/A

8 to 35 VDC (ZCG)
8 to 28 VDC (ZCH)

5 to 28 VDC

Precision Shaft Couplings

Tether Arm Kits, Bore Insert Kits,
Magnetic Coupling Kit

Precision Shaft Couplings

Construction

Cast Aluminum

Nylon Composite

Aluminum

Page Number

Page 839

Page 847

Page 851

Page 855

Description

Output

Max. Sensing
Distance

Operating
Power

Options

1-717-767-6511

809

QUICK Specs
Sensors
LENGTH SENSORS
MINIATURE LENGTH
LENGTH SENSORS
SENSORS

LINEAR
LINEAR ENCODER

PHOTO EYE
PHOTO EYES

Description

Length Measurement Sensor

Photo Electric Sensors

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Refer to Drawing

Model Dependent

Recommended
Installation

Counters/Rate Meters

Counters/Timers

Max. Operating
Frequency

200 KHz

10 KHz

125 KHz

1 KHz

Quadrature Open Collector

Single Channel or Quadrature,
Current Sinking.

Quadrature, Open Collector

NPN O. C.,
PNP O. C.

N/A

15 Foot (Reflective)
12 Inch (Proximity)
10 Foot (Opposed Beam)

5 to 28 VDC

8 to 35 VDC (ZFG)
8 to 28 VDC (ZFH)

5 to 28 VDC

10 to 30 VDC

Mounting Bracket, Various
Measuring Wheels

Single or Dual Shaft, Mounting
Bracket, Various Measuring
Wheels

Mounting Bracket

Mounting Brackets, Reflectors

Construction

Nylon Composite

Cast Aluminum

Aluminum

Plastic

Page Number

Page 857

Page 839

Page 859

Page 861

Output

Max. Sensing
Distance

Operating
Power

Options

810

www.redlion.net

QUICK Specs
Sensors
PRESSURE
PT SERIES

T E M P E R AT U R E S E N S O R S
THERMOCOUPLES

RTDS

CURRENT
TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS

Description

Pressure Sensors

Various Thermocouple Sensors

Various RTD Sensors

Current Transformers

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

68 mm (H) x 23 mm (W)

Model Dependent

Recommended
Installation

Digital Panel Meters/Process
Meters

Temperature Meters/Controllers

Digital Panel Meters/Process
Meters

Max. Operating
Frequency

N/A

Model Dependent

4 to 20 mA

0.1, 1, and 5 Amp

N/A

8 to 33 VDC

Model Dependent

N/A

Output

Max. Sensing
Distance

Operating
Power

Options

Adapter Fittings

Field Cuttable, Quick Disconnects, Field Cuttable, Quick Disconnects,
Handheld, Compression, Surface, Handheld, Compression, Surface,
Pipe Plug
Pipe Plug

N/A

Construction

Stainless Steel Case

Model Dependent

Plastic

Page Number

Page 868

Page 869

Page 878

Page 881

1-717-767-6511

811

QUICK Specs
Sensors
CURRENT TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT
CURRENT SWITCH
TRANSDUCERS

Current Transducers

Current Switch

Dimensions
(Height)x(Width)

Model Dependent

Recommended
Installation

Digital Panel Meters/Process
Meters

Stand Alone

Max. Operating
Frequency

Model Dependent

60 to 100 Hz

4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC
Model Dependent

Solid State Switch

Max. Sensing
Distance

N/A

Operating
Power

N/A

Self Powered

Fixed or Split Core, Model
Dependent

Construction

Thermoplastic

Page Number

Page 883

Page 889

Description

Output

Options

812

www.redlion.net

MODEL HESS - HALL EFFECT SPEED SENSOR
O

NPN OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT

OPERATES FROM 0 TO 10 KHz

3/8" DIAMETER STAINLESS STEEL CASE

DETECTS STEEL SENSING GEARS OR OTHER FERROUS
TARGETS

EPOXY ENCAPSULATED FOR OIL, DIRT & MOISTURE
RESISTANCE
IDEAL FOR TACHOMETRIC INPUTS

DESCRIPTION
The Hall Effect speed sensor (HESS) is ideal for sensing steel gears or other
ferrous targets from 0 to 10 KHz. This sensor does not have a minimum
threshold speed as does a magnetic pickup sensor. However, when the sensor is
first powered up, the output state is indeterminate (Hi or Lo) when the sensor is
not detecting metal. The unit operates from a +8 to +30 VDC power supply and
is reverse polarity protected. The sensor face can be mounted flush into metal
panels. The case is stainless steel and is supplied with 10 feet (3 M) of cable.
The stranded shield wire is not connected to the sensor circuit or case.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER SUPPLY: +8 to +30 VDC @ 30 mA max.; reverse polarity
protected.
2. MAXIMUM SENSING DISTANCE: 0.040" (1 mm).
3. OUTPUT: NPN O.C. transistor; VMAX = 30 VDC; VSAT = 1 VMAX @ 30
mA max. load.
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -25°C to 70°C
(-14°F to 158°F).
5. CABLE LENGTH: 10 feet (3.05 M).
6. OPERATING FREQUENCY: 0 to 10 KHz.
7. WIRE: 3 wire, 22 AWG with stranded shield wire and 100% foil coverage;
grey PVC jacket.
Color Code: Red (+VDC), Black (Comm.), White (Output).
8. CABLE STRAIN RELIEF: 10 lbs. (4.5 Kg.) for 1 minute.
Note: DO NOT adjust sensor air gap while target (gear) is moving.

TARGET SIZE
The HESS can detect gears as small as 24 D.P. or other ferrous targets with
equal or greater dimensions. The sensor is compatible with all Red Lion
Controls Sensing Gears.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

HESS

NPN O.C. Hall Effect Speed Sensor

HESS0000

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1-717-767-6511

813

MODEL PSAH - HALL EFFECT SPEED SENSOR
O

DETECTS STEEL SENSING GEARS OR OTHER FERROUS
TARGETS

NPN OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT

OPERATES FROM 0 TO 10 KHz

IDEAL FOR RATE APPLICATIONS

DESCRIPTION
The Hall Effect speed sensor (PSAH) is ideal for sensing steel gears or other
ferrous targets from 0 to 10 KHz. This sensor does not have a minimum
threshold speed as does a magnetic pickup sensor. However, when the sensor is
first powered up, the output state is indeterminate (Hi or Lo) when the sensor is
not detecting metal. The unit operates from a +8 to +30 VDC power supply and
is reverse polarity protected. The sensor face can be mounted flush into metal
panels. The case is stainless steel and is supplied with 10 feet (3 M) of cable.
The stranded shield wire is not connected to the sensor circuit or case.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER SUPPLY: +8 to +30 VDC @ 30 mA max.; reverse polarity
protected.
2. MAXIMUM SENSING DISTANCE: 0.040" (1 mm).
3. OUTPUT: NPN O.C. transistor; VMAX = 30 VDC; VSAT = 1 VMAX @ 30
mA max. load.
4. OPERATING FREQUENCY: 0 to 10 KHz.
5. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -25°C to 70°C
(-14°F to 158°F).
6. OUTPUT CABLE: Integrally potted 10 ft PVC jacketed, 3 wire, 22 AWG
conductors, with stranded shield wire and 100% foil coverage; grey PVC
jacket.
Color Code: Red (+VDC), Black (Comm.), White (NPN OC Output).
7. CONSTRUCTION: Epoxy encapsulated 0.297 sensor in 0.75" ±0.005" dia.
#304 stainless steel case.

TARGET SIZE
The PSAH can detect gears as small as 24 D.P. or other ferrous targets with
equal or greater dimensions. The sensor is compatible with all Red Lion
Controls Sensing Gears.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PSAH

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

PSAH

814

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

NPN O.C. Hall Effect Sensor
Block Mount

PART NUMBER

PSAH0000
5400100

INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SENSORS
O

SENSE FERROUS & NON-FERROUS METAL OBJECTS TO
“ZERO SPEED”

2-WIRE CURRENT SOURCE (NAMUR) & 3-WIRE NPN TRUE
OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTS

5 SIZES & 3 SENSING DISTANCES FOR APPLICATION
VERSATILITY

L.E.D. TARGET INDICATOR (PSA 2B, 6B, 7B, & 8B)

DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

PSA-1B & PSA-2B SPECIFICATIONS

Inductive Proximity Sensors detect the presence of metal objects which come
within range of their oscillating field and provide target detection to “zero
speed”. Internally, an oscillator creates a high frequency electromagnetic field
(RF) which is radiated from the coil and out from the sensor face (See Figure
1). When a metal object enters this field, eddy currents are induced into
the object.
As the metal moves closer to
the sensor, these eddy currents
increase and result in an
absorption of energy from the coil
which dampens the oscillator
amplitude until it finally stops.

PSA-1B

1. Power Supply:
2. Maximum Switching Frequency:
3. Output:
4.
5.
6.
7.

Maximum Sensing Distance:
Wire Color Code:
Operating Temperature:
Construction:

PSA-2B

+5 to +30 VDC
5 KHz
500 Hz
Less than 1 mA Target Sensed; Greater
than 2.2 mA No Target.
0.059" (1.5 mm)
0.394" (10 mm)
Brown = +VDC; Blue = Count
-25°C to +70°C (-14°F to +158°F)
NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13, and IEC IP 67.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PSA-1B

PSA-2B

Figure 1

MODELS PSA-1B & 2B
The 2-wire Models PSA-1B and 2B contain only the coil and oscillator
circuit (See Figure 2). With no metal object being sensed, the circuit oscillates
and draws greater than 2.2 mA of supply current. As a metal object of sufficient
size is brought into the sensing field, the oscillator amplitude dampens and
finally stops, resulting in less than 1 mA of circuit current being drawn. This
greater than 2.2 mA to less than 1 mA change in circuit current between
oscillating and non-oscillating conditions is converted into a usable voltage
signal (VS) by placing a resistor (RS) in series with the sensor leads.

Figure 2

1-717-767-6511

815

In addition to the coil and oscillator circuit, the 3-wire Models PSA-6B, 7B,
and 8B each contain a Detector Circuit and NPN Transistor Output (See Figure
3). In these units, the Detector Circuit senses when the oscillator stops, and
turns on the Output Transistor which controls the load. The Detector Circuit
also turns on an integrally case mounted L.E.D., visually indicating when a
metal object is sensed.

Figure 3

PSA-6B, 7B, & 8B
These Inductive Proximity Sensors have a maximum sensing distance of
0.059" (1.5 mm), 0.197" (5 mm) and 0.394" (10 mm) respectively, and operate
over a wide power supply range (See Specifications Below). They are each
housed in threaded metal cases and are supplied with 2 metal jam nuts for
mounting. The NPN transistor outputs are true open collector and are
compatible with most RLC counter and rate input circuits. Maximum sensing
frequencies are 2 KHz, 1 KHz, and 500 Hz respectively. In addition, the outputs
are overload and short circuit protected. These sensors are shielded for flush
mounting in metal applications.

SELECTION & APPLICATION OF PROXIMITY
SENSORS
Selection of the proper proximity sensor depends on the size, material, and
spacing of the target being sensed and the sensing distance that can be
maintained. The maximum sensing distance is defined as the distance in which
the sensor is just close enough to detect a ferrous target whose diameter is equal
to or greater than the sensor diameter. In actual application, the sensing distance
should be between 50 to 80% of the maximum sensing range to assure reliable
detection. For target sizes smaller than the sensor diameter, the maximum
sensing distance can be estimated from the curve (See Figure 4). A further
reduction factor must also be applied if the target material is non-ferrous metal
(See Figure 5). Ideally, spacing between adjacent targets should be at least one
sensor diameter so that the first target completely leaves the sensors field before
the next target appears. Individual targets can still be resolved as separate
objects if this spacing is reduced to 70 or 75% of the sensor diameter, however,
this can introduce a minimum limit on sensing distance that makes adjustment
more critical. All Proximity sensors are internally shielded which allows the
sensor face to be flush mounted in metal applications without reducing sensing
distance. In applications where proximity sensors must be placed next to each
other, a distance of at least 1 sensor diameter should separate sensors to
eliminate any frequency interference (See Figure 6).

MAXIMUM SENSING DISTANCE REDUCTION FACTORS
Reduction in the max. sensing distance due
to decrease in diameter of ferrous targets.

Figure 4

ferrous targets with diameters equal to or
greater than sensor diameter.

Figure 5

PSA-6B, 7B, & 8B SPECIFICATIONS
PSA-6B

PSA-7B

PSA-8B

+10 to +30+10
VDC
to +30 VDC
@ 10 mA @
max.
10 mA max.

1. Power Supply:

REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTION
2. Maximum Switching Frequency:
3. Output:

2 KHz

1 KHz

VSAT = 1.8 V @
150 mA max. load
4. Maximum Sensing Distance:
5. Wire Color Code:

500 Hz

NPN Open Collector Output,
Overload and Short Circuit protected.

0.059" (1.5 mm)

VSAT = 1.8 V @
200 mA max. load
0.197" (5 mm)

0.394" (10 mm)

Brown = +VDC; Blue = Common; Black = Output

6. Operating Temperature:
7. Construction:

-25°C to +70°C (-14°F to +158°F)

Typical reduction factors for various non-

MINIMUM SENSOR

NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13 and IEC IP 67

SPACING
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PSA-6B

Figure 6

PSA-7B

Note: PSA-6B, 7B, and 8B outputs are NPN open collector outputs. A
PSA-6B, 7B, or 8B may be used as an input to more than 1 indicator or
control only if the respective power supplies of each unit are
“unregulated” and can load share. It is recommended to use only one
power supply for sensor power. An indicator or control with a regulated
power supply may not be paralleled.
Counter #1 and #2 both contain
unregulated +12 VDC Power
Supplies.

PSA-8B

NOTES:
1. PSA 6B case material = #303 stainless steel.
2. PSA 7B & 8B case = chromed brass.
3. PVC Cable Jacket.

816

www.redlion.net

TYPICAL HOOK-UPS

APPLICATION SELECTION CHART
MAX. SENSING DISTANCE
MAX. SWITCHING FREQ.
POWER SUPPLY
OUTPUT
L.E.D. TARGET INDICATOR

PSA-1B

PSA-2B

0.059" (1.5 mm)
5 KHz
5-30 VDC
<1 mA> 2.2 mA
No

0.394" (10 mm)
500 Hz
5-30 VDC
<1 mA> 2.2 mA
Yes

PSA-6B

PSA-7B

PSA-8B

0.059" (1.5 mm)
0.197" (5 mm)
0.394" (10 mm)
2 KHz
1 KHz
500 Hz
10-30 VDC
10-30 VDC
10-30 VDC
NPN Open Collector Transistor
Yes
Yes
Yes

MODELS MB4B & 5B MOUNTING BRACKETS
DIMENSIONS

The Models MB4B and 5B are stainless steel right angle
mounting brackets, designed to provide easy mounting and
adjustment of PSA-7B and 8B respectively, using the 2 hex jam
nuts provided with each sensor.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
BRACKET
MODEL NO.

SENSOR
MODEL

MB4B

MB5B

DIMENSIONS
A

SLOT

PSA7B

1.63
(41.5)

1.00
(25.4)

2.5
(63.5)

1.25
(31.8)

0.62
(15.7)

0.31
(7.9)

1.88
(47.8)

0.75
(19.1)

0.06
(1.5)

0.22 X 0.75
(5.6 X 19.1)

PSA8B

2.62
(66.5)

1.75
(44.5)

4.25
(108.0)

1.75
(44.5)

0.88
(22.4)

0.37
(9.5)

3.50
(88.9)

1.19
(30.2)

0.07
(1.8)

0.28 X 1.25
(7.1 X 31.8)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PSA1B

2-Wire Cylindrical Proximity Sensor

PSA1B000

PSA2B

2-Wire, 30 mm Threaded Proximity Sensor

PSA2B000

PSA6B

8mm Threaded Proximity Sensor

PSA6B000

PSA7B

18mm Threaded Proximity Sensor

PSA7B000

PSA8B

30mm Threaded Proximity Sensor

PSA8B000

MB4B

Mounting Bracket for PSA7B

MB4B0000

MB5B

Mounting Bracket for PSA8B

MB5B0000

1-717-767-6511

PART NUMBER

817

MODEL PSAC - 3-WIRE INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SENSOR WITH CURRENT SINK OUTPUT

SENSE FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METAL OBJECTS

OPERATES FROM ZERO TO 5 KHZ PULSE OUTPUT RATE

SENSES TARGETS AS SMALL AS 12 D.P. GEAR TEETH

IDEAL FOR TACHOMETER, COUNTER AND CONTROL INPUT

PSAC APPLICATION

DESCRIPTION
The PSAC offers a NPN Open Collector output that is compatible with most
Red Lion Controls’ Motion Monitors, Counters, and Controls. This sensor has
a maximum sensing distance of 0.059" (1.5 mm) and can detect ferrous and
non-ferrous metal targets from zero speed to 5 KHz.
The 0.25" diameter pole piece is epoxy encapsulated in a stainless steel case
measuring 0.75" Dia. x 3.5" L and is supplied with a 10, 25 or 50 ft., 3-wire,
cable. Overall dimensions, including the neoprene strain-relief boot are 0.90"
Dia. x 4.5" L. Operating temperature range is -25° to +70°C.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: +10 - 30 VDC @ 20 mA max.; Unit is not Reverse
Polarity Protected.
2. MAXIMUM SWITCHING FREQUENCY: 5 KHz
3. OUTPUT: NPN Open Collector Transistor;
VOH = 30 VDC max.; VOL = 1 V max @ 150 mA.
4. MAXIMUM SENSING DISTANCE: 0.059" (1.5 mm)
5. OUTPUT CABLE: Integrally potted 10, 25, or 50 ft. PUR jacketed 3-wire
24 AWG conductors.
BROWN = +VDC, BLUE = Common, BLACK = NPN O.C. Output
6. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -25°C to +70°C (13°F to
+158°F)
7. CONSTRUCTION: Epoxy Encapsulated 0.25" dia. sensor in 0.750"
±0.005" dia. #304 stainless steel case.

PSAC application depends on the size, material, and spacing of the targets
being sensed and the sensing distance that can be maintained. The maximum
sensing distance is defined as that distance where the sensor is just close enough
to detect a ferrous target whose diameter is equal to or greater than the sensor
diameter. For the PSAC, the internally potted sensor diameter is 0.25". In an
actual application the sensing distance should be between 50-70% of the
maximum to assure reliable detection. For target sizes smaller than the 0.25"
sensor diameter, the maximum sensing distance can be estimated from the
curve in Fig. 2. A further reduction factor must also be applied if the target
material is a non-ferrous metal as shown in Fig. 3.
Ideally, spacing between adjacent targets should be at least 0.25" so that the
first target completely leaves the sensors’ viewing field before the next target
appears. Individual targets can still be resolved as separate objects if this
spacing is reduced to 70 or 75% of the sensor diameter, however this can
introduce a minimum limit on sensing distance that makes adjustment a bit
more critical
The PSAC is internally shielded which allows the sensor face to be flush
mounted in metal applications without reducing sensing distance.

MAXIMUM SENSING DISTANCE REDUCTION FACTORS
Reduction in the max. sensing distance
due to decrease in diameter of ferrous
targets.

Typical reduction factors for various
nonferrous targets with diameters equal to
or greater than sensor diameter.

Figure 2

Figure 3

Figure 1

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
3/4" DIAMETER CYLINDRICAL SENSOR MOUNTING
The PSAC and other Red Lion
Controls 3/4" dia. cylindrical
pickups may be easily mounted
using Model 5400100 BLOCK
MOUNT (see diagram at right).
This machined block of solid
aluminum provides for rigid
mounting using the 2 included #832 x 1/2" screws. The one screw
split-clamp design allows for easy
adjustment of airgap and locks the
unit securely without deforming
the case. Alternative plug mounts
available. See Model LMP for
details.

PSAC

BLOCK MOUNT

For 3/4" cylindrical sensors
Qty. 2 #8-32 x 1/2" Mounting screws included
P/N 5400100

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PSAC

DESCRIPTION

PSAC0000

NPN O.C. Proximity Sensor, 25 ft. Cable

PSAC0025

NPN O.C. Proximity Sensor, 50 ft. Cable

PSAC0050

Block Mount

818

www.redlion.net

PART NUMBER

NPN O.C. Proximity Sensor, 10 ft. Cable

5400100

“FLAT PACK” RECTANGULAR INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SENSORS
O

IDEAL FOR LIMITED SPACE APPLICATIONS

SENSE FERROUS & NON-FERROUS METAL OBJECTS TO
“ZERO SPEED”

3-WIRE NPN TRUE OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTS

2 SIZES & SENSING DISTANCES FOR APPLICATION
VERSATILITY

L.E.D. TARGET INDICATOR

DESCRIPTION & OPERATION
Inductive Proximity Sensors detect the presence of metal objects that come
within range of their oscillating field and provide target detection to “zero
speed”. Internally, an oscillator creates a high frequency electromagnetic field
(RF) that is radiated from the coil and out from the sensor face (See Figure 1).
When a metal object enters this field, eddy currents are induced into the object.
As the metal moves closer to
the sensor, these eddy currents
increase and result in an
absorption of energy from the coil
that dampens the oscillator
amplitude until it finally stops.

These Inductive Proximity Sensors have a maximum sensing distance of
0.078" (2 mm) and 0.393" (10 mm) respectively, and operate over a wide power
supply range (See Specifications Below). They are each housed in plastic with
a top active face. The NPN transistor outputs are true open collector and are
compatible with most Red Lion counter and rate meter input circuits. Maximum
sensing frequencies are 2 KHz and 500 Hz respectively. In addition, the outputs
are overload and short circuit protected. These sensors are shielded for flush
mounting in metal applications.

PSAFP1 AND PSAFP2 SPECIFICATIONS
PSAFP100

PSAFP200

+10 to +30 VDC
@ 15 mA max.

1. Power Supply:

REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTION
2. Maximum Switching Frequency:

4. Maximum Sensing Distance:

Figure 1

VSAT = 1.8 V @
150 mA max. load

VSAT = 1.8 V @
200 mA max. load

0.078" (2 mm)

0.393" (10 mm)

-25° to +85°C
(-14° to +185°F)

6. Operating Temperature:

In addition to the coil and oscillator circuit, the 3-wire Models PSAFP1 and
PSAFP2 each contain a Detector Circuit and NPN Transistor Output (See
Figure 2). In these units, the Detector Circuit senses when the oscillator stops,
and turns on the Output Transistor that controls the load. The Detector Circuit
also turns on an integrally case mounted L.E.D., visually indicating when a
metal object is sensed.

500 Hz

Brown = +VDC; Blue = Common;
Black = Output

5. Wire Color Code:

MODELS PSAFP1 & PSAFP2

2 KHz

NPN Open Collector Output,
Overload and Short Circuit protected.

3. Output:

7. Construction:

-25° to +70°C
(-14° to +158°F)

NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13 and IEC IP 67

8. Trigger Current for Overload Protection:

170 mA

220 mA

TYPICAL HOOKUP

Figure 2
LED STATES

LED ON (GREEN) POWER ON
LED ON (YELLOW) OUTPUT ENERGIZED
LED ON (FLASHING GREEN) SHORT CIRCUIT WARNING

1-717-767-6511

819

SELECTION & APPLICATION OF PROXIMITY
SENSORS

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PSAFP100

Selection of the proper proximity sensor depends on the size, material, and
spacing of the target being sensed and the sensing distance that can be
maintained. The maximum sensing distance is defined as the distance when the
sensor is just close enough to detect a ferrous target whose diameter is equal to
or greater than the sensor diameter. In actual application, the sensing distance
should be between 50 to 80% of the maximum sensing range to assure reliable
detection. For target sizes smaller than the sensor diameter, the maximum
sensing distance can be estimated from the curve (See Figure 3). A further
reduction factor must also be applied if the target material is non-ferrous metal
(See Figure 4). Ideally, spacing between adjacent targets should be at least one
sensor diameter so that the first target completely leaves the sensors field before
the next target appears. Individual targets can still be resolved as separate
objects if this spacing is reduced to 70 or 75% of the sensor diameter, however,
this can introduce a minimum limit on sensing distance that makes adjustment
more critical. All proximity sensors are internally shielded which allows the
sensor face to be flush mounted in metal applications without reducing sensing
distance. In applications where proximity sensors must be placed next to each
other, a distance of at least 1 sensor diameter should separate sensors to
eliminate any frequency interference (See Mounting below).

PSAFP200

MAXIMUM SENSING DISTANCE REDUCTION FACTORS
Reduction in the maximum sensing
distance due to decrease in diameter
of ferrous targets.

Notes:
1. PSAFP100 Housing: Plastic, PA12-GF30
Cable: 2 meter standard length
2. PSAFP200 Housing: Plastic, PBT-GF30-VO
Cable: 2 meter standard length

Typical reduction factors for various nonferrous targets with diameters equal to or
greater than sensor diameter.

Figure 3

Figure 4

PSAFP200 MOUNTING

PSAFP100 and PSAFP200 outputs are NPN open collector outputs. A
PSAFP100 and PSAFP200 may be used as an input to more than 1
indicator or control only if the respective power supplies of each unit
are “unregulated” and can load share. It is recommended to use only
one power supply for sensor power. An indicator or control with a
regulated power supply may not be paralleled.

Counter #1 and #2 both contain
unregulated +12 VDC Power
Supplies.

820

30.00 mm

45.00 mm

30.00 mm

60.00 mm

www.redlion.net

MODELS MB7 & MB8 MOUNTING ACCESSORIES FOR PSAFP200
MB700000
O

MOUNTING SPACER

FOR MOUNTING WITH ACTIVE FACE DOWNWARDS

METAL, Cu2n

MB800000

MOUNTING BRACKET

STAINLESS STEEL: VA 1.4301

The Model MB7 and MB8 mounting accessories are designed to provide easy mounting and adjustment of the PSAFP200.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

PSAFP1

2 mm Flat Pack Rectangular Proximity Sensor

PSAFP100

PSAFP2

10 mm Flat Pack Rectangular Proximity Sensor

PSAFP200

MB7

Spacer for PSAFP200

MB700000

MB8

Mounting Bracket for PSAFP200

MB800000

1-717-767-6511

821

MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SWITCH - RESPONDS TO FERROUS METALS &
REQUIRES NO EXTERNAL POWER & RUGGED, FOR HOSTILE ENVIRONMENTS
SPECIFICATIONS

1. *SWITCH CONTACT RATING: 1250 watts max.; 120, 240, 480, 600
VAC; 10 cps resistive load.
2. RESPONSE TIME: 8 msec.
3. REPEATABILITY: 0.002" Typical
4. LIFE: Tested to mechanical and electrical life of over 2 billion cycles.
(Actual life varies with electrical load.)
5. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -50°C to +120°C (-60°F to
+250°F)

DESCRIPTIONS

* - Derate at higher cycle rates, inductive loads and for DC uses.

This sensor is ideal for generating switch-contact count signals from passing
steel or iron castings, weldments, stampings, “Tin-cans”, pulley spokes, etc. A
flux-field, generated by internal permanent magnets is arranged to hold the
SPDT switch contact in the N.C. position. When an external mass of magnetic
material (target) approaches the sensing area, it shunts away a part of this field,
causing the switch contact to transfer to the N.O. position. The distance, at
which this occurs, is called the “Sensing Distance” and it depends on the size,
shape and thickness of the ferrous target. The curve below shows variation of
sensing distance with target area of steel plate, 0.1" or more in thickness. For
very thin sheet steel (0.01" to 0.02") derate sensing distance by 50%. Once the
N.O. switch transfer is made, the target must move away approximately 2 times
the sensing distance to re-establish the original N.C. contact closure.
These switches can be operated at speeds up to 60 counts/sec and have a life
rating of 2-billion operations when used in low-current, low-voltage electronic
counting applications. Operating temperature range is -50° to +120°C.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

MPS

DESCRIPTION

Magnetic Proximity Switch

PART NUMBER

4100600

Note: The MPS is also available in an explosion-proof version with certain
agency approvals on a special order basis. Contact your distributor for
prices and delivery.

822

www.redlion.net

MAGNETIC PICKUPS & IN-LINE PREAMPLIFIER
SIMPLE, RELIABLE & ECONOMICAL PULSE GENERATORS FOR:
SPEED SWITCHES
DIGITAL TACHOMETERS
FREQUENCY TO D.C. CONVERTERS
FEATURES INCLUDE
z SELF-GENERATING, NO EXT. POWER NEEDED
z WIDE OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
z EPOXY ENCAPSULATED, MECHANICALLY RUGGED
z IMPERVIOUS TO DIRT, OIL & WATER
z NO MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
z LOW COST
z M12 CONNECTOR (MODEL SPECIFIC)

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
A Magnetic Pickup consists of a permanent magnet, a pole-piece, and a
sensing coil all encapsulated in a cylindrical case. An object (target) of iron,
steel, or other magnetic material, passing closely by its pole-piece causes
distortion of the magnetic flux field passing through the sensing coil and polepiece, which in turn generates a signal voltage. The magnitude of the signal
voltage depends on the relative size of the magnetic target, its speed of
approach, and how close it approaches. The polarity of the signal depends on
whether the target is moving toward or away from the pole-piece.
Magnetic Pickups are most frequently used to sense passing teeth on a gear,
sprocket, or timing belt wheel, to bolt-heads, key-ways, or other moving
machine mounted targets. Typical targets and resulting signal wave forms are
shown below in Fig. 1.

SELECTING A MAGNETIC PICKUP
Selecting a magnetic pickup is a matter of matching a pickup to a gear (or
other target), to provide enough input signal to a tachometer, speed-switch, or
other device for operation at the required minimum speed. The open-circuit
output from a magnetic pickup is directly proportional to speed, and once the
minimum operating speed conditions have been met, excess signal will always
be available at higher speeds.
The “1-Volt Threshold Speed” column in the Application and Ordering Table
(next pg.) provides a convenient guide for estimating minimum operating
speeds. This value is the linear surface-speed of a reference gear required to
generate a 1-Volt peak, open-circuit output at an air-gap of 0.005". The
reference gear listed for each pickup is near the optimum size for that pickup,
as defined by the criteria in Fig. 1B. The RPM listed is for a reference gear with
60 teeth running at that surface-speed. Gears with larger teeth provide about the
same or somewhat more output at the same surface-speed, while gears with
smaller teeth or fewer number of teeth yield lower outputs. Figures 1C - 1F need
a very high surface speed to generate a 1-Volt peak. The “Minimum Gear Size”
column lists the Diametral Pitch size at which the output drops to 40-60% of the
output when the reference gear is used. Gears with very small teeth in relation
to the pole-piece diameter, deliver greatly reduced outputs, as shown in Fig. 1A.
Threshold outputs when using targets other than gear teeth can be estimated by
their relative size with respect to the reference gear teeth. For more information

on gears, definitions and relationships, see the Sensing Gears Bulletin.
The 1-Volt Threshold Speeds are based on a 0.005" air-gap. In applications
where this air-gap cannot be maintained or where the air-gap can vary due to
eccentricity of the sensing gear, a correction factor can be applied from the
curve in Fig 2. The effect of electrical loading is usually minimal at low speeds
and low output frequencies, however, output voltage drop due to loading at high
frequency or with low impedance inputs can be estimated based on the Output
Impedance data.
Note: Magnetic Pickups are used primarily for tachometer and other speed
related functions. They are not normally used for counting since loss of
counts will occur at low speeds. Therefore, counters are not designed to
accept outputs directly from conventional magnetic pickups. In special
applications where counting occurs only at running speed or where lowspeed count loss is acceptable, a Model ASTC can be used, or a different type
of sensor can be used as a substitute.

TYPICAL APPLICATION EXAMPLE
A Digital Tachometer, with an input sensitivity of 0.25 V is to be used with a
Magnetic Pickup and gear to indicate speed down to 75 RPM. What are the
alternative choices?
Since the input voltage required by the tachometer is only 0.25 V, the surface
speeds and reference gear RPM’s required would only be 2 of the 1-Volt
Threshold Speeds listed. The MP-25TA with a 60-tooth, 24 D.P. reference gear
would obviously fall short since this combination will not develop 0.25 V until
the reference gear speed reaches 250 RPM.
The MP-37CA with the 60-tooth, 20 D.P. reference gear would both prove
suitable since they would deliver the required 0.25 V at 50 and 45 RPM
respectively. They would also provide some additional margin for air-gap
variation. The curve of Fig. 2 shows a typical output drop of about 25% when
the air-gap is increased from 0.005" to 0.0075". Since the minimum operating
speed in this application is 75 RPM, the additional sensitivity can be traded for
a wider air-gap allowance.
The MP-62TA and MP-75TX with their respective reference gears would
allow operation at even lower speeds. With both of these pickups it would be
possible to drop to a smaller gear pitch for this application.

FIG. 1 OUTPUT WAVEFORMS WITH VARIOUS TARGET SHAPES & SIZES

1-717-767-6511

FIG. 2 TYPICAL OUTPUT/AIR-GAP

823

MAGNETIC PICKUP APPLICATION & ORDERING INFORMATION
1-VOLT
THRESHOLD
SPEED (1)

MINIMUM
GEAR
PITCH (2)

TEMP.
RANGE
o
C

OUTPUT
IMPENDANCE

MP-25TA

135 in/sec
1000 RPM
60T 24 D.P.
Ref. Gear

48 D.P.

-40 to +107

130 Ω ±20%
15 mH

MP25TA00

MP-37TA

33 in/sec
200 RPM
60T 20 D.P.
Ref. Gear

32 D.P.

-40 to +107

340 Ω ±20%
44 mH

MP37TA00

MP-37TAC1

33 in/sec
200 RPM
60T 20 D.P.
Ref. Gear

32 D.P.

-40 to +107

340 Ω ±20%
44 mH

MP37TAC1

MP-37CA

30 in/sec
180 RPM
60T 20 D.P.
Ref. Gear

32 D.P.

-40 to +107

300 Ω ±30%
65 mH

MP37CA00

MP-62TA

10 in/sec
50 RPM
60T 16 D.P.
Ref. Gear

24 D.P.

-40 to +107

1200 Ω ±20%
400 mH

MP62TA00

MP-62TAC1

10 in/sec
50 RPM
60T 16 D.P.
Ref. Gear

24 D.P.

-40 to +107

1200 Ω ±20%
400 mH

MP62TAC1

MP-62TB

20 in/sec
100 RPM
60T 16 D.P.
Ref. Gear

24 D.P.

-40 to +107

1200 Ω ±20%
400 mH

MP62TB00

MP-75TX
Explosion
Proof (3)

30 in/sec
100 RPM
60T 10 D.P.
Ref. Gear

12 D.P.

-73 to +93

230 Ω ±20%
100 mH

MP75TX00

MODEL NO.

DIMENSIONS

NOTES:
1) Surface speed of listed reference gear to produce 0.8 volt peak min., opencircuit output @ 0.005" air-gap.
2) Gear pitch where output will drop to 40-60% of that generated by the
reference gear size, at the same surface speed.
3) UL Listed CSA Certified, Class I Group A, B, C and D; Class II Group E, F
and G. (VDO Control Systems, Inc.) PN#AIRPAX/70085-1010-005, UL File
#E40545 (N), CSA File #042648.
4) Polarity, all pickups: white output lead goes positive with respect to black
when target approaches pole.
5) 2-Wire shielded cable is recommended for all magnetic pickup outputs.
Connect the shield to the “COMMOM” or “GROUND” terminal of the
instrument being used and leave the shield un-connected at the pickup.

The following cables are for use with magnetic pickups MP37TAC1 and MP62TAC1, which have
M12 connectors.

CCM

824

Magnetic Pickup signal leads should never be run in conduit, troughs, or
bundles with other power or control voltage lines.
6) Lead length of magnetic pickup should not be extended. An in-line preamplifier (ASTC) can be placed on the end of the provided length which
would allow longer length after the in-line pre-amplifier.
7) M12 unit color codes for 1 meter cable is:
PIN 3 - Blue (-)
PIN 4 - Black (+)
PIN 2 - NC
PIN 1 - NC

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PART NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

Mating Cable With M12 Connector, 1 Meter In Length

www.redlion.net

CCM12S01

LOGIC MAGNETIC PICKUPS - SUPER-SENSITIVE MAGNETIC PICKUPS WITH CURRENT
SINKING OUTPUT OR CURRENT SOURCING OUTPUT
O

DETECTS STEEL SENSING GEARS OR OTHER MOVING
FERROUS TARGETS

BUILT-IN PULSE SHAPING AMPLIFIER PROVIDES ULTRA-LOWSPEED OPERATION WITH LARGE AIR GAPS

TWO OUTPUT SIGNAL VERSIONS

3/4" DIAMETER STAINLESS STEEL CASE

EPOXY ENCAPSULATED SENSOR FOR OIL, DIRT & MOISTURE
RESISTANCE

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

LOGIC MAGNETIC PICKUPS (LMP’s) provide sensing sensitivities
several orders of magnitude greater than standard magnetic pickups when
detecting moving ferrous targets. By locating a high gain pre-amplifier & signal
processing circuit “inside” the mag pickup housing, larger airgaps and slower
target surface speeds can be achieved thereby greatly expanding application
versatility as compared with conventional mag pickups. In addition, these units
have excellent noise immunity and a frequency response to 10 KHz. The stainless
steel sensing pole is mounted flush to the plastic sensing face allowing greater
ease of setting airgaps and eliminating snagging the pole with a moving target.
Two output types are available (see ordering information). The NPN Open
Collector Transistor Output unit provides a negative going current sinking
output with the approach of a ferrous target and is current limited to 40 mA.
The Transistor Emitter-Follower Output unit provides positive going 5 V
pulses with the approach of a ferrous target and can source 20 mA of load
current. The Open Collector units are available with either an integrally potted
10, 25 or 50 foot 3-wire shielded cable with neoprene strain relief boot or a
polarized 3-pin 5/8"-24 threaded connector for quick change versatility (see
following page for mating extension cable). The Emitter-Follower output unit is
available in the 3-pin connector version only.

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE (all versions): +9 to +30 VDC @ 25 mA max.
2. NPN OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT (LMPC & LMPCC): VOH = 30
VDC max.; VOL = 1 Vmax. @ 30 mA, output current is limited to 40 mA.
3. EMITTER-FOLLOWER OUTPUT (LMPEC): +5 V signal level @ 20
mA max. current sourcing.
4. OPERATING FREQUENCY (all versions): 10 KHz max.
5. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -18°C to +60°C (0°F to +140°F)
6. CONSTRUCTION: Epoxy encapsulated in 0.750" ±0.005" dia. #304
stainless steel case. Plastic sensing face with stainless steel sensing pole.
7. OUTPUT CABLE (LMPC only): Integrally potted 10, 25 or 50 ft. PVC
jacketed, 3-wire 22 AWG conductors, with stranded shield and 100% foil
shield coverage.
RED = +VDC, BLK = COMMON, WHT = NPN O.C. OUTPUT
8. OUTPUT CONNECTOR (LMPCC & LMPEC): Polarized 5/8"-24 thread
3-pin connector.
A = +VDC, B = COMMON, C = SIGNAL OUTPUT

CONNECTOR BACK VIEW

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
LMPC

LMPCC & LMPEC

DIMENSIONS

1-717-767-6511

MODEL

LMPCC

3.5" (88.9)

4.125" (104.8)

LMPEC

3.0" (76.2)

3.625" (92.1)

825

3-PIN CONNECTOR EXTENSION CABLE
(LMPCC & LMPEC)

3/4" DIAMETER CYLINDRICAL SENSOR MOUNTING

This cable and connector assembly (see diagram below) is composed of PVC
jacketed, 3-wire 22 AWG conductors with stranded shield and 100% foil shield
coverage for noise immunity and is oil and water resistant. Connector/cable
junctions are silicone sealed. The 5/8"-24 threaded ring is fitted with an O-ring to
make a moisture proof connection. Cable is available in 10, 25, or 50 foot lengths.

Dimensions in inches (mm)

Logic Magnetic Pickups and other Red Lion Controls 3/4" dia. cylindrical
pickups may be easily mounted using Model 5400100 BLOCK MOUNT (see
diagram below). This machined block of solid aluminum provides for rigid
mounting using the two included #8-32 x 1/2" screws. The one screw splitclamp design allows for easy adjustment of airgap and locks the unit securely
without deforming the case.
The PLUG MOUNT (see diagram below) allows 3/4" dia. cylindrical
sensors to be mounted in “thru-wall” applications. The Plug Mounts 3/4-14
NPT thread is installed into a threaded wall or casing. The sensor is then
installed through the plug mount. The sensor-to-target airgap is adjusted and the
sensor is tightened into position by two #8-32 set screws. Tightening the ferrule
nut compresses a teflon ferrule around the sensor providing an oil tight seal.
Plug Mounts are available in both steel and stainless steel (see ordering
information).

BLOCK MOUNT

PLUG MOUNT

For 3/4" cylindrical sensors
Qty. 2 #8-32 x 1/2" Mounting screws
included
P/N 5400100

For 3/4" cylindrical sensors

3-PIN CONNECTOR EXTENSION CABLE
PVC jacketed, 3-wire, 22 AWG conductors with stranded shield and
100% foil shield coverage. There is no connection of stranded shield wire
to 3-pin connector. Shield may be connected to instrument common for
increased noise immunity.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

LMPC

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Logic Magnetic Pickup, NPN O.C., 10 ft. Cable

LMPC0000

Logic Magnetic Pickup, NPN O.C., 25 ft. Cable

LMPC0025

Logic Magnetic Pickup, NPN O.C., 50 ft. Cable

LMPC0050

LMPCC

Logic Magnetic Pickup, NPN O.C., 3-Pin Connector

LMPCC000

*LMPEC

Logic Magnetic Pickup, Emitter Follower, 3-Pin Connector

LMPEC000

Block Mount for 3/4" Cylindrical Sensors

5400100

Steel Plug Mount

5403701

Stainless Steel Plug Mount
CCA3

CCA3PC00

3-Pin Connector Extension Cable, 25 ft.

CCA3PC25

3-Pin Connector Extension Cable, 50 ft.

CCA3PC50

* This Model is a direct replacement for P/N 5171000.

826

5403702

3-Pin Connector Extension Cable, 10 ft.

www.redlion.net

P/N 5403701 - steel
P/N 5403702 - stainless steel

MODEL ARCJ - NEMA “C” FACE-MOUNTED MOTOR ADAPTER KITS

FOR CONVENIENT ADAPTATION OF SENSORS & SENSING GEARS
TO GEAR CASE OR FOOT-MOUNTED NEMA “C” FACE MOTORS

DESCRIPTION
ARCJ Ring Adapters can be quickly and easily installed on foot-mounted
motors with NEMA type “C” face mount end bells, or between motor and
gear case flange.
The ARCJ ring, with integral junction box, is cast aluminum with precision
machined mounting surfaces. Kits are supplied complete with a 60-tooth
sensing gear, factory installed magnetic pickup or HESS sensor, and mounting
hardware. The maximum recommended gear speed for all kits is 5,000 RPM.
Two ARCJ ring sizes and five gear bores cover the range of motor frame sizes
as listed in the Ordering Information.

Wiring connections to the sensor are made by removing the gasketed
junction box cover. Two threaded female (½" NPT) conduit connections are
provided for right or left conduit entry (as shown in the Dimension drawing).
A threaded plug is supplied with each kit for sealing the un-used conduit entry.
The 60-tooth steel sensing gear (kit supplied) results in direct RPM
indication when used with a 1 second time-base rate indicator (tachometer).
Red Lion Controls rate indicators can be configured to provide a complete
speed sensing and indication system. The following two sensor options (next
page) are available with the ARCJ kits in order to meet a wide variety of
applications.

DIMENSIONS FOR MODEL ARCJ-1 In Inches (mm)

DIMENSIONS FOR MODEL ARCJ-2 In Inches (mm)

See ARCJ-1 for
junction box details.

1-717-767-6511

827

MAGNETIC PICKUP SENSOR
The ARCJ kits with this sensor option use the Red Lion Controls MP-37CA
Magnetic Pickup.This sensor does not require external power.
The Magnetic Pickup is factory installed in the ring to provide a nominal
sensor/gear air gap of 0.007" (0.18 mm) to 0.010" (0.25 mm). This provides
adequate output from the sensor for most applications. However, if output must
be maximized, the air gap can be easily user-adjusted to 0.005" (0.13 mm)
minimum, once the particular gear being used is mounted on the motor shaft.
(Refer to Magnetic Pickup literature for more details, enclosed in ARCJ kits.)

HALL EFFECT SPEED SENSOR (HESS)

The ARCJ kits with the HESS sensor requires an external +8 to +30 VDC
power source. This sensor does NOT have a minimum threshold speed as does
a magnetic pickup sensor. However, when the sensor is first powered up, the
output state is indeterminate when the sensor is not detecting metal. The sensor
face can be mounted flush into metal panels. The case is stainless steel and is
supplied with 10 feet (3 M) of cable. The stranded shield wire is not connected
to the sensor circuit or the case.
The sensor to gear air gap is factory set to a nominal gap of 0.015" (0.38
mm). The air gap can be adjusted by the user from 0.005" (0.13 mm) to 0.040"
(1.02 mm), which allows 0.005" (0.13 mm) maximum total gear runout.

SPECIFICATIONS (HESS Sensor)
1. POWER SUPPLY: +8 to +30 VDC @ 30 mA max; Reverse Polarity
Protected.
2. MAXIMUM SENSING DISTANCE: 0.040" (1 mm).
3. OUTPUT: NPN O.C. transistor; VSAT = 1 V max @ 30 mA max. load.
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -25°C to 70°C
(-14°F to 158°F)
5. CABLE LENGTH: 10 feet (3.05 M)
6. OPERATING FREQUENCY: 0 to 10 KHz
7. WIRE COLOR CODE: 3-wire, 22 AWG with stranded drain wire and
100% foil coverage; grey PVC jacket.
8. CABLE STRAIN RELIEF: 10 lbs (4.5 Kg) for 1 minute.
Note: Do NOT adjust sensor air gap while target (gear) is moving.

HESS DIMENSIONS In Inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
SENSOR
SHAFT DIA.
RING
GEAR P/N
(Gear Bore) MODEL NO. (Ref.)
MAG. PICKUP
HESS

MOTOR FRAME SIZE

56C

5/8"

ARCJ-1

0960625

143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C

7/8"

ARCJ-1

0960875

182TC, 184TC, 213C, 215C, 254C
213TC, 215TC, 254UC, 256UC
254TC, 256TC

1 3/8"
1 5/8"

MODEL NO.

HESS
MP-37CA

828

1 1/8"

ARCJ-2
ARCJ-2
ARCJ-2

0941125
0941375
0941625

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

DESCRIPTION

COMPLETE KIT
PART NO.

ARCJ1A00
ARCJ1AZ0
ARCJ1B00
ARCJ1BZ0
ARCJ2A00
ARCJ2AZ0
ARCJ2B00
ARCJ2BZ0
ARCJ2C00
ARCJ2CZ0

PART NUMBER

Replacement Sensor for HESS Option

HESS0000

Replacement Sensor for Magnetic Pickup Option

MP37CA00

www.redlion.net

MODEL ZR - C-FACE ENCODER WITH LINE DRIVER OUTPUT
FOR MOTOR FEEDBACK

DESCRIPTION
The Model ZR C-face encoder for motor feedback is a rugged, high
resolution, high temperature (100°C) encoder designed to mount directly on
NEMA C-face motors. The ZR contains a precision bearing and internal
coupling that virtually eliminates inaccuracies induced by motor shaft runout.
This encoder is ideal for applications using high performance AC vector motors.
The thru-shaft design allows fast and simple mounting of the encoder directly
to the accessory shaft or to the drive shaft of the motor, using the standard motor
face (NEMA sizes 56C, 143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C). The tough anodized
aluminum housing with thru-shaft design resists the vibration and hazards of an
industrial environment.

SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY: 5 to 28 VDC, 40 mA current draw typical, 100 mA maximum.
2. OUTPUT: Quadrature Line driver, 20 mA max per channel (meets RS-422
at 5 VDC supply). Incremental - two square waves in quadrature with A
leading B for clockwise shaft rotation. Positive pulse index.
Note: Line driver outputs are intended for motion controllers that have line
driver receivers.
3. CYCLES PER REVOLUTION: 1024 or 2048
4. MOUNTING: NEMA 56C, 143TC, 145TC, 182C and 184C

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

THRU-SHAFT DESIGN FOR EASY MOUNTING

EXCELLENT CHOICE FOR VECTOR MOTOR DRIVE CONTROL

DESIGNED FOR INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENTS

GASKET KIT INCLUDED

QUADRATURE LINE DRIVER OUTPUT

POSITIVE INDEX PULSE

5. MAX MECHANICAL SPEED: 6000 RPM
6. MAX. FREQUENCY: 200 KHz
7. NOISE IMMUNITY: Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3; BS
EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; DDENV 50204; BS EN55022; BS
EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
8. SYMMETRY: 180° (±18°) electrical
9. MIN EDGE SEP: 67.5° electrical
10. RISE TIME: Less than 1 microsecond

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. BORE DIAMETER: 0.625" or 1.0"
2. BORE TOLERANCE: +0.0015"/-0.000"
3. MOMENT OF INERTIA: 3.3 × 10-3 oz-in-sec2 typical
4. USER SHAFT TOLERANCES:
Radial Runout:0.005"
Axial Endplay: ±0.015"
5. CABLE CONNECTION: 10 pin MS connector or 36" pigtail with 24 AWG
conductor
FUNCTION

+VDC

CABLE WIRE COLOR

RED

COM

BLACK

DATA A

WHITE

DATA A(

BROWN

DATA B

BLUE

DATA B(

VIOLET

DATA Z

ORANGE

DATA Z(

YELLOW

SHIELD

—

BARE

6. HOUSING: All metal construction
7. MOUNTING: NEMA 56C to 184C
8. WEIGHT: 2.60 lb. (1.18 Kg) with gland nut
3.00 lb. (1.36 Kg) with all other connector options
Note: All weights typical.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0 to +70°C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -25 to +100°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
5. SHOCK: 50 g @ 11 msec duration
6. SEALING: IP65

1-717-767-6511

829

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
Mounting Kit Items Included:
4 ea. - 3/8" 16 x 1.0" Length Socket Head Cap Screws,
Black Alloy.
4 ea. - 3/8" High Collar Spring Lock washer, Steel Zinc.
1 ea. 3/32" Hex Allen Wrench, Long arm.
Note: The ZR encoder can mount to many types of C face devices. In
these mounting instructions, we will refer to the device as a motor.

Step 1

After carefully unpacking the unit, inspect to insure the motor
shaft is the correct size and free of all burrs or aberrations. Slide the
ZR Encoder over the motor shaft. DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE
FORCE: There is a rubber O-ring in the Encoder locking collar that
will provide a small amount of resistance as it engages the shaft. If
the encoder does not slide easily See Note 1 below.

Step 2
Install the four 3/8" 16 x 1.0" socket head cap screws with lock washers
through the holes in the Encoder C face and tighten securely to the motor.

Step 3
Insure the shaft locking collar is flush with the Encoder cover plate. Prevent
the motor shaft from turning (See Note 2 for additional information) and
tighten the four 4-40 Allen head cap screws in the locking collar evenly in a
crossing pattern. See Figure 1. Make sure the screws are securely tightened and
the front of the locking collar remains flush with the encoder cover plate. If the
collar does not turn true when the motor shaft is rotated, loosen the four screws
and repeat the procedure.

In Case of Difficulty:
Note 1: Make sure the four 4-40 Allen head cap screws in the front of the
Encoder locking collar are loose and the collar is not cocked or jammed.
Clean the shaft of any burrs using fine crocus cloth. The O- ring in the
Encoder locking collar may need a small amount of additional lubrication.
Note 2: When tightening the screws in the locking collar avoid holding the
motor shaft with anything that may scar or burr the shaft.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

ZRJ

NEMA C
Face Encoder
0.625" DIA.
56C

ZRL

NEMA C
Face Encoder
1.0" DIA.
143TC, 145TC,
182C, 184C

PPR

BORE SIZE CONNECTION PART NUMBER

1024

0.625

MS 10-Pin

ZRJ1024Z

2048

0.625

MS 10-Pin

ZRJ2048Z

1024

0.625

36" Pigtail

ZRJ1024R

2048

0.625

36" Pigtail

ZRJ2048R

1024

1.0

MS 10-Pin

ZRL1024Z

2048

1.0

MS 10-Pin

ZRL2048Z

1024

1.0

36" Pigtail

ZRL1024R

2048

1.0

36" Pigtail

ZRL2048R

ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.

CCBRPG

830

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

10-Pin Connector

CCBRPG04

10-Pin Connector with 10 feet of Cable

CCBRPG05

10-Pin Connector with 20 feet of Cable

CCBRPG06

www.redlion.net

MACHINED STEEL SENSING GEARS FOR EXCITING SENSORS
Sensing Gears are available in a variety of sizes to cover most applications
where a sensor is to be used, but a suitable existing machine gear is not
available. Split-type gears are convenient for use on machine drive shafts where
a shaft-end is not available to mount a standard gear. Hubless gears are ideal
for mounting in tight locations or when only a short shaft stub is available. Hubtype, Split, and Hubless gears can be supplied with special bores (See notes
below Ordering Information & Dimensions table).
Caution: RLC’s machined steel sensing gears are NOT to be used as driving or
driven gears in a power transmission system.

HUB TYPE GEARS

SPLIT GEARS

HUBLESS GEARS

ORDERING INFORMATION & DIMENSIONS
TYPE

HUB TYPE

SPLIT GEAR

HUBLESS

NO. OF
TEETH &
DIAMETRAL
PITCH

STOCK
BORE
+0.003"
-0.000"

MAX. SPL.
BORE
+0.003"
-0.000"

O.D.
±0.003"

HUB

30 T. 16 D.P.
30 T. 10 D.P.
60 T. 20 D.P.
60 T. 10 D.P.
120 T. 24 D.P.
30 T. 10 D.P.
60 T. 10 D.P.
60 T. 20 D.P.
60 T. 20 D.P.
60 T. 12 D.P.
60 T. 12 D.P.
60 T. 12 D.P.

0.500"
0.750"
0.375"
0.875"
0.500"
0.750"
0.875"
0.625"
0.875"
1.125"
1.375"
1.625"

1.375"
1.875"
1.750"
2.250"
1.250"
1.875"
4.250"
0.870"
0.875"
1.370"
1.620"
1.625"

2.000"
3.200"
3.100"
6.200"
5.090"
3.200"
6.200"
3.100"
3.100"
5.160"
5.160"
5.160"

DIA “D”
±0.010"

PROJ “P”
±0.020"

1.625"
2.125"
2.000"
2.500"
1.500"

0.500"
0.875"
0.500"
0.875"
0.500"

FACE “F”
±0.010"

0.500"
1.000"
0.375"
1.000"
0.250"
*1.000"
*1.000"
0.375"
0.375"
0.656"
0.656"
0.656"

RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
TORQUE FOR
MAXIMUM
SET & CAP
GEAR
SCREWS
SPEEDS

25 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
25 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
25 in. lbs.
182 in. lbs.
182 in. lbs.
25 in. lbs.
25 in. lbs.
40 in. lbs.
40 in. lbs.
40 in. lbs.

5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
3000 RPM
1500 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM

PART
NUMBER

0950500
0900750
0970375
0910875
0980500
0920750
0930875
0960625
0960875
0941125
0941375
0941625

* A portion of the teeth near the cap screws are milled away. However, at least ¼" of the teeth face width is available, allowing sensing of all teeth.

SPECIAL BORES: Hub-Type, Split, and Hubless gears can be supplied with
special bore sizes between the Stock Bore and Max. Special Bore sizes listed
above. To order Special Bores, substitute 9999 for the last 4 digits of the part
number and specify special bore size required.

ASSEMBLY NOTE FOR SPLIT GEARS: When tightening the split gear
halves on a shaft, it is recommended that the flat washer spacers be used to
help keep the gap between halves equal.
Run-out should be checked after installation is complete. Always use the
supplied lock washers when tightening the socket head cap screws. Torque
these screws to 182 in. lbs.

1-717-767-6511

831

STANDARD SPUR GEAR DEFINITIONS, RELATIONSHIPS & FORMULA
Gear parameters are fundamentally related to their use as power transmission elements. Although these
parameters are not the most convenient when using gears to excite magnetic pickups, they can be easily converted
to more useful form, once the basic definitions are understood.

PITCH DIAMETER (P.D.) - The diameter of the circle described by the toothto-tooth contact point when running in mesh with the teeth of another gear.
This point is roughly half way between the root (bottom) and the tip of the
gear tooth. The Pitch Diameter is slightly smaller than the outside diameter
of the gear.

DIAMETRAL PITCH (D.P.) - The number of teeth/inch of Pitch Diameter.
Thus a 20 D.P. gear has 20 teeth for each inch of Pitch Diameter. A 60-tooth,
20 D.P. gear would have a pitch diameter of 3”, a 60T, 10 D.P. gear has a
Pitch Diameter of 6”.
PRESSURE ANGLE - Pressure angle relates to tooth shape and strength. It
has no significant effect on the operation of the gear for exciting magnetic
pickups, and pickups can be used with gears of any pressure angle.
OUTSIDE DIAMETER (O.D.) - The outside diameter is the overall diameter
of the gear to the tops of the teeth, and is used for calculating surface speed
when the gear is used to excite a magnetic sensor. The O.D. can be
determined from the following formula:
Nt(No. of teeth) + 2
O.D. = D.P. (Diametral Pitch)

Example: A 60T, 16 D.P. Gear has an O.D. of:

SURFACE SPEED - The output of a magnetic pickup depends on the linear
surface speed of the tops of the passing gear teeth. Surface speed is normally
expressed in inches/sec. and can be calculated for a given gear as follows:
Surface Speed in inches /sec. =
or;

Surface Speed x 60
O.D. x π

Example: What is the surface speed of the 60T, 20 D.P. Gear when running
at 50 RPM? At what RPM will the 1-Volt Threshold Speed (10 inches/sec.)
for the MP-62TA be realized?
Gear O.D. =

60 +2
20

= 3.1" (From O.D. formula above)

50 x 3.1 x π
Surface Speed =
= 8.115 inches /sec.
60
10 x 60
1-Volt Threshold RPM (@ 10 in/sec.) = 3.1 x π = 61.61 RPM

OUTPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCY - The frequency generated by passing gear
teeth is related to gear RPM and the number of gear teeth (Nt) by the
following:
RPM x Nt
Output frequency (Hz or teeth/sec.) =

60 + 2
O.D. =
= 3.875 inches
16

832

RPM =

RPM x O.D. x π
60

www.redlion.net

MODELS ZUJ AND ZUL - LARGE THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS
FOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The ZUJ and ZUL are high performance units that are ideal for fast revving
motor mount applications. The injection molded housing is grooved with
“cooling fins”, and can take the extreme heat of the motion control industry.
The unit comes equipped with a 3.5" to 5.90" B.C. tether arm to mount to a
4.5" motor face.
This revolutionary encoder can also be adapted to various standard and metric
sized motor shafts by using individual sleeves (Sold separately).
Electrically the unit offers line driver outputs, limited to 20 mA per channel.
The outputs are standard quadrature with index and are also available with
reverse phasing for the typical motor drive controller application. The separation
is 90° with output A leading output B for clockwise rotation. Output B leads
output A for the reverse phased output, for clockwise rotation.

SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC, 100 mA max. (no load)
2. OUTPUTS: Line driver, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA max. current.
Incremental - two square waves with A leading B for clockwise rotation. B
leads output A for the reverse phased.
Note: Line driver outputs are intended for motion controllers that have line
driver receivers.
3. MAX. PULSE RATE: 250 KHz
4. INDEX: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA
max. current. Once per revolution centered over output Channel A. Index
is a positive going pulse.
5. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 4000 RPM
6. MINIMUM EDGE SEPARATION: 45° electrical min, 63° electrical or
better typical
7. RISE TIME: Less than 1 microsecond
8. ACCURACY: Within 0.1° mechanical from one cycle to any other cycle,
or 6 arc minutes.

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. BORE SIZE: 5/8" or 1.0" (15.875 or 25.4 mm)
2. BORE TOLERANCES: -0.0000"/+0.0008"
3. USER SHAFT TOLERANCES:
Radial Runout: 0.005" max
Axial Endplay: +/- 0.050" max
4. MAXIMUM ACCELERATION: 1X105 rad/sec2
5. STARTING TORQUE: 4.0 oz-in typical (28.24 N-mm)

6. MOMENT OF INERTIA:
7.6 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2
7. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR: 10-pin MS type connector
FUNCTION

+VDC

CABLE WIRE COLOR

RED

COM

BLACK

DATA A

WHITE

DATA A(

BROWN

DATA B

BLUE

DATA B(

VIOLET

DATA Z

ORANGE

DATA Z(

YELLOW

SHIELD

BARE

8. WEIGHT: 8 oz. (226.7 g)

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -20°C to 105°C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -20°C to 85°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 20 g @ 5 to 2000 Hz
5. SHOCK: 80 g @ 11 msec duration
6. SEALING: IP66

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1-717-767-6511

833

ACCESSORIES

ORDERING INFORMATION

MODEL NO.
MODEL NO.

ZUJ

ZUL

DESCRIPTION

5/8" Thru-Bore Rotary Pulse
Generators For Motor Feedback
1" Thru-Bore Rotary Pulse
Generators For Motor Feedback

PPR

PART NUMBER

1024

ZUJ1024Z

2048

ZUJ2048Z

1024

ZUL1024Z

2048

ZUL2048Z

CCBRPG

RPGBSI

Notes: The following list of options are available, contact the factory for details

Additional wiring configurations, including M12 connectors
Additional output configurations, including reverse phase
Additional mounting and shaft/bore sizes
Additional pulses, including 10, 120, 200, 360, 512, 1024, 1500, 1800, and 2048
CE approved models available

RPGBSM

RPGPC

834

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

10-Pin Connector

CCBRPG04

10-Pin Connector with 10 ft Cable

CCBRPG05

10-Pin Connector with 20 ft Cable

CCBRPG06

0.500 Inch Bore Sleeve

RPGBSI00

0.625 Inch Bore Sleeve

RPGBSI01

0.750 Inch Bore Sleeve

RPGBSI02

0.875 Inch Bore Sleeve

RPGBSI03

1 Inch Bore Sleeve

RPGBSI04

19 mm Bore Sleeve

RPGBSM00

20 mm Bore Sleeve

RPGBSM01

24 mm Bore Sleeve

RPGBSM02

25 mm Bore Sleeve

RPGBSM03

56C Protective Cover Kit

RPGPC000

MODEL ZR - C-FACE ENCODER WITH NPN OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT

THRU-SHAFT DESIGN FOR EASY MOUNTING

EXCELLENT CHOICE FOR VECTOR MOTOR DRIVE CONTROL

DESIGNED FOR INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENTS

QUADRATURE OUTPUT

POSITIVE INDEX PULSE

C-FACE GASKET KIT INCLUDED

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The Model ZR C-face encoder is a rugged, high resolution, high temperature
(100°C) encoder designed to mount directly on NEMA C-face motors. The ZR
contains a precision bearing and internal coupling that virtually eliminates
inaccuracies induced by motor shaft runout. This encoder is ideal for
applications using high performance AC vector motors.
The thru-shaft design allows fast and simple mounting of the encoder directly
to the accessory shaft or to the drive shaft of the motor, using the standard motor
face (NEMA sizes 56C, 143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C). The tough anodized
aluminum housing with thru-shaft design resists the vibration and hazards of an
industrial environment. In addition, a C-face gasket kit is included free for motor
shaft protection and enclosure.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZR series of sensors have open collector outputs. An open collector
output brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching device to the
external world. Because the collector element is not associated with the sensor
supply voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up” to external
voltages different than the encoder supply voltage (40 VDC maximum). NPN
open collector outputs are current sinking devices. An output signal will not be
generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the open-collector to the
positive side of an external supply. The same supply can be used for powering
the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1. SUPPLY: 4.75 to 28 VDC, 40 mA current draw typical, 100 mA maximum.
2. OUTPUT: NPN Open Collector transistor , VOH = 40 VDC max.; 100 mA
max. current. Incremental - two square waves in quadrature with A leading B
for clockwise rotation. Positive pulse index.
3. CYCLES PER REVOLUTION: 256 or 1024
Note: Review the max. input rate of the RLC counter being used. The high
output rate of the 1024 version will quickly reach the max. input capability
of RLC quadrature counters. At 1024 PPR, high pulse rates are reached at
low RPM.
4. MAX MECHANICAL SPEED: 6000 RPM
5. MAX. FREQUENCY: 200 KHz
6. NOISE IMMUNITY: Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3; BS
EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; DDENV 50204; BS EN55022; BS
EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
7. SYMMETRY: 180° (±18°) electrical
8. MIN EDGE SEP: 67.5° electrical
9. RISE TIME: Less than 1 microsecond

WIRE COLOR

+ VDC

RED

COMMON

BLACK

DATA A

WHITE

DATA B

GREEN

INDEX Z

ORANGE

6. HOUSING: All metal construction
7. MOUNTING: NEMA 56C to 184C
8. WEIGHT: 2.60 lb. (1.18 Kg) with gland nut
3.00 lb. (1.36 Kg) with all other connector options
Note: All weights typical.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0 to +100°C for high temp. option
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -25 to +100°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
5. SHOCK: 50 g @ 11 msec duration
6. SEALING: IP50

1-717-767-6511

835

Step 1

After carefully unpacking the unit, inspect to insure the motor
shaft is the correct size and free of all burrs or aberrations. Slide
the ZR Encoder over the motor shaft. DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE
FORCE: There is a rubber O-ring in the Encoder locking collar
that will provide a small amount of resistance as it engages the
shaft. If the encoder does not slide easily See Note 1 below.

Step 2
Install the four 3/8" 16 x 1.0" socket head cap screws with lock washers
through the holes in the Encoder C face and tighten securely to the motor.

In Case of Difficulty:

Note 1: Make sure the four 4-40 Allen head cap screws in the front of the
Encoder locking collar are loose and the collar is not cocked or jammed.
Clean the shaft of any burrs using fine crocus cloth. The O- ring in the
Encoder locking collar may need a small amount of additional lubrication.
Note 2: When tightening the screws in the locking collar avoid holding the
motor shaft with anything that may scar or burr the shaft.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PPR

BORE SIZE PART NUMBER

NEMA C Face Encoder
0.625" DIA. 56C

256

0.625

ZRJ0256A

(Replaces ARA)

1024

0.625

ZRJ1024A

NEMA C Face Encoder
1.0" DIA.
143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C

256

1.0

ZRL0256A

1024

1.0

ZRL1024A

836

www.redlion.net

MODEL ZSD - 0.25" SHAFT STANDARD SERVO MOUNT ROTARY PULSE
GENERATOR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model ZSD encoder is ideal for applications requiring a miniature, high
precision, low cost encoder, designed with all metal construction for years of
trouble-free operation.
The NPN Open Collector outputs are each current limited to 20 mA. The
outputs are standard quadrature with index, available in resolutions up to 2500
pulses per shaft revolution. The quadrature separation is typically 90 electrical
degrees. Output A leads output B for clockwise rotation of the encoder shaft.

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZSD sensors have open collector outputs. An open collector output
brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching device to the
external world. Because the collector element is not associated with the sensor
supply voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up” to external
voltages (40 VDC max.) different than the encoder supply voltage . NPN open
collector outputs are current sinking devices. An output signal will not be
generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the open-collector to the
positive side of an external supply. The same supply can be used for powering
the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC, 100 mA max. with no output load
2. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA
max. current. Incremental - Two square waves in quadrature with Channel
A leading Channel B for clockwise rotation.
3. MAX. FREQUENCY: 200 KHz
4. INDEX: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA
max. current. Once per revolution centered over Output Channel A. Index is
a positive going pulse.
5. NOISE IMMUNITY: Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2;
BS EN61000-4-2; BS EN61000-4-3; BS EN61000-4-6; BS EN500811
6. SYMMETRY: 180° (±18°) electrical
7. QUAD PHASING: 90° (±22.5°) electrical
8. MIN EDGE SEP: 67.5° electrical
9. ACCURACY: Within 0.017° mechanical or 1 arc minute from true
position (for PPR>189)

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 8000 RPM
2. SHAFT SIZE: 0.25" (6.33 mm)
3. RADIAL SHAFT LOAD: 5 lbs. max. (2.25 kg)
4. AXIAL SHAFT LOAD: 5 lbs. max. (2.25 kg)
5. STARTING TORQUE: 0.4 oz-in. (2.82 N-mm) IP64
6. MOMENT OF INERTIA: 6.7 x 10-5 oz-in-sec2 (4.8 gm-cm2)
7. CABLE CONNECTIONS:
Cable is 36" (914.4 mm) in length with 24 AWG conductors
FUNCTION

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ZSD

WIRE COLOR

+VDC

Red

Common

Black

Data A

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

DESCRIPTION

0.25" Shaft
Standard Servo Mount
Rotary Pulse Generators

White

Data B

Green

Index Z

Orange

1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -20°C to 85°C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -25°C to +85°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
5. SHOCK: 80 g @ 11 msec duration
6. SEALING: IP64 standard

PART NUMBER

ZSD0060A

100

ZSD0100A

500

ZSD0500A

600

ZSD0600A

1000

ZSD1000A

1200

ZSD1200A

2000

ZSD2000A

2500

ZSD2500A

ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.

8. WEIGHT: 3 oz. (85.0 g)

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

PPR

RPGFC

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.25" - 0.25"

RPGFC001

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.25" - 0.375"

RPGFC002

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.25" - 6 mm

RPGFC005

Notes: The following list of options are available, contact the factory for details
Additional wiring configurations, including M12 connectors and flying leads
Additional output configurations, including Line Driver and Push-Pull
Additional mounting and shaft/bore sizes
Additional pulses, including 10, 120, 200, 360, 512, 1024, 1500, 1800, and 2048
When using higher resolutions, use caution and verify input specifications to
avoid frequency limitations
CE approved models available

1-717-767-6511

837

MODELS ZOD AND ZOH - THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS
(ZOH REPLACES THE MODEL RPGO)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model ZOD and ZOH are Thru-Bore Encoders. The ZOD has a bore of
0.25" (6.35 mm) and the ZOH is a 0.375" (9.5 mm) bore. These units are ideal
for applications requiring a miniature, high precision, low cost encoder,
designed with all metal construction for years of trouble-free operation.
The encoders have a flexible butterfly mount and blind hollow shaft. These
encoders use two set screws that are 90° apart to clamp the encoder's hub to the
motor shaft. The NPN Open Collector outputs are each current limited to 100
mA. The outputs are standard quadrature with index, and are available in
resolutions up to 2500 pulses per shaft revolution. The quadrature separation is
typically 90 electrical degrees. Output A leads output B for clockwise rotation
of the encoder shaft.

SPECIFICATIONS

Open Collector Output Wiring

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC, 100 mA max. with no output load
2. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA
max. current. Incremental - Two square waves in quadrature with A leading
B for clockwise rotation.
3. MAX. FREQUENCY: 200 KHz
4. INDEX: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA max.
current. Once per revolution centered over output Channel A. Index is a
positive going pulse.
5. NOISE IMMUNITY: Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2;
BS EN61000-4-2; BS EN61000-4-3; BS EN61000-4-6; BS EN500811
6. SYMMETRY: 180° (±18°) electrical
7. QUAD PHASING: 90° (±22.5°) electrical
8. MIN EDGE SEP: 67.5° electrical
9. ACCURACY: Within 0.017° mechanical or 1 arc minute from true
position (for PPR>189)

The ZOD and ZOH encoders have open collector outputs. An open collector
output brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching device to the
external world. Because the collector element is not associated with the sensor
supply voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up” to external
voltages different than the encoder supply voltage (40 VDC maximum). NPN
open collector outputs are current sinking devices. An output signal will not be
generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the open-collector to the
positive side of an external supply. The same supply can be used for powering
the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 8000 RPM
2. BORE SIZE:
ZOD: 0.25" (6.35 mm)
ZOH: 0.375" (9.5 mm)
3. BORE TOLERANCE: -0.0000"/+0.0006"
4. USER SHAFT TOLERANCES:
Radial Runout: 0.008" max
Axial Endplay: +/- 0.030" max
5. STARTING TORQUE: 0.6 oz-in (4.24 N-mm) IP64
6. MOMENT OF INERTIA:
6.7 x 10-5 oz-in-sec2 (4.8 gm-cm2)
7. CABLE CONNECTIONS:
Cable is 36" (914.4 mm) in length with 24 AWG conductors
FUNCTION

WIRE COLOR

+VDC

Red

Common

Black

Data A

White

Data B
Index Z

Green
Orange

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ZOD
&
ZOH

8. WEIGHT: 3 oz. (85.0 g)

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -20°C to 85°C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -25°C to +85°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
5. SHOCK: 80 g @ 11 msec duration
6. SEALING: IP64 standard

838

DESCRIPTION

Thru-Bore Rotary Pulse
Generators

PPR

PART NUMBER
0.25" Thru-Bore 0.375" Thru-Bore

ZOD0060A

ZOH0060A

100

ZOD0100A

ZOH0100A

500

ZOD0500A

ZOH0500A

600

ZOD0600A

ZOH0600A

1000

ZOD1000A

ZOH1000A

1200

ZOD1200A

ZOH1200A

2000

ZOD2000A

ZOH2000A

2500

ZOD2500A

ZOH2500A

Notes: The following list of options are available, contact the factory for details

Additional wiring configurations, including M12 connectors
Additional output configurations, including Line Driver and Push-Pull
Additional mounting and shaft/bore sizes
Additional pulses, including 10, 120, 200, 360, 512, 1024, 1500, 1800, and 2048
When using higher resolutions, use caution and verify input specifications to
avoid frequency limitations
CE approved models available

www.redlion.net

MODEL ZCG - SINGLE CHANNEL OUTPUT ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
MODEL ZFG and ZGG - SINGLE CHANNEL OUTPUT LENGTH SENSORS
(Replaces MODELS RPGC, LSCS and LSCD respectively)
O

VARIOUS PULSE PER REVOLUTION (PPR) RATES

RUGGED CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING

Up to 200 PPR for fine, high-resolution counting or
precision speed measurement from slow shaft speeds.

3/8" DIA. STAINLESS STEEL SHAFT

UP TO 10 KHz OUTPUT FREQUENCY

CURRENT SINK OUTPUT

LENGTH SENSORS AVAILABLE WITH:

SEALED PRECISION BALL BEARINGS

VARIOUS CABLE LENGTHS AVAILABLE

WIDE INPUT SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE &
LOW CURRENT OPERATION
EASY INSTALLATION
Eliminates air-gap, sensing distance, and beam
alignment procedures of other types of sensing.

Single or Dual Ended Shaft
O

IDEAL FOR DUSTY, DIRTY ENVIRONMENTS
Where “Non Contact” sensing means are impractical.

DESCRIPTION

ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR

The units are rugged, incremental encoders that convert shaft rotation into a
current sinking pulse train.
Internally, a single L.E.D. light source and a photologic sensor in conjunction
with a shaft-mounted, durable, metal-etched encoder disc, provides signal
accuracy and reliability to 10 KHz. The DC input power supply requirement is
a versatile +8 to +35 VDC, and is reverse polarity protected. The NPN Open
Collector Transistor Output is current limited to 40 mA and is compatible with
most RLC counters, rate indicators, controllers and accessories.
All units are packaged in a rugged cast aluminum housing with a gasketed,
rear aluminum cover. The 3/8" (9.53 mm) diameter heavy duty stainless steel
shaft and sealed, lifetime-lubricated precision ball bearings are preloaded for
minimum end play and rated for continuous use up to 6000 RPM. They are
designed to meet NEMA 13/IP54 environmental requirements. All units are
supplied with 10 feet (3M) of PVC jacketed 3-wire, 22 AWG cable with
stranded shield wire and 100% foil shield coverage. Operating Temperature
range is -18 °C to +60 °C.

The ZCG can be direct-coupled to a machine shaft by means of a flexible
bellows, spring or rubber sleeve type coupler, etc., that allows for axial and radial
misalignment. They can also be coupled with instrument timing belts and pulleys
or gears. The housing may be rigidly face-mounted with the 4, #8-32 threaded
holes. The 3-wire shielded cable exits through a cord connector.

ZCG DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

LENGTH SENSOR
The length sensors are available in both Single Ended Shaft (ZFG) and
Double Ended Shaft (ZGG) versions, both of which include a Stainless Steel
Handle Tube for mounting and 10 feet (3.05 M) of 3-wire shielded cable. When
mounted to a Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly (See Model LSAHC001)
and coupled with one or two Measuring Wheels (See Measuring Wheels), a low
cost, versatile and highly accurate length measurement system can be
configured.

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZCG, ZFG, and ZGG series of sensors have open collector outputs. An
open collector output brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder
switching device to the external world. Because the collector element is not
associated with the sensor supply voltage, the sensor output collector may be
“pulled up” to external voltages (40 VDC max.) different than the encoder
supply voltage. NPN open collector outputs are current sinking devices. An
output signal will not be generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from
the open-collector to the positive side of an external supply. The same supply
can be used for powering the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

LENGTH SENSOR MOUNTING CONSIDERATION

1. Length Sensors should be mounted so measuring wheel(s) contact ribbon,
strip or web as it passes over a roller. As an alternative, wheel(s) can be
driven by roller surface next to material being measured.
2. Note: The weight at the Length Sensor unit provides sufficient traction for
accurate operation when mounted, with arm angle from horizontal not
exceeding ±30o.
3. Tension on signal cable can cause wheel(s) to lift. Make sure cable is
clamped to machine frame near the unit and allow slack.

1-717-767-6511

839

EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT & CONNECTIONS

ZFG DIMENSIONS
In inches (mm)

This is the side view of the
Model ZFG. All other
dimensions (including the
handle tube) are the same
as the Model ZGG. See
below.

ZGG DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
ZFG FREQUENCY OUTPUT AT MAXIMUM 6000 RPM
PPR

1
10
12
60
100
*120
**200

FREQ. @ 6000 RPM MAX.

100 Hz
1000 Hz
1200 Hz
6000 Hz
10000 Hz
7300 Hz
7300 Hz

*RPM derated to 3600.
**RPM derated to 2200 RPM
(7300 Hz) due to internal
x2 circuitry.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ZCG

DESCRIPTION

Rotary Pulse Generator
(Replaces RPGC)

PPR

OUTPUT
PULSE RATE PART NUMBER
CODE

ZCG0001C

ZCG0010C

ZCG0012C

ZCG0060C

100

ZCG0100C

*120

ZCG0120C

*200

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: +8 to +35 VDC (including power supply ripple) @ 50
mA max. (30 mA typ.); Reverse polarity protected.
2. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor;
VOH = 30 VDC max., VOL = 1 V max. @ 40 mA
Output current is limited to 40 mA.
3. OUTPUT FREQUENCY: Up to 10 KHz
4. CABLE CONNECTIONS:
RED = +VDC; BLACK = Common; WHITE = NPN O.C. Output.

ZFG

Length Sensor
Single Shaft
(Replaces LSCS)

ZGG

WAVE OUTPUT DIAGRAM
Square wave output for models
with PPR 1, 10, 12, 20, 60 and
100. Square wave, 50/50 duty
cycle ±10%.
Models that use 1/3 yd. or 1/3 mtr
wheels with internal ÷ 3 circuits.
66/33 duty cycle.
Models with 120 and 200 PPR
utilize internal doubling. (50 μsec
±20% neg. going pulse.)

840

1/Foot

ZFG0001C

10/Foot

ZFG0010C

1/inch

ZFG0012C

60/Mt or Yd

ZFG0020C

60/Foot

ZFG0060C

100

100/Foot

ZFG0100C

*120

10/Inch

ZFG0120C

*200

600/Mt or Yd

ZFG0200C

.333

1/Mt or Yd

ZFG00/3C

3.333

10/Mt or Yd

ZFG03/3C

33.333 100/Mt or Yd

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 6000 RPM
2. RADIAL SHAFT LOAD: 15 lbs. max. (66.7N)
3. AXIAL SHAFT LOAD: 15 lbs. max. (66.7N)
4. STARTING TORQUE: 3 oz.-in. (21.2N-mm)
5. MOMENT OF INERTIA:
Single Shaft = 2.82 x 10-4 oz. - in. - sec.2 (1.99 x 10-3N - mm - sec2)
Dual Shaft = 3.09 x 10-4 oz. - in. - sec.2 (2.19 x 10-3N - mm - sec2)
6. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -18°C to +60°C
7. WEIGHT (LESS CABLE):
Rotary Pulse Generator = 15 oz (0.42 Kg)
Length Sensors = 22 oz (0.62 Kg)

ZCG0200C

RPGFC

Length Sensor
Double Shaft
(Replaces LSCD)

ZFG33/3C

1/Foot

ZGG0001C

10/Foot

ZGG0010C

1/inch

ZGG0012C

60/Mt or Yd

ZGG0020C

60/Foot

ZGG0060C

100

100/Foot

ZGG0100C

*120

10/Inch

ZGG0120C

*200

600/Mt or Yd

ZGG0200C

.333

1/Mt or Yd

ZGG00/3C

3.333

10/Mt or Yd

ZGG03/3C

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.250" - 0.375"

RPGFC002

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 0.375"

RPGFC003

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 0.500"

RPGFC004

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 6 mm

RPGFC006

* Rotary pulse generators and length sensors with 120 & 200 PPR outputs employ
an internal doubling circuit and deliver a fixed 50 µsec ±20% output pulse at the
leading and trailing edge of a passing slot. Additional doubling in external
indicators or circuits may not be applicable. These outputs are derated to 7300
Hz due to internal x2 circuitry. (See Wave Output Diagram)
Notes:
1. 25 and 50 foot cable versions available. Consult factory for details.
2. Wheels and mounting brackets are sold separately, see Length Sensor Accessories.

www.redlion.net

LENGTH SENSOR ACCESSORIES
SEPARATE LENGTH MEASURING WHEELS - DIMENSIONS In Inches (mm)
WHEEL
CODE

WHEEL
CODE

FOR USE ON: Soft, smooth
materials such as soft
paper, matting,
cardboard, fine weave
textiles. Broad wheel
tread minimizes contact
pressure and tan
polyurethane tread
minimizes marking.

FOR USE ON: Metal, paper,
foil, film and hard plastics.
Line contact on material
being measured,
convenient when available
measuring track is narrow
or for measuring on end of
roller beside passing
material.

FOR USE ON: Rubber,
coarse weave fabrics,
rough wood surfaces,
foam, insulation.
Max. Speed: 600 RPM
Balanced version of 1ft.
circumference available.
Balanced to ANSI S2.191989 Quality Grade 6.3
@ 3000 RPM.

Max. Speed: 600 RPM
Balanced version of 1ft.
circumference available.
Balanced to ANSI S2.191989 Quality Grade 6.3 @
3000 RPM.

Max. Speed: 600 RPM

SELECTING APPROPRIATE WHEEL SIZE & PPR (Pulses Per Rev.) OF ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
When the desired output of a length sensor and wheel combination is either
in inches, feet, yards, or meters selection of the proper combination is relatively
straight forward. For example, with a 1-foot wheel circumference, a 1 PPR
Rotary Pulse Generator will deliver 1 pulse/ft, 12 PPR would deliver 12
pulses/ft (1 pulse/inch); 100 PPR would yield 100 pulses/ft; and 120 PPR would
permit measuring to 1/10th of an inch (1/120th of a foot).

WHEELS & REPLACEMENT TIRES FOR CODE OR WHEELS
ORDERING INFORMATION
WHEEL CODE

BF (Balanced)

CIRCUMFERENCE

TOLERANCE

PART NUMBER

CIRCUMFERENCE

TOLERANCE

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.40%

WF1000OR

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000OK

1/3 meter

±0.40%

WM0333OR

1/3 meter

±0.30%

WM0333OK

4/10ths yard

±0.40%

WY0400OR

4/10ths meter

±0.40%

WM0400OR

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000OF

1/3 meter

±0.30%

WM0333OF

4/10ths yard

±0.30%

WY0400OF

4/10ths meter

±0.30%

WM0400OF

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.40%

WHEEL CODE

BK (Balanced)
Replacement Tires
for OR Wheels

WF1000BF

PART NUMBER

4/10ths yard

±0.30%

WY0400OK

4/10ths meter

±0.30%

WM0400OK

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000BK

1 foot (1/3 yd)

TORF1000

1/3 meter

TORM0333

4/10ths yard

TORY0400

4/10ths meter

TORM0400

Note: After installation of measuring wheels, ensure guards,shields or other
devices are in place to protect personnel from rotating equipment.

1-717-767-6511

841

MODEL LSAHC - LENGTH SENSOR HINGE CLAMP ASSEMBLY

The Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly provides an easy method for
attachment and mounting of the length sensors and LSCB1 Conversion
Bracket. The removable top on the solid zinc LSAHC mounting block allows
quick installation of the Length Sensor handle tube and provides secure
clamping retention. The mounting block pivots freely in zinc right angle
brackets to allow mounting the assembly via clearance holes for 1/4" dia. bolts.
The lock washers must be used as indicated (between the bolt head and the
top clamp piece). Assemble the top clamp piece as follows.
1. Tighten both bolts so that the top clamp half draws down evenly on
the sensor tube.
2. Tighten the bolts until both lock washers are flat.
3. Then turn each bolt an additional ½ to ¾ turn.

CAUTION: Downward tension
on signal cable can cause
wheel(s) to lift. Make sure
cable is clamped to
machine frame near
encoder and allow slack.

NOTE: The weight at the
Length Sensor unit
provides sufficient traction
for accurate operation
when mounted as shown,
with arm angle from
horizontal not exceeding
±30o, and with hinge clamp
toward the far extreme of
the extension arm.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Lock washers (2) must be
installed between bolt heads
and top clamp piece.

FRONT
VIEW

Model ZGG shown

E-clip retaining ring (2)
must be installed in slots.

TOP
VIEW

Model ZFG shown

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

LSAHC

842

DESCRIPTION

Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly

PART NUMBER

LSAHC001

www.redlion.net

Length Sensors should be mounted so measuring
wheel(s) contact ribbon, strip or web as it passes over
a roller. As an alternative, wheel(s) can be driven by
roller surface next to material being measured.

MODEL ZCH - QUADRATURE OUTPUT ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
MODEL ZFH and ZGH - QUADRATURE OUTPUT LENGTH SENSORS
(Replaces MODELS RPGQ, LSQS and LSQD respectively)
O

100, 200 & 500 PULSES PER REVOLUTION

QUADRATURE CURRENT SINKING OUTPUTS TO 50 KHz

For position measurement, bi-directional counting
and systems with mechanical backlash
O

SEALED PRECISION BALL BEARINGS

RUGGED CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING

3/8" DIA. STAINLESS STEEL SHAFT

WIDE INPUT SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE & LOW CURRENT OPERATION

VARIOUS CABLE LENGTHS AVAILABLE

DESCRIPTION
The units are rugged, incremental encoders that convert shaft rotation into a
current sinking pulse train.
Internally, a single L.E.D. light source and a photologic sensor in conjunction
with a shaft-mounted, durable, metal-etched encoder disc, provides signal
accuracy and reliability to 50 KHz. The DC input power supply requirement is
a versatile +8 to +28 VDC, and is reverse polarity protected. The NPN Open
Collector Transistor Output is current limited to 40 mA and is compatible with
most RLC counters, rate indicators, controllers and accessories.
All units are packaged in a rugged cast aluminum housing with a gasketed,
rear aluminum cover. The 3/8" (9.53 mm) diameter heavy duty stainless steel
shaft and sealed, lifetime-lubricated precision ball bearings are preloaded for
minimum end play and rated for continuous use up to 6000 RPM. They are
designed to meet NEMA 13/IP54 environmental requirements. All units are
supplied with 10 feet (3M) of PVC jacketed 3-wire, 22 AWG cable with
stranded shield wire and 100% foil shield coverage.

ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
The ZCH can be direct-coupled to a machine shaft by means of a flexible
bellows, spring or rubber sleeve type coupler, etc., that allows for axial and radial
misalignment. They can also be coupled with instrument timing belts and pulleys
or gears. The housing may be rigidly face-mounted with the 4, #8-32 threaded
holes. The 3-wire shielded cable exits through a cord connector.

LENGTH SENSOR
The length sensors are available in both Single Ended Shaft (ZFH) and
Double Ended Shaft (ZGH) versions, both of which include a Stainless Steel
Handle Tube for mounting and 10 feet (3.05 M) of 3-wire shielded cable. When
mounted to a Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly (See Model LSAHC001)
and coupled with one or two Measuring Wheels (See Measuring Wheels), a low
cost, versatile and highly accurate length measurement system can be
configured.

LENGTH SENSOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
ZCH DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Factors which affect measurement accuracy include Measuring Wheel
accuracy and wear, and material conditions. Ideally, materials which are hard,
thin and strong provide good readings. Conversely, soft, thick and elastic
materials can present problems in obtaining true readings. Count or Rate
Indicators with “input scaling” can compensate for Measuring Wheel wear and
material elasticity and compliance errors. In addition, English/Metric
conversions may also be accomplished.

LENGTH SENSOR ACCESSORIES
The Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly provides an easy method for
attachment & mounting the Length Sensors and LSCB1 Conversion Bracket.
The removable top on the solid aluminum LSAHC mounting block allows
quick installation of the Length Sensor handle tube and provides secure
clamping retention. The mounting block steel shaft pivots freely in oil
impregnated sintered bronze bushings, and aluminum right angle brackets
allow mounting the assembly via clearance holes for 1/4" (6.35 mm) dia. bolts
(See LSAHC Dimensions & Mounting).

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZCH, ZFH, and ZGH series of sensors have open collector outputs. An
open collector output brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder
switching device to the external world. Because the collector element is not
associated with the sensor supply voltage, the sensor output collector may be
“pulled up” to external voltages (40 VDC max.) different than the encoder
supply voltage . NPN open collector outputs are current sinking devices. An
output signal will not be generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from
the open-collector to the positive side of an external supply. The same supply
can be used for powering the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

1-717-767-6511

843

EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT & CONNECTIONS

ZFH DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

This is the side view of the Model
ZFH. All other dimensions (including
the handle tube) are the same as
the Model ZGH. See below.

ZGH DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

NOTES:
1. Channel A leads Channel B for clockwise shaft rotation when viewed from
housing front. Conversely, Channel B leads Channel A for Counterclockwise
shaft rotation.
2. The number of lines on the optical disc determines the Pulses Per Revolution
(PPR).
3. Duty Cycle is the relationship of output “High” time, “a”, to output “Low”
time, “b”, and is expressed as a High/Low percentage ratio, ie....% High time
= a/(a+b) x 100; % Low time = b/(a+b) x 100.
4. Quadrature Phase “c” is specified as the lead or lag between Channel A & B
in electrical degrees. Nominally 90° (1/4 cycle).

LENGTH SENSOR MOUNTING CONSIDERATION
1. Length Sensors should be mounted so measuring wheel(s) contact ribbon,
strip or web as it passes over a roller. As an alternative, wheel(s) can be driven
by roller surface next to material being measured.
2. Note: The weight at the Length Sensor unit provides sufficient traction for
accurate operation when mounted, with arm angle from horizonal not
exceeding ±30o.
3. Tension on signal cable can cause wheel(s) to lift. Make sure cable is clamped
to machine frame near thev unit and allow slack.

SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: +8 to +28 VDC (including power supply ripple) @ 50
mA max. (30 mA typ.); Reverse polarity protected.
2. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 30 VDC max., VOL = 1
V max @ 40 mA. Output current is limited to 40 mA. Incremental - Two
square waves in quadrature with Channel A leading B for clockwise rotation.
3. OUTPUT FREQUENCY: Up to 50 KHz
4. OUTPUT DUTY CYCLE: Channel A & B: 50/50 nominal. (See Figure 1,
Note 3)
5. QUADRATURE OUTPUT PHASE: 90° ±15° (See Figure 1, Note 3)
6. CABLE CONNECTIONS: RED = +VDC; BLACK = Common;
WHITE = Channel A Output; GREEN = Channel B Output.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ZCH

ZFH

DESCRIPTION

Rotary Pulse Generator
(Replaces RPGQ)

Length Sensor
Single Shaft
(Replaces LSQS)

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 6000 RPM
2. RADIAL SHAFT LOAD: 15 lbs. max. (66.7N)
3. AXIAL SHAFT LOAD: 15 lbs. max. (66.7N)
4. STARTING TORQUE: 3 oz.-in. (21.2N-mm)
5. MOMENT OF INERTIA:
Single Shaft = 1.03 x 10-4 oz. - in. - sec.2 (7.30 x 10-4N - mm - sec2)
Dual Shaft = 1.30 x 10-4 oz. - in. - sec.2 (9.21 x 10-4N - mm - sec2)
6. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0°C to +70°C
7. WEIGHT (LESS CABLE):
ZCH: 14.3 oz (406 g)
ZFH: 22.0 oz (623 g)
ZGH: 22.7 oz (643 g)

844

ZGH

RPGFC

Length Sensor
Double Shaft
(Replaces LSQD)

PPR

PART NUMBER

100

ZCH0100C

200

ZCH0200C

500

ZCH0500C

100

ZFH0100C

200

ZFH0200C

500

ZFH0500C

100

ZGH0100C

200

ZGH0200C

500

ZGH0500C

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.250" - 0.375"

RPGFC002

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 0.375"

RPGFC003

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 0.500"

RPGFC004

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 6 mm

RPGFC006

* 25 and 50 foot cable versions available. Consult factory for details.

www.redlion.net

LENGTH SENSOR ACCESSORIES
SEPARATE LENGTH MEASURING WHEELS - DIMENSIONS In Inches (mm)
WHEEL
CODE

WHEEL
CODE

FOR USE ON: Soft, smooth
materials such as soft
paper, matting,
cardboard, fine weave
textiles. Broad wheel
tread minimizes contact
pressure and tan
polyurethane tread
minimizes marking.

Max. Speed: 600 RPM
Balanced version of 1ft.
circumference available.
Balanced to ANSI S2.191989 Quality Grade 6.3 @
3000 RPM.

Max. Speed: 600 RPM

WHEELS & REPLACEMENT TIRES FOR CODE OR WHEELS
ORDERING INFORMATION
WHEEL CODE

BF (Balanced)

CIRCUMFERENCE

TOLERANCE

PART NUMBER

CIRCUMFERENCE

TOLERANCE

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.40%

WF1000OR

WHEEL CODE

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000OK

1/3 meter

±0.40%

WM0333OR

1/3 meter

±0.30%

WM0333OK

4/10ths yard

±0.40%

WY0400OR

4/10ths meter

±0.40%

WM0400OR

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000OF

1/3 meter

±0.30%

WM0333OF

4/10ths yard

±0.30%

WY0400OF

4/10ths meter

±0.30%

WM0400OF

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.40%

WF1000BF

BK (Balanced)
Replacement Tires
for OR Wheels

PART NUMBER

4/10ths yard

±0.30%

WY0400OK

4/10ths meter

±0.30%

WM0400OK

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000BK

1 foot (1/3 yd)

TORF1000

1/3 meter

TORM0333

4/10ths yard

TORY0400

4/10ths meter

TORM0400

Note: After installation of measuring wheels, ensure guards,shields or other
devices are in place to protect personnel from rotating equipment.

1-717-767-6511

845

MODEL LSAHC - LENGTH SENSOR HINGE CLAMP ASSEMBLY

CAUTION: Downward tension
on signal cable can cause
wheel(s) to lift. Make sure
cable is clamped to
machine frame near
encoder and allow slack.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Lock washers (2) must be
installed between bolt heads
and top clamp piece.

FRONT
VIEW

Model ZGH shown

E-clip retaining ring (2)
must be installed in slots.

TOP
VIEW

Model ZFH shown

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

LSAHC

846

DESCRIPTION

Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly

PART NUMBER

LSAHC001

www.redlion.net

MODEL ZUK - LARGE THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC, 100 mA max. (no load)
2. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA
max. current. Incremental - two square waves in quadrature with A leading
B for clockwise rotation.
3. MAX. PULSE RATE: 250 KHz
4. INDEX: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA max.
current. Once per revolution centered over output Channel A. Index is a
positive going pulse.
5. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 4000 RPM
6. MIN EDGE SEP: 45° electrical min, 63° electrical or better typical
7. RISE TIME: Less than 1 microsecond
8. ACCURACY: Within 0.01° mechanical from one cycle to any other cycle,
or 0.6 arc minutes.

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The ZUK is a high performance unit that is ideal for fast revving motor mount
applications. This industrial strength model features the largest thru bore
available in a 2.5" encoder, mounting directly on shafts as large as 1.125" (28
mm.) The injection molded housing is grooved with “cooling fins”, and can take
the extreme heat of the motion control industry.
The ZUK comes equipped with a 3 point Flex Mount adapting to both 2.25"
and 2.75" motor faces. It is also available with an optional “tether arm”
mounting kits for additional motor compatibility.
This revolutionary encoder can also be adapted to various standard and metric
sized motor shafts by using an accessory sleeve kit, or individual sleeves (Sold
separately).
Electrically the ZUK offers NPN open collector outputs, each limited to 100
mA. The outputs are standard quadrature with index and are also available with
quadrature reverse phasing for the typical motor drive controller application.
The quadrature separation is 90° with output A leading output B for clockwise
rotation. Output B leads output A for the reverse phased output, for clockwise
rotation.

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZUK series of sensors have open collector outputs. An open collector
output brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching device to the
external world. Because the collector element is not associated with the sensor
supply voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up” to external
voltages different than the encoder supply voltage (40 VDC maximum). NPN
open collector outputs are current sinking devices. An output signal will not be
generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the open-collector to the
positive side of an external supply. The same supply can be used for powering
the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

1. BORE SIZE: 1.125" (28 mm)
2. BORE TOLERANCES: -0.0000"/+0.0008"
3. USER SHAFT TOLERANCES:
Radial Runout: 0.005" max
Axial Endplay: +/- 0.050" max
4. STARTING TORQUE: 4.0 oz-in typical (28.24 N-mm) IP66
5. MOMENT OF INERTIA:
7.6 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2
6. MAX ACCELERATION: 1 X 105 rad/sec2
7. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR: 7-pin MS type connector
FUNCTION

+VDC

CABLE WIRE COLOR

Red

Common

Black

Data A

White

Data B
Data Z
CASE

D
E
F

Green
Orange
Bare

8. HOUSING: Nylon composite
9. MOUNTING: 2.25" to 2.75" B.C. 3-point flex mount
10. WEIGHT: 8 oz. (226.7 g)

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -20°C to 85°C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -20°C to 85°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 20 g @ 5 to 2000 Hz
5. SHOCK: 80 g @ 11 msec duration
6. SEALING: IP66

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1-717-767-6511

847

ACCESSORIES

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PPR

Large Thru-Bore
Rotary Pulse Generators

MODEL NO.

1.125" Thru-Bore

ZUK0060H

100

ZUK0100H

500
ZUK

PART NUMBER

CCBRPG

ZUK0500H

600

ZUK0600H

1000

ZUK1000H

1200

ZUK1200H

2000

ZUK2000H

2500

ZUK2500H

Notes: The following list of options are available, contact the factory for details

RPGBI

RPGBSI
RPGMK
RPGMB

Additional wiring configurations, including M12 connectors
Additional output configurations, including Line Driver and Push-Pull
Additional bore sizes
Additional pulses, including 10, 120, 200, 360, 512, 1024, 1500, 1800, and 2048
When using higher resolutions, use caution and verify input specifications to
avoid frequency limitations
CE approved models available
Additional Tether Arm mounting kits available
Additional sleeve kits and individual sleeves available for “sizing down” bores
for metric and standard sized shafts

848

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

7-Pin Connector

CCBRPG00

7-Pin Connector with 10 ft Cable

CCBRPG02

7-Pin Connector with 20 ft Cable

CCBRPG03

Inch Bore Insert Kit (includes 0.5, 0.625, 0.875,
and 1 inch sleeves)

RPGBII00

Large Metric Bore Insert Kit (includes 19, 20, 24,
and 25 mm sleeves)

RPGBIM00

0.625 Inch Bore Sleeve

RPGBSI01

Standard Tether Arm Kit 4.5 Inch

RPGMK002

Elongated Tether Arm Kit 8.5 Inch

RPGMK003

Magnetic Coupling Kit

RPGMB001

MODELS ZPJ - LARGE THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Model ZPJ ia a thru-bore encoder with a bore of 0.625" (15.875 mm).
Additional mounting kits are available to adapt it to both standard and metric
shaft sizes. This unit is ideal for applications requiring a miniature, high
precision, low cost encoder, designed with all metal construction for years of
trouble-free operation.
The ZPJ encoder has a flexible arm mount and blind hollow shaft. It uses two
set screws that are 90° apart to clamp the encoder's hub to the motor shaft. The
NPN Open Collector outputs are each current limited to 20 mA. The outputs are
standard quadrature with index, and are available in resolutions up to 2500
pulses per shaft revolution. The quadrature separation is typically 90 electrical
degrees. Output A leads output B for clockwise rotation of the encoder shaft.

Open Collector Output Wiring

SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC, 100 mA max.
2. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA
max. current. Incremental - Two square waves in quadrature with A leading
B for clockwise rotation.
3. MAX. FREQUENCY: 200 KHz
4. INDEX: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA max.
current. Once per revolution centered over output Channel A. Index is a
positive going pulse.
5. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 7500 RPM
6. NOISE IMMUNITY: Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2;
BS EN61000-4-2; BS EN61000-4-3; BS EN61000-4-6; BS EN55011
7. SYMMETRY: 180° (±18°) electrical
8. QUAD PHASING: 90° (±22.5°) electrical
9. MIN EDGE SEP: 67.5° electrical
10. ACCURACY: Within 0.01° mechanical from one cycle to any other cycle,
or 0.6 arc minutes.

The ZPJ encoder has open collector outputs. An open collector output brings
the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching device to the external
world. Because the collector element is not associated with the sensor supply
voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up” to external voltages
different than the encoder supply voltage (40 VDC maximum). NPN open
collector outputs are current sinking devices. An output signal will not be
generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the open-collector to the
positive side of an external supply. The same supply can be used for powering
the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0°C to +70°C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -40°C to +100°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
5. SHOCK: 50 g @ 11 msec duration
6. SEALING: IP64

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. BORE SIZE: 0.625" (15.875 mm)
2. BORE TOLERANCES: -0.0000"/+0.0006"
3. USER SHAFT TOLERANCES:
Radial Runout: 0.007" max
Axial Endplay: +/- 0.030" max
4. STARTING TORQUE: 2.5 oz-in (17.65 N-mm) IP64
5. MOMENT OF INERTIA:
3.9 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 (27.5 gm-cm2)
6. MAX ACCELERATION: 1 X 105 rad/sec2
7. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION: 36" (914.4 mm) cable (foil and braid
shield, 24 AWG conductors
FUNCTION

WIRE COLOR

+VDC

Red

Common

Black

Data A

White

Data B
Index Z

Green
Orange

8. HOUSING: Black non-corosive finish
9. MOUNTING: Flex arm 1.06" to 1.81" radius mounting
10. WEIGHT: 3.5 oz. typical (99.2 g)

1-717-767-6511

849

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PPR

PART NUMBER

ZPJ0060A

Large Thru-Bore Rotary
Pulse Generators

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ZPJ0100A

1.575" (40 mm) Bolt Circle Flex Mount Kit

RPGMK000

500

ZPJ0500A

1.811" (46 mm) Bolt Circle Flex Mount Kit

RPGMK001

600

ZPJ0600A

Inch Std Bore Insert Kit (includes 0.25, 0.375, and
0.50 inch sleeves)

RPGBII01

1000

ZPJ1000A

1200

ZPJ1200A

Large Metric Bore Insert Kit (includes 11, 12, and
14 mm sleeves)

RPGBIM01

2000

ZPJ2000A

2500

ZPJ2500A

Small Metric Bore Insert Kit (includes 6, 8, and
10 mm sleeves)

RPGBIM02

Mag Coupling Kit (no adapter sleeve necessary)

RPGMB001

100

ZPJ

ACCESSORIES

Notes: The following list of options are available, contact the factory for details

Additional wiring configurations, including M12 connectors
Additional output configurations, including Line Driver and Push-Pull
Additional mounting and bore sizes
Additional pulses, including 10, 120, 200, 360, 512, 1024, 1500, 1800, and 2048
When using higher resolutions, use caution and verify input specifications to
avoid frequency limitations
CE approved models available

850

www.redlion.net

MODELS ZBG AND ZBH STANDARD DUTY ENCODER (Replaces MODEL RPGB)
MODEL ZHG HEAVY DUTY ENCODER (Replaces MODEL RPGH)
I

z CURRENT SINK OUTPUTS
z HIGH PULSE PER REVOLUTION (PPR) RATES
Up to 1200 PPR for fine, high-resolution counting or precision speed
measurement from slow shaft speeds.

z QUADRATURE OUTPUT
For position measurement, bi-directional counting and in systems with
backlash counting requirements.

z AVAILABLE WITH MS AND M12 CONNECTORS

MODEL ZBG and ZBH - FOR GENERAL
INDUSTRIAL SERVICE (Replaces Model RPGB)

MODEL ZHG - HEAVY-DUTY SEALED HOUSING
(Replaces Model RPGH)

The units contain an L.E.D. light source and a photo sensor that scans a shaftmounted, slotted disc. An internal pulse-shaping amplifier circuit delivers a
rectangular pulse signal from the current sinking output in response to the passing
slots as it rotates. They can be direct-coupled to a machine shaft by means of a
flexible-bellows, spring, or rubber sleeve type coupling that allows for axial and
radial misalignment. They can also be coupled with light instrument timing-belts.
Timing-belt drives also allow convenient gear-up or gear-down speed ratio
changes that can be useful for obtaining non-standard PPR rates.

These heavy duty units feature a heavy cast aluminum housing with 1/4"
thick aluminum cover plates and 0-ring seals. Heavy duty bearings are doublesealed and allow radial shaft loading of 30 lbs (13.6 Kg).
A 1/2" (12.7 mm) NPT Conduit entry permits signal wiring to be run via flexconduit to an internal terminal block. Electrical characteristics are identical to
those for the Model ZBG. Terminal board markings correspond to the Pin-Out
identification of the ZBG.

DIMENSIONS In Inches (mm)

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1-717-767-6511

851

SPECIFICATIONS

Cable Connections

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: +5 to +28 VDC @ 80 mA max.
2. OUTPUT: Current Sinking
ZBG and ZHG (Single Channel): 250 mA max.
ZBH (Quadrature): 250 mA max. current per output. Incremental - two
square waves in quadrature with Channel A leading Channel B for clockwise
rotation. (Quad. Phase relationship is 90° ±36°)
Note: NPN Transistor outputs have 1.5 KΩ load resistors returned to supply
for internal feed back purposes. This does not interfere with the ability to
use these outputs as conventional “Open-Collector” outputs as long as
the supply voltage for the ZB is supplied by the indicator or control
receiving its output signal. The ZB’s internal load resistor also allows the
output to be used as a current source, however, load current must be
limited to 1 mA max.
3. MAXIMUM SHAFT SPEED: 6000 RPM
4. MAXIMUM FREQUENCY:
Single Channel: 20 KHz
Quadrature: 20 KHz
PPR available up to 1270 for both single channel and quadrature.

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. RADIAL SHAFT LOAD
ZBG & ZBH: 20 lbs. operating (9 kg)
ZHG: 30 lbs. operating (13.6 kg)
2. AXIAL SHAFT LOAD: 10 lbs operating (4.5 kg)
3. STARTING TORQUE:
ZBG & ZBH: 0.38 oz-in (2.68 N-mm)
ZHG: 1 oz-in (7.06 N-mm)
4. MOMENT OF INERTIA: 6.5 x 10-6 oz-in-sec2
5. CONNECTIONS: Consult factory for special lengths.
6-pin MS Connector: #14S-6P-6 or cable/connector assembly (4-wire
shielded), 10´ (3.05 m), 25´ (7.62 m), or 50´ (15.24 m) long, must be
ordered separately.
M12 Cable/Connector Assembly: 5-Wire Shielded, 4 meters or 10 meters
long, must be ordered separately.
6. HOUSING: Black non-corrosive finished 6063-T6 aluminum.
7. BEARINGS: ABEC3 double sealed ball bearings
8. WEIGHT:
ZBG & ZBH: 10 oz (283.5 g)
ZHG: 3.8 lbs (1.72 Kg)

The tables below list the pin connections from the ZBG and ZHG single
channel and ZBH quadrature encoder to the optional CCARPG or CCM cable.
FUNCTION

6-PIN
MS CONN

M12 CONN

+VDC

RED

COMMON

BLACK

DATA A

WHITE

DATA B if appl. (quad)

GREEN

NO CONNECTION

—

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ZHG

ZBG

DESCRIPTION

Single Channel
Heavy Duty
Rotary Pulse Generator

Single Channel
General Service
6-Pin MS Connector

Single Channel General Service
M12 Connector

ZBH

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0 ° to 85 °C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -25°C to +85°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. VIBRATION: 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
5. SHOCK: 50 g @ 11 msec duration

CABLE WIRE
COLOR

Dual Channel
General Service
6-Pin MS Connector

Dual Channel General Service
M12 Connector

PPR*

PART NUMBER

600

ZHG06004

1000

ZHG10004

1200

ZHG12004

ZBG00602

100

ZBG01002

600

ZBG06002

1000

ZBG10002

1200

ZBG12002

100

ZBG01003

600

ZBG06003

ZBH00102

ZBH00122

100

ZBH01002

120

ZBH01202

500

ZBH05002

600

ZBH06002

100

ZBH01003

600

ZBH06003

* Other PPR’s available on special order, only stock PPR’s listed.

ACCESSORIES

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

MODEL NO.

RPGFC

852

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.250"-0.375"

RPGFC002

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375"-0.375"

RPGFC003

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375"-0.500"

RPGFC004

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375"-6 mm

RPGFC006

Mating 6-Pin MS Connector

CCARPG00

10 Feet 6-Pin 4-Wire Cable/Connector

CCARPG01

25 Feet 6-Pin 4-Wire Cable/Connector

CCARPG25

50 Feet 6-Pin 4-Wire Cable/Connector

CCARPG50

4 Meter 8-Pin 5-Wire M12 Cable/Connector

CCM12894

10 Meter 8-Pin 5-Wire M12 Cable/Connector

CCM12890

www.redlion.net

LENGTH SENSOR CONVERSION BRACKET (P/N LSCB1000)
ADAPTS ZBG and ZBH ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR TO LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DESCRIPTION
This conversion bracket allows the customer to assemble a custom length
sensor by purchasing the following items separately.
1. Length Sensor Conversion Bracket (P/N LSCB1000)
2. ZBG or ZBH with appropriate PPR and Single Channel or Quadrature
Output.
3. One or two measuring wheels. Install OF & OK measuring wheels with set
screw hub facing ZBG shaft (as shown). Apply thread locking material to wheel
set screw threads during installation to ZBG or ZBH shaft.
4. Hinge Clamp Assembly (P/N LSAHC001)
Note: To complete installation, insure guards, shields or other devices are in
place to protect personnel from rotating equipment.

The tubular arm length of this bracket, related to the wheel axis center-line of
the ZBG or ZBH is 6.8" similar to the length sensors. The 10´ long, 4-wire,
shielded cable (included with conversion bracket) has the same color coding as
described for the ZBG and ZBH cable P/N CCARPG01. Screws for mounting
the conversion bracket are included.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

LSCB

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Length Sensor Conversion Bracket for ZBG and ZBH

LSCB1000

Length Sensor Conversion Bracket for ZBG and ZBH
(Special Length)

LSCB1099

Hinge Clamp Assembly for Length Sensors &
Conversion Bracket (Above)

LSAHC001

LENGTH SENSOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
Factors which affect measurement accuracy include Measuring Wheel
accuracy and wear, and material conditions. Ideally, materials which are hard,
thin and strong provide good readings, conversely, soft, thick and elastic
materials can present problems in obtaining true readings. The great majority of
these situations, where this effect is consistant, can be compensated for by
applying a multiplier to the quadrature output pulse train so as to obtain a
corrected measurement. Counter or Rate Indicators with “input scaling” can
compensate for Measuring Wheel wear and material elastic and compliance
errors. In addition, English/Metric conversions may also be accomplished (See
RLC catalog for more information).

LENGTH SENSOR ACCESSORIES
SEPARATE LENGTH MEASURING WHEELS - DIMENSIONS In Inches (mm)
WHEEL
CODE

WHEEL
CODE

OF
FOR USE ON: Soft, smooth
materials such as soft
paper, matting,
cardboard, fine weave
textiles. Broad wheel
tread minimizes contact
pressure and tan
polyurethane tread
minimizes marking.
Max. Speed: 600 RPM
Balanced version of 1ft.
circumference available.
Balanced to ANSI S2.191989 Quality Grade 6.3 @
3000 RPM.

OK
FOR USE ON: Rubber,
coarse weave fabrics,
rough wood surfaces,
foam, insulation.
Max. Speed: 600 RPM
Balanced version of 1ft.
circumference available.
Balanced to ANSI
S2.19-1989 Quality
Grade 6.3 @ 3000
RPM.

SELECTING APPROPRIATE WHEEL SIZE & PPR (Pulses Per Rev.) OF ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
When the desired output of a length sensor and wheel combination is either in feet or inch units, selection
of the proper combination is relatively straight forward. For example, with a 1-foot wheel circumference, a
1 PPR Rotary Pulse Generator will deliver 1 pulse/ft, 12 PPR would deliver 12 pulses/ft (1 pulse/inch); 100
PPR would yield 100 pulses/ft; and 120 PPR would permit measuring to 1/10th of an inch (1/120th of a foot).

1-717-767-6511

853

WHEELS & REPLACEMENT TIRES FOR CODE OR WHEELS
ORDERING INFORMATION
WHEEL CODE

BF (Balanced)

CIRCUMFERENCE

TOLERANCE

PART NUMBER

CIRCUMFERENCE

TOLERANCE

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.40%

WF1000OR

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000OK

1/3 meter

±0.40%

WM0333OR

1/3 meter

±0.30%

WM0333OK

4/10ths yard

±0.40%

WY0400OR

4/10ths meter

±0.40%

WM0400OR

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000OF

1/3 meter

±0.30%

WM0333OF

4/10ths yard

±0.30%

WY0400OF

4/10ths meter

±0.30%

WM0400OF

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.40%

WHEEL CODE

BK (Balanced)
Replacement Tires
for OR Wheels

WF1000BF

PART NUMBER

4/10ths yard

±0.30%

WY0400OK

4/10ths meter

±0.30%

WM0400OK

1 foot (1/3 yd)

±0.35%

WF1000BK

1 foot (1/3 yd)

TORF1000

1/3 meter

TORM0333

4/10ths yard

TORY0400

4/10ths meter

TORM0400

Note: After installation of measuring wheels, ensure guards,shields or other
devices are in place to protect personnel from rotating equipment.

MODEL LSAHC - LENGTH SENSOR HINGE CLAMP ASSEMBLY
The Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly provides an easy method for
attachment and mounting of the Length Sensors and LSCB1 Conversion
Bracket. The removable top on the solid zinc LSAHC mounting block
allows quick installation of the Length Sensor handle tube and provides
secure clamping retention. The mounting block pivots freely in zinc right
angle brackets to allow mounting the assembly via clearance holes for 1/4"
dia. bolts.
The lock washers must be used as indicated (between the bolt head and
the top clamp piece). Assemble the top clamp piece as follows.
1. Tighten both bolts so that the top clamp half draws down evenly on
the sensor tube.
2. Tighten the bolts until both lock washers are flat.
3. Then turn each bolt an additional ½ to ¾ turn.

CAUTION: Downward tension
on signal cable can cause
wheel(s) to lift. Make sure
cable is clamped to
machine frame near
encoder and allow slack.

NOTE: The weight at the
Length Sensor unit
provides sufficient traction
for accurate operation
when mounted as shown,
with arm angle from
horizontal not exceeding
±30°, and with hinge clamp
toward the far extreme of
the extension arm.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Lock washers (2) must be
installed between bolt heads
and top clamp piece.

Model ZGH Shown

FRONT
VIEW
E-clip retaining ring (2)
must be installed in slots.

TOP
VIEW

Model ZFH Shown

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

LSAHC

854

DESCRIPTION

Length Sensor Hinge Clamp Assembly

PART NUMBER

LSAHC001

www.redlion.net

MODEL ZDH - 2" FLANGE MOUNT ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
MODEL ZNH - 2.5" FLANGE MOUNT ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR
(REPLACES THE MODEL RPGD AND RPGN RESPECTIVELY)

SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The ZDH and ZNH series of sensors are heavy duty, extremely rugged,
reliable, yet compact encoders designed for harsh factory and plant floor
environments. Both models are flange mount and conform to NEMA 4, 13 and
IP66 standards. Typical applications include motion control feedback, machine
control, process control, elevator controls, conveyors, textile equipment,
robotics and food processing.

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZDH and ZNH series of sensors have open collector outputs. An open
collector output brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching
device to the external world. Because the collector element is not associated
with the sensor supply voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up”
to external voltages different than the encoder supply voltage (40 VDC
maximum). NPN open collector outputs are current sinking devices. An output
signal will not be generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the opencollector to the positive side of an external supply. The same supply can be used
for powering the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

REPLACEMENT
Note: The RPGD connections are made by a 24 inch cable. The ZDH uses a 7Pin MS connector.

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC, 100 mA max. with no output load
2. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 100
mA max. current. incremental - two square waves in quadrature with A
leading B for clockwise shaft rotation.
3. MAX. FREQUENCY: Up to 1 MHz
4. INDEX: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 100 mA
max. current. Once per revolution centered over Output Channel A. Index is
a positive pulse.
5. INPUT RIPPLE: 100 mV peak to peak at 0 to 100 KHz.
6. NOISE IMMUNITY: Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3;
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; DDENV 50204; BS EN55022;
BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
7. SYMMETRY:
1 to 6000 CPR: 180° (±18°) electrical at 100 KHz output
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 90° (±36°) electrical
8. QUAD PHASING:
1 to 6000 CPR: 90° (±22.5°) electrical
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 90° (±36°) electrical
9. MIN EDGE SEP:
1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at 100 KHz output
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 54° electrical
>20,480 CPR: 50° electrical
10. RISE TIME: Less than 1 microsecond
11. ACCURACY:
Instrument and Quadrature Error: From one cycle to any other cycle.
200 to 1999 CPR: 0.017° mechanical (1.0 arc minutes)
2000 to 3000 CPR: 0.01° mechanical (0.6 arc minutes)
Interpolation error (units >3000 CPR only) within 0.005° mechanical. (Total
Optical Encoder Error = Instrument + Quadrature + Interpolation)

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 8000 RPM
2. SHAFT DIAMETER:
ZDH: 0.25" (6.3 mm)
ZNH: 0.375" (9.5 mm)
3. RADIAL SHAFT LOAD: 80 lbs. max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lbs. for
bearing life of 1.5 X 109 revolutions.
4. AXIAL SHAFT LOAD: 80 lbs. max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lbs. for
bearing life of 1.5 X 109 revolutions.
5. STARTING TORQUE: 3.0 oz-in. (21.18 N-mm)

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ZDH

ZNH

1-717-767-6511

855

6. MOMENT OF INERTIA: 5.2 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 (3.66 x 10-3 N-mm-sec2)
7. CONNECTOR TYPE: 7-Pin MS type connector

FUNCTION

WIRE COLOR

+VDC

RED

COMMON

BLACK

DATA A

WHITE

DATA B

GREEN

INDEX Z

ORANGE

CASE GROUND

BARE WIRE

8. HOUSING: Black non-corrosive finish
9. MOUNTING:
ZDH: 2.0" Flange Mount
ZNH: 2.5" Flange Mount
10. WEIGHT: 11 oz. (311.8 g)

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0 to +70°C
2. STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -25 to +85°C
3. HUMIDITY: 98% RH non-condensing
4. SHOCK: 75 g @ 11 msec duration
5. SEALING: NEMA 4, 13 and IP66 with shaft seal

ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NUMBER
MODEL NO.

ZDH
&
ZNH

DESCRIPTION

Rotary Pulse Generators

PPR

2" Flange Mount

2.5" Flange
Mount

ZDH0060H

ZNH0060H

100

ZDH0100H

ZNH0100H

500

ZDH0500H

ZNH0500H

600

ZDH0600H

ZNH0600H

1000

ZDH1000H

ZNH1000H

1200

ZDH1200H

ZNH1200H

2000

ZDH2000H

ZNH2000H

2500

ZDH2500H

ZNH2500H

ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.

CCBRPG

RPGFC

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

7-Pin Connector

CCBRPG00

7-Pin Connector with 10 ft of 6 Wire Cable

CCBRPG02

7-Pin Connector with 20 ft of 6 Wire Cable

CCBRPG03

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.25" - 0.375"

RPGFC002

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 0.375"

RPGFC003

Flexible Coupling (1.5" Length) 0.375" - 0.5"

RPGFC004

Flexible Coupling (1" Length) 0.375" - 6 mm

RPGFC006

Notes: The following list of options are available, contact the factory for details

Additional wiring configurations, including M12 connectors and flying leads
Additional output configurations, including Line Driver and Push-Pull
Additional mounting and shaft/bore sizes
Additional pulses, including 10, 120, 200, 360, 512, 1024, 1500, 1800, and 2048
When using higher resolutions, use caution and verify input specifications to
avoid frequency limitations
CE approved models available

856

www.redlion.net

MODEL ZMD - MINIATURE LENGTH SENSOR
(Replaces MODEL LSM)
z COMPACT SIZE
z QUADRATURE OUTPUT

z BUILT-IN SPRING TENSIONING
z VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL, OR UPSIDE-DOWN MOUNTING
z REDUCES INSTALLATION TIME
z VARIOUS MEASURING WHEELS AVAILABLE

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

Designed for light to medium duty sensing applications, the Miniature Length
Sensor, Model ZMD, is compact in size and easy-to-use.
It features a built-in spring-loaded torsion arm that provides a simple-toadjust torsion load, allowing the unit to be mounted in almost any orientation,
including upside down. Using a 6" or 200 mm wheel, the ZMD can be used on
almost any surface, while operating at speeds up to 3000 feet per minute. The
housing is a durable, conductive composite material that will eliminate static
build up. Whether you need to measure speed, position, or distances, the Model
ZMD is the ideal solution. For other pulse rates and/or wiring configurations,
contact the factory for further details.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZMD sensors have open collector outputs. An open collector output
brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching device to the external
world. Because the collector element is not associated with the sensor supply
voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up” to external voltages
different than the encoder supply voltage (40 VDC maximum). NPN open
collector outputs are current sinking devices. An output signal will not be
generated unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the open-collector to the
positive side of an external supply. The same supply can be used for powering
the unit and for the pull-up resistor.

1. INPUT VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures up to 85ºC; 4.75
to 24 VDC for temperatures between 85ºC to 100ºC, reverse polarity
protected.
2. INPUT CURRENT: 100 mA max (65 mA typical) with no output load
3. OUTPUTS: NPN Open Collector Transistor, VOH = 40 VDC max.; 20 mA
max. current. Incremental - Two square waves in quadrature with A leading
B for clockwise rotation, as viewed from the wheel side.
4. MAX FREQUENCY: 200 KHz standard
5. NOISE IMMUNITY: Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2; BS
EN61000-4-2; BS EN61000-4-3; BS EN61000-4-6, BS EN500811
6. SYMMETRY: 180º (±18º) electrical
7. QUAD. PHASING: 90º (±22.5º) electrical
8. MIN. EDGE SEP: 67.5º electrical
9. ACCURACY: Within 0.017º mechanical or 1 arc-minute from true position.
(for PPR>189)

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SPEED: 6000 RPM. Higher speeds may be
achievable, contact the factory.
2. SHAFT MATERIAL: Stainless Steel
3. SHAFT TOLERANCE: +0.0000/-0.0004" (+0.000/-0.010 mm)
4. RADIAL SHAFT LOAD: 5 lb. max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for bearing life
of 1.2 x 10 10 revolutions
5. AXIAL SHAFT LOAD: 5 lb. max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for bearing life of
1.2 x 10 10 revolutions
6. STARTING TORQUE: 0.05 oz-in IP50; 0.4 oz-in IP65
7. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION: 2 meter Cable, (foil and braid shield, 24
AWG conductors). Drain wire internally connected to case..
FUNCTION

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

CABLE WIRE COLOR

+VDC

Red

Com

Black

White

Green

Shield

Bare

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.

1-717-767-6511

857

8. MOUNTING: Pivot Shaft can be mounted from either side of the housing
and is field reversible.
9. HOUSING: Stainless steel fibers in a high temperature nylon composite
10. WEIGHT: 5 oz typical

MOUNTING BRACKET
This accessory angle mounting bracket allows for a
variety of mounting positions and makes installation of
the ZMD even easier.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

I
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

ZMD

Miniature Length Sensor
with Quadrature Output

PPR

PART NUMBER

250

ZMD0250B

500

ZMD0500B

1000

ZMD1000B

2000

ZMD2000B

2500

ZMD2500B

ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION

Mounting Bracket

PART NUMBER

RPGMB002

Urethane (6" Circumference) Wheel

WI0006OF

Knurled (6" Circumference) Wheel

WI0006OK

Urethane (200 mm Circumference) Wheel

WM0200OF

Knurled (200 mm Circumference) Wheel

WM0200OK

Notes: The following list of options are available, contact the factory for details

Additional wiring configurations, including M12 connectors
Additional output configurations, including Line Driver and Push-Pull
Additional pulses, including 600, 1200 and 1800
Higher resolutions are available. Use caution and verify input specifications
for frequency limitations

858

www.redlion.net

MODEL ZLZ - LINEAR CABLE ENCODER
(Replaces MODEL LES)
z LOW COST LINEAR SOLUTION

z 50 OR 500 PULSES PER INCH
z STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
z 0 TO 50 INCHES OF CABLE MEASUREMENT
z VARIOUS CABLE ASSEMBLIES AVAILABLE

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The Linear Cable Encoder can provide an accurate, yet low cost solution for
Linear Measurement applications. Common applications include robotics,
extrusion presses, valve positioning, textile machinery, and gate control
positioning, just to name a few. The ZLZ has some unique advantages over
other sensing solutions. Using a stainless steel cable, perfect parallel alignment
is no longer required and with a 50 inch cable reach, it can easily be mounted
away from harsh environments. The ZLZ is available in a quadrature output,
allowing the sensor to operate in positioning applications.
Additional cable exit configurations, pulses per inch, and mating connectors
are available on special request. Contact the factory for details.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Open Collector Output Wiring
The ZLZ sensors have open collector outputs. An open collector output
brings the uncommitted collector of the encoder switching device to the external
world. Because the collector element is not associated with the sensor supply
voltage, the sensor output collector may be “pulled up” to external voltages (40
VDC max.) different than the encoder supply voltage . NPN open collector
outputs are current sinking devices. An output signal will not be generated
unless a pull-up resistor is connected from the open-collector to the positive side
of an external supply. The same supply can be used for powering the unit and
for the pull-up resistor.

1. INPUT VOLTAGE: 4.75 to 28 VDC
2. INPUT CURRENT: 80 mA maximum with no output load
3. INPUT RIPPLE: 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to 100 KHz
4. OUTPUT: NPN open collector; 250 mA max per channel; Incremental square wave with channel A leading B during linear extension.
5. INDEX: Once per 5" cable extension or retraction
6. MAX FREQUENCY : 0 to 125 KHz
7. SYMMETRY: 180° (±18°) electrical
8. QUAD PHASING: 90° (±22.5°) electrical
9. RISE TIME: Less than 1 μsec

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. FULL STROKE LENGTH (FSL): 50" standard. Longer measuring
ranges may be available, please contact customer service
2. FINISH: Black powder coated aluminum
3. ACCURACY: ±0.10% FSL
4. REPEATABILITY: ±0.015% FSL
5. LINEAR RESOLUTION: Up to 500 cycles per inch (0.002" per cycle)
6. CABLE MATERIAL: 0.034" nylon coated stainless steel rope
7. CABLE TENSION: 20 oz maximum typical
8. LIFE (CYCLES): 1,000,000 predicted at zero angle cable exit
9. CONNECTOR TYPE: 6-Pin MS type connector
10. WEIGHT: 19 oz (538.64 g)

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0°C to 85°C
2. SEALING: IP65 standard

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

MOUNTING BRACKET

ZLZ

1-717-767-6511

859

ZLZ ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ZLZ

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Quadrature output, 50 PPI, Standard Housing

ZLZ0050G

Quadrature output, 500 PPI, Standard Housing

ZLZ0500G

ACCESSORIES
MODEL NO.

ZLZ WIRING SPECIFICATIONS
FUNCTION

LE PIN

CCARPG WIRE COLOR

+VDC

RED

COMMON

BLACK

DATA A

WHITE

DATA B

GREEN

NO CONNECTION

860

CCARPG

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ZLZ Mounting Bracket

LEMTBR00

Mating 6-Pin MS Connector

CCARPG00

10' 6-Pin 4-Wire Cable/Connector

CCARPG01

25' 6-Pin 4-Wire Cable/Connector

CCARPG25

50' 6-Pin 4-Wire Cable/Connector

CCARPG50

COMPACT DC POWERED PHOTO-ELECTRIC SENSORS
O

RETROREFLECTIVE, PROXIMITY (DIFFUSE) & OPPOSED BEAM
PAIRS

MODULATED LED LIGHT BEAMS FOR IMMUNITY TO AMBIENT
LIGHT

+10 to +30 VDC OPERATION WITH REVERSE POLARITY
PROTECTION

NPN & PNP (CURRENT SINKING AND SOURCING ) OUTPUTS

RUGGED VALOX HOUSING MEETS NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12,
& 13 STANDARDS

LED SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATOR MAKES ALIGNMENT EASY
& PROVIDES INDICATION OF LIGHT SIGNAL DETERIORATION

DESCRIPTION

MOUNTING

These compact self-contained and powerful Retroreflective, Proximity
(Diffuse) and Opposed Beam Pair Photo-electric Sensors provide application
flexibility in counting, positioning and object detection. All units are
interchangeable with conventional 18 mm threaded barrel-type photo-electrics
and inductive proximity sensors. Their small 2-1/8" x 1-1/4" x 1/2" size, in
addition to various mounting options, greatly increases alignment ease and
application possibilities.
All units can be powered from +10 to +30 VDC and are reverse polarity
protected. Current sinking NPN and current sourcing PNP Open Collector
Transistors are protected from continuous overload and inductive load transients
and are rated to 150 mA, with low saturation voltage and less than 1 μA offstate
leakage current. In addition, no false outputs are generated at power-up. A 6 foot
long 4 conductor PVC jacketed cable with strain relief provides supply input
and transistor outputs.
A gasketed removable back cover provides access to the LIGHT/DARK
Operate Mode Selector. When in the “Light Operate” (LO) position, outputs
turn on when light is received by the detector. When in the “Dark Operate”
(DO) position, the outputs are turned on when sensor light is not detected. Also
accessible is a 15-turn screwdriver adjustable GAIN potentiometer that enables
precise adjustment of system sensitivity. A rear mounted LED Signal Strength
Indicator “lights” whenever the sensor sees a light condition and “blinks” at a
rate proportional to the received signals strength (the stronger the signal, the
faster the rate). This LED allows for easy alignment and monitoring of signal
strength deterioration due to dirty optics or changes in alignment.

Various mounting methods have been designed to simplify alignment and
provide versatility in any industrial environment. The integral 18 mm threaded
lense can be interchanged with existing threaded entries common to 18 mm
barrel sensors and inductive proximity switches. The threaded lense can also be
installed into panel thicknesses of 5/16" through a 0.71" diameter hole and
tightened into place with the supplied mounting nut. Two #4 screw clearance
through-holes on 0.95" centers are available for side mounting or side nesting
of multiple units on 1/2" centers for scanning large areas or for code reading
applications. Units may also be mounted using the stainless steel Bottom-Mount
or Side-Mount Bracket Kits (Models MB2 or MB3). These brackets allow 2
axes of movement & greatly simplify alignment.

MODEL RRDC - RETROREFLECTIVE SENSOR
The Model RRDC is a compact, DC powered, retroreflective photo-electric
sensor with maximum detection range of 15 feet (with 3" dia. reflector Model
RT2). The “visible” LED light beam allows for easy alignment and is modulated,
providing immunity to ambient light. The small beam size of 1/2" at 1 foot from
the lense, makes it a good choice for detecting relatively small objects.
In operation, the visible LED light beam is directed at a prismatic photo
transistor, amplified and demodulated. An object which then breaks this beam
will trigger the outputs.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: +10 to +30 VDC, 10% Ripple Max., Reverse
Polarity Protected, 25 mA max. (Model EMDC = 20 mA max.)
2. OUTPUTS: Current Sinking NPN and Current Sourcing PNP Open
Collector Transistors; Short Circuit Protected to +30 VDC, Internal Zener
Diode Protected;
ISNK = 150 mA each; VOH = 30 VDC max.
NPN VSAT = 0.2 V @ 10 mA load; 1 V max. @ 150 mA max. load
PNP VSAT = Less than 1 V @ 10 mA load; less than 2 V @ 150 mA max.
load
Offstate Leakage Current = Less than 1 μA
3. RESPONSE TIME: Responds to a “light” or “dark” signal duration of 1
msec. or greater.
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -4° to+158°F (-20° to +70°C)
5. WEIGHT: 3.5 oz (99.2 g)

ALIGNMENT
Apply DC power to the RRDC and direct its visible light beam at a reflective
target (Models RT1 or RT2) while observing the Signal Strength LED on the
back of the unit. Optimum alignment occurs when the sensor is receiving the
maximum amount of reflected light and the GAIN (sensitivity) potentiometer is
adjusted for the highest pulse rate on the Signal Strength LED. Note that glass,
metallic objects, and other highly reflective surfaces may not be detected. In
these applications, mount the sensor and reflector at any angle to the object to
minimize direct reflections.

1-717-767-6511

861

MODEL PRDC - PROXIMITY SENSOR

The Model PRDC is a compact, DC powered, Proximity (Diffuse) photoelectric sensor with a 12" maximum detecting distance (as measured with a
90% reflective white test card). This sensor requires no special reflectors or
reflective tapes and the limited 12" sensing range reduces detection of
background reflections. It is ideally suited for detection of transparent or
translucent objects, parts ejected from presses, and rotating targets such as
pulley spokes. A modulated “infrared” LED light beam provides immunity to
ambient light.
In operation, the modulated light beam is reflected by the object to be
detected. Actual sensing range is determined by the surface area and the
amount of reflectivity of the object. This reflected light is sensed by a phototransistor, amplified, demodulated and then energizes the outputs.

MB2 BOTTOM MOUNT BRACKET KIT INSTALLATION
1. Remove lense mounting nut on sensor and bottom lense screw.
2. Align mounting foot A under lense as shown with threaded insert facing
down and attach to lense with long kit supplied screw B .
3. Place sensor mounting peg into bracket hole.
4. Install screw, with washers, into long slotted bracket hole and into
mounting foot threaded insert.

ALIGNMENT
With the PRDC in its sensing position, apply DC Power and direct the
infrared light beam at the object to be detected. While observing the Signal
Strength LED, adjust the GAIN (sensitivity) potentiometer for the highest LED
pulse rate. Now remove the sensed object. If the LED goes out, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the LED remains lit, the sensor is “seeing” reflected
light from the background. Reduce the GAIN by steps until the sensor “sees”
the object but not the background. Then turn the pot counter clockwise 2 more
full turns. If the background is still being sensed, it will be necessary to reduce
its reflectivity by either moving it back or painting it flat black.

MODELS EMDC & RCDC - OPPOSED BEAM
EMITTER/ RECEIVER SENSOR PAIR
The Models EMDC (Emitter) and the RCDC (Receiver) are compact, DC
powered, Opposed Beam photo-electric sensor pairs with a 10 foot sensing
range. The Emitter contains a high power modulated “infrared” LED. The
Receiver contains a sensitive photo-transistor, amplifier-demodulator and
output transistors. In operation, these outputs will be triggered when the
Receiver detects that an object begins to break the Emitter beam. Due to their
high gain, they are ideally suited for detecting opaque objects in dirty and dusty
areas or when condensation or oil film environments are present. The small
1/8" well defined beam size allows for sensing small parts accurately and
provides repeatable edge sensing of opaque objects to better than 0.01" for
accurate positioning applications. Greater accuracies can be achieved by
aperturing the Emitter, Receiver or both. However, aperturing will result in
reduced sensing distances. While the beam size is small, the Receiver has a
wide field of view which allows easy “line-of-sight” alignment.

MB3 SIDE MOUNT BRACKET KIT INSTALLATION
1. Remove lense mounting nut from sensor.
2. Install screws with flat washers, through side clearance holes in sensor
and through top hole and slot of bracket.
3. Install lockwashers and tighten hex nuts.

ALIGNMENT
Temporarily mount the Emitter-Receiver Pair opposite, and in line-of-sight,
to each other. Apply DC power to both and aim the Emitter at the Receiver.
Move the Receiver up-down-left-right until the Signal Strength LED lights.
Optimum alignment occurs when the Signal Strength LED flashes at the
highest rate obtainable with the GAIN (Sensitivity) potentiometer adjusted to
the lowest setting needed to light the LED. Mount the units in place. Opposed
Beam Pairs should be used at their highest possible gain. Therefore, have the
object to be detected in “sensing position” and adjust the GAIN potentiometer
fully clockwise (maximum gain). If the Signal Strength LED comes on, “burnthrough” is occurring, and will require that the GAIN pot be backed off
(counter clockwise) until the LED goes out and then backed off 2 more full
turns. Note that Opposed Beam Pairs must be aligned properly and mounted
securely. Excessive movement or vibration can cause loss of alignment and
intermittent or false operation.

862

www.redlion.net

MOUNTING OPTIONS
MB3 SIDE MOUNTING BRACKET

MB2 BOTTOM MOUNTING BRACKET

TYPICAL HOOKUP

1-717-767-6511

863

DIMENSION DRAWINGS
FRONT
VIEW

REAR
VIEW

SIDE
VIEW

EMDC HOOKUP
1. GAIN (sensitivity) control: rotate clockwise to increase gain.
2. “SIGNAL STRENGTH” LED indicator pulse at a rate proportional to received light signal
strength.
3. LIGHT/DARK OPERATE SELECT control: DARK OPERATE = fully counter clockwise;
LIGHT OPERATE = fully clockwise.
4. 6´ PVC-jacketed 4-wire cable supplied (2-wire, EMDC).

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

864

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

RRDC

Retroreflective DC Photo-Electric Sensor

RRDC0000

PRDC

Proximity (Diffuse) DC Photo-Electric Sensor

PRDC0000

EMDC

DC Emitter (Opposed Beam Pair)

EMDC0000

RCDC

DC Receiver (Opposed Beam Pair)

RCDC0000

MB2

Bottom Mount Bracket Kit

MB200000

MB3

Side Mount Bracket Kit

MB300000

RT1

1-1/2" Dia. Prismatic Reflector (Model RRDC)

RT100000

RT2

3" Dia. Prismatic Reflector (Model RRDC)

RT200000

www.redlion.net

MODELS PRM & RRM – MINIATURE DC POWERED PHOTO-ELECTRIC SENSOR
O

O
O

RETROREFLECTIVE, PROXIMITY (DIFFUSE) & OPPOSED
BEAM PAIRS
+10 to +30 VDC OPERATION WITH REVERSE POLARITY
PROTECTION
COMPLEMENTARY NPN (CURRENT SINKING) OUTPUTS
DURABLE BLACK POLYCARBONATE/ABS ALLOY HOUSING
MEETS NEMA 6 AND IP65 STANDARDS

LED’s DISPLAY OPERATING STATUS

PUSH BUTTON DIGITAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

MODEL PRMDC - PROXIMITY SENSOR

These miniature self-contained and powerful Retroreflective, Proximity
(Diffuse) and Opposed Beam Pair Photo-electric Sensors provide application
flexibility in counting, positioning and object detection. All units are
interchangeable with conventional 12 mm threaded barrel-type photo-electrics
and inductive proximity sensors. Their small size, in addition to various
mounting options, greatly increases alignment ease and application
possibilities.
All units can be powered by supplies ranging from +10 to +30 VDC and are
reverse polarity protected. The complementary NPN open collector (Current
Sinking) outputs are protected from continuous overload and inductive load
transients and are rated to 150 mA, with low saturation voltage and less than
10 μA off-state leakage current. In addition, no false outputs are generated at
power-up. Two versions of the sensor are available, a 6 foot (1.83 M) long 4
conductor PVC jacketed cable or 6 inch long quick disconnect Pico-style
connector provides supply input and transistor output.
These miniature sensors offer a digital gain adjustment that uses a single
sealed push button to streamline installation and setup. The user simply holds
the button in to achieve maximum sensitivity, and then can click the button for
seven decremental settings to fine tune for your application. They also feature
smart new status indicators. Green and amber LED’s display operating status
from three directions, indicate “power on” and “light sensed” and flash to
signal “maximum gain,” “gain reduced one increment” and “minimum gain”
conditions. You can tell operating status of your sensors at a glance.

The Model PRMDC is a miniature, DC powered, Proximity (Diffuse)
photo-electric sensor with a 8" maximum detecting distance. This sensor
requires no special reflectors or reflective tapes and the limited 8" sensing
range reduces detection of background reflections. It is ideally suited for
detection of transparent or translucent objects, parts ejected from presses, and
rotating targets such as pulley spokes. A modulated “infrared” LED light beam
provides immunity to ambient light.
In operation, the modulated light beam is reflected by the object to be
detected. Actual sensing range is determined by the surface area and the
amount of reflectivity of the object. This reflected light is sensed by a phototransistor, amplified, demodulated and then energizes the outputs.

MODEL RRMDC - RETROREFLECTIVE SENSOR

The Models EMMDC (Emitter) and the RCMDC (Receiver) are miniature,
DC powered, Opposed Beam photo-electric sensor pairs with a 13 foot sensing
range. The Emitter contains a high power modulated “infrared” LED. The
Receiver contains a sensitive photo-transistor, amplifier-demodulator and
output transistor. In operation, this output will be triggered when the Receiver
detects that an object begins to break the Emitter beam. Due to their high gain,
they are ideally suited for detecting opaque objects in dirty and dusty areas or
when condensation or oil film environments are present.

The Model RRMDC is a miniature, DC powered, retroreflective photoelectric sensor with maximum detection range of 6.5 feet [1.98 M] (with 3" dia.
reflector Model RT2). The “visible” LED light beam allows for easy alignment
and is modulated, providing immunity to ambient light. The small beam size
makes it a good choice for detecting relatively small objects.
In operation, the visible LED light beam is directed at a photo transistor,
amplified and demodulated. An object which then breaks this beam will trigger
the output.

MODELS EMMDC & RCMDC - OPPOSED BEAM
EMITTER/ RECEIVER SENSOR PAIR

1-717-767-6511

865

SPECIFICATIONS

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: +10 to +30 VDC (10% Ripple Max.)
Current Draw: 25 mA max. (exclusive of load)
Reverse Polarity Protected
2. REPEATABILITY: Opposed Mode: 1 msec, All others: 175 μsec.
3. OUTPUTS: Current Sinking Complementary NPN Open Collector
Transistor; Short Circuit Protected
ISNK: 150 mA max. each; VOH = 30 VDC max.
VSAT: 1 V @ 10 mA load
Offstate Leakage Current : Less than 10 μA @ 30 VDC
4. OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME: Opposed Mode: 8 msec ON, 4 msec
OFF, All others 1.5 msec
5. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -4° to+131°F (-20° to +55°C)
6. WEIGHT: 0.4 oz. (1.13 g)

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

SIDE VIEW

SET-UP AND INSTALLATION
USING THE PHOTOELECTRIC
LED INDICATORS

The photoelectric has two bright LEDs; both are visible from the back, and
each is visible from one side of the sensor. They indicate the following:
Green steady: Power ON
Amber steady: Light sensed
Green flashing rapidly 5 times: Maximum gain
Single green flash: Push button “click” registered, gain reduced by one
increment
Amber/Green alternating: Minimum gain (can not reduce further)

SETTING SENSITIVITY
The unit features an extremely simple method for setting sensitivity (gain).
Simply hold the push button until the LED flashes rapidly, 5 times. The
sensor is automatically set to maximum gain.
Reduce gain by pressing the push button briefly (“clicking” it) up to 7 times;
gain will reduce in single increments with each click. Amber and green LEDs
alternate after the lowest setting is reached.
If the gain is accidentally set too low, hold the push button until gain
increases to the maximum level, then click the push button down to the
approrpriate level. Gain may be readjusted in this way at any time.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PART NUMBERS
w/ 2 Meter Cable
w/ Pico Connector

RRMDC

Retroreflective DC Photo-Electric Sensor

RRMDC000

PRMDC

Proximity (Diffuse) DC Photo-Electric Sensor

PRMDC000

PRMDC001

EMMDC

DC Emitter (Opposed Beam Pair)

EMMDC000

EMMDC001

RCMDC

RRMDC001

DC Receiver (Opposed Beam Pair)

RCMDC000

RCMDC001

MB2

Bottom Mount Bracket Kit

MBM20000

MB3

Side Mount Bracket Kit

MBM30000

RT1

1-1/2" Dia. Prismatic Reflector (Model RRMDC)

RT100000

RT2
CCMPE

866

DESCRIPTION

3" Dia. Prismatic Reflector (Model RRMDC)
Pico-Style Quick Disconnect Connector & Cable, 2 meters

www.redlion.net

RT200000
CCMPE000

CCMPE

WIRE OPTIONS

4-PIN FEMALE PICO-STYLE CONNECTOR [ 6.5' (2 m) ]

4-PIN MALE PICO-STYLE CONNECTOR

I
MOUNTING
Various mounting methods have been designed to simplify alignment and
provide versatility in any industrial environment. The integral 12 mm
threaded lense can be interchanged with existing threaded entries common to
12 mm barrel sensors and inductive proximity switches. The threaded lense
can also be installed into panel thicknesses of 3/16" through a 0.51" diameter
hole and tightened into place with the supplied mounting nut. Two #4 screw
clearance through-holes on 0.55" centers are available for side mounting or
side nesting of multiple units on 1/2" centers for scanning large areas or for
code reading applications. Units may also be mounted using the stainless steel
Bottom-Mount or Side-Mount Bracket Kits (Models MBM2 or MBM3).
These brackets allow 2 axes of movement & greatly simplify alignment.

MBM3

WIRING DIAGRAM

MBM2

1-717-767-6511

867

MODEL PT - PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

DESCRIPTION

COMPACT STAINLESS STEEL HOUSING

M12 QUICK DISCONNECT

EXCELLENT EMC RESISTANCE

SHORT CIRCUIT AND REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTION

IP67 PROTECTION RATING

CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY THAT PROVIDES LONG TERM
RELIABLE OPERATION

SPECIFICATIONS

The PT Series Pressure Transmitters are designed to provide accurate and
dependable pressure measurement, even in the most demanding applications.
The reliability of solid-state design and the durability of the stainless steel case
are the cornerstone of their design.
Proven ceramic component technology allows long-term stability and high
tolerance to overpressure conditions. The 4 to 20 mA output can easily be
connect to any Red Lion process meter for monitoring and/or control. Short
circuit and reverse polarity protection are built-in to the circuitry, further
enhancing this pressure transmitters.
The transmitter housing is constructed of stainless steel and provides an IP 67
level of protection. The fluid connection is a standard G ¼ thread, while the
electrical connection is a M12 connector.
Additional pressure ranges and accessories are available on special request,
contact the factory for more details.

SAFETY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
manual or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.

1. ACCURACY: ≤0.3% Full Scale
2. MEDIUM TEMPERATURE: -40°F to + 302°F (-40°C to +150°C)
3. OPERATING VOLTAGE: 8 to 33 VDC
4. OUTPUT: 4 to 20 mA
5. CURRENT CONSUMPTION: ≤20 mA
6. DYNAMIC RESPONSE: < 2 msec
7. SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION: Yes
8. REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTION: Yes
9. DEGREE OF PROTECTION: IP 67
10. HOUSING MATERIAL: SST 1.4305 (AISI 303)
11. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION: M12x1
12. FLUID CONNECTION: G ¼
13. SHOCK RESISTANCE: 75 G, 11 msec per IEC 68-2-27
14. VIBRATION RESISTANCE: 20 G, 15 mm per IEC 68-2-6

WIRING PINOUT AND SPECIFICATIONS
PT PIN

CAUTION: Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

FUNCTION

+VDC

4-20 mA OUT

N/C

WIRE COLOR

BROWN
BLUE

—

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
DISPLAY DEVICE
VDC SOURCE

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

CCM

868

DESCRIPTION

2 Wire Relative
Pressure
Transmitter

BAR

PSI

0-1

0 - 14.5

PT00001R

0 - 1.6

0 - 23.2

PT00002R

0 - 10

0 - 145

PT00010R

0 - 250

0 - 3625

PT00250R

4 Wire unshielded 2 meter cable/connector

PART NUMBER

CCM12U02

www.redlion.net

EXTERNAL
VDC SOURCE

MODEL TMP - FIELD CUTTABLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR PROBES
AND ACCESSORIES
O

THERMOCOUPLE OR RTD

24" PROBE CUTTABLE TO 3.5"

MEASURE TEMPERATURES UP TO 704 °C/1300 °F

MOUNTING AND WIRING ACCESSORIES

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Model TMP Thermocouple and RTD Temperature Probes are field cuttable to
the desired length. The probes can be trimmed to within 3.5" (88.9 mm) of the
probe tip allowing for greater application flexibility. Accessory hardware is
available to wire and mount the probes in the user's existing thermowell.
Optional spring loaded fittings (sold separately) slide along the probe sheath
to proper immersion depth as determined by the user. These fittings allow for
strong contact between the probe and the thermowell to improve response.

3. Use a pair of pliers to grasp the excess tubing to be removed.
4. Use a narrow range of motion to slowly work the excess tubing from side to
side until it separates from the probe. Using a wide range of motion will
deform the tube and prevent installation of the tube sleeve.
5. Remove the excess tubing and trim the leads to the desired length.
6. Install the tube sleeve in the open end of the tube to protect the leads from any
sharp edges on the inside of the tube.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. THERMOCOUPLE: Ungrounded J, K, T and E calibration available.
2. RTD: 3 Wire, 100W, Class "A" DIN Platinum per IEC751 (385 ALPHA)
3. PROBE SHEATH: 0.25" (6.35mm)
4. PROBE LENGTH: 24" (0.6M) as supplied, can be field cut down to 3.5"
(88.9mm).
5. LEAD WIRE: 6" (152.4mm) 24 gauge
6. WIRE INSULATION: Neoflon PFA, Fiberglass or High Temperature Glass.
As specified by part number.

TMPXXXXX

TMPACC01

(One tube sleeve is included with each probe.)

INSTALLATION

The thermocouple and RTD probes have a crimp mark located 3" (76.2 mm)
from the tip. This indicates the end of the internal seal. Damage to the probe will
occur if trimmed within 3.5" (88.9 mm) of the tip.

1. Orient the probe and the spring loaded fitting as shown below.
2. Screw the spring loaded fitting one complete turn into the thermowell (not
included).
3. Push the probe into the fitting until it touches the bottom of the thermowell.
4. Hold the probe to the bottom of the thermowell and tighten the fitting. This
ensures good contact between the probe and the bottom of the thermowell.
5. Completely tighten the fitting into the thermowell.
Note: The probe must be inserted only as shown below to prevent damage to
the fitting.

1. Determine the desired probe length and mark it with a pen or marker. Secure the
probe within a tube vice being careful not to deform or flatten the probe.
2. “Score” the tubing with a tubing cutter. Make one or two revolutions with the
cutter. Do not cut completely through the tubing to prevent burrs or a sharp
lip on the inside of the tubing.

If it becomes necessary to separate the probe and the fitting, first disconnect
the wires and then unscrew the fitting completely from the thermowell. Pull the
probe through the fitting from the end that was screwed into the thermowell. The
fitting will present resistance to the probe removal if you attempt to go in the
wrong direction.

CUTTING THE TUBING

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

TYPE

WIRE
COLOR

White (+)
Red (-)

K
TC Probe
TMP

RTD Probe

Yellow (+)
Red (-)

Blue (+)
Red (-)

Violet (+)
Red (-)

385

WIRE INSULATION

TEMPERATURE RANGE

PART
NUMBER

Neoflon PFA

0 to 260 °C / 32 to 500 °F

TMPJ2SU1

Fiberglass

0 to 370 °C / 32 to 700 °F

TMPJ2SU2

High Temp Glass

0 to 370 °C / 32 to 700 °F

TMPJ2SU3

Neoflon PFA

-200 to 260 °C / -328 to 500 °F

TMPK2SU1

Fiberglass

-200 to 482 °C / -328 to 900 °F

TMPK2SU2

High Temp Glass

-200 to 704 °C / -328 to 1300 °F

TMPK2SU3

Neoflon PFA

-200 to 200 °C / -328 to 400 °F

TMPT2SU1

Neoflon PFA

-200 to 260 °C / -328 to 500 °F

TMPE2SU1

Fiberglass

-200 to 430 °C / -328 to 800 °F

TMPE2SU2

High Temp Glass

-200 to 430 °C / -328 to 800 °F

TMPE2SU3

Neoflon PFA

-200 to 260 °C / -328 to 500 °F

TMPA2S01

Fiberglass

-200 to 600 °C / -328 to 1112 °F

TMPA2S02

** RTDs do not have color standard. Excitation and Signal+ are the same color. Signal common is the odd color.

1-717-767-6511

869

ACCESSORIES (sold separately)
Spring Loaded Fittings: Connects
probe to thermowell and attaches
to weatherhead 1/2" NPT X1/2"
NPT Stainless Steel.

Weatherproof Heads:
Cast Aluminum
Protects against dust, rain, splashing,
and hose directed water
Weatherproof gasket
Stainless steel chain

TMPACC01

Tube Sleeve
Tube sleeve to protect probe leads
from burrs after cutting probe.

I
TMPACC02
Terminal Blocks
2-Terminal for use with TCs

TMPACC03
4-Terminal for use with RTDs

TMPACC04

TMPACC05

ACCESSORIES (All accessories are sold separately)
MODEL NO.

TMPACC

870

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Spring Loaded Fitting

TMPACC01

Cast Aluminum Weatherproof Head

TMPACC02

Spare Tube Sleeve

TMPACC03

2-Terminal Block (for TCs)

TMPACC04

4-Terminal Block (for RTDs)

TMPACC05

www.redlion.net

MODELS TMPC, TMPU, & TMPB THERMOCOUPLES

I
TMPC

TMPU
TMPB

MODEL TMPC - HIGH TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The model TMPC thermocouple is double-protected with abrasion resistant
Inconel overbraid with high temperature ceramic fiber insulation. A temperature
rating of up to 980º C (1800º F) continuous service and 1090º C (2000º F) shortterm service makes these probes ideal for many high temperature measurement
applications. Ideal applications include profiling ovens and furnaces.

z Flexible and Abrasion Resistant
z Smooth, rounded tip on “hot” side
z Male high temperature standard size ceramic connector on “cold”
side

SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
10.0 (254.0)

3/16
(4.8)

1. WIRE: 20 AWG, 10 feet in length; standard limits of error
2. INSULATION: Nextel® ceramic fiber. (Not to be exported)
3. TEMPERATURE: 980 ºC (1800 ºF) continuous
1090 ºC (2000 ºF) short-term service depending on TC type
4. CONNECTOR: High temperature ceramic standard size style connector -29
to 650 ºC (-20 to 1200 ºF)
5. PROBE: Grounded TC junction with Inconel overbraid welded to form a
smooth, round tip

0.10 DIA.
(2.5)
1.50
(38.1)
0.5
(12.7)
0.16
(4.1)
0.19
(4.8)
0.44
(11.2)

0.59
(15)

ORDERING INFORMATION

1.00 (25.4)
0.63
(16)

MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

TMPC

Type K OVERBRAIDED CERAMIC TC

TMPKCF01

* Nextel can not be exported. Consult factory for available options.

1-717-767-6511

871

MODEL TMPU - UTILITY THERMOCOUPLES
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Utility thermocouple probes are basic products for temperature measurement.
They are typically connected to a hand held thermometer. The unit features a
rugged handle that is permanently molded to a probe sheath. A retractable cable
is connected with strain relief to the handle end, and termination is provided by
a miniature male connector.

z RETRACTABLE CABLE WITH SUPERIOR MEMORY
z MINIATURE CONNECTOR FOR USE WITH HAND HELD
THERMOMETERS
z MOLDED HANDLE RATED TO 220º C (425º F)
z MEETS OR EXCEEDS SLE AND EN 60584-2: TOLERANCE
CLASS 1

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
SPECIFICATIONS

12.0
(305)

5.38 (137)

0.63
(16.0)

1. HANDLE TEMPERATURE RATING: 220º C (425º F)
2. THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION: Grounded
3. CABLE LENGTH: 1 foot expands to 5 feet
4. PROBE LENGTH: 12 inches
5. MAX PROBE TEMPERATURE:
304SS: 900 °C (1650 °F)
Inconel: 1150 °C (2100 °F)

0.88
(22.4)

* For connector information see TMPCNM01 on page 875.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

TC ANSI TYPE

TMPU

TC HANDLE
PROBE

304 SS

TC HANDLE
PROBE

INCONEL 600

TMPU

SHEATH MATERIAL SHEATH DIAMETER

CABLE LENGTH

TC JUNCTION

PART NUMBER

.125

1' EXPANDS TO 5'

GROUNDED

TMPKUT01

.125

1' EXPANDS TO 5'

GROUNDED

TMPKUT02

MODEL TMPB - SPRING LOADED COMPRESSION FITTING THERMOCOUPLE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The spring-loaded compression fitting thermocouple is ideally suited for
measuring plastic processing machinery temperatures at the crosshead, die or
barrel. It has a 5 foot stainless steel cable, with a 3/16" sheath diameter and a
brass compression fitting with 1/8" NPT.

z IDEAL FOR EXTRUDERS/MOLDING AND MACHINE PROCESS
TEMPERATURE
z COLD END TERMINATION IS HIGH TEMPERATURE NICKEL
ZINC FERRITE CORE STANDARD MALE CONNECTOR
z STANDARD MALE CONNECTOR IS DESIGNED FOR
SUPPRESSION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
SPECIFICATIONS

60
(1524)

2
(50)

1. THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION: Type K, grounded
2. CABLE: 5 feet, 0.188 dia. stainless steel
3. CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS: Extra heavy duty solid male pin male
connector
Case Material: High temperature liquid crystal polymer (LCP)
Temperature ratings:
Ferrite core effectiveness: 120º C (248º F)
LCP Material: 260º C (500º F)
Impedance: (±20%): 35 ohms @ 25 MHz
70 ohms @ 100 MHz

0.10 DIA.
(2.5)

1.88
(47.8)
0.47 (11.9)

OMEGA

0.59 (15.06)

0.16 (3.96)
0.19 (4.77)
0.44 (11.11)

ORDERING INFORMATION
1.00
(25.4)

872

0.50
(12.7)

MODEL NUMBER

TMPB

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

COMPRESSION TC ASSEMBLY

PART NUMBER

TMPKBT01

QUICK DISCONNECT TEMPERATURE PROBES AND ACCESSORIES
MODEL TMP - QUICK DISCONNECT TEMPERATURE PROBES

z MATING FEMALE CONNECTOR (with "write on label") AND PLCM
CABLE CLAMP WITH LOCKING CLIP INCLUDED WITH
MINIATURE AND STANDARD SIZE PROBES
z CHOICE OF 304 SS, INCONEL 600 OR XL SHEATH
z XL HIGH TEMPERATURE PROBE AVAILABLE
z MEETS OR EXCEEDS SLE AND EN 60584-2: TOLERANCE
CLASS 1
z COLOR CODED CONNECTOR BODY
z WIRE SOLD SEPARATELY

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Model TMP Quick Disconnect Thermocouples are available with both
miniature and standard size connector termination. These rugged probes feature
a variety of calibration types, sheath materials and diameters, and are available
with an ungrounded junction. A high temperature probe is also available that can
be mated with a standard female universal connector. All temperature probes are
rated at the tolerance standard SLE, (Special Limits Of Error), which is ±2° C
degrees of error.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. SHEATH: Constructed of 304 stainless steel, Inconel 600, or XL (High
Temperature Probe only)
2. SHEATH DIAMETER: 0.062" or 0.125"
3. PROBE LENGTH: 12" Ungrounded junction.
4. CONNECTOR BODY: Glass Filled Nylon, rated to 220º C.
5. WIRE: Sold separately, see accessory details

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
12 (300)

ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

MINI
QUICK
DISCONNNECT
TC PROBE
W/ MOLDED
CONN

STANDARD
QUICK
DISCONNNECT
TC PROBE
W/ MOLDED
CONN

0.125 Dia.
12 (300)
0.062 Dia.

ANSI
TYPE
TC

SHEATH MATERIAL

SHEATH
DIAMETER PART NUMBER
INCHES

304SS

0.062

TMPJQD01

304SS

0.062

TMPKQD01

304SS

0.062

TMPTQD01

304SS

0.062

TMPEQD01

INCONEL 600

0.062

TMPJQD02

INCONEL 600

0.062

TMPKQD02

INCONEL 600

0.062

TMPTQD02

INCONEL 600

0.062

TMPEQD02

304SS

0.125

TMPJQD03

304SS

0.125

TMPKQD03

304SS

0.125

TMPTQD03

304SS

0.125

TMPEQD03

INCONEL 600

0.125

TMPJQD04

INCONEL 600

0.125

TMPKQD04

INCONEL 600

0.125

TMPTQD04

INCONEL 600

0.125

TMPEQD04

0.125

*TMPKQD05

* XL probes have a very low drift and are for use in high temperature
applications up to 1335° C.

1-717-767-6511

873

WIRING
MODEL TMWS - THERMOCOUPLE WIRE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Thermocouple wire is for use with the Mini and Standard Quick Disconnect
Temperature Probes. It is available in a variety of insulation and calibration
types, and spool lengths.

ORDERING INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS
1. WIRE LENGTH: 25 or 100 Foot Spools
2. INSULATION: Duplex Insulated
3. TYPE: 24 AWG Solid Wire
4. COLOR CODE: ANSI color codes

DESCRIPTION

ANSI
TYPE

MAX
TEMP

260

500 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .093 TMWSJ100

ºC

INSULATION TYPE

NOMINAL
SIZE (IN.)

PART
NUMBER

ºF

ANSI TYPE

POSITIVE

NEGATIVE

JACKET

260

500 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .093 TMWSK100

WHITE

RED

BROWN

200

400 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .092 TMWST100

YELLOW

RED

BROWN

260

500 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .092 TMWSE100

BLUE

RED

BROWN

370

700

GLASS BRAID .050 X .085 TMWGJ100

PURPLE

RED

BROWN

482

900

GLASS BRAID .050 X .080 TMWGK100

200

400

GLASS BRAID .050 X .080 TMWGT100

430

800

GLASS BRAID .050 X .080 TMWGE100

260

500 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .093 TMWSJ025

260

500 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .093 TMWSK025

200

400 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .092 TMWST025

260

500 NEOFLON PFA .056 X .092 TMWSE025

370

700

GLASS BRAID .050 X .085 TMWGJ025

482

900

GLASS BRAID .050 X .080 TMWGK025

200

400

GLASS BRAID .050 X .080 TMWGT025

430

800

GLASS BRAID .050 X .080 TMWGE025

WIRE
100' SPL

WIRE
25' SPL

MODEL TMPCB - RETRACTABLE SENSOR CABLES
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The retractable sensor cables are color coded and for use with thermocouples.
The cables have a superior jacket construction, employing the latest in jacketing
material: TPE (thermoplastic elastomer), a unique family of thermoplastics
which exhibits characteristics previously found only in rubber compounds. TPE
is extremely tough and flexible, and has excellent abrasion resistance. This
special construction technique yields an expansion rate of up to 500%. These
retractable cables are for use with electronic type indicators, either panel,
handheld or bench type models.

z COMPATIBLE WITH J, K, T AND E THERMOCOUPLE
CALIBRATIONS
z EXPANSION RATIO UP TO 500% - 1 Ft (300 mm) OF CABLE
STRETCHES TO 5 Ft (1500 mm)
z IDEAL FOR USE WITH HANDHELD AND BENCH STAND
ELECTRONIC INDICATORS
z BARE WIRE ENDS

SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

TYPE

J
2 FT RETRACT CABLE

K
T
E

874

JACKET

+WIRE

-WIRE

PART
NUMBER

BLACK

WHITE

RED

TMPCBS01

RED

TMPCBS02

RED

TMPCBS03

RED

TMPCBS04

YELLOW YELLOW
BLUE

BLUE

PURPLE PURPLE

1. INSULATION: TPE Thermoplastic Elastomer outer jacket
2. INNER CONDUCTORS: Neoflon PFA
3. CALIBRATIONS: J, K, T, E
4. THERMOCOUPLE WIRE CONFORMITY: SLE Standard limit of error
per ANSI MC 96.1 (1975)
5. TEMPERATURE RATING: -30 to 105ºC (-22 to 220º F)
6. CONSTRUCTION: 28 AWG stranded wire (7 strand x 36 gauge)
7. LENGTH: 2 feet (600 mm)

www.redlion.net

ACCESSORIES
MODEL TMPCN - QUICK DISCONNECT STANDARD CONNECTORS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Standard Connectors are for use with the Standard Quick Disconnect TC
Probes. They are available in both male and female termination, and include a
“write on label” for easy identification. The female standard connector is a
universal connector, meaning it can be used to terminate male versions of both
the standard and miniature connector.

SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1. CONNECTOR BODY MATERIAL: Glass Filled Nylon, for temperature
ranges of -29 to 220º C (-20 to 425 °F).
2. CONNECTOR BODY COLOR: ANSI color coded
3. WIRE GAGE: Accepts stranded or solid wire up to 14 AWG
4. WIRE TERMINATION: Combination Phillips/Slot Screws

0.10 DIA.
(2.5)

1.31
(33.33)
0.47
(11.90)

ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

0.59
(15.06)

TYPE

TERMINATION

PART NUMBER

0.16
(3.96)
0.19
(4.77)

0.50
(12.7)

0.44
(11.11)
1.0 (25.4)
0.31 (8.0)

STANDARD
CONNECTOR

MALE AND FEMALE HAVE
THE SAME BODY DIMENSIONS

0.22 (5.5) WIRE ACCESS
HOLE

0.5
(12.7)

MALE

TMPCNS01

FEMALE

TMPCNS02

MALE

TMPCNS03

FEMALE

TMPCNS04

MALE

TMPCNS05

FEMALE

TMPCNS06

MALE

TMPCNS07

FEMALE

TMPCNS08

Covered by US and Foreign Patents.

0.44 (11.1)
FRONT & REAR VIEW OF FEMALE

MODEL TMPCN - QUICK DISCONNECT MINIATURE CONNECTORS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

Miniature Connectors are for use with the Miniature Quick Disconnect TC
Probes. They are available in both male and female termination, and include a
“write on label” for easy identification.

1. CONNECTOR BODY MATERIAL: Glass Filled Nylon, for temperature
ranges of -29 to 220º C (-20 to 425 °F).
2. CONNECTOR BODY COLOR: ANSI color coded
3. WIRE GAGE: Accepts stranded or solid wire up to 20 AWG
4. WIRE TERMINATION: Combination Phillips/Slot Screws

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

0.10
(2.5) DIA.

TYPE

TERMINATION

PART NUMBER

MALE

TMPCNM01

FEMALE

TMPCNM02

0.194 (4.93) WIRE HOLE

0.19
(4.8)

0.81
(20.6)

0.09
(2.3)
0.13
(3.3)
0.31
(7.9)

0.50
(12.7)

0.66
(16.8)

1.00
(25.4)

0.03 (0.8)

MINIATURE
CONNECTOR
E

0.28
(7.16)

0.13 (3.3)
0.31 (7.9)

FEMALE

MALE

TMPCNM03

FEMALE

TMPCNM04

MALE

TMPCNM05

FEMALE

TMPCNM06

MALE

TMPCNM07

FEMALE

TMPCNM08

Covered by US and Foreign Patents.

1-717-767-6511

875

TRANSITION JOINT PROBES AND ACCESSORIES
MODEL TMP - TRANSITION JOINT PROBES
I
z CHOICE OF 304 SS, INCONEL 600 OR XL SHEATH
z STRIPPED BARE WIRE ENDS
z XL HIGH TEMPERATURE PROBE AVAILABLE
z EASILY ATTACHES TO STANDARD AND MINI STYLE
CONNECTORS (SEE ACCESSORIES)
z MEETS OR EXCEEDS SLE AND EN 60584-2: TOLERANCE
CLASS 1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Model TMPTJ transition joint probes are rugged temperature probes that
feature a spring strain relief at the “cold” end of the probe that prevents pinching
of the thermocouple wire that can occur in certain applications. These versatile
probes come in a variety of sheath diameters and materials. The probes are
standard 12" long transitioning to 40" of wire with exposed leads.

ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

TRANSITION
JOINT
PROBES

SPECIFICATIONS
1. SHEATH: Constructed of 304 stainless steel, Inconel 600, or XL (High
Temperature Probe)
2. SHEATH DIAMETER: 0.063" or 0.125"
3. PROBE LENGTH: 12" Ungrounded junction.
4. CONNECTOR BODY: Glass Filled Nylon, rated to 260º C.
5. WIRE INSULATION: Neoflon PFA
6. LEAD LENGTH: 40" (1 meter) with stripped ends

SHEATH
SHEATH MATERIAL DIAMETER
INCHES

UPPER TEMP
GUIDELINES
°C (°F)
TC JUNCTION

PART
NUMBER

INCONEL 600

1/16

921 (1690)

TMPKTJ01

INCONEL 600

1/8

1071 (1960)

TMPKTJ02

304 SS

1/16

899 (1650)

TMPKTJ03

304 SS

1/8

899 (1650)

TMPKTJ04

1/8

1149 (2100)

TMPKTJ05

1/16

1038 (1900)

TMPKTJ06

* XL probes have a very low drift and are for use in high temperature
applications up to 1335° C.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note: Probe supplied with 40" (1 Meter) cable.

876

ANSI
TYPE
TC

www.redlion.net

I
SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

0.10 DIA.
(2.5)

1.31
(33.33)
0.47
(11.90)

ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

0.59
(15.06)

TYPE

TERMINATION

PART NUMBER

0.16
(3.96)
0.19
(4.77)

0.50
(12.7)

0.44
(11.11)
1.0 (25.4)
0.31 (8.0)

STANDARD
CONNECTOR

MALE AND FEMALE HAVE
THE SAME BODY DIMENSIONS

0.22 (5.5) WIRE ACCESS
HOLE

0.5
(12.7)

MALE

TMPCNS01

FEMALE

TMPCNS02

MALE

TMPCNS03

FEMALE

TMPCNS04

MALE

TMPCNS05

FEMALE

TMPCNS06

MALE

TMPCNS07

FEMALE

TMPCNS08

Covered by US and Foreign Patents.

0.44 (11.1)
FRONT & REAR VIEW OF FEMALE

MODEL TMPCN - QUICK DISCONNECT MINIATURE CONNECTORS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

Miniature Connectors are for use with the Miniature Quick Disconnect TC
Probes. They are available in both male and female termination, and include a
“write on label” for easy identification.

1. CONNECTOR BODY MATERIAL: Glass Filled Nylon, for temperature
ranges of -29 to 220º C (-20 to 425 °F).
2. CONNECTOR BODY COLOR: ANSI color coded
3. WIRE GAGE: Accepts stranded or solid wire up to 20 AWG
4. WIRE TERMINATION: Combination Phillips/Slot Screws

ORDERING INFORMATION

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

DESCRIPTION

0.10
(2.5) DIA.

0.194 (4.93) WIRE HOLE

0.19
(4.8)

TYPE

0.81
(20.6)

T
0.09
(2.3)
0.13
(3.3)
0.31
(7.9)

0.50
(12.7)

0.66
(16.8)

0.03 (0.8)

0.28
(7.16)

0.13 (3.3)
0.31 (7.9)

MALE

MINIATURE
CONNECTOR

1.00
(25.4)

FEMALE

TERMINATION

PART NUMBER

MALE

TMPCNM01

FEMALE

TMPCNM02

MALE

TMPCNM03

FEMALE

TMPCNM04

MALE

TMPCNM05

FEMALE

TMPCNM06

MALE

TMPCNM07

FEMALE

TMPCNM08

Covered by US and Foreign Patents.

1-717-767-6511

877

MODEL TMPRT - SURFACE MOUNT AND PIPE PLUG RTD SENSORS

I
SURFACE MOUNT
PIPE PLUG

MODEL TMPRT - ADVANCED DESIGN SURFACE MOUNT RTD SENSOR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Model TMPRT "stick-on" style RTD temperature sensor mounts on flat
surfaces and provides Class B accuracy for critical monitoring applications.
Based on a bare 2 X 2 X .08 mm thin film platinum RTD, the unit is supplied in
a Neoflon PFA PFA insulated configuration and can be easily applied using its
self-adhesive backing. Some of the applications of this versatile RTD sensor
include monitoring chip, heat sink, and environmental temperatures in
electronic devices; checking piping or ducting temperatures; monitoring motor
and transformer core heat; testing insulation capabilities, as well as checking
other applications in which surface and/or gradient temperatures need to be
monitored and controlled.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. MINIMUM/MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE:
-73° C (-100° F) to 260° C (500° F) continuous
2. SENSING ELEMENT: 100 Ω at 0° C (32° F)
Temperature coefficient of 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C (IEC60751)
3. ACCURACY: ± 0.12% at 0° C (DIN Class B)
4. RESPONSE TIME: Less than 0.9 s (63% response time in water flowing at
3 feet per second), less than 2 sec response time on a hot plate.
5. LEAD WIRE:10 foot 26 AWG stranded nickel plated copper, Neoflon PFA
PFA-insulated and jacket cable
6. ADHESIVE PAD DIMENSIONS: 1 x ¾ " (25 X 19 mm)

z 100 Ω DIN CLASS B (± 0.12 % AT 0°C) ACCURACY STANDARD
z EASY-INSTALLATION SILICONE BASED, SELF BACKING RATED
TO 260°C (500°F)
z SENSOR CAN BE REAPPLIED
z STRIPPED 3 WIRE LEADS (CONNECTORS SOLD SEPARATELY)
z 10 FOOT LEAD LENGTH
z IDEAL FOR FLAT OR CURVED SURFACES

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

TMPRT

878

DESCRIPTION

SMT RTD

INSULATION
TYPE

TERMINATION
(COLD SIDE)

NEOFLON PFA

STRIPPED WIRE
BARE ENDS

www.redlion.net

LENGTH (FT) PART NUMBER

TMPRT001

MODEL TMPRT - PIPE PLUG RTD SENSOR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The pipe plug RTD sensor is a unit specially designed for use in pressure
vessel applications. Its 3 wire construction provides connectivity to most hand
held instruments with Red/Red/White per IE/ASTM-E-1137. The unit features a
high accuracy 100 Ω Class A DIN platinum element and steel braided, Neoflon
PFA insulated wires for the necessary durability and protection demanded by
harsher environments.

z IDEAL FOR USE IN PRESSURE VESSEL APPLICATIONS, 172
BAR (2500 PSI) MAXIMUM
z 6 MM (0.24") DIAMETER, SST PROBE
z STEEL BRAIDED, NEOFLON PFA INSULATED LEAD WIRES
z HIGH ACCURACY 100 Ω CLASS A DIN PLATINUM ELEMENT
(ALPHA = 0.00385)
z STRAIN RELIEF SPRING

SPECIFICATIONS
1. WIRE: 72" long 26 AWG insulated Neoflon PFA
2. MAX TEMPERATURE: 230º C (450º F)
3. TERMINATION: Stripped bare wire ends
4. OVERBRAID: Stainless Steel
5. THREADS: ¼" NPT
6. SENSING ELEMENT END DIAMETER: .24" (6mm)

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

TMPRT

PIPE PLUG RTD
SENSOR

CABLE
LENGTH

TERMINATION
(COLD SIDE)

PART NUMBER

STRIPPED BARE
WIRE ENDS

TMPRT002

MODEL TMPCN - RTD PROBE CONNECTORS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
RTD Mini Connectors are for use with RTD probes. They are miniature size,
and are available in both male and female termination.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
MALE

SPECIFICATIONS

FEMALE
0.19 (4.93) WIRE
ACCESS HOLE

0.13 DIA. TYP.
(3.3)

1. CONNECTOR BODY MATERIAL: Glass Filled Nylon, for temperature
ranges of -29 to 220º C.
2. CONNECTOR BODY COLOR: White
3. WIRE GAGE: Accepts stranded or solid wire up to 20 AWG
4. WIRE TERMINATION: Combination Phillips/Slot Screws
5. CONNECTOR ENDS: Copper

0.23
(5.8)

0.92
(23.4)
G

1.06
(26.9)

–
–

0.50
(12.7)

0.09
(2.3)
0.31
(7.9)
0.13
(3.3)
0.31
(7.9)

0.44
(11.2)
0.03
(0.8)
0.31
(7.9)

0.13
(3.3)

0.31
(7.9)

0.92
(23.4)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

TMPCN

RTD miniature male
connector
RTD miniature female
connector

TYPE

TERMINATION

PART NUMBER

MALE

TMPCNM09

FEMALE

TMPCNM10

1-717-767-6511

879

MODELS TMPT AND TMPTR - THERMOCOUPLE OR RTD CONNECTOR WITH
BUILT IN 4-20 mA TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
z HIGH ACCURACY, REPEATABILITY AND STABILITY
z CONNECTOR DESIGN CONVERTS INPUT SIGNAL TO A
STANDARD 2-WIRE, 4-20 mA OUTPUT
z PROVIDES “OPEN SENSOR WIRE” SIGNAL INDICATION

z ENCAPSULATED HOUSING
z COMPENSATES FOR LONG LEAD WIRES
z FACTORY CALIBRATED, NO ADJUSTMENTS REQUIRED
z MODELS FOR J, K, T (UNGROUNDED) THERMOCOUPLES AND
100 OHM, 0.00385 3-WIRE RTD'S

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The model TMPT's internal circuitry conditions the non-linear millivolt
output of a thermocouple, across a specified temperature range, and retransmits
it as a standard 2-wire 4-20 mA analog output. The TMPTR also provides a 2wire 4-20 mA output by conditioning the resistive change of a 100Ω, 0.00385
RTD sensor and transmitting it as a 4-20 mA output.

WIRING CONNECTION

SPECIFICATIONS
TMPT SPECIFICATIONS
1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 9 to 24 VDC @ 30 mA
2. OUTPUT: 4 to 20 mA
3. TEMPERATURE RANGE: See Ordering Information
4. ACCURACY: ± 0.5% of full scale millivolt input @ 23º C plus the nonlinearity of the thermocouple type (note that the TMPT does not compensate
for thermocouple non-linearity)
5. TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT: ± 0.002 mA/ºC
6. MAX LOOP LOAD: (Ω) = (V supply - 9 V)/0.02 A
7. TRANSMITTER OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -40º to 85ºC
8. AGENCY APPROVAL: CE
9. RESPONSE TIME: 120 msec (0 to 63% FS)
10. THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION: Ungrounded
11. CABLE CONNECTIONS: 10 foot 2-wire shielded cable
WIRE COLOR CODE

RED

FUNCTION

+VDC

BLACK

OUTPUT

WHITE

SHIELD

* Max cable run is determined by max loop load and wire resistance ( ≈1000ft).

ORDERING INFORMATION
TMPTR SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL NO.

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 9 to 24 VDC @ 30 mA
2. OUTPUT: 4 to 20 mA
3. TEMPERATURE RANGE: 2 - 569º C (36 - 1056º F)
4. INPUT: 3 wire, PT100 (α = 0.00385)
5. OPEN SENSOR WIRE INDICATION:
Leg 1: Open = 27 mA
Leg 2: Open = 2.2 mA
Leg 3: Open = 2.2 mA
6. INPUT CONNECTION: 3 prong minature connector
7. CABLE CONNECTIONS: 10 foot 2-wire shielded cable
WIRE COLOR CODE

RED

TMPT

DESCRIPTION

TC TRANSMITTER
WITH FEMALE
CONNECTOR

FUNCTION

TC
ANSI TYPE

TEMPERATURE
RANGE

PART NUMBER

-18 to 1093 °C
(0 to 2000 °F)

TMPTRN01

-18 to 538 °C
(0 to 1000 °F)

TMPTRN02

-18 to 121 °C
(0 to 250 °F)

TMPTRN03

-18 to 399 °C
(0 to 750 °F)

TMPTRN04

-18 to 121 °C
(0 to 250 °F)

TMPTRN05

-18 to 538 °C
(0 to 1000 °F)

TMPTRN06

2 to 569 °C
(36 to 1056 °F)

TMPTRN07

+VDC

BLACK

OUTPUT

WHITE

SHIELD

* Max cable run is determined by max loop load and wire resistance ( ≈1000ft).

TMPTR

RTD TRANSMITTER
WITH FEMALE
CONNECTOR

Covered by US and Foreign Patents.

880

www.redlion.net

MODEL CT - CURRENT TRANSFORMER
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. Operating Frequency: 50 to 400 Hz.
2. Insulation Class: 0.6 KV BIL 10 KV full wave.
3. Terminals: Brass studs No. 8-32 UNC with flat washer and hex nuts.
4. Window Diameter: 1.13" (28.7 mm).
5. Weight: 8.0 oz (226.0 g).
UL Recognized Component
(Instrument Transformers, Inc., PN# 2SFT500-0.1, 2SFT500, 2SFT201,
File # E93779)
Note: The listed current ratio of the current transformer is based on the primary
conductor passing once through the transformer opening. The ratio is reduced
in multiples by looping the conductor through the opening. A transformer
having a ratio 200:5 changes to a ratio of 100:5 if two loops are made through
the transformer with the primary conductor. The ratio of the transformer will
be 50:5 if four loops are made with the primary conductor, etc.

ORDERING INFORMATION
CURRENT ACCURACY VA 60 Hz
RATIO
@ 60 Hz
BURDEN

MAXIMUM OUTPUT WIRE DISTANCE BETWEEN
CT AND METER
18 AWG

16 AWG

14 AWG

PART NUMBERS

12 AWG

Wire distance is not an issue due to the low
current flow. Wires may be as long as needed.

50:0.1

±5.0%

2.5

50:5

±3.0%

2.0

5.0 ft.

7.5 ft.

12 ft.

18 ft.

CT005050

200:5

±1.0%

4.0

10 ft.

17.5 ft.

28 ft.

43 ft.

CT020050

1-717-767-6511

CT005001

881

MODEL CT004 - CURRENT TRANSFORMER
I

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

DESCRIPTION
The CT004 is intended for use with temperature controllers for monitoring
heater current. The CT004 is suitable for general purpose AC current
monitoring applications up to 40 Amps.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. CURRENT RATIO: 40:0.1A
2. MAX HEATER CURRENT: 50 A.
3. DIELECTRIC STRENGTH: 1000 VAC ( For 1 minute)
4. VIBRATION RESISTANCE: 50 Hz (Approx. 10 G)
5. TERMINALS: Solder type
6. WINDOW DIAMETER: 0.228" (5.8 mm).
7. WEIGHT: 0.406 oz (11.5 g).

ORDERING INFORMATION

Notes: Refer to the instruction manual of the temperature controller for
connection information and max. heater current allowable by the
temperature controller.

882

MODEL NO.

CURRENT RATIO

PART NUMBER

CT004

40 : 0.1 A

CT004001

www.redlion.net

MODEL CTD - DC CURRENT TRANSDUCER
z THREE JUMPER SELECTABLE INPUT RANGES

z OUTPUT IS MAGNETICALLY ISOLATED FROM THE INPUT
z INTERNAL POWER REGULATION
z SPLIT-CORE CASE FOR EASY INSTALLATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

CTD transducer combines a Hall Effect sensor and a signal conditioner into a
single package. This provides higher accuracy, lower wiring costs, easier
installation and saves valuable panel space. The CTD has jumper selectable
current input ranges and industry standard 4-20 mA output with a split-core case.

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.

SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Ø 0.19
(4.8)

1.18
(30)

3.53
(89.7)
2.40
(61)

3.04
(77.2)

0.45
(11.4)
0.85
(21.7)

0.85
(21.6)

1. OUTPUT SIGNAL: 4-20 mA
2. OUTPUT LIMIT: 23 mA
3. ACCURACY: 1.0% FS
4. REPEATABILITY: 1.0% FS
5. RESPONSE TIME: to 90% of step change 100 msec
6. FREQUENCY RANGE: DC
7. POWER SUPPLY: 22 – 26 VAC/VDC
Power input and output signal are not isolated.
8. POWER CONSUMPTION: 2 VA
9. LOADING: 650Ω max.
10. ISOLATION VOLTAGE: 3 kV (monitored line to output)
11. LINEARITY: 0.75% FS
12. CURRENT RANGES: Three selectable Ranges: 0 – 50 A
0 – 75 A
0 – 100 A
13. CASE: UL 94V-0 Flammability rated thermoplastic
14. ENVIRONMENTAL: -4 to 122 °F (-20 to 50 °C)
0-95% RH, non-condensing

2.25
(57.2)

1-717-767-6511

883

INSTALLATION

RANGE SELECT

Run wire to be monitored through opening in the sensor. Be sure the
monitored current flows in the same direction as the arrow on the sensor. The
arrow is just above the hinge, with the “+” symbol on the left, the “-” symbol on
the right. The CTD transducers work in the same environment as motors,
contactors, heaters, pull-boxes, and other electrical enclosures. They can be
mounted in any position or hung directly on wires with a wire tie. Just leave at
least one inch (25.4 mm) distance between sensor and other magnetic devices.

CTD transducers feature field selectable ranges. The ranges are factory
calibrated, eliminating time consuming and inaccurate field setting of zero or
span.
1. Determine the normal operating amperage of your monitored circuit.
2. Select the range that is equal to or slightly higher than the normal operating
amperage.
3. Place the range jumper in the appropriate position.

Split-Core Versions

Press the tab in the direction as shown to open the sensor. After placing the
wire in the opening, press the hinged portion firmly downward until a definite
click is heard and the tab pops out fully.

Important!

Keep Contact
Area CLEAN!
To Open
Press Tab
Toward Hinge.

KEEP SPLIT-CORE SENSORS CLEAN.

TROUBLE SHOOTING
1. Output Signal Too Low
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too high for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.
B. Power supply is inadequate. Check power supply. Make sure it is of
sufficient voltage with all loads at maximum. CTD Series draw 2.0 VA.
C. Output load too high. Check output load, be sure it is no more than 650 Ω.
2. Output Signal is always at maximum
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too low for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.
3. Sensor has no output
A. Polarity is not properly matched. Check and correct wiring polarity
B. Monitored load is not DC or is not on. Check that the monitored load is
DC and that it is actually on.
C.Split Core models: The core contact area may be dirty. Open the sensor and
clean the contact area.

Silicone grease is factory applied on the mating surfaces to prevent rust and
improve performance. Be careful not to allow grit or dirt onto the grease in the
contact area. Operation can be impaired if the mating surfaces do not have good
contact. Check visually before closing.

OUTPUT WIRING
Connect control or monitoring wires to the sensor. Use up to 14 AWG copper
wire and tighten terminals to 4 inch-pounds torque.

4-20mA:

ORDERING INFORMATION

The current loop is powered by the CTD Transducer.
Maximum loop impedance is 650 Ω.

MODEL NO.

CTD
24VAC/DC

Output loop is powered by
CTD Transducer. No loop power
supply required.

CONNECTION NOTES:
Deadfront captive screw
terminals.
12–22 AWG solid or stranded.
Observe polarity.

884

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

DC/DC, Split Case

PART NUMBERS

CTD00000

MODEL CTL - AVERAGE RESPONDING AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS
z AVERAGE RESPONDING OUTPUT: 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA
z JUMPER SELECTABLE RANGES
z OUTPUT IS MAGNETICALLY ISOLATED FROM THE INPUT

z SPLIT-CORE AND FIXED-CORE CASES

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
5T44

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

CTL Series transducers combine a current transformer and a signal
conditioner into a single package. This provides higher accuracy, lower wiring
costs, easier installation and saves valuable panel space.
The CTL Series transducers have jumper selected current input ranges and
industry standard 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA outputs. The CTL Series is designed
for application on “linear” or sinusoidal AC loads. Available in a split-core or
solid-core case. Select the CTL Series for constant speed loads or On/Off loads.

SAFETY SUMMARY
All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.

0-10 VDC
1. OUTPUT SIGNAL:
2. OUTPUT LIMIT:
3. FREQUENCY RANGE:
4. RESPONSE TIME:
5. ACCURACY:
6. POWER SUPPLY:

7. INPUT RANGES: (Jumper Selectable)
MODEL

RANGE

2A
5A
10 A
20 A
50 A
100 A
150 A
200 A

CTL005
CTL050

CTL200

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

SPLIT-CORE

3.04
(77.2)

MAXIMUM

Continuous
80 A
100 A
80 A
110 A
175 A
200 A
300 A
400 A

6 sec
125 A
125 A
125 A
150 A
215 A
300 A
450 A
500 A

1 sec
250 A
250 A
250 A
300 A
400 A
600 A
800 A
1000 A

8. ISOLATION VOLTAGE: 3 kV
9. CASE: UL 94V-0 Flammability rated thermoplastic
10. ENVIRONMENTAL: -4 to 122 °F (-20 to 50 °C)
0-95% RH, non-condensing
11. TORQUE RATINGS: 7 in-lbs on Fixed-core models; 9 in-lbs on Split-core
models.
12. LISTING: UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95,
and CE Certified.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

FIXED-CORE

3.03
(77.0)

1.19
(30.2)
Ø 0.19
(4.8)

3.53
(89.7)

0.93
(23.6)
Ø 0.19
(4.8)

2.40
(61)
0.85
(21.6)
2.25
(57.2)

4-20 mA

0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
15 VDC
40 mA
50-60 Hz
20-100 Hz
100 msec
300 msec
1.0% FS
0.5% FS
Self-powered 24 VDC Nominal, 40 VDC max.

2.40
(61.0)

Ø 0.74
(19)

2.18
(55.4)
0.85
(21.6)

3.50
(88.9)

1-717-767-6511

885

INSTALLATION

RANGE SELECT

Run wire to be monitored through opening in the sensor. The CTL Series
transducers work in the same environment as motors, contactors, heaters, pullboxes, and other electrical enclosures. They can be mounted in any position or
hung directly on wires with a wire tie. Just leave at least one inch (25.4 mm)
distance between sensor and other magnetic devices.

CTL series transducers feature field selectable ranges. The ranges are factory
calibrated, eliminating time consuming and inaccurate field setting of zero or span.
1. Determine the normal operating amperage of your monitored circuit
2. Select the range that is equal to or slightly higher than the normal operating
amperage.
3. Place the range jumper in the appropriate position.

Split-Core Versions
Press the tab in the direction as shown to open the sensor. After placing the
wire in the opening, press the hinged portion firmly downward until a definite
click is heard and the tab pops out fully.

Important!

Keep Contact
Area CLEAN!
To Open
Press Tab
Toward Hinge.

KEEP SPLIT-CORE SENSORS CLEAN.
Silicone grease is factory applied on the mating surfaces to prevent rust and
improve performance. Be careful not to allow grit or dirt onto the grease in the
contact area. Operation can be impaired if the mating surfaces do not have good
contact. Check visually before closing.

Connect control or monitoring wires to the sensor. Use up to 14 AWG copper
wire and tighten terminals to 7 inch-pounds torque for solid-core models and 9
inch-pounds torque for split-core models. Be sure the output load or loop power
requirements are met (see diagram).

Loop Power (VDC)

POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS

VL = 12VDC + (R L × 0.020A)
where V L = Minimum Loop Supply
R L = Total Loop Resistance (Ohms)

Operating Range

10
5

500
250
750
Total Loop Impedance (Ohms)

4–20mA Option

Range Jumper

24 VDC Power
(–) (+)

1(–) 2(+)
Output

886

Notes:

1000

Load
(+) (Controller,
Meter, etc.)
(–)

1. Sensor Has No Output
A. Polarity is not properly matched. Check and correct wiring polarity.
B. Monitored load is not AC or is not on. Check that the monitored load is AC
and that it is actually on.
C. Split Core models: The core contact area may be dirty. Open the sensor and
clean the contact area.
2. Output Signal Too Low
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too high for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.
B. Output load too low. Check output load, be sure that it is at least 100KΩ
and preferably 1 MΩ.
C. Monitored current is below minimum required. Loop the monitored wire
several times through the aperture until the “sensed” current rises above
minimum. Sensed Amps = (Actual Amps) x (Number of Loops). Count
loops on the inside of the aperture.
3. Output Signal Is Always At Maximum
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too low for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.

1(–) 2(+)
Output

1. Sensor Has No Output
A. Power supply is not properly sized. Check power supply voltage and
current rating.
B. Polarity is not properly matched. Check and correct wiring polarity
C. Split Core models: The core contact area may be dirty. Open the sensor and
clean the contact area.
2. Output Signal Too Low
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too high for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.
B. The load current is not sinusoidal.
C. Monitored current is below minimum required. Loop the monitored wire
several times through the aperture until the “sensed” current rises above
minimum. Sensed Amps = (Actual Amps) x (Number of Loops). Count
loops on the inside of the aperture.
3. Sensor Is Always At 4 mA
A. Monitored load is not AC or is not on. Check that the monitored load is
AC and that it is actually on.
4. Output Signal Is Always At 20 mA
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too low for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.

ORDERING INFORMATION

Captive screw terminals.
12–22 AWG solid or stranded.
Observe polarity.
1MΩ Recommended
100KΩ Acceptable (Add
1.3% error for 100 K)

10 VDC Option

Range Jumper

0-10 VDC OUTPUT MODELS

4-20 mA OUTPUT MODELS

OUTPUT WIRING

TROUBLE SHOOTING

MODEL NO.

CTL005

CTL050

CTL200

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

2-5A / 4-20 mA, Split Case

CTL0052S

10A-50 A / 10 VDC, Fixed Case

CTL0501F

10A-50 A / 4-20 mA, Fixed Case

CTL0502F

10A-50 A / 4-20 mA, Split Case

CTL0502S

100A-200 A / 10 VDC, Fixed Case

CTL2001F

100A-200 A / 4-20 mA, Fixed Case

CTL2002F

100A-200 A / 4-20 mA, Split Case

CTL2002S

MODEL CTR - TRUE RMS AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER
z TRUE RMS OUTPUT

z JUMPER SELECTABLE RANGES
z OUTPUT IS MAGNETICALLY ISOLATED FROM THE INPUT
z SPLIT-CORE CASE

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
5T44

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

CTR Series transducers combine a current transformer and a signal
conditioner into a single package. This provides higher accuracy, lower wiring
costs, easier installation and saves valuable panel space.
The CTR Series transducers are available in 4-20 mA output only. The CTR
Series provides a “True RMS” output on distorted waveforms found on VFD or
SCR outputs, and on linear loads in “noisy” power environments. Select the
CTR Series for variable speed or SCR controlled loads.
The current waveform of a typical linear load is a pure sine wave. In VFD and
SCR applications, however, output waveforms are rough approximations of a
sine wave. There are numerous spikes and dips in each cycle. CTR transducers
use a mathematical algorithm called “True RMS”, that integrates the actual
waveform over time. The output is the amperage component of the true power
(heating value) of the AC current waveform.True RMS is the only way to
accurately measure distorted AC waveforms.

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions that appear in the
literature or on equipment must be observed to ensure personal safety and to
prevent damage to either the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or other actuators
not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be potentially harmful to persons or
equipment in the event of a fault to the unit.

CAUTION: Read complete
instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
Ø 0.19
(4.83)

1.18
(30)

1. OUTPUT SIGNAL: 4 to 20 mA DC, loop-powered, True RMS
2. OUTPUT LIMIT: 23 mA
3. FREQUENCY RANGE: 10-400 Hz (All Waveforms)
4. RESPONSE TIME: to 90% of step change 600 msec
5. ACCURACY: 0.8% FS
6. POWER SUPPLY: 24 VDC Nominal, 40 VDC Max.
7. INPUT RANGES: (Jumper Selectable)
MODEL

3.04
(77.2)

CTR05

3.53
(89.7)

CTR2

2.40
(31)
0.45
(11.4)
0.85
(21.6)
0.85
(21.6)

2.25
(57.2)

RANGE

10 A
20 A
50 A
100 A
150 A
200 A

MAXIMUM

Continuous
80 A
110 A
175 A
200 A
300 A
400 A

6 sec
125 A
150 A
215 A
300 A
450 A
500 A

1 sec
250 A
300 A
400 A
600 A
800 A
1000 A

8. ISOLATION VOLTAGE: 3 kV
9. CASE: UL 94V-0 Flammability rated thermoplastic
10. ENVIRONMENTAL: -4 to 122 °F (-20 to 50 °C)
0-95% RH, non-condensing
11. TORQUE RATINGS: 9 in-lbs
12. LISTING: UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95,
and CE Certified.

1-717-767-6511

887

INSTALLATION

RANGE SELECT

Run wire to be monitored through opening in the sensor. Be sure the
monitored current flows in the same direction as the arrow on the sensor. The
CTR Series transducers work in the same environment as motors, contactors,
heaters, pull-boxes, and other electrical enclosures. They can be mounted in any
position or hung directly on wires with a wire tie. Just leave at least one inch
(25.4 mm) distance between sensor and other magnetic devices.

CTR series transducers feature field selectable ranges. The ranges are
factory calibrated, eliminating time consuming and inaccurate field setting of
zero or span.
1. Determine the normal operating amperage of your monitored circuit
2. Select the range that is equal to or slightly higher than the normal operating
amperage.
3. Place the range jumper in the appropriate position.

Important!

Keep Contact
Area CLEAN!
To Open
Press Tab
Toward Hinge.

TROUBLE SHOOTING
1. Sensor Has No Output
A. Power supply is not properly sized. Check power supply voltage and
current rating.
B. Polarity is not properly matched. Check and correct wiring polarity.
C. Split Core models: The core contact area may be dirty. Open the sensor and
clean the contact area.
2. Output Signal Too Low
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too high for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.
B. Output load too high. Check output load, be sure that VL does not exceed
40 VDC.
C. Monitored current is below minimum required. Loop the monitored wire
several times through the aperture until the “sensed” current rises above
minimum. Sensed Amps = (Actual Amps) x (Number of Loops). Count
loops on the inside of the aperture.
3. Output Signal Is Always At 4mA
A. Monitored load is not AC or is not on. Check that the monitored load is
AC and that it is actually on.
4. Output Signal Is Always At 20mA
A. The jumper may be set in a range that is too low for current being
monitored. Move jumper to the correct range.

OUTPUT WIRING
Connect control or monitoring wires to the sensor. Use up to 14 AWG copper
wire and tighten terminals to 9 inch-pounds torque. Be sure the output load or
loop power requirements are met (see diagram).

Connection Notes:
Captive screw terminals.
14-22 AWG solid or stranded.
Observe Polarity
See label for ranges & jumper positions

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

CTR

Loop Voltage Requirements:
VL = 12V + (RL x 20 mA)
Where: VL = Min. Loop voltage
RL = Loop Resistance

888

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBERS

50 A/4-20 mA, Split Case

CTR05000

200 A/4-20 mA, Split Case

CTR20000

MODEL CTS - AC CURRENT OPERATED SWITCH
z UNIVERSAL OUTPUT
z SELF-POWERED
z EASILY ADJUSTABLE SETPOINT

z FIXED OR SPLIT-CORE CASE

UL
R

US LISTED

IND. CONT. EQ.
5T44

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CTS Series Transducers are self-powered, solid-state current-operated
switches that trigger when the current level sensed through the aperature
exceeds the adjusted setpoint. The solid state output contacts can switch AC or
DC; this “universal” output makes them well suited for application in
automation systems.
CTS Series Current Operated Switches combine a current transformer, signal
conditioner and limit alarm into a single package for use in status monitoring or
proof of operation applications. Offering an extended setpoint range of 1-150 A
and universal, solid-state outputs, the self-powered CTS can be tailored to
provide accurate and dependable digital indication of over-current conditions
across a broad range of applications. Available in solid-core enclosure styles or
in a split-core case to maximize ease of installation.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
3.04
(77.2)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER SUPPLY: None - self powered
2. OUTPUT: Magnetically isolated normally open solid-state switch
3. OUTPUT RATING: 0.15A, 240 VAC/VDC
4. OFF STATE LEAKAGE: <10 μA
5. RESPONSE TIME: 120 msec
6. HYSTERESIS: Approx 5% of Setpoint
7. SETPOINT RANGES AND MAXIMUM AMPS:
MODEL

CTSF
CTSS

Fixed-Core: 1 - 150 A
Split-Core: 1.75 - 150 A

CTSG

Fixed-Core Go/No Go:
0.75 A max

MAXIMUM INPUT AMPS

Continuous
150 A
150 A

6 sec
400 A
400 A

1 sec
1000 A
1000 A

250 A

400 A

1000 A

8. SETPOINT ADJUST: 4 Turn potentiometer (CTSS)
15 Turn Potentiometer (CTSF)
9. FREQUENCY RANGE: 6-100 Hz
10. ISOLATION VOLTAGE: UL Listed to 1,270 VAC. Tested to 5,000 VAC
11. CASE: UL 94V-0 Flammability rated thermoplastic
12. ENVIRONMENTAL: -58 to 149 °F (-50 to 65 °C)
0-95% RH, non-condensing
13. TORQUE RATINGS: 5 in-lbs
14. LISTING: UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95,
and CE Certified.

SPLIT-CORE

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1.19
(30.2)

3.03
(77.0)

Ø 0.19
(4.8)

3.53
(89.7)

FIXED-CORE

0.93
(23.6)
Ø 0.19
(4.8)

2.40
(61)
0.85
(21.6)
2.25
(57.2)

SETPOINT RANGE

2.40
(61.0)

Ø 0.74
(19)

2.18
(55.4)
0.85
(21.6)

3.50
(88.9)

1-717-767-6511

889

INSTALLATION
Run wire to be monitored through opening in the sensor. The CTS Series
transducers work in the same environment as motors, contactors, heaters, pullboxes, and other electrical enclosures. They can be mounted in any position or
hung directly on wires with a wire tie. Just leave at least one inch (25.4 mm)
distance between sensor and other magnetic devices.

Typical Adjustment
1. Turn the pot to minimum setpoint (4 or 15 turns CW).
2. Have normal operating current running through the sensor. The output
should be tripped since the pot is at its minimum setpoint. For units with
LED, it should be flashing fast (2 to 3 times per second).
3. Turn the pot CCW until the unit un-trips. This is indicated by the slow
flashing of the LED (once every 2 to 3 seconds), or by the changing of
the output switch status.
4. Now turn the pot CW slowly until the unit trips again.
It is now set at the current level being monitored.
A. To Set UNDERLOAD - Turn the pot about 1/8 turn further CW.
B. To Set OVERLOAD - Turn the pot about 1/8 turn further CCW.
MONITORED AMPS

Important!

Keep Contact
Area CLEAN!
To Open
Press Tab
Toward Hinge.

SMART-LED

OPEN

OFF

Below Trip Level

OPEN

SLOW (2 sec)

Above Trip Level

CLOSED

FAST (0.5 sec)

TROUBLE SHOOTING

OUTPUT WIRING
Connect control or monitoring wires to the sensor. Use up to 14 AWG copper
wire and tighten terminals to 5 inch-pounds torque. Be sure the output load does
not exceed the switch rating.
CAUTION: Incandescent lamps can have “Cold Filament Inrush” current of up
to 10 times their rated amperage. Use caution when switching lamps.

1. Sensor Is Always Tripped
A. The setpoint may be too low. Turn pot CCW to increase setpoint.
B. Switch has been overloaded and contacts are burned out. Check the output
load, remembering to include inrush on inductive loads (coils, motors,
ballasts).
2. Sensor Will Not Trip
A. The setpoint may be too high. Turn pot CW to decrease setpoint.
B. Split Core models: The core contact area may be dirty. Open the sensor and
clean the contact area.
C. Monitored current is below minimum required. Loop the monitored wire
several times through the aperture until the “sensed” current rises above
minimum. Sensed Amps = (Actual Amps) x (Number of Loops). Count
loops on the inside of the aperture.
D. Switch has been overloaded and contacts are burned out. Check the output
load, remembering to include inrush on inductive loads (coils, motors,
ballasts).

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

CTS

SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT
CTS Series SETPOINT is adjusted with a 4-turn potentiometer (CTSS) or a
15-turn potentiometer (CTSF). The pot is shipped factory set to the lowest
setpoint, fully clockwise (CW). Turning the pot counter-clockwise (CCW) will
increase the setpoint. The pot has a slip-clutch to prevent damage at either end
of its rotation. To determine where the adjustment is, turn the pot all the way
CW. This will return it to the minimum setpoint.

Adjustment Notes:
1. Output contacts are solid-state. Check output status by applying voltage to the
contacts and reading the voltage drop across the contacts. An Ohmmeter set
on “Continuity” will give misleading results.
2. It is recommended that the setpoint be adjusted to allow for voltage variations
of 10-15%.

890

OUTPUT

None or 80 %
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature Range: -25 to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -40 to 85°C
Humidity, no moisture condensation: 95 % at 25°C
Vibration in acc. with IEC 68-2-6: < 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm;
15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3 g
Shock in all directions acc. with IEC 68-2-27: 30 g
Contamination in acc. with EN 50178: Degree of pollution 2
8. STANDARDS AND CERTIFICATIONS:
Electrical Safety (of information
technology equipment)
Industrial regulating devices

UL Recognized UL 60 950
UL
R

UL 508 listed
US

LISTED

Electronic equipment for use in
electrical power installations
(surge voltage category III)

EN 50178 / VDE 0160

Limitation of output power

NEC Class 2

Safe isolation

VDE 0100-410

Protection against electric shock

DIN VDE 0106-101

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

MODEL

EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
Immunity in accordance with EN 61000-6-2
Discharge of static electricity (ESD)

EN 61000-4-2

Housing > Level 3
Contact discharge: 8 kV
Discharge in air: 8 kV

Electromagnetic HF field

EN 61000-4-3

Housing Level 3
Frequency/Field intensity: 80-1000
MHz / 10 V/m

Fast transients (Burst)

EN 61000-4-4

Input: 4 kV (Level 4) 4)
Output: 2 kV (Level 3) 4)
Signal: 1 kV (Level 2) 4)

Surge voltage capacities (Surge)

EN 61000-4-5

Input: 4 kV 4) / 2 kV 4) (Level 4)
Output: 0.5 kV 4) / 0.5 kV 3) (Level 1)
Signal: 0.5 kV 4) (Level 1)

Conducted disturbance

EN 61000-4-6

I/O/S: Level 3
Frequency/Uo: 0.15-80 MHz / 10 V

Voltage dips

EN 61000-4-11

Simulation mobile phones

ENV 50204

Input: see mains buffering
> 20 ms
Frequency: 900 MHz, 1800 MHz
Field intensity: 20 V/m

Noise emission according to EN 50081-2
Emitted radio interference

EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B

Radio interference voltage

EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B

EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11 / EN 55022 corresponds to CISPR22
EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000

EN 60950 / VDE 0805

In conformance with EMC guideline 89/336/EEC
and low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC

PSDR0100 0.87 (22.5)
PSDR0200 1.77 (45)
PSDR0400 2.66 (67.5)

Criterion A:

Criterion B:

Symmetrical:

Normal operating behavior within the defined limits.
Temporary impairment to operational behavior, that is
corrected by the device itself.
Conductor to conductor.

Asymmetrical:

Conductor to ground.

Class B:

Area of application industry and residential.

9. ISOLATION VOLTAGE: Input/Output 3 kVAC
10. INSTALLATION POSITION: On horizontal mounting rail according to
EN 50022-35
11. CONNECTIONS: 24 to 14 AWG max. Torque 4.5 to 5.3 inch-lbs
(0.5-0.6 Nm).
12. MOUNTING: Standard DIN rail top hat (T) profile rail according to
EN50022 - 35 X 7.5 and 35 X 15. Can be mounted in rows with vertical
Spacing > 5 cm or horizontally with no space.
13. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is black, high impact plastic. IP20 touch
safe. Protection Class II.
14. MTBF (Mean Time Between Failure): >500000 h in acc. with IEC 1709 (SN
29500)
15. WEIGHT:
PSDR0100: 7.4 oz. (210 g)
PSDR0200: 8.8 oz. (250 g)
PSDR0400: 14.1 oz. (400 g)

1-717-767-6511

907

CONNECTION AND OPERATION
INSTRUCTIONS

INPUT

Caution: Danger! Never work on live equipment!
Caution: When the device is opened, a dangerous voltage may remain
at the electrolytic capacitors for up to 2 minutes after shutdown!
The installation must be performed by a specialist in accordance with
the requirements of EN 60950.
For vertical installations we recommend a minimum spacing of 5 cm
(1.97 in.) between other modules and this power supply to ensure
sufficient convection.
No minimum spacing is required for horizontal alignment.
The mains feed line must have an appropriate fixing or strain relief
outside of the device.
The supply-side installation and the connection via screw terminal
blocks must be done in a way that ensures protection against electric
shock.

PROTECTION
The device must be installed in accordance with the specifications of EN
60950.
It must be possible to switch off the device using a suitable disconnecting
device outside the power supply. For example, primary side line protection
could be used.
In case of DC applications it is necessary to connect in series an adequate fuse.

RAIL MOUNTING

The power supply unit can be snapped onto all mounting rails in accordance
with EN 50022-35. Installation should be made horizontally (input terminal
blocks below).

The input connection is made by the screw
connections “L(+)” and “N(-)” (torque 0.5 Nm) on the
COMBICON plug connection.
For device protection, there is an internal fuse.
Additional device protection is not necessary.
Recommended backup fuses are power circuitbreakers 6 A or 10 A, charactistic B (or identical
function). In DC applications, a suitable backup fuse
must be wired in.
If the internal fuse is triggered, there is most
probably a malfunction in the device. In this
case, the device must be inspected in the
factory!

OUTPUT
The 24 VDC connection is made by the screw connections “+” and
“-” (torque 0.5 Nm) on the COMBICON plug connection. At the time of
delivery, the output voltage is 24 VDC. The output voltage can be set from 22.5
to 28.5 VDC on the potentiometer.
The device is electronically protected against short circuits and idling. In the
event of an error, the output voltage is limited to max 35 VDC.

Function Monitoring
For function monitoring, there is the active DC OK switching output and the
DC OK LED.
The 24 VDC signal is measured between the “DC OK” and “-” connection
terminal blocks and can be loaded with 20 mA maximum. This signal output
indicates that the output voltage has fallen below 21.5 VDC when “active high”
changes to “low”.
The DC OK signal is isolated from the power output.
STATUS 1

STATUS 2

CABLE CONNECTION

Green LED “ DC OK”

off

The device is equipped with COMBICON plug connectors.
This easy-to assemble connection method allows devices to be exchanged
easily and the electrical connection to be visibly isolated.

Active DC OK switching
output

U = +24 V
(in reference to “-”)

U=0V
(in reference to “-”)

Status

Normal operation of the
power supply.
UOUT > 21.5 V

UOUT < 21.5 V
• Secondary consumer
short-circuit or overload
• No mains voltage or
device faulty

Connecting Cables:

Cable cross sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 rigid (solid)/flexible (stranded)
(AWG 24-14) may be used.
To maintain UL, use copper cable rated for an operating temperature of
75°C/170°F.

For Reliable And Touch-proof Contacts:
Strip the connection ends (7 mm - See Figure).

Output Characteristic Curve
The device functions following the U-I characteristic curve. Under load, the
operating point follows this curve. In the event of a short circuit or overload, the
output current is limited to IBOOST. The secondary voltage is reduced until the
short circuit on the secondary side has been remedied.
U OUT
[V]
UN24

IN
60°C

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

OUTPUT

PART NUMBER

PSDR1

24 VDC @ 1A

PSDR0100

PSDR2

24 VDC @ 2A

PSDR0200

PSDR4

24 VDC @ 4A

PSDR0400

908

40°C

I BOOST

I OUT

IBOOST

PSDR0100

1.3

PSDR0200

PSDR0400

[A]

Thermal Behavior
In the case of ambient temperatures above +60ºC, the output capacity has to
be reduced by 2.5% per Kelvin increase in temperature.
From +70°C or a thermal overload, the device reduces the output power for
its own protection, and returns to normal operation when it has cooled down.

www.redlion.net

MODEL APS - OCTAL PLUG-IN ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY
PROVIDES . . .
+12 VDC “HELPER” SUPPLY FOR LOAD SHARING WITH
UNREGULATED COUNTER SYSTEMS WITH UNUSUAL SENSOR
AND ACCESSORY LOADS, OR . . .
“STAND-ALONE” APPLICATIONS FOR POWERING SENSORS
AND ACCESSORIES

DESCRIPTION
The Model APS is an unregulated +12 VDC supply designed to load share
when connected in parallel with internal power supplies of many Red Lion
Controls Counters and Rate Indicators. It can also be used as a general purpose
“Stand-alone” power supply to power other control circuits, sensors and
accessories. The APS is furnished for 115 VAC or 230 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz
primary supply. Operating temperature range is -20° to +50°C. Output current
is per regulation curve.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

TYPICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

OUTPUT VOLTS/CURRENT REGULATION CURVE

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

APS01

115 VAC Accessory Power Supply

APS01000

APS02

230 VAC Accessory Power Supply

APS02000

SKT1
--

1-717-767-6511

Base Mount 8-pin Octal Socket

SKT10000

DIN Rail 8-pin Socket

SKTDIN00

909

ACCESSORY PLUG-IN RELAY
These industrial relays have a mechanical life
expectancy in excess of 10 million cycles, and are both
UL and CSA recognized.

RELAY SPECIFICATIONS

COIL VOLTAGE

PART NUMBER

COIL: 12 VDC Coil - 120 Ω ±10%,
Rated +12 VDC @ 100 mA.
115 VAC Coil - 2250 Ω ±10%,
Rated 115 VAC @ 52 mA.
CONTACTS: 10 A @ 115 and 230 VAC
(1/6 HP @ 115 V, 1/3 HP @ 230 VAC)
OPERATING TIMES:
Energize - 30 msec max.
De-energize - 30 msec max.
Operating times do not include bounce time
(approx. 3 msec).
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE:
-45° to +60°C
ELECTRICAL LIFE: In excess of 100,000 operations
@ rated load.
WEIGHT: 3 oz (85.1 g)

12 VDC

RLY10000

Mating sockets sold separately. See Ordering Information.

115 VAC

RLY30000

PLUG-IN RELAYS PROVIDED FOR
EASY SERVICING & MAINTENANCE

ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

DPDT Plug-in Relay

Base Mount 8-pin Octal Socket

SKT10000

DIN Rail 8-pin Socket

SKTDIN00

910

www.redlion.net

CONTACTS SHOWN IN
DE-ENERGIZEDPOSITION

MODEL APSIS - Octal Plug-in Accessory Power Supply With 20 mA Current Sources
PROVIDES...
24 VDC UNREGULATED “HELPER” SUPPLY FOR LOAD
SHARING WITH OTHER 24 VOLT SYSTEMS WITH UNUSUAL
SENSOR AND ACCESSORY LOADS OR...
“STAND-ALONE” APPLICATIONS FOR POWERING +24 VDC
SENSORS AND ACCESSORIES OR...
TWO 20 mA CURRENT SOURCES, EACH CAPABLE OF
SUPPLYING 20 mA OF CURRENT FOR SERIAL
COMMUNICATION LOOPS AND POWERING UP TO 16 UNITS
PER LOOP.

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The Model APSIS is a convenient plug-in unregulated +24 VDC power
supply designed to “load share” when connected in parallel with other +24
VDC unregulated systems with unusual power requirements due to sensor or
accessory loading (see Fig.1). It can also be used as a general purpose standalone supply to power +24 VDC control circuits, sensors and accessories (see
Fig.2). In addition, two 20 mA Current Source outputs are available, each
capable of powering up to 16 Serial Communications units (see Fig.3). The
APSIS is available in 115 and 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz. primary supply (see
Ordering Information). Operating temperature range is -20°C to +50°C.

1. POWER SOURCE: 2 versions, 115 VAC or 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz., 11
VA max. (see Ordering Information).
2. POWER OUTPUT: +24 VDC unregulated @ 200 mA max. current*,
Ripple = 1.5 V P-P max.
3. OUTPUT: Two 20 mA current sources, each capable of supplying 20 mA of
current for serial communication loops and powering up to 16 units per loop.
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: -20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F)
* Maximum available output current derates to 175 mA with 1 source active
and 150 mA max. with both sources active.

TYPICAL LOAD SHARING CONNECTION DIAGRAM

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Mating
Sockets
Sold
Separately
(See
Ordering
Information)

FIGURE 1

TEMPERATURE MONITORING SYSTEM
A temperature monitoring process requires both remote
and control room indicators and datalogging capabilities.
An RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) to 4 to 20 mA
Transmitter, provides a proportional 4 to 20 mA output
from the RTD input. Two Red Lion Controls “Loop
Powered Process Indicators” (Model LPPI) are installed
in series in the “Loop” and scaled to provide Local and
Remote temperature displays. A Datalogger is also placed
in the “Loop” to provide a hard-copy of process
temperatures. Each device in the “Loop” has an associated
“voltage drop” as follows: RTD Transmitter = 9 VDC
drop; LPPI = 3 VDC x 2 units = 6 VDC drop; Datalogger
= 5 VDC drop. The total voltage drops in the “Loop” =
20 VDC. Therefore, RLC’s Model APSIS, with its +24
VDC Supply, is used to power this process “Loop”.

FIGURE 2

1-717-767-6511

911

PROCESS MONITORING
SYSTEM
8 Apollo Thermocouples (APLTC) and 8
GEMINIs, all with isolated 20 mA Current
Loop Serial Communications, monitor and
control processes within a plant. All units,
which are located in different areas of the
plant, are tied together in series in two
“Loops” (one Transmit Tx, the other
Receive Rx) and are connected to a Central
Computer located in another area of the
plant. Since there are more than 7, and no
more than 16 units in the “Loop”, the APSIS
+20 mA Current Source Outputs are used to
power each “Loop”. (Both Apollo
Thermocouple and Gemini units can power
up to 7 units in a “Loop” when using their
internal 20 mA sources. However, their
sources may not be tied together to power
more than 7 units.) Each unit is assigned a
different address number and the same Baud
rate (see appropriate APLTC or Gemini data
sheet). An application program is written
which allows the Central Computer to send
and retreive data from any APLTC or
Gemini.

OUTPUT VOLTS/CURRENT

*Unregulated output +(2) 20 mA current
sources (if used).

FIGURE 3

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

APSIS

912

PART NUMBERS FOR
AVAILABLE SUPPLY VOLTAGES
230 VAC
115 VAC

DESCRIPTION

Accessory Power Supply- Current Source
Base Mount, 8-Pin Octal Socket
Din Rail Mount, 8-Pin Octal Socket

www.redlion.net

APSIS010
APSIS000
SKT10000
SKTDIN00

MODEL MLPS1 and MLPS2 - MICRO-LINE POWER SUPPLIES
PROVIDES POWER FOR THE MICRO-LINE SERIES
MLPS1: 12 VDC OUTPUT @ 400 mA
MLPS2: 24 VDC OUTPUT @ 200 mA
EASILY ATTACHED TO BACK OF DT8, CUB4 AND CUB5
UL Recognized Component,
File # E179259

DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The Model MLPS power supplies are designed to attach to the rear of the
Micro-Line Series. The MLPS1 provides a 12 VDC output, while the MLPS2
provides a 24 VDC output. Both supplies can be powered from an 85-250 VAC
source.
Caution: The maximum output current of the MLPS1 is 400 mA and the MLPS2
is 200 mA. Check the specifications of the specific counter(s)/indicators(s)
and sensors(s) being used to ensure that total current requirements do not
exceed the respective values of the power supplies.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

MLPS1

+12 VDC Micro Line/Sensor Power Supply

MLPS1000

MLPS2

+24 VDC Micro Line/Sensor Power Supply

MLPS2000

1. POWER REQUIREMENTS: 85-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 14 VA.
2. POWER OUTPUT:
MLPS1: +16 VDC max @ 4 mA; 11.5 VDC min @ 400 mA
MLPS2: +26 VDC max @ 0 mA; 22 VDC min @ 200 mA
3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°C
Storage Temperature: -30 to 75°C
Operating and Storage Humidity: 85% max. (non-condensing) from 0°C
to 50°C.
Altitude: Up to 2000 meters
4. CERTIFICATIONS AND COMPLIANCES:
SAFETY
UL Recognized Component, File # E179259, UL 61010-1, CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1
Recognized to U.S. and Canadian requirements under the Component
Recognition Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Output meets Class 2 power requirements per UL 1310.
IECEE CB Scheme Test Certificate # US/8946/UL,
CB Scheme Test Report # E179259-V2-S1
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use, Part 1.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control and Laboratory use.
Immunity to Industrial Locations:
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Criterion A
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Criterion A
10 V/m
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-4
Criterion A
2 kV power
1 kV signal
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
Criterion B
1 kV L-L,
2 kV L&N-E power
1 kV signal
RF conducted interference
EN 61000-4-6
Criterion A
3 V/rms
Voltage dip/interruptions
EN 61000-4-11 Criterion A
0.5 cycle
Emissions:
EN 55011
Class B
Notes:
1. Criterion A: Normal operation within specified limits.
2. Criterion B: Temporary loss of performance from which the unit selfrecovers.
5. CONSTRUCTION: High impact black plastic. Mounting hardware
included. Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
6. CONNECTION: Two position terminal block which accepts one 14 AWG
wire (torque terminal screws to 5 inch-lbs. [0.56 N-m]).
7. WEIGHT: 2 oz (47 g)

1-717-767-6511

913

Installation Procedure

TROUBLESHOOTING
For further technical assistance, contact technical support at the appropriate
company numbers listed.

The MLPS is shipped with all the necessary hardware to mount to the rear
of an installed Micro-Line unit. Refer to the instructions that correspond to
your Micro-Line unit for proper installation.

CUB4, DT8
The user must remove the common and V+ screw
terminals on the rear of the Micro-Line unit. Install
the 1/4" hex drive stand-offs into the common
and V+ terminals. The MLPS is then mounted
to the stand-offs using the screw
terminals and square washers. AC
power can then be connected to the
terminal block of the MLPS.

K
CUB5
The user must remove the common and V+
screw terminals on the rear of the Micro-Line
unit. Install the 3/16" hex drive stand-offs into
the common and V+ terminals. The MLPS is
then mounted to the stand-offs using the
supplied screws and square washers. AC
power can then be connected to the
terminal block of the MLPS.

914

www.redlion.net

MODEL PSMA POWER SUPPLY & INTERFACE MODULE
PROVIDES POWER FOR SENSORS & ACCESSORIES WITH SIGNAL
CONDITIONING FOR INPUT TO CUB COUNTERS* & DITAK TACHOMETERS*
ALLOWS CUB COUNTERS & DITAK
TACHOMETERS TO OPERATE WITH:
2-WIRE PROXIMITY SENSORS,
ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS,
LOGIC MAGNETIC PICKUPS,
MEASURING WHEEL LENGTH SENSORS,
CLOCK OSCILLATOR MODULES,
-- AND MANY OTHER SENSORS, CIRCUITS AND
ACCESSORIES

DESCRIPTION
Cub Counters and Ditak Tachometers are basically self-powered devices and
do not have built-in capability for powering electronic sensors or accepting high
level sensor outputs. The PSMA provides a convenient plug-in answer to those
applications requiring electronic sensors or accessories for pulse input to Cub
Counters or Ditak Tachometers.
The PSMA is available in 115 VAC and 230 VAC primary power input
versions, and delivers regulated D.C. voltage for sensors and accessories. The
signal conditioning amplifier can accept NPN or PNP Open Collector Inputs, or
2-Wire Proximity Sensor Inputs.
The signal conditioning amplifier supplies two separate outputs, one for
direct drive to the H.S. Input of Cub Counters, and the other for direct drive
input to the PSM Input of the Ditak. A ”pulse stretcher” is used in the circuit
that provides the output drive to Cub Counters (Terminal 4). This stretcher
allows the PSM to accept 50 μsec input pulses, standard on some Red Lion
Controls’ sensors and accessories, and expand it to the 100 μsec pulse, as
required by the Cub Counters. The Ditak output (Terminal 8) is not pulse
stretched, allowing this output to continue functioning to the full 10 KHz limit
of the Ditak.

PSMA intended for use with CUB 1, 2, and 7 Counters and
Ditak 8 and 9 Tachometers.

BLOCK DIAGRAM (TOP VIEW OF SOCKET)

SPECIFICATIONS
1. POWER SOURCE: 2 versions, for 115 VAC ±10% 50/6 0Hz, or 230 VAC
±10% 50/60 Hz. (See Ordering Information.)
2. POWER OUTPUT TO SENSORS OR ACCESSORIES: 12 VDC
regulated ±5%, 100 mA max.
3. INPUT SIGNAL: (Terminal 3) NPN Open Collector (sink), PNP Open
Collector (source), or 2-wire Input. Built-in 3.3 K resistor (Terminal 5) can
be jumper connected for pull-up, pull-down, or left unconnected as required.
Input Schmidt trigger levels as shown on BLOCK DIAGRAM.
4. OUTPUTS: (Terminal 4) Bi-polar drive to H.S. Input of Cub Counters
supplies 100 μsec negative going logic pulse (switches from +3 to 0 volts) in
response to a trailing (negative going) edge of the input pulse. This output
will drive up to 3 Cub Counters in parallel.
(Terminal 8) NPN Loaded Collector to drive the input of Ditaks. The output
voltage on this terminal is in phase with the input signal going into Terminal
3. The high level of this voltage will be clamped to 6.2V by the zener diode
in the Ditak. This output can drive up to 3 Ditak units.
5. OPERATING FREQUENCY:
0 to 5 KHz with Cub Counters;
0 to 10 KHz with Ditaks.

NOTES
1. Inputs and Outputs are referenced to COMMON, on Terminal 2.
2. This Power Supply is regulated and cannot be parallel connected with
+12 V outputs from other Red Lion Controls counters or tachometers.

1-717-767-6511

915

GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
NPN OPEN COLLECTOR SINK INPUT

INPUT CONNECTION TABLE FOR RED LION CONTROLS’ SENSORS
PSMA TERMINALS
SENSOR OR ACCESSORY

NPN 0.C. OUTPUTS
LMPC LOGIC MAG. PICKUP
PSAC PROXIMITY SENSOR *
LSC LENGTH SENSOR
RPGC ROTARY PULSE GEN.
ASTC INLINE PREAMPLIFIER
PSA6B, PSA7B, PSA8B
COS1 CLOCK OSCILLATOR

PNP OPEN COLLECTOR SOURCE INPUT

NPN OUTPUT W/COLLECTOR
LOADED TO +12V IN SENSOR
RPGB ROTARY PULSE GEN.
RPGH ROTARY PULSE GEN.
2-WIRE PROXIMITY SENSORS
PSA-1 or PSA-2

1 (+12V)

2 (COMM.)

3 (INPUT)

CONNECT
TO

RED

BLACK

WHITE

TERM #1

TERM #2

TERM #7/8

RED

BLACK

WHITE

NO
JUMPER
CONN.

BLACK
OR
BROWN

NO CONN.
TO SENSOR

BLUE

JUMPER 5
TO 2 ON
PSMA SKT

JUMPER

JUMPER
TERM 5
TO TERM 1
ON PSMA
SOCKET

* New PSAC: Brown = +12 V, Black = Input, Blue = Common

2-WIRE PROXIMITY SENSOR INPUT

OUTPUT CONNECTIONS TO CUB COUNTERS & DITAK TACHOMETERS

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Mating Sockets
Sold Separately
(See Ordering
Information Below)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

PSMA
-

916

PART NUMBER

Power Supply & Interface Module (less socket), 115 VAC
Power Supply & Interface Module (less socket), 230 VAC
Base Mount, 8-Pin Octal Socket
Din Rail Mount, 8-Pin Octal Socket

www.redlion.net

PSMA1000
PSMA2000
SKT10000
SKTDIN00

CONVERTER MODULES
ADAPTS MANY RED LION CONTROLS’ COUNTERS AND ACCESSORIES
TO A WIDE RANGE OF SIGNAL SOURCES
VCM - VOLTAGE CONVERTER MODULES
Converts AC/DC voltages to acceptable signal inputs for many RLC counters and
accessories, provides input/output isolation.

TCM - TRIAC CONVERTER MODULE
Accepts unloaded, high off-state leakage triac output from sensors and
programmable controllers.

LCM - LOGIC CONVERTER MODULE
For interface with CMOS, TTL, and other logic circuits to +28 VDC, at speeds to
5000 cps. Allows Cub Counters to share sensor outputs with other series
counters.

These miniature sized modules are completely encapsulated in PVC, which
provides protection against oil, water, dirt, and mechanical damage. They can
be quickly and easily mounted to the back of counter enclosures or to any
nearby panel surface by a self-stick adhesive pad.

VCM - VOLTAGE CONVERTER MODULES
VCM’s are provided in 2 series, VCM [A-D] and VCM [E-H], to increase
the application flexibility of many RLC Counters and Accessories.

VCM [A-D]
These modules provide a convenient way to adapt CUB Counters* to most
any machine control voltage signal. They also make it easy to upgrade electromechanical counter installations with CUB Counters.
They are available in four overlapping input voltage ranges that cover the
spectrum from 4-270 V (See VCM [A-D] Ordering Information for specific
input voltage ranges). The non-polarized input of these modules will accept
A.C. (50/60 Hz) or D.C. control voltages and at count speeds up to 30 cps. The
output is an NPN Open-Collector Transistor compatible with either the L.S.
Count or Remote Reset inputs of Cub Counters. Electrical isolation between
input and output is achieved by means of an internal opto-isolator.

* VCM [A-D] intended for use with Cub 1, 2, 4, and 7 Counters and Cub
5 with DC Voltage.

VCM [E-H]
These modules open up new application possibilities by adapting the Count
Inputs of Gemini, Libra, Apollo, Lynx, Legends, PAXC, PAXI, CUBC, SC
Series Counters, RMX - Rate Multiplier and the ACS Anti-Coincidence
Summer to machine control voltage signals. The non-polarized input of these
modules accept the four most widely used AC/DC voltage ranges and at count
speeds up to 30 cps (See VCM [E-H] Ordering Information for specific input
voltage ranges). Electrical isolation between the input and the NPN OpenCollector Transistor output is achieved by means of a UL listed opto-isolator
rated at 1500 V Peak continuous.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR VCM [A-D] & TCM
(Shown with optional VCM for Control Voltage Remote Reset)

1-717-767-6511

917

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR VCM [E-H]

RLC UNITS
SC SERIES
COUNTERS
RMX & ACS

VCM [E-H] COUNT INPUT
SWITCH SET-UP POSITIONS
S1 = OFF (SNK)
S2 = ON (LO FRQ)
S3 = OFF (HI BIAS)
S1 = ON (LOGIC)

GEMINI

TCM - TRIAC CONVERTER MODULE
The TCM* is a specialized version of the VCM [A-D]. It is specifically
designed to operate with photo-electric sensors and programmable controllers
that have 115 VAC Triac outputs. Due to protective suppression circuits
connected in parallel with Triacs, these outputs have a high OFF-State
Leakage current, which, if unloaded, is sufficient to keep a VCM in the ON
condition continuously.
The TCM incorporates a current bias that offsets output leakage currents of
up to 4 mA and allows the application of CUB Counters to most unloaded
Triac outputs. These modules are available for operation with 115 VAC ±10%

⎫
⎬
S4 = OFF (HI BIAS) ⎭
S2 = OFF (SNK)

S3 = ON (LO FRQ)

CHANNEL
“A”
SHOWN

50/60 Hz only. They operate at count rates up to 10 cps, and also provide
input/output electrical isolation. Connections for the TCM are the same as
those for the VCM [A-D].
Note: VCM’s can be used with Triac outputs that are also driving substantial
loads, since the load will shunt the leakage current away from the VCM
input.
* TCM intended for use with Cub 1, 2, 4, and 7 Counters and Cub 5 with
DC Voltage.

LCM - CONVERTER MODULE
The LCM adapts CUB Counters to practically any type of logic and sensor
output, and to any count signal voltage from +3 to +28 VDC. The module
accepts input count pulses from NPN Open-Collector Transistor outputs, BiPolar outputs, or sourcing outputs such as Emitter-Follower or PNP OpenCollector Transistors (Sourcing outputs must be externally loaded with a load
of 10 Kohms or less). The LCM output is a Bi-Polar drive that is compatible
with either the Low-Speed or High-Speed Counter inputs as well as the
Remote Reset input* of the CUB Counters. The output is inverted with respect
to the input which causes the CUB Counter to increment on the leading
(positive going) edge of a count pulse similar to other Red Lion Controls’
counter series. Power for operation of the LCM can be normally obtained from
the existing D.C. power supply used to operate the sensor or other logic
circuitry. The LCM will operate from any D.C. power source ranging from +5
to +28 VDC, and draws a maximum of 7 mA. No filtering or de-bounce
circuits are included in the LCM itself, since these are already provided within
the CUB Counters. When the LCM output is applied to the H.S. input of CUB
Counters, count rates to 5000 cps can be accommodated (100 μsec minimum
pulse width).** When count pulse signals are generated by switch contacts the
LCM output can be applied to the L.S. input of the CUB to de-bounce these
pulses. Minimum pulse width when driving the L.S. input is 10 msec and
maximum count rate is 50 cps.

* When used to operate Remote Reset input, the LCM will reset counter when
input to LCM goes high due to signal inversion.
** Some Red Lion Controls’ sensors and accessories deliver a 50 μsec output
pulse that will not be accepted by CUB Counters. (The PSMA Power
Supply and Interface Module has a 50 to 100 μsec pulse stretcher circuit
which can be used. See data sheet on PSMA).

TYPICAL INPUTS TO LCM
CMOS OR TTL

918

NPN OPEN COLLECTOR
(SINK OUTPUT)

PNP OPEN COLLECTOR
(SOURCE OUTPUT)

www.redlion.net

SHARING SENSOR OUTPUT
WITH OTHER RED LION
CONTROLS’ COUNTERS

DIMENSIONS FOR VCM, TCM, & LCM In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION

VCM [A-D] Intended For Use With Cub Counters**
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

INPUT VOLTAGE

INPUT CURRENT

TRACER COLOR

4-30 V AC/DC
1-15 mA
orange
20-70 V AC/DC
1.2-3.5 mA
yellow
*VCM [A-D]
Voltage Converter Module
60-160 V AC/DC
1.5-2.5 mA
none (all white)
150-270 V AC/DC
1.2-1.8 mA
red
*TCM
Triac Converter Module
115 VAC ±10%
9 mA
green
+3 to +28 VDC
115 µA max.
(signal)
(signal)
*LCM
Logic Converter Module
none
+5 to +28 VDC
7 mA max.
(supply)
(supply)
* For use with CUB 1, 2, 4, and 7 counters and also Cub 3 and Cub 5 with DC Voltage.
** VCM’s are not recommended for use with rate indicators.

PART NUMBER

VCMA0000
VCMB0000
VCMC0000
VCMD0000
TCM10000

LCM10000

VCM [E-H] Intended For Use With Gemini, Libra, Apollo, Lynx, SC Series, Legend, C48C, C48T,
PAXC, PAXI and CUBC Counters, & Also RMX & ACS**
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

INPUT VOLTAGE

4-16 V AC/DC
20-55 V AC/DC
VCM [E-H]
Voltage Converter Module
75-150 V AC/DC
160-260 V AC/DC
** VCM’s are not recommended for use with rate indicators.

INPUT CURRENT

TRACER COLOR

PART NUMBER

1.3-12 mA
2.4-8.4 mA
1.6-3.7 mA
1.6-3.0 mA

blue
violet
black
brown

VCME0000
VCMF0000
VCMG0000
VCMH0000

1-717-767-6511

919

MODEL RS - DIN RAIL RELAY SYSTEM
TERMINAL BLOCKS WITH BUILT-IN RELAY OUTPUTS
SLIM DESIGN SAVES DIN RAIL SPACE
REPLACEABLE RELAY SAVES DOWNTIME
JUMPERS SAVE WIRING TIME
UL Recognized Component,
File # E257265

DESCRIPTION
The RS Relay System provides a compact, modular means of adding relay
outputs to any transistor output device. The RSRLYB Relay Block serves as the
base for a miniature, 24 volt coil relay, capable of switching up to 250 VAC at
6 Amps. Accessories, such as Jumpers, Buss Blocks, and Relay Markers are
available to save installation time and money.

RELAY BLOCK-RSRLYB
K

The RS Relay System is built around the Relay Block. The Relay Block is a 6.2
mm wide terminal block that serves as the base for the miniature plug-in relay
(included). The relay has a 24 VDC coil, and its SPDT output can switch loads up
to 250 VAC at 6 Amps. With its plug-in design, the relay can be replaced in
seconds. The Block has a built-in suppression circuit to reduce EMC interference.
Other features include an input LED, and reverse polarity protection. The
RSRLYB00 is shipped in packages of 5 pieces, with the relay installed.

DIMENSIONS In Inches (mm)

13. MIN. SWITCHING POWER: 120 mW
14. INPUT TO OUTPUT ISOLATION: 4 kV, 50 Hz., 1 minute
15. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
16. NOMINAL OPERATING MODE: 100% Duty Cycle
17. INFLAMMABILITY CLASS: VO according To UL 94
18. MECHANICAL LIFE: 20 million cycles
19. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is green, Polymide PA non-reinforced
20. CONNECTIONS: 14 AWG max. Torque 4-6 in-lb.
21. MOUNTING: Standard DIN Top Hat (T) profile rail according to EN50022
–35 x 7.5 and 35 x 15.
22. WEIGHT: 0.073 lb. (33.1 g)

BLOCK DIAGRAM

2-POSITION JUMPER-RSJMPR
SPECIFICATIONS
1. NOMINAL INPUT VOLTAGE: 24 VDC
2. TYPICAL INPUT CURRENT @ 24 VDC: 9 mA
3. TYPICAL OPERATE TIME: 4 msec
4. TYPICAL RELEASE TIME: 8 msec
5. CONTACT TYPE: SPDT (Form C)
6. CONTACT MATERIAL: AgSnO
7. MAX. CONTACT VOLTAGE: 250 V AC/DC
8. MIN. CONTACT VOLTAGE: 12 V AC/DC
9. LIMITING CONTINUOUS CURRENT: 6 A
10. MAX. INRUSH CURRENT: 30 A
11. MIN. SWITCHING CURRENT: 10 mA
12. MAX. POWER RATING (RESISTIVE LOAD): 140 W

920

The RSJMPR Jumper can be used to bridge connections between adjacent
Relay Blocks. This avoids the tedious task of wire-jumping signals such as
commons or neutrals together. The maximum current capability of the RSJMPR
is 6 A. The RSJMPR is available in three different colors, and is shipped in
packages of 20 pieces.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAX. CURRENT: 6 A
2. LENGTH: 0.24" (6 mm)
3. COLOR: Available in Red, Blue, and Gray

www.redlion.net

CONTINUOUS JUMPER-RSCJMP

BARRIER-RSBARR

The RSCJMP can be used to bridge up to 80 adjacent Relay Blocks with total
currents as high as 30 A. For currents above 6 A, the Buss Block must be used
as the starting point. This cut-to-length jumper is available in three colors, and
is shipped in packages of 2 pieces.

The Barrier is always required at the start and end of a Relay System to
provide protective separation according to VDC 0106-101. The Barrier should
also be used to isolate adjacent Relay Blocks with voltage potentials greater
than 250 V. The RSBARR is equipped with prescored breakout points at the
bridging positions so that individual bridges can pass through if needed. The
RSBARR00 is shipped in packages of 2 pieces.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAX. CURRENT: 30 A
2. LENGTH: 19.7" (500 mm)
3. COLOR: Available in Red, Blue, and Gray

SPECIFICATIONS

BUSS BLOCK-RSBUSS

RELAY MARKERS-RSMARK

The 9 mm wide Buss Block is the same shape as the RSRLYB Relay Block.
It can be used as a starting point for the continuous jumper in applications
requiring up to 30 A. In applications that require less than 6 A, the starting point
for the jumper(s) can take place at one of the Relay Blocks.

The RSMARK00 Relay Markers can be used to label the Relay Blocks. After
labeling or writing on the Marker, it is snapped onto the engagement lever of the
Relay Block, providing a visual means of identification. The RSMARK00 is
shipped in packages of 100 pieces.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. COLOR: Black

1. MAX. CURRENT: 30 A
2. MAX. VOLTAGE: 250 V
3. CONSTRUCTION: Case body is gray, Polymide PA non-reinforced
4. CONNECTIONS: 10 AWG max. Torque 4-6 in-lb.
5. WEIGHT: 0.077 lb. (34.9 g)

1. COLOR: White

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

QUANTITY/PACKAGE

PART NUMBER

RSRLYB

Relay Block

RSRLYB00

RSBUSS

Buss Block

RSBUSS00

RSBARR

Barrier

RSBARR00

RSRSTP

Rail Stop

RSRSTP00

2-Position Jumper Red

RSJMPR10

2-Position Jumper Blue

RSJMPR20

2-Position Jumper Gray

RSJMPR30

Continuous Jumper Red

RSCJMP10

Continuous Jumper Blue

RSCJMP20

Continuous Jumper Gray

RSCJMP30

100

RSMARK00

RSRLY100

RSJMPR

RSCJMP

RSMARK

Relay Marker

RSRLY1

Replacement Relay

1-717-767-6511

921

MODEL RLY5 - SOLID STATE POWER UNIT

SWITCHES UP TO 45 AMPERES @ 240 VAC
LOW LEVEL DC INPUT CONTROL SIGNAL (3-32 VDC)
OPTICALLY-ISOLATED OUTPUT
ZERO VOLTAGE TURN-ON, ZERO CURRENT TURN-OFF FOR
REDUCED RFI
INTERNAL SNUBBERS TO REDUCE FALSE TRIGGERING
RELATED TO HIGH dv/dt APPLICATIONS
SUPPLIED WITH HIGH EFFICIENCY HEATSINK FOR SUPERIOR
THERMAL and SURGE CURRENT RATINGS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATIONS

The SSR Power Unit is a solid state relay which can switch load currents up
to 45 Amperes @ 240 VAC. The unit interfaces directly with a SSR Drive
Module (OMD00003). The input and output terminals are isolated from each
other to eliminate ground loops and noise problems. The unit features a zero
voltage turn-on and a zero current turn-off detector to minimize radiated RFI
when switching. An internal snubber minimizes inrush currents and guards
against false triggering of the output; related to high dv/dt applications. A low
DC control signal of +3 to +32 VDC is all that is needed for the switching
operation. The solid state switch, highlighted by the inverse-parallel SCR
output, provides a greatly increased operational life over a mechanical relay by
avoiding the usual relay contact problems: arcing, bouncing, mechanical
failure, etc. The solid state relay is shipped mounted to the high efficiency
heatsink for immediate installation.

OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. Operating Voltage Range: 50-280 VAC RMS
2. Operating Frequency Range: 47-63 Hz
3. Maximum Continuous Load Current: See Thermal Rating Code
4. Maximum Surge Load Current: See Peak Surge Current Curve
5. Minimum Load Current: 40 mA RMS
6. Maximum Off-State Leakage Current: 10 mA RMS
7. Maximum Transient Voltage: 600 V peak
8. Maximum Output Voltage Drop: 1.6 V peak
9. Power Dissipation at Full Load: 50 Watts
10. Maximum I2T: 1600A2sec
(For Fusing Purposes, t = 8.3 msec)
11. Minimum Off-State dv/dt protection: 500 V/usec

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
(Use with RLC SSR Drive Module, OMD00003)

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

1. Control Voltage Range: 3 to 32 VDC
2. Maximum Turn-on Voltage: 3 VDC
3. Minimum Turn-off Voltage: 1 VDC
4. Maximum Reverse Voltage: -32 VDC
5. Minimum Input Impedance: 1500 Ω
6. Maximum Turn-on/Turn-off time: 8.3 msec

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. Isolation (Input to Output to Base): 4000 V RMS
2. Insulation Resistance: 10 GΩ
3. Operating Temperature Range: -30° to +75°C
4. Storage Temperature Range: -40° to +120°C

INSTALLATION
It is recommended to mount the unit outside of an enclosure in an area where
there is unrestricted air flow. The unit should always be mounted with the fins
in a vertical position to maximize heat dissipation. If mounting the unit inside
an enclosure, the internal temperature of the enclosure will normally be higher
than the surrounding area and must be accounted for. At full rated load, the unit
will dissipate 50 watts and achieve a case temperature in excess of 90°C. In all
installations, it is important to allow at least two inches around the power unit
for proper ventilation.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

RLY5

SSR Power Unit

RLY50000

922

www.redlion.net

SURGE CURRENT

CONNECTIONS
Separate power feed lines should be run to the load side of the relay. The
controller unit and the load should NEVER share the same power feed. It is
recommended to install the SSR Power Unit as close to the load as possible to
keep the power cable runs short. This will help reduce noise from radiating
into other equipment. The input control signal cable can be run over distances
in excess of 200 ft. with shielded cable from the controller to the SSR power
unit. Connect the shield to the minus “-” terminal of the control signal, on the
SSR Power Unit and at only one end.

When the SSR Power Unit switches a load on, an in-rush (surge) current that
is higher than the continuous load current will flow. The surge current can be
estimated from the table below which outlines the ratio of surge to steady state
current for various load devices. The surge current duration must be within the
Safe Operating Area of the Peak Surge Current vs. Time Figure. Surge currents
outside the safe operating area will shorten the life of or cause permanent
damage to the power unit.
Load Device

Ratio
Surge Current to
Steady State Current

Incandescent Bulbs (cold)

Quartz Heaters (cold)

Motors (motionless)

Compressors

MULTIPLE UNITS
For increased power handling, up to four SSR Power Units may be parallel
connected, and all controlled by a single output of an SSR Drive Module
(OMD00003). The output of the SSR Power Units must NOT be parallel
connected to the same load because of unequal current sharing among the
devices. The outputs should be wired to individual heaters, but they may share
the same supply. If five or more SSR Power Units are required, a Relay Output
Module (OMD00000) may be used in conjunction with an external +12 VDC
power source (RLC Model APS01000) to switch the SSR Power Units.

FUSING

The output of the SSR Power Unit should be protected by a fast blow I2t fuse
(Bussman KAX-30 or equivalent). This guards against long duration surge
currents, short circuits, etc., which may damage the SSR Power Unit.

MECHANICAL INTERRUPT SWITCH
The off-state output leakage current of the power unit is 10 mA maximum.
The voltage level of the output will rise proportional to the resistance of the load
due to this leakage current. Full line voltage can be measured when the output
is connected to a high resistance load and the power unit is in the off-state.
A mechanical interrupt switch (double pole) should be placed between both
sides of the line voltage and the load. The switch should be opened when
servicing any part of the output wiring. When measuring the off-state output
voltage of the unit for correct operation, load the output of the SSR Power Unit
with a small resistance (approximately 100 ohms).

SNUBBING
The power unit has internal snubbers to guard against transients generated by
most loads. Loads with low power factors (ie. motors) may require additional
external snubbing network.

OPERATION
The following are important aspects of operation of the SSR power unit
which must be considered. Adhering to these guidelines will ensure reliable and
trouble free operation.

THERMAL RATING CURVES
The Thermal Rating Curve will determine the maximum allowable ambient
operating temperature for the maximum continuous load current. The two
parameters must intersect in the Safe Operating Area of the graph. Operation
outside the safe operating area will shorten the life of or cause permanent
damage to the SSR Power Unit.
The ambient temperature of the
power unit should be measured
with all of the associated
equipment operating to verify
the Thermal Ratings.

1-717-767-6511

923

MODEL RLY6/RLY6A - SINGLE PHASE DIN RAIL MOUNT SOLID STATE RELAY
INTEGRATED HEAT SINK
OPTICALLY ISOLATED
SOLID STATE SWITCHING
SINGLE PHASE OUTPUT RATING: 25 A (RLY6) or 40 A (RLY6A)
SWITCHING: 24 TO 660 VAC
CONTROL SIGNAL: 4 TO 32 VDC
ZERO VOLTAGE TURN-ON
MOUNTS ON DIN RAIL OR DIRECTLY TO PANEL
4000 VOLT ISOLATION
BUILT-IN SNUBBER

UL Recognized Component,
File #E191578

LED “ON” INDICATOR
CAGE CLAMP TERMINATIONS

LR 702877

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SAFETY SUMMARY

The RLY60000 is a solid state relay that switches load currents up to 25 A; the RLY6A000
switches load currents up to 40 A. These units feature a zero voltage turn-on detector to minimize
radiated RFI when switching. An internal snubber guards against false triggering of the output
related to high dv/dt applications. A low level DC control signal of 4 to 32 VDC is all that is needed
for the switching operation. These units, highlighted by the inverse-parallel SCR output, provide a
greatly increased operational life over mechanical relays by avoiding the usual relay contact
problems such as: arcing, bouncing, and mechanical failure.
The RLY6/RLY6A can be directly controlled by logic/SSR drive output or sourcing output of
Red Lion Controls products.

All safety related regulations, local codes and instructions
that appear in the literature or on equipment must be observed
to ensure personal safety and to prevent damage to either the
instrument or equipment connected to it. If equipment is used
in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Do not use this unit to directly command motors, valves, or
other actuators not equipped with safeguards. To do so, can be
potentially harmful to persons or equipment in the event of a
fault to the unit.

RLY6, 25 Amp DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
TOP VIEW
CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to installation
and operation of the unit.

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

SPECIFICATIONS
OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

RLY6A, 40 Amp DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
TOP VIEW

924

www.redlion.net

1. OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE: 24 to 660 VAC
2. OPERATING FREQUENCY RANGE: 47 to 63 Hz
3. MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS LOAD CURRENT:
(See Safe Operating Conditions)
RLY6: 25 ARMS
RLY6A: 40 ARMS
4. SURGE CURRENT:
RLY6:
Non-Repetitive 1 Cycle: 250 APEAK
Non-Repetitive 1 Second: 100 APEAK
RLY6A:
Non-Repetitive 1 Cycle: 250 APEAK
Non-Repetitive 1 Second: 150 APEAK
5. MIN. LOAD CURRENT: 100 mA
6. LEAKAGE CURRENT @ VOUT (Max.): 8 mA
7. OVER VOLTAGE RATING: 1400 PIV
8. VOLTAGE DROP @ IOUT: 1.5 VAC
9. POWER DISSIPATION AT FULL LOAD:
RLY6: 25.0 Watts
RLY6A: 48.0 Watts

SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)

SCHEMATIC

10. I2T FUSING: 1035 A2S
(For Fusing Purposes, T = 8.3 msec.)
11. Dv/Dt @ VOUT (Max.): 500 V/μsec

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. CONTROL VOLTAGE RANGE: 4 to 32 VDC
2. TURN-ON VOLTAGE (MIN.): 4 VDC
3. TURN-OFF VOLTAGE (MAX.): 1 VDC
4. REVERSE VOLTAGE PROTECTION: -75 VDC
5. INPUT CURRENT (MAX.): 8 mA

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

FUSING

1. ISOLATION (INPUT TO OUTPUT TO BASE): 4000 VRMS
2. CAPACITANCE INPUT TO OUTPUT: 3 pf
3. OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to +80°C

Devices such as electromechanical circuit breakers and slow blow fuses
cannot react quickly enough to protect this relay in a shorted condition. Fast
“semiconductor fuses” with appropriate I2T ratings are strongly recommended.

MECHANICAL INTERRUPT SWITCH

The off-state leakage current of the power unit is 8 mA maximum. The
voltage level of the output will rise proportional to the resistance of the load due
to this leakage current. Full line voltage can be measured when the output is
connected to a high resistance load and the power unit is in the off-state.
A mechanical interrupt switch is recommended between both sides of the line
voltage and the load. The switch should be opened when servicing any part of
the output wiring. When measuring the off-state output voltage of the unit for
correct operation, load the output of the RLY6/RLY6A with a small resistance
(approximately 100 ohms).

WIRING GUIDELINES
The controlling device and the relay load should NEVER share the same
power feed. It is recommended that this relay be installed as close as possible
to the load to keep the power cable runs short. The control voltage can run over
distances in excess of 200 feet with shielded cable. If using shielded cable,
connect the shield to the minus “-” terminal of the control signal at one end only.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NUMBERS

MODEL

DESCRIPTION

RLY6

25 A Single Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY60000

RLY6A

40 A Single Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY6A000

It is strongly recommended that a 0.18" (4.6 mm) clearance is maintained on
all four sides of the relay. If the relays are mounted against each other, then the
end relays must be derated by additional 10% (of the Derating Curve) and the
middle relays by 20%.
In small enclosures, adequate ventilation must be provided to assure proper
safe operating temperature. Accumulation of dust and dirt on the heat sink fins
will also affect heat dissipation. In extreme dust and dirt conditions, the relay
must be derated by additional 20%.

1-717-767-6511

925

MODEL RLY7 - THREE PHASE DIN RAIL MOUNT SOLID STATE RELAY
INTEGRATED HEAT SINK
OPTICALLY ISOLATED
SOLID STATE SWITCHING
25 A THREE PHASE OUTPUT RATING
24 TO 660 VAC SWITCHING
4 TO 32 VDC CONTROL SIGNAL
ZERO VOLTAGE TURN-ON
MOUNTS ON DIN RAIL OR DIRECTLY TO PANEL
4000 VOLT ISOLATION
BUILT-IN SNUBBER
LED “ON” INDICATOR
CAGE CLAMP TERMINATIONS
UL Recognized Component,
File #E191578

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The RLY7 is a three phase solid state relay that switches load currents up to
25 A. The unit features a zero voltage turn-on detector to minimize radiated RFI
when switching. An internal snubber guards against false triggering of the
output related to high dv/dt applications. A low level DC control signal of 4 to
32 VDC is all that is needed for the switching operation. This unit, highlighted
by the inverse-parallel SCR output, provides a greatly increased operational life
over a mechanical relay by avoiding the usual relay contact problems such as:
arcing, bouncing, and mechanical failure.
The RLY7 can be directly controlled by logic/SSR drive output or sourcing
output of Red Lion Controls products.

CAUTION: Risk of Danger.
Read complete instructions prior to
installation and operation of the unit.

SPECIFICATIONS
OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. Operating Voltage Range: 24 to 660 VAC
2. Operating Frequency Range: 47 to 63 Hz
3. Maximum Continuous Load Current: 25 Amps (3 pole), 35 Amps (2 pole)
(See Safe Operating Conditions)
5. Min. Load Current: 100 mA
6. Leakage Current @ VOUT (Max.): 10 mA
7. Peak Blocking Voltage: 1400 VAC
8. Voltage Drop @ IOUT: 3 VAC
9. I2T Fusing: 1350 A2sec
(For Fusing Purposes, T = 8.3 msec.)
10. Dv/Dt @ VOUT (Max.): 1000 V/μsec

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

926

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock.

TOP VIEW

www.redlion.net

FUSING

INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
1. Control Voltage Range: 4 to 32 VDC
2. Turn-on Voltage (Min.): 4 VDC
3. Turn-off Voltage (Max.): 1 VDC
4. Input Current (Max.): 15 mA

MECHANICAL INTERRUPT SWITCH

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. Isolation (Input to Output to Base): 4000 VRMS
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0°C to 40°C

SAFE OPERATING CONDITIONS
The relay must always operate within the “Safe Operating Area” of the
Derating Curve Figure. Operations outside the Safe Operating Area will shorten
the life of, or cause permanent damage to, the relay. The ambient temperature
should be measured 1" (25 mm) below the relay (when mounted to a vertical
surface) and with all of the associated equipment operating.
It is strongly recommended that a 1" (25 mm) clearance is maintained on all
four sides of the relay. If the relays are mounted against each other, then the end
relays must be derated by an additional 10% (of the Derating Curve) and the
middle relays by 20%.

The off-state leakage current of the power unit is 10 mA maximum. The
voltage level of the output will rise proportional to the resistance of the load due
to this leakage current. Full line voltage can be measured when the output is
connected to a high resistance load and the power unit is in the off-state.
A mechanical interrupt switch is recommended between the line voltage and
the load. The switch should be opened when servicing any part of the output
wiring. When measuring the off-state output voltage of the unit for correct
operation, load the output of the RLY7 with a small resistance (approximately
100 ohms).

WIRING GUIDELINES
The controlling device and the relay load should NEVER share the same
power feed. It is recommended that this relay be installed as close as possible to
the load to keep the power cable runs short. The control voltage can run over
distances in excess of 200 feet with shielded cable. If using shielded cable,
connect the shield to the minus ″-″ terminal of the control signal at one end only.

K
In small enclosures, adequate ventilation must be provided to assure proper
safe operating temperature. Accumulation of dust and dirt on the heat sink fins
will also affect heat dissipation. In extreme dust and dirt conditions, the relay
must be derated by an additional 20%.

SCHEMATIC
THREE PHASE HEATING APPLICATION
This application shows a Model TCU Temperature Controller regulating
the temperature of a drying kiln. The TCU has an SSR Drive Output
Module installed. This module controls the three phase relay directly.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

RLY7

Three Phase Din Rail Mount Solid State Relay

RLY70000

1-717-767-6511

927

MODEL PAXLBK - LABEL KIT FOR PAX

DESCRIPTION
All of the 5 digit PAX units allow you to use this handy kit.
Choose from one of 189 different engineering units, and insert
it into the unit. The label lights up from inside the PAX where
it is protected from washdown and dirty environments. The
backlight is controlled in the programming.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PAXLBK

928

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

Units Label Kit for 5 Digit PAX

PART NUMBERS

PAXLBK10

MODEL LX - LABEL ACCESSORY FOR LPAX
LX LABEL ACCESSORY

DESCRIPTION

Attach Units
Label to this
embossed
area.

The LX label accessories allow the 5 digit LPAX display to be
customized with an engineering unit. The label is affixed to the
embossed area on the bezel of the LPAX. The LPAX module is
then programmed to turn on its backlighting, which illuminates
the label from behind.

INSTALLATION

LXBLANK0 *

K A

mA µA

yd 3

LXK00000

kHz

Before applying the labe
embossed area is clean, dry
Remove the backing and c
the embossed area and attac
to seat the edges of the labe

SP4

SP3

kV VA

M
3

LXCM3000 LXMM3000 LXIN3000

ton
h
LXTON/H0

fps

ft
min

LXFT3/S0 LXFT3/MN

fpm

YPS

LXFT3000 LXYD3000 LXL/H000
3

KWh

kg ton gal

RPS

rps

min

l Kl

LXML0000 LXKL0000 LXM30000

LXKG/S00 LXKG/MIN LXM3/S00 LXM3/MIN LXM3/H00 LXL/S000

min

LXL/MIN0

LXKG/H00

gps

GPM

gpm

gph FPS FPM FPH

IPS IPM IPH

CPS

CPM

CPH MPS

BPS BPM

LPM

h
LXFT3/H0 LXBPS000 LXBPM000 LXLPM000 LXGPS000 LXGPM100 LXGPM200 LXGPH000 LXFPS100 LXFPM100 LXFPH000

YPM

YPH

LXFPS200 LXFPM200 LXYPS000 LXYPM000 LXYPH000 LXIPS000

kph

LXA00000 LXMA0000 LXUA0000 LXHZ0000 LXKHZ000 LXKV0000 LXVA0000 LXKVA000 LXVAC000 LXMV0000 LXV00000

LXMOHM10 LXOHM000 LXKOHM00 LXMOHM20 LXW00000 LXKW0000 LXKWH000 LXKG0000 LXTON000 LXGAL000 LXL00000

kVA VAC

rpm

rph ppb

MPM

MPH

LXIPM000 LXIPH000 LXCPS000 LXCPM000 LXCPH000 LXMPS000 LXMPM000 LXMPH000

ppm

mm
s

cm
s

cm
min

m
s

m
min

m
h

t
min

LXKPH000 LXRPS100 LXRPS200 LXRPM000 LXRPH000 LXPPB000 LXPPM000 LXMM/S00 LXCM/S00 LXCM/MIN LXM/S000 LXM/MIN0 LXM/H000 LXT/MIN0

min

LXU/MIN0

LXLB/MIN LXLB/H00

LXT10000 LXT20000

ØA ØB ØC bar

in
Hg

%RH

deg

G oz lb

x10

x100

x1000

LX%RH000 LXPH0000 LXDEG000 LXG00000 LXOZ0000 LXLB0000 LX10X000 LX100X00 LX1000X0

psi kPa

% in ft

yd mm cm

LXPHA000 LXPHB000 LXPHC000 LXBAR000 LXINHG00 LXPSI000 LXKPA000 LX%00000 LXIN0000 LXFT0000 LXYD0000 LXMM0000 LXCM0000 LXM00000

in lb ft lb min

h S

LXKM0000 LXN00000 LXHP0000 LXINLB00 LXFTLB00 LXMIN000 LXH00000

SEC

VDC

LXS00000 LXSEC000 LXVDC000

* Blank label included with each LPAX

°F

°C

LXDF0000 ** LXDC0000 **

** These labels included with MPAXT units

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

Custom Units Label for 5 Digit LPAX

PART NUMBERS

Listed Above

929

MODEL CUB5USB - USB PROGRAMMING OPTION CARD
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin serves as a guide for the installation, configuration and operation
of the CUB5 USB Programming plug-in card for the CUB5. The plug-in card is
a separately purchased option card that plug into the main circuit board of the
meter. The CUB5USB card in conjunction with the Crimson® programming
software enables the user to configure CUB5 on a PC. The CUB5USB requires
installation of drivers which are included with the Crimson Programming
software. Following installation of the drivers, the card appears as a Virtual
communications port.

Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the CUB® 5
meters from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands, that
make it easy to program the CUB5 meters. The CUB5 program can then be
saved in a PC file for future use. A CUB5 serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.

INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS

SPECIFICATIONS

The card plugs into the main circuit board of the meter as shown.
Perform USB driver installation below prior to powering the
CUB5 and connecting CUB5USB to PC USB port.

CUB5USB PROGRAMMING CARD
Type: USB Virtual Comms Port
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Unit Address: 0 to 99

CRIMSON 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
• Windows 2000, XP, or Vista
• RAM and free disk space as required by the chosen operating system.
• An additional 50 MB of disk space for software installation.
• A display of at least 800 by 600 pixels
• A USB port for downloading to the CUB5

USB Card

K
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.
CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.

USB DRIVER INSTALLATION

1. Download and install the latest Crimson 2 build on your Windows® compatible
PC. Earlier builds may not have the RLC Virtual Comm port drivers. Crimson
software is available as a free download at http://www.redlion.net.
2. Install CUB5USB card into CUB5 meter and apply power to the CUB5.
3. Connect Type A USB cable to computer and CUB5USB option card.
Windows will prompt you for the location of the drivers for the device. The
default location for these drivers is “C:\Program Files\Red Lion
controls\Crimson 2.0\Device.” When the hardware setup appears, choose
“Install from a list or Specific location,” click Next, and then check “Include
this location...” and click the Browse button. Point the Wizard at the location
specified above or whatever other location you specified during installation
of the software. It is important that you perform this step correctly, or you
may have to manually remove the drivers using the Device Manager, and
repeat the installation once more.
Note: Crimson’s USB drivers have not been digitally signed by Microsoft®,
and you will therefore see a dialog offering you the chance to stop the
installation. You should be sure to select the Continue option to indicate
that you do indeed wish to install the drivers.
4. Windows will automatically assign a comms port to the CUB5USB. To
determine the port assigned, open “System Properties” from within
Windows® Control Panel. Select the Hardware tab, and click the “Device
Manager” button. Expand the “Ports” line. Take note of which Comms port
is assigned to “RLC Virtual Comm port”. It must be Com4 or lower to operate
with Crimson 2. If higher, right-click on the entry and select “Properties,”
“Port Settings” tab, and then “Advanced” button. Select a Coms port that is
COM4 or lower and is not physically being used.

930

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

CUB5 USB Programming Card

CUB5USB0

CBLUSB

Type A to B USB Cable

CBLUSB00

SFCRD*

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for
Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP

SFCRD200

CUB5USB

* Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/

www.redlion.net

MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (5-SEr)
PARAMETER MENU

* - Disregard these parameters when configuring unit to upload or download wth Crimson.

Module 5 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. The only paramters of concern when utilizing the CUB5USB
programming option card to communicate with Crimson 2 programming
software is the Baud Rate and Meter Address. The Parameters are only
accessible when an optional CUB5USB, RS232 or RS485 serial
communications card is installed in the meter.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display.

Parameter

METER ADDRESS

Addr

Selection/Value

ABBREVIATED PRINTING *

Factory Settings are shown.

BAUD RATE

Abbr

YES

DATA BIT *

PRINT OPTIONS *

bAUd
ª

dAtA
ª

9600

300
600

7-bit

1200
2400

4800
9600

19200
38400

8-bit

7-bit

Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.

PARITY BIT*

PAr

Odd

EVEN

OPt

YES

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (P-ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting (YES),
without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, the Setpoint value(s) will not be sent unless an optional
setpoint card is installed in the meter.

* - Disregard these parameters when configuring unit to upload or download wth
Crimson software.

1-717-767-6511

931

MODEL CUB5COM -SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN OPTION CARDS
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin serves as a guide for the installation, configuration and operation
of the RS232 and RS485 serial communications plug-in cards for the CUB5.
The plug-in cards are separately purchased option cards that plug into the main
circuit board of the meter. Only one communication card can be used at a time.

Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the CUB5
meters from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands, that
make it easy to program the CUB5 meters. The CUB5 program can then be
saved in a PC file for future use. A CUB5 serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.

INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS

SPECIFICATIONS

The cards plug into the main circuit board of the meter as shown.
RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99; max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable, 2 msec min. or 50 msec min.

Comms Card
RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CARD
Type: RS232 half duplex (non-isolated)
Baud Rate: 300 to 38.4k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before
installing Plug-in card.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

CAUTION: The Plug-in cards and main circuit board contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.

CUB5COM

CBL

SFCRD*

PART NUMBER

RS485 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM1

RS232 Serial Communications Card

CUB5COM2

RS232 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBLPROG0

RS485 Programming Cable (DB9-RJ11)

CBPRO007

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for
Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP

SFCRD200

* Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/

WIRING CONNECTIONS
Connections to the serial communications cards are made through an RJ11
modular connector. Connector pin-outs for the RS485 and RS232 cards are
shown below.

RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS

932

www.redlion.net

MODULE 5 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (5-SEr)
PARAMETER MENU

Module 5 is the programming module for the Serial Communications
Parameters. These parameters are used to match the serial settings of the CUB5
with those of the host computer or other serial device. The Serial Setup
Parameters are only accessible when an optional RS232 or RS485 serial
communications module is installed in the meter.

«
ª

Abbr

YES

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display.
Parameter

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

BAUD RATE

bAUd
ª

300
600

9600

1200
2400

4800
9600

PRINT OPTIONS

19200
38400

DATA BIT

dAtA
ª

7-bit

8-bit

7-bit

OPt

YES

This parameter selects the meter values transmitted in response to a Print
Request. A print request is also referred to as a block print because more than
one parameter can be sent to a printer or computer as a block.
Selecting YES displays a sublist for choosing the meter parameters to appear
in the print block. All active parameters entered as YES in the sublist will be
transmitted during a block print. Parameters entered as NO will not be sent.
The “Print All” (P-ALL) option selects all meter values for transmitting (YES),
without having to individually select each parameter in the sublist.
Note: Inactive parameters will not be sent regardless of the print option
setting. For example, the Setpoint value(s) will not be sent unless an optional
setpoint card is installed in the meter.

Select either 7- or 8-bit data word length. Set the word length to match the
other serial communications equipment on the serial link.
ANALOG MODELS - CUB5V, CUB5I, CUB5P, CUB5TC, CUB5RT
DISPLAY

PARITY BIT

PAr

Odd

EVEN

INP
HI
LO
SPt-1
SPt-2

DESCRIPTION

Input
Maximum
Minimum
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2

FACTORY
SETTING

YES
NO
NO
NO
NO

MNEMONIC

INP
MAX
MIN
SP1
SP2

METER ADDRESS

Addr

1-717-767-6511

933

Sending Serial Commands and Data

Command Chart
Command Description

N
T
V
R
P

Analog Models - CUB5V, CUB5I, CUB5P, CUB5TC, CUB5RT
Notes

Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by a register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value Change (write) followed by a register ID character and
numeric data.
Reset a register value or setpoint output.
Reset
Must be followed by a register ID character
Block Print Request Initiates a block print output. Registers in the
(read)
print block are selected in Print Options.
Node (meter)
Address Specifier

1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints all the active selections chosen in the Print Options menu parameter.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See Command Response Time section for
differences in meter response time when using the * and $ terminator.

Receiving Data From The Meter

Applicable
Commands

Value Description MNEMONIC

Input

INP

5 digit

Maximum

MAX

T, R

5 digit

Minimum
Setpoint 1
(Reset output 1)
Setpoint 2
(Reset output 2)

MIN

T, R

5 digit

SP1

T, R, V

5 digit positive/4 digit negative

SP2

T, R, V,

5 digit positive/4 digit negative

D
E

Transmit Details (T and V)

Command String Examples:

1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to the setpoint 1 value
String: N17VD350*
2. Node address = 5, Read input, response time of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
3. Node address = 0, Reset Setpoint 1 output
String: RD*
4. Node address = 31, Request a Block Print Output, response time of 2 msec min
String: N31P$

Transmitting Data to the Meter

Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to transmit details listed in the
Register Identification Chart. Leading zeros are ignored. Negative numbers
must have a minus sign. The meter ignores any decimal point and conforms the
number to the scaled resolution. (For example: The meter’s scaled decimal point
position is set for 0.0 and 25 is written to a register. The value of the register is
now 2.5. In this case, write a value of 250 to equal 25.0).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.

The end of the response string is terminated with a and . After the
last line of a block print, an extra , and are added to provide
separation between the print blocks.

Abbreviated Transmission

Full Field Transmission
Byte

Byte

Description

2 byte Node Address field [00-99]

1-9

(Space)

9 byte data field, 7 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one
byte for decimal point
(carriage return)

(line feed)

* (Space)

3 byte Register Mnemonic field
9 byte data field; 7 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte for
decimal point
(carriage return)

* (carriage return)

(line feed)

* (line feed)

* (Space)

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.

* (carriage return)

* (line feed)

The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and the register
mnemonic, leaving only the numeric part of the response.

1, 2
3
4-6
7-15

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the meter address. If the address
assigned is 0, two spaces are substituted. A space follows the meter address field.
The next three characters are the register mnemonic, as shown in the Register
Identification Chart.
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field (bytes 7 to 15) is 9
characters long. When a requested display value exceeds the meter’s display
limits, decimal points are sent in place of numerical data to indicate a display
overrange.
The remaining 7 positions of this field consist of a minus sign (for negative
values), a floating decimal point (if applicable), and five positions for the
requested value. The data within bytes 9 to 15 is right-aligned with leading
spaces for any unfilled positions.

934

Meter Response Examples (Analog models):
1. Node address = 17, full field response, Input = 875
17 INP
875
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 1 = -250.5
SP1
-250.5
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block
print
250

www.redlion.net

Communication Format

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Timing Diagram Figure

Character Frame Figure

1-717-767-6511

935

MODEL PAXUSB - USB PROGRAMMING OPTION CARD
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin serves as a guide for the installation, configuration and operation
of the PAX USB Programming plug-in card. The plug-in card is a separately
purchased option card that plug into the main circuit board of the meter. The
PAX USB card in conjunction with the Crimson® programming software
enables the user to configure a PAX on a PC. The PAXUSB requires installation
of drivers which are included with the Crimson Programming software.

Following installation of the drivers, the card appears as a Virtual
communications port.
Crimson is a Windows® based program that allows configuration of the
PAX® meters from a PC. Crimson offers standard drop-down menu commands,
that make it easy to program the PAX meters. The PAX program can then be
saved in a PC file for future use. A PAX serial plug-in card is required to
program the meter using the software.

INSTALLING AN OPTION CARD

TOP VIEW

CAUTION: The option and main circuit cards contain static sensitive
components. Before handling the cards, discharge static charges
from your body by touching a grounded bare metal object. Ideally,
handle the cards at a static controlled clean workstation. Also,
handle the cards by the edges only. Dirt, oil or other contaminants
that may contact the cards can adversely affect circuit operation.
WARNING: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards. Remove
all power to the meter AND load circuits before accessing the unit.

1. Remove the main assembly from the rear of the case. Squeeze the finger
holds on the rear cover, or use a small screwdriver to depress the side latches
to release it from the case. It is not necessary to separate the rear cover from
the main circuit card.
2. Locate the option card connector for the type of option card to be installed.
Hold the unit by the rear connector, not the display board, when installing an
option card.
3. Install the option card by aligning the option card connector with the slot bay
in the rear cover. The cards are keyed by position with different main board
connector locations. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the tab on
the option card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
4. Slide the assembly back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully into
the case.
5. Perform USB driver installation below prior to powering the PAX and
connecting PAXUSB to PC USB port.

USB DRIVER INSTALLATION

1. Download and install the latest Crimson 2 build on your Windows® compatible
PC. Earlier builds may not have the RLC Virtual Comm port drivers. Crimson
software is available as a free download at http://www.redlion.net.
2. Install PAXUSB card into the meter and apply power to the PAX.
3. Connect Type A to mini B USB cable to computer and PAX option card.
Windows will prompt you for the location of the drivers for the device. The
default location for these drivers is “C:\Program Files\Red Lion
controls\Crimson 2.0\Device.” When the hardware setup appears, choose
“Install from a list or Specific location,” click Next, and then check “Include
this location...” and click the Browse button. Point the Wizard at the location
specified above or whatever other location you specified during installation
of the software. It is important that you perform this step correctly, or you
may have to manually remove the drivers using the Device Manager, and
repeat the installation once more.
Note: Crimson’s USB drivers have not been digitally signed by Microsoft®,
and you will therefore see a dialog offering you the chance to stop the
installation. You should be sure to select the Continue option to indicate
that you do indeed wish to install the drivers.
4. Windows will automatically assign a comms port to the PAXUSB. To
determine the port assigned, open “System Properties” from within
Windows® Control Panel. Select the Hardware tab, and click the “Device
Manager” button. Expand the “Ports” line. Take note of which Comms port
is assigned to “RLC Virtual Comm port”. It must be Com4 or lower to operate
with Crimson 2. If higher, right-click on the entry and select “Properties,”
“Port Settings” tab, and then “Advanced” button. Select a Coms port that is
COM4 or lower and is not physically being used.

SPECIFICATIONS
PAXUSB PROGRAMMING CARD
Type: USB Virtual Comms Port
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
PAXH Isolation:
Isolation To Sensor Common: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 125 V
Isolation To User Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V
Baud Rate: 300 to 19.2k
Unit Address: 0 to 99; only 1 meter can be configured at a time

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

PAXUSB

PAX USB Programming Card

PAXUSB00

CBLUSB

Type A to mini B USB Cable

CBLUSB01

SFCRD*

Crimson 2 PC Configuration Software for
Windows 98, ME, 2000 and XP

SFCRD200

* Crimson software is available for download from http://www.redlion.net/

936

www.redlion.net

MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (4S-)
PARAMETER MENU

* - Disregard these parameters when configuring unit to upload or download wth Crimson.

It is necessary to match the PAX meter’s serial communications parameters
to the host’s parameters before communications can be established. This is
accomplished by using the PAX front panel keys to enter
.
The only paramters of concern when utilizing the PAXUSB programming
option card to communicate with Crimson 2 programming software is the Baud
Rate and Meter Address. The Parameters are only accessible when an optional
PAXUSB, RS232 or RS485 serial communications card is installed.
Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display.

Parameter

METER ADDRESS

Selection/Value

ABBREVIATED PRINTING *

300
600

1200
2400

4800
9600

19200

Select abbreviated transmissions (numeric only) or full field transmission.
When the data from the meter is sent directly to a terminal for display, the extra
characters that are sent identify the nature of the meter parameter displayed. In
this case, select . When the data from the meter goes to a computer, it may be
desirable to suppress the node address and mnemonic when transmitting. In this
case, set this parameter to
.

PRINT OPTIONS *

DATA BIT *

YES

BAUD RATE

Enter the serial node address. With a single unit on a bus, an address is not
needed and a value of zero can be used (RS232 applications). Otherwise, with
multiple bussed units, a unique address number must be assigned to each meter.
The node address applies specifically to RS485 applications.

Factory Settings are shown.

YES

ª
Select either 7 or 8 bit data word lengths. Set the word length to match that
of other serial communication equipment. Since the meter receives and
transmits 7-bit ASCII encoded data, 7 bit word length is sufficient to request
and receive data from the meter.

- Enters the sub-menu to select those meter parameters to appear in the
block print. For each parameter in the sub-menu select
for the parameter to
appear with the block print, and
to disable the parameter.

PARITY BIT *

Odd

EVEN

ª
Set the parity bit to match that of the other serial communications equipment
used. The meter ignores the parity when receiving data, and sets the parity bit
for outgoing data. If no parity is selected with 7-bit word length the meter
transmits and receives data with 2 stop bits. (For example: 10 bit frame with
mark parity)

* - Disregard these parameters when configuring unit to upload or download wth
Crimson software.

1-717-767-6511

937

MODEL PAXCDC -SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG-IN OPTION CARDS
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin serves as a guide for the installation, configuration and
operation of the RS232 and RS485 cards for the PAX family of meters. Only
one communication card can be used at a time.

The PAX meter can be fitted with up to three different option cards. The slot
bays of the option cards are dedicated to a particular card function. The option
card functions are: serial communications, analog output and setpoint output.
Only one card from each function category can be installed into the meter.

INSTALLING AN OPTION CARD

TOP VIEW

1. Remove the main assembly from the rear of the case. Squeeze the finger
holds on the rear cover, or use a small screwdriver to depress the side
latches to release it from the case. It is not necessary to separate the rear
cover from the main circuit card.
2. Locate the option card connector for the type of option card to be installed.
Hold the unit by the rear connector, not the display board, when installing
an option card.
3. Install the option card by aligning the option card connector with the slot
bay in the rear cover. The cards are keyed by position with different main
board connector locations. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the
tab on the option card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
4. Slide the assembly back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
5. Apply the option card label to the bottom side of the meter. Do not cover
the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of the case must be
clean for the label to adhere properly. Apply the label to the area designated
by the large case label.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL

PAXCDC

938

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

RS485 Serial Communications Output Card with
Terminal Block

PAXCDC10

Extended RS485 Serial Communications Output
Card with Dual RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC1C

RS232 Serial Communications Output Card with
Terminal Block

PAXCDC20

Extended RS232 Serial Communications Output
Card with 9 Pin D Connector

PAXCDC2C

SPECIFICATIONS
PAXH Isolation For Both Cards:
Isolation To Sensor Common: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 125 V
Isolation To User Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V
RS485 Communication Card
Type: RS485 multi-point balanced interface
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Baud Rate: 300 to 19.2k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even, or no parity
Bus Address: 0 to 99, max 32 meters per line
Transmit Delay: Selectable; 2 - 50 msec or 50 - 100 msec
RS232 Communication Card
Type: RS232 half duplex
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Baud Rate: 300 to 19.2k
Data Format: 7/8 bits; odd, even or no parity

WIRING CONNECTIONS
RS232 Communications

RS485 Communications
The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the PAX is limited to 19.2k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. An RS485 bus is therefore always half-duplex,
that is, data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.
RECEIVING DEVICE

PAX METER
+5V

Transmit
Enable

33K
12

Terminal Block Connection Figure

B(-)

A(+)
(+)

33K

COMM. *

15 NC

* OPTIONAL

Terminal Block Connection Figure
Extended Comms Connection Figure
RS232 is intended to allow only two devices to communicate over distances up
to 50 feet. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) transmits data on the Transmitted
Data (TXD) line and receives data on the Received Data (RXD) line. Data
Computer Equipment (DCE) receives data on the TXD line and transmits data on
the RXD line. The PAX emulates a DTE. If the other device connected to the
meter also emulates a DTE, the TXD and RXD lines must be interchanged for
communications to take place. This is known as a null modem connection. Most
printers emulate a DCE device while most computers emulate a DTE device.
Some devices cannot accept more than two or three characters in succession
without a pause in between. In these cases, the meter employs a busy function.
As the meter begins to transmit data, the RXD line (RS232) is monitored to
determine if the receiving device is “busy”. The receiving device asserts that it
is busy by setting the RXD line into a space condition (logic 0). The meter then
suspends transmission until the RXD line is released by the receiving device.

1-717-767-6511

Extended Comms Connection Figure

939

MODULE 7 - SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS (4S-)
PARAMETER MENU

«
ª

BAUD RATE

300
600

1200
2400

Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display.
Parameter

METER ADDRESS

ABBREVIATED PRINTING

4800
9600

19200

YES

DATA BIT

8
PRINT OPTIONS

EVEN

Total Value
Setpoint values*

940

YES

Input Value

PARITY BIT

Odd

www.redlion.net

Sending Commands and Data

Command Chart
Command Description

N
T
V
R
P

Notes

Address a specific meter. Must be followed by
one or two digit node address. Not required
when node address = 0.
Read a register from the meter. Must be
Transmit Value (read)
followed by register ID character.
Write to register of the meter. Must be
Value change (write) followed by register ID character and numeric
data.
Reset a register or output. Must be followed
Reset
by register ID character
Node Address
Specifier

Block Print Request
(read)

Initiates a block print output. Registers are
defined in programming.

Value Description

Input

INP

T, P

Total

TOT

T, P, R

(Reset command resets total to
zero)

Max Input

MAX

T, P, R

(Reset command resets MAX to
current reading)

Min Input

MIN

T, P, R

(Reset command resets MIN to
current reading)

Setpoint 1

SP1

T, P, V, R

(Reset command resets the
setpoint output)

Setpoint 2

SP2

T, P, V, R

(Reset command resets the
setpoint output)

Setpoint 3

SP3

T, P, V, R

(Reset command resets the
setpoint output)

Setpoint 4

SP4

T, P, V, R

(Reset command resets the
setpoint output)

AOR

T, V

(Applies to manual mode)

CSR

T, V

I
J

Analog Output
Register
Control Status
Register

Applicable Commands/Comments

Command String Construction

Command String Examples:

The command string must be constructed in a specific sequence. The meter
does not respond with an error message to illegal commands. The following
procedure details construction of a command string:

1. Node address = 17, Write 350 to Setpoint 1, response delay of 2 msec min
String: N17VE350$

1. The first 2 or 3 characters consist of the Node Address Specifier (N) followed
by a 1 or 2 character node address number. The node address number of the
meter is programmable. If the node address is 0, this command and the node
address itself may be omitted. This is the only command that may be used in
conjunction with other commands.
2. After the optional address specifier, the next character is the command
character.
3. The next character is the register ID. This identifies the register that the
command affects. The P command does not require a register ID character. It
prints according to the selections made in print options.
4. If constructing a value change command (writing data), the numeric data is
sent next.
5. All command strings must be terminated with the string termination
characters * or $. The meter does not begin processing the command string
until this character is received. See timing diagram figure for differences of
* and $ terminating characters.

Receiving Data

Data is transmitted by the meter in response to either a transmit command
(T), a print block command (P) or User Function print request. The response
from the meter is either a full field transmission or an abbreviated transmission.
In this case, the response contains only the numeric field. The meter response
mode is established in programming.

2. Node address = 5, Read Input value, response delay of 50 msec min
String: N5TA*
3. Node address = 0, Reset Setpoint 4 output, response delay of 50 msec min
String: RH*

Sending Numeric Data
Numeric data sent to the meter must be limited to 5 digits (-19,999 to
99,999). If more than 5 digits are sent, the meter accepts the last 5. Leading
zeros are ignored. Negative numbers must have a minus sign. The meter ignores
any decimal point and conforms the number to the scaled resolution. (For
example: the meter’s scaled decimal point position = 0.0 and 25 is written to a
register. The value of the register is now 2.5 In this case, write a value = 25.0).
Note: Since the meter does not issue a reply to value change commands, follow
with a transmit value command for readback verification.

The end of the response string is terminated with a carriage return and
. When block print is finished, an extra is used to
provide separation between the blocks.

Abbreviated Transmission
Byte

Description

Byte

Description

12 byte data field, 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign,
one byte for decimal point
carriage return

1, 2

2 byte Node Address field [00-99]

line feed

(Space)

* (Space)

4-6

3 byte Register Mnemonic field

* carriage return

7-18

12 byte data field; 10 bytes for number, one byte for sign, one byte for
decimal point (The T command may be a different byte length)

* line feed

1-12

Full Field Transmission

carriage return

line feed

* (Space)

* carriage return

* line feed

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The abbreviated response suppresses the node address and register ID,
leaving only the numeric part of the response.

Meter Response Examples:

* These characters only appear in the last line of a block print.
The first two characters transmitted are the node address, unless the node
address assigned =0, in which case spaces are substituted. A space follows the
node address field. The next three characters are the register ID (Serial
Mnemonic).
The numeric data is transmitted next. The numeric field is 12 characters long
(to accommodate the 10 digit totalizer), with the decimal point position floating
within the data field. Negative value have a leading minus sign. The data field
is right justified with leading spaces.

1. Node address = 17, full field response, Input = 875
17 INP
875
2. Node address = 0, full field response, Setpoint 2 = -250.5
SP2
-250.5
3. Node address = 0, abbreviated response, Setpoint 2 = 250, last line of block
print
250

1-717-767-6511

941

SERIAL COMMANDS FOR PAX SOFTWARE
(CSR) Control Status Register

Examples:

The Control Status Register is used to both directly control the meter’s
outputs (setpoints and analog output), and interrogate the state of the setpoint
outputs. The register is bit mapped with each bit position within the register
assigned to a particular control function. The control function are invoked by
writing to each bit position. The bit position definitions are:

1. Set manual mode, turn all setpoints off:

bit 0: Setpoint 1 Output Status
0 = output off
1 = output on
bit 1: Setpoint 2 Output Status
0 = output off
1 = output on
bit 2: Setpoint 3 Output Status
0 = output off
1 = output on
bit 3: Setpoint 4 Output Status
0 = output off
1 = output on
bit 4: Manual Mode
0 = automatic mode
1 = manual mode
bit 5: Always stays 0, even if 1 is sent.
bit 6: Sensor Status (PAXT only)
0 = sensor normal
1 = sensor fail
bit 7: Always stays 0, even if 1 is sent.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0:bit location
VJ<30>* or VJ0*

ASCII 0 = 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 or <30>

V is command write, J is CSR and * is terminator.
2. Turn SP1, SP3 outputs on and SP2, SP4 outputs off:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0:bit location
VJ<35>* or VJ5*

ASCII 5 = 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 or <35>

3. Select Automatic mode:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0:bit location
VJ<40>* or VJ@*

ASCII @ = 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 or <40>

Note: Avoid writing values <0A> (LF), <0D> (CR), <24> ($) and <2E> (*)
to the CSR. These values are interpreted by the meter as end of command
control codes and will prematurely end the write operation.

(AOR) Analog Output Register
The Analog Output Register controls the analog output of the meter. The
manual mode must first be engaged by setting bit 4 of the Control Status
Register. The range of values of this register is 0 to 4095, which corresponds to
0 mA, 0 V and 20 mA, 10 V; respectively. The table lists correspondence of the
output signal with the register value.
Register Value

Although the register is bit mapped starting with bit 7, HEX < > characters
are sent in the command string. Bits 7 and 5 always stay a zero, even if a “1” is
sent. This allows ASCII characters to be used with terminals that may not have
extended character capabilities.
Writing a “1” to bit 4 of CSR selects manual mode. In this mode, the setpoint
outputs are defined by the values written to the bits b0, b1, b2, b3; and the
analog output is defined by the value written to the AOR. Internal control of
these outputs is then overridden.
In automatic mode, the setpoint outputs can only be reset off. Writing to the
setpoint output bits of the CSR has the same effect as a Reset command (R).
The contents of the CSR may be read to interrogate the state of the setpoint
outputs and to check the status of the temperature sensor (PAXT only).

Output Signal*

I (mA)

V (V)

0.000

0.005

0.0025

2047

10.000

5.000

4094

19.995

9.9975

4095

20.000

10.000

*Due to the absolute accuracy
rating and resolution of the output
card, the actual output signal may
differ 0.15% FS from the table
values. The output signal
corresponds to the range selected
(20 mA or 10 V).

Examples:
1. Set output to full scale:
VI4095*
2. Set output to zero scale:
VI0*

Command Response Time
The meter can only receive data or transmit data at any one time (half-duplex
operation). The meter ignores commands while transmitting data, but instead
uses RXD as a busy signal. When sending commands and data to the meter, a
delay must be imposed before sending another command. This allows enough
time for the meter to process the command and prepare for the next command.

Timing Diagram Figure

942

At the start of the time interval t1, the computer program prints or writes the
string to the com port, thus initiating a transmission. During t1, the command
characters are under transmission and at the end of this period, the command
terminating character (*) is received by the meter. The time duration of t1 is
dependent on the number of characters and baud rate of the channel.
t1 = (10 * # of characters) / baud rate
At the start of time interval t2, the meter starts the interpretation of the
command and when complete, performs the command function. This time
interval t2 varies from 2 msec to 50 msec. If no response from the meter is
expected, the meter is ready to accept another command.
If the meter is to reply with data, the time interval t2 is controlled by the use
of the command terminating character. The standard command line terminating
character is ‘*’. This terminating character results in a response time window of
50 msec minimum and 100 msec maximum. This allows sufficient time for the
release of the sending driver on the RS485 bus. Terminating the command line
with ‘$’ results in a response time window (t2) of 2 msec minimum and 50 msec
maximum. The faster response time of this terminating character requires that
sending drivers release within 2 msec after the terminating character is received.
At the beginning of time interval t3, the meter responds with the first
character of the reply. As with t1, the time duration of t3 is dependent on the
number of characters and baud rate of the channel. t3 = (10 * # of characters) /
baud rate. At the end of t3, the meter is ready to receive the next command.
The maximum serial throughput of the meter is limited to the sum of the
times t1, t2 and t3.

www.redlion.net

Communication Format
Data is transferred from the meter through a serial communication channel.
In serial communications, the voltage is switched between a high and low level
at a predetermined rate (baud rate) using ASCII encoding. The receiving device
reads the voltage levels at the same intervals and then translates the switched
levels back to a character.
The voltage level conventions depend on the interface standard. The table
lists the voltage levels for each standard.
LOGIC

INTERFACE STATE

RS232*

RS485*

mark (idle)

TXD,RXD; -3 to -15 V

a-b < -200 mV

space (active)

TXD,RXD; +3 to +15 V

a-b > +200 mV

Character Frame Figure

* Voltage levels at the Receiver

Data is transmitted one byte at a time with a variable idle period between
characters (0 to ∞). Each ASCII character is “framed” with a beginning start bit,
an optional error detection parity bit and one or more ending stop bits. The data
format and baud rate must match that of other equipment in order for
communication to take place. The figures list the data formats employed by
the meter.

Stop bit
The last character transmitted is the stop bit. The stop bit provides a single
bit period pause to allow the receiver to prepare to re-synchronize to the start of
a new transmission (start bit of next byte). The receiver then continuously looks
for the occurrence of the start bit.

1-717-767-6511

943

MODEL PAXCDC -DEVICENET™ OUTPUT OPTION CARD
DESCRIPTION
The DeviceNet Option Card (PAXCDC30) is designed for the PAX series of
meters. It fits into the Comms slot of any PAX meter and allows the meter to
communicate with a DeviceNet bus. The card supports Polling, Bit Strobe, and

Explicit Message Commands. The MAC ID and the Baud Rate are switch
adjustable via a DIP switch. A bicolor LED is used to indicate the meter’s status
in relationship to the bus.

INSTALLING AN OPTION CARD

TOP VIEW

1. Remove the main assembly from the rear of the case. Squeeze the finger
holds on the rear cover, or use a small screwdriver to depress the side
latches to release it from the case. It is not necessary to separate the rear
cover from the main circuit card.
2. Locate the option card connector for the type of option card to be
installed. Hold the unit by the rear connector, not the display board, when
installing an option card.
3. Install the option card by aligning the option card connector with the slot
in the rear cover. The cards are keyed by position with different main
board connector locations. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the
tab on the option card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
4. Slide the assembly back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
5. Apply the option card label to the bottom side of the meter. Do not cover
the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of the case must be
clean for the label to adhere properly. Apply the label to the area
designated by the large case label.
6. See manual for wiring connections and programming procedures.

DIP SWITCHES
Both MAC ID and baud rate are set via DIP switches on the DeviceNet™
option card. See the DIP switch setting table for more details on these DIP
switches. Configuration of MAC ID and baud rate is not supported over
DeviceNet™.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

PAXCDC

944

PAX DeviceNet™ Output Card

PART NUMBER

PAXCDC30

NETWORK STATUS LEDs
The network status LEDs provide visual indication to the operator of the
DeviceNet™ card’s current status.

www.redlion.net

DeviceNet™ SPECIFICATIONS

NETWORK STATUS LEDs

POWER SUPPLY
Source: Supplied by DeviceNet™ bus.
The bus does not power the host.
Voltage: 11 to 25 VDC.
Current:
Nominal: 40 mA at 25 VDC.
Inrush: 550 mA for 5 msec at 25 VDC.
*Power must be applied to the PAX meter before bus power is applied to
the card.
NETWORK SPECIFICS
Compatibility: Group 2 Server Only, not UCMM capable.
Baud Rates: 125 Kbaud, 250 Kbaud, and 500 Kbaud.
Bus Interface: Phillips 82C250 or equivalent with mis-wiring protection per
DeviceNet™ Volume 1 Section 10.2.2.
Node Isolation: Bus powered, isolated node.
Host Isolation: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between DeviceNet™
and meter input common.
Bus Connection:
12 V+
13 CAN_H
14 CAN_L
15 VShield: No Connection
INSTALLATION INFORMATION
Factory Settings:
Baud rate: 125 KBs.
MAC ID: 63
Strobe Register: 07h
Polling flags: All on.
Swap data flag: Off.
Store Flags: All on.
DIP SWITCH SETTING TABLE
SWITCH #

SUPPORTED CONNECTIONS
Polled Command: The Polled Command consumes 6 bytes of data, and is used
to get, set, or reset attributes. The meter attribute is determined by the value
in byte 0 of the data field. Refer to the Attribute Identification Chart for the
appropriate value. Byte 1 determines the action: 0 = get, 1 = set, 2 = reset.
The next 4 bytes are the new attribute value for the set command. For get or
reset commands, enter 4 zeros. The data response from the Polled Command
is in the format of a 4 byte hexadecimal number. For the get command (0),
the response is the attribute value. For the set command (1), the response is
an echo of the data input. For the reset command (2), all 0s are returned.
Bit Strobe Command: The Bit Strobe Command consumes eight bytes of data,
or less. This is a read only predetermined meter attribute. The data response
from the Bit Strobe Command is in the format of a 4 byte hexadecimal
number. The register that will be read using the Bit Strobe command is
determined by setting Attribute 2, Instance 1, Class 100* (decimal) with a
value that represents the desired attribute. Refer to the Attribute Identification
Chart for the appropriate value.
*Class 100 (decimal) is a vendor specific class.

EXPLICIT MESSAGE COMMAND

SETTING

1-6

MAC ID (all off = 0, all on = 63) Switch 1
is LSB (1), switch 6 is MSB (32).

7 off, 8 off

125 K baud

7 on, 8 off

250 K baud

7 off, 8 on

500 K baud

7 on, 8 on

N/A

CONNECTION SIZES
Device Profile: This product conforms to the DeviceNet™ specification
Volumes I and II of version 2.0.
Device Configuration: No DeviceNet™ configuration is supported.
However, some meter configuration is supported.
MESSAGE

Flashing Red LED:
This device is the only device on the network (waiting for an
acknowledgment to its duplicate MAC ID check), or an I/O connection
has timed out, or a recoverable error has occurred.
Flashing Green LED:
The device is functioning correctly and is waiting to be commissioned
by a bus master.
Solid Red LED:
The device has encountered a non-recoverable fault, such as a duplicate
MAC ID response, and has removed itself from the bus, or the device is
in a power up reset state and is attempting to come on line.
Solid Green LED:
The device is on line, functioning correctly and has been commissioned
by a bus master.

PRODUCED

CONSUMED

Explicit

4 Bytes

Polled

4 Bytes

6 Bytes

Bit Strobe

4 Bytes

8 Bytes

Get Attribute: The attribute that will be read using the Get Attribute command
is determined by setting Service Code 14, Instance 1, Class 100* (decimal),
and the attribute with a value that represents the desired meter attribute. Refer
to the Attribute Identification Chart for the appropriate value. The data
response from the Get Attribute Command is in the format of a 4 byte
hexadecimal number.
Set Attribute: The attribute that will be set using the Set Attribute command is
determined by setting Service Code 16, Instance 1, Class 100* (decimal), and
the attribute with a value that represents the desired meter attribute. Refer to the
Attribute Identification Chart for the appropriate value. The data field for the
Set Attribute Command is entered as a 4 byte hexadecimal number.
Reset Attribute: The attribute that will be reset using the Reset Attribute
command is determined by setting Service Code 5, Instance 1, Class 100*
(decimal), and the attribute with a value that represents the desired meter
attribute. Refer to the Attribute Identification Chart for the appropriate value.
*Class 100 (decimal) is a vendor specific class.
Note: Not all meter attributes respond to a Set or Reset Attribute command.
Refer to the Attribute Identification Chart for details.

Vendor Specific Error Responses
CODE ERROR #

ERROR CODE MEANING

1F (General Code)

Vendor Specific Error

1 (Additional Code)

Meter Response Time-out

2 (Additional Code)

Vendor Service Not Supported

3 (Additional Code)

Command String Syntax Error

1-717-767-6511

945

Attribute Identification Chart
VALUE

DESCRIPTION

PAX

PAXI

PAXCK

SERVICE CODES SUPPORTED

PAXDP

PAX

PAXI

PAXCK

PAXDP

STORE

Data Swapping Flag

G, S

N/A

Bit Strobe Attribute

G, S

N/A

Polling Flags 1

G, S

N/A

Polling Flags 2

G, S

N/A

Polling Flags 3

N/A

G, S

N/A

DIP Switch

N/A

Input

Total

Max

Min

Count A

Timer

Input A (rel)

G, S, R

G, R

Attr 3, bit 0

Attr 26, bit 0

Count B

Count

Input B (rel)

G, R

G, S, R

G, R

Attr 3, bit 1

Attr 26, bit 1

Count C

RTC Time

Calc

G, R

G, S, R

G, S

Attr 3, bit 2

Attr 26, bit 2

Rate

RTC Date

Total

G, R

G, S

G, R

Attr 3, bit 3

Attr 26, bit 3

SP 1

Min

SP 1

Min Input

G, S, R

G, R

Attr 3, bit 4

Attr 26, bit 4

SP 2

Max

SP 2

Max Input

G, S, R

G, R

Attr 3, bit 5

Attr 26, bit 5

SP 3

Scale A

SP 3

Input A (abs)

G, S, R

G, S

G, S, R

Attr 3, bit 6

Attr 26, bit 6

SP 4

Scale B

SP 4

Input B (abs)

G, S, R

G, S

G, S, R

Attr 3, bit 7

Attr 26, bit 7

AOR

Scale C

SP 1 Off

Input A (offset)

G, S

Attr 4, bit 0

Attr 27, bit 0

CSR

Load A

SP 2 Off

Input B (offset)

G, S

Attr 4, bit 1

Attr 27, bit 1

-----

Load B

SP 3 Off

-----

G, S

-----

Attr 4, bit 2

Attr 27, bit 2

-----

Load C

SP 4 Off

-----

G, S

-----

Attr 4, bit 3

Attr 27, bit 3

-----

SP 1

Timer Start

SP 1

-----

G, S, R

G, S

G, S, R

Attr 4, bit 4

Attr 27, bit 4

-----

SP 2

Count Start

SP 2

-----

G, S, R

G, S

G, S, R

Attr 4, bit 5

Attr 27, bit 5

-----

SP 3

Timer Stop

SP 3

-----

G, S, R

G, S

G, S, R

Attr 4, bit 6

Attr 27, bit 6

-----

SP 4

Count Stop

SP 4

-----

G, S, R

G, S

G, S, R

Attr 4, bit 7

Attr 27, bit 7

-----

MMR

-----

G, S

Attr 5, bit 0

Attr 28, bit 0

-----

AOR

RTC Day

AOR

-----

G, S

Attr 5, bit 1

Attr 28, bit 1

-----

SOR

-----

G, S

Attr 5, bit 2

Attr 28, bit 2

SOR

Store Flags 1

G, S

N/A

Store Flags 2

G, S

N/A

Store Flags 3

N/A

G, S

N/A

Data Swap: (1 byte), Attribute 1, Instance 1, Class 100 (decimal). Data is
normally sent and entered as follows: Pax display value = 500000 (7A120h).
4 byte value sent would be 20 A1 07 00. Setting the data swap value to 1
would result in the data being sent as 00 07 A1 20. This attribute can only be
set to 0 or 1, all other values are ignored. The factory setting value is 0. Data
Byte is saved in EEPROM memory.
DIP Switch Values: (1 byte), Attribute 6, Instance 1, Class 100 (decimal).
Returns the dip switch setting. Switch 1 = LSB, 1 = on.
Polling Flags: (3 bytes) Attribute 3 - 5, Instance 1, Class 100 (decimal). The
DeviceNet card is continually requesting values from the PAX unit. The
polling flags determine what values are requested during each loop. Setting
the flags to “1” enables the card to poll that particular value. A “0” value
disables it. Turning polling flags off allows the card to request fewer values
and therefore decreases the internal loop time, which allows the values that
are polled to be updated more often.
TYPICAL UPDATE TIMES
PAX

PAXI/PAXCK/PAXDP

All values (10) – 1.00 sec
5 values – 500 msec
1 value – 100 msec

All values (19) – 750 msec
10 values – 430 msec
5 values – 230 msec
1 value – 52 msec

Store Flags: (3 bytes) Attribute 26 - 28, Instance 1, Class 100 (decimal). This
set of flags determines whether the attribute is stored to EEPROM when a Set
or Reset service code is executed. If the flag is 0, the value is not saved to
EEPROM memory in the PAX. If the flag is 1, the value is saved immediately
to EEPROM memory in the PAX. Factory setting is “on” for all Store Flags.
The attributes are grouped in blocks. Storing one attribute may cause others
to be stored. If an attribute is SET frequently, its store flag should be set to 0
to increase EEPROM life.

MANUAL MODE DESCRIPTION

(CSR) Control Status Register [16] (PAX)
The Control Status Register is used to directly control the meter’s outputs
(setpoints and analog output), or view the state of the setpoint outputs and the
status of the temperature sensor (PAXT only). The attribute is bit mapped with
each bit position within the attribute assigned to a particular control function.
The control functions are invoked by writing to each bit position. The bit
position definitions are:

⎫
⎬
⎭

If a Set Attribute is executed for any value, that value is automatically
updated to the latest value, regardless of whether the polling flag is on or off.
On power up, all values are updated regardless of Polling flag settings.
Polling flag values are saved in EEPROM memory. Factory settings is “on”
for all Polling flags.
See Meter Attribute Identification Chart for polling flags.

bit 0: SP1 Output
bit 5: Always stays 0, even if 1 is sent.
bit 1: SP2 Output
0 = output off bit 6: Sensor Status (PAXT only)
1 = output on
bit 2: SP3 Output
0 = sensor normal
bit 3: SP4 Output
1 = sensor fail
bit 4: Manual Mode
bit 7: Always stays 0, even if 1 is sent.
0 = automatic mode
1 = manual mode
In Manual Mode, the setpoint outputs are defined by the values written to bits
b0, b1, b2, b3; and the analog output is defined by the value written to the AOR.
Internal control of these outputs is then overridden. In automatic mode, the
setpoint outputs can only be reset off.
Example:
1. Select manual mode for all outputs:
Value to write to attribute 16: 0010h

946

POLLING

www.redlion.net

MANUAL MODE DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
(MMR) Auto/Manual Mode Register [23] (PAXI/PAXCK/PAXDP)

(AOR) Analog Output Register (Not PAXCK)

This attribute sets the controlling mode for the outputs. In Auto Mode (0) the
meter controls the setpoint output. In Manual Mode (1) the outputs are defined
by the attribute SOR. When transferring from auto mode to manual mode, the
meter holds the last output value (until the attribute is changed by a write). Each
output may be independently changed to auto or manual. Select values to place
in manual mode by writing appropriate value to attribute 23. The bit position
definitions are:

The Analog Output Register controls the analog output of the meter. The
manual mode must first be engaged by setting bit 4 of the CSR (PAX) or bit 0
of the MMR (PAXI). The range of values of this attribute is 0 to 4095, which
corresponds to 0 mA, 0 V and 20 mA, 10 V; respectively. If a value larger than
4095 is written to the AOR Attribute, 4095 will be loaded. The table lists
correspondence of the output signal with the attribute value.

PAXCK

PAXI/PAXDP
bit 0: Analog Output
bit 1: SP4
bit 2: SP3
bit 3: SP2
bit 4: SP1

⎫ 0 = Auto Mode
⎬ 1 = Manual Mode
⎭

bit 0: SP4
bit 1: SP3
bit 2: SP2
bit 3: SP1

⎫ 0 = Auto Mode
⎬ 1 = Manual Mode
⎭

Example:
1. Select manual mode for all outputs and AOR (PAXI, PAXDP):
Value to write to attribute 23: 001Fh

Attribute Value

0
1
2047
4094
4095

Output Signal*

I (mA)
0.000
0.005
10.000
19.995
20.000

V (V)

0.000
0.0025
5.000
9.9975
10.000

Writing to this attribute while the meter is in the manual mode causes the output
signal to update immediately. While in the automatic mode, this attribute may be
written to, but the output will not update until the meter is placed in manual mode.

(SOR) Setpoint Output Register [25] (PAXI/PAXCK/PAXDP)
This attribute is used to view or change the states of the setpoint outputs.
Reading from this attribute will show the present state of all the setpoint outputs.
A “0” in the setpoint location means the output is inactive and a “1” means the
output is active.
In Automatic Mode (See MMR Description), the meter controls the setpoint
output state. In Manual Mode, writing to this attribute will change the output
state. The bit position definitions are:
bit 0: SP1
bit 1: SP2
bit 2: SP3
bit 3: SP4

*Due to the absolute accuracy rating
and resolution of the output card, the
actual output signal may differ 0.15% FS
from the table values. The output signal
corresponds to the range selected (20 mA
or 10 V).

Examples:
1. Set output to full scale:
Value to write to attribute 15 (PAX) or attribute 24 (PAXI) - 0FFFh (4095).
2. Set output to zero scale:
Value to write to attribute 15 (PAX) or attribute 24 (PAXI) - 0000h (0).

⎫ 0 = Output off
⎬ 1 = Output on
⎭

Examples:
1. Turn all outputs on:
Value to write to attribute 25 - 000Fh.
2. Turn outputs 1, 3 on:
Value to write to attribute 25 - 0005h.
3. Turn all outputs off:
Value to write to attribute 25 - 0000h.

1-717-767-6511

947

MODEL PAXCDC -MODBUS OUTPUT OPTION CARD
DESCRIPTION
This product bulletin covers the MODBUS Communication Card for the PAX
Meters. The card will allow the PAX Meter to transmit Display Values,

Setpoints and Reset Values via MODBUS RS485 communication, in the RTU
and ASCII modes.

INSTALLING AN OPTION CARD

TOP VIEW

1. Remove the main assembly from the rear of the case. Squeeze the finger
holds on the rear cover, or use a small scewdriver to depress the side
latches to release it from the case. It is not necessary to separate the rear
cover from the main circuit card.
2. Locate the option card connector for the type of option card to be
installed. Hold the unit by the rear connector, not the display board, when
installing an option card.
3. Install the option card by aligning the option card connector with the slot
in the rear cover. The cards are keyed by position with different main
board connector locations. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the
tab on the option card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
4. Slide the assembly back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
5. Apply the option card label to the bottom side of the meter. Do not cover
the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of the case must be
clean for the label to adhere properly. Apply the label to the area
designated by the large case label.
6. See manual for wiring connections and programming procedures.

MODBUS SPECIFICATIONS
1. Type: RS485; RTU and ASCII MODBUS modes
2. Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 minute.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
3. Baud Rates: 300 to 38400.
4. Data: 7/8 bits
5. Parity: No, Odd, or Even
6. Addresses: 1 to 247.
7. Transmit Delay: Programmable; See Transmit Delay explanation.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL

PAXCDC

948

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

PAX MODBUS Output Card

PAXCDC40

PAX MODBUS Output Card with RJ11 Connector

PAXCDC4C

RS485 COMMUNICATIONS

RECEIVING DEVICE

PAX METER

The RS485 communication standard allows the connection of up to 32
devices on a single pair of wires, distances up to 4,000 ft. and data rates as high
as 10M baud (the PAX is limited to 19.2k baud). The same pair of wires is used
to both transmit and receive data. RS485 is therefore always half-duplex, that
is, data cannot be received and transmitted simultaneously.

+5V
33K

Transmit
Enable

12
13

B(-)

A(+)
(+)

33K

COMM. *

15 NC

* OPTIONAL

Terminal Block Connection Figure

Extended Comms Connection Figure

SERIAL SET-UP DIP SWITCH OPERATION

For the serial bank, the following settings apply:

Serial port configuration is accomplished through two banks of DIP switches
on the MODBUS card. The bank of 8 switches sets the Unit Address, the bank
of 7 switches sets the Serial port parameters (ASCII/RTU, 7/8 bits, Parity, and
Baud rate). Changes to the switch settings are only detected on power-up of the
unit. After changing a switch setting, power to the unit must be cycled for the
new switch setting to take effect.

SWITCH

SETTINGS AVAILABLE

FACTORY
SETTINGS

OFF: ASCII

ON: RTU

RTU

OFF: 7 Bits

ON: 8 Bits

8 Bits

OFF: None

ON: Parity

No Parity

OFF: Even

ON: Odd

Baud Rate

⎫
⎬
⎭

OFF

(See Baud Rate
Switch Selections)

9600

BAUD RATE SWITCH SELECTIONS
5

38400:

19200:

OFF

9600:

OFF

4800:

OFF

2400:

OFF

1200:

OFF

600:

OFF

300:

OFF

Both unit address and serial set-up are set via DIP switches on the MODBUS
option card. See the DIP switch setting table for more details on these
DIP switches.
For the Unit Address bank, the high order bit is switch 1, and the ON
position is a ‘1’, the OFF position is a ‘0’. Legal unit addresses are 1 to 247.
When a Unit Address of 0 is selected, the card responds to Unit Address 1.
When a Unit Address of 248 through 255 is selected, the card responds to Unit
Address 247.

1-717-767-6511

949

MODBUS SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
COIL FUNCTIONS

OTHER SUPPORTED FUNCTIONS
FC04:
Returns the same values as FC03, except the register number starts with “3”
(Ex: Pax Input Hi is 30001)

FC01: Read Coils
FC05: Force Single Coil, FC15: Force Multiple Coils.
1. Valid coil addresses are 1-49.
2. Block starting point can not exceed coil 49.

HOLD REGISTER FUNCTIONS
FC03: Read Holding Registers.
FC06: Preset Single Register, FC16: Preset Multiple Registers.
1. Valid register address are 40001 – 40039, 40041, 40042, 41001 – 41010.
2. Up to 16 registers can be requested at one time.
3. Block starting point can not exceed the register boundaries.
4. Holding registers are a mirror of Input registers (FC04).
5. Unused registers will return a value of HEX <8000>.
6. If a register is implemented, but does not exist for a particular unit
configuration (such as SP3, SP4) a value of HEX <0000> will be returned.
7. Registers 41001 – 41010 contain the slave ID. See FC17.
8. Broadcast write is supported for FC06 & FC16. Register writes using address
“0” will be recognized by the MODBUS card, regardless of address DIP
switch setting.

FC08 – Fetch Comm. Event Counter.
The MODBUS response breaks down as follows:
“:010804”XX
The “TOT HI” and “TOT LO” values are the total number of messages that
were received, that started with the card’s address. The “GOOD HI” and
“GOOD LO” are “good” messages (correct address, parity, and checksum). The
values are reset on power up and every time the FC08 function is requested.
FC17 - Report Slave ID.
The following is sent upon FC17 request:
Unit Address, 17 (FC code), RLC-PAX(I or ?) 00?0, 0100 (for code version
1.00), 16 (number of read supported registers), 16 (number of write
supported registers), 00 (number of registers available for GUID/Scratch pad
memory), checksum of the string.
The following is the HEX of a PAXI (with unit address of 247):
:<11><14><52><4C><43><2D><50><41><58><49><30><30><3F>
<30><01><00><00><10><00><10><00><00>
XX is the LRC Checksum

PAX MANUAL MODE DESCRIPTION

(CSR) Control Status Register [40021]

(SOR) Setpoint Output Register [40038] (PAXI/PAXCK)

The Control Status Register is used to directly control the meter’s outputs
(setpoints and analog output), or view the state of the setpoint outputs and the
status of the temperature sensor (PAXT only). The register is bit mapped with
each bit position within the register assigned to a particular control function. The
control functions are invoked by writing to each bit position. The bit position
definitions are:

This register is used to view or change the states of the setpoint outputs.
Reading from this register will show the present state of all the setpoint outputs.
A “0” in the setpoint location means the output is inactive and a “1” means the
output is active.
In Automatic Mode (See MMR Description), the meter controls the setpoint
output state. In Manual Mode, writing to this register will change the output
state. The bit position definitions are:

bit 0: SP1 Output
bit 1: SP2 Output
0 = output off
bit 2: SP3 Output
1 = output on
bit 3: SP4 Output
bit 4: Manual Mode
0 = automatic mode
1 = manual mode

⎫
⎬
⎭

bit 5: Always stays 0, even if 1 is sent.
bit 6: Sensor Status (PAXT only)
0 = sensor normal
1 = sensor fail
bit 7: Always stays 0, even if 1 is sent.

In Manual Mode, the setpoint outputs are defined by the values written to bits
b0, b1, b2, b3; and the analog output is defined by the value written to the AOR.
Internal control of these outputs is then overridden. In automatic mode, the
setpoint outputs can only be reset off.

(MMR) Auto/Manual Mode Register [40036] (PAXI/PAXCK)
This register sets the controlling mode for the outputs. In Auto Mode (0) the
meter controls the setpoint output. In Manual Mode (1) the outputs are defined
by the registers SOR. When transferring from auto mode to manual mode, the
meter holds the last output value (until the register is changed by a write). Each
output may be independently changed to auto or manual. Select values to place
in manual mode by writing appropriate value to holding register 40036. The bit
position definitions are:
bit 0: Analog Output
bit 1: SP4
bit 2: SP3
bit 3: SP2
bit 4: SP1

⎫ 0 = Auto Mode
⎬ 1 = Manual Mode
⎭

bit 0: SP4
bit 1: SP3
bit 2: SP2
bit 3: SP1

⎫ 0 = Auto Mode
⎬ 1 = Manual Mode
⎭

Examples:
1. Select manual mode for all outputs (PAX):
Value to write to holding register 40021: 0010h
2. Select manual mode for all outputs and AOR (PAXI, PAXCK):
Value to write to holding register 40036: 001Fh

950

⎫ 0 = Output off
⎬ 1 = Output on
⎭

Examples:
1. Turn all outputs on:
Value to write to holding register 40038: 000Fh.
2. Turn outputs 1, 3 on:
Value to write to holding register 40038: 0005h.
3. Turn all outputs off:
Value to write to holding register 40038: 0000h.

(AOR) Analog Output Register (Not PAXCK)
The Analog Output Register controls the analog output of the meter. The
manual mode must first be engaged by setting bit 4 of the CSR (PAX) or bit 0
of the MMR (PAXI). The range of values of this register is 0 to 4095, which
corresponds to 0 mA, 0 V and 20 mA, 10 V; respectively. If a value larger than
4095 is written to the AOR register, 4095 will be loaded. The table lists
correspondence of the output signal with the register value.
Register Value

PAXCK

PAXI

bit 0: SP1
bit 1: SP2
bit 2: SP3
bit 3: SP4

0
1
2047
4094
4095

Output Signal*

I (mA)
0.000
0.005
10.000
19.995
20.000

V (V)

0.000
0.0025
5.000
9.9975
10.000

*Due to the absolute accuracy rating and
resolution of the output card, the actual
output signal may differ 0.15% FS from
the table values. The output signal
corresponds to the range selected (20 mA
or 10 V).

Writing to this register while the meter is in the manual mode causes the output
signal to update immediately. While in the automatic mode, this register may be
written to, but the output will not update until the meter is placed in manual mode.
Examples:
1. Set output to full scale:
Value to write to holding register 40020 (PAX) or 40037 (PAXI): 0FFFh (4095).
2. Set output to zero scale:
Value to write to holding register 40020 (PAX) or 40037 (PAXI): 0000h (0).

www.redlion.net

HOLDING REGISTERS
Values less than 65,535 will be in (LO word). Values greater than 65,535 will
continue into (HI word). Negative values are represented by two’s complement
of the combined (HI word) and (LO word).
* See Coil Table for register mapping and Coil Descriptions for functionality.

SETTING

HOLDING
REGISTER

PAX 4

ACCESS

40001:

Input (HI)

Read Only

40002:

Input (LO)

Read Only

40003:

Total (HI)

Read Only

40004:

Total (LO)

Read Only

40005:

Min (HI)

Read Only

40006:

Min (LO)

Read Only

40007:

Max (HI)

Read Only

40008:

Max (LO)

Read Only

40009:

SP1 (HI)

Read/Write

40010:

SP1 (LO)

Read/Write

40011:

SP2 (HI)

Read/Write

40012:

SP2 (LO)

Read/Write

40013:

SP3 (HI)

Read/Write

40014:

SP3 (LO)

Read/Write

40015:

SP4 (HI)

Read/Write

40016:

SP4 (LO)

Read/Write

40017:

Polling1 *

Read/Write

40018:

Reset *

40019:

TRX Delay

40020:

AOR

Notes:
1. Any registers marked with “——” are unused and will return a value of HEX
<8000>.
2. If a value larger than 4095 is written to the AOR register, 4095 will be
loaded.
3. TRX delay is the minimum time from the reception of the last character in
the MODBUS Query until the response is started. The minimum delay value
is equal to 2 character times (2 msec min.). The user can increase the delay
time by writing to the TRX Delay register. Any value written to the TRX
Delay register that is less than the value calculated at power up will be
ignored. The TRX Delay value is stored in E2PROM memory. On power-up,
the calculated value is compared to the value read back from the E2PROM.
The greater of the 2 values will be used as the TRX Delay value and will be
written to the TRX Delay register.
4. Numeric data is limited to value -19999 to 99999.
5. Numeric data is limited to the value listed for that parameter according to the
meter’s literature.

Read/Write
3

Read/Write
Read/Write

40021:

CSR

Read/Write

40022:

Terminate1

Read/Write

HOLDING
REGISTER

SETTING

PAXCK/PAXTM 5

ACCESS

HOLDING
REGISTER

SETTING

PAXI 5

PAXCK/PAXTM 5

ACCESS

40001:

CTA (HI)

Timer (HI)

Read/Write

40023:

LDC (HI)

SP4 Off (HI)

Read/Write

40002:

CTA (LO)

Timer (LO)

Read/Write

40024:

LDC (LO)

SP4 Off (LO)

Read/Write

40003:

CTB (HI)

Counter (HI)

Read/Write

40025:

SP1 (HI)

Timer Start (HI)

Read/Write

40004:

CTB (LO)

Counter (LO)

Read/Write

40026:

SP1 (LO)

Timer Start (LO)

Read/Write

40005:

CTC (HI)

RTC Time (HI)

Read/Write

40027:

SP2 (HI)

Counter Start (HI)

Read/Write

SP2 (LO)

Counter Start (LO)

Read/Write

K
SETTING

40006:

CTC (LO)

RTC Time (LO)

Read/Write

40028:

40007:

RTE (HI)

RTC Date (HI)

Read/Write

40029:

SP3 (HI)

Timer Stop (HI)

Read/Write

40008:

RTE (LO)

RTC Date (LO)

Read/Write

40030:

SP3 (LO)

Timer Stop (LO)

Read/Write

40009:

Min (HI)

SP1 (HI)

Read/Write

40031:

SP4 (HI)

Counter Stop (HI)

Read/Write

40010:

Min (LO)

SP1 (LO)

Read/Write

40032:

SP4 (LO)

Counter Stop (LO)

Read/Write

40011:

Max (HI)

SP2 (HI)

Read/Write

40033:

Polling1 *

Read/Write

40012:

Max (LO)

SP2 (LO)

Read/Write

40034:

Polling2 *

40013:

SFA (HI)

SP3 (HI)

Read/Write

40035:

TRX Delay
MMR
AOR

TRX Delay

Read/Write
3

Read/Write

40014:

SFA (LO)

SP3 (LO)

Read/Write

40036:

40015:

SFB (HI)

SP4 (HI)

Read/Write

40037:

40016:

SFB (LO)

SP4 (LO)

Read/Write

40038:

SOR

Read/Write

40017:

SFC (HI)

SP1 Off (HI)

Read/Write

40039:

Reset *

Read/Write

40018:

SFC (LO)

SP1 Off (LO)

Read/Write

40040:

MMR

Read/Write

RTC Day

Read/Write

40019:

LDA (HI)

SP2 Off (HI)

Read/Write

40041:

Terminate1

Read/Write

40020:

LDA (LO)

SP2 Off (LO)

Read/Write

40042:

Terminate2

Read/Write

40021:

LDB (HI)

SP3 Off (HI)

Read/Write

40022:

LDB (LO)

SP3 Off (LO)

Read/Write

1-717-767-6511

951

COIL TABLE
PAX

PAXI

PAXCK

COIL ADDRESS

COIL NUMBER

SP1 Output

40021 (bit 0)

SP1 Output

40038 (bit 0)

SP1 Output

40038 (bit 0)

SP2 Output

40021 (bit 1)

SP2 Output

40038 (bit 1)

SP2 Output

40038 (bit 1)

SP3 Output

40021 (bit 2)

SP3 Output

40038 (bit 2)

SP3 Output

40038 (bit 2)

SP4 Output

40021 (bit 3)

SP4 Output

40038 (bit 3)

SP4 Output

40038 (bit 3)

Reset Max

40018 (bit 2)

Reset Max

40039 (bit 2)

——-

Reset Min

40018 (bit 3)

Reset Min

40039 (bit 3)

——-

Reset CNT A

40039 (bit 7)

Reset Timer

40039 (bit 7)

——-

Reset CNT B

40039 (bit 6)

Reset Counter

40039 (bit 6)

——-

Reset CNT C

40039 (bit 5)

——-

Reset Total

40018 (bit 4)

——-

Poll Input

40017 (bit 0)

Poll CNT A

40033 (bit 0)

Poll Timer

40033 (bit 0)

Poll Total

40017 (bit 1)

Poll CNT B

40033 (bit 1)

Poll Counter

40033 (bit 1)

Poll Max

40017 (bit 2)

Poll MAX

40033 (bit 2)

Poll SP2

40033 (bit 2)

Poll Min

40017 (bit 3)

Poll MIN

40033 (bit 3)

Poll SP1

40033 (bit 3)

Poll SP1

40017 (bit 4)

Poll SP1

40033 (bit 4)

Poll Timer Start

40033 (bit 4)

Poll SP2

40017 (bit 5)

Poll SP2

40033 (bit 5)

Poll Counter Start

40033 (bit 5)

Poll SP3

40017 (bit 6)

Poll SP3

40033 (bit 6)

Poll Timer Stop

40033 (bit 6)

Poll SP4

40017 (bit 7)

Poll SP4

40033 (bit 7)

Poll Counter Stop

40033 (bit 7)

Poll AOR

40017 (bit 8)

Poll AOR

40033 (bit 8)

Poll Day

40033 (bit 8)

Poll CSR

40017 (bit 9)

Poll SOR

40033 (bit 9)

Poll SOR

40033 (bit 9)

Term Total

40022 (bit 0)

Poll CNT C

40033 (bit 10)

Poll RTC Time

40033 (bit 10)

Term Max

40022 (bit 1)

Poll RATE

40033 (bit 11)

Poll RTC Date

40033 (bit 11)

Term Min

40022 (bit 2)

Poll SFA

40033 (bit 12)

Poll SP3

40033 (bit 12)

Term SP1

40022 (bit 3)

Poll SFB

40033 (bit 13)

Poll SP4

40033 (bit 13)

Term SP2

40022 (bit 4)

Poll SFC

40033 (bit 14)

Poll SP1 Off

40033 (bit 14)

Term SP3

40022 (bit 5)

Poll LDA

40033 (bit 15)

Poll SP2 Off

40033 (bit 15)

Term SP4

40022 (bit 6)

Poll LDB

40034 (bit 0)

Poll SP3 Off

40034 (bit 0)

Term AOR

40022 (bit 7)

Poll LDC

40034 (bit 1)

Poll SP4 Off

40034 (bit 1)

Term CSR

40022 (bit 8)

Poll MMR

40034 (bit 2)

Poll MMR

40034 (bit 2)

Response Delay

40017 (bit 10)

Response Delay

40034 (bit 3)

Response Delay

40034 (bit 3)

——-

Term CNT A

40041 (bit 0)

Term Timer

40041 (bit 0)

——-

Term CNT B

40041 (bit 1)

Term Count

40041 (bit 1)

——-

Term CNT C

40041 (bit 2)

Term RTC Time

40041 (bit 2)

——-

Term Rate

40041 (bit 3)

Term RTC Date

40041 (bit 3)

——-

Term Min

40041 (bit 4)

Term SP1

40041 (bit 4)

——-

Term Max

40041 (bit 5)

Term SP2

40041 (bit 5)

——-

Term SFA

40041 (bit 6)

Term SP3

40041 (bit 6)

——-

Term SFB

40041 (bit 7)

Term SP4

40041 (bit 7)

——-

Term SFC

40041 (bit 8)

Term SP1 Off

40041 (bit 8)

——-

Term LDA

40041 (bit 9)

Term SP2 Off

40041 (bit 9)

——-

Term LDB

40041 (bit 10)

Term SP3 Off

40041 (bit 10)

——-

Term LDC

40041 (bit 11)

Term SP4 Off

40041 (bit 11)

——-

Term SP1

40041 (bit 12)

Term Time Start

40041 (bit 12)

——-

Term SP2

40041 (bit 13)

Term Count Start

40041 (bit 13)

——-

Term SP3

40041 (bit 14)

Term Time Stop

40041 (bit 14)

——-

Term SP4

40041 (bit 15)

Term Count Stop

40041 (bit 15)

——-

Term AOR

40042 (bit 0)

Term MMR

40042 (bit 0)

——-

Term MMR

40042 (bit 1)

Term Day

40042 (bit 1)

——-

Term SOR

40042 (bit 2)

Term SOR

40042 (bit 2)

952

COIL NAME

MIRROR REGISTER

COIL NAME

www.redlion.net

MIRROR REGISTER

COIL NAME

MIRROR REGISTER

COIL DESCRIPTIONS
Coils 1-4: Output Coils
These coils are used to read or change the states of the Setpoint Outputs.
To change the state of the output(s), the output(s) must be in manual mode.
Refer to the CSR or MMR/SOR registers in the Manual Mode Description
section.

Coils 5-10: Reset Coils
These coils are used to perform the Reset command for the values listed.
Forcing the coil “on” causes the appropriate value in the unit to be reset.
The coil is cleared after the command is executed, therefore, the coil value
read will always be 0 (zero).

Coils 11-29: Polling Coils
The MODBUS card is continually requesting values from the PAX unit. The
polling bit coils determine what values are requested during each loop.
Setting the coils to “1” enables the card to poll that particular value. A “0”
value disables it. Turning polling coils off allows the user to request fewer
values and therefore decreases the internal loop time, which allows the
values that are polled to be updated more often.

Coils 21-29 (PAX), Coils 31-49 (PAXI/PAXCK): Terminating
Coils
This set of coils determines what terminating character is sent to the PAX
meter when a write command is executed. If the flag is 0, a $ is used as the
terminating character and the value is not saved to E2PROM memory in
the PAX. If the flag is 1, an * is used as the terminating character and the
value is saved to E2PROM memory in the PAX.

Coil 30: Response Delay
When a write command is issued, the new value is written to the PAX. If
the coil is off, the MODBUS write response is not issued until the value is
read back from the PAX. For MODBUS reads, if a polling coil is off, the
response is not issued until the latest value is read back from the PAX. If
the coil is set “on” the MODBUS response is issued as soon the received
command is complete. The write coil is saved in E2PROM memory.
Factory setting is on.

If a MODBUS read is issued for any value, that value is automatically
updated to the latest value, regardless of whether the polling bit is on or
off. On power up, all values are updated regardless of Polling bit settings.
Polling coil values are saved in E2PROM memory. Factory settings is “on”
for all Polling coils.
TYPICAL UPDATE TIMES**
PAX

PAXI/PAXCK

All values (10) - 1.15 sec

All values (19) - 900 msec

5 values - 500 msec

10 values - 480 msec

1 value - 100 msec

5 values - 230 msec

1 value - 52 msec

**Update time is the typical time to update the internal memory provided no
MODBUS requests are incoming.

1-717-767-6511

953

MODEL PAXCDC - PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS OPTION CARD
z CONNECTS PAX METER TO PROFIBUS-DP NETWORK
z STANDARD 9-PIN D-SUB CONNECTOR INTERFACE
z CYCLIC I/O DATA TRANSMISSION, UP TO 84 BYTES IN/OUT
z OPERATING RANGE FROM 9.6 KBAUD TO 12 MBAUD WITH
AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE DETECTION
z STATION ADDRESS SET THROUGH ROTARY SWITCHES
z CONFIGURATION VIA SELECTION OF PRE-CONFIGURED
MODULES FOR ANALOG OR DIGITAL PAX METER TYPE
z FREEZE MODE AND SYNC MODE SUPPORTED
z DIAGNOSTIC LEDs INDICATE CARD STATUS
z PNO CERTIFIED, CONFORMANCE TESTED SLAVE DEVICE

DESCRIPTION

The PAX PROFIBUS-DP Communications Option Card provides a direct
connection for a PAX panel meter to a PROFIBUS-DP Network. This allows a
PROFIBUS Master device, such as a PLC, to control and monitor the operation
of the PAX meter. The meter functions as an intelligent PROFIBUS-DP Slave
device on the Network.
The PROFIBUS-DP Network connects through a 9-pin D-subminiature
female connector on the rear of the card. The card is installed in the PAX meter
using a slotted rear cover, allowing the PROFIBUS-DP Connector to extend
beyond the rear of the PAX case. Power for the card is provided internally from
the power supply of the PAX meter. The PROFIBUS-DP Network is isolated
from the control electronics on the card using high-speed optocouplers.
This fully featured communications card supports Automatic Baud Rate
Detection, with an operating range of 9.6 Kbaud up to 12 Mbaud. The Station
Address is set via rotary switches. The card’s address is read at power up.

Data Exchange with the Master device occurs through cyclic I/O data
transmission. The size of the I/O data block is determined by the selection of
pre-configured Modules for Analog or Digital PAX meter type. All data values
are in 32-bit integer format, Motorola byte ordering. The PROFIBUS-DP
protocol per EN 50170 is implemented using the Siemens SPC3 ASIC. Three
on-board Diagnostic LEDs indicate the status of Data Exchange (DATA), the
SPC3 Watchdog (WD) and DP State Machine (DP).

PNO Conformance and GSD File
The PAX PROFIBUS-DP Card is PNO certified, having passed the
conformance test for PROFIBUS-DP Slave devices, Certificate No. Z01170.
The PNO Identifier for this PROFIBUS device is 0x09D0. The functional
characteristics are described in GSD file REDL09D0.GSD. The GSD file and
PAX bitmap can be downloaded from the Red Lion Controls website.

SPECIFICATIONS
1. FIELDBUS TYPE: PROFIBUS-DP per standard EN 50170, implemented
with Siemens SPC3 ASIC
2. BUS INTERFACE: Isolated RS485 through 9-Pin D-Sub connector
3. NETWORK ISOLATION: 500 Vrms for 1 minute (50 V working) between
PROFIBUS-DP network and PAX Sensor & User Input commons. Not
isolated from other PAX option card commons.
4. POWER: Card powered internally by the PAX meter
5. OUTPUT POWER: +5 VDC @ 90 mA max. available on the D-Sub
connector pins 5 (GND) and 6 (+5 V)
6. BAUD RATES: 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud, Auto Baud Rate Detection
7. STATION ADDRESS: 0 to 125, set by rotary switches
8. SUPPORTED FUNCTIONS:
FREEZE Mode: Supported
SYNC Mode: Supported
FAIL SAFE Mode: Not Supported
EXTERNAL DIAGNOSTIC DATA: Not Supported
9. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
Installed Depth: 4.88" (124 mm) from the rear of the PAX bezel
Additional Height: 0.35" (9 mm) above the PAX case surface

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

PAXCDC

954

www.redlion.net

PAX PROFIBUS-DP Communications Card

PART NUMBER

PAXCDC50

INSTALLING AN OPTION CARD

TOP VIEW

Caution: The option and main circuit cards contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge static
charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.
Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter AND load circuits before
accessing the unit.
1. Remove the main assembly from the rear of the case. Squeeze the finger
holds on the rear cover, or use a small screwdriver to depress the side
latches to release it from the case. It is not necessary to separate the rear
cover from the main circuit card.
2. Locate the option card connector for the serial communication card.
Hold the unit by the rear cover, not the display board, when installing an
option card.
3. Install the option card by aligning the option card with the slot in the rear
cover. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the tab on the option
card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
4. Slide the assembly back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

DIAGNOSTIC LEDs

The PAX PROFIBUS-DP Card provides the PROFIBUS Network with
access to an Input Data Block (data written to the PROFIBUS Network from the
PAX) and an Output Data Block (data read from the PROFIBUS Network by
the PAX). Using an internal high speed protocol, the card scans each PAX
register in turn, continuously reading Input Data and only writing Output Data
on demand. The PAX registers are mapped into each Input and Output Data
Block, allowing the PROFIBUS Network read/write access to all the registers
in the PAX. The structure of these Data Blocks is described in more detail in
section Data Block Structure.
The Input Data and Output Data Blocks are updated at the end of each scan
of the host PAX Meter. In order to increase the rate that new data is made
available to the PROFIBUS Network, a scheme is employed that reduces the
number of registers polled by the card in each scan to only those that are
required in the application. This Polled Read Mask maps each bit to a PAX
register index which, when set, will force that register to be read from the PAX
Meter. This Polled Read Mask is defined as User Parameter Data and is
described in more detail in section Parameterization.
Due to the cyclic nature of data exchange in the PROFIBUS network
changing Output Data in a slave device, a scheme is employed that indicates
which registers need to be written to the PAX Meter. This Demand Write Mask
maps each bit to a register index which when set, will perform a “once only”
write from the Output Data Block to the PAX Meter. Clearing and re-setting the
bit in the Demand Write Mask will cause the value to be written again. The
Demand Write Mask is part of the Data Block structure and is described in detail
in section Demand Write and Store Request Masks.

Three LEDs indicate the status of the SPC3 DP Control State Machine (DP),
the Watchdog State Machine (WD) and the PROFIBUS-DP Data Exchange
State (DATA) as shown in Table 1. The LEDs are viewable through the vents on
the top of the PAX case.
Table 1 - LED Indication of PROFIBUS-DP Card Status
LED STATE

CARD STATUS

DP (Red)

WD (Green)

DATA (Red)

FLASHING

OFF

Bus Not Connected

OFF

FLASHING

OFF

Baud Rate Search

OFF

Baud Control

FLASHING

OFF

Waiting for Parameterization

OFF

Waiting for Configuration

OFF

Data Exchange

STATION ADDRESS
The station address is set using three rotary switches allowing the ID to be set
in standard decimal notation (e.g. address = 123 - SWC = 1, SWB = 2, SWA =
3). Valid addresses range from 0 to 125. If an address greater than 125 is set, the
card will default to a station address of 125.
Note: The card will not default to 125 if set for 999, this number is a special
test mode.

1-717-767-6511

955

PARAMETERIZATION

DATA EXCHANGE

The Polled Read Mask defines which PAX registers will be polled by the card
and therefore updated in the Input Data Block. The Polled Read Mask is a 32bit integer with each bit mapped to a PAX register index. The Polled Read Mask
is configured in the card by the Master sending a Parameterization telegram
with 4 bytes of User Parameter Data representing the Polled Read Mask, in
Motorola byte ordering.
Table 2 shows the User Parameter bytes representing the Polled Read Mask
and gives the default value and a typical example. The default Polled Read
Mask indicates PAX register index 0 will be updated in the Input Block. The
example Polled Read Mask indicates that PAX registers 0 and 8 will be updated
in the Input Block.
Table 2 - User Parameter Data

Demand Write and Store Request Masks

BYTE

DESCRIPTION

Polled Read Mask

DEFAULT

0x00

0x01

EXAMPLE

0x00

0x01

CONFIGURATION
The 2 basic PAX meter types are the Analog PAX (5-digit units) and the
Digital PAX (6-digit units). They differ in the number of registers available and
therefore the size of the Data Block required to map all the registers completely.
Each PAX register is represented as a 32-bit Integer requiring 2, 16-bit words or
4 bytes. Configuration of the Data Block is by the selection of pre-configured
modules, identified in the GSD file as “PAX Digital (6-digit)” and “PAX Analog
(5-digit)”, that correspond to the host PAX Meter type.

The Demand Write Mask defines how data is written to the PAX. The
Demand Write Mask is a 32-bit integer with each bit mapped to a PAX register
index. Setting a bit in the Demand Write Mask of the Output Data Block will
force the corresponding register to be written “once only” to the PAX. Clearing
and re-setting the bit will cause the value to be written again. The Demand Write
Mask is part of the Data Block structure.
The Write Service Status register in the Input Data Block reports when the
register has been written to the PAX by setting the corresponding bit. By
monitoring this register a PLC program can detect when the Output Data has
been serviced. The bit will be cleared in the Service Status register when the
corresponding bit is cleared in the Demand Write Mask.
The Store Mask defines how the written value is to be stored in the PAX. The
PAX meters have some values stored in EEPROM so they may power up in the
last saved state. For values that change often it is possible to exceed the life of
an EEPROM with repeated writes to the same address location - this method
inhibits writes to EEPROM. The Store Mask is a 32-bit integer with each bit
mapped to a PAX register index. Setting a bit will inhibit the corresponding
register from being saved to EEPROM.

Data Block Structure
Table 3 shows the Data Block Structure, consisting of the Write and Store
Masks and the individual PAX Data Registers. Each Data Register value is a 32bit Integer, with Motorola byte ordering. For the Analog PAX meters, the Data
Block size is 48 bytes Input, 48 bytes Output. For the PAXDP and the Digital
PAX meters, the Data Block size is 84 bytes Input, 84 bytes Output.

K
Table 3 - Data Block Structure
PAX ANALOG
INPUT METER
(5-Digit)

PAXDP ANALOG
INPUT METER
(5-Digit)

PAXI DIGITAL
COUNT / RATE
(6-Digit)

DATA BLOCK
BYTES

1-4

5-8

9 - 12

Input *

Input A (relative)

Count A

Timer

13 - 16

Total *

Input B (relative)

Count B

Counter

17 - 20

Max. Input *

Calculation

Count C

RTC Time

21 - 24

Min. Input *

Total

Rate

RTC Date

25 - 28

Setpoint 1

Min Input

Min. Rate

Setpoint 1

29 - 32

Setpoint 2

Max Input

Max. Rate

Setpoint 2

33 - 36

Setpoint 3

Input A (absolute)

Scale Factor A

Setpoint 3

37 - 40

Setpoint 4

Input B (absolute)

Scale Factor B

Setpoint 4

41 - 44

AOR **

Input A (offset)

Scale Factor C

Setpoint Off 1

Demand Write Mask (Output) / Service Status (Input)
Store Mask (Output) / Unused (Input)

45 - 48

CSR **

Input B (offset)

Count Load A

Setpoint Off 2

49 -52

----

***

Count Load B

Setpoint Off 3

53 - 56

----

***

Count Load C

Setpoint Off 4

57 - 60

----

Setpoint 1

Timer Start

61 - 64

----

Setpoint 2

Counter Start

65 - 68

----

Setpoint 3

Timer Stop

69 - 72

----

Setpoint 4

Counter Stop

73 - 76

----

MMR **

77 - 80

----

AOR **

RTC Day

81 - 84

----

SOR **

* Indicates Read-Only parameters. All other parameters are Read/Write.
** Indicates PAX Manual Mode Registers. See next section for description.
*** Indicates bit value must not be set in the Parameterization polled read masks.

956

PAXCK DIGITAL
CLOCK / TIMER
(6-Digit)

www.redlion.net

PAX MANUAL MODE REGISTERS
CSR - Control Status Register (PAX Analog Only)

(AOR) Analog Output Register (Not applicable to PAXCK)

The Control Status Register is used to directly control the meter’s outputs
(setpoints and analog output), or view the state of the setpoint outputs and the
status of the temperature sensor (PAXT only). The CSR register is bit mapped,
with the bit positions of the least-significant byte assigned to specific control
functions. The control functions are invoked by writing to the appropriate bit
position. The bit position definitions are:

The Analog Output Register value defines the signal level of the meter’s
analog output. The range of values for this register is 0 to 4095 (0FFFh), which
corresponds to the analog output signal ranges shown in Table 4.

bit 0: Setpoint 1 Output
0 = output off
bit 1: Setpoint 2 Output
1 = output on
bit 2: Setpoint 3 Output
bit 3: Setpoint 4 Output
bit 4: Auto/Manual Mode
0 = automatic mode
1 = manual mode

⎫
⎬
⎭

bit 5: Unused (always stays 0)
bit 6: Sensor Status (PAXT only)
0 = sensor normal
1 = sensor fail
bit 7: Unused (always stays 0)

Setting bit 4 of the CSR selects Manual Mode. In this mode, the setpoint
outputs are defined by the values written to bits b0, b1, b2, b3; and the analog
output is defined by the value written to the Analog Output Register (AOR).
Internal control of these outputs is then overridden.
In Automatic Mode, the setpoint outputs can only be Reset off. The contents
of the CSR may be read to interrogate the state of the setpoint outputs and to
check the status of the temperature sensor (PAXT only).

Table 4 - Analog Output Signal Ranges
Output Signal*

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

0.000

4.000

0.000

0.005

4.004

0.0025

2047

10.000

12.000

5.000

4094
4095

19.995
20.000

19.996
20.000

9.9975
10.000

0-10 V

*Due to the absolute accuracy
rating and resolution of the
output card, the actual output
signal may differ 0.15% FS from
the table values. The output
signal corresponds to the range
selected (0-20 mA or 0-10 V).

In Automatic mode, the meter controls the analog output signal level.
Reading the AOR will show the present value of the analog output signal. While
in Automatic mode, this register may be written to, but it has no effect until the
analog output is placed in the Manual mode.
In Manual mode, writing to the AOR causes the analog output signal level to
update per the value written. Manual mode is engaged by setting bit 4 of the
CSR (PAX Analog meter) or bit 0 of the MMR (PAXDP/PAXI). If a value larger
than 4095 is written to the AOR, 4095 will be loaded.

MMR - Auto/Manual Mode Register (PAXDP/PAXI/PAXCK)
This register sets the controlling mode for each output in the PAX meters.
Each output may be independently changed to Auto or Manual mode. The MMR
register is bit mapped, with the bit positions of the least-significant byte
assigned to specific outputs. Auto or Manual mode is selected by writing to the
appropriate bit position. The bit position definitions are:
PAXDP/PAXI

PAXCK

bit 0: Analog Output
bit 1: Setpoint 4 Output
bit 2: Setpoint 3 Output
bit 3: Setpoint 2 Output
bit 4: Setpoint 1 Output

bit 0: Setpoint 4 Output
bit 1: Setpoint 3 Output
bit 2: Setpoint 2 Output
bit 3: Setpoint 1 Output

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
Installation Clearance Required - In Inches (mm)

0 = Auto Mode, 1 = Manual Mode
In Auto Mode (0) the meter controls the setpoint output state and the Analog
Output (PAXDP/PAXI only). In Manual Mode (1) the setpoint outputs are
defined by the value in the Setpoint Output Register (SOR); and the Analog
Output is defined by the value written to the Analog Output Register (AOR).
When transferring from Auto Mode to Manual Mode, the meter holds the last
output value (until the register is changed by a write).

SOR - Setpoint Output Register (PAXDP/PAXI/PAXCK)
The Setpoint Output Register is used to view or change the states of the
setpoint outputs in the PAX meters. Reading this register will show the present
state of all the setpoint outputs. A “0” means the output is inactive and a “1”
means the output is active.
In Auto Mode (see MMR description), the meter controls the setpoint output
state. In Manual Mode, the four least-significant bits of the SOR are assigned to
specific outputs. Writing to the appropriate bit position defines the state of the
setpoint output. The bit position definitions are:
bit 0: Setpoint 4 Output Status
bit 1: Setpoint 3 Output Status
bit 2: Setpoint 2 Output Status
bit 3: Setpoint 1 Output Status

⎫
⎬
⎭

PROFIBUS-DP Network Connection
PROFIBUS plug connectors such as Siemens 6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 are
recommended. When wiring the connector, be sure to observe the proper
direction for data flows, indicated by the arrows on the connector. When the
PAX meter is the last device on the network, set the terminating resistor switch
on the connector to the “ON” position.

0 = Output Off
1 = Output On

1-717-767-6511

957

MODEL PAXCDS -SETPOINT OUTPUT PLUG-IN OPTION CARDS
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin serves as a guide for the installation, configuration and
operation of PAX Setpoint cards. The setpoint cards are available as dual relay,
quad relay, quad sourcing transistor, or quad sinking transistor outputs. Only
one setpoint card can be installed at a time.

The PAX meter can be fitted with up to three option cards. The slot bays of
the option cards are dedicated to a particular card function. The option card
functions are: serial communications, analog output and setpoint output. Only
one card from each function category can be installed.

INSTALLING AN OPTION CARD
Caution: The option and main circuit cards contain static
sensitive components. Before handling the cards, discharge
static charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal
object. Ideally, handle the cards at a static controlled clean
workstation. Also, only handle the cards by the edges. Dirt, oil or
other contaminants that may contact the cards can adversely
affect circuit operation.

TOP VIEW

Warning: Exposed line voltage exists on the circuit boards.
Remove all power to the meter AND load circuits before
accessing the unit.

1. Remove the main assembly from the rear of the case. Squeeze the finger
holds on the rear cover, or use a small screwdriver to depress the side
latches to release it from the case. It is not necessary to separate the rear
cover from the main circuit card.
2. Locate the option card connector for the type of option card to be
installed. Hold the unit by the rear connector, not the display board, when
installing an option card.
3. Install the option card by aligning the option card connector with the slot
in the rear cover. The cards are keyed by position with different main
board connector locations. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the
tab on the option card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
4. Slide the assembly back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
5. Apply the option card label to the bottom side of the meter. Do not cover
the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of the case must
be clean for the label to adhere properly. Apply the label to the area
designated by the large case label.

PAX REAR TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

958

www.redlion.net

SPECIFICATIONS

Sinking Output Logic Card

Setpoint Output Cards: Four types of field installable cards
Response Time: 200 msec. max. to within 99% of final readout value
(digital filter and internal zero correction disabled)700 msec. max.
(digital filter disabled, internal zero correction enabled)
PAXH only: 1 sec. max. to within 99% of final readout value (digital
filter disabled)
PAXT only: 200 msec. typ.; 700 msec max. (digital filter disabled)
PAXH Isolation For All Four Cards:
Isolation To Sensor Common: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 125 V
Isolation To User Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V
Dual Relay Card: PAXCDS10
Type: Two FORM-C relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2000 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 V
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 5 amps @ 120/240 VAC or 28 VDC (resistive
load), 1/8 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total Current With Both Relays Energized not to exceed 5 amps
Life expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC
snubber extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Quad Relay Card: PAXCDS20
Type: Four FORM-A relays
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 2300 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 250 V
Contact Rating:
One Relay Energized: 3 amps @ 250 VAC or 30 VDC (resistive load),
1/10 HP @120 VAC, inductive load
Total Current With All Four Relays Energized not to exceed 4 amps
Life Expectancy: 100 K cycles min. at full load rating. External RC
snubber extends relay life for operation with inductive loads
Quad Sinking Open Collector: PAXCDS30
Type: Four isolated sinking NPN transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: 100 mA max @ VSAT = 0.7 V max. VMAX = 30 V
Quad Sourcing Open Collector: PAXCDS40
Type: Four isolated sourcing PNP transistors.
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not Isolated from all other commons.
Rating: Internal supply: 24 VDC ± 10% , 30 mA max. total all four
External supply: 30 VDC max., 100 mA max each output

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL

PAXCDS

DESCRIPTION

Sourcing Output Logic Card
(Internal Supply)

Sourcing Output Logic Card
(External Supply)

Quad Sourcing Open Collector Output Card Supply Select

For Quad Sourcing Plug-in Card (PAXCDS40), set the jumper for internal or
external supply operation before applying power.

PART NUMBER

Dual Relay Output Card

PAXCDS10

Quad Relay Output Card

PAXCDS20

Quad Sinking Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS30

Quad Sourcing Open Collector Output Card

PAXCDS40

MODULE 6 - Setpoint (Alarm) Parameters (

)

PARAMETER MENU

SETPOINT SELECT

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display.

Parameter

ª
Selection/Value

Factory Settings are shown.

SP-1
SP-3

SP-2
SP-4

Enter the setpoint (alarm output) to be programmed. The in
the following parameters will reflect the chosen setpoint number. After
the chosen setpoint is completely programmed, the display will return to
. Repeat step for each setpoint to be programmed. The
chosen at
will return to
. The number of setpoints available
is setpoint output card dependent.

1-717-767-6511

959

SETPOINT ACTION

SETPOINT VALUE

OFF Ab-HI Ab-LO AU-HI
« dE-HI
dE-LO bANd totLo

AU-LO
totHI

Enter the action for the selected setpoint (alarm output). See
Setpoint Alarm Figures for a visual detail of each action.
=

Setpoint always off, (returns to SPSEL NO)

Absolute high, with balanced hysteresis

Absolute low, with balanced hysteresis

Absolute high, with unbalanced hysteresis

Absolute low, with unbalanced hysteresis

Deviation high, with unbalanced hysteresis *

Deviation low, with unbalanced hysteresis *

Outside band, with unbalanced hysteresis *

Lower Totalizer absolute high, unbalance hysteresis**

Upper Totalizer absolute high, unbalance hysteresis**

«
ª

Setpoint Alarm Figures
With reverse output logic

99999

Enter desired setpoint alarm value. These setpoint values can
also be entered in the Display Mode during Program Lockout when the setpoint is programmed as
in Parameter
Module 3. When a setpoint is programmed as deviation or
band acting, the associated output tracks
as it is changed.
The value entered is the offset, or difference from
.

HYSTERESIS VALUE

65000

Enter desired hysteresis value. See Setpoint Alarm Figures
for visual explanation of how setpoint alarm actions (balance
and unbalance) are affected by the hysteresis. When the
setpoint is a control output, usually balance hysteresis is
used. For alarm applications, usually unbalanced hysteresis
is used. For unbalanced hysteresis modes, the hysteresis
functions on the low side for high acting setpoints and
functions on the high side for low acting setpoints.

* Deviation and band action setpoints are relative to the value of setpoint 1.
It is not possible to configure setpoint 1 as deviation or band actions. It is
possible to use setpoint 1 for an absolute action, while its value is being used
for deviation or band.
** The lower Totalizer action
allows setpoints to function off of the
lower 5 digits of the Totalizer. The upper Totalizer action
allows
setpoints to function off of the upper 4 digits of the Totalizer. To obtain
absolute low alarms for the Totalizer, program the
or
output
logic as reverse.

-19999

Note: Hysteresis eliminates output chatter at the switch
point, while time delay can be used to prevent false
triggering during process transient events.

, the below alarm states are opposite.

Absolute High Acting (Balanced Hys) =

Ab-HI

Absolute Low Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =

Absolute Low Acting (Balanced Hys) =

Ab-Lo

Deviation High Acting (SP > 0) =

dE-HI

Deviation High Acting (SP < 0) =

dE-HI

Absolute High Acting (Unbalanced Hys) =
This is also for Totalizer alarms:
,

AU-HI

Deviation Low Acting (SP > 0) =

dE-Lo

Deviation Low Acting (SP < 0)=

dE-Lo

960

www.redlion.net

AU-Lo

Band Outside Acting =

bANd

ON TIME DELAY

0.0

SETPOINT ANNUNCIATORS

3275.0 Sec

Enter the time value in seconds that the alarm is delayed
from turning on after the trigger point is reached. A value of
0.0 allows the meter to update the alarm status per the
response time listed in the Specifications. When the output
logic is
, this becomes off time delay. Any time
accumulated at power-off resets during power-up.

«
ª

OFF TIME DELAY

«
ª

0.0

OFF

nor

rEv

FLASH

The

mode disables display setpoint annunciators. The
mode displays the corresponding setpoint annunciators
of “on” alarm outputs. The
mode displays the
corresponding setpoint annunciators of “off” alarms
outputs. The
mode flashes the corresponding
setpoint annunciators of “on” alarm outputs.

PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION (PAXT ONLY)

3275.0 Sec

Enter the time value in seconds that the alarm is delayed
from turning off after the trigger point is reached. A value of
0.0 allows the meter to update the alarm status per the
response time listed in the Specifications. When the output
logic is
, this becomes on time delay. Any time
accumulated at power-off resets during power-up.

OFF

Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a
temperature probe failure, the alarm output can be
programmed to go on or off.

OUTPUT LOGIC

«
ª

nor

rEv

Enter the output logic of the alarm output. The
logic
leaves the output operation as normal. The
logic
reverses the output logic. In
, the alarm states in the
Setpoint Alarm Figures are reversed.

RESET ACTION

«
ª

Auto

LAtC1

LAtC2

Enter the reset action of the alarm output.
= Automatic action; This action allows the alarm
output to automatically reset off at the trigger points per the
Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Alarm Figures. The “on”
alarm may be manually reset (off) immediately by a front
panel function key or user input.The alarm remains reset off
until the trigger point is crossed again.
= Latch with immediate reset action; This action
latches the alarm output on at the trigger point per the
Setpoint Action shown in Setpoint Alarm Figures. Latch
means that the alarm output can only be turned off by front
panel function key or user input manual reset, serial reset
command or meter power cycle. When the user input or
function key is activated (momentary or maintained), the
corresponding “on” alarm output is reset immediately and
remains off until the trigger point is crossed again.
(Previously latched alarms will be off if power up Display
Value is lower than setpoint value.)
= Latch with delay reset action; This action latches
the alarm output on at the trigger point per the Setpoint
Action shown in Setpoint Alarm Figures. Latch means that
the alarm output can only be turned off by front panel
function key or user input manual reset, serial reset
command or meter power cycle. When the user input or
function key is activated (momentary or maintained), the
meter delays the event until the corresponding “on” alarm
output crosses the trigger off point. (Previously latched
alarms are off if power up Display Value is lower than
setpoint value. During a power cycle, the meter erases a
previous Latch 2 reset if it is not activated at power up.)

Setpoint Alarm Reset Actions

Alternate Setpoints

An Alternate list of setpoint values can be stored and recalled as needed. The
Alternate list allows an additional set of setpoint values. (The setpoint numbers
nor rear terminal numbers will change in the Alternate list.) The Alternate list
can only be activated through a function key or user input programmed for
in Module 2. When the Alternate list is selected, the Main list is stored and
becomes inactive. When changing between Main and Alternate, the alarm state
of Auto Reset Action alarms will always follow their new value. Latched “on”
alarms will always stay latched during the transition and can only be reset with
a user input or function key. Only during the function key or user input
transition does the display indicate which list is being used.

STANDBY OPERATION

«
ª

YES

When
, the alarm is disabled (after a power up) until the
trigger point is crossed. Once the alarm is on, the alarm
operates normally per the Setpoint Action and Reset Mode.

1-717-767-6511

961

MODEL PAXCDL -ANALOG OUTPUT PLUG-IN OPTION CARD
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin serves as a guide for the installation, configuration and
operation of the PAX® Analog Output card. The analog output can be
configured for 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0-10 VDC. Only one range can be
used at a time.

The PAX® meter can be fitted with up to three optional plug-in cards. The
slot bays of the plug-in cards are dedicated to a particular card function. The
plug-in card functions are: serial communications, analog output and setpoint
output. Only one card from each function category can be installed.

INSTALLING AN OPTION CARD

TOP VIEW

1. Remove the main assembly from the rear of the case. Squeeze the finger
holds on the rear cover, or use a small screwdriver to depress the side
latches to release it from the case. It is not necessary to separate the rear
cover from the main circuit card.
2. Locate the option card connector for the type of option card to be
installed. Hold the unit by the rear connector, not the display board, when
installing an option card.
3. Install the option card by aligning the option card connector with the slot
bay in the rear cover. The cards are keyed by position with different main
board connector locations. Be sure the connector is fully engaged and the
tab on the option card rests in the alignment slot on the display board.
4. Slide the assembly back into the case. Be sure the rear cover latches fully
into the case.
5. Apply the option card label to the bottom side of the meter. Do not cover
the vents on the top surface of the meter. The surface of the case must
be clean for the label to adhere properly. Apply the label to the area
designated by the large case label.

SPECIFICATIONS
Analog Output Card

Types: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 10 VDC
Isolation To Sensor & User Input Commons: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V. Not isolated from all other commons.
PAXH Only:
Isolation To Sensor Common: 1400 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 125 V
Isolation To User Input Common: 500 Vrms for 1 min.
Working Voltage: 50 V
Accuracy: 0.17% of FS (18 to 28°C); 0.4% of FS (0 to 50°C)
Resolution: 1/3500
Compliance:
10 VDC: 10 KΩ load min.
20 mA: 500 Ω load max. (self-powered)
Update Time: 200 msec. max. to within 99% of final readout value (digital
filter and internal zero correction disabled)
700 msec. max. (digital filter disabled, internal zero correction enabled)
PAXH only: 1 sec. max. to within 99% of final readout value (digital filter
disabled)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PAXCDL

962

www.redlion.net

DESCRIPTION

Analog Output Card

PART NUMBER

PAXCDL10

MODULE 8 - Analog Output Parameters (

)

PARAMETER MENU

ANALOG LOW SCALE VALUE

Indicates Program Mode Alternating Display.

Parameter

Selection/Value

-19999 to 99999
Enter the Display Value that corresponds to 0 mA (0-20
mA) , 4 mA (4-20 mA) or 0 VDC (0-10 VDC).

Factory Settings are shown.

ANALOG HIGH SCALE VALUE

ANALOG TYPE

SELECTION

RANGE

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

-19999 to 99999
Enter the Display Value that corresponds to 20 mA (0-20
mA) , 20 mA (4-20 mA) or 10 VDC (0-10 VDC).

0 to 10 V

Enter the analog output type. For 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
use terminals 18 and 19. For 0-10 V use terminals 16 and
17. Only one range can be used at a time.

InP

«
ª

ANALOG ASSIGNMENT

ANALOG UPDATE TIME

0.0 to 10.0
Enter the analog output update rate in seconds. A value
of 0.0 allows the meter to update the analog output at a
rate of 20/sec.

tot

Enter the source for the analog output to retransmit:
InP = Display Input Value
HI = Maximum Display Input Value
LO = Minimum Display Input Value
tot = Totalize Display Value

PROBE BURN-OUT ACTION (PAXT ONLY)

«
ª

1-717-767-6511

Enter the probe burn-out action. In the event of a
temperature probe failure, the analog output can be
programmed for low or high scale.

963

INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS OF ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS &
CONTROLS, IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENTS

spike, several times the supply voltage, is generated every time the output is
turned off. This noise spike, in addition to physically degrading the relay
contact, can radiate off the output lines and into more sensitive areas of the
instrument. The surest way to alleviate this situation is to suppress the noise
spike. It is best to do it at the noise source (See Fig. 2), to prevent noise
currents from flowing in the output lines. There are several ways to do this.
If it is a DC device, then either a diode or a M.O.V. (Metal Oxide Varistor)
can be placed across the device to suppress it. The greater the current load
of the device, the higher wattage diode required. If it is an AC load, then a
M.O.V. or capacitor and resistor in series can be used. It can be seen that the
output lines can be noise sources and as such should be kept away from the
instrument’s own input lines, as well as the input lines of other instruments.
In addition to the foregoing considerations, care should be taken when
connecting input and output returns to the instrument’s common. When
separate input and output commons are provided, they should not be mixed.
When an output device return is connected to an input common (See Fig. 4),
the output current will flow in the input common line. This will cause a noise
voltage to be present, which can affect the operation of the instrument.
In summary, it is much easier to eliminate problems when building up a
system than after it is installed.

Most electronic equipment designed for use in industrial environments has
a high degree of noise immunity and protection against damage. But even the
best can experience difficulties in operation if certain minimal considerations
are not adhered to when installing the equipment. When relay contacts are
used to switch inductive loads, such as auxiliary relays or solenoids, extremely
large voltage spikes can be generated when the relay contact opens, these
voltage spikes can cause pitting of the relay’s contacts, thereby reducing its
usable life.
The internal functioning components of an electronic instrument operate on
a low DC voltage, generally 5 V, and respond to signals as low as 1 V or less.
In contrast, stray voltage spikes in excess of 100 V and sometimes thousands
of volts can be detected in the industrial environment. These voltage spikes
can be coupled from power lines that are powering equipment that contains
S.C.R. circuitry, or in other ways causes rapid load changes on the AC line.
These spikes can also be coupled from lines that are actuating AC or DC
solenoids or actuators. In other words, any wiring in an industrial application
should be considered a potential noise source.
How can these noise spikes get into the instrument? There are three major
ways that noise spikes can enter the instrument.
1. Noise can enter directly, via the AC power input. It is recommended that
electronic instruments be connected to a relatively clean source of power. If
this cannot be accomplished, there are means of suppressing noise or
isolating the instrument from the noise. These consist of everything from
simple inductive load suppressors (M.O.V.’s) to constant voltage isolation
transformers, depending on the severity of power line disturbance.
2. Noise can enter via the input leads. Here, there are two modes (See Fig. 1)
by which the noise can enter. Normal mode, which means the noise enters
on the input lead, with respect to the instrument common; and common
mode, which means the noise enters on both the input and the instrument
common with respect to earth ground (power line neutral). It is
recommended that sensor input and control input wiring not be run in the
same conduit or raceways with power lines or current carrying control lines.
It is also recommended that these lines be kept away from inductive loads
such as motors, solenoids, relays and contactors. For best results, it is
recommended that two-conductor shielded cable be used to connect these
inputs. The shield should be connected to the input common at the
instrument only. In addition, the input common should only be connected to
machine ground (earth) at one point, preferably a direct connection to the
input common terminal.
3. The third way noise can enter the instrument is via the output lines. This is
one of the most overlooked sources of trouble. When an output is driving
an inductive load, such as solenoids, contactors, or relays; a large noise

NORMAL MODE

COMMON MODE

Figure 1

NOISE SUPPRESSED AT LOAD

NOISE SUPPRESSED AT INSTRUMENT

Figure 2

DC DEVICE

AC DEVICE

IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTIONS

Figure 4
Figure 3

964

www.redlion.net

MODEL FCOR - FERRITE SUPPRESSION CORE
DESCRIPTION
This Ferrite suppression core is packaged in a nylon case ready to clamp on
a single cable or several cables connecting to electronic equipment. The
purpose of the core is to attenuate conducted Electro-Magnetic Interference
(EMI) in the 25 MHz to 200 MHz range. Increasing the number of cable turns
through the core increases the impedance of the core. A higher impedance
results in greater EMI attenuation.
Placing more than one core on a cable increases the impedance at a slower
rate than adding turns to one core. The impedance for multiple cores is equal to
the sum of each core’s impedance. For a given application, start with a single
core using 2 turns. Add additional turns or additional cores as necessary.
Note: Increasing the number of turns beyond two will tend to degrade
performance at higher frequencies (see Specifications).
Place the cores on the cables as close to the equipment as possible unless the
equipment is mounted in a shielded enclosure and the source of the EMI is from
outside the enclosure. In this case, place the cores on the cable just inside or
outside the entry point of the enclosure.

APPLICATION

Ferrite core used for suppressing common--mode noise.
IN = Common-mode Noise Current
ZL = Load Impedance
VS = Signal Voltage
VN = Common-mode Noise Voltage

SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAX. CABLE DIAMETER: 0.390" (9.9 mm)
2. IMPEDANCE (OHMS):
# OF TURNS

25 MHz MIN.

100 MHz ±20%

1
2
4

110
440
1760

225
900
1000

# OF TURNS = The number of times the cable passes through the core.

3. WEIGHT: 0.63 oz. (18 g)

DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)”

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

FCOR

Ferrite Suppression Core

FCOR0000

1-717-767-6511

965

INDUCTIVE LOAD SUPPRESSOR
DESCRIPTION
These devices, when installed across an inductive load, such as a contactor,
solenoid or relay, will suppress transient surges during a switching. This will
enhance relay life and provide increased reliability of operation.
There are two devices available, one for use in 115 volt circuits and one for
use in 230 volt circuits.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Fully slide PVC insulating tubing over Model ILS leads, as shown.
Caution: Ensure VAC is “OFF” before installing Model ILS.

MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ILS1

115 VAC Inductive Load Suppressor

ILS11500

ILS2

230 VAC Inductive Load Suppressor

ILS23000

ILS SPECIFICATIONS *

AC VOLTS

DC VOLTS

RATED PEAK
SINGLE PULSE
TRANSIENT CURRENT (AMPS)

ILS1

130

175

6500

1.0

340 V @ 100 A

ILS2

275

370

6500

150

1.0

710 V @ 100 A

DEVICE MODEL
NUMBER

RATED VOLTAGE

SINGLE PULSE
TRANSIENT
ENERGY JOULES

POWER DISSIPATION CLAMPING VOLTAGE
WATTS
VOLTS

*NOTE: These devices will suppress most transient surges. However, if the device heats up or stops functioning after a short period of time a higher joules rated device may be required.

966

www.redlion.net

R-C SNUBBER NOISE AND ARC SUPPRESSOR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The R-C Snubber is intended to suppress the “inductive kick” from motors,
solenoids or relay coils. High energy noise spikes are generated whenever
current is interrupted through an inductive load. These noise spikes may
interfere with associated equipment causing erratic operation and may also
accelerate relay contact wear. Applied across an inductive load, the R-C
snubber suppresses the noise spikes and extends contact life.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
[All Dimensions are nominal]

SPECIFICATIONS

1. R-C Value: 0.1 μf, 47 Ω 1/2 Watt (±30%)
2. Max. Line Voltage: 250 V rms or 250 VDC
3. Frequency: DC to 62 Hz
4. Peak Pulse Voltage: 1200 V max.
UL recognized component
(Okaya Electric America, Inc. PN# XEB0471, UL-1414, File # E47474)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

SNUB

R-C Snubber Inductive Load Suppressor

SNUB0000

APPLICATION
The R-C snubber inductive load suppressor should be applied as shown
below. Placing the suppressor across the contact in many cases can work
as well, but for maximum effect, it is best to place the suppressor directly

across the load. All inductive loads in a system should be suppressed in
this manner to avoid mutual interference. The suppressors are effective in
both AC and DC circuits.

Preferred Application

Alternate Application
* Use a snubber across all contacts in the load circuit.

1-717-767-6511

967

MODEL LFIL - GENERAL PURPOSE LINE FILTER
DESCRIPTION
This line filter can be used in AC or DC power supply lines to attenuate
conducted Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). EMI is the most common
cause of erratic operation in electronic equipment. Line filters should be
installed close to electronic equipment and mounted directly to a metal
enclosure that is connected to earth ground (protective earth).
Note: Always connect the earth lead of the filter to the power line ground
(protective earth).

DIMENSIONS “In inches (mm)”

SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 1
The ideal location for the line filter is directly inside the metal enclosure in
which the unit is mounted when the source of EMI is external to the enclosure
(See Figure 1). Mount the filter where the power enters the enclosure. If the
enclosure contains many different types of equipment or EMI generating
devices, such as motors or contactors, then the EMI source may be inside the
enclosure. In this case, mount the line filter as close to the unit as possible (See
Figure 2).

1. CURRENT RATING: 1.15 A @ 25°C ; 1 A @ 40°C
2. LEAKAGE CURRENT: 0.21 mA/Lead @ 220 V, 50 Hz
3. INDUCTANCE: 3 mH
4. INSERTION LOSS:
FREQUENCY

dB INSERTION LOSS

150 KHz
1.0 MHz
10 MHz

30
47
55

5. CONNECTIONS: Flexible wires 20 AWG
6. HIPOT TEST VOLTAGE: 2 KV, 50 Hz
7. MAX OPERATING VOLTAGE: 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz
8. OPERATING FREQUENCY: DC to 400 Hz
9. TEMPERATURE RANGE: -25°C to +85°C
10. WEIGHT: 2.29 oz. (65 g)
UL recognized component
(Schaffner Electronik AG, PN# FN610-1/07, File # E64388 (M))

BLOCK DIAGRAM

Figure 2
If the panel and enclosure are non-conductive, then the power feed ground is
the only earth ground connection. Connecting only the earth lead of the filter to
the earth ground without mounting the filter directly to a metal enclosure will
not be as effective.

968

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

LFIL

General Purpose Line Filter

LFIL0000

www.redlion.net

ENCLOSURES
& PANELS

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

969

This page intentionally left blank.
970

www.redlion.net

NEMA 4/IP65 ENCLOSURES

z RUGGED STEEL CONSTRUCTION
z COMPLETELY SEALED FOR WASH-DOWN
z VERSATILE MOUNTING OPTIONS FOR MACHINE OR DESK-TOP

DESCRIPTION
This series of enclosures is designed for applications requiring a water
resistant instrument enclosure. These rugged enclosures are fabricated of
formed steel with all seams welded to withstand NEMA 4/IP65 wash-down
applications. The kits are coated with a durable flat black polyurethane finish.
Electrical connections to the enclosed instrument are easily made through a
removable access panel at the rear of the enclosure. The panel can be drilled to
accept conduit fittings or other types of wiring connectors.

The enclosures can be mounted free-standing or securely fastened to a
mounting surface with brackets which are provided with each enclosure. The
brackets also allow the enclosures to be raised and/or tilted from the mounting
surface in order to achieve the most favorable operating position. Self-stick
rubber pads are provided which can be applied to the bottom of the enclosure.
These rubber pads will protect the mounting surface and are particularly useful
for free-standing installations.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

DESCRIPTION

Legend & Libra Series
NEMA 4 Enclosure

3.50"
(88.9)

4.75"
(120.6)

7.00"
(177.8)

Apollo & IM Series
NEMA 4 Enclosure

3.00"
(76.2)

4.75"
(120.6)

8.00"
(203.2)

Legend & Libra Series NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure

ENC40000

Apollo & IM Series NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure

ENC50000

Gemini Series
NEMA 4 Enclosure

3.50"
(88.9)

6.00"
(152.4)

8.00"
(203.2)

Gemini Series NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure

ENC60000

ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION

1-717-767-6511

PART NUMBER

971

Installation

The RLC ASTRO LINE products (GEMINI, LIBRA, APOLLO) have side
openings in the case for panel mounting latches, special latches are supplied
with each enclosure to engage the latch openings and securely retain the
instrument. The installation procedure is as follows:
1. Verify that the enclosure brackets are installed into the enclosure with the
bracket screws backed out more than half way from the brackets but keeping
the screw head flush against the enclosure rear.
2. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit until it is against the back of
the bezel.
3. Hold the unit on its side so that a side bracket opening is facing up and insert
the unit into the enclosure front opening.
4. The bracket hook should fall into the unit bracket opening. Keeping the meter
and enclosure on their side, turn the bracket screw tight.

5. Flip the meter and enclosure to the other side.
6. The other bracket hook should fall into the unit bracket opening. Keeping the
meter and enclosure on their side, turn the other bracket screw tight.
7. Verify that both screws are tight enough so that the front panel gasket is
compressed to at least 50% of it original thickness.
8. Install any connectors or conduit fittings to the rear access panel. Make the
desired wiring connections to the enclosed unit.
9. Install the rear panel gasket with the adhesive side against the enclosure and
the screw clearance holes aligned with the threaded holes in the enclosure.
10. After all electrical connections have been made, attach the rear access panel
to the rear of the enclosure with the four screws and washers provided.

Installation

Mounting Bracket Installation

L
Mounting Options

972

www.redlion.net

NEMA 4 PAX SERIES ENCLOSURES
ENC5B & ENC5C - PLASTIC ENCLOSURES
O

RUGGED POLYCARBONATE CONSTRUCTION

COMPLETELY SEALED FOR NEMA 4X/IP65 WASH-DOWN

EASY MOUNTING OPTIONS

DESCRIPTION
These enclosures are designed for applications requiring a water resistant
instrument enclosure. The ENC5B and ENC5C enclosures are fabricated of
polycarbonate and are designed to withstand NEMA 4X/IP65 wash-down
applications. The enclosures must be drilled to accept conduit fittings or other
types of wiring connectors. The enclosures can be used free-standing, or
securely fastened to a mounting surface. The enclosures are precut for either
one or two meters. When properly installed, the meter and the enclosure can
withstand NEMA 4X wash-down applications.
Electrical connections to the enclosed instrument are easily made by drilling
the desired location on the back or side of the enclosure. Select the proper drill
size to accommodate the conduit fitting or other wire connector. To maintain the
enclosure NEMA 4X rating, sealed connectors must be used. Also enclosed are
wall fastening lugs. which can be used to easy mount the enclosure to a wall.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ENC5B

NEMA 4X/IP65 Enclosure for One PAX Meter

ENC5B000

ENC5C

NEMA 4X/IP65 Enclosure for Two PAX Meters

ENC5C000

For More information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits, refer to the
RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC Distributor.

L
ENC5B AND ENC5C INSTALLATION
It is recommended to wire the unit before mounting it in the enclosure to ensure good electrical connections.
The following steps outline the most common sequence for installing a unit.
1. Determine the location of the conduit fitting and drill the necessary hole. Install the fitting and bring the wiring
into the enclosure.
2. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
3. Install the unit through the opening in the front of the lid until the bezel flange contacts the panel.
4. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the mounting clip is against the inside of the enclosure.
The mounting clip has latching features which engage into mating features on the unit’s housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding the mounting clip into position.
5. While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the
rear of the unit so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in
the slots on the case. The panel latch should be engaged in
the farthest forward slot possible. To achieve a proper seal,
tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the
panel (Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79 N-cm]). Do
not over-tighten the screws.
6. If the gasket is not adequately compressed, and
the mounting screws can no longer be turned,
loosen the mounting screws and check that the
mounting clip is latched as close as possible to the
inside of enclosure. Repeat the procedure for
tightening the screws.
7. Connect the necessary wires to the unit for the
application desired.
8. Assemble the enclosure with the screws provided.
Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform
gasket pressure.

1-717-767-6511

973

ENC5A - STEEL ENCLOSURE

DESCRIPTION
The ENC5A enclosure is fabricated of formed steel with all seams
welded to withstand NEMA 4/IP65 wash-down applications. The kit is
coated with a durable flat black polyurethane finish.
Electrical connections to the enclosed instrument are easily made
through a removable access panel at the rear of the enclosure. The panel
must be drilled to accept conduit fittings or other types of wiring
connectors.
The enclosure can be used free-standing or securely fastened to a
mounting surface with brackets which are provided with each enclosure.
The brackets also allow the enclosure to be raised and/or tilted from the
mounting surface in order to achieve the most favorable operating
position. Self-stick rubber pads are provided which can be applied to the
bottom of the enclosure. These rubber pads will protect the mounting
surface and are particularly useful for free-standing installations.

RUGGED STEEL CONSTRUCTION

COMPLETELY SEALED FOR NEMA 4/IP65 WASH-DOWN

VERSATILE MOUNTING OPTIONS FOR MACHINE OR DESKTOP

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ENC5A

DESCRIPTION

NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure for PAX & Short Apollo

PART NUMBER

ENC5A000

For More information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits, refer to the
RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC Distributor.

L
ENC5A INSTALLATION

1. Mark the location on the rear panel for your wire connector or conduit fitting, and drill the
necessary hole. Connect your wire connector or fitting to the rear panel.
2. Remove the center sections of the front and rear panel gaskets. These centers contain
the optional foam rubber feet for the enclosure.
3. Apply the adhesive side of the panel gasket to the front and rear openings of the
enclosure. DO NOT APPLY THE ADHESIVE SIDE OF THE GASKET TO
THE FRONT OR REAR PANELS.
4. Install the unit to the front panel according to the standard panel
installation instructions found in the product literature.
5. Route the wires to be connected to the unit from the conduit fitting
through the rear of the enclosure and out the front.
6. Connect the necessary wires to the unit for the application desired.
7. Attach the front and rear panels to the enclosure with the screws
and washers provided. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure
uniform gasket compression. Visually inspect the sponge rubber
gasket. The gasket should be compressed to about 75 to 80% of
its original thickness.
8. For a free-standing enclosure, apply the self-stick foam
rubber pads to the features on the bottom of the enclosure
to protect the mounting surface.
9. To securely mount the enclosure, attach the adjustable
mounting brackets to the enclosure using the washers and
bolts provided. Secure the mounting brackets to the desired
mounting location. The mounting screws to attach the
brackets to your surface are not provided due to the variety
of installation options available.

974

www.redlion.net

MODEL ENC8 - NEMA 4 ENCLOSURES FOR CUB4, CUB5, DT8 & DT9 UNITS
ENC8A & ENC8B - PLASTIC ENCLOSURES
ENC8A DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

DESCRIPTION
These enclosures are designed for applications requiring a water resistant
instrument enclosure. The enclosures are fabricated of polycarbonate and are
designed to withstand NEMA 4X/IP65 wash-down applications. The
enclosures must be drilled to accept conduit fittings or other types of wiring
connectors. The enclosures can be used free-standing, or securely fastened to a
mounting surface.

ENC8B DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ENC8A

Plastic Enclosure for single units

ENC8A000

ENC8B

Plastic Enclosure for units with an MLPS1 attached

ENC8B000

For More information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits, refer to the
RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC Distributor.

L
ENC8A INSTALLATION
It is recommended to wire the unit before mounting it in the enclosure to
ensure good electrical connections. The following steps outline the most
common sequence for installing a unit without an MLPS1 attached.
1. Determine the location of the conduit fitting and drill the necessary hole.
Install the fitting and bring the wiring into the enclosure.
2. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
3. Assemble nut fastener and mounting screw onto both sides of the mounting
clip. The tip of the screw should not project from the hole in mounting clip.
4. Install the unit through the opening in the front of the lid until the bezel
flange contacts the panel.
5. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the mounting clip is
against the inside of the enclosure. The mounting clip has latching
features which engage into mating features on the unit’s
housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when
sliding the mounting clip into position.
6. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform
gasket pressure. Visually inspect the front panel
gasket. The gasket should be compressed to about
75 to 80% of its original thickness (Recommended
torque is 28 to 36 in-oz.). If not, gradually turn
mounting screws to further compress the gasket.
7. If the gasket is not adequately compressed, and the
mounting screws can no longer be turned, loosen the
mounting screws and check that the mounting clip is
latched as close as possible to the inside of enclosure.
Repeat the procedure for tightening the screws.

8. Connect the necessary wires to the unit for the application desired.
9. Assemble the enclosure with the screws
provided. Alternately tighten each screw
to ensure uniform gasket pressure.

1-717-767-6511

975

ENC8B w/ MLPS1 Installation
Installing a unit with an MLPS1 attached requires some planning. It is
recommended that the unit with the MLPS1 attached be temporarily installed
in the enclosure to determine the best location for the conduit fitting to avoid
interference with the MLPS1.
1. Determine the location of the conduit fitting and drill the necessary hole.
Install the fitting and bring the wiring into the enclosure.
2. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
3. Remove the common and V+ screw terminals from the rear of the unit (save
for later use) and replace them with the stand-offs (supplied with the
MLPS1).
4. Assemble nut fastener and mounting screw onto both sides of the mounting
clip. The tip of the screw should not project from the hole in mounting clip.
5. Install the unit through the opening in the front of the lid until the bezel
flange contacts the panel mounted gasket.
6. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the mounting clip is
against the inside of the enclosure. The mounting clip has latching
features which engage into mating features on the unit’s housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding the
mounting clip into position.

7. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure. Visually
inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed to about 75
to 80% of its original thickness (Recommended torque is 28 to 36 in-oz.).
If not, gradually turn mounting screws to further compress the gasket.
8. If the gasket is not adequately compressed, and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen the mounting screws and check that the mounting
clip is latched as close as possible
to the inside of enclosure.
Repeat the procedure for
tightening the screws.

9. Mount the MLPS1 and optional sensor wires needed, to the stand-offs using
the screw terminals from the unit with the supplied square washers.
10. Connect AC power to the terminal block of the MLPS1.
11. After all electrical connections have been made, assemble the enclosure
with the screws provided. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform
gasket pressure.

L
ENC8 - STEEL ENCLOSURE
DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

DESCRIPTION
This enclosure is designed for use with the CUB4, CUB5, DT8 & DT9 units.
The enclosures are large enough to accommodate a Micro-line Power Supply
(MLPS1) attached to the unit. These rugged enclosures are fabricated of formed
steel with all seams welded to withstand NEMA 4/IP65 wash-down
applications. The kits are coated with a durable black polyurethane finish.
The holes for conduit fittings or other types of wiring connectors can be
drilled through the removable rear access panel, or through the enclosure itself.
The enclosures can be free standing or securely fastened to a mounting
surface with the brackets and hardware found in the mounting kit (provided
with the enclosure). The brackets also allow the enclosure to be raised and/or
tilted from the mounting surface in order to achieve the most favorable
operating position. Provided are four self-stick foot pads that can be applied to
the bottom of the enclosure to protect the mounting surface. The foot pads are
particularly useful for free standing installations.

976

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ENC8

NEMA 4/IP65 ENCLOSURE

ENC80000

For More information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits,
refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC Distributor.

www.redlion.net

ENC8 INSTALLATION
It is recommended to wire the unit before mounting it in the enclosure to
ensure good electrical connections. The following steps outline the most
common sequence for installing a unit without an MLPS1 attached.
1. Determine the location of the conduit fitting and drill the necessary hole.
2. Apply adhesive side of panel gasket to rear enclosure opening.
DO NOT APPLY THE ADHESIVE SIDE OF THE GASKET TO THE
ACCESS PANEL.

10. If the gasket is not adequately compressed, and the mounting screws can
no longer be turned, loosen the mounting screws and check that the
mounting clip is latched as close as possible to
the inside of the enclosure. Repeat the
procedure for tightening the screws.
11. Attach the rear access panel to the enclosure
with the eight screws provided.

3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
4. Assemble nut fastener and mounting screw onto both sides of the mounting
clip. The tip of the screw should not project from the hole in mounting clip.
5. Route the wire to be connected to the unit from the conduit fitting through the
mounting clip, and then through the rear of the enclosure and out the front.
6. Connect the necessary wires to the unit for the application desired.
7. Install the unit through the opening in the front of the enclosure until the
bezel flange contacts the panel.
8. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the
mounting clip is against the inside of the enclosure. The
mounting clip has latching features which engage into
mating features on the unit’s housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when
sliding the mounting clip into position.
9. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform
gasket pressure. Visually inspect the front panel
gasket. The gasket should be compressed to about
75 to 80% of its original thickness (Recommended
torque is 28 to 36 in-oz.). If not, gradually turn
mounting screws to further compress the gasket.

12. Alternately tighten each screw to
ensure uniform gasket pressure.
Visually inspect the sponge rubber
gasket. The gasket should be
compressed to about 75 to 80% of its
original thickness.

ENC8 w/ MLPS1 Installation
Installing a unit with an MLPS1 attached requires some planning. It is
recommended that the unit with the MLPS1 attached be temporarily installed
in the enclosure to determine the best location for the conduit fitting to avoid
interference with the MLPS1.
1. Mark the location of the conduit fitting and drill the necessary hole.
2. Apply adhesive side of panel gasket to rear enclosure opening.
DO NOT APPLY THE ADHESIVE SIDE OF THE GASKET TO THE
ACCESS PANEL.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.

4. Remove the common and V+ screw terminals from the rear of the unit (save
for later use) and replace them with the hex drive stand-offs (supplied with
the MLPS1).
5. Assemble nut fastener and mounting screw onto both sides of the mounting
clip. The tip of the screw should not project from the hole in mounting clip.
6. Route the wire to be connected to the unit from the conduit fitting through the
mounting clip, and then through the rear of the enclosure and out the front.
7. Connect the necessary wires to the unit for the application desired.
8. Install the unit through the opening in the front of the enclosure until the
bezel flange contacts the panel mounted gasket.
9. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the mounting clip is
against the inside of the enclosure. The mounting clip has latching features
which engage into mating features on the unit’s housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when
sliding the mounting clip into
position.

10. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure. Visually
inspect the front panel gasket. The gasket should be compressed to about 75
to 80% of its original thickness (Recommended torque is 28 to 36 in-oz.). If
not, gradually turn mounting screws to further compress the gasket.
11. If the gasket is not adequately compressed, and the mounting screws can no
longer be turned, loosen the mounting screws and check that the mounting
clip is latched as close as possible to the inside of enclosure. Repeat the
procedure for tightening the screws.
12. Connect AC power to the terminal block of the MLPS1.

13. Mount the MLPS1 and optional sensor wires needed, to the stand-offs
using the screw terminals from the unit with the supplied square washers.
14. After all electrical connections have been made, attach the rear access panel
to the enclosure with the eight screws provided.
15. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure. Visually
inspect the sponge rubber gasket. The gasket should be compressed to about
75 to 80% of its original thickness.

1-717-767-6511

977

MOUNTING THE ENCLOSURE
1. Self-stick foot pads may be applied to the features on the bottom of the enclosure to
protect the mounting surface.
2. To securely mount the enclosure, attach the adjustable mounting brackets to the
enclosure using the plastic washers and screws. Mounting brackets may be attached to
the top or bottom of the enclosure.
3. Secure the adjustable mounting brackets to mounting location with the screws provided.

978

www.redlion.net

LPAX ENCLOSURE, MOUNTING AND LABEL ACCESSORIES
O

ENGINEERING UNIT LABELS

BRACKETS FOR BASE, CEILING, OR WALL MOUNTING

NEMA 4/IP65 ENCLOSURE FOR WASHDOWN ENVIRONMENTS

FRONT PANEL SHROUD FOR ENHANCED VIEWING

ENC9-NEMA 4/IP65 LPAX ENCLOSURE
The ENC90000 NEMA 4/IP65 enclosure provides a means of mounting the
LPAX display in dirty or washdown environments. The enclosure comes with
all the gaskets, hardware (except the mounting screws), and brackets required
to base, ceiling, or wall mount the LPAX display. The mounting screws to
attach the brackets to your surface are not provided due to the variety of
installation options available.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

L
ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
1. Before drilling a hole in the enclosure for your wire connector or fitting,
ensure that the location you have chosen allows enough clearance around the
MPAX module.
2. Remove the center section of the gasket provided with the LPAX, and slide
it over the rear of the display and onto the mounting studs.
3. Insert the LPAX into the enclosure as illustrated. Install six #10-32 keps nuts
(supplied with the LPAX) and tighten evenly for uniform gasket
compression. The gasket should be compressed to about 75 to 80% of its
original thickness. Do not overtighten the nuts.
4. Run the wires through the hole that was drilled in the enclosure, and attach
them to the LPAX. Wiring instructions are provided in the appropriate PAX
bulletin shipped with the MPAX Module.
5. Remove the center section of the rear cover gasket. Apply the gasket to the
rear panel of the enclosure by inserting the screws through the panel and into
the holes in the gasket. Position the panel on the enclosure and start all of the
screws. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket
compression. The gasket should be compressed to about 75 to 80% of its
original thickness.
6. To securely mount the enclosure, attach the adjustable mounting brackets to
the enclosure using the washers and screws provided.
7. Secure the mounting brackets to the desired mounting location.
Rotate bracket for other
installation choices.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ENC9

1-717-767-6511

DESCRIPTION

NEMA 4 Enclosure for LPAX

PART NUMBERS

ENC90000

979

SHROUD
The optional shroud enhances the readability of the LPAX unit in areas with
high intensity overhead light sources. The shroud can be used in conjunction
with any installation (panel mount, enclosure, or mounting brackets). When
properly installed, the shroud will not affect the integrity of a NEMA 4
installation.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

INSTALLATION
1. Remove the center section of the gasket provided with the LPAX, and slide
it over the rear of the display and onto the mounting studs.
2. Orient the shroud and gasket as shown in the assembly figure, and place it
over the LPAX. The studs of the LPAX should now be protruding through the
rear of the shroud.
3. Follow the remaining installation instructions for panel mounting, bracket
mounting or enclosure mounting as appropriate.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

SHR

DESCRIPTION

Shroud for LPAX

PART NUMBERS

SHRLPAX0

MBLPAX-MOUNTING BRACKETS
The MBLPAX mounting brackets provide an easy way to base, wall, or
ceiling mount the LPAX display. The MBLPAX kit comes with two sets of
brackets, and most of the hardware to mount the LPAX at virtually any angle.
The screws to attach the brackets to your surface are not provided due to the
variety of installation options available.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ASSEMBLY

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

980

DESCRIPTION

Mounting Bracket for LPAX

PART NUMBERS

MBLPAX00

Notes:
1. When installing the brackets, the fastener bracket must be installed on the
studs of the LPAX as shown.
2. The mounting bracket may be installed with the flange facing in or out.
3. The rubber washers provided must be installed between the two mounting
brackets during assembly.
4. The screws for fastening the brackets to a surface are not provided in the
MBLPAX kit. The holes are 0.2" in diameter and will accept size #10 screws
and smaller.

www.redlion.net

NEMA 4 1/16 DIN SERIES ENCLOSURES
ENC11A & ENC11B - PLASTIC ENCLOSURES
O

RUGGED POLYCARBONATE CONSTRUCTION

COMPLETELY SEALED FOR NEMA 4X/IP65 WASH-DOWN

EASY MOUNTING OPTIONS

DESCRIPTION
These enclosures are designed for applications requiring a water resistant
instrument enclosure. The ENC11A and ENC11B enclosures are fabricated of
polycarbonate and are designed to withstand NEMA 4X/IP65 wash-down
applications. The enclosures must be drilled to accept conduit fittings or other
types of wiring connectors. The enclosures can be used free-standing, or
securely fastened to a mounting surface. The enclosures are precut for either
one or two meters. When properly installed, the meter and the enclosure can
withstand NEMA 4X wash-down applications.
Electrical connections to the enclosed instrument are easily made by drilling
the desired location on the back or side of the enclosure. Select the proper drill
size to accommodate the conduit fitting or other wire connector. To maintain the
enclosure NEMA 4X rating, sealed connectors must be used. Also enclosed are
wall fastening lugs. which can be used to easy mount the enclosure to a wall.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

ENC11A NEMA 4X/IP65 Enclosure for One 1/16 DIN Meter

ENC11A00

ENC11B NEMA 4X/IP65 Enclosure for Two 1/16 DIN Meters

ENC11B00

L
ENC11A AND ENC11B INSTALLATION
It is recommended to wire the unit before mounting it in the enclosure to ensure good electrical connections. The
following steps outline the most common sequence for installing a unit.
1. Determine the location of the conduit fitting and drill the necessary hole. Install the fitting and bring the wiring
into the enclosure.
2. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
3. Install the unit through the opening in the front of the lid until the bezel flange contacts the panel.
4. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the mounting clip is against the inside of
the enclosure. The mounting clip has latching features which engage into mating features
on the unit’s housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding the mounting clip
into position.
5. While holding the unit in place, push the panel latch over the rear of the
unit so that the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case.
The panel latch should be engaged in the farthest forward slot possible.
To achieve a proper seal, tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit
is snug in the panel (Torque to approximately 7 in-lbs [79 N-cm]). Do
not over-tighten the screws.
6. If the gasket is not adequately compressed, and the mounting
screws can no longer be turned, loosen the mounting
screws and check that the mounting clip is latched as
close as possible to the inside of enclosure. Repeat the
procedure for tightening the screws.
7. Connect the necessary wires to the unit for the
application desired.
8. Assemble the enclosure with the screws provided. Alternately
tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket pressure.

1-717-767-6511

981

ENC11 - STEEL ENCLOSURE
O

RUGGED STEEL CONSTRUCTION

COMPLETELY SEALED FOR WASH-DOWN

VERSATILE MOUNTING OPTIONS FOR MACHINE OR DESKTOP

DESCRIPTION
This enclosure is designed for applications requiring a water resistant
instrument enclosure. The enclosure is fabricated of formed steel with all seams
welded to withstand NEMA 4/IP65 wash-down applications. The kit is coated
with a durable flat black polyurethane finish.
Electrical connections to the enclosed instrument are easily made through a
removable access panel at the rear of the enclosure. The panel must be drilled
to accept conduit fittings or other types of wiring connectors.

The enclosure can be used free-standing or securely fastened to a mounting
surface with brackets which are provided with each enclosure. The brackets also
allow the enclosure to be raised and/or tilted from the mounting surface in order
to achieve the most favorable operating position. Self-adhering rubber pads are
provided which can be applied to the bottom of the enclosure. These rubber pads
will protect the mounting surface and are particularly useful for free-standing
installations.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

ENC11

982

DESCRIPTION

NEMA 4 Enclosure for 1/16 DIN Units

www.redlion.net

PART NUMBER

ENC11000

NEMA 4/IP65 LARGE DISPLAY ENCLOSURE & SHROUD FOR EPAX
O

LIGHT-WEIGHT ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION

COMPLETELY SEALED FOR WASH-DOWN

MOUNTING CHANNELS FOR VERSATILE INSTALLATION

DESCRIPTION
The NEMA 4/IP65 Large Display Enclosure is designed to protect the
EPAX from dust and hose directed water, when properly installed. This lightweight all aluminum unit utilizes welded seams and neoprene gaskets to meet
NEMA 4/IP65 requirements. A textured, polyurethane coating protects against
corrosion and is scratch resistant. Figure 1 below shows the overall
dimensions of the Enclosure. The Display Enclosure with Mounting Channels
weighs 9 pounds (4.1 Kg).

Picture includes the EPAX, Nema Enclosure, and Shroud

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

MOUNTING
Provided with the enclosure are two ¼-20 UNC x 1" hex
bolts, two ¼-20 UNC “strut nuts”, and two ¼" washers. The
“strut nuts” can be installed anywhere in the channel by
inserting them, spring side down, into the channels, then
rotating them 90 degrees clockwise until the notches engage
with the lips of the channel. The bolts and washers provided
allow mounting to surfaces ¼" to ½" thick (6.4 to 12.7 mm).
Use longer bolts for mounting to thicker surfaces. Bolts
fabricated from materials other than steel are not recommended.

* Housing Only

** Overall Including Screwheads
Figure 1

Figure 3

TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR NEMA 4/IP65 ENCLOSURE
Removing the rear panel of the enclosure allows access to the Display for
service. Either the rear panel or housing may be drilled to accept sealed conduit
fittings, liquid-tight cable fittings or other types of wiring connectors. The
enclosure may be attached to horizontal surfaces located above or below it,
using the mounting channels provided.

BASEMOUNT WITH WATERTIGHT
CABLE CONNECTOR ENTERING
THROUGH REAR PANEL.

SUSPENDED FROM CONDUIT
WITH SEALED FITTINGS.
(SHOWN WITH SHROUD).

BEAM MOUNT WITH SEALED
CONDUIT ENTERING FROM
RIGHT SIDE.

Figure 2

1-717-767-6511

983

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. Install the two mounting channels on the enclosure housing using
the four #8-32 screws provided and then insert the strut nuts
(provided). Invert enclosure if base mounting.
2. If the wiring is to be routed through the housing, make sure that
the mounting channels are oriented properly before drilling, so
the Display will be readable. Wiring is generally brought into the
right side of the housing or rear panel, closest to the terminals of
the MPAX module. Drill the proper size hole in the housing or
rear panel for the wiring connector or sealed conduit fitting and
attach the fitting(s)
3. Before installing the Display into the housing, be sure that the
mounting channels are oriented properly for the type of installation
planned. Place the gasket that is supplied with the Display over the
studs extending from the front panel of the display.
4. If using the shroud, refer to the Shroud Installation Procedure.
Place the Display with gasket through the holes in the housing as
shown at right. Working back and forth across the stud pattern,
install the #10-32 keps nuts supplied with the Display on the
studs. Tighten firmly.
5. Mount the housing, using the strut nuts and steel ¼-20 UNC bolts
and washers, as shown in figure 4.
6. Connect the wires to the Display per the instructions included
with the personality board.
7. Remove the center section of the rear panel gasket. Apply the
gasket to the rear panel of the enclosure by inserting the #8-32
screws through the panel and into the holes in the gasket. Position
the panel on the housing, start all of the screws, then firmly tighten
them in a pattern working back and forth across the rear panel.

* Supplied with EPAX.

Figure 4

DIMENSIONS FOR THE EPAX DISPLAY SHROUD

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

The optional EPAX Display Shroud enhances the readability of the
Displays that are installed in areas with high intensity overhead light sources.
The Shroud can be used with the EPAX Display in any installation, (panel
mount, NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure, or Universal Mounting Bracket). When
properly assembled, the Shroud will not affect the integrity of a NEMA
4/IP65 installation. The Shroud weighs 1.0 pounds (0.45 Kg).
Figure 5

L
SHROUD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installing The Shroud On An EPAX Display In A
NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure Or Panel
1. Place a gasket over the studs extending from the rear of the front
panel of the Display.
2. Orient the shroud as shown in Figure 6, and place it over the
display. The studs of the display should now be protruding
through the rear of the shroud.
3. Place the other gasket over the studs.
4. Install the unit into the panel or enclosure using the #10-32 keps
nuts that are supplied with the Display. Tighten the nuts firmly.

Nema 4/IP65 Shroud Installation
* Supplied with EPAX.

Figure 6

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.
ENC12
SHR
EN/SH

984

DESCRIPTION

NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure for EPAX

PART NUMBERS

ENC12000

Shroud for EPAX

SHREPAX0

EPAX NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure and Shroud

EPAXENSH

www.redlion.net

MODEL BMK3 & BMK4 - BASE MOUNT KITS
DESCRIPTION

The Model BMK3 and 4 Base Mount Kits provide the necessary
equipment for base mounting various units. The kits are coated with a
durable flat black polyurethane finish and consist of two mounting legs
which attach to the customer’s base panel, using the hardware provided.
Model PMK3 and 4 are separate front panels, available for different
sized units. After mounting the units to the appropriate PMK panel, the
entire assembly is then attached to the mounting legs.

MOUNTING PROCEDURE
1. Mark and drill holes (3/16" Dia.) in base panel for attaching the base mount
legs. Use the appropriate Model PMK panel as a template for marking the
mounting hole locations. NOTE: RECOMMENDED MINIMUM BASE
PANEL THICKNESS IS 1/8" TO SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE
INDICATOR WITHOUT PANEL DISTORTION.
2. Attach the base mount legs to the base panel using the machine screws and
nuts provided or user supplied hardware if panel thickness exceeds 1/4".

3. Mount the indicator to the Model PMK panel, utilizing the mounting clips
provided, in accordance with the panel mounting instructions supplied with
the individual unit.
4. Attach the PMK panel and unit assembly to the base mount legs by using the
self-tapping screws provided.

BASE MOUNT DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
BMK3

BMK4

1-717-767-6511

985

PANEL DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
PMK3B

PMK3A

PMK4A

PMK3C

PMK4B

L
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

986

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

BMK 3

Base Mount Kit For Legend, Lynx And Libra

BMK30000

BMK 4

Base Mount Kit For Gemini, Apollo, IM, PAX, TCU, PCU, TSC And PSC

BMK40000

PMK 3A

Mounting Panel For Lynx

PMK3A000

PMK 3B

Mounting Panel For Libra And Legend

PMK3B000

PMK 3C

Mounting Panel For C48, T48, P16 And T16

PMK3C000

PMK 4A

Mounting Panel For Gemini

PMK4A000

PMK 4B

Mounting Panel For IM, Apollo, PAX, TCU, PCU, TSC And PSC

PMK4B000

www.redlion.net

MODEL BMK6, BMK7 & BMK7A - BASE MOUNT KIT FOR CUB4, CUB5 & DT8 UNITS
DESCRIPTION
The BMK6, BMK7 and BMK7A base mounts are designed for use with the
CUB4, CUB5, and DT8 units. The BMK7 is large enough to accommodate a
Micro-line Power Supply (MLPS) attached to a CUB4 or DT8. The BMK7A
will accommodate a Micro-line Power Supply (MLPS) attached to a CUB5.
The wires can either be brought through the panel on which the unit is
mounted, or through the hole(s) in the enclosure itself. Grommets are provided
to insert in the hole(s) on the base mount (where applicable) when wires are
routed through it. The grommets are in the accessory bag with each base mount
unit, along with four nuts and bolts for mounting.
The base mounts are constructed of steel with a textured black finish.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
BMK6 - OPEN BASE MOUNT KIT
(Without MLPS)

BMK7/BMK7A - CLOSED BASE MOUNT KIT
(With or Without MLPS)

L
MODEL

4.00
3.45
2.80
(101.50) (87.63) (71.12)
4.62
4.00
3.50
BMK7A
(117.35) (101.50) (88.90)
BMK7

INSTALLATION
BMK6 - Open Base Mount
Before attaching the BMK6 to the panel or frame, it is recommended to wire and mount the unit to
ensure good electrical connections. The following steps outline the most common sequence for installing
a unit without an MLPS attached.
1. Install the grommet (provided in the accessory bag) in the hole in the base mount.
2. Assemble nut fastener and mounting screw onto both sides of the mounting clip. The
tip of the screw should not project from the hole in mounting clip.
3. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back of the bezel.
Then install the unit through the opening in the front of the base mount
until the bezel flange makes contact.
4. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the
mounting clip is against the inside of the base mount. The
mounting clip has latching features which engage into
mating features on the unit’s housing.
Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding the
mounting clip into position.
5. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket
compression.
6. Connect the necessary wires from the grommet to the unit.
7. Mount the base mount enclosure to the panel or frame as application
requires. Four bolts and nuts are provided with the Base Mount Kit.

1-717-767-6511

987

INSTALLATION
BMK7/BMK7A - Closed Base Mount
Before attaching the BMK7/BMK7A to the panel or frame, it is
recommended to wire and mount the unit to ensure good electrical
connections. The following steps outline the most common sequence for
installing a unit with an MLPS attached.
1. Install the grommets (provided in the accessory bag) in the holes
in the base mount.
2. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the back
of the bezel.
3. Remove the common and V+ screw terminals
from the rear of the unit (save for later
use), and replace them with the
hex drive stand-offs with
round washers (supplied
with the MLPS).
4. Assemble nut fastener
and mounting screw
onto both sides of the
mounting clip. The tip
of the screw should not
project from the hole in
mounting clip.
5. Route the wires from
the grommets, through
the mounting clip, into
the rear of the base mount
and out the front.

Note: It is necessary to hold the unit in place when sliding the mounting
clip into position.
9. Alternately tighten each screw to ensure uniform gasket compression.

6. Connect the wires necessary for the application to the unit.
7. Install the unit through the opening in the front of the base mount until the
bezel flange makes contact.
8. Slide the mounting clip over the rear of the unit until the mounting clip is
against the inside of the base mount. The mounting clip has latching
features which engage into mating features on the unit’s housing.

10. Connect AC power to the terminal block of the MLPS.
Note: Make sure the AC selector switch is set to the appropriate position
before applying power to the unit.
11. Mount the MLPS and optional sensor wires needed to the stand-offs using
the screw terminal from the unit with the supplied square washers.
12. Mount the base mount enclosure to the panel or frame as application
requires. Four bolts and nuts are provided with the Base Mount Kit.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO

DESCRIPTION

OPEN BASE MOUNT KIT
BMK

PART NUMBER

BMK60000

CLOSED BASE MOUNT KIT (DT8, CUB4)

BMK70000

CLOSED BASE MOUNT KIT (CUB5)

BMK7A000

For More information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to
the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC Distributor.

988

www.redlion.net

MODEL BMK8 - BASE MOUNT KIT FOR CUB7
DESCRIPTION
The BMK8 base mount is designed for use with the CUB7 series products.
Wire feed to the CUB7 unit may be through the existing panel/frame or through
the hole in the BMK8 itself.
The base mount is constructed of steel with a textured black finish and
includes four mounting bolts and nuts.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

BMK8

DESCRIPTION

CUB7 BASE MOUNT KIT

PART NUMBER

BMK80000

For More information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits refer to
the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC Distributor.

INSTALLATION
1. Mark and drill holes (5/32") in existing panel using the
BMK8 as a template. An addition hole may be cut in the
existing panel for wire feed.
2. Remove the panel latch (mounting clip) from the
CUB7 unit and insert the mounting screws (supplied
with the CUB7) on both sides of panel latch. The tip
of the screw should not project from the hole in the
panel latch (mounting clip).
3. Slide the CUB7 through the cut out in the BMK8 until the
bezel flange contacts the base mount. The CUB7 panel gasket
is optional.
4. Slide the panel latch (mounting clip) over the rear of the unit and
towards the front of the unit until it latches firmly against the inside of the
base mount. Note: It is necessary to hold the CUB7 in place when sliding the
mounting clip into position.
5. Alternately tighten mounting screws.
6. Route wires through existing panel wire hole or through wire hole on base mount
and connect to the appropriate terminals on the CUB7.
7. Mount the CUB7/base mount assembly to the existing panel or frame utilizing
the four bolts and nuts provided with the base mount.

1-717-767-6511

989

MODEL BMK9 - DIN RAIL MOUNT ADAPTER KIT FOR PAX
DESCRIPTION
The BMK9 DIN rail mount kit is designed to adapt any PAX panel mount meter
to DIN rail mount requirements. Wire feed to the PAX unit may be through the top
or bottom of the adapter kit.
The DIN rail adapter frame is constructed of steel with a textured black finish
and includes two plastic DIN rail mounting feet for attachment to a top hat (T)
profile rail according to EN50022 - 35 x 7.5 and 35 x 15.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

BMK9

DESCRIPTION

DIN Rail PAX Base Mount Kit

PART NUMBER

BMK90000

For More information on Pricing, Enclosures & Panel Mount Kits
refer to the RLC Catalog or contact your local RLC Distributor.

INSTALLATION
1. Remove the panel latch (mounting clip) from the PAX meter unit and insert
the mounting screws (supplied with the PAX) on both sides of panel latch.
The tip of the screw should not project from the hole in the panel latch
(mounting clip).
2. The PAX meter may be wired after the unit has been mounted in the adapter
frame, in which case continue with Step 3. If pre-wiring the PAX is more
convenient, skip to the pre-wiring step at the end of this installation
procedure before returning to Step 3.
3. Slide the PAX meter through the cut out in the BMK9 and then slide
the panel latch (mounting clip) over the rear of the PAX.
4. Continue sliding the PAX meter until the bezel flange contacts
the adapter frame. The PAX panel gasket is optional.
5. Slide the panel latch (mounting clip) towards the front of the
unit until it latches firmly against the inside of the adapter
frame. Note: It is necessary to hold the PAX meter in place
when sliding the mounting clip into position.
6. Alternately tighten mounting screws through the rear access holes of the
adapter frame.
7. Apply both DIN rail feet to the rear of the adapter frame. The two latching
pins of the rail foot are positioned into the mating holes on the adapter
frame. Slight pressure applied to the center of the rail foot will snap foot into
locking position.
8. Wire PAX meter appropriately.
9. To install the complete assembly on a T style rail, angle the assembly so that
the top groove of both rail feet are located over the top lip of the rail. Push
the assembly towards the rail until it snaps into place.
10. To remove the assembly from the rail, place a screwdriver behind the
bottom groove of the foot rail and slightly pry upwards to release first rail
foot. Apply same procedure to second rail foot and remove complete
assembly.

990

Pre-wire PAX
2a. Route wires through the panel latch (mounting clip) and then through the
front cut out of the adapter frame from the inside to the outside. Wire PAX
meter appropriately. Continue with installation at Step 3 above.

www.redlion.net

MODEL BMK11 – CUB5 OR MLPS DIN RAIL BASE MOUNT ADAPTER KIT
DESCRIPTION
The model BMK11 can be used to mount a CUB5 meter or a Micro Line
Power Supply (MLPS) in various applications. Need a DIN rail mounted
display? Simply add the DIN rail clips to the back of the BMK11, install your
meter and snap it on the rail. If your application requires an inexpensive power
supply, simply mount an MLPS to the BMK11 and snap it to the rail. For base
mount application, just use the appropriate mounting screws to securely fasten
the BMK11. Nothing could be easier.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

BMK11

DESCRIPTION

CUB5 or MLPS DIN Rail Base Mount Kit

PART NUMBER

BMK11000

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
BMK11 WITHOUT UNIT

BMK11 WITH CUB5

BMK11 WITH MLPS

1-717-767-6511

991

CUB5 INSTALLATION
1. Remove the panel latch (mounting clip) from the indicator. Insert the
indicator into the BMK11 per diagram at right. Verify indicator is fully seated
and latches have engaged. With latches properly engaged the indicator will
not pull out of the BMK11.
2. Wire the indicator.
3. For DIN RAIL mounting, insert the two plastic feet as shown in the diagram
at right. Angle the assembly so that the top groove of both rail feet are located
over the top lip of the rail. Rotate the assembly towards the rail until it snaps
into place.
4. To remove the assembly from the rail, place a screwdriver behind one of the
rail feet and draw the rail foot away from the rail disengaging it from the rail.
Apply the same procedure to the second rail foot and remove the complete
assembly from the rail.
5. For Base Mount, use the holes indicated in the diagram at right, and screw
or bolt the assembly to the desired mounting surface. User is responsible for
selecting the appropriate screw or bolt to provide mounting to the desired
surface. Base mount holes in the BMK11 are designed for #8 hardware.
6. To remove the indicator from the BMK11, slide a small screwdriver into the
slot provided in the latch. Draw the latch away from the indicator until
disengaged. Repeat the procedure on the other side. Once the latches are
released, remove the indicator from the BMK11.

MLPS INSTALLATION
1. Using the two nuts supplied with the BMK11, affix standoffs from MLPS
hardware pack as indicated in the diagram at left.
2. Snap the MLPS over the standoffs into the BMK11 as indicated in the diagram.
3. Attach the MLPS to the standoffs using the square washers and SEMS terminal
screws included with MLPS hardware pack.
4. Assembly can be wired at this time, or after the mounting is completed.
5. For DIN RAIL mounting, insert the two plastic feet as shown in the diagram.
Angle the assembly so that the top groove of both rail feet are located over the
top lip of the rail. Rotate the assembly towards the rail until it snaps into place.
6. For Base Mount, use the holes indicated in the diagram at left, and screw or
bolt the assembly to the desired mounting surface. User is responsible for
selecting the appropriate screw or bolt to provide mounting to the desired
surface. Base mount holes in BMK11 are designed for #8 hardware.

7. To remove the MLPS from the BMK11, slide a small screwdriver between the
MLPS and the latch wall. Draw the latch away from the MLPS until
disengaged. Repeat procedure on the other side. Once latches are released
remove the MLPS from the BMK11.

992

www.redlion.net

MODELS PMK5, PMK7, and PMK7A - PANEL MOUNT ADAPTER KITS
PMK5 - 1/4 DIN TO 1/8 DIN ADAPTER
This panel mount adapter kit is used to mount 1/8 DIN instruments, vertically or horizontally into an existing 1/4 DIN panel cut-out. The kit includes two durable
steel mounting plates painted black and a neoprene gasket. The Adapter Kit, when used with a unit which has NEMA 4/IP65 specifications, will meet NEMA 4/IP65
requirements when properly installed. Red Lion Controls 1/8 DIN products include Temperature and Process Control Units (Models TCU, TSC, PCU, and PSC), and
PAX Series.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
ADAPTER PLATE

MOUNTING PLATE

INSTALLATION
TYPICAL VERTICAL MOUNT INSTALLATION

1. Remove the paper backing from the
adhesive side of the adapter gasket
(included with adapter kit) and
carefully apply the gasket to the front
of the existing panel cut-out.
2. Apply the panel gasket (provided with
the unit) to one side of the mounting
plate. Slide the mounting plate over
the unit with the gasket facing the
Bezel of the unit.
3. Insert the unit with mounting plate
into the panel cut-out from the front.
Slide the adapter plate over the rear of
the unit. The protrusion on the adapter
plate is designed to fit into the
existing 1/4 DIN panel cut-out to
properly position the unit.
4. Refer to the installation section of the
manual, supplied with the instrument,
to complete the installation.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

PMK5

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/4 DIN TO 1/8 DIN)

PMK7

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/4 DIN TO 1/16 DIN)

PMK70000

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/4 DIN TO CUB)

PMK7A000

PMK7A

1-717-767-6511

PMK50000

993

PMK7 - 1/4 DIN TO 1/16 DIN ADAPTER
This panel mount adapter kit is used to mount 1/16 DIN instruments, into an existing 1/4 DIN panel cut-out. The kit includes two durable steel mounting plates
painted black and a neoprene gasket. The Adapter Kit, when used with a unit which has NEMA 4/IP65 specifications, will meet NEMA 4/IP65 requirements when
properly installed. Red Lion Controls 1/16 DIN products include Temperature and Process Control Units (Models T48, T16, P48, and P16), and Model C48
Counters and Timers.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
MOUNTING PLATE

ADAPTER PLATE

INSTALLATION

TYPICAL INSTALLATION

994

www.redlion.net

PMK7A - 1/4 DIN TO CUB ADAPTER
This panel mount adapter kit is used to mount CUB4, CUB5, DT8 and DT9 instruments, into an existing 1/4 DIN panel cut-out. The kit includes two durable steel
mounting plates painted black and a neoprene gasket. The Adapter Kit, when used with a unit which has NEMA 4/IP65 specifications, will meet NEMA 4/IP65
requirements when properly installed.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
MOUNTING PLATE

ADAPTER PLATE

INSTALLATION

TYPICAL INSTALLATION

1-717-767-6511

995

PANEL MOUNT ADAPTER KIT - 1/8 DIN TO 1/16 DIN
The panel mount adapter kit is used to mount 1/16 DIN instruments into
existing vertical or horizontal 1/8 DIN panel cut-outs. The kit includes two
black painted durable steel mounting plates and a sponge rubber gasket. The
Adapter Kit, when used with a unit which has NEMA 4/IP65 specifications,
will meet NEMA 4/IP65 requirements when properly installed. Red Lion
Controls 1/16 DIN products include Temperature and Process Control Units
(Models T48, and P48), and the C48 units.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PMK6

DESCRIPTION

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/8 DIN to 1/16 DIN)

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
MOUNTING PLATE

ADAPTER PLATE

L
INSTALLATION
TYPICAL VERTICAL MOUNT INSTALLATION

1. Remove the paper backing from the adhesive side of the
adapter gasket (included with adapter kit) and
carefully apply the gasket to the front of the existing
panel cut-out.
2. Carefully remove the center section of the
panel gasket (provided with the unit) and
discard. Slide the panel gasket over the
rear of the unit to the back of the
bezel.
3. Slide the mounting plate
over the rear of the unit
to the back of the unit bezel.
4. Insert the unit with
mounting plate into the
panel cut-out from the front.
Slide the adapter plate over
the rear of the unit. The
protrusion on the adapter
plate is designed to fit into
the existing 1/8 DIN
panel cut-out to properly
position the unit.
5. Refer to the installation
section of the manual,
supplied with the unit, to
complete the installation.

996

www.redlion.net

PART NUMBER

PMK60000

PANEL MOUNT ADAPTER KIT - 1/8 DIN TO CUB5
The panel mount adapter kit is used to mount CUB5 units into existing 1/8
DIN panel cut-outs. The kit includes two black painted durable steel mounting
plates and a sponge rubber gasket. The Adapter Kit, when used with a unit
which has NEMA 4/IP65 specifications, will meet NEMA 4/IP65 requirements
when properly installed. Red Lion Controls CUB5 products include Counters,
Timers, Temperature, Process and Rate units.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PMK6A

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (1/8 DIN to CUB5)

PMK6A000

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
MOUNTING PLATE

ADAPTER PLATE

INSTALLATION
TYPICAL HORIZONTAL MOUNT INSTALLATION

1. Remove the paper backing from the adhesive side of the
adapter gasket (included with adapter kit) and carefully
apply the gasket to the front of the existing panel cutout.
2. Carefully remove the center section of the panel
gasket (provided with the unit) and discard.
Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the
unit to the back of the bezel.
3. Slide the mounting plate over the
rear of the unit to the back of the
unit bezel.
4. Insert the unit with mounting plate
into the panel cut-out from the
front. Slide the adapter plate over
the rear of the unit. The
protrusion on the adapter plate is
designed to fit into the existing
1/8 DIN panel cut-out to properly
position the unit.
5. Refer to the installation section of
the manual, supplied with the unit,
to complete the installation.

1-717-767-6511

997

MODEL PMK8 - PANEL MOUNT ADAPTER KIT FOR PAX TO GEMINI CUT-OUT
The PMK8 panel mount adapter kit is used to mount a PAX meter into an
existing GEMINI panel cut-out. The kit includes two durable steel mounting
plates painted black and a neoprene gasket. The Adapter Kit, when used with a
meter which has NEMA 4/IP65 specifications, will meet NEMA 4/IP65
requirements when properly installed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PMK8

DESCRIPTION

Panel Mount Adapter Kit (PAX to Gemini)

PMK8 DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)
MOUNTING PLATE

ADAPTER PLATE

PMK8 INSTALLATION
1. Apply the panel gasket (provided with the meter) over the PAX meter.
2. Insert the PAX meter through the mounting plate.
3. Apply the panel gasket (provided with the adapter kit) over the
PAX meter behind the mounting plate.
4. Insert the PAX meter with mounting plate and gaskets into the
front of the existing Gemini hole cut-out. Slide the adapter
plate over the rear of the PAX meter.
5. Slide the panel latch (provided with the meter) over the
rear of the PAX meter and tighten the screws.

998

www.redlion.net

PART NUMBER

PMK80000

GEMINI SERIES PANEL ADAPTER KIT FOR DIN PANEL CUT-OUTS
The Gemini Series panel adapter kit permits the mounting of the Gemini unit
to an existing 68 mm x 138 mm DIN standard panel cut-out. The kit consists of
two metal adapter plates coated with a durable flat black polyurethane finish,
and a neoprene gasket, which provides a sealed front panel that meets NEMA
4/IP65 specifications when properly installed.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

Note:
An overall panel area
of 3” x 6” is required
for proper mounting.

INSTALLATION
1. Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the adapter gasket (included
with adapter kit) and carfully stick the gasket to the front of the existing
panel cut-out.
2. Apply the standard panel mount gasket (provided with the Gemini unit) to
one of the adapter plates and slide the plate over the Gemini unit. (Gasket
side must be facing the bezel.)
3. Insert the Gemini unit into the panel cut-out from the front and slide the
remaining adapter plate over the Gemini unit from the rear.
4. Install the two mounting clips (provided with the Gemini unit) as per the
instructions in the Gemini manual. Install the screws into the mounting
clips and tighten them evenly to apply uniform compression and to provide
a water-tight seal.
CAUTION: Only minimum pressure is required to seal the panel. Do NOT
overtighten the mounting screws.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

PMKG1

3-PIECE KIT permits mounting to existing
2.67” x 5.43” (68 mm x 138 mm) Panel cut-out,
O.A. DIM. 3” x 6” (76.2 mm x 152.4 mm)

PMKG1000

1-717-767-6511

999

1/8 DIN PANEL ADAPTER KIT
FOR DT3A, DT3D, SCT, & SCP PANEL CUT-OUTS
The 1/8 DIN panel adapter kit permits the mounting of the PAX and Apollo
units into an existing 1.8" (45.7 mm) x 3.88" (98.5 mm) (DT3A, DT3D, SCT, &
SCP) panel cut-out. The kit consists of two metal adapter plates coated with a
durable flat black polyurethane finish, and a neoprene gasket, which provides a
sealed front panel that meets NEMA 4/IP65 specifications when properly
installed.

DIMENSIONS In Inches (mm)
NOTE:
An overall panel area
of 2.25" (57.1 mm) x
4.63" (117.6 mm) is
required for proper
mounting.

INSTALLATION
1. Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the adapter gasket (included
with adapter kit) and carefully stick the gasket to the front of the existing
panel cut-out.

2. Place the standard panel mount gasket (provided with the unit) over the unit.
Then slide one of the plates over the unit. If the gasket has adhesive, apply
the gasket to the plate, then slide the plate over the unit. (Gasket must be
facing the bezel.)
3. Insert the unit into the panel cut-out from the front and slide the remaining
adapter plate over the unit from the rear.
4. Install the mounting clip(s) as per the unit instructions. Tighten the
mounting screws evenly to apply uniform compression and to provide a
water-tight seal.
CAUTION: Only minimum pressure is required to seal the panel. Do NOT
overtighten the mounting screws.

ORDERING INFORMATION

1000

MODEL NO.

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

PMKA1

3-PIECE KIT permits mounting to existing
1.8" x 3.88" (45.7 x98.4 mm) Panel cut-out, O.A.
DIM. 2.25" x 4.63" (57.1 x 117.6 mm)

PMKA1000

www.redlion.net

INSTALLATION FOR CUB CONTROLLER PANELMOUNT KITS

PMKCC1

PMKCC2

PMKCC3

Three panelmount kits for the CUB Controller are available to replace most existing miniature
presettable counters on the market today. Kits come complete with adapter plates coated with a
durable flat black polyurethane finish, mounting hardware, and gaskets to provide a complete sealed
unit that meets NEMA 4/IP65 specifications when properly installed.

PMKCC1 & PMKCC2
These panelmount kits adapt the CUB Controller to either a 50 mm x 50 mm
or a 68 mm x 68 mm panel cut-out. The kit consists of two metal panel adaptors,
one neoprene gasket and 2 3-48 x 1/2” screws. The adapter plates and gasket are
pinched between the front bezel of the counter and the mounting clips (provided
with the controller accessory bag). The 1/2” long screws may be necessary for
thicker panel installations.
Note: If room permits, install signal connector after unit is mounted. If there is
not enough room, pull the wires through before installing as described below:

5. Install mounting clips (one on either side) with the screws provided. Tighten
the screws moderately to “pinch” the gaskets and panels between the front
bezel and the mounting clips. (Mounting clips are provided in accessory
bag.)

1. Pull signal connector through the following items in order:
a) One panel adapter plate.
b) Through existing panel opening.
2. Slide the following items onto the counter.
a) Panel gasket
b) Adapter plate
c) Adapter gasket
3. Install connector in the Cub Controller. Ensure connector is in proper
orientation i.e. lockslots visible when viewed from below the case.
4. Slide counter through panel cut-out from the front, and center in the panel
opening.

DIMENSIONS In inches (mm)

PMKCC1

PMKCC2

1-717-767-6511

PMKCC3

1001

PMKCC3
For mounting proceed as follows:
1. Slide panel gasket over back of counter. (Gasket is supplied in accessory bag
with counter.)
2. Slide counter onto adapter plate.
3. Slide adapter gasket onto counter.
4. Attach counter to adapter plate with two mounting clips and screws. (Both
mounting clips are supplied in accessory bag with counter.)
5. Install connector in the Cub Controller. Ensure connector is in proper
orientation i.e. lockslots visible when viewed from below the case.
6. Place complete assembly over existing cut-out, lining up the adapter plate
mounting holes with existing holes.
7. Use two mounting screws and nuts provided with Panel Adapter Kit to
secure panel to existing cut-out.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL NO.

PMKCC1

PMKCC2

PMKCC3

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

3-PIECE KIT permits mounting in existing
1.97” X 1.97” (50 mm x 50 mm) panel cut-outs
O.A. 2.27” x 2.27” (57.6 mm x 57.6 mm)
3-PIECE KIT permits mounting in existing
2.68” x 2.68” (68 mm x 75 mm) socket box panel cut-outs,
(72 mm x 72 mm DIN bezel opening)
O.A. 3” x 3” (76 mm x 76 mm)
2-PIECE KIT permits mounting for existing 2.36” x 2.95”
(60 mm x 75 mm) socket box panel cut-outs
O.A. 2.36” x 2.96” (60 mm x 75 mm)
Hole Centers 2.48” (63 mm

1002

www.redlion.net

PMKCC100

PMKCC200

PMKCC300

SENSOR WIRING
GUIDE

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

1003

CUB7

10
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

9
(COMM.)

10
(DC OUT)

BRN
(+ V)

10
(DC OUT)

SWITCH

1
(COMM)

BLK
(-)
RED
(+ V)

6
(H.S. IN)

WHT
(Ch A)

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

1 2 3 4
PSMA

BLK
(Ch A)
BLUE
(-)
BRN
(+ V)

NOT
APPLICABLE

BLK
(Ch A)
BLUE
(-)
BRN
(+ V)

NOT
APPLICABLE

APS

CUB2LU

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLK (COMM)
WHT
(Ch A)

NOT
APPLICABLE

CUB3

WHT
(Ch A)

6
(H.S. IN)

NOT
APPLICABLE

4
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

5
(SIG. IN)

SWITCH

7
SETTINGS
(INPUT A)

B
(-)

9
(COMM.)

B
(-)

9
(COMM.)

A
(+ V)

10
(DC OUT)

C
(+ V)

10
(DC OUT)

C (Ch A)

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

BRN
(+ V)

BLK *
(COMM)

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT *
(CNT.)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

NOT
APPLICABLE

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)
BLK *
A (+ V)
(COMM)
B (-)
C
(Ch A)

WHT *
(CNT.)
APS

BLK *
(COMM)

BLUE (-)
BLK
(Ch A)

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

A
(+ V)

APS

BRN
(+ V)

BLK *
(COMM)

B (-)

1 (+) 2 (-)

NOT
APPLICABLE

6
(H.S. IN)

A
(+ V)

C (Ch A)

WHT *
(CNT.)

BLK
(Ch A)

1
(COMM)

B (-)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT *
(CNT.)

* Designates wires from the listed counter.

1004

B
(-)

7
A
SETTINGS
(INPUT A)
(Ch A)

BLK *
(COMM)

BLUE (-)

APS

BLK (COMM)

C
(Ch A)

APS

1 (+) 2 (-)
BLK *
(COMM.)

5
(SIG. IN)

1 (+) 2 (-)

WHT *
(CNT.)

RED (+ V)

C
(Ch A

1
(COMM)

NOT
APPLICABLE

1 (+) 2 (-)
RED (+ V)

4
(COMM.)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

NOT
APPLICABLE

B
(-)

SWITCH
3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

A
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

BLK *
(COMM)

BLK
(-)
RED
(+ V)

5
(SIG. IN)

SWITCH
3
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

SETTINGS
7
(INPUT A)

BLUE
or
WHT

A
(+ V)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

BLK
(Ch A)

SWITCH

7
SETTINGS
(INPUT A)

A (+ V)
RED

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

RED
(+ V)

BLK
or
BRN
(+ V)

5
(SIG. IN)

KEY

C (Ch A)
WHITE

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

9
(COMM.)

BLK
(Ch A)

SWITCH

4
SETTINGS
(COMM.)

BLK

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

C48C

BLK
(-)

5
(SIG. IN)

4
(COMM.)

A (+ V)
RED

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SWITCH

1 2 3 4
PSMA

CUB1, CUB2

BLUE
(Ch A)

7
SETTINGS BLUE
(Ch A)
(INPUT A)

WHT
(Ch A)

CUB2LQ

1.5 K

BLUE
(-)

KEY

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

5
(SIG. IN)

4
(COMM.)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

WHT
(Ch A)

SWITCH
3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SWITCH
BRN
3
SETTINGS (+ V)
(DC OUT)

C (Ch A)
WHITE

BLACK

BLACK
(Ch A)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

4
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-) or
(COMM)

LMPCC

LMPEC

WHITE
OR
BLUE

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK
(-)

BLK
or
BRN
(+ V)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SWITCH
3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)
MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

RED
(+ V)

MP25TA
MP37TA
MP37CA
MP62TA
MP75TX

BROWN
(+ V)

BLUE
(Ch A)

WHITE
(Ch A)

WHT
(Ch A)

BLACK
OR
BROWN
(+ V)

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

APLR/APLRI/
APLPT

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

RED
(+ V)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

OLD
MODEL

LSC
RPGC

PSA6B
PSA7B
PSA8B
PSAFP
PSAC

PSA1B
PSA2B

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SENSOR
MODEL

ASTC, LMPC,
ZFG, ZCG,
HESS, PSAH

www.redlion.net

NOT
APPLICABLE

A (+ V)

BLK *
(COMM.)

B (-)
C
(Ch A)

WHT *
(CNT.)

RPGB
RPGH

RPGB

CUB7

WHT
(Ch A)
BLK
(-)
RED
(+ V)

1
(COMM)
6
(H.S. IN)

CUB2LQ

CUB1, CUB2

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA
WHT
(Ch A)
BLK
(-)
RED
(+ V)

BLK *
(COMM)
WHT *
(H.S. IN)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA
APS
1 (+) 2 (-)
RED (+ V)
BLK (-)
WHT (Ch A)
GRN (Ch B)

BLK *
(COMM)
WHT *
(CNT.)
GRN *
(QUAD.)

CUB2LU

BLK (COMM)
WHT
(Ch A)

CUB3

BLK *
(COMM.)

B
(-)

4
(COMM.)

WHT
(Ch A)

5
(SIG. IN)

C
(Ch A)

5
(SIG. IN)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

C (Ch A)

GRN (Ch B)

WHT
(Ch A)

WHT *
(CNT.)
GRN *
(QUAD.)

BLK *
(COMM.)

APS

1 (+) 2 (-)

BLK (COMM)

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLK (COMM)
WHT *
(CNT.)

WHT
(Ch A)

SWITCH

3 (Ch A)

BLK *
(COMM)

2 (-)

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

1
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

SWITCH

3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

3
SETTINGS BRN
(+ V)
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

4
(COMM)

WHT

5
(SIG. IN)

BLUE
(-)

4
(COMM)

WHT

5
(SIG. IN)

SWITCH

SETTINGS
7
(INPUT A)

SETTINGS
7
WHT
(INPUT A)

9
(COMM)
10
(DC OUT)

WHT

1
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

6
(H.S. IN)

BRN
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

WHT *
(CNT.)

BLK *
(COMM)

1 (+ V)
2 (-)
3
(Ch A)
4
(Ch B)

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)

C (Ch A)

6
(H.S. IN)

1
(+ V)

BLACK
(PNP OPEN)

BLUE
(-)

9
(COMM)

BRN
(+ V)

10
(DC OUT)
WHT

1
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

6
(H.S. IN)

BRN
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5

PSMA

WHT

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

BRN
(+ V)

WHT

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

BRN
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5

PSMA

1 (+) 2 (-)

GRN *
(QUAD.)

A (+ V)
B (-)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)

APS

BLK *
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)
D
(Ch B)

1
(COMM)

2 (-)

WHT *
(CNT.)

NOT
APPLICABLE

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)

GRN *
(QUAD.)

BLK *
(COMM)

1 (+ V)
2 (-)
3 (Ch A)

BRN
(+ V)

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLUE (-)

WHT *
(CNT.)

NOT
APPLICABLE

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)

WHT *
(CNT.)

RED (+ V)

3 (Ch A)

1 (+) 2 (-)
A (+ V)
B (-)

BROWN (+ V)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)
BLACK
(NPN CLOSED)

SWITCH
7
(INPUT A) SETTINGS WHT
8
(INPUT B)
BLUE
9
(-)
(COMM)
BRN
10
(+ V)
(DC OUT)

APS

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)
RED (+ V)

5
(SIG. IN)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)

WHT (Ch A)

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

A
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

BLK (-)

BLK *
(COMM)

B (-)

WHT *
(H.S. IN)

RED (+ V)

3
(Ch A)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA

BLK *
(COMM)

6
(H.S. IN)

A
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5
PSMA
WHT
(Ch A)
BLK
(-)
RED
(+ V)

1
(COMM)

B (-)

6
(H.S. IN)

4
(COMM.)

3
SWITCH
7
(INPUT A) SETTINGS (Ch A)
4
8
(Ch B)
(INPUT B)
2
9
(-)
(COMM)
1
10
(+
V)
(DC OUT)

C (Ch A)

1
(COMM)

2
(-)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

4
(COMM.)

WHT
(Ch A)
BLK
(-)
RED
(+ V)

BROWN (+ V)

SWITCH
3
SETTINGS BRN
(+ V)
(DC OUT)

SWITCH

C
SWITCH
7
(INPUT A) SETTINGS (Ch A)
D
8
(Ch B)
(INPUT B)
B
9
(-)
(COMM)
A
10
(+ V)
(DC OUT)

8
5

GREEN
(Ch B)

BLK
(-)

BLK (COMM)
WHT *
(CNT.)

BLK *
RED (+ V)
(COMM.)

WHT
(Ch A)

D (Ch B)
GREEN

3
1
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)
(+ V)

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)
RED (+ V)

Ch B
Ch A
COMM
+V

4
3
2
1

SWITCH
3
A
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)
(+ V)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

RED
(+ V)

3
4

RED
(+ V)

C (Ch A) ZHG
WHITE

RED
(+ V)

SWITCH
7
WHT
(INPUT A) SETTINGS (Ch A)
8
GRN
(INPUT B)
(Ch B)
9
BLK
(COMM)
(-)
10
RED
(DC OUT)
(+ V)

WHT
(Ch A)
GRN
(Ch B)
BLK
(-)

WHITE
(Ch A)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

5
(SIG. IN)

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

WHT
(Ch A)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

4
(COMM.)

D (Ch B)
GREEN

C (Ch A)
WHITE

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
BLACK

KEY

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

BLK
(-)

ZBG and ZBH

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SWITCH
3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)
MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

RED
(+ V)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

WHITE
(Ch A)
GREEN (Ch B)

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
BLACK

KEY

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

C48C

APLR/APLRI/
APLPT

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

RED (+ V)
BLACK (-) or
(COMM)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

LE, RPGN

PRDC
RCDC
RRDC

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

OLD
MODEL

ARJ, LSM, LSQ,
RPGO, RPGQ,

PRMDC
RCMDC
RRMDC

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

ZBG
ZBH
(M12 Connector)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

ZBG
ZBH
ZHG

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

ZDH
ZLZ
ZNH
ZUK

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SENSOR
MODEL

ZCH, ZFH, ZGH,
ZMD, ZOD, ZOH,
ZPJ, ZRJ, ZRL, ZSD,
RPGD

WHT *
(CNT.)

WHT

BRN
(+ V)

WHT *
(CNT.)

WHT

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)

NOT
APPLICABLE

BRN
(+ V)

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLUE (-)
WHT

WHT *
(CNT.)

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLUE (-)
WHT *
(CNT.)

APS
1 (+) 2 (-)
BRN
(+ V)

BLK *
(COMM.)

BLUE (-)
WHT *
(CNT.)

WHT

WHT *
(CNT.)

* Designates wires from the listed counter.

1-717-767-6511

1005

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

1 2 3 4

Sensor also works for INP B

NOT
APPLICABLE

1 2 3 4

BLUE

3
(INPUTA)
TBC

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BLK
(Ch A)

BRN
(+ V)

BLUE
(-)
BLK
(Ch A)

7
(INPUTA)

5
(COMM.)

BLK

4
SWITCH
WHT
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
or
TBA
BLU
5
(COMM.)
TBC
3
BLK
(INPUTA)
TBC

SWITCH

SETTINGS
4
(MAG.PKUP)
TBC

www.redlion.net

5
(COMM.)
TBC

A
(+ V)

SWITCH

4
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

B
(-)

5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

7
(INPUTA)

A
(+ V)

B
(-)
C
(Ch A)

A
(+ V)

SWITCH

4
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

B
(-)

5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

7
(INPUTA)

SWITCH
4
A
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
(+ V)
TBA
5
B
(COMM.)
(-)
TBC
3
C
(INPUTA)
(Ch A)
TBC

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SWITCH

SETTINGS
6
(MAG. PKUP)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

BLU
(-)

SWITCH

4
SETTINGS WHT
(DC OUT)
or
BLU
5
(COMM.)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

4
(DC OUT)
TBA

BRN
(+ V)

DITAK w/MLPS

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK
or
BRN

7
(INPUT A)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLUE

SWITCH

4
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

A
(+V)

3 INP
1 GND V+ 2

3 INP
1 GND

DITAK w/MLPS
BLK
or
BRN

C
(Ch A)
4.8K
B
(COMM)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK

3 INP
1 GND V+ 2

A
(+V)

SWITCH
4
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
TBA
5
(COMM.)
TBC
3
(INPUTA)
TBC

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

C
(Ch A)
B
(COMM)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

WHT
or
BLUE

BRN
(+V)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

NOT
APPLICABLE

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS
MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

GEMINI 1
GEMINI 2, 3 or 4

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

+ VDC

1006

INP A

WHT
(Ch A)

+ VDC

BLK
(-)

4
SWITCH
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
TBA
5
(COMM.)
TBC
3
(INPUTA)
TBC

USR

RED
(+ V)

7
(INPUTA)

Sensor is not applicable for INP B

NOT
APPLICABLE

BLK
(Ch A)
4.8K
BLUE
(COMM)

DITAK w/MLPS

5
(COMM.)

Sensor is not applicable for INP B

1 2 3 4

BLK
(Ch A)
BRN
(+ V)
INP B

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

4.8K

BLK
(-)

1 2 3 4

Sensor also works for INP B

3 INP
1 GND V+ 2

WHT
(Ch A)

USR

Sensor also works for INP B

SWITCH
SETTINGS

NOT
APPLICABLE

RED
(+V)

SWITCH

1 2 3 4

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

1 2 3 4

INP A

SWITCH
SETTINGS

INP B

SWITCH
SETTINGS

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

SWITCH
SETTINGS

1 2 3 4

4
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

C
(Ch A)
A
(+ V)

B
(COMM)

BLUE
(COMM)

RED
(+ V)

C
(Ch A)
A
(+ V)

B
(COMM)

INPUTA
V+

SWITCH
SETTINGS

Sensor is not applicable for INP B

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BLUE or WHT
(Ch A)
BLK
(COMM)

COMM.

HESS or PSAH sensors only.
Also applicable for INP B

BLK
(COMM)

BLK
(Ch A)
BRN
(+ V)

BLUE
(COMM)

NOT
APPLICABLE

USE ASTC IN-LINE
AMPLIFIER

INPUTA
V+

C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS
+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

CUB5T

2.2 K ohm

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

1 2 3 4

BLK or BRN
(+ V)

A
(+ V)

B
(COMM)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SWITCH
SETTINGS

WHT
(Ch A)

DITAK 7
DITAK 8

COMM.

BLUE (Ch A)

WHT
(Ch A)
RED
(+ V)

BLK
(COMM)

NOT
APPLICABLE

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2
1 COM

BLK
(Ch A)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

WHT
(Ch A)
RED
(+ V)

BLK
(COMM)

BRN
(+ V)

C
(Ch A)
10 K ohm

NOT
APPLICABLE

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2
1 COM

BLUE
(COMM)

A (+ V)
RED

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK
A
B
(COMM) (+ V)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

CUB5
(Pre 2004)

WHT
(Ch A)

INPUTA
V+

COMM.

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

CUB5B
CUB5R

RED
(+ V)

BLK
(COMM)

KEY

C (Ch A)
WHITE

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK

10 K ohm

NOT
APPLICABLE

A (+ V)
RED

BLK
(Ch A)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

CUB4

10 K ohm

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2
1 COM

Sensor also works for INP B

BRN
BLUE
(+ V)
(COMM)

WHT
(Ch A)

KEY

C (Ch A)
WHITE

BLACK

BLACK
(Ch A)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

RED
(+ V)

LMPCC

LMPEC

WHITE
OR
BLUE

BLUE
(-) or
(COMM)

BLUE
(Ch A)

WHITE
(Ch A)

BLK
(COMM)

BROWN
(+ V)

BLACK
OR
BROWN
(+ V)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

RED
(+ V)

MP25TA
MP37TA
MP37CA
MP62TA
MP75TX

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

OLD
MODEL

LSC
RPGC

PSA6B
PSA7B
PSA8B
PSAFP
PSAC

PSA1B
PSA2B

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SENSOR
MODEL

ASTC, LMPC,
ZFG, ZCG,
HESS, PSAH

SENSOR
MODEL

ZCH, ZFH, ZGH,
ZMD, ZOD, ZOH,
ZPJ, ZRJ, ZRL, ZSD,
RPGD

ZDH
ZLZ
ZNH
ZUK

ZBG
ZBH
ZHG

ZBG
ZBH
(M12 Connector)

OLD
MODEL

ARJ, LSM, LSQ,
RPGO, RPGQ,

LE, RPGN

RPGB
RPGH

RPGB

D (Ch B)
GREEN

B
(COMM)

A
(+ V)

C
(Ch A)

1 COM

WHT
(Ch A)
GRN
(Ch B)
B

1 COM

WHT
(Ch A)
BLK
(COMM) GRN RED
(Ch B) (+ V)

D
(Ch B)
B

SWITCH
SETTINGS

WHITE
(Ch A)

Ch B
Ch A
COMM
+V

4
3
2
1

C
(Ch A)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)

1
(+ V)

3
(Ch A)

BRN
(+ V)

BLUE
(COMM)

WHT

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2

1 COM

B
(COMM)

1 COM

A
(+ V)

C
(Ch A)
D
(Ch B)
B

C
(Ch A)
D
A
(Ch B) (+ V)

2
(COMM)

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2

3
(Ch A)
4
(Ch B)

3
(Ch A)
4
1
(Ch B) (+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

WHT

BLUE
(COMM)

TBC 2
(INPUT B)

C
Ch A)
D
(Ch B)

TBC 2
(INPUT B)

3
(Ch A)
4
(Ch B)

SWITCH
TBA 4
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

TBC 5
(COMM.)
TBC 3
(INPUTA)
TBC 2
(INPUT B)

BRN
(+V)

M
V+ 2

DITAK w/MLPS
SWITCH

BRN
(+ V)

SETTINGS
4
(DC OUT)

BRN
(+ V)

SETTINGS
4
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

5
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

5
(COMM.)

WHT

7
(INPUTA)

WHT

7
(INPUTA)

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 4
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

TBC 5
(COMM.)

WHT

TBC 3
(INPUTA)

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 4
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

TBC 5
(COMM.)

WHT

TBC 3
(INPUTA)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

DITAK w/MLPS

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

TBC 3
(INPUTA)

8
(INPUT B)

4.8K

3 INP
1 GND

V+ 2

SWITCH
SETTINGS
MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

TBC 5
(COMM.)
TBC 3
(INPUTA)

1
(+ V)
2
(COMM)

7
(INPUT A)

WHT
BLUE
(COMM)

SWITCH

1 2 3 4

Sensor also works for INP B

BRN
(+V)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

TBC 5
(COMM.)

SWITCH
TBA 4
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

5
(COMM.)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

TBC 5
(COMM.)
TBC 3
(INPUTA)

A
(+ V)
B
(COMM)

8
(INPUT B)

3
Ch A)
4
(Ch B)

4
SWITCH
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SWITCH
TBA 4
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

7
(INPUT A)

1
(+ V)
2
(COMM)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

C
Ch A)
D
(Ch B)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

GRN

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

WHT

8
(INPUT B)

SWITCH
TBA 4
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK

7
(INPUTA)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

RED

5
(COMM.)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

8
(INPUT B)

5
(COMM.)

4
SWITCH
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

GRN

A
(+ V)
B
(COMM)

4.8K

3 INP
1 GND

V+ 2

DITAK w/MLPS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

7
(INPUTA)

4
SWITCH
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

WHT

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

5
(COMM.)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

BLK

DITAK w/MLPS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

DITAK 7
DITAK 8
GEMINI 1
GEMINI 2, 3 or 4

4
SWITCH
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

3 INP
1 GND

V+ 2

WHT
BLUE
(COMM)

2
(COMM)
3 INP
1 GND

V+ 2

1
(+V)

+ VDC

1 2 3 4

INP A

DITAK w/MLPS

B
(COMM)

3
(Ch A)

+ VDC

SWITCH
SETTINGS

USR

3 INP
1 GND

V+ 2

RED

4.8K

A
(+V)

BRN
(+ V)
INP B

3 INP
1 GND

B
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)

A
(+V)

WHT

SWITCH
SETTINGS
INP COMM
PWR
COMM

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

NOT
APPLICABLE

1 2 3 4

Sensor also works for INP B

BLUE
(COMM)

BRN
(+ V)

INP A

WHT

USR

1 2 3 4

Sensor also works for INP B

INP B

+ VDC

1 2 3 4

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

INP A

SWITCH
SETTINGS

USR

4.8K

C
(Ch A)

BRN
(+ V)

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

BLK
(COMM)

RED
(+V)

WHT

SWITCH
SETTINGS

Sensor also works for INP B

WHT
(Ch A)

INPUTA
V+

COMM.

SWITCH
SETTINGS
INP B

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT

BRN
(+ V)

BLUE
(COMM)

BRN
(+ V)

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2

1 COM

INPUTA
V+

COMM.

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

1 2 3 4

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

WHT

BRN
(+ V)

BLUE
(COMM)

A
V+

COMM.

2
(COMM)

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

+ VDC

INP A

USR

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT
10 K ohm

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2

1 COM

1
(+ V)

A
V+

COMM.

SWITCH
SETTINGS
1 2 3 4

BRN
(+ V)

BLUE
(COMM)

10 K ohm

B
(COMM)

BLACK
(PNP OPEN)

BLACK
(NPN CLOSED)

BLUE
(COMM)

CUB5T

BROWN (+ V)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)

GREEN
(Ch B)

2
(COMM)

BROWN (+ V)
RED
(+ V)

2
3
8
4
5

C (Ch A) ZHG
WHITE

A
B
(COMM) (+ V)

A
V+

C
(Ch A)
D
A
(Ch B) (+ V)
INP B

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

+ VDC

INP A

USR

INP B

1 2 3 4

C
(Ch A)

COMM.

B
(COMM)
ON

D (Ch B)
GREEN

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2

A
(+ V)

B
(COMM)

A
V+

COMM.

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

10 K ohm

H.S. CNT 5
V+ 2

RED
(+ V)

BLK
(COMM)

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
BLACK

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

C (Ch A)
WHITE

KEY

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

CUB4
CUB5
(PRE 2004)

10 K ohm

INP COMM
PWR
COMM

CUB5B
CUB5R

WHT
(Ch A)

RED
(+ V)

BLK
(COMM)

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
F
BLACK

SWITCH

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

WHITE
(Ch A)
GREEN (Ch B)
RPGD:
BLUE (Ch B)

KEY

PRDC
RCDC
RRDC

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

ZBG and ZBH

RED (+ V)
BLACK (-) or
(COMM)

PRMDC
RCMDC
RRMDC

* Designates wires from the listed counter.

1-717-767-6511

1007

1008

2.2 K
BLUE

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SWITCH

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

BLK
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

SWITCH

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT
or
BLUE

TBB 2
(FB)

BLK

TBB 3
(COMM.)

www.redlion.net

SWITCH
SETTINGS

9
(COMM.)

6
(SIG. IN)

A
(+ V)

TBA 4
(DC +)

B
(-)

TBA 5
(DC -)

C
(Ch A)

TBB1
(INPA)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SWITCH
TBA 3
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

B
(-)

TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

SWITCH

TBA 6 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

B
(-)

TBA 5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

SWITCH

TBA 3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

B
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

SWITCH

5
SETTINGS
(+12 VDC )

B
(-)

7
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

6
(SIG. IN)

A
(+ V)

TBA 4
(DC +)

B
(-)

TBA 5
(DC -)

C
(Ch A)

TBB1
(INPA)

A
(+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SWITCH
TBA 3
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

B
(-)

TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

A
(+ V)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

B
(-)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

8
(INPUT)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC SRC
NPN OC

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

7
(+12 V)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

C
(Ch A)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC SRC
NPN OC

7
(COMM.)

A
(+ V)

SWITCH

B
(-)

A
(+ V)

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

BLK

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

TBC 3
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

5
A
SETTINGS
(+12 VDC )
(+ V)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

A
(+ V)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

9
(COMM.)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

B
(-)

TBC 6
(COMM.)

SWITCH

TBA 6 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

TBA 5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

8
(INPUT)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

B
(-)

TBA 5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

A
(+ V)

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

BLUE
(-)

7
(+12 V)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS
SRC
LOGIC
SNK
MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC SRC
NPN OC

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS
SRC
LOGIC
SNK
MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

SETTINGS
TBA 6
(DC OUT)

A
(+ V)

SWITCH
A
TBC 1 SETTINGS (+ V)
(INPUTA)

WHT
or
BLUE

SWITCH

BRN
(+ V)

BLK
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

TBB 4
(COMM)

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

SWITCH

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SWITCH

B
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

MAG
SRC

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK
or
BRN

BLK

SWITCH
SETTINGS

C
(Ch A)

A
(+ V)

LOGIC
SNK

TBB 3
(COMM.)

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

SWITCH

TBB 1
(INPA)

TBC 6
(COMM.)

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK
(-)

SWITCH

BLK
(Ch A)

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

WHT
or
BLUE

Not applicable for INP B.
Only LD200P0/LD4006P0

TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

BLUE

BLK

7
(COMM.)

B
(-)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

TBA 3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

TBB1
(INPA)

SWITCH

SETTINGS
6
(SIG. IN)

SWITCH

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

MAG
SRC

RED
(+ V)

BLK
(Ch A)

A (+ V)
RED

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK

LOGIC
SNK

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

TBA 5
(DC -)

BLUE
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

9
(COMM.)

MAG
SRC

WHT
(Ch A)

BLUE
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

TBC 3
(COMM.)

TBA 6
(DC OUT)

BLK

LOGIC
SNK

TBA 5
(COMM.)

TBA 4
(DC +)

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BLK
or
BRN

SWITCH
8
(INPUT) SETTINGS

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK
(-)

BRN
(+ V)

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

WHT
or
BLUE

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

TBA 6 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BLUE

6
(SIG. IN)

MAG
SRC

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

SWITCH

RED
(+ V)

2.2 K

BLK
(Ch A)

LOGIC
SNK

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

TBB 2
(FB)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS
MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

WHT
(Ch A)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

SWITCH

BLK

SWITCH
WHT
5
SETTINGS
or
(+12 VDC)
BLUE
7
(COMM.)

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

IMI
LD20, LD40,
LD2T, LD4T
LEGEND

BLK
(-)

BLK
or
BRN

BLUE
(-)

KEY

1 2 3 4 5

SWITCH
TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

TBB1
(INPA)

9
(COMM.)

BRN
(+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

TBA 5
(DC -)

BLUE
(-)

C (Ch A)
WHITE

BLUE

RED
(+ V)

WHT
(Ch A)

2.2 K

8
(INPUT)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

TBC 6
(COMM.)

A
(+ V)

1 2 3 4 5

TBB1
(INPA)

TBA 4
(DC +)

7
(+12 V)

BLK
(Ch A)

A (+ V)
RED

WHT
(Ch A)

BLK
or
BRN

BRN
(+ V)

SWITCH

TBC 5 SETTINGS
(MAG. PKUP)

1 2 3 4 5

TBA 5
(DC -)

6
(SIG. IN)

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

WHT
or
BLUE

BLK
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BLUE

BLK
(Ch A)

1 2 3 4 5

TBA 4
(DC +)

7
(COMM.)

TBC 6
(COMM.)

RED
(+ V)

1.5 K

BLUE
(-)

SWITCH

5
SETTINGS
(+12 VDC )

1 2 3 4 5

6
(SIG. IN)

BLK
or
BRN

WHT
(Ch A)

1 2 3 4 5

7
(COMM.)

LIBC1 / LIBC2
LNXC1 / LNXC2

SWITCH

SETTINGS
5
(+12 VDC )

BLK
(-)

BLUE

8
(INPUT)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

9
(COMM.)

7
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS

SWITCH

SETTINGS
TBA 4
(DC OUT)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

BLK
(-)

BLK
or
BRN

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

8
(INPUT)

MAG
SRC

IFMA
IFMR

WHT
(Ch A)

RED
(+ V)

MDC

7
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS

BLUE

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

KEY

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK

BRN
(+ V)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

SWITCH

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

WHT
(Ch A)

BLK
or
BRN

C (Ch A)
WHITE

BLACK

BLACK
(Ch A)

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

TBC 6
(COMM.)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK
(-)

RED
(+ V)

SWITCH

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

LMPCC

LMPEC

WHITE
OR
BLUE

BLUE
(-) or
(COMM)

BLUE
(Ch A)

WHITE
(Ch A)

RED
(+ V)

MP25TA
MP37TA
MP37CA
MP62TA
MP75TX

BROWN
(+ V)

BLACK
OR
BROWN
(+ V)

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

LOGIC
SNK

GEM52

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

RED
(+ V)

MAG
SRC

OLD
MODEL

LSC
RPGC

PSA6B
PSA7B
PSA8B
PSAFP
PSAC

PSA1B
PSA2B

LOGIC
SNK

SENSOR
MODEL

ASTC, LMPC,
ZFG, ZCG,
HESS, PSAH

RPGB
RPGH

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

WHT
(Ch A)

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SWITCH
TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BLK
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

WHT
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

MAG
SRC

RED
(+ V)

A
(+ V)

TBA 4
(DC +)

B
(-)

TBA 5
(DC -)

C
(Ch A)

TBB1
(INPA)

D
(Ch B)

TBB 2
(INP B)

TBC 2
(INPUT B)

A
(+ V)

(-)

TBA 5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

A
(+ V)

B
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

BRN
(+ V)

7
(+12 V)

WHT

8
(INPUT)

WHT

8
(INPUT)

BLUE
(-)

9
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

9
(COMM.)

3
(Ch A)

6
(SIG. IN)

1
(+ V)

TBA 4
(DC +)

2
(-)

TBA 5
(DC -)

3
(Ch A)

TBB1
(INPA)

4
(Ch B)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

TBB 2
(INP B)

BLUE
(-)

7
(COMM.)

WHT

6
(SIG. IN)

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 4
(DC +)

BLUE
(-)

TBA 5
(DC -)

WHT

TBB 1
(INPA)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS
SRC
LOGIC
SNK

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SWITCH

5
SETTINGS
(+12 VDC)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SWITCH

BRN
(+ V)

5
SETTINGS
(+12 VDC)

BLUE
(-)

7
(COMM.)

WHT

6
(SIG. IN)

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 4
(DC +)

BLUE
(-)

TBA 5
(DC -)

WHT

TBB 1
(INPA)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

7
(COMM.)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

7
(+12 V)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BRN
(+ V)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS
LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS
SRC
LOGIC
SNK

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

2
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

Only LD200P0/LD4006P0

A
(+ V)

TBA 3
SWITCH
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

1
(+ V)

C
(Ch A)

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

3
(Ch A)

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

D
(Ch B)

TBC 2
(INPUT B)

4
(Ch B)

TBC 2
(INPUT B)

1
(+ V)

TBA 6
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BRN
(+ V)

SETTINGS
TBA 6
(DC OUT)

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 6 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

2
(-)

TBA 5
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

TBA 5
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

TBA 5
(COMM.)

3
(Ch A)

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

WHT

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

WHT

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

WHT

TBB 2
(FB)

WHT

TBB 2
(FB)

A
(+ V)

SWITCH

SETTINGS
TBA 6
(DC OUT)

TBA 5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBA 4
(CNT. IN )

SWITCH

A
(+ V)

SWITCH
1
TBA 3 SETTINGS
(+ V)
(DC OUT)

B
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

SWITCH

TBA 3
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

2
(-)

TBB 3
(COMM.)

3
(Ch A)

TBB 2
(FB)

SWITCH

BRN
(+ V)

TBA 3 SETTINGS BRN
(+ V)
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

WHT

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

SWITCH

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

BLUE
(-)

TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

WHT

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

2
(-)

TBA 3
SWITCH
(DC OUT) SETTINGS
TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

B
(-)

TBA 3 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

SWITCH

TBA 6 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

WHT

5
SWITCH
(+12 VDC ) SETTINGS BRN
(+ V)
MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

6
(SIG. IN)

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

TBA 5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

WHT

SWITCH
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

BLK
(-)

SWITCH

7
(COMM.)

TBC 6
(COMM.)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SETTINGS
TBA 6
(DC OUT)

D
(Ch B)

9
(COMM.)

BLUE
(-)

SWITCH
MAG
SRC

RED
(+ V)

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

2
(-)

TBC 6
(COMM.)

LOGIC
SNK

TBC 2
(INPUT B)

TBA 4/5
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

8
(INPUT)

BLUE
(-)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

GRN
or
BLUE

SWITCH
TBA 3
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

3
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

TBC 1
(INPUTA)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

BLK
WHT

A
SWITCH
TBA 3
(DC OUT) SETTINGS (+ V)
B
TBA 4/5
(-)
(COMM.)

LOGIC
SNK

MDC

LIBC1 / LIBC2
LNXC1 / LNXC2

LEGEND

RED

7
(+12 V)

5
1
SWITCH
(+12 VDC ) SETTINGS (+ V)

B
(-)

Only LD200P0/LD4006P0

1
(+ V)

BRN
(+ V)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

Only LD200P0/LD4006P0

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

SWITCH

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

MAG
SRC

TBB 2
(INP B)

3
(Ch A)

SWITCH

BRN
(+ V)

LOGIC
SNK

D
(Ch B)

TBC 6
(COMM.)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

TBB1
(INPA)

A
(+ V)

2
(-)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC
1 2 3 4 5

C
(Ch A)

9
(COMM.)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

TBB 2
(INP B)

TBA 5
(DC -)

B
(-)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

GRN
or
BLUE

B
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

8
(INPUT)

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

TBB1
(INPA)

TBA 4
(DC +)

C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

WHT
(Ch A)

A
(+ V)

7
(+12 V)

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

TBA 5
(DC -)

6
(SIG. IN)

A
(+ V)

MAG
SRC

BLK
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

C
(Ch A)

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

LOGIC
SNK

TBA 4
(DC +)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

RED
(+ V)

7
(COMM.)

C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
TBA 4
(DC OUT) SETTINGS

1 2 3 4 5

6
(SIG. IN)

B
(-)

TBC 6
(COMM.)

BLACK
(PNP OPEN)

WHT
(Ch A)

SWITCH

5
SETTINGS
(+12 VDC)

B
(-)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)

BLACK
(NPN CLOSED)

GREEN
(Ch B)
1
(+ V)

BROWN (+ V)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)

1 2 3 4 5

7
(COMM.)

A
(+ V)

SWITCH
TBA 4
SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

7
6

BROWN (+ V)

BLK
(-)

SWITCH

9
(COMM.)

Ch B
Ch A
COMM
+V

8
5

1 2 3 4 5

5
SETTINGS
(+12 VDC)

B
(-)

4
3
2
1

2
3
4

RED
(+ V)

C
(Ch A)

8
(INPUT)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

C (Ch A) ZHG
WHITE

1 2 3 4 5

9
(COMM.)

7
(+12 V)

WHITE
(Ch A)

BLK
(-)

A
(+ V)

8
(INPUT)

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

1 2 3 4 5

WHT
(Ch A)

C
(Ch A)

LOGIC
SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

SWITCH
SETTINGS

TBC 6
(COMM.)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

7
(+12 V)

B
(-)

MAG. PKUP.
LOGIC
NPN OC

RED
(+ V)

SWITCH

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

MAG
SRC
LO FRQ

TBC 4/2
(INPUT)

A
(+ V)

D (Ch B)
GREEN

LOGIC
SNK
HI FRQ

WHT
(Ch A)

D (Ch B)
GREEN

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
BLACK

C (Ch A)
WHITE

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

TBC 6
(COMM.)

KEY

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

BLK
(-)

MAG
SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

TBA 4 SETTINGS
(DC OUT)

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
F
BLACK

MAG
SRC

SWITCH

RED
(+ V)

KEY

LOGIC
SNK

WHITE
(Ch A)
GREEN (Ch B)
RPGD:
BLUE (Ch B)

LD20, LD40,
LD2T, LD4T

IMI

IFMA
IFMR

GEM52

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

ZBG and ZBH

RED (+ V)
BLACK (-) or
(COMM)

PRDC
RCDC
RRDC

RPGB

SNK
HI FRQ
HI BIAS

LE, RPGN

PRMDC
RCMDC
RRMDC

SRC
LO FRQ
LO BIAS

OLD
MODEL

ARJ, LSM, LSQ,
RPGO, RPGQ,

ZBG
ZBH
(M12 Connector)

ZBG
ZBH
ZHG

MAG
SRC

ZDH
ZLZ
ZNH
ZUK

LOGIC
SNK

SENSOR
MODEL

ZCH, ZFH, ZGH,
ZMD, ZOD, ZOH,
ZPJ, ZRJ, ZRL, ZSD
RPGD

* Designates wires from the listed counter.

1-717-767-6511

1009

SWITCH
SETTINGS

4
(COMM)
5 or 6
(INPA/B)

6
5
4
3
2
1

SW1 SW2

SWITCH

BLK
or
BRN

SETTINGS
3
(+12 V)
6

2.2 K

4
(COMM)
5 or 6
(INPA/B)

BLUE

5
4
3
2
1

BLUE
(-)

BLK
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BRN
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

BLUE
(-)

4
(COMM)
5 or 6
(INPA/B)

BLK
(Ch A)

SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

6
5
4
3
2
1

BLK

SWITCH
SETTINGS

WHT
or
BLUE

7
SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

B
(-)

C
(Ch A)

A
(+ V)

B
(-)

C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SWITCH

SETTINGS
4
(COMM)
6

BLK
WHT
or
BLUE

5
(INPA)

5
4
3
2
1

A
(+ V)
B
(-)
C
(Ch A)

3
(+12 V)

SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

4
(COMM)
5 or 6
(INPA/B)

6
5
4
3
2
1

A
(+ V)

B
(-)

C
(Ch A)

A
(+ V)

B
(-)

C
(Ch A)

SW1 SW2

A
(+ V)
B
(-)
C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS
SRC
LOGIC
SNK

WHT
or
BLUE

A
(+ V)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

SWITCH
SETTINGS

3
(+12 V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

4
(COMM)
5 or 6
(INPA/B)

NOT
APPLICABLE

SWITCH
SETTINGS

C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
3
(+12 V) SETTINGS

4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

JUMPER

BRN
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

BLUE
(-)

4
(COMM)

BLK
(Ch A)

5 or 6 JUMPER
(INPA/B)

SNK

NOT
APPLICABLE

www.redlion.net

NOT
APPLICABLE

1 2 3 4

A
(+ V)
B
(-)

6
5
4
3
2
1

4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

C
(Ch A)

3
(+12 V)

1 2 3 4

5 or 6
(INPA/B)

5
(INP)

1 2 3 4

2.2 K

BLUE

WHT
or
BLUE

A
(+ V)
B
(-)

Not applicable for PAXLC.

3
(+12 V) SRC
4
(COMM)

BLK
(Ch A)

4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

SWITCH
4
(COMM) SETTINGS

BLK

BLK
or
BRN

5
(INP)

BLUE
(-)

3
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS
1 2 3 4

BLUE

4
(COMM)

BRN
(+ V)

2.2 K

SWITCH
3
(+12 V) SETTINGS
1 2 3 4

NOT
APPLICABLE

BLK
or
BRN

1010

4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

1 2 3 4

WHT
(Ch A)

3
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS
ON

PAXLC, PAXLR
PAXLPT

NOT
APPLICABLE

RED
(+ V)
BLK
(-)

SRC

BRN
(+ V)

BLK

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK

SNK
LOGIC

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

BLUE

SWITCH
SETTINGS

A (+ V)
RED

PAXC PAXI
Dual Quad A

WHT
(Ch A)

3
(+12 V)

SW1 SW2

BLK
(Ch A)

C (Ch A)
WHITE

PAXC PAXI
Dual Quad B

PAXC, PAXI,
PAXR

RED
(+ V)
BLK
(-)

BLK
or
BRN

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SNK
LOGIC

BLUE
(-)

SRC

BLK
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BLUE

BRN
(+ V)

A (+ V)
RED

B (-) or (COMM )
BLACK

SNK
LOGIC

SWITCH
SETTINGS

KEY

C (Ch A)
WHITE

BLACK

SRC

RED
(+ V)

BLK
or
BRN

KEY

BLACK
(Ch A)

SNK
LOGIC

PAXTM, PAXCK

WHT
(Ch A)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

BLK
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SRC

RED
(+ V)

LMPCC

LMPEC

WHITE
OR
BLUE

BLUE
(-) or
(COMM)

BLUE
(Ch A)

WHITE
(Ch A)

MP25TA
MP37TA
MP37CA
MP62TA
MP75TX

BROWN
(+ V)

BLACK
OR
BROWN
(+ V)

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

SNK
LOGIC

PRA2

PRS1 / PRA1

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

RED
(+ V)

SRC

OLD
MODEL

LSC
RPGC

PSA6B
PSA7B
PSA8B
PSAFP
PSAC

PSA1B
PSA2B

SNK
LOGIC

SENSOR
MODEL

ASTC, LMPC,
ZFG, ZCG,
HESS, PSAH

ZBG
ZBH
ZHG

ZBG
ZBH
(M12 Connector)

OLD
MODEL

ARJ, LSM, LSQ,
RPGO, RPGQ,

LE, RPGN

RPGB
RPGH

RPGB

2
3
4

8
6

Ch B
Ch A
COMM
+V

4
3
2
1

BROWN (+ V)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)

BLUE (-)
or (COMM)
WHITE
(NPN OPEN)
BLACK
(PNP OPEN)

BLACK
(NPN CLOSED)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

A
(+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

A
(+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

1
(+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BRN
(+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BRN
(+ V)

BLK
(-)

B
(-)

2
(-)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

BLUE
(-)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

GREEN
(Ch B)

BLUE
(-)

3
(Ch A)

WHT

1
(+ V)

BRN
(+ V)

2
(-)

SNK
LOGIC

D (Ch B)
GREEN

RED
(+ V)

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

D (Ch B)
GREEN

WHITE
(Ch A)

C (Ch A) ZHG
WHITE

C (Ch A)
WHITE

BLACK
(-) or
(COMM)

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
BLACK

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

PAXC, PAXI,
PAXR
PAXC PAXI
Dual Quad A
PAXC PAXI
Dual Quad B

KEY

BLUE
(-)

3
(Ch A)

SW1 SW2

WHT

BRN
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

BLUE
(-)

4
(COMM)
5 or 6
(INPA/B)

RED
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

BLK
(-)

4
(COMM)

WHT
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

GRN
or
BLUE
(QUAD)

6
(INP B)

RED
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

BLK
(-)

4
(COMM)

WHT
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

GRN
or
BLUE
(QUAD)
RED
(+ V)

SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

6
5
4
3
2
1

SWITCH
SETTINGS
6
5
4
3
2
1

C
(Ch A)

A
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

4
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

D
(QUAD)

6
(INP B)

A
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

B
(-)

4
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

ON
7
D
(USER 1)
(QUAD)
User Jumper = SNK

3
(+12 V)

BLK
(-)

4
(COMM)

WHT
(Ch A)

6
(INP B)

SWITCH
SETTINGS
6
5
4
3
2
1

SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

6
5
4
3
2
1

SWITCH
SETTINGS
6
5
4
3
2
1

A
(+ V)

B
(-)

C
(Ch A)

A
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

B
(-)

4
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

D
(QUAD)

6
(INP B)

A
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

B
(-)

4
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

6
5
4
3
2
1

SWITCH
SETTINGS
6
5
4
3
2
1

A
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

B
(-)

4
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)

6
(INP B)

SWITCH
SETTINGS
6
5
4
3
2
1

A
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

B
(-)

4
(COMM)

C
(Ch A)

6
(INP B)

SWITCH
SETTINGS
6
5
4
3
2
1

2
(-)

4
(COMM)

3
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

4
(QUAD)

6
(INP B)

1
(+ V)

3
(+12 V)

2
(-)

4
(COMM)

3
(Ch A)

5
(INPA)

2
(-)

4
(COMM)

3
(Ch A)

6
(INP B)

BLUE
(-)

4
(COMM)
5 or 6
(INPA/B)

WHT

6
5
4
3
2
1

SRC
LOGIC
SNK
ON

NOT
APPLICABLE

6
5
4
3
2
1

NOT
APPLICABLE

6
5
4
3
2
1

ON
8
(USER 2)
User Jumper = SNK

3
(+12 V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

BRN
(+ V)
BLUE
(-)
WHT

NOT
APPLICABLE

BLUE
(-)
WHT

1-717-767-6511

3
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS
4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

3
(+12 V)
4
SNK
(COMM)
5 or 6 JUMPER
(INPA/B)

BRN
(+ V)
BLUE
(-)
WHT

3
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS
4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

1 2 3 4

NOT
APPLICABLE

WHT

SWITCH
SETTINGS

NOT
APPLICABLE

6
5
4
3
2
1

SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

BRN
(+ V)

NOT
APPLICABLE

SWITCH
SETTINGS

1 2 3 4

3
(Ch A)

3
(+12 V)

5
(INP)

3
(+12 V)

1
(+ V)
2
(-)

BRN
(+ V)

SW1 SW2

SWITCH
SETTINGS

1 2 3 4

C
(Ch A)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

6
5
4
3
2
1

SWITCH
SETTINGS

ON
7
(USER 1)
User Jumper = SNK

1
(+ V)

4
(QUAD)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

4
(COMM)

3
(+12 V)

1 2 3 4

4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

A
(+ V)
B
(-)

C
(Ch A)

3
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS
1 2 3 4

A
(+ V)
B
(-)

4
(COMM)
5
(INP)

1 2 3 4

WHT
(Ch A)

3
SWITCH
(+12 V) SETTINGS

3
(+12 V)

D
4
ON
ON
7
7
(QUAD)
(QUAD)
(USER 1)
(USER 1)
User Jumper = SNK
User Jumper = SNK

GRN
D
ON
ON
ON
8
8
D
8
or
(QUAD)
(QUAD)
(USER 2)
(USER 2)
(USER 2)
BLUE
(QUAD) User Jumper = SNK
User Jumper = SNK
User Jumper = SNK

RED
(+ V)
BLK
(-)

1
(+ V)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SRC

B
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

SNK
LOGIC

SRC

A
(+ V)

SRC

BLK
(-)

SWITCH
SETTINGS

C
(Ch A)

SNK
LOGIC

SRC

RED
(+ V)

C
(Ch A)

SNK
LOGIC

SRC

WHT
(Ch A)

PAXLC, PAXLR
PAXLPT

A (+ V)
RED
B (-) or (COMM)
F
BLACK

RED
(+ V)

WHT
(Ch A)

PAXTM, PAXCK

KEY

PRDC
RCDC
RRDC

SRC
LOGIC
SNK

WHITE
(Ch A)
GREEN (Ch B)
RPGD:
BLUE (Ch B)

SNK
LOGIC

PRA2

PRS1 / PRA1

OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS

ZBG and ZBH

RED (+ V)
BLACK (-) or
(COMM)

PRMDC
RCMDC
RRMDC

SRC

ZDH
ZLZ
ZNH
ZUK

SNK
LOGIC

SENSOR
MODEL

ZCH, ZFH, ZGH,
ZMD, ZOD, ZOH,
ZPJ, ZRJ, ZRL, ZSD,
RPGD

3
(+12 V)
4
SNK
(COMM)
5 or 6 JUMPER
(INPA/B)

1011

This page intentionally left blank.
1012

www.redlion.net

PART NUMBER
INDEX

The Trusted Source for

Innovative Control
Solutions

1-717-767-6511

1013

Terms of Sale
All sales of Red Lion Controls products are made subject to our Terms and Conditions of Sale, which are
available on request.

Summarized Warranty
Red Lion Controls warrants that all equipment shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under
normal use for a period of two years from date of shipment to Buyer save that Red Lion Controls does not
warrant that operation of the software will be completely uninterrupted or error free, or that all program errors
will be corrected. Buyer shall be responsible for determining that the equipment is suitable for Buyer’s use and
that such use complies with any applicable local, state or federal law.

Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL RED LION CONTROLS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSSES OR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE SALE
OF ITS PRODUCTS. BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY ARISING OUT OF ITS PURCHASE AND USE OF RED LION
CONTROLS’S PRODUCTS, OR ARISING OUT OF ANYTHING DONE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY CONTRACT,
SHALL BE FOR DAMAGES NO GREATER IN AMOUNT IN AGGREGATE THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
PRODUCTS IN RESPECT OF WHICH DAMAGES ARE CLAIMED.

1014

www.redlion.net

PART NUMBER LIST
PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

DESCRIPTION

CAT
PAGE

SENSING GEARS

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION

4601200

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBG12002

CALL

0900750

10/30 Gear, Standard Bore

831

4610010

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH00102

CALL

0909999

10/30 Gear, Special Bore *

831

4610012

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH00122

CALL

0910875

10/60 Gear, Standard Bore

831

4610100

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH01002

CALL

0919999

10/60 Gear, Special Bore *

831

4610100M

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH01003

CALL

0920750

10/30 Gear Split, Standard Bore

831

4610120

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH01202

CALL

0929999

10/30 Gear Split, Special Bore *

831

4610500

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH05002

CALL

0930875

10/60 Gear Split, Standard Bore

831

4610600

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH06002

CALL

0939999

10/60 Gear Split, Special Bore *

831

4610600M

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBH06003

CALL

0941125

12/60 Gear, ARCJ-2A

831

4700600

RPGH

Discontinued. Replaced with ZHG06004

CALL

0941375

12/60 Gear, ARCJ-2B

831

4701000

RPGH

Discontinued. Replaced with ZHG10004

CALL

0941625

12/60 Gear, ARCJ-2C

831

4701200

RPGH

Discontinued. Replaced with ZHG12004

CALL

0949999

12/60 Gear, Special Bore *

831

0950500

16/30 Gear, Standard Bore

831

5000060

RPGD

Not Available Contact Technical Sales

CALL

0959999

16/30 Gear, Special Bore *

831

5000100

RPGD

Not Available Contact Technical Sales

CALL

0960625

20/60 Gear, ARCJ-1A

831

5000600

RPGD

Not Available Contact Technical Sales

CALL

0960875

20/60 Gear, ARCJ-1B

831

5001000

RPGD

Not Available Contact Technical Sales

CALL

0970375

20/60 Gear, Standard Bore

831

5010100

RPGD

Sealed Shaft Flange Mount Quad 100 PPR

855

0979999

20/60 Gear, Special Bore *

831

5010600

RPGD

Sealed Shaft Flange Mount Quad 600 PPR

855

0980500

24/120 Gear, Standard Bore

831

5011000

RPGD

Sealed Shaft Flange Mount Quad 1000 PPR

855

0989999

24/120 Gear, Special Bore *

831

* Special Bore - Not Stocked at Factory, add $24.00 set up charge for each
different gear and/or bore size.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
2101100

Replaced with CCARPG00

CALL

2101200

Replaced with CCBRPG00

CALL

2300200

Socket, 12-Pin

2500030

Connector, 3-Pin

PROXIMITY SENSORS
4100600

MPS

Magnetic

822

SERIES 4 ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS
4210010

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH0010A

CALL

4210060

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH0060A

CALL

4210100

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH0100A

CALL

4210120

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH0120A

CALL

4210500

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH0500A

CALL

4210600

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH0600A

CALL

4211000

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH1000A

CALL

4211200

RPGO

Discontinued. Replaced with ZOH1200A

CALL

4410010

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH0010H

CALL

4410060

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH0060H

CALL

4410100

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH0100H

CALL

4410120

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH0120H

CALL

4410500

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH0500H

CALL

4410600

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH0600H

CALL

4411000

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH1000H

CALL

4411200

RPGN

Discontinued. Replaced with ZNH1200H

CALL

4600060

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBG00602

CALL

4600100

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBG01002

CALL

4600100M

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBG01003

CALL

4600600

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBG06002

CALL

4600600M

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBG06003

CALL

4601000

RPGB

Discontinued. Replaced with ZBG10002

CALL

SERIES 5 ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

SENSOR MOUNTS
5400100

Block Mount

825

5403701

Plug Mount, Steel

825

5403702

Plug Mount, Stainless Steel

825

SIGNAL CONDITIONING DIN RAIL MODULE
AAMA3535

AAMA

AAMR6436

AAMR

753

Universal, 3 Way Isolated
ANALOG ALARM DIN RAIL MODULE

Dual Setpoint
APOLLO ACCESSORIES

ACA10000

ACA1

18" DIP Plug Cable Assembly

ACE10000

ACE1

Edgecard w/Solder Eyelet 3 & 4-Digit

ACE40000

ACE4

Edgcrd w/Solder Eyelet, 5 & 6-Digit

CONVERTER MODULE
AFCM0000

AFCM

AIMI0202

AIMI

Analog to Frequency Converter Module

729

SIGNAL CONDITIONING DIN RAIL MODULES
758

Passive Loop Powered
ANALOG ALARM DIN RAIL MODULE

AIMR5306

AIMR

Loop Powered

APOLLO CLOCK/ELAPSED TIME INDICATORS
APLCK000

APLCK

115V

APLCK010

APLCK

230V

APLCL400

APLCL

W/o Excitation, 115V

APLCL401

APLCL

W/Excitation, 115V

APLCL410

APLCL

W/o Excitation, 230V

APLCL411

APLCL

W/Excitation, 230V

APLHV400

APLHV

600 VAC Input, 115V

APLHV410

APLHV

600 VAC Input, 230V

APOLLO CURRENT LOOP INDICATORS

APOLLO POWER-LINE MONITORS

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1015

CAT
PAGE

MODEL
NO.

APLIA400

APLIA

AC, 115V

APLIA410

APLIA

AC, 230V

APLID400

APLID

DC, 115V

APMR0016

APMR

3 Phase Fault Detector 230VAC

759

APLID410

APLID

DC, 230V

APMR0086

APMR

3 Phase Fault Detector 380VAC

759

APLIT405

APLIT

5AMP AC, 115V

APMR0096

APMR

3 Phase Fault Detector 480VAC

759

APLIT415

APLIT

5AMP AC, 230V

APLLP500

APLLP

DESCRIPTION
APOLLO CURRENT METERS

APOLLO LOOP POWERED INDICATOR
NL

4-20mA/10-50mA
APOLLO PROCESS TIME INDICATORS

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

APLVD400

APLVD

DC, 115V

APLVD410

APLVD

DC, 230V

DESCRIPTION

SIGNAL CONDITIONING DIN RAIL MODULES

ACCESSORIES
APS01000

APS01

Accessory Power Supply, 115VAC

909

APS02000

APS02

Accessory Power Supply, 230VAC

909

APSCM010

10AMP Current Shunt

100AMP Current Shunt

APLPT400

APLPT

4-Digit, 115V

APSCM100

APLPT410

APLPT

4-Digit, 230V

APSIS000

APSIS

Power Supply/Current Source, 115V

911

APLPT500

APLPT

5-Digit, 115V

APSIS010

APSIS

Power Supply/Current Source, 230V

911

APLPT510

APLPT

5-Digit, 230V

NL
ARA10256

ARJ

Discontinued. Replaced with ZRJ0256A

CALL

APLPV400

APLPV

w/o Excitation, 115V

ARA11024

ARJ

Discontinued. Replaced with ZRJ1024A

CALL

APLPV401

APLPV

w/Excitation, 115V

ARC10256

ARJ

Discontinued. See ZR series

CALL

APLPV410

APLPV

w/o Excitation, 230V

ARC11024

ARJ

Discontinued. See ZR series

CALL

APLPV411

APLPV

w/Excitation, 230V

NL
ARCJ1000

ARCJ1

APOLLO PROCESS VOLTMETER

APOLLO RATE INDICATORS

C-FACE QUAD PHASE ENCODERS

C FLANGE ADAPTER RINGS MAGNETIC PICK-UP
Small Ring w/o Gear

827

APLR0600

APLR

Time Base, 115V

ARCJ1A00

ARCJ1

56C Magnetic Ring Kit

827

APLR0610

APLR

Time Base, 230V

ARCJ1B00

ARCJ1

143TC Magnetic Ring Kit

827

APLR0630

APLR

Time Base, 24VDC

APLRI600

APLRI

Time Interval, 115V

ARCJ10Z0

ARCJ1

Small Ring w/o Gear

827

APLRI610

APLRI

Time Interval, 230V

ARCJ1AZ0

ARCJ1

56C Ring Kit

827

APLRI630

APLRI

Time Interval, 24VDC

ARCJ1BZ0

ARCJ1

143TC Ring Kit

827

C FLANGE ADAPTER RINGS WITH HESS SENSOR

APOLLO STRAIN-GAGE INDICATORS
APLSG400

APLSG

C FLANGE ADAPTER RINGS MAGNETIC PICK-UP
CALL

Not Available Contact Technical Sales
APOLLO SLAVE DISPLAYS

ARCJ2000

ARCJ2

Large Ring w/o Gear

827

ARCJ2A00

ARCJ2

182TC Magnetic Ring Kit

827

APLSP3A0

APLSP3

3-Digit, 5VDC

ARCJ2B00

ARCJ2

213TC Magnetic Ring Kit

827

APLSP3B0

APLSP3

3-Digit, 10-28VDC

ARCJ2C00

ARCJ2

254TC Magnetic Ring Kit

827

APLSP4A0

APLSP4

4-Digit, 5VDC

APLSP4B0

APLSP4

4-Digit, 10-28VDC

ARCJ20Z0

ARCJ2

Large Ring w/o Gear

827

C FLANGE ADAPTER RINGS WITH HESS SENSOR

APLSP5A0

APLSP5

5-Digit, 5VDC

ARCJ2AZ0

ARCJ2

182TC Ring Kit

827

APLSP5B0

APLSP5

5-Digit, 10-28VDC

ARCJ2BZ0

ARCJ2

213TC Ring Kit

827

APLSP6A0

APLSP6

6-Digit, 5VDC

ARCJ2CZ0

ARCJ2

254TC Ring Kit

827

APLSP6B0

APLSP6

6-Digit, 10-28VDC

APLTC400

APLTC

115V

APLTC401

APLTC

w/Serial, 115V

ATB10000

ATB1

w/Terminal Blk for 16 BCD Inputs

APLTC402

APLTC

w/Alarms, 115V

ATB20000

ATB2

w/o Terminal Blk for 16 BCD Inputs

APLTC403

APLTC

w/Serial & Alarms, 115V

ATB30000

ATB3

w/Terminal Blk for 24 BCD Inputs

APLTC404

APLTC

w/Alarms & Analog, 115V

ATB40000

ATB4

w/o Terminal Blk for 24 BCD Inputs

APLTC405

APLTC

w/Serial, Alarms, & Analog, 115V

APLTC410

APLTC

230V

AVMR0037

AVMR

24VAC/DC Input

APLTC411

APLTC

w/Serial, 230V

AVMR4037

AVMR

24VAC/DC Output

APLTC412

APLTC

w/Alarms, 230V

APLTC413

APLTC

w/Serial & Alarms, 230V

BDMD1000

BDMD

x1 Module

APLTC414

APLTC

w/Alarms & Analog, 230V

BDMD2000

BDMD

x2/x4 Module

APLTC415

APLTC

w/Serial, Alarms, & Analog, 230V

NL
BMK10000

BMK1

CUB 1 Base Mount Kit

APLVA400

APLVA

AC, 115V

BMK11000

BMK11

CUB5 or MLPS DIN Rail Base Mount Kit

991

APLVA410

APLVA

AC, 230V

BMK1A000

BMK1A

CUB 1 Base Mount Kit

APOLLO THERMOCOUPLE INDICATORS

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

ASTC0000

APOLLO VOLTMETERS

NOTE
NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1016

MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

Revised 01/01/2009

ASTC

In-Line Amplifier, NPN O.C.

823

APOLLO ACCESSORY BOARDS FOR SLAVE DISPLAY

DIN RAIL RELAY TERMINAL BLOCKS

BI-DIRECTIONAL MOTION DECODER

BASE MOUNT KITS

BMK20000

BMK2

CUB 2 Base Mount Kit

BMK30000

BMK3

Libra/Lynx Base Mount Kit

985

BMK40000

BMK4

Apollo/Gemini Base Mount Kit

985

www.redlion.net

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

BMK50000

BMK5

Cub 3 Base Mount Kit

BMK60000

BMK6

Open Base Mount Kit CUB4/DT7

BMK70000

BMK7

Base Mount Kit CUB4/DT7 W/MLPS

DESCRIPTION

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

C48CP101

C48CP

2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

178

987

C48CP105

C48CP

2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, SER

178

987

C48CP110

C48CP

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC

178

C48CP111

C48CP

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

178

C48CP115

C48CP

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, SER

178

DESCRIPTION

BMK7A000

BMK7A

Base Mount CUB5 with MLPS

987

BMK80000

BMK8

Base Mount Kit CUB7

989

BMK90000

BMK9

DIN Rail Mount PAX

990
C48CS003

C48CS

1 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, RLY

178

BNA00000

BNA

Batteries N Alkaline

C48CS004

C48CS

1 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC, RLY

178

BNL00000

BNL

3V Lithium Battery

C48CS013

C48CS

DC, 1 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, RLY

178

BNL10000

BNL

3V Lithium Battery

C48CS014

C48CS

DC, 1 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC, RLY

178

C48CS103

C48CS

1 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, RLY

178

ACCESSORIES

C48 1 PRESET COUNTER

BNL30000

BNL

3V Lithium Battery CR2032

C48CS104

C48CS

1 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, RLY

178

C48CB001

C48CB

3 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC

178

C48CS113

C48CS

DC, 1 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, RLY

178

C48CB003

C48CB

3 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, RLY

178

C48CS114

C48CS

DC, 1 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, RLY

178

C48CB004

C48CB

3 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC, RLY

178

C48CB005

C48CB

3 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, SER

178

C48TD001

C48TD

2 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC

263

C48CB008

C48CB

3 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, RLY, SER

178

C48TD002

C48TD

2 Preset, Reflective, RLY

263

C48CB009

C48CB

3 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC, RLY, SER

178

C48TD005

C48TD

2 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, SER

263

C48CB011

C48CB

DC, 3 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC

178

C48TD007

C48TD

2 Preset, Reflective, RLY, SER

263

C48CB014

C48CB

DC, 3 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC, RLY

178

C48TD011

C48TD

DC, 2 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC

263

C48CB100

C48CB

3 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC

178

C48TD012

C48TD

DC, 2 Preset, Reflective, RLY

263

C48CB101

C48CB

3 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

178

C48TD101

C48TD

2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

263

C48CB103

C48CB

3 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, RLY

178

C48TD102

C48TD

2 Preset, Backlit, RLY

263

C48CB104

C48CB

3 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, RLY

178

C48TD105

C48TD

2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, SER

263

C48CB105

C48CB

3 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, SER

178

C48TD106

C48TD

2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, SER

263

C48CB108

C48CB

3 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, RLY, SER

178

C48TD107

C48TD

2 Preset, Backlit, RLY, SER

263

C48CB109

C48CB

3 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, RLY, SER

178

C48TD111

C48TD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

263

C48CB110

C48CB

DC, 3 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC

178

C48TD112

C48TD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, RLY

263

C48CB111

C48CB

DC, 3 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

178

C48TD116

C48TD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, SER

263

C48CB114

C48CB

DC, 3 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, RLY

178

C48TD117

C48TD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, RLY, SER

263

C48CB119

C48CB

DC, 3 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, RLY, SER

178

C48 BATCH COUNTERS

C48 2 PRESET COUNTER

C48 2 PRESET TIMER

C48 1 PRESET TIMER
C48TS003

C48TS

1 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, RLY

263

C48TS004

C48TS

1 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC ,RLY

263

C48CD002

C48CD

2 Preset, Reflective, RLY

178

C48CD005

C48CD

2 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, SER

178

C48TS013

C48TS

DC, 1 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, RLY

263

C48CD007

C48CD

2 Preset, Reflective, RLY, SER

178

C48TS014

C48TS

DC, 1 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC ,RLY

263

C48CD012

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Reflective, RLY

178

C48TS103

C48TS

1 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, RLY

263

C48CD015

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, SER

178

C48TS104

C48TS

1 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC ,RLY

263

C48CD017

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Reflective, RLY, SER

178

C48TS113

C48TS

DC, 1 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, RLY

263

C48CD100

C48CD

2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC

178

C48TS114

C48TS

DC, 1 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC ,RLY

263

C48CD101

C48CD

2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

178

C48CD102

C48CD

2 Preset, Backlit, RLY

178

CBJ11A07

CBJ

RJ11 w/7 ft unterminated cable

C48CD105

C48CD

2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, SER

178

CBJ11BD5

CBJ

6" RJ11 Jumper Cable

C48CD106

C48CD

2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, SER

178

CBJ11C07

CBJ

DLCD RJ11 to RJ45

C48CD107

C48CD

2 Preset, Backlit, RLY, SER

178

CBLxxxxx

CBL

Communication Cables

C48CD110

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC

178

CBLPROG0

CBL

Programming Cable for CS, G3, & Paradigm

C48CD111

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC

178

CBLRLCxx

CBL

Interface Cables

C48CD112

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, RLY

178

CBLSIE03

CBL

Comm. Cable Siemens MPI w/Adapter

C48CD115

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC, SER

178

CBLTEL00

CBL

G3 Telemechanique RS485

C48CD116

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, PNP OC, SER

178

CBLUSB00

CBL

Cable USB Type A-B

C48CD117

C48CD

DC, 2 Preset, Backlit, RLY, SER

178

C48 2 PRESET COUNTER w/PRESCALER

CABLE ASSEMBLIES

CBLUSB01

CBL

Cable USB Type A-Mini B

CBLUSB23

CBL

USB Serial Adaptor RS-232

C48CP001

C48CP

2 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC

178

CBPRO007

DLC

RJ11 Program & Interface Cable

C48CP005

C48CP

2 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, SER

178

CCA3PC00

LMP

3-Cond. 3-Pin w/10 ft Cable

825

C48CP011

C48CP

DC, 2 Preset, Reflective, PNP OC

178

C48CP015

C48CP

DC, 2 Preset, Reflective, NPN OC, SER

178

C48CP100

C48CP

2 Preset, Backlit, NPN OC

178

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1017

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CCA3PC25

LMP

3-Cond. 3-Pin w/25 ft Cable

CCA3PC50

LMP

3-Cond. 3-Pin w/50 ft Cable

CCA3PC99

LMP

3-Cond. 3-Pin w/Special Length Cable

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION

MODEL
NO.

825

CSPID1S0

CSPID

Single Loop Module, Solid State Outputs

825

CSPID1SA

CSPID

Single Loop Module, Solid State Out. Analog

825

CSPID1SM

CSPID

Single Loop Module Solid State, HCM

DESCRIPTION

CCARPG00

Mating, 6-Pin MS Connector

CSPID1TA

CSPID

Single Loop Module, Triac Outputs, Analog

CCARPG01

4-Cond. 6-Pin w/10ft Cable

851

CSPID2R0

CSPID2

Dual Loop Module, Relay Outputs

CCARPG25

4-Cond. 6-Pin w/25 ft Cable

851

CSPID2RM

CSPID2

Dual Loop Module, Relay Outputs, HCM

CCARPG50

4-Cond. 6-Pin w/50 ft Cable

851

CSPID2S0

CSPID2

Dual Loop Module, Solid State Outputs

CCARPG99

4-Cond. 6-Pin w/Special Length Cable

851

CSPID2SM

CSPID2

Dual Loop Module, Solid State Outputs, HCM

CCBRPG00

7-Pin Connector

CSPID2T0

CSPID2

Dual Loop Module, Triac Outputs

CCBRPG01

6-Cond. 7-Pin w/10 ft Cable

838

CSPID2TM

CSPID2

Dual Loop Module, Triac Outputs, HCM

CCBRPG02

7-Pin Connector with 10 ft Cable - S159

CSRTD600

CSRTD

6 Channel Input, RTD

CCBRPG03

7-Pin Connector with 20 ft Cable - S159

CSSG10RA

CSSG1

Single Loop, 1 SG Input, Rly Outpts, Analog

CCBRPG04

10-Pin Connector

CSSG10SA

CSSG1

Single Loop, 1 SG Input, Solid State Out, Anlg

CCBRPG05

10-Pin Connector with 10 ft Cable

CSSG11RA

CSSG1

Single Loop, 2 SG Inpts, Rly Outpts, Analog

CCBRPG06

10-Pin Connector with 20 ft Cable

CSSG11SA

CSSG1

Single Loop, 2 SG Inpts, Solid State Out, Anlg

CCBRPG99

6-Cond. 7-Pin w/Special Length Cable

838

CSTC8000

CSTC

8 Channel Thermocouple Module

CCM12890

10 Meter 8-Pin 5-wire M12 Cable/Connector

851

CSTERM00

Replacement Termination Plug

CCM12894

4 Meter 8-Pin 5-wire M12 Cable/Connector

851

CCM12S01

M12 Cable Assembly, 1 M, Shielded

851

CT004001

40 : 0.1A for use with TCU/PCU, & P48/T48

882

CCM12S06

M12 Cable Assembly, 6 M, Shielded

851

CT005001

50 : 0.1A for use with TCU/PCU, & P48/T48

881

CCM12U02

4 Wire Unshielded, 2 M, Cable/Connector

868

CT005050

50 : 5A for use with IMH/APLIT

881

Pico Quick Disconnect Cable

861

CT020050

200 : 5A for use with IMH/APLIT

881

CCMPE000

CCMPE

CTD00000

PARADIGM OPERATOR INTERFACE PANELS
CL010000

CL01

LCD, 2X20, 128 K Memory

CL010010

CL01

LCD, 2X20, XRAM, 512 K Memory

CL010050

CL01

LCD 2X20 w/Banner Presence 128 K Memory

CL010060

CL01

LCD 2x20 w/Banner Presence 512 K Memory

CL050000

CL05

LCD, 2X20, 128 K Memory

CL050010

CL05

LCD, 2X20, 512 K Memory

CL200000

CL20

LCD, 4X20, 128 K Memory

CL200010

CL20

LCD, 2X40, 512 K Memory

CL400000

CL40

LCD, 2X40, 128 K Mem w/Numeric Keypad

CL400010

CL40

LCD, 2X40, XRAM, 256 K Mem w/Num. Key

ACCESSORIES
COS10000

COS1

Clock Oscillator
MODULAR CONTROLLER SERIES

CSBASE00

Replacement Base

CSDIO14R

CSDIO

Eight Inputs, Six Relay Outputs

CSDIO14S

CSDIO

Eight Inputs, Six Solid State Outputs

CSINI800

CSINI

8 Channel 0(4)-20 mA Input Module

CSINI8L0

CSINI

8 Chan 0(4)-20 mA Input Mod 100 Linearizer

CSINV800

CSINV

8 Channel ±10 V Input Module

CSINV8L0

CSINV

8 Chan ±10 V Input Mod 100 Linearizer

CSMSTRGT

CSMSTR

Master, Data Logger, Full VGA Virtual HMI

CSMSTRLE

CSMSTR

Master, Multiple Protocol Cnvtr, Ethernet

CSMSTRSX

CSMSTR

Master, Data Logger, Virtual HMI

CSMSTRV2

CSMSTR

Master, Comms, Ethernet

CSOUT400

CSOUT

4 Channel Analog Output

CSPID1R0

CSPID

Single Loop Module, Relay Outputs

CSPID1RA

CSPID

Single Loop Module, Relay Outputs, Analog

CSPID1RM

CSPID

Single Loop Module, Relay Outputs, HCM

NOTE
NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1018

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

DC CURRENT TRANSDUCER

X Special Length - Not stocked at factory, add $17.00 setup charge for each
different length, plus $0.40/ft over 10 ft.

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

Revised 01/01/2009

DC/DC, Split Case

883

AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS
885

CTL0052S

5A/4-20ma, Split Case

CTL0501F

50A/10VDC, Fixed Case

885

CTL0502F

50 A 4 - 20 mA, Fixed Case

885

CTL0502S

50A/4-20ma, Split Case

885

CTL2001F

200A/10VDC, Fixed Case

885

CTL2002F

200A/4-20ma, Fixed Case

885

CTL2002S

200A/4-20ma, Split Case

885

TRUE RMS AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS
CTR05000

50A/4-20ma, Split Case

887

CTR20000

200A/4-20ma, Split Case

887

CURRENT OPERATED SWITCHES
CTSF0000

Current Switch, Fixed Case

889

CTSG0000

Current Switch, GO/NO GO

889

CTSS0000

Current Switch, Split Case

889

CUB 1 MINIATURE COUNTERS
CUB10000

CUB1

Counter

CUB1XP00

CUB1XP

XP Version

CUB 2 MINIATURE COUNTERS
CUB20000

CUB2

Counter

CUB2L000

CUB2L

Counter w/Lithium Battery

CUB2L800

CUB2L8

8-Digit Counter w/Lithium Battery

CUB2LQ00

CUB2LQ0 Quadrature Cntr w/Lithium Battery

CUB2LQ10

CUB2LQ1 Quad 1st Dec Pnt Cntr w/Lithm Bat

CUB2LQ20

CUB2LQ2 Quad 2nd Dec Pnt Cntr w/Lithm Bat

CUB2LU00

CUB2LU

Up/Down Counter w/Lithium Battery

CUB2XP00

CUB2XP

XP Version

CUB 3 MINIATURE INDICATORS
CUB30000

CUB3

Counter

CUB3L000

CUB3L

Counter w/Lithium Battery

CUB3LR00

CUB3LR

Cntr w/Lithium Batt & Remote Reset

CUB3R000

CUB3R

Counter w/Remote Reset

www.redlion.net

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

DESCRIPTION

CAT
PAGE

CUB 3T MINIATURE TIMERS W/LITHIUM BATTERY

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CUB5VB00

CUB5V

DC Voltmeter with Red/Green Backlight

305

CUB5VR00

CUB5V

DC Voltmeter with Reflective Display

305

DESCRIPTION

CUB3T300

CUB3T

1 hr; Remote Reset

CUB3T310

CUB3T

0.1 hr; Remote Reset

CUB3T320

CUB3T

0.01 hr; Remote Reset

CUB70000

CUB7

8-Digit Counter, Reflective Display

CUB3T330

CUB3T

0.1 min; Remote Reset

CUB70010

CUB7

8-Digit Counter w/Yel/Grn Backlghtng

CUB3T400

CUB3T

1 hr; Front Panel & Remote Reset

CUB70020

CUB7

8-Digit Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB3T410

CUB3T

0.1 hr; Front Panel & Remote Reset

CUB7P000

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Contact, Reflective Display

CUB3T420

CUB3T

0.01 hr; Front Panel & Remote Reset

CUB7P010

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Contact, Green Backlight

CUB3T430

CUB3T

0.1 min; Front Panel & Remote Reset

CUB7P020

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Contact, Red Backlighting

CUB7P100

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Voltage, Reflective Display

CUB7P110

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Voltage, Green Backlight

CUB 4 SERIES

CUB 7 MINIATURE COUNTERS AND TIMERS

CUB4CL10

CUB4CL

Current Loop w/Yel/Grn Neg Backlighting

406

CUB4CL20

CUB4CL

Current Loop w/Red Neg Backlighting

406

CUB7P120

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Voltage, Red Backlighting

CUB4CL30

CUB4CL

Current Loop w/Yel/Grn Pos Backlighting

406

CUB7P200

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Logic, Reflective Display

CUB4CL40

CUB4CL

Current Loop w/Red Pos Backlighting

406

CUB7P210

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Logic, Green Backlight

CUB4I000

CUB4I

DC Current Meter, Reflective Display

305

CUB7P220

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Logic, Red Backlighting

CUB4I010

CUB4I

DC Current Meter w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

305

CUB7P300

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Low Volt Reflective Disply

CUB4I020

CUB4I

DC Current Meter w/Red Backlighting

305

CUB7P310

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Low Volt, Green Backlight

CUB4L000

CUB4L

Counter, Reflective Display

CUB7P320

CUB7P

8-Digit Counter, Low Volt, Red Backlight

CUB4L010

CUB4L

Counter w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

CUB7T000

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Contact, Reflective Display

237

CUB4L020

CUB4L

Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB7T010

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Contact, Green Backlighting

237

CUB4L800

CUB4L8

8-Digit Counter, Reflective Display

CUB7T020

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Contact, Red Backlighting

237

CUB4L80M

CUB4L8

8-Digit Counter, Reflective w/V+ Terminal

CUB7T100

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Voltage, Reflective Display

241

CUB4L810

CUB4L8

8-Digit Counter w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

CUB7T110

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Voltage, Green Backlighting

241

CUB4L820

CUB4L8

8-Digit Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB7T120

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Voltage, Red Backlighting

241

CUB4L8W0

CUB4L8W 8-Digit Counter Positive Reflective

CUB7T300

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Low Volt, Reflective Display

245

CUB4L8W1

CUB4L8W 8-Digit Counter w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

CUB7T310

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Low Volt, Green Backlight

245

CUB4L8W2

CUB4L8W 8-Digit Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB7T320

CUB7T

8-Digit Timer, Low Volt, Red Backlighting

245

CUB4L8WM CUB4L8W 8-Digit Counter w/V+ Terminal

CUB7W000

CUB7W

8-Digit Counter Positive Reflective

CUB4LM00

CUB4LM

6-Digit Counter w/V+ Terminal

CUB7W010

CUB7W

8-Digit Counter w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

CUB4LP00

CUB4LP

Loop Pwrd Process Meter, Reflective

406

CUB7W020

CUB7W

8-Digit Counter w/Red Backlighting

CUB4LP40

CUB4LP

Loop Pwrd Process Meter, Red Backlighting

406

CUB7W300

CUB7W

8-Digit Counter, Low Volt, Reflective Display

CUB7W310

CUB7W

8-Digit Counter, Low Volt, Green Backlight

CUB7W320

CUB7W

8-Digit Counter, Low Volt, Red Backlight

CX200000

CX200

VFD, 4X20, 128 K Memory

CX200010

CX200

VFD, 4X20, 256 K Memory

CUB4 TEMPERATURE INDICATORS
CUB4RT00

CUB4RT

RTD Input, Reflective

CUB4RT20

CUB4RT

RTD Input, Red Backlighting

CUB 4 SERIES
CUB4V000

CUB4V

DC Voltmeter

305

CUB4V010

CUB4V

DC Voltmeter w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

305

CUB4V020

CUB4V

DC Voltmeter w/Red Backlighting

305

CUB5

CUB5R000

CUB5

DUAL LOOP CONTROLLER
DLC00001

DLC

Dual Loop Controller with Dual Isolation

DLC01001

DLC

Dual Isolated Controller with 2 Analog Out.

Dual Count & Rate Indicatr w/Bklght Display

102

DLC11001

DLC

Setpoint Controller with 2 Analog Outputs

CUB 5 SERIES
CUB5B000

PARADIGM OPERATOR INTERFACE PANELS

Dual Count & Rate Indicatr w/Reflctve Dsply

102

DLCD0001

DLCD

Dual Loop Controller with DH-485

CUB5COM1

RS485 Serial Communication Card

932

DLCD1001

DLCD

Dual Loop Cont. w/2 Anlg Out w/DH-485

CUB5COM2

RS232 Serial Communication Card

932

DLCN0001

DLCN

Dual Loop Cont. w/DeviceNet, M12

CUB5IB00

CUB5I

DC Current Meter with Red/Green Backlight

317

DLCN0011

DLCN

Dual Loop Cont. w/DeviceNet, Combicon

CUB5IR00

CUB5I

DC Current Meter with Reflective Display

317

DLCN1001

DLCN

Dual Loop, w/DeviceNet, 2 Anlg Out, M12

CUB5PB00

CUB5P

Process Meter with Red/Green Backlight

410

DLCN1011

DLCN

Dual Loop, w/DeviceNet, 2 Anlg, Combicon

CUB5PR00

CUB5P

Process Meter with Reflective Display

410

DLCN1101

DLCN

Setpoint Cont., DeviceNet, w/2 Anlg., M12

Single Relay Option Card

102

DLCN1111

DLCN

Setpoint Cont., DeviceNet, w/2 Anlg., Comb.

RTD Meter with Red/Green Backlight

501

CUB5RLY0
CUB5RTB0

CUB5RT

CUB5RTR0

CUB5RT

CUB5SNK0

DIGITAL PANEL METERS

RTD Meter with Reflective Display

501

DP5D0000

DP5D

Universal DC Input, AC Powered

358

Dual Sinking Open Collector Output Card

102

DP5D0010

DP5D

Universal DC Input, DC Powered

358

CUB5TB00

CUB5T

Preset Timer & Cycle Counter w/Bklght Dsply

249

DP5P0000

DP5P

Process Input, AC Powered

358

CUB5TCB0

CUB5TC

Thermocouple Meter with Red/Green Bcklght

489

DP5P0010

DP5P

Process Input, DC Powered

358

CUB5TCR0

CUB5TC

Thermocouple Meter with Reflective Display

489

CUB5TR00

CUB5T

Preset Timr & Cycle Countr w/Reflctve Dsply

249

CUB5USB00

USB Option Card

930

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1019

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

DP5T0000

DP5T

Thermocouple/RTD Input, AC Powered

DP5T0010

DP5T

Thermocouple/RTD Input, DC Powered

DESCRIPTION

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

358

G308C000

G308

358

G308K000

ADAPTER

CAT
PAGE

LCD, DSTN, 640 X 480 Indr, 7 button keypad

Kadet 8 inch TFT

G310C000

G310

LCD, 640 X 480 Indoor, 8 button keypad

RJ11 to Terminal Adapter

G310S000

G310

LCD, 640 x 480 Outdoor, 8 button keypad

DRRJ45P6

RJ45 Parallel Connector

G315C000

G315

LCD, 1024 X 768 Indoor, 10 button keypad

DRRJ45T8

RJ45 to Terminal Adapter

G3BFDM00

BFD

Big Flexible Display - Red for G303

G3BFDNEM BFD

Big Flexible Display NEMA 4 Option

DRRJ11T6

DLC

DATA STATION PLUS
DSPGT000

DSP

Protocol Cnvtr, Data Logger, VGA Virtual HMI

G3BR08A0

G308A Backlight Assembly

DSPLE000

DSP

Protocol Cnvtr, Comms, Ethernet

G3BR10C0

G310C Backlight Assembly

DSPSX000

DSP

Protocol Cnvtr, Data Logger, Virtual HMI

G3BR10C1

G310C Backlight Assembly

DIGITAL TACHOMETERS

G3BR10S0

G310S Backlight Assembly

DT800000

DT8

Adjustable Time Base Tachometer

205

G3CF064M

64 MB CompactFlash Card

DT800010

DT8

Adj. Time Base Tach. w/Yel/Grn Bklg.

205

G3CF256M

256 MB CompactFlash Card

DT800020

DT8

Adj. Time Base Tach. w/Red Bklghtng.

205

G3CF512M

512 MB CompactFlash Card

DT900000

DT9

Not Available Contact Technical Sales

CALL

G3CN0000

G3CN

G3 CANopen Option Card

DT900010

DT9

Not Available Contact Technical Sales

CALL

G3DN0000

G3DN

G3 DeviceNet Option Card

DT900020

DT9

Not Available Contact Technical Sales

CALL

G3FILM03

Pck of ten prtctve films for G303M or G303S

PHOTO-ELECTRIC EMITTER SENSOR

G3FILM06

Pck of ten prtctve films for G306

861

G3FILM08

Pck of ten prtctve films for G308 or G308A

EMMDC000 PRM/RRM DC Emitter (Opposed Beam Pair)w/Cable

865

G3FILM10

Pck of ten prtectve films for G310M or G310S

EMMDC001 PRM/RRM DC Emitter (Opposed Beam Pair)w/Pico Conn.

865

G3FILM15

Pck of ten prtectve films for G315

G3FILM4K

Pack of ten protective films for G304K

EMDC0000

EMDC

(Opposed Beam Pair), DC Powered

ENCLOSURES
ENC10000

Small Utility Enclosure, NEMA 1

G3FILM6K

Pack of ten protective films for G306K

ENC11000

1/16 DIN ENCLOSURE, NEMA 4

981

G3FILM8K

Pack of ten protective films for G308K

ENC12000

EPAX 6 Enclosure, NEMA 4

983

G3GSM000

GSM/GPRS Modem Option Card for G3

ENC20000

Large Utility Enclosure, NEMA 1

G3PBDP00

ENC30000

Libra/Lynx Enclosure, NEMA 1

G3QANT00

ENC40000

Libra Series Enclosure, NEMA 4

971

G3RS0000

ENC50000

Apollo Series Enclosures, NEMA 4

971

ENC5A000

PAX Enclosure, NEMA 4

973

GCM23201

GCM232

Serial Converter RS232

ENC5B000

Fiberglass Enclosure for 1 PAX unit

973

GCM42201

GCM422

Serial Converter RS422

ENC5C000

Fiberglass Enclosure for 2 PAX units

973

ENC60000

Gemini Series Enclosures, NEMA 4

971

GEM10060

GEM1

w/Relay, 115/230V

ENC70000

LDD Enclosures, NEMA 4

GEM20060

GEM2

w/Relay, 115/230V

ENC80000

CUB4/5, DT7 NEMA 4

975

GEM20160

GEM2

w/Relay & Current Loop, 115/230V

ENC8A000

CUB4/5, DT8 NEMA 4X Fiberglass

975

GEM33060

GEM33

w/Relay, 115/230V

ENC8B000

CUB 4/5, DT8 NEMA 4X, use with MLPS

975

GEM33160

GEM33

w/Relay & Current Loop, 115/230V

ENC90000

LPAX Enclosure, NEMA 4

979

GEM41060

GEM41

w/Relay, 115/230V

GEM41160

GEM41

w/Relay & Current Loop, 115/230V

EXTRA LARGE PAX PANEL METER
EPAX0500

EPAX5

EPAX0600

EPAX6

G3PB

G3RS

G3 Profibus Option Card

Quad-band GSM/GPRS cellular antenna

G3 RS232/485 Option Card

CONVERTER MODULES

GEMINI SERIES

5-Digit Extra Large Display Module Analog

694

GEM42060

GEM42

w/Relay, 115/230V

6-Digit Extra Large Display Module Digital

700

GEM42160

GEM42

w/Relay & Current Loop, 115/230V

EPAXENSH

NEMA 4/IP65 Enclosure and Shroud

983

GEM52060

GEM52

w/Relay, 115/230V

EPAXPGM0

Programming Remote w/10 ft cable

700

GEM52160

GEM52

w/Relay & Current Loop, 115/230V

FERRITE SUPPRESSION CORE
FCOR0000

FCOR

PARADIGM OPERATOR INTERFACE PANELS
965

Ferrite Suppression Core
G3 OPERATOR INTERFACE PANELS

DESCRIPTION

G303M000

G303

G303S000

G303

G304K000

CALL

Replaced with GL350VF1

CALL

GL350VF0

256 x 128 VFD DISPLAY 256 K Memory

LCD, 128 x 64 Outdoor

GL350VF1

256 x 128, XRAM VFD DISPLAY 768 K Memory

Kadet 4.3 inch TFT

G306

LCD 320 X 240 Indoor, 5 button keypad TFT

G306

Replaced by G306A000

G308

Replaced with GL350VF0

GL350

G306C000

G308A000

GL350

GL350010

LCD, 128 x 64 Indoor

G306A000

G306K000

GL350000

GRAPHICAL TANK MONITOR

GTM10080

GTM

10" Display 8 Tank

CALL

GTM1008S

GTM

10" Display 8 Tank, Preconfigured Comm

Kadet 6 inch TFT

LCD, TFT, 640 X 480, Indr, 7 button keypad

HALL EFFECT SENSOR
827

HESS0000

HESS

Hall Effect Sensor

HHT00000

HHT

LCD Hand Held Contact Tachometer

231

HHT Concave Disc

231

MISCELLANEOUS
NOTE
NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1020

Revised 01/01/2009

HHTCONC0

www.redlion.net

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

HHTCONE0
HHTP0000

HHTP

HHTRT000
HHTWHL00

DESCRIPTION

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION

HHT Cone Point Disc w/Shaft

231

IMD23167

IMD2

w/Exc, Sw, Alrms, Ser, & Anlog 115/230VAC

LCD Hand Held Photo Tachometer

231

IMD23169

IMD2

w/Exc, Sw, Alrms, Ser, & V Anlg 115/230VAC

HHTP Replacment 4x24 Reflect Tape

231

HHT Rubber Wheel

231

ACCESSORIES

INTELLIGENT METER FOR 5-AMP AC INPUTS
IMH40060

IMH

Base Unit, 115/230VAC

IMH40062

IMH

w/Alarms, 115/230VAC

HWK10000

HWK1

Hardware Kit, CUB 2

IMH43060

IMH

w/Software (Sw), 115/230VAC

HWK20000

HWK2

Hardware Kit, CUB 2

IMH43062

IMH

w/Software, & Alarms, 115/230VAC

HWK28000

HWK28

Bezel Kit, SCUB28

896

IMH43066

IMH

w/Software, Alarms, & Analog, 115/230VAC

HWK30000

HWK3

Bezel Kit, SUB CUB 2, SSCUB 2

895

IMH43068

IMH

w/Exc, Sw, Alrms, Ser, & V Anlg 115/230VAC

HWK40000

HWK4

Bezel Evaluation Kit, SUB CUB 2

895
IMI04160

IMI

Base Unit, 115/230VAC

INTELLIGENT METER FOR DIGITAL RATE INPUTS

HWK50000

HWK5

Bezel Kit, SSCUB 2

HWK60000

HWK6

Bezel Kit, SCUBD

897

IMI04161

IMI

w/Serial, 115/230VAC

HWK70000

HWK7

MDM Cable Assembly

899

IMI04162

IMI

w/Alarm, 115/230VAC

IMI04163

IMI

w/Analog, 115/230VAC

DIN RAIL MODULES
IAMA0006

IAMA6

Configurable 3-Way Isolating Amplifier

750

IMI04167

IMI

w/Alarms, Serial, & Analog, 115/230VAC

IAMA3535

IAMA

Universal Signal Conditioning

742

IMI04169

IMI

w/Exc, Alarms, Serial, & V Anlg 115/230VAC

IAMA6262

IAMA

Universal Signal Conditioning Square Root

742

IAMS0001

IAMS

IAMS with analog

731

IMP20060

IMP

Base unit, 115/230VAC

IAMS0010

IAMS

IAMS with setpoint

731

IMP20160

IMP

w/Exc, 115/230VAC

IAMS0011

IAMS

IAMS with analog and setpoint

731

IMP20162

IMP

w/Exc & Alarms, 115/230VAC

IAMS3535

IAMS

Smart Setpoint Analog Module

IMP23160

IMP

w/Exc & Sw, 115/230VAC

IMP23161

IMP

w/Exc, Sw, & Serial, 115/230VAC

ACCESSORIES

INTELLIGENT METER FOR PROCESS INPUTS

ICA00000

ICA

Spare Input Connector

IMP23162

IMP

w/Exc, Sw, & Alarms, 115/230VAC

ICAXP000

ICAXP

Spare Input Conn. XP Version

IMP23163

IMP

w/Exc, Sw, & Analog, 115/230VAC

IMP23167

IMP

w/Exc, Sw, Alrms, Serial, Anlg 115/230VAC

IMP23169

IMP

w/Exc, Sw, Alrms, Serial, V Anlg 115/230VAC

DIN RAIL MODULES
ICM40030

ICM4

RS232/RS485 Converter

788

ICM50000

ICM5

3 way Isolated RS232/RS485 Converter

792

INTELLIGENT METER FOR RTD INPUTS

ICM80000

ICM8

Ethernet Gateway

796

IMR00160

IMR

Base unit, 115/230VAC

IFMA0035

IFMA

Frequency to Analog Converter, DC Powered

713

IMR00162

IMR

w/Alarms, 115/230VAC

IFMA0065

IFMA

Frequency to Analog Converter, AC Powered

713

IMR02160

IMR

w/Sw, 115/230VAC

IFMR0036

IFMR

Speed Switch, DC Powered

721

IMR02161

IMR

w/Sw & Serial, 115/230VAC

IFMR0066

IFMR

Speed Switch, AC Powered

727

IMR02162

IMR

w/Sw & Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMR02163

IMR

w/Sw & Analog, 115/230VAC

ILS11500

ILS1

115VAC

966

IMR02167

IMR

w/Sw, Alrms, Serial, & Anlg 115/230VAC

ILS23000

ILS2

230VAC

966

IMR02169

IMR

w/Sw, Alrms, Serial, & V Anlg 115/230VAC

IMA04161

IMA

Base Unit, 115/230VAC

IMS03160

IMS

Base unit, 115/230VAC

IMA04164

IMA

w/Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMS03162

IMS

w/Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMS03164

IMS

w/Alarms & Serial, 115/230VAC

IMS

w/Alarms & Analog, 115/230VAC

IMS

w/Alarms,& V Analog 115/230VAC

INDUCTIVE LOAD SUPPRESSORS

INTELLIGENT METER FOR STRAIN GAGE INPUTS

INTELLIGENT SERIAL SLAVE DISPLAY

INTELLIGENT DECADE METER FOR VOLTAGE INPUTS
IMD10060

IMD1

Base Unit, 115/230VAC

IMS03166

IMD10160

IMD1

w/Exc, 115/230VAC

IMS03168

IMD10162

IMD1

w/Exc & Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMD13160

IMD1

w/Exc & Sw, 115/230VAC

IMT00060

IMT

Base unit, 115/230VAC

IMD13161

IMD1

w/Exc, Sw, & Serial, 115/230VAC

IMT00062

IMT

w/Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMD13162

IMD1

w/Exc, Sw & Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMT02060

IMT

w/Sw, 115/230VAC

IMD13163

IMD1

w/Exc, Sw & Analog, 115/230VAC

IMT02061

IMT

w/Sw & Serial, 115/230VAC

IMD1

w/Exc, Sw, Alarms, Ser, & Anlg 115/230VAC

IMT02062

IMT

w/Sw & Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMD1

w/Exc, Sw, Alrms, Ser, & V Anlg 115/230VAC

IMT02063

IMT

w/Sw & Analog, 115/230VAC

IMT02067

IMT

w/Sw, Alrms, Serial, & Analog 115/230VAC

IMT02069

IMT

w/Sw, Alrms, Serl, & V Analog 115/230VAC

IMD13167
IMD13169

INTELLIGENT DECADE METER FOR CURRENT INPUTS
IMD20060

IMD2

Base Unit, 115/230VAC

IMD20160

IMD2

w/Exc, 115/230VAC

INTELLIGENT METER FOR THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS

INTELLIGENT METER FOR THERMISTOR INPUTS

IMD20162

IMD2

w/Exc & Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMY00160

IMY

Base unit, 115/230VAC

IMD23160

IMD2

w/Exc & Sw, 115/230VAC

IMY00162

IMY

w/Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMD23161

IMD2

w/Exc, Sw, & Serial, 115/230VAC

IMD23162

IMD2

w/Exc, Sw & Alarms, 115/230VAC

IMD23163

IMD2

w/Exc, Sw & Analog, 115/230VAC

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1021

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

IMY02160

IMY

w/Sw, 115/230VAC

IMY02161

IMY

w/Sw & Serial, 115/230VAC

IMY02162

IMY

IMY02163
IMY02167

CAT
PAGE

MODEL
NO.

LGPM0201

LGPM

6 Multi Preset w/Dual Color Backlight

193

LGS00000

LGS

Single Preset, w/Yel/Grn Bklt & Relay

187

w/Sw & Alarms, 115/230VAC

LGS00001

LGS

Single Preset, w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

187

IMY

w/Sw & Analog, 115/230VAC

LGS00100

LGS

Single Preset, w/Red Bklt, & Relay

187

IMY

w/Sw, Alrms, Serial, & Analog 115/230VAC

LGS00101

LGS

Single Preset, w/Red Backlighting

187

IMY02169

IMY

w/Sw, Alrms, Serial, & V Anlg, 115/230VAC

NL
LIBC1000

LIBC1

Single Preset LCD Cntr, 115V

IRMA2003

IRMA

Intelligent RTD, Loop Powered

763

LIBC1010

LIBC1

Single Preset LCD Cntr, 230V

IRMA3035

IRMA

Intelligent RTD, DC Powered

769

LIBC1E00

LIBC1E

Single Preset LED Cntr, 115V

ITMA2003

ITMA

Intelligent Thermocouple, Loop Powered

775

LIBC1E10

LIBC1E

Single Preset LED Cntr, 230V

ITMA3035

ITMA

Intelligent Thermocouple, DC Powered

782

LIBC2000

LIBC2

Dual Preset LCD Cntr, 115V

ITMS4037

ITMS

Smart Thermocouple to MODBUS w/Alarms

LIBC2010

LIBC2

Dual Preset LCD Cntr, 230V

LIBC2E00

LIBC2E

Dual Preset LED Cntr, 115V

LIBC2E10

LIBC2E

Dual Preset LED Cntr, 230V

LIBT1000

LIBT1

Single Preset LCD Timer, 115V

DIN RAIL MODULE

LOGIC CONVERTER MODULE
LCM10000

LCM1

917

Logic Converter Module
LARGE DISPLAYS

DESCRIPTION

LIBRA SERIES

LD200400

2.25" High 4-Digit Red LED Counter

629

LIBT1010

LIBT1

Single Preset LCD Timer, 230V

LD200600

2.25" High 6-Digit Red LED Counter

629

LIBT1E00

LIBT1E

Single Preset LED Timer, 115V

LD2006P0

2.25" 6-Dgt LED Cnt/Rte w/Rly Out & Srl Com

629

LIBT1E10

LIBT1E

Single Preset LED Timer, 230V

LD2A05P0

2.25" High 4-Digit Red LED Analog

659

LIBT2000

LIBT2

Dual Preset LCD Timer, 115V

LD2SS6P0

2.25" High 6-Digit Serial Slave Display

674

LIBT2010

LIBT2

Dual Preset LCD Timer, 230V

LD2T06P0

2.25" 6-Dgt Red LED Tmr w/Rly Out & Srl Com

645

LIBT2E00

LIBT2E

Dual Preset LED Timer, 115V

LD400400

4" High 4-Digit Red LED Counter

629

LIBT2E10

LIBT2E

Dual Preset LED Timer, 230V

LD400600

4" High 6-Digit Red LED Counter

629

LD4006P0

4" 6-Digit LED Cnt/Rte w/Rly Out & Srl Com

629

LMPC0000

LMPC

NPN O.C. w/Cable

825

LD4A05P0

4" High 5 1/2 Digit Red LED Analog

659

LMPC0025

LMPC

NPN O.C. w/25ft Cable

825

LD4SS6P0

4" High 6-Digit Red LED Serial Slave Display

674

LMPC0050

LMPC

NPN O.C. w/50ft Cable

825

LD4T06P0

4" 6-Dgt Red LED Tmr w/Rly Out & Srl Com

645

LMPCC000

LMPCC

NPN O.C. 3-Pin Connector

825

LMPEC000

LMPEC

Emitter Follower, 3-Pin Connector

825

LARGE DIGIT DISPLAYS
LDD00400

LDD

4-Digit, 115/230 VAC w/Red Display

LOGIC MAGNETIC PICKUP

LYNX SERIES COUNTERS

LDD00600

LDD

6-Digit, 115/230 VAC w/Red Display

LNXC1000

LNXC1

Single Preset Lynx, 115V

LDD0G400

LDD

4-Digit, 115/230 VAC w/Green Display

LNXC1010

LNXC1

Single Preset Lynx, 230V

LNXC1020

LNXC1

Single Preset Lynx, 12VDC

LDD0G600

LDD

6-Digit, 115/230 VAC w/Green Display

LNXC1030

LNXC1

Single Preset Lynx, 24VDC

LES1050S

Discontinued. Replaced with ZLZ0050G

CALL

LNXC2000

LNXC2

Dual Preset Lynx, 115V

LES1500S

Discontinued. Replaced with ZLZ0500G

CALL

LNXC2010

LNXC2

Dual Preset Lynx, 230V

ZLZ Mouting Bracket

859

LNXC2020

LNXC2

Dual Preset Lynx, 12VDC

LNXC2030

LNXC2

Dual Preset Lynx, 24VDC

LNXCC000

LNXCC

Contact Input Lynx, 115V

LNXCC010

LNXCC

Contact Input Lynx, 230V

LINEAR ENCODER

LEMTBR00

LINE FILTER
LFIL0000

LFIL

968

General Purpose Line FIlter

LEGEND COUNTER/RATE INDICATOR SERIES

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

DESCRIPTION

LGB00000

LGB

Four Preset Batch, w/Yel/Grn Bkltng

187

LNXCC020

LNXCC

Contact Input Lynx, 12VDC

LGB00100

LGB

Four Preset Batch, w/Red Bkltng

187

LNXCC030

LNXCC

Contact Input Lynx, 24VDC

LGD00000

LGD

Dual Prst, w/Yel/Grn Bkltng, & Relay

187

LGD00001

LGD

Dual Preset, w/Yel/Grn Backlighting

187

LNXT1000

LNXT

Single Preset, 115V

LGD00100

LGD

Dual Preset, w/Red Bklt, & Relay

187

LNXT1010

LNXT

Single Preset, 230V

LGD00101

LGD

Dual Preset, w/Red Backlighting

187

LNXT1020

LNXT

Single Preset, 12VDC

LGM00001

LGM

Multi Preset (6), w/Yel/Grn Bkltng

187

LNXT1030

LNXT

Single Preset, 24VDC

LGM00101

LGM

Multi Preset (6), w/Red Backlighting

187

LNXT2000

LNXT

Dual Preset, 115V

LGPB0000

LGPB

4 Preset Batch w/Green Backlight

193

LNXT2010

LNXT

Dual Preset, 230V

LGPB0100

LGPB

4 Preset Batch w/Red Backlight

193

LNXT2020

LNXT

Dual Preset, 12VDC

LGPB0200

LGPB

4 Preset Batch w/Dual Color Backlight

193

LNXT2030

LNXT

Dual Preset, 24VDC

LYNX SERIES TIMERS

LARGE DISPLAY PAX PANEL METER

LGPBF100

LGPBF

Foot/Inch Counter

193

LGPM0001

LGPM

6 Multi Preset w/Green Backlight

193

LPAX0500

LPAX

5-Digit Large Display Module

682

LGPM0101

LGPM

6 Multi Preset w/Red Backlight

193

LPAX0600

LPAX

6-Digit Large Display Module

686

LPAXCK00

LPAX

6-Digit Large Clock Display Module

686

LPAXDA00

LPAX

6-Digit Large Dual Process Display Module

690

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1022

www.redlion.net

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

LSAHC001

LSAHC

LSCB1000

LSCB

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

Hinge Clamp Assembly

851

MDC00100

MDC

Conversion Bracket

851

DESCRIPTION

MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR LENGTH SENSORS

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION
MOTOR DRIVE CONTROLLER

LENGTH SENSORS WITH DOUBLE SHAFT, NO WHEELS

227

Motor Drive Controller
MDMU COUNTER/TIMER/TACH

MDMU0000 MDMU

Panel Mount w/Reflective Display

899

LSCD00/3

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG00/3C

CALL

MDMU0010 MDMU

Panel Mount w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

899

LSCD0001

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0001C

CALL

MDMU0020 MDMU

Panel Mount w/Red Backlighting

899

LSCD0010

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0010C

CALL

MDMU0100 MDMU

PC Board Mount w/Reflective Display

899

LSCD0012

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0012C

CALL

MDMU0110 MDMU

PC Board Mount w/Yel-Grn Bcklghtng

899

LSCD0020

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0020C

CALL

MDMU0120 MDMU

PC Board Mount w/Red Backlighting

899

LSCD0060

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0060C

CALL

LSCD0100

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0100C

CALL

MDMV0000 MDMV

Panel Mount w/Reflective Display

900

LSCD0120

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0120C

CALL

MDMV0010 MDMV

Panel Mount w/Yel-Grn Backlighting

900

LSCD0200

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG0200C

CALL

MDMV0020 MDMV

Panel Mount w/Red Backlighting

900

LSCD03/3

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG03/3C

CALL

MDMV0100 MDMV

PC Board Mount w/Reflective Display

900

LSCD33/3

LSCD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGG33/3C

CALL

MDMV0110 MDMV

PC Board Mount w/Yel-Grn Bcklghtng

900

MDMV0120 MDMV

PC Board Mount w/Red Backlighting

900

LENGTH SENSORS WITH SINGLE SHAFT, NO WHEELS

MDMV DC VOLTMETERS

POWER SUPPLY

LSCS00/3

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG00/3C

CALL

LSCS0001

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0001C

CALL

MLPS1000

MLPS1

Micro-Line, 85-250 VAC

913

LSCS0010

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0010C

CALL

MLPS2000

MLPS2

Micro-Line 24 VDC

913

LSCS0012

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0012C

CALL

LSCS0020

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0020C

CALL

MP25TA00

MP25TA

1/4" Threaded

823

LSCS0060

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0060C

CALL

MP37CA00

MP37CA

3/8" Cylindrical

823

LSCS0100

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0100C

CALL

MP37TA00

MP37TA

3/8" Threaded

823

LSCS0120

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0120C

CALL

MP37TAC1

MP37TA

3/8" Threaded with M12 Connector

823

LSCS0200

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG0200C

CALL

MP62TA00

MP62TA

5/8" Threaded

823

MP62TAC1

MP62TA

5/8" Threaded with M12 Connector

823

MP62TB00

MP62TB

5/8" Threaded, Blind End

823

MP75TX00

MP75TX

3/4" Threaded, Explosion Proof

823

LSCS03/3

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFG03/3C

CALL

LSCS33/3

LSCS

Discontinued. Replaced with SFG33/3C

CALL

MINIATURE LENGTH SENSOR, QUADRATURE OUTPUT

MAGNETIC PICKUPS

LARGE DISPLAY PAX PANEL METER MODULES

LSM10250

LSM

Discontinued. Replaced with ZMD0250B

CALL

LSM10500

LSM

Discontinued. Replaced with ZMD0500B

CALL

MPAXC000

PAX

AC Power, PAXC Count Module

686

LSM11000

LSM

Discontinued. Replaced with ZMD1000B

CALL

MPAXC010

PAX

DC Power, PAXC Count Module

686

MPAXCK00

PAX

AC Power, PAXCK Clock Module

686

QUADRATURE LENGTH SENSORS WITH DUAL SHAFT, NO WHEELS
LSQD0100

LSQD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGH0100C

CALL

MPAXCK10

PAX

DC Power, PAXCK Clock Module

686

LSQD0200

LSQD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGH0200C

CALL

MPAXD000

PAX

AC Power, PAXD Universal DC Input Module

682

LSQD0500

LSQD

Discontinued. Replaced with ZGH0500C

CALL

MPAXD010

PAX

DC Power, PAXD Universal DC Input Module

682

MPAXDP00

PAX

AC Power, PAXDP Dual Process Module

690

QUADRATURE LENGTH SENSORS WITH SINGLE SHAFT, NO WHEELS
LSQS0100

LSQS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFH0100C

CALL

MPAXDP10

PAX

DC Power, PAXDP Dual Process Module

690

LSQS0200

LSQS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFH0200C

CALL

MPAXH000

PAX

AC Power, PAXH True RMS Volt/Cur Module

682

LSQS0500

LSQS

Discontinued. Replaced with ZFH0500C

CALL

MPAXI000

PAX

AC Power, PAXI Count/Rate Module

686

MPAXI010

PAX

DC Power, PAXI Count/Rate Module

686

MPAXP000

PAX

AC Power, PAXP Process Module

682

MPAXP010

PAX

DC Power, PAXP Process Module

682

LARGE PAX CUSTOM ANNUNCIATOR LABELS
LX******

929

LX LABEL LPAX Annunciator Label

MOUNTING BRACKETS FOR PHOTO-ELECTRIC SENSORS
MB200000

MB2

Bottom Mount Bracket Kit

861

MPAXR000

PAX

AC Power, PAXR Rate Module

686

MB300000

MB3

Side Mount Bracket Kit

861

MPAXR010

PAX

DC Power, PAXR Rate Module

686

MPAXS000

PAX

AC Power, PAXS Strain Gage Module

682

MOUNTING BRACKETS
MB400000

MB4

PSA7A Proximity Sensor

815

MPAXS010

PAX

DC Power, PAXS Strain Gage Module

682

MPAXT000

PAX

AC Power, PAXT Thermocouple/RTD Module

682

MB4B0000

MB4B

PSA7B Proximity Sensor

815

MB500000

MB5

PSA8A Proximity Sensor

815

MPAXT010

PAX

DC Power, PAXT Thermocouple/RTD Module

682

MB5B0000

MB5B

PSA8B Proximity Sensor

815

MPAXTM00

PAX

AC Power, PAXTM Timer Module

686

MB600000

MB6

Large Digit Display (LDD)

MPAXTM10

PAX

DC Power, PAXTM Timer Module

686

MB700000

MB7

Mounting Spacer for PSAFP

819

MB800000

MB8

Mounting Bracket for PSAFP

819

MBLPAX00

MBLPAX

LPAX Mounting Bracket

979

MBM20000

PRM/RRM Bottom Mount Bracket Kit

865

MBM30000

PRM/RRM Side Mount Bracket Kit

865

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1023

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT MODULES FOR TCU

OMD00000
OMD00001
OMD00003

MODEL
NO.

DESCRIPTION

CAT
PAGE

PAXCDC30

PAX

DeviceNet Option Card

944

Relay Module

574

PAXCDC40

PAX

MODBUS Option Card

948

Triac Module

574

PAXCDC4C

PAX

Extnd. MODBUS Card with RJ11 Connector

948

SSR Drive Module

574

PAXCDC50

PAX

PROFIBUS-DP Option Card

954

PAXCDL10

PAX

Analog Output Card

962

1/16 DIN PROCESS CONTROL UNITS
P1610000

P16

w/Relay Output

541

PAXCDS10

PAX

Dual Relay Card

958

P1610010

P16

DC, w/Relay Output

541

PAXCDS20

PAX

Quad Relay Card

958

P1611100

P16

w/Relay Output, 2 Alarms, and User Input

541

PAXCDS30

PAX

Quad NPN-OC Card

958

P1611110

P16

DC, w/Relay Out, 2 Alarms, and User Input

541

PAXCDS40

PAX

Quad PNP-OC Card

958

P1620000

P16

w/Solid State Output

541

PAXCK000

PAXCK

Clock/Timer, Field Upgradeable Red

268

P1620010

P16

DC, w/Solid State Output

541

PAXCK010

PAXCK

DC, Clock/Timer, Field Upgradeable Red

268

P1621100

P16

w/Solid State Out, 2 Alarms, and User Input

541

PAXCK100

PAXCK

Clock/Timer, Field Upgradeable Green

268

P1621110

P16

DC, w/Solid State Out, 2 Alrms, & User Input

541

PAXCK110

PAXCK

DC, Clock/Timer, Field Upgradeable Grn

268

P1641100

P16

w/Analog Output, 2 Alarms, and User Input

541

PAXD0000

PAXD

Universal DC Input, Field Upgradeable Red

378

P1641110

P16

DC, w/Analog Out, 2 Alarms, and User Input

541

PAXD0010

PAXD

DC, Universal DC Input, Field Upgrad. Red

378

P4800001

P48

w/Analog Output

591

PAXD0100

PAXD

Universal DC Input Field Upgradeable Grn

378

P4800011

P48

DC, w/Analog Output

591

PAXD0110

PAXD

DC, Universal DC Input, Field Upgrad. Grn

378

P4810000

P48

w/Relay Output

591

PAXDP000

PAXDP

Dual Process Input, Upgradeable Red

440

P4810010

P48

DC, w/Relay Output

591

PAXDP010

PAXDP

DC, Dual Process Input, Upgradeable Red

440

P4810101

P48

w/Dual Relay, and Analog

591

PAXH0000

PAXH

True RMS Volt & Current, Field Upgrad. Red

378

P4810105

P48

w/Dual Relay, Analog, and RSP

591

PAXH0100

PAXH

True RMS Volt & Current, Field Upgrad. Grn

378

P4810107

P48

w/Dual Relay, Analog, and RS485

591

PAXI0000

PAXI

Smart Counter/Rate, Field Upgradeable Red

137

P481010A

P48

w/Dual Relay, and Dual Analog

591

PAXI0010

PAXI

DC, Smart Counter/Rate, Field Upgrad. Red

137

P4810111

P48

DC, w/Dual Relay, Analog

591

PAXI0100

PAXI

Smart Counter/Rate, Field Upgradeable Grn

137

PAXI0110

PAXI

DC, Smart Counter/Rate, Field Upgrad. Grn

137

PAXLBK10

PAX

Label Kit for PAX Meters

928

P4810115

P48

DC, w/Dual Relay, Analog, and RSP

591

P4810117

P48

DC, w/Dual Relay, Analog, and RS485

591

P481011A

P48

DC, w/Dual Relay, and Dual Analog

591

P4811100

P48

w/Dual Relay

591

PAXLA000

PAXLA

Process Current Volt Meter

P4811102

P48

w/Dual Relay, and RS485

591

PAXLBK30

PAX

Label Kit for PAX Lite Analog Meters

P4811110

P48

DC, w/Dual Relay

591

PAXLC600

PAXLC

Six Digit Counter

118

P4811112

P48

DC, w/Dual Relay, and RS485

591

PAXLC800

PAXLC

Eight Digit Counter

118

PAXLCL00

PAXLCL

Current Loop Meter

422

PROGRAMMING CABLES

PAX LITE METERS
347

P890301C

RJ11 to DB9 Connector

PAXLCR00

PAXLCR

Count/Rate Meter

125

P890301J

RJ12 to RJ12 Connector

PAXLHV00

PAXLHV

AC Voltage Monitor

342

P890301Z

Programming Cable (part of SFEDT)

PAXLIA00

PAXLI

AC Current Meter

329

P890806Z

RJ11-10P Black w/ Housing

PAXLID00

PAXLI

DC Current Meter

329

P890807Z

RJ11-5P Black w/ Housing

PAXLIT00

PAXLIT

5 Amp Current Meter

336

P890808Z

RJ11 Adapter for DIN Rail

PAXLPT00

PAXLPT

Process Time Meter

220

P893805Z

Paradigm to MODBUS RS485 (RJ11)

PAXLPV00

PAXLPV

Process Volt Meter

430

P895xxxZ

Communication Cable

PAXLR000

PAXLR

Rate Meter

210

P895053Z

Commun. Cable Siemens MPI w/ Adapter

PAXLRT00

PAXLRT

RTD Meter

521

PAXLSG00

PAXLSG

Strain Gage Meter

473

PARADIGM PROFIBUS HOST
PAPBH000

PAPBH

PAPBHDIN

PROFIBUS Host Adapter

PAXLTC00

PAXLTC

Thermocouple

513

PROFIBUS DIN Rail Mounting Kit

PAXLVA00

PAXLV

AC Volt Meter

329

PAXLVD00

PAXLV

DC Volt Meter

329

PAX METERS

PART NO.

PAX METERS

PAXC0000

PAXC

Count Indicator, Field Upgradeable Red

137

PAXC0010

PAXC

DC, Count Indicator, Field Upgradeable Red

137

PAXP0000

PAXP

Process Input, Field Upgradeable Red

378

PAXC0100

PAXC

Count Indicator, Field Upgradeable Green

137

PAXP0010

PAXP

DC, Process Input, Field Upgradeable Red

378

PAXC0110

PAXC

DC, Count Indicator, Field Upgradeable Grn

137

PAXP0100

PAXP

Process Input, Field Upgradeable Green

378

PAXCDC10

PAX

RS485 Option Card

938

PAXP0110

PAXP

DC, Process Input, Field Upgradeable Green

378

PAXCDC1C

PAX

Extnd. RS485 Card w/Dual RJ11 Connector

938

PAXR0000

PAXR

Rate Indicator, Field Upgradeable Red

137

PAXCDC20

PAX

RS232 Option Card

938

PAXR0010

PAXR

DC, Rate Indicator, Field Upgradeable Red

137

PAXCDC2C

PAX

Extnd. RS232 Card w/9 Pin D Connector

938

PAXR0100

PAXR

Rate Indicator, Field Upgradeable Green

137

PAXR0110

PAXR

DC, Rate Indicator, Field Upgradeable Green

137

PAXRTC00

PAXRTC

Real-Time Clock Card

686

PAXS0000

PAXS

Strain/Bridge Input, Field Upgradeable Red

378

NOTE
NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1024

Revised 01/01/2009

www.redlion.net

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

PAXS0010

PAXS

DC, Strain/Bridge Input, Field Upgrad. Red

PAXS0100

PAXS

Strain/Bridge Input, Field Upgradeable Grn

PAXS0110

PAXS

PAXT0000

PAXT

PAXT0010
PAXT0100

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

378

PCU12005

PCU

w/NEMA 4X, 0-10 Anlg, Scdry/Alrm & RS485

596

378

PCU12108

PCU

RSP w/NEMA 4X, 0-10 Analog & Alarm

596

DC, Strain/Bridge Input, Field Upgrad. Grn

378

PCU12306

PCU

MVP w/NEMA 4X, 0-10 Analog & Alarm

596

Thermocouple/RTD Input, Field Upgrad. Red

378

PAXT

DC, Thermo/RTD Input, Field Upgrad. Red

378

PFM1608A

TRICOLOR DISP 16x80 115V

PAXT

Thermocouple/RTD Input, Field Upgrad. Grn

378

PFM1608B

TRICOLOR DISP 16x80 230V

PAXT0110

PAXT

DC, Thermo/RTD Input, Field Upgrad. Grn

378

PFM2412A

TRICOLOR DISP 24x120 115V

PAXTM000

PAXTM

Timer, Field Upgradeable Red

268

PFM2412B

TRICOLOR DISP 24x120 230V

PAXTM010

PAXTM

DC, Timer, Field Upgradeable, Red

268

PFM3212A

TRICOLOR DISP 32x120 115V

DESCRIPTION

PLANT FLOOR MARQUEE

PAXTM100

PAXTM

Timer, Field Upgradeable Green

268

PFM3212B

TRICOLOR DISP 32x120 230V

PAXTM110

PAXTM

DC, Timer, Field Upgradeable Green

268

PFM6412A

TRICOLOR DISP 64x120 115V

PAXUSB00

PAXUSB

USB Option Card

936

PFM6412B

TRICOLOR DISP 64x120 230V

INTELLIGENT SERIAL SLAVE MODULES FOR LDD

IAMS PROGRAMMING MODULE

PBA04101

PBA

w/Serial

PBA04104

PBA

w/Alarms & Serial

INTELLIGENT MODULES FOR VOLTAGE INPUTS FOR LDD

PGMMOD00

IAMS Programming Module

731

ACCESSORIES
PGM00000

PGM

Programming Box For LDD

PKS10000

PKS1

Panel Key Switch

PBD10000

PBD1

Base Unit

PBD10100

PBD1

w/Excitation

PBD10102

PBD1

w/Excitation & Alarms

PMK10000

PMK1

Cub 1

PBD13100

PBD1

w/Excitation & Software (Sw)

PMK1A000

PMK1A

Cub 1

PMK1B000

PMK1B

Cub 1

INTELLIGENT MODULES FOR CURRENT INPUTS FOR LDD

CUB PANEL MOUNT KITS

PBD20000

PBD2

Base Unit

PMK2A000

PMK2A

Cub 2, Key Reset

PBD20100

PBD2

w/Excitation

PMK2B000

PMK2B

Cub 2

PANEL MOUNT KITS

PBD20102

PBD2

w/Excitation & Alarms

PBD23100

PBD2

w/Excitation & Software (Sw)

PMK3A000

PMK3A

Lynx Mounting Panel

985

PBD23107

PBD2

w/Exc, Sw, Alarms, Serial, & Analog

PMK3B000

PMK3B

Libra Mounting Panel

985

PMK3C000

PMK3C

C48/T48 Mounting Panel

985

INTELLIGENT MODULES FOR DIGITAL RATE INPUTS FOR LDD
PBI04100

PBI

Base Unit

PMK4A000

PMK4A

Gemini Mounting Panel

985

PBI04101

PBI

w/Serial Communication

PMK4B000

PMK4B

Apollo Mounting Panel

985

PBI04102

PBI

w/Dual Alarm

PMK50000

PMK5

1/4 DIN to 1/8 DIN Panel

993

PBI04107

PBI

w/Alarm, Analog Out & Serial Comm

PMK60000

PMK6

1/8 DIN to 1/16 DIN Panel

996

PMK6A000

PMK6A

1/8 DIN to CUB5

997

PBLCK000

PBLCK

Real Time Clock

PMK70000

PMK7

1/4 DIN to 1/16 DIN Panel

993

PBLPT400

PBLPT

4-Digit Process Time

PMK7A000

PMK7A

1/4 to CUB5

993

PBLPT500

PBLPT

5-Digit Process Time

PMK80000

PMK8

Gemini to PAX Adapter Kit

998

PBLR0600

PBLR

Time Base Rate

PBLRI600

PBLRI

Time Interval Rate

PBLSP600

PBLSP

BCD Slave Display Module

PBLT0600

PBLT

6-Digit Totalizer

APOLLO MODULES FOR LDD

PROCESS CONTROL UNITS

APOLLO PANEL MOUNT KIT
45.7 x 98.4 mm Panel Mnt 3 Piece Kit

1000

PMKA1000

PMKA1

PMKCC100

PMKCC1

50 x 50 mm Panel Mount 3 Piece Kit

1001

PMKCC200

PMKCC2

72 x 72 mm Panel Mount 3 Piece Kit

1001

PMKCC300

PMKCC3

60 x 75 mm Panel Mount 2 Piece Kit

1001

CUB CONTROLLER PANEL MOUNT KITS

PCU01000

PCU

w/Analog Output

596

PCU01001

PCU

w/Alarm & Analog Output

596

PCU10000

PCU

Base unit, w/NEMA 4X

596

PCU10001

PCU

w/NEMA 4X & Alarm

596

PCU10002

PCU

w/NEMA 4X & Secondary Output

596

PNL1A000

Blank Panel For Small Enclosure

PCU10104

PCU

RSP w/NEMA 4X, Alarm & RS485

596

PNL1B000

Panel For SCP,SCT,DT3A,DT3D,RMX

PCU10307

PCU

MVP w/NEMA 4X, Alarm & RS485

596

PNL1C000

Panel For Gemini Series

PCU11000

PCU

w/NEMA 4X & Analog Output

596

PNL1D000

Panel For Libra Series

PCU11001

PCU

w/NEMA 4X, Analog Output & Alarm

596

PNL1E000

Panel For Lynx Series

PCU11002

PCU

w/NEMA 4X, Analog & Secondary

596

PNL1F000

Panel For Apollo Series

PCU11004

PCU

w/NEMA 4X, Analog, Alarm & RS485

596

PNL1G000

Panel For 1/16 DIN Units

PCU11005

PCU

w/NEMA 4X, Analog, Secondary & RS485

596

PNL2A000

Blank Panel For Large Enclosure

PCU11108

PCU

RSP w/NEMA 4X, 4-20 Analog & Alarm

596

PNL2C000

Panel For SCD

PCU11306

PCU

MVP w/NEMA 4X, 4-20 Analog & Alarm

596

PCU12001

PCU

w/NEMA 4X, 0-10VDC Analog & Alarm

596

PCU12004

PCU

w/NEMA 4X, 0-10VDC Anlg, Alarm & RS485

596

GEMINI PANEL MOUNT KITS
PMKG1000

PMKG1

68x138 mm Panel Mount 3 Piece Kit

999

PANELS FOR UTILITY ENCLOSURES

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1025

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

POWER SUPPLY MODULES

PNL2D000

Double Cutout Panel For Large Enclsr

PNL3A000

Panel For Libra Series

PSMA1000

PSMA1

115V

915

PNL3B000

Panel For Libra Series w/Keylock

PSMA2000

PSMA2

230V

915

PNL3C000

Panel For Lynx Series

PNL3D000

Panel For Lynx Series w/Keylock

PT00001R

2 Wire Relative, Bar 0-1, PSI 0-14.5

868

PNL3E000

Blank Panel (no cut-out)

PT00002R

2 Wire Relative, Bar 0-1.6, PSI 0-23.2

868

PNL3F000

Panel For 1/16 DIN Units

PT00010R

2 Wire Relative, Bar 0-10, PSI 0-145

868

PNL3G000

Panel For 1/16 DIN Units w/Keylock

PT00250R

2 Wire Relative, Bar 0-250, PSI 0-3625

868

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

FREQUENCY TO ANALOG CONVERTERS

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
NL

PT600120

861

RBC48001

1 Preset, NPN-OC

178

PRM/RRM Miniature Prox. DC Sensor w/Cable

865

RBC48002

1 Preset, PNP-OC

178

PRM/RRM Miniature Prox. DC Sensor w/Pico Conn.

865

RBC48003

2 Preset, Relay

178

RBC48004

3 Preset, Relay, NPN-OC

178

RBC48005

3 Preset, Relay, PNP-OC

178

PRA20000

PRA2

Pulse Rate to Analog Converter

PRDC0000

PRDC

Proximity (Diffused), DC Powered

PRMDC000
PRMDC001

PT600

PHOTO-ELECTRIC SENSORS

Potential Transformer

C48 REPLACEMENT OUTPUT BOARDS

SPEED SWITCHES
PRS10011

PRS1

0.1-1 Hz, 115V

PRS10012

PRS1

0.1-1 Hz, 230V

PRS10101

PRS1

1-10 Hz, 115V

RBD48100

Main Control Relay

566

PRS10102

PRS1

1-10 Hz, 230V

RBD48111

Main Control & Dual Alarm Relay

566

PRS11011

PRS1

10-100 Hz, 115V

RBD48200

Main Control Logic Output

566

PRS11012

PRS1

10-100 Hz, 230V

RBD48211

Main Control Logic & Dual Alarm Relay

566

PRS11021

PRS1

100-1000 Hz, 115V

PRS11022

PRS1

100-1000 Hz, 230V

PRS11031

PRS1

1000-10,000 Hz, 115V

PRS11032

PRS1

1000-10,000 Hz, 230V

PROXIMITY SENSORS

T48/P48 REPLACEMENT OUTPUT BOARDS

TLA REPLACEMENT OUTPUT BOARD
RBDLA210

Form-C Limit Output Relay

611

PHOTO-ELECTRIC RECEIVER SENSOR
(Opposed Beam Pair), DC Powered

861

RCDC0000

RCDC

RCMDC000

PRM/RRM Mini(Opposed Beam Pair) DC Recv w/Cable

865

RCMDC001

PRM/RRM Mini(Opposed Beam Pair) DC Rev w/Pico

865

PSA10000

PSA1

1.5 mm Inductive

815

PSA1B000

PSA1B

1.5 mm Inductive

815

PSA20000

PSA2

10 mm Inductive

815

RLY10000

RLY

Relay, 12VDC

909

PSA2B000

PSA2B

10 mm Inductive

815

RLY30000

RLY

Relay, 115V

909

PSA6A000

PSA6A

1.5 mm Inductive

815

RLY50000

RLY

SSR Power Unit

922

RELAYS

PSA6B000

PSA6B

1.5 mm Inductive

815

RLY60000

RLY

25A Single Phase DIN Rail Mnt Solid State

924

PSA7A000

PSA7A

5 mm Inductive

815

RLY6A000

RLY

40A Single Phase DIN Rail Mnt Solid State

924

PSA7B000

PSA7B

5 mm Inductive

815

RLY70000

RLY

Three Phase DIN Rail Mnt Solid State Relay

926

PSA8A000

PSA8A

10 mm Inductive

815

RLYBD000

RLY

Gemini 1000 Relay

PSA8B000

PSA8B

10 mm Inductive

815

RLYBD001

RLY

Gemini 4100 Relay

PSAC0000

PSAC

Inductive w/10 ft Cable

818

RLYBD002

RLY

Gemini Dual Relay

PSAC0025

PSAC

Inductive w/25 ft Cable

818

RLYLG001

RLY

Single Relay Board, Legend Series

187

PSAC0050

PSAC

Inductive w/50 ft Cable

818

RLYLG002

RLY

Dual Relay Board, Legend Series

187

PSAFP100

PSAFP

Flat Pack Proximity Sensor, 2 mm Range

819

PSAFP200

PSAFP

Flat Pack Proximity Sensor, 10 mm Range

819

PSAH0000

PSAH

NPN O.C. Hall Effect Sensor

814

PSC11001

PSC

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm & 4-20 Analog Output

604

PSC11004

PSC

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm, 4-20 Analog & RS485

604

RPGBII00

PSC11005

PSC

w/NEMA 4X, Secndry, 4-20 Analog & RS485

604

RPGBII01

PSC12004

PSC

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm, 0-10 Analog & RS485

604

RPGBIM00

PSC12005

PSC

w/NEMA 4X, Secndry, 0-10 Analog & RS485

604

PROCESS SETPOINT CONTROLLERS

DESCRIPTION

RATE MULTIPLIER
RMX00000

Rate Multiplier

ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR ADAPTER PLATE
RPGAP000

DIN RAIL POWER SUPPLIES

RMX

RPGAP

RPG Adapter

BORE INSERT KIT
ZUK Inch Bore Insert Kit

847

ZPJ Inch Standard Bore Insert Kit

849

ZUK Large Metric Bore Insert Kit

847

RPGBIM01

ZPJ Large Metric Bore Insert Kit

849

RPGBIM02

ZPJ Small Metric Bore Insert Kit

849

RPGBI

BORE SLEEVES

PSDR0100

PSDR

24 VDC @ 1A

907

PSDR0200

PSDR

24 VDC @ 2A

907

RPGBSI00

RPGBSI

0.5 inch Bore Sleeve

833

PSDR0400

PSDR

24 VDC @ 4A

907

RPGBSI01

RPGBSI

0.625 inch Bore Sleeve

833

RPGBSI02

RPGBSI

0.75 inch Bore Sleeve

833

RPGBSI03

RPGBSI

0.875 inch Bore Sleeve

833

RPGBSI04

RPGBSI

1 inch Bore Sleeve

833

RPGBSM00

RPGBSM

19 mm Bore Sleeve

833

NOTE
NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1026

Revised 01/01/2009

www.redlion.net

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

RPGBSM01

RPGBSM

20 mm Bore Sleeve

833

RPGBSM02

RPGBSM

24 mm Bore Sleeve

833

OPCWORX

RPGBSM03

RPGBSM

25 mm Bore Sleeve

833

SFC48xxx

RPGC0001

RPGC

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCG0001C

CALL

RPGC0010

RPGC

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCG0010C

RPGC0012

RPGC

RPGC0060

DESCRIPTION

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION
PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
OPC Server Configuration Software

SFC48

C48

178

SFCRDxxx

SFCR

Crimson for PAX

137

SFCRK

SFCR

Crimson for Modular Controller Software Kit

CALL

SFCRM1xx

SFCR

Crimson Software for Modular Controller

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCG0012C

CALL

SFCRM200

SFCR

Crimson for G3 Software Kit

RPGC

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCG0060C

CALL

SFDLC

DLC

RPGC0100

RPGC

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCG0100C

CALL

SFEDTxxx

SFEDT

Paradigm - EDICT97

RPGC0120

RPGC

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCG0120C

CALL

SFIMS

Intelligent Modules

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCG0200C

CALL

187

ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

RPGC0200

RPGC

FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS

SFLGPxxx

SFLGP

Legend

SFPAXxxx

SFPAX

PAX

SFT48xxx

SFT48

T48/P48

566

RPGFC001

0.250" - 0.25" Flexible Coupling

837

RPGFC002

0.250" - 0.375" Flexible Coupling

837

RPGFC003

0.375" - 0.375" Flexible Coupling

839

SHR10000

SHR

Large Digit Display (LDD)

RPGFC004

0.375" - 0.500" Flexible Coupling

839

SHREPAX0

SHR

EPAX Shroud

983

RPGFC005

0.25" - 6 mm Flexible Coupling

837

SHRLPAX0

SHR

LPAX Shroud

979

0.375" - 6 mm Flexible Coupling

839
SKT10000

SKT1

8-Pin Socket

909

DIN Rail Mount, 8-Pin Octal Socket

909

R-C Snubber Inductive Load Supressor

967

RPGFC006

ACCESSORIES

SHROUD

MISCELLANEOUS

RPGMB001

RPGMB

ZPJ ZUK Magnetic Coupling Kit

847

SKTDIN00

RPGMB002

RPGMB

ZMD Mounting Bracket

857

SNUB0000

RPGMK000

RPGMK

ZPJ 1.575 in (40 mm) Bolt Circle Flex Mnt Kit

849

RPGMK001

RPGMK

ZPJ 1.811 in (46 mm) Bolt Circle Flex Mnt Kit

849

RPGMK002

RPGMK

ZUK Standard Tether Arm Kit 4.5 Inch

847

RPGMK003

RPGMK

ZUK Elongated Tether Arm Kit 8.5 Inch

847

RPGPC000

RPGPC

56C Protective Cover Kit

833

QUADRATURE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

SNUB

SUPER SUB-CUB MODULE
SSCUB200

SSCUB2

SSCUB 2 Display Counter Module

DIN RAIL MOUNTED 8 PORT ETHERNET SWITCH
SWITCH08

SWITCH

T1610000

T16

802

8-Port Ethernet Switch

1/16 DIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS
w/Relay Output

541

RPGQ0100

RPGQ

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCH0100C

CALL

T1610010

T16

DC, w/Relay Output

541

RPGQ0200

RPGQ

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCH0200C

CALL

T1611100

T16

w/Relay Output, 2 Alarms, and Usr Inp

541

RPGQ0500

RPGQ

Discontinued. Replaced with ZCH0500C

CALL

T1611110

T16

DC, w/Relay Out, 2 Alarms, and Usr Inp

541

T1620000

T16

w/Solid State Output

541

861

T1620010

T16

DC, w/Solid State Output

541

865

T1621100

T16

w/Solid State Out, 2 Alarms, and Usr Inp

541

T1621110

T16

DC, w/Solid State Out, 2 Alms and Usr Inp

541

PHOTO-ELECTRIC SENSORS
RRDC0000

RRDC

Retro-Reflective, DC Powered

RRMDC000

PRM/RRM Mini Retro-Reflective, Sensor w/Cable
DIN RAIL RELAY SYSTEM

RSBARR00

RSRLY

Relay System Barrier Plate

920

T1641100

T16

w/Analog Output, 2 Alarms, and Usr Inp

541

RSBUSS00

RSRLY

Relay System PLC Buss Block

920

T1641110

T16

DC, w/Analog Out, 2 Alarms, and Usr Inp

541

RSCJMP10

RSRLY

Relay System Cont Jumper - Red

920

T4810000

T48

w/Relay Output

566

RSCJMP20

RSRLY

Relay System Cont Jumper - Blue

920

T4810002

T48

w/Relay Output & RS485

566

RSCJMP30

RSRLY

Relay System Cont Jumper - Grey

920

T4810010

T48

DC, w/Relay Output

566

RSJMPR10

RSRLY

Relay System 2 POS Jumper - Red

920

T4810101

T48

w/Dual Relay Output & Analog

566

RSJMPR20

RSRLY

Relay System 2 POS Jumper - Blue

920

T4810105

T48

w/Dual Relay Output, Analog, & RSP

566

RSJMPR30

RSRLY

Relay System 2 POS Jumper - Grey

920

T4810106

T48

w/Dual Relay Output, Analog, & HCM

566

RSMARK00

RSRLY

Relay Marker

920

T4810107

T48

w/Dual Relay, Analog & RS485

566

RSRLY100

RSRLY

RS Repl. Relay

920

T4810108

T48

w/Dual Relay Output, RSP, & RS485

566

RSRLYB00

RSRLY

RS Relay Block

920

T4810109

T48

w/Dual Relay Output, HCM, & RS485

566

RSRSTP00

RSRLY

Rail Stop

920

T481010A

T48

w/Dual Relay Output & Dual Analog

566

T4810111

T48

DC, w/Dual Relay & Analog

566

PHOTO-ELECTRIC SENSORS
RT100000

RT1

Retro-Reflective Target 1.5"

861

T4810115

T48

DC, w/Dual Relay, Analog, & RSP

566

RT200000

RT2

Retro-Reflective Target 3"

861

T4810116

T48

DC, w/Dual Relay, Analog, & HCM

566

T4810117

T48

DC, w/Dual Relay, Analog & RS485

566

SCUB1000

SCUB1

SCUB-1 Counter, 6-Digit

895

T4810118

T48

DC, w/Dual Relay, RSP, & RS485

566

SCUB2000

SCUB2

SCUB-2 Counter, 6-Digit

895

T4810119

T48

DC, w/Dual Relay, HCM, & RS485

566

SCUB28A0

SCUB28

SCUB-28 Counter, 8-Digit

896

T481011A

T48

DC, w/Dual Relay & Dual Analog

566

SCUBD200

SCUBD

SCUB-D Bi-Directional Cntr, 8-Digit

897

SCUBT200

SCUBT

SCUB-T Timer/Counter, 5 1/2-Digit

898

SUB-CUB MODULES

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1027

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

T4811000

T48

w/Dual Relay Output

T4811100

T48

w/3 Relay Output

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION

MODEL
NO.

566

TCU11306

TCU

Mtr Vl Pstnr w/NEMA 4X, 4-20 Analog & Alrm

574

566

TCU12001

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm, & 0-10VDC Analog

574

TCU12004

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm, RS485, & VDC Analog

574

DESCRIPTION

T4811102

T48

w/3 Relay Output & RS485

566

T4811103

T48

w/3 Relay Outputs & RSP

566

TCU12005

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Cool, Alarm, RS485, & Analog

574

T4811104

T48

w/3 Relay Outputs & HCM

566

TCU12108

TCU

Remote Setpnt w/NEMA 4X, 0-10 Alg & Alrm

574

T4811110

T48

DC, w/3 Relay Output

566

TCU12306

TCU

Mtr Vl Pstnr w/NEMA 4X, 0-10 Anlg & Alarm

574

T4811112

T48

DC, w/3 Relay Output & RS485

566

T4811113

T48

DC, w/3 Relay Outputs & RSP

566

TLA11100

TLA

Form-A Limit Relay w/2 Alarms

611

T4811114

T48

DC, w/3 Relay Outputs & HCM

566

TLA11110

TLA

DC, Form-A Limit Relay w/2 Alarms

611

T4820000

T48

w/Logic Output

566

TLA21000

TLA

Form-C Limit Relay w/1 Alarm

611

T4820010

T48

DC, w/Logic Output

566

TLA21010

TLA

DC, Form-C Limit Relay w/1 Alarm

611

T4820201

T48

w/Dual Logic Output & Analog

566

T4820205

T48

w/Dual Logic Output, Analog, & RSP

566

TMPACC01

TMPACC

Spring Loaded Fitting

869

T4820206

T48

w/Dual Logic Output, Analog, & HCM

566

TMPACC02

TMPACC

Cast Aluminum Weatherproof Head

869

T4820208

T48

w/Dual Logic Output, RSP & RS485

566

TMPACC03

TMPACC

Spare Tube Sleeve

869

T4820209

T48

w/Dual Logic Output, HCM, & RS485

566

TMPACC04

TMPACC

Simplex Terminal Block (for TC’s)

869

T4820211

T48

DC, w/Dual Logic Output & Analog

566

TMPACC05

TMPACC

Three Terminal Block (for RTD’s)

869

T4820215

T48

DC, w/Dual Logic Output, Analog, & RSP

566

T4820216

T48

DC, w/Dual Logic Output, Analog, & HCM

566

TMPA2S01

TMP

Plat Type, 400°F

869

T4820218

T48

DC, w/Dual Logic Output, RSP & RS485

566

TMPA2S02

TMP

Plat Type, 900°F

869

T4820219

T48

DC, w/Dual Logic Output, HCM, & RS485

566

TMPE2SU1

TMP

Type E, 400°F

869

T4821000

T48

w/Logic & Relay Output

566

TMPE2SU2

TMP

Type E, 900°F

869

T4821100

T48

w/Logic & Dual Relay

566

TMPE2SU3

TMP

Type E, 1300°F

869

T4821102

T48

w/Logic, Dual Relay & RS485

566

TMPJ2SU1

TMP

Type J, 400°F

869

TEMPERATURE LIMIT ALARM

THERMOCOUPLE TEMPERATURE PROBE ACCESSORIES

THERMOCOUPLE TEMPERATURE PROBES

T4821103

T48

w/Logic, Dual Relay, & RSP

566

TMPJ2SU2

TMP

Type J, 900°F

869

T4821104

T48

w/Logic, Dual Relay, HCM

566

TMPJ2SU3

TMP

Type J, 1300°F

869

T4821110

T48

DC, w/Logic & Dual Relay

566

TMPK2SU1

TMP

Type K, 400°F

869

T4821112

T48

DC, w/Logic, Dual Relay & RS485

566

TMPK2SU2

TMP

Type K, 900°F

869

T4821113

T48

DC, w/Logic, Dual Relay, & RSP

566

TMPK2SU3

TMP

Type K, 1300°F

869

T4821114

T48

DC, w/Logic, Dual Relay, HCM

566

TMPT2SU1

TMP

Type T, 400°F

869

T4832200

T48

w/Triac & Dual Logic Output

566

T4832210

T48

DC, w/Triac & Dual Logic Output

566

TCM10000

TCM1

TRIAC CONVERTER MODULE, MICRO-LINE
917

115V

1/8 DIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

RETRACTABLE SENSOR CABLES
TMPCBS01

TMPCBS

2 ft retract cable Type J Bare Wire Ends

873

TMPCBS02

TMPCBS

2 ft retract cable Type K Bare Wire Ends

873

TMPCBS03

TMPCBS

2 ft retract cable Type T Bare Wire Ends

873

TMPCBS04

TMPCBS

2 ft retract cable Type E Bare Wire Ends

873

THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTORS

TCU00000

TCU

Base Unit

574

TCU00001

TCU

w/Alarm

574

TMPCNM01 TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Mini Connector Type K Male

TCU00002

TCU

w/Cooling Output & Alarm

574

TMPCNM02 TMPCN

Quick Disconct Mini Connector Type K Female

873

TCU01001

TCU

w/Alarm & Analog Ouput

574

TMPCNM03 TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Mini Connector Type T Male

873

TCU01004

TCU

w/Analog Output, Alarm & RS485 Comm

574

TMPCNM04 TMPCN

Quick Disconct Mini Connector Type T Female

873

TCU01005

TCU

w/Analog, Cooling & RS485 Comm

574

TMPCNM05 TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Mini Connector Type E Male

873

TCU10000

TCU

Base unit, w/NEMA 4X

574

TMPCNM06 TMPCN

Quick Disconct Mini Connector Type E Female

873

TCU10001

TCU

w/NEMA 4X & Alarm

574

TMPCNM07 TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Mini Connector Type J Male

873

TCU10002

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Cooling Output, & Alarm

574

TMPCNM08 TMPCN

Quick Disconct Mini Connector Type J Female

873

TCU10104

TCU

Remote Setpoint w/N 4X, Alrms & RS485

574

TMPCNM09 TMPCN

Miniature Connector for RTD Male

878

TCU10204

TCU

Heater Crnt Mntr w/N 4X, Alrms & RS485

574

TMPCNM10 TMPCN

Miniature Connector for RTD Female

878

873

TCU10307

TCU

Motrzd Valve Pstnr w/N 4X, Alrm & RS485

574

TMPCNS01

TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Std Connector Type K Male

873

TCU11001

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm & Analog Output

574

TMPCNS02

TMPCN

Quick Disconct Std Connector Type K Female

873

TCU11002

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Cooling, Alarm & Analog

574

TMPCNS03

TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Std Connector Type T Male

873

TCU11004

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Analog, Alarm & RS485

574

TMPCNS04

TMPCN

Quick Disconct Std Connector Type T Female

873

TCU11005

TCU

w/NEMA 4X, Analog, Cooling & RS485

574

TMPCNS05

TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Std Connector Type E Male

873

TCU11108

TCU

Remote Setpnt w/NEMA 4X, 4-20 Alg & Alrm

574

TMPCNS06

TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Std Connector Type E Female

873

TCU11208

TCU

Htr Crnt Mntr w/NEMA 4X, 4-20 Alg & Alrm

574

TMPCNS07

TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Std Connector Type J Male

873

TMPCNS08

TMPCN

Quick Disconnect Std Connector Type J Female

873

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1028

www.redlion.net

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION
THERMOCOUPLE PROBES

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION

TMWSK100 TMW

Teflon Type K 100 ft 24 AWG

873

TMPEQD01

Quick Disconnect Mini Type E Stainless .062

873

TMWST025 TMW

Teflon Type T 25 ft 24 AWG

873

TMPEQD02

Quick Disconnect Mini Type E Inconel .062

873

TMWST100 TMW

Teflon Type T 100 ft 24 AWG

873

TMPEQD03

Quick Disconnect Std Type E Stainless .125

873

TMPEQD04

Quick Disconnect Std Type E Inconel .125

873

TORF1000

Neoprene, 1 Ft

851

TMPJQD01

Quick Disconnect Mini Type J Stainless .062

873

TORM0333

Neoprene, 1/3 Meter

851

TMPJQD02

Quick Disconnect Mini Type J Inconel .062

873

TORM0400

Neoprene, 4/10 Meter

851

TMPJQD03

Quick Disconnect Std Type J Stainless .125

873

TORY0400

Neoprene, 4/10 Yd

851

TMPJQD04

Quick Disconnect Std Type J Inconel .125

873

TMPKBT01

Springload Compression Fittng Stainless 5 ft

872

TP16KIT1

T/P16

Programming Kit w/Power Supply

541

TMPKCF01

Ceramic Overbraided Type K 10 ft

871

TP16KIT2

T/P16

Programming Kit w/o Power Supply

541

TMPKQD01

Quick Disconct Mini Type K Stainless.062

873

TMPKQD02

Quick Disconnect Mini Type K Inconel .062

873

TSC01001

TSC

w/Alarm & 4-20 Analog Output

583

TMPKQD03

Quick Disconnect Std Type K Stainless.125

873

TSC11001

TSC

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm & 4-20 Analog Output

583

TMPKQD04

Quick Disconnect Std Type K Inconel .125

873

TSC11002

TSC

w/NEMA 4X, Cooling Out, & 4-20 Analog

583

TMPKQD05

Quick Disconct Std Type K XL High Temp .125

873

TSC11004

TSC

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm, 4-20 Analog & RS485

583

TSC11005

TSC

w/NEMA 4X, Cooling, 4-20 Analog & RS485

583

TRANSITION JOINT PROBES

REPLACEMENT TIRES

ACCESSORIES

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT CONTROLLERS

TMPKTJ01

K Type Inconel .063

876

TSC12004

TSC

w/NEMA 4X, Alarm, 0-10 Analog & RS485

583

TMPKTJ02

K Type Inconel .125

876

TSC12005

TSC

w/NEMA 4X, Cooling, 0-10 Analog & RS485

583

TMPKTJ03

K Type Stainless Steel .063

876

TMPKTJ04

K Type Stainless Steel .125

876

TSW0A400

TSW0A4

0 True, Terminal Block, 4-Digit

TMPKTJ05

K Type XL High Temp .125

876

TSW0A600

TSW0A6

0 True, Terminal Block, 6-Digit

TMPKTJ06

K Type XL High Temp .063

876

TSW1A400

TSW1A4

1 True, Terminal Block, 4-Digit

TSW1A600

TSW1A6

1 True, Terminal Block, 6-Digit

UTILITY THERMOCOUPLES WITH HANDLE
TMPKUT01

Type K Stainless Steel .125 Grounded

872

TMPKUT02

Type K Inconel .125 Grounded

872

RTD SENSORS
TMPRT001

Surface Mount Teflon PFA 10 ft

878

TMPRT002

Pipe Plug 6 ft cable with Male Mini Connector

878

THERMOCOUPLE PROBES

THUMBWHEEL SWITCHES

OPERATOR INTERFACE PANELS
TX700T00

TX700T

10.4" TFT Color Touchscreen, 736 K Mem

TXCCFL00

TX700T

TX Backlight Replacement

VCM10000

VCM1

4-50 V

VCM20000

VCM2

50-270 V

VOLTAGE CONVERTER MODULES
NL
NL

TMPTQD01

Quick Disconnect Mini Type T Stainless.062

873

VCMA0000

VCMA

Replaced by VCM10000

CALL

TMPTQD02

Quick Disconnect Mini Type T Inconel .062

873

VCMB0000

VCMB

Replaced by VCM10000 or VCM20000

CALL

TMPTQD03

Quick Disconnect Std Type T Stainless.125

873

VCMC0000

VCMC

Replaced by VCM20000

CALL

TMPTQD04

Quick Disconnect Std Type T Inconel .125

873

VCMD0000

VCMD

Replaced by VCM20000

CALL

THERMOCOUPLE TRANSMITTER WITH FEMALE CONNECTOR

VCME0000

VCME

Replaced by VCM10000

CALL

TMPTRN01

Type K 0-2000 F

880

VCMF0000

VCMF

Replaced by VCM10000 or VCM20000

CALL

TMPTRN02

Type K 0-1000 F

880

VCMG0000

VCMG

Replaced by VCM20000

CALL

TMPTRN03

Type T 0-250 F

880

VCMH0000

VCMH

Replaced by VCM20000

CALL

TMPTRN04

Type T 0-750 F

880

TMPTRN05

Type J 0-250 F

880

TMPTRN06

Type J 0-1000 F

880

TMPTRN07

RTD 36-1056 F

880

THERMOCOUPLE WIRE

OPERATOR INTERFACE PANELS
VX500TS0

VX500TS 640 x 480, 16 Color, Touchscrn, 736K Mem.

BALANCED WHEELS
WF1000BF

Flat Polyurethane, 1 Ft

851

WF1000BK

Knurled Aluminum, 1 Ft

851

WHEELS

Glass Braid Type E 25 ft 24 AWG

873

TMWGE100 TMW

Glass Braid Type E 100 ft 24 AWG

873

WF1000OF

Flat Polyurethane, 1 Ft

851

TMWGJ025 TMW

Glass Braid Type J 25 ft 24 AWG

873

WF1000OK

Knurled Aluminum, 1 Ft

851

TMWGJ100 TMW

Glass Braid Type J 100 ft 24 AWG

873

WF1000OR

Neoprene, 1 Ft

851

TMWGK025 TMW

Glass Braid Type K 25 ft 24 AWG

873

WI0006OF

Urethane, 6"

857

TMWGK100 TMW

Glass Braid Type K 100 ft 24 AWG

873

WI0006OK

Knurled 6"

857

TMWGT025 TMW

Glass Braid Type T 25 ft 24 AWG

873

WM0200OF

Urethane 200 mm Circumference

857

TMWGT100 TMW

Glass Braid Type T 100 ft 24 AWG

873

WM0200OK

Knurled 200 mm Circumference

857

TMWSE025 TMW

Teflon Type E 25 ft 24 AWG

873

WM0333OF

Flat Polyurethane, 1/3 Meter

851

TMWSE100 TMW

Teflon Type E 100 ft 24 AWG

873

WM0333OK

Knurled Aluminum, 1/3 Meter

851

TMWSJ025

TMW

Teflon Type J 25 ft 24 AWG

873

TMWSJ100

TMW

Teflon Type J 100 ft 24 AWG

873

Teflon Type K 25 ft 24 AWG

873

TMWGE025 TMW

TMWSK025 TMW

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1029

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

DESCRIPTION

MODEL
NO.

DESCRIPTION

CAT
PAGE

LENGTH SENSOR SINGLE SHAFT/SINGLE CHANNEL

WM0333OR

Neoprene, 1/3 Meter

851

WM0400OF

Flat Polyurethane, 4/10 Meter

851

ZFG0001C

ZFG

1 Foot

839

WM0400OK

Knurled Aluminum, 4/10 Meter

851

ZFG0010C

ZFG

10 PPR

839

WM0400OR

Neoprene, 4/10 Meter

851

ZFG0012C

ZFG

12 PPR

839

WY0400OF

Flat Polyurethane, 4/10 Yd

851

ZFG0020C

ZFG

20 PPR

839

WY0400OK

Knurled Aluminum, 4/10 Yd

851

ZFG0060C

ZFG

60 PPR

839

WY0400OR

Neoprene, 4/10 Yd

851

ZFG0100C

ZFG

100 PPR

839

ZFG0120C

ZFG

120 PPR

839

DSP/MODULAR CONTROLLER EXPANSION CARDS
XCCN0000

DSP/MC CANopen Option Card

ZFG0200C

ZFG

200 PPR

839

ZFG00/3C

ZFG

1 Meter/Yard

839

XCDN0000

DSP/MC DeviceNet Option Card

XCGSM000

GSM/GPRS Modem Option Card for G3

ZFG03/3C

ZFG

10 Meter/Yard

839

XCPBDP00

DSP/MC Profibus DP Expansion Card

ZFG33/3C

ZFG

100 Meter/Yard

839

XCQANT00

Quad-band GSM/GPRS cellular antenna

XCRS0000

DSP/MC RS232/485 Card

SINGLE CHANNEL ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

LENGTH SENSOR SINGLE SHAFT/QUADRATURE OUTPUT
ZFH0100C

ZFH

100 PPR

843

ZFH0200C

ZFH

200 PPR

843

ZFH0500C

ZFH

500 PPR

843

ZBG00602

ZBG

60 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZBG01002

ZBG

100 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZBG06002

ZBG

600 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGG0001C

ZGG

1 Foot

839

ZBG10002

ZBG

1000 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGG0010C

ZGG

10 PPR

839

ZBG12002

ZBG

1200 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGG0012C

ZGG

12 PPR

839

ZBG01003

ZBG

100 PPR M12 Connector

851

ZGG0020C

ZGG

20 PPR

839

ZBG06003

ZBG

600 PPR M12 Connector

851

ZGG0060C

ZGG

60 PPR

839

ZGG0100C

ZGG

100 PPR

839

ZGG

120 PPR

839

DUAL CHANNEL ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

LENGTH SENSOR DOUBLE SHAFT/SINGLE CHANNEL

ZBH00102

ZBH

10 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGG0120C

ZBH00122

ZBH

12 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGG0200C

ZGG

200 PPR

839

ZBH01002

ZBH

100 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGG00/3C

ZGG

1 Meter/Yard

839

ZBH01202

ZBH

120 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGG03/3C

ZGG

10 Meter/Yard

839

ZBH05002

ZBH

500 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZBH06002

ZBH

600 PPR 6-Pin MS Connector

851

ZGH0100C

ZGH

100 PPR

843

ZBH01003

ZBH

100 PPR M12 Connector

851

ZGH0200C

ZGH

200 PPR

843

ZBH06003

ZBH

600 PPR M12 Connector

851

ZGH0500C

ZGH

500 PPR

843

SINGLE CHANNEL OUTPUT ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

LENGTH SENSOR DOUBLE SHAFT/QUADRATURE OUTPUT

HEAVY DUTY SINGLE CHANNEL ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

ZCG0001C

ZCG

1 PPR

839

ZHG06004

ZHG

600 PPR

851

ZCG0010C

ZCG

10 PPR

839

ZHG10004

ZHG

1000 PPR

851

ZCG0012C

ZCG

12 PPR

839

ZHG12004

ZHG

1200 PPR

851

ZCG0060C

ZCG

60 PPR

839

ZCG0100C

ZCG

100 PPR

839

ZLZ0050G

ZLZ

Quad output 50 PPI Standard Housing

859

ZCG0120C

ZCG

120 PPR

839

ZLZ0500G

ZLZ

Quad output 500 PPI Standard Housing

859

200 PPR

839

ZCG0200C

ZCG

QUADRATURE OUTPUT ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

LINEAR CABLE ENCODERS

MINIATURE LENGTH SENSORS WITH QUAD OUTPUT
ZMD

250 PPR

857

ZCH0100C

ZCH

100 PPR

843

ZMD0500B

ZMD

500 PPR

857

ZCH0200C

ZCH

200 PPR

843

ZMD1000B

ZMD

1000 PPR

857

ZCH0500C

ZCH

500 PPR

843

ZMD2000B

ZMD

2000 PPR

857

ZMD2500B

ZMD

2500 PPR

857

2 INCH FLANGE MOUNT ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

PART NO.

ZMD0250B

2.5 INCH FLANGE MOUNT ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

ZDH0060H

ZDH

60 PPR

855

ZDH0100H

ZDH

100 PPR

855

ZNH0060H

ZNH

60 PPR

855

ZDH0500H

ZDH

500 PPR

855

ZNH0100H

ZNH

100 PPR

855

ZDH0600H

ZDH

600 PPR

855

ZNH0500H

ZNH

500 PPR

855

ZDH1000H

ZDH

1000 PPR

855

ZNH0600H

ZNH

600 PPR

855

ZDH1200H

ZDH

1200 PPR

855

ZNH1000H

ZNH

1000 PPR

855

ZDH2000H

ZDH

2000 PPR

855

ZNH1200H

ZNH

1200 PPR

855

ZDH2500H

ZDH

2500 PPR

855

ZNH2000H

ZNH

2000 PPR

855

ZNH2500H

ZNH

2500 PPR

855

ZOD0060A

ZOD

60 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

ZOD0100A

ZOD

100 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS
NOTE
NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1030

Revised 01/01/2009

www.redlion.net

CAT
PAGE

MODEL
NO.

ZOD0500A

ZOD

500 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

0.25 IN SHAFT STANDARD SERVO MOUNT ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

ZOD0600A

ZOD

600 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD0060A

ZSD

60 PPR

837

ZOD1000A

ZOD

1000 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD0100A

ZSD

100 PPR

837

ZOD1200A

ZOD

1200 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD0500A

ZSD

500 PPR

837

ZOD2000A

ZOD

2000 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD0600A

ZSD

600 PPR

837

ZOD2500A

ZOD

2500 PPR 0.25 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD1000A

ZSD

1000 PPR

837

ZOH0060A

ZOH

60 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD1200A

ZSD

1200 PPR

837

ZOH0100A

ZOH

100 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD2000A

ZSD

2000 PPR

837

ZOH0500A

ZOH

500 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZSD2500A

ZSD

2500 PPR

837

ZOH0600A

ZOH

600 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZOH1000A

ZOH

1000 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZUJ1024Z

ZUJ

1024 PPR 5/8 inch Thru-Bore

833

ZOH1200A

ZOH

1200 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZUJ2048Z

ZUJ

2048 PPR 5/8 inch Thru-Bore

833

ZOH2000A

ZOH

2000 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZOH

2500 PPR 0.375 inch thru-bore

838

ZOH2500A

DESCRIPTION

LARGE THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS

PART NO.

MODEL
NO.

CAT
PAGE

PART NO.

DESCRIPTION

LRG THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS FOR MOTOR FEEDBACK

LARGE THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS
ZUK0060H

ZUK

60 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZUK0100H

ZUK

100 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZPJ0060A

ZPJ

60 PPR

849

ZUK0500H

ZUK

500 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZPJ0100A

ZPJ

100 PPR

849

ZUK0600H

ZUK

600 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZPJ0500A

ZPJ

500 PPR

849

ZUK1000H

ZUK

1000 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZPJ0600A

ZPJ

600 PPR

849

ZUK1200H

ZUK

1200 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZPJ1000A

ZPJ

1000 PPR

849

ZUK2000H

ZUK

2000 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZPJ1200A

ZPJ

1200 PPR

849

ZUK2500H

ZUK

2500 PPR 1.125 inch Thru-Bore

847

ZPJ2000A

ZPJ

2000 PPR

849

ZPJ2500A

ZPJ

2500 PPR

849

C-FACE ENCODERS WITH NPN OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT
ZRJ0256A

56C 256 PPR

836

ZRJ1024A

56C 1024 PPR

836

ZRL0256A

143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C 256 PPR

836

ZRL1024A

143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C 1024 PPR

836

LRG THRU-BORE ROTARY PULSE GENERATORS FOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
ZUL1024Z

ZUL

1024 PPR 1 inch Thru-Bore

833

ZUL2048Z

ZUL

2048 PPR 1 inch Thru-Bore

833

C-FACE ENCODERS WITH LINE DRIVER OUTPUT FOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
ZRJ1024R

1024 PPR .625 inch bore 36 inch pigtail

829

ZRJ1024Z

1024 PPR .625 inch bore MS 10-pin

829

ZRJ2048R

2048 PPR .625 inch bore 36 inch pigtail

829

ZRJ2048Z

2048 PPR .625 inch bore MS 10-pin

829

ZRL1024R

1024 PPR 1 inch bore 36 inch pigtail

829

ZRL1024Z

1024 PPR 1 inch bore MS 10-pin

829

ZRL2048R

2048 PPR 1 inch bore 36 inch pigtail

829

ZRL2048Z

2048 PPR 1 inch bore MS 10-pin

829

NOTE

Revised 01/01/2009

NL = Available, but not listed in the catalog.
See the support section of our website.

1-717-767-6511

1031

This page intentionally left blank.
1032

www.redlion.net

Red Lion product families

Protocol Conversion
& communications
modular control &
data acquisition

digital & analog
panel meters

Operator Interfaces

Signal Conditioners

Sensors & Encoders

Red Lion solutions worldwide.

Red Lion Controls
Worldwide Headquarters
20 Willow Springs Circle
York, PA 17406
USA
Phone: +1 (717) 767-6511
Fax: +1 (717) 764-0839
sales@redlion.net

Red Lion Controls

*Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. CompactFlash is a registered trademark of the CompactFlash Association.

Red Lion Controls
China
Unit 101, XinAn Plaza
Building 13
No.99 Tianzhou Road
ShangHai, P.R. China 200223
Phone: +86 21 6113-3688
Fax: +86 21 6113-3683
asia@redlion.net

www.redlion.net

Red Lion Controls
India
54, Vishvas Tenement,
Near Railway Crossing
GST Road, New Ranip,
Ahmedabad-382480
Gujarat, India
Phone: +91 98795 40503
Fax: +91 79 27531350
india@redlion.net

Volume 23

Insight Enabled

digital and analog panel meters

and communications

• Counters, Rate Meters, Timers
• Current, Process, Voltage, Strain Gage
• Large Displays for all of the above
• Temperature; on/off, PID, limit alarm

digital and analog
panel meters

Signal Conditioners

Protocol Conversion and communications

Signal Conditioners

Signal Conditioning

Panel Meters

Data Acquisition

Red Lion Controls ph: (717) 767-6511 fax: (717) 764-0839 www.redlion.net

Operator Interface • Panel Meters • Data Acquisition

• Data Station® Plus Series: Powerful and
versatile data management platform
with web-enabled communications,
data logging and protocol conversion

Innovative Control Solutions

Perform protocol conversion among any of over 170 protocols.

Protocol Conversion • Signal Conditioning • Sensors

Protocol Conversion

Operator Interfaces

Operator Interfaces & DISPLAYS

Operator Interface

Innovative operator interface,
measurement, monitoring
and control solutions Protocol Conversion

Sensors and Encoders

modular control and
data acquisition

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res Tagged PDF : No Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Instance ID : uuid:da9bdf4a-93d0-40a8-a41a-e1cb4ffa75c4 Document ID : adobe:docid:indd:98063465-ebde-11dd-810b-e9b3ae35b6aa Rendition Class : proof:pdf Manifest Link Form : ReferenceStream Manifest Placed X Resolution : 72.00 Manifest Placed Y Resolution : 72.00 Manifest Placed Resolution Unit : Inches Manifest Reference Instance ID : uuid:c46f265e-ada6-4a31-b4ba-6a70bdc4d08e Manifest Reference Document ID : uuid:F906D29A226A11DD89FA9D60FB51C69E Create Date : 2009:02:09 11:10:19-05:00 Modify Date : 2009:02:19 16:01:38-05:00 Metadata Date : 2009:02:19 16:01:38-05:00 Creator Tool : Adobe InDesign CS2 (4.0.5) Thumbnail Format : JPEG Thumbnail Width : 256 Thumbnail Height : 256 Thumbnail Image : (Binary data 10117 bytes, use -b option to extract) Format : application/pdf Title : Red Lion Controls Catalog Ver 23 Creator : . Producer : Adobe PDF Library 7.0 Trapped : False Page Count : 1040 Page Layout : OneColumn
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Red Lion Controls Catalog Ver 23

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation